Combined

QCS 2014
Section 11: Health and Safety

Page 1
Part 1.01: Qatar Legislation and Management (Regulatory Document)
REGULATORY DOCUMENT
1.1
QATAR LEGISLATION AND MANAGEMENT
1.1.1
Occupational Health and Safety at Work including Construction Sites ............ 6
1.1.2
Duties, Responsibilities, Offences and Penalties etc. .................................... 11
1.1.3
Safety Policies ............................................................................................... 21
1.1.4
Consultation with Employees ......................................................................... 42
1.1.5
Health & Safety Training and Induction Training ............................................ 54
1.1.6
General Health and Safety ............................................................................. 72
1.1.7
Risk Assessments and Method Statements ................................................... 79
1.1.8
Construction (Design and Management) ....................................................... 82
1.1.9
Safety Inspections and Auditing ................................................................... 142
AL
IO
1.1.10 Safety at Street Works and Road Works ..................................................... 157

1.1.11 Setting Up Site ............................................................................................. 176
AT
1.1.12 Security on Site ............................................................................................ 199
EG
IN
TE
1.1.13 Statutory Forms, Notices and Registers ...................................................... 207
QCS 2014

Page 2
FORWARD
This Section of the Regulatory Document (RD) was produced as a project deliverable under Ministry of
Municipality and Urban Planning Contract Number P2009/3, entitled Consultancy Services for the
Preparation of Codes and Standards for Safety and Accident Prevention on Construction Sites.
During the latter stages of the project, the Committee responsible for the administration of the project
decided that the RD and the associated Safety and Accident Prevention Management/Administration
Systems (SAMAS) would be best delivered to stakeholders via the portal provided by the Qatar
Construction Standards (QCS).
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
The QCS includes references and certain sections which address occupational health and safety. To
ensure that that users of the RD/SAMAS are fully aware of the where occupational health and safety
issues are addressed in the QCS, the following table summarises where potential overlaps may occur.
For consistency, it is recommended that in matters relating to occupational health and safety reference
is made first to the RD/SAMAS. For the purpose of clarity, however, references are made in the
relevant section of the RD/SAMAS to their comparable sections in the QCS and vice versa.
QCS 2014

Page 3
Sr. No
QCS 2014
Section No.
Part No.
Part Name
Submittals
7.5.2
Health and Safety Organization

Chart
Submittals
7.6.1
Health and Safety Plan
10
Health and Safety
All
All
All
11
Engineer's Site Facilities
10
11.4.6
Safety Equipment and Clothing
14
Temporary Works and Equipment
14.4
Test Certificates for Cranes and

Lifting Tackle
15
Temporary Controls
All
All
All
16
Traffic Diversions
16.1.3
Safety
General
8.1.6
Safety
General
8&9
1.4.12
Safety and Management
10
General Requirements for Piling

Work
1.6
Safety
11
Deep Foundations
4.9.1.7
Safety Precautions
12
Deep Foundations
13
General
14
Asphalt Plants
15
14
Works in Relation to Services
AT
IO
37 & 38
42
Item Name
AL
Page No. Item No.
4.9.1.13 Protection of Testing Equipment
4&5
1.6
Temporary Fencing
15
7.8.13
Safety Requirements
14.2.2
Safety
General
1.3.2
Health and Safety
17
Painting and Protective Coatings
8.1.9
Safety
18
Trenchless Pipeline Construction
9.2.5
Safety Requirements
19
10
Pipeline Cleaning and Inspection

Survey
4,5&6
10.1.7
Safety Requirements
20
11
Sewer Rehabilitation
11.2.2
Safety
21
General
16
1.2.8
Safety Guards
22
General
19
1.2.16
Noise Levels and Vibration
23
19
Hot Water Storage
5.1.6
Safety
24
21
General Provisions for electrical

Installation
7&8
1.1.11
Fire and Safety Precautions
25
21

Installation
14
1.1.23
Safety Interlocks
26
24
General
1.1.4
Scaffolding
27
29
Design Aspects
1.1.5
Fire Resistance Period
28
29
Geotechnical Specifications
2.3.1.5
Safety
29
29
Tunnel
18
4.5.8
Safety Regulations
30
29
Tunnel
19
4.5.9
Fire Prevention
31
29
Tunnel
21
4.6.4
Safety Measures and Systems
32
29
Concrete Structures
7.1.10
Safety Railing
EG
16
IN
TE
4
7,8, 9 &
10
QCS 2014

Page 4
Qatar Regulatory Document

Notes for Users
Legislation and Management
Occupational Health and Safety
Introduction
1
This Regulatory Document is designed to help managers, supervisors and safety

representatives comply with their legal, moral and social responsibilities and assist in the
crucial areas of:
(a)
accident prevention
(b)
the avoidance of occupational ill health
(c)
Environmental good practice.
The Regulatory Document seeks to maintain a balance between outlining the requirements
of legislation, as it applies to the Qatar construction industry, and providing practical
guidance on how to comply with these applicable Regulations.
Contractors will therefore be able to assess the legal responsibilities of themselves and
others and decide how best to organise work activities in a safe and healthy manner.
This Regulatory Document is a set of regulations which makes provision for securing the
health, safety and welfare of persons at work, for protecting others against risks to health or
safety in connection with the activities of persons at work and for controlling the keeping and
use of dangerous substances.
It is an essential piece of legislation covering occupational health and safety in Qatar and
focuses on the construction industry placing legal obligations as from project design concept.
It focuses on planning, design and management of construction projects and places legal
obligations on everyone involved at work and in construction.
The Regulatory Document is designed to help Clients, Designers, Contractors,

Subcontractors and others to comply with their legal, moral and social responsibilities and
assist in the crucial areas of:
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Project planning, design and management for better occupational health and safety
performance
(b)
It imposes legal requirements for safety consideration in the future stages of the
project life cycle, namely use, operations and maintenance, cleaning,
decommissioning and replacement of facilities, plant and equipment etc
EG
(a)
(c)
Safety planning for construction, use and maintenance
(d)
Incident prevention at work
(e)
Avoidance of occupational ill health
(f)
Safety, health and environmental good practice.
Designers and Contractors have legal obligations to promote, plan, implement and
showcase good health, safety and welfare management in relation to their undertakings.
Structure of the Health and Safety Regulations in QCS

1
The Occupational health and safety legislation of the QCS is formed mainly under Section
11 Part 1: Regulatory Document and guidance is given in Part 2: Safety and Accident
Prevention Management Administration System (SAMAS)
Other references of Occupational health and safety in QCS are summarised in the table in
the above section.
The word Regulations is used throughout this document and refers hereafter to the Qatar Regulatory Document
QCS 2014

Page 5
Definitions / Interpretations
These Regulations contain words and phrases with a meaning that is defined in the
legislation.
Words and phrases such as 'construction work', 'structure', 'approved', 'lifting gear' and
'working platform', have such a legal definition.
Definitions of the more common terms are outlined below.
Hazard: The potential to cause harm, including ill health and injury; damage to property,
plant, products or to the environment; production losses or increased liabilities.
Risk: The likelihood that a specified undesired event will occur, due to the realisation of a
hazard by, or during, work activities or by the products and services created by work
activities.
Danger: A person is in danger when they are exposed to a risk. The degree of danger is
dependent on the nature of the hazard or degree of risk.
Competent person: A person who has practical and theoretical knowledge and actual
experience of the work activities that they are required to do. A person's competence will, in
some cases, be tangibly demonstrated by the award of a qualification or other recognition of
training received.
Practicable: Where a legal requirement is qualified by the word 'Practicable', the specified
measures must be taken if it is physically possible, irrespective of cost, difficulty or
inconvenience.
Reasonably practicable: Where a legal requirement is qualified by the term 'Reasonably

practicable', the cost (in terms of money, time and inconvenience) of taking precautions may
be balanced against the risk being considered.
10
If an assessment of the situation shows that the cost of taking the precautions is
disproportionately high in relation to the risk of an accident or injury occurring, the
precautions need not be taken.
11
Employer: means any person, company or organisation who has an employment

relationship with the employees or workers and has responsibility for the undertaking and/or
establishment and includes any self-employed in relation to the undertaking. In relation to
construction site, the Employer is the Contractor.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Note:
12
Whenever these Regulations are being applied, attention should be paid to the section at the
start of each piece of legislation, entitled 'Interpretation', where definitions and other
important provisions may be listed and explained.
QCS 2014

Page 6
Occupational Health and Safety

1.1.1
Occupational Health and Safety at Work including Construction Sites
1.1.1.1 Key points

These Regulations place legal duties on Contractors, Employers, Self-employed, Employees
and others with respect to all transactions carried out in Qatar.
Under the Regulations, there is a special focus on construction works, construction sites and
Contractors who undertakes or manages construction work on site.
Legal duties are also placed on manufacturers, designers, contractors, sub-contractors,

importers and suppliers of articles for use in the workplace.
Contravening these Regulations is a criminal offence and punishable in a Qatar Court of Law
These Regulations place a duty on the Qatar Administrative Authority where no other body
has been given the responsibility.
AL
IO
Note:
Section 1, Part 7 of the QCS covers submittals associated with construction sites
and includes a health and safety organization chart and the health and safety plan. General
safety requirements are specified in Section 1, Part 2 of the QCS.
AT
1.1.1.2 Aims and scope of this Regulatory Document

The regulations aim to promote and enforce high standards of health, safety and welfare in
the Qatar workplace especially with special regards to construction workplaces or
construction sites. Hence contractors and sub-contractors and others have to implement
effective standards of health, safety and welfare management onsite and in connection with
their business.
This Regulatory Document (Regulations) provides for a comprehensive framework to

promote, stimulate and encourage high standards of health and safety in the Qatar
construction workplace. Its ultimate aim is to promote health and safety awareness and
effective standards of health and safety management by every Contractor.
It is a requirement under these regulations that everyone is involved and made responsible
for their acts towards health and safety. Hence the scope of this document relates to
organisation, companies and individuals and requires everyone to make responsible for
health and safety- starting from-management, the employees, the self-employed, the
employees' representatives, the controllers of premises and the manufacturers of plant,
equipment and materials - in the matters of construction site health and safety. The
Regulatory Document (Regulations) also requires that adequate measures are taken to
protect the public where otherwise their health or safety would be at risk.
EG
IN
TE
1.1.1.3 Standards of compliance

1
In many instances the Regulatory Document (Regulations) places a legal duty which is
qualified by the words practicable (or best practicable means) or reasonably practicable.
Where a legal duty is qualified by the word practicable the duty must be complied with if it is
'capable of being carried out' or 'feasible within the current state of knowledge and
technology', at whatever expense, taking note of published information, Guidance Notes or
relevant British/International Standards.
In practical terms a legal duty qualified by the word practicable cannot be disregarded on
the grounds that to comply with it would slow up the building programme, be expensive,
difficult or otherwise inconvenient.
QCS 2014

Page 7
Where a legal duty is qualified by the term reasonably practicable Contractors are allowed
to exercise their judgement on the extent of the measures that need to be taken to ensure
the health and safety of whoever is carrying out the job and others who may be affected by
it.
This judgement should be based upon the findings of a risk assessment.
Where the risks to health and safety in carrying out a job are found to be low in comparison
to what would be disproportionately high costs to overcome the risks totally, the Contractors
need only take the measures that are considered to be reasonably practicable.
Should there be a legal dispute as to a decision of what was or was not reasonably
practicable, the onus of proving in court that all reasonably practicable measures were
taken lies with the Contractors.
Managers, supervisors, safety supervisors and safety representatives and others with a
responsibility for ensuring legal compliance will be mainly concerned with the following:
AL
1.1.1.4 Duties of Contractors
These Regulations place a general duty on every Contractor to ensure, so far as is

reasonably practicable, the health, safety and welfare at work of all their employees.
Contractors must, so far as is reasonably practicable
protect the health, safety and welfare at work of all their employees.
(b)
provide and maintain plant and systems of work that are safe and without risk to
health.
(c)
ensure safety and absence of risks in the use, handling, storage and transport of
articles and substances.
(d)
provide any necessary information, including information on legal requirements, to

ensure the health and safety of their employees.
(e)
provide adequate supervision and training, as is necessary, to ensure the health and
safety of their employees.
(f)
provide and maintain a safe and healthy place of work, with safe access and egress.
(g)
provide and maintain a working environment that is safe and without risks to health
and is adequate with regard to welfare facilities and arrangements for welfare at work.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
(h)
AT
IO
to ensure, as far as is reasonably practicable, that the conduct of their activities does
not endanger persons not in their employment who may be affected by operations
under their control, for example, subcontractors or the public.
Contractors must not:

(a)
levy a charge, or permit any employee to be charged for anything required to be

provided in pursuance of any of the relevant statutory provisions i.e. Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE) and Respiratory Protective Equipment (RPE).
(b)
The regulations place a general duty on every contractor to conduct his undertaking in
such a way as to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that persons not in his
employment who may be affected thereby are not thereby exposed to risks to their
health or safety.
1.1.1.5 Duties of employees

1
These Regulations place two general duties on employees:
QCS 2014

Page 8
(a)
to exercise reasonable care for the health and safety of themselves or others who may
be affected by their acts or omissions at work.
(b)
to co-operate with the Contractors, as far as may be necessary, to enable them (the
Contractors) to carry out their legal duties in health and safety matters.
1.1.1.6 Duty on 'all people'

This Regulatory Document (Regulations) places a duty on 'all persons' to:
'not intentionally or recklessly interfere with anything provided in the
interests of health, safety and welfare'.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Not only does it apply to Contractors and employees but it also applies to members of the
public.
QCS 2014

Page 9
1.1.1.7 Duties of manufacturers, designers, importers and suppliers

A general duty is placed on any person who manufactures, designs, imports or supplies any
article, materials or substance for use in a workplace or a construction site shall ensure, so
far as is reasonably practicable, that articles and substances are, by design and
construction, safe and without risks to health when being used, set, cleaned or maintained
by persons at work.
For example, information on design noise levels under normal working conditions should be
supplied if noise levels may be a risk to health, or exceed the lower exposure action value
specified in the Noise at Work section of this Regulatory Document. Similarly, manufacturers
of tools that may be a source of hand/arm vibration must provide details of the levels of
vibration generated.
More specifically, a duty exists to ensure that arrangements are made to carry out the
necessary testing, examination and research, and that steps are taken to provide adequate
information about any conditions necessary to ensure that it will be safe when used.
A general duty is placed on installers or erectors of any article for use at work to ensure, so
far as is reasonably practicable, that it is safe and without risk to health when used by
persons at work.
IO
AL
The Qatar Administrative Authority has the powers under these regulations to examine, to
investigate and to seize and take possession of any matter relating to health, safety and
welfare of workplaces and construction sites. They have the power to advise and enforce the
law on any matter relating to health, safety and welfare of workplaces and construction sites.
TE
AT
1.1.1.8 Administrative Authority
IN
Investigation
Administrative Authority Workplace Inspectors are given a general right to examine and
investigate as may be necessary. They may enter premises (accompanied by a police officer
or other authorised person if necessary), taking with them any equipment or material
required by them for the purposes of the examination. They may direct that anything shall be
left undisturbed if required for examination or investigation, take measurements, samples,
photographs and such recordings as may be necessary. They may have dismantled or
tested any article or substance considered dangerous, or take possession of any article for
examination and evidence.
Administrative Authority Workplace Inspectors may inspect or take copies of books or

documents. They may demand from an employee any information they think necessary and
can ask the employee to sign a declaration of the truth of their answers. In general, they can
demand the full co-operation of any person to provide them with such facilities and
assistance as they may think necessary.
EG
Advisory
4
Inspectors also act as a source of information and advice. It is their duty to inform employees
about anything that may affect their health and safety at work.
Enforcement options
Administrative Authority Workplace Inspectors can use any of the powers listed below
against any person taking part in, or in control of, any work activity, or piece of equipment.
'Any person' means a Contractor, self-employed person, a supplier, or the employee.
QCS 2014
(a)
Informal
(b)
Workplace Inspectors may give advice on compliance in the case of minor breaches.
(c)
Formal letter
(d)
A formal letter may contain details of breaches and action needed to comply with the
legislation. It may also contain more detailed and formalised advice. Whilst visiting a
site, a Workplace Inspector can prepare an Instant Visit Report with a date agreed for
work to be completed.
(e)
Improvement Notice
Where a breach is more serious, the Inspector may issue an Improvement Notice, which will
outline the work required and the date for completion. This will be at least 21 days from the
date of receipt.
(a)
If an activity involves, or is likely to involve, a serious risk of personal injury, the Inspector
may serve a Prohibition Notice to stop that activity immediately or after a specified time.
In addition to the enforcement outlined above, the Inspector may consider that it is also
necessary to prosecute.
IO
Prosecution
(a)
AL
Prohibition Notice
AT

Page 10
Appeals
on appeal following the issue of an Improvement Notice, the Notice will be suspended
until the relevant board meets and decides the issue
(b)
on appeal following the issue of a Prohibition Notice, the Notice will stand until the
appeal has been decided, or the relevant board orders it to be suspended.
IN
TE
(a)
Where a person has been prosecuted for failing to comply with a duty or requirement of this
Regulatory Document (Regulations), and is claiming that it was not reasonably practicable
for them to carry out that duty or requirement, it is the responsibility of that person to
prove that it was not reasonably practicable to comply, and that there was no reasonably
practicable alternative way in which they could have carried out that duty or requirement.
EG
10
Anyone served with an Improvement or Prohibition Notice has the right to appeal. This must
be done within 21 days of the issue of the Notice. The Administrative Authority may cancel or
modify the Notice:
QCS 2014

Page 11
Occupational Health and Safety Construction Site Safety

1.1.2
Duties, Responsibilities, Offences and Penalties etc.
1.1.2.1 Key points

1
The purpose of this section is to:

(a)
Outline the legal duties placed upon Contractors and employees while at work on
Qatar construction sites.
(b)
Emphasise that where health and safety legislation places legal duties on the
Contractors, in most cases the duties also apply to the self-employed.
1.1.2.2 Introduction
This section is designed to give both Contractors and employees details of their legal duties /
responsibilities at work.
AL
1.1.2.4 Legal duties of Contractors
IO
Set out over the following pages are the principal legal duties of Contractors and employees.
AT
1.1.2.3 Responsibilities
The Contractor shall protect the health, safety and welfare of their employees and other
people who might be affected by their business. This means making sure those workers and
others are protected from anything that may cause harm, effectively controlling any risks to
injury or health that could arise in the workplace.
Contractors will usually be site-based and in a position to fulfil their legal duties by directly
controlling the workforce and monitoring the standards of health and safety on site. By
comparison, in larger companies the Contractors will not normally be site-based and it is
usual for them to delegate responsibility for day-to-day legal compliance to site-based staff
such as Site Managers. It may be necessary for Site Managers to further delegate the
responsibility for overseeing the health and safety aspects of some work activities to trade
supervisors. Whatever the circumstances, the duty to ensure compliance with health and
safety legislation stays with the Contractors.
EG
IN
TE
1.1.2.5 Legal duties of the self-employed

1
Generally, where legislation places legal duties on Contractors with regard to ensuring the
health and safety of their employees, similar duties are also placed on the self-employed
with regard to ensuring their own health and safety.
1.1.2.6 Legal duties of the Employees
All employees and workers have a right to work in places where risks to their health and
safety are properly controlled. The contractor or the employer is responsible for providing for
their health, safety and welfare.
Employees shall take reasonable care of their own and other peoples health and safety.
Employees shall follow the training that they have received when using any work items that
the contractor or employer has provided.
Employees shall co-operate with your employer on health and safety.
QCS 2014

Page 12
Employees shall tell the employer, the supervisor, or the health and safety representative if
they think the work or inadequate precautions are putting anyones health and safety at
serious risk.
1.1.2.7 Construction (Design and Management) CDM

1
The CDM Regulations place legal duties on planning and management arrangements for
construction works. It places duties on everyone involved in construction and contractors
have a set of specific duties under CDM.
The CDM regulations forms section 1.1.8 of the Regulatory Document

Contractor duties / Responsibilities
Plan, manage and monitor construction phase in liaison with sub-contractors
Prepare, develop and implement a written plan and site rules. The initial plan must be
completed before the construction phase begins. Plan is termed Construction Phase Health
and Safety Plan.
Give sub-contractors relevant parts of the plan.
Check competence of all their appointees.
Ensure that expert knowledge/advice is available in relation to highly hazardous activities

(e.g. explosives, cofferdams, caissons etc.) and when works are undertaken on or in
proximity of existing structures.
Coordinate temporary works and cooperate with designers and others as relevant.
Secure the site.
Ensure, as far as is reasonably practicable, the health, safety and welfare of all their
employees.
Provide and maintain plant and systems of work that are safe and without risk to health and
safety and ensure safety and absence of risks in the use, handling, storage and transport of
10
Provide any necessary information, including information on legal requirements, to ensure

the health and safety of their employees.
11
Provide adequate instruction, training and supervision as is necessary, to ensure the health
and safety of their employees.
12
Provide a safe place of work, with safe access and egress. Provide a safe working
environment that is without risks to health.
13
Provide adequate welfare facilities and arrangements for welfare at work.
14
Have a general statement of health and safety policy.
15
Prepare a written health and safety policy, then review and update it as often as is
necessary.
16
Bring the company health and safety policy, and any revisions of it, to the attention of
employees.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 13
Carry out risk assessments for all work activities undertaken and record the significant
findings of the risk assessment.
18
Implement any control measures identified by your risk assessment.
19
Regularly review risk assessments and any associated control measures.
20
Ensure that work equipment used for working at height and places of work are inspected by
a competent person.
21
Ensure that scaffolding is only erected, altered or dismantled by, or under the supervision of,
a competent person.
22
Have access to competent advice to assist in matters of health, safety and welfare, where
necessary.
23
Establish a safety committee
24
Consult with workers and safety representatives on matters of health and safety.
25
Assess manual handling operations at the workplace and take appropriate steps to reduce
the risk of injury to employees.
26
Ensure that all injury accidents, however slight, are entered in the accident book and
investigated.
27
Report to the Administrative Authority all reportable accidents, dangerous occurrences and
notifiable diseases.
28
Provide employees with personal protective equipment, as necessary.
29
Avoid entry into confined spaces, wherever possible.
30
Protect employees who may be exposed to asbestos at work.
31
Assess all excavations and take appropriate steps to reduce the risk of injury to employees.
32
Appoint trained and competent persons for the purpose of mounting abrasive wheels.
33
Examine, test and properly maintain plant, equipment, cranes, lifting equipment and
accessories at regular intervals, and record the findings.
34
Provide adequate first-aid facilities with sufficient trained first aiders and appointed persons.
35
Consult with your employees on health and safety matters.
36
Engage only competent persons to carry out work on electrical installations and appliances.
37
Take measures to prevent or adequately control employees' exposure to harmful dusts and
fumes.
38
Take the necessary steps to ensure that the health and safety of the public is not put at risk
by works being carried out.
39
Allow only competent people to use plant and equipment and undertake a work activity for
which they are competent to do so.
40
Ensure that guard-rails and toe-boards are installed on all working platforms where a risk
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
17
QCS 2014

Page 14
assessment indicates that any person would be injured as a result of the fall.
41
Prevent hearing damage resulting from exposure to excess noise levels.
42
Prevent occupational health problems resulting from exposure to vibration.
43
Use only competent waste carriers and check their documentation regularly.
44
Carry out COSHH assessments and record the significant findings.
45
Protect the environment by preventing avoidable pollution by, for example, installing diesel
oil tanks correctly.
Employee duties / Responsibilities
All employees must have a basic level of health and safety knowledge if they are to be safe
when working on site and aware of their responsibilities to their Contractors and work
colleagues.
To co-operate with the Contractors and follow any information, instructions and training that
is provided.
Not to interfere with or misuse anything the Contractors has provided in the interests of
health, safety and welfare.
Take reasonable care at all times and make sure that their actions or omissions do not
endanger themselves or any other person.
Use all tools and equipment safely and in accordance with instructions given or training
received.
Report any defects or potential hazards in equipment to the Contractors (or supervisor if
appropriate) as soon as possible.
Make proper use of any safe system of work or mechanical means provided by the
Contractors in connection with manual handling.
Only operate plant and equipment for which training has been provided and authority given
to use.
Use the personal protective equipment supplied by your Contractors correctly, take care of it
and report any loss or defects in the equipment.
10
Report to the Contractors any work situation that might present danger.
11
Not to erect, alter or dismantle scaffolding unless competent to do so or under the

supervision of a competent person.
12
When operating goods hoists: keep the gates closed except when loading, etc. do not override any controls do not allow any passengers.
13
Use only the proper safe means provided for entering and leaving an excavation.
14
Do not block or obstruct any access or means of escape.
15
Make full use of any control measures provided to prevent or limit exposure to substances
hazardous to health, and wear the personal protective equipment provided.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 15
Observe safe use and handling instructions for hazardous substances.
17
Do not use a mobile elevating work platform for any other use than as a work platform.
18
Co-operate with Administrative Authority Workplace Inspectors, as required.
19
Do not remove safety guards or render inoperative any safety device fitted to any plant or
equipment.
20
Do not ride on plant or vehicles in unauthorised and insecure places.
21
Recognise the importance of personal hygiene, especially when working with substances
harmful to the skin.
22
Never exceed the safe working load of any lifting equipment.
23
Understand and comply with all signs and notices that are displayed.
24
Wear ear protectors in designated areas where mandatory warning signs are displayed.
25
Know how to report accidents and to whom.
26
Follow all company and site health and safety rules.
27
Report to the Contractors any activity or defect relating to work at height that can be
considered unsafe.
28
Use equipment and safety devices for working at height in accordance with training and
instructions received.
29
Attend health surveillance procedures, as required, during working hours and at the expense
of the Contractors.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
16
Set out below is a summary of the main powers which Inspectors possess when carrying out
their duties under this Regulatory Document (Regulations). Officers of the Qatar
Administrative Authority also have enforcement powers when dealing with matters
concerning fire prevention.
EG
1.1.2.8 Powers of the Qatar Administrative Authority, Workplace Inspectors
1.1.2.9 Qatar Administrative Authority Workplace Inspectors may do the

following:
1
Prosecute a company or an individual for a breach of this Regulatory Document

(Regulations).
Visit or carry out an inspection of a construction workplace at any reasonable time without
giving prior notice, engaging the assistance of the police if necessary.
Issue a Prohibition Notice stopping a work activity where there is a risk of serious personal
injury.
Stop the further use of any equipment if it is considered to be a serious risk to health or
safety.
Issue an Improvement Notice requiring remedial work to be carried out within a specific time,
where there is a breach of health and safety legislation.
QCS 2014

Page 16
Investigate accidents or dangerous occurrences in the workplace.
Require that any designated part of a premise remains undisturbed for as long as is deemed
necessary.
Investigate a particular work activity or any plant or equipment following a complaint or

accident.
Take measurements, photographs and records as necessary.
10
Inspect or take copies of any books or records.
11
Demand the full co-operation of any person to assist them in their duties.
12
Demand information from a Contractor or employee and require them to sign a statement of
their answers.
13
Remove or make safe any article or substance considered to be a source of danger or

serious personal injury.
14
Require additional fire precaution work to be carried out on a construction site.
15
Provide information for Contractors and employees about hazards that may affect their
health and safety at work.
16
Act as a source of information on construction health, safety and welfare at work.
AT
IO
AL
TE
1.1.2.10 Penalties that can be awarded

Qatar Labor Law Fourteen, Part Sixteen details the extent of penalties that may be charged
upon the proof of violations regarding failure to comply with Qatar Construction Regulations.
The Contractor shall maintain an acceptable OHS performance at all times throughout the
Contract duration. The criteria used for determining acceptable OHS performance are at the
sole discretion of the relevant authority. The following items shall be taken into consideration
when making assessments of acceptable performance;
(a)
EG
IN
any stop work instructions issued to the Contractor
(b)
any adverse comments arising from Occupational Health and Safety inspections
(c)
any adverse comments arising from Occupational Health and Safety audits
(d)
any adverse formal communication from the relevant authority to the Contractor
regarding Occupational Health and Safety performance
(e)
any adverse formal communication between the Contractor and enforcing authorities
or government organizations
(f)
any incidents occurring as a result of the Work undertaken by the Contractor.
Should acceptable Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) performance not be maintained
by the Contractor then the relevant authority may take any action at their discretion in
furtherance to their powers (see sections 1.1.1.8 and 1.1.2.8) or may impose the following
penalties on the Contractor;
QCS 2014

Page 17
No.
Unacceptable performance criteria

Commencement of Work on the Worksite without an approved Occupational Health and
Safety Plan
2.
Commencement of Work on the Worksite without an approved Occupational Health and

Safety Manager / Officer appointed and employed on a full time basis at the Worksite
3.
Failure to conduct risk assessments and develop method statements prior to work activities
being undertaken
4.
Failure to appoint competent persons for specified activities (other than OSH Staff)
5.
Collapse of any scaffolding, temporary works or excavation
6.
Use of electrical installations in an unsafe conditions or electrocution of any person
7.
Person falling from a height of more than 2 meters due to unsafe working environment
8.
Person working at height of more than 2 meters without fall prevention or arrest
9.
Failure to maintain acceptable housekeeping, site tidiness, waste collection or waste disposal
10.
Collapse of any crane or lifting equipment
11.
Overturning of any mobile plant, equipment or vehicle on the Worksite
12.
Use of cranes, lifting appliances, mobile plant, equipment or vehicles by operators without
valid driving license and the related training certificate
IO
AT
TE
rd
Use of cranes and lifting appliances without valid 3 party inspection / test certificate
IN
13.
AL
1.
Person entering into a confined space without a permit to work
15.
Failure to provide safe access and egress at the Worksite and to the surround residential
area
16.
Failure to provide and maintain proper welfare facilities , first aid box / kits and notice / sign
board
17.
Failure to plan and implement fire prevention and firefighting arrangements considering level
of risks, type of work, sufficient quantity of fire extinguisher, escapes, signage, escape routes
etc
18.
Failure to posses and/or follow 'Permit to Work' system
19.
Permitting Contractor Personnel or Subcontractor's employees to enter the Worksite without

proper PPE and clear identification
20.
Failure to conduct emergency drills at periods not exceeding 3 months throughout the
duration of the Work
21.
Failure to notify the relevant authority of an incident or failure to provide an incident report to
the relevant authority in a timely manner
22.
Failure to provide an accurate monthly OHS report or failure to provide a monthly OHS report
in a timely manner
23.
Failure to hold a monthly OHS committee meeting or failure to provide the OHS committee
meeting minutes in a timely manner
24.
Failure to attend meetings or other events related to OHS issues organised by the Employer
EG
14.
QCS 2014

Page 18
1.1.2.11 Health and safety questionnaire

The Contractor shall assess the level of knowledge of employees to ensure that they have
the understanding and skills to undertake a work activity.
Well informed and safety-conscious employees are a key part of health and safety. Before
they progress further, the following 20 questions should be carefully read and answered by
employees, preferably in writing. At the end of their training or induction, employees should
be asked the questions again. You, the Contractor, will then be able to compare the level of
their knowledge after studying with the level it was before.
If you critically assess the answers you will gain an insight into your employees' need for
further training and instruction.
Are you playing your part? Check against these questions.
AL
Are you aware that your company has a health and safety policy?
(b)
Have you read your company's health and safety policy?
(c)
Have you been trained to do the job you do or to operate the plant, machinery or tools
you use?
(d)
Do you know who your Safety Representative is or who will represent you?
(e)
Do you know the procedures to be followed if you have an accident?
(f)
Are you aware of the first aid arrangements at your place of work?
(g)
Do you know where to get first aid?
(h)
Do you know where the accident book is kept?
(i)
Would you know what to do if there was a fire at your workplace?
(j)
Do you know how to raise the alarm in the event of fire?
(k)
Do you know the colour coding that is used for fire extinguishers?
(l)
Are you aware of any potentially harmful substances in your place of work?
(m)
Are you familiar with the identification symbols displayed on the containers of harmful
and dangerous substances?
IO
AT
TE
IN
EG
(n)
(a)
Do you use correct manual handling techniques when moving or lifting loads?
(o)
Have you been issued with all the necessary personal protective equipment?
(p)
Are you fully aware of the hazards and risks in your job?
(q)
Are you aware of the health and safety rules applying to your job?
(r)
Do you know what you should do if you discover a potential risk to health and safety?
(s)
Can you identify a 'confined space'? Are you aware of the potential hazards confined
spaces may present?
(t)
Are you aware of your company's Permit to Work system, if they have one?
QCS 2014

Page 19
1.1.2.12 Points to consider on implementing of health and safety

1
The following points can be used to stimulate thoughts and ideas whilst developing health
and safety systems.
If you read them through and think about them carefully, there are many 'pearls of wisdom'
that you can adapt to your circumstances.
No one is accident-prone, they are just badly trained; or perhaps they are the wrong
person doing the wrong thing in the wrong place at the wrong time.
(b)
No one wants accidents - not clients, not Contractors, and most of all not employees.
(c)
Safety culture in a company is when people act and behave safely even when no one
is looking.
(d)
Personal protective equipment, however good it is, is no substitute for a proper safe
system of work.
(e)
Hazards and risks! Eliminate the hazard (the thing that can cause harm) and you can
forget about the risk (the chance of an accident occurring) forever.
(f)
Fire destroys property and jobs. Safe systems of work and safe people prevent fires.
(g)
Compliance with these Regulations gives a minimum standard. Do you personally

accept minimum standards?
(h)
A safety policy cannot stop ill health or accidents, but the people who put the policy
into practice certainly can.
(i)
First aid. If you can check the heart and the breathing, and stop the bleeding you
might save a life. If you can't, then you won't.
(j)
In safety, good luck is planning meeting opportunity. Bad luck is just bad
management.
(k)
Compliance with rules does not mean that you are doing everything that is 'reasonably
practicable'.
(l)
Compliance with a rule or a regulation is not in itself a risk assessment.
(m)
You cannot insure against having an accident, it is just that the insurance company
eventually pays some of the costs.
(n)
Accident statistics only really tell you just how often you got things wrong in the past.
IO
AT
TE
IN
EG
(o)
AL
(a)
Good health and safety performance should not be especially praiseworthy - it should
be the expected norm.
(p)
A conviction in a Qatar court of law for a health and safety offence will give you a
criminal record.
(q)
The uninsured costs of an accident are always paid for out of profits, or they help
towards causing losses.
(r)
Risk assessments. What's the hazard, what's the risk and what's the action?
(s)
Actions speak louder than words. If managers act safely, then the employees will
follow the example.
(t)
The three essentials for health and safety are: safe people, safe places, and safe
systems of work,
(u)
If you know where you are as regards health and safety, then and only then, can you
decide where you want to go.
(v)
Every accident is the visible, the very highly visible, face of failure. Safe performance
is the visible face of success.

Page 20
(w)
If an employee said 'wouldn't it be a good idea if we sought further advice' I would

rather the Contractors said MAYBE than NO.
(x)
If there is a system failure, don't just blame the system, do something about it.
(y)
Who? What? Why? Where? And how? Are all very good questions to ask when doing
risk assessments?
(z)
I'm alright. I've never had an accident yet, are very famous last words.
(aa)
There is no such thing as an accident. Someone, somewhere, sometime did

something to cause it.
(bb)
Safety has to start at the top; then, and only then, will it percolate down to everyone
else.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
QCS 2014

Page 21

1.1.3
Safety Policies
1.1.3.1 Key points

This Regulatory Document requires every Contractor to have a policy on how health and
safety will be managed within the company.
The policy must explain how matters of health and safety will be organised within the
company and the arrangements that the company has put in place for implementing the
policy.
The policy should be periodically reviewed to ensure that it is still current, and amended
when necessary, with the content and changes made available to all employees.
Off the shelf health and safety policies, obtained from third parties are unlikely to contain
sufficient company-specific content.
AL
A general statement of health and safety policy is the way in which a company sets out its
intention to manage health and safety. It will vary from one company to another. There is no
such thing as a 'standard' health and safety policy, as a company's policy must be clearly
and directly related to its own operations.
It is common for companies to obtain policies via the internet or purchase them from third
parties. These are generic, rarely reflect the type of work that is carried out and may lead a
company into a false sense of security.
The content of the 'organisation' and 'arrangements' sections of the policy is specific to each
company. If a generic policy is used it is quite likely that there will be serious omissions in its
content and therefore in the way the health and safety is managed. Each company's policy
must be based upon its own work activities, management and organisational structure, and
staff competencies.
The act of compiling a health and safety policy, will focus the Contractor or senior member of
staff to whom the Job is delegated on the day-to-day management of health and safety
issues.
This will help them to become aware of shortcomings, duplications of effort and requirements
for certain competences, which can then be rectified.
Evidence shows that companies with a well-structured and properly implemented health and
safety policy, together with the organisation and arrangements for putting the policy into
effect, have much better overall health and safety performance.
It is through the ongoing development of a company's health and safety policy that
shortcomings can be identified and procedures put in place to help eliminate common
causes of accidents and reverse this unenviable record.
A comprehensive and accurate health and safety policy is the basis of an effective
management system.
There is no difference in the standard of protection required during a house extension

compared to that for a major construction project; what is likely to differ is the complexity of
the management system.
10
Health and safety, and the provision of proper welfare facilities, are crucial to the proper
running of any building, construction or civil engineering project. They are not an add-on, an
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
QCS 2014

Page 22
extra or an afterthought, but should be integrated with the normal day-by-day activities of
project planning, tendering and management.
1.1.3.3 Competent contractor

Contractors must be able to demonstrate how they effectively manage health and safety. If
the company cannot demonstrate competence in health and safety issues, it may not be
invited to tender in the future. It is no longer acceptable to simply state that the company has
been in the industry for many years without experiencing an accident.
Generally, this Regulatory Document (Regulations) requires Contractors to provide for their
employees a place of work that is safe and where risks to health are properly controlled.
They are also required to ensure that people who are not their employees are not exposed to
risks to their safety and health.
There should be a carefully planned and systematic approach to health and safety issues,
where all risks have been assessed and the appropriate control measures put into place.
Irrespective of size, a company must have a general statement of health and safety policy in
order to demonstrate to a client or to another contractor that it has committed itself to the
principles of health, safety and welfare.
A health and safety policy is a statement of how a company will, within its overall business
activities, manage health, safety and welfare for the benefit of its employees and all other
persons who may be affected by the company's operations.
These Regulations require that a safety policy should cover three distinct aspects:
TE
AT
IO
AL
A general statement of the company's health and safety policy highlighting the
intent of the Contractors to have high standards of health and safety in the company,
including what they intend to achieve and how they will achieve it.
(b)
The organisation within the company for the effective maintenance and
implementation of the health and safety management system.
(c)
The arrangements for the effective implementation and ongoing monitoring of the
health and safety management system.
EG
IN
(a)
1.1.3.4 Section 1 - The statement of policy

1
The statement of policy should demonstrate a clear commitment to health and safety from
senior management by declaring how the company intends to manage health, safety and
welfare matters in relation to employees and other persons.
It should specifically state the name of, and be signed by, the person responsible for health
and safety, who should be the managing director or another director to whom responsibility
has been delegated. The policy should be reviewed at least every twelve months and a new
copy signed, dated and displayed to demonstrate that it is a live document.
There should be a declaration that the necessary resources will be provided to ensure the
health and safety of all employees.
It is usual for the statement of policy to state the importance that the company places upon
the health and safety of its employees and what is required of them to achieve the aims of
the policy. It should also clearly state that all employees will be informed of the contents of
QCS 2014

Page 23
the health and safety policy and that they will be consulted about its application.
5
An example of a General Statement of Health and Safety Policy for a medium-sized

Contractor is given in Appendix 1.
1.1.3.5 Section 2 - Organisation

This part of the document should:
(a)
identify those people within the company who have specific health and safety
responsibilities, including the person who has ultimate responsibility for health and
safety
(b)
outline the methods by which health and safety procedures and other health and
safety issues will be communicated
(c)
explain the methods by which the effectiveness of the health and safety management
system will be measured, reviewed and updated where necessary.
AL
The section must clearly state 'who has to do what' in terms of health and safety. For
example, it might say that the Contracts Manager will receive information from the Site
Manager about accidents, how the results of investigations into those accidents will be
managed, and that the Contracts Manager will notify the Administrative Authority when
necessary.
It should also detail how health and safety information is to be discussed with and brought to
the attention of employees, especially those with specific duties highlighted within the
document.
It is important to remember that once this information is written down, if there is a serious
accident, it will be used in court by the Administrative Authority (Administrative Authority).
This means people need to be aware of their responsibilities, and have the competence to
carry them out.
IN
TE
AT
IO
EG
1.1.3.6 Section 3 - Arrangements

This part of the health and safety policy should clearly show the specific arrangements that a
company has put in place for managing health and safety during its normal work activities. It
should also detail how emergency situations and any other incidents would be handled both
from a management and a site perspective.
One area for consideration is for companies to indicate how they compile risk assessments
and develop safe systems of work. The arrangements in place in relation to compliance with
the Construction (Design and Management) CDM Regulations (see Section 1.1.8 of the
Regulatory Document) can should also be detailed to demonstrate how compliance with
CDM is achieved.
The development of the arrangements section is likely to evolve over a period of time and, to
an extent, reflect the findings of the company's risk assessments. It should encompass who
is responsible, as well as what they will do and when and how they will achieve it. This
section should:
(a)
explain how the need for (health and safety) competencies and training are
established and satisfied and, if necessary, what interim measures will be put in place
whilst shortcomings exist.
(b)
outline the means by which health and safety consultation with the workforce will be
achieved including, as necessary, reference to management and safety
representatives and safety committees.
QCS 2014

Page 24
(c)
explain the procedures for ensuring that sub-contractors have a satisfactory health
and safety management system and exhibit safe working practices on site.
(d)
list the areas of risk and identify the person who is responsible for managing each risk.
Some of the elements that might need to be addressed are:

Site activities
Hot works
Piling
Electricity
Gas
Noise
10
Vibration
11
Confined spaces
12
Protection of the public
13
Authorisation for the use of plant and equipment
14
Asbestos
15
Lone working
16
Machine guarding
17
Portable hand-tool testing
18
Manual handling
19
Working at heights
20
Roofing
21
Scaffolding
22
Ladders
23
Cradles
24
MEWPs
25
Excavations
26
Hazardous substances
27
Working in occupied premises
28
Any trade-specific items e.g. loading and unloading plant.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 25
Administration procedures
Emergency procedures
30
First aid
31
Fire
32
Means of escape
33
Accident reporting
34
Welfare facilities
35
Employee consultation
36
Monitoring procedures for the effectiveness of health and safety procedures.
37
The arrangements section of the policy must demonstrate clearly how the company plans to
carry out its work activities and should identify all the specific site risks associated with them.
This Regulatory Document (Regulations) requires that Contractors give their employees all
the information, instruction, training and supervision that is necessary to ensure their health
and safety. However, on small works of short duration or emergency repairs, detailed preplanning may not be possible. Employees may be sent to a client's premises or a customer's
house at very short notice. This type of work may create a number of problems for
employees, including the need for a short notice or on-site 'risk assessment', and the
arrangements section of the company health and safety policy must cater for this type of
eventuality.
38
The arrangements section of the policy should also cover the situation where a manager is
unable to visit a possible work site whilst tendering or preparing a quotation for a job, but
instead sends an estimator. In this case the estimator must be trained to assess the health
and safety risks of the work, and to record the work to be done and the risk control measures
necessary.
39
These notes should indicate all possible hazards, working height, obstructions, plant and
equipment required. Detailed risk assessments can then be carried out and the associated
method statements developed. This will allow for employees to be properly instructed on or
informed about the work that they are to do.
40
Managing health and safety on a large site offers certain challenges, but it is normally far
easier than dealing with a large number of minor works. This is purely down to the level of
supervision and control that can be put in place.
41
There is a certain irony that typically it is the smallest and probably least resourced
organisations that have the biggest challenges in terms of developing management systems.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
29
1.1.3.7 Updating of safety policies

1
This Regulatory Document (Regulations) requires Contractors to revise their safety policies
'as often as may be appropriate'.
Changes in the type of work carried out and changes in staff will also give rise to the need
for a review of the policy. In addition, the policy should be regularly reviewed to ensure that it
stays meaningful and relevant to the company's overall operations.
QCS 2014

Page 26
1.1.3.8 Communication
1
Contractors are legally required to bring their health and safety policy and any subsequent
revisions to it, to the notice of all employees. CDM emphasises the need for consultation with
the people who carry out the work. Communicating the health and safety policy is a good
way of doing this.
The only way to find out if the requirements of the policy are realistic and workable is to talk
to the people who have to comply with them in the workplace.

Under the CDM regulations (Section 1.1.8), the client is responsible for ensuring all
contractors are competent.
The Engineer is appointed by the Client to advise and assist the client with his task and shall
formally assess the competence of the Contractor, if requested.
Part of this assessment process must be a review and critical examination of the contractor's
health and safety policy
CDM requires that companies bidding for work will compile a 'competence pack' to show
how their policies, organisation and arrangements meet the stipulated core criteria for
competency demonstration in implementing and managing health and safety.
The appendix to this section contains a suggested layout of a health and safety policy for a
medium-sized company carrying out small building works. Not all of it will be relevant to
some companies and, conversely, it may not contain specific content that some companies
require.
For most companies, the General Statement of Health and Safety Policy should fit onto one
page of A4 paper. The organisation and arrangements sections will be longer depending on
the size of the company and the type of work that is carried out. Overall, the final document
should be a clear indication to clients, employees and other interested parties such as the
Administrative Authority that the company is honestly, openly and totally committed to the
proper and effective management of all aspects of health, safety and welfare.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.1.3.10 The business case

1
In addition to the legal considerations, for example, compliance with this Regulatory
Document, there are very strong economic and social drivers for a robust health and safety
policy and its proper implementation. The economic argument is that if there are fewer
accidents on site and no occupational ill health, more employees will be at work, rather than
off sick. This means improved business continuity with a greater prospect of completing
projects on time, to budget and to the satisfaction of the client.
The social argument is similar. Clients and customers are far more likely to place business
with a company who they see is behaving with integrity, and taking proper care of the health,
safety and welfare of their employees and others who might be affected by the activities of
the company.
QCS 2014

Page 27
1.1.3 Appendix 1
GENERAL STATEMENT OF HEALTH AND SAFETY POLICY
The Contractor will comply with his duties in order to provide a safe and healthy working
environment for its employees and others affected by its activities. It will take positive action
to ensure that other contractors' employees, occupiers of premises, and members of the
public do not have their health and safety adversely affected by the work operations of the
company. The only acceptable standard of health and safety, and for welfare facilities, will be
full and proper compliance with the requirements of legislation. Where it is possible and
practical to do so, the company will exceed the minimum requirements of the Qatar
Regulatory Document (Regulations).
The company will seek to ensure that each company with whom it contracts or subcontracts
aspires to a similar high standard of health and safety management.
In recognition of the importance that this company places on the engagement and wellbeing
of its employees, the company will:
AL
consult, on health and safety matters, with its employees and others who may work
under its control to ensure that the arrangements for health and safety management
are practical to implement and effective
(b)
as far as is reasonably practicable, fully and effectively control the health and safety
risks arising from its work activities, in co-operation with employees, other contractors,
clients and other relevant parties
(c)
ensure that accident and ill health prevention is provided the highest priority,
commensurate with business objectives, within all company operations
(d)
investigate lapses in health and/or safety performance and implement remedial

actions to prevent, so far as is reasonably practicable, their recurrence
(e)
provide and ensure that all plant and equipment owned, used or hired by the company
is appropriate, safe to use and properly maintained, inspected and tested
(f)
ensure that all equipment, materials and substances used by the company are
appropriate for their intended use and used, handled and stored safely
(g)
ensure that all employees are provided with adequate supervisory training, information
and instructions to competently carry out their work activities
(h)
ensure that all working places are maintained in a safe and healthy condition
(j)
AT
TE
IN
EG
(i)
IO
(a)
provide adequate resources, including sufficient finance, and access to competent

health and safety advice, to achieve the aims of this policy
review and revise this policy statement at regular intervals and also where necessary
due to changes in the company activities.
Signed:.......................................................... Designation: ......................................................................

Date: ............................................................. Review Date: ....................................................................
QCS 2014

Page 28
ORGANISATION FOR HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT

4
The table below can be used to record the area of responsibilities with respect to the
organisation for implementation of the policy.
First column: Description of the area of responsibility the overall and final responsibility for
ensuring that the health and safety policy is properly implemented and that the health and
safety standards are achieved and maintained.
Second column: Include the contact details of those with the identified responsibility (In
addition to the person(s) named in the arrangements section of this policy) to ensure that
health and safety standards are achieved, maintained and improved.
AREA OF RESPONSIBILITY
POSITION or NAME
TE
Health and safety management
AT
The person with responsibility for approving the

inclusion of each contractor on to the approved list
of contractors is:
IO
The person responsible for vetting the health and

safety procedures and past health and safety
performance of contractors who bid for contracts,
is:
AL
Contractors
IN
The person responsible for the management and

updating of the health and safety management
system is:
EG
The person responsible for monitoring the day-today standards of health and safety, and instigating
improvements where necessary, is:
at the company offices:
on each site:
The person responsible for compiling and
communicating health and safety information to
each site is:
The person responsible for compiling and
comparing year-on-year health and safety accident
statistics is:
The person responsible for ensuring that the
statutory inspections of plant, equipment and
places of work are carried out, and that certificates
are obtained and displayed where appropriate, is:
QCS 2014

Page 29
AREA OF RESPONSIBILITY (continued)
POSITION or NAME
IN
TE
IO
AT
Liaison with senior management

The person responsible for keeping senior
management informed of day-to-day health and
safety performance of the company is:
The person responsible for informing senior
management of any event which has attracted the
attention of the Administrative Authority:
The person responsible for submitting the annual
health and safety report to senior management is:
AL
Health and safety procedures

The person responsible for ensuring the adequacy
of the scope and the accuracy of all health and
safety procedures is:
To effectively discharge this duty they will:
monitor the adequacy of existing health and
safety procedures
develop new health and safety procedures as
necessary
maintain the currency of all health and safety
procedures
communicate any change to any health and
safety procedure and the publication of new
health and safety procedure to all users.
EG
Liaison with external agencies

The person who is the contact for any enquiries
from the Administrative Authority is:
The person responsible for reporting reportable
accidents and other reportable events to the
Administrative Authority is:
The person responsible for liaising with the fire and
rescue service about onsite hazards or hazardous
work activities is:
Worker consultation
The person responsible for ensuring that an
effective system of worker consultation is
maintained is:
The person responsible for ensuring effective
worker consultation at site level is:
QCS 2014

Page 30
Health and safety risks arising from work activities

7
The control of the risks associated with the work done by the company can only be achieved
by the proper use of risk assessments. Risk assessments will be carried out for all work
done by the company. They will be reviewed at regular intervals.
AREA OF RESPONSIBILITY
POSITION or NAME
Accidents
AL
The company will investigate accidents as

necessary to establish their root cause and prevent
recurrence. The investigation will be proportional to
the seriousness of the event and its likely
implications.
on each site:
IO
AT
on each site:
IN
TE
The person responsible for investigating the causes

of accidents and suggesting or implementing
remedial action is:
EG
The person responsible for ensuring that completed

accident records are securely stored at the
company offices is:
Asbestos
The person responsible for ensuring that all

accidents are properly recorded in the accident
book is:
The company will investigate the possible presence

of asbestos within its office premises and on the
sites that it operates and if asbestos is found to be
present, will properly manage it and record its
presence in the asbestos register.
The person responsible for the management of the
presence of asbestos is:
on each site:
QCS 2014

Page 31
POSITION or NAME
Competency
The company will provide induction training and
job-specific training for all employees to ensure that
they are fully competent to carry out the work that is
required of them.
The person responsible for assessing competency
requirements and identifying shortcomings is;
Competent health and safety advice
Consultation with employees
IN
TE
The company will endeavour to fully and effectively

consult its employees on matters of health and
safety in such a way that upward feedback will be
welcomed, evaluated and acted upon where
appropriate.
EG
Employees' health and safety representatives who

will provide two-way communication between
management and employees are:
N
IO
AT
The responsibility for engaging competent health

and safety advice lies with:
AL
The company accepts that there will be occasions

where expert health and safety advice is needed for
dealing with matters outside the company's normal
scope of work. On such occasions the responsibility
for raising awareness of the need for competent
health and safety advice lies with:
QCS 2014

Page 32
POSITION or NAME
Electrical safety
The company will endeavour to manage its work
activities so that no employee is put at risk by
electricity.
The following persons are responsible for their
respective areas of electrical safety:
Check for hidden services:
Check for underground services:
Office installation inspection and testing:
AL
On-site installation inspection and testing:
IO
The management of risk from overhead

cables:
AT
Emergency procedures - fire and evacuation
TE
The company will endeavour to ensure that no

person is put at risk from the outbreak of fire. Fire
risks will be addressed by a risk-based fire and
evacuation plan for the company offices and one for
each site.
Fire and evacuation plans will be drafted (and
amended as necessary) by:
on each site:
EG
IN
Deciding upon the range fire fighting appliances

required and suitable locations for them is the
responsibility of:
on each site:
Arranging for the annual maintenance of fire

fighting appliances is the responsibility of:
Arranging for the maintenance of fire alarms (where
fitted) is the responsibility of:
QCS 2014

Page 33
POSITION or NAME
Emergency procedures - fire and evacuation

(continued)
Initiating and monitoring the effectiveness of office
emergency evacuation (fire drills) is the
responsibility of:
Initiating and monitoring the effectiveness of on-site
emergency evacuation (fire drills) is the
responsibility of:
AL
Arranging for the training of selected employees in

the use of fire fighting appliances is the
responsibility of:
IO
AT
The company will endeavour to organise work

activities to eliminate or reduce the occasions when
employees (or others) must enter an excavation or
confined space. When entry into an excavation or
confined space cannot be avoided, the company
will ensure that the work is carried out in a safe
manner by competent persons.
Excavations and confined spaces
TE
The person responsible for developing safe

systems of work, including rescue procedures, for
working in excavations or confined spaces is:
IN
The person responsible for carrying out, or

arranging, the training of employees to work in
excavations and/or confined spaces is:
EG
The person responsible for ensuring the attendance

of a rescue team during confined space working
and their training is:
QCS 2014

Page 34
POSITION or NAME
First aid, accidents and work-related ill health

The company will provide sufficient trained first-aid
staff and first-aid equipment to provide adequate
cover at all places where company employees are
working or make arrangements to share the first-aid
arrangements made by others.
First-aid box(es) will be provided at the following Maintaining and replenishing the first-aid box(es)
will be the responsibility of:
locations:
Office:
On site:
AL
Trained first aiders or appointed persons work at These people are:

the following locations:
IO
Office:
AT
On site:
Induction and further training
TE
The company will ensure that each employee

receives an adequate initial induction into the
company and further information, instruction and
training to enable them to work without risks to the
health or safety of any person.
EG
IN
The person responsible for ensuring the effective

health and safety induction into the company of
new employees is:

arranging for, the induction of new persons on site
is:
The person responsible for carrying out the
induction of office-based staff is:
The person responsible for compiling and updating
the training record of each member of staff is:
The person responsible for establishing the need
for the additional training of any individual is:
QCS 2014

Page 35
POSITION or NAME
Induction and further training (continued)

arranging, the additional training of any individual,
including delivering toolbox talks, is:
Training records:
will be kept at:
by:
AL
The person responsible for ensuring that

employees working at locations under the control of
other contractors (Contractors) are given relevant
health and safety information and supervision is:
AT
IO
Supervision of young workers or trainees will be

arranged, undertaken and monitored by:
Manual handling
The company will endeavour to take all necessary

measures to ensure that no employee is injured as
a result of a manual handling activity.
EG
IN
TE

employees are trained in the correct manual
handling techniques, and that these techniques are
applied, is:
Monitoring the health and safety policy
The company will periodically audit the

effectiveness of its health and safety management
system, in particular adherence to this policy.
Audits will be carried out by:
on each site:
QCS 2014

Page 36
POSITION or NAME
Noise
The company will ensure, so far as is reasonably
practicable, that the hearing of no employee is
damaged as a result of exposure to noise at work.
Where necessary, noise assessments will be
carried out to protect employees from hearing
damage. The person responsible for arranging such
assessments is:
AL
Where the noise survey indicates a noise level of

80 db(A) (lower exposure action value), ear
protection will be provided by:
IO
AT
the setting up of hearing protection zones and

ensuring that employees use the hearing
protection provided by the company will be the
responsibility of:
Where the noise survey indicates a noise level of

85 db(A) (upper exposure action value):
assessing the need for health surveillance and

arranging for it where necessary is the
responsibility of:
IN
TE
The person responsible for ensuring that no

employee is exposed to a noise level above 87
db(A) (exposure limit value) is:
EG
Office safety
The company will ensure that all work conducted in

the company offices, including that of external
contractors, is carried out without risk to the health
or safety of any person.
The person responsible for general office health
and safety is:
The person responsible for carrying out display
screen workstation assessments is:
The person responsible for ensuring that work in
company offices by external contractors is carried
out without risk to the health or safety is:
QCS 2014

Page 37
POSITION or NAME
Permits to Work
The company will ensure that where appropriate all
potentially hazardous work activities are carried out
under a Permit to Work system and that the system
is robustly developed and monitored.
The person responsible for determining whether or
not any particular work activity should be carried
out under a Permit to Work is:
The person responsible for raising, co-ordinating
and closing Permits to Work is:
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
TE
AT
The company will organise, so far as is reasonably

practicable, its work activities in such a way that the
use of PPE is not necessary. However, when it is
deemed that PPE must be used, the company will
ensure that appropriate PPE is provided and that
adequate training in its use and maintenance is
provided.
IO
AL
The person responsible for training, or arranging

the training, of employees who will have to work
under any form of Permit to Work is:
IN
The person responsible for ensuring that all PPE

provided by the company is suitable, issued free of
charge, and maintains an issue log, is:
EG

employees are instructed in the proper use of PPE
and ensuring that it is used where needed is:
QCS 2014

Page 38
POSITION or NAME
Plant and equipment

The company will ensure that all plant and
equipment is suitable for its intended use, well
maintained, inspected/examined where appropriate
and operators are trained in its proper use.
Identifying appropriate items of plant which must be
hired or bought is the responsibility of:
Ensuring the continued serviceability and fitness for
purpose of all plant and equipment is the
responsibility of:
N
IO
AT
Identifying the need for and arranging the training

for plant and equipment operators is the
responsibility of:
AL
Monitoring the requirement for routine servicing,

testing, maintenance inspections and statutory
examinations for all plant is the responsibility of:
Any employee discovering a defect in, or other

problem associated with, an item of plant or
equipment should report the facts to:
TE
Risk assessments / method statements
IN
The company will carry out suitable and sufficient

risk assessments to cover all of its work activities.
EG
Pre-start site risk assessments will be undertaken

and recorded by:
Risk assessments for site-based activities will be

reviewed at appropriate intervals and revised as
necessary by:
Risk assessments for the company's office-based
work activities will be carried out, recorded and
reviewed at suitable intervals by:
Method statements for site-based activities will be
compiled where appropriate and reviewed or
revised as necessary by:
QCS 2014

Page 39
POSITION or NAME
Safe handling and use of substances (COSHH)

practicable, that hazardous substances are
handled, transported, used and stored in such a
manner that the health of no person is harmed by
their presence.
All substances which require
assessment will be identified by:
COSHH
COSHH assessments will be undertaken, reviewed

and amended as necessary by:
AT
IO
Providing at-risk employees with appropriate

information from COSHH assessments is the
responsibility of:
AL
The implementation and monitoring of all actions

from COSHH assessments will be checked by:
on each site:
Arranging for the safe disposal of residues and

empty containers, is the responsibility of:
IN
TE
Where necessary, health surveillance will be

arranged by:
Transport
EG
The company will ensure that it operates its

transport in a way that does not put the safety of
any person at risk.
Where it is necessary to transport staff or materials
by vehicle, either on or off site, the person
responsible for ensuring that proper procedures are
followed is:
The person responsible for ensuring that all
company vehicles are maintained in a legal,
roadworthy and otherwise safe condition is:
The person responsible for ensuring that workrelated road risks are properly managed is:
QCS 2014

Page 40
POSITION or NAME
Vibration
practicable, that the health of no person is put at
risk as a result of exposure to vibration resulting
from the company's work activities.
Where necessary, expert advice on vibration will be
given or arranged by:
The
person
responsible
for
implementing
organisational and engineering controls, to control
vibration at source or reduce exposure, is:
N
IO
AT

appropriate actions are taken if the level of personal
exposure reaches the 'exposure action value' or the
'exposure limit value' is:
AL
The person responsible for monitoring employees'

exposure to vibration on site and taking the
appropriate actions, is:
The person responsible for assessing the need for

health surveillance and arranging for it to be carried
out, where necessary, is:
TE
Welfare facilities
IN
The company will ensure that adequate and

suitable welfare facilities are provided (or made
available) for all staff.
EG
The person responsible for ensuring that adequate

and suitable welfare facilities are provided or made
available is:
on each site:
The person responsible for ensuring that welfare
facilities are maintained and kept in a clean and
order condition is:
on each site:
Arrangements for shared welfare facilities will be
organised by:
QCS 2014

Page 41
POSITION or NAME
Work at height
The company acknowledges that working at height
is a major cause of serious injuries and fatalities
and will therefore endeavour to ensure that where
such work cannot be avoided, it is carried out in a
safe manner.
The person responsible for deciding whether or not
work at height can be avoided is:
developing
safe
AL
The person responsible for

methods of working at height is:
IO
AT

inspections of places of work at height, is:

statutory inspections associated with the equipment
used for work at height, or arranging for them to be
carried out, is:
TE
Young persons in the workplace
The person responsible for ensuring that the

employees who will carry out work at height are
suitably and properly trained is:
EG
IN
The company will ensure that the health or safety of

young persons is not put at risk due to their
inexperience, curiosity, lack of hazard awareness or
physical limitations.
If one or more young persons are present in the

workplace, the person who will ensure that the risk
assessment is suitable and sufficient for their
presence is:
on each site:
The person responsible for managing the presence
of young persons in the workplace is:
on each site:
QCS 2014

Page 42

1.1.4
Consultation with Employees
1.1.4.1 Key points

Employers, in particular Contractors have a duty to consult all their employees on matters of
health and safety.
Consultation must involve two-way communication - Contractors passing relevant health and
safety information to their employees and, conversely, seeking and encouraging the opinions
and views of employees where appropriate.
Effective Contractors / employee consultation is an essential tool in highlighting potential

problem areas, finding solutions and therefore maintaining a healthy and safe place of work.
Construction (Design and Management) CDM places a significantly increased emphasis on

consultation.
The needs of employees, and others, whose understanding of Arabic and/or English is below
average must be allowed for during the consultation process.
Section 1, Part 6 of the QCS covers project meetings, Section 1, Part 17 covers project
coordination and Section 1, Part 18 covers contractors.
IO
Note:
AL
AT
Consulting employees on health and safety matters can be very important in creating and
maintaining a safe and healthy construction working environment.
By consulting employees, a Contractor should motivate staff and make them aware of health
and safety issues.
Businesses can become more efficient and reduce the number of accidents and work-related
illnesses.
Consultation involves Contractors not only giving information to employees, but also listening
to and taking account of employees opinions.
When an employee has raised a health and safety issue, it is essential that feedback is given
on any decision taken so that the employee can be confident that their suggestions are
considered and action taken where appropriate.
Where the need for consultation stems from changes to work practices, new work equipment
or changes in organisation, etc, it is essential that the Contractor consults with the workforce
at a sufficiently early stage to allow them to consider the implications and raise any queries.
Furthermore, there may be special considerations when carrying out consultation, such as to
establish the needs of particular individuals, for example taking into account the
requirements of employees with disabilities.
Every Contractor should, as part of their health and safety policy, have documented
arrangements in place which outline how effective consultation will be achieved.
Consultation cannot take place if there is a barrier to effective communication, such as one
of the parties having a limited understanding of Arabic and/or English, either spoken or
written. This is becoming an increasing challenge.
10
Those people on site who have a responsibility for consulting with the workforce must
identify any such barriers and determine ways in which they may be overcome, such as
adapting the means of communication or using interpreters. It is highly unlikely that the use
EG
IN
TE
QCS 2014

Page 43
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
of a Labour gangmaster as an interpreter would be judged to be an acceptable means of

consultation for the purpose of communicating health and safety information.
QCS 2014

Page 44
1.1.4.3 Duty of the Contractors to consult

It is the duty of the Contractor to consult with their employees in good time on health and
safety matters. In particular:
(a)
the introduction of any measure that will affect the health and safety of employees
(b)
the arrangements for appointing or nominating the person(s) to assist the Contractors
in complying with this Qatar Regulatory Document (Regulations)
(c)
the provision of relevant information as required under this Regulatory Document

(Regulations)
(d)
any planning or organisation of training required by this Regulatory Document

(Regulations)
(e)
the health and safety implications of the introduction of new technologies into the
Contractors' workplace.
AL
1.1.4.4 Persons to be consulted
Contractors may consult directly with all their employees or through 'representatives of
employee safety' elected by a group of employees to represent them in health and safety
consultation with the Contractors.
The Contractors must provide employees with a list of names of representatives of employee
safety and the groups they are representing in the workplace.
In addition, the Contractors must inform employees of any changes in the form of
consultation, such as a move from dealing with representatives to directly consulting with
each employee.
Employee representatives must also inform the Contractors when they no longer represent a
group or groups of employees.
IN
TE
AT
IO
EG
1.1.4.5 Provision of information

The Contractors must provide all such information as the employees may require in order for
them to participate fully in the consultation procedure. This will either be directly with all
employees or with the elected 'representatives of employee safety'.
This information may cover what the Contractors proposes to do in relation to health and
safety and includes giving the safety representatives an opportunity to express their views in
the light of the information provided. The Contractors shall take account of the safety
representatives' responses.
The issues the Contractors will consult on are:
(a)
introduction of measures, at the workplace, which may substantially affect the health
and safety of the employees
(b)
arrangements for obtaining or appointing the competent person to assist the

Contractors to comply with health and safety requirements
(c)
information on risks to employees' health and safety and the measures taken to
remove or minimise them.
Specific areas include:

(a)
emergency procedures
(b)
first aid provision
QCS 2014

Page 45
(c)
display screen equipment
(d)
manual handling
(e)
noise
(f)
asbestos
(g)
work at height
(h)
vibration management
(i)
work equipment
(j)
personal protective equipment
(k)
CDM
1.1.4.6 Functions of the representative of employee safety

They may make representation on hazards, risks, dangerous occurrences, ill health and
general health and safety matters, particularly those that the Contractors has a duty on
which to consult.
AL
IO
1.1.4.7 Training, time off and the provision of facilities
The Contractors must provide the employee representative with appropriate and reasonable
training time and reasonable facilities to enable them to perform their functions.
This includes the Contractors meeting reasonable costs associated with training and time off
to perform the function.
The employee is also protected from unfair dismissal or from being otherwise penalised
when participating in consultation with Contractors on matters of health and safety in the
workplace.
IN
TE
AT

The fundamental requirements under CDM, for competence, co-operation and co-ordination,
imply a need for consultation between the various parties working on a project, at all levels.
These requirements apply to all projects.
On all projects the CDM Regulations require that all contractors ensure that their workforce
is properly consulted on matters which could affect their health or safety.
CDM uses the term 'worker engagement' rather than 'consultation'.
Worker engagement requires contractors and others to actively engage their workforce in the
process of identifying and controlling risks as an essential part of accident and incident
reduction; 'one-way consultation' should be a thing of the past. For this process to work
successfully, the workforce must:
EG
(a)
be provided with a means of promptly reporting health, safety or welfare issues to a

site-based supervisor or manager
(b)
have sufficient knowledge, gained through training where necessary, to appreciate

where health, safety and welfare issues exist
(c)
have sufficient confidence, based upon their knowledge, to report suspected or known
unsafe situations
(d)
be provided with feedback to ensure that the issue raised has been investigated and
corrective action taken where necessary.
QCS 2014

Page 46
In doing this, the Contractor will have to take into account the diversity of the work being
carried out by the various contractors and self-employed people who will be on the project at
the same time, and the duration of their particular work activity.
In that respect, each contractor, sub-contractor and designer has legal duties under CDM to
consult amongst themselves regarding construction work and ongoing design, design
changes and they all have a legal duty to provide information needed for the future stages of
the project (post construction)..
1.1.4.9 The Management of Health and Safety at Work

These Regulations require Contractors to provide information to employees on the
arrangements for dealing with 'serious and imminent danger and danger areas'. The
information required is the nature of the hazard and the measures taken to protect the
employees from it.
In addition, Contractors must provide employees with comprehensible and relevant

information relating to:
AL
health and safety risks identified by the risk assessment process
(b)
the preventative and protective measures established
(c)
(d)
health and safety risks that have been notified to the Contractors.
AT
IO
(a)
1.1.4.10 Functions of the safety representative
TE
Consultation with the Contractors Safety Representatives

These Regulations require every Contractor to consult with safety representatives with a
view to making and maintaining arrangements which will enable them and their employees to
co-operate effectively in promoting and developing measures to ensure health and safety at
work, and in checking the effectiveness of such measures. To achieve this, safety
representatives should encourage co-operation between the Contractors and employees.
They should use the established methods of communication within the workplace to keep
their members informed of matters affecting their health, safety and welfare at work.
Safety representatives will need to establish a close relationship with other appointed safety
representatives, including those appointed to develop a common approach to their
responsibility for the group or groups they represent.
EG
IN
Investigation
occurrences
and
reporting
of
significant
hazards
and
dangerous
This function is placed on the safety representative on behalf of all employees. In practice
this means that the safety representative should bring to the Contractors notice
unsatisfactory conditions, working practices or arrangements which come to their attention
either during formal inspections or day-to-day observation.
Any such reports should normally be in writing. The report does not imply that all other
conditions and working practices are safe and healthy, or that the welfare arrangements are
satisfactory in all other respects. Making a written report should not preclude a direct oral
approach to (for example) the supervisor or shift leaders in situations where speedy remedial
action is necessary or where it can lead to an immediate resolution of the problem.
QCS 2014

Page 47
It is important that the safety representative should have access to the Contractors
competent representative responsible for safety. Responsibilities for safety should be clearly
defined.
In order to fulfil their functions, safety representatives should keep themselves informed of
the particular hazards and risks of the workplace. They should also keep themselves
informed of the measures deemed necessary to eliminate or minimise the risks as set out in
the health and safety policy of their Contractors, as well as the organisational arrangements
for fulfilling that policy.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 48
Investigation of accidents in the workplace

5
Safety representatives should examine the causes of accidents at the workplace and make
representations to their Contractors on behalf of all employees they represent using
recording and reporting procedures like those outlined under 'Investigation and reporting of
significant hazards and dangerous occurrences' above.
Representation on general health and safety matters
Again, all employees should be represented and it is advised that similar recording and
reporting procedures are used.
Reception of complaints by employees
The function of the safety representative in this area is similar to that of a shop steward; so
the safety representative should ensure that there is no duplication of effort. It is advisable
that recording and reporting procedures as outlined previously are used.
AL
IO
Where safety representatives have been appointed they will be the appropriate persons to
represent employees in any consultations with the Administrative Authority, or other
Administrative Authority.
AT
Representation in consultation with the Administrative Authority
Safety representatives should attend meetings of safety committees in their capacity as

safety representatives in connection with any of their statutory functions.
TE
Attendance at meetings of safety committees
Inspections of the workplace
IN
These may occur in four distinct situations:

on a regular basis
(b)
after a substantial change in conditions of work
(c)
after a notifiable accident, dangerous occurrence or contraction of a notifiable disease
(d)
after remedial action has been taken.
EG
(a)
10
On a regular basis
11
Safety representatives are entitled to inspect the workplace, or part of it, at least every three
months. However, there may be special circumstances in which safety representatives and
their Contractors may wish to agree a different frequency of inspections for different areas or
sectors of the workplace, for example, where there is an especially high risk or in rapidly
changing circumstances. In all instances, agreement should be reached with the Contractors
on the frequency of inspections.
12
Safety representatives must give Contractors reasonable notice in writing of their intention to
carry out an inspection.
13
It is preferable that the Contractors and the safety representative should plan a programme
of formal inspections in advance. This will fulfil the conditions as to notice. Variations in this
planned programme should be subject to agreement.
14
There are advantages in formal inspections being jointly carried out by the Contractors or a
representative and the safety representative, but this should not prevent safety
QCS 2014

Page 49
representatives from carrying out independent investigations or having private discussions

with employees.
The number of safety representatives taking part in any one formal inspection should be
agreed by the safety representatives and the Contractors in the light of particular
circumstances and the nature of the inspection.
16
At large workplaces it may be impracticable to conduct a formal inspection of the entire

workplace at a single session. In these circumstances, arrangements may be agreed for the
inspection to be broken down into manageable units. It may also be appropriate, as part of
the planned programme, for different groups of safety representatives to carry out
inspections in different parts of the workplace. This can be either simultaneously or at
different times, but it should be in such a manner as to ensure complete coverage before the
next round of formal inspections becomes due.
17
The inspection may take various forms and the type to be carried out will be for the safety
representative to agree with the Contractors.
18
Several types of inspection which, on their own or in combination, will over a period of time
be appropriate:
Safety auditing - systematic checking of every aspect of the company's operations.
(b)
Safety sampling - systematic sampling of the hazardous activities, processes or areas.
(c)
Safety surveys - general inspections of all work activities, processes or areas.
(d)
Safety tours - general inspections of the workplace.
AT
IO
(a)
Safety representatives should record their findings and notify the Contractors of particulars.
19
AL
15
An inspection may take place after a substantial change in the conditions of work, or new
and relevant information concerning hazards in the workplace has been published.
IN
20
TE
After a substantial change in conditions of work
EG
After a notifiable accident, dangerous occurrence or contraction of a notifiable

disease
When there has been a notifiable accident or dangerous occurrence in a workplace or a
notifiable disease has been contracted, safety representatives may carry out an inspection of
the part of the workplace concerned and, so far as is necessary for the purposes of
determining the cause, may inspect any other part of the workplace.
22
Where inspections are carried out, it must be safe for the inspection to be carried out and it
must be in the interests of employees in the group or groups which safety representatives
are appointed to represent.
23
Where it is reasonably practicable to do so, the Contractors, or their representative, should

be notified of the safety representative's intention to carry out such an inspection.
24
It may be necessary, following an accident or dangerous occurrence, for the Contractors to

take urgent steps to safeguard against further hazards. If the Contractors do this, they
should notify the safety representative of the action taken and accompany this in writing.
25
The inspection must not interfere with any evidence or the testing of any machinery, plant,
equipment or substance which could disturb or destroy the factual evidence before a
Workplace Inspector from the appropriate Administrative Authority has had the opportunity to
investigate the circumstances of the accident or occurrence.
21
QCS 2014

Page 50
After remedial action has been taken

26
Where remedial action has been taken by the Contractors and the safety representative has
been notified in writing, the representative should be given the opportunity to make any
necessary re-inspection in order to satisfy themselves that the matter(s) notified have
received appropriate attention. They should also be given the opportunity to record their
views. It is advisable that a formal procedure is used.
27
Any remedial actions that are subsequently taken should be publicised throughout the
workplace via the normal channels of communication and should be brought to the specific
attention of the safety committee.
Inspection of documents
Safety representatives are entitled to inspect and take copies of any documents which the
Contractors is required to keep, by virtue of any statutory provision, relevant to the workplace
or to the employees represented.
29
The safety representatives must give a Contractor reasonable notice of their intention to
inspect and take copies of documents.
30
In exercising this right, safety representatives should have regard to the circumstances and
allow the Contractors a reasonable period of time. However, the Contractors must ensure
access to the documents.
31
The only exception is documents consisting of, or relating to, any health record of an
identifiable individual, unless the individual concerned has given their approval.
TE
1.1.4.11 Provision of facilities
AT
IO
AL
28
In addition to the facilities which Contractors must provide for inspections and consultations,
the Contractors must provide whatever assistance may be reasonable in the circumstances.
Note: Throughout these Regulations, reference is made to the facilities that the Contractors
have to provide to the safety representative. All parties should clearly understand that the
facilities should be reasonable, allowing representatives to effectively fulfil their functions.
The necessary facilities should be discussed and agreed on by all concerned.
EG
IN
1.1.4.12 Establishment of safety committees

1
Consultation about forming a safety committee should cover membership, function,

procedures and the meeting programme of the committee, and take into account start and
finish dates of the contractors who will work on the project.
Once the committee has been established, the Contractors must post a notice stating the
composition and the workplace to be covered by its activities.
1.1.4.13 Objectives and functions

1
The committee should be concerned with all relevant aspects of health, safety and welfare in
the workplace.
It should draw up objectives and agreed terms of reference. These might include:
(a)
study of accidents, dangerous occurrences, disease statistics and trends
(b)
examination of safety audits and other inspection reports
(c)
consideration of reports and factual information from the enforcing authorities
QCS 2014

Page 51
(d)
reports which safety representatives may wish to submit
(e)
development of safety procedures and safe systems of work
(f)
effectiveness of the safety content of employee training
(g)
adequacy of safety and health communication and publicity in the workplace
(h)
the provision of a link with the appropriate enforcing authorities' inspectors
(i)
the appropriate input into risk assessments, etc.
1.1.4.14 Membership
The number of management representatives should not exceed the number of employee
representatives. Management representatives should be drawn from all levels of
management and supervision, bearing in mind the needs of all contractors. In some
instances, safety experts may be co-opted.
AL
1.1.4.15 Conduct
The frequency of meetings will depend on the nature of the workplace, and prior consultation
should take place.
It is advisable that meeting programmes should be arranged with agendas and minutes, and
that these should be published and freely available.
It is particularly important that the standing of the committee in relation to management

representatives and safety representatives is clearly defined and that procedures for
reaching decisions are understood.
TE
AT
IO
A safety representative or other employee cannot be dismissed for drawing the attention of a
Contractor to genuine health and safety concerns.
EG
IN
1.1.4.16 Employment protection
Construction Site Safety

1.1.4 Appendix 1
Examples of information sought from Contractors
1
Information sought from Contractors on health and safety matters might be such as is
detailed under the following headings. The list should not be taken as exhaustive.
General safety
2
Information relating to safety, health and welfare, such as:

(a)
who the Contractors makes responsible for safety at the office, depot or site; and
where that person can be contacted
(b)
the health and safety policy of the Contractors and the organisation, and the
arrangements for implementing the policy
(c)
a list of members of any health and safety committees and a list of other safety
representatives within the company or on site
(d)
the specific responsibilities of individual managers and supervisors for health and
QCS 2014

Page 52
safety in the company and on site.
Details of existing procedures for:
(f)
the health, safety and welfare of the workforce and the established procedures for
consultation and negotiation
(g)
the issue, maintenance and replacement of any personal protective clothing and
equipment
(h)
obtaining first aid treatment
(i)
statutory inspections of the workplace, regular inspections and safety drills
(j)
warning notices and signs to be posted around the workplace and any signals which
need to be made during the working day
(k)
accident reporting and investigation
(l)
dealing with unsafe acts and conditions at the workplace, including working with
hazardous materials.
AL
(e)
IO
Information relating to the health, safety, welfare and training of young people, such as:
induction training, the general training methods to be implemented and the facilities
available for that training and how they are to be used
(b)
the people responsible for training and the safety content of on- and off-the-job
training
(c)
the provision of specific safety training for certain tasks and activities undertaken
within the workplace
(d)
who sets and monitors the required safety standards in training
(e)
the records to be kept to indicate what training has been received; where those
records are kept and by whom.
TE
AT
(a)
IN
Training of young people
Details of training related to the health, safety and welfare of adult workers, such as:
(a)
(b)
the type of training available both on- and off-the-job and the duration of that training
EG
Training of adult workers
the training available and given to skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled people
(c)
the extent to which retraining includes health and safety instruction
(d)
the methods of training which are currently being used
(e)
the arrangements for ensuring the effectiveness of the training given to workers whose
first language is Arabic and/or English, for whatever reason, have a lower than
average level of understanding of Arabic and/or English.
Training managers and specialists

5
Details of training related to health, safety and welfare of training managers and specialists,
which is given when:
(a)
any new work methods, equipment or materials are introduced into the company's
operations
(b)
any new standards or legislation are introduced which affect the company's operations
(c)
the existing knowledge and skills of the workforce are inadequate to meet the
requirements of the job.
QCS 2014

Page 53
The company's organisation and activities

6
General information on health, safety and welfare related to the company's organisation and
activities, such as:
(a)
the organisation, structure and specific site organisation
(b)
the numbers of personnel employed for each of the categories of skills employed and
of the specialists available for consultation
(c)
the methods of personnel recruitment, selection and placement policy
(d)
any significant changes in the company's activity, such as any proposed or anticipated
expansion, or the end of contracts.
Access to documents
AL
Contractors need to maintain and provide access to the following health and safety
information:
first aid statistics, along with records of absence
(b)
details of both manufacturers' and suppliers' technical data
(c)
reports, Improvement and Prohibition Notices served by the Administrative Authority

Workplace Inspectors
(d)
minutes of meetings, reports and any recommendations made by Safety Committees;

reports of safety officers, etc.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
QCS 2014

Page 54

1.1.5
Health & Safety Training and Induction Training
1.1.5.1 Key points

Construction and building sites can be dangerous places to work, even for experienced
workers.
Everyone arriving new on site, whether new to the industry, experienced or even a
temporary visitor, should be given an induction to the site.
Accident statistics show that the majority of accidents happen to people during their first few
days on site.
The threats to health and safety will vary from site to site and even on the same site as work
progresses and the hazards change.
An effective induction process is an essential part of on-site health and safety management.
The content of the induction presentation must:
AL
be understandable, comprehensive and relevant to the hazards present on site at that

time;
(b)
anticipate and inform inductees of forthcoming changes to the hazards on site;
(c)
allow for the effective induction of inductees who do not have English as their first
language or may otherwise have difficulty in understanding what is being said.
AT
IO
(a)
It is a requirement of these Regulations that employees are provided with health and safety
training whenever they are exposed to new or increased risks. When employees first arrive
in the company or at a new site, this training takes the form of an 'induction'. It is accepted
that providing proper and effective health and safety induction training can have a significant
impact on the likelihood of accidents and injuries during a person's first few days, weeks or
months with a company or on a particular site.
Given that every accident occurring to an employee can be seen as an eventual financial
cost to the Contractors, then anything that can be done to reduce accidents is of direct
financial benefit to the Contractors. The costs of giving proper and effective health and safety
induction training are relatively minor when viewed against the cost benefits that can accrue
from accident avoidance and prevention. This also applies to the prevention of long-term ill
health and the avoidance of dangerous occurrences.
EG
IN
TE
1.1.5.3 Types of inductees

1
Mention of the word 'induction' or 'inductee' would cause many people to think of a person
arriving on site or into the company totally new.
Whilst this is the case for some people, there will be a significant number of people who do
not fall into this category. In wider terms inductees may be:
(a)
young people joining the industry for the first time. This will generally be persons
joining a company as trainees or apprentices
(b)
persons arriving at a new site even though they have been in the industry for some
time
(c)
people transferring between companies within the industry
(d)
persons who have been promoted, for example, from tradesperson to chargehand
QCS 2014

Page 55
It must be appreciated that different types of inductee will probably require different levels or
styles of induction training because of their varying levels of knowledge, experience and
competence within the industry.
1.1.5.4 Health and Safety at Work (Construction Sites)

1
This Regulatory Document (Regulations) requires that Contractors provide their employees
with sufficient information, instruction, training and supervision as is necessary for their
health and safety.

These Regulations are more specific in that they require the following of the Contractors.
Every Contractor shall, in entrusting tasks to employees, take into account their
capabilities as regards health and safety.
(b)
Every Contractor shall ensure that employees are provided with adequate health and
safety training:
AL
(a)
on their being recruited into the Contractors undertaking; and
(ii)
on their being exposed to new or increased risks because of:
IO
(i)
their being transferred or given a change of responsibilities within the

Contractors undertaking
the introduction of new work equipment or a change regarding work

equipment already in use within the Contractors undertaking
the introduction of new technology into the Contractors undertaking
the introduction of a new system of work or a change regarding a system

of work already in use within the Contractors undertaking.
AT
TE
(a)
(b)
EG
These Regulations specifically require that:

contractors provide all of their workers with the necessary information and training
which is necessary for their health and safety, including a suitable site induction,
where it is not provided by a Contractor
IN
the Contractor takes all reasonable steps to ensure that every worker is provided with
a suitable site induction.
The above requirement on contractors to provide site inductions means that inductions must
be carried out for all projects
The requirements of other Regulations which in themselves indicate a need for competence
in certain work situations, when viewed against the type of work to be carried out, might
indicate additional topics which need to be covered during site induction.
1.1.5.7 Contractors responsibilities

1
Refer to this section 1.1.2.7
1.1.5.8 Employee responsibilities

1
Refer to this section 1.1.2.7.
QCS 2014

Page 56
1.1.5.9 Induction training

1
It will be for the Contractors to decide when and where the training takes place. However,
the sooner the induction training takes place the more opportunity there is to have a
significant influence on the people being inducted. It is important that the induction training is
seen as a formal company procedure, which the company provides for the benefit of the
inductee, so that the Contractors can be seen to be meeting both the letter and the spirit of
the law. If it is seen as 'something that is just necessary, we have to do it anyway' then it will
fail to have the desired long-term effects.
The style and content of the presentation will vary between company and site. However, the
person giving the presentation needs to have both the necessary skills and knowledge,
together with the ability or 'presence' to deliver the programme effectively and in a
meaningful manner.
AL
Induction difficulties
It is essential that the health and safety messages put across during site induction are fully
understood. Possible barriers to learning will depend largely upon the training methods used.
For example, reliance on written training materials will disadvantage those with dyslexia or
other reading difficulties. Similarly, amongst the increasing number of workers who do not
speak Arabic as their first language, some may find induction training of limited value unless
thought is given to how it is delivered.
It is up to the person organising the training to establish the limitations of those undertaking
induction, remembering that there may be a degree of embarrassment and, therefore, a
reluctance to admit limitations.
To successfully induct those whose first language is not Arabic, but who have some
understanding, it will probably be necessary to modify the presentation in style, speed of
delivery and the aids used, depending upon the level of Arabic. Induction aids may need to
be more visual, with less reliance upon the written word. Where there are operatives who do
not speak Arabic at all, it is likely that specialist help, such as interpreters, will be required.
There may also be scope for training someone on the site who speaks both languages to
carry out specific induction sessions for specific groups.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Induction content
6
Different companies will have different issues to include in the induction training. The
requirements for on-site training will vary as work on the site progresses. In the early days
there may be excavations, exposed reinforcing bars and other problems at ground level.
As the site and above-ground works progress, the hazards will change and it will be
necessary for the emphasis in the health and safety training to change. As the site develops,
temporary or permanent traffic routes may be introduced, or the circulation of traffic on site
may need to change, for example, due to the repositioning of a crane or the installation of
services. All these issues should be reflected in the induction training that will be provided for
people arriving on site or as the project progresses. It is quite possible, or even likely, that
the induction session delivered on day one of the project will not be valid after three months.
Part of the induction process must be to find out what the audience already knows, identify
key areas that must be covered and use plain language, illustrating with diagrams, drawings
and pictures to ensure that inductees can easily take in the information.
There will undoubtedly be other issues that are specific to a company or site and these will
need to be considered and developed by the company concerned.
QCS 2014
10

Page 57
Explain that at the end of the induction session, all inductees will be required to add their
name and signature to an attendance sheet signifying that they have understood what they
have been told.
1.1.5.10 Site and company rules

1
Obviously, users will amend the content in order to reflect the philosophy of their company,
site or organisation regarding health, safety and welfare provisions. There may be items
covered which you feel are inappropriate and these should be omitted.
Conversely, some additional items not covered may be of particular importance to your
company, site or organisation and these should be included.
Access
Explain the rules regarding access to, and egress from, the workplace. Are there any oneway systems? Are there any prohibited areas? Are there any special rules or conditions
applying to the site or workplace?
AL
IO
The participants should be in no doubt of the requirements for reporting accidents. Explain
when, where and to whom accidents must be reported and, in general, how they will be
investigated. Your procedures may go beyond those required by legislation as a company
policy decision.
AT
Accident reporting
Asbestos
If asbestos or asbestos-containing materials are potentially present, it is essential to provide

elementary asbestos awareness training, including details of any prohibited areas, to reflect
the site conditions.
You should have a company policy for dealing with any material suspected of being
asbestos and employees should be informed of this policy.
This may be along the lines of:
EG
IN
TE
'If you find any material that is off-white or crumbly, or any fibrous
material that looks like dirty cotton wool it may be asbestos or contain
asbestos, so leave it alone and if practical keep other people out of the
area. Contact your supervisor and tell them what you have found.'
Assembly points
8
See also Emergency evacuation. Explain where the assembly points are for site
evacuation in the event of an emergency.
Boundaries
Explain the boundaries of the site if there is no perimeter fence. Include the prevention of
trespass.
Buried services
10
Explain site or company procedures that should be followed if gas, electricity,

telecommunications, fibre optics, water, sewerage and other buried services are discovered
on site.
QCS 2014

Page 58
Competence
11
You may need to advise employees and others of the levels of competence required for
operating certain types of plant or carrying out particular pieces of work. CDM in particular
places a legal duty on anyone who arranges for or instructs any worker to carry out
construction work, to ensure that they are competent to do so.
Confidential issues
12
Explain the provision for 'whistle blowing'. How can employees raise confidential (including
medical) issues if the need arises?
Confined spaces
Explain the rules that apply on site. Many employees will fail to recognise that a confined
space can be above ground, or be as innocuous as a sub-basement boiler room.
Unfortunately, confined spaces have been responsible for a number of deaths in the
industry, all of which could have been avoided by compliance with proper health and safety
procedures.
AL
13
AT
what is the mechanism for workers to bring any health and safety concerns they have
to the attention of site management?
(b)
If there is a health and safety committee on site?
(c)
If so, who are the members?
(a)
If there is a suggestion box or scheme, explain how employees can put forward ideas for
improvements in health, safety and welfare, waste minimisation and so on, on a day-by-day
basis.
IN
15
Contractors have a duty to consult the workforce on matters of health and safety, you must
explain how such (two-way) consultation is achieved:
TE
14
IO
Consultation with employees
The raised awareness of environmental matters makes the prevention of ground

contamination of growing importance. Explain how employees can prevent spillage of diesel
fuel, paint, oil, thinners, cement, concrete or any other substance that could lead to
contamination.
16
EG
Contamination
COSHH (Control of Substances Hazardous to Health)

17
Explain the on-site procedures relating to hazardous substances. Are there any substances
that are additional to the usual cement, oils, paints, etc.?
Dangerous occurrences
18
Explain the policy in relation to the reporting of dangerous occurrences. It is thought that
many go unreported as employees regard them as 'an accident where nobody was injured'.
Dermatitis
19
Explain that contact dermatitis can be caused by some relatively common substances such
as diesel and mould release oil, paints, thinners and cement. Gloves should be worn on
appropriate occasions, and barrier creams should be used properly.
QCS 2014
20

Page 59
These occasions should have been identified by the Contractors risk assessments.
Discipline
21
Explain the company policy regarding breaches of this Regulatory Document (Regulations),
site or company rules.
Dress code
22
Explain the effects of sun exposure and the importance of preventing skin cancer. Explain
company or site rules on whether shorts or sleeveless vests are permissible on site.
Drugs
Explain the rules about arriving on site or being on site under the influence of any nonprescribed controlled drugs, or taking these during the hours of employment. It may be that
employees will be asked to leave the site.
24
The issue of prescribed drugs should also be covered as some of these can have side
effects such as drowsiness. If the user is authorised to operate plant or drive vehicles, this
needs to be addressed and resolved with the supervisor or management.
IO
AL
23
What standard is used? What is the safe system of work for persons working on or near
open or leading edges?
25
AT
Edge protection
TE
temporary or permanent repairs by competent persons on site?
(b)
use of 240v equipment?
(c)
use of RCD or similar circuit breakers?
(d)
use of transformers and 110v equipment?
IN
(a)
EG
27
What are the site or company rules concerning:
Are there any other general rules regarding working with electricity?
26
Electricity
Emergency evacuation
28
Explain site or company procedures. What is the siren or alarm? Where are the emergency
evacuation assembly points?
Emergency procedure
29
Explain the procedures to be followed in the event of an emergency other than fire. This may
be civil disturbance, a bomb scare, structural collapse or other eventuality.
Environment
30
Environmental pollution can include the air, as well as the ground or water. Explain any
specific issues of environmental protection and control concerning the company or site. It is
perhaps worth noting that dust, as well as smoke and fumes, can be considered an
environmental pollutant.
QCS 2014

Page 60
Escape routes
31
Explain the recognised escape routes on site and from buildings in the event of a fire or
emergency.
32
Explain that access and egress routes must be - well-defined and kept clear. How are they
marked? How will they be lit when it is dark? How will changes to the escape routes be
notified as construction progresses?
Excavations
Explain the policy regarding:
(a)
excavation support
(b)
proper entry and exit from an excavation
(c)
edge protection around an excavation.
AL
33
Explain if there are any specific eye protection problems, or rules applicable to the site or
any particular work that is taking place. See also Personal protective equipment.
IO
34
Eye protection
You may wish to comment on the use of safety nets, safety decking, air bags and other
similar systems.
35
AT
Fall-arrest
Explain the hierarchy of control measures that are to be used on site to prevent persons from
falling or to catch them safely if they do fall. This will obviously vary depending on the type of
site and work undertaken.
IN
36
TE
Fall prevention
In the induction session, you should at least cover the following:

(a)
(b)
(c)
38
fire precautions, fire prevention and good housekeeping
37
EG
Fire
who will be responsible for summoning the fire brigade

location of:
(i)
fire points
(ii)
fire extinguishers
(iii)
hose reels
(d)
training and competence in the use of fire fighting equipment
(e)
testing of the fire alarm
(f)
fire drills and practice evacuations
(g)
evacuation in the event of an on-site emergency
(h)
policy for 'hot works', including permits.
Explain the company or site policy regarding the burning of rubbish or 'bonfires'. On many
sites, this is prohibited due to the danger of fire spreading and the environmental pollution
caused by fires.
QCS 2014

Page 61
First aid
39
If there is to be an on-site first-aid facility that can be used by all contractors, clearly explain
the arrangements.
(a)
Where is the first-aid kit?
(b)
Who are the first aiders, and how can they be contacted or identified?
(c)
Who are the appointed persons?
(d)
In the event of an accident requiring more than first aid, who will summon the
ambulance or emergency services?
Flammable liquids
storage
(b)
withdrawal from storage
(c)
use
(d)
return to storage.
(a)
AL
If flammable liquids (such as paint thinners, solvents, spirit-based paints and others) are kept
and used on site, explain the rules for:
IO
40
See also Consultation with employees. If there is a site health and safety committee (and
this may also be reflected in earlier comments for CDM or Consultation with employees),
explain the terms of reference for:
41
AT
Health and safety committee
the committee and membership
(b)
how often the committee meets
(c)
agenda items
(d)
how the outcomes of meetings are made known to employees on site (publication of
minutes).
EG
IN
TE
(a)
42
Hearing protection zones

Are there any mandatory protection zones on site? How are they marked? Explain the
supply and issue of hearing protectors and when they should be worn.
High visibility clothing
43
Explain the site or company rules for this clothing to be worn and clearly define the
appropriate locations. Also clearly define the standard for high visibility clothing.
Hoists
44
For passenger hoists:

(a)
who is the competent person to operate the hoist?
(b)
if any person can operate it, do they need training prior to being authorised as
competent?
(c)
if the controls are regarded as so simple that the hoist may almost be regarded as a
public lift, is there any danger of controls being overridden?
(d)
what is the maximum number of persons permitted in the hoist?
QCS 2014
(e)
45

Page 62
which rules apply regarding goods carried in the hoist?
For goods hoists:

(a)
who is the authorised competent person to drive it?
(b)
can any other persons be authorised?
(c)
what are the rules for closing the gates?
(d)
what is the safe working load?
(e)
explain that passengers cannot be carried.
Ladders/stepladders
Explain the company standards for:
securing or tying ladders/stepladders
(b)
use of ladders/stepladders for light work of short duration or gaining access
(c)
any restrictions imposed on the use of ladders and stepladders
(d)
movement of ladders around the site.
AT
Lasers
If lasers are to be used on site, explain what class of laser is to be used and what, if any,
hazards could be caused. Levelling lasers (used, for example, by suspended ceiling fixers)
are not normally regarded as hazardous as long as appropriate health and safety rules are
followed.
47
AL
(a)
IO
46
Explain that different projects and clients will have different rules and that employees should
understand the need for each rule and how it will be enforced.
Explain the following:

(a)
(b)
who has the authority to use lifting equipment of varying sizes and types
49
EG
Lifting equipment
IN
48
TE
Site Rules
the duties of slingers and signallers
(c)
testing and inspection of equipment
(d)
current colour coding, if such a system is used.
Lighting
50
Explain the site or company rules for provision of work lighting and emergency lighting.
Include:
(a)
the placing of luminaires
(b)
extra lighting during winter months or for work outside normal hours.
Liquefied petroleum gas

51
Explain the rules for:

(a)
use and storage
(b)
separation of full and empty cylinders
QCS 2014

Page 63
(c)
separation from oxygen and acetylene, as appropriate
(d)
use of hose check valves and flashback arresters
(e)
use of fire extinguishers.
Manual handling
52
Explain site or company rules regarding:

(a)
the avoidance of manual handling wherever possible
(b)
the use of mechanical devices to aid manual handling
(c)
company policy or procedures regarding dense or heavyweight concrete blocks
(d)
the importance of good manual handling techniques including team lifting.
AL
Medication
Some prescribed medicines, and some medicines which can be purchased from a Pharmacy
without a prescription for problems such as hay fever, can cause drowsiness or other side
effects.
54
Explain that anyone who is concerned that any medicines prescribed may affect their health
and safety performance should discuss the matter with their supervisor.
AT
IO
53
Method statements
Explain the importance of supervisors discussing with employees the method statement to
be used for particular tasks, and the benefits to be gained from employee input into method
statements.
TE
55
Explain who has the competence to operate or use MEWPs. Give the evidence required to
prove competence and training. Where can MEWPs be used? Where they are not allowed?
Explain the use of safety harnesses when working from platforms.
EG
56
IN
Mobile elevating work platforms (MEWPs)
57
Near-miss incidents
Explain the importance of reporting all incidents that are 'near misses'. These can then be
investigated and the appropriate remedial measures put into place so that the next 'near
miss' does not become an accident.
Needles and syringes
58
Because of the secretive nature of illegal drug use, these items may be hidden away, which
can increase the danger to those finding them. Employees should be warned to be very
vigilant, particularly regarding the discovery of used hypodermic syringes, razor blades
(needles and needlestick injurys).
59
Explain the action to be taken on:
60
(a)
finding discarded needles
(b)
receiving a needlestick injury.
It should be noted that most gloves in common use on site do not offer very much protection
against a needlestick injury.
QCS 2014

Page 64
Noise
61
See also Hearing protection zones. Explain the site or company rules concerning the use
of equipment that produces excessive noise. Explain the use of hearing protection and noise
control zones.
Occupational health
62
Stress the importance for employees to report to supervisors any cases of ill health, as it
may be potentially work-related. This is particularly important if employees are working
where there may be rats, or if the area has been used for illegal drug taking and the related
paraphernalia may be found. In the case of refurbishment and renovation works, there may
be residual materials from previous occupants likely to cause ill health.
Overhead electricity cables
(b)
marking
(c)
allowable proximity for vehicles
(d)
working nearby
(e)
precautions.
location
IO
(a)
Permits to work
Explain company or site procedures regarding issuing, working with and the cancellation of
permits to work. Where 'lock off systems are used, explain the rules regarding padlock keys.
TE
64
AL
Explain the site or company rules on:
AT
63
Explain the site or company rules regarding:

safety helmets
(b)
protective footwear
(c)
high visibility clothing
(d)
66
EG
(a)
65
IN
Personal protective equipment
eye protection
(e)
respiratory protection
(f)
any other issues.
Remind the inductees that PPE in general, and respiratory protective equipment (RPE) in
particular, should only be used as a means of last resort when all other control measures
have been investigated and found to be impracticable. The need for PPE (apart from helmet,
boots and high visibility clothing) should be covered in the risk assessment and method
statement.
Plant and equipment
67
Explain the site rules regarding:

(a)
the authority to operate plant and
(b)
equipment, including the requirement for competence cards, where necessary
(c)
any type of plant/equipment that is prohibited, for example mains-powered hand tools
QCS 2014

Page 65
(d)
the need for noise control where appropriate
(e)
the requirement for permits to work where appropriate.
Powers of Administrative Authority Workplace Inspectors

68
You may want to explain, in general terms, the powers that Inspectors have when they come
on site and the requirement for employees to co-operate with them.
Reporting defects
Explain the importance of reporting all defects in plant and equipment, scaffolding, supports
for excavations, and so on. Early reporting will bring about swift remedial measures and help
to prevent accidents.
70
The possible consequences of not reporting defects may result in an accident or disciplinary
procedures.
AL
69
Explain whether there are any areas on site that are restricted to all people, or a specific
class of people. Include what identifies a restricted area. Typical examples are areas where
demolition, impact cleaning, water jetting, or asbestos removals are taking place.
AT
IO
71
Restricted or prohibited areas
Risk assessments
Explain the significant findings of risk assessments, as they will affect staff on site as a
whole, or those working on a particular activity. It may be useful to explain the risk
assessment process and the health and safety benefits that can be gained by employees.
See also Method statements.
IN
Safe systems of work
TE
72
The crucial need arising out of risk assessments and method statements is for safe systems
of work. Explain that site rules require employees to work in accordance with any safe
systems of work that have been developed by the Contractors.
74
Explain also the benefits of working to a safe system of work and the potential for accidents
and disciplinary action if it is not followed properly.
EG
73
Safety harnesses
75
Explain the company or site requirements for wearing and using safety harnesses and
lanyards. See also Fall-arrest.
Safety policy
76
Explain any relevant areas of the company's health and safety policy, together with the
organisation and arrangements for the implementation of the policy. If relevant, explain
where a copy of the policy is displayed on site.
Safety signs and notices
77
Remind the audience that all employees must comply with all safety signs and notices at all
times. Explain the whereabouts of any site notice board, and how changes and modifications
to site rules will be made known to the workforce.
QCS 2014

Page 66
Scaffolding (including mobile scaffolds)

78
79
Explain the site rules regarding:

(a)
who is allowed to erect, alter or dismantle tube and fitting or system-built scaffolds
(b)
the implications (safety and disciplinary) of unauthorised dismantling or alteration of

scaffolds
(c)
assessing competency to erect proprietary aluminium or tower scaffolds
(d)
the safe use of mobile tower scaffolds
(e)
safe access/egress to and from scaffolds.
Explain any other company or site-specific rules about the use of scaffolding as either a
working place, or as access to the working place.
Explain whether any specific rules apply to pedestrian and traffic movement. This will
depend on the size and complexity of the site. You may also include where contractors may
lay down materials and which areas they may use for the prefabrication of components.
IO
80
AL
Site layout
Security is very much allied to health and safety in that a breach of security can lead to
trespassers on site and possible exposure to a risk of injury. Open a discussion if you have
any particular company or on-site rules concerning security. Also consider the issue of health
and safety awareness of site security staff, whether they are employees or a subcontracted
security company.
TE
81
AT
Site security
Skin protection
It may be appropriate to discuss the need for skin protection, both in terms of gloves and
barrier creams. If barrier creams are used, where are they dispensed? Also explain that the
types of gloves used must be the most suitable for the levels of protection needed.
83
If it is likely to be a significant hazard, you should also include details of the risk of skin
cancer associated with excess exposure to the sun.
EG
IN
82
Smoking
84
Explain the policy on smoking in the workplace and the canteen, clearly identifying those
areas where smoking is not allowed. Include details of the measures taken to protect nonsmokers from the discomfort caused by tobacco smoke.
Tidiness (housekeeping)
85
Explain the importance of maintaining a tidy site in order to eliminate many of the slip, trip
and fall hazards. Include:
(a)
rubbish skips
(b)
separation of waste
(c)
who is responsible for organising the delivery of and removal of skips
(d)
good housekeeping
(e)
sweeping up - general tidiness.
QCS 2014

Page 67
Toilets
86
See also Welfare facilities. Explain the site or company rules regarding cleanliness, abuse
of facilities and graffiti, and how such behaviour will be dealt with. Include the reporting of
defects.
Traffic routes
87
These are dependent on the size and complexity of the site.
88
Explain:
one-way systems
(b)
the need to minimise or avoid reversing
(c)
signallers (formerly banksmen)
(d)
segregation of pedestrians from vehicles and machines - pedestrian walkways.
AL
(a)
What training will be given to persons on site? Explain the need for all contractors to ensure
that persons working for them on site have been trained and are competent to carry out the
work they are required to do.
AT
IO
89
Training
Due to the nature of the project or the ground, some sites will have specific issues to deal
with and there may be the potential for a particular type of injury. Take the opportunity to
explain this in order to prevent injuries occurring. For instance, working at height raises
specific issues and working at height over or alongside water may introduce additional
hazards.
IN
TE
90
Types of injury
Vehicles
EG
Explain the site rules for the presence and operation of vehicles on site. Include:
(a)
the parking of private vehicles
(b)
delivery vehicles, for example,
(c)
91
constraints on the access to off-loading bays
(d)
keeping clear of site (working) vehicles
(e)
who is allowed to operate plant on site
(f)
providing proof of competence to operate plant
(g)
the security of vehicle keys when not in use
(h)
security measures to make vehicles unavailable to trespassers and children during

non-working hours
(i)
traffic routes and speed limits
(j)
the need for signallers and slingers.
Vibration
92
Many people are still unaware of the problems that can be caused by high-speed rotary and
percussive equipment. Explain the potential severity of vibration white finger and the
company or site policy regarding:
QCS 2014

Page 68
(a)
the use of vibrating equipment
(b)
the limitations of personal protective equipment
(c)
design and selection of tools and equipment
(d)
rest breaks and the rotation of work
(e)
the symptoms of vibration white finger
(f)
the need for employees to seek medical advice if they have any symptoms.
Waste disposal
93
Describe the location of skips and other waste containers. Explain the segregation of waste.
Who is responsible for the removal of waste from the workplace? Explain the company or
site policy if contractors do not clear away their own waste.
Explain that this is a financial issue as well as an environmental matter. It is also closely
linked with site tidiness, pollution control, housekeeping and accident prevention. Effective
waste minimisation is also an issue within sustainable construction and there are company
and national benefits to be gained. There is more likelihood of a project being completed on
time and to budget if waste is minimised.
AT
IO
94
AL
Waste minimisation
Welfare facilities
Explain:
the location of the welfare facilities
(b)
if appropriate, the opening hours of site canteens
(c)
responsibilities for the cleaning and maintenance of the facilities
(d)
the provision of barrier creams and rehydrating lotions
(e)
the need for good personal hygiene
(f)
the company policy regarding damage and graffiti
(g)
the location of facilities for men
(h)
the arrangements (if any) made for smokers.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
95
Working at height
96
This is allied to fall prevention, safe systems of work and PPE. Explain the company or site
rules for:
(a)
working at height, including safe systems of work
(b)
competence of employees
(c)
protection of those below, including the public

(i)
the prevention of materials falling - use of containment and debris nets.
Working near, on or over water

97
Explain the site or company rules for working near, on or over water, including:
(a)
the wearing of life jackets or life preservers or flotation devices
(b)
prevention of falls into water
(c)
safety harnesses
QCS 2014

Page 69
(d)
the rescue of anyone who has fallen into water
(e)
safety lines and safety boats
(f)
lookouts
(g)
alarms.
Conclusion
It is extremely important that records are kept showing which workers have attended site
induction, together with details of the training they have received and the date it was carried
out.
99
Appendix 1 of this module is an example of an attendance list that can be copied and used
for record purposes on induction training. It may also be copied into a computer and
electronic records maintained.
100
Appendix 2 is a checklist that can be:
'ticked' as appropriate and attached to the induction attendance list as a record of

which topics were covered
(b)
used by the trainer to ensure that the important basic facts are included in an induction
training talk.
IO
(a)
EG
IN
TE
AT
Operatives may also find the checklist helpful in identifying gaps in their knowledge.
101
AL
98
QCS 2014

Page 70

1.1.5 Appendix 1
Health and Safety Induction Training
Title:
Date
Location
Start time
Duration (minutes)
End time
Presenter's name
Presenter's signature
Name of inductee's Contractors
Inductee's signature
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Inductee's name
QCS 2014

Page 71

1.1.5 Appendix 2
Induction training checklist
CDM
Competence
Confidential issues
Confined spaces
Consultation with
employees
EG
Contamination
COSHH
Competence
Risk assessments
Safe Systems of
Work
Safety harnesses
Safety policy
Safety signs and

notices
Scaffolding (incl.
mobile scaffolds)
Edge protection
Electricity
Emergency
evacuation
Emergency
procedure
Environment
Escape routes
Excavations
Eye protection
Fall-arrest
Site layout
Site security
Skin protection
Smoking
Tidiness
(housekeeping)
Toilets
Flammable liquids
Health and safety

committee
AL
Drying rooms
First aid
Hearing protection
zones
Buried services
Drugs
Fire
High visibility
clothing
IO
Boundaries
Dress code
Fall prevention
Hoists
AT
Assembly points
Discipline
Asbestos
Dermatitis
Working near, on or
over water
Dangerous
occurrences
TE
Accident reporting
IN
Access
Ladders/
stepladders
Lasers
Legal issues
Lifting equipment
Lighting
Liquefied petroleum
gas
Manual handling
Traffic routes
Training
Types of injury
Vehicles
Vibration
Waste disposal
Medication
Method statements
Mobile elevating
work platforms
Near-miss incidents
Needles and
syringes
Noise
Occupational health
Overhead electricity
cables
Permits to work
Personal protective
equipment
Plant and equipment
Powers of
Inspectors
Registration
schemes
Reporting defects
Restricted or
prohibited areas
Waste minimisation
Waste minimisation
Working at height
QCS 2014

Page 72

1.1.6
General Health and Safety

1
Contractors are required to access the risks to workers in their undertakings, and to any
other person whose health and/or safety may be adversely affected by a Contractors work
activities. The phrase 'any other person' clearly encompasses contractors, members of the
public, site visitors, employees of other contractors etc.
Contractors are required to implements any protective or preventive measure to control a

risk or risks, they must do so in line with the following general principles:
These include:
Avoiding risks where possible.
(b)
Evaluating the risks that cannot be avoided.
(c)
Combating risks at source.
(d)
Adapting the work of an individual with a view to alleviating monotonous work and
reducing its effects on health.
(e)
Adapting to technical progress.
(f)
Replacing the dangerous with the safe or less dangerous.
(g)
Developing a coherent policy which influences the factors relating to the working
environment.
(h)
Giving collective measures priority over measures that protect the individual.
(i)
Giving appropriate instructions to employees.
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
Contractors have a requirement to make effective arrangements, as are appropriate for the
nature of the work activities carried out and the size of the company, for the management of
all aspects of health and safety. Contractors must record the arrangements made for the
effective planning, organisation, control, monitoring and review of the preventative and
protective measures implemented.
Contractors are required to ensure that employees are provided with health surveillance
where the findings of a risk assessment identify risks to the health and safety of employees
that can be eliminated or reduced by applying health surveillance techniques.
Health surveillance should be introduced where the risk assessment indicates that:
EG
IN
(a)
there is an identifiable disease or adverse health condition related to the work

concerned
(b)
there are valid detection techniques
(c)
there is a reasonable likelihood that the disease or condition may occur under the
particular conditions of work
(d)
health surveillance has the potential to increase the protection of the health of the
employees concerned.
Health surveillance techniques can be as simple as:

(a)
hand-checks for the early signs of dermatitis being carried out by a site manager or
supervisor, who has received the appropriate training, or
(b)
employees being asked to complete a short questionnaire on occupational health
QCS 2014

Page 73
issues.
Alternatively, health surveillance can necessitate the engagement of medically trained

persons and specialist equipment, for example, audiometry (hearing) checks.
Contractors are required to appoint one or more 'competent persons' to assist them in
interpreting and complying with Qatar health and safety legislation, where the Contractors
does not have the necessary training, experience or knowledge to carry out this duty
themselves. If more than one competent person' is appointed, the Contractors must ensure
that there is adequate co-operation between them.
10
Where the Contractors him/herself is not competent in matters of construction health and
safety, the requirements of this Regulatory Document are normally satisfied by the
employment of a suitably qualified and experienced health and safety adviser or the
engagement of an appropriately experienced consultant.
11
The Contractors must ensure that any competent person who is not an employee, for
example, a consultant, is adequately informed of all relevant facts in relation to site health
and safety.
12
Given that in-house safety advisers or external consultants will usually only visit sites at a
frequency that is deemed to be appropriate, the responsibility for the day-to-day
management/monitoring of health and safety is often delegated to the site manager. In these
circumstances, this regulation places a duty on the Contractors to ensure that the site
manager is adequately trained and competent to discharge this duty.
13
A competent person is someone who has sufficient training and experience, or knowledge
and other qualities, to enable them to properly assist the Contractors in complying with
relevant health and safety legislation.
14
Competence may be indicated by membership of a recognised Institution of Occupational

Safety and Health and/or possession of a qualification in Occupational Safety and Health
from an appropriate accrediting body.
15
Contractors are required to implement procedures to be developed for any particular serious
and - imminent dangers that may arise. This will very much depend on both the activities of
the Contractors and the location. Fire is a real risk for everyone almost everywhere, but
bomb threats in rural locations may not be.
16
Other serious and imminent dangers may relate to LPG, HFL, collapse of scaffold,
excavations, confined spaces or virtually anything else. Again, Contractors should know their
industry.
17
Once such procedures have been developed, the workforce must receive the appropriate
information, instruction and training.
18
Contractors are required to establish contact with external agencies as necessary,

particularly with regard to first aid, emergency medical care and rescue work.
19
Contractors must provide their employees with comprehensible (understandable) and

relevant information on:
20
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
the risk to their health as identified by any part of the Contractors risk assessments
(b)
any preventive or protective measures taken to eliminate or reduce the risks identified
(c)
any risks notified to the Contractors that arise out of the work activities of another
Contractors.
Where there is more than one Contractor in the workplace, they must co-operate with each
QCS 2014

Page 74
other with regard to health and safety, to enable both (or all if there are more than two)
Contractors to fulfil their legal duties.
21
This may require planning exchanges of information on hazards and risks, or deciding who
works where and when and, on larger sites, a health and safety co-ordinator may be needed.
The client, the Contractor or a nominated contractor may have, or have been given, by
contract or arrangement, the co-ordination role.
22
Contractors are required to ensure that when allocating a task to any employee, the
Contractor takes into account the employee's capabilities (knowledge, training, experience
etc.) with regards to health and safety.
23
The Contractors also has a duty to ensure that employees are provided with adequate health
and safety training:
upon being exposed to new or increased risk.
AL
(b)
This training must be:

repeated periodically where appropriate
(b)
reviewed and adapted to take account of any new or changed risks
(c)
during working hours.
AT
IO
(a)
Employees are required to:
use all tools, equipment, dangerous substances, safety devices etc, in accordance
with any training received.
(b)
report to the Contractors (or Contractors health and safety 'competent person') any
work situation which the employee feels is not safe.
(a)
25
on recruitment
TE
24
(a)
Contractors (and in some cases self-employed persons) with regard to the employment of
workers who are employed under a temporary contract or supplied by a Labour agency.
27
Before starting work, such workers must be supplied with comprehensible (understandable)
information on:
(b)
any special occupational qualifications or skills required to enable the temporary

worker to work safely
(a)
EG
IN
26
the requirement for any health surveillance arising out of the work to be carried out.
28
The above bullet points have obvious implications where temporary workers, whose first
language is not English, are to be employed. See notes below.
29
Contractors are required to inform any Labour agency who are to supply temporary workers
of:
(a)
any special occupational qualifications or skills that must be held by the temporary
worker(s) to enable them to work safely
(b)
any features of the work to be carried out by the temporary workers insofar as those
features are likely to affect their health and safety.
30
Contractors should respond after notification that the employee is pregnant. Exposure limits,
working conditions and working hours for such workers must be taken into consideration.
31
Contractors are required to specifically assess and review the risks to the health and safety
of young persons who are on site. Due account must be taken of their lack of maturity or
experience and their lack of knowledge of potential risks.
QCS 2014
33
34
Unless:
(a)
it is necessary for their training
(b)
they are under the supervision of a competent person
(c)
the risks are reduced to the lowest level that is reasonably practicable
No Contractors may employ a young person for work which:

(a)
is beyond their physical or psychological capacity
(b)
involves exposure to agents which are toxic, carcinogenic or otherwise have serious
specific health implications
(c)
involves harmful exposure to radiation
(d)
involves the risks of accidents because of their lack of experience and/or training
(e)
involves a risk to health from extreme cold or heat, noise or vibration.
A 'young person' is anyone over the minimum school leaving age but under 18 years of age.
AL
32

Page 75
1.1.6.2 Construction workers for whom Arabic is not their first language
Contractors shall, in entrusting tasks to his employees, take into account their capabilities as
regards health and safety.
Steps must be taken to ensure that effective two-way communication is established so that
they can work safely and without risk to their health or to the health and safety of any other
person who might be affected by their action or omissions.
Ultimately, if a contractor decides to engage workers who cannot speak and/or understand
Arabic the situation will have to be managed. This could be achieved by the employment of a
bilingual supervisor who, in the appropriate language, can give information, instructions,
training and supervision. If a contractor is responsible for engaging workers who cannot
speak English then the Contractor should ensure that the contractor provides suitable
translators. Equally, the same criteria will need to be implemented on other smaller sites.
Contractors are required to ensure that employees are trained and competent for the job
they have to do. Not being able to communicate using the language of the country of
residence does not mean that workers are not competent in their trade. Provided they are
here legally, it would be extremely unwise to ban workers who can prove their competence,
just because they cannot speak the language effectively or fluently. Provisions for such
situations can and should be made.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
1.1.6.3 Manual Handling Operations

1
These require that simple, common sense measures be taken to prevent injuries to workers
resulting from carrying or otherwise moving loads manually.
Definitions of the terms injury, load and manual handling, all of which are as would be
expected.
An injury is any injury, not just to the back, and would include cuts from sharp edges or
broken toes caused by dropped objects.
A load is virtually anything, including a person, an animal, a bag of cement, heavyweight

building blocks - in fact, any moveable object. The only proviso is that a tool is not a 'load'
while it is being used. A Labourer carrying a chainsaw to a carpenter would be carrying a
load.
Manual handling means transporting, supporting, lifting, putting down, pushing, pulling,
carrying or moving anything by hand or bodily force.
Contractors are required to avoid manual handling operations which involve a risk of
QCS 2014

Page 76
employees being injured, as far as is reasonably practicable and, where manual handling
cannot be avoided, to carry out risk assessments and introduce alternatives to manual
handling, control measures and appropriate training.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Employees are required to make full and proper use of all equipment or systems provided by
the Contractors.
QCS 2014

Page 77
1.1.6.4 Provision and Use of Work Equipment

Every Contractor must ensure that all work equipment is constructed or adapted to be
suitable for the purpose for which it is intended.
Definition of work equipment: Any tool or piece of equipment for use at work.
There is a non-exhaustive list of work equipment, and construction-related examples

including:
(b)
ladder
(c)
air compressor
(d)
crane
(e)
tractor
(f)
hoist
(g)
mobile work platform
(h)
hammer
(i)
lifting sling
(j)
podger
(k)
drill bit
(l)
socket set
(m)
scaffolding.
dumper truck
TE
AT
IO
(a)
AL
Use is defined as any activity involving work equipment.
All vehicles used on site are covered by these Regulations.
Contractors are required to ensure that work equipment is suitable for the purpose, and only
used under conditions for which it is suitable.
Contractors are required to ensure that work equipment is properly and adequately
maintained.
Contractors are required to ensure that specific risks are identified, information and
instructions to employees and the training of employees take place.
Contractors must ensure that all work equipment, whether European Conformity (CE)
marked or not, complies with all current British or International standards.
10
The basic principle is that every dangerous part of any machine or piece of equipment must
be effectively and properly guarded at all times, but provisos do exist for certain
circumstances, such as the use of push sticks on woodworking machines.
11
Controls should be efficient, effective, easy to use, clearly marked and easily accessible. The
main requirement is to provide safe equipment for the employee, with controls that allow it to
be used in a safe manner. It goes without saying that emergency stop controls feature quite
significantly.
12
Contractors are required to ensure that lighting must be suitable and sufficient, taking
account of the work operation in progress.
EG
IN
QCS 2014

Page 78
13
Contractors may also have to consider the need for both access lighting and task lighting.
14
Contractors are required to ensure that all markings must be clear and appropriate, and
'warnings' which may be audible or visible and they must be unambiguous, easily perceived
and easily understood.
1.1.6.5 Personal Protective Equipment

The main consideration when dealing with personal protective equipment is that it should
always be the last form of protection, or control, considered for the protection of the
employees' health and safety.
No distinction is made between equipment and clothing. Personal protective equipment

(PPE) includes all types of respiratory protective equipment (RPE).
Contractors are required to ensure that personal protective equipment is suitable and
provided, where a risk cannot be adequately controlled in some other manner.
Contractors are required to ensure compatibility if more than one item of personal protective
equipment needs to be worn at any time, so that one item does not detract from the
protection offered by another.
This is of particular importance to the building and construction industry as, on many
occasions, a combination of safety helmet, eye protection, ear protection or respiratory
protection needs to be worn.
Contractors are required to ensure assessments to be made of the suitability of the

equipment with regard to the nature of the risk.
The requirements of the assessment are specified and, in general, require the problem to be
thought through in a structured manner and - the right equipment chosen for the right
reasons.
A key factor is the competence of the person carrying out the assessments. If they do not get
it right, the consequences for the health and safety of employees could be very serious.
Assessments must be reviewed when they become out of date or there are any significant
changes.
10
Contractors are required to ensure that personal protective equipment provided shall be
properly maintained, cleaned or replaced as appropriate; that adequate and suitable storage
or accommodation is provided for it; and that employees receive all necessary information,
instruction and training.
11
Training must be comprehensible and the question of language use must be considered.
12
Employees are required to use personal protective equipment in accordance with any
instructions or training given, and to report any loss or defects.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 79

1.1.7
Risk Assessments and Method Statements
1.1.7.1 Interpretation
contractor means any organization or person who carries out or manages construction
work or a place of work and includes any employer or self-employed in relation to a
business
business means a trade, business or other undertaking including construction work

(whether for profit or not)
Construction work means the carrying out of any building, civil engineering or engineering
construction work and includes:
AL
the construction, alteration, conversion, fitting out, commissioning, renovation, repair,

upkeep, redecoration or other maintenance, de-commissioning, demolition or
dismantling of a structure;
(b)
the preparation for an intended structure, including site clearance, exploration,

investigation and excavation, and the clearance or preparation of the site or structure
for use or occupation at its conclusion;
(c)
the assembly on site of prefabricated elements to form a structure or the disassembly

on site of prefabricated elements which, immediately before such disassembly,
formed a structure;
(d)
the removal of a structure or of any product or waste resulting from demolition or

dismantling of a structure or from disassembly of prefabricated elements which
immediately before such disassembly formed such a structure; and
(e)
the installation, commissioning, maintenance, repair or removal of mechanical,

electrical, gas, compressed air, hydraulic, telecommunications, computer or similar
services which are normally fixed within or to a structure
(f)
Any associated temporary works associated with construction works and a work
activity
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
Work activity means any activity part of construction work and includes temporary works
Young person means any person who has not attained the age of eighteen. A young
person under 16 years of age cannot be employed at all in a Qatar workplace, as per Qatar
Labour Law 14, Article 86.
These duties are held by the contractor who carries out the work, irrespective of whether he
is an employer or is self-employed.
These duties are also held by those who do not do construction work themselves, but control
the way in which the work is done or manages construction work or owns and manages a
place of work.
Suitable and sufficient means the risk assessment should identify the risks arising from or in
connection with the work and the level of detail should be proportionate to the risk. The level
of risk arising from the work activity should determine the degree of sophistication of the risk
assessment.
A method of work shall mean a method statement describing the logical sequence of how a
work activity is to be carried out safely and without risk to health
1.1.7.2 Risk assessment
QCS 2014

Page 80
Every contractor shall make a suitable and sufficient risk assessment:

(a)
To the health and safety of his employees to which they are exposed whilst they are
at work; and
(b)
To the health and safety of persons not in his employment arising out of or in
connection with his undertaking
Any assessment referred to in paragraph (1) shall be reviewed if:

(a)
There is reason to suspect that it is no longer valid; or
(b)
There has been a significant change in the matters to which it relates.
A contractor shall not employ a young person unless he has undertaken or reviewed his risk
assessment in accordance with paragraphs (1) and (4) below in relation to risks to the health
and safety of young persons.
In making or reviewing the assessment, a contractor who employs or is to employ a young

person shall take account of:
(c)
The extent of the health and safety training provided or to be provided to young
persons
IO
AL
The lack of awareness of risks in relation to the work to be undertaken and or the risks
impacting on the role of young persons
AT
Any risk assessment referred to in paragraph (1) shall take into account
language difficulties and language barriers of employees
(b)
safety culture and other behavioural safety issues of employees
(c)
The development and implementation of effective techniques as essential mitigations

to (a) and (b) above.
TE
(a)
The contractor shall record:

(a)
The significant findings of the risk assessment; and
(b)
Any group of his employees and others identified by it as being especially at risk.
(d)
the controls to be put in place to control risks
The contractor is required to ensure that employees are provided with health surveillance
where the findings of a risk assessment identify risks to the health and safety of employees
that can be eliminated or reduced by applying health surveillance techniques.
(b)
IN
The inexperience and immaturity of young persons;
EG
(a)
1.1.7.3 Method of work

1
Risk assessment shall be supported by effective and suitable written method of work
describing the logical sequence of how a work activity is to be carried out in a manner which
is safe and without risk to health.
Any written method of work referred to in paragraph (8) shall be developed by a competent
person who has knowledge and experience of the work activity being assessed and its
development shall involve consultation with those undertaking the work activity.
Any risk assessment and method of work referred to in paragraph (1) and (8) respectively
shall be developed before undertaking of any work activity and shall be communicated to
and acknowledged by those who will undertake the work activity.
Any risk assessment and method of work referred to in paragraph (1) and (8) respectively
shall identify the requirements for the contractor to provide for his employees:
(a)
information about how to undertake the work safety and without risk to their health
QCS 2014

Page 81
(b)
implementation of instructions for undertaking the work safety and without risk to their
health
(c)
identify and conduct necessary training to employees so that they have the
understanding and skills to undertake the work activity without risk to their health and
safety
(d)
implementation of supervision of the work
Note
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Guidance on Risk assessment and written method of work can be found in Section 2.4
(Section 11, Part 2 of QCS).
QCS 2014
1.1.8

Page 82
Construction (Design and Management)
1.1.8.1 Key points

1
The overall concept of Construction (Design and Management) (CDM) regulations is to focus
on planning, design and management to improve health and safety standards on Qatar
construction industry without creating unnecessary paperwork and bureaucracy.
The key aim of the CDM Regulations is to integrate health and safety into the management
of construction projects and to encourage everyone involved to work together to:
improve the planning, design and management of projects from the very start
involving subject matter experts to ensure that risks associated with all aspects of
business, particularly in terms of hazardous activities are properly assessed;
(b)
identify hazards early on, so they can be eliminated or reduced at the design or
planning stage and the remaining risks can be properly managed;
(c)
target effort where it can do the most good in terms of health and safety; and
(d)
discourage unnecessary bureaucracy.
AL
(a)
IO
These Regulations are intended to focus attention on planning and management

throughout construction projects, from design concept onwards. The aim is for health
and safety considerations to be treated as an essential, but normal part of a projects
development not an afterthought or addition.
The effort devoted to planning and managing health and safety should be in proportion to the
risks and complexity associated with the project. When deciding what you need to do to
comply with these Regulations, your focus should always be on action necessary to reduce
and manage risks. Any paperwork produced should help with communication and risk
management. Paperwork which adds little to the management of risk is a waste of effort, and
can be a dangerous distraction from the real business of risk reduction and management.
Time and thought invested at the start of the project will pay dividends not only in
improved health and safety, but also in:
reductions in the overall cost of ownership, because the structure is designed for
safe and easy maintenance and cleaning work, and because key information is
available in the health and safety file;
(a)
EG
IN
TE
AT
(b)
reduced delays;
(c)
more reliable costings and completion dates;
(d)
improved communication and co-operation between key parties; and
(e)
improved quality of the finished product.
1.1.8.3 Definitions / Interpretations

1
Client: A client means a person or an organisation or a company who seeks or accepts the
services of another person, organisation or company to carry out a project for him. The
Client can carry out the project himself.
Designer: Any person or organisation or company who in the course of a project or business
prepares or modifies a design; or arranges for or instructs any person under his control to do
so.
Design: Includes drawing, design details, specification, bills of quantities and calculations
QCS 2014

Page 83
prepared for the purpose of designing all aspects of a structure or any products or electrical
or mechanical systems intended for a particular structure.
any construction, alteration, conversion, fitting out, commissioning, renovation, repair,

upkeep, redecoration or other maintenance, cleaning (using water, abrasives at high
pressure, or the use of corrosive or toxic substances), decommissioning, demolition or
dismantling of a structure
(b)
preparatory works including site clearance, exploration and investigation (but not site
survey) and clearance or preparation of the site or structure for use or occupation
(c)
assembly of prefabricated structures or their disassembly
(d)
demolition or dismantling of any structure and the removal of materials and waste.
(e)
fabrication of elements which will form parts of offshore installations
(f)
the construction of fixed offshore oil and gas installations at the place where they will
be used
(g)

electrical, gas, compressed air, hydraulic, telecommunications, computer or similar
services which are normally fixed within or to a structure.
IO
AL
(a)
AT
The activities listed below have been defined as not being construction work. However,
given the complexities of many modern projects, thought may have to be given to how health
and safety is managed in connection with these activities where they form a part of the
project to which CDM otherwise applies:
putting up and taking down tents
(b)
normal maintenance of items of plant unless it is structural work, for example,

maintaining a large silo, chemical or nuclear reactor
(c)
tree planting and general horticultural work
(d)
work with removable lightweight
(e)
partitions, such as those used to divide open-plan offices or to create exhibition stands
and displays
(f)
erection of scaffolds for support or access in non-construction work
(g)
IN
TE
(a)
EG
Construction work: Any building, civil engineering or engineering construction work. It

includes any of the following:
surveying - this includes taking levels, making measurements and examining a

structure for faults
(h)
work to or on vessels such as ships and mobile offshore installations
(i)
off-site manufacture of items for later use in construction work (for example, roof
trusses, pre-cast concrete panels, bathroom pods and similar prefabricated elements
and components)
Engineer: Refer to QCS Section 1 (General) Part 1 (Introduction) 1.4 (Terms and
Definitions).
Contractor: Refer to QCS Section 1 (General) Part 1 (Introduction) 1.4 (Terms and
Definitions).
Sub-Contractor: means any person or organisation selected by the contractor for execution
or management of construction works. A sub-contractor works under the control of the
Contractor on site.
The construction phase starts when actual construction work on the project commences,
and normally ends on the transfer or handing over of the structure to the client. If there is
QCS 2014

Page 84
more than one structure (or building), the construction phase does not end until the work on
the last structure is complete.
10
Construction Phase (Health & Safety) Plan: The Contractor must develop a plan suitable
for managing health and safety in the construction phase of the project, which includes
developing information provided by the client, designer and Engineer. This must be
completed, submitted and approved as suitable and sufficient by the client before
construction work on site can proceed.
The Construction Phase (Health & Safety)) plan is the foundation for good management and
clarifies:
who does what
who is responsible for what
the hazards and risks which have been identified
how the works are controlled
AL
AT
IO
The plan should be regarded as a live document, reviewed at regular intervals and, where
necessary, amended to reflect changes in the scope of work or programme changes where
the planned interface of trades may alter.
Construction site: includes any place where construction work is being carried out or to
which the workers have access, but does not include a workplace within it which is set aside
for purposes other than construction work.
12
Principles of Prevention: means the hierarchy of hazard and risk control specified in
section 1.1.8.6 and which applied to every duty holder and everyone on a construction
project.
13
Project: means an undertaking (whether for profit or not) which includes or is intended to
include construction work and includes all planning, design, management or other work
involved in a project until the end of the construction phase.
14
Structure: This is defined as:

any building, any masonry, timber, metal or reinforced concrete structure, railway line
or siding, dock, harbour, inland navigation, tunnel, shaft, bridge, viaduct, waterworks,
reservoir, pipe or pipe-line, cable, aqueduct, sewer, sewage works, gasholder, road,
airfield, sea defence works, drainage works, earthworks, lagoon, dam, wall, caisson,
mast, tower, pylon, underground tank, earth retaining structure or structure designed
to preserve or alter any natural feature, fixed plant and any structure similar to the
foregoing;
(a)
EG
IN
TE
11
(b)
any formwork, falsework, scaffold or other structure that provides temporary support or
access
1.1.8.4 Co-operation
1
These Regulations require that every duty holder involved in a project:

(a)
seeks the co-operation of any other person involved in any project, whether on the
same or an adjoining site co-operates with all other persons involved in any project,
whether on the same or an adjoining site
So far as it is necessary for all persons involved in the project(s) to comply with their duties
or functions under these Regulations.
QCS 2014

Page 85
Every person involved in a project, who is working under the control of another person, must
shall inform that person of anything believed to endanger the health or safety of himself or
others.
Common examples of co-operation are:

(a)
one contractor allowing the workforce of another company to use their scaffold to
enable work at height to be carried out safely.
(b)
site management on one site allowing oversailing by a tower crane on an adjacent

site.
(c)
Designers of a project providing residual hazard and safety information to another

designer on an interfacing project.
1.1.8.5 Co-ordination
(a)
carrying out construction work; and
(b)
otherwise affected by the construction work
AL
These Regulations require that every duty holder involved in a project co-ordinates their
activities with the activities with one another in a manner which ensure so far as is
reasonably practicable the health and safety of persons who are:
IO
There are many examples of where the various contractors involved in a project can coordinate their work activities, agreeing who works where and when so that construction work
runs smoothly and without the risks created by one set of workers endangering the health
and safety of other workers.
All construction projects require co-operation and co-ordination between all members of
the project team. For low risk projects, a low-key approach will be sufficient. In higher
risk projects, for example those involving demolition, a more rigorous approach to coordination, co-operation and planning will be needed. Under the Regulations, any action
taken should be in proportion to the risk which the work creates. The architect, lead
designer or contractor who is carrying out the bulk of the design work should normally
co-ordinate the health and safety aspects of the design work; the main Contractor
should co-ordinate construction work.
It is vital that those doing the work understand the risks involved and what to do about
them. If the risks are low and the precautions well understood by those carrying out the
work, then there will be no need for a written health and safety plan. Where the risks are
higher, a written comprehensive construction phase health and safety plan will be
required. for example where the work involves:
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
structural alterations;
(b)
deep excavations, and those in unstable or contaminated ground;
(c)
unusual working methods or safeguards;
(d)
ionizing radiation or other significant health hazards;
(e)
nearby high voltage power lines;
(f)
a risk of falling into water which is, or may become, fast flowing;
(g)
diving;
(h)
explosives;
(i)
heavy or complex lifting operations;
(j)
demolition works.
A comprehensive construction phase health and safety plan will be required.
QCS 2014

Page 86
1.1.8.6 Taking account of the general principles of prevention

1
These Regulations require that:

(a) Every person involved on a construction project, in relation to its design, planning
and preparation shall take account of the general principles of prevention in the
performance of those duties during at all the stages of the project.
(b) Every person involved on a construction project, in relation to the construction phase
of a project shall ensure so far as is reasonably practicable that the general
principles of prevention are applied in the carrying out of the construction work
When considering what precautions are necessary to control risks associated with a
project, everyone who has a duty under these Regulations must take account of the
general principles of prevention specified below:
avoiding risks;
(b)
evaluating the risks which cannot be avoided;
(c)
combating the risks at source;
(d)
adapting the work to the individual, especially as regards the design of

workplaces, the choice of work equipment and the choice of working and
production methods, with a view, in particular, to alleviating monotonous work and
work at a predetermined work-rate and to reducing their effect on health;
(e)
adapting to technical progress;
(f)
replacing the dangerous by the non-dangerous or the less dangerous;
(g)
developing a coherent overall prevention policy which covers technology,

organisation of work, working conditions, social relationships and the influence of
factors relating to the working environment;
(h)
giving collective protective measures priority over individual protective measures;

and giving appropriate instructions to employees.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
EG
1.1.8.7 Summary of the duties under these Regulations

A summary of the duties and how they are applied with respect to each duty holder is given
in the following table and chart:
All construction projects
QCS 2014

Page 87
(a) Check competence and resources of all appointees

(b) Ensure there are suitable management arrangements for the project, including
welfare facilities
(c) Allow sufficient time and resources for all stages
Clients
(d) Provide pre-construction information to designers and contractors

(e) Appoint an Engineer
(f) Appoint Contractor
(g) Make sure that the construction phase does not start unless there are suitable:
welfare facilities, and
construction phase plan in place
(h) Provide information relating to the health and safety file to the Engineer
AL
(i) Retain and provide access to the health and safety file
AT
IO
(j) (*There must be an Engineer and Contractor until the end of the construction phase)
(a) Advise and assist the client with their duties
TE
(c) Facilitate good communication between client, designers and contractors

(d) Liaise with Contractor about ongoing design
(e) Identify, collect and pass on pre-construction information
IN
Engineer
(b) Co-ordinate health and safety aspects of design work and co-operate with others
involved with the project
EG
(f) Ensure that expert knowledge/advice is available in relation to highly hazardous

activities (e.g. explosives, cofferdams, caissons etc.)
(g) Prepare and update health and safety file
Designers
(a) Check that client is aware of their duties

(b) Eliminate hazards and reduce risks during design
(c) Provide information about remaining risks
(d) Check client is aware of duties and Engineer has been appointed
(e) Provide any information needed for the health and safety file
All construction work
QCS 2014

Page 88
(a) Plan, manage and monitor construction phase in liaison with sub-contractors
(b) Prepare, develop and implement a written plan and site rules. (Initial plan must be
completed before the construction phase begins. Plan is termed Construction Phase
Health and Safety Plan.
Contractor
(c) Give sub-contractors relevant parts of the plan

(d) Make sure suitable welfare facilities are provided from the start and maintained
throughout the construction phase
(e) Check competence of all their appointees
(f) Ensure all workers have site inductions and any further information and training
needed for the work
(g) Ensure that expert knowledge/advice is available in relation to highly hazardous
activities (e.g. explosives, cofferdams, caissons etc.)
AL
(h) Consult with the workers

(i) Liaise with Engineer regarding ongoing design
IO
(j) Secure the site
AT
(b) Provide Contractor with details of any sub-contractors) engaged
(c) Provide any information needed for the health and safety file
(d) Inform Contractor of problems with the Construction Phase Health and Safety Plan
TE
(e) Inform Contractor of reportable accidents, diseases and dangerous occurrences

(f) Plan, manage and monitor own work and that of workers
IN
(g) Check competence of all their appointees and workers
EG
(h) Train own employees and provide information to their workers
Sub-Contractors
(a) Co-operate with Contractor in planning and managing work, including reasonable
directions and site rules
QCS 2014

Page 89
1.1.8.8 Duty holders under CDM

1
The following groups have specific duties under these Regulations:

(a)
Clients
(b)
Designers
(c)
Engineers
(d)
Contractors
(e)
Sub-Contractors
1.1.8.9 Clients Duties

Under these Regulations there is a greater focus on the client's responsibilities. The term
'client' excludes 'domestic' clients; people must be having construction work carried out as a
part of their business activities (whether for profit or not) to be classified as a client under
these Regulations. Clients must ensure that arrangements are made for managing the
projects and providing relevant information.
In relation to the arrangements for managing the project, the client must take reasonable
steps to ensure that:
IO
AL
so far as is reasonably practicable, the project will be managed in such a way

(including the allocation of sufficient time and other resources) that the construction
work can be carried out without avoidable risks to health or safety of any person
(b)
there are suitable welfare facilities for the people engaged in the construction work
(appendix 1)
(c)
any structure which is to be built complies with the requirements of the latest revision
for QCS
(d)
these standards are maintained and reviewed throughout the project.
IN
TE
AT
(a)
In relation to the provision of information, the client's duties are to ensure that all
designers and contractors are promptly provided with relevant pre-construction information.
The pre-construction information must include all relevant information which is in the client's
possession, or can be reasonably obtained, including information that relates to:
(a)
EG
anything likely to affect the site or the construction work, for example the presence of
asbestos or underground services
(b)
the proposed use of the structure as a workplace
(c)
the minimum amount of time before the construction phase starts allowed for planning
and preparation (mobilisation)
The purpose of the provision of information by the client is to:

(a)
(b)
secure, so far as is reasonably practicable, the health and safety of anyone who will:
(i)
be involved in the construction work
(ii)
be otherwise affected by the construction work
(iii)
use the structure as a place of work
assist the persons to whom information is provided to:

(i)
perform their duties under these Regulations
(ii)
determine the resources allocated to them to manage the project
QCS 2014

Page 90
In situations where there are a number of organisations, any of which could be the client,
one of the organisations must elect in writing to take on the role of client. This needs to be by
agreement. In this case, none of the other organisations have any duties under these
Regulations.
The client has one of the biggest influences over the way a project is run. They have
substantial influence and contractual control and their decisions and approach determine:
the time, money and other resources available for projects
(b)
who makes up the project team, their competence, when they are appointed and
who does what
(c)
whether the team is encouraged to co-operate and work together effectively
(d)
whether the team has the information that it needs about the site and any existing
structures
(e)
the arrangements for managing and co-ordinating the work of the team
AL
(a)
Because of this, they are made accountable for the impact their approach has on the health
and safety of those working on or affected by the project. However, these Regulations also
recognise that many clients know little about construction health and safety, so clients are
not required or expected to plan or manage projects themselves. Nor do they have to
develop substantial expertise in construction health and safety, unless this is central to their
business. Clients must ensure that various duties are discharged, but are not normally
expected to do them themselves.
Those clients without construction expertise should rely on the engineers advice on how
best to meet their duties, but the engineer will need the clients support and input to be able
to carry out their work effectively. The client remains responsible for ensuring that client
duties are met.
10
Clients can also, intentionally or unwittingly, take on additional responsibilities. If they specify
materials or methods of working they may well become designers in relation to those specific
matters. They will also be contractors if they directly manage or carry out construction work
on site.
11
Client shall ensure that the construction phase does not start unless:
(b)
12
the contractor has prepared a construction phase plan which complies with
Section 1.1.8.32); and
(a)
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
the contractor have made arrangements for suitable welfare facilities to be

provided from the start and throughout the construction phase
In addition to the duties set out above, clients must:

(a) appoint an Engineer to advise and assist with their duties and to co-ordinate the
arrangements for health and safety during the planning phase;
(b) appoint a Contractor to plan and manage the construction work preferably early enough
for them to work with the designer on issues relating to building safety issues, usability
and maintainability;
(c) ensure that the construction phase does not start until the Contractor has prepared a
suitable construction phase plan and made arrangements for suitable welfare facilities to
be present from the start of the work;
(d) make sure the health and safety file is prepared, reviewed, or updated ready
for handover at the end of the construction work. This must then be kept
available for any future construction work or to pass on to a new owner.
QCS 2014
13

Page 91
Getting the right people for these roles and making early appointments is particularly
important for clients with little construction or health and safety expertise, as they will need to
rely on the advice given by the Engineer on matters relating to the competence of those who
they intend to appoint, and the adequacy of the management arrangements made by
appointees.
1.1.8.10 Who are clients?

1
A client is an organisation or individual for whom a construction project is carried out. Clients
only have duties when the project is associated with a business or other undertaking
(whether for profit or not). This can include for example, Qatar Ministrys, Insurance
Companies or Private Developers.
1.1.8.11 Domestic clients

Domestic clients are people who have work done on their own home or the home of a
family member, that does not relate to a trade or business, whether for profit or not. It is
the type of client that matters, not the type of property.
Domestic clients have no client duties under CDM.
Designers and contractors working for domestic clients have to manage their own work
and co-operate with and co-ordinate their work with others involved with the project so
as to safeguard the health and safety of all involved in the project.
In some circumstances it may not be immediately obvious who is the client and there
can sometimes be more than one client involved in a project. To avoid confusion, this
needs to be resolved by those involved at the earliest stage possible. Take into
account who:
ultimately decides what is to be constructed, where, when and by whom;
(b)
commissions the design and construction work (the employer in contract

terminology);
(c)
initiates the work;
(d)
is at the head of the procurement chain;
(e)
engages the contractors.
EG
IN
(a)
TE
AT
IO
AL
If there is still doubt, then all of the possible clients can appoint one of them as the only
client for the purposes of these Regulations. Someone will always be the client. It is in
the interests of all possible contenders to identify who it is. If not, they run the risk that all will
be considered to carry the clients duties under these Regulations.
1.1.8.12 What clients must do for all projects

1
Clients must make sure that:

(a)
designers, contractors and other team members that they propose to engage are
competent (or work under the supervision of a competent person), are adequately
resourced and appointed early enough for the work they have to do.
(b)
they allow sufficient time for each stage of the project, from concept onwards;
(c)
they co-operate with others concerned in the project as is necessary to allow other
duty holders to comply with their duties under these Regulations;
(d)
they co-ordinate their own work with others involved with the project in order to
ensure the safety of those carrying out the construction work, and others who may
be affected by it;
QCS 2014

Page 92
(e)
there are reasonable management arrangements in place throughout the project

to ensure that the construction work can be carried out, so far as is reasonably
practicable, safely and without risk to health. (This does not mean managing the
work themselves, as few clients have the expertise and resources needed and it
can cause confusion);
(f)
contractors have made arrangements for suitable welfare facilities to be provided

from the start and throughout the construction phase;
(g)
any fixed workplaces (for example offices, shops, factories, schools and any other
structures which can be a place of work for end users including maintainers)
which are to be constructed will comply, in respect of their design and the
materials used, with any requirements of latest version for QCS
(h)
relevant information likely to be needed by designers, engineer, contractors or

others to plan and manage their work is passed to them in order to comply with
these Regulations.
AL
1.1.8.13 Co-operation, co-ordination, timeliness and resources

Co-operation between parties and co-ordination of the work are key to the successful
management of construction health and safety. Co-operation and co-ordination can only
be meaningful if the relevant members of the project team have been appointed early
enough to allow them to contribute to risk reduction. This is particularly important during
the design stage when both clients and contractors should contribute to discussions on
building safety issues, usability and maintainability of the finished structure. Clients
should seek to appoint those who can assist with design considerations at the earliest
opportunity so that they can make a full contribution to risk reduction during the planning
stages.
Unrealistic deadlines and a failure to allocate sufficient funds are two of the largest
contributors to poor control of risk on site. When engaging designers, contractors, and
appointing engineers, clients have to consider the resources (for example staff,
equipment and, particularly, time) needed to plan and do the work properly. Any
contractors who are being considered for appointment should be informed of the
minimum time period allowed to them for planning and preparation before construction
work begins on site. Contractors should be given sufficient time after their appointment
to allow them to plan the work and mobilise the necessary equipment (for example
welfare facilities) and staff to allow the work to proceed safely and without risk to health.
This is particularly important where the project involves demolition work - contractors
must be given sufficient time for the planning and safe execution of any demolition
activities.
Clients should consult with appointees (including the contractor) to find out how much
time they will need for planning and preparation before work is expected to start in order
that both parties can agree a suitable time period. Similarly, engineers will need
sufficient time after their appointment to carry out their duties under these Regulations.
Clients must then inform their appointees how much time the client has allowed for
planning and preparation before the work starts.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
1.1.8.14 Arranging design work

1
Clients must only employ designers who are competent to carry out their CDM duties.
Clients often employ more than one designer, for example architects, civil, structural and
services engineers. In such cases they all need to know who does what, and the timing
of the appointments needs to enable the design work to be co-ordinated from an early
stage. Nominating one designer as the lead designer is often the best way to ensure
co-ordination and co-operation during work which involves a number of designers.
QCS 2014

Page 93
1.1.8.15 Management Arrangements

1
Clients, particularly those who only occasionally commission construction work, will not
be experts in the construction process and for this reason they are not required to take
an active role in managing the work. Clients are required to take reasonable steps to
ensure that suitable management arrangements are in place throughout the life of the
project so that the work can be carried out safely and without risk to health. The
arrangements put in place should focus on the needs of the particular job and should be
proportionate to the risks arising from the work.
The client will need to ensure that arrangements are in place to ensure that:
there is clarity as to the roles, functions and responsibilities of members of the
project team;
(b)
those with duties under CDM have sufficient time and resource to comply with
their duties;
(c)
there is good communication, co-ordination and co-operation between members

of the project team (for example between designers and contractors);
(d)
designers are able to confirm that their designs (and any design changes) have
taken account of the requirements of their (designers duties), and that the
different design elements will work together in a way which does not create risks
to the health and safety of those constructing, using or maintaining the structure;
(e)
that the contractor is provided with the pre-construction information.
(f)
contractors are able to confirm that health and safety standards on site will be
controlled and monitored, and that welfare facilities will be provided by the
contractor from the start of the construction phase through to handover and
completion.
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
Most of these arrangements will be made by others in the project team, such as
designers and contractors. Before they start work, a good way of checking is to ask the
relevant members of the team to explain their arrangements, or to ask for examples of
how they will manage these issues during the life of the project. When discussing roles
and responsibilities, on simple projects all that may be needed is a simple list of who
does what.
When deciding whether management arrangements are suitable and maintained

throughout the project, clients will need to make a judgement, taking account of the
nature of the project and the risks that the work will entail. If this judgement is
reasonable and clearly based on the evidence requested and provided, clients will not
be criticised if the arrangements subsequently prove to be inadequate, or if the company
who has made the arrangements fails to implement them properly without the clients
knowledge.
EG
IN
1.1.8.16 Providing the pre-construction information

1
Clients must provide designers and contractors who may be bidding for the work (or who
they intend to engage), with the project-specific health and safety information needed to
identify hazards and risks associated with the design and construction work (the preconstruction information).
The information should be provided as part of the early procurement process or tendering,
and responses to the issues identified can be a real help when judging competence of
those tendering for the work. It therefore needs to be identified, assembled and sent out
in good time, so that those who need it when preparing to bid or when preparing for the
work can decide what resources (including time) will be needed to enable design,
planning and construction work to be organised and carried out properly. Where design
QCS 2014

Page 94
work continues during the construction phase, the pre-construction information will need
to be provided to designers before work starts on each new element of the design.
Similarly, where sub-contractors are appointed during the construction phase, each subcontractor (or those who are bidding for the work) must be provided with the preconstruction information in time for them to take this into account when preparing their
bid, or preparing for work on the site.
Clients may already have all, or much of the information needed. However, where there
are gaps in this information, the client should ensure that these are filled by
commissioning surveys or by making other reasonable enquiries. Where no existing
information is available from the Client, designers shall identify and commission relevant
surveys to enable them to complete their design and prepare preconstruction
information that will be used to inform preparation and planning for construction. The
information shall consist of relevant health and safety information of anyone affected by
the design over the project life cycle.
The pre-construction information provided should be sufficient to ensure that significant

risks during the work can be anticipated and planned for. It should concentrate on those
issues that designers and contractors could not reasonably be expected to anticipate or
identify, and not on obvious hazards such as the likelihood that the project would involve
work at height.
The information needs to be in a form that is convenient, i.e. clear, concise and easily
understood, but it can be included in other documents, for example the specification,
providing the relevant health and safety issues are fully covered. Brief notes on as built
drawings are particularly useful, but should be checked in case significant alterations have
been carried out. will advise the client as to what is needed and arrange for relevant
information to be given to designers and contractors.
Clients are also required to tell Contractors who they engage to carry out construction work
the minimum notice that they will be given before they are expected to start construction
work. This is to ensure that Contractors have sufficient time to plan and prepare for
example mobilise their workforce and equipment, and make arrangements for welfare
facilities to be provided.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
EG
1.1.8.17 Pre-construction information

When drawing up the pre-construction information, each of the following topics should
be considered. Information should be included where the topic is relevant to the wor k
proposed. The pre-construction information provides information for those bidding for or
planning work, and for the development of the construction phase plan. The level of
detail in the information should be proportionate to the risks involved in the project.
Description of project
(a)
project description and programme details including:

(i)
key dates (including planned start and finish of the construction phase), and
(ii)
the minimum time to be allowed between appointment of the contractor and

instruction to commence work on site;
(b)
details of client, designers, engineer and other consultants;
(c)
whether or not the structure will be used as a workplace (in which case, the
finished design will need to take account of the relevant requirements of the latest
version for QCS).
(d)
extent and location of existing records and plans.
Clients considerations and management requirements
(i)
planning for and managing the construction work, including any health and
safety goals project,
(ii)
communication and liaison between client and others,
(iii)
security of the site,
(iv)
welfare provision;
requirements relating to the health and safety of the clients employees or

customers or those involved in the project such as:
(i)
site fencing requirements,
(ii)
site transport arrangements or vehicle movement restrictions,
(iii)
client permit-to-work systems,
(iv)
fire precautions,
(v)
emergency procedures and means of escape,
(vi)
no-go areas or other authorisation requirements for those involved in the

project,
(vii)
any areas the client has designated as confined spaces,
AT
(viii) smoking and parking restrictions.
Safety hazards, including:
boundaries and access, including temporary access for example narrow

streets, lack of parking, turning or storage space,
(ii)
any restrictions on deliveries or waste collection or storage,
(iii)
adjacent land uses for example schools, railway lines or busy highways.
(iv)
existing storage of hazardous materials,
(v)
location of existing services particularly those that are concealed water,

electricity, gas, etc,
(vi)
IN
TE
(i)
EG
(a)
Environmental restrictions and existing on-site risks
ground conditions, underground structures or water courses where this

might affect the safe use of plant, for example cranes, or the safety of
groundworks,
AL
(b)
arrangements for:
(a)

Page 95
IO
QCS 2014
(vii)
information about existing structures stability, structural form, fragile or

hazardous materials, anchorage points for fall arrest systems (particularly
where demolition is involved),
(viii) previous structural modifications, including weakening or strengthening of

the structure (particularly where demolition is involved),
(ix)
fire damage, ground shrinkage, movement or poor maintenance which may

have adversely affected the structure,
(x)
any difficulties relating to plant and equipment in the premises, such as

overhead gantries whose height restricts access,
(xi)
health and safety information contained in earlier design, construction or

as-built drawings, such as details of pre-stressed or post-tensioned
structures;
(xii)
Health hazards, including:
(xiii) asbestos, including results of surveys (particularly where demolition is

involved),
QCS 2014

Page 96
(xiv) existing storage of hazardous materials,
(xv)
contaminated land, including results of surveys,
(xvi) existing structures containing hazardous materials,

(xvii) health risks arising from clients activities.
5
Significant design and construction hazards

(a)
significant design assumptions and suggested work methods, sequences or other

control measures;
(b)
arrangements for co-ordination of ongoing design work and handling design

changes;
(c)
information on significant risks identified during design;
(d)
materials requiring particular precautions.
AL
The Health and Safety File
Description of its format and any conditions relating to its content.
The information needs to be in a form that is convenient, i.e. clear, concise and easily
understood, but it can be included in other documents, for example the specification,
providing the relevant health and safety issues are fully covered. Brief notes on as built
drawings are particularly useful, but should be checked in case significant alterations have
been carried out. Engineers will advise the client as to what is needed and arrange for
relevant information to be given to designers and contractors.
Clients are also required to tell contractors who they engage to carry out construction work
the minimum notice that they will be given before they are expected to start construction
work. This is to ensure that contractors have sufficient time to plan and prepare for
example mobilise their workforce and equipment, and make arrangements for welfare
facilities to be provided
IN
TE
AT
IO
Clients do not have to provide welfare facilities for construction workers, but if there are
particular constraints which make it difficult for facilities to be provided, the client should
co-operate with contractors and assist them with their arrangements.
EG
1.1.8.18 Welfare arrangements
1.1.8.19 Additional duties for clients

1
Refer to 1.1.8.9.
1.1.8.20 Appointment of the Engineer

1
The client must appoint a competent, adequately resourced engineer as soon as

practicable after initial design work or other preparations for construction work have
begun.
The engineer provides clients with a key project advisor in respect of construction health
and safety risk management matters. Their main purpose is to help clients to carry out
their duties; to co-ordinate health and safety aspects of the design work and to prepare
the health and safety file.
Early appointment is crucial for effective planning and establishing management

arrangements from the start. CDM requires the appointment to take place as soon as is
practicable after initial design work or other preparation for construction work has begun.
QCS 2014

Page 97
This allows the client to appraise their project needs and objectives, including the
business case and any possible constraints on development to enable them to decide
whether or not to proceed with the project before appointing the engineer. The engineer
needs to be in a position to be able to co-ordinate design work and advise on the
suitability and compatibility of designs, and therefore they should be appointed before
significant detailed design work begins. Significant detailed design work includes
preparation of the initial concept design and implementation of any strategic brief. As a
scheme moves into the detailed design stage, it becomes more difficult to make
fundamental changes that eliminate hazards and reduce risks associated with early
design decisions.
Proper consideration of the health and safety implications of the design for those who
build and maintain the structure will make a significant contribution to reducing its whole
life cost, and will make delivery to time, cost and quality more likely.
The engineer can be an individual or a company. Engineers can be appointed

independently of any other role on the project team, or they may combine this work with
another role, for example, project manager, designer or contractor. Where the role is
combined, it is crucial that the engineer has sufficient independence to carry out their
tasks effectively. The tasks can be shared out, but when this happens it is important to
make sure that all of the duties are discharged. On simple projects, one person should
be able to provide all of the support that clients need, but a team approach will be more
common for larger or more complicated projects because of the workload and skills
required.
1.1.8.21 Appointment of the Contractor
AT
IO
AL
Clients must appoint one competent, adequately resourced contractor to plan, manage
and monitor the construction work. The appointment needs to be in writing.
The contractor can be an organisation or an individual. A contractors key duties is to coordinate and manage the construction phase to ensure the health and safety of
everybody carrying out construction work, or who is affected by the wor k.
The contractor must be appointed as soon as the client knows enough about the project
to select a suitable contractor. Early appointment allows the contractor and other
specialists, for example maintenance contractors and facilities management experts to
make a substantial contribution to ensuring the building safety issues and maintainability
of the structure under construction. This helps to eliminate and reduce risks to health
and safety, and to avoid interruptions, delays and other problems, which can add
significantly to the costs of a project.
Early appointment is essential for the contractor to have sufficient time to develop an
adequate construction phase plan and to arrange for appropriate resources, including
welfare facilities, to be available when work commences on site. (Ensuring that welfare
facilities are provided when work starts on site is a specific duty of the contractor, but the
client also has a duty to make sure that the contractor has done so). Contractors should
be told as part of the pre-construction information the minimum amount of time which
they will be given for planning and preparation before the construction work is expected
to start on site.
There can only be one contractor (the main Contractor of construction works and having
authority and control of the construction site) at any one time. To ensure continuity,
clients should normally keep the same contractor for the whole project from site
clearance and preparation to final completion. However, there may be exceptions, for
example where:
EG
IN
TE
(a)
preliminary works, for example involving demolition or site preparation work,

where there is a substantial delay between site clearance and the start of new
QCS 2014

Page 98
construction work;
(b)
separate projects for different clients, for example for a building shell and
subsequent fitting-out work.
(c)
In these cases, any change in contractor should:
(d)
be clear to, and agreed by all those involved, particularly in relation to the timing of
the change;
(e)
be clearly recorded;
(f)
provide the practical authority to enable the contractor to discharge his duties.
1.1.8.22 Management arrangements

Clients must appoint a competent engineer who will assist them with the assessment of
the adequacy of the management arrangements made by others in the project team.
Having appointed a competent engineer, the client is entitled to rely on their advice
when making these judgements.
AL
IO
Before construction work begins clients must check to ensure that suitable welfare
facilities have been provided, and that the construction phase plan has been prepared
by the contractor. With the help of the engineer, clients must ensure that the plan is
project-specific and suitable. Example content of the construction phase plan is:
AT
1.1.8.23 Before the construction phase begins
1.1.8.24 Construction Phase (Health & Safety) Plan

When drawing up the construction phase plan, you should consider each of the
following topics. Information should be included in the plan where the topic is relevant to
the work proposed. The plan sets out how health and safety is to be managed during the
construction phase. The level of detail should be proportionate to the risks involved in
the project. Once the construction phase has begun, it is the responsibility of the
Contractor to update the Plan as per the development of the construction works.
Description of project
project description and programme details including any key dates;
(b)
details of client, engineer, designers, Contractor and other consultants;
(a)
(c)
EG
IN
TE
extent and location of existing records and plans that are relevant to health and
safety on site, including information about existing structures when appropriate.
Management of the work

(a)
management structure and responsibilities
(b)
health and safety goals for the project and arrangements for monitoring and
review of health and safety performance
(c)
arrangements for;
(i)
regular liaison between parties on site,
(ii)
consultation with the workforce,
(iii)
the exchange of design information between the client, designers, Engineer and
contractors on site,
(iv)
handling design changes during the project,
(v)
the selection and control of contractors,
QCS 2014

Page 99
(vi)
the exchange of health and safety information between contractors,
(vii)
site security,
(viii)
site induction,
(ix)
on site training,
(x)
welfare facilities and first aid,
(xi)
the reporting and investigation of accidents and incidents including near misses,
(xii)
the production and approval of risk assessments and written systems of work;
(d)
site rules (including drug and alcohol policy);
(e)
fire and emergency procedures.
(f)
Arrangements for controlling significant site risks
(a)
Safety risks, including:

delivery and removal of materials (including waste) and work equipment taking
account of any risks to the public, for example during access to or egress from
the site,
(ii)
dealing with services - water, electricity and gas, including overhead power lines
and temporary electrical installations,
(iii)
accommodating adjacent land use,
(iv)
stability of structures whilst carrying out construction work, including temporary

structures and existing unstable structures,
(v)
preventing falls,
(vi)
work with or near fragile materials,
(vii)
control of lifting operations,
(viii)
the maintenance of plant and equipment,
(ix)
work on excavations and work where there are poor ground conditions,
(x)
work on wells, underground earthworks and tunnels,
IO
AT
TE
IN
EG
(xi)
AL
(i)
work involving diving,
(xii)
work on or near water where there is a risk of drowning,
(xiii)
work in a caisson or compressed air working,
(xiv) work involving explosives,

(xv)
traffic routes and segregation of vehicles and pedestrians,
(xvi) storage of materials (particularly hazardous materials) and work equipment,

(xvii) any other significant safety risks;
(b)
health risks, including:

(i)
the removal of asbestos,
(ii)
dealing with contaminated land,
(iii)
manual handling,
(iv)
use of hazardous substances, particularly where there is a need for health

monitoring,
(v)
reducing noise and vibration,
(vi)
work with ionising radiation,
(vii)
exposure to UV radiation (from the sun),
QCS 2014

Page 100
(viii) any other significant health risks.
The health and safety file

(a)
layout and format;
(b)
arrangements for the collection and gathering of information;
(c)
storage of information.
Once the construction phase has begun, neither clients nor engineers have a duty to
check that the plan is updated; this is the responsibility of the contractor.
1.1.8.25 Completion and handover (all projects)

One of the most important stages in a project is when it nears completion and is handed
over to the client. It is rare for all construction work to be completed before handover.
Sometimes clients, in their eagerness to have things up and running, assume control
when a great deal of construction work remains.
Risks to employees and others not engaged in construction work can increase
substantially as they visit the site or spend more time there. The risks to the construction
workers can also increase, due to the presence and work of others not directly engaged
or experienced in construction work.
To minimise such risks, the management of this phase needs to be considered well in
advance to address:
the nature, scope and duration of any finishing-off work;
(b)
how this work will be managed and by whom;
(c)
how the site will be split up, and access controlled, to safeguard construction
workers as well as clients employees and/or members of the public.
TE
(a)
IN
For simple projects these arrangements can be discussed and agreed between the
various parties. In more complex situations, the arrangements should be recorded as
part of the construction phase plan.
EG
AT
IO
AL
1.1.8.26 What clients dont have to do

Clients are not required or expected to:
(a)
plan or manage construction projects themselves; or
(b)
specify how work must be done, for example requiring a structure to be

demolished by hand. Indeed they should not do so unless they have the expertise
to assess the various options and risks involved. (They should, of course, point
out particular risks that would inform this decision.)
(c)
provide welfare facilities for those carrying out construction work (though they
should co-operate with the contractor to assist with his arrangements);
(d)
visit the site (to supervise or check construction work standards) but it is good
practice for the client to appoint someone to ensure the contents of the
Construction Phase (H&S) Plan is being complied with. This may be in the form of
an appointed H&S advisor / consultant and / or the Engineer which may assist in
the resolution of any onsite design issues.
QCS 2014

Page 101
1.1.8.27 The Engineer

Appointment of an Engineer
1
The role of engineer may be filled by an individual, an organisation or by a professional

practice such as an architect's practice or a specialist consultancy.
The more complex the project and hence the more construction disciplines involved, the less
likely it is that the role of engineer can be satisfactorily carried out by a single person.
The selection of a competent engineer should be based upon the complexity of the work and
the range of knowledge required.
The duties of the engineer are seen to be to:
AL
(ii)
the start of the construction phase as outlined previously in the client's duties
taking reasonable steps to ensure that the necessary arrangements are made
for managing health and safety
AT
IO
ensure that suitable arrangements are made and implemented for the co-ordination of
health and safety measures during the planning and preparation phases of the project
with regard to:
co-operation and co-ordination between all parties working on the project
(ii)
the implementation of the general principles of prevention
(i)
liaise with the contractor with regard to:

(i)
the information required for the health and safety file
(ii)
the information needed by the contractor for the preparation of the health and
safety plan
(iii)
any design developments which may have an impact on the planning and
management of the work
TE
(c)
(i)
IN
(b)
give suitable and sufficient advice and assistance to enable the client to comply with
the client's duties under these Regulations, in particular with regard to:
EG
(a)
take all reasonable steps to identify and collect pre-construction information and
promptly provide it, as necessary, to designers and contractors
(e)
take all reasonable steps to ensure that designers comply with their duties
(f)
(g)
(d)
take all reasonable steps to ensure the co-operation between designers and the
contractor with regard to designs and any changes in design
prepare the health and safety file and pass the file to the client at the end of the
construction phase
The purpose of the engineer is to provide the client with key project information about
construction health and safety risk-management matters.
They should assist and advise the client on:

(a)
the appointment of competent contractors
(b)
the adequacy of the arrangements for managing health and safety
(c)
ensuring proper co-ordination of the health and safety aspects of the design process
(d)
facilitating good communication and co-operation between all project team members
(e)
preparing the health and safety file,
QCS 2014

Page 102
Early involvement of the engineer with the client and designers should significantly contribute
to the reduction of risk to construction workers and to anyone who has to subsequently work
on the completed structure.
The role demands a comprehensive knowledge of the design process and construction
methods, plus a thorough understanding of construction health, safety and welfare issues.
It is suggested that if the position is filled by a competent person or organisation who/which

possesses the necessary range of knowledge, experience and resources, compliance with
the rest of these Regulations should flow relatively smoothly.
10
These Regulations require that the role of the engineer must be filled at all times by a
competent person. It has, therefore, to be accepted that the appointment of the engineer can
be terminated by the client if the duties are not being carried out satisfactorily, for example:
the engineer has not generally displayed the required level of competence
(b)
the job has reached a stage where it involves construction activities outside the scope
of the experience of the current engineer and a pre-planned handover to another
engineer takes place. For example, the original engineer is appointed for the ground
works and structural stage of a project, but another appointment is made for the fitting
out and commissioning stages.
IO
AL
(a)
The role of an engineer is to provide the client with a key project advisor in respect of
construction health and safety risk management matters. They should assist and advise
the client on appointment of competent contractors and the adequacy of management
arrangements; ensure proper co-ordination of the health and safety aspects of the
design process; facilitate good communication and co-operation between project team
members and prepare the health and safety file.
12
Through early involvement with clients and designers, an engineer can make a
significant contribution to reducing risks to workers during construction, and to
contractors and end users who work on or in the structure after construction.
IN
TE
AT
11
Appointing the Engineer

Refer to 1.1.8.20.
EG
13
1.1.8.28 What Engineers should do

An engineer should:
(a)
give suitable and sufficient advice and assistance to clients in order to help them
to comply with their duties, in particular:
(i)
the duty to appoint competent designers and contractors; and
(ii)
the duty to ensure that adequate arrangements are in place for managing
the project;
(b)
co-ordinate design work, planning and other preparation for construction where
relevant to health and safety;
(c)
identify and ensure collection of the pre-construction information and advise the
client if surveys need to be commissioned to fill significant gaps;
(d)
promptly provide in a convenient form to those involved with the design of the
structure; and to every contractor (including the contractor) who may
(e)
be or has been appointed by the client, such parts of the pre-construction

information which are relevant to each;
(f)
manage the flow of health and safety information between clients, designers
QCS 2014

Page 103
(g)
and contractors;
(h)
advise the client on the suitability of the initial construction phase plan and the
arrangements made to ensure that welfare facilities are on site from the start;
(i)
produce or update a relevant, user friendly, health and safety file suitable for
future use at the end of the construction phase.
Advising the client on competency of designers and contractors

2
Clients are responsible for appointing competent and adequately resourced designers
and contractors. A competent engineer will have the knowledge and expertise to assist
clients with these assessments.
Managing information flow
Co-operation and co-ordination can only be achieved if there is good communication
between all parties involved in a particular aspect of a project. During planning stages
the engineer needs to make sure that there are appropriate systems in place to
encourage communication and the sharing of relevant information, and engineers
should manage the flow of information between the team members. They may need to
convene special meetings if they are not satisfied there is sufficient co-operation
between designers or with other team members, or if adequate regard is not being given
to health and safety. It is, however, better for these issues to be addressed in routine
project meetings.
AT
IO
AL
Clients must provide designers and contractors who may be bidding for the work (or who
they intend to engage), with the project-specific health and safety information needed to
identify hazards and risks associated with the design and construction work. (The preconstruction information). Clients are required to provide this information to the
engineer. The engineer should check the information to ensure that it is complete,
advise the client if there are any significant gaps or defects, and ensure these are filled
by commissioning surveys or by making other reasonable enquiries. The engineer
should then provide designers or contractors who may be bidding for, or preparing to
carry out construction work on site, with such parts of the pre-construction information
that are relevant to each.
EG
IN
TE
Providing information
Advising the client on adequacy of management arrangements

5
Clients must make sure that there are suitable (project-specific) arrangements for
managing each project so that the work can be carried out safely and without risk to
health. Most clients, particularly those who only occasionally commission construction
work, will not be experts in the construction process. These Regulations do not require
clients to take an active role in managing the work, but they do require clients to take
reasonable steps to ensure that suitable management arrangements are in place
throughout the life of the project.
The engineer should assist with the development of these arrangements, and should
advise clients on whether or not the arrangements are adequate. They should assist the
client with decisions about how much time a contractor will need to prepare before
construction work begins. When advising and assisting the client, the following issues
should be considered.
(a)
Is the client aware of their duties and do they understand what is expected of
them?
(b)
Has the client prepared relevant information about the site?
(c)
Have the necessary appointments been made?

Page 104
(d)
Is there an established project team who meet regularly to discuss and coordinate activities in relation to the project?
(e)
Are project team members clear about their roles and responsibilities?
(f)
Are there arrangements in place for co-ordinating design work and reviewing the
design to ensure that designers duties are being addressed?
(g)
Are there arrangements in place for dealing with late changes to the design, and
for co-operating with contractors, so that problems are shared?
(h)
Has the contractor been given enough time to plan and prepare for the work, and
mobilise for the start of the construction phase?
(i)
Has the contractor made arrangements for providing welfare facilities on site from
the outset, and have they prepared a construction phase plan that addresses the
main risks during the early stages of construction?
(j)
Are there suitable arrangements for developing the plan to cover risks that arise
as the work progresses?
(k)
Has the format for the health and safety file been agreed, and are arrangements
in place for collecting the information which it will contain?
(l)
Has the contractor put in place suitable arrangements for consulting with workers
on site; for carrying out site induction and for ensuring that workers are adequately
trained and supervised?
Not all of these questions will need answers at the start of the project, and the
arrangements will need to evolve as the project develops. The key thing is to plan ahead
so that arrangements are in place before the risks that need managing materialise on
site.
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
TE
1.1.8.29 Co-ordinating design work: Design reviews

The engineers responsibility in respect of design work only extends to health and safety
aspects of the design checking that the requirements of the designers duties have
been addressed and that the different design elements work together without causing
danger. This is best achieved through design reviews during which health and safety
issues are addressed alongside practicality and cost in a wider review of the designs
building safety issues, maintainability and usability.
When considering building safety issues, meetings should where possible include the
contractor(s) so that difficulties associated with construction can be discussed and
solutions agreed before the work begins. When discussing usability and maintainability,
involving the client or those who will be responsible for operating the building or
structure will mean that proper consideration can be given to the health and safety of
those who will maintain and use the structure once it has been completed. Doing this
during the design stage will result in significant cost savings for the client, as rectifying
mistakes after the structure has been built is always expensive.
As part of design reviews, engineers need to ensure that the designers have identified a
safe method for construction for unusual or complex designs, and that the designs
include the information needed by other designers and contractors to allow them to work
safely and without risk to health. This information needs to be clear and concise.
The timing of the reviews also needs careful consideration. Design needs to be far
enough developed for people to have a clear view of what is in mind, but not so far
developed that it is too late to modify the proposals, if necessary. Design is an iterative
process so it may need review at several different stages. The effort devoted to design
review should be in proportion to the risks and complexity.
EG
IN
QCS 2014

Page 105
Engineers who identify important health and safety issues that have not been addressed
in the design must draw them to the attention of the designer.
1.1.8.30 The Engineer and the construction phase

Design often continues throughout a project and engineers have a continuing role during
the construction phase ensuring that designers, including those engaged by a
contractor and contractors who carry out design work themselves, co-operate with each
other, and designs meet the requirements of these Regulations. Where design changes
and decisions during the construction phase have significant health and safety
implications, engineers should liaise with the contractor about any implications for the
construction phase plan.
The design of temporary works, such as falsework, formwork and scaffolding, falls within
the scope of CDM. Engineers have to take reasonable steps to ensure co-operation
between permanent and temporary works designers, in particular to ensure that
arrangements are in place to ensure that designs are compatible and that the
permanent works can support any loadings from temporary works.
Engineers need to pay particular attention to late designs or late change s to designs.
Examples would be revisions on architects instructions, when clients require changes or
when unforeseen problems are encountered on site. The engineer should make sure
that there are arrangements in place to ensure that such changes do not result in
significantly increased risks on site.
AT
IO
AL
Engineers dont have to:
approve the appointment of designers, contractors, although they normally advise

clients about competence and resources;
(b)
approve or check designs, although they have to be satisfied that the design
process addresses the need to eliminate hazards and control risks;
(c)
approve the contractors construction phase plan, although they have to be able to
advise clients on its adequacy at the start of construction;
(d)
supervise the contractors implementation of the construction phase plan - this is

the responsibility of the contractor; or
(e)
EG
IN
TE
(a)
What Engineers dont have to do
supervise or monitor construction work this is the responsibility of the contractor.
1.1.8.31 The health and safety file

1
Engineers must prepare a suitable health and safety file.

It is important that they
discuss this with the client before work starts on site so that the format can be agreed,
along with who should provide what information and when. This requires the cooperation of several duty holders, so engineers need to make sure that designers and
contractors know, early on in the project, what information they will need to provide
The health and safety file (the file) is a source of information that will help to reduce the
risks and costs involved in future construction work, including cleaning, maintenance,
alterations, refurbishment and demolition. Clients therefore need to ensure that the file is
prepared and kept available for inspection in the event of such work. It is a key part of
the information, which the client, or the clients successor, must pass on to anyone
preparing or carrying out work to which CDM applies.
Clients may need to provide incentives or include requirements in contracts to ensure

that the information is given to the engineer immediately after relevant design or
QCS 2014

Page 106
construction work is completed. At the end of a project the engineer should give the
completed file to the client for safekeeping.
The contents of the health and safety file
When putting together the health and safety file, you should consider including
information about each of the following where they are relevant to the health and safety
of any future construction work. The level of detail should allow the likely risks to be
identified and addressed by those carrying out the work:
a brief description of the work carried out;
(b)
any residual hazards which remain and how they have been dealt with (for
example surveys or other information concerning asbestos; contaminated land;
water bearing strata; buried services etc);
(c)
key structural principles (for example, bracing, sources of substantial stored

energy including pre- or post-tensioned members) and safe working loads for
floors and roofs, particularly where these may preclude placing scaffolding or
heavy machinery there;
(d)
hazardous materials used (for example lead paint; pesticides; special coatings
which should not be burnt off etc);
(e)
information regarding the removal or dismantling of installed plant and equipment

(for example any special arrangements for lifting, order or other special
instructions for dismantling etc);
(f)
health and safety information about equipment provided for cleaning or

maintaining the structure;
(g)
the nature, location and markings of significant services, including underground

cables; gas supply equipment; fire-fighting services etc;
(h)
information and as-built drawings of the structure, its plant and equipment (for
example, the means of safe access to and from service voids, fire doors and
compartmentalisation etc).
AL
(a)
AT
TE
IN
EG
The file should be useful to:

(a)
clients, who have a duty to provide information about their premises to those who
carry out work there;
(b)
designers during the development of further designs or alterations;
(c)
(d)
IO
engineers preparing for construction work;

contractors and sub-contractors preparing to carry out or manage such work.
The file should form a key part of the information that the client, or the clients
successor, is required to provide for future construction projects. The file should therefore
be kept up to date after any relevant work or surveys.
The scope, structure and format for the file should be agreed between the client and
engineer at the start of a project. There can be a separate file for each structure, one for
an entire project or site, or one for a group of related structures.
What you must do
Clients, designers, contractors, other sub-contractors and engineers all have duties in
respect of the health and safety file:
(a)
Engineers must prepare, review, amend or add to the file as the project
progresses, and give it to the client at the end of project;
QCS 2014

Page 107
(b)
clients, designers, contractors and other sub-contractors must supply the

information necessary for compiling or updating the file;
(c)
clients must keep the file to assist with future construction work; and
(d)
everyone providing information should make sure that it is accurate, and provided
promptly.
The client should make sure that the engineer compiles the file. In some cases, for
example design and build contracts, it is more practical for the contractor to obtain the
information needed for the file from the specialist contractors. In these circumstances
the contractor can assemble the information and give it to the engineer as the work is
completed.
10
The file does not need to include things that will be of no help when planning future
construction work, for example:
the pre-construction information, or construction phase health and safety plan
(b)
construction phase risk assessments, written systems of work and COSHH

assessments
(c)
details about the normal operation of the completed structure
(d)
construction phase accident statistics
(e)
details of all the contractors and designers involved in the project (though it may be
useful to include details of the contractor and engineer)
(f)
contractual documents
AT
IO
AL
(a)
information about structures, or parts of structures, that have been demolished

unless there are any implications for remaining or future structures, e.g. voids
(ii)
information in other documents, but relevant cross-references should be

included.
TE
(i)
IN
Storing the file after the work is complete

To be useful the file needs to be kept up to date, and retained for as long as it is relevant
normally the lifetime of the structure. It may be kept electronically (with suitable
backup arrangements), on paper, on film, or any other durable form.
12
Where clients dispose of their entire interest in a structure, they should pass the file to
the new owners and ensure that they are aware of the nature and purpose of the file.
Where they sell part of a structure, any relevant information in the file should be passed
or copied to the new owner.
EG
11
1.1.8.32 Designers
1
Designs develop from initial concepts through to a detailed specification, often involving
different teams and people at various stages. At each stage, designers from all disciplines
can make a significant contribution by identifying and eliminating hazards, and reducing
likely risks from hazards where elimination is not possible.
Designers earliest decisions fundamentally affect the health and safety of construction
work. These decisions influence later design choices, and considerable work may be
required if it is necessary to unravel earlier decisions. It is therefore vital to address
health and safety from the very start.
Designers have duties regardless of whether the client is a domestic or non-domestic Client.
QCS 2014

Page 108
Designer's duties
1
Designers are in a unique position at an early stage of a project to reduce the potential risks
to health and safety that could arise during the construction phase or at a later stage such as
during maintenance of the completed structure.
Designers have duties regardless of whether the client is at work or is a domestic client.
No designer shall commence work in relation to a project unless any client for the project is
aware of his duties under these Regulations.
Every designer shall in preparing or modifying a design avoid foreseeable risks to the health
and safety of any person
(b)
liable to be affected by such construction work;
(c)
cleaning any window or any transparent or translucent wall, ceiling or roof in or on a

structure;
(d)
maintaining the permanent fixtures and fittings of a structure; or
(e)
using a structure designed as a place of work.
IO
AT
In discharging their duties, the designer shall
AL
carrying out construction work;
(a)
eliminate hazards which may give rise to risks; and
(b)
reduce risks from any remaining hazards,
(a)
and in so doing shall give collective measures priority over individual measures
The duties on designers are:
TE
no design work should be carried out unless the client is aware of their duties under
these Regulations.
(b)
not carry out detailed design work until an Engineer has been appointed.
(c)
designers must ensure so far as is reasonably practicable that their designs avoid
foreseeable health and safety risks to anyone who is:
carrying out the construction work
(i)
EG
IN
(a)
(ii)
liable to be affected by the construction work
(iii)
cleaning any window or other transparent or translucent surfaces
(iv)
maintaining the permanent fixtures and fittings
(v)
using the structure as a place of work.
It will include aspects of design such as positioning a vehicle loading bay to ensure that
delivery vehicles are routed safely away from pedestrians. The intention is that all designers
consider the implications of their designs with regard to the structures being built and
maintained reasonably safely.
In discharging their duties, designers:

(a)
must so far as is reasonably practicable:
(b)
eliminate hazards that give rise to risks, and
(c)
reduce the risk from any hazards that remain
(d)
give collective protection measures priority over individual protective measures.
QCS 2014

Page 109
An example of hazard elimination is to design out the use of fragile roofing materials or the
installation of fragile roof-lights in an otherwise load-bearing roof.
11
Reducing risk can be achieved by reducing the likelihood of harm occurring, the severity of
any incident that does occur, the number of persons exposed to the harm and the frequency
or duration of the exposure to harm.
12
Designers must ensure that any structure designed for use as a workplace conforms to the
requirements latest edition of QCS with regard to the design and the materials used.
13
In designing any structure for use as a workplace the designer shall ensure that the design
conforms to the requirements latest edition of QCS with regard to the design and the
materials used.
14
Designers must take all reasonable steps to provide sufficient information about the aspects
of the design or its construction or maintenance to adequately assist the following to comply
with their duties:
AL
10
the client;
(b)
the Engineer;
(c)
other designers;
(d)
contractors;
(e)
Sub-contractors;
(f)
Other consultant/interfacing organisations identified as relevant
AT
IO
(a)
Historically, risks were created at the design stage as a result of an attitude by some
designers that it 'is someone else's problem to build/clean/maintain' the structure once it has
been designed. CDM is emphatically not trying to stifle creative design, but merely ensuring
that the practicalities of carrying out any of the above activities are considered during the
design process.
16
Having completed their design, designers are obliged to pass on information about the risks
that they have not been able to design out. For example, having designed an external
overhead pipe run for a factory, the engineer consults the client's maintenance team about
the need for access. The designer establishes that the maintenance team will only need to
access the pipe-run every 4 years and that they can quite safely use a scissor lift for the
task.
17
The designer then simply passes on the information as to how the risk of working at height
during maintenance can be carried out in a safe manner.
18
Designers responsibilities extend beyond the construction phase of a project. They also
need to consider the health and safety of those who will maintain, repair, clean, refurbish
and eventually remove or demolish all or part of a structure as well as the health and
safety of users of workplaces. For most designers, building safety issue considerations
and ensuring that the structure can be easily maintained and repaired will be part of their
normal work, and thinking about the health and safety of those who do this work should
not be an onerous duty. Failure to address these issues adequately at the design stage
will usually increase running costs, because clients will then be faced with more costly
solutions when repairs and maintenance become necessary.
19
Where significant risks remain when they have done what they can, designers should
provide information with the design to ensure that the engineer, other designers and
contractors are aware of these risks and can take account of them.
20
In addition to the duties outlined above designers should:
EG
IN
TE
15
QCS 2014

Page 110
(a)
ensure that the client has appointed an Engineer;
(b)
ensure that they do not start design work other than initial design work unless
an Engineer has been appointed;
(c)
co-operate with the Engineer, Contractor and with any other designers or
contractors as necessary for each of them to comply with their duties. This
includes providing any information needed for the pre-construction information
or health and safety file.
Early appointment of the Engineer is crucial for effective planning and establishing
management arrangements from the start. These regulations require the appointment to
take place as soon as is practicable after initial design work or other preparation for
construction work has begun.
22
Once the Engineer has been appointed, the designer will need to co-operate with them
and provide the information which the Engineer needs to comply with their duties.
AL
21
IO
Designers are those who have a trade or a business which involves them in:
preparing designs for construction work, including variations. This includes
preparing drawings, design details, specifications, bills of quantities and the
specification (or prohibition) of articles and substances, as well as all the related
analysis, calculations, and preparatory work; or
(b)
arranging for their employees or other people under their control to prepare
designs relating to a structure or part of a structure.
AT
(a)
23
Who are designers?
It does not matter whether the design is recorded (for example on paper or a computer)
or not (for example it is only communicated orally).
25
Designers therefore include:
IN
TE
24
architects, civil and structural engineers, building surveyors, landscape architects,

other consultants, manufacturers and design practices (of whatever discipline)
contributing to, or having overall responsibility for, any part of the design, for
example drainage engineers designing the drainage for a new development;
(d)
anyone who specifies or alters a design, or who specifies the use of a particular
method of work or material, such as a design manager, quantity surveyor who
insists on specific material or a client who stipulates a particular layout or material
for a new structure;
EG
(c)
(e)
building service designers, engineering practices or others designing plant which

forms part of the permanent structure (including lifts, heating, ventilation and
electrical systems), for example a specialist provider of permanent fire
extinguishing installations;
(f)
those purchasing materials where the choice has been left open, for example
those purchasing building blocks and so deciding the weights that bricklayers
must handle;
(g)
contractors carrying out design work as part of their contribution to a project, such
as an engineering contractor providing design, procurement and construction
management services;
(h)
temporary works engineers, including those designing auxiliary structures, such

as formwork, falsework, faade retention schemes, scaffolding, and sheet piling;
(i)
interior designers who also develop the design;
QCS 2014
(j)
26

Page 111
those determining how buildings and structures are altered, for example during
refurbishment, where this has the potential for partial or complete collapse.
Manufacturers supplying standardised products that can be used in any project are not
designers under CDM. The person who selects the product is a designer and must take
account of health and safety issues arising from its use. If a product is purpose-made for
a project, the person who prepares the specification is a designer under CDM, and so is
the manufacturer who develops the detailed design.
What designers should do for all projects
make sure that they are competent and adequately resourced to address the
health and safety issues likely to be involved in the design;
(b)
check that clients are aware of their duties;
(c)
When carrying out design work, avoid foreseeable risks to those involved in the
construction and future use of the structure, and in doing so, they should eliminate
hazards (so far as is reasonably practicable, taking account of other design
considerations) and reduce risk associated with those hazards which remain;
(d)
provide adequate information about any significant risks associated with the
design;
(e)
co-ordinate their work with that of others in order to improve the way in which risks
are managed and controlled.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
In carrying out these duties, designers need to consider the hazards and risks to those
who:
carry out construction work including demolition;
(b)
clean any window or transparent or translucent wall, ceiling or roof in or on a

structure or maintain the permanent fixtures and fittings;
(c)
use a structure designed as a place of work;
(d)
may be affected by such work, for example customers or the general public.
TE
(a)
IN
28
Designers should:
EG
27
29
When do these duties apply?

These duties apply whenever designs are prepared which may be used in construction
work in Qatar. This includes concept design and relevant work carried out as part of
feasibility studies.
Making clients aware of their responsibilities
30
Designers are often the first point of contact for a client, and CDM requires them to
check that clients are aware of their duties under these Regulations
Preparing a design
31
Designers have to weigh many factors as they prepare their designs. Health and safety
considerations have to be weighed alongside other considerations, including cost,
fitness for purpose, aesthetics, building safety issues, maintainability and environmental
impact. CDM allows designers to take due account of other relevant design
considerations. These Regulations do not prescribe design outcomes, but they do
require designers to weigh the various factors and reach reasoned, professional
decisions.
QCS 2014

Page 112
Designers are required to avoid foreseeable risks so far as is reasonably practicable, taking
due account of other relevant design considerations. The greater the risk, the greater the
weight that must be given to eliminating or reducing it. Designers are not expected to
consider or address risks which cannot be foreseen, and these Regulations do not
require zero risk designs because this is simply impossible. However, designers must
not produce designs that cannot be constructed, maintained, used or demolished in
reasonable safety.
33
Designers should critically assess their design proposals at an early stage, and then
throughout the design process, to ensure that health and safety issues are identified,
integrated into the overall design process and addressed as they go along. It is pointless
to complete the design first, then try to address the risks which the design has
introduced. By then, all of the key decisions are likely to have been taken and no one
will be willing to make any changes because of the time and cost involved.
34
The first thing that designers need to do is eliminate hazards (things with a potential to
cause harm) from their designs so far as is reasonably practicable, taking account of
other design considerations. Examples would be to design out things like fragile roofing
materials or products; eliminating roof lights from areas where roof access is needed;
positioning plant which needs regular maintenance at ground level so there is no need
for work at height or providing permanent safe access for work at height. Eliminating
hazards removes the associated risk, and is therefore the best option and should always
be the first choice.
35
It is not always reasonably practicable to eliminate hazards, and where this is the case
consideration should be given to incorporating design solutions which reduce the overall
risk to an acceptable level. This can be done by reducing the:
AT
IO
AL
32
likelihood of harm (injury or adverse health effect);
(b)
potential severity of the harm;
(c)
number of people exposed to the harm; and
(d)
frequency or duration of exposure to harm.
IN
TE
(a)
The amount of effort put into eliminating hazards and reducing risks should depend on
the degree of risk. There is little point in spending a lot of money, time and trouble on
low risk issues. There is also little to be gained by detailed comparison of construction
techniques that present similar risks, for example whether to specify a steel frame or
concrete portal building. The focus should be on issues that are known to have the
potential to cause significant harm, and where there are known solutions that reduce the
risks to everyone exposed.
37
Designers also need to take account of other relevant health and safety requirements
when carrying out design work. Where the structure will be used as a workplace, (for
example factories, offices, schools, hospitals and any other structures which can be a
place of work for end users including maintainers) they need to take account of the
provisions of the latest version for QCS requirements.
EG
36
38
Designers must provide information that other project team members are likely to need
to identify and manage the remaining risks. This should be project specific, and
concentrate on significant risks which may not be obvious to those who use the
design. For example, providing generic risk information about the prevention of falls is
pointless, because competent contractors will already know what needs to be done, but
if the design gives rise to a specific and unusual fall risk which may not be obvious to
contractors, designers should provide information about this risk.
39
Designers also need to provide information about aspects of the design that could
QCS 2014

Page 113
create significant risks during future construction work or maintenance. If in doubt about
the level of information needed, the best way to find out is to ask those who will use it.
(a)
not likely to be obvious to a competent contractor or other designers;
(b)
unusual; or
(c)
likely to be difficult to manage effectively.
Information should be brief, clear, precise, and in a form suitable for the users. This can
be achieved using:
notes on drawings this is preferred, since the notes will then be immediately
available to those carrying out the work. They can refer to other documents if
more detail is needed, and be annotated to keep them up to date;
(b)
written information provided with the design - this should be project specific, and
should only contain information which will be useful to those constructing or
maintaining the structure;
(c)
suggested construction sequences showing how the design could be erected

safely, where this is not obvious, for example suggested sequences for putting up
pre-cast panel concrete structures. Contractors may then adopt this method or
develop their own approach.
AL
(a)
It is not always possible to provide all the information at the same time, particularly when
design work is continuing whilst construction work is underway. In these circumstances
information should be released as the design develops, but construction work should not
be allowed to proceed unless all the information necessary for the work to be carried out
safely has been provided.
TE
42
AT
IO
41
Significant risks are not necessarily those that involve the greatest risks, but those,
including health risks that are:
40
IN
Co-operation
Designers must co-operate with the client, and other designers and contractors,
including those designing temporary works. This is to ensure that incompatibilities
between designs are identified and resolved as early as possible, and that the right
information is provided in the pre-construction information.
44
For smaller projects where most of the work is done by a single designer, this can be
achieved through discussion with those who use or are affected by the design. For
larger projects or those involving significant risks, a more managed approach will be
necessary.
45
Co-operation can be encouraged by:
46
EG
43
(a)
setting up an integrated team involving designers and contractor.
(b)
the appointment of a lead designer, where many designers are involved.
(c)
agreeing a common approach to risk reduction during design;
(d)
regular meetings of all the design team (including the engineer) with contractors,
and others;
(e)
regular reviews of developing designs;
(f)
site visits, through which designers can gain a direct insight into how the risks are
managed in practice.
Regular reviews of the design involving all members of the design team are particularly
important in making sure that proper consideration is given to building safety issues,
QCS 2014

Page 114
usability and maintainability. When considering building safety issues, meetings should
include the contractor so that difficulties associated with construction can be discussed
and solutions agreed before the work begins. When discussing usability and
maintainability, involving the client or those who will be responsible for operating the
building or structure will mean that proper consideration can be given to the health and
safety of those who will maintain and use the structure once it has been completed.
Doing this during the design stage will result in significant cost savings for the client, as
rectifying mistakes after the structure has been built is always expensive.
What designers dont have to do
Under CDM, designers dont have to:
take into account or provide information about unforeseeable hazards and risks;
(b)
design for possible future uses of structures that cannot reasonably be anticipated
from their design brief;
(c)
specify construction methods, except where the design assumes or requires a

particular construction or erection sequence, or where a competent contractor
might need such information;
(d)
exercise any health and safety management function over contractors or others;
or
(e)
worry about trivial risks.
IO
AL
(a)
AT
47
Designers are not required to keep records of the process through which they achieve a
safe design, but it can be useful to record why certain key decisions were made. Brief
records of the points considered, the conclusions reached, and the basis for those
conclusions, can be very helpful when designs are passed from one designer to
another. This will reduce the likelihood of important decisions being reversed by those
who may not fully understand the implications of doing so.
49
Too much paperwork is as bad as too little, because the useless hides the necessary.
Large volumes of paperwork listing generic hazards and risks, most of which are well
known to contractors and others who use the design are positively harmful, and suggest
a lack of competence on the part of the designer.
EG
IN
TE
48
1.1.8.33 The Contractor

Contractor
1
Under these Regulations, the duties of the contractor are to:

(a)
plan, manage and monitor construction work to ensure so far as is reasonably

practicable that it is carried out without risks to health and safety, including ensuring:
(i)
that there is adequate co-operation and co-ordination between all parties

involved in the project
(ii)
that the general principles of prevention are applied
(b)
liaise with the engineer with regard to ensuring the co-operation between designers
during the construction phase
(c)
ensure that adequate welfare facilities are provided in accordance with Appendix 1
(d)
where necessary in the interests of health and safety, draw up site rules which are
appropriate to the site and the activities that will be carried out on it
(e)
give reasonable directions to sub- contractors to enable the contractor to fulfil their
duties under these Regulations
(f)
ensure that all sub-contractors are informed of the minimum amount of time that will
QCS 2014

Page 115
be allowed to them for planning and preparation, before their construction work starts
(g)
where necessary, consult with sub-contractors before finalising the parts of the
construction phase plan that are relevant to the work to be undertaken by each subcontractor
(h)
ensure that before each sub-contractor's work begins, the sub-contractor is given
sufficient time to access the parts of the health and safety plan that are relevant to the
sub-contractor's work and that the relevant parts of the plan contain sufficient detail for
the sub-contractor's needs
(i)
ensure that before each contractor's work begins, the contractor is given sufficient
time to enable them to prepare such information as they need with regard to:
(i)
the prompt provision of welfare facilities
(ii)
carrying out their work without risks to health and safety so far as is reasonably
practicable
identify to each sub-contractor the information needed by the engineer for the health
and safety file and to ensure that the information is promptly provided
(k)
take reasonable steps to prevent unauthorised access to the site
(l)
take all reasonable steps to ensure that all workers are provided with a suitable site
induction and other information and training as may be necessary
IO
AL
(j)
There is an emphasis on trying to keep documentation to a minimum. This is based on the

idea that a competent workforce only needs to be told about site-specific risks and working
practices.
While these requirements might seem onerous they are all principles of good management
of health, safety and welfare and many companies have been implementing them for a long
time.
The avoidance of accidents and the prevention of ill health by the use of good management
techniques have proven to result in significant benefits, not least to the 'bottom line'.
Good management of health and safety on site is crucial to the successful delivery of a
construction project. The key duty of contractors is to properly plan, manage and coordinate work during the construction phase in order to ensure that the risks are properly
controlled. Contractors must also comply with the duties placed on all contractors under
these Regulations.
This allows the management of health and safety to be incorporated into the wider
management of project delivery. This is good business practice as well as being helpful
for health and safety purposes.
EG
IN
TE
AT
Co-operation and co-ordination

7
Good co-operation and co-ordination of work between all of the parties involved in a
project is essential if risks are to be identified early on and properly controlled.
Contractors should take the lead and actively encourage co-operation and co-ordination
between sub-contractors from an early stage. A team approach involving the client,
designers, contractors and even manufacturers who work closely together will often
produce the best results. This allows the client, designers, contractors and facilities
management experts, together, to identify the best solution for the clients needs, taking
account of the practicalities of construction work, maintenance and use. Even on
projects where it is not practical to formally establish an integrated team, the client,
designer, contractors and others involved in the project still need to work together.
If there are other projects on the same or neighbouring sites then the co-operation and
QCS 2014

Page 116
co-ordination needs to extend to those involved with such projects. If this need can be
identified early on, the risks that one project may cause for the other can also be
identified and addressed in the early stages of project planning. If potential problems are
not identified until the actual work has started they can be much more difficult to
address.
9
Good, timely communication is essential to co-operation and co-ordination of activities.

Information about risks and precautions needs to be shared sensibly (i.e. relevant
information, not everything) when it is needed to plan and manage work. Drawings can
be used to highlight hazards or unusual work sequences identified by designers, with
advice on where to find more information, if required. Induction training and toolbox talks
help to ensure workers understand the risks and precautions, and are a good
opportunity to inform workers of site rules or any special risks relating to the project.
How many Contractors can there be for each project?
There can only be one main contractor for a project at any one time. However,
sometimes two or more projects take place on a site at the same time. This can occur if
different clients commission adjacent work, or if a client procures two truly independent,
unrelated packages of work which do not rely upon one another for their viability or
completion.
11
Where overlapping projects are running on a single construction site, it is best to appoint
one Contractor for them all. If this is not done, all the contractors must co-operate, and
their plans must take account of the interfaces for example in traffic management.
AT
IO
AL
10
Planning and managing health and safety in the construction phase

Contractors must plan, manage and co-ordinate work during the construction phase
taking account of the information contained in the pre-construction information provided
by the client, and any other information provided by sub- contractors.
13
The effort devoted to planning and managing health and safety should be in proportion
to the risks and complexity associated with the project.
14
The Contractor should work with other sub-contractors to identify the hazards and
assess the risks related to their work, including the risks they may create for others.
Using this information and applying the general principles of prevention the Contractor,
in discussion with the sub-contractors involved, must plan, manage and co-ordinate the
construction phase. This includes supervising and monitoring work to ensure that it is
done safely and that it is safe for new activities to begin.
15
Where the project involves high-risk work, for example alterations that could result in
structural collapse, work on contaminated land, specialist advice is likely to be needed at
the planning stage.
EG
IN
TE
12
The construction phase plan

16
The way in which the construction phase will be managed and the key health and safety
issues for the particular project must be set out in writing in the construction phase plan.
This plan should set out the organisation and arrangements that have been put in place
to manage risk and co-ordinate the work on site. It should not be a repository for
detailed generic risk assessments, records of how decisions were reached or detailed
method statements, but it may, for example set out when such documents will need to
be prepared. It should be well focused, clear and easy for sub-contractors and others to
understand emphasising key points and avoiding irrelevant material. It is crucial that
all relevant parties are involved and co-operate in the development and implementation
of the plan as work progresses.
QCS 2014

Page 117
17
The plan must be tailored to the particular project. Generic plans that do not contain
the information relevant to the particular risks associated with the work will not satisfy
the requirements of CDM. Photographs and sketches can greatly simplify and shorten
explanations. It should also be organised so that relevant sections can easily be made
available to designers and sub-contractors.
18
Often the design and preparation for later work is not complete at the start of the
construction phase. Nevertheless, the plan for the initial phase of the construction work
must be prepared before any work begins. It should also address later activities that will
require careful planning. It may only be practical to address such activities in outline
form before work starts and most will require revision in the light of developments.
Implementing and monitoring the plan
A plan is no use if it is treated as merely a paper exercise and gathers dust. To improve
Qatar standards, it must be a practical aid to the management of health and sa fety on
site. Contractors and other sub-contractors have a particular role in both implementing
and monitoring the plan to ensure that it works in practice. Monitoring arrangements will
need to be discussed and agreed with the client as they form part of the management
arrangements.
20
The purpose of monitoring is to ensure that the precautions described in the

construction phase plan are appropriate and followed in practice. Where contractors do
not work safely or comply with the plan, Contractors must take appropriate action to
deal with the risk.
21
The contractor is responsible for ensuring the health and safety of everyone on site.
Everyone on site (including the client, anyone working for the client and workers of utility
companies) must co-operate with the contractor to enable them to comply with their duties.
22
The plan needs to be routinely reviewed, revised and refined by the contractor as the
project develops. For example, where the plan is not being followed, and health and
safety is put at risk, those involved must take appropriate action to deal with the risk.
Monitoring may show the plan has shortcomings and needs to be modified. Any
significant changes in the plan should be brought to the attention of all those affected.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
19
Site rules
24
Contractors should include any necessary rules for the management of construction
work in the construction phase plan, which others on the site have to follow. These may
cover issues such as restricted areas, permit-to-work systems, hot work and emergency
plans. In order to avoid cluttering the plan with detailed arrangements for implementing
site rules, the plan should refer to other documents or put detailed arrangements in
appendices. Site rules should be:
23
(a)
set out in writing;
(b)
understandable to those who have to follow them;
(c)
brought to the attention of everyone who has to follow them;
(d)
enforced by the Contractor
Copies of the site rules should be displayed on site in a place where they can be seen
by those who work there.
Controlling access onto sites
25
A contractor must take reasonable steps to prevent access by unauthorised persons to

the construction site. Only people who are explicitly authorised, individually or
QCS 2014

Page 118
collectively, by the contractor, should be allowed access. The authorisation may cover
the whole site or be restricted to certain areas. Authorised people should have relevant
site rules explained to them and undertake any necessary site induction, and should
comply with site rules and co-operate with the contractor. Some authorised visitors may
need to be supervised or accompanied while on site or visiting specific areas.
(a)
rights of way cross sites;
(b)
sites are in, or next to, other work areas;
(c)
new houses are being built on a development where some houses are already
occupied; or
(d)
there are children or other vulnerable people nearby.
The effectiveness of the arrangements needs to be reviewed in the light of experience.

In particular, their adequacy should be carefully reviewed if there is evidence of children
playing on, or near the site.
a suitable induction; and
(b)
any further information and training needed for the particular work.
This does not mean that the contractor has to train everyone on the site - this will be the
responsibility of individual sub-contractors.
Induction
EG
Inductions are a way of providing workers with specific information about the particular
risks associated with the site and the arrangements that have been made for their
control. Induction is not intended to provide general health and safety training, but it
should include a site-specific explanation of the following:
(a)
30
(a)
TE
29
Site induction, training and information are vital to securing health and safety on site.
The Contractor has to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that every worker has:
IN
28
AT
Site induction, training and information
IO
27
How access is controlled depends on the nature of the project, the risks and location.
The boundaries of all sites should be physically defined, where necessary, by suitable
fencing. The type of fencing should reflect the nature of the site and its surroundings.
Special consideration is needed where:
AL
26
senior management commitment to health and safety
(b)
the outline of the project
(c)
the individuals immediate line manager and any other key personnel
(d)
any site-specific health and safety risks, for example in relation to access,
transport, site contamination, hazardous substances and manual handling
(e)
Control measures on the site, including;

(i)
any site rules,
(ii)
any permit-to-work systems,
(iii)
traffic routes,
(iv)
security arrangements,
(v)
hearing protection zones,
(vi)
arrangements for personal protective equipment, including what is needed,

where to find it and how to use it,
QCS 2014

Page 119
(vii)
arrangements for housekeeping and materials storage,
(viii) facilities available, including welfare facilities,

(ix)
emergency procedures, including fire precautions, the action to take in the

event of a fire, escape routes, assembly points, responsible people and the
safe use of any fire-fighting equipment;
(f)
arrangements for first aid
(g)
arrangements for reporting accidents and other incidents
(h)
details of any planned training, such as toolbox talks
(i)
arrangements for consulting and involving workers in health and safety, including
the identity and role of any:
safety representatives,
(ii)
safety committees;
information about the individuals responsibilities for health and safety.
AL
(j)
(i)
1.1.8.34 Sub-Contractor
Sub-contractors and those actually doing the construction work are most at risk of injury
and ill health. They have a key role to play, in co-operation with the contractor, in
planning and managing the work to ensure that risks are properly controlled.
All sub-contractors (including utilities, specialist contractors, contractors nominated by

the client and the self-employed) have a part to play in ensuring that the site is a safe
and healthy place to work. The key to this is the proper co-ordination of the work,
underpinned by good communication and co-operation between all those involved.
Anyone who directly employs, engages construction workers or controls or manages

construction work related tasks is a sub-contractor for the purposes of these
Regulations. This includes companies that use their own workforce to do construction
work on their own premises. The duties on contractors apply whether the workers are
employees or self-employed and to agency workers without distinction.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
What sub-contractors must do on all projects

For all projects sub-contractors must:
(a)
check clients are aware of their duties;
(b)
satisfy themselves that they and anyone they employ or engage are competent
and adequately resourced;
(c)
plan, manage and monitor their OWN work to make sure that workers under their
control are safe from the start of their work on site;
(d)
ensure that any sub-contractor who they appoint or engage to work on the project
is informed of the minimum amount of time which will be allowed for them to plan
and prepare before starting work on site;
(e)
provide workers under their control (whether employed or self-employed) with any
necessary information, including about relevant aspects of other contractors work,
and site induction (where not provided by a contractor) which they need to work
safely, to report problems or to respond appropriately in an emergency;
(f)
ensure that any design work they do complies with these Regulations
(g)
co-operate with others and co-ordinate their work with others working on the
project;
(h)
ensure the workforce is properly consulted on matters affecting their health and
QCS 2014

Page 120
safety; and
(i)
obtain specialist advice (for example from a structural engineer or occupational

hygienist) where necessary when planning high-risk work for example
alterations that could result in structural collapse or work on contaminated land or
carrying out modification works on an existing structure.
Planning and managing construction work

5
Sub-contractors should always plan, manage, supervise and monitor their own work and
that of their workers to ensure that it is carried out safely and that health risks are also
addressed. The effort invested in this should reflect the risk involved and the experience
and track record of the workers involved. Where sub-contractors identify unsafe
practices, they must take appropriate action to ensure health and safety.
Site induction, information and training
Contractors must not start work on a construction site until they have been provided with
basic information. This should include information from the client about any particular
risks associated with the project (including information about existing structures where
these are to be demolished or structurally altered), and from designers about any
significant risks associated with the design.
Sub-contractors must ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that every worker has:
AT
IO
AL
a suitable induction; and
(b)
any further information and training needed for the particular work
(a)
Site induction should be provided by the contractor, and the sub-contractor must cooperate with the contractor to ensure that an adequate site induction is provided.
Where sub-contractors are involved in design work, including for temporary works, they
also have duties as designers.
10
Sub- contractors must also:
(b)
co-operate with the contractor, the Engineer and others working on the project
or adjacent sites;
(a)
EG
IN
TE
inform the contractor about risks to others created by their work;
(c)
provide details to the contractor of any supply chain or specialist sub-contractor

whom he engages in connection with carrying out the work;
(d)
comply with any reasonable directions from the main contractor, and with any
relevant rules in the construction phase plan;
(e)
inform the contractor of any problems with the plan or risks identified during
their work that have significant implications for the management of the project;
(f)
inform the contractor about accidents and dangerous occurrences;
(g)
provide information for the health and safety file.
Reporting incidents
11
The Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences (RIDDOR) require s the
QCS 2014

Page 121
responsible person to notify any death, reportable injury, disease or dangerous

occurrence to the Qatar Administrative Authority. The responsible person is the
employer or, for the self-employed, the contractor.
Sub-contractors must co-operate with the contractor, and assist them in the
development of the construction phase plan and its implementation. Where subcontractors identify shortcomings in the plan, the contractor should inform the contractor.
13
Sub-contractors must promptly inform the contractor about risks to other site workers or
members of the public resulting from their work. This includes anything, for example
from risk assessments and written systems of work, which might justify a review or
update of the construction phase plan. Sub-contractors must also provide details to the
contractor of any other sub-contractors who they engage to assist in the carrying out of
the work. Contractors must be in a position to know who is working on the site.
Contractors also have duties relating to the provision of information to sub-contractors,
and they will not be in a position to discharge these duties if they are not told that such
sub-contractors have been engaged.
14
Sub-contractors must also provide information about RIDDOR incidents to contractors

so that they can monitor compliance with health and safety standards and, if necessary,
review the arrangements for the management of health and safety.
IO
AL
12
AT
Site Specific Duties (Contractors/Sub-contractors)
Every contractor and subcontractor carrying out construction work shall comply with the
regulatory requirements of this section insofar as they affect him or any person carrying out
construction work under his control or relate to matters within his control.
16
Every person (other than a contractor carrying out construction work) who controls the way
in which any construction work is carried out by a person at work shall comply with the
regulatory requirements under this section insofar as they relate to matters which are within
his control.
17
Every person at work on construction work under the control of another person shall report to
that person any defect which he is aware may endanger the health and safety of himself or
another person.
EG
IN
TE
15
Safe places of work

18
There must be, so far as is reasonably practicable, safe access to and egress from a place
of work and to any other place provided for the use of any person at work. Such means of
access must be properly maintained.
19
Places of work must, so far as is reasonably practicable, be maintained without risk to health
or safety of the person(s) who will work there.
20
Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable,
that no-one gains access to any place which does not comply with the requirements of these
Regulations
21
Every place of work must, so far as is reasonably practicable, be of sufficient size and be
arranged so that it is suitable for any person who has to work there, taking account of any
work equipment used.
Good order (Housekeeping)
22
Every part of a construction site shall, so far as is reasonably practicable, be kept in good
order and every part of the site which is used as a place of work shall be kept in a
QCS 2014

Page 122
reasonable state of cleanliness.

23
Where it is necessary in the interests of health and safety, the perimeter of the site shall be
identified by suitable signs so that the arrangements and extent of the site is readily
identifiable, or fenced off, or both.
24
No timber or other material with projecting nails or other similar sharp objects shall be used
in any work or be allowed to remain in any place where the nails will be a source of danger
to any person.
Stability of structures
25
All practicable steps must be taken to ensure that any structure or part of a structure which
may become unstable or weak due to construction work does not collapse.
26
Any buttress, temporary support or temporary structure:

must be installed and maintained to withstand any strains and stresses that may be
imposed on it
(b)
only be used for the purposes for which it was designed, installed and maintained.
AL
(a)
No part of a structure may be loaded in such a way that it becomes unsafe.
28
The client is responsible for providing reasonable information, and issues relating to the
stability of the structure would fit into that category.
AT
IO
27
Demolition or dismantling
The demolition or dismantling of any structure must be planned and carried out in such a
way as to prevent danger, or reduce the danger so far as it is reasonably practicable to do
so.
30
Demolition or dismantling must not be carried out unless the arrangements for ensuring that
is carried out in a safe manner have first been recorded in writing.
31
The demolition or dismantling of any structure must be planned and carried out as safely as
possible, under the supervision of a competent person. Demolishing buildings and structures
remains high risk work.
32
It will normally be impossible for the contractor to comply with these Regulations without
reports such as an asbestos survey, information on underground services and structural
surveys.
EG
IN
TE
29
Explosives
33
So far as is reasonably practicable, explosives must be stored, transported and used safely
and securely.
34
Explosives may only be used when steps have been taken to ensure that there is no danger
from the explosion, projected or flying materials.
35
Any blasting would categorically be considered high risk work and a written method
statement required.
Excavations
36
All practicable steps, such as the provision of supports or battering, must be taken where
necessary to prevent danger to any person, to ensure that:
QCS 2014

Page 123
(c)
no part of an excavation collapses
(d)
any accidental fall or dislodgement of material is prevented
(a)
no person is buried or trapped by the fall or dislodgement of any material.
37
Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken to prevent the fall of any person, equipment or
material into the excavation.
38
Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken to prevent, where necessary, any part of an
excavation or ground adjacent to it from being overloaded by work equipment or material.
39
Work must not be carried out in any excavation where supports or battering have been
provided, unless:
(b)
the person who inspected it is satisfied that work can be carried out in it safely.
AL
the excavation and any equipment and materials which affect its safety have been
inspected by a competent person.
Work must not be carried out in any excavation if an inspection reveals any defect rendering
the excavation unsafe, until that defect has been rectified.
The decision as to whether or not to install shoring must be made with regard to the
circumstances prevailing at the time. Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken to
prevent any person working in an excavation from becoming trapped or buried by a
fall of materials.
Excavations must be supported as soon as possible by the provision of sufficient and

suitable materials. Such supports must only be installed, altered or dismantled under the
supervision of a competent person and without the person(s) installing the supports being
put at risk.
TE
41
AT
IO
(a)
40
(a)
Every cofferdam or caisson must be:

of suitable design and construction and have sufficient strength and capacity for the
purpose for which it is being used
(b)
equipped to enable workers to gain shelter or escape, if water or materials should

enter it
(c)
43
properly maintained.
Work must not be carried out in any cofferdam or caisson unless:

(a)
(b)
44
EG
(a)
42
IN
Cofferdams and caissons
it and any work equipment or materials which affect its safety have been inspected:
(i)
before any person carries out any work at the start of every shift, and
(ii)
after any event likely to affect the strength or stability of the cofferdam or
caisson or any part of it
the person who inspected it is satisfied that work can be carried out in it safely.
Work must not be carried out in any cofferdam or caisson if any inspection reveals any
defect rendering the cofferdam or caisson unsafe, until that defect has been rectified.
Reports of inspections
45
Where a statutory inspection of an excavation, cofferdam or caisson has been carried out,
the person carrying out the inspection must, before the end of the shift during which the
inspection was carried out:
QCS 2014

Page 124
(a)
inform the person for whom the inspection was carried out of any matter that renders
the excavation or caisson unsafe as a place of work
(b)
prepare a written report.
46
Note: The report must contain the particulars listed in Appendix 2.
47
The person who prepares the written report must provide a copy of the report within 24 hours
to the person on whose behalf the inspection was carried out.
48
The employer Contractor of the person authorised to carry out inspections, or the person in
control, must ensure that the inspections are only carried out by persons who are authorised
to do so.
49
The report or a copy of it must be kept available for inspection by a Administrative Authority
Workplace Inspector
(b)
for a period of three months (at the company offices)
AL
on the site until the project is completed, and thereafter
No report of a cofferdam or caisson inspection is required if one has been written within the
previous seven days.
IO
50
(a)
AT
Energy distribution installations
Where it is necessary to prevent danger, every energy distribution installation must be

located, checked and clearly identified.
52
Where there is a risk from electric power cables, in order of priority, they must be;
51
repositioned out of the area of risk, or
(b)
made dead by cutting off the current, or
(c)
where it is not reasonably practicable to carry out the above actions erect warning
notices and:
a suspended means of protection where vehicles have to pass beneath

overhead cables, or
(ii)
barriers, or
EG
(i)
IN
TE
(a)
(iii)
other measures which provide an equivalent or better level of protection.
53
Construction work must not be carried out where there is a risk of danger from damaging or
disturbing underground services unless suitable and sufficient steps have been taken so far
as is reasonably practicable.
54
Whilst electrical cables are specifically mentioned, the title indicates that the general
requirement outlined in the first paragraph applies to all sources of energy, for example
hydraulic and pneumatic distribution systems.
Prevention from drowning
55
Where any person is liable to drown from falling into water or any other liquid, suitable and
sufficient steps must be taken to:
(a)
prevent, so far as is reasonably practicable, a person falling
(b)
minimise the risk of a person drowning in the event of a fall
(c)
ensure that suitable rescue equipment is provided, maintained and properly used so
that anyone who falls into the water may be promptly rescued.
QCS 2014

Page 125
56
Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken to ensure the safety of any person transported to
their place of work by water.
57
Any vessel used to convey a person to or from a place of work, by water, must not be
overcrowded or overloaded.
Traffic routes
58
Every construction site must, so far as is reasonably practicable, be organised in such a way
that pedestrians and vehicles can move about safely and without risk to health.
59
Traffic routes must be suitable for persons or vehicles using them, sufficient in number, in
suitable places and of sufficient size.
60
To be suitable, each traffic route must:

enable pedestrians and vehicles to use it without causing danger to persons who are
near it
(b)
doors or gates used by pedestrians which lead into a traffic route must be adequately
separated from that route so that pedestrians may see approaching vehicles
(c)
provide sufficient separation between vehicles and pedestrians to ensure safety, or,
where that is not reasonably practicable, provide:
IO
AL
(a)
other means of protecting pedestrians and
(ii)
an effective means of warning any at-risk pedestrian of the approach of any

vehicle
AT
(i)
have at least one exit in any loading bay for the exclusive use of pedestrians
(e)
provide one or more pedestrian-only gates, clearly marked and kept free of
obstructions where it is unsafe for pedestrians to use a gate intended primarily for
vehicles.
Traffic routes must be:
identified by suitable signs, where necessary
(b)
regularly checked and
(c)
satisfactorily maintained.
EG
(a)
61
IN
TE
(d)
62
No vehicle must be permitted to drive on a traffic route unless, so far as is reasonably

practicable, the route is free from obstructions and permits sufficient clearance.
63
All traffic routes must be indicated where necessary.

Vehicles
64
Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken to prevent the unintended movement of any
vehicle.
65
Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken to ensure that persons who are in control of
vehicles give warning to other persons who may be endangered by the movement of the
vehicle.
66
Any vehicle being used for construction work must be:

(a)
driven, operated or towed in a safe manner
(b)
loaded in such a way that it can be driven, operated or towed in a safe manner.
QCS 2014

Page 126
67
No person shall ride or be required to ride on any vehicle unless they are in a safe place that
is purposely provided (i.e. the vehicle is designed to carry passengers).
68
No person may remain or be required to remain on any vehicle while it is being loaded or
unloaded with any loose material unless a safe place of work is provided for them and
maintained as necessary.
69
Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken to prevent the vehicle from falling into an
excavation or pit, or into water, or over the edge of an embankment or earthwork.
Prevention of risk from fire
70
Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken to prevent, so far as is reasonably practicable,
the risk of injury to any person during the carrying out of construction work arising from any
fire or explosion, flooding, or any substance that is liable to cause asphyxiation.
AL
Where necessary, in the interests of health and safety, suitable and sufficient arrangements
must be prepared and, where necessary, implemented to deal with any foreseeable
emergency, and such arrangements must include procedures for evacuation of the site, or
any part of it.
72
When making these arrangements, account must be taken of:
AT
the type of work being carried out
(b)
the characteristics and size of the site and the number of work locations on it
(c)
the work equipment being used
(d)
the number of persons likely to be present on the site at any one time
(e)
the physical and chemical properties of any substances or materials likely to be on the
site
IN
TE
(a)
Such arrangements must be communicated to all persons on site and tested at suitable
intervals.
EG
73
IO
71
Emergency routes and exits

74
Sufficient emergency routes and exits must be provided to enable any person to quickly
reach a place of safety in the event of danger.
75
Any emergency route or exit must lead directly, or as directly as possible, to an identified
safe area.
76
Any emergency route or exit must be kept clear of obstructions and, where necessary,
provided with emergency lighting so that it can be used safely at any time.
77
All emergency routes and exits must be indicated by suitable signs.

Fire detection and fire-fighting
78
Where necessary in the interests of health and safety, suitable fire-fighting equipment,
together with fire alarms and fire detection systems, must be installed in suitable locations.
79
A fire risk assessment will be required for the site including storage areas, with particular
emphasis on the storage highly flammable or explosive substances, and site welfare
facilities.
QCS 2014

Page 127
80
Fire-fighting equipment and fire detection/alarm systems must be properly maintained and
subjected to periodic tests and examination so as to ensure that the equipment remains
effective.
81
Any fire-fighting equipment that is not designed to operate automatically must be easily
accessible.
82
Every person at work on a construction site must, so far as is reasonably practicable, be

instructed in the use of any fire-fighting equipment that it may be necessary for them to use.
83
Where any work activity gives rise to a particular risk of fire, no person shall be authorised to
carry out such work unless that person has received suitable instructions.
84
All fire-fighting equipment must be indicated by suitable signs.

Fresh air
Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable,
that every workplace or approach to it has sufficient fresh or purified air to ensure that the
place or approach is safe and without risk to health.
86
Where plant is used for the purpose of providing fresh or purified air, it must be equipped
with an effective device to give visible and audible warning of the failure of the plant.
Temperature and weather protection
AT
IO
AL
85
Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken during working hours to ensure, so far as is
practicable, that the temperature at any indoor place of work is reasonable, having regard for
the purpose for which the place is being used.
88
Every place of work outdoors must, where necessary to ensure the health and safety of the
people at work there, be arranged so far as is reasonably practicable, to provide adequate
protection from adverse weather, having regard for the purpose for which the place is used
and any protective clothing or work equipment provided.
Lighting
EG
IN
TE
87
Every place of work, every approach to it and every traffic route must be provided with
suitable and sufficient lighting. The lighting should, as far as is reasonably practicable, be
natural lighting.
90
The colour of any artificial lighting must not adversely affect or change a perception of any
sign or signal that is provided for the purposes of health and safety.
91
Secondary or emergency lighting must be provided where there may be a risk to the health
and safety of any person in the event of the failure of any primary artificial lighting.
89
1.1.8.35 Competence and training

92
This section gives guidance about assessing the competence of organisations and
individuals engaged or appointed under CDM engineers; designers; contractors and
sub-contractors.
93
Assessments should focus on the needs of the particular project and be proportionate to the
risks, size and complexity of the work.
94
To be competent, an organisation or individual must have:
QCS 2014

Page 128
(a)
sufficient knowledge of the specific tasks to be undertaken and the risks which the
work will entail.
(b)
sufficient experience and ability to carry out their duties in relation to the project; to
recognise their limitations and take appropriate action in order to prevent harm to
those carrying out construction work, or those affected by the work.
Organisations and individuals will need specific knowledge about the tasks they will be
expected to perform, and the risks associated with these tasks. This will usually come
from formal or on the job training.
96
Appropriate experience is also a vital ingredient of competence. People are more likely
to adopt safe working practices if they understand the reasons why they are necessary,
and past experience should be a good indicator of the persons/ companys track record.
97
The development of competence is an ongoing process. Individuals will develop their

competence through experience in the job and through training which is part of life-long
learning. Professionals such as designers, engineers and advisors should be signed up
to a Continuing Professional Development CPD programme either through their
company or professional institution membership schemes. This will allow them to remain
up to date with changes in best and professional practice. Construction trades workers
and labourers should also receive refresher training or regular training updates either
through an in-house planned programme of learning and development, or a more formal
skills-based training programme.
AT
IO
AL
95
What you must do
All those with duties under CDM must satisfy themselves that businesses that they
engage or appoint are competent. This means making reasonable enquiries to check
that the organisation or individual is competent to do the relevant work and can allocate
adequate resources to it. Those taken on to do the work must also be sure that they are
competent to carry out the required tasks before agreeing to take on the work.
99
A key duty of the engineer is to advise clients about competence of designers and
contractors.
100
Doing an assessment requires you to make a judgement as to whether the organisation or

individual has the competence to carry out the work safely. If your judgement is reasonable,
taking into account the evidence that has been asked for and provided, you will not be
criticised if the organisation you appoint subsequently proves not to have been competent
to carry out the work.
EG
IN
TE
98
How to assess the competence of organisations

101
Competency assessments of organisations (including contractors, sub-contractors,

designers and engineers) should be carried out as a two-stage process:
102
Stage 1: An assessment of the companys organisation and arrangements for health

and safety to determine whether these are sufficient to enable them to carry out the
work safely and without risk to health.
103
Stage 2: An assessment of the companys experience and track record to establish that
it is capable of doing the work; it recognises its limitations and how these should be
overcome and it appreciates the risks from doing the work and how these should be
tackled.
104
In order to provide more consistency in the way in which competency assessments of

companies are carried out, a set of core criteria is set out below.
QCS 2014

Page 129
Competence chart
Core criteria for demonstration of competence:
106
Companies, contractors, engineers and designers
107
You need to meet the standards set out in the core criteria table on the next page.
108
Column 1 of the table lists the elements which should be assessed when establishing
whether or not a company is competent for the work which they will be expected to do.
109
Column 2 lists the standards against which the assessment should be made. Column 3
gives some examples of how a company might demonstrate that it meets these standards.
110
Companies do not have to produce all of the evidence listed in column 3 to satisfy the
standard - they simply need to produce enough evidence to show that they meet the
standard in column 2, taking account of the nature of the project and the risks which the work
entails. This requires you to make a judgement as to whether the evidence provided meets
the standard to be achieved. If your judgement is reasonable, and clearly based on the
evidence you have asked for and been provided with, you will not be criticised if the
company you appoint subsequently proves not to be competent when carrying out
the work.
111
Remember that assessments should focus on the needs of the particular job and should be
proportionate to the risks arising from the work. Unnecessary bureaucracy associated with
competency assessment obscures the real issues and diverts effort away from them.
112
'contractor', 'designer' and 'engineer' relate to your function, not to the type of organisation.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
105
AL
Section
11: Health and Safety
Part
1.01: Qatar Legislation and Management (Regulatory Document)
Page 130
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Criteria
Standard to be achieved
Health and safety policy and You are expected to have and implement an A signed, current copy of the company policy (indicating when
organisation for health and appropriate policy, regularly reviewed, and signed off it was last reviewed and by whose authority it is published).
safety
by the managing director or equivalent.
TE
R
Stage 1 assessment
Examples of the evidence that you could use to

demonstrate you meet the required standard
EG
IN
The policy must be relevant to the nature and scale of

your work and set out the responsibilities for health and
safety management at all levels within the organisation.
Arrangements
Competent advice -corporate Your organisation, and your employees, must have Name and competency details of the source of advice, e.g. a
and construction related
ready access to competent health and safety advice, safety group, trade federation, or consultant who provides
preferably from within your own organisation.
health and safety information and advice.
These should set out the arrangements for health and A clear explanation of the arrangements which the company
safety management within the organisation and should has made for putting its policy into effect and for discharging
be relevant to the nature and scale of your work. They its duties under CDM .
should set out how the company will discharge their
duties under CDM. There should be a clear indication
of how these arrangements are communicated to the
workforce.
The advisor must be able to provide general health and An example from the last 12 months of advice given and
safety advice, and also (from the same source or action taken.
elsewhere) advice relating to construction health and
safety issues.
AL
Section
Part
Page 131
You should have in place, and implement, training

arrangements to ensure your employees have the skills
and understanding necessary to discharge their duties
as contractors, designers or Engineers. You should
have in place a programme for refresher training, e.g. a
continuing professional development programme or life
long learning which will keep your employees updated
on new developments and changes to legislation or
good health and safety practice. This applies
throughout the organisation - from board or equivalent
to trainees.
Evidence of a health and safety training culture including

records, certificates of attendance and adequate health and
safety induction training for site-based workforce.
Evidence of an active learning programme. Sample 'tool box
talks'.
Individual qualifications and Employees are expected to have the appropriate

experience
qualifications and experience for the assigned tasks,
unless they are under controlled and competent
supervision.
Details of qualifications and/or experience of specific

corporate post holders, e.g. board members, health and
safety adviser etc. Other key roles should be named or
identified and details of relevant qualifications and experience
provided.
IN
EG
Headline training records.
Training and information
TE
R
AT
IO
QCS 2014
FOR CONTRACTORS: details of number/percentage of

people engaged in the project that have passed a
construction health and safety assessment and hold industry
qualifications.
For professionals, details of qualifications and/or professional
institution membership.
Evidence of a company-based training programme suitable
for the work to be carried out.
AL
Section
Part
Page 132
Individual qualifications and

experience (cont'd)
FOR
DESIGN
ORGANISATIONS:
details
of
number/percentage of people engaged in the project who
have passed a construction health and safety assessment
Details of any relevant qualifications and/or professional
institution membership and any other specific qualifications
such as NEBOSH Certificate or equivalent.
FOR ENGINEERS: details of number/percentage of people
engaged in the project who have passed a construction health
and safety assessment. Evidence of health and safety
knowledge such as NEBOSH Certificate or equivalent.
Details of professional institution membership and any other
specific qualifications.
Evidence of a clear commitment to training and the continuing
professional development of staff.
EG
IN
TE
R
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Monitoring, audit and review
You should have a system for monitoring your Could be through formal audit or discussions/reports to senior
procedures, for auditing them at periodic intervals, and managers.
for reviewing them on an ongoing basis.
Evidence of recent monitoring and management response.
Copies of site inspection reports.
AL
Section
Part
Page 133
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Workforce involvement
You should have, and implement, an established Evidence showing how consultation is carried out.
means of consulting with your workforce on health and
Records of health and safety committees
safety matters.
Names of safety representatives.
Accident
reporting
and You should have records of all RIDDOR reportable Evidence showing the way in which you record and
enforcement action; follow up events for at least the last three years. You should also investigate accidents and incidents.
investigation
have in place a system for reviewing all incidents, and
Records of the last two accidents/incidents and the actions
recording the action taken as a result.
taken to prevent recurrence.
You should record any enforcement action taken
Records of any enforcement action taken over the last five
against your company over the last five years, and the
years, and what action was taken to put matters right.
action which you have taken to remedy matters subject
to enforcement action.
For larger companies, simple statistics showing incidence
rates of major injuries, over three-day injuries, reportable
cases of ill-health and dangerous occurrences for the last
three years.
EG
IN
TE
R
Records should include any incidents that occurred whilst the

company traded under a different name, and any incidents
that occur to direct employees or Labour-only subcontractors.
Subcontracting/
consulting You should have arrangements in place for appointing Evidence showing how you ensure subcontractors are
procedures (if applicable)
competent subcontractors/ consultants.
competent.
You should be able to demonstrate how you ensure Examples of subcontractor assessments you have carried
that subcontractors will also have arrangements for out.
appointing competent subcontractors or consultants.
Evidence showing how you require similar standards of
You should have arrangements for monitoring competence assessment from subcontractors.
subcontractor performance.
Evidence showing how you monitor subcontractor
performance.
AL
Section
Part
Page 134
Hazard elimination and risk You should have, and implement, arrangements for Evidence showing how you:
control (Designers only)
meeting your duties under CDM
ensure co-operation and co-ordination of design work
within
the
design
team
and
with
other
designers/contractors
ensure that hazards are eliminated and any remaining

risks controlled
ensure that any structure which will be used as a

workplace will meet relevant requirements of the
latest revision for QCS.
Examples showing how risk was reduced through design. A

short summary of how changes to designs will be managed.
(Note: the emphasis here should be on practical measures
which reduce particular risks arising from the design, not on
lengthy procedural documentation highlighting generic risks.)
EG
IN
TE
R
10
AT
IO
QCS 2014
11
Risk
assessment You should have procedures in place for carrying out risk Evidence showing how the company will identify significant
leading to a safe assessments and for developing and implementing safe health and safety risks and how they will be controlled.
method of
work systems of work/method statements.
Sample risk assessments or safe systems of work or method
(Contractors only)
statements.
The identification of health issues is expected to feature This will depend upon the nature of the work, but must reflect
prominently in this system.
the importance of this risk area.
12
Co-operating
with
others
and
coordinating your work
with that of other
contractors
(Subcontractors)
You should be able to illustrate how co-operation and co- Evidence could include sample risk assessments, procedural
ordination of your work is achieved in practice, and how you arrangements, project team meeting notes.
involve the workforce in drawing up method statements/safe
Evidence of how the company co-ordinates its work with other
systems of work.
trades.
AL
Section
Part
Page 135
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Welfare
provision You should be able to demonstrate how you will ensure that Evidence could include, for example, health and safety policy
(Contractors)
appropriate welfare facilities will be in place before people start commitment; contracts with welfare facility providers; details
work on site.
of type of welfare facilities provided on previous projects.
14
Engineers duties
You should be able to demonstrate how you go about The evidence should be in the form of actual examples rather
encouraging co-operation, co-ordination and communication than by generic procedures.
between designers.
Criteria
Standard to be achieved
EG
IN
TE
R
13
Examples of the evidence that you could use to

demonstrate you meet the required standard
Stage 2 assessment
1
Work experience
You should give details of relevant experience in the field of work A simple record of recent projects or contracts should be kept,
for which you are applying.
with the phone numbers and addresses of contacts who can
verify that work was carried out with due regard to health and
safety.
This should be sufficient to demonstrate your ability to deal
with the key health and safety issues arising from the work you
are applying for.
Where there are significant shortfalls in your previous
experience, or there are risks associated with the project which
you have not managed before, an explanation of how these
shortcomings will be overcome.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 136
Part
Organisations who are bidding for work should put together a package of information
that shows how their own policy, organisation and arrangements meet these sta ndards.
If regularly updated, this information should then be used each time they are asked to
demonstrate competence as part of a tender process.
114
Where the project is much larger than any that the organisation being assessed has
worked on before, or where the work will involve them managing new risks, this should
not automatically rule them out for consideration for the work.
115
The assessor should look for an appreciation of these risks; an understanding of how
they will be managed, and some indication of how any shortcomings in their current
arrangements for managing such risks will be addressed.
116
It may be that an organisation is weak in certain areas. This can be addressed by

putting arrangements in place to cover these weaknesses, or by employing people with
particular expertise for relevant parts of the contract. What really matters is that the
organisation has access to the expertise which it needs, and the ability to control the
risks which arise from the work.
117
Remember that assessments should focus on the needs of the particular project and be
proportionate to the risks, size and complexity of the work. Unnecessary bureaucracy
associated with competency assessment can obscure the real issues and divert effort
away from them.
AT
IO
AL
113
How to assess the competence of High Hazard Activities

These regulations require clients to ensure that their proposed project engineers, designers,
contractor and sub contractors (including their employees) are competent, adequately
resourced and appointed early enough for the work they have to do. In turn, these duty
holders must assess their own competency and that of their employees and other duty
holders (except in the case of a client where the test does not apply) as they cannot accept
an appointment unless they are competent to do so.
119
In every case, a client must assess the competency of the organisations to be appointed for
high hazard activities.
120
The client must assess the competence of an organisation using a two-stage process:
121
Stage 1: Procedures and arrangements for ensuring health and safety (a client should ask
for evidence of written health and safety policies and these must in turn be checked for
relevance); and
122
Stage 2: Experience and track record.
123
Organisations should provide information as to their competence with reference to the above
when tendering for work. In the case of high specialist activities such as:
124
EG
IN
TE
118
(a)
Use of explosives
(b)
Cofferdams and caissons
(c)
Work in compressed air
(d)
Tunnelling and underground works
Clients are required when reviewing competences of specialist contractors who are
tendering for construction projects involving high hazard activities to appoint consultant
health and safety advisers with specialist knowledge pursuant to the high hazard activities.
The appointed consultants experience will aid the clients to discharge their responsibilities
QCS 2014
Section
Page 137
Part
when reviewing duty holders tender and competence documentation.

125
The list of high hazard activities listed above is not definitive and when projects are out of the
scope of their internal health and safety advisors capability, the appointment of an external
consultant must take place to aid in establishing the competence of construction tendering
contractors.
How to assess the competence of individuals
The information in this section will help clients, engineers or others who control the way
in which construction work is carried out to assess the competence of key individuals.
127
Remember that assessments should focus on the needs of the particular job and should be
proportionate to the risks arising from the work.
128
As with organisations, assessing the competence of an individual should be a two-stage

process:
AL
126
Stage 1: An assessment of the persons task knowledge to determine whether this

is sufficient to enable them to carry out the work safely and without risk to health;
(b)
Stage 2: An assessment of the individuals experience and track record to

establish that they are capable of doing the work; they recognise their limitations
and how these should be overcome and they appreciate the risks from doing the
work and how these should be controlled.
AT
IO
(a)
Stage 1 assessments will look at an individuals qualifications and training records, and
arrangements which have been made for their Continuing Professional Development or
lifelong learning. This will include an assessment as to whether the individual has a basic
understanding of the risks arising from construction work which is essential for all people
who work on or regularly visit sites.
130
Stage 2 assessments should concentrate on the persons past experience in the type of
work which you are asking them to do. Where the work is more complex than any that
the person has done before, or where the work will expose them to new risks, this
should not automatically rule them out for consideration for the work. In these
circumstances, the assessor should look for an appreciation of these risks; an
understanding of how they will be managed, and some indication of how any
shortcomings in their current knowledge will be addressed. Working under the
supervision of someone who is competent and familiar with the work is one way in which
people can learn how to do work safely.
EG
IN
TE
129
1.1.8.36 Worker engagement and communication

1
Involving the workforce in identifying and controlling risks is crucial to reducing the high
accident rate associated with construction work. The workforce has first-hand
experience of site conditions and is often the first to identify potential problems. Worker
engagement is the participation by workers in decisions made by those in control of
construction activities, in order that risks on site can be managed in the most effective
way.
Participation will be most effective when the workforce has sufficient knowledge and
confidence to provide feedback, and can identify risks and explain their importance.
People have the confidence to do this when they are properly trained, know how to
report their concerns, and see prompt action being taken as a result. Training should
include, where necessary, the skills required to participate in decision-making
processes, and consultation with managers.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 138
Part
What you are required to do for all projects

All those in control of construction work are required to provide workers (including the
self-employed) under their control with any information that worker needs to carry out
the construction work safely and without risk to health.
All workers should be provided with a suitable site-specific induction to inform them of
the arrangements for health, safety and welfare at their work site. This should include
any relevant findings resulting from a risk assessment, including risks arising from the
activities of other workers working nearby. If contractors have site rules these should be
explained, along with the procedures to be followed in the event of any worker finding
themselves in a position of serious and imminent danger. Contractors must
communicate to their workers the identity of the person who is responsible for
implementing health and safety procedures on site. Every worker has a duty under CDM
to report anything, which is likely to endanger the health and safety of himself or others.
To ensure involvement of the entire workforce, contractors may need to make special
arrangements for workers who have little or no understanding of Arabic and or English,
or who cannot read Arabic and or English. These could include providing translation,
using interpreters or replacing written notices with clearly understood symbols or
diagrams.
Arrangements for worker engagement on smaller sites should always be tailored to the
size and nature of the project and risks involved. On smaller sites informal arrangements
for collecting workers views can be effective. An effective way of achieving this is to
arrange reviews of method statements immediately before the work itself is being
carried out. Those workers who will be involved in the work can then comment directly
on the risks and the ways in which these are being controlled.
TE
AT
IO
AL
EG
Employers must consult their workers on matters relating to their health and safety. This
can often be done most effectively through worker representatives.
IN
Worker representatives
QCS 2014
Section
Page 139
Part
Requirements for welfare facilities

1.1.8 Appendix 1
The Contractor must provide:
Sanitary conveniences
1
Suitable and sufficient sanitary conveniences must be provided or made available at

readily accessible places. So far as is reasonably practicable, the rooms containing
sanitary conveniences must be;
(a)
adequately ventilated and lit
(b)
kept in a clean and orderly condition.
Welfare facilities
Suitable and sufficient washing facilities including showers, if required by the nature of
the work or for health reasons, must, so far as is reasonably practicable, be provided or
made available at readily accessible places.
Washing facilities must be provided:
N
IO
adjacent to sanitary conveniences, whether or not provided elsewhere
(b)
adjacent to changing rooms, where provided, whether or not provided elsewhere.
AT
(a)
Washing facilities must include:
a supply of clean hot and cold (or warm) water, which so far as is reasonably
practicable shall be running water
(b)
soap or other suitable skin cleansers
(c)
towels or other suitable means of drying.
TE
(a)
IN
AL
Rooms containing washing facilities must be lit and sufficiently ventilated.
Washing facilities and the rooms containing them must be kept in a clean and orderly
condition.
Except for washing facilities which are intended for the washing of hands and forearms
only, separate rooms must be provided for men and women except where they:
EG
(a)
are in a room, the door of which can be locked from the inside and
(b)
the room is intended to be used by one person at a time.
Drinking water
7
An adequate supply of wholesome drinking water, conspicuously marked with the

appropriate sign, should be provided or made available at readily accessible places.
Sufficient cups or other drinking vessels must be provided, unless the water supply is in
the form of a jet (drinking fountain) from which a person can easily drink.
Changing rooms and lockers
Suitable facilities must be provided or made available at readily accessible places if:
(a)
the worker has to wear special clothing for the purposes of work, and,
(b)
for reasons of health or personal privacy, changing cannot be carried out
QCS 2014
Section
Page 140
Part
elsewhere.
10
Where necessary, in the interests of personal privacy, separate changing rooms for men
must be provided.
11
Changing rooms must:

(a)
be provided with seating
(b)
include, where necessary, facilities to dry clothing and personal effects
(c)
include, where necessary, facilities for locking away:

(i)
special clothing that is not taken home
(ii)
a person's own clothing which is not worn at work
(iii)
their personal effects (property).
Suitable and sufficient facilities for rest must be provided at readily accessible places.
They must:
include suitable arrangements to protect non-smokers from the discomfort caused
by tobacco smoke
(b)
be equipped with an adequate number of tables and adequate seating (with

backs)
(c)
where necessary, include facilities for any pregnant woman and nursing mother to
rest, lying down
(d)
where necessary, include a means of boiling water and suitable arrangements to

ensure that meals can be prepared and eaten
(e)
be maintained at an appropriate temperature
AT
IO
(a)
IN
TE
12
AL
Facilities for rest
An 'enclosed' workplace is one which has a roof or ceiling and, except for passageways,
doors and windows, is wholly enclosed, whether on a temporary or permanent basis.
14
A 'substantially enclosed' workplace is one which has a roof or ceiling but there are
permanent openings in the walls, the combined area of which is less than 50% of the
total wall area. When calculating the total 'open area' of any workplace, doors and/or
windows which can be closed must not be counted.
EG
13
QCS 2014
Section
Page 141
Part
Particulars to be included in a report of inspection

1.1.8 Appendix 2
Name and address of the person on whose behalf the inspection was carried out.
Location of the place of work inspected.
Description of the place of work or part of that place inspected (including any work
equipment and materials).
Date and time of the inspection.
Details of any matter identified that could give rise to a risk to the health or safety of any
person.
Details of any action taken as a result of any matter identified in paragraph 5 above.
Details of any further action considered necessary.
Name and position of the person making report.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
Section
Page 142
Part

1.1.9
Safety Inspections and Auditing
1.1.9.1 Key points

Inspections of the workplace, from a health and safety point of view, can form a productive
part of the consultation between management and the workforce.
There are several forms of workplace inspection described in this section.
While they are often carried out by a safety professional, they do not have to be.
The successful outcome of any inspection is that remedial actions are put in place where
shortcomings have been identified.
Workplace inspections should be carried out against a predetermined checklist incorporating

some method of recording the findings.
Whereas workplace inspections tend to be a 'snapshot in time', an audit is a thorough

examination not only of the site conditions prevailing at any one time but also of:
the commitment of management to health and safety;
(b)
the procedures that underpin the health and safety management system.
IO
(a)
Note:
AT
Contractors being able to demonstrate their competence in matters of health and safety
management potentially puts a greater importance on them being able to show that audits
are carried out and acted upon.
Section 1, Part 21 covers inspections and handovers.
AL
TE
identifying the hazards which employees face within the workplace
(b)
understanding how accidents are caused by unsafe acts, unsafe systems of work and
unsafe conditions on site
(c)
taking steps to control the activity of the worker, the work method and the workplace.
IN
(a)
Contractors, managers, supervisors and safety representatives all have equally important
roles to play. By obtaining and providing information through the inspection, investigation
and examination of the workplace, they can help provide a basis for effective management
action to promote safer and healthier workplaces, and induce a greater awareness of health,
safety and welfare on the part of all concerned.
It is well-established and documented that accidents can be prevented by:
EG
1.1.9.3 Safety inspections

Regular and random inspections
1
Formal inspections at reasonably regular intervals should augment the site manager's dayto-day checks, inspections and examinations which occur as part of any job task. These
should involve safety representatives using a properly designed safety checklist for a
systematic inspection of the workplace.
An example of such a checklist can be found in Appendix 1.
The advantages of regular safety inspections are that they ensure that good housekeeping is
maintained within the workplace and that awareness is developed, amongst employees at all
levels, of the need to promote and maintain safety standards. The disadvantage or danger of
QCS 2014
Section
Page 143
Part
regular inspections is that they may become a rather mechanical routine for all concerned,
and that their impact might be lessened.
4
Random inspections, however, carried out without any prior notice to the workforce, on
different days of the week, at irregular intervals and at different times of the day, avoid the
shortcomings of a predictable inspection and help to encourage a continuous interest in
safety by all personnel.
In practice, a combination of the two approaches of both regular and random inspections is
probably the best course of action.
1.1.9.4 Remedial actions

A clear understanding of what remedial actions are required to eliminate or less the risks to
health and safety, and when those actions should be taken, is an essential part of health and
safety management.
The following lists suggest how shortcomings, as highlighted during health and safety
inspections, should be prioritised for remedial action.
Items requiring immediate action:
IO
AL
the contravention of this Regulatory Document
(b)
the occurrence of accidents or incidents which produce situations of immediate danger

to the health and safety of employees or other people, including members of the public
(c)
the risk of financial liabilities, as a result of damage to plant and equipment, or

compensation to workers or members of the public
(d)
the risks of fire, explosion or other hazards involving electricity, toxic materials or
substances
(e)
the existence of unsafe working practices and unsafe places of work
(f)
any shortages of correct and adequate personal protective clothing and equipment
(g)
any accident or incident that is reportable under RIDDOR
(a)
(b)
TE
IN
EG
Items requiring prompt action:

any potential hazards which may exist, but which do not cause any imminent or
immediate danger
AT
(a)
any signs of inadequate information, instruction or supervision, which should have

been provided by either the management or others
(c)
any first aid facilities and training that fall short of statutory requirements
(d)
occasions when new plant, new work methods, new equipment, or different materials
are to be introduced into the workplace.
Items requiring short-term action:

(a)
where there is a lack of planning and control affecting safety within the workplace,
either directly or indirectly, e.g. through the inadequate supply of materials and
equipment to enable the workforce to carry out their tasks satisfactorily and safely
(b)
where there are signs of inadequacies in the personal skills, knowledge and
experience of the workforce, which may have an adverse effect on safety.
Items requiring long-term planning and action:

(a)
where there is a lack of certain categories of safety skills and trained personnel
amongst the workforce
QCS 2014
Section
Page 144
Part
(b)
where there is a need for the training of safety advisers, supervisors and safety
representatives
(c)
where there is a need for training to take place to keep abreast of the future needs of
the company and its employees
(d)
where there is a need for the improvement of standards of health, welfare and safety
within the company.
1.1.9.5 Safety tours

Managers, engineers, foremen, supervisors and operatives should have the opportunity to
take note of safety conditions prevailing within the workplace during normal construction
work. Production, however, will often be their first priority and this need to get the job done
may adversely affect their judgement on safety matters. Familiarity with certain activities and
hazards may further cause them to overlook, fail to recognise or ignore real or potential
dangers which are present at the workplace.
For these reasons, safety tours (general inspections of the workplace) made by safety
advisers, supervisors and safety representatives should take place at regular intervals.
In attempting to reach agreement with Contractors on the frequency of safety tours, the
following factors should be considered:
IO
AL
the size of the site to be inspected, the number of people employed and the number of
types of activity which are carried out on that site
(b)
the categories of skill and the experience of the operatives
(c)
the existing safety policy and safety organisation within the company
(d)
the accident record of the site, company or organisation
(e)
the degree of risk to employees in carrying out specific activities or to groups of other
people.
IN
TE
AT
(a)
1.1.9.6 Safety sampling
(a)
(b)
EG
Safety sampling of a particular work activity, process or work area may be necessary in the
following circumstances:
where the activity, process or work area presents particular health and safety
concerns
where there have been changes to an activity, process or work area that are relevant
to health and safety
(c)
where there is a need to improve the safety performance of the company in a

particular area of operations
(d)
where there have been changes in Qatar legislation or safety standards which affect
the operations of the company
(e)
where there are high accident rates or increasing accident rates
(f)
where there are areas of high labour turnover.
Safety sampling should be carried out by someone totally familiar with the work activity,
process or work area under inspection.
1.1.9.7 Safety surveys

1
These are general inspections which are carried out at longer intervals (yearly or once every
two years) to assess the current safety standards and activities of the company, and to
QCS 2014
Section
Page 145
Part
compare these with other sites of the same company, or other companies within the industry.
2
The survey should be used to determine the future safety objectives and activities of the
company, in the light of planned requirements.
It provides an opportunity to:

compare the current safety performance of the company against previous years
(b)
review safety objectives and determine the future objectives and safety policy of the
company
(c)
examine current levels of safety activity and training within the company to decide
whether they are adequate and suitable
(d)
decide where changes, if any, need to be made, and to make recommendations to the
company as to where and how those changes may be implemented
(e)
improve procedures, records, communications and information supplied by and to the

Contractors or their representative
(f)
determine whether any additional resources are required to enable the company's
operations to be carried out more safely and effectively
(g)
decide whether the numbers of existing safety staff (including safety representatives)
are adequate.
IO
AL
(a)
AT
1.1.9.8 Hazard-spotting exercises
Hazard-spotting exercises are a modified version of the safety sampling method, where a
particular department, section, work area or work activity is singled out for a closer and more
thorough examination.
The exercises should be arranged by the safety adviser, in conjunction with the company
management. It should involve supervisors, safety representatives and operatives.
Observers may include first line or senior managers, but there should be at least an equal
number of operatives. Some management may prefer a predominant number of operatives
up to chargehand/ganger level in the party, thereby encouraging workers to take an active
interest in safety and accident prevention at the workplace.
EG
IN
TE
1.1.9.9 Hazard-spotting party

1
Members of the proposed hazard-spotting party should have had some previous training or
experience in safety matters and be able to:
(a)
recognise any unsafe acts of people at work
(b)
recognise unsafe or potentially unsafe conditions of work or methods of work.
One person should be appointed leader, and their functions should include:
(a)
the collection of the written findings of the members of the party
(b)
the study of these findings and the summary of unsafe acts and conditions which have
been observed during the tour
(c)
the preparation of a brief report, setting out the unsafe acts and conditions which were
observed during the tour and making recommendations for action by
(d)
the management or their representative to rectify any situation that may have been
observed
(e)
noting and recording the response of the line or senior management, satisfying
themselves that action will be taken by management to rectify any situations observed
QCS 2014
(f)
Section
Page 146
Part
reporting back, to members of the party, what action will be taken by the line manager
concerned.
The participants should be informed in advance of their involvement in the hazard-spotting

exercise, given a time and place to meet, and told who is the leader of the party to whom
they should report.
They should be:

briefed on which work processes and activities are to be inspected and the hazards
which they will be looking for
(b)
informed that they can ask any questions, but not interfere with the normal work
processes and activity
(c)
instructed in the use of any checklists or forms which are to be used to record their
findings. See examples in Appendix 2
(d)
asked to differentiate between unsafe acts and unsafe conditions
(e)
instructed to record their findings independently, without fear of recrimination or

interference.
AL
(a)
The leader of the party spots at the same time as everyone else and is responsible for
seeing that the inspection tour is completed within the agreed timescale.
Employees working in the section to be inspected should be informed of the intent to inspect,
but not of the date or time when the inspection will be carried out.
A set and properly structured programme of inspections and sampling will ensure that all of
the main activities of a company are continuously under scrutiny. Hazard-spotting exercises
should be used not only where there is seen to be a need to ensure the safety and health of
people at work, but also as a continuing monitoring exercises.
IN
TE
1.1.9.10 Hazard-spotting programme
AT
IO
EG
1.1.9.11 Inspection reports
Supervisors and safety representatives should record the findings of their inspections.
Commercially produced versions of inspection report forms are often multi-copy, and 'self
duplicating', with each copy on a different colour paper to identify the intended recipient.
These are called PAD format.
See an example of a report form in Appendix 3.
Whatever the type of checklist or form used, it should provide a record of any action
requested to remedy conditions and working practices considered to be unsafe. Space
should be provided on the form to record the date and place of the inspection and details of
the action taken or, if no action was taken, an explanation of why this was so.
1.1.9.12 Investigation at the workplace

4
Safety representatives are expected to;

(a)
investigate potential hazards and dangerous occurrences at the workplace
(b)
carry out inspections where there has been a RIDDOR accident, occurrence or
disease at the workplace
(c)
investigate any complaints by employees relating to health and safety
(d)
make representations to the Contractors on behalf of the workforce on general and
QCS 2014
Section
Page 147
Part
specific matters relating to the health and safety of employees at the workplace.
These functions do not affect a Contractors rights and obligations to manage an enterprise
or site as they should wish, or to investigate any type of accident or occurrence.
1.1.9.13 Safety auditing

1
Many clients are now asking for detailed safety management information, such as that
gathered during safety auditing, as part of their pre-qualification procedures. This will be part
of the client's competence assessment of contractors, as required under CDM. Such
information has the potential to indicate a proactive approach to safety management and
whether or not identified issues are satisfactorily dealt with.
What is a safety audit, and what is in it for you?
A safety audit is a demonstration of the management's commitment to improve the overall
safety of the workplace. The typical definition of an auditing system is a systematic, critical
examination of an operation in its entirety to identify hazards and levels of risk, to detect
falling standards and to ensure that operations are performed in an efficient and safe way in
accordance with the policies and procedures laid down by the organisation.
Therefore, the key requirements of a safety audit include:
IO
AL
a critical examination of the whole operation
(b)
an assessment of how the risks to health and safety are being handled
(c)
the identification of the efficient and safe performance of people
(d)
the detection and identification of falling standards, ineffective company procedures,

and non-compliance with industry standards and Qatar legal requirements
(e)
the use of meaningful standards consistent with the organisation's operations.
TE
AT
(a)
Health and safety auditing should also be seen as an integral part of the overall monitoring of
health and safety within an organisation.
The aim of such an audit is to identify problem areas that may exist, so that you can make
improvements to your standard of safety. The audit should look at the interaction of all the
activities of your company, as well as at the activities themselves.
An audit supports the company's safety policy; it measures performance against it and will
help management to judge just how well safety is being managed and, if carried to its logical
conclusion, will prompt the question: 'What caused this accident to happen?'
By adopting safety auditing, the Contractors will be acting to identify problems and possible
causes of accidents before they happen.
If any are identified, the Contractors will be able to change the health and safety
management system, improve working practices, identify health and safety training needs
and strengthen other weaknesses. These changes will help ensure that no unsafe actions
occur, thereby preventing accidents, and may include the setting of new standards of health
and safety performance by managers and employees.
The aim of any health and safety auditing system should be to constructively assist site
management to safely organise the company's construction activities. The application of a
well thought out auditing system will undoubtedly repay the time and money that the
company initially invests in developing it.
10
There is an additional benefit to the company
EG
IN
QCS 2014
Section
Page 148
Part
11
The result of safety audits carried out correctly is an improved safety performance so that the
ultimate of NO ACCIDENTS is achieved.
12
A good audit will benefit everyone from senior management to the youngest employee, and
will hopefully be accepted on its merits as the resultant changes bring improvements in
safety performance.
13
The health and safety audit should be carried out, as far as possible, by independent
auditors. This overcomes the problems faced by line managers auditing their own area of
work, or even a second line manager being critical of their peers. Auditing must be carried
out objectively and with a high degree of honesty when identifying non-compliance with
management systems and techniques.
14
The frequency of safety audits should ensure that the health and safety management system
of the organisation does not degrade over time or through changes in the company
organisation, personnel or the activities it carries out.
performance against internal systems
(b)
performance against legal standards.
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
IO
One of the most difficult things about auditing is deciding whether the measured
performance is satisfactory. Within health and safety, experienced external auditors will
typically audit against two parameters:
AL
1.1.9.14 Benchmarking
QCS 2014
Section
Page 149
Part

1.1.9 Appendix 1
Observation checklist
The worker
gloves
(b)
clothing
(c)
boots
(d)
helmets
(e)
goggles
(f)
ear defenders?
safety signs and signals
machine and equipment guards
(ii)
warning notice
(iii)
barriers
safety equipment
(d)
first aid training?
(c)
alarm systems
TE
(b)
Is the worker aware that they must exercise good behaviour at work whilst paying attention
to the following:
(a)
avoiding messing around
(b)
distractions
(c)
staying out of prohibited areas
(i) use of:
AT
(i)
IO
use of:
Is the worker aware of safeguards which exist in relation to:

(a)
AL
(a)
IN
Is the worker able to obtain and correctly wear personal protective equipment, such as:
EG
machinery
plant
power tools
hand tools
transport
access equipment
working platforms
hazardous activities?
When handling materials, does the worker take into account the following:
(a)
good manual handling and lifting techniques, including wearing appropriate PPE
(b)
mechanical methods available
(c)
proper stacking
(d)
correct storage
(e)
transporting and moving loads
(f)
loading and unloading
(g)
dangerous materials?
QCS 2014
(a)
at heights
(b)
above or near to water
(c)
near live electrical conductors
(d)
in confined spaces
(e)
in excavations, tunnels and shafts
(f)
in other hazardous environments?
Is the worker aware of, and using, welfare facilities which are provided relating to:
first aid
(b)
changing rooms
(c)
canteen
(d)
washing
(e)
seating
(f)
toilets
(g)
drinking water
(h)
drying facilities
(i)
workspace
AL
(a)
IO
If required to work in hazardous areas, is the worker competent to work:
(b)
temperature
(c)
lighting
(d)
noise
(e)
dust
(f)
fumes
(g)
8
IN
ventilation
EG
(a)
TE
Is the working environment satisfactory in relation to:
The workplace and the work method
AT
Section
Page 150
Part
welfare facilities?
Is the condition of machinery, plant and equipment, tools and materials acceptable as far as
the following are concerned:
(a)
machinery, transport, plant
(b)
workplace
(c)
working platforms
(d)
tools, equipment, appliances
(e)
hazardous work areas?
Are adequate fire precautions in place including:

(a)
exits and emergency escape routes
(b)
extinguishers
(c)
alarms
(d)
procedures?
QCS 2014
(a)
warning notices
(b)
general health and safety signs
(c)
colour codings
(d)
work methods
(e)
adequacy of:
information
instruction
supervision
work procedures?
(b)
site conditions
(c)
ground, floor conditions
(d)
storage areas
(e)
gangways, walkways
(f)
access, egress?
general layout
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
AL
Is good housekeeping a part of normal procedures when considering:
EG
11
Are safety notices displayed, relating to:
10
Section
Page 151
Part
QCS 2014
Section
Page 152
Part

1.1.9 Appendix 2
Unsafe conditions
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
5.
5.
6.
AT
IO
AL
Unsafe acts
Observation report
TE
6.
IN
7.
10.
9.
EG
8.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Location.......................................................................
Name...........................................................................
Date.........................................................
Comments:
This illustration constitutes only an example of the kind of form which could be used during a hazard-
QCS 2014
Section
Page 153
Part
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
spotting exercise of the workplace. Contractors may choose to use this example or create their own.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 154
Part

1.1.9 Appendix 3
Health, Safety and Welfare Inspection Report
Company..................................................................................Report no....................................................................
Workplace.....................................................................................................................................................
Welfare
Storage areas
Canteens
18 Tidiness
34
Services
Rest rooms
19 Flammables
35
Security
Changing rooms
20 Gases
36
Fire precautions
First aid training
21 Fuels, lubricants
37
Electrical
First aid facilities
22 Fire precautions
Washing
23 Tools & equipment
Sanitation
24 Access equipment
Protective clothing
25 Timber
Protective equipment or
substances
26 Dangerous materials
AL
Hoists
39
Tower cranes
Mobile cranes
41
Lifting gear
42
Excavations
43
Transport
44
Other plant
45
Machinery
29 Ladders, trestles
46
Power tools
30 Working platforms
47
Hand tools, equipment
31 Access/egress
48
Tidiness
32 Signs & notices
49
Noise levels
33 Accommodation
50
Traffic management
51
Restricted area
AT
IO
40
38
27 Stores procedures
Offices
Construction site
Accident records
11
Statutory forms,
28 Scaffolding
TE
10
registers, etc.
General cleanliness
13
Fire precautions
14
Environmental factors
15
Seating
16
Access/egress
17
Alarms, notices
EG
IN
12
Action required for items........................................................................................................................................

(Details on reverse of form)
Signature(s).................................................................
Date of inspection.......................................................
(Safety representative(s)
Circulation:
Original
1st copy
2nd copy
3rd copy
(pink)
(blue)
(white)
(yellow)
to safety officer / supervisor

to site manager / agent
to be retained by auditor
for management action and return
QCS 2014
Section
Page 155
Part

1.1.9 Appendix 4
Contractor NCR Template
SAFETY NON-CONFORMANCE REPORT

Contract Name:
Contractors Name:
NCR No:
Contract Number:
Date Opened:
Date Closed:
AL
PART A: DETAILS OF NON-CONFORMANCE:

Details:
Classification of Defect:
Critical
Major
Minor
Cause of Non-conformance:
Material
Process
Equipment
Documentation Reference (QCS, Local Legislation, Other Specification / Standard etc.):
IO
CONSULTANT /ENGINEER
REP*
*Delete as applicable
Work Area / Location:
Title:
Documentation
Date:
AT
Name & Signature:
Unknown
N
R
TE
Reject/Replace
Target Date to Close NCR:
Name & Signature:
Re-work
IN
CONTRACTOR
PART B: PROPOSED REMEDIAL / CORRECTIVE & PREVENTIVE ACTION:

Details:
Repair
Title:
Use as-is
Date:
EG
- Contractors proposals are acceptable and remedial work / Corrective & Preventive Action may proceed.
CONSULTANT
PART C: CONSULTANT ACCEPTANCE OF CONTRACTORS PROPOSALS IN PART B:
- Contractors proposals are unacceptable for the following reasons. (Contractor should revise & resubmit):
Name & Signature:
Title:
Date:
PART D: REMEDIAL WORKS / CORRECTIVE & PREVENTIVE ACTION PROPOSED IN PART B ARE
COMPLETE & READY FOR INSPECTION:
CONTRACTOR
Name & Signature:
Title:
Date:
ENGINEER REP.
PART E: FOLLOW UP & CLOSE-OUT:

- Remedial Works / Corrective & Preventive Action have been undertaken and are acceptable. This NCR may be
closed out.
- Remedial Works / Corrective & Preventive Action undertaken by the Contractor are not acceptable for the
following reasons and this NCR may not be closed out. (Contractor must address these issues):
Name & Signature:
Title:
Date:
QCS 2014
Section
Page 156
Part
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
NOTES AND ATTACHMENTS (Photographs, Sketches etc.):
QCS 2014
Section
Page 157
Part

1.1.10 Safety at Street Works and Road Works
1.1.10.1 Key points
1
Will someone coming along the road or footway from any direction understand exactly what
is happening and what is expected of them?
These Regulations specifies minimum safety requirements for:

signage and lighting
(b)
working on different classes of roads
(c)
methods of traffic control
(d)
speed control of passing traffic
(e)
works near to tramways and railway level crossings.
(f)
Operatives who carry out work on the highway must be competent to do so,
particularly anyone involved in laying out the site, positioning signage or lighting,
implementing traffic control measures and undertaking similar jobs.
IO
AL
(a)
AT
Note:
Section 1, Part 3 of the QCS covers traffic safety management. Section 1, Part 16
of the QCS covers traffic diversions. Section 6 of the QCS covers roadworks..
Health and Safety at Work (Construction Sites)
TE
This places a duty of care on Contractors, employees and the self-employed. It requires not
only the safety of employees to be considered, but also the safety of those affected by the
work i.e. members of the public using the highway.
IN
When you give notice that you intend to start work, they will inform the other utility service
providers in an attempt to co-ordinate works so that the utilities may each carry out their
work during one excavation in order to avoid the same piece of roadway being continually
excavated.
EG
1.1.10.3 Commencement of work
1.1.10.4 Measures necessary where apparatus is affected by major works

(diversionary works)
1
Definition: Apparatus is any pipe or ducting buried within the highway or pavement which is
owned by one of the utilities. It may take the form of gas pipes, water mains, sewers,
electricity cables, telephone cables and, where installed, cable TV cables.
1.1.10.5 Major works

1
The term major works covers works carried out by the Civil Engineering Department
Ministry of Public Works such as:
(a)
the reconstruction or widening of the highway
(b)
works on dual carriageways and at roundabouts
(c)
other similar major works
(d)
the construction of vehicle crossings over footways and verges.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 158
Part
1.1.10.6 Diversionary works

1
The term diversionary works covers:

(a)
works to protect apparatus on site
(b)
works to relocate apparatus elsewhere.
1.1.10.7 Construction risk factors

Construction factors to be considered in deciding whether apparatus is at risk include:
(a)
the removal of the footway or carriageway construction
(b)
construction plant crossing or working in the vicinity of apparatus
(c)
the undermining or removal of side support to apparatus
(d)
any deep construction adjacent to apparatus
(e)
piling or ground consolidation operations.
AL
AT
IO
The construction of vehicle crossings is included because the works put apparatus at risk in
a number of ways, such as:
the majority of 'service' apparatus is located in footways
(b)
the footway construction layers must normally be excavated to accommodate thicker

construction layers
(c)
the new construction may no longer provide adequate cover to apparatus
(d)
the vehicular loading may be greater than the apparatus can withstand
(e)
vibrations from vehicles may weaken joints over a period of time.
TE
(a)
IN
1.1.10.8 Vehicle crossings
1.1.10.9 Minimising construction risks
EG
To minimise construction risks, you should:

(a)
provide suitable and safe vehicle crossing and access points.
(b)
temporarily move apparatus to a safe location, during any construction work.
(c)
protect or temporarily support apparatus in situ.
Note: Methods of supporting apparatus during excavation form part of the assessment
process incorporated within the relevant operative and supervisor qualifications.
1.1.10.10
Safety of gas apparatus
Depth of cover
1
The normal minimum depth of cover for gas mains operating in the low and medium
pressure ranges is:
(a)
600 mm in footway or verges
(b)
750 mm in carriageways
although these figures may vary, as each area gas companies can have its own standards.
In certain circumstances, depending upon the mains material, operating pressure and depth
of cover, it may be acceptable for the mains to remain in situ when only subjected to light
QCS 2014
Section
Page 159
Part
traffic, e.g. a vehicle layby or crossing.

4
It is not generally permissible to allow cast iron mains previously in the footway or verge to
be subjected to vehicular traffic.
Risks during construction
Liaison with the gas services provider during the planning stage is essential because existing
mains, specifically older materials such as cast iron, cannot be raised, lowered or moved
laterally even for a few millimetres without risk. Gas apparatus must not be undermined and
certain apparatus is particularly vulnerable to deep excavations adjacent to the apparatus.
Any proposals to dig deep trenches may mean that gas apparatus will have to be diverted.
1.1.10.11
Decisions on the protection or diversion of water mains are likely to be influenced by

considerations of access to mains for repair purposes.
AL
Safety of water apparatus
IO
Depth of cover
The minimum depth of cover for the three types of water mains, i.e. trunk mains, distributor
mains and service pipes, will vary according to its type.
Further information can be found by consulting with the Qatar General Electricity & Water
Company.
TE
AT
Construction plant and lorries travelling over water apparatus with temporarily reduced cover
can be an unacceptable risk. Therefore, diversions may be necessary unless protective
measures are practicable.
Factors influencing the decision to divert water pipes must include:
IN
the maintenance of the continuity of supply and the water quality
(b)
material types and condition
(c)
the inability to raise, lower or slew pipes
1.1.10.12
(d)
EG
(a)
the possible loss of ground support to pipes with the consequential risk of damage.
Safety of telecommunications apparatus
The need for the rigorous exclusion of moisture from telecommunication cables and joints
places constraints on what can be done to older cables, in respect of their movement during
works.
For maintenance purposes there is the added need for vehicles to have access and be
located at or near jointing chambers.
Preferred depth of cover
Varying depths of cover may be found with this type of equipment, depending on the types
and design of the cables. As a rough guide, television and telecom cabling can be found at
depths varying from 250 mm in the verge or footway up to 900 mm in the carriageway.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 160
Part

According to circumstances, the apparatus may be left in situ if ducts are adequately
protected from construction plant and vehicles by the use of metal plates or tracks.
In some cases, it may be possible to accommodate small temporary or permanent

alterations in the line of a duct track by bodily slewing, raising or lowering a nest of ducts with
the cables in situ.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
1.1.10.13
1
Section
Page 161
Part
Overhead telecommunication lines
Poles must be positioned to:

(a)
minimise the risk of damage to cables by vehicles
(b)
give the minimum inconvenience to pedestrians
(c)
avoid obstructing access to premises.
Road alterations may necessitate the replacement of poles if the clearance under the cables
becomes inadequate.
Minimum heights above ground for overhead telecommunication lines are typically:
(a)
6.1 m at any point over a street
(b)
6.1 m on bus routes
(c)
6.5 m on designated roads.
IO
The following factors should be considered when protecting cables in situ or diverting
apparatus.
AT
Safety of electrical apparatus
1.1.10.14
AL
Underground cables
The need to protect and support potentially hazardous equipment from mechanical
impact, damage, strain and vibration during and after road works.
(b)
A requirement to maintain the security of supply if alternative circuits are not available.
(c)
The operating voltage of the apparatus. Depth of cover
TE
(a)
The depth at which electricity cables or ducts are usually laid in the ground is decided by the
need to avoid undue interference or damage.
Dependent on the type of cable and the power that it may be carrying, the depth of cover
may vary from 450 mm up to 900 mm. It is common to find electrical cables much shallower
than these depths, particularly over bridges or culverts and extreme caution must be
exercised.
In all cases where the depth of cover is likely to increase or decrease, the apparatus owner
must be consulted.
EG
IN
Overhead lines
(a)
The supports and stays of overhead lines may have to be relocated.
(b)
Ground clearance may be affected.
(c)
Earth wires from supports may have to be re-sited.
(d)
Buried pilot wires may be associated with the route of overhead lines.
Height above ground of overhead lines

1
The minimum height of overhead lines above ground varies according to the voltage of the
cable and as directed by the service provider. They can be as low as 5.2 m for lines carrying
33 kV, up to 6.7 m for lines carrying 132 kV.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 162
Part

(a)
Additional protection or temporary diversion may be necessary to prevent damage to

any apparatus during the construction stage.
(b)
The hazards of accidental electrical contact by persons on site must be fully assessed.
(c)
Damage to underground cables can, in certain circumstances, cause widespread loss

of electrical supplies for a long period.
1.1.10.15
1
Signs and equipment
Traffic signs and other apparatus for the control of traffic must comply with relevant Qatar
Work Zone Traffic Management Guide latest revision.
1.1.10.16
Basic principles of signing
AL
Fix signs properly
Visibility of signs
IO
Traffic on two-way roads
AT
Surplus signs
Clearing up
Refer to Qatar Work Zone Traffic Management Guide latest revision.
TE
Be seen
Whether working on site or just visiting, all personnel must wear a high visibility jacket or
waistcoat to BS EN 471 at all times. Ensure the garment is in good condition and is properly
fastened at the front.
Refer to Section 11 Part 1(RD) 1.2.2 (PPE) Personnel Protective Equipment.
Refer to Section 11 Part 2 (SAMAS) 2.3.9 (PPE) Personnel Protective Equipment.
EG
IN
1.1.10.17
1
1.1.10.18
1
Site layout definitions
Signs for Street Works and Road Works
QCS 2014
1.1.10.19
Section
Page 163
Part
Foamed concrete for reinstatement (FCR)
FCR hazards
1
Cement-based materials that can be poured into an excavation to any required depth without
the need for compaction are called FCRs.
Because FCRs are fluid, they present a hazard for children and animals. Reinstatements
must therefore be guarded until a sufficient set has occurred.
Like all cement-based materials, FCRs should be handled with care because:
(a)
excessive contact with mixed FCRs can cause contact dermatitis or skin burns
(b)
excessive exposure to cement dust when FCRs are mixed on site can lead to
respiratory problems.
AL
Precautions
Use barrier creams on hands and wear gloves.
Wear long-sleeved shirts, full length trousers and Wellington boots.
Cement on skin should be washed off immediately.
Reinstatement
1.1.10.20
AT
IO
All utilities that have carried out work upon a highway or pavement, or have employed a
contractor to carry out work on their behalf, are responsible for the satisfactory reinstatement
of the highway or pavement.
Any interim reinstatements must be made permanent within six months.
Reinstatement faults
EG
1.1.10.21
IN
TE
Settlement
This is the most common and obvious fault, and has implications for the short-term
acceptability of the reinstatement to the public, and the long-term cost of maintaining the
highway.
If the reinstatement material is soft in comparison with the surrounding undisturbed material,
the latter will tend to move laterally towards the excavation and downwards until equilibrium
is reached.
The area at risk on each side of the excavation is roughly equal to the thickness of the poorly
compacted material, regardless of the vertical position of such material.
Crowning
4
The practice of deliberately filling the reinstatement high is an acknowledgement that

settlement is going to occur.
The same processes of adjacent ground movement, and road structure cracking that
accompany settlement can also be present with crowning, since they are a function of poor
compaction and little influenced by surface profile.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 164
Part
Edge cracking
6
If the vertical edges between the reinstatement and original surfacing have not been sealed
properly with bitumen, water can enter the joint, freeze, and open up a crack.
Alternatively, relative movement between the reinstatement and the original surface can
cause fretting, initiating a crack which is subsequently worsened by the ingress of water.
Lateral spread in the surfacing
This can be caused by too soft a binder being used in the surfacing which then spreads due
to traffic and temperature.
Bleeding or fatting up
In hot weather the binder softens. If the binder is soft initially, it may rise to the surface and
either be picked up by vehicles or lie on the surface. If this is not rectified, the binder will
harden during the colder months and form a very smooth, slippery surface.
AL
IO
The development of fine surface cracks not accompanied by settlement results from fatigue
of the material under traffic loading.
AT
10
Crazing
Fretting
This is defined as the loss of aggregate particles from the surface of bituminous materials.
12
A variety of causes can be identified, including inadequate compaction, low bitumen content,
and an excessive degree of fluxing for the conditions.
13
The most serious consequence is the increased risk of skidding on the freshly exposed
bitumen and loose particles of aggregate.
Cracking
EG
IN
TE
11
Cracking in reinstatements remote from the edges is generally due to the tensile strain
produced by settlement.
15
Another contributing factor is the use of thin surfacing layers which are consequently
overstressed and suffer fatigue cracking.
14
Open texture
16
Delayed set materials need to be open textured to some degree so that fluxing oils can
evaporate through the air passages.
17
By the same token, water can also soak down through the material into the underlying
material.
18
Open textured materials should be replaced or surface sealed as soon as possible after they
have hardened, especially in winter.
Lateral spread due to trenches in the edge of the carriageway
19
This happens in carriageways where the foundations of edge of the carriageway are
weakened. Consequently they give way and allow the full depth of construction to spread.
QCS 2014
1.1.10.22
Section
Page 165
Part
Surface profile
The following requirements apply to the immediate, interim and permanent reinstatements of
all service providers excavations.
If at any time during the immediate, interim or permanent guarantee periods the surface
profile of a reinstatement exceeds any of the intervention limits, remedial action must be
carried out in order to return the surface profile of the reinstatement to the as-laid condition.
As-laid profile
The reinstatement of any surface must be completed so that the edges of the reinstatement
are flush with the adjacent surfaces and the reinstatement does not show any significant
depression in between.
The maximum allowable tolerance at the edge of the reinstatement between the levels of the
reinstatement and the adjacent surface must not exceed + 6 mm.
AL
Edge depression - intervention
An edge depression is an essential vertical step or trip at the interface of the reinstatement
and the existing surface.
Intervention is required where the depth of any edge depression exceeds 10 mm over a
continuous length of more than 100 mm.
AT
IO
IN
TE
Edge depression limits
EG
Surface depression - intervention

A surface depression is a depressed area within the reinstatement. It generally has smooth
edges and gently sloping sides forming a shallow dish.
Intervention is required where the height of any area of surface crowning spanning more
than 100 mm in any plan dimension exceeds the limits shown in the table.
Surface depression limits
QCS 2014
Section
Page 166
Part
Intervention limits - surface depression

Intervention limit X
(mm)
10
over 400 to 500
12
over 500 to 600
14
over 600 to 700
17
over 700 to 800
19
over 800 to 900
22
over 900
25
up to 400
AL
Reinstatement width
W (mm)
IO
Surface crowning - intervention
Surface crowning is an upstand of the reinstatement above the mean level of the existing
adjacent surfaces.
10
Intervention is required where the height of any area of surface crowning spanning more
than 100 mm in any plan dimension exceeds the limits shown in the table.
TE
EG
IN
Surface crowning limits
AT
Intervention limits - surface crowning
Reinstatement width
W (mm)
Intervention limit Z
(mm)
up to 400
10
over 400 to 500
12
over 500 to 600
14
over 600 to 700
17
over 700 to 800
19
over 800 to 900
22
over 900
25
QCS 2014
Section
Page 167
Part
1.1.10.23
Inspections
During work and after completion, personnel from the Civil Engineering Department Ministry
of Public Works will inspect work being carried out by services providers.
There are two distinct inspections:

(a)
sample inspections
(b)
defect inspections.
1.1.10.24
Sample inspections
These are routine inspections of random samples of services providers work at various
stages of excavation and reinstatement and after reinstatement.
It enables the Civil Engineering Department Ministry of Public Works to monitor the level of
compliance with prescribed standards including:
AL
applicable reinstatement specification
(b)
the requirements for signing, lighting and guarding of works in progress
(c)
verification that requirements for qualified supervisors and operatives are met.
IO
AT
Defect inspection
1.1.10.25
(a)
This is a procedure for dealing with individual reinstatements which fail to comply with the
reinstatement specification.
A special procedure applies to non-complying reinstatements which are causing a danger to

persons using the street.
1.1.10.26
Types of sample inspection
EG
Five stages of inspection have been identified for monitoring purposes:
IN
TE
Type
Category
During excavation
Whilst reinstating (including

interim phase)
Immediately after permanent

reinstatement (within 1 month)
Between 6 and 9 months after

permanent reinstatement
During one month preceding end

of guarantee period
QCS 2014
1.1.10.27
Section
Page 168
Part
Inspection checklists
Two standard forms are used to report on the inspection carried out and include entries on
whether the items checked were acceptable or non-acceptable.
The form for categories 1 and 2 covers signing and guarding requirements in addition to
excavation and reinstatement works.
The form for categories 3, 4 and 5 cover performance requirements of the finished surface.
Sample forms are provided in Appendices 3 and 4.
1.1.10.28
as a result of sample inspections
(b)
by members of the public
(c)
by routine inspections by the Civil Engineering Department Ministry of Public Works
Reinstatements that are found to be defective are divided into two types:
1.1.10.29
Non-complying reinstatements not causing danger
These are reported to the party undertaking the work and normally require remedial action to
be taken within seven days.
AL
(a)
IO
Defective reinstatements may be identified:
AT
Types of defect
IN
TE
1.1.10.30
Non-complying reinstatements causing danger to pedestrians &
vehicles
Where the Civil Engineering Department Ministry of Public Works considers a defect to be
causing danger, the overriding aim is to remove the danger as soon as possible. The exact
procedure may differ in and out of normal working hours.
The Civil Engineering Department Ministry of Public Works may make the site safe by
signing, lighting and guarding and request the attendance of the service provider.
Reported defects trigger a further two inspections.
EG
1.1.10.31
1
Qualifications
Contractors must ensure that:

(a)
the execution of street works is supervised by a person having a prescribed

qualification as a supervisor
(b)
there is on site at all times, whilst work is in progress, at least one person having a
prescribed qualification as a trained operative
QCS 2014
Section
Page 169
Part

1. 1.10 Appendix 1
Safety checklist for the supervisor
Before work starts
Has a site-specific risk assessment been carried out?
Have you planned how you will sign and guard the works?
Have all the appropriate authorities been notified?
Is everyone on the site wearing high-visibility clothing?
What are the correct positions for the first warning sign?
What other signs are needed approaching the works?
What signs are needed at the works?
What length of coned taper is required?
How many lamps and cones will be needed?
10
What width of carriageway can be kept open and will it be enough for two-way traffic?
11
What width of footway can be kept open and will it be enough?
12
What form of traffic control is needed?
13
Have any misleading permanent signs been covered?
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
EG
When work is in progress
If circumstances change, have you altered the signs, cones and lamps to suit?
15
Are signs, cones and lamps being regularly inspected, cleaned, maintained or replaced?
16
Has authorisation been obtained to accommodate any changed circumstances?
17
When traffic control changes are made at night or weekends, have the warning signs been
changed?
18
Are traffic control arrangements reviewed and changed to reduce delays as works change?
19
Are the works adequately signed, guarded and lit for the overnight period?
20
Have you cleared away any mud that may have spread onto the surrounding road or
footway?
14
When work is complete and before you leave

21
Have all signs, cones and lamps been removed?
22
Have all permanent signs been restored?
QCS 2014
Section
Page 170
Part
Have appropriate authorities been notified that work is complete?
24
Have you cleared away any mud that may have spread onto the surrounding road or
footway?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
23
QCS 2014
Section
Page 171
Part

1.1.10 Appendix 2
Situations where further advice may be needed
Examples of situations where an operative will need to consult a supervisor
Where the Civil Engineering Department Ministry of Public Works restricts work to certain
times of the day.
When the roadworks make it impossible for drivers to follow the permanent traffic signs.
At times of poor visibility or bad weather conditions, when additional signs may be required
or work suspended.
When stronger than normal barriers are needed for deeper excavations.
Whether traffic control is needed at a site and which type would be appropriate for the
circumstances.
Where it is intended to use portable traffic signals, as the traffic authority must give approval
if these signals are to be used at a site which contains a junction.
When tailbacks occur at portable traffic signals.
Where a width of at least 3.25 metres cannot be provided on both sides of a site which is in
the middle of a two-lane single carriageway road.
When the works affect a pedestrian crossing, in which case the traffic authority should be
told in advance of the works. This is particularly important in the case of pelican crossings.
10
Where work affects tramways.
11
Where Stop/Go boards are proposed to be used in a shuttle lane containing a junction.
12
Where it may be necessary to close a road and therefore provide a diversion route.
13
When work on the approach to a traffic signalled junction disrupts the traffic flow through the
junction.
14
If work has to be undertaken at permanent traffic signals on a road with a speed limit of 64
km/h or more.
15
Where works are located at roundabouts.
16
Where mobile works are located in the centre of carriageways.
17
Where mobile lane closure techniques are to be used.
18
Where works are to be undertaken within 200 metres of a level crossing or are likely to
cause congestion in the area around a level crossing or where ramps as part of the works
may cause long low vehicles to ground.
19
Where the works are near the junction of roads joining and leaving high speed roads.
20
Where works are located on three-lane single carriageway roads.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
Section
Page 172
Part
Where work is to be carried out over the carriageway and the headroom is reduced.
22
When work is likely to affect any bus route or bus stop.
23
Where work is located near to schools.
24
Where works are located near buildings likely to be used by large numbers of elderly or
disabled people, e.g. old people's homes.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
21
QCS 2014
Section
Page 173
Part

1.10 Appendix 3
Service Provider works
Inspections checklist
FOR USE ON INSPECTIONS 1 AND 2
Authority reference
DATE
Service Providers reference
AL
Location o/s of or from __________________________to __________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Time taken for inspection ____________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Unacceptable
AT
Acceptable
Excavation
EG
Backfill & reinstatement

Surround to apparatus
Backfill material
Compaction
Sub-base
Roadbase
Basecourse
Wearing course
IN
TE
Signing & guarding

Correct type
Distance
Safety zones
Barriers
Traffic control
Pedestrian control
Other
IO
1. Signing & guarding and excavation

Insert inspection number
2. Signing & guarding and backfill and reinstatement
State reasons for unacceptability
Name
Signature
Date
Unseen/inapplicable
QCS 2014
Section
Page 174
Part

1.1.10 Appendix 4
Service Provider works
Inspections checklist
FOR USE ON INSPECTIONS 3, 4 AND 5
Authority reference
DATE
Services Providers reference
Unacceptable
AT
Acceptable
Insert inspection number
IO
3. Immediately after permanent reinstatement (within 1 month)

4. Intermediate (between 6 and 9 months)
5. One month preceding end of guarantee period
AL
Location o/s of or from __________________________to __________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Time taken for inspection ____________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Signature
Date
Name
EG
IN
TE
Edge depression/trips
Surface depressions
Surface crowning
Edge cracking
Texture depth
Surface regularity
Other
Name
Signature
Date
AL
Section
Part
Page 175
AT
IO
QCS 2014

1.1.10 Appendix 5
Size and siting distance: details of signs and cones and safety zone dimensions
Type of road
IN
TE
R
Minimum and
normal maximum
Minimum
siting distance (D) clear visibility Minimum size
of first sign in
to first sign of signs (mm)
advance of lead-in
(metres)
taper (meters)
Minimum
Sideways Details of lead-in cone tapers (but
height of
safety zone see Notes below) Recommended
cones
(S)
lengths
(mm)
Width of Hazards (metres) including safety zones(s)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
60
600
450
0.5m
Length of taper (T) in metres

Minimum number of cones
Minimum number of lamps at night
13
4
3
26
4
3
39
6
5
52
7
6
65
9
8
78
10
9
91
12
11
45 to 110
60
750
450
0.5m

20
4
3
40
6
5
60
8
7
80
10
9
100
13
12
120
15
14
140
17
16
All-purpose dual
carriageway road, restricted
to 64 km/h or less
110 to 275
60
750
450
0.5m

25
4
3
50
7
6
75
10
9
100
13
12
125
15
14
150
18
17
175
21
20
Single carriageway road,

with speed limit of 80 km/h
or more
275 to 450
75
750
450
1.2m

25
4
3
50
7
6
75
10
9
100
13
12
125
15
14
150
18
17
175
21
20
All-purpose dual
carriageway road, with
speed limit of 80 km/h or
more
725 to 1600
105
1200
750
1.2m

32
5
4
64
9
8
96
121
1
128
16
15
160
19
18
192
23
22
224
26
25

restricted to 48 km/h or less
EG
20 to 45

restricted to speeds of 49 to
64 km/h inclusive
Speed limit (km/h)

Minimum longways
clearance (L) metres
48 or less
64
80
95
112
1/2
15
30
60
100
Notes:
1. Lead-in tapers used with traffic control, and all exit tapers, shall be at about 45 to the kerb line with cones spaced 1.2 metres apart.
2. The maximum spacing distance of cones in longitudinal lengths of coning shall be 9 metres, but no fewer than 2 cones shall be used in any length between tapers.
3. In certain circumstances on congested roads with speed limits of 48 km/h or under, the taper may also be reduced to 45.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 176
Part

1.1.11 Setting Up Site
1.1.11.1 Key points
Consideration must be given to the initial design, creation and layout of a site, and its effect
upon the people who work on it, visit it, or live nearby.
The footprint of the structure(s) to be erected will dictate what space remains for other
purposes, which must be used to its best advantage.
Consideration should be given to early contact with local residents, local schools, adjacent
properties etc. prior to, or at the start of, setting up a site.
Time and effort put into properly planning and setting up a site has the distinct potential to
forestall problems as the job progresses.
Note:
Section 1, Part 1 of the QCS covers setting up a site and site management.
AL
CDM places a legal duty upon the client for any project to ensure that every person involved
in the design process and every Contractor is provided with adequate and relevant
information about the site to enable the health and safety of anyone engaged in the
construction phase to be secured. This information should be included in the health and
safety plan which then enables decisions to be taken with regard to setting up the site.
The health and safety plan should give the Contractor details of specific issues that will need
to be considered when setting up a site. These, together with the contracts and architects'
drawings and specifications, will give information about specific factors to be incorporated. It
is likely that the responsibility for setting up the site will in many cases be delegated to the
site manager.
Contractors are require to plan, manage and monitor the construction phase (which includes
setting up a site) to ensure that, so far as is reasonably practicable, it can be carried out
without risks to health and safety.
Suggested factors to be considered when setting up a site can be found in the appendix at
the end of this section.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
1.1.11.3 Temporary works

1
By the nature of construction, much work will not be left in place at the end of the project but
still requires the same care and attention that the main structure attracts. Many accidents
occur through poor planning, design and installation of temporary works which begin as soon
as site set up commences.
These include, but are not confined to:

(a)
Foundation assessment for new porta cabin install, and in particular multi-storey
complexes.
(b)
Excavation support assessment to be carried out for below ground service

connections.
(c)
Services may require protection to prevent damage during site set up. Also material
storage areas should be sited away from shallow services that may be susceptible to
damage.
(d)
Site hoardings and gates to be designed to withstand wind loadings. Particular
QCS 2014
Section
Page 177
Part
attention should be taken with swing gates, and ensuring that these can be managed
by an individual under high wind conditions.
Any supporting structures on a cabin set-up must be designed, e.g. cabins elevated to
provide parking below on congested city sites.
(f)
Generally there will always be a need for craneage on site, so ground bearing
capacities require checking for outrigger loadings on and around the site.
(g)
Any temporary access roads on site should be assessed to ensure that they are
suitable to withstand loadings that may occur during site works.
(h)
Site establishments that are at risk of objects falling from above should be protected
with the use of designed crash decks or fans.
(i)
Where site establishments are close to the public highway or temporary haul roads
where heavy plant is to be used, there must be suitable barriers in place to protect the
office from collision damage.
(j)
When crane lifts are required from a neighbouring street then the temporary works
engineer must be aware of any below ground services, including basements and
subways and so on, and their proximity to the crane.
AL
(e)
IO
1.1.11.4 Human factors
These Regulations require that:'No person may arrange or instruct a

worker to carry out or manage design or construction work unless the
worker is:
competent, or
(b)
under the supervision of a competent person.'
(a)
TE
AT
Competence
This is now the fundamental requirement of the requirement for health and safety in
construction. Competence has been defined as: 'possessing practical and theoretical
knowledge, which combined with actual experience so as to enable errors, faults and
weaknesses to be detected and their importance accurately assessed'.
Depending upon the nature of the site and the type of work to be undertaken, the
competence of people who will come on to the site might be an issue for the person setting
up the site. It may be necessary, for example, to check the competence of those who will;
(a)
EG
IN
erect, alter or dismantle scaffolds
(b)
operate site plant
(c)
dig excavations and install the supports
(d)
install traffic management systems.
In any case the most likely competence required early on is that of a crane coordinator to
ensure the planning and management of lifts associated with site cabins and welfare units.
Consultation
Contractors are required to consult on matter of health and safety. Generally, this may be
summarised as:
(a)
Contractors must consult their employees, or their representatives on issues of heath

and safety
(b)
employees must be able to raise any concerns they have over health and safety with
the Contractors either directly or through their health and safety representative
QCS 2014
Section
Page 178
Part
As part of the process of setting up a site, consideration must be given to how effective
Contractors/employee consultation on matters of health and safety will be achieved.
Co-operation
CDM requires that everyone concerned in a construction project, whether a contractor, selfemployed person or an individual worker, must- co-operate with each other in the interests of
health and safety.
How such co-operation can be effectively achieved, must be decided at the stage where a
site is being set up.
Contact with the emergency services
It is advisable:
to inform the emergency services of the location of the site, particularly if it is difficult
to locate
(b)
particularly to inform the fire and rescue service if materials that represent a significant
fire risk will be present on site
(c)
if considered necessary, to display in the site office a road map showing the quickest
route to the nearest hospital with an Accident and Emergency Department in the site
office
(d)
on larger sites, to identify the position of emergency controller to oversee site actions
and communication with emergency services.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
1.1.11.5 Site features and facilities
TE
Existing buildings, features and ground conditions

Consider the current and past uses of the site.
This could involve issues such as:
IN
the existence of contaminated ground and the possible need for extensive site
transport movements, both within and off site
(b)
ground water levels and/or underground water sources and the prevention of their
contamination
EG
(a)
(c)
the previous storage of dangerous goods or hazardous substances in buildings,

cellars or tanks
(d)
the location of underground services and whether they have been, or need to be,
isolated or protected from surcharging, for example stockpiling heavy materials over
shallow services
(e)
the location of overhead cables and whether they need to be isolated or repositioned
(f)
the need for equipment to create barriers and goalposts where overhead cables cross
or border the site and remain live
(g)
if working on an existing structure, whether the electrical distribution system is still live
and whether or not it should be
(h)
the condition of existing buildings -strength/condition of roofs, floors, stairs, hand-rails,

walls and structural members. Advice from a structural engineer may be required to
assess the suitability of a structure for its intended use
(i)
the possible presence of asbestos (where existing surveys exist these should be
included)
QCS 2014
Section
Page 179
Part
(j)
the possible presence of other hazardous substances, viruses and organisms such as
lead, leptospirosis and anthrax
(k)
the possible need for demolition
(l)
the possible need for site lighting
(m)
the existence of a health and safety file for work on existing structures.
1.1.11.6 Site security

Ideally, the site boundary will be secured immediately on possession, with lockable gates
and suitable fencing or hoarding to prevent unauthorised access by the general public,
particularly children, and to prevent the unauthorised tipping of waste. Where it is not
possible to secure the whole site, adequate steps must be taken to ensure that potential
locations of hazardous operations can be appropriately secured.
Gates and hoardings should be designed and able to withstand wind loadings. Particular
attention should be given to swing gates to ensure they can be operated by one person and
stops should be in place to prevent gates swinging into pedestrian/public areas.
In many cases it will be necessary to make separate provision for the security of individual
items of equipment and plant.
IO
AL
Access will be needed not only for plant, other vehicles and equipment, but also for people,
therefore segregation is the safest method. Ideally traffic routes will be organised so that
pedestrians are not put at risk by incorporating such measures as:
site entrances and exits positioned so as not to cause a traffic hazard on the public
road
(b)
segregated traffic and pedestrian routes and, if practical and necessary, segregated
site entrances
(c)
one-way systems
(d)
turning areas to avoid the need to reverse
(e)
speed limits that must be enforced as necessary
(f)
reversing vehicles being under the control of a qualified signaller
(g)
EG
IN
TE
(a)
AT
1.1.11.7 Pedestrian/traffic routes, movement of plant and people
the need for published traffic priorities where site vehicles and private traffic both use
site roads
(h)
the need for the provision of traffic control measures (e.g. traffic lights), both on and off
site
(i)
the provision of parking areas for delivery vehicles which are waiting to unload; if
necessary, for example tightly-bound city centre sites, this may need to be off site
(j)
the provision of a car park for privately owned vehicles which preferably:
(i)
is entered directly from a public road without having to pass through

construction areas
(ii)
does not permit access to the construction area by private vehicles
(iii)
is connected to the site offices and welfare facilities by a safe, segregated

pedestrian route
(k)
the possible need for a vehicle wheel wash where there is the potential for mud or
other debris to be deposited on public roads
(l)
the possible need for a mechanical road sweeper to keep site and public roads clear
QCS 2014
Section
Page 180
Part
of mud or other debris
(m)
the provision of a secure vehicle compound.
When planning traffic/pedestrian routes, consideration should also be given to the possible
need for rapid emergency evacuation of the site and/or the attendance of the emergency
services.
1.1.11.8
Provision must be made for the safe storage of materials and equipment. Consideration
should be given to:
ensuring that site roads and any access road to the site are kept clear of obstructions
(b)
where possible avoiding 'double handling' by arranging for items (particularly heavy
items that may have to be moved by hand) to be stored close to where they will be
needed
(c)
the provision of proper storage facilities for flammable substances such as bottled
gases and fuels
(d)
ensuring that materials that are delivered on pallets are stored in stable stacks, with a
safe limit on the height of each
(e)
ensuring that there is no chance of stored materials toppling and breaching the site
boundary
(f)
the possible need for access by lifting equipment such as telehandlers, mobile and
tower cranes.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
1.1.11.9 Utility services
(a)
a 230 volt (mains) supply (or a 415 volt, 3-phase supply where there will be heavy
electrical loads such as a tower crane)
(b)
a supply of fresh water. This should be tested to ensure it is of suitable quality for
drinking and, if a new connection, should only be made by Qatar General Electricity &
Water Company
(c)
the drainage of surface and foul water. New connections should only be made with the
knowledge of the local authority. Particular attention should be given if hydrocarbons
are to be used extensively near to watercourses. Petrol interceptors may be required,
as are discharge consents if discharging into rivers
(d)
the provision of gas or oil for heating
(e)
appropriate telecommunication links
(f)
the provision of a stand-by generator and the appropriate fuel.
1.1.11.10
1
EG
IN
Where necessary, early consideration must be given to the need for the installation of utility
services to support the running of the welfare facilities and other site accommodation. This
could include:
TE
Materials storage and lay-down areas
110 volt power system
Whilst not strictly speaking a 'utility', consideration must be given to whether a 110 volt
distribution system will be required, and if so:
(a)
is there a live 230/415 volt system to power it?
(b)
who will design and install it?
QCS 2014
(c)
1.1.11.11
Section
Page 181
Part
who will test and inspect to ensure it meets British (BS) or other International
standards?
Work at height
If work at height is to be carried out, it must be done so safely using the most appropriate
access equipment.
If scaffolds (including alloy towers) are to be used, they must:

(a)
only be erected, altered or dismantled by a competent person, or someone who is

under the direct supervision of a competent person
(b)
be periodically inspected by a competent person
If mobile elevating platforms are to be used, they must be suitable for the job and only
operated by competent persons.
Ladders should only be used in situations where the findings of a risk assessment show it is
not reasonably practicable to use other safety access equipment.
Excavations
IO
1.1.11.12
AL
If excavations are to be dug, which by virtue of their depth, size or position could lead to an
injury if a person, material or vehicle fell into them, suitable equipment such as guard-rails
will be required to form an effective barrier around each such excavation.
Where the sides of excavations have to be supported to prevent the fall of soil, rock or other
material, the system of support must be designed by a competent person.
Usually the competent person, a temporary works co-ordinator, will gather such information
as required including ground reports and liaise with designers to ensure adequate support is
designed and installed.
A safe means of access and egress must be provided for the people who will work in
excavations. Where dictated by the depth, this will usually be a ladder.
If vehicles have to approach excavations for any reason, for example to tip material, the
vehicle should be under the control of a qualified signaller and suitable anchored stop-blocks
(or a similar device) must be employed to prevent vehicles getting too near the edge. This
must be communicated to the temporary works co-ordinator to ensure the design considers
this activity.
EG
IN
TE
AT
1.1.11.13
The site office
It is acknowledged that, depending upon the size of the site and the nature of the project, the
term 'site office' can cover office accommodation ranging from a single portable cabin to an
office complex comprising multiple-cabins on more than one level in which non-construction
workers, such as administrative staff, are employed.
Administrative staff, and others who may not usually carry or wear PPE, should ideally have
access to site offices from outside the site via a safe route that does not entail passing
through the construction area.
The site office should offer reasonably comfortable accommodation for all types of weather
and normal ranges of temperature.
When setting up the site office the following must be considered:
QCS 2014
Section
Page 182
Part
a suitable and safe form of heating, including the safe location of LPG cylinders if used
(b)
the need for an electrical supply (with each circuit protected by a residual current
device [RCD]) and telecommunications
(c)
obtaining a suitable, fully stocked first-aid kit unless first-aid facilities are located
elsewhere
(d)
obtaining a suitable accident book
(e)
displaying information on how to identify and contact site first aider(s), where the firstaid box is located and the actions to take in an emergency
(f)
displaying a copy of the Contractors Health and Safety Policy
(g)
obtaining and displaying as necessary appropriate company-specific information
(h)
obtaining registers for the recording of statutory inspections, for example inspections
of excavations and scaffolds
(i)
compiling registers for other purposes, for example:

portable electrical appliance (PAT) testing
(ii)
tests of the fire alarm and other emergency procedures
(iii)
a site-visitors' log
IO
(i)
Welfare facilities
AT
1.1.11.14
AL
(a)
Workers will need clean and hygienic portable buildings or suitably protected areas where
they can change and securely store clothing, make a hot drink, heat and eat their meals, and
take shelter in the event of bad weather.
Workers will also need access to clean, well maintained toilets and appropriate washing
facilities with hot and cold or warm water, soap and towels, for example basins or sinks large
enough to wash their faces, hands and forearms in. In appropriate circumstances it will be
necessary for showers to be provided.
Where there will be males and females on site appropriate provision must be made in
relation to:
EG
IN
TE
toilets
(b)
washing (and if necessary shower) facilities
(c)
(d)
1.1.11.15
(a)
changing rooms
rest facilities.
First aid
The appropriate number of qualified first aiders and/or appointed persons for the job will be
required. Details of the first aider(s) and the location of first-aid kit(s), with details of
emergency telephone numbers, must be displayed and given out during site induction.
Where justified by the size of the site, or in a small number of cases the type of work being
carried out, it may be decided that it would be beneficial to establish a first-aid room staffed
by a qualified nurse at all times that work is being carried out.
1.1.11.16
1
Fire safety
Consideration must be given to the level of fire risk arising out of the work to be undertaken
(not forgetting the masses of paperwork, drawings etc. that can accumulate in site offices)
and the nature of any other flammable substances that may be stored and used.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 183
Part
A sufficient number of fire extinguishers appropriate to the type of fire which may occur
should be obtained and located in highly visible fire points in appropriate places, including
office and welfare accommodation.
Fire exit and emergency escape route signs must be obtained and displayed and must, in
the interests of health and safety, be illuminated in periods of darkness, as necessary.
An early decision must be made with regard to whether smoking will be allowed in any area
of the site. If smoking is to be allowed in certain areas, those areas must be equipped with
signs that clearly indicate the extent of the 'smoking area'. Equipment must be provided for
the safe disposal of spent smoking materials. Official signs indicating that smoking is not
permitted must be clearly displayed at the entrance(s) to all site accommodation.
1.1.11.17
Emergency plans
During the setting up of a site provision must be made for dealing with emergency situations
which may involve evacuation of the site. It is likely that this will be simpler for an open site
than, say, for the refurbishment of a multi-floor structure.
Liaison with the Civil Defence (Fire Department) may be useful in identifying a fire-fighting
strategy within the plan and locations of fire-fighting cores and dry riser locations.
Emergency escape routes must be determined, identified by appropriate signs and

communicated to all on site. On larger, more complex sites it may be necessary to:
AT
IO
AL
compile a fire safety/emergency evacuation plan, which may or may not as

appropriate, be a part of the construction health and safety plan
(b)
appoint evacuation wardens who have responsibility for ensuring that particular areas
of the site has been totally evacuated.
TE
(a)
The location of a suitable assembly point, which can accommodate the maximum number of
people expected on site and is a safe distance from the potential hazard, must be
determined. On larger sites it may be considered appropriate to designate more than one
assembly point.
However, unless the evacuation procedure is well thought out and effectively communicated
to all on site, this has the potential to make accounting for everyone more difficult.
Information must be displayed regarding actions to be taken in the event of an emergency,

for example:
EG
IN
(a)
what the fire/evacuation alarm sounds like
(b)
the days/times that tests will be carried out
(c)
where the fire assembly point(s) is/are.
Suitable arrangements should also be provided for dealing with environmental emergencies
and incidents such as the accidental release of oils or fuels. The site must consider the type
and location of spill kits and any necessary training in their proper use and disposal.
1.1.11.18
Contractors have a legal duty to provide the necessary personal protective equipment (PPE)
for their employees. Depending upon the type of work that will be undertaken and other
control measures that are in place, it is quite likely that a stock of appropriate PPE will be
required at the time the site is set up.
It may be necessary to discuss with a reputable PPE supplier the standards of PPE required
QCS 2014
Section
Page 184
Part
where there is a choice, for example when purchasing:

(a)
respiratory protective equipment
(b)
eye protection
(c)
hearing protection
(d)
gloves
1.1.11.19
It is usual to post one or more signs at site entrances to inform all persons who enter of the
health and safety requirements of the site. It is usual for these to specify:
the minimum standard of personal protective equipment required (usually safety
helmet, safety boots and hi-vis waistcoat)
(b)
that all visitors must report to the site office.
(c)
Other signs that must be obtained for display are:
(d)
a selection of appropriate, mandatory, warning, prohibition and safe condition signs
(e)
appropriate traffic-management signs
(f)
if appropriate, signs to indicate the presence of liquid petroleum gases and other
flammable substances, particularly vehicle fuels
(g)
other fire safety signs as are necessary, for example to indicate the location of fire
points.
IO
AT
Environmental considerations
IN
1.1.11.21
TE
Consideration must be given to the quantities and types of waste (possibly including food
waste) that might be generated and arrangements made for its lawful disposal.
Much construction work has the potential to impose a severe impact upon the environment.
Measures must be taken to prevent environmental damage including:
EG
Waste disposal
1.1.11.20
AL
(a)
(a)
defining responsibilities on site for managing the environmental issues
(b)
making everyone on site aware of the project environmental issues through inductions
and briefings
Signs and notices
(c)
identifying and protecting any water courses and drainage systems
(d)
implementing measures that will avoid the spillage of harmful fluids, but where spillage
does occur, preventing it from seeping into the ground and contaminating water
courses, including sources of drinking water
(e)
the appropriate handling, storage and disposal of construction waste and other types
of waste
(f)
adequately protecting the site against theft and damage
(g)
identifying and dealing with the existence of protected species of mammals, insects,
plants etc.
(h)
reducing noise pollution as far as it is reasonable to do so, which may involve

restricting some construction processes to certain times of the day
(i)
providing well-maintained haul routes to reduce dust, mud and noise
(j)
reducing the amount of substances used that give off environmentally damaging
vapours or fumes
QCS 2014
Section
Page 185
Part
paying appropriate attention to other sources of nuisance to neighbouring properties
and the public in general
(l)
not leaving the engine of any item of construction plant running when it is not in use
(m)
maintaining good housekeeping to prevent wind-blown debris or waste leaving the site
and to reduce damage and waste to materials
(n)
turning off other power sources when the equipment is not in use.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(k)
QCS 2014
Section
Page 186
Part

1.1.11 Appendix
Setting up site checklist
This checklist suggests the common factors that should be checked when setting up a site; the list is
not exhaustive. If necessary, refer back to the main text of this section, or other sections that cover
specific topic areas, for greater detail.
Human factors
Competencies
Y
Have measures been put in place for accurately assessing the competency
of everyone who will come on to the site? In particular, attention to
competence should be applied to:
1.1 carrying out risk assessments and extracting the significant findings
1.2 writing method statements and disseminating the content
AL
1.
1.3 raising, monitoring compliance with and cancelling permits to work
IO
1.4 carrying out any type of training
AT
1.5 designing, erecting, altering or dismantling scaffolds (including alloy

tower scaffolds)
1.6 carrying out scaffold inspections

1.7 raising scaffold hand-over certificates
1.8 planning, supervising and working at height, using any means of access
TE
1.9 designing and installing excavation support systems
IN
1.10 carrying out the inspection of excavations

1.11 the identification and isolation (as necessary) of buried services
EG
1.12 operating all types of construction plant

1.13 carrying out inspections and examinations of construction plant
1.14 planning and supervising lifting operations
1.15 inspecting and examining lifting equipment and accessories

1.16 planning, supervising and carrying out work in confined spaces
1.17 carrying out rescues from confined spaces
1.18 the use of any power tool or hand tool that has the potential to be
harmful if not properly maintained, inspected and/or used
1.19 assessing exposure to noise and/or vibration
1.20 the use of any flammable or hazardous substance
1.21 any work on the public highway
1.22 designing temporary works for site establishment
continued on next page
N/A
QCS 2014
Section
Page 187
Part
continued from previous page

The spaces below are for competences, not included above, to be added.
1.23
1.24
1.25
1.26
1.27
1.28
1.29
1.30
Consultation
Have measures been put in place to ensure effective two-way consultation
and communication on matters of health and safety?
AL
2.
Co-operation
Have measures been put in place to ensure effective co-operation between

everyone who will be on site?
IO
3.
Has contact been made with the relevant emergency services to ensure
that they have sufficient information to deal with any foreseeable
emergency that might arise?
TE
Site features and facilities
4.
AT
Contact with the emergency services
3.
4.
EG
2.
Have checks been made of the previous use of existing structures and the
land?
Have checks been carried out for land that may be contaminated, for
example, by leakage of fuels or oils?
1.
IN
Existing buildings, features and ground conditions
Have the appropriate authorities been asked for details of water levels
and/or underground water sources?
Is there evidence of previous storage in buildings, cellars or tanks of
dangerous goods or hazardous substances?
5.
Has all information, relating to any underground services, been provided?
6.
Have the appropriate measures been taken to prevent an electrical hazard

from overhead cables?
7.
Has the existing electrical distribution system been made safe?
8.
With regard to buildings on the site, is the strength/condition of roofs, floors,

stairs, guard-rails, walls and structural members known?
N/A
QCS 2014
Section
Page 188
Part

9.
Have checks been made to establish whether or not asbestos is present?
10.
Have checks been made to establish the presence of other hazardous

agents, such as chemicals, gases, viruses or organisms?
11.
Will any demolition required be carried out by competent contractors?
12.
Has the delivery and installation of site-lighting been arranged?
13.
Has the Health and Safety File for any existing structure(s) been consulted?
Site security
2.
N/A
N/A
Has the delivery and erection of materials to form a secure site boundary
been arranged?
Have those people who will be on site as it is set up been informed of the
security arrangements?
AL
1.
Have out-of-hours contact details been displayed at the site entrance?
4.
Have separate security measures been put in place to prevent theft and to
prevent access into identified hazardous areas?
5.
Is a plan in place that outlines the actions that should be taken to deal with
unauthorised visitors?
AT
IO
3.
TE
Management of vehicular and pedestrian traffic
Have traffic routes been designed to segregate vehicles from pedestrians?
2.
Have site entrances and exits been positioned so as not to cause a traffic
hazard on the public road?
3.
Have traffic management measures such as one-way systems, speed limits

and turning areas been implemented?
4.
Are there clear priorities, for example using traffic lights, where site transport
and private vehicles use the same routes?
5.
Has a safe area been designated for delivery vehicles waiting to unload?
6.
Has a car-park for private vehicles, with a safe entrance and exits (separate
exit for pedestrians), been established?
Have measures been taken to prevent mud and debris from accumulating on
public roads?
7.
EG
IN
1.
8.
Has a secure construction plant compound been established?
9.
Have haul roads been designed to prevent blind spots and prevent build up
at pedestrian crossings?
QCS 2014
Section
Page 189
Part
Materials storage and lay-down areas
1.
Have these areas been planned so that traffic and pedestrian routes will not
be obstructed?
2.
Have these areas been positioned to avoiding the 'double handling' of heavy
items that may have to be moved by hand?
3.
Have proper storage areas been created for flammable substances, such as
bottled gases?
4.
Are palletised materials stored safely, with stacks of materials stable and
limited in height?
5.
Are storage areas located away from site boundaries, particularly in areas
where the general public have access to the other side?
N/A
N/A
N/A
Have arrangements been made for the installation and commissioning of a

suitable electrical supply?
Is a supply of fresh drinking water available?
IO
2.
AT
1.
AL
Utility services
Have arrangements been made for the installation and commissioning of

drainage systems for surface and foul water?
4.
Have arrangements been made for the supply of other types of heating
fuel?
5.
Have arrangements been made for the installation of the required number
of telephone lines and other forms of telecommunication links?
6.
Have appropriate measures been taken for the supply of stand-by power?
7.
Have arrangements been made for the design and installation of a 110 volt
distribution system?
Working at height
EG
IN
TE
3.
1.
Have arrangements been made for scaffolds to be erected, altered and

dismantled by a competent person?
2.
Have arrangements been made for the statutory inspection of scaffolds to

be carried out by a competent person?
3.
Will all work at height be planned, supervised and carried out by a

competent person?
4.
In all cases, will work at height be carried out using the most appropriate
means of access to height?
5.
Have arrangements been made to ensure that competent operators will be

available for mobile elevating work platforms (MEWPS)?
QCS 2014
Section
Page 190
Part

6.
Has consideration been given to whether the ground conditions are suitable
for the use of MEWPs?
7.
Will a survey be carried out to investigate the existence of cellars, drains and
other underground voids?
8.
Has consideration been given to the possible existence of overhead power

lines or other high-level hazards?
9.
Will the use of ladders be restricted to tasks where it is not reasonably

practicable to use an alternative, safer means of access?
Excavations
Y
Has suitable equipment been obtained to form an adequate barrier (for
example guard-rails) around each excavation into which a fall could cause a
person to be injured?
2.
Where installed, will the system of supporting the sides of all excavations
be designed and installed by a competent person?
3.
Will a safe method of installing the supports, that does not involve anyone
going into an unsupported trench, be employed?
4.
Will a safe means of access/egress be provided (where necessary) for each

excavation?
5.
Where vehicles have to approach an excavation:

5.1 will they be under the control of a trained signaller?
AT
IO
AL
1.
IN
7.
Have arrangements been made for the statutory inspections of excavations

to be carried out by a competent person?
If the sides of the excavation are sloped or battered, is the angle of batter
sufficient to prevent collapse?
EG
6.
TE
5.2 will anchored stop-blocks (or a similar device) be installed to prevent the
vehicle over-running?
Has consideration been given to the possibility of any excavation affecting

the stability of neighbouring structures?
9.
Will materials, spoil or plant be stored away from the edges of the
excavation, to reduce the likelihood of collapse?
8.
N/A
QCS 2014
Section
Page 191
Part
The site office
1.
2.
3.
4.
N/A
N/A
Have arrangements been made for the delivery and siting of adequate
office accommodation, including carrying out any enabling work?
Is the site office located so that it can be accessed without the need to wear
PPE?
Does the site office have a safe form of heating, with the fuel stored in a
safe manner?
Are the electrical circuits in the office protected by an RCD and regularly
tested and inspected?
Is there a suitable, fully stocked first-aid kit in the office?
6.
If the answer to 5 is 'NO', have alternative provisions been made for first
aid?
7.
Is information on how to locate and identify first aiders displayed?
8.
Is a copy of the company Health and Safety Policy displayed?
9.
10.
Have registers been set up for recording statutory inspections?

Have other registers, as may be necessary, been set up?
12.
Are emergency plans and routes to the nearest hospital available?
AT
IO
AL
5.
Welfare facilities
Are adequate welfare facilities available in respect of:
1.
toilets which are adequately ventilated and lit?
1.2
washing facilities (including showers if necessary), which are

equipped with hot and cold (or warm) water, soap and towels or a
means of drying?
rest areas (including facilities for a female person who is pregnant, or
a nursing mother, to lie down)?
IN
EG
1.3
TE
1.1
drying and/or changing rooms with secure lockers?
1.5
1.6
where necessary, separate facilities for men and women?

the cleaning and keeping in good order of welfare facilities?
1.7
a supply of fresh drinking water complete with suitable cups, unless

from a 'water fountain' or similar?
1.4
QCS 2014
Section
Page 192
Part

1.8
a means of preparing hot food?
1.9
arrangements to enable food to be eaten in reasonable comfort (an

adequate number of tables and chairs with backs)?
1.10
a means of boiling water?
First aid
Y
Have sufficient and suitable first-aid kits been obtained?
2.
Has an assessment been made as to whether more extensive first-aid

facilities are required?
3.
Have 'travelling first-aid' kits been obtained for site vehicles and anyone who
works in a remote location?
4.
Are sufficient qualified first aiders available?
5.
Are sufficient 'appointed persons' available?
6.
7.
Has initial or refresher first-aid training been arranged as necessary?

Has a scheme whereby first aiders can be quickly located and identified
been implemented?
8.
Has an adequate number of first-aid signs been obtained and displayed?
9.
Has an accident book been obtained and made available?
N/A
NA
AT
IO
AL
1.
TE
Fire safety
Has an adequate number of serviceable fire extinguishers of the

appropriate type(s) been obtained?
2.
Has an appropriate number of site-staff been trained in the selection and

use of hand-held fire extinguishers?
3.
Are fire extinguishers located at well-signed and easy to find fire-points?
4.
Has an effective fire alarm system been devised?
5.
Will everyone on site be made aware of what the fire alarm sounds like?
6.
Has a means of preventing the accumulation of flammable waste material

been established?
7.
Have suitable and sufficient fire safety signs been obtained and displayed?
8.
Have proper storage areas for flammable substances like LPG been
established?
9.
Will smoking be allowed in well-defined safe areas of the site and/or

welfare facilities?
10.
Have signs been erected to clearly define the boundaries of the areas in
which smoking is allowed?
EG
IN
1.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 193
Part

11. Has equipment been obtained and positioned to enable the safe disposal
of spent smoking materials?
12.
Has a time been set each day, after which smoking is not allowed?
Y
N/A
1. Has an emergency evacuation plan been drawn up and communicated to all

on site?
2. Will a nominated person monitor the evacuation plan and ensure that it is
always up to date?
AL
3. Has an adequate number of 'evacuation wardens' been appointed and

informed of their duties?
4. Have one or more assembly points, which are a safe distance from the
potential hazard, been selected?
IO
5, Have 'assembly point' signs been obtained and clearly displayed?

6. Has everyone on site been informed of:
AT
6.1 the location of the assembly point to which they are to report in the event
of an evacuation?
6.2 what the evacuation signal sounds like?
6.3 what to do when they get to the assembly point?
TE
6.4 the days/times when the evacuation signal will be tested?
IN
6.5 the fact that the evacuation plan will be periodically practised on a 'nonotice' basis?
EG
Has an assessment of the needs for personal protective equipment (PPE)

been made, engaging the assistance and advice of a reputable supplier if
necessary?
2.
Has everyone on site been issued with all of the PPE that they need to
carry out the jobs allotted to them?
3.
Does everyone on site know how and where to obtain any extra PPE that
they might need in the future?
4.
Does everyone on site know how to obtain replacement PPE for that which
is lost or defective?
5.
Has a PPE issue log been started?
1.
N/A
QCS 2014
Section
Page 194
Part
Signs and notices
1.
Has a 'combination' safety sign been erected at each site entrance to inform
everyone who needs access of the minimum standards of safety on site?
2.
Has an adequate selection of warning, prohibition, mandatory and safe

condition signs been obtained and displayed?
3.
Has an adequate stock of other signs, such as traffic management signs,

been obtained and displayed?
4.
Has a person been nominated to ensure that additional signs are erected and
existing signs are moved or removed to reflect changing conditions as the job
progresses?
N/A
N/A
AL
Waste disposal
Have arrangements been made for the delivery of sufficient skips or other
suitable containers to enable different types of waste materials to be stored?
2.
Have the arrangements for the segregation and disposal of waste been
communicated to everyone on site?
3.
Has an area of the site that is readily accessible by large vehicles been set
aside for the siting of skips?
AT
IO
1.
Has responsibility for environmental management, monitoring and

inspection been defined?
2.
Has the potential overall environmental impact of the project been

considered?
3.
Have the project environmental issues been included in the site induction?
4.
Have measures been put in place to avoid or reduce the more obvious
environmental problems, such as:
6.1 the spillage of environmentally damaging fluids?
EG
IN
TE
1.
6.2 any spillage that does occur is not able to seep into the ground,
drainage systems or watercourses?
6.3 the management, storage and disposal of waste materials?
6.4 noise and dust pollution, arising out of construction activities?
6.5 the number and quantity of substances used that give off
environmentally damaging vapour or fumes?
6.6 air pollution resulting from the unnecessary running of construction plant
engines?
5.
Has the existence of protected species of mammals, insects, plants etc.

been investigated?
6.
If protected species are known to be on site, have appropriate measures

been taken to ensure that they remain undisturbed or undamaged?
7.
Have arrangements been defined to adequately deal with environmental

emergencies such as the accidental release of oil and fuels?
N/A
AL
Section
Part
Page 195
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Action plan
Human factors
TE
R
Question
number
Section
EG
IN
Competence
Consultation
If you have answered NO to any of the questions in the checklist, please provide further information in the columns below.
Co-operation
Contact with the

emergency services
Action to be taken
By whom
Date for
completion
Comments
AL
Section
Part
Question
number
TE
R
IN
Site security
EG
Management of vehicular
and pedestrian traffic
Materials storage and

lay-down areas
Working at height
Excavations
Action to be taken
Existing buildings,
features and ground
conditions
Utility services
AT
IO
Site features and facilities

Section
Page 196
QCS 2014
By whom
Date for
completion
Comments
AL
Section
Part
Page 197
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Question
number
Section
Action to be taken
TE
R
The site office
IN
Welfare facilities
Fire safety
EG
First aid
Personal protective
equipment
Signs and notices
By whom
Date for
completion
Comments
AL
Section
Part
Page 198
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Question
number
Section
Action to be taken
TE
R
Waste disposal
EG
IN
Environmental
considerations
By whom
Date for
completion
Comments
QCS 2014
Section
Page 199
Part

1.1.12 Security on Site
1.1.12.1 Key points
Generally, site security is as much about the health and safety of 'other persons' as it is
about contractors, employees and other people who would be expected to be on site.
Site security must be effective both during and out of working hours.
Effective site security will keep children and other trespassers off the site; even outside
working hours, construction sites can be hazardous places for the unwary, particularly
children.
There are actions that can be carried out to prevent the theft of construction plant.
The nature of some sites means that whilst they cannot be completely fenced off from the
public, for example scaffolds erected in public places, unauthorised access must be
prevented.
AL
IO
Note: Section 1, Part 3 of the QCS covers site access and Section 1, Part 4 covers site
protection.
AT
Security is a subject that in many circumstances is closely associated with health and safety
on building, construction or civil engineering sites. A poor standard of security with the
resulting risk of trespass, theft and damage can have implications for the health and safety of
the trespassers and possibly the people who are authorised to be there.
There are several reasons why the security of a site might be breached, not all of which are
malicious.
There are common examples of construction activities taking place in premises, which are
still partially occupied by the owner, landlord, members of their staff and possibly members
of the public. For example, where construction work is taking place in a:
(b)
(c)
supermarket or department store that is still open to the public but is undergoing an
extension or renovation
(a)
EG
IN
TE
newly built, partially occupied housing estate

block of occupied flats undergoing maintenance or renovation.
It might be possible for unauthorised persons to inadvertently stray into the site quite
innocently unless adequate security measures are taken.
However, in many cases, the reasons for trespass have been shown to be malicious. This is
usually for the purpose of theft or criminal damage, both of which can have health and safety
implications for site staff when they return to work.
Children might also try to gain access to sites out of curiosity and the mistaken belief that
they are safe and 'fun' places to play.
Equipment designed to physically control access to sites is readily available. Even a modest
investment (in terms of finance, time and effort) can easily result in a significant improvement
in the standard of site security and therefore reduce the potential for financial and other
losses.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 200
Part
1.1.12.3 Site visitors

1
It can be taken that a 'visitor', for the purpose of these Regulations, can be anyone who is
not an employee. Therefore, a visitor may be any person who is a lawful visitor with a
genuine reason to visit the premises, or a trespasser, who at any time during the day or the
night may be intent on committing a crime.
1.1.12.4 Lawful visitors

Examples of visitors who may have reason to visit construction sites and are:
(a)
postmen/women and couriers
(b)
telephone engineers and other communications specialists
(c)
electricity, gas, telephone and water company employees
(d)
visiting engineers and other construction professionals
(e)
customers and other beneficial visitors
(f)
Administrative Authority Workplace Inspectors
(g)
QCS Inspecting Officers
(h)
delivery drivers
(i)
trainees.
AL
1.1.12.5 Unlawful visitors and trespassers
Examples of unlawful visitors are:

(a)
any person entering the site for the purpose of theft or to commit criminal damage
(b)
any person entering the site by accident
(c)
any (unauthorised ) person deliberately passing through the site, e.g. as a short-cut
(d)
children entering the site to play.
In respect of all trespassers, including those with criminal intent and children, it is illegal to
set any form of trap or to deliberately do anything that is intended to cause injury to, or to
damage the health of, the intruder.
TE
AT
IO
1.1.12.6 Foreseeable risks
Employees may be well aware of the risks, and have safe systems of work, use protective
equipment or have procedures that would be unknown to a visitor. In these cases, the
occupier must make suitable provision for the protection of all visitors.
An example might be the provision of eye, foot or head protection where necessary, or
barriers to keep visitors away from machines.
EG
IN
1.1.12.7 Children and young persons
If children or young persons are allowed on the premises (as children of customers, invited
school parties, and so on), it must be remembered that they cannot be considered to have
any concept of hazard and risk and cannot be expected to behave as would an adult.
Whereas an adult may stand behind a guardrail that is set at a height of 1 metre, a small
child could walk under it. It may be necessary to install two intermediate guard-rails at 330
mm and 660 mm.
It should also be appreciated that children may not be able to read, understand or comply
with safety signs and notices.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 201
Part
1.1.12.8 Site security and crime prevention

The crimes that cause the greatest problem on site include theft, criminal damage and arson.
While it may be usual to think about offenders being unauthorised people who come onto
site to steal or cause damage, it must be remembered that a substantial number of offences
are committed by employees either for the direct gain of what they steal or out of malice
against the Contractors. It is not unknown for employees to damage property to delay the
progress of work, so they can be employed for longer repairing the damage that they have
caused.
Sometimes, site employees will give information to other persons who will later come and
commit the crime. This is very often the case with regard to the theft of larger items of
construction plant and equipment, or where substantial amounts of material are taken. Even
if the offenders are caught, it is very difficult to identify the employee who passed on the
information.
AL
remove temptation by hiding from view any 'attractive' item that might tempt a potential
thief
(b)
make it more difficult for the trespasser to get onto the site or into the building
(c)
make it harder for the trespasser to gain access to 'attractive' items if they do manage
to get onto the site
(d)
make it more difficult for the criminal to profit from their crime.
TE
AT
(a)
Removing temptation
IN
1.1.12.10
1
IO
The four most important things that can be done for site security are to:
This simply involves ensuring that 'attractive' items such as hand-held power tools are
removed from view when not in use, particularly out of normal working hours. On sites
surrounded by a solid hoarding, this should not be an issue.
Making it difficult for the trespasser to gain access to the site
1.1.12.11
EG
1.1.12.9 Managing security
The first consideration in attempting to make it difficult for the trespasser to effect an entry
will include the provision of site fencing.
This should be at least a 2-m high security fence with the posts securely anchored. 'Mesh'
type fencing, which includes 'anti climb' panels, can be hired. The panels have small gaps in
the mesh to make it more difficult to obtain footholds.
Alternatively, a close-boarded wooden perimeter fence or hoarding, at least 2 m high, may

be needed in a city or town centre site or at other high-risk premises.
It should be remembered that if employees are used as security staff, they must be given the
appropriate health and safety training before they start work, or whenever they are exposed
to a new or an increased risk.
Guard dogs
As work on most sites only takes place during the normal working week, serious
consideration must be given to 'out-of-hours' security.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 202
Part
Again, an assessment is needed and the use of guard dogs may be considered.
Locks, alarms and other security measures
If buildings are to be made secure, special attention should be paid to doors where high
quality locks should be used. Windows may need to be protected by steel grilles as well as
locks. The use of padlocks, other than very high security padlocks, is questionable, as
criminals using bolt croppers frequently cut the exposed shank.
The walls of a building are not very often broken through but it is reasonably common for
criminals to gain access through ceilings, particularly to get into shop premises.
It is relatively common for thieves to use cutting equipment to enter storage containers.
There are a number of proprietary products, particularly toolboxes/chests, which advertise
that they are designed to be more thief resistant.
A burglar alarm, whilst not adding anything to the physical security of premises, may well
deter a criminal from trying to break in, or cause them to run away without stealing anything
when the alarm sounds.
If perimeter fencing is to be made secure, special attention should be paid to entrance gates,
in respect of which high quality locks should be used.
IO
AL
Because of the nature of building, construction and civil engineering activities, it is difficult to
have a totally secure site. As unlawful visitors will get onto site occasionally, and some
employees may be dishonest, measures need to be taken to prevent criminal offences from
being committed. There are two main areas where action can be taken to make it harder for
people to steal property:
TE
Making it harder for the criminal to steal or damage anything
AT
1.1.12.12
put it somewhere where it cannot be stolen
(b)
secure it or immobilise it.
IN
(a)
Making it more difficult for the criminal to profit from their crime
EG
1.1.12.13
This is something that can easily be done with all property that may be stolen, and is
probably one of the most cost-effective areas of crime prevention.
A simple example is with scaffolding, where many companies, ever mindful of the risk of
theft, paint their tubes and fittings with brightly coloured bands. It becomes immediately
obvious that something is wrong if they appear on another contractor's site.
Highly visible markings may be a deterrent, but professional criminals are still prepared to
steal items and then remove the markings.
The rising value of metals has made some crime even more lucrative, as there is little need
to consider the risks associated with resale and reuse if the stolen item is simply exported for
reprocessing. It is important to consider at what stages of construction progress a site is
more likely to be the target of theft. For example, one strategy is to move to a full-time
security presence at second fix and to install high value white goods immediately prior to
handover/practical completion.
1.1.12.14
1
Construction plant and equipment
The health and safety implications if the equipment is not there, or has been damaged, may
be that the job cannot now be done properly or safely. Often shortcuts are taken and such
QCS 2014
Section
Page 203
Part
'makeshift' or temporary works will expose employees to additional risks to their health and
safety.
2
Where possible, isolate plant and machinery at the end of each shift, and park it in a secure
area such as a plant compound that is locked and visible to site security.
1.1.12.15
1
Photographic evidence of ownership
It can be difficult to identify stolen property because many people have no idea what a
compressor, excavator or a backhoe loader really looks like. Photographs of plant and
equipment are useful when trying to describe stolen items to the police or to your insurance
company, especially when they are not common or standard pieces.
1.1.12.16
Security of plant
Security of plant has implications for health and safety on building, construction or civil
engineering sites as well as for the financial viability of a company.
Having a well-managed security programme, to restrict the theft of equipment, may help in
reducing premiums to insurance companies.
The theft of plant which is not properly secured, or that can be moved or started, could have
serious financial consequences for a company.
The actual cost of security arrangements can be insignificant when compared with the
financial loss that theft incurs.
Costs which may be encountered could be in terms of production time lost due to missing
equipment, the administration in acquiring replacement equipment, as well as dealing with
the police and insurance companies.
Losses may also be incurred due to the damage caused to plant and equipment by
unsuccessful theft or by wanton vandalism, such as broken cab windows or spray paint
graffiti. Steps must be taken to minimise the possibility of either.
1.1.12.17
Site security and crime prevention
Theft of plant and equipment is one of the most common crimes that occur on site, some by
chance and some to order. The damage that the thief does in trying to steal the plant can be
substantial, not only to the plant but also to perimeter fencing, even if the theft fails.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.1.12.18
Managing the security of plant and equipment
An overall theft prevention plan should be produced and constantly reviewed. Each of the
anti-theft methods outlined in the following, and the ways to identify and locate plant, should
be considered as part of this plan.
There tends to be a lack of responsibility by people towards the security of plant, tools and
equipment, particularly where these are hired in.
It is the responsibility of management to ensure that staff are aware of the problems created
by plant theft, including the possible effect on the company's viability and the consequent
damaging effect on jobs.
1.1.12.19
1
Closed circuit television (CCTV)
As the cost of closed circuit television (CCTV) has reduced, the affordability and wider use of
QCS 2014
Section
Page 204
Part
the equipment has made the deterrent effect of its use considerable.
2
Cameras need to be well placed and:

(a)
capable of viewing the perimeter in darkness, with or without the aid of security
lighting
(b)
difficult for a thief to interfere with or steal.
On an unstaffed site, it is essential that the potential criminal knows recording is taking place
and that the recorder itself is in a secure location.
1.1.12.20
Put it somewhere where it cannot be stolen
On most sites, small, valuable hand tools and pieces of plant or equipment will be locked in a
site hut or tool store, or in a secure tool chest out of sight. The storage place should be as
substantial and secure as possible so that it is difficult to break into.
If a mobile tool store or chest is used, it should be recognised that some types of site
equipment and lorry-mounted cranes can be used to lift or drag tool chests and stores onto a
vehicle and stolen intact with their contents.
They should, therefore, be put in a secure site hut or container and securely bolted or
welded to the floor. If the tool store or vault has to be left externally, it should be bolted to a
concrete floor or block, or chained to an immovable object.
Often high security steel freight containers are used. These have no windows, virtually
impenetrable walls, floors and roofs, and doors that are designed to be securely locked. This
is a great advantage over the average site hut, which is usually a portable building with no
integral security features beyond normal door locks.
When using these containers, however, it should be remembered that they must never be
used for the storage of LPG cylinders or any other gas bottles, or quantities of solvents.
There have been instances when cylinders and gas bottles have leaked overnight, allowing a
dangerous build-up of gas inside the container.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Secure it or immobilise it
EG
1.1.12.21
Non-driven mobile plant and trailers

1
Non-driven mobile plant and trailers should be immobilised by the use of specialist
mechanical devices, such as eye-locks and wheel clamps, and should also be secured by a
security chain to an immovable object, thus preventing lifting by lorry-mounted cranes or
other site equipment.
Their visibility acts as a deterrent. Removal requires much physical effort and time and the
use of specialised tools. Their removal is also likely to be accompanied by noticeable noise
and light.
Immobilisation could also include smaller items being chained to larger items of plant,
concrete posts or steel columns.
'Security' chains should be strong enough to defeat files, hacksaws, levers and large bolt
croppers, and be difficult to attack with power tools.
Where possible, chains should be kept off the ground as this makes attack more difficult.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 205
Part
Driven plant
Larger items of driven plant and equipment that cannot be put into a store should be
immobilised by simple specialist mechanical or electronic devices.
It should be appreciated that the smaller the plant, the less likely it is that an electronic
immobiliser can be adequately concealed and that mechanical devices will be more
practical. Mechanical devices can immobilise stabiliser legs, steering mechanisms,
excavator booms and tracks.
On items of plant such as large earthmovers, road graders and large dump trucks, or where
the machine is complex, it is easier to conceal an electronic immobiliser. A mechanical
device to do the same job would be too large to manually handle.
Many pieces of plant have either mechanical devices and/or electronic devices fitted by the
manufacturer at the time of manufacture. All aspects of their operation should be understood
and full use made of them when the item of plant is left.
10
When the plant is left overnight or longer, there should be a disciplined approach to security.
The plant should be parked in a location where any wrongdoing would be noticed by
passers-by and away from easy access by a lorry-mounted crane to reduce the possibility of
it being lifted off site.
11
The ignition keys should be removed which will, in many instances, set an alarm and an
immobiliser. If the alarm or immobiliser does not set automatically then it must be set
manually.
12
A mechanical immobilisation device, where fitted, should be in such a position that it is

visible to passers-by to ensure any suspicious tampering is noticed. If such mechanical
devices allow equipment to be locked together, then this facility should be used whenever
possible.
13
Immobilisation could also include smaller items being chained to larger items of plant.
14
Any labels supplied by the manufacturer that indicate that immobilisation devices are fitted
should be prominently displayed.
Create a series of barriers
1.1.12.22
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
One of the key problems for any prospective thief is lack of time, and overcoming barriers is
time consuming. For instance, a fence or gate may be the first barrier to overcome, the
second a security container, the third a security chest or a series of physical locks and
chains within the container.
Individually each barrier might not present the prospective thief with too much difficulty but,
added together, they may prove so time consuming that the thief abandons the attempt.
Similarly, for larger equipment, fencing is the first barrier. The secure location of the
equipment, and the setting of mechanical and electronic immobilisers, then adds further
barriers, increasing the difficulty and the time required to overcome them.
A bright corporate colour scheme for all pieces of plant owned by a Contractor, as well as
the vans and lorries visiting the site, dissuades the thief. It identifies the equipment and
makes it more difficult to resell without repainting. Also, when a van or truck parked next to
the plant is not in the same corporate colours, and any work being undertaken is suspicious,
it can alert passers-by.
Painting plant and equipment in corporate colours could be used as part of an overall theft
QCS 2014
Section
Page 206
Part
prevention plan.
1.1.12.23
1
Recovery of plant and equipment
Once stolen equipment has left the site, the cost of inconvenience has started to mount up.
Although any subsequent recovery device will mitigate the final cost of the theft, it will not
change the cost of lost time and administration.
Stolen vehicle and plant location
A popular way of recovering plant is through a tracking device. This relies on the ability of the
police or a central monitoring station to locate the plant through signals emitted from devices
located on the equipment.
Although the success of recovering plant fitted with trackers is high, thieves are becoming
more sophisticated in their actions and technology, and are finding ways to neutralise the
devices.
Keys
1.1.12.24
AL
Another recommendation is the elimination of single keys for plant. (As with cars, some sets
of keys will give access to a variety of vehicles, not necessarily of the same make or year of
manufacture.) Plant manufacturers will eventually undertake this move, but until all machines
have different keys, the fitting of either a mechanical or electronic immobilisation device, or
both, is essential.
Whilst manufacturers will also be upgrading the security of cabs and canopies, it is still
necessary to lock them to reduce the possibility of hot-wiring plant to start it or the damage
caused whilst trying.
Plant theft - summary
IN
1.1.12.25
TE
AT
IO
Among the items most commonly stolen are mini-excavators, floodlighting equipment,
generator sets and compressors. All are of high value and relatively portable. Once removed
from site, they may prove impossible to track down.
Construction plant or equipment that is securely locked, immobilised, and clearly and visibly
marked is less likely to be stolen than plant which is not secured or marked.
Equipment that is fitted with an electronic tracking device or is registered with a database is
more likely to be recovered after being stolen.
Electronic tracking devices may be active or passive. Active devices allow the owner to know
exactly where the item of plant is at all times, while passive devices are only activated once
that piece of plant has been stolen or unlawfully removed.
EG
QCS 2014
Section
Page 207
Part

1.1.13 Statutory Forms, Notices and Registers
1.1.13.1 Key points
1
The selection of the forms or notices, etc., will necessarily be as appropriate or applicable to
the individual site or premises, and the circumstances that exist on that site.
1.1.13.2 Statutory Forms, Notices and Registers

Accident Book
The keeping of an accident book is required by these Regulations
All accidents that cause any injury to an employee, no matter how slight, must be entered.
Entry may be made either by the employee or anyone acting on their behalf.
Completed book stubs and records must be kept for three years from the date of the last
entry.
F100 Report of an injury or dangerous occurrence (Pad of forms) Injuries
Form F100, report of an accident or dangerous occurrence, is required by RIDDOR - The

Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences.
Unless notification has been made by telephone, fax, email, Form F100 must be completed
and sent by the person completing the report to the Administrative Authority which is the
Administrative Authority, this action is required under the following circumstances:
If an employee or other person dies or suffers any major injury as a result of an accident at
work.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
EG
Note: (i) This type of accident must also be reported immediately by the quickest practical
method (usually the telephone).
Note: (ii) A major injury or serious condition such as:
(b)
any fracture of any bone other than the fingers, thumbs or toes
(a)
any amputation, the dislocation of the shoulder, hip, knee or spine
(c)
the loss of sight (whether temporary or permanent) or any other listed eye injury
(d)
electric shock or burn causing unconsciousness
(e)
any injury leading to hypothermia, heat-induced illness or to unconsciousness

requiring resuscitation or admittance to hospital for more than 24 hours
(f)
unconsciousness due to asphyxia or exposure to a harmful substance or biological

agent
(g)
acute illness or unconsciousness caused by any poisoning by any route
(h)
acute illness caused by exposure to infected material or a biological agent
(i)
if an employee has an accident at work and is unfit or is off work for more than three
days (weekends and rest days included) as a result of the accident.
Dangerous occurrences
8
Form F100 must be sent to the Administrative Authority whenever a scheduled dangerous
QCS 2014
Section
Page 208
Part
occurrence has occurred. Alternatively, notification may be given by telephone, fax or email.
Dangerous occurrences listed include (briefly):
collapse, overturning or failure of any load-bearing part of any lift, hoist, crane, derrick,
mobile powered access platform, access cradle, window cleaning cradle, excavator,
piling rig or forklift truck
(b)
explosion, bursting or collapse of any closed vessel, boiler, etc.
(c)
contact with, or arcing from, any overhead electric cable caused by any plant or
equipment
(d)
electrical short-circuit with fire or explosion
(e)
explosion or fire caused by any material resulting in stoppage of work or plant for more
than 24 hours
(f)
uncontrolled release of 100 kg or more of a flammable liquid, 10 kg or more of a

flammable liquid above its normal boiling point or 10 kg of a flammable gas, inside a
building, and 500 kg or more of such substances outside a building
(g)
collapse or partial collapse of any scaffold over 5 metres in height or fall of any cradle,
etc.
(h)
collapse of 5 tonnes or more of any building or structure, or any falsework, or any wall
or floor in any workplace
(i)
uncontrolled release of any biological agents
(j)
accidental ignition of any explosive
(k)
failure of any load-bearing part of a freight container
(l)
bursting, explosion or collapse, or fire involving a pipeline
(m)
specific incidents involving road tankers
(n)
specific incidents involving dangerous substances being conveyed by road
(o)
escape of any substance in a quantity sufficient to cause death, injury or damage to

health
(p)
malfunction of any breathing apparatus whilst in use or when being tested before use
(q)
contact with or arcing of any overhead power line.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
EG
F100A Report of a case of disease

10
A report on form F100A is required by RIDDOR the Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and
Dangerous Occurrences.
11
It must be sent, by the person completing the report, to the Administrative Authority, when a
registered medical practitioner has diagnosed in writing that an employee is suffering from a
scheduled reportable disease
AND
12
the person has been employed in a scheduled work activity by the Contractors.
13
Alternatively, notification may be given by telephone, fax or email.

COSHH assessments, etc.
14
The Control of Substances Hazardous to Health require assessments to be made of

substances hazardous to health and, except in the simplest and most obvious of cases, for
the assessments to be written and kept accessible for those who need to know the results.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 209
Part
This specifically includes safety representatives.

15
If health surveillance is appropriate, the health records of employees under health

surveillance must be maintained and kept for 40 years after the date of the last entry.
16
All mechanical control measures, such as dust extraction, must be subject to routine
examination in accordance with the Regulations and records kept.
17
Substances hazardous to health must be properly labelled.

Danger areas
18
Identify with signs
19
Dangerous substances and explosive atmospheres
A substance or preparation which is explosive, oxidising, extremely flammable, highly

flammable or flammable, or any dust which can form an explosive mixture with air or an
explosive atmosphere.
IO
20
AL
Dangerous substances
AT
Explosive atmosphere
A mixture, under atmospheric conditions, of air and one or more dangerous substances in
the form of gases, vapours, mists or dusts in which, after ignition has occurred, combustion
spreads to the entire unburned mixture.
22
Where an explosive atmosphere may occur, a specific sign is to be erected.
23
The sign must consist of black letters on a triangular yellow background with black edging.
EG
IN
TE
21
Diving
24
Records have to be kept of the written appointment of all diving supervisors and of the
qualifications and medical certificates of divers. All dives have to be recorded in the divers'
log books. Diving rules have to be in writing.
Electrical equipment
25
All electrical equipment, including portable equipment, should be inspected on a regular

basis by a competent person and records kept. Portable electric tools should be PAT-tested
on a three-monthly basis, with a sticker showing the test date and the date the next test is
due fixed to each item.
Electric shock placard

26
Notices or placards giving details of emergency resuscitation procedures in the event of an
QCS 2014
Section
Page 210
Part
electric shock should be displayed in locations where people are at an enhanced risk of
electric shock.
Emergency evacuation
27
Emergency routes and exits must be established and indicated by suitable signs.
Excavations, cofferdams and caissons
28
Excavations, cofferdams and caissons must be inspected and written reports of the
inspections made.
Explosives
Possession of explosives requires an explosives certificate which is issued by the local Chief
Officer of Police.
30
Detailed records have to be kept of all movements or usages of explosives.
AL
29
AT
It is required that records should be kept of all design calculations, drawings, estimated
loadings and specifications for falsework, together with written permissions to pour concrete
or to 'load' falsework, and to dismantle it.
31
IO
Falsework
TE
Documentary information relating to fire safety should include:

records of staff training in the use of extinguishers
(b)
record of fire extinguisher servicing
(c)
record of practice evacuations
(d)
written fire risk assessment and a written fire safety plan.
EG
IN
(a)
32
Fire
First aid
33
First-aid notices are required to be displayed as an effective means of informing the

workforce of the Contractors arrangement for first aid.
Food hygiene
34
Toilets adjacent to food rooms must be separated by a lobby. A notice stating 'NOW WASH
YOUR HANDS' must be displayed.
35
Employees in food rooms must not smoke. A notice is displayed to that effect. Checks and
inspections of equipment and staff training should be recorded. Certificates of staff training in
food hygiene and handling must be displayed.
Fragile surfaces
36
Appropriate warning notices must be clearly displayed at all approaches to the area.
QCS 2014
Section
Page 211
Part
Hazardous substances
37
All containers containing hazardous substances should be clearly marked with their contents
and the appropriate hazard warning symbol.
38
Assessments must be made and, with minor exceptions, recorded.

Health and safety policy
39
The policy must be brought to the notice of all employees.

Holes in floors and similar openings
If a cover is used over a hole, it must be clearly marked to show its purpose.
AL
40
Ionising radiation
The appropriate warning signs and notices for controlled areas must be displayed.
IO
41
AT
Lifting operations
All machinery and accessories used for lifting are marked to indicate their safe working load
for each configuration in which they can be used.
43
Lifting equipment designed to lift persons is clearly marked as such.
44
Lifting equipment not designed for lifting persons but which could be easily mistaken for such
is marked appropriately.
45
All lifting equipment and accessories are subjected to a scheme of thorough examination.
Records of thorough examination are made and kept available for inspection.
IN
TE
42
EG
Management of health and safety

Risk assessments must be made of all work activities and the significant findings must be
recorded.
47
Health surveillance, if it is needed, individual health records must be kept.
48
Emergency procedures need to be displayed
46
Manual handling
49
Assessment to be made where risks from manual handling cannot be avoided. It is required
that all but the most simple assessments should be recorded.
Noise
50
Hearing protection zones need to identified by means of a sign.
51
A hearing protection zone is anywhere where an employee is likely to be exposed to a daily

personal noise exposure of 85 dB(A) or a peak sound pressure of 137 dB(C).
QCS 2014
Section
Page 212
Part
Plant and equipment

52
If it is not otherwise provided for, it is strongly recommended that all plant, tools and
equipment are subject to inspection and examination, and proper records kept.
53
A daily inspection and a six-monthly examination may be appropriate.

Pressure vessels
54
All pressure vessels intended to contain air or nitrogen at a greater pressure than 0.5 must
have details of the maximum working pressure, maximum and minimum working
temperatures, and cubic capacity clearly displayed on it.
Protective clothing and equipment
AL
Assessment of the need for personal protective equipment. In all but the simplest cases the
assessments should be recorded.
Where a safety committee has been established, proper minutes and records should
be kept. Safety representatives may give written reports to management concerning safety
in the workplace.
AT
56
IO
Safety representatives and safety committees
55
Scaffolding
(1) Display of 'Incomplete scaffold notice.
58
Designated 'danger areas' must be created where there is a risk of a person falling or being
hit by a falling object. In the case of incomplete scaffolding, suitable notices must be
displayed to discourage attempted access on to the scaffold.
IN
(2) Reports of inspections
EG
59
TE
57
60
Steam boilers
The maximum working pressure of any steam boiler must be clearly marked. Boilers must be
inspected at the scheduled intervals and proper records kept.
Training
61
It is most strongly recommended that all such information, instruction and training is properly
and fully recorded so that Contractors are in a position to prove that duties under these
Regulations have been met.
VDUs - Visual display units or display screens
62
Suitable and sufficient analysis of workstations for the purpose of assessing health and
safety risks. All but the simplest and obvious cases must be recorded.
Work equipment
63
Maintenance, records of maintenance, written instructions. Maintenance log should be

recorded. All work equipment must be marked in a clearly visible manner where necessary,
in the interests of health and safety.
QCS 2014
64
Section
Page 213
Part
Warnings, audible or visible, to be incorporated into work equipment as necessary.

Working at height
65
Any training carried out to achieve competency should be recorded. Where any person at
work may pass across or near to a fragile surface, or actually work on it, prominent signs
indicating that it is a fragile surface must be fixed at every approach to that place. Where
any person could be injured by falling or being hit by a falling object, 'danger areas' must be
created to prevent such an occurrence. Danger areas must be clearly indicated, usually by
signs and/or barriers Where inspections of work equipment are carried out a record of the
inspection must be made and retained as specified.
Safety signs
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
END OF PART
AL
All signs giving health or safety information or instructions must comply with the relevant
British Standard. A safety sign is anything that combines geometrical shape, colour and
pictorial symbols to give safety information.
66
QCS 2014

Page 1
Part 1.02: Occupational Health and Hygiene (Regulatory Document)
REGULATORY DOCUMENT........................................................................... 1
1.2
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND HYGIENE .................................................... 1
1.2.1
The Management of Health on Site ............................................................... 4
1.2.2
Personal Protective Equipment .................................................................... 15
1.2.3
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) ................................ 29
1.2.4
First Aid at Work .......................................................................................... 57
1.2.5
Food Safety on Site ..................................................................................... 70
1.2.6
Working with Lead ....................................................................................... 73
1.2.7
Manual Handling .......................................................................................... 88
1.2.8
Asbestos in the Workplace ........................................................................ 104
1.2.9
The Control of Dust and Fumes ................................................................. 112
AL
Control of Noise ..................................................................................... 129
1.2.11
Protection of the Eyes ............................................................................ 149
1.2.12
Protection of the Skin ............................................................................. 161
1.2.13
Control of Vibration ................................................................................ 175
1.2.14
Compressed Air ..................................................................................... 199
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
1.2.10
QCS 2014

Page 2
FORWARD
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Construction Standards (QCS). The QCS includes references and certain sections which address
occupational health and safety. To ensure that that users of the RD/SAMAS are fully aware of the
where occupational health and safety issues are addressed in the QCS, the following table
summarises where potential overlaps may occur. For consistency, it is recommended that in matters
relating to occupational health and safety reference is made first to the RD/SAMAS. For the purpose
of clarity, however, references are made in the relevant section of the RD/SAMAS to their comparable
sections in the QCS and vice versa.
QCS 2014

Page 3
Sr. No
QCS 2014
Section No.
Part No.
Part Name
Submittals
7.5.2

Chart
Submittals
7.6.1
10
Health and Safety
All
All
All
11
10
11.4.6
14
14.4

Lifting Tackle
15
Temporary Controls
All
All
All
16
Traffic Diversions
16.1.3
Safety
General
8.1.6
Safety
General
8&9
1.4.12
10

Work
1.6
Safety
11
Deep Foundations
4.9.1.7
Safety Precautions
12
Deep Foundations
13
General
14
Asphalt Plants
15
14
AT
IO
37 & 38
42
Item Name
AL
Page No. Item No.
4&5
1.6
Temporary Fencing
15
7.8.13
Safety Requirements
14.2.2
Safety
General
1.3.2
Health and Safety
17
8.1.9
Safety
18
9.2.5
Safety Requirements
19
10

Survey
4,5&6
10.1.7
Safety Requirements
20
11
11.2.2
Safety
21
General
16
1.2.8
Safety Guards
22
General
19
1.2.16
23
19
Hot Water Storage
5.1.6
Safety
24
21

Installation
7&8
1.1.11
25
21

Installation
14
1.1.23
Safety Interlocks
26
24
General
1.1.4
Scaffolding
27
29
Design Aspects
1.1.5
28
29
2.3.1.5
Safety
29
29
Tunnel
18
4.5.8
Safety Regulations
30
29
Tunnel
19
4.5.9
Fire Prevention
31
29
Tunnel
21
4.6.4
32
29
Concrete Structures
7.1.10
Safety Railing
EG
16
IN
TE
4
7,8, 9 &
10
QCS 2014

Page 4

1.2.1
The Management of Health on Site
1
Note:
One of the reasons why Contractors have safe systems of work is to avoid accidents and
keep employees at work instead of being off sick.
Section 1, Part 13 of the QCS covers setting out of the works.
1.2.1.2 Benefits
1
The benefits that arise from adopting a positive policy of health risk management can be
measured in legal, economic, social and moral terms.
Freedom from prosecution by the administrative authorities, or either Government Officials

stopping or delaying Contractors works.
IO
AL
Legal
Uninterrupted production and lower staff turnover and having a good reputation with the
prospect of future business.
AT
Economic
Being recognised by employees and others as a 'caring' Contractor and a good company to
work for.
TE
Social
IN
Moral
Knowing that the Contractor and work activities are not damaging the health of staff or
anyone else, given the fact that no Contractor has the right to damage the health of any
employee.
While social and moral issues are not usually mentioned, it can be seen that they are
becoming of greater importance, particularly when clients or contractors are looking for
contractors who have a demonstrated commitment to health as well as to safety.
EG
1.2.1.3 Some of the specific health areas that need to be addressed

Manual handling
1
Giving employees the appropriate training in the correct manual handling techniques and the
use of mechanical lifting aids is highly cost effective. Adequate supervision is necessary to
ensure that employees then use the proper equipment and techniques and do not take 'short
cuts'. This will reduce accidents, the amount of time lost on site, and the disruption to work
that is caused when something goes wrong.
The part of the body most vulnerable if bad manual handling techniques are used is the
back, particularly the lower back. Once it has been damaged, it is usually weakened for the
rest of a person's life.
All the other major joints and muscle groups can also be easily damaged if the correct
manual handling techniques are not used.
QCS 2014

Page 5
The consequences of an injury due to bad manual handling, or a musculo-skeletal injury or

illness as they are often called, can be a long-term or permanent inability to work. The cost
to the Contractor is reduced productivity and having to find others to carry out the work.
Noise
(a)
annoyance and irritation
(b)
loss of concentration
(c)
reduced efficiency
(d)
fatigue
(e)
increased accident risk
(f)
masking of other warning signals.
AL
The damage can range from temporary hearing loss to total deafness. As well as hearing
problems, excess noise is also known to cause:
On site, the failure of an employee to understand instructions that have been given, or to
hear a warning signal, can have serious consequences, both for them and for the Contractor.
IO
1.2.1.4 Vibration
A considerable number of the tools and other pieces of equipment that are currently used in
the Qatar building and construction industry have a rotary or percussive action and so can
cause hand-arm vibration. This even applies to some widely used small tools, such as
hand drills that have a 'hammer' action. Other examples of tools that create vibration include
pneumatic breakers, vibrating pokers, vibrating rollers, plate compactors and scabbling
machines.
The most commonly caused ill-health effect is 'vibration white finger' where the effect of the
vibration damages the nerves and blood vessels in the fingers. The fingers become white
and there is a loss of feeling which prevents smaller tools from being held or used properly.
Hand-arm vibration is also known to cause other vascular, neurological and muscular
damage in the hands, wrists, elbows and shoulders.
Whole-body vibration, which is caused by the transmission of vibration to the body from
sources such as moving plant or vehicles, can bring about long-term back pain.
The effects of both hand-arm vibration and whole-body vibration can be reduced by carrying
out risk assessments, appropriate purchasing policies, the correct use of the equipment and
the use of the appropriate anti-vibration devices such as special handles or grips.
EG
IN
TE
AT
1.2.1.5 Stress
1
In the workplace, stress is a growing problem but one that has not been widely recognised or
generally accepted within the Qatar building and construction industry.
Stress can cause physical problems such as:

(a)
high blood pressure
(b)
heart disease
(c)
depression as well as behavioural problems, such as:
(d)
anxiety
(e)
irritability
QCS 2014
(f)
failure to cope as usual
(g)
bad time-keeping. Some of the causes of stress are:
(h)
too much work/long working hours
(i)
confusion as to what is expected
(j)
uncertainty as to responsibilities
(k)
conflict of interests.
Work-related factors that lead to stress can be managed but this will require appropriate
training for management and operatives. If left unchecked, the following signs of stress may
quickly emerge at the workplace and cause problems.
Loss of motivation, commitment and work output.
(b)
Increased absence due to sickness and unauthorised reasons.
(c)
Decline in the relationships between staff on site.
(d)
Poor decision-making and increased errors.
(e)
Physical illness, and perhaps stomach ulcers and heart problems.
(f)
Mental illness.
IO
AL
(a)
AT

Page 6
While a reasonable degree of challenge and stress is acceptable as providing an added

incentive to work, excess stress among employees is counterproductive and should be
avoided if employees are to work to their best potential.
Some things that can be done to avoid or prevent stress are:
IN
1.2.1.6 Management-related
TE
The fostering of good relationships between staff and management
Well-set, clear and achievable objectives
Good and effective two-way communications
Employee involvement
Good management support
Staff training
EG
1.2.1.7 Task-related
1
Well-defined tasks
Clear responsibilities
Proper use of skills
Good control of hazards and risks
Support from senior management
The benefits that come from reducing stress include:
QCS 2014

Page 7
(a)
less sickness and absence from the workplace
(b)
increased performance and productivity
(c)
better staff relationships
(d)
lower staff turnover
(e)
increased morale
(f)
lower overall costs.
The elements of the work-related stress standards are:
Demands - Issues that should be considered are workload, work patterns and the working
environment.
Control - How much control does the individual have over the way they do their work?
10
Support - Do workers feel that adequate encouragement and resources is provided by the
company, managers and colleagues?
11
Relationships - Workers at any level must not be subjected to unacceptable behaviours by

anyone at work and conflicts must be effectively dealt with.
12
Role - Workers at all levels must understand their role (how they fit into the organisation)
and there must not be any conflicting roles.
13
Change - People can be suspicious of the real motives behind organisational change which,
whether large or small, must be well managed and effectively communicated.
AT
IO
AL
TE
1.2.1.8 Radiation, sunshine and heat stress

If all the signs and other procedures are obeyed, no-one should be at risk from ionising
radiation.
One area of risk that does exist is the radiation from sunshine. The short-term dangers are
blisters and sunburn while the well known long-term danger is skin cancer.
On site it is tempting for employees to take their shirts off on sunny days to get a suntan, but
a suntan does not protect against the risk of skin cancer.
People most at risk include those with fair or freckled skin that does not tan or that burns
before it tans. People with red or fair hair and light coloured eyes, and those who have a
large number of moles (more than 50), are also at a higher level of risk.
As well as protecting against the possibility of sunburn and the long-term risk of skin cancer,
a shirt will also provide protection against minor cuts, abrasions and some of the chemicals
or dusts that can be found on site.
EG
IN
Heat Stress
1
The body reacts to heat by increasing the blood flow to the skin's surface, and by sweating.
This results in cooling as sweat evaporates from the body's surface and heat is carried to the
surface of the body from within by the increased blood flow. Heat can also be lost by
radiation and convection from the body's surface.
Typical example of a heat stress situation:

(a)
Someone wearing protective clothing and performing heavy work in hot and humid
conditions could be at risk of heat stress because:
QCS 2014

Page 8
(i) Sweat evaporation is restricted by the type of clothing and the humidity of the
environment.
(ii) Heat will be produced within the body due to the work rate and, if insufficient
heat is lost, deep body temperature will rise.
(iii) As deep body temperature rises the body reacts by increasing the amount of
sweat produced, which may lead to dehydration.
(iv) Heart rate also increases which puts additional strain on the body.
(v) If the body is gaining more heat than it can lose the deep body temperature
will continue to rise.
(vi) Eventually it reaches a point when the body's control mechanism itself starts
to fail.
(vii) The symptoms will worsen the longer they remain working in the same
conditions.
AL
Heat stress effects
Heat stress can affect individuals in different ways, and some people are more susceptible to
it than others.
Typical symptoms are:

an inability to concentrate
(b)
muscle cramps
(c)
heat rash
(d)
severe thirst - a late symptom of heat stress
(e)
fainting
(f)
heat exhaustion - fatigue, giddiness, nausea, headache, moist skin
(g)
heat stroke - hot dry skin, confusion, convulsions and eventual loss of consciousness.
IN
TE
AT
(a)
Heat stroke is the most severe disorder and can result in death if not detected at an early
stage.
EG
IO
Workplace examples
People might suffer from heat stress because of the hot environment created by the process,
or restricted spaces:
(a)
construction sites
(b)
confined spaces
(c)
operating machinery
(d)
tunnels
(e)
mines
(f)
compressed air tunnels
(g)
foundries and smelting operations
(h)
brick-firing and ceramics plants
(i)
boiler rooms
(j)
kitchens
(k)
laundries
QCS 2014

Page 9
Control Measures
7
Over time people adapt to hot conditions by sweating more, and by changing their behaviour
to try and cool down, e.g. removing clothing, taking cool drinks, fanning themselves, sitting in
the shade or a cool area, and/or reducing their work rate. However, in many work situations
such behavioural changes may not be possible, e.g. during asbestos removal. Where there
is a possibility of heat stress occurring you will need to carry out a risk assessment.
Contractors must undertake a risk assessment.
When carrying out a risk assessment, the major factors you need to consider are:
work rate - the harder someone works the greater the amount of body heat generated;
(b)
working climate - this includes air temperature, humidity, air movement and effects of
working near a heat source;
(c)
worker clothing and respiratory protective equipment - may impair the efficiency of
sweating and other means of temperature regulation;
(d)
workers age, build and medical factors - may affect an individual's tolerance.
AL
(a)
Firstly, you will need to talk to the workers involved (and their safety representatives), to see
whether they are suffering early signs of heat stress. If it seems likely that there is a problem,
you may need to consult with people who are more experienced in determining the risk from
hot environments, e.g. occupational hygienists, nurses or doctors.
11
Contractors must remove or reduce the sources of heat by:

CONTROLLING THE TEMPERATURE using engineering solutions, e.g.
change the processes,
(ii)
use fans or air conditioning,
(iii)
use physical barriers that reduce exposure to radiant heat.
TE
(i)
IN
(a)
AT
IO
10
PROVIDE MECHANICAL AIDS where possible to reduce the work rate.
(c)
REGULATE THE LENGTH OF EXPOSURE to hot environments by:
EG
(b)
(iv) allowing workers to enter only when the temperature is below a set level or at
cooler times of the day,
(v) issuing permits to work that specify how long your workers should work in
situations where
there is a risk,
(vi) providing periodic rest breaks and rest facilities in cooler conditions.
(d)
PREVENT DEHYDRATION. Working in a hot environment causes sweating which

helps keep people cool but means losing vital water that must be replaced. Provide
cool water in the workplace and encourage workers to drink it frequently in small
amounts before, during (this is not possible in some situations e.g. respiratory
protective equipment use or asbestos removal) and after working.
(e)
PROVIDE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT. Specialised personal protective

clothing is available which incorporates, for example, personal cooling systems or
breathable fabrics. This may help protect workers in certain hot environments.
Protective clothing or respiratory protective equipment is often required when there will
be exposure to some other hazard at work e.g. asbestos. This type of equipment,
while protecting from the other hazard, may increase the risk of heat stress
(f)
PROVIDE TRAINING FOR YOUR WORKERS, especially new and young employees,
telling them about the risks of heat stress associated with their work, what symptoms
to look out for, safe working practices and emergency procedures.
QCS 2014

Page 10
(g)
ALLOW WORKERS TO ACCLIMATISE to their environment and identify which

workers are acclimatised/assessed as fit to work in hot conditions.
(h)
IDENTIFY EMPLOYEES WHO ARE MORE SUSCEPTIBLE to heat stress either

because of an illness/condition or medication that may encourage the early onset of
heat stress, e.g. those with heart conditions. Advice may be needed from an
occupational health professional or medical practitioner.
(i)
MONITOR THE HEALTH OF WORKERS AT RISK. Where it is considered that a

residual risk remains after implementing as many control measures as practicable,
you may need to monitor the health of workers exposed to the risk. You should then
seek advice from occupational health professionals with a good working knowledge of
the risks associated with working in heat stress situations.
During the period from June 15th until August 31st, work under direct sun rays is prohibited
from 11:30 am to 3:00 pm unless special arrangement is taken by the Contractor to control
and ease effect of the direct sun on the workers unless otherwise announced by the
concerned authorities. This arrangement should be approved by the Engineers
Representative and should be agreed upon before implementation.
AL
12
Respiratory problems Dust
The inhalation of any dust will eventually cause respiratory problems, including or
contributing to such conditions as asthma, bronchitis, pneumoconiosis and certain types of
lung cancer. Some dusts cause an allergic reaction where breathing problems are caused
immediately after a dust is breathed in. As well as presenting a health hazard, many airborne
dust clouds are also flammable or explosive.
14
Whenever practicable, the generation of dust should be avoided, and where it cannot be
avoided it should be controlled by ventilation or extraction. The use of personal protective
equipment by employees must be regarded as the very last resort when all other methods of
control have been examined and found not to be practicable.
TE
AT
IO
13
IN
Fumes including solvent fumes
The vapour given off by many substances has the potential to cause respiratory illness or
other symptoms of ill health if not adequately controlled. Other symptoms include
headaches, coughing, feeling sick, feeling light-headed, shortness of breath or feverishness.
16
As well as being inhaled and causing direct problems in the lungs, many fumes can be
absorbed into the bloodstream and bring about complications in other parts of the body.
17
An example of this type of response is cancer of the bladder which can be caused by
inhaling certain aniline fumes (a chemical made for use in textile dyes).
18
Potential sources of hazardous fumes, which may be inhaled if control measures are not
taken, are:
19
EG
15
(a)
solvent-based adhesives, spirit-based or solvent-based paints
(b)
welding, especially welding galvanised metals
(c)
oxyacetylene cutting
(d)
engine exhausts.
If the generation or release of the fumes cannot be avoided, for example by using a waterbased solvent or paint instead, then adequate natural or mechanical ventilation should be
used. The use of personal protective equipment for employees must be regarded as the last
resort.
QCS 2014

Page 11
1.2.1.9 Bird and bat droppings

1
The presence of large populations of roosting birds or a bat colony can present significant
risks to health if their droppings are disturbed. This has obvious implications for some types
of construction work and preliminary work such as surveys.
The main hazard is the inhalation of fungus spores which become airborne as a result of
disturbance of the droppings.
1.2.1.10 Dermatitis
Occupational dermatitis causes lost time in the building and construction industry. Yet with
proper attention to risk assessments, control measures and good working practices it could
be avoided. The prevention of dermatitis would save the Qatar construction industry and
Contractors large amounts of money, and also assist in improved productivity on site, as well
as improving conditions for the workers.
The agents which cause dermatitis can be divided into five classes as follows:
mechanical factors such as friction, pressure and trauma
(b)
physical factors including heat, cold, electricity, sunlight and radiation
(c)
the use of some chemicals
(d)
contact with some plants and their products
(e)
contact with biological agents, organisms, insects and mites.
AT
IO
(a)
There are two main types of dermatitis, commonly known as 'contact dermatitis' and 'allergic
dermatitis'.
Contact dermatitis
TE
AL
This is sometimes also called irritant dermatitis. It is the commonest form of occupational
dermatitis and results from repeated contact with any substance that irritates the skin. Such
substances can include cement, lime, plaster, paint, solvents, adhesives, sawdust, oils,
pitch, tar, fibreglass, white spirit, thinners and most acids and alkalis.
The effect of the substances is usually to cause the skin to dry out and crack due to the
removal of the natural oils. Skin damaged in this way is very vulnerable to other infections.
EG
IN
Allergic dermatitis
6
This is sometimes also called sensitive dermatitis. It is an allergic reaction by the skin to a
specific substance that the skin has been exposed to in the past, and which has caused the
skin to become especially sensitive to it. Once a person's skin has become 'sensitised', any
future exposure to the substance will cause an immediate skin reaction.
The main sensitising substances on site are cement, resins, glues, hardeners, hardwoods,
chrome and nickel compounds. The allergic response is usually specific to an individual as
opposed to affecting everyone, and can also appear suddenly after many years' exposure.
The prevention of dermatitis is basically one of good personal hygiene, good housekeeping,
safe systems of work that avoid contact with substances that are known to cause dermatitis,
and the use of personal protective equipment (as a control measure of the last resort), in the
appropriate cases.
QCS 2014

Page 12
1.2.1.11 Needlestick injuries

A needlestick injury is an accidental puncture of the skin by a hypodermic needle.
It is a sad fact that the current drug culture affects the construction industry as much as other
industrial sectors. The abuse of both legal and illegal drugs brings with it the risk of
discovering discarded hypodermic syringes or discarded needles.
Employees in the refurbishment sector of the industry are probably at greatest risk,
especially if the property is derelict or has been occupied by unauthorised occupants.
However, any work in occupied or previously occupied premises carries with it some risk of
finding needles that have been randomly discarded or hidden away in areas where they are
difficult to see, until it is too late.
If not handled in a safe manner, discarded needles can pose serious health risks to anyone
whose skin is accidentally pricked. Blood on a needle could be infected with a hepatitis or
HIV virus.
As part of site induction in the appropriate circumstances, employees should be told to

assume that any needle they find has been used by a drug user and is potentially
contaminated by infected blood.
Contractor site procedures should cover the actions that employees and supervisors should
take whenever discarded needles are found. The removal and disposal of such items should
be properly covered.
Generally, employees should be clearly told not to touch or move any needles or hypodermic
syringes they find, but ask a responsible person to guard it whilst reporting the matter to their
supervisor.
If a needle or syringe must be moved then suitable instructions to employees might be:
TE
AT
IO
AL
if possible, use a pair of pliers to pick it up
(b)
carry it with the needle pointing downwards
(c)
do not wrap it in paper or put it into a litter bin
(d)
if available, place it in a clear glass bottle or jar
(e)
place the bottle or jar in a secure location
(g)
EG
(f)
IN
(a)
carefully follow site or company procedures regarding disposal

wash hands thoroughly.
Employees should not panic if a needle punctures the skin. Gently squeeze the area around
the wound to encourage bleeding but do not suck the wound. Wash the site of the injury
thoroughly with soap and water at the first opportunity, and obtain medical assistance as
soon as possible from the nearest hospital with an accident and emergency department. If
you can do so safely, take the syringe or needle with you.
10
If dealt with properly and promptly, the risks of a resulting health problem are small.
1.2.1.12 Leptospirosis (Weil's disease)

1
When working near to water or on sites that are otherwise wet, consideration must be given
to the health implications associated with the presence of rats.
Leptospirosis is an occupational hazard for anyone working near water, damp areas or
anywhere else where rats might be present. It is a disease caused by bacteria that is present
QCS 2014

Page 13
in the urine of infected rats and is therefore also in the water where they live. The bacteria
thrives in damp conditions, typical of banks of rivers or streams, and can enter the body
through unprotected cuts and scratches, by swallowing infected water and through the lining
of the nose.
3
If anyone thinks they may have come into contact with the disease, they should be aware
that the early symptoms closely resemble the symptoms of influenza, namely:
(a)
fever
(b)
headache
(c)
chill. Later symptoms include:
(d)
tightening of the skin
(e)
a yellowing of the skin (similar to jaundice)
(f)
internal bleeding.
It is essential that anyone who is at risk, and who becomes unwell with flu-like symptoms,
should visit their doctor, describe where they have been working and that they are at risk
from leptospirosis.
Persons regularly at risk, for example, canal or sewage workers should carry a card
explaining their occupation and the occupational hazard of leptospirosis.
Personal precautions that should be taken include the following:
AT
IO
AL
discourage the presence of rats on site: do not leave food lying about or throw away
food scraps
(b)
do not handle the carcasses of dead rats
(c)
avoid inadvertent entry or immersion in water that could be infected
(d)
if this happens and you think that you may be infected, particularly if you swallowed
any water, see a doctor as a matter of urgency
(e)
wear appropriate PPE
(f)
prior to entering the work area, wash any cuts or grazes in clean water. Apply
antiseptic to the wound, then cover with gauze, a waterproof dressing and PPE as
necessary
(g)
upon completion of work, wash hands, forearms and all other exposed areas of skin
thoroughly. Remove any wet protective clothing as soon as possible and dry it
EG
IN
TE
(a)
(h)
avoid rubbing your nose, mouth or eyes with your hands during work
(i)
do not smoke, eat or drink without first washing your hands.
Leptospirosis can be fatal, typically within four to six weeks, if the early symptoms are not
recognised and treated.
1.2.1.13 Contaminated ground

1
The disturbance of contaminated ground can release hazardous fibres such as asbestos,
hazardous gases or fumes.
Where ground that has been previously used is to be disturbed, a risk assessment must be
carried out to determine whether there will be residual risks to health.
The findings of a thorough assessment of the risks will determine exactly what the hazards
are and how the risks can be eliminated or controlled to an acceptable level. Given the
possible wide range of contaminants, the potential for ill health may result from inhalation,
QCS 2014

Page 14
ingestion or skin contact with the hazardous substance.
1.2.1.14 Smoking
1
Although smoking is totally prohibited on many sites, Contractors in control of a site may
make provision for smoking in areas which are not 'enclosed' or 'substantially enclosed', as
long as non-smokers are not exposed to tobacco smoke.
1.2.1.15 Repetitive strain injury
(b)
carpenters
(c)
painters
(d)
plant operators.
AL
plumbers
Methods by which workers can limit the potential for RSI are:
avoiding long periods of repetitive tasks - job rotation
(b)
alternating the use of the hands - picking up left- then right-handed
(c)
taking more short breaks rather than one long break
(d)
wearing looser fitting clothing to increase ease of movement
(e)
keeping warm - cold muscles don't expand properly
(f)
not overstretching - move closer to the task
(g)
reporting pain or other symptoms immediately - RSI is easier to treat in the early
stages.
TE
AT
IO
(a)
IN
(a)
Contractors can make a big difference to the health of their workers, which will have
business benefits, by:
EG
With regard to the construction industry, the jobs where workers are most likely to develop
RSI are:
(a)
assessing each job for the potential for RSI
(b)
encouraging early reporting
(c)
allowing workers to organise their work and take breaks as necessary.
QCS 2014

Page 15

1.2.2
Personal Protective Equipment
1.2.2.1 Key points

The correct use of personal protective equipment (PPE) is essential in many cases to protect
the wearer from harm.
Given the nature of most construction sites, the use of some items of PPE, such as safety
helmets and safety footwear, is a daily occurrence.
However, it must be remembered that the use of PPE as a means of protecting against risks
to health or safety is the last resort; it only protects the wearer and only then if it is:
the right PPE for the job
in good working order
being used properly.
Contractors have a legal duty to investigate the use of other protective measures before
resorting to the issue of PPE.
Employees must look after the PPE that has been issued to them and inform their Contractor
if it becomes damaged or is lost.
Contractors have a duty to supply the necessary PPE free of charge.
10
Respiratory protective equipment (RPE) is a sub-group of PPE.
Section 1, Part 11 of the QCS covers safety equipment and clothing.
Note:
AT
IO
AL
TE
Construction workers will have to wear some items of personal protective equipment (PPE),
such as safety helmets and safety footwear, as a matter of course. Other PPE will have to be
provided and worn as required, as indicated by the findings of a risk assessment. Generally,
PPE is thought of as equipment that is designed to protect the head, ears, eyes, respiratory
system, skin, hands and feet, and includes such items as gloves, safety goggles and hearing
protectors. However, other categories of PPE are designed to protect individuals from falling
from height and to keep them afloat in water or other liquids.
Respiratory protective equipment (RPE) is a significant sub-group of PPE. As its name

suggests, it is designed to protect the respiratory system of users from hazardous and
hostile atmospheres.
For simplicity, wherever any reference is made to 'PPE', it will include 'RPE', although at
appropriate places RPE will be referred to in its own right.
All PPE must bear the CE mark to show conformity with European Standards. When
Contractors are deciding how best to protect employees from a risk to their health and safety
at work, the decision to issue PPE may only be made where it is found that the risk cannot
be adequately controlled by other means that are equally or more effective. In effect, the
issue and use of PPE is the 'last resort' in terms of risk control.
PPE must be selected by a competent person who, if necessary in conjunction with the
suppliers, can identify the PPE that will be effective against the hazards present in the
workplace. An example of this is the selection of the correct type of respirator or filter to
protect the user against the various types of airborne substances, either particles or gases.
It must be remembered that failure of an item of PPE, or the wrong type of PPE being used,
could expose an employee to the possibility of occupational ill-health, serious injury or death.
EG
IN
QCS 2014

Page 16
These Regulations place a requirement on every Contractor to make a suitable and sufficient
assessment of every work activity in order to identify any hazard that employees, or any
other persons, might encounter as a result of the work being carried out.
When hazards are identified, it is then the Contractor's duty to either eliminate the hazard or
to put control measures into place to reduce the risks to health and safety arising out of the
hazards, as far as is reasonably practicable.
Where the hazard cannot be eliminated or the risks to health and safety controlled in any
other way, as determined by a risk assessment, the Contractor must supply suitable PPE
and ensure that it is used and looked after.
10
The following requirements of these Regulations all have a relevance to the selection and
use of PPE:
Contractors must provide employees with comprehensible and relevant information on
any risks that exist in the workplace, details of the existing control measures that are
in place and any measures to be introduced to reduce the residual risks
(b)
Contractors must ensure that employees are provided with appropriate health
surveillance where indicated as necessary by the risk assessment
(c)
Contractors must take into account each employee's capability with regards to health
and safety when allocating work, and provide them with adequate health and safety
training
(d)
employees, in turn, have a duty under these Regulations to:
AT
IO
AL
(a)
use equipment (e.g. PPE) in accordance with any training and instruction given
(ii)
inform the Contractor of any work situation or other matter which they consider
presents a risk to the health and safety of themselves or others.
The emphasis is firmly towards engineering and organisational controls and away from
'person-based' controls such as the wearing of PPE.
IN
11
TE
(i)

These Regulations require that where a risk has been identified by a risk assessment and it
cannot be adequately controlled by other means which are equally or more effective, then
the Contractor must provide suitable PPE and ensure that it is correctly used and cared for
by employees.
Detailed requirements of any such risk assessment require the problem to be thought
through in a structured manner and the right equipment chosen for the right reasons.
A key factor is the competence of the person carrying out the assessments. If they do not get
it right, the consequences for the health and safety of employees could well be very serious.
In essence, personal protective equipment may only be used as a last resort after all other
means of eliminating or controlling the risk have been considered.
In deciding which type to issue, the Contractor must take into account the hazard that the
PPE is being used to protect against and ensure that the PPE will fit the wearer and allow
them to work safely. If more than one item of PPE is being used at any one time, the
Contractor must make sure that individual items of PPE are compatible and do not adversely
affect the performance of each other.
Whenever PPE is to be issued, the Contractor must ensure that employees have been given
adequate and appropriate information, instruction and training to enable the employees to
understand the risks being protected against, the purpose of the PPE and the manner in
EG
QCS 2014

Page 17
which it is to be used.
properly use the PPE provided, in accordance with the information, instruction and
training that they have been given
(b)
return PPE to its storage facility, where provided, after use
(c)
know the procedures for reporting loss of any PPE or defects in it to their Contractor.
The assessment must consider:

an assessment of the risks to health and safety that have not been controlled by other
means
(b)
the nature of the risks to health and safety against which the PPE is to protect the user
(c)
a comparison of the nature of the risks and the performance capabilities of the PPE
(d)
the compatibility of the PPE under consideration and any other PPE that will be worn
at the same time.
AL
(a)
(a)
Contractors and self-employed persons must:
IO
Whilst the Contractor must ensure that personal protective equipment is supplied and used,
the employee has duties to:
(a)
review such assessments if it is thought that they are no longer valid or if there has
been a significant change in the matters to which it relates
(b)
incorporate any changes that are indicated by the review.
AT
These Regulations requires that Contractors ensure that PPE that has been provided to
employees is maintained (which includes replacement or cleaning) in an efficient state,
efficient working order and good repair.
11
These Regulations require that Contractors provide suitable storage facilities for PPE that
has been issued, for when it is not in use.
12
These Regulations require that Contractors who have provided employees with PPE also
provide adequate and appropriate information, instruction and training to enable employees
to know:
(b)
(c)
the risk or risks for which the PPE has been provided
(a)
EG
IN
TE
10
the purpose for which, and the manner in which, the PPE is to be used
any actions that they (users) must take to keep the PPE in the suitable condition.
13
Training can be theoretical and/or practical. Where appropriate the Contractor should, at
appropriate intervals, arrange suitable demonstrations in the correct wearing of PPE.
14
These Regulations place a legal duty on:

(a)
Contractors to take reasonable steps to ensure that the PPE provided to employees is
used correctly
(b)
employees to use the PPE provided in accordance with any instruction and training
provided
(c)
employees to take reasonable steps to return PPE to any storage facilities provided.
1.2.2.4 Construction (Head Protection)

1
These Regulations require that all at-risk persons involved in construction and engineeringconstruction activities are provided with, and wear, suitable head protection on site.
QCS 2014

Page 18
Under these Regulations, the term 'suitable head protection' means any head protection
that is designed to protect the wearer against any foreseeable risk of head injury, other than
by falling. It must, with necessary adjustment, fit comfortably.
Whilst generally the Contractor's interpretation of this legislation means that safety helmets
are worn at all times on site except when in safe areas such as site offices and canteens,
individual Contractors may decide that on certain sites they are able to designate other 'safe
areas' or 'safe routes' where helmets need not be worn.
This decision must be based on the findings of a risk assessment which must investigate
fully the danger of workers being hit by anything falling from above or of them hitting their
head and being injured. It is not unknown for 'protected routes' to be created on larger sites
enabling people to gain access to office complexes etc. from the site entrance, without the
need to wear full PPE.
any head protection provided under these Regulations has to comply with any relevant
European Standards and must therefore carry a CE mark
(b)
before selecting any head protection for employees, the Contractor or self-employed
person must carry out an assessment to determine whether it is suitable.
AL
(a)
In order to determine whether it is suitable, the assessment must compare the required
protection characteristics of the head protection with the known risks.
Contractors must:
IO
AT
review such assessments if it is thought that they are no longer valid or if there has
been a significant change in the matters to which it relates
(b)
incorporate any changes that are indicated by the review.
(a)
In general, suitable head protection will be an industrial safety helmet conforming to BS EN

397. For work in confined spaces, a bump cap designed to BS EN 812 may be more
suitable, but is restrictive in use.
IN
TE
1.2.2.5 Contractor's duties
EG
The Contractor must:

(a)
carry out an assessment to determine the suitability of head protection
(b)
produce written rules on the use of head protection or provide directions (such as
verbal instructions and safety signs) to reinforce when and where head protection
must be worn and bring those rules to the attention of any persons who might be
affected by them
(c)
provide each employee with suitable head protection and adequate storage facilities
(d)
ensure that all head protection is adequately maintained and, where necessary,
replaced.
The Contractor must also keep records of the assessment and details of the control
measures implemented. These will need to be reviewed as a result of any significant change
in the work to which the protection relates or when its suitability is no longer valid.
1.2.2.6 Employees' duties

1
Employees must:
(a)
co-operate with their Contractor
(b)
wear the head protection provided in accordance with instructions or written rules
QCS 2014

Page 19
(c)
take reasonable care of the head protection provided and report any loss, defect or
concerns about its serviceability.
No other workers are covered by this exemption.

Provision, maintenance and replacement of suitable head protection
Every Contractor must provide each employee with suitable head protection where, due to
the nature of the work or activity, they are at risk from head injuries. All self-employed
persons have an obligation to provide themselves with suitable head protection in similar
circumstances. In both cases, the head protection must be adequately maintained to ensure
serviceability, and it should be replaced as necessary.
The assessment should be reviewed as a result of any significant change in the work to
which the protection relates or it is no longer suitable. Contractors should ensure that
storage for head protection is available when it is not in use.
AL
IO
Every Contractor and anyone who has control over persons at work have a duty to ensure
suitable head protection is worn.
AT
Ensuring suitable head protection is worn
Rules and directions
As part of pre-planning for the commencement of work, written rules on the use of head
protection should be established by site management, particularly on multi-contractor sites.
Rules should be clear, unambiguous and brought to the notice of those affected. Persons in
control should consult with any interested parties in matters relating to head protection.
Where written rules are not in place, verbal instructions or the provision of safety signs may
help to provide a procedure and a reinforcement of when and where to use suitable head
protection.
EG
IN
TE
Wearing of suitable head protection

In compliance with written rules or instructions given by those in control of operations or
works, employees should wear suitable head protection as directed.
Reporting the loss of, or defect in, head protection
10
Every employee, having been provided with head protection, should take reasonable care of
it, reporting any loss, obvious defects or concern about its serviceability to the Contractor,
under the arrangements that have been made. These arrangements should enable repairs
or replacement head protection to be provided, before the employee concerned is allowed to
restart work.
1.2.2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (Control of Substances Hazardous to Health)

1
These Regulations place a duty on Contractors to ensure that the exposure of their
employees to substances hazardous to health is either prevented or, where this is not
reasonably practicable adequately controlled.
These control measures include:

Page 20
(a)
Contractors must either prevent exposure of employees to substances hazardous to

health or, where this is not reasonably practicable, adequately control exposure.
(b)
The preferable method of prevention or control is to substitute the substance or

process with a non-hazardous or less hazardous substance or process.
(c)
Controls shall be, in order of priority, by engineering controls, by providing ventilation,

by implementing organisational controls then, as a last resort, providing suitable
personal protective equipment.
(d)
All employees must make proper use of any PPE, and must take all steps to return it
to its place of storage after use and report any defects to their Contractor.
(e)
Adequate maintenance, examination and testing of control measures provided must

be undertaken to ensure they are in efficient working order and, in the case of PPE,
maintained in a clean condition.
(f)
Information, instruction and training must be provided for persons who may be
exposed to substances hazardous to health so that they are aware of the danger of
exposure and the precautions which should be taken.
1.2.2.8 Personal Protective Equipment (Work at Height)
AL
QCS 2014
These Regulations are relevant where PPE in the form of a safety harness, lanyard, a fallarrest block or other personal fall-arrest equipment is used.
The key provisions of these Regulations are that Contractors should:

where it is reasonably practicable, avoid the need to carry out work at height
(b)
where such work cannot be avoided, select the most appropriate equipment for the
work and to prevent falls
(c)
reduce the distance of, and potential consequences of, any fall
(d)
ensure that the work is risk
(e)
assessment-based and that it is carried out safely
(f)
ensure the work is carried out by trained and competent persons who are adequately
supervised.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
These Regulations require that Contractors follow current best industry practice when
selecting equipment for work at height. In particular, Contractors are required to take account
of:
AT
IO
(a)
working conditions and risks to the safety of the persons at work
(b)
access and egress, and distances to be negotiated
(c)
distance and consequences of any potential fall
(d)
duration and frequency of use of the work equipment
(e)
need for and ease of evacuation and rescue in an emergency
(f)
any additional risks posed by the installation, use or removal of the work equipment,
and any evacuation or rescue from it.
The requirements are:

(a)
a personal fall protection system shall only be used if a risk assessment has shown
that the work can be done safely while it is being used, and that the use of other, safer
work equipment is not reasonably practicable
(b)
the user and a sufficient number of others have been trained in its use and in rescue
procedures
QCS 2014

Page 21
(c)
it shall be suitable and of sufficient strength for the purpose for which it is to be used
and will withstand any foreseeable loading
(d)
it fits the wearer and is correctly fitted or worn
(e)
it is designed to minimise injury to the user in the event of a fall, and is such that the
user will not fall or slip out of it if they do fall
(f)
it is designed, installed and used so as to prevent unplanned or uncontrolled

movement of the user.
Any anchorage point must be suitable and of sufficient strength to support any foreseeable
loading. If designed to do so, the equipment must be securely attached to at least one such
anchorage point when in use.
All safety harnesses, lanyards and other fall prevention or fall arrest equipment must comply
with the appropriate British and European standards.
AL
1.2.2.9 Common-use types of PPE
Hearing protection
Construction activity and equipment generate excessive noise, which can cause permanent
hearing damage in those exposed to it unless appropriate control measures are put in place.
Excessive noise can also cause annoyance, fatigue, loss of concentration and disrupted
communication, and may lead directly or indirectly to an increased risk of accidents.
There are two basic types of hearing protection:
AT
IO
ear plugs - either disposable or reusable
(b)
ear defenders.
IN
Disposable ear plugs
TE
(a)
These are made of very fine mineral fibre, sometimes ready shaped. They must be inserted
correctly and, if taken out, should not be reused. They should only be handled with clean
hands.
Employees need to be instructed on how to insert disposable ear plugs correctly or the
assumed level of protection will not be reached.
EG
Reusable ear plugs

6
These are made of rubber or plastic, and need regular and careful washing. They must be a
good fit. A competent person should be responsible for instructing employees in their correct
fitting and use. Different sizes may be required for each ear. Reusable ear plugs, like
disposable ones, must be fitted with clean hands as any contamination by dirt, grease or
swarf may cause ear irritation.
Ear defenders
Ear defenders, sometimes referred to as 'ear muffs', completely cover the ear, and are
sealed to the head with a foam or liquid-filled seal.
Badly designed or badly produced ear defenders may give little or no protection against the
noise.
Facial hair and the side arms of spectacles may interfere with the seal and reduce the
QCS 2014

Page 22
amount of protection given by ear defenders.
1.2.2.10 Eye protection

1
Construction personnel engaged in a wide range of activities (for example, grinding, welding,
cutting, hammering, handling chemicals) run the risk of eye injury. The risks include:
(a)
impact of solids
(b)
ingress of liquid, dust or gas
(c)
splashes of hot metal
(d)
exposure to glare.
Contractors have a duty to provide eye protection to employees who may be exposed to eye
injury, and must take all reasonable steps to ensure that it is worn. Assessments must be
carried out to determine when eye protection is required and what type is appropriate for the
work activities.
The two main types of eye protection -safety spectacles (including safety goggles) and face
shields
AT
IO
AL
All types of eye protection must:
comply with British or International Standards
(b)
suit the type of work or risk involved -including resistance to impact, heat, dust and
chemical penetration
(c)
suit the user to ensure minimum discomfort and ease of movement whilst working
(d)
be marked to identify their type and suitability
(e)
5
EG
IN
(a)
TE
be kept clean and disinfected.
Lasers that are now widely used on construction sites for setting datums, levelling,
surveying, and so on can pose a particular hazard. They must be operated by competent
and fully trained persons. If high powered lasers are used, eye protection equipment will be
needed to give the required level of protection to those at risk. A safe system of work must
be in place to exclude anyone not involved in the activity from the area.
1.2.2.11 Respiratory protection

The hazards
1
Dust has long been known as hazardous to the health of construction workers, especially
when inhaled for long periods. While the health issues associated with asbestos are well
recognised, the greater part of the dust problem in the industry currently relates to more
common substances, for example, cement, plaster, wood, MDF, stone, silica, fillers and
plastics. High speed cutting of most materials can produce sufficient dust to cause a health
hazard.
QCS 2014

Page 23
Dust that is visible in the air is generally accepted as being hazardous. However, dust that is
too fine to be seen by the naked eye also causes many health problems, the symptoms of
which may take many years to manifest themselves. Small dust particles of any material
entering the lungs can be absorbed into the body and can cause scarring and sometimes
cancer within the lungs. Skin irritation, dermatitis and ulceration can be caused by contact
with some dusts.
Eating food with dirty or dust-covered hands can cause stomach disorders.
Fumes from certain substances, such as solvents, paints and adhesives, can have serious
health implications. When used in poorly ventilated or confined spaces, it is not uncommon
for fatalities to occur.
Whenever respiratory protective equipment (RPE) is to be used for work, a test check that a
facepiece (the respirator) matches the person's facial features and seals adequately to the
wearer's face. It will also ensure that incorrectly fitting facepieces are not selected for use.
This test must be carried out by a competent person.
The training of employees in the correct use of RPE is essential before first use and should
be repeated at suitable intervals. It is essential that training is carried out by a competent
person and covers:
AL
why the RPE is necessary
(b)
the hazards, the risks and the effects of exposure
(c)
what RPE is to be provided
(d)
how the RPE works
(e)
why facepiece fit testing might be necessary
(f)
how to wear and check the RPE correctly
(g)
fit-checking the RPE before use
(h)
what maintenance is required and when
(i)
where and how to clean the RPE and store it
(j)
how to report defects in the RPE or any other problem with it
(k)
the Contractor's responsibilities and those of employees
(l)
use and misuse of the RPE.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
Selecting RPE
7
The provision and use of RPE must only be considered when equally or more effective
protective control measures cannot be used. The failure of RPE could have serious
consequences. The importance of the correct type of RPE being provided and used cannot
be overstated as it must be assumed that the user will be working in a hostile environment.
However, there are several potential problems arising from the selection and/or use of RPE:
(a)
the failure of an item of RPE, where for whatever reason, such as lack of routine
maintenance, it fails to provide the necessary level of protection
(b)
the misuse of RPE, such as it being mistreated or not used in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, or the training given
(c)
it being the wrong type of RPE, for example there would be no protection from a
filtering respirator designed solely to capture airborne dust if being used, where the
workplace hazard is in fact a toxic gas
(d)
the effectiveness of the 'face fit'. Many types of RPE depend upon a good seal
QCS 2014

Page 24
between the facepiece and the skin of the user at all times, including where physical
activity and exertion are required. Factors such as facial hair or the shape of the face
can interfere with a good fit.
Each type of RPE is assigned a 'protection factor' which gives the user some idea of the
level of protection that the device will provide. For example, a filtering half-mask marked:
10
FF P1
is a low efficiency device offering a protection factor of 4
11
FF P2
is a medium efficiency device offering a protection factor of 10
12
FF P3
is a high efficiency device offering a protection factor of 20
13
A protection factor of 10 means that in controlled conditions, for every 10 units of

contaminant outside the mask, only 1 unit will get inside the mask, or for every 20 units
outside the mask there will be 2 units inside, and so on. It is important, therefore, that the
correct filter is selected for the type and level of contaminant in the air.
14
There are many types of RPE, including:
AL
disposable face mask respirators
(b)
half-mask dust respirators
(c)
high efficiency dust respirators
(d)
positive pressure powered respirators
(e)
ventilator visor or helmet respirators
(f)
compressed air line breathing apparatus
(g)
self-contained breathing apparatus.
TE
AT
IO
(a)
It should be noted that nuisance dust masks (simple gauze filters or cup-shaped filters often
held in place by a single strap) are not classed as personal protective equipment or
respiratory protective equipment. They do not meet any current standards.
16
The Contractor must carry out an assessment to determine when RPE is required and what
type is appropriate for controlling exposure to the hazardous material. Selecting RPE that is
both suitable for the user and the job must be carried out by a competent person. This is
because this choice will depend on a number of interacting factors, such as:
EG
IN
15
(a)
the nature of the hazards and materials
(b)
the measured dust concentrations
(c)
the period of exposure
(d)
if working outdoors, the prevailing weather conditions.
QCS 2014

Page 25
(e)
suitability for each user - field of vision, provision for communication and the need to
move in cramped or difficult working places, such as confined spaces.
Using and maintaining RPE

Both the Contractor and the employee have a duty to ensure that all RPE provided is used
correctly and that it is stored correctly after use.
18
Contractors must also ensure that non-disposable RPE is thoroughly examined and tested at
appropriate intervals. Such examinations and tests should be carried out at least every
month, and more frequently where conditions are particularly severe. Longer intervals may
be more appropriate in the case of certain RPE, for example, half-mask respirators used
infrequently for short spells against air contaminants of relatively low toxicity. However, the
longest interval between examinations and tests should not exceed three months.
19
Disposable RPE, provided it is only used for one working day or shift then disposed of, does
not require any examination or tests.
AL
17
1.2.2.12 Skin protection
IO
Industrial dermatitis
Industrial dermatitis is caused by contact between the skin (usually the hands) and irritant
substances. Many types of gloves are available to prevent such contact. It is essential that a
risk assessment identifies the properties of the hazardous substance so that the correct type
of glove can be provided.
Dermatitis, an inflammatory skin disease, accounts for over half of all working days lost
through industrial sickness. There are two general types:
contact or irritant dermatitis - usually where the skin comes into contact with an irritant
substance
allergic or sensitive dermatitis - where a person develops an allergic reaction to a substance.
With different people, some substances are known to have the effect as either an irritant or a
sensitiser, such as turpentine.
In the course of their work, many construction workers are likely to come into contact with
one or more possible skin irritants, such as:
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
cement, lime and plaster
(b)
certain types of wood, resins, fungicides and pesticides
(c)
paint
(d)
tar, pitch and bitumen
(e)
solvents, thinners and degreasers
(f)
mineral oils and grease.
Cuts and abrasions

7
Many people working in the construction industry will carry out manual work that will render
them susceptible to cuts and abrasions if the correct type of gloves are not provided and
worn.
Again, gloves designed to protect the hands against cuts and abrasions are freely available.
QCS 2014

Page 26
Generally, rigger gloves offer adequate protection for most activities although for some
activities, such as handling sheet glass, specialist Kevlar-impregnated gloves will be
necessary.
1.2.2.13 Hot works

1
Activities such as welding and grinding will require that the hands, forearms and face are
protected against high temperatures and welding fumes or grinding sparks. To achieve this
level of protection it is necessary for those who carry out such activities to wear specialist
PPE made for the purpose. For example, welders should wear welding gauntlets that extend
up to the elbow and a face shield.
1.2.2.14 Acid and alkali burns

Some substances that are in common use in the construction industry have sufficiently
strong acid or alkali properties to cause burns to the skin.
Gloves are available to protect the users of such substances from chemical burns.
AL
IO
1.2.2.16 Selection of hand protection
AT
Special anti-vibration gloves will help lessen the effects of using rotary or percussive hand
tools (which can lead to vibration white finger) but most are ineffective at the most damaging
frequencies and are of more value in keeping the hands warm.
1.2.2.15 Vibration
British Standards cover many types of protective glove but care is needed in selecting the
right type for a particular hazard. For example, a glove suitable for handling abrasive
materials may offer no protection against chemicals, while the appropriate glove to protect
the skin against contact with diesel oil may offer no protection against some solvents.
All manufacturers offer advice on the most suitable gloves for specific types of hazard, some
of which are summarised in the following table.
EG
IN
TE
Hazard
Recommended type
Acids, concrete, brickwork, stain removers,

Neoprene, nitrile, PVC, rubber
solvents, alkalis
Esters, ethers, ketones (mastic, sealers),
aldehydes, petroleum-based products
Medium and heavy weight rubber, neoprene,

nitrile, PVC
High and low temperatures
Nitrile, PVC, medium and heavyweight rubber
Abrasion, unloading bricks and blocks,

general materials handling
Rubber, nitrile, PVC, neoprene, chrome-leather

with reinforced palm
Bitumen, hot work
Asbestos substitute or 'Nomex' gloves
QCS 2014

Page 27
It should be noted that industrial safety gloves are rated from 1-4 for their resistance to
abrasion, tear and puncture, and 1-5 for blade cut. Those specifying and purchasing work
gloves must ensure that the correct grade is obtained, if necessary by speaking to the
manufacturers or suppliers.
1.2.2.17 Foot protection

It is essential that protective footwear is worn when people are on site, both from a
Contractor's point of view, in being able to provide a safe place and a safe method of
working, and from an employee's position where safety footwear has a benefit in preventing
injuries.
Wellington boots, for example, whether reinforced with protective toecaps or soles or not, are
essential in preventing burns from wet cement or concrete. The cement content, when mixed
with water, becomes highly corrosive and will cause severe burns to body tissue.
The above picture shows the severely burnt legs of a man who was ignorant of the dangers
of wet cement, the effect it can have on skin, and the need to wear Wellington boots to
protect the legs.
Other clothing that protects the wearer against any risk to their health or safety, for example
a high-visibility waistcoat, is classified as PPE whereas clothing such as uniforms, the
primary purpose of which is to promote a corporate image, is not.
EG
Other clothing
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.2.2.18 Fall protection

1
Items of equipment that are used by a person to prevent that person falling from height are
also classified as PPE. Examples of this type of equipment are:
(a)
safety harness
(b)
fall-arrest or restraint lanyard
(c)
inertia reel fall-arrest block.
All the Contractors' and employees' duties that apply to other types of PPE apply to this type
of equipment also.
A major additional consideration regarding the use of this type of PPE is the prompt rescue
of anyone who has fallen and is suspended in a harness. A medical condition known as
suspension trauma, which at worst can result in the death of the suspended person, can
occur if rescue is not carried out within 10 minutes.
QCS 2014

Page 28
1.2.2.19 Life jackets

1
Another category of PPE is that which enables the user to keep afloat should they fall into
water or other liquids. These are broadly divided into life jackets and buoyancy aids.
In many circumstances it will be necessary for operatives to simultaneously wear more than
one item of PPE.
Whilst this is entirely acceptable, attention should be given to ensuring that the different
types of PPE are compatible with each other, to avoid the possibility of a dangerous
situation.
For example, hearing protectors that are fitted directly to a safety helmet will not be effective
if the safety helmet is poorly fitting and, by moving around on the head, does not allow the
hearing protectors to form an effective seal around the ears.
AL
1.2.2.20 Consultation with employees

Contractors are likely to be far more successful in persuading employees to wear the PPE
provided if the employees themselves are involved in the process of selecting the PPE
purchased.
PPE can be cumbersome and uncomfortable and the cheapest may not be the most suitable
for the wearer. In such circumstances the likelihood is that it will not be worn, at least not for
long, leaving the worker unprotected against the hazard.
It is much better to purchase PPE that fits comfortably and will be used willingly.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
QCS 2014

Page 29

1.2.3
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH)
1.2.3.1 Key points

Many of the substances used or created during work processes have the potential to cause
harm to the health of anyone exposed to them.
In construction many COSHH issues relate to substances created such as dust or fumes, as
opposed to chemicals that have been bought in.
Hazardous substances that are already present on site when it is first occupied can also
pose hazards to health.
All purchased products that are hazardous to health must carry an appropriate warning
symbol on the packaging, however those hazardous substances which are created by the
work process or are already present on site will carry no such 'health warning'.
Contractors have duties to establish the health risks to their employees, and others who may
come into contact with hazardous substances, by carrying out an appropriate assessment
and must put in place adequate control measures.
The assessment should take into account how the substance is used and should not merely
be a copy of the supplier's information.
Ideally, exposure to any hazardous substance would be rendered impossible by:
AT
IO
AL
the substitution of safer substances
(b)
changing the way that the job is carried out so that the substance is not necessary
(c)
modifying the method of its use, for example total enclosure of the process.
(a)
In many cases, none of these measures is practical in a construction site environment: if the
prevention of exposure is not possible, the level of exposure must be controlled.
Using PPE to control exposure must only be considered as a last resort after other methods
have been explored and found not to be reasonably practicable.
10
In some cases employees exposed to hazardous substances must be offered health

surveillance.
EG
IN
TE
1
These Regulations are based on very simple principles. The intention of these Regulations is
to protect human health from exposure to hazardous substances by either totally preventing
exposure or, where that is not reasonably practicable, controlling the level of exposure to
safe values, by appropriate means.
COSHH deals with all harmful substances in relation to their health effects. However, these
Regulations do not cover any flammable or explosive properties that the substances might
also possess.
QCS 2014

Page 30
1.2.3.3 Sources of harm

1
Many of the basic substances (products) bought in and used in the construction industry
have the potential to harm the health of people using them, for example sand, cement,
synthetic mineral fibre, adhesives, solvents, resins, and mineral oils.
Additionally, many of the essential construction processes can create potentially hazardous
substances, for example the inhalation of:
dust from mixing cement, taking down ceilings and walls, chasing out or cutting blocks
(b)
solvent fumes arising from the application of adhesives for surface finishes
(c)
metal fumes and toxic gases, such as carbon monoxide, nitrous fumes and ozone,
which can be created by welding or hot cutting processes.
AL
A third group of substances, also covered by these Regulations, are harmful substances
(including micro-organisms) that may already be on site when a project commences.
Examples are:
leptospirosis, which can be spread by the urine of infected rats
(b)
discarded needles and syringes, which have the potential to pass on blood-borne
diseases such as HIV and hepatitis
(c)
hazardous materials buried or simply left by a previous user of the land.
IO
(a)
AT
(a)
The Regulations cover substances that have chronic or delayed effects, for example,
substances that are carcinogenic (cause cancer), mutagenic (cause mutation of the body) or
teratogenic (cause malformation of an embryo).
The purpose of these Regulations is to safeguard the health of people using or coming into
contact with any substance that is harmful to health.
These Regulations apply to those substances that are classified as being very toxic, toxic,
harmful, corrosive or irritant.
IN
TE
EG
1.2.3.4 Workplace exposure limits (WEL)

Unsurprisingly, some hazardous substances have legal limits to which people may be
exposed. All of these substances have a Workplace Exposure Limit (WEL) that represents a
concentration of a substance in the air measured over a specific period of time. The taking of
such measurements (workplace monitoring) is a specialist activity which must be carried out
by someone who is competent to do so and who possess the appropriate equipment.
Such monitoring must be carried out where a (COSHH) risk assessment indicates it is
necessary.
The following substances, all of which have a WEL, are commonly used in or produced by
construction activities:
(a)
general dust
(b)
hardwood dust
(c)
softwood dust
(d)
silica
(e)
white spirit
(f)
pulverised fuel ash
(g)
synthetic mineral fibre - rock wool/ fibreglass
QCS 2014

Page 31
(h)
asphalt
(i)
welding/cutting fume
(j)
gypsum
(k)
Portland cement
(l)
micro-organisms associated with:

(i)
blood products
(ii) Weil's disease
(iii) tetanus
(iv) sewage
(v) certain 'black mould' species
(vi) anthrax.
This list is not exhaustive. Every Contractor has a legal duty to access competent health and
safety advice. Failing to establish that an in-use substance has a WEL, or failing to control
exposure to it, are criminal offences under Qatar Law.
A list of all WELs is published by the UK Health and Safety Executive (HSE) in Guidance
Note EH40/2005, available in hard copy or for download via the:
IO
AT
AL
HSE website at www.hse.gov.uk/coshh/table1.pdf
1.2.3.5 Is there a COSHH problem?
Those who plan and carry out work that could result in exposure to hazardous substances
may have difficulty in appreciating that there is a (real or potential) problem. This is
particularly true when a hazardous substance is created by the work process.
For example, a hardwood plank should not pose any serious health issues in the form that it
is delivered to site. However, cutting or sanding it will produce dust that, unless controlled,
has the potential to cause irritation of the nasal passages, sensitisation or, on rare
occasions, nasal cancer. Cutting, sawing, grinding or sanding any substances has the
potential to liberate harmful dust. Furthermore, many types of hot works will create harmful
fumes or gasses which may be inhaled unless the process is closely controlled.
The COSHH Regulations place a duty on the Contractor to assess whether or not a hazard
to the health of the employees, or other persons, will arise from the presence of hazardous
substances during work activities. This process is known as carrying out a COSHH
assessment.
The decision-making process that must be worked through when carrying out an
assessment will be familiar to anyone who has completed risk assessments.
Establishing the degree of risk can require expertise and experience. For example, if the only
way to complete an activity involves using a particularly hazardous substance (for example
dry rot treatments), the work will have to be well planned, managed and closely controlled.
This would result in a high hazard/low risk situation.
Conversely, it is possible to create very high exposures that may be harmful to health from
apparently low risk substances like dust, which is a common COSHH problem in
construction.
EG
IN
TE
QCS 2014

Page 32
1.2.3.6 Definitions
1
The meanings of the following words need to be clearly understood.
Substance means any natural or artificial substance, in solid, liquid, gaseous or vapour
form, and includes micro-organisms.
Hazard is the potential for the substance to cause harm, illness or damage to health.
Risk is the likelihood that the hazardous potential of the substance will be realised.
1.2.3.7 Control of Substances Hazardous to Health

1
These Regulations place a duty on Contractors.
These duties cover:

people actually working with substances
(b)
other people such as the public or other contractors who might be affected.
AL
(a)
Significant findings of the COSHH assessment and the actions that will be taken to control
exposures must be written down.
The main requirements of these Regulations are as follows.
AT
IO
Assess the health risks to employees or other people created by work activities that
involves substances hazardous to health.
(b)
Implement suitable control measures to effectively protect employees and others from
exposure.
(c)
Review the assessment if there have been any changes that may invalidate it, such
as:
(i)
IN
TE
(a)
a change in the way the work is carried out, or
EG
(ii) the results of monitoring indicating that existing control measures are not
effective.
The emphasis under COSHH is to avoid exposure to hazardous substances unless it is not
reasonably practicable to do so, in which case adequate control measures must be put in
place to control exposure to a safe level.
These Regulations require the following thought process in relation to control:
(a)
Can the work be carried out by a less hazardous method that does not require the use
of hazardous substances?
(b)
If not, can the substance be changed (substituted)?
If the answer to both of these questions is 'no' then the introduction of measures to control
exposure will be necessary.
'Engineering' controls should be the first controls to be considered, such as pouring devices
to stop splashes, the use of dust extraction, increasing ventilation and so on. PPE should not
be considered as a control until engineering control options have been exhausted. PPE:
(a)
can be expensive
(b)
can be unpleasant to wear
(c)
only protects the wearer and then only if it is being used correctly and maintained
QCS 2014
(d)

Page 33
often requires considerable management effort to ensure that it is used correctly.
Removing the need to buy and use it makes good occupational health and business sense.
10
The requirements of these Regulations are very thorough and one of those requirements is
to ensure that the control measures which have been identified as suitable are properly
used.
11
To ensure that the control measures are effective, the Regulations require that:
extract ventilation systems must be thoroughly examined periodically
(b)
if using substances which are known to damage health, part of the assessment is
likely to identify that health surveillance is necessary. Any records must be kept for 40
years and made available to the people who have been exposed to the hazard
(c)
there is a duty to communicate the information and provide relevant training to people
who may be exposed
(d)
emergency arrangements are put in place and, where required, practised.
AL
(a)
IO
Contractors must carry out a risk assessment of health risks created by work involving
substances hazardous to health. Each assessment must take account of:
the hazardous properties of the substance
(b)
information provided by the supplier on the potential harmful effects
(c)
the type, level and duration of exposure
(d)
the way in which the job will be carried out, including the amount of the substance
used (or present in the case of substances created by a work process)
(e)
activities such as maintenance where there is the potential for high levels of exposure
(f)
any published WEL for the substance (EH40 Benchmarked Standards to which the
Qatar Construction Industry will adopt)
(g)
the effects of any control measures which are, or will be, in place
(h)
the results of any health surveillance and/or exposure monitoring that has been
undertaken
(i)
(j)
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
1.2.3.8 Summary of COSHH
the risks where there is exposure to more than one hazardous substance at any one
time
other information that the Contractor may need or have in order to complete the
assessment.
Any assessment must be reviewed regularly if there is reason to suspect that the
assessment is no longer valid, or if there has been a significant change in the work to which
the assessment relates, or exposure monitoring results indicate it is necessary.
Contractors must record significant findings of the risk assessment and the steps taken to
prevent or control exposure.
Contractors must either prevent exposure of employees to substances hazardous to health

or, where this is not reasonably practicable, adequately control exposure.
The preferable method of prevention or control is to replace the substance or process with a
non-hazardous or less hazardous substance or process.
Controls shall be, in order of priority: engineering controls, organisational controls, then, as a
QCS 2014

Page 34
last resort, providing suitable personal protective equipment (PPE).

7
The control measures must:

(a)
ensure the safe handling, storage, transportation and disposal of hazardous

substances
(b)
ensure maintenance procedures, which involve exposure to hazardous substances,

are suitable
(c)
reduce to a minimum the number of people exposed, the level and duration of
exposure and the quantity of hazardous substances present in the workplace
(d)
include control of the working environment, including the provision of adequate

ventilation
(e)
include adequate hygiene and washing facilities.
These Regulations contain further details of measures that must be taken to control
exposure to carcinogens, mutagens and biological agents.
With regard to these Regulations, it is considered that control of exposure will be generally
adequate if:
AL
work activities are organised to minimise the release and spread of hazardous
substances
(b)
account is taken of the routes of exposure - inhalation, skin absorption and ingestion
(c)
the control measures selected:
AT
IO
(a)
are proportionate to the degree of health risk
(ii)
are effective in minimising the escape and spread of the substance
(iii)
may, where necessary, include a combination of control measures, including

PPE
TE
(i)
the control measures selected are periodically reviewed for their effectiveness
(e)
users of hazardous substances are informed of the hazards and risks and trained in
the use of the control measures provided
(f)
it does not increase the overall risks to health or safety from other sources.
EG
IN
(d)
1.2.3.9 Control Measures

1
Contractors who provide any control measure are required to ensure that it is properly used
or applied. All employees must:
(a)
make proper use of any control measure (including PPE) provided
(b)
take all steps to return it to its place of storage after use
(c)
report any defects in the control measure to their Contractor.
Where control measures are provided, adequate maintenance, examination and testing of
control measures, including any PPE provided, must be undertaken to ensure they are in
efficient working order and remain clean.
Where engineering controls are undertaken, the Contractor must ensure thorough
examinations and testing are carried out on a regular basis.
1.2.3.10 Monitoring
1
Where indicated as necessary by the COSHH assessment, monitoring of the exposure to
QCS 2014

Page 35
hazardous substances must be undertaken using suitable procedures, unless it can be

demonstrated by another method of evaluation that exposure is adequately controlled.
2
Suitable records of any monitoring should be kept tor five years, or 40 years if personal
exposures occur.
1.2.3.11 Health surveillance

Health surveillance, where it is appropriate for protecting employees' health, must be carried
out and recorded.
Where an employee requires medical surveillance following exposure, and it has been
decided that the employee cannot continue in that work, the Contractor must take steps to
ensure the employee adheres to the medical decision unless it has been cancelled.
Upon reasonable notice, a Contractor must allow the employee to access any medical
records applying to them.
AL
Information, instruction and training must be provided for persons who may be exposed to
substances hazardous to health so that they are aware of the danger of exposure and the
precautions which should be taken.
AT
IO
1.2.3.12 Information, instruction and training
first-aid provisions
(b)
the use of safety drills and their regular testing
(c)
identification and details of hazards
(d)
specific hazards that are likely to occur during any accident, incident or emergency,
together with warning and communication systems and emergency actions.
IN
TE
(a)
These procedures must be made available to accident and emergency services, and be
displayed on site.
Procedures to deal with accidents, incidents and emergencies involving hazardous

substances must be provided. These procedures should include:
EG
1.2.3.13 Procedures
1.2.3.14 COSHH responsibilities

Designers
1
The chain of responsibilities starts at the design stage of a project. Under CDM, designers
have a duty to consider the risks created for the construction, maintenance, cleaning and
use of a structure that could arise out of their designs. This must include consideration of
COSHH issues.
It is important to be aware that this may not eliminate all 'COSHH risks'. Consider, for
example, the periodic painting of a high level structure. It may be considered preferable to
continue to use a solvent-based paint, as opposed to a water-based paint (a less hazardous
product) on the grounds that the periods between painting will be longer, thereby reducing
the frequency of working at height.
Furthermore, designers must take all reasonable steps to provide sufficient COSHH
information about aspects of the design or its construction or maintenance, to adequately
assist the client, other designers and contractors to comply with their duties under these
QCS 2014

Page 36
Regulations.
Clients
4
CDM places a duty on the client to provide pre-construction information to other parties
involved in a project to protect the health and safety of anyone carrying out construction
work, anyone affected by it or those who will use the structure as a place of work.
This will obviously include providing information on any known existing hazardous
substances, such as the presence of hazardous residues in pipework or the existence of
contaminated ground. Where necessary, this may involve commissioning surveys or taking
samples to enable accurate information to be available for a risk-based control. It is no
longer acceptable for the client to say: 'there may be the presence of x'.
Shared Workplace
AL
co-operate with the Contractor and help them ensure the work is carried out safely
(b)
have undertaken their own COSHH assessments in relation to the work they are to
undertake
(c)
have effective arrangements to ensure that control measures are put in place and are
monitored.
IO
(a)
Some risks are likely to have been highlighted in the information provided by the client and
designers. Often designers may simply not be aware of what the job entails, or they may
believe the risks are commonplace and therefore any competent contractor should be aware
of them.
TE
Under CDM, organisations that share a workplace must:
AT
Employees
IN
Employees have duties to:
work with their Contractor to enable them to comply with the law
(b)
make proper use of any control measures provided (including PPE)
(c)
return any control measure, where provided (mainly PPE), to its accommodation after
use
(d)
(e)
EG
(a)
report any defects in the control measures to their Contractor

attend health surveillance medicals where required (the Contractor must pay for the
medical and it must be in paid work time).
1.2.3.15 Work on another Contractor's premises

1
Under CDM the client has a duty to provide pre-construction information to the Contractor,
including the information necessary for maintenance or other work to be carried out, where
this work is being done in an occupied premises.
Examples of such information are:
(a)
details of the substances contained in pipework or tanks, if for example a pipefitter is

to break into a pipe to replace a valve.
(b)
what gases, vapours or fumes may be discharged through a rooftop ventilation duct
during the time a roofer has to work next to it.
There is also a requirement for the client to make sure that contractors are aware of
emergency procedures that might arise out of the use of any particular substance(s) on the
QCS 2014

Page 37
site. Obviously, this duty is reciprocal. The contractor has a duty to inform the client or the
site occupier if (the contractor's) work poses risks to the client's staff and visitors and to
outline how the risks will be controlled. This is particularly important where the client has outof-hours security staff. Often, arrangements that are effective during the working day, to
ensure that the contractor and client liaise, can become non-effective after normal working
hours, for example by the security staff entering an agreed exclusion zone due to ignorance
of the hazards present.
1.2.3.16 Information
1
Information about hazards from substances purchased can be found in several sources:
(a)
Information on labels.
(b)
Information provided by the manufacturer or supplier of the substance
Many suppliers have Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on their websites.
Data sheets must contain certain information:
AL
Identification of the substance or preparation and the company or undertaking

providing the substance.
(b)
Composition and information on ingredients.
(c)
Hazard identification.
(d)
First-aid measures.
(e)
Fire-fighting measures.
(f)
Accidental release measures.
(g)
Handling and storage.
(h)
Exposure controls and personal protection.
(i)
Physical and chemical properties.
(j)
Stability and reactivity.
(k)
Toxicological information.
(l)
Ecological information.
(m)
Disposal considerations.
(o)
IO
AT
N
TE
IN
EG
(n)
(a)
Transport information.
Other information.
If the substance is a carcinogen or a mutagen, i.e. capable of causing cancer or mutation of

the body, every possible step should be taken to eliminate the need for its use.
It is considerably harder to find out information about substances created by the work
process.
1.2.3.17 Carrying out an assessment

1
An assessment is the fundamental requirement of COSHH. It is in two parts.
Firstly, a Contractor must not carry out any work that is liable to expose employees to any
substance hazardous to health, unless a suitable and sufficient assessment of the risks
created by the work has been made.
Secondly, if the first step indicates that substances hazardous to health will be used or
QCS 2014

Page 38
created, Contractors must identify the actions to be taken to comply with these Regulations.
The procedure itself is fairly simple but does take time and effort. It involves:
(a)
identifying jobs, working processes and procedures that involve the use or generation
of substances that are hazardous to health
(b)
identifying all the hazardous substances in use in the workplace, very toxic, toxic,
harmful, corrosive or irritant
(c)
identifying how the hazardous substances are stored and used. This means how they
are used, not how they should be used
AL
Very toxic or toxic

Substances that, in low quantities, cause death or acute or chronic
damage to health when inhaled, swallowed or absorbed via the skin
AT
IO
Harmful
Substances that may cause death or acute or chronic damage to health
when inhaled, swallowed or absorbed via the skin.
IN
TE
Corrosive
Substances that may, on contact with living tissues, destroy them.
EG
Irritant
Non-corrosive substances that through immediate, prolonged or
repeated contact with the skin or mucous membrane, may cause
inflammation.
(d)
identifying how these hazardous substances might enter the body. Normally these
methods are classed as:
(i) inhalation into the lungs, when the substance is in the form of a gas, vapour,
fume, mist, aerosol or dust
(ii)
absorption through the skin or eyes by contact with a substance that can
penetrate unbroken skin, or is absorbed through unprotected cuts or grazes
(iii)
injection by contact with contaminated sharp objects or high-pressure

equipment, e.g. water jetting
(iv)
ingestion by swallowing particles of a hazardous substance resulting from handto-mouth transfer
(e)
identifying the amount of exposure. This involves knowing how much of the substance
will be used, how people will be exposed to it and if there are is a workplace exposure
limit
(f)
investigating the possible health effects of such exposure
(g)
identifying who is at risk, for example the persons using it or anyone who enters the
QCS 2014

Page 39
area within the following 24 hours
(h)
considering the effectiveness of the control measures already in place, for example
whether the concentration of vapour is likely to be above the WEL
(i)
identifying the risk to workers if control measures deteriorate or fail or if an emergency

occurs, for example if a volatile solvent is accidentally spilt resulting in a high
concentration of hazardous vapour in the workplace
(j)
finally, from the above considerations, making a decision upon whether a substance
represents a health risk or not. If the answer is 'no', the findings should be recorded. If
'yes', action will be necessary to either prevent or control exposure.
Completed assessments must be made available to the person who is going to carry out the
work so that they are aware of the health hazards present and the control measures that
they must use.
AL
1.2.3.18 Who can make an assessment?

Anyone who is competent.
IO
1.2.3.19 So how do you do one?
AT
General requirements
The process must be carried out at an early stage to ensure that safe systems of working are
developed before anyone is exposed to potentially harmful substances. However, further
details can be added as the job progresses.
The process of compiling the list of substances must consider the whole lifespan of the site,
for example the chemical treatment of vegetation, and the removal and treatment of
contaminated land before construction starts to the treatment of new timber fencing at the
end of the project.
When carrying out an assessment, in addition to considering normal usage, it is important to

also consider the potential for exposure when the substance is:
EG
IN
TE
handled or stored
(b)
transported
(c)
(a)
accidentally released as the result of an accident
(d)
used for cleaning or maintenance
(e)
disposed of as waste.
1.2.3.20 Step 1: Find out what is (or will be) on site

Bought-in products
1
The first, and easiest, stage is to look at the substances that are bought in. This involves
identifying what is used and what is not hazardous to health. Most construction processes
are relatively simple as they rarely use a large number of substances or involve mixing of
substances. Mechanical workshops, for example where plant is serviced, tend to be more
challenging simply because of the amount of chemicals present in the substances that they
normally use.
Another consideration is the substances that will be brought onto site by other contractors,
how those substances might affect other people and the quality of the contractors' COSHH
assessments.
QCS 2014

Page 40
Furthermore, the site office and other accommodation must not be overlooked. For example,
it is not unreasonable to suppose that strong cleaning materials will be used in catering and
other welfare facilities.
Having made a list of all substances, it is then sensible to identify any products that are
obviously not hazardous, so that they can be ruled out.
Taking cleaning chemicals as an example, washing-up liquid does not have any warning
symbols on it and therefore, other than noting its presence, no further action is necessary.
However, the information on a container of bleach should provide the basis for determining
how it can be used safely. Of the two products that have been considered, one requires no
control measures to be Identified but the second does.
Created by the work process
The situation becomes more complicated when potentially harmful substance, such as many
forms of dust or fumes, are created by work processes. The situation is further complicated if
the substance created has a WEL that must not be exceeded. This may require that
exposure levels are measured unless exposure can be eliminated or controlled to a known
safe level. Again, it will be necessary to also consider potentially harmful processes that will
be carried out by other contractors.
Depending upon the complexity of the project, it may not be possible to complete this part of
the exercise prior to the start of the project unless all work processes and substances that
will be created are known. In these circumstances, it will be a case of building up the
COSHH information as the job progresses, but this must be achieved in such a way that noone is exposed to a potentially harmful substance until the assessment of it has been carried
out and appropriate controls are in place.
Already present on site
TE
AT
IO
AL
A third category of potentially harmful substances is those substances, including microorganisms, that may already be present on site.
10
Examples are:
(b)
(c)
11
land heavily contaminated with fuels, oils and other hazardous liquids which have
seeped into the ground over many years
(a)
EG
IN
residues of hazardous substances left in pipework, underground tanks and drums

substances such as asbestos and polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) that were
deliberately buried by the past users of the land.
Also in contaminated land there could be sources of micro-organisms. These include:

(a)
leptospirosis (Weil's disease) from the presence of infected rats or their carcases
(b)
infected syringes, needles and other items associated with drug-taking, for example
where a derelict site is being refurbished
(c)
tetanus from infected ground or other materials
(d)
a range of respiratory diseases arising from the disturbance of accumulated bird or bat
droppings
(e)
pipework and sumps containing sewage sludge residue.
1.2.3.21 Step 2: Substitution

1
If there is a way around using a potentially hazardous substance, designers and planners
QCS 2014

Page 41
should take advantage of it.

2
Returning to the cleaning materials example, there is no reason why a COSHH assessment
cannot be carried out for bleach, but the first rule of COSHH is to not use the potentially
hazardous product.
Can a safe alternative product be identified? If nothing else, it will be one less COSHH
assessment to carry out.
There are many similar situations, when simply changing the product is either no risk or a
risk that is easier to control.
Other examples include:

altering the work method so the process that produces the exposure is no longer
necessary, e.g. using a demolition shear to cut structural steelwork rather than gas
cutting and therefore avoiding a process that may produce metal fumes and toxic
gases
(b)
changing the work method to prevent the production of a hazardous waste product,
e.g. purchasing panels of the correct size, rather than cutting oversize panels on site
and producing dust. Given the pressure on reducing waste and manual handling, this
is another example where 'good health and safety is good business'
(c)
it may be possible to obtain and use the hazardous substance in a safer form, e.g. as
a liquid or paste rather than as a powder, if using the powder may result in airborne
dust being inhaled by workers.
AT
These examples of controlling the 'COSHH risk' may indicate that some companies are
already doing COSHH assessments without realising it.
IO
AL
(a)
TE
1.2.3.22 Step 3. Exposures - who, what, how much and how often?
Now the assessment process really starts -having identified the substances that may be
harmful for health, the assessment needs to consider the exposures.
Who is exposed? Is it just the person using the substance or can it affect other people?
What are they going to do with it? The decision to either spray or apply paint by brush may
make a significant difference. Spray application will probably mean a much smaller droplet
size, creating a more severe respiratory hazard. This assessment needs to be honest and
objective. For example, paint removal gels state on the tin that they are only for brush
application, although it is physically possible to spray them. However, the controls required
to spray without potentially damaging the skin, eyes or lungs are completely different to
those required for brush application.
How often and how much of a substance is used and for how long are also very important
factors.
EG
IN
1.2.3.23 Step 4. Implementing controls

1
The first step is to consider in detail how the work practices involving potentially hazardous
substances will be carried out. The person carrying out the assessment must be sufficiently
familiar with each process to know exactly how it is carried out.
As an example, a woodworking company purchased vacuum cleaners to remove sawdust in

the woodworking machine shop. They believed that this would result in airborne dust being
reduced to a safe level. However, it was found that the employees continued to use brushes
to sweep the dust into large heaps, which they then vacuumed up. This obviously
QCS 2014

Page 42
circumvented the intended control measure of vacuuming instead of sweeping.

Elimination/substitution
3
As has already been stated, the first and most effective controls are elimination or
substitution, which means either changing the task completely or changing the substance for
a less harmful one.
Engineering controls
The next tier of control is referred to as 'engineering controls'. This encompasses a wide
range of solutions, which traditionally would have been more common in a workshop or
manufacturing environment as they encompass such techniques as completely enclosing
processes, automating a process or installing high efficiency ventilation. However, as the
Qatar construction industry responds to occupational health issues, it is becoming more
common to see features such as:
hand-powered tools fitted with dust extraction apparatus (either in-built or with a fitting
which enables a vacuum cleaner to be attached)
(b)
free-standing dust extraction and collection units
(c)
air handling units that dilute the concentration of any airborne substance
(d)
motorised table-saws that enable wet-cutting to be carried out
(e)
using hydraulic croppers to cut brick pavers rather than disc-cutting them, to reduce
exposure to dust
(f)
lead paint removal by a system that does not heat the paint sufficiently to liberate lead
fumes.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
Some control measures are very simple, for example damping down the dust on a floor slab
before sweeping. Other situations may require a little more thought and ingenuity.
However, it is not always possible or 'reasonably practicable' to introduce engineering

controls and so the implementation of certain organisational controls may be possible.
IN
TE
EG
Organisational controls
These are concerned with investigating whether the way in which the job is carried out can
be changed so that individual exposure is reduced. For example, by carrying out a job out of
normal working hours, the number of persons exposed, who would otherwise have to wear
PPE, will be significantly reduced.
Further examples include:
(a)
job rotation so that no individual person is exposed to a substance above its WEL
(b)
moving a work activity into the open air to prevent the accumulation of vapour or
fumes.
Personal protective equipment (PPE)

9
If it is found that it is not reasonably practicable to implement any of the above control
measures, the use of PPE may be the only control measure that can be effectively used.
Where the health hazard is an airborne substance, respiratory protective equipment (RPE)
will be required.
10
It is important to remember that anyone wearing a mask must be face-fit tested for that type
of mask, and have no facial features, such as a beard, which would interfere with the seal
between the face and the mask. This problem can be overcome by using the loose fitting
QCS 2014

Page 43
'airstream' type of RPE where the mask does not seal to the face and a stream of filtered air
from a blower unit not only aids breathing but also creates an 'over-pressure' around the face
area to stop substances from entering it.
11
As with all PPE, there need to be arrangements to check that it is:

(a)
adequate and suitable for the job
(b)
a proper fit
(c)
stored safely when not in use
(d)
checked for defects and maintained as appropriate
(e)
disposed of safely
(f)
replaced as necessary
Users need to be trained on all these points and must be informed of the operational limits of
the equipment, i.e. what it cannot do as well as what it can do.
13
In some circumstances the application of control measures will continue after the actual work
activity is completed. For example, some jobs will require the operatives to go through a full
decontamination procedure, e.g. working with heavily contaminated land. Anyone who has
been in the live working area may have to follow a strict procedure about where they take
boots and overalls off, or even go through a shower, and it may involve wearing additional
gloves to ensure that contaminants are kept off their skin when decontaminating.
14
Often, simply washing hands with hot soapy water will suffice. Good COSHH practice and
the provision of good welfare facilities are very closely linked. This may mean in some
circumstances that eating and drinking are not allowed other than in designated clean zones.
AT
IO
AL
12
TE
The assessment
The assessment is a 'considered Judgement' that balances the hazardous properties of the
substance, the method by which it will be handled and the environment in which it will be
used.
16
The skill of the COSHH assessor is to:
(b)
17
sift through the information contained on the material safety data sheet (MSDS) and
other sources such as on the container
(a)
EG
IN
15
extract the useful information
(c)
incorporate their knowledge of how, when and where the substance is used
(d)
from the information available, produce a useful and useable COSHH assessment to
guide those who will be doing the work.
Examples of an MSDS and a COSHH assessment are in Appendices 2 and 3, and show
how the mass of information on the MSDS can be condensed into a usable assessment.
Emergencies
18
If significant or dangerous accidental releases or leakages of a hazardous substance are

possible, despite the control measures which have been implemented, an emergency plan
should be drawn up and instigated for achieving suitable control and for safeguarding the
health of anyone who may be affected.
19
The emergency plan should include first-aid provisions and safety drills, including the testing
of drills at regular intervals. Any particular hazards that are likely to occur as a result of the
emergency must be specified.
QCS 2014
20

Page 44
The emergency plan should be made available to all people potentially affected and be
displayed on site. It should also be made available to the accident and emergency services.
1.2.3.24 Review of assessments and control measures

1
An assessment should be reviewed regularly, and at once, if:

(a)
there is reason to believe that it is no longer valid, e.g. new information on health risks
has come to light
(b)
the work to which it relates has changed significantly, e.g. new substances have been
introduced, or the method of working is to change, such as the use of a spray gun to
apply paint instead of a brush or roller
(c)
environment and/or health monitoring results indicate it is necessary.
The definition of 'regularly' will depend on a number of factors, such as the nature of the risk.
However, the maximum period between reviews should not exceed five years.
Each review should trigger an opportunity to consider whether exposure can now be
prevented, for example, by substituting a less hazardous substance or by process changes.
Similarly, control measures should be reappraised to see whether they are still adequate or if
further improvements are necessary and possible.
IO
AL
AT
Use of control measures
Contractors should have procedures in place to ensure that measures provided to control
exposure to hazardous substances, including the provision of PPE, are properly used or
applied. These procedures should include regular inspections of working practices and a
system to ensure that, where remedial action is found to be necessary, it is promptly taken.
Employees have a duty to:
make full and proper use of any control measures and to properly wear any PPE
provided for their use
(b)
take all reasonable steps to return the PPE after use to the accommodation provided
(c)
notify any defects at once to management.
EG
IN
(a)
These are all common sense measures. Work with hazardous substances also dictates that
employees make every effort to practise a high standard of personal hygiene, for example,
by:
TE
(a)
removing any protective clothing (this may be contaminated) and thoroughly washing
before eating and drinking
(b)
consuming food and drink only in mess rooms or canteens
(c)
making full use of shower facilities
(d)
using the storage facilities provided and keeping personal protective clothing separate
from ordinary clothing, to avoid possible contamination
(e)
smoking only in designated areas and thoroughly washing hands before handling
cigarettes or tobacco, otherwise contamination may spread from hands to the mouth
and ingested into the stomach, which can lead, in some circumstances, to serious
health problems.
Maintenance, examination and test of control measures

7
Contractors are required to ensure that all measures installed to prevent or control exposure
to substances hazardous to health under these Regulations are maintained in efficient
QCS 2014

Page 45
working order and in good repair.

8
Certain engineering controls require thorough examination and tests, as follows.

Local exhaust ventilation plant
Local exhaust ventilation plant should be examined and tested at least once every 14
months.
10
Any defects in local exhaust ventilation systems must be reported and promptly rectified.
Non-disposable respiratory protective equipment (RPE)
Thorough examinations and tests of non-disposable respiratory protective equipment (RPE)
should be carried out, where appropriate, at suitable intervals.
12
Examinations and tests should be carried out at least every month, and more frequently
where the conditions of use are particularly severe. Longer intervals may be more
appropriate in the case of certain RPE, e.g. half-mask respirators used infrequently for short
spells against air contaminants of relatively low toxicity. However, the longest interval
between examinations and tests should not exceed three months.
13
Face-fit testing by someone who is competent is required for any tight-fitting masks. For full
face masks, this needs to be quantitative testing using a computerised method.
AT
IO
AL
11
Disposable RPE
No examinations or tests are required, provided that the disposable RPE is used for only one
working day or shift and then disposed of.
15
Again, face-fit testing by a competent person is required. This can be qualitative testing
using a sweet/bitter solution to check the effectiveness of the fit.
IN
TE
14
All examinations, tests and repairs carried out on engineering controls and non-disposable
RPE should be suitably recorded in any format provided they are easily retrievable. These
records should be kept for at least five years.
16
EG
Records
1.2.3.25 Monitoring exposure at the workplace

1
There are certain situations, outlined below, in which the monitoring of exposure to a
hazardous substance is required. Sometimes, however, it is so obvious that there is a
problem that the money may be better spent on solving the problem rather than simply
confirming what was already suspected.
Monitoring is required in the following circumstances:
(a)
where a serious health hazard could arise because of failure or deterioration of the
control measures
(b)
where it is necessary to ensure that a workplace exposure limit (WEL) or Contractorimposed working standard is not exceeded. Significant exposure to silica dust may
require monitoring
(c)
when it is necessary to carry out an additional check on the effectiveness of any

control measure
An example of monitoring would be the use of a personal sampler to monitor an airborne
QCS 2014

Page 46
contaminant in the breathing zone of an employee.

Monitoring records
4
Monitoring records must be kept in a suitable format and be available either as individual
records or as a suitable summary for five years. If they are representative of the personal
exposures of identifiable employees, the records must be kept for at least 40 years.
1.2.3.26 Health surveillance

The main purpose of health surveillance is to detect problems with the health of employees
at the earliest possible stage. The purpose of control measures is to prevent damage to the
health of employees; this is something that health surveillance cannot do. However, adverse
health surveillance results may indicate that the existing control measures are not working
properly.
Health surveillance has to be undertaken when:

an employee is exposed to a substance that is hazardous to health and there is an
identifiable disease or adverse health effect related to this exposure (which may occur
because of the conditions of the work) and there are valid techniques for detecting
indications of the disease or effect. For example, isocyanates used in 'two pack paints'
are respiratory irritants and can result in sensitisation and asthma.
AT
IO
(a)
AL
Working on contaminated land often requires some form of health surveillance. This may
include lung function testing or direct analysis of blood, urine or hair samples. Normally this
would occur before during and after the work. It allows a personal baseline to be established
and then simply acts as a check that the control measures are working.
Suitable health surveillance can be undertaken by an appointed doctor or a registered

medical practitioner or an examination by an occupational health nurse. At the other end of
the scale, health surveillance could simply involve a trained manager or supervisor
inspecting an employee's hands and forearms, looking for the early signs of dermatitis.
Contractors are required to keep health records of employees under health surveillance for
at least 40 years from the date of the last entry.
EG
IN
TE
1.2.3.27 Information, instruction and training for people who may be exposed to
hazardous substances
1
If an employee is likely to be exposed to substances hazardous to health, the Contractor

must provide sufficient information, instruction and training so that the employee is aware of:
(a)
the health risks, and
(b)
the precautions that should be taken.
It is important that workers do not put themselves at risk due to lack of information,
instruction or training.
Therefore, they should be knowledgeable of the health risks, the precautions they should
take (including the control measures), and be able to use the supplied personal protective
equipment effectively.
They should also know what procedures to follow in the event of an emergency.
QCS 2014

Page 47

1.2.3 Appendix 1
Management action plan
Compile an inventory of all hazardous substances to which employees may be exposed,
which are either purchased (proprietary products) or created by a work process (dust, fumes
etc.) or may be already on site (micro-organisms, contaminated land, residues etc.).
2.
Gather relevant technical information about each substance from sources such as labelling,
safety data sheets. For each substance, evaluate the work task(s) and working practices
associated with it. If necessary, observe the work activity in which the hazardous substance is
used or created.
3.
From information and observations made, decide if there are any risks to health.
4.
Assess what action needs to be taken to prevent exposure (PRIORITY), or to control it to an

acceptable level. Record the significant findings of the assessment.
5.
Take the actions necessary to ensure that the appropriate control measures are provided,
properly used and maintained as necessary. Provide all users of (or those creating) each
hazardous substance with the necessary information, instruction and training. From the
information gained, decide if there is any requirement for exposure monitoring and health
surveillance.
6.
Review the assessment regularly and revise it as necessary.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.
QCS 2014

Page 48

1.2.3 Appendix 2
Example of a material safety data sheet - diesel fuel
Product name: AUTO DIESEL / DERV
Synonyms: G.O.R.V., Ultra-Low Sulphur Diesel,
AD10
Sheet
1 of 8
Revision no.
10
Last revision
AL
This is an uncontrolled copy
1. Identification of the substance / preparation and of the company
AT
Facsimile:
Telephone:
IO
Name and address of manufacturer/supplier:
TE
Emergency contact:
IN
Health and safety emergency telephone:

Application:
EG
For use as a fuel in diesel engines only. Any other use implies a processing operation which may
change its essential characteristics and liability for safety of the product will transfer to the processor.
2. Composition / information on ingredients
Petroleum hydrocarbons >99%

Saturated olefinic and aromatic:
PAHs.
C10 to C26 - may contain Polycyclic Aromatic Nydrocarbons -
CAS No. 068334-30-5. EINECS No. 269-822-7, R40.

Additives
1. Middle distillate flow improvers (various) up to 1000ppm. (Dispersion of Ethylene vinyl acetate in
an organic solvent).
2. Cetane improvers (AlkyI Nitrates) - up to 500ppm. CAS No. 27247-96-7, EINECS No. 269-822-7.
3. May contain dye and chemical marker - gas oil marker concentrate. CAS No. 68334-30-5.
4. Antistatic additive 1-3ppm
5. May contain a multifunctional detergent
January
2006
QCS 2014

Page 49
AUTO DIESEL / DERV
Sheet
2 of 8
Revision no.
10
Last revision
January 2006
3. Hazard identification
Health hazards:
IO
AL
This product contains amounts of Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons, some of which are known from
experimental animal studies to be skin carcinogens. Prolonged and repeated exposure may therefore
cause dermatitis and there is a risk of skin cancer. The risk of skin cancer will be very low, providing
the handling precautions are such that prolonged and repeated skin contact is avoided and good
personal hygiene is observed. Aspiration of liquid into the lungs directly or as a result of vomiting
following ingestion of the liquid can cause severe lung damage and death.
Safety hazards:
AT
Product can accumulate static charges, which may be a possible ignition source (see Section 7).
However product does contain an antistatic additive.
Environmental hazards:
Eyes:
EG
4. First aid measures
IN
TE
Dangerous for the environment. Toxic to aquatic organisms. May cause long-term adverse effects in
the environment.
Rinse immediately with plenty of water until irritation subsides. If irritation

persists, obtain medical attention.
Skin:
Immediate flush with large amounts of water, using soap if available.

Remove contaminated clothing, including shoes, after flushing has begun. If
irritation persists, get medical attention.
Inhalation:
In emergency situations use proper respiratory protection to immediately

remove the affected victim from exposure. Administer artificial respiration if
breathing has stopped. Keep at rest. Call for prompt medical attention.
Ingestion:
DO NOT INDUCE VOMITING, since it is important that no amount of the

material should enter the lungs (aspiration). Keep at rest. Get prompt
medical attention.
Pressure injection:
ALWAYS OBTAIN IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION EVEN THOUGH

THE INJURY MAY APPEAR MINOR.
QCS 2014

Page 50
Sheet
3 of 8
Revision no.
10
Last revision
January 2006
5. Fire-fighting measures
Foam, dry chemical powder, carbon dioxide.
Fire and explosion

hazards:
Flammable liquid, moderate hazard. Liquid can release vapours that readily
form flammable mixtures at or above the flash point.
Static discharge:
Material can accumulate static charges which may cause an incendiary

electrical discharge. However, this product does contain an antistatic
additive.
Special fire-fighting
procedures:
Water fog or spray to cool fire exposed surfaces (e.g. containers) and to
protect personnel, should only be used by personnel trained in firefighting.
AT
IO
AL
Extinguishing media:
IN
TE
Cut off "fuel"; depending on circumstances, either allow the fire to burn out
under controlled conditions or use foam or dry chemical powder to
extinguish the fire. Respiratory and eye protection required for fire-fighting
personnel exposed to fumes or smoke.
EG
Hazardous
Smoke, sulphur oxides and carbon monoxide in the event ofincomplete
combustion products: combustion.
6. Accidental release measures
Personal precautions: See Section 8

Environmental
precautions:
Land spill: Eliminate sources of ignition. Shut off source taking normal safety
precautions. Prevent liquid from entering sewers, watercourses or low lying
areas; advise the relevant authorities if it has, or if it contaminates soil/vegetation.
Take measures to minimise the effects of groundwater.
Water spill: Eliminate the spill immediately with booms. Warn shipping. Notify port
and other relevant authorities.
Decontamination
procedures:
Recover by skimming or pumping using explosion-proof equipment, or contain

spilled liquid with booms, sand or other suitable absorbent and remove
mechanically into containers. If necessary, dispose of absorbed residues as
directed in Section 13.
QCS 2014

Page 51
Sheet
4 of 8
Revision no.
10
Last revision
January 2006
7. Handling and storage

Store product in cool, well ventilated surroundings, well away from sources of ignition. Provide suitable
mechanical equipment for the safe handling of drums and heavy packages.
AL
Electrical equipment and fittings must comply with local Regulations regarding fire prevention with this
class of product.
Storage temperature:
Load/unload temperature: Ambient to 40C
IO
Special precautions:
Ambient to 40C
AT
Use the correct grounding procedure. Store and handle in closed or properly vented containers.
Ensure compliance with statutory requirements for storage and handling. Check for and prevent
potential leaks from containers.
TE
8. Exposure controls / personal protection
Substance
IN
Workplace exposure
limit:
STEL
Source / Other Information
5 mgm-3
10 mgm-3 HSE Guidance: not listed in EH 40
EG
Mineral oil mist
8-hour TWA
Personal protection:
Monitoring methods:
In open systems where contact is likely, wear safety goggles (EN 166),
chemical-resistant overalls and chemically impervious gloves (EN 374). Where
only incidental contact is likely, wear safety glasses with side shields. No other
special precautions are necessary provided skin/eye contact is avoided. Where
concentrations in air may exceed the OES approved respirators may be
required (EN 405).
Health & Safety Executive (HSE), Methods for the determination of Hazardous
Substances (MHDS); MDHS 84 www.hsl.gov.uk/search.htm
Sheet
5 of 8
Revision no.
10
Last revision
January 2006
QCS 2014

Page 52
9. Physical and chemical properties
Appearance:
Clear straw-coloured Odour:

liquid
Density at 15C:
0.82 g/ml
Pungent petroleum
pH:
Not applicable
Vapour pressure at 20C: < 0.3 Kpa
Vapour density (air=1):
< air
Boiling point:
Pour point:
-24C
Flash point (closed cup): > 55C
Auto-ignition
temperature:
250- 270C
Flammability limit, in air, % by volume:
LEL: 0.5, UEL: 6.0

4.8
2 -1
3.0
Solubility:
AT
Kinematic viscosity at 40C, mm s
IO
2 -1
Kinematic viscosity at 20C, mm s
AL
180 - 390C
Negligible
TE
IN
10. Stability and reactivity
PLEASE NOTE THAT THESE PROPERTIES DO NOT CONSTITUTE A SPECIFICATION.
EG
Stability:
The product is stable and not subject to polymerisation.

Avoid exposure to extreme heat.
Materials to avoid:
Avoid contact with strong oxidising agents such as liquid chlorine.
Conditions to avoid:
Hazardous decomposition products:
Product does not decompose at ambient temperature.
Sheet
6 of 8
Revision no.
10
Last revision
January 2006
QCS 2014

Page 53
11. Toxicological information

The following toxicological assessment of health effects is based on a knowledge of the toxicity of the
product's components.
Slightly irritating but does not damage eye tissue.
On skin:
Low order of acute toxicity. Irritating. Prolonged or repeated contact may also lead to
more serious skin disorders, including skin cancer. Certain components present in this
material may be absorbed through the skin, possibly in toxic quantities.
By inhalation:
In high concentrations and/or at elevated temperatures, vapour or mist is irritating to

mucous membranes, may cause headaches and dizziness, may be anaesthetic and
may cause other central nervous system effects. Elevated temperatures or mechanical
action may form vapours, mists or fumes, which may be irritating to the eyes, nose,
throat and lungs. Avoid breathing vapours, mists or fumes.
By ingestion:
Low order of acute/systemic toxicity. Minute amounts aspirated into the lungs during
ingestion or vomiting may cause severe pulmonary injury and death.
Chronic:
Contains Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAHs). Prolonged and/or repeated skin

contact with certain PAHs has been shown to cause skin cancer. Prolonged and/or
repeated exposure by inhalation of certain PAHs may also cause cancer of the lung
and of other sites of the body.
Acute:
Based upon animal test data from similar materials and products, the acute toxicity of
this product is expected to be:
AT
IO
AL
On eyes:
IN
TE
ORAL LD50 > 5000 mg/kg DERMAL LD50 > 2000 mg/kg
EG
12. Ecological information
Ecotoxicity:
In the absence of specific environmental data for this product, this assessment is based on information
developed with other crude oils. Gas oils released into the environment will float on water and spread
on the surface; on release to soils, gas oils show some mobility and predominantly absorb.
Dangerous for the environment. Toxic to invertebrates and slightly toxic to fish.
Mobility:
Some mobility in soils.
Persistence and
degradability:
Lighter components volatilise and in air undergo photolysis to give half-lives of less
than a day. Photoxidation of liquid hydrocarbons on the water surface also
contributes to the loss process. Slow to moderate degradation in water and soil.
Bioaccumulation
potential:
Potential to bioaccumulate, but metabolic processes may reduce this tendency.
QCS 2014

Page 54
Sheet
7 of 8
Revision no.
10
Last revision
January 2006
13. Disposal considerations
AL
14. Transport information
Rails cars, tank trucks, tankers, barges, drum.
Shipping name:
Diesel Fuel
Packaging group:
III
Marine pollutant:
See Section 6
ICAO/IATA:
Class 3
R & S phrases:
EC Directives:
Statutory information:
R40
1202
UN Class:
ADR/RID:
Class 3
Emergency action
code:
3Y
AT
IO
UN Number:
TE
Xn Harmful
EG
Hazard label data:
IN
15. Regulatory information
Classification for transport:
N Dangerous for the Environment
Limited evidence of carcinogenic effect
R51/53 Toxic to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in

the aquatic environment
S2
Keep out of reach of children
S36/37
Wear suitable protective clothing and gloves
S61
Avoid releases into the environment, see Section 6
QCS 2014

Page 55
Sheet
8 of 8
Revision no.
10
Last revision
January 2006
16. Other information
AL
The data and advice given apply when the product is sold for the stated application or applications.
The product is not sold as suitable for any other application. Use of the product for applications other
than as stated in this sheet may give rise to risks not mentioned in this sheet. You should not use the
product other than for the stated application or applications.
IO
If you have purchased the product for supply to a third party for use at work, it is your duty to take all
necessary steps to ensure that any person handling or using the product is provided with the
information in this sheet.
EG
IN
TE
AT
If you are an Contractor, it is your duty to tell your employees and others who may be affected about
any hazards described in this sheet and about any precautions that should be taken.
QCS 2014

Page 56

1.2.3 Appendix 3
COSHH assessment - diesel fuel
Auto diesel
Substance hazard classification:
Flammable, harmful/irritant
Trade name(s):
Any auto fuel production company
Substance used for:
Motive power for plant and other diesel powered vehicles
Safety precautions
Remove to fresh air. Seek medical
attention if conditions severe.
AT
IO
Inhalation: can lead to nausea Avoid inhaling vapour or mist;

and headaches.
ensure good ventilation.
Remove the victim from
exposure.
Potential hazards
AL
Name of hazardous substance:
Avoid prolonged/repeated
contact. Wear PVC gloves. Do
not use as a cleaning agent.
Eye contact: will cause

irritation.
Wear eye protection if splashing Rinse immediately with plenty of

can occur.
water until irritation subsides. Seek
medical advice.
IN
EG
Ingestion: will irritate mouth,

throat etc.
Remove contaminated clothing.

Wash skin thoroughly with soap
and warm water.
TE
Skin contact: can be irritating

and have a defatting effect.
Do not eat, drink or smoke

during use.
Do not induce vomiting. Wash

mouth with water. Seek immediate
medical attention.
Fire: products of combustion

Do not smoke during use. Avoid Clear the area. Do not inhale
are toxic. Vapour/air mixture is heat sources and open flames. vapours, smoke etc.
explosive.
Spillage: fumes/vapour likely to Do not allow to enter drains.
collect in low areas.
Eliminate ignition sources.
Ensure good ventilation.
Contain with sand or granules.

Remove into a container. Dispose
of as hazardous waste.
Additional information: Environmentally damaging.

Assessment date
Approved for use by (print name and position)

Signature
Next
date
review
QCS 2014

Page 57

1.2.4
First Aid at Work
1.2.4.1 Key points

Trained first-aid staff and first-aid equipment must be available on site.
The level of provision of trained staff and first-aid equipment will depend upon several
factors.
Everyone working on site should know where the first aiders and the first-aid kits can be
found.
All accidents causing injury must be recorded in an accident book.
In an emergency, assess the situation but do not put yourself in danger.
Don't move casualties who are obviously injured unless it is necessary to do so - summon
the first aider immediately and contact external emergency services.
Cover severe bleeding with a clean pad and apply direct pressure.
First Aiders have the potential to save lives.
N
IO
These Regulations provide a flexible framework within which Contractors can develop
effective first-aid arrangements appropriate to their workplace and the size of their workforce.
The following four factors will influence decisions:

workplace hazards and risks
(b)
the nature of the undertaking and its history of accidents
(c)
the size of the establishment and distribution of employees
(d)
the location of the establishment and the locations to which employees go in the
course of their work.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
DANGER
AT
1
AL
Your own safety is your first priority

RESPONSE
Does the casualty respond to voice/touch?
AIRWAY
Does the casualty have a clear airway?
BREATHING
Is the casualty breathing?
If
you
are
not
there
are
brief
notes
to be taken in an emergency.
a
in
PROMPT ACTION SAVES LIVES!
trained
Appendix
first
on
aider,
actions
QCS 2014

Page 58
1.2.4.3 Definition of first aid

1
First aid is defined as the follows:

(a)
in cases where a person will need help from a doctor or a nurse: treatment for the
purpose of preserving life and minimising the consequences of injury or illness until
such help is obtained.
(b)
treatment of minor injuries which would otherwise receive no treatment or which do

not need treatment by a doctor or nurse.
It should be noted that the definition covers any illness at work and not just accidents. You
must, therefore, plan for times when someone has a heart attack or just collapses.
Emergency fist aiders can give a restricted range of first aid treatment to someone who is
injured or becomes ill at work. Fully trained first aiders can do the above, plus apply first aid
to a range of specific injuries and illnesses.
Contractors are required to:
AL
provide adequate first-aid equipment and facilities appropriate to the type of work or
operations undertaken
(b)
appoint a sufficient number of suitable and trained people to render first aid to
employees who are injured or become ill at work
(c)
appoint a sufficient number of suitable people who, in the temporary absence of the
first aider, will be capable of dealing with an injured or ill employee needing help from
a medical practitioner or nurse, and who are able to take charge of first-aid equipment
and facilities
(d)
inform employees of the first-aid arrangements, including the location of equipment

and personnel. This will require that notices be posted and signs displayed. Provision
should be made for employees with language or reading difficulties.
EG
Shared facilities
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
To avoid the unnecessary duplication of facilities where employees of more than one
Contractor are working together, arrangements may be made to share facilities. Whilst there
is no requirement for shared facilities to be formally recorded, industry best practice is that
the arrangements are recorded in writing, with each Contractor retaining a copy.
In such circumstances, it is the responsibility of each Contractor to ensure that the agreed
facilities are actually provided, and that all their employees are aware of these
arrangements.
Trained and suitable personnel

7
First aiders must have received training and hold a current first-aid certificate issued by a
recognised training organisation.
Where first aiders have received first-aid instruction relating to special or unusual hazards in
the workplace, they should undergo refresher training and re-examination as necessary. The
Contractor must keep a written record of such training.
Number of first aiders required
For construction, which the table categorises as 'higher risk', the recommendation is as
follows.
QCS 2014

Page 59
Number of employees
Number of first aid trained staff
10
Less than 5: At least one appointed person
11
5-100: At least one first aider or emergency first aider per 50 employees or part thereof
12
More than 100: At least one first aider per 50 employees or part thereof
13
In determining the total number of qualified first aiders required, additional factors should be
considered. These are:
the type of work or operations being carried out
(b)
whether or not employees work alone or in scattered and isolated locations
(c)
whether there are special or unusual hazards
(d)
whether or not there is shift work -first-aid cover will be required at all times that work
is being carried out
(e)
the maximum number of people likely to be on site at any one time
(f)
the remoteness of emergency medical services
(g)
cover for first-aiders' holidays and sickness absence - first-aid cover will be required at
all times that work is being carried out
(h)
the presence of work-placement trainees.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
On sites where special or unusual hazards are present, a proportionately larger number of
first aiders, having regard to the factors already mentioned, will be needed. Good practice
should encourage all the contractor's site personnel to be trained in basic emergency aid.
15
On major construction projects where there is a site nurse, and/or a doctor on call, their
advice in connection with first aid should be followed.
IN
1.2.4.4 Appointed persons
TE
14
An appointed person is someone who has been nominated by the Contractor to take charge
of a situation, e.g. to call an ambulance if there is a serious illness or injury.
They will act in the absence of the trained first aider or in situations where it is deemed that a
first aider is not required, such as in a small non-hazardous working area, and where there is
easy access to professional medical assistance, such as a hospital accident and emergency
department.
Emergency first-aid training should be considered for all appointed persons.
Appointed persons must not be regarded as an alternative to qualified first aiders and they
must not be required to render first aid. The appointed person is responsible for first-aid
equipment in the absence of the first aider or in the circumstances described above.
EG
1.2.4.5 Equipment and facilities

Location of first-aid facilities
1
It is essential that all employees should have quick and easy access to first-aid facilities on
site. Where employees are working in large numbers and in close proximity, facilities should
be centralised in that area. When employees are spread over a wider area, it is necessary to
distribute first aiders and equipment accordingly. Sometimes, a combination of these
arrangements may be appropriate.
QCS 2014

Page 60
All employees must be aware of the location of first-aid facilities and the arrangements for
providing treatment. The location of first-aid facilities should be clearly marked with the
appropriate symbol:
White symbol and letters on a green background
AL
First-aid boxes
Every Contractor must provide one or more first-aid boxes. They should be strategically
placed, readily accessible and clearly marked with a white cross on a green background.
The container should hold first-aid equipment and nothing else, and should protect the
contents from dust and damp.
It is essential that the contents of first-aid boxes are replenished after use and checked
frequently by the first aider or appointed person. Some of the items are prone to deterioration
after a certain period. The minimum recommended contents of the first-aid box are listed in
Appendix 1, which should be adjusted following an assessment of the first aid needs of a
specific site.
AT
IO
Special or small travelling first-aid kits should be provided to those employees:

who are working alone or in small groups in isolated locations, e.g. maintenance
gangs
(b)
whose work involves travel in remote areas
(c)
who use potentially dangerous tools or machinery.
EG
IN
(a)
The first-aid kit should only contain the items as recommended in Appendix 1.
TE
Travelling first-aid kits
Supplementary equipment
7
Where first aiders are employed, stretchers or appropriate carrying equipment, such as a
carrying chair or wheelchair, should be provided in an accessible location clearly identified
by a sign. If a site covers a large area, or contains a number of distinct working areas, it will
be necessary to provide such equipment at a number of suitable locations.
However, it is recommended that, in most incidents, casualties are moved as little as

possible before the emergency services arrive.
QCS 2014

Page 61
First-aid rooms
On a large building or construction site, a first-aid room, suitably staffed and equipped,
should be provided. The need for such a room cannot be decided purely on the numbers of
persons employed, but should be assessed on the type of work being carried out and
whether hospital A&E or other emergency facilities are close to hand.
10
The first-aid room will normally be under the control of the first aider who should be nearby
or on call, with access to the room when employees are at work. The name of this person
should be displayed, together with the names and locations of all other first alders and
appointed persons. On some larger sites, the first-aid room will be staffed by a qualified
nurse.
11
The room should be clearly identified, available at all times and used only for rendering first
aid. It should be of sufficient size to contain a couch with adequate space around it to allow
people to work, and provided with an access door to allow the passage of a stretcher or
other carrying equipment. Pillows and blankets should be provided and be frequently
cleaned.
12
The room itself should be cleaned each working day, have smooth-topped impermeable
working surfaces and provision for privacy and refuse disposal.
13
Heating, lighting and ventilation should be effective. In addition to the first-aid materials (see
Appendix 1) which should be stored in a suitable cabinet, there should be:
(b)
a sink with running hot and cold water
(a)
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
drinking water
(c)
soap, nail brush and paper towels
(d)
clean garments for use by first-aid personnel
(e)
a suitable container for disposal of clinical waste (yellow bags).
14
In first-aid rooms that are supervised by the site nurse, other items may be provided on their
advice.
15
The room should have a telephone, where possible, and a siren or klaxon to alert personnel
on call.
16
A sufficient number of first aiders should be provided in any work area that is not within easy
reach (approximately three minutes) of the first-aid room.
1.2.4.6 Training and qualifications

1
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that those people who have been selected as fully
QCS 2014

Page 62
qualified first aiders have undergone training and possess adequate qualifications. Additional
training may be necessary to cope with any special hazards in a particular working
environment.
2
Instruction in emergency first aid, such as resuscitation, control of bleeding and treatment of
unconsciousness, is desirable for all staff.
Initial selection of first aiders
Whilst it is desirable to appoint staff who have already received first-aid training and utilise
their skills, in many instances this may not be an option. On most new sites it is unlikely that
a trained first aider will be available, and it will be necessary to arrange training for a suitable
member of staff.
In selecting people for this role, the following factors should be considered:
friendly, reassuring disposition
acceptable to male and female staff
able to cope with stressful and physically demanding emergency procedures
able to remain calm in an emergency
employed on a task which they can leave immediately in order to go to the scene of an
emergency
capable of acquiring the knowledge and qualifications required.
AT
IO
AL
normally take three full days (18 'classroom' hours), however
(b)
it need not be completed in a period of three consecutive days - 'split courses' will be
permitted.
On completion of the course, each student must be able to demonstrate that they are able
to:
(a)
12
IN
(a)
EG
11
The First Aid training course, including examination will:
10
TE
Training of fully qualified first aiders
recognise minor and major illnesses
(b)
act safely, promptly and effectively with emergencies at work
(c)
use first-aid equipment, including the contents of the first-aid container
(d)
understand the duties of Contractors and the legal framework
(e)
maintain simple factual records on the treatment or management of emergencies
(f)
recognise the importance of personal hygiene in first-aid procedures.
Students must also be able to deal with a casualty who:

(a)
requires cardiopulmonary resuscitation
(b)
is bleeding or wounded
(c)
is suffering from shock
(d)
is unconscious
(e)
is suffering from an injury to bones, muscles or joints
QCS 2014

Page 63
(f)
has an eye injury
(g)
has been overcome by gas or fumes
(h)
has been burned or scalded
(i)
has been poisoned or exposed to a harmful substance.
13
Students must also be able to manage the transportation of the casualty as required by
workplace circumstances.
14
It may be necessary to provide specialised instruction in the use of protective equipment or

rescue techniques, where these are important in the trainee's workplace or if special hazards
exist there.
Expiry of certificates
First-aid certificates should be valid for three years. Re-qualification training, with reexamination, will be required before re-certification.
16
First aiders can undertake re-qualification training up to 3 months before the expiry of their
current first-aid certificate. The certificate will be dated to 'run on' from the expiry date of the
previous one. Ideally, Contractors will take advantage of this period.
17
However, where this is not possible or practical, re-qualification training can be taken within
28 days after the previous certificate expires.
18
Where within the 28 day period, the student:
AT
passes the re-qualification training, a certificate will be issued, backdated to the expiry
of the previous one
(b)
fails to pass the re-qualification training, the full First Aid at Work course must be
taken again, and passed, for a certificate to be issued.
IN
TE
(a)
In effect, these arrangements provide Contractors with a four month window in which to get
each first aider re-certificated.
EG
19
IO
AL
15
Re-qualification training
Re-qualification training for fully qualified first aiders including re-examination:
(a)
20
must last at least 12 hours (two days)
(b)
can be 'split' over a longer period, but
(c)
must be completed within a period of six weeks.
Refresher training
21
Contractors are strongly recommended that fully qualified first aiders attend a three-hour
refresher course each year to brush up on their basic skills and learn about new techniques
and developments.
Training of first aiders for special or unusual situations
22
First aiders should have completed training in the subjects described for first aiders, and
been given any specialised training related to the particular requirements of their workplace
and its hazards.
23
Some workers carry their own medication, such as inhalers for asthma or 'Epipens' which
contain injectable adrenaline for the treatment of severe allergic (anaphylactic) reactions, for
QCS 2014

Page 64
example to peanuts. These medications are prescribed by a doctor. If an individual needs to

take their own prescribed medication, the first aider's role is limited to helping them do so
and contacting the emergency services as appropriate.
Training of emergency first aiders
24
Emergency first aiders must undertake a six-hour course, with their certificate being valid for
three years. Similar to fully qualified first aiders, the Contractor is recommended that
emergency first aiders undertake an annual three-hour basic skills update and refresher
course.
25
To requalify and retain their certification for a further three years, emergency first aiders must
retake the six-hour course within their three-year qualification period.
Training of appointed persons
(b)
cardio-pulmonary resuscitation
(c)
first aid for the wounded or bleeding
(d)
first aid for an unconscious casualty.
Contractors must keep written records of all training that has been given to employees and
the results of that training.
IN
Ambulance
TE
1.2.4.7 Miscellaneous
The local ambulance service should be informed about large sites and of any particularly
hazardous operations being undertaken. It is helpful to supply a map locating the site and its
entrances and, where appropriate, the first-aid room.
EG
what to do in an emergency
IO
(a)
Training records
27
AL
Training courses cover the following subjects:
AT
26
Induction
2
Induction training for employees and other persons joining the site should include details of
the location of first-aid boxes, qualified first-aid personnel and actions to be taken in cases of
injury or illness.
Record of treatment
First-aid treatment should be recorded. The use of an accident book does not normally allow
enough detail to be gathered and an additional treatment book may be necessary,
particularly in order to keep a record of the use of first-aid materials.
1.2.4.8 Accident reporting

1
All accidents causing any injury must be recorded and, where necessary, reported to the
QCS 2014

Page 65

1.2.4 Appendix 1
Recommended contents of first-aid boxes
First-aid boxes
Travelling first-aid
kits
Guidance card*
Individually wrapped sterile adhesive dressings (assorted

sizes)
20
Sterile eye pads, with attachment
Nil
AL
Item
Safety pins
AT
Medium-sized, individually wrapped, sterile, unmedicated

wound dressings (approx. 12 cm x 12 cm)
IO
Individually wrapped triangular bandages
Nil
Nil
TE
Large, sterile, individually wrapped, unmedicated wound

dressings (approx. 18 cm x 18 cm)
EG
Disposable gloves (pair)
IN
Individually wrapped, moist cleaning wipes (suggested

minimum number)
Where tap water is not readily available for eye irrigation, sterile water or sterile normal saline (0.9%)
in sealed disposable containers should be provided.
Travelling first-aid kits

Small travelling first-aid kits are designed for use where the workforce is dispersed widely (possibly
with hazardous tools), for employees working away from their Contractor's establishment.
QCS 2014

Page 66

1.2.4 Appendix 2
Health and Safety (First Aid)
Checklist
First-aid provision
How many employees are involved?
How is the workforce distributed/grouped? (Widely dispersed, etc.?)
Are remote locations involved?
Are shirts worked?
What is the nature of the work?
Does it involve special operations?
Can particular hazards be identified, such as falls, electric shock, dangerous substances?
How many first aiders are needed -consider holiday and sickness cover?
IO
AL
AT
Training
Which personnel require first-aid training?
10
Does the training offered meet foreseeable needs?
11
Is there a system to trigger a warning to management when a first aider is within three
months of their certificate expiring?
12
Are training records kept?
13
Are individuals working in isolated locations trained to cope with emergencies?
14
Where appointed persons are in charge, do they understand their duties?
15
Does induction training cover first-aid arrangements?
EG
IN
TE
Equipment
Is first-aid equipment placed in locations where it is likely to be needed?
17
Does it meet foreseeable needs, special hazards, etc.?
18
Are travelling first-aid kits available when required?
19
Is a first-aid room needed, or available, and suitably equipped?
20
Are information signs provided?
21
Are first-aid boxes and kits properly stocked and maintained?
16
General
22
Has responsibility for first-aid provision and organisation been assigned to an individual?
23
Are there established procedures for reviewing:

(a)
training and equipment needs?
(b)
new work processes?
(c)
special operations?
(d)
changes in work patterns, site locations, size of labour force?
QCS 2014
(e)

Page 67
arrangements with contractors?

1.2.4 Appendix 3
Health and Safety (First Aid)
Basic advice on first aid at work
What to do in an emergency
Priorities
Assess the situation - do not put yourself in danger.
Make the area safe.
Assess all casualties and attend first to any unconscious casualties.
Send for help - do not delay.
Follow the advice given below.
AL
IO
Check for consciousness
If there is no response to gentle shaking of the shoulders and shouting, the casualty may be
unconscious. Your priorities are to:
shout for help
open the airway
check for normal breathing
10
take appropriate action.
11
The priority is to check the Airway, Breathing and Circulation. This is the ABC of
resuscitation.
N
R
TE
IN
To open the airway:

(a)
(b)
(c)
Place one hand on the casualty's forehead and gently tilt the head back.
12
EG
A - Airway
AT
Remove any obvious obstruction from the casualty's mouth.

Lift chin with two fingertips.
B - Breathing
13
Look along the chest, listen and feel at the mouth for signs of normal breathing, for no more
than 10 seconds.
If the casualty is breathing:
14
Place in the recovery position and ensure the airway remains open.
15
Send for help.
16
Monitor that the casualty continues to breathe until help arrives.

If the casualty is not breathing:
17
Send for help.
18
Start chest compressions (see CPR below).
QCS 2014

Page 68
C-CPR
To start chest compressions:
Lean over the casualty and, with your arms straight, press down on the centre of the
breastbone, 4-5 cm, and then release.
20
Repeat at a rate of about 100 times a minute (more than one compression per second!)
21
After 30 compressions, open the airway again.
22
Pinch the casualty's nose closed and allow the mouth to open.
23
Take a normal breath and place your mouth around the casualty's mouth, making a good
seal.
24
Blow steadily into the mouth while watching for the chest rising.
25
Remove your mouth from the casualty and watch for the chest falling.
26
Give a second breath and then start 30 compressions again without delay.
27
Continue with chest compressions and rescue breaths in a ratio of 30:2 until qualified help
takes over or the casualty starts to breathe normally.
AL
19
IO
Severe bleeding
Apply direct pressure to the wound.
29
Raise and support the injured part (unless broken).
30
Apply a dressing and bandage firmly in place.
TE
If a broken bone or spinal injury is suspected, obtain expert help. Do not move casualties
unless they are in immediate danger.
IN
31
Broken bones and spinal injuries
AT
28
Burns
Burns can be serious so, if in doubt, seek medical help. Cool the part of the body affected
with cold water until pain is relieved. Thorough cooling may take 10 minutes or more, but this
must not delay taking the casualty to hospital.
33
Certain chemicals may seriously irritate or damage the skin. Avoid contaminating yourself
with the chemical. Treat in the same way as for other bums but flood the affected area with
water for 20 minutes. Continue treatment even on the way to hospital, if necessary. Remove
any contaminated clothing which is not stuck to the skin.
EG
32
Burning clothing
34
To extinguish the burning clothing of anyone involved in a fire, lay, push or knock the person
to the floor to reduce the spread of flames. Cover the burning area with a blanket, coat or
other items to smother the flames but do not use synthetic materials (for example, polyester).
DO NOT REMOVE ANY OF THE VICTIM'S CLOTHES.
35
Apply large amounts of water to the area of the burns as quickly as possible to cool the
affected parts, and then keep them wet with more water. Seek medical help urgently.
Eye injuries
36
All eye injuries are potentially serious. If there is something in the eye, wash out the eye with
clean water or sterile fluid from a sealed container, to remove loose material. Do not attempt
to remove anything that is embedded in the eye.
37
If chemicals are involved, flush the eye with water or sterile fluid for at least 10 minutes,
QCS 2014

Page 69
whilst gently holding the eyelids open. Ask the casualty to hold a pad over the injured eye
and send them to hospital.
Record keeping
It is good practice to record in a book any incidents involving injuries or illness that have
been attended, including the following information in your entry:
39
Date, time and place of incident.
40
Name and job of injured or ill person.
41
Details of injury/illness and any first aid given.
42
What happened to the casualty immediately afterwards (for example, went back to work,
went home, went to hospital).
43
Name and signature of the person dealing with the incident.
44
This information can help identify accident trends and possible areas for improvement in the
control of health and safety risks.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
38
QCS 2014

Page 70

1.2.5
Food Safety on Site
1.2.5.1 Key points

1
Getting food hygiene wrong can have severe implications for many other people.
Anyone who handles food for consumption by others:
(a)
must have training in basic food handling techniques;
(b)
must report to their supervisor details of any illness that they may be suffering from;
(c)
may have to be suspended from work if they contract an infectious illness.
Premises in which food is handled, prepared and served must conform to certain standards
of construction and cleanliness.
AL
Food poisoning is caused by bacteria (germs or bugs) which have lain dormant in most
uncooked or unprepared foods, whether meat, fish, poultry and some vegetables.
Food poisoning keeps people off work through sickness, just as accidents do.
Applying appropriate hygiene standards on site are essential because of the potential for:
AT
IO
time lost through sickness absence being reduced
(b)
avoiding lost production
(a)
TE
1.2.5.3 Definitions
Food - food or drink of any description, or any of the ingredients used in the preparation of
food.
Food area - any room or food area in which a person engages in the handling of food,
including a server, counter or outside grill preparation area.
EG
IN
The premises
3
The siting, design and construction of the premises must aim to avoid the contamination of
food and harbouring of pests. It must be kept clean and in good repair so as to avoid food
contamination.
Surfaces in contact with food must be easy to clean and, where necessary, disinfect. This
will require the use of smooth, washable, non-toxic materials.
Adequate provision must be made for cleaning foodstuffs, and the cleaning and (where
necessary) disinfection of utensils and equipment. You must take all reasonable, practical
steps to avoid the risk of contamination of food or ingredients.
Washbasins must be designated for washing hands, have hot and cold (or appropriately
mixed) running water, and be equipped with soap and suitable hand-drying facilities, such as
disposable towels. Lavatories must not lead directly into food rooms and they must be kept
clean, maintained in good repair and ventilated.
Adequate arrangements and facilities for the hygienic storage and disposal of hazardous and
inedible substances and waste (whether liquid or solid) must be available. Food waste must
not be allowed to accumulate in food rooms and should be deposited in closable containers.
QCS 2014

Page 71
Adequate facilities and arrangements for maintaining and monitoring suitable food
temperature conditions must be available. (See also below.)
The food
Stored raw materials and ingredients must be kept in appropriate conditions which will
prevent harmful deterioration and be protected from contamination likely to make them unfit
for human consumption.
Water
10
There must be an adequate supply of potable (clean, drinkable) water which must be used
whenever necessary to ensure foodstuffs are not contaminated. This includes the use of ice
which must also be made, handled and stored in a way that protects it from contamination.
Foods intended for supply which need temperature control for safety must be held either
HOT at or above a minimum temperature of 63C or CHILLED at or below a maximum
temperature of 8C.
11
AL
Temperature control
IO
Food handlers
Anyone who works in a food handling area must maintain a high degree of personal
cleanliness. The way in which they work must also be clean and hygienic. Food handlers
must wear clean and, where appropriate, protective over-clothes. Adequate changing
facilities must be provided where necessary.
13
Food handlers must protect food and ingredients against contamination, which is likely to
render them unfit for human consumption or create a health hazard. For example, uncooked
poultry should not contaminate ready-to-eat foods, either through direct contact or via work
surfaces or equipment.
14
Anyone whose work involves handling food should:
IN
TE
AT
12
observe good personal hygiene
(b)
routinely wash their hands before handling foods
(c)
never smoke in food handling areas
(d)
EG
(a)
report any illness (like infected wounds, skin infections, diarrhoea or vomiting) to their
manager or supervisor immediately.
15
If any employee reports that they are suffering from any condition or illness, Contractors may
have to exclude them from food handling areas. Such action should be taken urgently.
16
Food handlers must receive adequate supervision, instruction and training in food hygiene.
Microwave ovens
17
On sites where microwave ovens are used, the following points must be noted.
(a)
Metal containers or utensils must not be placed in a microwave oven.
(b)
Door seals of microwave ovens should be periodically examined to see that they are
not damaged.
(c)
Microwave ovens should not be overloaded by trying to cook too many things at the
same time.
(d)
Frozen food should be properly thawed.

Page 72
(e)
Food should be thoroughly cooked. Follow instructions on the packaging and leave to
stand.
(f)
Do not attempt to add anything to or stir any liquid which has just been removed from
a microwave oven and has not been allowed to stand, by using a metal spoon or
utensil. Such an action may cause the liquid to boil violently.
(g)
Always adhere to the supplier's or manufacturer's instructions.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
QCS 2014

Page 73

1.2.6
Working with Lead
1.2.6.1 Key points

1
Lead can be a major health hazard if exposure is not prevented or adequately controlled.
Lead is a cumulative poison that can find its way into the bloodstream and collect in tissues,
particularly the bone marrow.
The ways that lead is likely to get into the body are through:
(a)
the inhalation of fumes or dust;
(b)
the ingestion of lead particles through hand to mouth contact.
All work with lead, or lead-containing products, must be the subject of a risk assessment.
Builders, carpenters, decorators etc., who remove old paint, particularly if involved in window
renovation, may be exposed to 'significant' quantities of lead without realising it.
Where the risk assessment indicates that employees' exposure to lead is likely to be
'significant', certain monitoring actions must be taken with regard to the employees affected
and the workplace itself.
'Significant exposure' is defined in these Regulations.
During health surveillance, employees' exposure to lead is measured by the concentration of

lead in their blood or urine.
Above a certain level of exposure, Contractors have a legal duty to temporarily suspend the
affected worker(s) from further work with lead.
AT
IO
AL
IN
Exposure to lead, dust, fumes and vapour constitutes a major hazard in the construction
industry who work with lead and lead products. Construction workers most at risk include:
plumbers working on lead flashing, upstands and gutters
(b)
operatives handling old architectural lead work
(c)
painters rubbing down or burning off old paintwork
(d)
demolition operatives
(e)
EG
(a)
TE
anyone involved in structural renovation or refurbishment, including conservation or

heritage projects.

1
assessment of every work activity in order to identify any hazard that employees or any other
person might encounter as a result of the work being carried out.
Once those hazards have been identified, it is then the Contractor's duty to put control
measures into place in order either to eliminate the hazard or, where this is not possible, to
reduce the risks of injury or ill health arising from the hazards, as far as is reasonably
practicable.
The Contractor must provide employees with comprehensible and relevant information on
any risks in the workplace and on any control measures in place to reduce those risks.
Employees, in turn, have a duty to tell their Contractor of any work situation which presents a
QCS 2014

Page 74
risk to themselves or to others, or of any matter which affects the health and safety of
themselves or other persons. The main consideration will be identifying where lead is
present and taking the appropriate actions to protect the health of lead workers and, if
necessary, other people who may be affected by the work.
1.2.6.4 Control of Lead at Work

These Regulations aim to give greater health protection to people at work by reducing their
exposure to lead and thus the concentrations of lead in their blood. Where concentrations
are too high, Contractors are required to remove employees from work with lead. This is
known as the 'suspension level'.
Concentration levels of lead in blood, which are below the suspension level and known as
'action levels', have been set.
If these lower levels are breached, Contractors have a duty to investigate and remedy the
cause. Contractors are also required to take steps to reduce the concentrations of lead in air
to a level not exceeding the occupational exposure limits stated in these Regulations.
The main requirements of these Regulations include:
AT
A Contractor who is working with lead, or a substance or material containing lead, has to
protect from exposure anyone who may be affected by the work as well as their own
employees. This includes:
the workers of other Contractors including those not engaged in work with lead, such
as maintenance staff and cleaners
(b)
visitors to the work site
(c)
the families of those who are exposed to lead at work who may become affected by
lead carried home unintentionally on the clothing and footwear of the employee are
particularly at risk of lead poisoning, and therefore have lower blood-lead action and
suspension levels than other people.
(d)
the occupiers of premises, including private dwellings, irrespective of whether the

occupiers are present whilst the work is carried out or they reoccupy the premises
later.
TE
(a)
EG
IN
IO
Duties under these Regulations
AL
Assessment of the risks to health

6
Every Contractor is required to make a suitable and sufficient assessment of the risk to the
health and safety of employees while at work. This includes other people who are not
employees but who may be exposed as a result of the way the Contractor carries out the
work concerned. The assessment must be reviewed as often as is necessary and in other
certain specified circumstances, and a record made of any significant findings. Such an
assessment is to allow the Contractor to make a decision whether the work concerned is
likely to result in an employee being significantly exposed to lead, and to identify the
measures needed to prevent or adequately control exposure.
Control of exposure
Every Contractor must ensure that the exposure of employees to lead is either prevented or,
where this is not reasonably practicable, adequately controlled by means of appropriate
control measures.
As the preferred control measure, the Contractor must consider the use of alternative
materials or processes as a means of eliminating or reducing the risks to the health of
QCS 2014

Page 75
employees.
(a)
the design and use of the work process, systems and engineering controls
(b)
control of exposure at source, including ventilation systems, and
(c)
where adequate control cannot be achieved by other means, the provision and use of
suitable PPE.
The control measure(s) must include:

the safe handling, storage and transportation of lead and waste which contains lead
(b)
suitable maintenance procedures
(c)
reducing to the minimum required for the task in hand, the number of employees
exposed, the level and duration of exposure and the quantity of lead present in the
workplace
(d)
control of the working environment, including, where appropriate, general ventilation
(e)
appropriate hygiene measures, including washing facilities.
AL
(a)
10
Where it is not reasonably practicable to prevent exposure to lead, the Contractor must
introduce protective measures which are appropriate to the work activity and consistent with
the findings of the risk assessment. In order of priority, these must be:
IO
Irrespective of these control measures, where the exposure to lead is, or is likely to be
significant, the Contractor must provide suitable and sufficient protective clothing.
12
Where the inhalation of lead fumes is possible, the control measures will only be regarded as
adequate if:
AT
11
the occupational exposure limit is not exceeded
(b)
or if it is, the Contractor identifies the reason and takes immediate steps to rectify the
situation.
IN
TE
(a)
Contractors must take reasonable steps to ensure that any control measure provided is
properly used or applied.
14
Employees must make full and proper use of any control measure provided, and:
take all reasonable steps, where appropriate, to return anything provided as a control
measure to its accommodation (storage) after use
(a)
EG
13
(i)
15
report any defect in any control measure provided to the Contractor.
Adequate control of exposure to lead covers all routes of possible exposure, such as
inhalation, Absorption through the skin and ingestion.
Eating, drinking and smoking
16
Adequate steps must be taken to control the ingestion of lead. A Contractor must ensure
that, as far as is reasonably practicable, employees do not eat, drink or smoke in any place
which is, or is liable to become, contaminated by lead. In practical terms, employees must be
warned against doing so. Furthermore, under these Regulations employees have a legal
duty not to eat, drink or smoke in any place that they have reason to believe is contaminated
by lead.
Maintenance, examination and testing of control measures
17
All control measures provided, including PPE, must be well maintained, kept in a good state
of repair and cleaned as necessary. Any defect in the equipment, or failure to use and apply
QCS 2014

Page 76
it properly, which could result in a loss of efficiency or effectiveness, thus reducing the level
of protection, should be identified and rectified as soon as possible.
Air monitoring
18
Where employees are liable to receive significant exposure to lead, Contractors must
establish a programme of air monitoring including keeping records of the findings of such
monitoring.
Medical surveillance
make sure that employees are under medical surveillance by a 'relevant doctor'
(b)
provide suitable facilities for health surveillance to be carried out where the
procedures are to be carried out at the Contractor's premises
(c)
maintain health surveillance records and retain them for 40 years
(d)
allow employees reasonable access to their personal health records
(e)
take steps to determine the reasons why any employee's blood sample exceeds the
appropriate action level and take appropriate remedial action
(f)
take the necessary actions, including reviewing the risk assessment, where an
employee's blood or urine sample reaches the 'suspension level'.
IO
AL
(a)
Employees for whom health surveillance has been arranged must, when required by the
Contractor (and at the cost of the Contractor), make themselves available for the necessary
health surveillance procedures and supply the relevant doctor with such health-related
information as the doctor may require.
TE
20
Where exposure to lead is significant, the Contractor must:
AT
19
Information, instruction and training
IN
Contractors who undertake work liable to expose employees to lead shall provide such
information, instruction and training as is suitable and sufficient to know the risks to health,
and the precautions which should be taken.
EG
21
Arrangements for accidents, incidents and emergencies

The Contractor, in attempting to protect the health of employees from an accident, incident
or emergency, must ensure that procedures, including the provision of first aid facilities and
safety drills, have been prepared and can be put into effect should such an occasion arise.
The Contractor must also ensure that information on such emergency arrangements has
been notified to accident and emergency services and that all such information is displayed
within the workplace.
22
1.2.6.5 Training
1
There is a specific requirement to ensure that the information, instruction and training
provided for persons working with lead includes:
(a)
the type of lead being worked, the potential health hazards and symptoms
(b)
the relevant occupational exposure limit, action level and suspension level (as
explained)
(c)
any other sources of information
(d)
the significant findings of the risk assessment
(e)
the control measures that are in place and which must be used to enable work to be
QCS 2014

Page 77
carried out safely
(f)
the results of any monitoring carried out
(g)
the results of previous health surveillance, in such a way that the confidentiality of
individual cases is not breached.

These Regulations require that where a risk of exposure to lead has been identified by a risk
assessment and it cannot be adequately controlled by other means which are equally or
more effective, the Contractor must provide personal protective equipment (PPE) and ensure
it is properly used by employees.
Users of PPE must be trained in its use and care as appropriate.
In essence, PPE may only be used as a last resort after all other means of eliminating or
controlling the risk have been considered and are not reasonably practicable.
AL
In the context of this section the important requirements of these Regulations are for
provision of adequate welfare facilities, particularly in respect of personal hygiene.
Contractors must provide or make available:
AT
IO
suitable and sufficient washing facilities, including showers if necessary due to the
nature of the work
(b)
hot and cold (or warm) water, soap or other cleanser and towels or other effective
means of drying
(c)
suitable and sufficient changing rooms
(d)
lockers or other facilities in which to secure work clothing that is not taken home and
personal clothing that is not worn at work
(e)
suitable rest facilities where meals may be prepared and eaten.
IN
TE
(a)
EG

These Regulations require that a Contractor only supplies work equipment that is correct and
suitable for the job for which the equipment is going to be used.
These Regulations also require that users of work equipment are trained in its use, as
appropriate.
1.2.6.9 Control of exposure to lead in the workplace

The hazard
1
Lead is a cumulative poison that will find its way into the bloodstream and can collect in
tissues, particularly the bone marrow. Lead poisoning may occur through exposure to lead in
its pure form or exposure to products containing lead.
Lead affects the body's ability to produce haemoglobin, which is the protein in blood that
carries oxygen to the tissues.
Inorganic lead, the type likely to be encountered during construction activities, can enter the
body in one of two ways:
(a)
by inhalation of dust or fumes
QCS 2014
(b)

Page 78
via the digestive tract from hand-to-mouth transfer of lead particles.
Inhalation is by far the most common route of entry.
Whilst the control of exposure through inhalation will be largely controlled by actions taken
by the Contractor, the control of exposure through ingestion depends upon the good
personal hygiene practices of employees working with lead.
Risk assessment
Contractors must not carry out any work that may expose employees to lead unless a
suitable and sufficient risk assessment has been carried out.
The purpose of the risk assessment is to enable the Contractor to:

assess whether the exposure of employees to lead is likely to be significant
(b)
identify the measures necessary to prevent or control exposure.
AL
(a)
Control measures
Control measures involve substituting lead with less hazardous substances or, if this is not
possible, using engineering and organisational methods, similar to those outlined for
COSHH, to control exposure.
The control of exposure to lead (by inhalation) will only be regarded as adequate:
AT
IO
if the concentration of lead in air is kept below the OEL (see below)
(b)
if, where the OEL is exceeded, the Contractor identifies the reasons and takes
immediate steps to remedy the situation.
TE
(a)
IN
Air monitoring
Where a risk assessment indicates that employees may be liable to significant exposure to
lead, the Contractor must arrange for air monitoring to be carried out to establish the levels
of lead in the air at the place of work.
11
Air monitoring will involve using specialist equipment, which is fitted to the employee being
monitored, to take an air sample from the employee's 'breathing zone' over a set period of
time.
12
Using static air-monitoring equipment to take air samples is not acceptable as the results will
not be representative of any employee's personal exposure.
13
Generally, depending upon the circumstances, monitoring must be carried out at either
three-monthly or yearly intervals. Air monitoring will determine whether the OEL has been
breached.
14
The Contractor has a duty to retain records of air monitoring results for a period of five years.
15
Given the temporary nature of construction sites, and the even shorter periods when
employees might actually be exposed to lead, the above requirement is considered to be
largely academic for the construction industry. With tradesmen such as plumbers and
painters being potentially exposed to lead many times but over relatively short periods, it will
be for the Contractor to decide how frequently air monitoring should be carried out to confirm
whether or not existing control measures are adequate.
EG
10
QCS 2014

Page 79
Occupational Exposure Limit (OEL)

16
The standard for inorganic lead in air is 0.15 milligrams of lead per cubic metre of air
determined on an eight-hour time-weighted concentration.
17
This quantifies the standard to be met by the control measures for airborne lead under these
Regulations.
Medical surveillance to detect exposure to lead involves measuring the concentration of lead
in the blood or urine and therefore necessitates the involvement of suitable trained, medical
staff.
19
Where a risk assessment indicates that employees' exposure to lead is likely to be

significant, the Contractor has a duty to arrange medical surveillance for the affected
employees.
20
If medical surveillance detects blood-lead concentrations at or above those outlined below,

this will trigger continued surveillance:
all employees: 35 micrograms of lead, or greater, per decilitre of blood.
IO
(a)
AL
18
young persons (aged 16-17): 40 micrograms of lead per decilitre of blood
(b)
all other employees: 50 micrograms of lead per decilitre of blood.
TE
(a)
If medical surveillance detects blood-lead concentrations at or above these action levels, the
Contractor must:
recognise that the employee's blood-lead level is near the 'suspension level'
(b)
investigate the effectiveness of existing control measures and take the necessary
actions to reduce employees' blood-lead levels below the action level
(c)
prevent the blood-lead level of affected employees from reaching the suspension
level.
IN
(a)
22
The action levels for lead are:
EG
21
AT
Action levels
Suspension levels
23
24
If medical surveillance reveals that an employee's blood-lead level has reached or exceeded
the levels outlined below, a doctor must decide whether to temporarily suspend them from
work which exposes them to lead:
(a)
young persons (aged 16-17): 50 micrograms of lead per decilitre of blood
(b)
all other employees: 60 micrograms of lead per decilitre of blood.
In such circumstances, the Contractor must:

(a)
ensure that a doctor makes an entry in the health record of affected employee(s) as to
whether, in the doctor's professional opinion, they should be suspended from further
work liable to expose them to lead
(b)
review the relevant risk assessment
(c)
review the actions taken to prevent exposure to lead
QCS 2014

Page 80
(d)
provide for a review of the health of any other employees who may have been
similarly exposed.
25
If the doctor thinks that there is no need to suspend the affected employee(s) from work, the
doctor must note in their health records:
(a)
the reasons for that decision
(b)
any conditions under which working with lead may continue.
26
A Contractor must act on the doctor's decision and an employee will not be able to work with
lead again or be exposed to it until the doctor considers it safe to do so.
27
(Refer to Appendix 2 for an example of a health surveillance record form.)

Significant levels
AL
Significant exposure to lead can occur where:

any employee is, or is liable to be, exposed to a concentration of lead in the
atmosphere exceeding half the occupational exposure limit for lead
(b)
there is a substantial risk of an employee ingesting lead
(c)
there is a risk of contact between the skin and lead alkyls or other substances
containing lead which can be absorbed through the skin.
IO
(a)
AT
28
Contractors must provide employees with protective clothing, monitor lead in air
concentration, and place the employees concerned under medical surveillance.
30
Personal protective equipment will be required where control measures are not practicable.
29
(a)
burning off old paint
(b)
dry-sanding old paint
(c)
high temperature lead-work such as lead smelting, burning and welding
(d)
32
EG
IN
Some types of work with lead carried out as part of construction or decorating activities, have
the potential to result in significant exposure to lead unless the Contractor provides adequate
controls and ensures that they are used. For example:
31
TE
Types of work liable to result in significant exposure to lead
working with metallic lead and alloys containing lead, for example, soldering
(e)
disc abrasion of lead surfaces and cutting lead with abrasive wheels
(f)
spray painting with lead-based paints
(g)
work inside tanks that have contained petrol
(h)
manufacture of leaded glass
(i)
hot cutting, demolition and dismantling operations
(j)
otherwise removing or disturbing old lead sheet thereby raising contaminated dust
(k)
recovering lead from scrap and waste
(l)
welding galvanised metal and flame cutting steelwork that has been painted with leadbased paint.
Those operations which do not usually produce significant levels include low temperature
work, ordinary plumbing, soldering, handling clean sheets or pipes of lead, rough painting.
QCS 2014

Page 81
How does lead affect your health?

33
If the level of lead in the body gets too high, it can cause headaches, tiredness, irritability,
constipation, nausea, stomach pains and loss of weight. Continued uncontrolled exposure
could cause far more serious symptoms, such as kidney damage, nerve and brain damage.
A developing unborn child is at particular risk from exposure to lead, particularly in the early
weeks before a pregnancy becomes known.
Prevention of exposure
The Contractor has a duty to assess the nature and extent of the exposure to lead and, on
the basis of this assessment, to determine the measures necessary to control exposure and
comply with these Regulations.
35
Action should be taken to reduce the amount of lead breathed by operatives to below the
lead in air standard.
36
The basic need is to prevent the liberation of lead dust, fumes or vapour into the workplace.
37
If surface finishes are to be disturbed, always check for the presence of lead paint or, if this
is not possible, assume the worst (that it is a lead-based paint) and take the appropriate
precautions.
38
Ways of testing for the presence of lead include:
AT
IO
AL
34
a variety of destructive tests for paint sampling, although these result in damage to
painted surfaces in order for samples to be taken
(b)
disposable test kits: instant, on-site lead/no lead result with 95% accuracy. (These are
an indicator only, not a laboratory-standard test)
(c)
paint-sampling kits which are ready-to-use (for non-lab professionals) for submission
of samples for chemical analysis. A laboratory-standard test
(d)
dust-wipe sampling kits which are ready-to-use dust sampling kits (for non-lab
professionals) for submission of samples for chemical analysis. A laboratory-standard
test
(e)
hand-portable devices that use XRF (x-ray fluorescence) technology to obtain

laboratory standard readings instantly, on site.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
1.2.6.10 Personal protective equipment

Respiratory protective equipment
1
Where control measures do not reduce the lead in air levels to below the control limits,
respiratory protective equipment of a type suited to the hazard or process involved must be
provided, and all employees must be properly trained to use it. All such equipment should be
serviced, cleaned, maintained and stored correctly, as is appropriate.
Depending upon whether the hazard is lead dust or fumes, adequate protection will be given
by the use of compressed air-line breathing apparatus, self-contained breathing apparatus,
or a full-face positive pressure powered respirator fitted with a high efficiency filter.
Protective clothing
Wherever exposure is significant, protective clothing must be provided. It must be suited to

the hazard or process involved, should resist the permeation of lead dust, and not collect or
harbour dust. Employees must be instructed to report any damaged or defective ventilation
plant or protective equipment, without delay, to their supervisor or safety representative.
QCS 2014

Page 82
1.2.6.11 Working with lead-based paints

1
The residues of lead-based paints are a health hazard. Operatives carrying out the removal
of old lead-based paint, and anyone else who might be adversely affected, must be
adequately protected when applying or removing paints containing lead.
Similarly, the occupiers of premises (including the residents of private housing) must be
protected by not being allowed to return to their premises (or contaminated parts of those
premises) until they have been thoroughly and effectively cleaned (see below).
The findings of a risk assessment, carried out before any surface finish is disturbed, will
indicate the most appropriate of removal and safety precautions which must be taken.
See Appendix 3 for specimen record details.
AL
Sanding
Unless appropriate RPE and protective clothing are worn, old lead paint should never be drysanded by hand as this activity will liberate lead-rich dust into the air. Again, unless
appropriate RPE and protective clothing are worn and effective measures are taken to clear
up the residue, mechanical sanding can only be used if the sander is fitted with a dust
extraction/ collection unit incorporating a high efficiency particle air HEPA filter.
Wet sanding of lead-based paint is acceptable, providing the residue is collected before it
dries out with the potential to become airborne dust.
As a result, the subsequent dry sanding of apparently 'clean' wood can liberate a significant
amount of lead-containing dust into the air.
AT
IO
Solvents
Lead paint may be removed by using a solvent or water-rinseable paint remover. If a solvent
is used, the work area must be well-ventilated and no smoking or naked flames allowed.
Suitable RPE and other appropriate PPE should be used.
IN
Unless appropriate RPE is worn, blow-lamps or gas torches must not be used to burn off old
lead paint as these will heat the paint sufficiently to liberate lead fumes into the air.
EG
TE
Burning
Hot-air gun
10
These must not be confused with blow-lamps and gas torches. A hot-air gun will not raise
the temperature of the paint sufficiently to allow lead fumes to be created. When using a hotair gun, the old paint must be scraped off as soon as it is sufficiently soft and before it rehardens. Care must be taken to ensure that the paint does not burn as this indicates that it is
reaching too high a temperature where fumes may be given off. The use of RPE to protect
against lead-containing dust may be necessary.
Infra-red heating
11
A product is available that safely lifts the old paint from the base material by heating it to a
safe temperature using an infra-red heater. Whilst warm, the paint can be safely scraped off.
This method is particularly suitable where large surface areas have to be stripped.
12
The main benefits of using this method, which acts by heating the resins in the wood and
breaking the bond between the wood and the first layer of paint, are:
QCS 2014

Page 83
(a)
all layers of paint are removed in 'a single hit'
(b)
virtually all residual lead is removed from within the grain of the wood
(c)
large surface areas can be safely stripped more quickly than by using other methods.
Spraying
13
Spraying methods should not normally be employed for applying lead-based paints.
Cleaning up the work area
All surfaces that have been stripped of paint should be washed down thoroughly, either with
a proprietary lead-specific detergent or with a solution of dishwasher detergent in hot water,
and then wiped down again with clean water.
15
Any residual dust and other debris should be removed using a vacuum cleaner fitted with a
HEPA filter. Depending upon the level of contamination, it may be necessary to wear
appropriate RPE whilst doing this.
16
Normal vacuum cleaners (domestic or industrial) should not be used as their filters are not
sufficiently efficient to retain the lead-containing dust.
IO
AL
14
Anyone who works with lead should take simple personal hygiene measures to prevent the
inhalation or ingestion of lead during and after work.
TE
Changing and washing facilities
AT
1.2.6.12 Personal hygiene
To avoid any risk to health or damage to any clothing concerned, the Contractor must
provide separate accommodation for an employee's own clothing and any protective clothing
the employee may have to wear at work. This requirement will normally apply for protective
clothing worn for work with lead.
Adequate and suitable washing facilities are required where operatives are exposed to lead.
Where employees are exposed to lead, washing and changing facilities provided should
allow them to meet a high standard of personal hygiene so as to minimise the risk of them
ingesting or otherwise absorbing lead.
The design of the washing facilities should be related to the nature and degree of exposure
to lead as indicated by the assessment. Where employees are significantly exposed to lead,
and if washbasins alone would not be adequate, the washing facilities should include
showers or baths.
An example would be where work is carried out in dusty conditions which could result in the
whole body being contaminated by lead. Then the provision of showers or baths would be
essential.
Washing facilities should provide at least:
EG
IN
(a)
one washbasin for every five persons. Basins should be of sufficient size to permit
arms to be immersed up to the elbow
(b)
a constant supply of hot and cold or warm water (running water where reasonably
practicable)
(c)
soap or other cleaning materials
(d)
nail brushes
QCS 2014
(e)
7

Page 84
warm air dryers or roller towels; communal towels should not be used.
For certain types of work, such as lead work, carried out at premises or sites where such
work is not regularly done (for example, certain tank cleaning and lead burning operations),
mobile caravan type washing/showering facilities of suitable design should be provided.
Eating, drinking and smoking
These Regulations require Contractors to reduce the risk of ingestion of lead by ensuring
that employees do not eat, drink or smoke in places which are contaminated, or likely to be
contaminated, from lead arising from work activities. Therefore, Contractors should reduce
the risk of employees ingesting lead by ensuring that they are given adequate information on
the specific areas that might be contaminated by lead and in which they should not eat
(including chewing gum or tobacco), drinker smoke.
The information should be reinforced by displaying a prominent notice to identify those areas
in which employees may, or may not, eat, drink or smoke.
10
The following points should be noted:
AL
clean areas, canteens or mess rooms should be isolated from lead-contaminated work
areas
(b)
protective clothing should be removed before entering these areas
(c)
washing should take place before eating meals or drinking
(d)
the Contractor must advise employees where they may not eat, drink or smoke
(e)
Employees are not to eat, drink or smoke in any place where there is risk of
contamination by lead.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
QCS 2014

Page 85

1.2.6 Appendix 1
Lead hazards
Safety checklist
Has a risk assessment been carried out?
Have all persons who have to work with lead received adequate information, instruction and
training?
Has the nature and extent of any exposure to lead been assessed?
Is the monitoring of lead in air levels carried out?
Is medical surveillance of individuals necessary and, if so, undertaken?
If medical surveillance is necessary, are medical records kept as required?
Are measures in place to control levels of exposure to lead?
Is protective equipment and clothing in use, as necessary and required?
Is the correct type of respiratory equipment being used for the hazard being encountered?
10
Are measures being taken to control the spread of any lead contamination?
11
Is there adequate provision of washing and changing facilities?
12
Are separate areas provided for eating and drinking?
13
Are all operatives adequately trained in safe working procedures?
14
Are operatives aware of the risks to health that can arise from not working safely?
15
Are records being kept as required by these Regulations?
16
Are arrangements in place to deal with accidents, incidents and emergencies?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 86

1.2.6 Appendix 2
Specimen health surveillance record
Recorded details of an employee under medical surveillance because of exposure to lead
Employee's details
Name:
AL
Permanent address:
Place of birth:
IO
Date of birth:
AT
Sex:
Doctor's details
Address:
EG
Telephone number:
IN
TE
Name:
Contractor's details
Name:
Address:
Telephone number:
QCS 2014

Page 87
Employment details
Years exposed to lead before starting of
current employment:
Date of first exposure to lead in current
employment: (Day Month Year)
AL
Date of end of exposure to lead in current

employment: (Day Month Year)
a) the reason for medical surveillance
AT
b) the dates of initial and periodic medical surveillance
c) the results of clinical assessments
IN
TE
d) the results of measuring blood-lead concentrations and

of any other biological tests in enough detail to allow
adverse trends to be identified, and
EG
e) action taken, including periods moved to work not

involving exposure to lead, and periods of suspension.
IO
Additional information
QCS 2014

Page 88

1.2.7
Manual Handling
1.2.7.1 Key points

1
Poorly thought out or badly performed manual handling activities are the cause of many
injuries to construction workers.
'Manual handling' includes lifting, lowering, pulling, pushing or carrying a load by physical
effort.
Several factors will determine whether it is safe for an individual to manually handle any
particular load.
Contractors must:
(b)
where that is not reasonably practicable, assess the risks to the employee;
(c)
put in place control measures to prevent such an injury occurring.
AL
avoid so far as reasonably practicable their employees having to carry out manual
handling activities likely to result in an injury;
IO
Employees must:
make full and proper use of the Contractors safe system of work;
(b)
use (lifting) equipment and machinery in accordance with instruction and training
given;
(c)
report to the Contractor any situation where it is considered that the system of working
is not safe.
AT
(a)
(a)
Where sustaining an injury is a possibility and handling a load cannot be avoided, using a
mechanical means of carrying out the activity is the best solution.
Note:
Section 1, Part 9.2 of the QCS covers the manual handling of materials.
All construction and building work involves lifting and handling to some extent. Although
mechanical equipment should be used whenever practicable, much of the work will inevitably
continue to be done manually. The risk of injury can be greatly reduced by a knowledge and
application of correct lifting and handling techniques and by taking a few elementary
precautions.
EG
IN
TE

1
assessment of every work activity, including those that involve manual handling, to identify
any hazard to employees which might be encountered during their work, or to any other
person who might be affected by their operations.
measures into place, either to remove the hazard or, where this is not possible, to reduce the
risk of injury resulting from manual handling activities, as far as is reasonably practicable.
any (manual handling) risks that exist in the workplace and any control measures that are in
place to reduce those risks.
Employees, in turn, have a duty under these Regulations to inform the Contractor of any
work (manual handling) situation that presents a risk to themselves or others.
QCS 2014

Page 89

1
These Regulations specify how Contractors have to deal with risks to the safety and health
of employees who have to carry out manual handling in the course of their employment, as
follows:
(a)
Assess the manual handling task to identify any risk that may be inherent in the
operation.
(b)
Avoid the need to carry out manual handling as far as possible.
(c)
Where a risk is identified, implement control measures to reduce that risk.
The requirements relevant to lifting and handling are described below.

Contractor's duties
Each Contractor shall, so far as is reasonably practicable, avoid the need for employees to
undertake any manual handling operations at work, that involve a risk of their being injured;
or where this is not reasonably practicable, each Contractor shall:
make a suitable and sufficient assessment of all such manual handling operations to
be undertaken by their employees.
(b)
take appropriate steps to implement control measures, thereby reducing the risk of
injury to those employees undertaking any manual handling operations, to the lowest
level which is reasonably practicable
(c)
take appropriate steps to provide any of those employees who are undertaking any
manual handling operations with general indications and, where it is reasonably
practicable to do so, precise information on:
(d)
the weight of each load
(e)
the heaviest side of the load whose centre of gravity is not positioned centrally.
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
Any assessment that a Contractor has made must be reviewed where:

there is reason to suspect that it is no longer valid, or
(b)
there has been a significant change to the manual handling operations to which that
assessment relates.
EG
(a)
AL
Where changes to an assessment are required, as a result of any review, a Contractor shall
make them.
When determining for the purposes of these Regulations whether manual handling
operations at work involve a risk of injury, and to determine the appropriate steps needed to
reduce that risk, particular regard shall be taken to check:
(a)
the physical suitability of the employee to carry out the operation
(b)
the clothing, footwear and other personal effects worn by the employee
(c)
the employee's knowledge and training
(d)
the results of any relevant risk assessment carried out
(e)
whether the employee is within a group of employees identified by that assessment as

being especially at risk
(f)
the results of any health surveillance already carried out
Contractors must additionally:

(a)
provide safe systems and places of work
QCS 2014

Page 90
(b)
ensure the safety of their employees and, where possible, the absence of risks in the
handling, storage and transport of all types of articles and substances
(c)
provide the information, instruction, training and supervision necessary to ensure the
health and safety of their employees.
Employee's duties
8
It is the duty of each employee, while at work, to:

(a)
make full and proper use of any system of work provided for use by the Contractor in
connection with manual handling.
(b)
Use any machinery or equipment provided by the Contractor in accordance with any
training or instruction received.
(c)
Inform the Contractor, or anyone else responsible for safety, of any dangerous work
practice or shortcomings in the Contractor's arrangements for safety.
IO
Designers have the potential to minimise the amount of manual handling that is necessary
during any construction project and therefore the injuries that might arise from it. Examples
of how this might be achieved are:
designing site layouts such that 'double handling' is eliminated and manual handling
distances are minimised
(b)
incorporating mechanical lifting points into components that would otherwise have had
to be manually handled into. place
(c)
taking advantage of technological advances by specifying modern components made

from lighter material
(d)
ensuring that designs allow for adequate access for construction plant, such as
excavators and dumpers, where excavation work and other earth-moving activities are
necessary.
TE
AT
(a)
IN
AL
Strains and sprains to muscles and joints, torn ligaments and tendons, disc trouble
and hernias. These are often caused by sudden and awkward movements, for example,
twisting or jerking while lifting, or handling heavy loads. They are also caused by persons
attempting to lift loads beyond their physical capabilities. The muscles of the abdominal wall
are particularly vulnerable, and excessive strain may lead to ruptures.
EG
1.2.7.6 Common injuries
(a)
Cuts and abrasions from rough surfaces, sharp or jagged edges, splinters, projections,
etc. Personal protective equipment and clothing should be worn as necessary, such
as leather gloves to protect the hands.
(b)
Back injuries are most frequently sustained while lifting and handling manually. They
may be the cumulative effect of repeated minor injuries, or the result of an abrupt
strain. Stoop lifting (see below) should be avoided; it greatly increases the chances of
sustaining back injuries.
QCS 2014
The risk of injury is reduced by a knowledge of correct lifting techniques and by not
attempting to lift excessively heavy loads without assistance.
Crushing of limbs, etc. by falling loads, or by fingers, hands or feet becoming

trapped by loads.
(a)
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

Page 91
Correct positioning of hands and feet in relation to the movement of the load is essential.
Timber wedges or other blocks should be used when beginning to raise or lower heavy loads
to enable a secure grip to be achieved and to prevent fingers and hands becoming crushed
when lowering the load. Safety shoes with steel toecaps will protect the feet. Soles of
footwear should also provide a secure grip.
1.2.7.7 Making an assessment

1
Completing the assessment is the Contractor's responsibility. Expert help may be needed in
difficult or unusual cases.
Often assessments can be done by a team of people and, although employees should not
make their own assessments, their involvement will often be beneficial.
A Contractor should make provision for properly trained manual handling assessment teams,
but if there are special difficulties and it is decided to call in outside assistance, the
Contractor should ensure that the person engaged is competent to make the type of
assessments required and that clear instructions are given.
QCS 2014

Page 92
The wide range of manual handling tasks that arise on every building and construction site
need to be fully identified. This should be systematically carried out by looking at individual
tasks and the way in which they are carried out.
By grading these factors, e.g. low/medium/high, the assessor will be able to more clearly
identify the overall risk.
Whilst carrying out the assessment, the assessor should consider ways of reducing any risk
found.
An assessment should not just be a paper exercise but should be used to pinpoint the
unsafe features of the work task, so that the Contractor may improve the situation, by
implementing control measures.
It is quite acceptable to group any manual handling tasks which have common features into
a single manual handling assessment, but care must be taken to ensure that the range of
risks is common to all tasks covered by the single risk assessment. However, when taking
this approach, it can be tempting to make a task fit the assessment rather than make the
assessment fit the task. The important thing is to identify any risk of injury, and then point the
way to practical improvements.
Significant findings should be recorded and kept, but this is not necessary if the findings are
obvious and the assessments easily repeated.
AT
IO
AL
1.2.7.8 Lifting capacities
The weight that can be lifted by any individual will vary according to personal physique, age,
condition and practice, and the techniques employed. Lifting capacity declines with age and
an older person may not be capable of lifting the same load as a younger person; this,
however, can be offset to some extent by employing a better technique.
The general rule is that the load should not be lifted if it causes a feeling of strain. Assistance
should be available if required, and employees must not be required to lift loads beyond their
capacity.
Youthful exuberance and bravado often tempt younger employees to attempt to lift loads that
are too heavy. While they may succeed in the short term, long-term damage may be done to
the ligaments, muscles and back.
If single person handling is needed, either blocks or other materials of 20 kg or lighter should
be specified and used, or other precautions should be implemented to reduce the risk by, for
example, the provision of mechanical handling.
With blocks or other materials weighing less than 20 kg, manual handling risks are still
significant and suitable precautions should be taken to minimise these risks as much as
possible.
EG
IN
TE
1.2.7.9 Abdominal belts

1
Research has shown that abdominal belts do not necessarily prevent manual handling
injuries and may, in some cases, make things worse.
1.2.7.10 Preparing to lift

1
Before lifting and handling any load, the following points should be established:
(a)
What has to be moved?
(b)
Does it really have to be moved?
QCS 2014

Page 93
(c)
What does it weigh?
(d)
Can it be broken down into smaller loads?
(e)
Can the process that requires it to be moved be changed?
(f)
Where is the load's centre of gravity?
(g)
Can it be safely handled by one person?
(h)
Will assistance be required?
(i)
Can the move be carried out more safely with mechanical assistance?
(j)
How far does it have to be moved and from where to where?
(k)
Is the route clear of obstructions?
(l)
Can it be put down safely?
Suitable protective clothing should be worn. This may include gloves, safety footwear, safety
helmets, and special overalls if hot or corrosive substances are to be carried.
Ensure that the lifting and lowering areas are clear of tripping hazards, and likewise check
the route over which the load is to be carried.
IO
AL
AT
1.2.7.11 The load
Large, heavy loads should, if possible, be broken down into smaller, lighter and more
manageable sizes. It is obviously easier to lift 10 kg five times than to try and lift 50 kg once.
Where the load has to be moved by a woman, the weight should be reduced by
approximately 30%.
As a rough guide, where lifting is repetitive, weights should be reduced as follows:
TE
IN
Special factors in operation
Rough guide
Reduce weight by 30%
Operation repeated five to eight times a minute
Operation repeated more than 12 times per minute
EG
Operation repeated once or twice a minute
'Average' female
Handler twists through 45 degrees
Handler twists through 90 degrees
Handler seated and twisting
Less than 5 kg
Handler seated
About 5 kg
About 25 kg for starting or

Pushing or pulling a load (assuming that force is applied with
stopping a load About 10 kg
hands between knuckle and shoulder height)
for keeping a load in motion
The size and shape of a load may be as significant as its weight in determining whether
assistance is required. Large awkward loads, which require the arms to be extended in front
of the body, place more strain on the back and abdomen than compact objects carried close
to the body.
QCS 2014

Page 94
The absence of natural or designed handling points can also make it difficult to raise and
carry objects without strain and may require barrows or other lifting and handling aids.
Not all loads need to be carried, of course. It may be easiest to roll or push them, depending
on the contents. Even so, assistance might still be required to avoid the risk of injury.
AT
IO
AL
1.2.7.12 Kinetic method of lifting
Kinetic handling must be taught by trainers. It cannot be 'picked up'. It is important that
postural errors are corrected during training before bad habits are established.
The main features of this method are that it:

utilises the strong leg and thigh muscles - not the weaker back muscles as in stoop
lifting
(b)
maintains the natural shape of the spine throughout the lift. Although the body may be
bent over, the spine remains straight
EG
(a)
(c)
3
IN
TE
uses the momentum of body weight to initiate forward movement.
The correct posture (such as the position of various parts of the body) in performing a task is
essential. Important points are:
(a)
correct position of feet
(b)
knees bent
(c)
straight back
(d)
arms close to body for lifting and carrying
(e)
correct grip or hold
(f)
chin in, head up
(g)
use of body weight.
Some lifting and handling techniques employing the kinetic method are described on the
next page.
QCS 2014

Page 95
Bend at the knees (1)

5
The weight to be lifted must be within the lifting capacity of the individual worker and the load
should be approached squarely, facing the intended direction of travel. The feet are
positioned about a hip's width apart, one foot SLIGHTLY in front of the body. The knees are
bent and the body lowered as close to the load as possible while remaining relaxed and
balanced. The back should be straight from hips to shoulders, but not necessarily vertical.
Grasp the load (2)
The load is tilted with one hand (if necessary) so that the other hand can obtain a secure grip
at the corner nearest the body. The free hand is then transferred to the furthest corner of the
load and drawn as close to the trunk as possible. Arms should be well tucked in to provide
maximum support to the load.
AL
Lift, using the legs (3)

The load can then be lifted by straightening the legs so that the body and load move
upwards in unison. All movements should be smooth and natural. Jerking, twisting or
straining movements should be avoided.
Lifting should feel comfortable. Lifting movements will remain smooth and natural providing
the back and head are kept naturally erect. This is achieved by looking straight ahead when
straightening the legs, instead of looking down at the load.
AT
IO
Carrying the load (4)
The load should be held firmly into the body and carried to where it is to be deposited. The
closer the centre of gravity of the load can be kept to the body, the easier and more natural
the lift. It is important to be able to see over or around the load so as to avoid tripping
hazards.
10
When the weight is approaching the maximum lifting capacity of the individual, it will be
necessary to lean back on the hips with the load to bring the trunk to the erect position
before straightening the legs to lift the load. In this instance the body is being used simply as
a counterbalance to keep muscular effort to a minimum.
EG
IN
TE
1.2.7.13 Changing grip

1
Grips should not be changed while carrying the load. First

rest the load on a ledge or other firm support, then change
QCS 2014

Page 96
the grip if necessary.
1.2.7.14 Stacking
1
Loads should not be lifted above shoulder height. When it is impossible to lift and stack with
the elbows tucked into the sides of the body, a platform should be used to stand on. An
intermediate platform should also be used when lifting loads down from a higher level.
1.2.7.15 Use of a lifting platform

The squat position is adopted as near to the load as possible. Keeping a straight back and
using the leg muscles, the load should be lifted onto a platform. The person lifting the load
then stands as near to the platform as possible and, bending at the knees and hips (NOT the
back), eases the load onto their shoulder, adjusts for balance and straightens at the knees
and hips.
For lowering the load, the procedure is reversed.
Carrying a load under one arm, supported on the hip, causes strain and should be avoided.
N
IO
1.2.7.16 Hand hook or lifting aids
Hand hooks or lifting aids should be used if loads are unwieldy or so irregular in shape that a
good grip cannot be maintained. If hooks are being used, care must be taken to ensure that
the contents of the load are not damaged.
AT
AL
1.2.7.17 Team lifting
When large or awkward weights are involved, assistance should be sought. The person
assisting should be of similar height and build, so that the raised load does not become
unbalanced or unevenly distributed.
Co-ordinating team activity is important in team lifting. One person should give directions
during all lifting, carrying and lowering operations.
Properly designed lifting aids will enable some tasks to be performed more quickly and
easily, and eliminate the risk of injury or damage.
EG
IN
TE
1.2.7.18 Using rollers to move a load

1
Lengths of steel pipe or proper rollers can be used to roll or slew heavy crates. The load is
QCS 2014

Page 97
pushed gently forward on two or more rollers, and further rollers are inserted under the front
end as necessary.
Care must be taken by the person placing the rollers to avoid being trapped as the load
moves forward, and to ensure that those pushing do not trip over the rollers that have
previously been used.
Whenever practical, mechanical handling and lifting should replace manual techniques. This
will reduce the risk of fatigue, improve efficiency and reduce the risk of accidents.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 98

1.2.7 Appendix 1
Safety checklist
Manual handling and lifting
Preparation
What is being lifted?
Where to and how far?
Has a manual handling risk assessment been carried out?
Would mechanical means be more practical or appropriate?
Is the operation part of a routine? If so, could it be more effectively planned and executed?
How many people will be needed to move the load safely?
Are they all trained in kinetic lifting and handling?
Are proper (kinetic) lifting methods being employed?
What methods and equipment will be required?
10
Is the required equipment available?
11
Is the lifting and handling area clear of hazards?
AT
IO
AL
Lifting and handling
Is the proper personal protective clothing in use?
Is co-ordination satisfactory in dual and team lifting with one person taking charge of the lift?
Is the necessary equipment in use or to hand?
Are excessively heavy weights being lifted?
Are loads being deposited or stacked safely and securely?
Is adequate supervision employed where necessary?
EG
IN
TE
After lifting and handling

1
Are any incidents or accidents reported and recorded?
Where injuries have been sustained, has medical attention been sought?
Is the damage or loss of equipment recorded?
QCS 2014

Page 99

1.2.7 Appendix 2
Manual handling of loads: Assessment checklist
Section A - Preliminary
Task name:
Is an assessment needed? (An assessment will be

needed if there is a potential risk of injury, eg if the
task falls outside the guidelines) Yes/No*
Task description:
Load weight:
AL
Frequency of lift:
Carry distances (if applicable):
IO
Are other manual handling tasks carried out by

these operators?
AT
Assessment discussed with employees/safety

representatives
* Circle as appropriate
IN
TE
If 'Yes' continue. If 'No' the assessment need go no further.
Diagrams (other information including existing

control measures):
Locations:
EG
Operations covered by this assessment

(detailed description):
Personnel involved:
Date of assessment:
Overall assessment of the risk of injury?

* Circle as appropriate
Low/ Medium/ High*
Make your overall assessment after you have completed Section B.
AL
Section
Part
1.02: Occupational Health and Hygiene (Regulatory Document)
Page 100
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Section B: Lifting and carrying - More detailed assessment, where necessary

If yes, tick appropriate
level of risk
Questions to consider:
Do the tasks involve:
TE
R
Low
holding loads away from trunk?
twisting?
stooping?
reaching upwards?
large vertical movement?
long carrying distances?
strenuous pushing or pulling?
unpredictable movement of loads?
repetitive handling?
insufficient rest or recovery?
a work rate imposed by a process?
EG
IN
Are the loads:
heavy?
bulky/unwieldy?
difficult to grasp?
unstable/unpredictable?
intrinsically harmful (eg sharp/hot)?
Med
High
Problems occurring from the task (Make rough

notes in this column in preparation for the possible
remedial action to be taken)
Possible remedial action e.g. changes to be made to the

task, load, working environment etc. Who needs to be
involved in implementing the changes?
AL
Section
Part
Page 101
AT
IO
QCS 2014

If yes, tick appropriate
level of risk
TE
R
Low
Consider the working environment - are there:

constraints on posture?
poor floors?
variations in levels?
hot/cold/humid conditions?
strong air movements?
poor lighting conditions?
EG
IN
Consider individual capability - does the job:
require unusual capability?

pose a risk to those with a health problem or
a physical or learning difficulty?
pose a risk to those who are pregnant?
call for special information/training?
Med
High
Problems occurring from the task (Make rough

notes in this column in preparation for the possible
Possible remedial action e.g. changes to be made to

the task, load, working environment etc. Who needs to
be involved in implementing the changes?
AL
Section
Part
Page 102
AT
IO
QCS 2014

Yes/No
TE
R
Other factors to consider

Protective clothing
Yes/No
Is there an absence of the correct/suitable

PPE being worn?
Yes/No
IN
Is movement or posture hindered by clothing

or personal protective equipment?
EG
Work organisation (psychosocial factors)
Do workers feel that there has been a lack of

consideration given to the planning and
scheduling of tasks/rest breaks?
Yes/No
Do workers feel that there is poor /

communication between managers and
employees (eg not involved in risk
assessments or decisions on changes in
workstation design)?
Yes/No
Are there sudden changes in workload, or

seasonal changes in volume without
mechanisms for dealing with the change?
Yes/No
Do workers feel they have not been given

enough training and information to carry out
the task successfully?
Yes/No
Problems occurring from the task (Make rough notes Possible remedial action e.g. changes to be made to
in this column in preparation for the possible
the task, load, working environment etc. Who needs
to be involved in implementing the changes?
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 103
Section C - Remedial action to be taken
Remedial steps that should be taken, in order of priority: Person responsible for
implementing controls
Target implementation Completed

date
Y/N
IO
AL
AT
TE
EG
IN
Date by which actions should be completed:

Date for review of assessment:
Assessor's name:
Signature:
TAKE ACTION ... AND CHECK THAT IT HAS THE DESIRED EFFECT
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 104

1.2.8
Asbestos in the Workplace
1.2.8.1 Key points

All asbestos-containing material (ACM) is hazardous when airborne and dangerous when
fibres are inhaled.
Before any work with asbestos is carried out a written risk assessment must be made.
The priority for any Contractor is to prevent exposure to, and spread of, asbestos.
A written, site specific plan of work must be kept on site and followed.
Anyone who does any work with asbestos must be specifically trained to do it, and this
training must be repeated annually.
Do not forget other hazards besides asbestos, e.g. working at height or in a confined space,
when working with/removing asbestos.
Note:
Section 1, Part 9 of the QCS covers manual handling of materials.
AL
AT
The key is a risk assessment, which needs to be carried out by someone who is competent
in terms of:
working with asbestos
(b)
the requirements of these Regulations
(a)
IO
Asbestos is a risk to health when airborne fibres are breathed in. The greater the number of
fibres, and the longer the period over which they are breathed in, the greater the risk of
incurable asbestos-related diseases developing. These include cancers in the lungs and
chest lining.
However, asbestos that is in a good condition, which is not damaged and is not likely to be
worked on or disturbed, does not pose any immediate problem.
Although asbestos building materials and products have been largely replaced by safer
alternatives, there remains the issue of the ongoing and long-term management of existing
asbestos where its removal is not practicable.
Locating and identifying asbestos can be difficult, as its appearance may be changed by
surface coatings, heat or ageing. It may also be encapsulated by, or be concealed beneath,
other materials. Past uses of asbestos include:
EG
IN
TE
Insulation and sprayed coatings using moulded or pre-formed lagging

6
boilers, plant and pipework
fire protection to steel work
thermal and acoustic insulation of buildings, including loose packing

Insulation board
fire protection to doors
10
claddings on walls and ceilings
QCS 2014
Section
Part
11
partitioning
12
ceiling tiles
13
fire breaks in ceiling voids
Page 105
Asbestos cement
corrugated roof sheets
15
flat sheets for cladding and partitions
16
roof and rainwater drainage goods
17
underground pipes
18
bath panels
19
artificial roof slates
AL
14
IO
Other uses
vinyl or thermoplastic floor tiles
21
insulation of electrical equipment
22
some textured coatings
23
bakelite sanitary ware, and other products.
24
Asbestos-based friction materials were widely used in brake and clutch linings in vehicles
and plant, together with gaskets and packing in engines and heating or ventilation systems.
Substitute materials have been developed in most cases.
IN
TE
AT
20
Asbestos is a naturally occurring fibrous silicate mineral material, which does not burn and is
resistant to most acids and alkalis. The fire protection and insulative properties of asbestos
were the main reason for its use over the years. Three main types of asbestos have been
used in the construction industry:
EG
1.2.8.3 Types of asbestos and its identification
(a)
chrysotile (white)
(b)
amosite (brown)
(c)
crocidolite (blue).
Although the colours are often used to differentiate between the different types of asbestos,
the actual colour of a material suspected of being asbestos is not necessarily an accurate
indication as to whether or not it is asbestos or an asbestos-containing material, or if it is, of
what type.
Changes in colour may occur due to:

(a)
it ageing or simply becoming dirty
(b)
the effects of heat
(c)
surface coatings being applied
(d)
encapsulation
QCS 2014
(e)
Section
Part
Page 106
oil or chemical splashes.
The type of asbestos used in the lagging of boilers can be particularly difficult to identify
visually. Repairs and modifications can mean that boilers or pipework may be lagged by a
mixture of different types of asbestos.
Asbestos was widely used as fire protection in building materials, for thermal insulation and
also as a sprayed coating to steel structural members. All of these uses now present
significant management issues associated with the maintenance of the asbestos over the
remaining life span of the building, or the removal of the asbestos during renovation,
refurbishment or demolition.
Working with, among, or alongside asbestos materials demands stringent control, and
compliance with recommended precautionary measures and methods of work.
AL
1.2.8.4 Control of Asbestos

Risk assessment - an assessment of risk carried out by someone with both the theoretical
background and practical experience of the intended work with asbestos-containing
materials.
While a competent construction manager may be able to form an opinion as to whether a

material may be asbestos or an asbestos-containing material, the decision as to who can do
the work, and the standards that the work should be carried out to, are likely to require
specialist advice.
If you are a contractor working on someone else's premises, you should be given information
about the presence of asbestos and what they expect you to do about it. If you are not
given this, you should not start work.
Note 1. This requires a survey by a competent person. If representative samples are needed
for laboratory analysis, this may well be a task for a competent technician. Where multiple
samples are taken, each sample and the sample point should be numbered. If samples are
being sent for analysis, it is a requirement that any laboratory carrying out analysis has the
necessary facilities, expertise and quality control procedures. Any samples should be well
sealed, for example inside two zip lock plastic bags.
Note 2. If in doubt presume that the material is asbestos or ACM until you can prove that it is
not. It is better to 'overprotect', than to expose employees and others to asbestos.
Note 3. A plan of the premises showing where the materials are will always be extremely
useful, and will be essential in larger premises. Such a plan would form an integral part of
the ongoing management of the asbestos or ACM.
Note 4. A risk assessment should be undertaken by a competent person who has sufficient
knowledge of the subject.
If the materials are in good condition, not liable to be damaged, and will not be disturbed or
worked on, then the risk is probably low. If the materials are flaky, crumbling, in a place
where they can be damaged by, for example, forklift trucks, then the risk is high. Given the
known ill health caused by asbestos, then a high risk of damage calls for urgent actions.
Note 5. This could be work by your employees, or any contractors or subcontractors brought
in for carpentry, flooring, partitioning, ceiling fixing, plumbing, electrical or other work.
10
Note 6. If material is not going to be removed by an asbestos removal contractor, consider

how you are going to manage the long-term presence of the asbestos. If it is in good
condition and not liable to be damaged, then routine inspection and monitoring may be
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 107
enough if records are kept. A sealing coat may be needed, or other protective works
necessary, to lower and to further control the risk.
Note 7. Make it happen by putting your plan into action. What is the organisation, what are
the arrangements for the implementation of the plan and who has the responsibility?
12
Note 8. A regular review of the action plan will ensure that it is working that the control
measures are still effective, and that inspection, monitoring and recording are in fact taking
place. It may be the case that procedures, notices and policies that have been in place for a
length of time tend to be overlooked. A fresh approach may therefore be needed.
13
Note 9. Part of this information will be the signs that will have been placed to identify the
asbestos or ACM. In a large workplace or premises, this may also mean keeping a register
that describes every individual room or workplace and the asbestos or ACM that is in there.
This means that visiting subcontractors can be told exactly what asbestos or ACMs to expect
in the areas in which they will be working.
14
These Regulations also impose duties on Contractors for the protection of employees who
may be exposed to asbestos at work, and other persons affected or who may be at risk of
being affected by such work.
AL
11
IO
1.2.8.5 Representative sampling
To confirm or identify the type of asbestos or ACM on the premises, a series of samples may
have to be taken for laboratory analysis. Methods employed in taking samples of asbestos
will vary according to its type and location. Guidance on taking samples is available in the
UK publication MDHS100.
Anyone removing samples for analysis must be competent to do so and use appropriate
protective clothing and respiratory equipment, particularly if the work involves cutting, boring,
drilling or otherwise creating airborne dust or fibres. Precautionary measures to be observed
include:
no people, other than those taking the sample, to be in the area
(b)
the area from where the sample is to be taken should be dampened using a 'killer
spray'
(c)
a knife, core borer or hand drill should be used to place the sample in a suitably
labelled, scalable container. Do not use any tools that will create airborne fibres
(e)
EG
(a)
(d)
IN
TE
AT
other surfaces on which asbestos dust may fall should be covered with an impervious
sheet. The area should be subsequently cleaned by using a dustless method, e.g. a
damp cloth, which should be disposed of in a sealed polythene bag
any disturbed or damaged surfaces should be sealed after a sample has been taken.
The results of the analysis will determine what action should be included in the management
plan.
1.2.8.6 Asbestos surveys

1
All asbestos surveys must be carried out by a competent person who can demonstrate the
following:
(a)
evidence of their training and experience in such work
(b)
types of survey outlined below they are qualified to carry out
(c)
that they are going to carry out the survey in accordance with the HSE guidance
MDHS100
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 108
If an individual surveyor is to be appointed, a check should be made as to whether they have

personnel certification for asbestos surveys from a certification body which has been
approved by a recognised accreditation body under the standard ISO 17024,
All surveys should be subject to a quality assurance process. It is important to note that ISO
9000 accreditation is not the correct standard for assessing asbestos surveys. ISO 17020 is
the relevant standard.
The competence schemes are:

The United Kingdom Accreditation Service UKAS. This is accreditation by the United
Kingdom Accreditation Service against ISO 17020, and is normally held by an
organisation such as the surveying division of a licensed contractor or an asbestos
laboratory. www.ukas.org.uk
(b)
National Individual Asbestos Certification Scheme (NIACS) is a scheme jointly run by

the Asbestos Removal Contractors Association and the Royal Institute of Chartered
Surveyors. It accredits individual surveyors. www.niacs.org.uk
(c)
Asbestos Building Inspectors Certification Scheme (ABICS) is a scheme run by the

British Occupational Hygiene Society. It also accredits individual surveyors.
www.bohs.org/standardTemplate.aspx/Home/Professional/ABICS
AL
(a)
A UKAS or equivalent laboratory should have carried out all analysis of asbestos samples.
Three types of survey are defined within HSE's publication MDHS 100:
AT
IO
Type 1 - presumptive survey - during which the surveyor does not take any samples.
Instead, using their skill and judgement alone, the surveyor identifies materials as
containing asbestos or not. The survey is of the asbestos risks that the building poses
to its occupants in normal use.
(b)
Type 2 - sampling survey - the surveyor makes use of sampling and subsequent
laboratory analysis to confirm whether or not a material contains asbestos. The survey
is of the asbestos risks that the building poses to its occupants in normal use.
(c)
Type 3 - invasive survey - the surveyor samples and breaks into the structure and
fabric of the building to try to find the asbestos-containing materials, before a
contractor does so in the course of their work.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
Anyone applying the results of a survey should initially check if the surveyor has written any
caveats on the survey. It is common to exclude access to areas which are over 3 metres
above ground level, as it is not possible for a single surveyor to safely use a ladder higher
than this because they cannot foot it. There may be other areas that have not been
accessed.
Asbestos surveyors are taught to identify the 'spaces' where asbestos is likely to be found
and to survey accordingly. The meaning of 'spaces' can be anything from a boiler room, to a
roof void, an office, an underground duct, a cavity between the two leafs of a wall or
anywhere else that asbestos or an asbestos-containing material might have been used.
A 'no access' comment on an asbestos report could be simply because:
10
(a)
the door of a room was locked and the surveyor could not gain entry
(b)
the 'space' was an underground duct and a mini digger was required to lift the covers
(c)
a suspended floor had no access other than by destroying the floor
(d)
the electrical system being live during the survey.
To understand the difference between a Type 2 and Type 3 survey, the simplest explanation
is to consider a studwork wall which forms a firebreak. It was originally covered in asbestos
insulation board and then covered over with plasterboard. In a Type 1 and Type 2 survey,
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 109
the surveyor would correctly identify the outer surface as being plasterboard.
During these surveys there would be no need to carry out any invasive testing and therefore
the asbestos insulation board lies undiscovered. Type 3 surveys would be invasive and the
surveyor would be expected to check under the plasterboard for other materials. In the
previous case, if a building contractor only commissioned a Type 2 survey upon which to
plan their work, they may find the asbestos insulation board unexpectedly. Invasive checks
must be made before invasive work is carried out.
12
Just because the surveyor did not find any asbestos does not mean that there is no asbestos
present. In all cases it is important to remember that surveying is as much an art as a
science and there will be mistakes. There are also some asbestos-containing materials
which would only be found by luck rather than judgement, for example, asbestos cement
shuttering in a slab, or asbestos insulation board used as packers inside a stud work wall. It
is important to be wary of unidentified building products and for everyone to have sufficient
asbestos awareness training. There should also be management who are in a position to
stop work if necessary and question the presence of any 'funny looking plasterboard' found.
AL
11
1.2.8.7 Working with asbestos
AT
A Contractor who carries out any work in a building or structure is required to:
(a)
make a suitable and sufficient assessment as to whether asbestos is, or is liable to be,
present in the premises where work is being carried out. Under CDM, the client has a
duty regardless of the size of the project to provide information such as the presence
of asbestos
(b)
note that:
TE
IO
Requirements of the Regulations
this information should normally be in the form of Type 3 surveys as defined in

the HSE publication MDHS 100 for most invasive construction work
(ii)
any information on the presence of asbestos supplied by the client based upon
a Type 2 survey, must be closely scrutinised to ensure that the construction
work will not disturb more of the structure than the surveyor checked
EG
IN
(i)
identify that the material does not contain asbestos or assume it contains brown or blue
asbestos
ensure that a competent person carries out an assessment to decide the likely exposure for
the proposed work methods.
prepare a suitable written plan of work
provide adequate information, instruction and training, for employees and others
ensure that training is repeated on an annual basis for any work with asbestos
prevent or reduce asbestos exposure to the lowest level reasonably practicable by means
other than the use of respiratory protective equipment (RPE), for example use an asbestos H
class vacuum cleaner or other fibre suppression techniques
ensure the proper use of respiratory protective equipment and that face-fit testing is carried
out
maintain respiratory equipment in a clean, efficient state, good order and repair. Regularly
examine and test exhaust ventilation equipment
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 110
10
provide adequate and suitable protective clothing and ensure that it is cleaned or disposed of
appropriately
11
prevent the spread of asbestos from the workplace
12
ensure premises and plant involved in work with asbestos are kept clean
13
monitor the air where employees are exposed to asbestos and keep suitable records for a
specific period
14
ensure that air monitoring is only carried out by a UKAS or equivalent accredited laboratory
15
provide washing and changing facilities that are adequate and suitable for employees
exposed to asbestos, and storage for protective clothing and personal clothing (not worn
during working hours)
AL
Asbestos areas and respirator zones

Where an asbestos removal contractor is undertaking the removal of asbestos, in order to
ensure that people other than those involved in asbestos work are not exposed to asbestos
by entering 'asbestos areas', such areas should be designated and clearly identified, using
notices.
17
Areas where the removal contractors are working, and where control limits for exposure to
airborne fibres are liable to be exceeded, will be designated as respirator zones to ensure
that only removal contractors wearing respiratory protective equipment are allowed to "
enter.
18
Contractors with asbestos removal contractors on their premises should strictly prohibit entry
into these areas by their own employees.
IN
TE
AT
IO
16
Asbestos removal contractors must ensure that their employees, who are liable to be
exposed to asbestos, are under regular medical surveillance by an employment medical
adviser or appointed doctor.
20
Medical examinations should be provided before work with asbestos starts and at prescribed
periods thereafter, currently every two years.
21
Health records containing information on medical examinations have to be maintained and

kept for 40 years after the date of the last entry.
EG
19
Washing and changing facilities

22
Asbestos removal contractors must provide adequate and suitable washing and changing
facilities for their employees. Where protective clothing and respiratory equipment are in use,
storage must be provided for contaminated items.
23
Separate storage must be provided for personal clothing not worn during working hours.
Storage, dispatch, labeling of asbestos waste
24
Asbestos waste is considered to be of two types - combined or fibrous. Combined was

previously called bonded and effectively the asbestos is well bound into the material. Roofing
felt, vinyl floor tiles and most asbestos cement is categorised as combined. Asbestos
insulation board, pipe lagging and sprayed coating are fibrous. Professional advice may be
needed to ensure that the waste is correctly categorised.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 111
25
There is no requirement to bag or wrap asbestos cement sheets, or gutters removed

externally, where they can be placed straight into a suitable skip. The skip should be secured
if it is left overnight. It is good practice to bag or wrap waste from internal work to guarantee
that when the waste is carried outside there will be no asbestos debris dropped. If a van is
being used to carry asbestos waste, the material must be double bagged and the bags
secured by putting them in a lidded bin, for example.
26
Any fibrous asbestos removed should be sealed in proper containers and correctly marked
before despatch. Typically, this will be double-bagged with the inner bag being red and the
outer clear.
27
Containers should be designed and constructed so as to retain the asbestos without any
spillage or loss during normal handling.
Labelling of asbestos waste and used protective clothing
Where the asbestos removal contractor uses labels on waste or removed asbestos, the label
must be clearly and indelibly printed so that the words in the lower half can be easily read.
These words must be printed as specified in the diagram.
29
The label has to be firmly affixed to the packaging using an adhesive type label, or directly
printed onto the packaging (plastic bag).
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
28
Labelling requirement
Disposal of removed asbestos

30
In essence, there is a duty of care put on everyone in the waste disposal chain. Clients,
whether they are at work or domestic, have a responsibility to ensure that the waste is
disposed of correctly. They can be prosecuted if the waste is fly tipped. Where asbestos has
been removed as part of a project, a prudent contractor would ensure that proof of disposal
formed part of the information that was given to the client.
Other aspects
31
Concerns regarding aspects of health and safety that are often associated with working with
asbestos, such as working at height, the risk of fire, working in confined spaces, the use of
machinery, burning, cutting and lifting. It is important not to view asbestos as a hazard in
isolation.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 112

1.2.9
The Control of Dust and Fumes
1.2.9.1 Key points

1
The inhalation of dust or fumes has the potential to cause severe respiratory illness.
Asbestos fibres and lead dust are particularly hazardous if inhaled.
The dust of some types of wood can be irritating to the skin.
The creation of airborne dust or fumes should ideally be prevented although this is often not
possible in a construction site environment.
Where the prevention of dust or fumes is not possible, the extent of exposure must be
controlled to a level that is safe.
Control of dust can be achieved by the:
(b)
collection of dust in 'collector bags' attached to powered hand tools
(c)
wet cutting of solid materials such as thermal blocks, bricks or ceramic tiles
(d)
where practical, carrying out of work activities in the open air rather than in enclosed
spaces.
Hazardous fumes usually result from:
processes in which materials are heated, such as welding, lead burning or grinding
(b)
uncontrolled use of substances such as solvents and adhesives
(c)
the use of equipment and plant powered by internal combustion engines.
TE
(a)
Note:
Section 1, Part 15.2.3 of the QCS covers the control of dust.
The exposure of employees to airborne dust or fumes can result in severe respiratory
illnesses, such as occupational asthma. Such diseases can be totally disabling, causing
those affected to give up work or change their employment. Exposure of the skin to some
hazardous dusts can result in severe irritation and ulceration of the affected areas.
1.2.9.3 Dust
EG
AT
IO
AL
extraction of dust and fumes through stand-alone extractor units
IN
(a)
Dust is the name for a mix of tiny solid particles. It consists of a wide mix of components. In
the construction context, the mix will reflect the work activities.
It is widely known that almost any excess levels of dust can cause health problems. Harmful
effects range from simple skin irritation to severe respiratory illness.
Not all harmful dusts are visible. Dusts that are too fine to be seen by the naked eye are the
cause of many serious health problems. Like most occupational health problems, it can take
several years for symptoms of ill health to manifest themselves.
Skin irritation, dermatitis and ulceration can be caused by contact with some types of dusts.
Other types of dust, being soluble, may be absorbed through the skin via cuts and abrasions.
The inhalation of dust can cause wheezing, coughing, breathlessness, bronchitis, nasal and
other types of cancer. Dust also contains bacteria and viruses and therefore has the
potential to cause stomach disorders. These can result from ingesting airborne dust or from
eating food with contaminated hands.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 113
Such problems are not likely to arise if occupational exposure limits are not exceeded and
safe systems of work are maintained.
1.2.9.4 Fumes
1
Hazardous fumes can be produced when some building materials are heated or otherwise
worked. A common form of respiratory illness, which has flu-like symptoms, is caused by the
inhalation of welding fumes. Other sources of hazardous fumes are:
(a)
uncontrolled exposure to liquid substances such as solvents or paints
(b)
the use of equipment and plant which is powered by internal combustion engines.
Contractors must provide and maintain plant and systems of work that are safe and
without risks to health.
(b)
Contractors must make arrangements for safe handling, storage, and transport of
(c)
Contractors must provide adequate information, instruction, training and supervision.
(d)
Contractors have a duty to ensure persons not in their employment are not exposed to
risks to their health and safety.
(e)
Persons in control of premises must use the best practicable means to ensure that
noxious or offensive substances do not enter the atmosphere
(f)
Contractors must not charge an employee for personal protective equipment that is
provided in accordance with statutory requirements relating to health and safety.
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
Employees have a duty to:
exercise reasonable care for their own health and safety and that of others who may
be affected by their acts or omissions; to co-operate with their Contractor in enabling
him or her to carry out his or her duties under the relevant statutory provisions
(b)
not intentionally or recklessly interfere with, or misuse, anything provided in the

interests of health, safety and welfare.
IN
(a)
The relevant provisions are as follows.
EG

1
These Regulations place a legal duty on every Contractor to make a suitable and sufficient
assessment of every work activity to identify any hazard that employees or any other person
might encounter as a result of the work being carried out.
measures in place to either eliminate the hazards or, where this is not possible, reduce the
risk of injury or ill health resulting from those hazards, so far as is reasonably practicable.
Where a hazard is identified that requires it, the Contractor must offer appropriate health
surveillance to employees. This must take into account all the risks to their health and safety
that have been identified.
the risks that exist in the workplace and inform them of the control measures that are in
place to reduce those risks.
Employees, in turn, have a duty under these Regulations to tell their Contractor of any work
situation which presents a risk to the health and safety of themselves and to any other
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 114
person who may be affected.

6
These Regulations require that Contractors assess the health risks to their employees
arising out of exposure to hazardous dusts and fumes, and, if reasonably practicable, put
control measures in place to eliminate the work processes and the use of substances that
cause exposure. If this is not reasonably practicable, Contractors must:
(a)
control exposure to an acceptable level, and
(b)
inform employees of the hazards involved and the control measures in place
(c)
mitigate the effects of any exposure by providing health surveillance where necessary.
AL
(b)
the much smaller particles which are called 'respirable dust'.
inhalable dust, sometimes called 'total dust', and
AT
IO
Because dust is a mix of very small particles, all dusts have been assigned a concentration
in air above which they are considered hazardous. It is important to remember that this
applies to all dusts, for example those caused by:
sweeping a dusty floor
(b)
clearing out a building
(c)
driving plant on dusty sites
(d)
mixing sand and cement to make mortar
(e)
sanding down Medium density fibreboard (MDF) or timber.
TE
(a)
The technical descriptions of the two types of dust are:
IN
(a)
(a)
total inhalable dust approximates to the fraction of airborne material that is inhaled and
is available for deposition in the respiratory tract
(b)
respirable dust approximates to the fraction of airborne material that is inhaled and
penetrates to the gas exchange region of the lung (the alveoli).
EG
When dust is inhaled, the body's defence mechanisms can usually deal with the larger
particles. However, they struggle to cope with the very small particles. In occupational
hygiene terms, dust is divided into two categories:
Any concentration of an inhalable dust in excess of 10 milligrams of dust per cubic metre of
3
3
air (10 mg/m ) averaged out over eight hours, or any respirable dust in excess of 4 mg/m
averaged over eight hours, is deemed to be a substantial concentration of dust and therefore
within the definition of a substance hazardous to health.
The official list of exposure limits is updated periodically and published in the Health and
Safety Executives Guidance Note EH40. The most recent edition is EH40/2005. This has
been supplemented by a table on HSE's website, which is updated more frequently and has
the up-to-date list of workplace exposure levels:
www.hse.gov.uk/coshh/table1.pdf
This lists specified workplace exposure limits (WEL) for a number of dusts, in addition to
other substances. Dusts are therefore classified as substances that are hazardous to health.
Further guidance on the health hazards posed by dust is included on pages 29-31 of
EH40/2005.
The principal points of these Regulations place requirements on the Contractor to protect
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 115
employees, or any other persons who may be affected by their operations, by:
(a)
assessing the health risks created by work involving substances hazardous to health.
(b)
ensuring that the exposure of employees or others is prevented or adequately

controlled, by putting in place any measures necessary to control the exposure to risks
(c)
ensuring that any control methods provided are properly used and maintained, and by
monitoring the work environment as necessary
(d)
carrying out health surveillance in specified circumstances
(e)
providing information, instruction and training for employees on the risks to health and
precautions to be taken regarding any work with substances hazardous to health
(f)
providing procedures for dealing with accidents, incidents and emergencies, including
first-aid and safety drills.
AL

Designers have the potential to eliminate or reduce the exposure of operatives, and possibly
others, to dust or fumes through their designs.
Examples of how this can be achieved are:
IO
specifying construction methods that avoid hot-works and therefore the creation of
fumes, particularly in enclosed areas and confined spaces
(b)
specifying that construction materials are cut to size at the point of manufacture,
eliminating the need for cutting, planing, sanding and so on, on site
(c)
designing enclosures to contain hazardous dust where its creation is unavoidable.
AT
(a)
Contractors and sub-contractors have the potential to reduce exposure to dust and/or fumes
by co-ordinating work activities, co-operating with each other and adopting work methods.
TE
IN

the Contractor must provide and ensure that suitable personal protective equipment is used
by the at risk employees.
In essence, personal protective equipment (PPE) may only be used as a last resort after all
other means of eliminating or controlling the risk have been considered and are found not to
be reasonably practicable.
In deciding which type to issue, the Contractor must take into account the nature of the
hazard that the PPE is being used to protect against, and ensure the PPE will fit the wearer
and allow them to work safely. If more than one item of PPE is being used, the Contractor
must make sure that individual items of PPE are compatible and suitable for the task that is
to be undertaken.
understand the risks being protected against, the purpose of the PPE and manner in which it
is to be used.
the employee has a duty to properly use the equipment provided, follow the information,
instruction and training that they have been given, and know the procedures for reporting
loss or defects to their Contractor.
EG
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 116
1.2.9.10 Training
1
It should be noted that these Regulations place a legal duty on the Contractor to provide
employees with adequate information, instruction, training and supervision to be able to carry
out any work task safely and without risks to their health.
1.2.9.11 Respiratory hazards

The following paragraphs describe the main respiratory hazards which may be encountered
on site.
Dusts are produced when solid materials are broken down into finer particles. The longer
that the dust stays in the air then the easier it is to breathe in. Airborne dust is usually
respirable dust.
Mists are tiny liquid droplets formed by atomisation of the liquid, for example, when spraying
or using an aerosol. Mists may be a combination of several hazardous substances.
Metal fumes occur when metal is vaporised at high temperatures, for example, when
welding and gas cutting. The physical properties of fumes can be confusing, particularly
when identifying suitable respiratory protective equipment (RPE). Usually, metal 'fume' is
actually a solid particle by the time it is inhaled.
When welding is taking place the temperature of the metal at the weld is sufficiently high for
the elements in the metal to become gaseous. However, 2-3 mm away from the weld the
gases have cooled down sufficiently for the fume to solidify out as small particles.
Consequently, when purchasing RPE to protect against fume, a device that protects against
solid particles rather than gases is required.
Gases are airborne at room temperature and normally mix with the air that we breathe.
Examples include propane, butane, acetylene, carbon monoxide and hydrogen sulphide.
Gases can spread very quickly.
Vapours are the gaseous state of substances that are liquids or solids at room temperature.
They usually form when substances evaporate.
One example is the vapour from a tin of glue or solvent that has been left open.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.2.9.12 Exposure limits

1
Exposure to any unlisted substance or general nuisance dust should be limited by reducing
dust levels to the minimum reasonably practicable. These levels should not exceed 10
milligrams of dust per cubic metre of air, when measured over an eight hour period (10
3
3
mg/m 8H TWA). Within that figure, only 4 mg/m should be respirable dust.
Generally speaking, if visible dust can be seen in the air, it is highly possible that the 10 mg
limit is being approached (or exceeded), and the application of COSHH should be
considered.
1.2.9.13 Control of dust

1
Dust in its many forms has been the cause of health problems throughout the history of the
building and construction industry. While much attention has been given to newly recognised
hazards, the greater part of the dust problem relates to more common substances.
Dust is taken here to mean anything that forms a powder or cloud and is a nuisance,
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 117
including cement, wood, stone, silica, fillers and plastics. The high speed cutting and
grinding of most materials can produce dust.
Dust in confined spaces is a particular hazard, because of the potential risk of explosion. The
most obvious example is in coal mines. Flour dust can also be explosive, and whilst that is
normally a process industry risk, for companies who may maintain or cut up extraction plant
in bakeries and flour/feed mills, it is something that does require consideration.
In all cases, knowledge of the hazards associated with materials, processes and operations
is required, and of the specific precautions and protective equipment necessary to reduce or
eliminate the risk to health and safety.
In many cases, the control of dust will not be difficult to achieve. The accumulation of
'general dust' can be controlled by good housekeeping and simple measures, such as
'damping down'.
Where the creation of dust is more localised, such as during the cutting, grinding or sanding
of solid materials, satisfactory control will often be achieved by the extraction and collection
of the dust through attachments fitted to power tools or by 'wet cutting'. Even where the
collection of dust is not practical, it will often be possible to create an enclosure around the
activity and ensure that the person carrying it out uses appropriate RPE.
Conversely, carrying out some dust-generating activities in the open air may be preferable to
allow the dust to disperse, depending upon the hazard posed by the quantity and nature of
the dust so created.
AT
IO
AL
Wood dust
Impregnated timber and some hardwoods (such as teak, African mahogany and iroko) are
known to be health hazards. The inhalation of hardwood dusts through the nose is a known
cause of nasal cancer.
A list of some timbers known to present risks is given below. Protection is not normally
required when working on these timbers with hand tools in the open, but harmful dusts can
be produced when using machine tools (e.g. sanders or saws) in enclosed or poorly
ventilated areas. An assessment should be made and, if ventilation or dust extraction cannot
be improved to remove or reduce the dust problem, a dust respirator should be worn.
EG
IN
TE
Medium density fibreboard

10
Medium density fibreboard (MDF) is a commonly used material in the construction sector. It
is manufactured from wood dust glued together with a urea-formaldehyde binder.
11
The risks associated with MDF are exposure to dust and dried urea-formaldehyde during
use.
12
The primary issue for construction workers is simply the huge amount of dust that any work
with MDF generates. Given the makeup of the product this is not really surprising. The
3
exposure level normally used is the same as softwood dust - 5 mg/m on a time weighted
average exposure of eight hours
Selection of timbers and their irritant effects
13
The severity and frequency of any symptoms will vary with individuals. They are also doserelated.
(a)
Camphor wood - asthma, dermatitis
(b)
Red cedar - asthma, bronchial trouble, sneezing, watering of eyes, rhinitis, dermatitis,
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 118
septic wounds from splinters

Dahoma - irritation of mucous membranes and chest, sneezing, coughing, running
eyes and nose, dermatitis
(d)
Ebony - irritation of nose and throat, dermatitis
(e)
Guarea (also West African cedar) - mild nasal irritation, sneezing, coughing, running
eyes; can cause severe vomiting, chest irritation, blisters around the eyes and
dermatitis
(f)
Iroko - skin and eye irritation, asthma and symptoms of the common cold
(g)
Machaerium - dermatitis
(h)
Sapele - dermatitis, allergic extrinsic alveolitis
(i)
Mahogany - asthma, dermatitis
(j)
Chestnut - asthma, dermatitis, rhinitis
(k)
Mansonia - irritation of mucous membranes, sneezing, nasal haemorrhage, eyes sore

and bloodshot, dizziness, dermatitis
(l)
Satinwood - dermatitis, headache, coughing
(m)
Teak - dermatitis, eye inflammation. Effects are severe once the skin's protective layer
has been penetrated
(n)
Walnut - asthma, dermatitis, conjunctivitis, rhinitis
(o)
Yew - bronchial asthma and dermatitis
AT
IO
AL
(c)
Generally speaking, the greater the amount and the finer the dust, the greater the risk of
health problems.
15
Both hardwood and softwood dusts have a workplace exposure limit of 5 mg/m on a time
weighted average exposure of eight hours. As both are known causes of asthma dust levels
need to be controlled to as low a level as possible.
IN
TE
14
EG
Other common sources of dust

When cleaning stone, brick and concrete facades, or any metal structure with dry or wet grit
blasting, control measures will include the use of respiratory protective equipment. This is
likely to be a high performance type such as a powered respirator. When cleaning siliceous
masonry, air line equipment may be required.
17
Although this type of cleaning operation is commonly called 'sand blasting', sand must not be
used for blast cleaning because of the known health hazard caused by airborne sand and
silica.
18
Effective preventative measures must be taken if exposure to crystalline silica is possible.
19
Protection is also necessary when using mechanical cleaning methods.
20
Exhaust ventilation devices should be fitted to power tools, or the operative should be
provided with high efficiency breathing apparatus.
21
The cutting and chasing of masonry, stone, brickwork, plaster, thermal insulating blocks and
concrete, creates a dust hazard. Therefore, extraction equipment should be provided, the
process performed wet or respirators worn, depending on the assessment made.
22
Crystalline silica (also known as quartz) is present in sand and rock and can also be found in
building materials such as cement, concrete, plaster, bricks and tiles.
16
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 119
23
Dust from plastic fillers can damage the lungs if inhaled, as can dust from resin-based fillers,
and fibrous particles of glass fibre, rockwool and similar insulation materials.
24
The dry sanding of lead-based paint can result in exposure to hazardous levels of lead dust.
Softening with heat guns and scraping, or the use of chemical stripping agents, will usually
be effective. If sanding is required, wet and dry paper with a solution of dishwater detergent
can be used. A dishwasher tablet dissolved in about 5 litres of water will give the required
solution strength. The form of detergent used for dishwashers is effective at binding and
stabilising the lead chromate used in paint.
25
The disturbance of asbestos is likely to result in airborne fibres (dust) which can result in
cancer, and other respiratory illnesses, if inhaled.
26
Where a work activity involves the creation or disturbance of dust, a COSHH assessment
must be carried out.
AL
1.2.9.14 Control of fumes

Within the wide range of activities carried out in the construction industry there are numerous
operations which liberate fumes into the atmosphere and cause risks to the health and safety
of people at work. Every effort must be made to minimise these risks. Fumes may be
classified as a substance hazardous to health and thereby require an assessment of the risk
to health to be carried out.
If a risk does exist, control measures such as mechanical extraction systems and adequate
natural air ventilation can prevent high concentrations of fumes forming to create a hazard,
particularly in confined areas.
The HSE publication EH40 'Occupational exposure limits' lists a level of exposure for each
type of fume or pollutant. This represents the maximum limit at which it is considered safe for
work to take place.
EH 40/2005 has been supplemented by a table on HSE's website, which has the up-to-date
list of workplace exposure levels:www.hse.gov.uk/coshh/table1.pdf
Every reasonably practicable measure should be taken to reduce any exposure as far below
the limit given as is possible.
If the fume type is listed in EH40, or is otherwise a hazard to anyone's health, the provisions
of the COSHH Regulations will apply. Therefore, an assessment of the risk and the provision
of any necessary precautions must be made.
Some of the more common causes of fumes are listed below and discussed under
subsequent headings:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
welding or flame cutting
(b)
lead burning (both cutting and melting)
(c)
cable burning (this practice must not be carried out on site)
(d)
the use of solvents, paints, adhesives and soon
(e)
internal combustion engines.
1.2.9.15 Welding
1
During welding and flame cutting, toxic fume hazards can arise from:
(a)
nitrogen oxide gases
QCS 2014
Section
Part
(b)
ozone
(c)
phosgene gas
(d)
carbon monoxide gas.
Page 120
These are mainly caused by the very high temperatures and the presence of volatile
substances, sometimes as contaminants, but often as shielding agents or flux.
The inhalation during welding of freshly formed metal oxides (such as zinc, cadmium,
chrome, nickel, copper and mercury) may lead to an acute 'flu-like' illness termed 'metal
fume fever'.
The fever is most commonly caused by fumes created while working with galvanised or zinccoated metals, especially in confined spaces.
Fumes arising from the cutting and welding of cadmium are especially dangerous, even in
the open air. Prolonged or recurrent exposure may result in cadmium poisoning.
AL
Precautionary measures
A risk assessment, including a COSHH assessment, as appropriate.
The use of extraction systems and fume hoods to remove fumes from the breathing zone.
The use of respiratory equipment, particularly in confined spaces where high concentrations
of fumes can be anticipated.
AT
IO
1.2.9.16 Lead burning
Lead burning is the process whereby lead is heated to its molten state so that it can be
poured into joints, or flame cut to shape, or flame heated so that it can be bent and formed
into various shapes.
This process is employed extensively in sheet lead work by workers in the plumbing trades,
in the formation of roof drainage, guttering, chimney flashings and so on.
This will mean that the operatives will need to be under health surveillance.
The creation of fumes by the heating of lead exposes operatives to risk. The following safety
points should be observed:
EG
IN
TE
(a)
the use of local exhaust ventilation, or other means, to evacuate fumes from the
immediate working area where reasonably practicable
(b)
the use of respiratory equipment of an approved type in the appropriate cases
(c)
the provision of protective clothing and storage for that clothing, along with adequate
washing facilities.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 121
Wear respirator
1.2.9.17 Cable burning
AL
Quite simply this is not an acceptable practice at anywhere other than a specialised
processing facility. This method of recovering metal from cables, by burning off the
insulation, often results in the creation of fumes which can be very toxic.
Chlorinated solvents, paints, adhesives and thinners all require precautions to be taken
during their use. If they are hazardous to health, they must be handled and used in
accordance with these Regulations.
AT
IO
1.2.9.18 Solvents
Avoid breathing the vapour
Most solvents are safe when used correctly but, in common with other compounds of
hydrocarbons, the inhalation of a high concentration of vapour will cause drowsiness,
headaches and giddiness. Severe exposure may lead to unconsciousness or even prove
fatal. Extraction or exhaust ventilation may be needed or, where this is not available,
respiratory protective equipment must be used.
Long term exposure to solvents may affect the central nervous system. Other chemicals may
also have adverse effects. An example is isocyanate, which is a component of expanding
foams contained in aerosol tins.
Some of the vapours are considerably heavier than air and may collect at low levels,
particularly in still conditions. This can cause displacement of the oxygen present and lead to
the risk of suffocation. It can also lead to a build up of solvent fume at explosive
concentrations.
EG
IN
TE
Other precautions with solvents

5
DO NOT
(a)
take solvents internally or 'sniff' any solvent
(b)
smoke when using solvents
(c)
use the solvent in a place which is not well ventilated - but avoid draughts
(d)
lean over any vessel containing the solvent liquid or vapour
(e)
store solvents in buckets or other open storage vessels
(f)
enter vessels which have contained or have been cleaned with solvents, unless
proper tests have been made to ensure it is safe to do so
(g)
allow solvent liquid or vapour to come into contact with naked flames or red hot
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 122
surfaces, e.g. welding arcs. Acidic and toxic decomposition products will be formed.
1.2.9.19 Internal combustion engines

The nature of the construction industry, the activities carried out and the drive to get a job
finished may lead some people into taking unnecessary risks. The majority of people are
aware that internal combustion engines should not be used within confined spaces unless
the exhaust gases are led directly to the open air. However, when for example the concrete
is too hard, or a pipe will not cut by hand and the job is late, people will often ignore such a
basic safety requirement and start a petrol engine disc cutter in a cellar. It is an error which
could be fatal.
There is a potential for excavations to be contaminated by exhaust gases which are heavier
than air and could simply roll down into the excavation. On projects with forced ventilation
systems such as tunnels and shafts, the additional loading on the system needs to be
factored in before petrol or diesel powered equipment is used.
In large buildings the use of forklift trucks, and other vehicles with internal combustion
engines, can cause carbon monoxide to reach unacceptable levels, if there is no system to
extract exhaust pollution. Simply opening the doors may not be enough.
In all cases of doubt, a COSHH assessment should be made by a competent person and,
where necessary, the appropriate controls introduced.
AT
IO
AL
1.2.9.20 Precautions
The following points are especially important:
the identification of potentially hazardous work processes, materials and substances

before work starts
(b)
the provision of information, instruction and training to employees
(c)
the strict observance of all
(d)
recommendations and procedures advised by the manufacturer
(e)
the effective supervision of employees, and the monitoring of work methods and
practices
(f)
the provision of protective clothing and equipment before any work starts
(g)
EG
IN
TE
(a)
the correct disposal of waste materials and containers as recommended by the

manufacturers
(h)
cleaning, for example, by extracting dust using a vacuum cleaner, rather than stirring it
up by sweeping
(i)
personal hygiene, including the cleansing of hands before consuming food, the use of
barrier creams, the removal and storage of contaminated clothing during meals, and
the correct laundering or disposal of contaminated clothing
(j)
to avoid, where practical, carrying out potentially hazardous work activities in confined
areas to lessen the chances of dust concentrations or fumes building up.
1.2.9.21 Protective equipment

1
Given the nature of some work activities, it is not always practical to completely contain the
airborne dust or fumes created. In these circumstances, if no other control measure is
reasonably practicable, respiratory protective equipment (RPE) and other PPE as necessary,
must be provided for each person working with, or otherwise exposed to, airborne dust or
fumes.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 123
There are various types of respiratory protective equipment approved for use. Details of
types and permissible uses are available from the manufacturers.
1.2.9.22 Respiratory protective equipment

Selection
Selecting the wrong type of RPE could have serious, even fatal, consequences. Selection
must be carried out by a competent person. Some of the factors that will determine the
appropriate type of RPE are:
the hazardous nature of the substance
(b)
the airborne concentration of the substance
(c)
the period of exposure
(d)
the wearer's required field of vision
(e)
the provision for communication
(f)
the need to move in cramped or difficult working places
(g)
the prevailing weather conditions
(h)
the suitability of the protective equipment for the individual
(i)
the need for an external source of breathable air.
IO
AL
(a)
AT
Notes:
When selecting suitable respiratory protective equipment (RPE) it may be necessary to seek
expert advice from manufacturers/suppliers.
Training in the types of, and in the use of, respiratory equipment must be given.
A face fit test is required for any tight fitting face piece - this will include all disposable masks,
half masks and most powered masks.
All masks, other than disposables, require regular examination by a competent person and
records to be kept.
The following are some types of respiratory protective equipment (RPE) that are used in the
construction industry:
(b)
disposable face mask respirators
(a)
EG
IN
TE
half-mask dust respirators
(c)
powered respirators
(d)
ventilated visor and ventilated helmet respirators
(e)
compressed air line breathing apparatus
(f)
self-contained breathing apparatus.
Each type of RPE is given an 'assigned protection factor' (APF), which gives the user some
idea of the level of protection that the device will provide. For example, a disposable mask
marked:
(a)
P1
offers a protection factor of 4
(b)
P2 offers a protection factor of 10
(c)
P3 offers a protection factor of 20
The APF assumes that the user has passed a face fit test, is wearing the mask correctly, is
clean shaven and there is no other interference in fit such as facial piercing.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 124
The APF is a simple multiplier that can be used in two ways. An example is:
(a)
a particle mask with an APF of 10.
This simply means that for every 10 units of contaminant outside the mask, only one unit will
get inside the mask, so the mask filters out 9 of 10 of the units.
If there is a time exposure limit, then a mask extends the time by the same factor - so if
someone can be exposed to a concentration of a contaminate for 10 minutes without
needing to wear a mask, then a mask with an APF of 10 would allow the person to be
exposed for 100 minutes (10 x 10).
The same protection factors are used for all particle masks. This does create some
surprising results such as the highest protection level on half masks and disposable masks
are the same, P3 or an APF of 20, and the normal protection factor of a powered mask fitted
with a P3 filter is an APF of 40.
If there is any doubt regarding the level of protection required, which type of respiratory
protective equipment should be provided or which cartridge should be used on a respirator,
advice should be sought from a competent person, or advice taken from the respiratory
protective equipment manufacturers/suppliers.
AL
IO
Disposable face mask respirators
These are simple face masks designed to filter out harmful dust and particles. They are
lightweight, comfortable and cheap. They should only be worn by one person and for no
longer than a single eight-hour shift. They should be disposed of after use.
11
In areas of high dust levels, it may be necessary to dispose of dust masks more frequently,
since they may become clogged and, subsequently, breathing will become more difficult.
12
The big advantage of disposable masks is that they do not need any inspection or record
keeping as they are designed to be simply thrown away. This may be a major factor in
choosing them as a solution, particularly if the wearers of such masks are normally out on
different sites.
EG
IN
TE
AT
10
Nuisance dust masks

It should be noted that nuisance dust masks are not classed as personal protective
equipment or respiratory protective equipment. They do not meet any current standards o
legal requirements, and are dangerous in the respect that they give the uninformed user a
false impression that they are providing a level of protection. The filter size used in their
construction is so large that any particles that they manage to keep out would have been
safely dealt with by the body's own defence mechanisms.
14
They typically come in two forms which are either a metal plate that holds a piece of gauze
over the nose and mouth or a lightweight cup-shaped filter, again fitting over the nose and
mouth, and looking like a disposable dust respirator.
15
Nuisance dust masks are often identifiable by only having one strap and the device is not
marked with a protection factor (e.g. P1, P2 or P3). They should not be confused with
approved disposable dust masks which will bear the appropriate EN number and a
protection factor.
16
Nuisance dust masks should not be issued or used in any circumstances where these
Regulations (COSHH) apply or may apply.
17
People who work with harmful dusts should always be provided with, and use, the correct
type of CE-marked dust mask or respirator to ensure proper and effective protection.
13
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 125
Half-mask dust respirator

18
This is one of the most common types of respirator used. It consists of a face mask which
covers the nose and mouth of the wearer, and a suitable filter through which air is drawn by
breathing.
19
The main advantages of this type of respirator are its low cost, easy maintenance, and the
fact that it provides the wearer with freedom of movement.
AT
IO
AL
Half masks
The filtering canisters or cartridges used in these respirators may be round, oval or
triangular, and are often colour-coded to indicate the type of contaminant they give
protection against. If a 'use by' date or shelf life is specified, it must be adhered to.
21
High efficiency dust respirators provide protection by drawing air in through the filter system
by inhalation.
22
The advantage that this type of mask offers over a disposable mask is that it is usually
possible to fit filter cartridges of different types, for example, changing from a dust filter to a
fume filter.
23
The disadvantage is that as well as face fit testing, the mask needs some form of
identification and regular inspection by a competent person, who then records the detail of
the inspection. This exercise can be logistically challenging.
EG
IN
TE
20
Powered respirators
24
A powered respirator has a filtered air supply provided to the wearer by a small, batteryoperated pump and filter unit which will deliver air continuously for approximately seven
hours. The air pressure inside the mask facepiece is slightly higher than normal air pressure,
and therefore filtered air leaks out rather than letting potentially contaminated air enter.
25
These respirators are most suitable for specialised applications, as they are relatively
comfortable, and they can be worn where long periods of exposure are involved. The users
must be face fit tested and the fit test method must be the so called 'quantitive test', which
usually involves the use of a computer and test equipment called a portacount.
26
Batteries must be changed or recharged and filters cleaned or replaced at scheduled

intervals to maintain peak efficiency.
Ventilated visor and ventilated helmet respirators
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 126
In this type of equipment, a small axial fan housed in the back of the helmet draws in dustladen air through a series of filters situated in the crown of the helmet. Filtered air is then
passed downwards over the user's face, maintaining a positive pressure in the region of the
nose and mouth. The unit is powered by a rechargeable battery pack worn on a belt.
28
This type of respirator is comfortable and combines protection against dust with the
protection afforded by a safety helmet (manufactured to BS EN 397) and face and eye
protection (to BS EN 166). Advice should be taken from the manufacturer with regard to the
substances the mask will protect against. They are quite comfortable to wear. Tunnelers will
be familiar with a version that includes hearing protection, lamp and hard hat as an all-in-one
headpiece.
29
Efficient maintenance and cleansing procedures are essential. If the flow of air is reduced by
clogged filters or low battery power, unfiltered air can be drawn in around the side of the
facepiece.
30
This type of mask does not require a face fit test as it does not seal tightly on the wearers
skin. It is the only type of commonly used mask that someone with a full beard can wear.
TE
AT
IO
AL
27
IN
Compressed air line breathing apparatus

With this equipment, air is supplied to the user from a compressed air supply, via a hose to
the face mask or hood. The correct air pressure, temperature and humidity must be
maintained.
32
The air supplied must be of breathable quality, thus the selection, siting and maintenance of
the compressor and filtration of the air supply is vitally important.
33
The presence of an air hose can, on some occasions, restrict the user's movements.
34
As with all types of breathing equipment, operators should be properly and adequately
trained and, unless experienced in the type of work to be carried out, should be properly
supervised.
EG
31
Self-contained breathing apparatus

35
In a set of self-contained breathing apparatus, air is usually supplied from compressed air
cylinders carried on the worker's back and is fed to a full face mask via a regulator. As with
the air line apparatus, operators must be properly and adequately trained and, unless
experienced in the type of work to be carried out, must be properly supervised.
36
A limitation is that the typical duration of a compressed air cylinder is between 20 minutes
and two hours. The equipment should therefore only be selected by competent persons with
a full knowledge of their use.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 127
1.2.9.23 Dust sampling

Sampling is usually carried out by a specialist using metered pumps with membrane filters.
The dust collected is weighed in relation to the amount of air sampled. Dust samples can
also be examined for type.
There are also some direct-reading dust sampling monitors available. However, there is
some doubt as to the accuracy of these instruments. They are very useful for a long-term
project where they can be calibrated regularly by comparing their readings against samples
taken from membrane filters.
They are not recommended as the sole means of measuring a personal exposure to dust. It
is also important to be aware that there are a number of different laboratory techniques
required for analysis, for example, measuring exposure to silica normally requires X-ray
diffraction.
Use of Tyndall Beam to identify dust clouds
The Tyndall Beam is a useful way to determine whether a problem exists before
investigating further. It uses the common phenomenon of dust being highlighted in a shaft of
light.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.2.9.24 Training and supervision

1
New employees should receive full instruction before starting work and should be
familiarised with the following:
(a)
the health risks associated with dust and the preventative measures in operation, as
identified by the risk assessment
(b)
the correct use and cleaning of protective clothing and equipment
(c)
the reasons for air sampling
(d)
their duties in respect of the correct use of equipment and of safe systems of work in
operation
(e)
the procedures for reporting defective or inadequate equipment.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 128
Construction site Safety

1.2.9 Appendix 1
Control of fumes
Safety checklist
An assessment must be carried out.
All hazardous processes and operations have been identified.
All personnel have been fully instructed in the types of hazard likely to be encountered.
There is adequate supervision of all work operations.
All personnel are competent to carry out the work operations.
Correct and adequate protective clothing is provided and used.
Respiratory protective equipment is provided and used, as necessary.
Face fit testing and records for the RPE are available.
Exhaust ventilation or extraction equipment is used, as required.
10
The correct type of eye protection is provided and used, as necessary.
11
Safe working methods are being adhered to.
12
No one under 16 years is employed (lead burning).
13
Chlorinated solvents, paints, adhesives, and so on are:
used safely.
AT
(b)
stored safely
(a)
IO
AL
Personnel have been made aware of the hazards that exist when working with chlorinated
solvents, paints, adhesives, and so on.
15
Engine exhaust gases are led directly out of confined spaces.
EG
Dust hazards
IN
TE
14
Safety checklist
There is adequate supervision of all work operations.
17
Materials, substances and associated hazards have been properly identified.
18
Manufacturers' or suppliers' instructions are available and observed.
19
Power tools are fitted with a dust extraction and collection facility.
20
Local exhaust ventilation is fitted to workshop machinery.
21
The correct protective equipment is supplied and clothing provided.
22
Operatives have been instructed in the use of materials and are aware of the hazards
associated with those materials.
23
There is provision for the ongoing training of employees.
24
There is provision for, and operation of, safe systems of work.
25
There is adequate provision of washing facilities, and facilities for storing overalls, and other
work wear during meal breaks.
26
Correct procedures for the storage, identification and disposal of waste materials or
substances are followed.
27
Adequate arrangements have been made for air sampling, as necessary.
16
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 129

1.2.10 Control of Noise
1.2.10.1 Key points
Contractors and employees have duties under these Regulations.
Noise experienced at work, in the home and social environments can cause permanent
damage to hearing.
There are often early signs that the hearing is being damaged; these should not be ignored.
Contractors should seek to control noise by other, equally or more effective, ways before
resorting to personal protective equipment.
Effective pre-planning of site activities and the active management of noise during the
construction process can significantly reduce noise exposure on site.
In addition to hearing damage, excessive noise can have other health and safety
implications, such as not being able to hear alarms or shouted warnings.
Establishing the noise levels on site might not necessarily involve arranging for noise
measurements to be taken.
Section 1, Part 15.2.3 of the QCS covers noise control.
AT
Note:
IO
AL
High levels of noise on construction sites often come from machinery used for demolition,
excavation or piling, from compressors and concrete mixers, etc. Other operations, such as
hammering, riveting and the use of cartridge-operated fixing tools, may also be the source of
excessive noise.
The degree of nuisance or damage caused by noise is related to the nature of the noise
generated as well as its loudness. Intermittent noise is often more disruptive than a
continuous noise and high-pitched sounds are more disturbing than low frequency ones.
Exposure to high levels of noise can cause permanent damage to hearing in the form of
partial or total deafness.
Contractors have a duty to control noise and protect their workers and other persons from its
effects. Noise is also a source of annoyance and disruption, and may directly or indirectly
lead to an increase in the risk of accidents. Every reasonably practicable step should be
taken to control it.
EG
IN
TE

1
to put control measures into place to reduce the risks to health and safety arising from the
any risks that exist in the workplace and on any control measures that are in place to reduce
those risks.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 130
Employees, in turn, have legal duties under these Regulations to:

(a)
tell their Contractor of any work situation which presents a risk to the health and safety
of themselves or any other persons who may be affected by their work activities
(b)
use all machinery and equipment in accordance with any training provided.
These Regulations require that, additionally, the Contractor provides employees with
adequate information, instruction, training and supervision to be able to carry out any work
safely and without risks to their health.
Contractors must assess the risks to employees' health arising from noise and put effective
control measures in place.
1.2.10.4 Control of Noise at Work

These Regulations:
place duties on Contractors and employees
(b)
allow personal exposure to noise to be measured over a weekly, rather than an 8hour, period in situations where employees are exposed to widely varying noise levels
(c)
give employees the right to hearing checks where a noise assessment indicates their
hearing could be at risk.
AL
(a)
IO
AT
Action and limit values
These Regulations specify the following three levels of exposure to noise, each of which
requires that certain actions be taken:
Lower exposure action value. This is reached when a daily or weekly personal exposure
reaches 80 dB(A) or a peak sound pressure of 135 dB(C) occurs.
Upper exposure action value. This is reached when a daily or weekly personal exposure
reaches 85 dB(A) or a peak sound pressure of 137 dB(C) occurs.
Exposure limit value. This is the maximum level of noise to which anyone at work may be
exposed. It is set at 87 dB(A) at the ear, measured on a daily or weekly basis as appropriate
or when a peak sound pressure of 140 dB(C) occurs.
EG
IN
TE
Contractor's duties
6
These Regulations place a duty on Contractors with respect to the health and safety of
employees, the Contractor is, so far as is reasonably practicable, also under a similar duty to
anyone else at work who may be affected by the noise created by the Contractor's work
activities
When applying the 'exposure limit value', Contractors may take account of any hearing
protection worn; it is the level of noise actually entering the ear. Therefore, the performance
characteristics of any hearing protection worn can be taken into account when assessing the
noise exposure of individuals. Similarly, it must be taken into account when decisions are
taken on the purchase of personal hearing protectors.
If employees are likely to be exposed to noise at or above the lower exposure action
value, the Contractor must:
(a)
carry out a suitable and sufficient assessment of the risks to employees and ensure
that it identifies the measures necessary to adequately control the level of noise at
work. When carrying out the risk assessment the Contractor must assess noise
exposure by:
QCS 2014
observing work practices
(ii)
referring to information on the probable level of noise issued by tool and

equipment manufacturers
(iii)
only if necessary, arranging for noise levels to be measured.
If employees are likely to be exposed at or above the 'upper exposure action value' or the
'exposure limit value', the risk assessment must also include consideration of:
the level and type of noise and its duration, including any exposure to 'peak sound
pressure'
(b)
the effects that the noise might have on the health of employees exposed to it
(c)
so far as is practicable, the effects on the health of employees resulting from an

interaction between exposure to noise and any ototoxic substances (mainly commonuse solvents) that are in use or between noise and vibration
(d)
the possibility of warning alarms or other audible systems not being heard
(e)
information provided by the manufacturers of equipment that generates the noise
(f)
the possibility of using alternative, less noisy equipment
(g)
exposure of employees to noise when not actually working, such as in rest areas and
canteens
(h)
the results of previous health surveillance and published information
(i)
the availability of suitable personal hearing protectors, taking into account their
performance.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
The Contractor must regularly review the risk assessment and immediately if:
there is reason to believe that it is no longer valid
(b)
there has been a significant change in the work to which the assessment applies and
implement changes to the risk assessment as identified by the review process.
TE
(a)
IN
11
(i)
The Contractor must inform at-risk employees of the findings of the risk assessment and
record:
EG
10
Page 131
(a)
the significant findings of the risk assessment as soon as is practicable after it has
been made or changed
(b)
the control measures that have been put in place to eliminate or reduce the noise,
including the provision of hearing protection and employee training.
Section
Part
12
Records may be kept in any form so long as they are easily retrievable and can be printed.
13
The Contractor must also:
14
(a)
generally eliminate at source the risk of hearing damage or reduce it to the lowest
level that is reasonably practicable, irrespective of noise levels
(b)
where exposure is likely to be at or above the upper exposure action value, reduce
the noise, as far as is reasonably practicable, by implementing organisational and
technical measures other than by providing personal hearing protectors.
Contractors must consider the following:

(a)
alternative, less noisy methods of carrying out the work
(b)
alternative, less noisy tools for carrying out the work
(c)
the layout of the workplace, including any rest facilities
(d)
providing employees with adequate information and training so that they can minimise
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 132
their exposure to noise
(f)
effective maintenance programmes for equipment that can generate noise, the
workplace itself and workplace systems
(g)
limiting the duration and intensity of exposure to noise
(h)
adjusting work schedules and ensuring adequate rest periods.
The Contractor must ensure that employees are not exposed to noise above the exposure
limit value, or if they are, immediately:
(a)
reduce exposure to below the exposure limit value
(b)
identify the reasons for the exposure limit value being exceeded
(c)
take appropriate actions to prevent it occurring again.
AL
Contractors must:
ensure that the level of noise in rest facilities that are under their control is reduced to
a suitable level for their purpose
(b)
adjust and adapt any measures taken to prevent exposure to noise to take account of
any person(s) whose health is likely to be particularly at risk from exposure to noise
(c)
inform employees of the measures taken to eliminate or control the level of noise in
the workplace.
(a)
IO
16
the reduction of noise by technical means
AT
15
(e)
Where employees are exposed to noise at or above the lower exposure action value but
below the upper exposure action value, the Contractor must make suitable personal
hearing protectors available to employees who request them.
18
Where employees are exposed to noise at or above the upper exposure action value, the
Contractor must:
TE
17
designate the affected part of the workplace as a 'Hearing Protection Zone'
(b)
identify the extent of the area by signs indicating that hearing protectors are to be
worn
(c)
restrict access to the area where practicable and it is justified by the level of risk
(d)
ensure so far as is reasonably practicable that all employees entering the hearing
protection zone wear personal hearing protection.
EG
IN
(a)
19
Hearing protectors must be selected, so as to eliminate the risk to hearing or reduce it to as

low a level as is reasonably practicable
20
Contractors must:
(a)
ensure so far as is practicable that anything provided to comply with these

Regulations, except personal hearing protectors, is fully and properly used
(b)
ensure that anything provided to comply with these Regulations is maintained in good
working order and in a good state of repair
21
If the risk assessment indicates that there is a risk to the health of employees exposed to
noise, the Contractor must ensure that those employees are placed under suitable health
surveillance, including providing them with hearing tests.
22

(a)
ensure that a record is kept and maintained for each employee who undergoes health
surveillance and that records are readily available in a suitable format
QCS 2014
(b)
Where, as a result of health surveillance, an employee is found to have identifiable hearing

damage, the Contractor must ensure that the employee is examined by a doctor and, if
necessary, a specialist. Where the hearing damage is found to be as a result of exposure to
noise at work, the Contractor must:
ensure that the employee is informed by a suitably qualified person
(b)
review the risk assessment
(c)
review existing control measures, taking into account any advice given by a doctor,
occupational health professional or administrative authority
(d)
consider reassigning the employee to other work where there is no risk of further
exposure, taking into account any advice given as above
(e)
continue with the health surveillance of affected employees.
AL
(a)
Where employees are exposed to noise at or above the lower exposure action value, the
Contractor must provide the employees with suitable and sufficient information, instruction
and training, which must include:
the nature of the risks arising from exposure to noise
(b)
the control measures taken to eliminate or reduce exposure
(c)
the exposure limit value and the lower and upper exposure action values
(d)
(e)
the availability and provision of personal hearing protectors and how to use them
correctly
(f)
why and how to detect and report signs of hearing damage
(g)
the employees' entitlement to health surveillance
(h)
how to work safely to minimise noise exposure and thereby avoid hearing damage
(i)
the collective results of any health surveillance carried out, anonymised so as not to
reveal the personal health record of any individual.
TE
AT
IO
(a)
The information, instruction and training provided as above must be updated by the
Contractor to take account of any significant changes of the type of work carried out or
method of working.
25
allow employees to see their health surveillance records on being given reasonable
notice
IN
24
Page 133
EG
23
Section
Part
Employees' duties
26
Employees must:
(a)
make full and proper use of personal hearing protectors if the noise exposure exceeds
the upper exposure action value
(b)
make full and proper use of other control measures provided by the Contractor
(c)
report any defects in the personal hearing protectors or other control measures to their
Contractor
(d)
make themselves available for health surveillance checks (during working hours) as
required by the Contractor, the health surveillance being at the Contractor's expense.
1.2.10.5 The nature of noise

1
Sound is the transmission of air vibrations at different frequencies. Noise is sometimes

defined as unwanted sound. The ear is a pressure-sensitive mechanism, detecting small
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 134
changes of air pressure over a wide range of frequencies of 20-20,000 cycles per second.
The unit of frequency is the hertz (Hz). Those with impaired hearing due to age or other
forms of hearing loss are less likely to be able to hear the higher frequency range.
Audiometry is the technique used to determine the capacity of the ear to detect sounds of
varying loudness over a range of frequencies. It can be used to measure an individual's
hearing capacity against a recognised standard. Successive audiometric checks can confirm
whether or not a person is suffering from progressive hearing loss.
When judging the level of noise, the 'rules of thumb' are that if you have to raise your voice
to make yourself understood at 2 metres from the other person, the background noise is
around 85 dB(A). If the distance is only 1 metre, the noise is around 90 dB(A).
A peak sound pressure of 137 dB(C) will be produced by many impact tools such as
cartridge-operated tools.
Two "types' of noise may damage the hearing of the people who are exposed to it:
AL
Continual or periodic noise, which even if varying over the course of time, can be
measured and averaged out over an eight-hour (or in some circumstances a weekly)
reference period. This is known as the 'daily (or weekly) personal noise exposure' as
referred to in these Regulations. This is the common everyday noise that is
experienced on many construction sites.
(b)
Sudden, short bursts of loud impulsive noise such as experienced during the driving of
piles, the use of explosives or the use of some hand tools. The references in these
Regulations to 'peak sound pressure' are to this type of noise.
AT
IO
(a)
1.2.10.6 Effects of noise at work
Noise levels may fluctuate widely or be relatively steady. A reasonably steady sound level is
where the level fluctuates through a total of less than 8 dB(A) on a slow response scale.
Exposure to noise can have the following consequences:
IN
TE
It can cause annoyance and irritation.
(b)
It may affect concentration and efficiency.
(c)
It may cause fatigue and the likelihood of accident proneness.
(d)
It can mask out other sounds, preventing a person's ears from registering instructions
and warnings.
EG
(a)
(e)
It can result in temporary hearing loss.
(f)
Regular exposure to loud noise can cause damage to the ear and permanent loss of
hearing.
There is also growing evidence that continued exposure to noise has consequential effects
on some other illnesses.
Hearing loss
Hearing loss can be temporary or permanent. Temporary deafness is often experienced after
leaving a noisy place. It is often accompanied by a ringing in the ears. Although hearing
usually recovers within a few hours, this symptom should not be ignored. It should be taken
as a sign that further or continued exposure to noise is likely to result in permanent damage.
Permanent hearing damage can also be caused immediately by sudden and loud noises, for
example from explosives or cartridge-operated tools.
Hearing loss due to prolonged exposure to noise is usually gradual. It may only be when
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 135
damage caused by exposure to noise over the years combines with normal hearing loss due
to ageing that people realise how deaf they have become.
6
Prolonged exposure to noise can also cause tinnitus, which can be described as a
permanent ringing, whistling or buzzing in the ears. This distressing condition can lead to
disturbed sleep which, in turn, can lead to fatigue even before an employee arrives at work.
Other adverse effects of noise
At work, noise can also be a safety hazard, interfering with communication, the
understanding of instructions and, most serious of all, making warnings harder to hear. Noise
can also cause stress.
1.2.10.7 Establishing noise levels
AL
Unit of measurement
The unit of measurement for sound levels (noise) is called a decibel (dB). This scale is
logarithmic and means that 90 dB is ten times the intensity of 80 dB and one hundred times
the intensity of 70 dB.
An increase of 3 dB doubles the energy in the sound. This means that, for example, 87 dB is
actually twice as damaging as 84 dB, even though the 3 dB difference in sound level is
difficult to perceive.
Sound level meters, used for measuring noise levels, have standard 'filters' built into them
that attenuate or emphasise signals at different frequencies in order to simulate how the
sound affects the ear. This is known as 'frequency weighting'.
An instrument with a frequency weighting known as an 'A' weighted scale is commonly used
on construction sites to measure noise from the working environment. Readings are
expressed as dB(A).
Sudden impact noises, hammer blows, etc. are measured in terms of maximum pressure. In
this case measurements are 'C' weighted and therefore expressed as dB(C).
Risk assessments should be based on measurements of the 'Leq', which is an average of

the level of noise for the duration of the measurement.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Risk assessments
7
If any employee is likely to be exposed to noise at or above the lower exposure action
value, the Contractor must carry out a risk assessment which may or may not result in the
need for a competent person to measure the actual level of noise exposure.
Any new tool or equipment that generates a potentially harmful level of noise should state
the actual level of noise generated, either on the tool itself or in the accompanying
documents. This can be useful in identifying potentially problematic tools, but it is important
to remember that the actual noise experienced by the operator depends on many factors,
such as the acoustics of the working environment, tool configuration and material being
worked.
Survey of noise levels
If it is necessary to resort to the measurement of noise, someone who is competent in

evaluating the type of workplace, the use of the equipment and the interpretation of the
results must be engaged. They must be able to draw valid conclusions from the information
obtained and advise management on the actions needed to comply with the requirements of
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 136
legislation.
(a)
identify workers who may be at risk of hearing damage to enable an action plan to be
prepared to control the noise exposure
(b)
determine the daily personal noise exposure (LEP,d) of workers (including times when
not actually working (for example, rest areas) and from non-occupational sources such
as personal entertainment systems)
(c)
identify additional information to comply with these Regulations, for example, whether
noise control measures or hearing protection are needed and, if so, where and what
type.

keep a record of the noise assessments and the employees exposed to the noise
(b)
regularly review those assessments. This should be done biannually or whenever it is

considered that the assessment is no longer valid, for example, whenever there is new
equipment or a change to the process that may alter noise levels
(c)
use the assessment to develop an action plan for introducing noise control measures
(d)
deal with the immediate risk by providing personal hearing protectors (this should only
be until other controls have been investigated and implemented)
(e)
identify what steps are reasonably practicable to reduce the noise exposure of
employees by engineering or other organisational means
(f)
establish priorities for action and consider what changes may need to be phased in
over the course of time.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
11
The aim of the noise assessment is to:
10
Ideally, one person, with sufficient authority, will be given the responsibility for ensuring that
these Regulations are complied with and for co-ordinating and monitoring the noise
reduction programme where necessary.
13
Nomograms (see Appendix 4) can be used to establish the equivalent continuous sound
level for an eight hour period or daily personal noise exposure (LEp,d)
EG
IN
TE
12
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 137
AT
IO
AL
Typical sound intensities
1.2.10.8 Avoiding exposure to noise
The design of the project, and of the processes and equipment which will be involved.
(b)
The phasing of differing operations, especially if a number of contractors are working

on site.
(c)
The location of the site; or sites if the project involves more than one location.
(d)
The noise levels that are likely to be produced by the work being carried out.
EG
IN
(a)
(e)
TE
Attention should be given at the planning stage to developing a noise control strategy that
considers the following factors:
Planning against excess noise levels
The layout of the site, including the siting of access points, batching plants, etc.
(f)
The hours of working which are planned.
(g)
The provisions available for controlling noise on site.
(h)
The possibility of disturbance to nearby residents and properties. (If this is likely, the
situation and measures to be taken to reduce noise should be explained to persons
likely to be affected.)
Failure to plan the control of noise may lead to delay and increased cost later. Where
appropriate, noise levels must be a consideration for designers under CDM.
Reference BS 5228 Noise and vibration control on construction and open sites
Managing noise levels during construction
Exposure to noise can be eliminated or reduced by:

(a)
controlling noise at source
(b)
employing engineering controls where possible
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 138
(c)
using a purchasing/hire policy for plant, equipment and tools that takes noise into
account
(d)
introducing alternative methods and processes that eliminate or reduce noise levels
(e)
giving consideration to the careful siting of noisy plant, and equipment
(f)
where practical, storing bulk materials to form an acoustic screen
(g)
carrying out job rotation for employees to reduce exposure to noise
(h)
providing rest rooms or acoustic refuges for staff during breaks from work
(i)
rearranging work locations for staff, if possible, away from noisy equipment
(j)
as a last resort, providing personal hearing protectors.
Control of noise at source

Controlling the noise at its source can be achieved by a variety of means, by:
the design and manufacture of the equipment.
(b)
the use of acoustic covers and exhaust silencers for equipment
(c)
the use of alternative, less noisy equipment or methods of working
(d)
enclosing noisy equipment within temporary structures
(e)
regular inspection and maintenance of the equipment being used
(f)
fitting noise-absorbent mountings to reduce the transmission of noise through adjacent

structures.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
IN
Measures that can be taken include ensuring that all equipment which has the potential to
create excessive noise:
is kept well maintained
(b)
is kept in good order, including ensuring that there are no loose panels or casing and
that exhaust mufflers are in good condition
(c)
is not left running when it is not actually in use.
EG
(a)
TE
Engineering controls
Reference BS 5228 Noise and vibration control on construction and open sites
Siting or location
6
Effective siting or location includes:

(a)
Removing the source of the noise to a distance whenever possible (see Appendix 2).
(b)
Orientating plant to direct the noise away from the work area.
(c)
Placing site buildings, stores, etc. between the noise source and noise sensitive
areas.
(d)
Screening the noise source with a barrier, wall, acoustic screen, spoil heap, or by
locating the source behind partly completed buildings.
The effectiveness of a noise barrier will depend on its dimensions, its position relative to the
source and the listener, and the material used in the construction of the barrier. Care must
be taken to ensure that barriers do not, by reflecting sound, transfer the noise nuisance from
one sensitive area to another and so create a health problem for someone else.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 139
Effect on working hours

8
The effect on maximum working times of exposures to equivalent continuous sound levels
without any hearing protection are listed in Appendix 1 of this section.
1.2.10.9 Personal hearing protectors

All hearing protectors produced or imported by reputable companies are manufactured to
British or International Standards. As with all PPE for use at work, ear protectors should be
selected by a competent person who can ensure, in discussion with the supplier, that it
possesses the necessary performance characteristics. Most leading manufacturers and
suppliers will offer their own advisory service.
Competence in the selection of this type of PPE is particularly important as ear protectors
that give good protection against noise at a high frequency may not offer very much
protection against low frequency noise, and vice versa.
All reasonably practicable methods must be used to reduce noise levels, but where these
remain at or above the upper exposure action value, after control measures have been
implemented, ear protectors must be made available and worn. Ear protectors are not a
substitute for other methods of noise control, they are an absolute last resort.
Employees may initially be reluctant to wear ear protection and those who are at risk must
be made aware of the potential for hearing loss that can be caused by exposure to excessive
noise levels.
Mandatory warning sign:

'Wear ear protectors'
Colour: white symbol on circular blue background
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Other considerations
5
Personal hearing protectors must be provided on an individual basis.
A competent person must be responsible for any training that may be necessary in the
correct use of personal hearing protectors.
Personal hearing protectors should normally be provided as an interim measure while more
effective and permanent methods of control are sought.
Employees must be trained in the use, care and storage of ear protectors.
Ear protectors must be suited to the user and suitable for the type of noise.
10
They must provide an effective seal.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 140
11
They should be stored in a clean place when not in use, unless disposable.
12
They should be inspected regularly for deterioration or damage and replaced when
necessary, unless disposable.
13
Personal hearing protectors should not 'over protect' whereby users can become isolated
from their work environment and unable to hear warnings.
14
Note: A check should be made to ensure that hazard warning signals are audible to
individuals wearing ear protectors, and the volume, tone, or method of signalling changed if
necessary.
1.2.10.10
Types of personal hearing protectors
The two basic types of protector are ear plugs and ear defenders.
Disposable ear plugs: These are made of very fine mineral fibre or foam, sometimes ready
shaped. They must be inserted correctly and, if taken out, should not be reused. They should
only be handled with clean hands.
Reusable ear plugs: These are made of rubber or plastic, and need regular, careful
washing. The initial supply and fitting should be carried out by trained persons. Different
sizes may be required for each ear and must be a good fit. They must be fitted with clean
hands as any contamination by dirt, grease or swarf may cause ear irritation. Ear plugs are
therefore unsuitable on site for intermittent use, such as can occur when operating a
breaker.
Ear defenders (or muffs): These completely cover the ear and are sealed to the head with a
foam or liquid-filled seal. Badly designed or badly produced defenders may give little or no
protection against noise. Other points are as follows:
TE
AT
IO
AL
pressure from the seal may cause wearers to complain of tightness, but loose
defenders lose most of their protective capability and are ineffective
(b)
damage and deterioration to seals also results in ineffectiveness and loss of protection
(c)
in fitting, account needs to be taken of people with different sized or shaped heads or
ears, hair styles and spectacles
(d)
facial hair and the arms of spectacles may interfere with the seal on ear defenders
(f)
EG
(e)
IN
(a)
defenders fitted to safety helmets may cause problems by not fitting tightly to the ear,
or by moving as the helmet moves
defenders must be chosen to deal with a particular noise problem; ones that offer
protection against low frequency sound may be ineffective at high frequency, and vice
versa.
Ear defenders which incorporate a sound enhancement system are available. When noise
levels are low, sound detected by a microphone is replayed to the wearer enabling them to
communicate normally. When noise levels are high, the sound replay system is automatically
cut, such that the defenders act as regular ear protectors. Such products are particularly
suitable for those exposed to unpredictable short bursts of noise.
Ear protectors are only effective while they are being used. If protectors are worn for only
half the shift, only some 10% protection is gained; if worn for 7% out of 8 hours, the
protection factor is still only 75%.
Contractors providing hearing protectors that perform 4 dB better than the required
minimum, in order to take into account 'real world' factors such as poor fitting.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 141

1.2.10. Appendix 1
The effect on maximum working times due to exposure without protection
Maximum exposure in one working day if 80

dB(A) (LEp,d) is not exceeded
80
8 hours
83
4 hours
86
2 hours
89
1 hour
92
30 minutes
AL
Average noise level dB(A)
95
15 minutes
7.5 minutes
98
IO
101
3.75 minutes
EG
IN
TE
AT
Increase of protection gained in relation to time if ear protectors are worn
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 142

1.2.10. Appendix 2
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
How sound levels vary with distance from source
Notes:
1
This assumes that the sound at the measurement point only comes directly from the source
and there are no reflections from the ground or any other objects
This is the noise level at the ear and not at the source
The graphs on pages 14 and 15 of this module are based on the International Organisation
for Standardisation standard where an increase of 3 dB(A) is regarded as doubling the noise
level or halving the exposure time.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 143

B10. Appendix 3
Calculating personal noise exposure
Nomogram for calculation of equivalent continuous sound level for an eight hour period, so
giving the daily personal noise exposure.
For each exposure, connect sound level dB(A) with exposure duration t and read fractional
exposure f on centre scale.
Add together values of f received during one day to obtain total value of f,
Read equivalent continuous sound level opposite total value of f, by drawing a line through
f9 from the time scale t = 8 to read LEP,d on the L scale.
The noise exposure figures on the nomogram are illustrative only and do not represent a
legal or safe level of exposure to noise.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 144

1.2.10 Appendix 4
Some typical sound levels of construction and piling equipment
(Levels given are average at source)
Construction equipment
95
Hand tools - electric
100
101
102
Hand tools - air

Forklifts
Hammer drill
103
Dumpers
104
Concrete mixer
105
Hand tools - petrol
106
107
108
109
Tower cranes
Circular bench saw
Trucks
Excavators
110
Crawler cranes
111
Heavy lorries
112
113
Ready mix
Hoists diesel
114
Loading shovel
115
116
Rock drill
Batching plant
117
118
Generators
Loaders
119
Cranes - lorry mounted
120
Compressors - compactors
128
136
138
AT
IO
6 tonne drop hammer (cased piles)
TE
IN
EG
126
Bulldozers - graders
121
125
Piling equipment
AL
Sound level dB(A)
Trench hammer (sheet piles)

Rotary bored piles
Screen drop hammer (sheet piles)
Impact boring (driving case method)
2 tonne drop hammer (pre-cast concrete piles)
Vibration system (sheet piles)
Resonant system 'h' section
Single acting air hammer (pre-cast concrete)
Diesel hammer (sheet piles)
Double acting air hammer (sheet piles)
These sound levels are for guidance only. Information should be sought from the manufacturer or the
plant hire company regarding machines on site.
Noise levels emitted from the machines will be affected by the competence of the operator and the
quality of maintenance.
For accurate measurement of site noise, a survey is necessary.
AL
Section
Part
Page 145
AT
IO
QCS 2014

1.2.10 Appendix 5
Summary of legal requirements
IN
TE
R
Contractors' duties
Exposure below the

Exposure at or
Exposure at or
Exposure at or
lower exposure
above the lower
above the upper
above the
action value of 80 exposure action
exposure action
exposure limit
values of 80 dB(A) values of 85dB(A) values of 87dB(A)
dB(A)
or peak sound
or peak sound
or peak sound
pressure of
pressure of
pressure of 140 dB
135dB(C)
137dB(C)
EG
Assessment of noise exposure
Record of significant findings and control measures put in place
Risk assessment to be carried out and reviewed as necessary
Risk assessment to include extra considerations in higher risk situations

General duty to reduce risk
Risk of hearing damage to be eliminated or reduced to the lowest level
reasonably practicable
Implement organisational and technical control measures, excluding

issue of personal hearing protection
Reduce exposure below exposure limit value (ELV), if ELV breached,

identify why and modify organisational and technical measures
Ensure noise exposure in rest facilities is kept to acceptable level
Adapt control measures as necessary to take account of employee(s)

who may be particularly at risk from exposure to noise
Consult with employees on protective measures taken
AL
Section
Part
Page 146
AT
IO
QCS 2014
IN
TE
R
Contractors' duties (continued)
Exposure below
the lower
exposure action
value of 80dB(A)
Exposure at or
Exposure at or
Exposure at or
above the lower above the upper
above the
exposure action exposure action
exposure limit
values of 80
values of 85
values of
dB(A) or peak
dB(A) or peak
87dB(A)or peak
sound pressure of sound pressure of sound pressure of
135dB(C)
137 dB(C)
140 dB
Provision of hearing protection
Ensure that personal hearing protectors are:

provided to employees who ask for them
provided to all those exposed
used by all those exposed.
EG
Create hearing protection zones, designated by appropriate signs and:
restrict access if justified by the level of risk
ensure as far as is reasonably practicable that all who go into a

marked hearing protection zone use hearing protection.
AL
Section
Part
QCS 2014
Exposure below
Exposure at or
Exposure at or
Exposure at or
the lower
above the lower above the upper
above the
exposure action exposure action exposure action
exposure limit
value of 80 dB(A)
values of 80
values of 85
values of 87
dB(A) or peak
dB(A) or peak
dB(A) or peak
sound pressure of sound pressure of sound pressure of
135dB(C)
137 dB(C)
140 dB
TE
R
AT
IO
Page 147
Maintenance and use of equipment

Ensure so far as is reasonably practicable that:
EG
all equipment provided under these Regulations, except personal

hearing protectors, are fully and properly used
all equipment is maintained in an efficient state and good
working order.
IN
Information instruction and training

Provide adequate information, instruction and training and update it as
necessary, on:
the nature of the risks to hearing from noise
the organisational and technical measures taken
the action and limit values
}
}
}
}
how to obtain a personal hearing protector

}
how to detect and report signs of hearing damage }
the entitlement to health surveillance
}
the results of any collective health surveillance. }
Provide information, instruction and training for anyone who has
responsibilities for ensuring the Contractor's legal duties are carried out.
AL
Section
Part
QCS 2014
Exposure below
the lower
exposure action
value of 80dB(A)
Exposure at or
above the lower
exposure action
values of
80dB(A) or peak
sound pressure
of 135dB(C)
Exposure at or
above the upper
exposure action
values of
85dB(A) or peak
sound pressure
of 137 dB(C)
Exposure at or
above the
exposure limit
values of
87dB(A) or peak
sound pressure
of 140 dB
TE
R
AT
IO
Page 148
Health surveillance
Provide as appropriate if the risk assessment indicates there to be } a risk

to employees' health resulting from noise at work }
EG
IN
Keep and maintain records of health surveillance }

Enable employees access to their own health surveillance }
Where employee found to have hearing damage: }

ensure the employee is informed by a suitably qualified person }
review the risk assessment and control measures }
consider assigning the employee to alternative (non-noisy) work }
continue with health surveillance. }
Employee's duties
Use of equipment
Employees must:
make full and proper use of personal hearing protectors
use any other control measures provided by the Contractor
report any defects discovered in the protective measures to the

Contractor.
Health surveillance
Attend health surveillance procedures as required by the Contractor in
working hours and at the Contractor's expense.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 149

1.2.11 Protection of the Eyes
1.2.11.1 Key points
1
Many eye injuries occur to people at work each year because eye protection is not being
worn.
These accidents are easily preventable simply by wearing the correct type of eye protection.
The loss of sight, even in one eye, will have a profound effect on the sufferer.
Given the nature of most construction sites, in many cases protection of the eyes will be
achieved by the issue and wearing of appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE).
In common with other types of PPE, Contractors must:
(b)
provide it at no charge to employees who need it;
(c)
provide adequate information, instruction and training in its use;
(d)
make sure that it is worn.
IO
AL
identify the correct type of eye protection necessary;
AT
Users of eye protection must:
wear it when there is a risk of eye injury as indicated by a risk assessment;
(b)
look after it, particularly with regard to protecting the lenses or face shield;
(c)
return it to any accommodation allocated to it when not in use;
(d)
report to the Contractor any defect, such as scratched or crazed lenses, and obtain a
replacement;
(e)
report to the Contractor if it is lost and seek a replacement.
TE
(a)
EG
IN
(a)
A person's eyes are very vulnerable and an accident or injury can completely change that
person's way of life.
Analysis of the injuries to people's eyes shows that damage is caused as follows:
(a)
75% by impact
(b)
10% by abrasion following ingress of dust or other foreign body
(c)
15% by burns or chemical contamination.
The majority of these injuries would have been prevented if the correct eye protection had
been worn.
Contractors must make a provision for the protection of the eyes of employees at work.
The protection provided must conform to the approved specifications and includes goggles,
visors, spectacles, face screens and fixed shields, either free standing or attached to
machinery or plant.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 150
The Management of Health and Safety at Work
If a risk assessment identifies that employees may be exposed to a risk of injury to their eyes
then, unless the risk can be adequately controlled by other means, the Contractor has a duty
to supply eye protection and must take all reasonable steps to ensure that it is worn.
Selection of all personal protective equipment should be carried out by a competent person.
IO
AL
Duties of Contractors
Eye protectors should be:
issued on a personal basis to the person at risk
(b)
maintained and readily available in sufficient numbers for persons occasionally

employed.
(a)
TE
AT
Eye protectors and shields Issue and availability
Eye protectors should be kept available in sufficient numbers so that any which become lost,
destroyed or defective can be replaced.
EG
IN
Replacement of eye protectors
Construction and marking

All eye protectors and shields provided must comply with British or International
specifications and be:
(a)
suitable for the type of work or risk involved
(b)
suitable for the user to give them minimum discomfort and ease of movement whilst
working
(c)
marked to identify their type and suitability
(d)
maintained, kept clean and disinfected.
Fixed shields
5
Fixed shields provided must:

(a)
conform to the relevant European Standard specification
(b)
be cleaned regularly, disinfected and properly maintained
(c)
be so constructed and kept in position as to protect the eyes.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 151
Duties of employees
6
It is the duty of an employee:

(a)
to tell their Contractor of any work situation which presents a risk to the health and
safety of themselves or others
(b)
where there is any risk of injury to the eyes, to use the protection provided in
accordance with the instructions and training given
(i)
to take care of eye protectors
(ii)
to report any loss or defect to the Contractor.
1.2.11.4 Eye Protection

Identifying the type of hazard
Only when the Contractor has carried out a risk assessment to determine the hazards can
the correct type of eye protector be supplied.
Some of the types of hazard detailed require eye protectors to have sufficiently strong lenses
or shield to withstand the impact of particles or fragments striking them.
The effectiveness of the seal made between the eye protectors and the operator's skin is
very important in affording protection against the type of hazard where irritant or corrosive
materials are involved.
The ability to withstand high temperatures or reduce strong light and glare is a main
requirement for the other types of eye protector.
For further information concerning specific requirements or combinations of different kinds of

protection, manufacturers' literature should be consulted.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.2.11.5 Types of eye protector
There are several types of eye protector and it is important to select and issue the correct
type to give the required protection. The types and their markings are listed in Appendix 1.
Examples of the types of work for which the various standards of eye protection might be
used, are listed in Appendix 2.
EG
1.2.11.6 Eye protection safety checklist

1
Have operations requiring eye protection been identified?
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 152
Has the work activity been assessed to determine what, if any, hazards exist?
Are appropriate types of eye protection available for the various work activities to be carried
out?
Does all eye protection comply with the relevant standard?
Is the eye protection supplied on a persona] basis to employees?
Are there sufficient quantities of eye protectors available for occasional users?
Is the use of eye protection satisfactorily monitored?
Have employees been informed of work activities requiring eye protection?
Have employees been trained in the correct use and maintenance of eye protection?
10
Are employees aware of their
11
responsibilities with regards to the care and reporting of loss or defective eye protectors?
12
Are appropriate safety signs displayed?
IO
AT
1.2.11.7 Lasers
AL
Items of equipment producing light amplification by the stimulated emission of radiation,

more normally known as lasers, are widely used on construction sites, mainly for alignment
and levelling in civil engineering. Most are of the helium or neon continuous wave type and
emit visible light, but some lasers emit in the invisible infrared region of the electromagnetic
spectrum, and these require extra caution.
The optical radiation produced by a laser is absorbed by the first few centimetres of the body
and so the skin and eyes are the tissues most at risk of damage.
All lasers should comply with BS EN 60825. This standard groups laser products into five
classes (with some subclasses), based on acceptable emission levels, and is intended to
ensure that the manufacturer and user of laser products comply with current requirements.
Appendix 3 reproduces an extract of information contained in BS EN 60825.
The use of Class 1 and 2 products is preferred on construction sites because these
represent the lowest risk of eye injury. However, even these lower power lasers can cause
eye damage if they are misused, for example, staring directly into the beam or viewing the
beam through any magnifying device.
Class 3R and 3B lasers, which may sometimes be in use, can involve hazards to both the
user and other personnel. Those who maintain, operate and supervise the use of these
products must be fully trained, competent and capable of implementing the necessary safety
and hazard control procedures.
Where lower power lasers are used, the human 'blink reflex' will offer some protection.
However, this should not be relied upon and is unlikely to offer any protection from higher
power lasers.
Appendix 4 outlines the hazards arising out of the uses of the various classes of laser and
control measures necessary.
EG
IN
TE
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 153
General procedures
Full training and information must be given to persons using lasers.
10
There should be no unauthorised access to any laser equipment.
11
All personnel must be aware of the hazards when working with lasers, the safe working
procedures and accident reporting procedures.
12
Any necessary eye protection equipment, hazard signs, barriers, etc. must be available and
in use as necessary.
13
Any eye protectors used in conjunction with lasers must be suited to the wavelength of the
laser in use. General purpose safety glasses offer no protection whatsoever against lasers
and should not be used.
14
All hazard areas must be clearly defined with signs and barriers.
15
The laser beam should only be directed at non-reflecting surfaces. Any adjacent reflective
surfaces must be covered, otherwise the beam will diverge and could affect other areas and
people not directly involved in the job.
16
Extra care must be taken when working near reflective surfaces (e.g. water, dust, spray)
which cannot be marked or covered.
17
Special precautions must be taken when working near roads, airfields and other public
areas, where a stray beam could cause a hazard.
18
When work activities require the use of high powered lasers, the work should, when
possible, be undertaken when the site is vacated (such as evenings or weekends). If this is
not possible, special precautions will be necessary to ensure that unauthorised persons do
not enter the work area or any designated area.
19
See Appendix 3 for specific precautions.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
In the event of an eye injury caused by a laser

20
No medication is to be applied to the eye.
21
The eye involved should be covered with a clean, dry material.
22
Immediate medical attention should be sought.
23
A thorough ophthalmic examination should be carried out within 24 hours, with a full
biophysical investigation.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 154
Laser safety checklist

25
Only competent and trained people must be allowed to operate laser equipment.
26
The hazard area should be defined and clearly marked.
27
Create an 'exclusion zone' when the more powerful classes of laser are being used.
28
When work with lasers is taking place, only authorised people should be allowed in the area.
29
The correct eye protection must be in use during all laser operations.
30
There should be no danger to any other person(s) resulting from stray reflections or from any
activity involving the use of lasers.
31
Where necessary, the source and direction of the laser beam should be clearly identified.
32
The laser beam should only be directed at a non-reflecting surface.
33
Any other reflective surfaces should be covered.
34
All laser equipment should comply with British Standard EN 60825.
35
Beam attenuators and any other safety devices must be in use when using Class 3R and 3B
products.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
24
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 155

1.2.11 Appendix 1
The standards of eye protection
Hazard description
Marking
BSEN 166 (1 or 2).S
Low energy impact (45 m/sec)
BSEN 166 (1 or 2).F
Medium energy impact (120 m/sec)
BSEN 166 (1 or 2).B
High energy impact (190 m/sec)
BSEN 166 (1 or 2).A
Droplets and splashes of liquid
BS EN 166 (1 or 2).3
Large dust particles
BSEN 166 (1 or 2).4
AL
Increased robustness
BSEN 166 (1 or 2).5
Gas and fine dust particles
BSEN 166 (1 or 2).8
IO
Short circuit electric arc

Molten metal and hot solids
AT
Hard coat (resistance to fine particles)
Non-mist (resistance to fogging)
BSEN 166 (1 or 2).K

BSEN 166 (1 or 2).N
BS EN 175
Face shields (welding)
BSEN 166 (1 or 2).9
TE
Notes:
The 1 or 2 in the BS EN numbers refer to the optical characteristics of the PPE.
Eye protectors manufactured to the British and European Standard are subjected to a
number of tests (including temperature, robustness and optical quality) before approval.
In the test of robustness, for example, general purpose goggles to EN 166.1 .S must
withstand the impact of a 6 mm steel ball travelling at 12 m/sec (43.45 km/h). Impact goggles
to EN 166.1.F must withstand the impact at 45 m/sec (160.93 km/h) and for EN 166.1.B they
must withstand an impact at 120 m/sec (434.52 km/h).
Eye protection to BS EN 166 A is for specialist applications and is only available in the form
of a face shield.
Safety goggles are marked with a combination of letters and numbers to indicate the
standard of protection provided, for example:
EG
IN
(a)
BS EN 166.1 .F is impact-resistant to a low energy projectile.
(b)
BS EN 166.1.B.3.4 is impact-resistant to medium energy projectiles, droplets,

splashes of liquid and large dust particles.
(c)
BS EN 166.1.A.9 is impact-resistant to high energy projectiles, molten metal and hot

solids.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 156

1.2.11 Appendix 2
Selecting eye protection
The following hazards are those most likely to be encountered in construction operations.
Approved eye protection is required and must be provided for all persons engaged in any of
the processes specified below.
The protection listed below is recommended as containing good practical value, but should
be regarded as the minimum standard required.
Eye protection must be selected in the light of the work activity to be undertaken and the
assessed level of risk. A suitable and sufficient risk assessment will identify hazards and
indicate the control measures required to minimise the likelihood and severity of potential
risks.
Hazard
Recommended protection
BS specification
PART I Processes in which approved eye protectors are required
BS EN 166.B
Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
BSEN 166.S
Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
BSEN 166.F
Goggles
Face shield
BS EN 166.B
Chipping of metal, chipping; knocking Flying fragments or

out or cutting of cold rivets, bolts, nuts, particles
lugs, pins, collars etc. using hand or
power tools (6)
Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
BSEN 166.F
Chipping or scuffing of paint, scale,

slag, rust etc. from metal and other
hard materials using hand or power
tools (7)
Goggles
BS EN 166.4
Goggles
Face shield
BSEN 166.B
AT
Goggles
Face shield
Use of compressed air with shot or

High speed flying
other abrasives for blasting or cleaning fragments or particles
(1, 2)
IO
Process to be considered
AL
Flying fragments or
particles
Use of hand or power tools to strike

masonry nails (4)
Flying fragments or
particles
EG
IN
TE
Cleaning by means of high pressure

water jets (3)
Handling and use of cartridge-operated High speed flying

tools (5)
fragments or particles
Flying particles, dust
Use of power-driven high-speed metal High speed flying

cutting saw, or abrasive cutting-off
wheel or disc (8)
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 157
Goggles
BSEN 166.3 and 4
Handling in open vessels or

manipulation of the substances
described above (12)
Flying particles, chemical

splash, injurious dust
Goggles
BSEN 166.3 and 4
Pressure injection of liquids or

solutions into buildings or structures
(14)
Chemical splashes
Goggles
BSEN 166.3
Use of hand or power tools to drive in

bolts, pins, collars etc. (13)
Flying fragments or
particles
Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
BS EN 166.F
Breaking up of metal by use of a

Flying fragments or
hammer (whether power-driven or not) particles
or a tup
Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
Use of compressed air to remove

swarf, dust, dirt etc. (17)
Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
BS EN 166.S
Goggles
Face shield
BS EN 166.9
Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
BSEN 166.F
EG
IN
TE
Breaking, cutting, dressing, carving or Flying fragments or

drilling with hand or power tools the
particles
following materials:(i) Glass, hard
plastics, concrete, fired clay, plaster,
slag, natural or artificial stone, and any
similar materials. Also any articles
consisting wholly or partly of these
materials(ii) Stonework, brickwork, or
blockwork(iii) Bricks, tiles, or blocks
(16)
BS EN 166.F
IO
Pouring or skimming molten metal (18) Molten metal, splash,

sparks
AT
Flying fragments or
particles
AL
Operation, maintenance, dismantling Flying particles, chemical

or demolition of plant which contains
splash, injurious dust
or has contained acids, alkalis,
corrosive materials, or other
dangerous substances, whether liquid
or solid (11)
Cutting of wire and related operations

(21)
Flying fragments or
particles
Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
BSEN 166.S
Cutting of wire or metal strapping

under tension (22)
High speed flying

Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
BSEN 166.B
Processing and handling of glass or

cullet (23)
Flying fragments or
particles
Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
BS EN 166.S
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 158
PART 11 Processes in which approved shields or approved fixed shields are required
Electric arc welding (24)
Glare, radiation, heat,

spatter
Fixed shield and/or welding Housing BS EN 175 Filters

helmet or band screen
BS EN 169
PART III Processes in which approved eye protectors or approved shields or approved fixed shields are required
Glare, radiation, heat,

splatter
Goggles
Housing BS EN 175 Filters

BS EN 169
Cutting, boring, cleaning, surfaceconditioning, or spraying of material

using apparatus supplied with oxygen
or flammable gas under pressure (27)
Flying fragments or
particles
Goggles
Housing BS EN 175 Filters

BS EN 169
Processes involving the use of lasers

(28)
Radiation and burning
Fixed shield Goggles
AL
Gas welding (25)
AT
IO
BS EN 60825
PART IV Process in which approved eye protectors or approved shields or approved fixed shields are required
High speed particles or

fragments
Fixed shield and/or

goggles
BSEN 166 B
Dry grinding of materials or articles

using a power-driven wheel, disc or
band, or a portable tool (31)
Flying particles or hot

sparks
Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
BS EN 166 F
IN
TE
Truing or dressing of abrasive wheels

(29)
Flying particles
Goggles
Spectacles
BSEN 166 S
Welding of metals by an electric

resistance process or a submerged
electric arc (35)
Flying particles, spatter
Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
BS EN 166 S
EG
Machining of metals including any dry

grinding process not elsewhere
specified (34)
Cases in which protection is required for persons at risk from, but not employed in, the process
Chipping of metal, chipping; knocking Flying fragments or
out or cutting of cold rivets, bolts, nuts, particles
lugs, pins, collars, etc. using hand or
power tools (1)
Goggles
Spectacles
Face shield
Fixed shield
BSEN 166 F
Electric arc welding (2)
Glare, radiation, spatter
Cover
Goggles
Spectacles
BSEN 166 S Filters BSEN

169
Process involving lasers
Radiation and burning
Goggles
Spectacles
BS EN 60825
AL
Section
Part
Page 159
AT
IO
QCS 2014

1.2.11 Appendix 3
Summary of technical requirements when using lasers
TE
R
This table constitutes a quick reference guide for the safe use of lasers. For further authoritative information, consult BS EN 60825:1991.
Class 1
Labelling
Hazard warning label Yellow

background with black symbol
and border, with the words
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
Key control
Class 2
Class 3R
(formerly Class 3A)
Class 3B
Class 4
1) Hazard warning label Yellow

background with black symbol
and border 2) Explanatory label
(black/yellow) LASER
RADIATION DO NOT STARE
INTO BEAM CLASS 2 LASER
PRODUCT
As 1 - 2 except explanatory label

to read: LASER RADIATION DO
NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR
VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
As 1 - 3 except explanatory
label to read: LASER
RADIATION AVOID
EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
As 1 - 3 except explanatory
label to read: LASER
RADIATION AVOID SKIN
OR EYE EXPOSURE TO
DIRECT OR SCATTERED
RADIATION CLASS 4
LASER PRODUCT
EG
IN
Classification
Requirement
Beam attenuator
Not required
Remove key when not in use
Not required
When in use prevents inadvertent exposure
Emission indicator device Not required
Indicates laser is energised
Warning signs
Not required
Follow precautions on warning signs
Beam path
Not required
Specular reflection
Not required
Eye protection
Not required
Required if engineering and administrative procedures not applicable and MPE exceeded
Protective clothing
Not required
Sometimes required
Training
Not required
Terminate beam at end of useful length

Prevent unintentional reflections
Required for all operator and maintenance personnel
Specific requirements
AL
Section
Part
Page 160
AT
IO
QCS 2014

1.2.11 Appendix 4
Laser health risks and control

Health risks
Class 1M
Potentially harmful to the eye but only if deliberately viewed

through an optical magnifying device, such as binoculars.
EG
IN
TE
R
Class of laser
No one must be allowed to deliberately look at the beam or to direct the beam into
another person's eyes.
Magnifying devices such as binoculars must not be used by any person who may be
exposed to a laser beam whilst using them.
May be harmful to the eyes if deliberately misused, for

example, if someone stares directly into the beam.
As above.
Harmful to the eyes if viewed through an magnifying optical

device.
As above.
Class 3R
(formerly Class 3A)
These are higher power lasers that can cause eye injuries,
generally exposure is no more hazardous than to a Class 2
device because of the human 'blink reflex'.
BS EN 60825 specifies minimum training requirements for the users of Class 3 and 4
lasers. This will include information on the risks from the beam and the advice
against misuse.
Class 3B and Class 4
A higher power laser that can cause eye injury, either

directly from viewing the beam or from reflections.
Appropriate eye protection (PPE) must be worn whenever Class 3R or more

powerful lasers are used. Class 3B and Class 4 lasers. Particular training on these
classes of laser is required. The human 'blink reflex' is not likely to offer any
protection to anyone accidentally exposed to the beam.
Class 2M
Class 2
Control measures
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 161

1.2.12 Protection of the Skin
1.2.12.1 Key points
Many of the substances used or created during construction activities have the potential to
cause severe skin problems.
The (COSHH) risk assessment and the information on the accompanying data sheet and a
substance's container should indicate the degree of risk and the preventative measures
necessary.
Ideally, the risk will eliminated by avoiding the substance altogether, although this will often
not be practical.
Hazardous substances created by work processes will carry no 'health warning' but must be
identified in a (COSHH) risk assessment.
Skin conditions can be prevented by such simple actions as wearing the appropriate gloves
(PPE).
Barrier creams offer limited protection against some substances but should not be relied
upon.
Most substances can enter the body through openings such as cuts and grazes. Other, more
hazardous, substances can penetrate unbroken skin.
Periodic 'self-checks' or hand-checks carried out by someone trained to recognise the

symptoms are an effective form of initial health surveillance.
Prompt medical advice should be sought if there could be an emerging health problem.
TE
AT
IO
AL
Industrial dermatitis is a major cause of absenteeism.
It is an inflammatory skin condition which is neither infectious nor contagious. It is caused by

certain irritants contained in many industrial materials. Although dermatitis is not itself an
infection, it can lead to infection when the skin's natural barriers break down.
There are two general types:
EG
IN
Irritant dermatitis
4
Irritant dermatitis is usually caused by the skin coming into contact with an irritant substance
-usually a chemical, but it can be a mineral.
Repeated exposure to extreme heat or cold can lead to physical damage to the skin and
make it more likely that irritant dermatitis will occur. Wet work, which involves the hands
being wet for long periods (more than two hours a day) or repeatedly getting the hands wet,
can also cause dermatitis. Anyone may be affected, and the length of exposure together with
the strength of the irritant substance will affect the seriousness of the complaint. Most cases
of dermatitis are of this type.
Sensitising dermatitis
Sensitising dermatitis, also know as allergic contact dermatitis, accounts for about 20% of all
work-related dermatitis.
Some people develop a sudden allergic reaction following exposure to a specific substance.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 162
The reaction may be after weeks, months or even years of use or exposure to a substance
without any ill effects.
However, once that sensitising dermatitis has occurred, any future exposure to the
substance will again produce an adverse reaction. The exposure may be to an everyday
chemical or mineral, and may be as simple as exposure to nickel in jewellery.
The outer layer of skin forms a natural defence against irritants providing it is undamaged by
cuts and abrasions, or by solvents (such as hydrocarbons, benzene, tetrachloride, spirits and
thinners) that remove the skin's natural protective oils. Reaction of the skin to an irritant
varies from one individual to another. The reaction may be only a mild redness or it can
develop into swelling, blisters and septic ulcers that are both unsightly and painful.
10
Personal hygiene is particularly important when working with materials which may be
irritants, as resistance to an irritant varies with the type of skin. Pores, ducts and hair follicles
in the skin may admit irritants to the sensitive inner skin layer and, therefore, washing
thoroughly to remove dirt and grime with soap and water is an essential preventative
measure.
11
It is equally important that clothing is kept clean. Oil-stained overalls are a known cause of
skin problems around the thighs.
12
The best course of action is to prevent skin contact with all potentially irritant substances,
even if this is achieved by issuing PPE. When total avoidance of skin contact cannot be
guaranteed, it will be necessary in some cases to implement occupational health screening
(depending on the hazardous properties of the substance). Initially this should involve
establishing whether the persons involved in the job have had any previous adverse reaction
to the substance(s) in use.
13
Those people who are found to be allergic to one or more substances should be identified
and not be allowed to handle or come into contact with them. Any part of the body that
comes into contact with a skin irritant may be affected although it is usually the hands, wrists
and forearms that are affected initially. Treatment for dermatitis should be sought as soon as
possible because, if neglected, symptoms may spread to other parts of the body.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Many substances that are used in the construction industry have corrosive properties that
can cause severe burns to the skin. These substances have either strong acid or alkali
properties.
EG
1.2.12.3 Skin burns
1.2.12.4 Abrasion and cuts

1
Manually handling objects with rough surfaces, sharp corners etc. can cause damage to the
skin of the hands if appropriate gloves, such as rigger gloves, are not worn. Repetitive
manual handling may even make the situation worse. Such damage breaks the surface of
the skin making it more vulnerable to absorbing other substances that could potentially have
severe health effects. Worn-out gloves must be thrown away and replacements obtained.
Where objects with sharp edges such as sheet glass, sheet metal components etc. have to
be manually handled, gloves with cut-proof material, such as Kevlar, woven into the fabric
must be worn.
Ideally, work would be organised so that the manual handling of all such objects could be
avoided, however, given the nature of construction activities, total avoidance is usually not
possible. For example a roof tiler may now use an inclined hoist to get the tiles up to roof
level, but the hoist must still be loaded and the tiles distributed around the roof by hand.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 163

1
Contractors have a duty to ensure that, as far as is reasonably practicable, safe systems of
work are used, that adequate welfare facilities are available and that appropriate information,
instruction, training and supervision are provided, as is necessary to ensure safety and the
absence of risks to health in the use, handling, storage and transport of articles and
substances.
Employees are required to take reasonable care for their own health and safety, and that of
other persons who may be affected by their work, and to co-operate with the Contractor so
as to enable them to carry out their legal duties and requirements. In addition, employees
must not intentionally or recklessly interfere with anything provided in the interests of health
and safety.

assessment of every work activity in order to identify any hazard to employees (or any other
persons) that might be encountered as a result of the work having been carried out.
Where a hazard is identified that requires it, the Contractor must offer health surveillance to
employees, taking into account the risks to their health and safety that have been identified.
any risks that exist in the workplace and control measures that are in place to reduce those
risks.
situation which presents a risk to the health and safety of themselves and any other persons
who may be affected.
In the context of this module, the risk assessment must identify any substance to be used
that can cause an adverse skin reaction and the control measures that are necessary to
ensure that the substance can be used safely.
Employees are required to use hazardous substances provided in accordance with any
training or instructions that they have received from their Contractor.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

1
The principal points of these Regulations place requirements on the Contractor to protect
employees, or any other persons who may be affected by their operations, by:
(a)
assessing the health risks created by work involving substances hazardous to health.
(b)
ensuring that the exposure of employees or others is prevented, or adequately

controlled, by putting in place any measures necessary to control the exposure to risks
(c)
ensuring that any control methods provided are properly used and maintained by
monitoring the work environment, as necessary
(d)
carrying out health surveillance in specified circumstances
(e)
providing information, instruction and training for employees on the risks to health and
precautions to be taken regarding any work with substances hazardous to health
(f)
providing procedures for dealing with accidents, incidents and emergencies, including
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 164
first aid and safety drills.
1.2.12.8 Personal Protective Equipment at Work

These Regulations require that where a risk has been identified by a risk assessment, and it
the Contractor must provide and ensure that suitable personal protective equipment (PPE) is
used by employees.
controlling the risk have been considered.
In deciding which type to issue, the Contractor must take into account the risk that the PPE
is being used for, and that the PPE will fit the wearer and allow them to work comfortably.
Whilst the Contractor must take 'reasonable steps' to ensure that any PPE supplied is worn,
employees in turn must ensure that they wear the equipment provided and know the
procedures for reporting any loss or defect to their Contractor.
(b)
adequate washing facilities (including showers, where appropriate)
(c)
a supply of hot and cold (or warm) water
(d)
soap or suitable cleansers
(e)
towels or other means of drying.
TE
IN
Use of harmful substances
(b)
EG
Specifically in relation to skin protection, Contractors must ensure that the appropriate
assessments have been made on any articles and substances used at work, and that they
are:
(a)
designs that avoid foreseeable risks to health and safety
(a)
1.2.12.10
1
AT
In the context of this section, the relevant requirements of these Regulations include the
provision of:
safe and free from any risk to health, when properly used
IO
AL
used in accordance with the findings of risk assessments, procedures and conditions
stipulated
(c)
properly stored, transported and handled
(d)
properly marked to indicate any special precautions which need to be taken.
They must ensure that persons using such articles and substances are:
(a)
suitable and able to carry out the task which is expected of them
(b)
properly and adequately trained in their use and aware of all necessary precautions
which must be taken
(c)
provided with appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment
(d)
supplied with all necessary information
(e)
educated in the dangers of skin
(f)
conditions, and in methods to be used to prevent those conditions arising
(g)
able to detect, and be aware of, the need to report any signs of skin infection or
dermatitis.
QCS 2014
Adequate washing and first aid facilities must be provided, and barrier and cleansing creams
should be available. In addition, the Contractor is responsible for providing supervision to
ensure the above procedures, conditions and correct methods of work are maintained and
that the proper facilities and equipment are available.
1.2.12.11
Potentially harmful substances and agents
Substances and physical agents which can be potentially harmful to the skin include:
pitch, tar and bitumen
(b)
cement or lime
(c)
brick, stone, tile and plaster dust
(d)
paints, varnishes, lacquers and stains
(e)
certain types of timber (see Appendix 2)
(f)
fibreglass
(g)
certain epoxy resins
(h)
acrylic and formaldehyde resins
(i)
chromates (in primers, cement, etc.)
(j)
organic solvents
(k)
petrol, diesel and paraffin oils
(l)
white spirit and thinners
(m)
acids or alkalis
(n)
ionising radiation
(o)
solar radiation
(p)
other materials (depending on individual reactions).
N
IO
AT
N
Effects of contact with some materials
EG
1.2.12.12
AL
(a)
TE
Page 165
IN
Section
Part
Skin contact with certain materials can cause a variety of reactions and some examples are
given below. This list is not exhaustive.
Mineral oils, including fuel oils and mould oils, can lead to inflammatory skin conditionsdermatitis, oil acne or even skin cancer.
These may be caused by constant contact with oil or oily clothes and rags (e.g. when placed
in overall pockets).
Chemicals, including strong alkalis and certain acids, chromates, formaldehyde, are
substances which can penetrate the skin causing ulcers (for example, chrome ulceration)
and dermatitis.
Cement and lime can also cause chronic dermatitis. Wetted cement and lime become more
alkaline, corrosive and therefore potentially very damaging to the skin.
Solvents and de-greasers, including paraffin, turpentine, petroleum products, thinners

and similar solvents, affect the skin by dissolving the natural oils (de-fatting) which renders
it more vulnerable to attack by other substances and bacteria.
Tar, pitch, bitumen products, including cresols and phenols like mineral oil, cause
inflammation, blisters and oil acne.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 166
Radiation, light and heat radiation, including X-rays, beta and gamma radiation,
extremes of radiation, temperature and humidity, make the skin more susceptible to
dermatitis and other skin problems.
Epoxy resin hardeners, glass fibres, certain woods, fungicides and insecticides may
irritate the skin and lead to dermatitis.
1.2.12.13
Reducing risks
Substitute products
1
Every effort must be made to ascertain which substances have the potential to cause
dermatitis and, where possible, to substitute other materials that either eliminate or reduce
the danger. An alternative, where possible, may be to use a more dilute form of the
substance.
AL
Reducing contact
If the outcome of an assessment is that there are no alternatives, and substances that cause
dermatitis have to be used, methods of work should be implemented which eliminate contact
between the skin and the substance.
The use of mechanical handling equipment may be possible but, if this is not available,
simple devices and instruments, including splash guards, drip trays, tongs, and scrapers, will
help to reduce the risk.
AT
IO
Healthy working conditions
It may be possible to use localised ventilation and exhaust systems to deal with dust, fumes
and oil spray.
Plentiful supplies of clean fresh air and comfortable working temperatures are vitally
important, as is the general cleanliness of the working area, the machinery and any other
equipment which is in use.
Wherever possible and appropriate, the display of warning and information signs should be
prominently made, so that all employees are aware of the hazards existing in that area.
EG
IN
TE
Warning signs (black on yellow background)
Mandatory signs (white on blue background)
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 167
Protecting the worker

7
If a Contractor intends to use any items of PPE (including gloves and barrier creams) as part
of their skin protection strategy in the workplace, then it is important that the correct PPE is
selected.
All PPE for skin protection that is produced or imported by reputable companies is
manufactured to British and European Standards.
As with all PPE for use at work, skin protection should be selected by a competent person
who can ensure, in discussion with the supplier, that it meets the appropriate standards.
Protective clothing
Protective clothing and other PPE provides one of the most practical ways of limiting contact
between the skin and other substances. To be effective, all protective clothing must be the
right size, fit for the purpose, maintained in good condition, cleaned regularly and stored
carefully when not in use.
11
Protective clothing may include gloves, overalls, eye protectors (such as goggles, face
shields), aprons, boots and leggings, depending on the work being undertaken. The
protective equipment provided must be suited to the requirements of the job.
12
Regular inspections must be made to ensure it remains sound and adequate.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
10
Gloves
13
A glove suitable for handling abrasive materials may offer no protection against chemicals.
The appropriate glove for sulphuric acid may not be approved for chromic acid.
14
Much care is needed in selecting the right type of glove to be used for a particular hazard.
Manufacturers' charts and recommendations should be followed when selecting gloves to
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 168
protect the wearer against specific hazards. A properly selected glove can be useful in the
prevention of dermatitis if care is taken to avoid getting contaminants inside the gloves when
putting them on and taking them off.
15
The modern materials from which gloves are now made enable them to be effective against
hazardous substances whilst generally allowing the necessary amount of 'feel' and dexterity
where these factors are an issue.
Industrial gloves - some types and uses
Recommended type
Acids, concrete, brickwork, stain

removers, solvents, alkalis
Neoprene, nitrile, PVC, rubber
Esters, ethers, ketones (mastic,

sealers), aldehydes, petroleumbased products
Medium and heavyweight rubber,

neoprene, nitrile, PVC
AT
IO
AL
Hazard
Nitrile, PVC, medium and

heavyweight rubber
TE
High and low temperatures
IN
Abrasion, unloading bricks and

blocks, general materials handling
Asbestos substitute or 'Nomex'

gloves
EG
Bitumen, hot work, etc.
Rubber, nitrile, PVC, neoprene,

chrome-leather with reinforced
palm
Barrier substances
16
Where exposure of the skin is unavoidable, the use of barrier creams or other preparations
may limit the degree of contact.
17
These substances are applied before starting work and removed by washing after each spell
of work. Reapplication is necessary before resuming work.
18
Water-soluble barrier creams are unsuitable where wet work is involved, and some
substances are worn off with manual work.
19
There are many types of barrier substances available and it is essential that the right type is
used for the work being done.
20
Most barrier substances afford only limited protection and should never be relied on as a
sole means of protection.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 169
Hygiene
21
Personal cleanliness is an important factor in the prevention of dermatitis. The necessary

washing facilities and an ample supply of clean warm water, soap and clean towels should
be made available near to the workplace, and workers should be encouraged to use these
facilities.
22
Facilities for changing out of work-stained or contaminated clothing will also help to promote
personal cleanliness.
23
All facilities should be kept clean and inspected regularly.

Skin cleansers
Soap and water will help restore the skin to its natural state after the use of barrier creams.
Skin cleansers may be required where soap and water are not adequate (such as insoluble
barrier substances). With some skin cleansers (sanitisers), an additional moisturiser may be
needed.
25
Solvents (such as paraffin, turpentine, thinners and petrol) remove the natural oils from the
skin and must not be used for skin cleaning. Conditioning creams, designed to replace the
natural oils of the skin removed through frequent cleansing, should be used when necessary.
First aid
AT
1.2.12.14
IO
AL
24
A healthy, intact skin is an effective barrier against some substances and infection, but the
slightest cut or other injury may admit infection.
All abrasions to the skin, however minor, should be treated at once. However, be aware that
some substances can penetrate unbroken skin.
Medical advice should be sought as early as possible when there is concern. Any treatment
of dermatitis or its symptoms should be left to a doctor.
EG
IN
Treatment of dermatitis
TE
Inspections and examinations, educating staff in prevention

4
Regular inspections of the workplace, work methods and precautionary procedures adopted
will help ensure that the risk of dermatitis, or other skin complaints, is kept to a minimum. Atrisk employees should be encouraged to carry out 'self checks' for the first signs of dermatitis
and, ideally, supervisors should be trained to identify dermatitis. In appropriate
circumstances, arrangements should be made for workers to have regular examinations by
an occupational health professional to detect early signs of skin complaints, such as
dermatitis and skin cancer.
Active concern for the welfare of employees will encourage their co-operation in reporting
skin irritations at an early stage. Workers are more likely to co-operate in preventative
measures if they are told positively what dermatitis is and what can be done to prevent it
from occurring.
Health risks from working in the sun
A sunny day usually makes most people feel good, but too much sunlight can actually
damage the skin. It is not simply sudden exposure while on holiday that is harmful. Even a
tan that has been built up gradually can be harmful to health. A tan is a sign that the skin has
been potentially damaged.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 170
Skin damage is caused by ultraviolet rays in the sunlight. People whose jobs keep them
outdoors for a long time (such as building, construction and civil engineering workers) may, if
their skin is unprotected, get more sun on their skin than is healthy for them. They will then
be at greater risk of developing skin cancer.
The dangers
In the short term, excess exposure of unprotected skin to the sun can cause blistering and
peeling. Even mild reddening of the skin is a sign of skin damage. In the long term, too much
sun will speed up ageing of skin, making it leathery, mottled and wrinkled. However, the
most serious issue is an increased chance of developing skin cancer.
Some medicines, and contact with some chemicals used at work (such as bitumen
products), can make the skin more sensitive to sunlight (photosensitivity).
Some people are more at risk than others - and the effect that strong sunlight can have on
the different types of skin is explained below. People with white skin are most at risk.
Workers should take particular care if they have:
fair or freckled skin that does not tan, or goes red or burns before it tans
(b)
red or fair hair and light coloured eyes
(c)
a large number of moles.
IO
(a)
AT
10
AL
The risks
Skin types
Type 1: White skin, never tans, always burns. Often person has red or fair hair, blue eyes,
pale skin and freckles.
12
Type 2: White skin, burns easily, but may tan eventually. Person may have fair hair, blue
eyes and freckles.
13
Workers with skin types 1 and 2 must take extra care to avoid strong sunshine or cover up
with tightly woven clothing and a hat.
14
Type 3: White skin tans easily and burns rarely. Person has dark hair and eyes and slightly
darker skin.
15
Type 4: White skin, never burns, always tans. Person has dark hair, eyes and skin.
16
Workers with skin types 3 and 4 should still take care in strong sunshine.
17
Type 5: Brown skin.
18
Type 6: Black skin.
19
Workers with skin types 5 and 6 are still at risk from skin cancer. These skin types can still
darken and even burn in stronger sunlight.
EG
IN
TE
11
To protect yourself
20
Even if their skin is not fair or freckled, workers should be particularly careful whilst working
out of doors in summer in the three or four hours around midday when the sun is most
intense.
21
Workers should:
QCS 2014
22
Section
Part
Page 171
(a)
protect themselves with the type of clothing outlined below
(b)
try to avoid the mild reddening which is a sign of skin damage as well as being a sign
of early burning
(c)
try to work and take breaks in the shade if they can. This will reduce the danger of
harming the skin
(d)
not be complacent. The skin's most vulnerable areas are the back of the neck and the
head. Where possible, keep these areas covered
(e)
not try to get a tan; it might look good but it indicates that the skin has already been
damaged.
A suntan does not eliminate the long-term cancer risk, which is associated with prolonged
exposure to the sun.
Protective clothing
AL
Work clothing made from close-woven fabric, such as a long-sleeved shirt and jeans,
will stop most of the UV rays.
(b)
Wear a hat. A wide brimmed hat will shade the face and head. A safety helmet will
afford protection and the addition of a hanging flap will protect the back of the neck.
(c)
Keep a shirt or other top on.
IO
(a)
Hats and other clothing are the best form of protection, but sun creams and lotions can add
useful protection for parts of the body that are not easy to shade from the sun. A sun
protection factor rating of 30 or more is recommended.
TE
Periodic checking of the skin
24
The main way to avoid the dangers of developing skin cancer is to cover up.
AT
23
The first warning sign is often a small scabby spot that does not clear after a few weeks.
Workers should be instructed to look for changed or newly formed moles or any skin
discoloration. Workers should pay particular attention to any growths that appear on the
face, especially around the eyes and nose, or on the backs of hands.
26
If these signs are noticed, medical assistance should be sought either from the Contractors
medical staff or a local general practitioner, drawing attention to any moles that grow,
change or bleed.
27
Many of these symptoms may prove to be non-cancerous - but they need to be checked to
be absolutely sure.
28
Even if a spot is cancerous, simple modern treatments can usually cure them. This type of
cancer very rarely spreads to other parts of the body. The smaller the spot, the easier it is to
cure.
29
Don't delay If you think something might be wrong, get it checked out
30
Contractors are strongly encouraged to develop a Sun Safety Policy. An example of such a
policy is attached at Appendix 3 to this module.
EG
IN
25
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 172

1.2.12 Appendix 1
Protection of skin Safety checklist
Have the materials or substances in use been correctly identified?
Is up-to-date manufacturers' information available on the safe use of the substances?
Have the hazardous substances that will be produced by a work process been identified?
Have the necessary risk assessments been carried out?
Has an attempt been made to control the hazard at source, for example by using a less
hazardous substance?
Has a COSHH risk assessment been carried out for the substances in use?
Have the significant findings of the risk assessment been communicated to those who will be
using or otherwise affected by the substance?
Are the correct warning and cautionary notices displayed?
Are the methods of handling, transport and storage correct for the substances being used?
10
Are there adequate selection and training procedures available for operatives using harmful
substances?
11
Is it necessary for workers to have wet hands for long periods or repeatedly get their hands
wet?
12
Have operatives been properly trained in the necessary precautions and protective
measures required for safe working?
13
Are safe working procedures and methods being properly implemented?
14
Is the correct handling equipment available and in use?
15
Is there adequate ventilation where toxic materials are in use?
16
Are there adequate washing facilities, barrier creams and cleansing agents of the correct
type available and in regular use?
17
Are there gloves and protective clothing of the correct type and specification available and in
use?
18
Have they been selected by a competent person, who can be the supplier?
19
Is there provision for cleaning protective clothing?
20
Is protective clothing regularly changed?
21
Are there adequate supervision and inspection procedures in place?
22
Is medical surveillance available for operatives when applicable?
23
Have appropriate welfare and first aid facilities been provided?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
Section
Part

1.2.12 Appendix 2
Some timbers known to produce dermatitis and other irritant effects
Harmful effects
Severity
Frequency
Afrormosia
Dermatitis, asthma
Can be severe
Quite frequent
African mahogany
Dermatitis
Severe
Infrequent at present
Boxwood
Dermatitis, rhinitis, asthma Mild
Quite frequent
Chestnut
Dermatitis, conjunctivitis,
asthma
Usually mild
Infrequent
Dahoma
Irritation of the chest,

dermatitis
Severe
East African camphor wood
Asthma, dermatitis
Fairly severe
Ebony
Irritation of nose and throat, Fairly severe

dermatitis
Fairly frequent
Guarea (also West African cedar)
Nasal irritation, severe

vomiting, chest irritation,
blisters and dermatitis
Quite frequent
Iroko
Skin and eye irritation,

asthma, symptoms of the
common cold
AL
Commercial name
AT
IO
Frequent
TE
IN
Usually mild, occasionally Very infrequent

serious
Severe
Infrequent at present
Irritation of mucous
membrane, nasal
haemorrhage, sore eyes,
dizziness, dermatitis
Severity varies with

individuals
Frequent
Satinwood
Dermatitis, headache,
coughing
Quite severe
Infrequent
Teak
Dermatitis, eye
inflammation
Can be severe
Not frequent
Western red cedar
Asthma, bronchial trouble,

dermatitis, septic wounds
from splinters
Severe
Fairly frequent
Yew
Bronchial asthma and

dermatitis
Quite severe
Infrequent
Mansonia
Dermatitis
EG
Machaerium
Effects vary from mild to

severe depending on
sensitivity
Infrequent
Page 173
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 174

1.2.12 Appendix 3
Model Sun Safety Policy
This Contractor is committed to protecting and educating its workers about the risks to health
arising from excessive exposure to strong sunlight. The policy will be implemented as
appropriate for all workers who are at risk. Sun protection advice will be provided as part of
routine health and safety training for all.
All new employees will be made aware of the Sun Safety Policy.
Wherever possible, working hours and tasks will be scheduled to avoid the midday sunshine.
Wherever possible, work that can be carried out indoors or in the shade will be scheduled
during periods of strong sunshine.
All workers who are liable to be at risk will receive appropriate training on how to protect
themselves from prolonged exposure to strong sunlight, regardless of their skin type or hair
colour.
Workers who are at risk will be encouraged to wear full-length trousers and long-sleeved
shirts throughout the year. They will be made aware that, ideally, clothing will be loose fitting
and made from a close-weave fabric.
In most circumstances, the mandatory wearing of a safety helmet will provide the necessary
protection for the head. In the rare circumstances where a safety helmet need not be worn,
workers at risk will be advised to wear a hat.
Workers at risk will be given information on the appropriate use of sunscreen creams,
including advice on the minimum recommended level of protection.
Drinking water will be provided in the shade and all workers will be encouraged to drink
plenty of water to avoid dehydration.
Rest areas in the shade will be provided and workers at risk will be encouraged to use them
for their rest breaks.
10
All contractors working on the site will be made aware of the contents of the Sun Safety
Policy and will be required to adhere to its guidelines.
11
The effectiveness of this policy will be monitored and it will be reviewed and updated as
necessary.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Signed ..................................................................... Date ....................................................................

Position ...................................................................................................................................................
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 175

1.2.13 Control of Vibration
1.2.13.1 Key points
Exposure to hand-arm vibration has the potential to cause disabling injuries.
Exposure to whole-body vibration can cause severe back pain.
Contractors have a legal duty to reduce the risks to the health of employees by either
eliminating exposure to vibration or reducing it to an acceptable level.
Contractors have various means at their disposal of estimating exposure to vibration before
resorting to having measurements carried out.
If it is necessary to have vibration measurements taken, it is essential that the person doing
so is trained and competent.
Some of the things that can be done to control the potentially harmful effects of exposure to
hand-arm vibration are:
adopting alternative (non-vibrational) work methods;
(b)
ensuring that tools are either low-vibration by design and/or well-maintained;
(c)
adapting work patterns;
(d)
ensuring that ergonomic factors are taken into account;
(e)
preventing those person(s) exposed to vibration from becoming cold and/or damp;
(f)
training workers how to minimise the risks from vibration.
AT
IO
(a)
Exposure to whole-body vibration can be controlled by, for example, improved technology in
mobile plant (e.g. improved suspension and driver's seat), operator training, smooth
operation of machines and job rotation.
TE
AL
IN
1.2.13.2 Introduction Hand-arm vibration

A wide range of tools commonly used during construction and demolition activities,
particularly those with a rotary or percussive action, have the potential to cause serious
health problems. The seriousness of the situation will depend largely on how frequently and
for how long vibrating tools are used although, as will be explained elsewhere in this module,
other factors contribute to the potential for ill health.
The most common forms of ill health resulting from exposure to vibration of hands and arms
are known as hand-arm vibration syndrome (HAVS) and vibration white finger (VWF), which
is also known as Secondary Raynaud's Syndrome.
VWF, which is sometimes called 'dead finger' or 'dead hand', is most common in people
whose hands are regularly exposed to damaging levels of vibration. Damage to the nerves
and blood vessels in the fingers can lead to permanent loss of feeling and eventual disability.
At worst, VWF can eventually lead to ulceration or gangrene, possibly resulting in the loss of
one or more fingers. There is no effective treatment for the disorder. Exposure to vibration
can also cause damage to muscles, joints and bone, which may also contribute to pain and
stiffness in the hands and wrists.
If the symptoms of VWF can be seen in an employee's hands or fingers, it is clear evidence
that any protective or control measures that are in use have not been effective. The damage
has already been done.
EG
Section
Part
Page 176
IO
AL
QCS 2014
The symptoms or effects of vibration white finger are usually triggered when the hands are
exposed to the cold. Early indications are the fingertips rapidly becoming pale or white
(blanched), with loss of feeling and perhaps also numbness and 'pins and needles'. This
phase is sometimes followed by a red flush that signals the return of blood circulation to the
fingers and is usually accompanied by a very uncomfortable or painful throbbing. Continued
work with vibrating tools will cause the affected area to increase in size and for attacks to
become more frequent over time.
Vibration damage to the fingers, hands or body is very much dose-related. The greater the
exposure to vibration, the more likely there is to be damage. Increased exposure could be
due to being exposed to greater magnitudes of vibration or being exposed for longer
durations.
Other factors that can influence the risk of developing hand-arm vibration syndrome include:
the grip, push and other forces used to guide and apply the vibrating tools or pieces of
work equipment. The tighter the grip, the more vibration energy is transferred to the
hands
(a)
EG
IN
TE
AT
(b)
tools with blunt cutting edges usually require more time to complete the task, higher
grip and push forces, and often result in greater vibration emission
(c)
the exposure pattern, length and frequency of work and rest periods
(d)
how much of the hand, and other parts of the body, is exposed to the vibration
(e)
factors that potentially affect blood circulation, such as workplace temperature,

smoking and individual susceptibility
(f)
the hardness of the material being worked
(g)
tool maintenance is important in order to keep it running smoothly and efficiently.
1.2.13.3 Whole-body vibration

1
Whole-body vibration, as its name suggests, is vibration or jolting of the whole body through
the surface that is supporting the body, such as a machine seat or floor.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 177
Whole-body vibration, which often results from driving or operating some types of
construction plant or vehicles, has the potential to cause back injury or make an existing
back condition more painful.
1.2.13.4
When hazards are identified, it is the Contractor's duty to either eliminate the hazard or to
put control measures into place to reduce the risks to health and safety arising out of the
those risks.
Employees, in turn, have legal duties under these Regulations to:
IO
AL
tell their Contractor of any work situation which presents a risk to the health and safety
of themselves or any other persons who may be affected by their work activities
(b)
use all machinery and equipment in accordance with any training provided.
AT
(a)
The Contractor must assess the risks to employees' health arising from hand-arm vibration
and whole-body vibration and put effective control measures in place.
IN
TE
EG
1.2.13.6 Control of Vibration
They impose duties on Contractors to protect employees (and others) who may be exposed
to risk of ill health because of vibration at work.
These Regulations place legal duties on Contractors and employees with regard to the
control and management of employees' exposure to vibration.
Definitions
3
These Regulations give a number of definitions, knowledge of which will help readers better
understand the requirements of these Regulations.
(a)
Hand-arm vibration (HAV) means mechanical vibration which is transmitted into the
hands and arms by a work activity.
(b)
Whole-body vibration (WBV) means mechanical vibration which is transmitted into

the body through the supporting surface when a person is seated or standing during a
work activity.
(c)
Mechanical vibration means vibration occurring in a piece of machinery, equipment

or vehicle as a result of its operation.
(d)
Daily exposure means the extent of the mechanical vibration to which a worker is
exposed during a working day, which takes account of both the magnitude and
duration of the vibration.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
(e)
Exposure action value (EAV) means the level of daily exposure that, if exceeded,
requires specific action to be taken to reduce the risk.
(f)
Exposure limit value (ELV) means the level of daily exposure for any worker that
must not be exceeded.
(g)
Working day means a daily working period, irrespective of the time of day, when it
begins or ends, or whether it begins or ends on the same day.
(h)
Health surveillance means an assessment of the state of health of an employee as

related to their exposure to vibration.
Exposure limit and action values
For hand-arm vibration:

2
(a)
the daily exposure action value is 2.5 metres per second squared (2.5 m/s A(8))
(b)
the daily exposure limit value is 5 metres per second squared (5 m/s A(8)).
AL
For whole-body vibration:
the daily exposure action value is 0.5 metres per second squared (0.5 m/s A(8))
(b)
the daily exposure limit value is 1.15 metres per second squared (1.15 m/s2 A(8)).
(a)
IO
Page 178
AT
Note: The 'A(8)' notation after each value indicates that the measurement of exposure to vibration is
'time weighted' over an 8 hour period.
See flowchart at Appendix 1.
TE
1.2.13.7 Duties of Contractors
Contractor's duties to non-employees
EG
IN
Where these Regulations place a duty on Contractors with respect to the health and safety
of employees, the Contractor shall so far as is reasonably practicable, also be under a
similar duty to anyone else, whether at work or not, who may be affected by the vibration
created by the Contractor's work activities, except for the provision of:
(a)
health surveillance
(b)
information, instruction and training unless the non-employees are at the same place
of work as where the noise is being created.
Contractor's duties to employees

3
If employees are likely to be exposed to risks from vibration in the course of their work the
Contractor must:
(a)
carry out an assessment of the risks to the health and safety of the employees
exposed to vibration. The risk assessment must identify the measures that need to be
taken to meet the requirements of these Regulations
(b)
as part of the risk assessment, assess the daily exposure of employees to vibration
by:
(c)
(i)
observing work practices
(ii)
referring to information on the probable level of vibration corresponding to the

equipment used in those particular conditions
(iii)
if necessary, arranging for vibration levels to be measured.
assess whether any employee is likely to be exposed to vibration at or above the
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 179
exposure action value or the exposure limit value.

4
The risk assessment must include consideration of:

(a)
the magnitude, type and duration of exposure to vibration, including intermittent

vibration and repeated shocks
(b)
the effects that the vibration might have on employees whose health is particularly at
risk from exposure
(c)
any effects that vibration might have with regard to work equipment, such as:
(i)
the proper handling of controls

(ii) the reading of indicators
(iii) the stability of structures
(iv) the security of joints.
the availability of alternative equipment that is designed to reduce exposure to

vibration
(f)
exposure of employees to whole-body vibration when not actually working, such as in

rest areas and canteens
(g)
specific working conditions, such as working in low temperatures
(h)
the availability of appropriate information obtained from health surveillance.
IO
AT
The Contractor must regularly review the risk assessment and immediately if:
there is reason to believe that it is no longer valid
(b)
there has been a significant change in the work to which the assessment applies
(c)
implement changes to the risk assessment as identified by the review process.
IN
TE
(a)
The Contractor must record:

(a)
the significant findings of the risk assessment as soon as is practicable after the risk
assessment has been carried out or changed
(b)
the measures taken to eliminate or control exposure to vibration
(c)
AL
(e)
EG
any information provided by the manufacturers of the equipment that creates the
vibration
(d)
the measures taken to provide information, instruction and training for at-risk
employees.

(a)
ensure that exposure to vibration is eliminated at source or reduce it to the lowest

level that is reasonably practicable
(b)
where exposure is likely to be at or above the exposure action value, reduce

exposure to vibration to as low a level as is reasonably practicable, by implementing
organisational and technical measures which are appropriate to the work activity being
carried out
(c)
Contractors must take in to consideration the following general principals of

prevention:
(i)
alternative work methods which eliminate or reduce exposure to vibration
(ii)
alternative work equipment or an appropriate ergonomic design which, taking

account of the work to be done, produces the least vibration
(iii)
the design and layout of the workplace including any rest facilities
QCS 2014
(iv)
the provision of extra equipment that has the effect of reducing injuries caused
by exposure to vibration
(v)
the effective maintenance programmes for equipment that can create vibration,
the workplace itself and workplace systems
(vi)
the provision of information and training for at-risk employees such that they are
aware of how to use work equipment correctly and safely in order to minimise
exposure
(vii)
limiting the duration and intensity of exposure to vibration
(viii)
adjusting work schedules and ensuring adequate rest periods
(ix)
the provision of work clothing to protect at-risk employees from cold and damp.
The Contractor must ensure that employees are not exposed to vibration above the
exposure limit value or, if they are, immediately:
reduce exposure to below the exposure limit value
(b)
identify the reasons for the exposure limit value being exceeded
(c)
take appropriate actions to prevent it occurring again.
AL
(a)
AT
IO
The above paragraph does not apply where the exposure of an employee to vibration is
usually below the exposure action value but varies markedly from time to time and may
occasionally exceed the exposure limit value, provided that:
the exposure to vibration averaged over one week is less than the exposure limit
value
(b)
there is evidence to show that the risk from the actual pattern of exposure is less than
the corresponding risk from constant exposure to the exposure limit value
(c)
the risk from exposure is reduced to as low as level as is reasonably practicable
(d)
the employees concerned are subject to increased health surveillance, where

appropriate.
(a)
TE
Page 180
IN
Section
Part
Any measures taken to comply with these Regulations must be adapted where necessary to
take account of any employee(s) who is/are particularly at risk from exposure to vibration.
11
If the risk assessment indicates that:
(b)
(c)
12
13
there is a risk to the health of employees who are exposed to vibration
(a)
EG
10
those employees are likely to be exposed to vibration at or above the exposure

action value;
the Contractor must ensure that those employees are placed under suitable health
surveillance, where appropriate.
The health surveillance will be appropriate if:

(a)
a link can be established between exposure to vibration and an identifiable disease or

any other adverse effect on health
(b)
it is probable that the disease or other effect on health may occur under particular
working conditions
(c)
there are valid ways of detecting the disease or other effect on health.

(a)
ensure that a record is kept and maintained for each employee who undergoes health
surveillance and that records are readily available in a suitable form
QCS 2014
(b)
Page 181
allow employees to see their health surveillance records upon being given reasonable
notice
Where, as a result of health surveillance, an employee is found to have an identifiable

disease or other adverse effect on health, which is considered by a doctor or other
occupational health professional to be the result of exposure to vibration, the Contractor
must:
ensure that the employee is informed by a suitably qualified person, including advice
regarding a need for further health surveillance
(b)
ensure that the Contractor is informed of any significant findings of the health
surveillance, allowing for medical confidentiality
(c)
review the risk assessment
(d)
review existing control measures, taking into account any advice given by a doctor.
(e)
consider reassigning the employee to other work where there is no risk from further
exposure, taking into account any advice given as above
(f)
ensure that the health of any other employee(s) who has been similarly exposed is
reviewed, including the provision of a medical examination where recommended by a
doctor, occupational health professional or the administrative authority.
AL
(a)
AT
Where the risk assessment shows a risk to the health of employees who are (or are liable to
be) exposed to vibration at or above the exposure action value, the Contractor must
provide the employees and their representatives with suitable and sufficient information,
instruction and training, which must include:
the organisational and technical measures taken to eliminate or control exposure to
vibration
(b)
the exposure limit value and the action values
(c)
the significant findings of the risk assessment, including details of any measurements
taken, with an explanation of the findings
(d)
why and how to detect and report signs of injury resulting from exposure to vibration
(e)
the employees' entitlement to health surveillance
(f)
how to work safely to minimise exposure to vibration
(g)
the collective results of any health surveillance carried out, anonymised so as not to
reveal the personal health record of any individual.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
15
IO
14
Section
Part
16
The information, instruction and training provided as above must be updated by the
Contractor to take account of any significant changes in the type of work carried out or
method of working.
17
The Contractor must ensure that any person, whether an employee or not, who has been
given the responsibility to ensure that the Contractor's duties are carried out, for example a
site manager or project manager, receives suitable and sufficient information, instruction and
training to enable compliance with these Regulations.

1
Under these Regulations, employees have a legal duty to make themselves available for
health surveillance checks (during working hours) as required by the Contractor, the health
surveillance being at the Contractor's expense.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 182
1.2.13.9 The Provision and Use of Work Equipment

1
These Regulations require that Contractors only provide work equipment that is suitable for
the job and ensure that it is maintained and kept in good working order.
Where the use of the equipment involves a specific risk to the health and safety of
employees, the use of the equipment must be restricted to competent and specified workers.
Employees must be provided with information, instruction and training in the use of work
equipment, where necessary for their health and safety.
These Regulations require Contractors to provide serviceable and suitable work equipment
that will, in conjunction with other vibration management techniques, by virtue of its design or
adaptability, eliminate exposure to vibration or reduce it to an acceptable level.
Tools and plant used in the Qatar construction industry that could cause exposure to risks
from vibration include:
Tools likely to cause harmful levels of vibration
AL
1.2.13.10
road and concrete breaking drills
(b)
concrete vibro thickeners
(c)
concrete pokers
(d)
plate vibrators
(e)
chisels
(f)
demolition picks
(g)
compressor guns
(h)
pneumatic drills
(i)
angle grinders
(j)
percussive (hammer) drills
(k)
sanders, and similar reciprocating tools
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
(l)
IO
HAV
abrasive wheels (e.g. bench grinders)
(m)
cutting-off wheels and discs
(n)
power hammers and chisels, including 'Kango' hammers
(o)
needle guns
(p)
chainsaws
(q)
woodworking machinery.
This is irrespective of the tools' power source. Other equipment that may occasionally be
used and that is a source of vibration includes rotavators, lawnmowers, brush-cutters and
leaf blowers.
WBV
(a)
rough-terrain forklift trucks and tele-handlers
(b)
vibratory rollers
(c)
mobile crushers
QCS 2014
Section
Part
(d)
dumper trucks and other forms of earth-moving machinery
(e)
delivery vehicles if required to travel on rough terrain.
1.2.13.11
Page 183
Managing vibration, vibration risk assessment in practice
A general risk assessment can be briefly defined as a systematic examination of a work

process, carried out by a competent person on behalf of a Contractor.
A vibration risk assessment follows the same principle but with the emphasis solely on
vibration and its potential to cause ill health in employees.
The principle of risk assessment is not new. In fact, it is quite likely that many Contractors
have been carrying out risk assessments, including vibration risk assessments, during the
day-to-day course of their business activities, possibly without thinking of the process in
terms of a risk assessment.
A survey of what work activities are carried out, using what tools and equipment, and by
whom, will establish who is at risk. If there is any doubt as to whether a particular job has the
potential to cause vibration-induced health problems or injury, it is better to assume that it
has, initially at least.
Having established who could be at risk it is necessary to examine work activities in detail to
determine which work activities are of genuine concern. As outlined in the summary, only
when all other investigative methods have been exhausted should it be necessary to carry
out vibration measurements.
There are many sources of information available to Contractors, such as:
AT
IO
AL
the users of vibrating tools themselves; they are the ones who may have experienced
the early symptoms of HAVS
(b)
free online vibration measurement databases which are based on the actual vibration
measurements achieved during the testing of hundreds of tools of different types in
different conditions
(c)
tool manufacturers' published vibration data, although this should be treated with
caution as it can be based upon laboratory testing rather than 'field trials' and usually
underestimates exposures under real work conditions.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
In construction, it is likely that those exposed to WBV will exceed the exposure action value
if they operate machines for several hours per day. The exposure limit value should only
be exceeded if the machine is operated very aggressively or with non-approved
attachments.
For HAV, the guidance is that an employee is probably at risk from HAVS if they are using:
(a)
hammer action equipment for more than 15 minutes each day.
(b)
rotary equipment for more than one hour each day.
Employees who fall into these categories, as well as other at-risk employees, should be
asked to complete a short health surveillance questionnaire (details in Appendix 2).
10
An important factor in establishing who is at risk is the actual time that someone is using a
vibrating tool, commonly referred to as the 'trigger time'. When asked, it is usual for users to
overestimate the length of time that they actually use the equipment. Their response may be
'I use the equipment all day' when in fact what they mean is that they use it on-and-off all day
with, for example, a total 'trigger time' of less than 60 minutes per day.
QCS 2014
1.2.13.12
Section
Part
Page 184
The elimination or control of exposure to vibration in the workplace
On the basis of the general principles and hierarchy of control measures, Contractors must
ensure that employees' exposure to vibration is either eliminated or reduced so far as is
reasonably practicable.
Where it cannot be eliminated the Contractor must introduce a programme of organisational

and technical measures (control measures) consistent with their risk assessment. This must
include consideration of:
alternative methods of carrying out the work that eliminate or reduce employees'
exposure to vibration, for example, stripping off surface coatings by chemical
treatment rather than 'power-sanding'
(b)
choice of work equipment that, because of its design or features, or the nature of the
work to be done, produces the least possible vibration
(c)
the provision of ancillary equipment that reduces the risk of injury being caused by
vibration, for example, manufacturer approved vibration absorbent handles for handheld equipment
(d)
proper maintenance arrangements for the work equipment, workplace and workplace
systems, for example, maintaining ground surfaces over which vehicles regularly
travel
(e)
the design and layout of workplaces, workstations and rest facilities
(f)
suitable and sufficient information and training for employees so that they may use the
equipment safely and correctly in order to minimise their exposure to vibration, such
as training mobile machine operators how to correctly adjust their seats and the
benefits from driving less aggressively
(g)
limitation of the duration and intensity of the vibration, for example by job rotation
(h)
appropriate work schedules with adequate rest periods
(i)
the provision of clothing to protect employees from cold and damp
(j)
arranging for operatives to stay warm by providing heating for the workplace where
needed and possible, together with suitable clothing and gloves
(k)
ensuring that any new tools have vibration control measures built in
(l)
by adopting a 'buy smooth'/'hire smooth' policy, in which a commitment is made to

choose tools that incorporate low vibration technology
(n)
TE
IN
EG
(m)
AT
IO
AL
(a)
the reduction of vibration transmission in the path between the source and the handles
or other surfaces gripped by operatives' hands
the minimisation of the amount of force required to apply and control the tools, and
keeping them in good order.
A 'points' system has been developed by the UK Health and Safety Executive (HSE) which
allows for quick estimates of the hand/arm vibration exposure for a worker. Each process is
assigned a number of points per hour. Adding the points from each process carried out
(calculated by multiplying the points per hour by the number of hours use) provides an
estimate of the total exposure. For HAV the exposure action value corresponds to 100
points and the exposure limit value corresponds to 400 points. For WBV the exposure
action value corresponds to 100 points and the exposure limit value corresponds to 529
points. Points from HAV and WBV should not be combined.
Further guidance on estimating exposure is contained in Appendix 5.
A further benefit gained as a result of controlling vibration can be the reduction in noise
levels; in some circumstances reducing noise will also reduce vibration, hence many noise
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 185
control techniques also involve techniques for controlling vibration. See:

www.hse.gov.uk/vibration/hav/vibrationcalc.htm
1.2.13.13
If the risk assessment shows that there is a risk to the health of employees because of
vibration, or they are exposed to vibration in excess of the exposure action value, then the
Contractor must give employees information, instruction and training on:
how the Contractor is 'managing' vibration in the workplace
(b)
the exposure limit values and exposure action values
(c)
the significant findings of the risk assessments, including details of any measurements
taken
(d)
what employees should look for in themselves as regards HAVS, VWF and low back
pain and how they should inform their Contractor
(e)
the entitlement to health surveillance
(f)
the safe working practices in place to minimise employees' exposure to vibration
(g)
the collective (as opposed to individual) results of any health surveillance undertaken.
Work equipment Selection of tools and equipment
AT
1.2.13.14
AL
(a)
IO
Information and training for employees
All equipment that is liable to vibrate, and that is manufactured for use as work equipment,
should be designed to have low vibration operating characteristics.
Manufacturers are required to provide information on all aspects of their equipment,

including details of any vibration that may be expected. In particular, suppliers must provide
information on vibration levels if the tool or machine is likely to subject workers to levels of
vibration exceeding the exposure action value of 2.5 metres per second squared.
However, as some manufacturers may base their vibration figures on laboratory simulation
rather than field trials, the figures quoted may be unrealistically low. In many cases
information is also available from independent real or simulated work measurements.
Vibration emission is one of many important factors to consider when selecting a tool. For
example, a very heavy tool might not emit much vibration but could cause manual handling
risk. Similarly, some tools might emit less vibration than others but be relatively inefficient,
resulting in increased exposure times, higher grip and push forces. Always select the right
tool for the job.
EG
IN
TE
Regular maintenance of tools

5
Correctly installed and smooth running machines will, in time, vibrate as the machinery parts
become worn.
The parts of machinery that contribute to vibration are:

(a)
worn bearings
(b)
dirty fan blades (unbalanced fans)
(c)
worn mountings or worn anti-vibration pads
(d)
misaligned shafts
(e)
unbalanced rotating parts
(f)
loose bolts
QCS 2014
Section
Part
(g)
damaged gear teeth
(h)
blunt cutting tools and blades
(i)
worn suspension components
(j)
incorrect tyre pressures
(k)
damaged seats
(l)
damaged tyres/tracks.
Page 186
The lack of correct maintenance and lubrication will produce increased vibration magnitudes.
Machines should, therefore, be maintained at regular intervals and any detected faults
rectified as soon as possible, thus reducing the risk of vibration problems. Cutting tools or
blades should be kept sharp by maintenance or replacement, as appropriate.
1.2.13.15
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Health issues
EG
Health surveillance
If the findings of the risk assessment, feedback from employees or other sources of
information show that there is a risk to the health of employees because of their use of
vibrating tools, or that employees are exposed to vibration in excess of the exposure action
value, then the Contractor must ensure that the employees are under suitable medical
surveillance where it is appropriate.
A recommended five-stage system of health surveillance for HAV:
An initial questionnaire to be answered when employees first move into any job that involves
exposure to vibration (see Appendix 2).
A short questionnaire answered annually by employees exposed to vibration (see Appendix

3).
A formal HAVS health assessment carried out by a qualified person, for example, an
occupational health nurse.
A formal diagnosis made by a doctor who is qualified in occupational health, and who will
assess fitness for work
Contractors who consider that their employees are at a potential risk from HAVS should
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 187
appoint a person to manage the health surveillance programme and be actively involved in
the initial stages.
4
This person:
(a)
does not need to be medically qualified

(i)
should not attempt diagnosis or be judgemental as to the causes of HAVS with

regard to individual cases
(ii)
should receive training from an occupational health professional
(iii)
must be able to describe the symptoms of HAVS.
The person should have experience of the working environment, be able to gain the trust
and co-operation of employees, and understand the importance of confidentiality.
For WBV, detailed health surveillance is not possible, as there are many non-vibration
causes of back pain. An example of a health monitoring questionnaire is given in Appendix
4.
AL
Keeping records
Health surveillance records should be stored 'in house' in a way that retains their
confidentiality, possibly under the control of the person nominated to manage the health
surveillance system.
Contractors should create a health record for each individual who is exposed to vibration and
keep them for at least as long as they are under health surveillance and possibly longer.
Health records should be kept up to date and should include full details of the employee's
exposure to vibration and any questionnaires that have been completed.
10
It is considered to be good practice if employees are offered a copy of their health records
when they leave the Contractor.
IN
TE
AT
IO
EG
Maintaining blood circulation

Keeping the hands and body warm is essential to help maintain good blood flow to the
fingers and reduce the risk of injury due to HAV.
12
Specific measures might include:
11
(a)
wearing gloves
(b)
using proprietary heating pads for the hands
(c)
using tools with heated handles
(d)
avoiding tools that have pneumatic exhausts that discharge towards the hands
(e)
allowing operatives to warm up before starting work, and helping them to stay warm
(f)
wearing warm, weatherproof clothing in cold, wet areas
(g)
advising those who smoke to stop or cut down (smoking reduces blood circulation)
(h)
massaging and exercising fingers during work breaks.
Work patterns
13
One of the most simple but also one of the most effective ways of minimising risks arising
from vibration is by reducing the time when operatives are actually exposed to vibration.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 188
14
If the use of a vibrating tool is shared between a team of employees, as opposed to it only
being used by one person, the tool may be kept in productive use for the day.
15
Moving any employees not operating the tools at that time onto other areas of work will
considerably lessen the effects of vibration on users, by splitting and rotating the work. This
will also assist the maintenance of blood circulation, thus lessening the chances of injury or
ill health being caused to users by the vibrating tool.
16
Some retro-fit products are available that are designed to protect operators from vibration.
17
Only those approved by the machine manufacturers should be used.
18
The wearing of anti-vibration gloves is not recommended. Problems with anti-vibration

gloves include:
reduced flexibility at the hands resulting in higher grip and push forces and loss of
precise tool control
(b)
the possibility of gloves amplifying the tool vibration in some cases (these cases are
very difficult to predict)
(c)
anti-vibration gloves are only tested in one direction and vibration occurs in three
directions
(d)
field trials of gloves have shown that the vibration isolation materials are not always
durable.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
However, if anti-vibration gloves are to be tried, it is essential that they carry the CE-mark
and are selected by a competent person. One benefit from gloves is that they keep the
hands warm and offer other protection.
20
Therefore, if a Contractor intends to provide items of PPE as part of their strategy to reduce
the risks from vibration in the workplace, it is important that the correct PPE is selected. All
PPE produced or imported by reputable companies is manufactured to British and European
Standards. As with all PPE for use at work, gloves or anti-vibration protection should be
selected by a competent person who can ensure, in discussion with the supplier, that they
meet the appropriate standards. Most leading manufacturers and suppliers will offer advice
on the selection of different types of gloves and other PPE.
21
Ear defenders should be worn to lessen the effects of the noise created by vibrating tools,
and eye protection should be worn to avoid the risks from dust or flying particles.
EG
IN
TE
19
1.2.13.16
Summary
The control of vibration at work makes good business sense for Contractors. Employees who
are able to work are of far greater benefit to the Contractor than those who are off sick as a
result of work-related ill health, or those who cannot work to maximum effect due to HAVS,
VWF or back pain.
In summary, these Regulations require that the Contractor should:

(a)
assess the risks to the health of your employees from vibration, and to effectively plan
for its control
(b)
properly manage the risks
(c)
provide suitable work equipment for your employees, having regard for technical
developments in tool design and vibration suppression
(d)
maintain equipment fully and correctly
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 189
give employees and supervisors information and training on the risks to health caused
by vibration, and on the safe use of the work equipment that is provided
(f)
provide health surveillance/health monitoring where risks cannot be completely

eliminated
(g)
consult employees on your proposals for dealing with vibration.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(e)
QCS 2014
Section
Part
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

1.2.13 Appendix 1
Vibration - actions by Contractor
Page 190
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 191

1.2.13. Appendix 2
Initial hand/arm vibration screening questionnaire
Medical in confidence - when completed
Initial screening questionnaire for workers using hand-held vibrating tools, hand-guided vibrating
machines and hand-fed vibrating machines.
Date ..........................................................................................................................................................
Name ........................................................................................................................................
Occupation ................................................................................................................................................
Address .....................................................................................................................................................
Date of birth ..............................................................................................................................................
AL
Contractor name
.........................................................................................................................................
Y/N
IO
Have you ever used hand-held vibrating tools, machines or hand-fed processes in your job?
AT
If YES:
a) list year of first exposure

........................................................................................................
TE
b) when was the last time you used them? ...........................................................................

(detail work history overleaf)
IN
1 Do you have any tingling of the fingers lasting more than 20 minutes after using vibration
equipment?
EG
2 Do you have tingling of the fingers at any other time?
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
4 Do one or more of your fingers go numb more than 20 minutes after using vibration
equipment?
Y/N
5 Have your fingers gone white* on cold exposure?
Y/N
6 If YES to 5, do you have difficulty re-warming them when leaving the cold?
Y/N
7 Do your fingers go white at any other time?
Y/N
8 Are you experiencing any other problems with the muscles or joints of the hands or arms?
Y/N
9 Do you have difficulty picking up very small objects, e.g. screws or buttons or opening
tight jars?
Y/N
3 Do you wake at night with pain, tingling, or numbness in your hand or wrist?
* Whiteness means a clear discoloration of the fingers with a sharp edge, usually followed by a red
flush.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 192
10 Have you ever had a neck, arm or hand injury or operation?

If so, give details
.......................................................................................................................
Y/N
11 Have you ever had any serious diseases of joints, skin, nerves, heart or blood vessels?
If so, give details
.......................................................................................................................
Y/N
12 Are you on any long-term medication?

If so, give details ...................................................................................................................
Y/N
Occupational history
Dates
Job title
AL
IO
AT
TE
IN
Signed:
EG
I certify that all the answers given above are true to the best of my knowledge and belief.
Return in confidence to:
Date:
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 193

1.2.13. Appendix 3
Annual hand/arm vibration screening questionnaire for health surveillance
Screening questionnaire for workers using hand-held vibrating tools, hand-guided vibrating machines
and hand-fed vibrating machines.
Date ..........................................................................................................................................................
Employee name ........................................................................................................................................
Occupation ................................................................................................................................................
Address .....................................................................................................................................................
AL
Date of birth ..............................................................................................................................................
National insurance number .......................................................................................................................
IO
Contractor name
.........................................................................................................................................
Y/N
AT
Date of previous screening

........................................................................................................................
Have you been using hand-held vibrating tools, machines or hand-fed processes in
your job, or if this is a review, since your last assessment?
(detail work history overleaf)
TE
If NO or more than 2 years since last exposure, please return the form - there is no need to
answer any further questions.
IN
If YES:
Y/N
2 Do you have numbness or tingling of the fingers at any other time?
Y/N
EG
1 Do you have any numbness or tingling of the fingers lasting more than 20 minutes after
using vibrating equipment?
3 Do you wake at night with pain, tingling, or numbness in your hand or wrist?
Y/N
4 Have any of your fingers gone white* on cold exposure?
Y/N
5 Have you noticed any change in your response to your tolerance of working outdoors in
the cold?
Y/N
6 Are you experiencing any other problems in your hands or arms?
Y/N
7 Do you have difficulty in picking up very small objects, e.g. screws or buttons or opening
tight jars?
Y/N
8 Has anything changed about your health since the last assessment?
Y/N
* Whiteness means a clear discoloration of the fingers with a sharp edge, usually followed by a red
flush.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 194
10 Have you ever had a neck, arm or hand injury or operation?

Y/N
If so, give details .....................................................................................................................
11 Have you ever had any serious diseases of joints, skin, nerves, heart or blood vessels? Y/N
12 Are you on any long-term medication?
Y/N
Dates
Job title
AL
IO
AT
TE
IN
Signed:
EG
Return in confidence to:
Date:
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 195

1.2.13 Appendix 4
Sample health monitoring questionnaire
Date of assessment...................................................................................................................................
Employee No/Payroll No ...........................................................................................................................
Name ........................................................................................................................................................
Date of birth ..............................................................................................................................................
Job title .....................................................................................................................................................
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Any change in duties since last questionnaire?
AL
Recent experience
Is there currently any movement or activity that causes you pain in your back?
AT
Please describe the severity of the pain experienced:
IO
Have you suffered any back/neck/shoulder pain in the last 12 months
No pain
Pain as bad as
10
it could be
IN
TE
Note: If severity above 5 indicated, refer on for further advice. However if rank less than 5, but for
three consecutive assessments, then refer for further advice. *
Yes*
No
Yes*
No
Yes*
No
Yes*
No
EG
Have you had to take any medication to deal with the pain experienced?
Have you had to seek medical advice regarding this pain?
Has this back/neck/shoulder pain resulted in time off from work?
Have you had any accidents or injury to the back in the last two years?
Action/advice
Referral for further advice?
Other advice provided?
* Further advice should be sought from an occupational health professional or GP in these cases.
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 196
Signed:
Date:
Return to:
Hand-arm vibration syndrome (HAVS):

is a disorder which affects the blood vessels, nerves, muscles and joints of the hand, wrist and
arm.
can become severely disabling if ignored; and
its best known form is vibration white finger (VWF) which can be triggered by cold or wet
weather and can cause severe pain in the affected fingers.
AT
Signs to look out for in hand-arm vibration syndrome:
IO
AL
tingling and numbness in the fingers
in the cold and wet, fingers go white, then blue, then red and are painful
you can't feel things with your fingers
pain, tingling or numbness in your hands, wrists and arms
loss of strength in hands.
Job title
Dates
EG
IN
TE
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 197

1.2.13 Appendix 5
Estimating exposure to hand arm vibration
You may be able to get suitable vibration data from the equipment handbook, or from the equipment
supplier. See Table 1 for guidance examples of vibration levels which have been measured on
equipment in use. There are also some databases on the internet which may have suitable vibration
data.
AT
IO
AL
If you plan to use the manufacturer's vibration data you should check that it represents the way you
use the equipment (see 'Duties of manufacturers and suppliers') since some data may underestimate
workplace vibration levels substantially. Ask the manufacturer for an indication of the likely vibration
emission of the tool when your employees are using it. If you are able to get vibration data from the
manufacturer which is reasonably representative of the way you use the equipment, it should be
suitable for you to use in estimating your employees' exposure. However, if the only information
available to you is the vibration emission declared in the equipment's handbook, it may be safer to
double this figure before using it for estimating daily exposures.
You also need to check, by observing them, how long employees are actually exposed to the vibration
(i.e. the total daily 'trigger time' with the equipment operating and in contact with the employee's
hand(s)). Employees are unlikely to be able to provide this information very accurately themselves.
You could observe and measure the trigger time over, for example, half an hour and then use the
result to estimate the trigger time for the full shift. Alternatively, where the work task is repetitive, e.g.
drilling large numbers of holes in masonry, you could measure the trigger time when drilling several
holes and multiply the average by the number of holes typically drilled in a shift
Table 1
Some typical vibration levels for common tools
Typical
Highest
5m/s
12 m/s
20 m/s
8m/s
15 m/s
25 m/s
Hammer drills/combi hammers
6m/s
9 m/s
25 m/s
EG
TE
Lowest
5 m/s
18 m/s
40 m/s
8m/s
Demolition hammers
Needle sealers
IN
Road breakers
Angle grinders
Scabblers (hammer type)
4 m/s
Clay spades/jigger picks
16 m/s
Chipping hammers (metal)
18 m/s
Stone-working hammers
Chainsaws
Brushcutters
Sanders (random orbital)
10 m/s
2 m/s
-
6m/s
30 m/s
2
4 m/s
7-10 m/s
If the employee is exposed to vibration from more than one tool or work process during a typical day,
you will need to collect information on likely vibration level and 'trigger time' for each one.
Workplace vibration measurements
If you want to obtain vibration measurements for your own tools you will need to arrange for a
competent person to carry out measurements for you using specialised equipment. Measurement
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 198
results can be highly variable, depending on many factors, including the operator's technique, the
condition of the work equipment, the material being processed and the measurement method. The
competence and experience of the person who makes the measurements is important so that they
can recognise and take account of these uncertainties in producing representative vibration data.
Tool vibration (m/s )
10
12
15
Points per hour

(approximate)
20
30
50
70
100
200
300
450
Multiply the points assigned to the tool vibration by the number of hours of daily 'trigger time' for the
tool(s) and then compare the total with the exposure action value (EAV) and exposure limit value
(ELV) points.
AL
100 points per day = exposure action value (EAV)
400 points per day = exposure limit value (ELV)
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Table 2 Simple 'exposure points' system
QCS 2014
Section
Part
Page 199

1.2.14 Compressed Air
it can enter body orifices such as the mouth, ears and anus, causing severe and often
fatal injuries;
(b)
at high pressure it can penetrate the skin;
(c)
particles or oil carried in an air jet can damage the eyes;
(d)
oil-coke deposits in a system can spontaneously ignite and cause an explosion;
(e)
vessels containing compressed air, even at comparatively low pressure, can explode
violently once their integrity is lost; and
(f)
dirty or 'wet' air can lead to corrosion and blocked valves which may make the system
unsafe.
AL
(a)
This section explains how to minimise the likelihood of such problems, but it does not give
specific advice on air separation plant, the pneumatic transportation of materials through
pipelines or the supply of respirable air. Reference in this section to a particular standard
does not preclude using an equally effective alternative standard.
AT
This section provides for the safe use of compressed air by giving advice to designers,
manufacturers, installers, users and others concerned with or responsible for health and
safety at work (Note: Section 9, Part 14 of the QCS covers air blowers and compression
equipment). There are many ways in which compressed air can be dangerous, for example:
IO
TE
The major hazard associated with compressors is over-pressurisation, which may arise from:
a blocked outlet or some other restriction to flow;
(b)
failure of automatic controls combined with low air consumption;
(c)
compressor malfunction, e.g. overspeeding;
(d)
an external fire near the pressure system; and
(e)
overheating and the build-up of carbonaceous deposits, both of which can lead to fires
or explosions. Although they are rare, fires and explosions can also occur as a result
of oil or oil vapour being ignited in the pressure system.
EG
IN
(a)
Hazards
To mitigate the risks of the hazards listed above occurring, a structured and audited
equipment maintenance plan must be implemented (see standards such as HSG 139).
Furthermore in the use of compressed air for activities other than for respiratory purposes,
the user must make every effort to avoid the risk of harm to themselves or their colleagues.
To this end, compressed air nozzles must be directed away the users and care must be
taken to ensure that they are not directed towards other individuals.
END OF DOCUMENT
QCS 2014

Part 1.03: Working at Heights (Regulatory Document)
Page 1
REGULATORY DOCUMENT ...................................................................... 1
1.3
WORKING AT HEIGHTS ............................................................................ 1
1.3.1
Work at Height ........................................................................................................................... 4
1.3.2
Ladders, Steps and Lightweight Staging ................................................................................. 18
1.3.3
Working Over or Near to Water including Liquid Bodies ......................................................... 32
1.3.4
System Scaffolds and Mobile Towers ...................................................................................... 50
1.3.5
Tube and Fitting Scaffolds ....................................................................................................... 63
1.3.6
Safe Working on Roofs and at Heights .................................................................................... 93
1.3.7
Fall-arrest and Suspension Equipment .................................................................................. 110
1.3.8
Safety with Steelwork ............................................................................................................. 135
1.3.9
Roofing and Fragile Surface Practices .................................................................................. 146
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 2
FORWARD
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 3
Sr. No
QCS 2014
Section No.
Part No.
Part Name
Submittals
7.5.2

Chart
Submittals
7.6.1
10
Health and Safety
All
All
All
11
10
11.4.6
14
14.4

Lifting Tackle
15
Temporary Controls
All
All
All
16
Traffic Diversions
16.1.3
Safety
General
8.1.6
Safety
General
8&9
1.4.12
10

Work
1.6
Safety
11
Deep Foundations
4.9.1.7
Safety Precautions
12
Deep Foundations
13
General
14
Asphalt Plants
15
14
AT
IO
37 & 38
42
Item Name
AL
Page No. Item No.
4&5
1.6
Temporary Fencing
15
7.8.13
Safety Requirements
14.2.2
Safety
General
1.3.2
Health and Safety
17
8.1.9
Safety
18
9.2.5
Safety Requirements
19
10

Survey
4,5&6
10.1.7
Safety Requirements
20
11
11.2.2
Safety
21
General
16
1.2.8
Safety Guards
22
General
19
1.2.16
23
19
Hot Water Storage
5.1.6
Safety
24
21

Installation
7&8
1.1.11
25
21

Installation
14
1.1.23
Safety Interlocks
26
24
General
1.1.4
Scaffolding
27
29
Design Aspects
1.1.5
28
29
2.3.1.5
Safety
29
29
Tunnel
18
4.5.8
Safety Regulations
30
29
Tunnel
19
4.5.9
Fire Prevention
31
29
Tunnel
21
4.6.4
32
29
Concrete Structures
7.1.10
Safety Railing
EG
16
IN
TE
4
7,8, 9 &
10
QCS 2014

Page 4

1.3.1
Work at Height
1.3.1.1 Key points

1
Falls from height are the main source of fatalities and injuries to construction workers.
Falls from 'low heights' (below 2 metres) are the cause of many deaths and injuries.
Working at height is defined as working at any height from which a fall could cause personal
injury.
Work at height requires that such work is:
carried out using appropriate equipment to prevent falls
(c)
organised so that the distance and possible consequence of any fall are minimised
(d)
risk-assessment based
(e)
properly planned and supervised by a competent person(s)
(f)
carried out by competent operatives.
IO
AL
(b)
AT
Accidents that occurred through working at height show that common factors include the
failure of:
all parties to recognise that there was a problem
(b)
management to provide a safe system of work
(c)
management to ensure that the safe system of work was followed
(d)
management to provide adequate information, instruction, training or supervision
(e)
the victim to use appropriate equipment
(f)
management to provide safe plant and equipment.
TE
(a)
Section 14 of the QCS covers roofing and roofworks and Section 24, Part 1 relates to
scaffolding.
EG
Note:
avoided if it is reasonably practicable to do the job another way
IN
(a)
1
The intent of these Regulations is to reduce the number of deaths and injuries resulting from
falls, and so improve the safety performance of the industry.
They cover all circumstances where a person:
(a)
is working at height or
(b)
is gaining access to or egress from such a place of work, either above or below
ground and
(c)
'could fall a distance liable to cause personal injury', that is, any distance whatsoever.
Common examples of tasks carried out within the construction industry classified as work at
height include: working on a scaffold; working from a mobile elevated working platform;
being on the back of a lorry; using cradles or ropes to gain access; working close to an
excavation or a cellar opening; painting at height; working on staging or trestles, and using
ladders or stepladders for cleaning and maintenance tasks. Many other jobs in the
construction industry also involve working at height and are covered by these Regulations.
QCS 2014

Page 5
1.3.1.3 Requirements of these Regulations

1

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
ensure that the work is properly planned, risk assessment-based and that it is carried
out safely.
(e)
supervised.
The use of a ladder or stepladder is not prohibited by these Regulations; however, a greater
degree of consideration must be given to using an alternative means of access before
selecting a ladder or stepladder for use. A decision to use this type of access equipment
must be justified by the findings of a risk assessment that clearly shows that, given all of the
circumstances, it is reasonable to use such equipment rather than safer types of access
equipment.
It is to be hoped that these Regulations will be a further stimulus to architects and designers
to 'design out' work at height for the construction and ongoing maintenance of buildings, or at
least make safe working at height easier to further contribute to safety in the Qatar
construction industry.
AT
IO
AL
TE
Below are the most important definitions from within these Regulations.
'Access and egress' includes ascent and descent.
(b)
'Fragile surface' means a surface which would be liable to fail if any reasonable
foreseeable load were to be applied to it. This will obviously include the weight of a
person or any work equipment or materials.
(c)
'Ladder' includes any fixed ladder or stepladder.
(d)
'Personal fall protection system' means:
(e)
a fall prevention, work restraint, work positioning, fall arrest or rescue system other
than a system in which the only safeguards are collective safeguards, or
EG
IN
(a)
1.3.1.4 Definitions
(f)
rope access and positioning systems.
(g)
'Suitable' means suitable in any respect which it is reasonably foreseeable will affect
the safety of any person.
(h)
'Work at height' means work in any place, including a place at or below ground level,
along with access there to and egress there from (except by a staircase in a
permanent workplace) where, if the measures required by these Regulations were not
taken, a person could fall a distance liable to cause personal injury.
(i)
'Working platform':
(i)
means any platform used as a place of work or as a means of access to or

egress from a place of work
(ii)
includes any scaffold, suspended scaffold, cradle, mobile platform, trestle,

gangway, gantry and stairway which is so used.
QCS 2014

Page 6
1.3.1.5 Reasonably practicable

1
The term reasonably practicable is used in these Regulations. Therefore a Contractor can
look at what the risks in a task involving work at height actually are, and what it would cost to
avoid them. If it would cost a great deal of money or use of other resources to avoid a very
small risk, then it may not be 'reasonably practicable' to avoid it.
1.3.1.6 Contractors Duty

The requirements of these Regulations are:
(a)
on a Contractor to apply to work carried out by their employees and by any other
person(s) under the Contractor's control, to the extent of that control.
(b)
to self-employed persons, together with persons under their control, to the extent of
that control.
(c)
to persons who are not self-employed, in relation to work being carried out for them
and under their control, to the extent of their control.
AL
1.3.1.7 Duty of employees
These Regulations also apply to employees in that they have duties.
Employees must:
AT
IO
report any activity or defect relating to work at height which they know is likely to
endanger the safety of themselves or that of any other person
(b)
use any work equipment or safety device provided for work at height in accordance
with any training and/or instructions which they have received.
Failure by an employee to comply with the above is an offence which could, in the
appropriate circumstances, be dealt with by company discipline procedures.
IN
TE
(a)
EG
1.3.1.8 Organisation and planning of work

It is the responsibility of every Contractor to ensure that all work at height is properly
planned, appropriately supervised and carried out in a safe manner, taking into account
adverse weather conditions that could jeopardise the health and safety of employees.
Planning must include the selection of appropriate work equipment, and planning for any
emergencies or any rescue.
A Contractor will probably meet most of the requirements of this regulation if they have
carried out and properly implemented a suitable and sufficient risk assessment.
1.3.1.9 Competence
1
Contractors must ensure that no person engages in any activity concerning work at height
(including the organisation and planning of the work, and selection of the work equipment),
unless they are trained and competent to do so or, if they are being trained, it must be by a
rd
3 party accredited company, trainees must be supervised by a trained and competent
person.
The level of supervision is important. The supervisor will need to be able to intervene,
physically or by virtue of their authority, if an unsafe situation begins to develop and thereby
rectify the situation or stop the work in progress. The less experience an employee has of
working at height, the greater will be the appropriate level of supervision required.
QCS 2014

Page 7
Competence may be taken to mean:

3
A person who has practical and theoretical knowledge of the appropriate aspects of work at
heights, together with actual experience of what they are to do, which will enable them to
ensure that all necessary planning and assessments have been prepared, and safety
precautions taken, so that the work may be carried out safely, or that they may work safely.
If they will be inspecting work equipment then 'competence' may be taken to mean:
A person who has practical and theoretical knowledge together with actual experience of
what they are to examine, which will enable them to detect errors, defects, faults or
weaknesses that it is the purpose of the examination or inspection to discover; and to assess
the importance of any such discovery.
Training is an element of the competence necessary to work at height. Similarly, those who
deliver such training must also be competent to do so. To assist trainers in this respect
British Standard BS 8454:2006 is to be used. The title of this standard is:
'Code of practice for the delivery of training and education for work at height and rescue.'
AL
IO
1.3.1.10 Avoidance of risks from work at height
Contractors to ensure that risk assessments are carried out.
In addition, these Regulations require that:
AT
TE
'every Contractor shall ensure that work is not

carried out at height where it is reasonably
practicable to carry out the work safely
otherwise than at height.'
This clearly requires the Contractor to carry out a detailed study or assessment of all the
ways in which the work could be carried out. If a way can be found to carry out the work
other than at height, then the Contractor should do so, provided that it is reasonably
practicable.
A good example of how this can be achieved was demonstrated during the construction of
an over-bridge. The bridge deck was completed on flat ground before the spoil was
excavated from below it, thus virtually eliminating the need for working at height and
reducing the height at which people had to work when constructing the upper parts of the
structure.
Ground-level fabrication is another way of eliminating or at least reducing some tasks that
have been traditionally carried out at height.
The fact that falls from height often result in fatal injuries should weigh heavily in any risk
assessment and 'cost versus risk calculation' in deciding if an alternative to working at height
is reasonably practicable.
Where work at height has to take place because there is no reasonably practicable
alternative, these Regulations require the Contractor to take suitable and sufficient
measures, so far as is reasonably practicable, to prevent any person falling a distance likely
to cause injury.
The measures include, but are not limited to:
EG
IN
(a)
ensuring that the work is carried out from an existing (safe) place of work
(b)
ensuring that any means of access to or egress from a place of work using an existing
QCS 2014

Page 8
means it is reasonably practicable to do so safely, and under appropriate ergonomic

conditions.
9
Where these control measures do not eliminate the risk of a fall occurring, then the
Contractor must:
(a)
use suitable and sufficient measures, including the provision of work equipment, to
minimise the distance and consequences of any fall
(b)
or, if it is not reasonably practicable to minimise the distance of a fall, then to minimise
the consequences of a fall
(c)
provide additional training and instructions, or other suitable and sufficient measures,
to prevent, so far as reasonably practicable, any person falling any distance likely to
cause them personal injury.
In order to minimise the distance and/or consequences of any fall, suitable and sufficient
measures may include the use of safety harnesses, safety nets, safety mats and air bags.
11
Where safety harnesses or safety nets are used, a plan must be developed to rescue
anyone who has fallen and must allow for the fact that they may be injured or unconscious.
This is particularly important if someone is suspended in a safety harness. Suspension
trauma can occur very rapidly and result in severe discomfort or even death if the casualty is
not rescued quickly.
12
Ideally, safety nets will be rigged immediately below the place of work and rescue should not
be a problem. Anyone who has fallen into the net should be able to simply clamber out of it,
or an injured/unconscious person easily rescued. However, if any recovery would prove to
be unduly difficult, an alternative method of work which does not involve the use of a safety
harness or nets would be more appropriate.
AT
IO
AL
10
TE
1.3.1.11 Selection of equipment for work at height

In selecting work equipment for use in work at height there is a requirement for the
Contractor to select work equipment or other measures which will give collective protection
to employees as a whole, rather than just individual personal protection for one person.
For example, a guard-rail will protect everyone, whereas a safety harness only protects the
wearer.
These Regulations require that Contractors follow current best industry practice when
selecting equipment for work at height. In particular, Contractors are required to take account
of:
EG
IN
(a)
working conditions and risks to the safety of the persons at work
(b)
access and egress and distances to be negotiated
(c)
distance and consequences of any potential fall
(d)
duration and frequency of use of the work equipment
(e)
need for and ease of evacuation and rescue in any emergency
(f)
any additional risks posed by the installation, use, or removal of the work equipment,
and any evacuation or rescue from it, and
(g)
Any work equipment which is selected must:
(h)
be appropriate for the work intended to be carried out
(i)
have dimensions and load-bearing characteristics
(j)
allow passage of persons and materials without risk
QCS 2014
(k)

Page 9
be the most suitable equipment for avoiding risks while working at height.
Requirements for particular work equipment

These Regulations cover the provision of:
(a)
guard-rails, toe-boards, barriers and similar means of protection
(b)
working platforms such as scaffolds and trestles
(c)
nets, airbags and other collective means of arresting falls
(d)
personal fall protection systems
(e)
work positioning systems
(f)
rope access and positioning systems
(g)
fall arrest systems
(h)
work restraint systems
(i)
ladders.
AL
Guard-rails must be installed to at least 950 mm above the work surface or the edge from
which a person may fall.
Although there is no statutory minimum height for toe-boards, both BS EN 13374 and
TG20:08 recommend a minimum of 150 mm. They must be suitable and sufficient to prevent
the fall of persons or materials. In line with current industry practice it is anticipated that
scaffold boards on edges will continue to be used in most circumstances.
The maximum distance or gap between the top of a toe-board and the mid guard-rail, or
between the mid guard-rail and the top guard-rail is 470 mm.
Where brick guards or similar items are used as a 'means of protection', then they must be:
TE
placed so as to prevent the fall of persons or materials
(b)
of a suitable size and strength
(c)
placed or secured so that they do not become accidentally displaced.
EG
IN
(a)
Guard-rails may be removed on a temporary basis for the movement of materials, provided
that suitable and effective alternative fall protection measures are put in place for the
duration of the work, and that the guard-rails are replaced as soon as possible after the work
is completed.
AT
IO
1.3.1.12 The use of scaffolds

1
All scaffolding works must be conducted in accordance with BS EN 12811-1:2003.

Temporary work equipment. Part 1. Scaffold -Performance requirements and general design.
Additional guidance is produced by the UK National Access and Scaffolding Confederation

(UK NASC), which sells TG20:08 A guide to good practice for scaffolding with tubes and
fittings' 'SG4:05 Preventing falls in scaffolding and falsework and NASC User Guide SG4:
You. Preventing Falls in Scaffolding & falsework 2006. The use of fall arrest equipment
whilst erecting, altering and dismantling scaffolding.
1.3.1.13 The use of ladders, stepladders and trestles

1
Ladders may be used for access to and egress from the place of work, and ladders,
stepladders and trestles may be used to work from, provided that all of the requirements are
properly complied with.
QCS 2014

Page 10
The primary objective of these Regulations is to eliminate work at height (and so the
possibility of falls) and where that is not possible, to ensure that all work at height is carried
out safely and that the work equipment being used, such as ladder or stepladder, is
appropriate, suitable and safe for the work.
In deciding to use a ladder for access or egress, or a ladder, stepladder or trestle for work at
height, the Contractor must have carried out an assessment and found that it is not
reasonably practicable to use any safer means, and that a risk assessment has shown that
the risks from using the ladder, stepladder or trestle are low.
Ladders should be used in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. They must be the
right ladder for the job, positioned at the correct angle, placed on a firm level surface, and
secured or otherwise prevented from slipping or moving. Users should face the ladder at all
times when climbing up or down, have both hands free, and not carry anything that would
interfere with their safety or balance.
Ladders may be used as a place of work, subject to the above, and if it is light work of short
duration. Users should be trained in how to work safely on ladders, for example not to
overreach.
When stepladders are to be used to carry out work they should be of a suitable size and
type. Generally, stepladders should be placed facing the work. They should not be used
side-on to the work in any situation where a sideways load could be applied. Again, the work
should be light and of short duration.
Trestles should be of sound construction, and properly set up on a surface which will bear
their weight as well as any loading of persons or materials. If they are adjustable using
telescopic adjustment, they should have high tensile pins in the adjusters.
If they are fitted with wheels or castors, they should have brakes or other suitable devices on
the wheels or castors.
Trestles should be fitted with guard-rails and toe-boards, where appropriate.
EG
1.3.1.14 Fragile surfaces
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Contractors must ensure that no person passes across or near, or works on, from or near,
any fragile surface when it is reasonably practicable to carry out the work safely without their
having to do so.
Where this requirement cannot be met, then the Contractor must:
(a)
provide and ensure that there are suitable and sufficient platforms, coverings, guardrails or other similar means of support or protection, which must be capable of
supporting any foreseeable load or loading
(b)
where the risk of a fall still remains, take suitable and sufficient steps to minimise the
distance and consequences of any fall should it occur
(c)
place prominent warning notices at the approach(es) to any fragile material
(d)
where such notices cannot be used, ensure that employees (and others as
appropriate) are made aware of the fragile materials by other means.
1.3.1.15 Falling objects

1
Contractors must take suitable and sufficient steps (including prohibiting the throwing down
of materials) to prevent, so far as is reasonably practicable, the fall of any materials or
objects which are likely to cause any injury to any person. 'Suitable steps' will include the use
of such items as brick guards, toe-boards and debris nets.
QCS 2014

Page 11
Where such falls cannot be prevented, or in the interests of safety, suitable and sufficient
measures must be taken to prevent persons from being hit by falling objects or materials.
This will cover the use of protective fans, boarded or roofed walkways and 'exclusion zones'
at ground level.
Materials on scaffolds and working platforms must be stored so that they cannot fall or pose
a risk of injury to anyone by their collapse, overturning or unintended movement.
1.3.1.16 Danger areas

1
In any workplace where there is a risk of any person falling or of persons being struck by
falling objects, then Contractors must take all reasonably practicable steps to prevent any
unauthorised access to that area, and appropriate warning signs must displayed.
1.3.1.17 Inspection of work equipment

Where the safety of work equipment used for working at height, for example a scaffold,
depends upon how it has been installed or assembled, then it must not be used in that place
or elsewhere until after it has been inspected by a competent person. Throughout these
Regulations, 'inspection' means any visual or more rigorous inspection, and any appropriate
testing that a competent person decides is necessary.
All work equipment exposed to conditions causing deterioration that may result in dangerous
situations must be inspected. This will ensure that it remains safe and that any deterioration
can be detected and remedied.
AT
IO
AL
Inspections must take place:

at suitable intervals
after each time that exceptional circumstances have occurred that are liable to have
jeopardised the safety of the work equipment.
In addition to these requirements, any working platform that is used for construction work,
and from which a person could fall more than 2 metres, must not be used unless it has been
inspected in that position within the previous seven days. A mobile working platform (such as
a mobile scaffold tower or a mobile elevating work platform) must have been inspected
within the previous seven days.
Contractors must ensure that no work equipment is used unless they have evidence that the
last inspection required by these Regulations was carried out.
If there is no evidence of the last inspection then the work equipment cannot be used on site
until an inspection is carried out.
These formal inspection(s) should not be regarded as a substitute for any routine pre-use
checks that should be carried out by the user.
What is a 'suitable interval' should be decided by a competent person, based on the results
of risk assessments, and then be reviewed in the light of experience.
10
The purpose of an inspection is to identify if the work equipment is safe to use, and that any
defect or deterioration is detected and repaired. If this is not possible, the work equipment
should be removed from service and its re-use prevented before it becomes an
unacceptable risk.
11
The results of every inspection must be recorded and kept on site until the construction work
is completed, and after that they must be kept at one of the company offices for three
EG
IN
TE
QCS 2014

Page 12
months.
12
Any computer-based system should be secure and cannot be interfered with. Systems may
also be in the form of a 'register'.
1.3.1.18 Inspection of places of work at height

1
So far as is reasonably practicable, every Contractor must ensure that the surface of every
place of work at height, every parapet and any permanent rail or other such fall prevention
measure be inspected visually prior to each use. While there is no requirement to record
such inspections, a simple record would provide evidence that they have been carried out.
1.3.1.19 Schedules
Much of the information contained in the schedules detailed below is virtually identical to
current requirements and/or guidance so if Contractors are actively working to current
standards and guidance then there is little extra for them to do.
AL
Schedule 1
The requirement in this schedule is for existing places of work at height and means of
access or egress to and from such places to be stable, of sufficient size and strength and
with edge protection as necessary. Ladders in particular must rest on stable, strong
surfaces.
A place of work is to be properly constructed, used and maintained so as to prevent the risk
of tripping, slipping or being trapped between it and adjacent surfaces. It should have no
gaps through which materials could fall and injure someone.
AT
IO
IN
This covers the requirements for guard-rails, toe-boards, barriers and similar means of
protection. The top guard-rail must be at least 950 mm above the edge from which any
person might fall.
Schedule 3
EG
TE
Schedule 2
This covers the requirements for working platforms. Part 1 deals with requirements for all
working platforms, and Part 2 covers the additional requirements for scaffolding.
Part 1 Working platforms must be erected and used so that components cannot become
displaced and cause danger to anyone. They must be suitable for the work, and of sufficient
strength and rigidity. If they are altered or modified (by a competent person) they must
remain safe and stable.
Any supporting structure for a working platform must itself be suitable and of sufficient
strength and stable while being erected, used or dismantled. It must be prevented from
slipping or moving, and if it has wheels or castors, they must be capable of being locked or
similar. Working platforms and supporting structures must not be overloaded.
Part 2 As regards the additional requirements for scaffolding, strength and stability,
calculations must be carried out unless it is being assembled in conformity with generally
recognised standard configurations. Design calculations will probably only affect
manufacturers and scaffolding companies, and if prefabricated scaffolding materials are
being used, then following the manufacturers' erection instructions will probably cover
'recognised standard configurations'.
QCS 2014

Page 13
Depending on the complexity of the scaffold, detailed plans may be needed for its erection,
use and dismantling. This may be a standard or generic plan, supplemented with specific
details as appropriate. A copy of the plan must be kept for the use of any persons concerned
with the erection, use or dismantling of the scaffold.
10
The size and layout of the scaffold must be appropriate and suitable for the work to be
performed, and it must also permit the work and passage of persons to happen safely
(although no explicit dimensions or requirements are given in these Regulations). It is
suggested that following the industry guidance on the size and width of working platforms
and the provisions of TG20:08, together with any future guidance produced by the UK
NASC, should be sufficient to demonstrate compliance.
Schedule 4
This schedule covers the requirements for collective safeguards for arresting falls. Collective
safeguards include safety nets, airbags, landing mats and any similar devices or
arrangements. All must be suitable and of sufficient strength to be able to safely arrest or
cushion a fall.
12
These safeguards may only be used:
AL
11
where a risk assessment has shown that the work which is to be done can be carried
out safely while the safeguard is being used, and without influencing its effectiveness
(b)
where the use of safer work equipment is not reasonably practicable
(c)
if a sufficient number of employees (or others) have received adequate training

specific to the safeguard, including rescue procedures.
AT
IO
(a)
A key requirement is that if the safeguard is designed to be attached to a building or a

structure then the safeguard, the structure and all anchorages must be suitable and of
sufficient strength for any foreseeable load that a fall might impose on it.
14
Airbags and landing mats must be suitable for the purpose intended, and they must be
stable.
15
If a safeguard is designed to distort when arresting a fall, it must give sufficient clearance
from the ground or adjacent structures to avoid injury to a person whose fall is being
arrested.
Schedule 5
EG
IN
TE
13
16
This schedule covers the requirements for personal fall protection systems (Part 1), work
positioning systems (Part 2), rope access and positioning techniques (Part 3), fall arrest
systems (Part 4), and work restraint systems (Part 5).
17
Important note. Much of the information in this schedule is quite technical and it is of
paramount importance that employees are, or have been, fully trained on and are competent
in the use of any of the fall protection systems available to them. There is not sufficient detail
within this brief explanation of the schedule to train a person on the requirements, or for
them to gain sufficient knowledge to be regarded as competent.
18
All safety harnesses, lanyards and other fall prevention or fall arrest equipment must comply
with the appropriate British or International Standard.
19
Part 1 deals with the requirements for all personal fall protection systems. See Interpretation
of these Regulations on page 2 of this module for the definition of 'personal fall protection
systems'.
20
Regulations apply to all rope-based activities for work at height, including industrial rope
QCS 2014

Page 14
systems and any other similar activity when carried out as a work activity.
The schedule requires that:
(a)
a personal fall protection system shall only be used if a risk assessment has shown
that the work can be done safely while it is being used, and that the use of other, safer
work equipment is not reasonably practicable
(b)
the user and a sufficient number of others have been trained in its use and in rescue
procedures
(c)
it shall be suitable and of sufficient strength for the purpose for which it is to be used
and will withstand any foreseeable loading
(d)
it fits the wearer and is correctly fitted or worn
(e)
it is designed to minimise injury to the user in the event of a fall, and is such that the
user will not fall or slip out of it should they fall
(f)
it is designed, installed and used so as to prevent unplanned or uncontrolled

movement of the user.
AL
21
Any anchorage point must be suitable and of sufficient strength to support any foreseeable
loading. If designed to do so, the equipment must be securely attached to at least one such
anchorage point when in use.
23
Part 2 deals with the additional requirements for work positioning systems, which may only
be used if:
AT
the system includes a suitable backup system for preventing or arresting a fall, or
(b)
the system includes a line as a back up system and the user is connected to it, or
(c)
where it is not reasonably practicable to do either of the above, then other suitable
measures are taken to prevent or arrest a fall.
TE
(a)
IN
Part 3 deals with the additional requirements for rope access and positioning techniques,
which may only be used if:
it has two separate lines: the working line and a safety line
(b)
the user has a safety harness which is connected to both the working line and the
safety line
(c)
the working line has safe means of ascent and descent, and a self-locking device to
prevent falling
EG
(a)
24
IO
22
(d)
the safety line has a mobile fall protection system which is connected to and travels
with the user
(e)
subject to the type and length of work, and the findings of a risk assessment, it has a
seat with appropriate accessories.
25
However, if a risk assessment has demonstrated that a second line would entail a higher risk
to the user, then, provided that appropriate safety measures have been taken, a single rope
may be used.
26
Part 4 deals with the additional requirements for fall arrest systems. It requires that they
must have a suitable energy absorber (often called a shock absorber and which is usually
either a folded metal strip that deforms, or 'tear away' stitched webbing), or other suitable
means of limiting the force applied to the user's body if they fall. In addition, a fall arrest
system must not be used if there is any risk of a line (a rope or a lanyard) being cut, or where
there is no safety zone or clear zone to allow for any swinging or pendulum effect after a fall,
or in a way which hinders the system's safety performance or makes its use unsafe.
27
Part 5 deals with the additional requirements for work restraint systems (often a safety
QCS 2014

Page 15
harness with a very short lanyard), and requires that they are designed so that they are used
correctly to prevent the user from getting into a position where they could fall.
Schedule 6 Requirements for ladders
28
Contractors must ensure that a ladder or stepladder is only used for work at height if a risk
assessment has shown that the use of more suitable work equipment is not justified because
of the low risk and the short duration of the work, or because of existing features on site that
cannot be altered.
29
The remainder of the schedule is in line with current industry best practice and does not
contain any further new or changed requirements.
30
The requirements are:
(b)
the ladder to be strong enough for loads which may be put on it
(c)
the ladder to be placed so that it is stable during use
(d)
the suspended ladder to be attached in a secure manner so that it does not swing
(e)
portable ladders to be prevented from slipping by being secured at or near their top or
bottom, or with anti-slip or stability devices, or other effective means
(f)
access ladders to be long enough to provide a handhold when getting off at the top,
unless other handholds have been provided
(g)
sections on interlocking or extension ladders to be prevented from movement while in

use
(h)
mobile ladders to be prevented from moving before being stepped on
(i)
where reasonably practicable, rest platforms to be provided where a run of ladders

rises a vertical distance of more than 9 metres
(j)
ladders to be used in such a way that a secure handhold and secure support are
always available to the user
(k)
the user can maintain a safe handhold while carrying a load.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
the surface on which a ladder rests to be stable and of sufficient strength
This last point is qualified for stepladders in that:
31
(a)
'in the case of a stepladder the maintenance of a handhold is not practical when a load is
carried, and a risk assessment has demonstrated that the use of a stepladder is justified
because of the low risk and the short duration of the work.'
Schedule 7
32
This schedule states the details to be recorded.
33
The details are:

(a)
The name and address of the person for whom the inspection was carried out.
(b)
The location of the work equipment inspected.
(c)
A description of the work equipment inspected.
(d)
The date and time of the inspection.
(e)
Details of any matter identified that could give rise to a risk to the health or safety of
any person.
(f)
Details of any action taken as a result of any matter identified in 5.
QCS 2014
(g)
Details of any further actions considered necessary.
(h)
The name and position of the person making the report.
Page 16
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Reports of inspection have to be kept on site until construction work is completed and then at
the Contractor's offices for three months.
34

QCS 2014


1.3.1 Appendix
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Work at height flowchart
Page 17
QCS 2014

Page 18

1.3.2
Ladders, Steps and Lightweight Staging
1.3.2.1 Key points

Ladders, stepladders and lightweight staging are all easily transported means of access to
work at height. They can all be used safely in certain conditions.
The danger comes when any of them is used for a job for which it is not suitable; this
particularly applies to ladders and stepladders.
Although newer and safer equipment is available, these still present serious risks if not used
correctly.
The nature and duration of the job will be significant factors in determining the most
appropriate type of access equipment to use.
Falls from low heights, that is from a height below 2 metres, are the cause of many fatalities
and major injuries.
All work at height must be subjected to a risk assessment.
AL
IO
Ladders, stepladders and trestles (or lightweight staging) are among the most commonly
used pieces of access equipment on site and, perhaps, the most misused. Many
construction workers have used them at some time and it is essential that safe working
practices should be followed if accidents are to be avoided.
Most ladder accidents occur because the ladder has not been secured correctly at the top or
bottom and then slips. A person climbing the ladder while carrying a load or overreaching
and overbalancing often makes an unsecured ladder unstable. Ladders that are badly
placed, or set on an uneven or unstable base, are also a contributory cause of accidents.
There are many proprietary devices designed to stabilise the top or bottom of a ladder and
uneven ground can be accommodated with adjusters bolted to the stiles.
Contractors are to provide safe access and a safe system of work. In certain circumstances particularly where work at height is prolonged, difficult or requires freedom of movement and
the use of both hands - scaffolding, as opposed to ladders or stepladders should be used.
At the same time it must provide both safe access and a safe workplace.
All ladders, stepladders and trestles are 'work equipment' for the purposes of these
Regulations and, as such must be safe, suitable for the job and well-maintained. Before any
work at height is carried out, a risk assessment should be made.
Guard-rails and toe-boards are required on all working platforms where a risk assessment
indicates that any person would be injured as a result of the fall.
EG
IN
TE
AT
1.3.2.3 Work at Height

1
These Regulations require that Contractors should:

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
ensure that the work is properly planned, risk assessment-based and that it is carried
QCS 2014

Page 19
out safely
(e)
supervised.

assessment of every work activity so as to identify any risks which might be encountered
during the work, and which might affect the health and safety of employees or of any other
persons.
put control measures into place to reduce the risks to health and safety arising out of the
The Contractor must provide employees with clear and understandable information on any
risks that exist in carrying out the work and on any control measures that are in place to
reduce those risks.
An employee, in turn, has a duty under these Regulations to follow any instructions or
training given and to tell their Contractor of any work situation that presents a risk to
themselves or others, or of any matter which affects the health and safety of themselves or
any others.
If carrying out work at height cannot be avoided, the risk assessment must determine the
most appropriate type of access equipment for the job to be carried out.
Factors that will enable this decision to be made include:
AT
IO
AL
the nature of the work to be carried out
(b)
the time that it will take to complete the work
(c)
keeping the risk of anyone falling low.
IN
TE
(a)
EG

These Regulations require that Contractors supply work equipment that is safe and suitable
for the job, ensures that the equipment is maintained and kept in good order, and that
employees are properly trained in its use.
employees, the use of the equipment must be restricted to specified, trained and competent
workers.

1
These Regulations require that Contractors, as far as reasonably practicable, avoid the need
for employees to carry out any manual handling operations which involve a risk of their being
injured. Where this is not possible, the Contractor must make an assessment of the work to
be carried out and take appropriate steps to reduce the risk of injury to employees.
All employees must follow any safe system of work, including using any work equipment (or
personal protective equipment) that is provided by the Contractor.
1.3.2.7 General
1
Contractor must provide employees with adequate information, instruction, training and
QCS 2014

Page 20
supervision so that they can carry out their work safely and without risk to their health,
1.3.2.8 General guidelines for the safe use of ladders

1
A ladder must not be used as an access to, or egress from, a workplace unless it is
reasonable to do so taking into account the work being carried out, its duration, and the risks
to the safety of any person arising from the use of the ladder.
Schedule 6 requires that a ladder should only be used in a low risk situation when a risk
assessment has shown that the use of alternative equipment is not justified. This is when:
the ladder is to be used for a very short time, or
(b)
the work is of a light nature
(c)
there are aspects of the site that cannot be changed.
AL
A ladder must be of the correct class for the intended use, of sufficient strength, suitable for
the job that is to be done, and be so erected that it does not become displaced.
Ladders should be set on a firm, level base, strong enough to support the ladder and
any load that may be placed upon it.
(b)
There should be no makeshift use of bricks, blocks or timber packing, etc. to gain
extra height or to level up the stiles.
(c)
Ladders should be sited clear of any excavation, and in such a position that they are
not causing a hazard, or placed anywhere they may be struck or dislodged. Barriers
should be placed around the foot as added protection where necessary.
(d)
Ladders should not be placed on or leant against any fragile surface or fitting.
(e)
Proprietary stand-off devices should be used where the point of rest would otherwise
be unsuitable, for example, against plastic gutters.
(f)
Ladders should be set, as near as possible, at an angle of 75 (a ratio of 1 unit of

length out to 4 units of length up).
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
(a)
(g)
Ladders must not be secured by their rungs; lashings should be around the stiles, or
proprietary ladder ties should be used.
QCS 2014

Page 21
Lashing or clamping, at the mid-point of a ladder, will make it safer and help to prevent
sway, particularly with ladders that are over 6 metres in height.
(i)
A ladder must not be placed in such a position that any adjacent scaffold tubes
interfere with the footing of the person on the ladder.
(j)
If the vertical height of a ladder is over 9 metres, safe landing areas or rest platforms
should be provided at suitable intervals.
(k)
Only one person should be climbing a ladder at any one time.
(l)
Always face the ladder when climbing or descending it.
(m)
Footwear worn by persons using a ladder must be suitable for maintaining a

satisfactory grip.
(n)
When climbing or descending a ladder, both hands must be kept free for holding onto
the ladder and free of any other items.
(o)
Tools and materials required for work can be carried in a shoulder bag, on a special
belt, or be hoisted up or lowered afterwards.
(p)
When using a ladder, secure handholds and secure support must always be available.
(q)
Tools not in use should be hooked or otherwise secured to the ladder.
(r)
The top of the ladder must not be repositioned, by jumping, while standing on the
rungs.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(h)
(s)
When a ladder must be left standing after working hours, a board should be lashed
between the rungs to prevent unauthorised access; ideally, they will be removed.
(t)
Ladders must extend at least 1 metre (approximately 5 rungs) above the landing
place, unless an alternative, secure handhold is available.
(u)
As far as possible, ladders must be placed so that there is adequate space behind
each rung for a proper foothold.
(v)
Overreaching leads to overbalancing. The most satisfactory method for working safely
on a ladder is for both thighs and hips to be kept between the stiles, and one hand
always holding the ladder. The working position should be not less than five rungs
from the top of the ladder.
(w)
Ladders must be properly maintained, of sound construction and materials, free from
any defects and kept in good repair. If a rung is missing or damaged, the ladder must
not be used.
(x)
Ladders must be supported on each stile and prevented from sagging or swaying.
(y)
All ladders should, in the interests of safety, be securely fixed or lashed to prevent
QCS 2014

Page 22
slipping, either near the top or, if this is not possible, at the bottom.
Ladders must not be painted or otherwise treated in any way that would hide or
conceal any defects. They may be treated with a transparent coating such as varnish,
shellac or clear preservative. It should be remembered that some timber preservatives
might not be compatible with aluminium fittings.
(aa)
Ropes or lashings which are used to secure a ladder must be in good condition.
(bb)
Ladders should only be used as a working place for light work, e.g. maintenance or
painting for short periods. Where longer periods of work are anticipated, other access
equipment, such as trestles or scaffolds, should be used.
(cc)
No part of a building should be used to support a ladder unless it is safe to do so and

strong enough for the purpose.
(dd)
BS EN 12811-1 Scaffolds. Performance requirements and general design (Schedule

6) and good practice
TE
AT
IO
AL
(z)
IN
'Footing' ladders:
is generally ineffective in preventing most types of ladder incidents
(ff)
must only be used as a last resort, for example when initially climbing a ladder to tie it
off, and only if a risk assessment shows a low risk of a fall
(gg)
is only effective on short ladders.
EG
(ee)
The person on the ladder must keep their weight between the stiles (no over-reaching or
straddling onto adjacent structures).
Depending upon circumstances, it may be possible to improve ladder stability by using antislip, stand-off devices towards the top and/or anti-slip feet under the stiles.
If possible, seek manufacturer's guidance with regard to extra loading imposed by the weight
of two persons on the ladder.
1.3.2.9 Types of ladder

1
Note: Whichever of the following types of ladder is to be used, it should be Class 1 (suitable
for industrial use.
Standing ladders: single stage ladders up to 5 metres or 6 metres in length.
Pole ladders: a variant of the above type, but with the stiles having been made from a long
whitewood pole cut down the middle to give even strength and flexibility. Lengths can vary
up to a maximum of 10 metres.
QCS 2014

Page 23
The practice of shortening a pole ladder to fit a particular situation should be discouraged.
The only time shortening a pole ladder is acceptable is when an end is damaged. Care must
be taken to ensure that the fabric of the ladder remains stable if a tie wire is removed.
Extension ladders: these consist of two or three sections coupled together and extended by
sliding over or inside each other.
Longer multi-stage ladders are extended by means of a rope and pulley. A three-section
ladder, fully extended, may reach over 16 metres.
Stepladders: these are of various types, have flat rectangular treads and are usually free
standing.
Roof ladders (for pitched roofs): a ladder with a hook on the top end of it for securing over
the ridge of a roof.
Aluminium ladders: various types are available. Their main advantage is that they are light
and weather resistant. They can be prone to slipping at the base if the rubber or wooden feet
are not properly maintained.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.3.2.10 Classes of ladder (British Standards 1129: 1990, 2037: 1994 and BS EN 131)
10
Portable ladders, steps, trestles and lightweight staging are covered by BS 1129: 1990,
BS2037: 1994 and BS EN 131.
11
A duty rating indicates their suitability of use.
12
Class 1: Industrial. Heavy duty - can be used frequently and in the tough conditions that
can be found on site. These are the only ladders that are recommended for use on site.
13
Class 2: Light trades. Medium duty - can be used only in good conditions. Suitable for light
trade purposes. (This class of ladder is now covered by BS EN 131.)
QCS 2014

Page 24
14
Class 3: Domestic. Light duty - suitable only for domestic and household use.
15
Class 2 and 3 ladders are not recommended for general use on site.
16
All ladders should be marked with a unique identification number and the class or duty
rating.
1.3.2.11 Inspection of ladders

Every ladder should be inspected on a regular basis and should carry an identification mark,
as detailed above. A written record should be kept of all inspections, defects and repairs.
Ladders should not be used if defective in any way and, if damaged beyond repair, they
should be destroyed.
During the inspection of ladders, attention should be paid to the following points.
There should be no:
damaged or worn stiles, particularly at the head or foot of the ladder
(b)
broken, missing, loose or worn rungs
(c)
mud or grease on the rungs
(d)
rungs supported solely by nails, screws or spikes
(e)
movement in the rungs or stiles
(f)
decayed timber, or the corrosion of fittings
(g)
insecure tie wires
(h)
warping, sagging or distortion; check that the ladder stands firmly.
TE
AT
IO
(a)
The condition of any ropes and cords, along with pulleys, hinges and any other fittings,
should be checked for fraying to ensure that they are all secure with no sign of damage.
EG
IN
AL
1.3.2.12 Carrying a ladder

1
A short ladder may be carried comfortably by

having it vertical against the shoulder and
holding one of the lower rungs, using the other
hand to hold the stile. Longer ladders should be
carried horizontally by two people. Care should
be taken in negotiating comers and obstacles.
QCS 2014

Page 25
Ladders must not be taken into the vicinity of overhead power lines unless a permit to work
has been issued. Even then, extreme care should be taken with the head of the ladder so
that it is not allowed to get close to the overhead power lines.
Timber ladders generally do not conduct electricity (unless wet) but aluminium ladders are
extremely conductive, and are dangerous to use in close proximity to overhead lines.
1.3.2.13 Erecting and lowering ladders

The procedure for erecting a ladder, when the ladder is flat on the ground, is as follows.
One person stands on the bottom rung while the other takes position at the head of the
ladder and takes hold of the top rung, raising the ladder off the ground.
Then, rung by rung, that person moves towards the foot of the ladder, lifting as they go. The
person at the foot grasps the lower rungs as soon as possible and draws the ladder towards
them, steadying it at the same time.
The sequence is reversed when lowering.
Short ladders may be raised by one person placing the foot of the ladder against a wall or
fixture and pushing the ladder upwards starting at the top, walking, under-running and raising
the ladder as they go.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.3.2.14 Extension ladders

1
Extension ladders are raised one section at a time and slotted into position. The minimum
recommended overlap on extension ladders is as follows:
QCS 2014

Closed length
Approx. no. of rungs
Under 5 metres
5-6 metres
2
3
Page 26
Overlap of rungs
under 18
18-23
over 6 metres
over 23
Latching hooks must be properly engaged.
Ordinary ladders must never be lashed, tied or spliced together in an attempt to make
an extension ladder.
1.3.2.15 Roof ladders

Roof ladders (shown below) should be erected as follows.
First, a standing ladder is erected for access to the eaves of the roof. It should extend at
least 1 metre or five rungs above the eaves of the roof and be properly secured, but not to
the guttering, downpipes or any other plastic or fragile material.
The roof ladder should then be brought up and pushed up the roof on its wheels, with the
anchor hook or ridge hook uppermost.
Once over the ridge, the ladder is turned over and the hook engaged. It may be necessary to
secure the ladder with a rope if ridge tiles are unsound.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.3.2.16 Storage of ladders

1
Ladders, especially if made of wood, deteriorate when exposed to the weather for prolonged
periods. Where indoor storage is not available, they should be covered or stored in a
protected, well ventilated position. They should not be exposed to steam pipes, boilers or
other sources of radiant heat.
Ladders should be stored on racks, supported on the stiles only, with sufficient supports to
prevent them from sagging. They must not be hung from the rungs or stiles.
Aluminum ladders should be kept away from wet lime or cement, which may corrode them.
Pulleys and hinges should be lubricated and the condition of ropes and cords checked.
Any damage or deterioration should be noted and made good before further use.
QCS 2014

Page 27
1.3.2.17 Stepladders and alternatives

Stepladders
Stepladders are not to be used if a fall from one would cause the user to be injured
(based upon a risk assessment).
(b)
The treads (or steps), hinges, bolts, screws and fixings must all be sound and secure.
(c)
Retaining cords or hinges should be of equal length and in good condition.
(d)
The stepladder must be stable when open and standing on a level base.
(e)
The legs of Stepladders should be positioned as far apart as the retaining cord or
hinges allow, with all four legs firmly and squarely on the ground.
(f)
Wherever possible, the stepladder should be positioned so that the person climbing it
is facing the work to avoid twisting and possible instability.
(g)
Unless the design permits, the knees of the person using the stepladder should be
kept below the top step.
(h)
The user should not work from the top third of a stepladder unless it has been
designed for this purpose.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
If it is not practicable to maintain a handhold when a load is being carried, a risk assessment
must demonstrate that the use of the stepladder is justified because of:
(a)
the low risk, and
(b)
the short time the stepladder is to be in use.
TE
Many of the general rules for the safe use of ladders also apply to Stepladders. In addition,
the following points should be considered.
IN
Podium steps/mini mobile towers
The use of this type of equipment is preferred to

Stepladders in most circumstances as it
provides a small but stable working platform,
complete with guard-rails. This type of access
equipment has the advantage over a stepladder
in that it allows the user to work in a safer
manner facing any side of the working platform
without it becoming unstable.
Podium steps and mini towers are lightweight in

construction and some types will fold flat for
transportation and are designed to be wheeled
through a standard-sized door. Some types of
this access equipment can be fitted with
outriggers to increase stability.
Whilst providing a high degree of safety in most

situations, there are a number of specific
hazards with the use of this type of equipment
and the Contractor should ensure the following
precautions are considered in selecting and using podium steps.
EG
(a)
There are many differing types of podium steps with different arrangements of use.
Some are just wheeled platforms and others have specific installation requirements.
The instructions for each individual podium must be available and understood by the
QCS 2014

Page 28
user.
(b)
The height of the working platform should be assessed: too low and the user will not
reach; too high and the user may be inclined to work from the steps rather than the
platform.
(c)
Where adjustable height platforms are in use, ensure that the user is trained in how to
adjust the platform and handrails to ensure protection.
(d)
Brakes must be used whilst the platform is in use and users must not be permitted to
pull themselves along from the top of the podium.
(e)
Podium steps, like any other access equipment, must have an individual identifying
mark and be subject to frequent inspection.
1.3.2.18 Lightweight staging and trestle scaffolds
AL
Split head trestles and trestle frames

These older type of trestle either consisted of two or more support-trestles supporting
scaffold boards to form a working platform, or were made up using four split head trestles
with the forks of the split head trestle taking a bearing timber (or two scaffold boards on
edge) with boards or staging laid on top.
Both split head trestles and telescopic frames need a sound, level base.
Where a trestle system is used in which the positioning of trestle supports is variable, they
should comply with the following criteria:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
(b)
trestle supports must be spaced at the following distances apart:

(i)
1 metre when using 32 mm thick boards
(ii)
1.5 metres when using 38 mm thick boards
(iii)
2.6 metres when using 50 mm thick boards.
The amount that the end of any board may overhang any trestle should not exceed
four times (4 x) the thickness of the board used for the working platform, unless it is
effectively secured to prevent it from tipping.
This type of trestle is now unacceptable in most circumstances because of the inability to fix
guard-rails or toe-boards to the 'working platform' and the tripping hazard caused by boards
that overlap. There may be rare circumstances where they can still be used safely, for
example:
(a)
where a fall is not possible because the working platform is completely and tightly
QCS 2014

Page 29
enclosed by the walls of a room or other solid structure

(b)
the working height and the surrounding floor surface are such that a fall could not
result in a personal injury.
Modern trestle systems

More modern trestles are similar in many ways to system scaffolding, including the fact that
guard-rails and toe-boards are an integral part of the working platform. The spacing of the
supports is fixed by the system design which enables platform boards to fit snugly without
overhang or overlapping.
All lightweight staging should be marked with the maximum permitted distributed loading.
This can be done by either specifying the maximum number of persons, allowing for their
tools and equipment, or by specifying the maximum safe weight.
Guidelines are as follows:
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
trestles must be set on a firm, level base
(b)
only one working platform is installed
(c)
guard-rails, barriers and toe-boards are required where a fall would cause a personal
injury, as indicated by a risk assessment
(d)
EG
(a)
where fitted, guard-rails should conform to the standard outlined and dimensions
specified in these Regulations
(e)
if a guard-rail is removed, for example to allow materials to be stacked on the working

platform, the guard-rail must be replaced as soon as practicable
(f)
scaffold boards used on trestles to form a working platform must be of a consistent

length and of equal thickness
(g)
the trestle assembly must be completely stable when in use
(h)
a safe means of access to the working platform must be provided, for example a
ladder that is of sufficient length, properly positioned and securely lashed
(i)
where locating pins are used, they should be of the correct size and type and not
rebar off-cuts or other makeshift items.
QCS 2014

Page 30

1.3.2 Appendix
Safety checklist
Ladders
Is a ladder the right piece of access equipment to be using?
Are ladders only used for very light work of short duration, or access?
Are all ladders properly stored and inspected regularly?
10
Are the ladders that are being used suited to the purpose or use to which they are being put?
11
Are there any damaged, loose or missing parts?
12
Are the rungs of ladders clean and free of mud or grease?
13
Are sufficient persons available to handle and place ladders properly and safely?
14
Are ladders set on firm and level ground?
15
Are ladders properly erected and secured?
16
If there is not an alternative suitable hand-hold, does the ladder project sufficiently above the
landing place?
17
Is there the correct overlap on extension ladders?
18
Are the methods for raising tools or materials safe?
19
Are ladders placed so that the work does not involve overreaching?
20
Is suitable footwear that will give a satisfactory grip and prevent slipping being worn?
21
Are ladders set at the correct angle of 75?
22
Are ladders clear of excavations or other potential hazards?
23
Are ladders being leant against or secured to any fragile material?
24
Are all lashings used of sound material, and made properly secure?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 31
Stepladders
25
Is the stepladder level and stable?
26
Is it open to the full extent of the retaining cords or hinges?
27
Are steps set at right angles to the workface wherever possible?
28
Are the user's knees below the top step?
29
Could the person using the stepladder fall a distance that would cause an injury?
30
Is the person using the ladder not using the top third?
Trestles
Are trestles, and any boards that are being used with the trestles, safe, undamaged and of
adequate strength?
32
Are the trestles set on a firm and level base?
33
Is the working platform of a sufficient width for the job in hand?
34
Are guard-rails and toe-boards fitted to trestle platforms if indicated as being necessary by a
risk assessment?
35
Where indicated as necessary by a risk assessment, is the trestle tied to the adjacent
structure?
36
Is a safe ladder access provided?
37
Is the maximum permitted distributed load indicated and complied with?
AT
IO
AL
31
Podium steps
Are the podium steps of sufficient size and the correct type for the task?
39
Have the operators been supplied with and fully understood the supplier's instructions for
use?
40
Are all of the components available and in good condition?
41
Is the floor surface sound and of a level construction?
42
Are brakes provided, in working order and used?
43
Do all podium steps carry unique identifying marks and are they subjected to frequent
inspection?
EG
IN
TE
38
Management responsibilities
Management should:
44
Understand these Regulations and guidance on work at height that is appropriate to ladders,
stepladders, podium steps, trestles and other access equipment
45
consider whether any safer system of work or access can be provided
46
know how and where access equipment is being used by employees
47
install permanently fixed ladders wherever possible
48
provide any necessary safety equipment
49
provide adequate storage for ladders and access equipment
50
institute a system of proper inspection and the keeping of records for all ladders and access
equipment
51
ensure that all ladders, stepladders, podium steps, trestles and boards are of sound design
and manufacture, and kept in good condition
QCS 2014

Page 32
52
ensure that all users have been properly instructed and trained, and are competent to use
the equipment safely and without risk to themselves or others
53
provide proper supervision of all employees who are using any form of access equipment.

1.3.3
Working Over or Near to Water including Liquid Bodies
1.3.3.1 Key points

Working over water will often, although not always, involve working at height. The potential
risks arising from both hazards will have to be managed.
Ideally, work will be carried out from a stable working platform that may prevent an
unplanned fall into the water.
Where there is a risk of someone accidentally entering the water, appropriate rescue
equipment and people who are competent to use it must be available.
Working over water may result in a greater emphasis on the wearing of PPE than other types
of work at height.
Suddenly falling fully clothed into water may induce shock and an increased risk of drowning
if appropriate PPE is not worn.
Rescue drills should be planned and practiced.
If the use of a rescue boat is not appropriate, an established hierarchy of rescue methods
should be followed; if a (powered) rescue boat is appropriate, it must only be operated by
someone trained in rescue procedures.
Working near to deep water, for example adjacent to Mariner Quays can be as dangerous as
working over water if appropriate control measures are not put in place.
Working over or near water can pose risks to health as well as safety.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
If employees have to work over or in the vicinity of water, a safe system of work must be
developed, usually formalised in a method statement, and all those involved must be made
aware of the risks and informed of the protective measures that have been put in place.
Equally important is the provision of proper rescue equipment and suitable emergency
procedures, together with the information and training necessary to use the equipment and
respond effectively in an emergency. While every possible effort must be made to prevent
people falling into the water, it is essential to make sure that anyone who does fall in can
swim or at least is sufficiently confident in water to float (assisted by a buoyancy aid) without
panicking. Recovery of the person from the water must take place as quickly as possible.
EG

1
Contractors must do everything that is reasonably practicable to provide information,

instruction, training and supervision; must provide a safe place and safe systems of work
with safe access and egress; and must ensure provision is made for safe use and handling
of materials, etc.

1
Every Contractor must make a suitable and sufficient assessment of risks to the health and
safety of employees (and others) arising out of work activities and introduce risk control
measures as are appropriate to reduce the risks to health and/or safety to an acceptable
QCS 2014

Page 33
level.
2
In the context of working over or near water, the risk control measures should include:
(a)
ideally, ensuring that it is not possible for anyone to fall into water, by preventing falls
(b)
where that is not reasonably practicable, arresting any falls that do occur, providing
there is sufficient clearance height for fall arrest measures to be effective or, where
that is not reasonably practicable
(c)
ensuring that anyone who does enter the water is rescued in the shortest possible
time
(d)
issuing appropriate PPE such as immersion suits and life jackets
(e)
making sure that appropriate rescue equipment and trained staff are available
(f)
providing information, instruction and training to those persons who have to work over
or near water.
The following summary of these Regulations is limited to their requirements as far as they
apply to working over or near to water.
IO
These Regulations require that when, during construction work, a person is liable to fall into
liquid (with a risk of drowning) appropriate measures are taken to:
prevent falls and to minimise the chance of drowning should a fall occur
(b)
ensure that rescue equipment is provided, maintained and used when necessary, to
enable a prompt rescue
(c)
ensure the safe transportation of anyone to and from the place of work, when they are
transported by water
(d)
ensure that vessel used to convey people to and from a place of work is not
overcrowded or overloaded.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
The Regulations also place duties on:

(a)
(b)
(c)
all contractors to ensure the competence of anyone working under their control
AT
All construction projects

2
AL
the client to provide adequate pre-construction information on site conditions that

might adversely affect health and safety, including in the context of this section, any
known hazards arising out of the presence of water
designers, by way of their designs, to eliminate the hazards or reduce the risks arising
out of construction activities, so far as is reasonably practicable, including in the
context of this section, working adjacent to, or over water.
All Projects
4
Duty holders must:

(a)
ensure that the Engineer promptly provides the Contractor and all other subcontractors with health and safety information relevant to the site
(b)
take the information supplied by the Engineer and incorporate it into the construction
phase health and safety plan
(c)
must take reasonable steps to ensure that everyone engaged in construction work is
provided with a suitable site induction and adequate other training that is relevant to
what they are required to do.
QCS 2014

Page 34

1
On many occasions, working over water will also involve working at height.
Contractors are required to:

avoid the need for working at height, where reasonably practicable
(b)
when it cannot be avoided, select the most appropriate equipment to prevent falls
(c)
reduce the distance and consequences of any falls that do occur
(d)
ensure that all work at height is properly planned, based upon a risk assessment and
carried out safely by competent persons
(e)
ensure that equipment used for working at height is appropriately selected and
inspected as specified
(f)
ensure that measures are taken to prevent anyone being injured by falling objects.
AL
(a)
In the context of these Regulations, common-use personal protective equipment (PPE) will
include such items as life jackets, safety harnesses, lanyards and immersion suits.
Where risks to health and safety cannot be adequately controlled by other means,
Contractors must:
AT
IO
identify appropriate and suitable PPE that will control the risks to an acceptable level
(b)
provide the PPE free of charge to those who are at risk
(c)
provide the users of the PPE with adequate instruction and training with regard to:
(a)
the risks that the PPE will protect against
(ii)
the purpose for which it has been issued and the manner in which it is to be
used
(iii)
maintaining the PPE in good working order.
EG
IN
TE
(i)
The Contractor must take all reasonable steps to ensure that employees use the PPE
provided as directed.
Employees for their part must:
(a)
use any PPE that has been issued as instructed and in accordance with any training
received
(b)
return the PPE to any storage area that has been assigned to it, after use
(c)
report any loss or defect in the PPE to the Contractor.
Risk areas
5
Hazardous areas include docks, locks, canals, wharves, lakes, ponds (natural and artificial),
reservoirs, water-filled pits, sewage ponds, slurry ponds, rivers, streams, swimming pools,
water-holding tanks (if of sufficient size) and the sea. Working alongside or near the water's
edge can be as hazardous as working over the water. Extra care is needed in the vicinity of
culverts, outfalls and other discharge points, and at coastal sites, where drag or undertow
due to tidal conditions may be encountered.
Leptospirosis (Weil's disease)

6
When working over water, consideration must be given to the health implications arising from
QCS 2014

Page 35
the accidental entry into contaminated water.

7
The possibility of contracting leptospirosis whilst working over or near to rivers or streams
must be considered.
Accidental entry into water

Every effort must be made to eliminate the risk of accidental entry into water. This will
involve protecting employees against:
falls from heights (including a failure to use the fall prevention or arrest measures
provided)
(b)
trips and slips from low level
(c)
persons being knocked over by moving objects, e.g. crane loads
(d)
loss of balance, e.g. caused by high winds, particularly when handling sheet materials
(e)
failure or absence of barriers
(f)
failure of ropes or lines
(g)
rising swell or swell from passing waterborne traffic
(h)
horseplay
(i)
being under the influence of prescribed drugs.
IO
Hazards of falling into the water
The most immediate danger is of drowning. Causes or contributory factors include:

shock of sudden immersion in cold water
(b)
weight of waterlogged clothing
(c)
incapacity following injury after striking an object during the fall or in the water
(d)
fatigue or hypothermia where rescue is not immediate.
TE
(a)
IN
AL
(a)
AT
EG
1.3.3.8 Prevention of falls
Scaffolds and platforms

1
Where reasonably practicable, a stable working platform such as a scaffold is the best
method of ensuring safe working over water. It should be designed for the task so that it is
stable and of
sufficient
size
for
the
proposed
work.
Guard-rails and toe-boards should be fitted to prevent falls of persons or materials and it
QCS 2014

Page 36
may be advisable to fit double height toe-boards, double guard-rails and brick guards or
nets. Boards should be lashed to prevent high winds causing displacement.
If a ladder is used for access to the scaffold or platform, it should be of sufficient length,
extend at least five rungs above the stepping off point, be properly secured (preferably at the
top) and set at the correct angle. If it is necessary for a long access ladder to be used,
landing places should be provided every 9 metres. There should be a proper system for the
inspection of ladders.
AT
IO
AL
Safety nets
If safety nets are to be used, they should be erected as close as possible below the working
level and, if cantilevered nets are erected on the outside of the structure, the outermost edge
should be higher than at the inner edge.
Nets are intended to save lives and prevent injury; they are not a substitute for the effective
prevention of falls.
The manufacturer or supplier of a safety net must supply an instruction manual in

accordance with BS EN 1263-1:2002. This
guidance should contain:
EG
IN
TE
the required anchorage forces
(b)
maximum falling height
(c)
(a)
minimum catching width
(d)
safety net linkage
(e)
minimum distance below the safety net
(f)
storage requirements
(g)
inspection and replacement requirements.
These instructions may need to be supplemented by special installation instructions,

depending on the specific application of the net. Reference should be made to BS EN 12632:2002.
There are two main types of safety net:

(a)
Personnel nets: 100 mm mesh. Intended to catch a person falling from above.
(b)
Material or debris protection nets: smaller mesh 12 mm-19 mm. Intended to protect
those below from falling objects.
QCS 2014

Page 37
The size and siting of the nets are of critical importance; the further a person may fall, the
larger the net needs to be.
10
The maximum recommended distance a person should fall before contact with the net is 6
metres.
11
For a fall of 1 metre, an out rigged net must have a horizontal projection beyond the
outermost working point of 2.6 metres, while for a fall of 6 metres a projection of 4.4 metres
is necessary.
12
Erection of safety nets should be carried out by competent and qualified persons who should
ensure that any supporting framework can withstand impact or shock loadings and that the
framework itself does not present a hazard to personnel who may fall into the net.
13
Nets should be securely attached to support framework with tie cords, hooks, rings or
thimbles spaced at a maximum of 750 mm. The actual tie should be at least double the
strength of the net and, if hooks are used, they must have positive locking of some
description. See diagram below.
14
Nets can be out rigged on scaffolding provided that the scaffolding is securely tied into the
structure and has been designed to take shock loading.
15
The risk assessment must take into account the rescue of anyone who has fallen into a
safety net, including what to do if they are injured or unconscious. Where the safety net has
been rigged immediately below the place of work, someone who is uninjured should be able
to simply climb out of it.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

Periodic testing
Safety nets are provided with short lengths of test cord attached, normally eight. They must
not be used as tie cords. At intervals not exceeding three months, one cord should be
removed and tested (see BS EN 1263) and a record kept. For nets which have been in
continuous use for two years (i.e. eight times three months) or if there is any visible
deterioration, advice should be sought from the manufacturers. Nets should be inspected
weekly for damage, loose ties, etc., together with the framework and anchorage points. A net
should also be inspected for damage and replaced, if necessary, subsequent to a person or
other significant load falling into it. All such inspections should be recorded.
AT
IO
16
Page 38
AL
QCS 2014
Care should be taken to reduce to a minimum unnecessary wear and mechanical damage
likely to weaken the net. Materials must not be stacked on it and deliberate jumping onto, or
dropping of objects into, nets must be prohibited. Sources of damage or wear such as
accumulations of debris in the net should be avoided as far as possible.
EG
IN
17
TE
Care of nets
1.3.3.9 Safety belts, harnesses and lanyards

These Regulations permit the use of safety harnesses and lanyards where it is not possible
to provide a standard working platform or safety net, provided that they are always worn and
always secured to a safe anchorage.

Training
IO
Training should refer to the manufacturer's instructions and the importance of following them.
It should cover fitting, adjustment and use of the belt or harness and the choice of suitable
anchorage points. Personnel should not be permitted to use the equipment before instruction
has been received.
AT
Page 39
AL
QCS 2014
Selection and use of equipment
The selection of the correct type of harness for the work planned is essential. If any doubt
exists concerning the suitability for a particular task or type of work, further information and
advice should be sought from manufacturers or suppliers.
Whatever type is chosen it should give a high degree of safety, allied to mobility and wearer
comfort.
Contractors should consider:
EG
IN
TE
the selection of anchorage points
(b)
the selection, attachment and inspection of lanyards
(c)
(a)
the selection of alternative fall-arrest devices
(d)
the implications of suspension trauma
(e)
the selection of alternative types of access equipment.
QCS 2014

Page 40
1.3.3.10 Rescue equipment and procedures

1
Although every effort should be made to prevent people falling into the water, the risk of this
happening remains. In the event of there being a casualty, two things are of paramount
importance:
(a)
the person must be kept afloat
(b)
location and rescue must be achieved as quickly as possible.
Both of these aims should be kept in view when selecting rescue equipment and establishing
rescue procedures. In addition, the effective use of the equipment and the speed and
effectiveness of emergency procedures and rescue operations will depend on the training,
instruction and information given.
Life jackets and buoyancy aids

All employees working over or near water, and at risk of falling in, should wear some form of
life jacket or buoyancy aid. Both life jackets and buoyancy aids are designed to keep the
wearer afloat. There are, however, important differences. It is recommended that life jackets
are used in preference to buoyancy aids.
Life jackets to the relevant British Standards are designed to

support an unconscious person in the water and turn them face
upwards, by inflation when in the water. Inflation is by means of
a CO2 cartridge, activated manually or automatically.
Selection of suitable life jackets must be made by the Contractor,

having taken advice from the manufacturer or supplier, if
necessary.
Refer to Appendix 2 for advice on the selection of life jackets and

buoyancy aids.
Buoyancy aids are intended to provide a conscious person with enough extra buoyancy to
stay afloat and achieve a reasonable flotation position. A basic buoyancy aid may not turn an
unconscious person over from face-down. Buoyancy is usually incorporated in the form of
closed cell foam.
Buoyancy aids are bulky and, in some people's view, hinder movement and may slow the
progress of work, whereas life jackets are less bulky. Manually inflated life jackets, which are
inflated by mouth after entry into the water, should not be used. Automatically inflated life
jackets offer a high degree of freedom of movement and do not depend upon the wearer
being conscious for them to inflate.
Decisions on the type of equipment needed for specific types of work should be based on an
assessment of the factors involved. These may include, for example, whether a person is a
competent swimmer, the length of time a casualty may be in the water, the risks of injury,
water temperature, current and the proximity of assistance.
10
Specialist advice can be obtained from manufacturers on the

suitability of equipment for a particular purpose, e.g. type of water,
type of environment.
11
Where safety harnesses are to be worn in addition to flotation

equipment, it is important to ensure each of these items functions
effectively and will not interfere with the other.
12
Safety harness and buoyancy aid combinations are available from
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 41
some manufacturers, though it is necessary to make sure that the harness is not merely a
restraint for use in small boats, or a rescue harness, neither of which may be satisfactory for
use in construction and similar work.
13
The provision of whistles and lights as aids to the location of people in the water may be
advisable in some circumstances.
14
Wearers should be fully trained in the use of safety harnesses, life jackets and buoyancy
aids. The functions of the equipment and, where appropriate, its limitations should be clearly
understood by users.
Management
A clear policy needs to be in place on the use, inspection and storage of automatically
inflated life jackets. This policy also needs to address the training needs of the life jacket
users.
16
Life jackets, if used regularly, should be allocated to individual users. Each individual, having
been adequately trained, can then be responsible for carrying out pre-wear checks and
inspections, and report defects according to company procedures. This will help ensure
correct inflation of the life jackets is not jeopardised by the carelessness of others.
17
Management needs to enforce its policy on life jackets. This can be achieved by spot checks
of both the condition of the life jackets in use and the records of inspection and servicing.
AT
IO
AL
15
All workers who use automatically inflated life jackets need to be trained and competent in
their care and use, including pre-wear checks and inspection procedures. Training should
cover:
TE
18
Training
an explanation of the risks present and the need for life jackets
(b)
operation, performance and limitations of the equipment provided
(c)
instruction and practice on the selection, pre-wear checks, inspection, use and storage
of the life jackets, including the use of the manual override lever and oral inflation tube
(d)
factors which can affect the correct operation of the life jackets, such as the working
conditions, inadequate fitting, defects, damage and wear (recognising defects in life
jackets and arrangements for reporting loss or damage).
EG
IN
(a)
19
Extra or refresher training may need to be given, for example, if a new type of life jacket or
automatic inflation mechanism is introduced.
Pre-wear checks
20
21
A pre-wear check needs to be carried out each day the life jacket is used. This should be
carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and will normally include visual
checks to ensure:
(a)
the firing mechanism has not been activated. This is usually made obvious by the fact
that the life jacket is found inflated
(b)
the automatic firing capsule and gas cylinder are correctly screwed in place
(c)
there are no signs of corrosion, cracks or dents in the gas cylinder or automatic firing
capsule
(d)
unwanted movement within the firing mechanism (creepage) has not occurred.
Some automatic inflation mechanisms have colour-coded indicators to show when
QCS 2014

Page 42
compression in the spring has been lost. Those that do not have such indicators will require
careful inspection to judge whether the spring has lost any compression. Examination of the
piston or other visible component may also show whether creepage has happened. Make
sure:
(a)
the whistle and light (when fitted) is in position
(b)
the oral inflation tube is capped
(c)
the straps and main body of the jacket are not worn or damaged
(d)
the jacket is correctly packed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions

(ensuring that any Velcro is correctly fastened and the manual inflation lanyard is
accessible).
Inspection and maintenance

As well as pre-wear checks, a more thorough inspection and testing programme needs to be
carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where life jackets are used
heavily, for example, off-shore, the periods between inspections may need to be shorter than
the quarterly inspection recommended by some manufacturers.
23
As a general guide, where life jackets are used daily, inspections on at least a monthly basis
may be necessary.
24
Inspection and testing need to be carried out by those competent in recognising defects and
the remedial action to be taken. Records need to be kept of all inspections and repairs
made.
25
Testing the air-tightness of the life jacket will involve orally inflating the life jacket and leaving
it overnight (or submerging it in water) to check for leaks. The automatic inflation mechanism
will need to be dismantled to make a detailed examination of its condition. Make sure:
TE
AT
IO
AL
22
all screw threads are examined for signs of rust. Rust can lead to problems in locating
the cocking cap or the gas cylinder in the correct position
(b)
the gas cylinder is examined for corrosion, cracks, dents and other defects. Particular
attention will need to be paid to the cylinder cap as any indentations found could mean
that the automatic firing mechanism has fired but failed to pierce the cylinder. If this is
the case, the reason for activation and the cause of failure needs to be identified
(c)
the cylinder fitting and groove of the firing pin are checked so that they are free from
dirt
EG
(d)
IN
(a)
the automatic inflation mechanism is operated manually (with the gas cylinder
removed) to ensure that it operates smoothly, and that there is no obstruction to the
movement of the pin which prevents it piercing the cylinder. The pin also needs to be
checked to ensure that it is sharp
(e)
the 'salt' or 'paper ring' is inspected for any cracking, dissolving or tearing which has
taken place since the last inspection
(f)
where fitted, the rubber '0' ring is inspected for damage and that it is correctly seated
(g)
the mechanism is checked for signs of 'creepage'.
26
Once the inspection is complete, the life jacket should be reassembled according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
27
Manufacturers generally recommend life jackets to be serviced every two years by their
appointed agents. However, where life jackets are used very regularly, an annual or more
frequent service may be needed.
28
If any defects are found with either the gas cylinder or the automatic inflation mechanism,
QCS 2014

Page 43
these parts must be replaced. If the life jacket is in need of repair, return it to the
manufacturer. Repairs should only be carried out by people approved by the manufacturer.
Storage
Exposure to damp, humid conditions can lead to deterioration in the automatic inflation
mechanism, known as 'creepage'. This has the potential to lead to failure of the pin to pierce
the carbon dioxide gas cylinder. Life jackets need to be stored in suitable dry conditions. The
following advice should be observed when storing life jackets:
do not hang life jackets with wet oilskins or other damp clothing
(b)
if the life jacket is wet, unpack it and leave it to dry out on a hanger
(c)
do not store life jackets close to or directly above heat sources, such as convection
heaters
(d)
to prevent water getting into the automatic inflation mechanism, do not store wet life
jackets upside down or lying flat
(e)
make sure there is enough space around the life jacket, when it is stored, to allow the
air to circulate.
AL
(a)
29
IO
Lifebuoys
Lifebuoys should be available wherever people are working on, over or near water. Standard
760 mm diameter lifebuoys with rope or cord lifelines (usually 30 metres) attached should be
placed in conspicuous positions near the water's edge.
31
A lifebuoy can be thrown only a short distance, perhaps 6-8 metres and then with little
accuracy.
32
Handling 30 metres of rope may also present problems to the inexperienced person,
although lifebuoys are available with the rope packed into plastic containers, from which it
reels out when the lifebuoy is thrown.
33
Lifebuoys should be suspended from a suitable hook or bracket, with the lifeline coiled ready
for use.
Rescue lines
EG
IN
TE
AT
30
34
Various types of rescue line are available. One type employs 25 metres of line in a canvas
bag with a small flotation chamber. The free end of the line is held, while the bag is thrown
underarm towards the casualty. The line can be delivered accurately up to its full length, but
underarm throwing may be hindered by guardrails and other forms of edge protection.
35
Another method of delivering the line is the

capsule emergency lifeline. A light but strong
line, 40 metres in length, is packed into a small
plastic capsule. The free end of the line is
secured to a cord grip which is held while the
capsule is thrown, the line paying out as it goes.
36
The capsule may be thrown or flicked to the full

distance of 40 metres using an extension rod
which fits into the handle. Both line and capsule
will float, allowing the casualty to grab the line
and be hauled to safety. If the first throw misses,
it can be very quickly used again. The ability to
deliver the line up to 40 metres may avoid the
QCS 2014

Page 44
need to launch a boat or for somebody to enter the water.

37
The capsules are small enough to be carried in a belt

or, alternatively, can be mounted in cabinets (with the
extension rod) at convenient locations.
The majority of drownings occur close to the bank or water's

edge; safety provision should take account of this, where it is the
dominant risk. Lightweight throwing lines or similar equipment
should be provided to supplement lifebuoys, especially if workers
are moving from place to place, adjacent to the water. The mere
provision of a standard lifebuoy may not be regarded as doing all
that is reasonably practicable to secure the safety of employees.
AL
Rescue packs
This method requires the rescuer to swim out on a
lifeline with a buoyancy aid for the casualty or,
alternatively, wearing a deflated rescue life jacket which is inflated when the casualty is
reached. Both are then pulled in on the lifeline.
39
The 100 or 200 metre floating line supplied in the pack ensures the rescuer is secured to the
shore or edge at all times. In rough or tidal waters, this is an important consideration. If using
this method, account must be taken of the fact that the person who has fallen may be
panicking and, therefore, the rescuer must be trained in rescue techniques.
AT
IO
38
TE
Rescue boats
A rescue boat should be provided whenever work is being undertaken over or adjacent to
deep, tidal or fast flowing water; it may also be advisable to provide a boat in some areas of
still water, dependent upon the findings of a risk assessment.
41
The craft may be rigid (wooden or fibreglass) or inflatable. It must have a reliable engine and
carry oars and possibly a first aid kit. The operator should be experienced and competent at
handling small craft on flowing water, particularly in rescue situations that involve special
boat-handling and skills.
42
Note Where there is a possibility that a rescue might have to be carried out using a powered
rescue boat, it is strongly recommended that the operator is trained to a minimum standard.
Rescuing a person from the water in a power boat with a rotating propeller demands skill and
experience, particularly if there is a current flowing. Ideally, there will be two people in the
boat, the driver and a 'rescuer'.
43
Whether the rescue boat is to be permanently manned and constantly afloat, or not, will
depend on the circumstances, as will its size and the equipment to be carried. If any work is
to be done during the hours of darkness, the rescue boat will require high efficiency lighting.
44
Two-way radio communication between boat and shore may be necessary on large areas of
water. Grab lines should be provided for persons in the water and a boat hook should be
carried. Practice rescue drills should be held, so that the best method of rescuing, securing
and landing a potential casualty is known in advance.
EG
IN
40
Stop nets or lines

45
Given the right circumstances, including still or gently flowing water and no waterborne
traffic, nets may be suspended just into the water or lines trailed across or in the water to
QCS 2014

Page 45
allow a conscious person to hold on while awaiting rescue, or to pull themselves to the bank.
These cannot be totally relied upon, because a casualty may be unconscious or otherwise
unable to help themselves.
46
If there is a weir or sluice, nets should not be relied upon unless they can be positioned well
upstream of it.
Rescue techniques
Methods of rescuing a casualty, other than by using a rescue boat, may be summarised as
follows:
(a)
involve the emergency services
(b)
reach out from the bank or edge
(c)
throw out a means of flotation or recovery
(d)
wade out
(e)
go out.
AL
47
Emergency services. In many cases, the Civil Defence (Fire Department) or Qatar
Coastguard service in appropriate circumstances will have the expertise and equipment to
carry out rescue procedures. A judgement will have to be made as to whether it is advisable
or practical to await their arrival. This must be balanced against the risks involved in
attempting the following means of rescue.
49
Reach out. If the casualty is near enough to the bank or edge, it may be possible to grab
their hand, or use a sturdy stick, boat-hook, oar, broom handle, or anything they can seize to
pull them in to safety. The rescuer should ensure that they have a secure foothold and
sufficient grip and balance to counteract the weight of the casualty in the water.
50
Throw out. When the casualty is some way out in the water, a lifebuoy and rescue line or
any buoyancy aid with line attached should be thrown to them. This technique is preferable
to entering the water to reach the casualty, especially if the depth of water and state of
currents is not known.
51
Wade out. A shelving bed or shore may enable a rescuer to reach the person in the water
while keeping their feet on the bottom. Care is needed, since currents, underwater obstacles
and sudden changes in the depth of water may put the rescuer at risk.
52
Go out. Assistance should be summoned first when possible. Individuals should only act
alone if they really have to. A boat should preferably be used to reach the casualty. If not, the
rescuer should swim out with a lifeline secured to the shore or edge and a buoyancy aid.
53
Avoid becoming a casualty. People who cannot swim should not enter the water, but must
raise the alarm and wait for assistance.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
48
1.3.3.11 Onshore facilities and procedures

1
First aid. Almost irrespective of the size of the operation, first aid facilities should be
provided, and trained and qualified first-aiders should be present at the site of all work
adjacent to water.
Facilities should include provision for transferring casualties from boat to shore and
ambulance access.
Alarms. Some effective means of raising an alarm must exist. Gongs, bells, whistles,
pressurised canister fog horns, klaxons or similar items of equipment should be provided. All
people on site should be instructed in the correct use of the alarm and the actions to be
QCS 2014

Page 46
taken when the alarm sounds.

Lighting. Water surfaces should be illuminated at night so that victims of falls can be seen
and constantly watched while awaiting rescue.
Communications. The telephone number for the ambulance, coastguard and lifeboat
services should be stressed to operatives and adequate provision should be made for
effective on-site communications.
Rescue equipment. Rescue equipment is for use in an emergency. It must be properly

maintained, not misused and never relied upon as a primary safeguard against accidents.
Clothing. High visibility vests or jackets should be worn. These will assist in keeping the
casualty in view while the rescue operation is being mounted. High visibility immersion suits
will be appropriate in some circumstances.
Checking personnel. Periodic checks should be made to ensure nobody is missing.

Personnel should work in pairs or in sight of each other to enable one person to raise the
alarm in the event of an emergency.
Weather and tides. Details of weather and, where appropriate, tides should be obtained
before each shift.
10
Recovery of equipment from the water. In the event of tools, equipment or small plant
falling into the water, no attempt should be made to recover them using amateur divers or
improvised techniques.
AT
IO
AL
Training
A clearly defined and documented rescue procedure should be devised. All personnel should
be familiar with the procedure and understand the actions they must take in an emergency.
12
The location of emergency equipment should be known and any special training in its use
given to the personnel involved. Responsibility for co-ordinating and supervising rescue
operations must be allocated to identify individuals, trained and competent to discharge it.
Practices in rescue procedures should be held where appropriate.
13
Locally employed site-based staff and the employees of subcontractors should receive
instruction in emergency procedures and the use of life-preserving equipment, and must be
given such information as is necessary to enable them to act effectively in an emergency.
EG
IN
TE
11
QCS 2014


1.3.3 Appendix 1
Safety checklist: working over or near to water
Management and planning
Risk assessment carried out.
Safe system of work, usually specified in a method statement.
Permit to work system implemented where necessary.
Frequent accounting for all staff.
Lone working prohibited.
Regular auditing that safety rules are being adhered to.
Competence of all staff confirmed.
Site induction and relevant toolbox talks for all.
Other training provided where necessary.
10
Serviceability and suitability of all rescue equipment periodically checked.
11
Lighting available, if necessary.
12
Weather forecast monitored where the state of the weather could be an issue.
13
Tide-tables checked where the state of the tide is an issue.
14
Preparedness to suspend work, where appropriate.
AT
IO
AL
TE
Keeping out of the water
Scaffolds: guard-rails, toe-boards fitted; inspections made.
Safety nets: secure mountings, correct size of net, at the right place.
Safety harness: right type, properly worn, good anchorage, attached constantly.
Effective rescue procedures developed, for example, from a safety net.
Keeping afloat
EG
IN
Life jackets: right size and type, always worn.
Buoyancy aids: suitable for purpose.
Prompt response by rescue craft.
Rescue procedures
1
Lifebelt: correctly positioned, ready for action.
Rescue lines: available, personnel trained in use.
Rescue pack: requires a good swimmer.
Rescue boat: properly equipped, experienced crew.
Stop nets or lines, just in or on water.
Rescue hierarchy:
(a)
emergency services
(b)
reach out
(c)
throw out
Page 47
QCS 2014

(d)
wade out
(e)
go out.
Page 48
Avoid becoming a casualty.
Onshore emergency procedure

Audible alarm.
Good communications: telephone, radio.
10
Emergency services: phone numbers displayed, clear directions to accident location.
11
Site access for emergency vehicles.
12
Trained first aiders/rescue team.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 49

1.3.3 Appendix 2
Classes of life jacket
Life jackets are divided into different buoyancy classes. The criterion of each class is the
support (buoyancy) provided by each class, which is expressed in Newtons (N).
The EU standards which cover life jackets also require a level of protection for the
unconscious person in the water. This means that life jackets must distribute the weight of
the wearer in such a manner that the person is turned face-up. The standards require that
automatic life jackets must self-inflate within 10 seconds of contact with water.
The buoyancy level in the standards relate to a person weighing 70 Kg, thus the amount of
actual buoyancy provided by any life jacket will depend upon the weight of the wearer.
Consider the following situations:
AL
wearing a life jacket with too little buoyancy poses obvious problems as there may be
too little support for a heavy person to keep their face out of the water or possibly even
turn them face-up if unconscious
(b)
conversely, wearing a life jacket with too much buoyancy could also pose problems;
wearers who are not particularly heavy will be more buoyant and, for example, could
find it difficult to escape from an air pocket if they have to fully immerse themselves
and their life jacket to 'duck under' an obstruction.
AT
The selection of the most appropriate life jacket is therefore essential and the following text
provides a guide.
IO
(a)
For use by good swimmers in safe water only as long as assistance is at hand. Not safe for
unconscious persons.
100 N life jacket
Suitable for adults who are swimmers and for use in inland waters and safe areas, providing
limited protection for unconscious persons depending upon the clothing worn.
EG
IN
TE
50 N buoyancy aid
150 N life jacket

8
Suitable for swimmers and non-swimmers in all waters. Only limited protection for
unconscious persons wearing heavy waterproof clothing or in heavy seas.
275 N life jacket

9
For offshore use and extreme conditions. Immediate protection for unconscious persons,
with turnover guaranteed in 5 seconds. Adequate buoyancy even in heavy clothing.
10
Buoyancy aids incorporate closed-cell foam inserts sewn into the material of the device.
11
Life jackets incorporate a gas cartridge which inflates a bladder within the life jacket.
Actuation can be either manual (usually by pulling a toggle on an actuating chord), or
automatic (when an inbuilt 'trigger' device comes into contact with water). If operated, either
in an emergency or by accident, the bladder can be deflated and repacked and the life jacket
can be fitted with a rearming kit so that it can be reused if undamaged.
QCS 2014

Page 50

1.3.4
System Scaffolds and Mobile Towers
1.3.4.1 Key points

Scaffold of any type must only be erected, altered or dismantled by operatives who have
been trained, or are under the direct supervision of someone who is competent to do so.
The modular construction of system and tower scaffolds could increase the temptation for
unqualified persons to tamper with them. Site managers must be aware of this and monitor
the situation.
Scaffolds must be subjected to statutory inspections with reports raised where appropriate.
All scaffolds must be properly erected, stable, tied to the structure as appropriate, suitable
for their purpose and equipped with toe-boards and guard-rails on all working platforms.
BS EN 12811 series of standards highlights requirement for additional ties and bracing.
AL
1.3.4.2 System Scaffolds
IO
System scaffolds and the components of mobile scaffold towers are generally of a modular
layout. They comprise standards with welded node connectors to which ledgers and
transoms are fastened, usually with proprietary wedges or rings (rather than loose coupler
connections) or frames with both standards and transoms welded into one unit.
The safety requirements of system scaffolds are broadly similar to traditional scaffolds, but
there are some significant differences.
TE
AT
IN
Work at Height
The height at which guard-rails and toe-boards must be fitted is determined solely by the
findings of a risk assessment. The requirement now is that a Contractor must:
'take suitable and sufficient measures to prevent, so far as it is reasonably practicable, any
person falling a distance liable to cause personal injury.'
Experience has shown that falls from less than 2 metres can cause serious and fatal injuries.
Contractors must consider:
EG
(a)
the organisation and planning of work at height
(b)
avoidance of risks from working at height
(c)
the competence of those who work at height and are involved with work equipment
used for working at height
(d)
the general principles for the selection of work equipment for working at height
(e)
the requirements for particular work equipment
(f)
work on or near fragile surfaces
(g)
danger areas
(h)
the inspection of work equipment used for working at height
(i)
the inspection of places of work at height
(j)
the duties of persons at work in relation to work at height.
QCS 2014

Page 51
Of relevance to this section, these Regulations refer to applicable Schedules in section C1,
these include:
(a)
the requirements for working platforms, guard-rails and toe-boards
(b)
additional requirements for scaffolding
(c)
additional requirements for fall-arrest systems
(d)
additional requirements for work restraint systems
(e)
the requirements for ladders
(f)
the particulars to be included in a report of inspection.

System scaffolds, including individual components and associated equipment, are classified
as 'work equipment'. As such, all equipment must be suitable for its intended purpose, well
maintained and inspected as necessary.
AL
Manual handling will be an activity linked to the erection, alteration and dismantling of
scaffolds. It is also likely that those who work from scaffolds will be involved in manual
handling activities during the course of their work.
AT
IO
Before undertaking the erection of a system scaffold, the following points must be clearly
defined:
TE
1.3.4.6 Basic system scaffolding considerations
The management of risk
A risk assessment should be carried out.
The scaffold, so far as it is reasonably practicable, should be the safest and most suitable
'work equipment' for the task it is intended to carry out.
The purpose of the scaffold is usually to provide a safe place of work, primarily at height and
the configuration of a system scaffold may vary depending on its intended use. For example,
scaffolds for bricklaying, masonry, refurbishment, glazing or painting may differ in their
design and construction.
EG
IN
Who will erect the scaffold?

5
Scaffolds must only be erected, altered or dismantled by, or under the direct supervision of,
a competent person.
Where will it be erected?

6
Care will be required in the initial setting out of the system scaffold as far as leg or jack
adjustment and the positioning of fixed length ledgers are concerned.
Measuring the length of the building and then positioning the first frames or standards and
ledgers in relation to door openings will be important.
Are the ground conditions suitable?

8
Bay lengths may often differ from those associated with tube and fitting scaffolding, which
QCS 2014

Page 52
can cause loads to be concentrated in particular spots. Initial ground inspection and levelling
is essential to reduce the amount of jack levelling and adjustment required during scaffold
erection. As with tube and fittings scaffolds, care should be taken with regards to manholes,
slopes and the general load-bearing capabilities of the area on which the system scaffold is
to be placed.
What materials are to be used?
9
The availability of space for the standards and the width of the working area are prime
considerations in deciding which type of scaffold should be used. An allowance must be
made for the fact that heavy or bulky materials may be deposited on the scaffold.
Stability of the scaffold structure

The scaffold structure must be of sufficient strength and rigidity when erected and, if
appropriate, secured or 'tied-in' to the structure against which it is built to ensure stability.
11
If the scaffold is later adapted or altered, this must be done in such a way as to ensure that
the scaffold structure remains stable.
12
A requirement of BS EN 12811 -1:2003 is that all but 'standard scaffolds' must be properly
designed.
System scaffolds provide a variety of options for safe access to the working place, such as
pole ladders, internal ladder systems or staircase towers. A decision must be made at an
early stage in order that provision may be made for the particular type of access required.
13
AT
Can safe access to the working place be provided?
IO
AL
10
Platforms may have to be installed at every level, whether or not they are working places.
This is a feature of some types of system scaffold. However, it is often the case that only one
or two may be used as working places, and in such cases the manufacturer's
recommendations must be followed as to whether or not platforms can be omitted.
EG
IN
14
TE
How many working platforms will there be?
How and where will the scaffold be tied in?

15
The principle of tying a system scaffold to the supporting structure is the same as for a tube
and fitting scaffold. The pattern of ties and the frequency of their use will vary between
manufacturers, and the different types of system scaffold will often incorporate their own
proprietary ties instead of the conventional through ties or Hilti rings that are used on tube
and fitting scaffolds.
16
It may be necessary to tie-in the scaffold at different places compared to the tying-in of tube
and fitting scaffolds, and so consideration should be given to the exact locations available.
17
Note that BS EN 12811-1:2003 recommends the installation of additional ties in some

circumstances, when compared to the requirement previously required under BS 5973.
What bracing will be required?

18
Ledger bracing is not generally required in system scaffolds. This has the benefit of providing
a clear walk-through at platform level. However, the frequency of facade bracing will vary
from product to product, and plan bracing may be required if tie or anchor positions are not
readily achievable or, if deemed necessary, under BS EN 12811-1:2003.
QCS 2014

Page 53
Unauthorised alteration
19
Due to their design features, most types of system scaffold are generally easier to alter than
is a tube and fitting scaffold. This makes unauthorised alteration, for example the removal of
a guard-rail or the repositioning of a working platform, that much easier.
20
Unauthorised alteration can make a scaffold an unsafe place of work for the unwary and
possibly breach the scaffold design criteria from a stability point of view.
21
It is for site management to make clear to anyone who has to work on a system scaffold that
unauthorised alteration must not be carried out and that appropriate actions will be taken
against individuals who do so.
1.3.4.7 System scaffold specifications
AL
Materials
Components should be free from any weld defects, bends, distortion or corrosion that may
affect the safe functioning of the items. Many scaffold systems are galvanised, so the risks
from corrosion are reduced.
Fittings employed for tying and adaptations to the scaffold should be free from worn threads
and damaged bolts.
AT
IO
The requirement for any supplementary support or load-spreading capability will depend
upon:
the nature of the surface on which a system scaffold is to be erected
(b)
the weight of the scaffold itself
(c)
loading that will be imposed upon the completed scaffold by materials, people and
equipment.
TE
(a)
IN
Foundations and levelling
In most cases, the installation of either base plates alone, or base plates plus sole boards,
will be sufficient.
On system scaffolds, the ledgers and transoms connect to the standards at fixed points so
there is not the degree of vertical adjustment that there is with tube and fitting scaffolds.
Because of the difficulty of levelling a system scaffold as erection progresses, all such
scaffolds should be properly levelled and located at the first level. If this is done correctly,
components should be vertically self-aligning, but great care must be taken to check the
initial vertical alignment at the base.
EG
Platform decking
7
As the scaffold frames and components have been designed by the manufacturer to meet
the requirements then, if used in accordance with the manufacturer's assembly instructions,
platform span and thickness requirements will be met.
Types of platform
8
There are several different types of platform available for use with system scaffolds:
(a)
conventional scaffold boards (225 mm x 38 mm x 3.9 m) (plus steel and aluminium

versions of similar dimensions)
QCS 2014

Page 54
(b)
timber battens (typically 225 mm x 60 mm x 2.5 m)
(c)
decking platforms of plywood and aluminium (650 mm x 50 mm x 2.5 m or 3.0 m or

3.5 m)
(d)
steel decking platforms (330 mm x 50 mm x 2.5 m or 3.0 m)
Only scaffold boards, whether timber, steel or aluminium, require supporting at 1.2 m or 1.5
m centres. Other decking products have been generally designed to span distances of up to
3.0 m or 3.5 m. The manufacturers of the various types of decking will provide specific
guidance.
Requirements for scaffold boards

10
Any scaffold boards used should comply with BS 2482:2009 Scaffold boards should not be
warped, twisted, split or badly worn. They should be banded or nail plated.
All scaffold boards or decking platforms should be secured against the possibility of wind
uplift. There are several types of fitting and straps available to achieve this. Design features
such as locking devices to prevent wind uplift are increasingly built into proprietary platforms.
IO
11
AL
Reaction to windspeed
AT
Platform widths
There is a requirement for a minimum width of a working platform, 600 mm, as specified in
BS EN 12811-1 is 'standard' minimum.
13
The actual width chosen will depend largely upon the nature of the application, for example,
bricklaying will not be suitable on a 750 mm-wide scaffold, but painting and cladding may be
well suited to this width.
TE
12
Additional ledger bracing is not generally required within system scaffolds due to the inherent
stiffness of the joints. However, if the system scaffold is to exceed the design boundaries of
a 'standard scaffold', the layout should be specified by a competent scaffold designer.
EG
14
IN
Ledger bracing
15
Longitudinal or facade bracing

The requirement for longitudinal or facade bracing will be specified by the manufacturer or
scaffold designer, and will vary from product to product.
Ties
16
The need for ties on a system scaffold is the same, in principle, as on a traditional scaffold.
17
However, a system scaffold has different characteristics (for example, its components are
shorter and lighter) so the tie pattern will need to be specified by the manufacturer, or a
competent scaffold designer. Requirements for ties may vary from product to product.
18
Increasingly, new methods of tying are being used to replace conventional through ties or
Hilti rings. Eyebolt and plastic plug type ties are now used on some systems.
Sheeting of scaffolds
19
Caution must always be exercised before a decision is taken to sheet any scaffold. The
sheeting of any scaffold increases the wind-loading on it. The requirement for additional ties
QCS 2014

Page 55
will be determined by the manufacturer or a competent scaffold designer.
1.3.4.8 Access
Requirements for ladders
Any ladder (including those used in conjunction with a system scaffold) must be in good
condition, and of sufficient strength.
It must be prevented from slipping during use either by securing it at the top or bottom or by
an effective anti-slip device or other equally effective means. However, industry best practice
is that all ladders, irrespective of length, should be properly secured at all times.
The top of the ladder should extend to a sufficient height above the platform level unless
alternative means are used to provide a safe handhold. (It is suggested that 1 metre or five
rungs is a suitable height.)
If a ladder, or a series of ladders, rises a vertical distance of 9 metres or more, rest platforms
or safe landing areas must be provided.
Pole ladders and steel ladders are still used for access to system scaffolds even though they
have been a contributory factor in many falls from height.
Staircase towers or built in ladder sections for access onto the working platform are now
widely available and used as an alternative to conventional ladders.
Staircase towers may be more appropriate for the movement of higher numbers of people
and particularly for heights in excess of 10 metres.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 56
1.3.4.9 Concentrated loads

1
Where concentrated loads, e.g. pallets of bricks or tiles, are to be placed on the scaffold,
loading towers may be required. These specially designed and braced scaffolds provide
support for concentrated loads, the weight of which would be excessive on standard scaffold
working platforms.
1.3.4.10 Incomplete scaffolds

1
Where a loading tower constructed in a system scaffold is erected adjacent to the working
scaffold, the two structures should be securely tied both to each other and to the building.
1.3.4.11 Safe places of work, and stability of working platforms

Any working platform on a scaffold must:
have safe access to it and egress from it
(b)
be of suitable and sufficient strength and rigidity for the purpose for which it is to be
used
(c)
be so erected and used so that none of the components can come loose or be
displaced and endanger anyone
(d)
be stable when being erected, used and dismantled
(e)
be of sufficient dimensions to permit safe passage of persons and materials, and

provide a safe working area for the work that is to be done there
(f)
have a suitable (non-slip) surface so as to prevent slipping or tripping
(g)
not have any gaps through which a person or materials could fall
(h)
be used and maintained so that persons cannot be caught between the working
platform and any adjacent structure
(i)
be dismantled in such a way as to prevent accident displacement.
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
IN
Each item of plant and equipment used in conjunction with any scaffold must be of sound
construction and materials, and must be sufficiently strong and suitable for the job it has
been designed to do. It must be maintained in such a condition.
EG
1.3.4.12 Plant and equipment
1.3.4.13 Requirements for guard-rails and toe-boards

1
Where the proper erection of a scaffold has not been completed, it should not be left
unattended without the display of a notice stating:
Scaffolding incomplete - do not use
It is also a good idea to remove and secure access ladders.
For Mobile Towers, please see the next page.
1.3.4.14 Mobile Towers

1
The use of lightweight aluminium mobile towers on construction sites is a popular alternative
to the use of traditional tube and fitting towers. However, these systems have some
limitations and should only be used when they can satisfy both legislative and general site
requirements.
Five different items make up a basic mobile aluminium tower:

frames
(b)
braces
(c)
platforms
(d)
legs
(e)
wheels or castors.
AT
IO
(a)
TE
General conditions and provisions
IN
The UK Prefabricated Access Suppliers' and Manufacturers' Association (PASMA) has

developed two methods of installing guard-rails that do not require the erector to stand on a
working platform until the guard-rail frames have been installed:
(a)
advanced guard-rail system
(b)
through-the-trap (3T method)
EG
Page 57

AL
QCS 2014
These methods should be adopted by Contractors as best industry practice in Qatar.
The advanced guard-rail system involves the use of specially manufactured, hinged guardrail
frames that can be raised and slotted into position from below.
The 3T method involves the erector only passing through the platform trap-door far enough
to be able to locate the guard-rail frames in place. In many cases, safe erection of the guardrail sections can be achieved with the erector sitting on the platform with their legs through
the trap and their feet supported on the ladder section below.
Materials
7
Mobile towers may be constructed from steel, but are principally of aluminium.
All components must be free from any welding defects, dents, bends or distortion, or any
corrosion that could prevent their safe use. Platform boards must be free from holes, cracks,
splits or any delamination would affect their safe use.
Competence
9
Any person erecting a mobile tower must be competent to do so, having received adequate
QCS 2014

Page 58
training or, if not fully competent, be under the supervision of an experienced and competent
person.
10
The tower must start off and remain vertical as it is built and used.
Maintenance
11
All aluminium mobile towers are work equipment.
12
As such, mobile towers (including individual components) must be suitable for the job in
hand and properly maintained.
Preparation and planning

A risk assessment should be carried out to determine whether or not a mobile aluminium
tower scaffold is a suitable item of work equipment for the type of work that is to be carried
out and the environment in which it is intended to be used.
14
Factors that should be considered when deciding whether or not it is safe to use a mobile
tower are:
AL
13
The ground surface (1) - is the surface sufficiently level to use a mobile tower if there
is no adjustment on the legs for levelling the tower? A tower scaffold should not be
erected if it cannot be levelled and therefore made stable.
(b)
The ground surface (2) - mobile towers only have a small area of each wheel in
contact with the ground and therefore each wheel imposes a high loading at each
point of contact. Is the surface strong enough to take the loading? It may be possible
to use sole boards on soft ground to effectively spread the load and allow a mobile
tower to be used, providing that there is no chance of the tower sinking, tilting or
otherwise becoming unstable.
(c)
The ground surface (3) - are there any features such as drain covers or underground
pipes that may not be able to take the direct or indirect loading imposed by one or
more wheels?
(d)
The weather (outdoor use) - aluminium tower scaffolds are lightweight structures
which can become unstable in moderately high winds. Has a check of the weather
been made for the period that the tower will be erected? Is it possible to tie-in the
tower to the structure against which it is to be erected? If any doubt exists on the
limitations of the tower in high winds, has the manufacturer or supplier been
consulted?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
(e)
Overhead power lines - are there any lines that are close enough to render the use of
a metal scaffold unsafe? Remember, it is not necessary to touch a high voltage cable
to get a shock. Many overhead power lines are not insulated and the electricity can
'arc' through the air to an adjacent metal object.
Pre-assembly inspection
15
The competent person who is to erect a mobile tower should check that all the components
are present and undamaged and ensure that they are all from the same
manufacturer/supplier, and are for the same type of tower.
16
A check should be made that the castors and wheels rotate and swivel freely and that they
have a functioning locking device (brake).
QCS 2014

Page 59
Safety during use

Stability
Due to their lightweight nature, stability can be a problem with aluminium tower scaffolds, the
more so the higher they are built.
18
Individual manufacturers carry out tests on their products to enable them to provide specific
guidance on height-to-base ratios, including circumstances where the installation of
outriggers will be necessary. Such guidance should be available to the competent person
erecting the tower.
19
As general guidance, it should be assumed that stabilisers will be required if an aluminium

tower is to have a working platform higher than 3 metres above ground level.
20
In addition to the dimensions of the erected tower scaffold, there are several other factors
that can affect its stability:
AL
17
Sheeting (out of doors) - will increase the wind-loading on a tower scaffold. In many
instances it will not be acceptable to sheet a tower scaffold unless it can be tied-in to
the structure.
(b)
Overreaching - if this is so severe that the centre of gravity is moved to a point outside
the base area of the scaffold, it will overturn. It is far safer to move the tower scaffold.
(c)
Work activity - any work that involves applying a sideways pressure to the adjacent
structure, for example water-jetting, at a point that is high on the tower, will create an
equal and opposite pressure that may overturn the tower. In many cases, tying-in the
tower to the adjacent structure may overcome this problem.
(d)
Hoisting materials - if heavy items are hoisted up the outside of the tower, it could
become unstable and overturn. Again, tying-in the tower to the adjacent structure may
overcome this problem.
(e)
Climbing the tower - access to the working platform should be gained by using the
built-in stair or ladder sections. If a vertical ladder is built into an end frame of the
tower, the person climbing the ladder must do so on the inside of the tower. Climbing
the outside could overturn the tower. Never gain access to the working platform by
leaning a ladder against the tower.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
Tying-in a tower scaffold

21
Care should be taken to avoid couplers causing damage to the aluminium tubing and,
accordingly, only special couplers should be used. Advice on the horizontal and vertical
frequency of ties will be supplied by the manufacturer or supplier or, in the case of
substantial or 'linked' towers, the scaffold designer.
The working platform

22
The access hatch to the working platform must be closed as soon as everyone working from
the tower is on the working platform.
23
The working platform must be fully boarded unless a design feature of the scaffold enables
safe access and egress and effective guard-rails and toe-boards to be installed around a
partially boarded platform.
24
These state that a working platform must be of sufficient dimensions for the safe passage of
people, plant and materials with due regard to the type of work being carried out. However,
BS EN 12811-1 recommends that platforms on all types of scaffold should not be less than
600 mm wide.
QCS 2014

Page 60
Gaining extra height

25
Placing stepladders and ladders on the working platform of a mobile tower to gain additional
height is particularly dangerous and must be prohibited. Adjustable legs are only to be used
for levelling, and not to gain additional height. If additional height is needed then a further lift
should be added, providing this is within the manufacturer's height limitations.
The brakes
26
The wheel brakes must be locked in the 'ON' position at all times when the tower is not being
moved. The lightweight nature of aluminium tower scaffolds presents the potential for
unattended towers to be moved by the wind if the brakes are not applied, particularly where
they are used on exposed floor slabs at height.
Moving a tower scaffold

The tower must not be moved whilst anyone is on the working platform. Any item that could
fall or cause the tower to be unstable whilst being moved, taking into account the condition of
the floor surface, must also be removed. A tower scaffold must only be moved by pushing or
pulling at the base.
28
The tower must never be moved by:
IO
AL
27
towing it with a vehicle
(b)
a person who is on the platform pulling the tower along using an adjacent structure.
AT
(a)
Avoiding collisions
Suitable barriers should be erected to prevent people or vehicles from accidentally colliding
with a tower scaffold, particularly where it is erected in a public place.
30
It may be necessary to create a safety zone around a tower simply because of the nature of
the work being carried out above.
IN
TE
29
The capacity of each platform and tower structure is often shown on labels attached to the
frame of the mobile tower, or will be in the manufacturer's assembly guide. Never exceed the
recommended loading levels as this may cause the tower to become unstable.
31
EG
Loading capacity
Incomplete towers
32
Where the proper erection of a mobile tower has not been completed, it should not be left
unattended without the display of a notice stating:
QCS 2014

Page 61
Inspection and reporting

33
34
Where the tower constitutes a working platform, it must be inspected:

(a)
before being used for the first time
(b)
after any substantial addition, dismantling or other alteration
(c)
after any event which is likely to have affected its strength or stability
(d)
at regular intervals not exceeding seven days since the last inspection.
An inspection report is not necessary, however, for any mobile tower, unless it has remained
erected in the same place for a period of seven days or more.
Wind strength
Aluminium structures are very vulnerable to the strength of the wind. It is recommended by
many manufacturers that if the wind reaches a speed of 17 miles per hour then all work
should cease on the tower.
36
If the wind speed is likely to reach 40.23 km/h, the tower should be tied-in to a rigid structure.
If there is a possibility of the wind reaching speeds approaching or in excess of 64.37 km/h,
the tower should be dismantled.
37
Operators should be aware of the possibility of sudden high winds in exposed or gusty
conditions.
38
It must be remembered that winds at high levels are often higher than at ground level. The
wind speed can also increase as it funnels between buildings or other solid structures.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
35
QCS 2014

Page 62

1.3.4 Appendix
Wind strengths and effects (Beaufort Scale)
Speed m/sec
0-1
Calm
Calm, smoke rises vertically
Light air
Direction of wind shown by smoke drift, but

1.1-5.5
not by wind or weather vanes.
1-2
Light breeze
Wind felt on face. Leaves rustle. Wind or

weather vanes move.
2-3
Gentle breeze
Leaves and small twigs in constant motion.

Wind extends light flags.
Moderate breeze
Wind raises dust and loose paper. Small

branches move.
Strong breeze
Near gale
Gale
Strong gale
20-28
5-8
29-38
8-11
39-49
11-14
50-61
14-17
62-74
17-21
Chimney pots, slates and tiles may be blown 75-88

off. Other slight structural damage may be
caused.
21-24
Small trees in leaf begin to sway. Little

crested wavelets form on inland waters.
TE
3-5
Fresh breeze
12-19
5.6-11
AL
Speed
Km/h
Wind effect locally
IO
Description of
wind
AT
Windforce
number
EG
IN
Large branches in motion. Umbrellas used

with some difficulty.
Whole trees in motion. Becoming difficult to

walk against the wind.
Twigs break off trees. Progress is generally

impeded.
QCS 2014

Page 63

1.3.5
Tube and Fitting Scaffolds
1.3.5.1 Key points

Scaffolds must only be erected, altered or dismantled by operatives who have been trained
to do so and are competent, or are under the direct supervision of someone who is.
Scaffolds are subject to statutory inspections, with reports of inspections raised where
appropriate.
All scaffolds must be properly erected, stable, tied to the structure as appropriate, suitable
for their purpose and equipped with toe-boards and guard-rails on all working platforms.
The BS EN 12811 series is supported by the UK National Access and Scaffolding

Confederation's technical guidance note TG20 'Guide to good practice for scaffolding with
tube and fittings'.
AL
The purpose these Regulations is to give readers an understanding of the safety issues that
relate to the use of scaffolds, particularly where site managers or other readers have to
manage scaffolding operations and assess the suitability of scaffolds which have been
erected by others.
The majority of guidelines for good practice in scaffolding can be found in UK NASC safety
and technical guidance notes.
The main British and European Standard for scaffolding is BS EN 12811 (Part 1) Scaffolds Performance requirements and general design.
This latter standard, which focuses more on scaffold design, does not cover the same range
of good practice as the old Code of Practice BS 5973 (now withdrawn) and readers are
directed to the range of UK National Access and Scaffolding Confederation (UK NASC)
particularly 'Guide to Good Practice for Scaffolding with Tubes and Fittings TG20.
They must also be used in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions or the scaffold
should be designed by a competent engineer.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
1.3.5.3 UK NASC Technical Guidance TG20:08

1
Wherever TG20' appears in the text, it refers to UK National Access and Scaffolding
Confederation publication Guide to Good Practice for Scaffolding with Tubes and Fittings
(TG20:08).
1.3.5.4 Competent persons

1
For the purposes of scaffold inspection, a competent person may be defined as:
A person who has practical and theoretical knowledge, scaffold inspection training and
actual experience of what they are to examine, in respect of a scaffold, so as to enable them
to detect errors, defects, faults or weaknesses that it is the purpose of the examination or
inspection to discover; and to assess the importance of any such discovery.
As regards the competence of individuals in relation to the erection of scaffolds,

'competence' may be taken to mean:
A person who has practical and theoretical knowledge, together with actual experience of
QCS 2014

Page 64
scaffolding, and has acquired, or who is being supervised while being trained to acquire, a
recognised qualification in scaffolding.

These Regulations are covered in detail in Section C1. The key provisions of these
Regulations that can apply to scaffolding are:
to ensure that the work is risk assessment based and that it is carried out safely
(b)
the definition of 'work at height'
(c)
fall prevention and protection
(d)
falling object prevention and protection
(e)
danger zones where people would be at risk of falling or being struck by falling objects
(f)
fragile surfaces
(g)
competence for planning, organising and working at height
(h)
weather conditions
(i)
emergencies and rescue
(j)
requirements for guard-rails, toe-boards and similar barriers
(k)
requirements for working platforms
(l)
requirements for access and egress and the use of ladders.
(m)
statutory scaffold inspections
(n)
scaffolding design
(o)
a scaffolding plan
(p)
duties on employees to report hazards and work at height safely.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
TE
IN

In general terms, these Regulations place a requirement on the Contractor to make a
suitable and sufficient assessment of every work activity in order to identify any hazards to
employees that might be encountered during their work, or to any other persons who might
be affected by what employees are doing. This includes the work of those who erect, alter
and dismantle scaffolds and also those who use scaffolds as a place of work.
put into effect control measures to reduce the risks to health and safety arising from the
hazard, so far as it is reasonably practicable to do so.
The Contractor must provide employees with information on the risks which exist and the
measures that are put in place to control them.
The employees then have a duty to comply with any instructions they have been given, and
to tell the Contractor about any work situation, or any aspect of the work, which presents a
risk to them or anyone else. These Regulations, therefore, cover the duty of the Contractor
to carry out 'work at height' risk assessments.
These Regulations include a specific requirement to produce a scaffolding plan (or method
statement) covering the assembly, use, alterations and dismantling, which is a form of risk
assessment.
Contractors must consider the physical capabilities of employees who are required to erect,
alter or dismantle scaffolding, due to the physical nature of the occupation.
EG
QCS 2014

Page 65

1
Scaffolding, including individual components and associated equipment, are classified as

'work equipment'. As such, all equipment must be suitable for its intended purpose, well
maintained and individual components inspected as necessary.

1
Manual handling will be an activity linked to the erection, alteration and dismantling of
scaffolds. It is also likely that those who work from scaffolds will be involved in manual
handling activities during the course of their work.
Contractors carrying out scaffolding activities must assess the risks arising out of manual
handling. This is usually undertaken as part of the general risk assessment and method
statement/scaffold plan.
Architects and designers have duties under these Regulations to consider the design of
temporary works such as access scaffolding, falsework and formwork structures. Where
these temporary structures would be required for construction or future maintenance,
designers have a duty to carry out a 'design risk assessment' to design out risk and
communicate any residual hazards that remain.
the competence of management and operatives for the type of work
(b)
a proven track record for the type of work
(c)
the past health and safety performance
(d)
the allocation of sufficient physical and human resources to service the contract (e.g.
scaffolding equipment, transport, qualified scaffolders and supervision)
IN
TE
(a)
Before engaging a specialist scaffolding contractor, it is a good idea to prepare information

on the intended use of the scaffolds for the scaffolding contractor to take into account. For
further information reference should be made to TG20 (Volume 1 clause 37.2.2) 'Client's
brief.
When selecting a scaffolding contractor you must check that they are competent and
consider:
EG
1.3.5.10 Planning for a scaffolding contract
AT
IO
AL
1.3.5.11 Basic scaffolding considerations

1
Before the erection of any scaffold, the following points must be clearly defined.
(a)
What is the scaffold for?
(b)
Is it to be a 'standard scaffold' as defined in UK NASC guide TG20 Volume 1?
(c)
Exactly where is it to be erected?
(d)
(e)
Can safe access be provided for the erection and use of the scaffold?
(f)
How many working platforms will there be?
(g)
Is the ground condition where the scaffold is to be erected suitable?
(h)
How and where can the scaffold be tied-in?
(i)
What bracing will be required?
QCS 2014

Page 66
(j)
What loadings will be imposed upon those working platforms, and on the scaffold as a
whole?
(k)
Will it be sheeted?
1.3.5.12 Scaffold design

These Regulations require all scaffolds to be calculated unless constructed to a generally
recognised standard configuration. This means for tube and fitting scaffolds they must be a
'standard scaffold' as defined in TG20 Volume 1 Section 2. Otherwise the scaffold MUST be
designed and calculated by a competent engineer.
Further sections of Volume 1 and Volume 2 of TG20 provide information for engineers to
design and calculate 'special scaffolds' in tube and fittings.
Scaffolding contractors should have suitable arrangements in place to manage and control
the erection, alteration and commissioning of special scaffolds (such as issuing drawings;
managing variations to the design; inspection and handing over designed scaffolds).
Note that for all standard scaffolds erected, a simple procedure must be followed to
determine the maximum safe height as required by TG20 (Volume 1 Section 2 Clause 4.4.3).
This basic calculation is intended to be carried out by those planning and organising
scaffolding and not necessarily an engineer.
IO
AL
AT
1.3.5.13 Fall prevention and protection while scaffolding
While a scaffold structure is actually being built, the scaffolders do not always have the
protection afforded by guard-rails and toe-boards until such time as they themselves have
installed them. They rely upon the use of personal fall protection equipment (harnesses) to
arrest a fall during this time.
In order to assist Contractors, the UK National Access and Scaffolding Confederation (UK
NASC) has produced UK NASC Guidance Note SG4:05, Preventing Falls in Scaffolding and
Falsework. This is the accepted industry standard to which all scaffolding contractors should
be working.
Under the heading of 'Step 1 - Planning for work at height', the guidance states:
'Scaffolding contractors should consider measures that prevent falls from height, such as
providing adequate work platforms with suitable guard-rails or other collective measures,
before resorting to fall arrest equipment (i.e. harnesses).'
Devices and systems of work that provide collective fall protection, such as Advanced
Guardrail Systems and Step-ups, are now available for certain scaffolding operations. These
collective measures enable scaffolders to provide guard-rail protection in advance of erection
and to maintain fall protection for alterations and dismantling. Such systems do not
completely eliminate the risk of a fall in all circumstances and UK NASC still recommends
the use of personal fall protection equipment. Most of the current industry guidance is based
on the content of BS EN 13374.
Scaffolding plans must also consider the rescue and recovery of a scaffolder suspended by
their personal fall protection equipment. For further information on rescue planning see UK
NASC safety guidance note SG19.
Personal fall protection equipment used for scaffolding should be inspected:
EG
IN
TE
(a)
before use by the user
(b)
thoroughly by a competent person every three months and recorded
QCS 2014
(c)

Page 67
thoroughly at other intervals if the need is identified via a risk assessment.
For further information on the inspection of fall protection equipment see UK NASC safety
guidance note SG16.
To ensure compliance with the above requirements:

(a)
scaffolders and their supervision should be trained in the requirements of SG4:05 and
the rescue plan
(b)
site managers and others who run construction sites should check that the scaffold
contractors coming on to their sites have been adequately trained in the requirements
of SG4:05.
1.3.5.14 Scaffold features
AL
Foundations
The foundations for all scaffolds must
be of adequate strength to support and
disperse the load. On hard surfaces,
such as steel and concrete of sufficient
strength and thickness, standards may
be placed directly on the surface,
although it is generally preferable to use
a base plate which is 150 mm x 150
mm in size. Sheeting or proprietary
plastic treaders can also be used to
protect sensitive floors from damage or
marking.
On other surfaces, the load should be spread by using base plates and sole boards (see
above). The soil or ground beneath the sole board should be level and properly compacted.
When a sole board is used on hard ground, the area beneath any one standard should be at
2
least 1,000 cm . If a timber sole board is used, it must be not less than 35 mm thick.
On soft or disturbed ground, the sole board area should not be less than 1,700 cm . Each
sole board should support two standards.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Sole board minimum dimensions

5
These should be:

on hard ground
450 mm x 225 mm x 35 mm
on soft ground
760 mm x 225 mm x 35 mm
Bricks, blocks and scraps of odd timber must not be used as sole boards.
On sloping ground, steps should be cut into the ground to accept base plates or sole boards
(see below). If the slope exceeds 1:10, an engineer should check that the ground has
sufficient stability.
QCS 2014
Page 68
Scaffolds founded on roofs or other suspended surfaces will need special consideration for
the loads imposed. An assessment and calculations may need to be made by an engineer to
ensure the loads can be supported, or whether temporary supports (shoring) will be required.
Alternative scaffolding materials, such as aluminium, can also be used to reduce the loads
imposed by the scaffolding.
AL

IO
Materials
Scaffold tubes and fittings must comply with BS EN 39:2001 (older tube to BS 1139). Ends
should be cut square and clean, free from any bends or distortion, corrosion, lamination
splits or surface flaws.
10
Fittings must comply with BS EN 74:3 2007 and BS 1139 Part 2.1. Fittings should not have
worn threads or damaged bolts and excess surface oil which may reduce friction grip.
11
All scaffold boards should comply with BS 2482:2009 and should not be warped, twisted,
split or badly worn, painted or otherwise treated so as to conceal any defects.
IN
TE
AT
Standards should be:

(a)
placed vertically
(b)
spaced closely enough to provide an adequate support (see TG20 Table 1 Load
classes)
12
EG
Standards
(c)
on a base plate and sole boards to prevent displacement
(d)
near to ledgers
(e)
positioned so that joints are staggered ensuring there are no more than three joints in
any one bay.
Ledgers
13
Ledgers should be:

(a)
horizontal and fixed securely to the inside of standards with right-angled, load-bearing
couplers
(b)
fitted so that joints are staggered, and not situated in the same bay
(c)
positioned so that joints in ledgers are in the end thirds of the bay, adjacent to the
standards.
QCS 2014

Page 69
Putlogs and transoms

The length of putlog tubes and transoms will
vary to suit the width class of the scaffold in
accordance with TG20 Table 7.
15
In order to avoid injury to site workers (and in

some circumstances, the public), the
outermost ends of the putlogs or transoms
should not project an unnecessary distance
beyond the face of the scaffold and/or be
shielded by the use of purpose-made
protective plastic cups or other suitable
protection.
16
Where appropriate, transoms should be long enough to butt up against the supporting
structure and enable the attachment of facade bracing tubes.
17
Putlogs should be:
securely fixed to ledgers or standards with right-angled or putlog couplers
(b)
supported with the blade placed in the mortar bed joint of the brickwork, and pushed
right into the wall to provide a sufficient support (see above). The blade should be
horizontal and bedded approximately 75 mm into the brickwork.
AT
IO
(a)
When putlogs are used on existing buildings for tasks such as refurbishment or repointing,
each putlog blade can be installed either with the flattened end located in a vertical joint
(pert) or the horizontal bed in the brickwork.
18
AL
14
TE
1.3.5.15 Boarded lifts
The recommended minimum width in accordance with BS EN 12811-1 is 600 mm.
Lift height
EG
IN
Width
BS EN12811-1 requires a minimum headroom height of 1.75 m on working lifts.
Under TG20, the maximum lift height is 2.0 m for standard putlog and independent tied
scaffolds.
Where pedestrian access is required under the first lift, a 2.7 m base lift is permissible,
provided that the scaffold is tied at the first level to alternate standards.
Transom (or putlog) spacing

5
The spacing of transoms or putlogs for boarded lifts will be determined by the standard or
grade of scaffold board used and the load class of scaffold required.
The spacing between transoms or putlogs must not result in an unsupported length of board
greater than that specified in Table 8 of TG20.
Loading
7
It is essential that scaffolds are not loaded beyond their maximum design load. Materials
should be distributed as evenly as possible with heavy items, such as piles of bricks,
positioned adjacent to standards. See Table 1 of TG20.
QCS 2014

Page 70
1.3.5.16 Non-boarded lifts

1
For scaffolds up to 15 metres high, transoms and putlogs used for non-boarded lifts should
be fixed at every pair of standards, including the pair at each end of the scaffold, to either the
standards with right-angled couplers, or to the ledgers with putlog couplers, and should be
within 300 mm of the ledger and standard connection. For scaffolds higher than 15 metres,
specialist guidance should be sought.
Note that SG4 requires all platform boards to be correctly supported as part of the safe
system of work. Transoms provided as temporary board supports on non-boarded lifts must
be left in place for alterations and dismantling.
1.3.5.17 Ledger bracing

Ledger bracing on 'standard scaffolds' should usually be fixed to alternate pairs of standards
to all lifts.
BS EN 12811-1 requires unimpeded access along the working lift. For this to be achieved in
tube and fittings, reference needs to be made to TG20 Volume 2 and the structure classed
as a 'special scaffold'.
Ledger bracing should be fitted on alternate pairs of standards, except where the width of the
bays is 1.5 m or less. Then they may be fitted on every third pair.
Ledger bracing should be fitted:
AT
IO
AL
to ledgers or standards using load-bearing fittings, which will have a minimum slip
resistance of 5 Kn
(b)
to the full height of the scaffold
(c)
to start at base plate level (unless a pavement lift is required).
IN
1.3.5.18 Facade bracing
TE
(a)
Facade bracing runs parallel to the face of the

building or structure and is also known as
longitudinal, face or sway bracing. It is fixed to the
outside standards for independent tied scaffolds.
Facade braces can be attached to transoms with

right angle couplers at every lift, or to every
standard using swivel couplers.
Facade bracing must be fixed to every sixth bay

and set at an angle between 35-55 degrees. All
joints should be made with sleeve couplers.
However, when joint pins are used, a splicing
tube should overlap by a minimum of 300 mm
and be fixed with two swivel couplers on either
side of the joint.
There are three standard facade bracing patterns.
EG
(a)
Zigzag across two bays (ledger braced).
(b)
Continuous for wider facades.
(c)
Zigzag across one bay only*.
*Note that plan bracing is required for this form of facade bracing (see Plan bracing below).
QCS 2014

Page 71
1.3.5.19 Plan bracing

1
Plan bracing is required horizontally across the scaffold on all standard scaffolds taller than 8
m where the facade bracing is fixed across one bay only (see Facade bracing above).
Plan braces are fixed to the standards with right angle couplers, except where headroom is
critical, when it may be fixed with swivels to the ledgers.
Plan bracing should be fitted every 8 m (four lifts) vertically and every 12th bay to correspond
with the facade bracing.
Greater detail on the fitting of plan bracing can be found in UK NASC guide TG20.
1.3.5.20 Scaffold ties

A tie secures the scaffold to the supporting structure and is provided to resist the inward and
outward movement of the scaffold and also to give some additional longitudinal stability.
Ties are generally designated as 'moveable' or 'non-moveable', the terminology being selfexplanatory. Where possible, ties should be left undisturbed until the scaffold is dismantled.
Where it is necessary for ties to be removed, even for a short period, the scaffold will be less
stable and the fitting of additional temporary ties will be necessary unless the initial tiepattern was designed to allow for the temporary removal of some ties.
Ties must not be removed by anyone other than a competent scaffolder or someone who is
under the direct supervision of one. The removal of scaffold ties must be carried out in
compliance with a method statement.
Scaffolds fitted with debris netting, sheeting and tarpaulins will be subjected to extra loading
due to wind pressure and will require the scaffold designer to increase the number and
frequency of ties, or the tie capacity.
Ties often pass through openings into the building, although alternative methods of tying can
be employed.
Generally, each tie must have a minimum tensile or compressive capacity of 6.1 kN,
although designers can consider heavy duty ties at 12.2 kN and light duty ties at 3.5 kN.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.3.5.21 Layout and frequency of ties

1
Ties should be evenly distributed over the scaffold, both horizontally and vertically with a
vertical spacing of no more than 4 m.
TG20 offers alternative tie patterns. If these minimum tie patterns cannot be achieved, the
pattern will need to be calculated by an engineer. At least 50% of ties must be fixed to ledger
braced standards.
The density of ties will be decided by the scaffold designer based on all the factors that have
the potential to affect the loading on the scaffold.
Full details of tying scaffolds are included in UK NASC guide TG20.
1.3.5.22 Rakers
1
For lower level and domestic scaffolds, where it is not possible to install normal ties, the
stability of a scaffold can be achieved by the use of rakers. A single, unjointed raking tube
not more than 6.4 m in length may be coupled at the top to the ledger at the second lift,
QCS 2014

Page 72
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
extending at an angle not greater than 75 to the horizontal (4:1). The foot of the raking tube
must be well founded and must always be tied back to the main scaffold. This arrangement
can be used in place of a single tie.
1.3.5.23 Freestanding access scaffolds

1
Freestanding access scaffolds for modern methods of construction, such as timber frame
structures, require calculations to be made for stability. These scaffolds would therefore be
classed as special scaffolds.
Engineers can utilise alternative methods of achieving stability, such as buttressing,

kentledge (ballast or counterweights), guys and ground anchors. Returns around corners,
access towers and loading bays can also be taken into
account by engineers when calculating stability.
For further information see UK NASC safety guidance

SG28 Safe systems of work for scaffolding associated
with timber frame construction.
1.3.5.24 Types of tie

The following methods may be employed.
QCS 2014

Page 73
Through tie: This type of tie relies on a tube, usually placed vertically inside an opening or
window in a building. The tie tube should preferably rest on the sill, as close to one edge of
the opening as possible.
Through ties should be placed as close as possible to the window reveal and secured with
right-angled couplers.
Reveal tie: In cases where it is not

possible to open or leave windows open
or where it is impractical to fit other
types of tie, a reveal tube may be
wedged or jacked tight between the
opposing faces of the window opening.
Timber packing should be thin (10 mm)
to reduce the possibility of timber
shrinkage and approximately 75 mm x
75 mm. It should be checked frequently
for tightness.
A bridle tube should then be attached to

the reveal tube with a right-angle
coupler, within 150 mm of end opposite
to the reveal pin (whether this is
horizontal or vertical). The bridle tube is
usually fixed to the scaffold in two places
with right-angle couplers although other
satisfactory arrangement may be used.
It should be noted that reveal ties

generally depend entirely upon friction
for their integrity and therefore:
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
they should be checked frequently for tightness
(b)
their use is limited to a maximum of 50%. Refer to

UK NASC guidance TG20.
EG
(a)
Box tie: This forms an assembly of tubes and couplers

around columns or other parts of a building. It should
preferably be at the level of the scaffold lift and joined to
both inside and outside ledgers or uprights.
Lip ties: An alternative form of tie, where box ties cannot be used; these take the form of an
'L' shaped arrangement of tubes and couplers which hook the scaffold behind elements of
the building, such as parapets. Lip ties do not resist inward or sway movement of the
scaffold; adjacent butting and sway transoms should be used to prevent this.
1.3.5.25 Cast-in or drilled-in anchorages

1
A selection of screwed plates, eyes, sockets and nuts are available for setting into concrete
during pouring. These may be used as anchorages.
There is a wide range of drilled-in anchorages available, also known as masonry anchors.
The accepted industry standard for the selection, use and testing of masonry anchors is UK
NASC technical guidance TG4:04 'Anchorage Systems for Scaffolding'.
QCS 2014

Page 74
Masonry anchors must be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Scaffolders who install these anchors should be trained in accordance with those
instructions.
TG4 requires two levels of testing.

(a)
Preliminary testing, wherever there is doubt about the base materials to help select
the correct type of anchor.
(b)
Proof testing, to check the installation and that the required tensile loads can be
achieved. A minimum of three ties must be tested and 5% (1 in 20) thereafter. Ties
must be tested to 1.5 times the required tensile load e.g. 6.1 kN tie requires a 9.2 kN
tensile test load.
If any anchor fails the test the cause must be investigated and the test frequency increased
to 10%. A test report should be provided with the test results as part of the handover
process.
Ring bolts are produced in two sizes.
(b)
A smaller ring for use with wire or steel

banding ties, which should be turned
around a node point of the scaffold or
otherwise prevented from slipping.
A ring of 50-55 mm internal diameter,

through which a scaffold tube could be
passed.
The strength and pull-out capabilities of all cast or

drilled anchorages must be confirmed before use.
TE
AT
IO
(a)
AL
1.3.5.26 Wire or steel banding ties
Scaffolding may be secured to the building using the small ring bolt described previously,
with 6 mm wire rope threaded through the ring and around a scaffolding member with a
minimum of three turns. Steel banding of the equivalent strength may be used for the same
purpose.
This method does not prevent movement inwards; butting or sway transoms should be used
to prevent this.
Some architectural features of a structure may be of sufficient strength for attaching wire or
banding ties although they must not be used until their suitability has been verified, by testing
if necessary. If there is any doubt, they must not be used and an alternative method of tying
must be found. Rainwater guttering and soil pipes must never be used for the attachment of
ties.
When viewed in plan, tie tubes or banding ties should be set at right-angles to the building.
Information regarding design loads for ties can be obtained from UK NASC guidance
TG4:04.
EG
IN
1.3.5.27 Scaffold boards

1
The minimum amount by which any

scaffold board should overhang any
putlog or transom must be no less than 50
QCS 2014

Page 75
mm.
2
The maximum overhang varies with the thickness of the scaffold board used. For further
information, see Table 8 of TG20.
All scaffold boards which comply with BS 2482:2009 should:

be free from splits, shakes, excessive knots, paint, oil or concrete
(b)
be usually 225 mm wide and not less than 220 mm
(c)
not be painted or otherwise treated to conceal defects
(d)
be banded or nail-plated at ends
(e)
be supported by putlogs or transoms at the appropriate spacings
(f)
overhang at least 50 mm but not more than four times the thickness of the board,
unless secured from tipping
(g)
be guarded against the wind causing the boards to lift
(h)
be secured to prevent movement if short boards less than 2.13 m are used.
AL
(a)
IO
1.3.5.28 Working platforms and decking
All working platforms and decking should be closely boarded to their full width and free from
tripping hazards. Where reasonably practicable, overlapping boards should be avoided.
Where an overlap is unavoidable, the lapped board should be secured to prevent movement
and, if necessary, bevelled pieces should be installed.
The platform should be of an adequate width for the work to be carried out and safe passage
of people. The suggested widths as shown in Table 7 of TG20 may be taken as current
industry guidance.
When material is deposited on a platform, a clear passage must be maintained for access.
The space between the inner edge of a working platform and the adjacent structure should
be kept as small as possible to prevent falls. However, there can be circumstances in which
this gap has to be left wider. This is usually due to the nature of the work being carried out,
for example to enable the craning-in of sections of curtain wall between the scaffold and the
building under construction or where there is only primary steelwork inside the scaffold.
In such circumstances, suitable compensatory measures must be taken if there is a risk of

people falling, or people being struck by falling objects. For example:
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
use of inner guard-rails and toe-boards
(b)
segregation of the areas below the scaffold and post warning signs
(c)
areas of the scaffold designated as 'danger areas', where access is restricted by

guard-rails and warning signs
(d)
use of personal fall protection equipment (harnesses).
The space between scaffolding boards should be kept as small as possible and in any case
should not exceed 25 mm.
Boards should be securely fixed and present no risk to any person below.
1.3.5.29 Gangways and runs

1
All gangways and runs should be:
QCS 2014

Page 76
(a)
600 mm wide (3 boards) if used for harrowing and the passage of materials
(b)
preferably horizontal, but where this is not possible they may slope up to a maximum
gradient of 20% (1 unit vertical to 5 units horizontal) without the requirement for
stepping laths.
If the gradient is unavoidably over 20%, or if the conditions are slippery, stepping laths must
be provided. Whilst there is no recommended distance between stepping laths, a 300 mm
separation is suggested. Stepping laths may incorporate a maximum central gap of 100 mm
for barrow wheels.
1.3.5.30 Guard-rails
Guard-rails are just one of the options a Contractor
may consider as a 'suitable and sufficient measure'
or means of protection when a person could fall any
distance liable to cause them personal injury. As
guard-rails are generally a collective measure, by
offering protection to everyone, they are to be
preferred to other measures that only protect
individuals, such as safety harnesses.
A guard-rail must be 950 mm above the edge (or

above a working platform) from which any person is liable to fall.
A second guard-rail (or mid guard-rail) may be placed approximately halfway between the
top edge of the toe-board and the top guard-rail, so that there is no gap larger than 470 mm
between the guard-rails or between the mid guard-rail and the toe-board.
All guard-rails must be fixed inside the standards with right-angle couplers to each standard.
Brick guards should always be installed where there is a possibility of materials toppling from
working platforms. If using the common type of brick guard, mid guard-rails should also be
fitted.
There will be occasions when it is possible to fall from the working platform into the structure
under construction. In these cases, it will be necessary to consider installing guard-rails to
the inner edge of working platforms or using other fall prevention/arrest measures.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.3.5.31 Temporary removal of guard-rails

1
Where it is necessary to load out scaffolds with bulk materials and so on, ideally there will be
a purpose-built loading bay with a lifting safety gate or similar. Where this is not the case, it
QCS 2014

Page 77
is permissible to temporarily remove guard-rails and toe-boards, provided that;
(a)
unless other work is stopped, other equally effective fall prevention/arrest measures
are put in place (such as safety harnesses) whilst there is an exposed edge
(b)
once the loading has been completed, the guard-rails and toe-boards are replaced
immediately.
The removal and refitting of guard-rails and toe-boards must only be carried out by a
competent scaffolder or a trainee who is under the direct supervision of a competent
scaffolder.
1.3.5.32 Toe-boards
Toe-boards must be:
(a)
fitted in conjunction with all guard-rails
(b)
a minimum height of 150 mm in accordance with TG20
(c)
fixed inside the standard, at a minimum of two positions.
AL
IO
1.3.5.33 Access to scaffolds
Contractors are required to specify the use of existing structures as a means of access to
height, for example lifts or a permanent staircase, in preference to temporary measures such
as ladders.
Whilst ladders have been the commonly used means of access to scaffolds, the use of other,
safer means of access, such as stair towers, should now be considered in preference.
BS EN 12811 recommends that where extensive work is carried out, stairways should be
provided for access, and for taller scaffolds consideration should be given to the use of a
passenger hoist.
Note: Where passenger hoists are used, then additional non-mechanical access must also
be provided in case of breakdown or emergencies.
The UK NASC recommends the following hierarchy of access from TG20.
(b)
Stairways.
(a)
EG
IN
TE
AT
Ladder access bays with single lift ladders (to reduce the potential fall distance).
(c)
Ladder access bays with multiple lift ladders.
(d)
Internal ladder access with protected ladder traps.
(e)
External ladder using a safety gate.
Where a ladder protrudes through a working platform (known as a ladder trap), the
remaining width of the platform must be at least 450 mm (2 boards wide).
1.3.5.34 Ladder access

1
Straight ladders used for access to a scaffold must:

(a)
be manufactured to BS EN 131/BS 1129
(b)
not be defective in any way
(c)
not be painted or treated in any way that might hide defects
(d)
be placed on a firm footing, with each stile equally supported
QCS 2014

Page 78
(e)
be so positioned that there is sufficient space at each rung to give an adequate

foothold
(f)
be positioned approximately at an angle of 75, that is: 1 measure horizontal to 4

measures vertical
(g)
be secured at the top using square lashings or a proprietary ladder clamp. For longer
ladders, additional ladder supports (stays) can be used to prevent the ladder
deflecting when used. The stay must not obstruct the rung of the ladder
(h)
extend approximately 1 m above the working platform, unless there is another

adequate handhold
(i)
be provided with suitable rest platforms if rising more than 9 m
(j)
be the 'right way up' (tie wires or bars positioned under the rungs).
Note: Shorter/Ladders, which provide access to only one lift, are recommended.
AL
Where scaffolds are designed with internal ladders, working platforms must be provided with
access holes for each ladder. Such access holes should be at least 450 mm wide (across
the platform) and not less than 600 mm in the other direction. The access hole should be
protected with a ladder trapdoor as good practice.
AT
be fitted with guard-rails and toe-boards, as previously detailed
(b)
not be used for the storage of materials
(c)
be installed at a maximum vertical height of 9 metres and multiples thereof
(d)
be equipped with access holes of similar dimensions to working platforms as detailed

above.
TE
(a)
Lateral gaps in guard-rails and toe-boards for access and egress must be kept to a minimum
and protected with a ladder safety gate as good
practice.
EG
Landing platforms should:
IN
IO
1.3.5.35 Landing platforms
1.3.5.36 Incomplete scaffolds

1
Where the erection of a scaffold has not been

completed, physical measures must be taken to
restrict access to the scaffold, e.g. remove or
board over the access ladder(s) and warn people of the fact
QCS 2014

Page 79
that the scaffold is not safe to use. The method of warning will usually be 'scaffold
incomplete' signs at each point of access.
2
On larger scaffolds that are substantially complete, it may only be necessary to deny access
to the part of the scaffold that remains incomplete, providing:
(a)
the part of the scaffold that is complete is safe to occupy
(b)
all access points from the completed part of the scaffold, beyond which the scaffold is
incomplete, are clearly defined by warning signs and access to the incomplete part of
the scaffold is effectively prevented with guard-rails or other barriers.
1.3.5.37 Loading of scaffolds

Any working platform on a scaffold should not be so loaded that it gives rise to a danger of
collapse or to any deformation which could affect its safe use.
Any scaffold, or part of, that is to be loaded by mechanical means (e.g. crane or fork lift
truck), must be specially designed and calculated as a loading bay or tower.
The scaffold should be checked periodically to ensure that the loads are within the
permissible limits. Refer to Table 7 of TG20.
IO
AL
AT
1.3.5.38 Loads on scaffold fittings
BS EN 74 Part 1 contains specifications for scaffolding couplers, including the 'slip-load' of

scaffold fittings. Load-bearing fittings such as right-angle and swivel couplers have much
higher slip values than non-load-bearing items such as putlog clips.
Other considerations are:
TE
scaffold fittings must not be oily or greasy. This will cause reduced frictional resistance
between the tube and the fitting
(b)
the correct spanner or podger must be used, and used in the correct manner,
otherwise the screw threads may be overstressed
(c)
scaffold fittings and tubes must be free from corrosion or other obvious defects.
EG
IN
(a)
1.3.5.39 Hoisting of materials

1
When working at heights, various items of lifting equipment or ancillary lifting equipment will
usually be required. These may include block and tackle, motorised winches, wire ropes,
chains or slings.
Goods and passenger hoists should not be tied to the scaffold unless specially designed and
calculated for the purpose.
1.3.5.40 Inspection of scaffolds

1
All scaffolds and working platforms (together with all other protective measures) are 'work
equipment' and so the inspection requirements of these Regulations apply:
'Every Contractor shall ensure that where the safety of work equipment depends on how it is
installed or assembled, it is not used after installation or assembly in any position unless it
has been inspected in that position.'
This clearly applies to all scaffolds including mobile and static tower scaffolds.
The inspection must be carried out by a competent person. A Contractor may wish to have a
QCS 2014

Page 80
commercial arrangement with a scaffolding contractor in order to carry this out.

5
There is a further requirement in that every Contractor must ensure that work equipment
exposed to conditions that may cause any deterioration liable to result in dangerous
situations is inspected at suitable intervals, and also when any exceptional circumstances
that are liable to jeopardise the safety of the work equipment have occurred.
In addition, Contractors must ensure that working platforms used for construction and from
which a person could fall more than 2 metres are not used in any position unless they have
been inspected in that position within the previous seven days.
1.3.5.41 Inspection of places of work at height

An additional requirement as regards inspection (or checking) is that every Contractor must
ensure, so far as it is reasonably practicable, that every surface, parapet, permanent rail or
other such fall protection measure of every place of work at height is checked before each
use.
AL
1.3.5.42 Reports
Where an inspection has been carried out, a written report of the findings of the inspection
must be made before the end of the working period.
The person who prepares the written report must provide a copy within 24 hours to the
person on whose behalf the inspection was carried out. The report, or a copy of it, must be
kept on the site where the inspection was carried out until the construction work is
completed, and then kept at the company offices for three months.
Contractors are free to design their own inspection report forms or purchase pads of them
from commercial suppliers.
In either case the following details must be included:
IN
TE
AT
IO
The name and address of the person for whom the inspection was carried out.
(b)
The location of the work equipment inspected.
(c)
A description of the work equipment inspected.
(d)
The date and time of the inspection.
(e)
EG
(a)
Details of any matter identified that could give rise to a risk to the health or safety of
any person.
(f)
Details of any action taken as a result of any matter identified in 5.
(g)
Details of any further actions considered necessary.
(h)
The name and position of the person making the report.
Where someone has carried out an inspection of a scaffold and believes that it is not safe to
use, they must inform the person for whom the inspection has been carried out that the
scaffold is unsafe. The scaffold must not then be used until it has been made safe.
An example of an inspection report form is included in Appendix 7 of this module.
1.3.5.43 Use of scaffolds by other employees

1
Scaffolds erected for one Contractor may (provided that permission has been sought and
given) be used by employees of another company, providing that the second Contractor is
satisfied that the scaffold is safe for its intended use and conforms to these Regulations.
QCS 2014

Page 81
1.3.5.44 Protection of the public

1
Protection of the public and other persons against falling materials should be provided by the
use of nets, brick guards, toe-boards and protective fans, etc.
1.3.5.45 Scaffold in a public place

These
can
cause
particular
problems to people with physical
and visual disabilities, unless
adequate steps are taken to reduce
'contact' hazards with such items as
tube ends and threads on fittings.
This can usually be achieved by

cladding the run of standards or
binding the scaffold poles and
fittings with suitable padding and/or
brightly coloured bunting and tape.
All joints should be wrapped to

protect the public and other persons
from sharp edges, and plastic
protective cups should be placed in
or over the ends of tubes.
In most cases the scaffold will need to be designed to allow for ledger braces to be omitted
at ground level so that members of the public can pass under the scaffold.
The bottom or 'pavement' lift of the scaffold should be at a height no greater than 2.7 m. The
lift above pavement gantries must be fully close boarded, with a double layer of scaffold
boards and a layer of impervious sheeting.
It is not sufficient to warn the public of the hazard just by placing safety signs on the,
scaffold. Contractors must have acted to reduce the hazard as far as reasonably
practicable.
To ensure the scaffold is not struck by vehicles, no part of it should be allowed to project into
the roadway, unless appropriate measures are taken, such as traffic control or a road
closure. The provision of lighting at night may also be necessary.
Supplementary lights should be installed on the scaffold where it has been erected in a place
to which the public has access (whether pedestrians or vehicles), unless the level of
'background' lighting after dark is thought to be sufficient.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.3.5.46 Handover certificates

1
Contractors may, in their own interests, require that scaffold handover certificates are issued
by the scaffolding contractor.
Such certificates usually specify:

(a)
that the scaffold is complete and complies with the requirements of relevant standards
or guidance
(b)
the maximum distributed loads which are permitted on the working lifts
(c)
the guarding of working platforms
QCS 2014

Page 82
(d)
that the bracing and ties are complete
(e)
that inspection is required every seven days or following exposure to adverse weather
conditions
(f)
that the findings of the inspection should be recorded
(g)
that the Contractor is responsible for their employees working on the scaffold
(h)
that sheeting or netting is not to be fixed to the scaffold structure unless the scaffold
has been specifically designed for it
(i)
that unauthorised modifications or alterations are not to be made to the scaffold.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
A specimen handover certificate is shown in Appendix 9.
QCS 2014

Page 83

1.3.5 Appendix 1
Widths of access scaffold platforms
Table 7 from TG20:08
(1)
Minimum
number of 225
mm nominal
width boards
mm
Effective width of
boarded platform for
(2)
loading calculations
mm
Working platforms for men without

materials or only for the passage of
materials
500
3 boards
705
For men and materials provided there is

430 mm left clear for the passage of men
or 600 mm if barrows are used
800
4 boards
4+1 boards
4+2 boards
AL
Minimum
clear width
(4)
mm
1,050
For use in dressing or roughly shaping

(3)
stone
1,300
1,155
1,435
1,655
6 boards
7 boards
1,350
1605
930
1205
1430
5 boards
5+1 boards
5+2 boards
AT
For carrying trestles or other similar

higher platforms
IO
Purpose
TE
Notes:
Where internal ladders are incorporated the minimum width may be 430 mm, i.e. two boards
Effective width as defined in BS EN 12811-1 includes a 30 mm allowance for toe-board
These scaffolds should be specially designed
For hop-up platforms, a minimum width of 450 mm is required
EG
IN
QCS 2014

Page 84

1.3.5 Appendix 2
Maximum and target span of scaffold boards
Table 8 from TG20:08
Thickness
Transom spacing (span of

board)
Target span
Tolerance
(1)
mm
mm
mm
mm
38
1,200
+100
ns
50
150
38
1,500
+100
ns
50
150
50
ns
2,600
50
200
63
ns
ns
3,250
50
250
ns
TE
BS 2482-2
mm
mm
38-1.5m
Maximum
mm
BS 2482-1
38-1.2 m
Minimum
IO
Span
Maximum
span
AT
Nominal Tolerance
Board overhang
AL
Board
specificatio
n
Board properties verified by machine stress grading
EG
(1)
IN
Notes:
ns means 'not stated' as calculation indicates the stress exceeds the allowable limit on the scaffold
QCS 2014

Page 85
1.3.5 Appendix 3
Load classes for access and working scaffolds made from tube and fittings
Table 1 from TG20:08 (Extract)
Load
class
Likely use of
platform
Duty
Max. bay
length
Max. spacing Max. number

board
of boards
transoms
m
mm
Inspection, painting,
stone cleaning, light
cleaning and access
2.7
Light duty
Plastering, painting,
stone cleaning, glazing
and pointing
2.4
General purpose
General building work

including brickwork,
window and mullion
fixing, rendering and
plastering
1,200
AL
Inspection and very

light duty
1,200
1,200
IO
AT
2.1
4+1
4+2
R
TE
Heavy duty
Masonry work,
concrete block work,
and very heavy
cladding
EG
IN
5+1 5+2
1.8
900
54+1
4+2
5+1
5+2
The above table is an extract of Table 1 from UK NASC Guidance Notes TG20:08. It is
reproduced only for the purpose of highlighting to readers the different load classes to which
scaffolds may be erected and examples of work activities for which each class might be
used.
QCS 2014

Page 86

1.3.5 Appendix 4
TE
AT
IO
AL
Putlog scaffold
Check from the ground:
IN
Safety checklist
EG
1. Base soundness; adequate spread of load;

particularly as there is only one line of standards,
avoidance of pavement lights, manhole covers, etc.;
no nearby excavation
Check from inside building or on the scaffold:

9. Spade end of putlog laid horizontally where possible, fully home
(75 mm) in brickwork (bed joint)
2. Line of standards and ledgers. Standards vertical
10. Ties, particularly on lift below working platform or, in early stages,
rakers on alternate standards. Special attention to 'through' ties on
large flank ends without windows. Load-bearing couplers to be used
3. Spacing of putlogs
11. Platform loading (not overloaded)
4. Working platform. Check line and even support of

boards; overhang; lapped boards and fillets
12. Security and correct use of all fittings (couplers), particularly on

transoms and bracing
5. Guard-rails and toe-boards
13. Condition of tubes and fittings
6. Security of boards, toe-boards and guard-rails
14. Damage from falling material
7. Longitudinal bracing
15. Security of stacked materials
8. Means of access
QCS 2014

Page 87
Construction Site Safety 1.3.5

Appendix 5
Safety checklist
Check from the scaffold:
EG
Check from the ground:
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Independent tied scaffold
1. Base soundness; adequate spread of load;

9. Ties, particularly on lift below working platform or, in early stages,
avoidance of pavement lights, manhole covers, etc.; no rakers on alternate standards. Special attention to 'through' ties on
nearby excavation
large flank ends without windows. Load-bearing couplers to be used
2. Line of standards and ledgers; standards vertical
10. Special loadings by protective fans, wind sails, etc.; anchorage

and spread of load
3. Staggering of joints (vertical and horizontal)
11. Security of boards, toe-boards and guard-rails
4. Spacing of transoms
12. Security and correct use of all fittings (couplers), particularly on

transoms and bracing
5. Working platform. Check line and even support of

boards; overhang; lapped boards and fillets
13. Condition of tubes and fittings
6. Security of guard-rails and toe-boards
14. Damage by loads swinging from cranes or by falling material
7. Longitudinal, ledger and plan bracing
15. Overloading
8. Means of access
QCS 2014

Safety checklist
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

1.3.5 Appendix 6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Base
Line of standards and ledgers
Line and spacing of transoms
Diagonal bracing (in both directions)
Plan bracing
Security of boards, toe-boards and guardrails. Maximum gap at wall
Security and correct use of couplers and fittings
Condition of tube and fittings
Even spread of load on platform
10
Means of access
11. Overloading
Page 88
QCS 2014

Page 89
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
With birdcage scaffolds, the floor of the building has to carry the full weight of the scaffold and its
load. Sole plates are therefore necessary to help distribute the load as widely as possible - and they
should always be set at right angles to the underlying floor beams or joists.
QCS 2014

Page 90
Construction Site Safety 1.3.5

Appendix 7
Report of inspection on *scaffolding, *work equipment or working platform
(*delete as appropriate)
Inspection carried out on behalf of: ...........................................................................................................
Inspection carried out by (name and position): .........................................................................................
Address of site (or location of work equipment): .......................................................................................
AL
Details of any action

taken as a result of
any matter identified
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Description of
Details of any
place of work, matter identified
or part
giving rise to the
inspected
health and safety
of any person
Date and
time of
inspection
Details of any
further action
required
QCS 2014

Page 91

1.3.5 Appendix 8
Short checklist
Check at each inspection that your scaffold does not have these faults:
Footings
Bracing (facade
1 2 3 4 and ledger)
Ties
1
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Soft and uneven
Some missing
Some missing
No base plates
Loose
Loose
No sole boards
Wrong fittings
1 2 3 4 Putlogs and
transoms
2 3 4
IO
Standards
AL
Undermined
Loose,
Jointed at same
height
Wrongly spaced
Wrong spacing
Wrongly supported
AT
Not plumb
1 2 3 4
Bad boards
Trap boards
TE
Incomplete boarding
Insufficient supports
IN
Damaged
Boarding
EG
Ledgers
Couplings
1 2 3 4
2 3 4
Guard-rails and toeboards

1 2 3 4
Wrong fitting
Loose
No check couplers
Wrong height
Joint in same bays
Loose
Some missing
Damaged
Damaged
Not level
Loose
Bridles
2 3 4
Ladders
Weak support
Not tied
Wrong spacing
Damaged
Wrong couplings
Insufficient length
Key: 1 = good, 2 = average, 3 = poor, 4 = N/A
1 2 3 4
QCS 2014

Page 92

1.3.5 Appendix 9
Specimen handover certificate
(This is a type of handing over certificate which could be used.)
SCAFFOLDING - HANDING OVER CERTIFICATE
To (Contractor): .............................................................................. Date: ................................................
Site: ................................................................................................ Time: ...............................................
Description of scaffold or section of scaffold handed over: .....................................................................
AL
...............................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................
IO
Drawing No: ..............................................................................................................................................

(where applicable)
AT
Scaffolding as described above has now been completed and complies with current standards. It is
structurally sound and should only be used and loaded in accordance with our Quotation No:
Use only for:.......................................................................................................................................
TE
a)
(.....................................)
b) Loading to be: ..................................................................................... working lifts with distributed
IN
Load of: ......................................................................................................... .....(kN/m2 (lb/ft2) per lift)
EG
The detailed requirements of the Regulations with regard to guard-rails - working platforms - toeboards - bracing and ties have been complied with.
In order to comply with the Regulations, this scaffold must be inspected before being taken into use for
the first time, at regular intervals not exceeding 7 days since the last inspection, after any event likely
to have jeopardised the safety of the scaffold and after any substantial addition, dismantling or other
alteration. Particulars of each inspection must be recorded in a Report of Inspection.
This scaffold has / has not (delete as appropriate) been designed to take tarpaulin sheets (or other
windsails).
Scaffold Contractor: ..................................................................................................................................
Depot: .......................................................................................................................................................
Certificate received on behalf of the Contractor: ......................................................................................
QCS 2014

Page 93

1.3.6
Safe Working on Roofs and at Heights
1.3.6.1 Key points

Gravity is the only rule that works every time! Those who work on roofs are, by the nature of
their work, at risk of falling if appropriate measures are not taken.
Those who plan, supervise or carry out roof work must be competent to do so.
A risk assessment and, where considered necessary, a method statement, must be

compiled for all such work.
Integral features of roofs such as a steep pitch, valleys, fragile cladding or roof lights can
increase the risk of falling.
Falls through fragile roofing materials continue to be the cause of many deaths and injuries.
Bad weather can have a significant impact on the risk control measures that have to be
taken.
Ideally work will be carried out from a stable working platform, fitted with guard-rails and toeboards.
Where such fall prevention measures cannot be used, effective fall arrest measures must be
put in place, ideally 'collective' measures such as safety nets or other soft landing systems.
Those who work on roofs must also take into consideration the safety of anyone passing
below to protect them from falling materials or tools.
AT
IO
AL
Roof work, including work on fragile roofing materials, gives rise to a substantial number of
fatal and serious accidents.
It needs to be emphasised, however, that there is not just the actual roof working to be
considered, but the whole process - including planning the job, creating a safe access, the
safe storage of equipment and materials etc.
There is no such thing as a 'safe height'; anyone who is off the ground is at risk of falling.
The hazard exists on working platforms, scaffolds, ladders, flat and pitched roofs, open
steelwork and any area in which work is being done in proximity to fragile materials,
openings, holes and roof edges.
Most accidents could be avoided, given the provision of appropriate equipment and the
adequate information, instruction, training and supervision of those who use it.
EG
IN
TE

1
These Regulations require that a 'suitable and sufficient' risk assessment of all work
activities is carried out and that significant risks are recorded. By its very nature, work carried
out on roofs will entail a significant risk of falls from height unless appropriate control
measures are put in place.
The risk assessment must:
(a)
identify the hazards arising from working on roofs which will include working at height
(b)
specify the control measures that will be put in place to reduce the risk of falls to an
acceptable level.
These Regulations then require that the control measures identified are put in place.
QCS 2014

Page 94
Contractors to ensure that work at height is planned, supervised and carried out in a
safe manner by competent persons
(b)
work at height to be carried out using appropriate work equipment, particularly that
which provides collective fall protection
(c)
suitable and sufficient steps to be taken to prevent falling objects which are likely to
cause injury to any person
(d)
give consideration to the weather conditions
(e)
where appropriate, the need to plan how the rescue of someone who has fallen but is
suspended might be achieved
(f)
where there is a risk of a person falling or being struck by a falling object, steps to be
taken to prevent unauthorised access into that area.
AL
(a)
The key areas are planning and competence to ensure that the control measures will be put
in place and followed.
The relevant requirements of these Regulations with regard to roof work are considered to
be:
AT
IO
All equipment used in connection with work carried out at heights is classified as 'work
equipment' for the purposes of these Regulations. This will include not only items such as
scaffold components and ladders, but also the tools used such as slate rippers, screw guns
and the like.
These Regulations require that whoever supplies work equipment must ensure that it is
suitable for the job in hand, maintained in good working order and subjected to inspection as
necessary.
EG
IN
TE
1.3.6.6 Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment

In the context of roof work, these Regulations apply to those items of work equipment that
are used for mechanically lifting or lowering any load to or from a place of work at height,
such as:
(a)
mobile cranes
(b)
mobile elevating work platforms
(c)
passenger lifts
(d)
inclined hoists
(e)
tele-handlers
(f)
powered hoists
(g)
gin-wheels.
Also covered by these Regulations are the accessories that are used in conjunction with
lifting equipment, such as:
(a)
ropes
(b)
hooks
QCS 2014

(c)
chains
(d)
eye-bolts
(e)
slings.
Page 95

Where a risk to health and safety has been identified by a risk assessment and cannot be
adequately controlled by other means that are equally or more effective, the Contractor must
provide suitable personal protective equipment (PPE) and ensure that it is used by
employees. PPE should only be used as a last resort after other methods of controlling the
risk have been considered and deemed not to be reasonably practicable.
In the context of roof work, the definition of PPE includes items of fall-arrest equipment such
as safety harnesses and lanyards.
is being used for, and also ensure that the PPE will fit the wearer and allow them to work
comfortably.
The Contractor must ensure that employees have been given adequate and appropriate
information, instruction and training to enable them to understand the risks being protected
against, the purpose of the PPE and the manner in which it is to be used.
Whilst the Contractor must take reasonable steps to ensure that any personal protective
equipment supplied is used, the employee in turn must ensure that they use the equipment
provided in accordance with instruction and training given and know the procedures for
reporting loss or defect to their Contractor.
AT
IO
AL
These Regulations place legal duties on several categories of duty-holder, each of which has
the potential to reduce the risks to health and safety during and after the construction phase.
IN
TE
EG
Designers
The definition of designer under CDM is extremely wide and many contractors will also be
designers. A common scenario would be where the client simply asks the contractor to sort
out a leaking roof and the contractor designs the solution.
Whoever devises the specification for the work is likely to be considered a designer. This is
very important as the designer has a legal duty to consider health and safety issues in
relation to not only carrying out the work, but also the maintenance, cleaning and eventual
removal (demolition) of the roof.
In common with all aspects of design, the person carrying out the design should be
sufficiently knowledgeable of the construction process to specify how the work can be
carried out safely.
Roofers working on industrial type buildings are commonly faced with the problem of fragility.
This may be because the roof itself is made of a fragile material such as asbestos cement
sheets or simply because the rooflights are not load bearing. As the standard specification
for rooflights is 10% by area, this represents a significant amount of fragile roof surface.
When designing roofs, designers should also consider such things as ongoing maintenance
activities, for example how rooflights and gutters can be cleaned safely and whether the safe
access for this type of work can be designed-in at the design stage.
QCS 2014

Page 96
Clients
Under these Regulations the client must provide relevant pre-construction information to
other parties such as the Contractor and Engineer to enable the job to be planned so that it
can be carried out safely. The client, along with other duty-holders, must take reasonable
steps to ensure that all parties involved are competent to do what is required of them.
The main type of information that would be relevant for roof work would be the presence of
asbestos, areas of damage, loading limitations of the roofing material, the existence of fallrestraint systems, the location of safe access routes where known, as built drawings where
available and so on.
It should be noted that the client may not be aware of such factors as damaged areas of the
roof or the existence (or lack) of safe access routes. The client may well assume that the job
will be carried out by a method that is neither practical nor safe. They commonly expect
roofing contractors to be able to access places and do tasks that they would simply not allow
their employees to do.
AL
Design
(b)
Selection of contractors/staff
(c)
Planning
(d)
Carrying out the work
(e)
Post-completion information (at the end).
AT
(a)
Selection of contractors/staff
EG
IN
Where a Contractor is using its own employees to carry out roof work, it is essential that
several factors are taken into consideration. Both training and operational work on roofs can
be hazardous, strenuous work, often involving:
(a)
work at considerable heights for long periods of time
(b)
work outdoors usually in hot, cold or wet weather and possibly high winds
(c)
repetitive materials handling
(d)
11
IO
There are various stages to any roofing project:
TE
10
The stages of a roofing project
reaching, stretching, and maintaining balance in awkward postures whilst carrying

loads on varying roof terrains.
12
This means that fitness to work is particularly important and needs to be considered by the
Contractors.
13
It is vital that people working on roofs do not suffer from:

(a)
any neurological condition likely to cause seizures
(b)
weakness of limbs, loss of balance including vertigo (dizziness from being at height)
(c)
any heart or lung condition likely to be aggravated by strenuous work
(d)
any disability/impairment of limb function
(e)
any other disease, disability, medication, alcohol, drugs or effects of toxic substances
(lead etc.) likely to impair mental or physical activity, especially at a height
(f)
temporary ailments such as influenza or other conditions that may affect judgment
(g)
uncorrected sight problems
QCS 2014
(h)
14

Page 97
a physique that would be unsuitable for the work.
It is very strongly suggested that Contractors should establish a policy on fitness for work.
Planning
15
Planning the work should include consideration of the progression of the work with regard to:
(a)
site-specific risks
(b)
weather conditions
(c)
emergencies (including rescue)
(d)
safe means of access and egress
(e)
materials handling and storage.
The site-specific risks could include:
working above public areas such as shopping malls or public streets
(b)
the difficulties in delivering materials and transferring them to roof level
(c)
the presence of site traffic or road traffic on a public road
(d)
awkward working environments, such as occupied houses or factories
(e)
emergency situations, such as rescuing someone who has fallen and is suspended at
high level in a safety harness
(f)
vent pipes that may suddenly shower unsuspecting roof workers with anything ranging
from high pressure steam to noxious chemicals
(g)
certain species of bird that will aggressively defend their territory
(h)
the presence of accumulated bird droppings.
TE
AT
IO
(a)
EG
Weather conditions
IN
16
AL
Site-specific risks
It goes without saying that the weather can have a significant impact upon the intention to
carry out roof work and may ultimately be the reason for the start of a job being delayed, or it
being suspended part-way through.
18
Heavy rain, high winds, frost or snow might make it unsafe for operatives to work at height.
19
The only note of caution is that the forecast wind speed is given for 'ground level'. The wind
speed can be considerably higher at height, for example, if installing a glass atrium roof on
top of a multi-storey tower block.
20
If a roofing job has started and the weather is forecast to be changeable, with perhaps
extremes of conditions, it will be essential to monitor the forecast so that work can be halted
before it becomes unsafe to continue.
21
The wind speed could have an impact upon whether or not it is safe to handle or store
certain types of materials, such as roofing sheets, at height.
22
Work involving the handling of sheeting and cladding requires extra care in windy conditions,
when a sheet may act like a 'sail' causing the person holding it to lose their balance.
23
Working in gusty wind conditions can be particularly dangerous. Industry Guidance suggests
that the following activities should cease when the average wind speeds shown are
17
QCS 2014

Page 98
exceeded:
(a)
27.36 km/h - handling lightweight materials and any materials over 5 metres long or
rolls of felt
(b)
37.01 km/h- general roofing activities.
Emergencies (including rescue)

Several types of emergency, such as a fire, could occur either at ground level or at height,
which requires that an emergency evacuation of the whole site or the roof be carried out. For
this reason the planning stage must ensure that safe access and egress will be available at
all times. Depending upon the nature of the job it may be necessary to have more than one
access/egress route.
25
If the site layout necessitates that the asphalt/bitumen boiler has to be sited on the roof, the
question will have to be asked as to whether it is still possible to get off the roof safely if a fire
occurs.
26
It may be necessary to deal with medical emergencies where someone becomes

incapacitated at height through illness or injury and is unable to make their way back to
ground level. In such circumstances, the local fire and rescue service may have to be
involved to effect a safe rescue. It is not unknown for someone who has been incapacitated
at height to be recovered to ground level in an empty skip suspended from a tower crane
whilst being attended to by a paramedic.
27
Carrying out roof work will often involve the use of fall-arrest equipment such as safety nets
or safety harness and lanyard. Anyone who falls will have to be rescued promptly,
particularly if they are suspended in a harness.
TE
Safe means of access and egress
AT
IO
AL
24
The means of gaining access to height and safely working there will depend upon many
factors such as the nature of the roof structure, whether there is room to erect a scaffold or
bring in a MEWP and even the length of time that the job is expected to take.
29
Some common means of gaining access to height or actually working at height are:
EG
IN
28
ladders
(b)
mobile access equipment
(c)
(a)
fixed or mobile towers
(d)
stair towers
(e)
independent scaffolds.
Materials handling and storage

30
Part of the planning process will involve taking decisions on:

(a)
what roofing materials are required and quite possibly where they can be stored safely
at ground level
(b)
a safe means of transferring roofing materials to height and in what quantities
(c)
avoiding the overloading of any part of the roof by stacking materials prior to
installation
(d)
the safe storage of sheet materials if they are to be stored for any length of time,
particularly during windy weather
(e)
the safe distribution of materials around the roof during installation
QCS 2014
(f)

Page 99
the safe transfer of waste materials back to ground level.
1.3.6.9 Carrying out the work

1
To a large extent, the risks of doing the job, the risk-control measures that will be necessary
and therefore the way in which the work is carried out will depend upon the type of roof.
Flat roofs
On flat roofs, falls most frequently occur from:
(a)
the edge of a completed roof
(b)
from the leading edge where work is being carried out
(c)
through openings or gaps
(d)
through fragile material.
AL
A roof with a pitch of less than 10 is classed as a flat roof. Safe access to the roof, and to
any working place on that roof, must be provided and maintained.
If there is no parapet or similar barrier to stop anyone from falling, edge protection must be
provided. This may take the form of standard guard-rails and toe-boards or, providing
nobody will approach the edge, a barrier set back from the edge.
Where works are to be undertaken which could result in materials or equipment falling onto
people passing below, protective measures must be taken. This can range from adding
netting, close boarding or debris fans to scaffolds or establishing exclusion zones. These
could range from permanently fenced off areas to simply having someone stopping people
from accessing the 'drop zone' at critical times.
There will be times when operatives need to work at exposed leading edges, but it is not
reasonably practical to install guard-rails or other fall prevention measures. In these
circumstances, it will be necessary to install or provide fall-arrest systems. The most suitable
type of fall-arrest system will be indicated by a risk assessment. Where safety nets, air bags
or other soft landing systems are used, they will provide collective safety for anyone working
above them who falls.
Alternatively, it may be decided that operatives should wear a safety harness with a lanyard
clipped to a strong anchor point or a horizontal 'running line'. The effectiveness of this
system depends upon the training of operatives in the use of the equipment and the
operatives actually 'clipping on'.
When a safety harness and lanyard is used, consideration must be given to the position of
the anchor point, which ideally will be above the head-height of the user. Where the anchor
point is at ankle level, for example, there will be more slack in the lanyard and the fall will be
further before it is arrested. It has been calculated that in some circumstances a person
could fall up to 5.5 metres before the fall is arrested. In this situation, where the person is
working less than 5.5 metres above ground level, impact with the ground would occur before
the fall could be arrested.
Sometimes, guard-rails have to be moved or removed to enable work to be undertaken. If

this is to happen:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
10
(a)
an equally effective safe system of work must be in place and maintained, which will
prevent falls of persons or materials
(b)
the guard-rails must be replaced or re-erected as soon as practical.
Some flat roofing systems will involve the use of various chemicals or hot-works and the
QCS 2014

Page 100
liberation of fumes or solvents may occur, Consideration to COSHH should be given as well
as the significant possibility of fire, explosion or burns from hot bitumen.
Traditional pitched roofs
11
On traditional pitched roofs, most falls occur:

(a)
from the eaves, by slipping down then falling from the roof
(b)
into the structure during truss erection
(c)
from gable ends during salvage prior to demolition
(d)
through fragile roofing materials, particularly fragile roof lights
(e)
when passing along valley gutters with fragile materials alongside the access way.
A sloping roof is defined as any roof having a pitch of more

than 10.
13
Work on pitched roofs should only be carried out:
AL
12
by persons who are physically capable and adequately

trained
(b)
using roof ladders or a temporary work platform

equipped with guard-rails and toe-boards as necessary
and securely fixed to prevent it slipping
(c)
providing either a suitable catch barrier or a working

platform with guard-rails is erected at the eaves of the building.
AT
IO
(a)
This requirement applies to any work on a sloping roof, including

access to and egress from other workplaces.
15
If the steepness of the roof is such that it prevents a secure foothold,

a working platform must be erected. Roofs pitched at over 50 should
be regarded as 'steep', as should shallower slopes if they are
slippery.
Curved roofs
When working on a curved roof such as a glass barrel-vault structure,

providing:
16
EG
IN
TE
14
(a)
the roofing material is load-bearing, and
(b)
there is a secure anchorage at the apex of the roof
17
it is usually necessary to employ rope access techniques such as work-positioning or

abseiling. It is essential that any such system incorporates a self-locking device to prevent
the uncontrolled descent of anyone who loses their footing.
18
Additionally, proprietary 'rubber steps' are available that follow the exact contour of a curved
roof, with sections being joined to extend the overall length. These steps must be regarded
as a foothold only as they are not equipped with a hand-rail. They must therefore only be
used in conjunction with another form of fall protection, such as a fall-arrest block.
19
Where there is a risk of falling through a curved roof, consideration should be given to
installing safety nets inside the roof.
QCS 2014

Page 101
Profiled roofs
These range from a single asbestos cement sheet on an outside toilet to the latest
continuously extruded system formed in situ to cover large portal frame buildings. The
systems will differ in complexity and range from single skin through to composite factoryproduced units.
21
New build profiled installation will normally be carried out over a system of safety nets which
provide fall protection.
22
There are other means of providing safe access for roofs. Traditionally for new build systems
this was called leading edge protection and used working platforms in the form of lightweight
staging. This system advances along the roof in line with, or previously, in advance of the
installation of the roof sheets.
23
If a double skin roof system is being installed, the inner sheet or liner tray must be fixed by at
least four fixings before it can be stood on.
24
Metal profile roof sheets are therefore still fragile until they have been fixed. Furthermore,
many rooflight assemblies, which are often installed as part of a profiled roof system, are
also fragile. This will necessitate proprietary work platforms such as 'Youngman' boards are
used to enable safe access.
25
Any working platform must be a minimum of 600 mm wide with hand-rails on one or both
sides, depending on whether a fall can occur. This does create practical difficulties in terms
of moving them due to their bulk and weight. In a new build situation it can be possible to run
the boards on a wheeled system referred to as purlin trolleys.
26
The only other option therefore is to physically step on the roof and lift the stagings. A 5
metre platform with guardrails weighs about 50 kg. Given that the platforms should be joined
together, then physically moving them does offer challenges. Also, how the stagings are put
in place to start with can often be an issue. It is not a safe system of work to simply carry the
staging up the steelwork. They may need to be craned up and positioned at the same time
as the packs of sheets.
Fragile roofs
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
20
Fragile roofing materials include asbestos, glass, plastic, cement sheets and similar brittle
surfaces.
28
Non-fragile roof lights should be fixed with a red coloured fixing to allow people to
differentiate between them.
29
As far as the strength of the materials is concerned, the appearance of fragile roofs is often
misleading. Surface coatings, dirt or moss may conceal the fragile nature of the material,
thereby giving a false appearance of soundness to glass, plastic, asbestos, etc. Even if the
roof is clad in a load-bearing material, roof lights are often fragile.
30
Asbestos and various plastic materials are particularly brittle and will shatter without warning.
31
Many deaths and serious injuries have occurred as a result of roof workers falling through
fragile surfaces. Most of the falls could have been easily prevented had a risk assessment
been carried out and a safe system of work developed. Even if the falls did occur, the deaths
and injuries could have been prevented by the use of safety nets or another soft landing
system.
27
QCS 2014

Page 102
Ideally, another way of carrying out the job would be found that does not require anyone to
work on or near to fragile roofing materials. However, in many cases, this may not be
practical.
33
If it is necessary to pass across a fragile roof, a roof-board complete with a guard-rail should
be used to spread the weight and provide a good handhold. Depending upon the job, it may
be necessary to use more than one roof-board: one to support the person whilst the other is
moved to a new position.
34
The practice of trying to 'walk the line of the bolts' or 'the line of the purlins' is very dangerous
and must not be attempted. Where walkways with a hand-rail are not an integral part of the
roof structure, a safe system of work must be devised.
35
Walkways near fragile surfaces (in valleys, parapets, gutters or channels) must be provided
with suitable guard-rails or, if not, the fragile surface should be over-laid with a load-bearing
material to prevent the possibility of anyone falling
through.
36
Warning signs must be fixed at all approaches to

roofs constructed with fragile materials.
37
Where such signs are not fixed in place, it is

essential that the presence of fragile material is
identified in advance and those doing the job are
made aware of it by other means.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
32
1.3.6.10 Access arrangements

Ladders
1
All ladders used for access to elevated work positions, including working platforms or roofs,
must comply with the following requirements.
(a)
A risk assessment must be carried out before a ladder is used either for access or as
a place of work.
QCS 2014

Page 103
The risk assessment must show that it is not reasonably practicable to use an
alternative, safer means of access.
(c)
Ladders should only be used as a place of work for light work of short duration where
the risk assessment shows the risk of falling to be low.
(d)
30 minutes is a guide to short duration. This is not 30 minutes in one place and then
30 minutes having moved the ladder 1 m along the wall.
(e)
Such work could be an inspection or light maintenance work involving the use of one
hand only. Removing cast iron gutters would obviously not fall under this definition.
(f)
All ladders should be to the correct industrial specification and not domestic quality
(Class 3).
(g)
The ladder must be securely fixed near to the top of the stiles or, if this is not
physically possible, footed near to the bottom to prevent undue swaying or
displacement.
(h)
9 metres is the maximum height suggested for footing a ladder.
(i)
The ladder must be set on a firm level footing (for example, not on loose bricks).
(j)
Both stiles must be properly supported.
(k)
The ladder must extend at least 1 metre (5 rungs) above the landing place, unless
another suitable handhold is provided.
(l)
There must be sufficient clear space at each rung to allow a safe foothold.
(m)
The vertical run of the ladder should

not exceed 9 metres, unless an
intermediate
landing
has
been
provided, where practical.
(n)
The ladder must be set at the correct

angle, approximately 75 - one
measure out for every four measures
up.
(o)
The ladder must not be lashed to any

gutter or soil stack or similar item,
which may be fragile or insecure.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(b)
Where two-handed operations are necessary,

a risk assessment must be carried out to
determine a safer method of working, e.g. a
static or mobile tower erected by a competent
person, scissor lift or cherry picker.
Independent or putlog scaffolds, which

provide safe access to and around the roof
edge, storage space and possibly a loading
bay, are another solution.
Pitched Roof ladders

4
Ideally, where it is necessary to use a pitched roof ladder, access to the lower end of it will
be from a working platform at the eaves.
Pitched roof ladders must be:

(a)
only used by persons who are competent to use them
(b)
positioned to enable easy and safe transfer between:
QCS 2014

(i)
any other ladder used to get to the eaves and the roof ladder
(ii)
the roof ladder and the place of work
Page 104
designed for the purpose
(d)
of good construction, strong enough to enable the planned work to be carried out and
regularly inspected
(e)
adequately supported to take the user's weight without damaging the roof
(f)
securely fixed to the sloping part of the roof by means of a ridge hook placed over the
ridge. Ridge hooks must not bear down on ridge tiles or capping tiles.
AT
IO
AL
(c)
1.3.6.11 Landing places
All landing places must be of adequate dimensions.
If a person is liable to fall from a height that would result in injury, landing places must be
provided with:
IN
TE
a guard-rail at a height of not less than 950 mm
(b)
an intermediate guard-rail
(c)
a toe-board
(e)
(d)
EG
(a)
a gap not exceeding 470 mm between the toe-board and guard-rail, or between any
two guard-rails
an intermediate guard-rail if standard, light-gauge brick guards are used.
1.3.6.12 Openings, corners, breaks, edges and joisting in a floor

1
Where reasonably practicable, edge protection, in the form of guard-rails and toe-boards,
must be provided if people have to work close to what would otherwise be an unprotected
edge, where:
(a)
a person who fell would be injured as a result of the fall
(b)
material, tools or equipment could fall
(c)
the work is over water, other liquid or dangerous materials.
All holes in floors, etc. must be similarly guarded or securely covered. The covering must be
of a suitable material, securely fixed and clearly marked 'Hole below'.
QCS 2014

Page 105
Open joists through which a person could fall must be boarded over to provide safe access
to a working place.
Guard-rails, toe-boards and covers may be removed to allow access for people and
materials, but must be replaced as soon as possible. This does not apply to demolition work
unless it is left unattended.
AL
1.3.6.13 Mobile access platforms
Mobile access platforms are often used as an alternative to ladders, scaffolds and cradles.
The range of equipment includes mobile elevating work platforms (MEWPs), forklift trucks
equipped with work platforms, and mast climbing work platforms (MCWPs). Each of these
types of equipment can be suitable for carrying out particular types of roof work. For
example, using a telescopic boom MEWP (cherry picker) might be a suitable and safe way of
accessing a job that would otherwise require someone having to cross a fragile roof. This is
particularly important for inspection work. Truck mounted cherry pickers now have sufficient
reach to enable inspection of nearly all buildings to be made without having to directly
access the roof.
Where people are working from these platforms, calculations of the real loads must be
made. Typically an allowance for each person of 100 kg covers operative and tools. If
materials are to be carried as well, then the weight must be estimated to ensure that the
platform is not overloaded.
Finally, thought must be given to emergencies, and how aerial rescue could be carried out if
necessary.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Mobile elevating work platform (MEWP)

5
Easily moved from place to place, MEWPs are particularly suitable for short duration tasks
requiring a work platform.
Work platforms may be towable units, lorry or trailer-mounted, or self-propelled.
Also, it must not be overlooked that MEWPs are classified as lifting equipment and as the
task is so called 'man riding' the inspections must be at six-monthly intervals.
Working platforms on forklift trucks

8
Forklift trucks equipped with work platforms may be used for access to limited heights,
usually for maintenance work. The platform or 'cage' must be
designed for the purpose, fitted to the forklift truck in a manner
that prevents it from becoming accidentally detached.
If the use of a forklift truck for this purpose becomes part of an

established pattern of work, consideration should be given to
QCS 2014

Page 106
introducing a purpose-built mobile platform.

10
The use of so-called 'non' integrated work platforms on forklift trucks is not seen as a
particularly safe practice. They are very concerned on the use of rough terrain telescopic
forklifts.
11
These are very commonly used on demolition sites when stripping roofs for salvage or
removing asbestos cement sheets. To be able to use them, as a minimum the platform and
forklift must have the following:
tested under Lifting Operations Lifting Equipment (LOLER) every six months
(b)
the basket must have a plate displaying information about loading etc.
(c)
harness points identified
(d)
dipper ram controls isolated
(e)
signage on the forklift confirming that it is suitable for the use.
AL
(a)
Crane and 'man riding basket'
One way to overcome the access difficulties associated with fragility is simply not to land on
the roof at all. It is possible to use man riding baskets from a mobile crane. The crane itself
would normally be expected to be fitted with a 'dead man's' handle so that the driver cannot
inadvertently lower the basket to the ground, and must be on 'power lower' as opposed to
'free fall'. This may rule out some older crawler cranes.
13
All physical parts of the system will require thorough examination under LOLER every six
months. It would be expected for the operatives to be harnessed in and typically the
harnesses are attached to the hook block of the crane, which offers a second level of safety so-called redundancy.
TE
AT
IO
12
EG
With this equipment, the platform or cradle rises up one or more static masts in a similar way
to a hoist, providing a temporary work platform at height, usually on the side of a building.
Some of the procedures to be observed in the erection and use include:
(a)
they should be erected only by skilled and competent persons
(b)
they should be used only by trained operatives
(c)
14
IN
Mast climbing work platforms (MCWPs)
they should be inspected daily before use, by the user
(d)
they should be regularly inspected by a competent person and records maintained of

the inspection
(e)
they should be thoroughly examined every six months
(f)
they should be clearly marked with the safe working load and permitted numbers of
persons allowed on the platform at each configuration
(g)
they should not be used as a substitute for using stairs or a passenger lift for travelling
to higher levels.
Access to chimneys
15
Various purpose-designed lightweight stagings are available for work on or around

chimneys. Alternatively, tube and fitting scaffolding should be erected or a MEWP used. In
no circumstances should work be carried out on a chimney without the use of a properly
constructed and stable working platform.

Page 107
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
1.3.6.14 Other considerations
TE
Care must be taken at all times when stacking material on or at roof level. Attention should
be given to the following:
the size of the load involved
(b)
the types of material involved
(c)
the methods of raising the load, whether manually or mechanically
(d)
the means of communication (signals) and the competence of the slinger or signaller
(e)
the position authorised for stacking materials
(f)
the distribution of the loads (loading plan)
(g)
EG
IN
(a)
Stacking materials on roofs
the maximum load or stack size
(h)
the loading limitations of the roof
(i)
adequate support or packing to the truss
(j)
protecting the existing roof surface and any weather-proofing
(k)
preventing the displacement of loads which should be:

(i)
secured against the wind, especially split bundles and sheets
(ii)
secured against sliding down sloping roofs (sheet stop).

Permission to load roofs
the owners or occupiers, or
(b)
the architect or a consultant engineer, or
(c)
the Contractor.
AT
(a)
TE
1.3.6.15 Danger areas

Contractors are to ensure:
the safety of those working at height (from falls)
(b)
the safety of others who may be working or passing below (from falling objects), by the
creation of 'danger areas', either around the high-level workplace and/or below it.
IN
(a)
EG
IO
Permission to place a load on a roof structure must be obtained from:
Page 108
AL
QCS 2014
This is achieved by preventing unauthorised access into any danger area, so far as is
reasonably practicable, by the use of equipment such as barriers and appropriate signs.
Contractors may find in particular situations that it is not practical to create a permanent
'exclusion zone' beneath the work being carried out above. In these circumstances a
solution would be to deploy 'safety marshals' at the lower level to enforce exclusion from the
danger area as and when it is necessary.
In such circumstances it is essential that an effective means of communication be

established between those working at height and the workers controlling the danger area.
Roof trusses
5
The placement and installation of roof trusses and their associated bracing has the potential
to be a very hazardous activity and a safe system of access and protection must be planned
and implemented. The risk assessment should have considered these and all other aspects
of the work.
A safe working platform around the perimeter of the roof should be erected and, where
access is required within the trusses, safe access provided. This can be achieved by
boarding out the bottom chord of the trusses, so long as they are stable and capable of
taking the imposed loads.
QCS 2014

Page 109
Safety nets can be used, provided a safe clearance distance can be achieved below the net.
However, it is difficult to arrange a strong fixing for a net on a new build house. The most
common fall protection systems in use in building are 'bean bags', air bags or crash decks.
There are a number of proprietary soft-landing systems available in which the fall-arrest bags
simply interlock to provide a cushioned landing if someone falls.
Crash decks could be as simple as a tower scaffold under the place of work.
10
Roof trusses can be boarded out if access is needed or timber sheets
11
Safe access within the trusses
12
They do require moving periodically so that they remain under the place of work and of
course they are nowhere as comfortable to land on as a soft-landing system.
AL
Working over water

Where there is a risk of persons falling from a structure into water, a secure form of fencing,
barrier or fall arrest equipment (preferably safety nets) must be provided. This can be briefly
removed for access and the movement of materials, but must be replaced as soon as
possible.
14
Other points to be considered include:
AT
IO
13
ensuring that a risk assessment has been carried out
(b)
if possible, providing a suitable working platform
(c)
safety nets, if used, must be properly erected and periodically inspected
(d)
warning notices must be placed near to all edges
(e)
adequate lighting must be provided as necessary
(f)
special care must be taken in inclement weather such as fog, frost, snow and rain
(g)
special attention must be paid to the possibility of tides or storm surges changing
water levels or flow rates
(h)
life jackets must be provided, and worn by all operatives involved in working over
water
TE
IN
EG
(i)
(a)
preferably only operatives who can swim should be used
(j)
suitable rescue equipment must be provided, maintained and operated by trained and
competent staff
(k)
frequent checks must be carried out to ensure that the correct number of personnel
can be accounted for
(l)
all persons must work in pairs, or in larger groups, as necessary (no lone working)
(m)
all persons must be trained in the procedures for raising alarms and in rescue drills.
The presence of birds

15
The accumulated droppings of birds, if disturbed into airborne dust and then inhaled, can
cause severe respiratory problems. It is anticipated that this will mainly be a problem during
refurbishment and repair work or demolition.
16
If during the early visits to site it is evident that pigeons have been, or are present, measures
must be taken to clean up the droppings before work starts, using a safe system of work,
and to discourage the return of the birds.
QCS 2014

Page 110

1.3.7
Fall-arrest and Suspension Equipment
1.3.7.1 Key points

1
In situations where the prevention of falls from height cannot be guaranteed, it is essential
that measures are put in place to ensure that any fall that does occur is arrested, without
injury to the person who has suffered the fall.
In many cases safety nets are the preferred method of arresting falls because:
they provide what is termed 'collective' fall protection
(b)
if rigged immediately below the work area, they limit the height of the fall to the
minimum and recovery of the 'faller' should not be a problem
(c)
they are a 'soft landing system' that should cause no injury to the person who has
fallen.
AL
(a)
Safety nets can suffer wear and damage and must be inspected periodically.
Other forms of soft-landing systems, such as air-bags or bean-bags, also offer collective
protection and are more appropriate for some types of work.
If fall-arrest is to be achieved using a safety harness and lanyard, the wearer must be trained
in fitting and adjusting the harness and selecting the appropriate lanyard and a secure
anchorage.
Harness and lanyard offer personal fall-arrest protection only.
Some items may need a regime of inspections and thorough examinations.
Personal suspension equipment, such as rope-access equipment and a boatswain's chair

must only be used by people who have been trained and are competent.
TE
AT
IO
IN
Where a risk assessment has identified that the risk of falls from height cannot be eliminated
by the installation of barriers, guard-rails or other similar measures, the use of fall-arrest
equipment may then be the best option.
Safety nets or the use of other soft landing systems are preferred to the use of safety
harnesses and lines, as they protect the whole area and all persons working above them.
They do not rely on individual workers wearing a safety harness and lanyard connected to a
secure anchorage point.
In situations where people and traffic pass below others working at height, a safety net used
in conjunction with a fine mesh debris net will protect those below from falling tools and
materials, as well as providing fall-arrest for the people working at height.
Where safety nets cannot be rigged for any reason, and it is not practical to use another form
of soft-landing system, it may be necessary to resort to the use of a safety harness and
lanyard, providing:
EG
(a)
operatives have been trained in the use and care of the equipment and wear it
correctly
(b)
the work environment enables falls to be arrested without injury to the person who has
fallen
(c)
a secure anchor point is available
(d)
the person working at height actually 'clips-on'.
QCS 2014

Page 111
Whichever system is used for minimising injury from falling, whether it be safety nets,
another soft-landing system or harness and lanyard, the system must be:
(a)
designed to provide a safe system of work
(b)
installed by competent persons
(c)
maintained, inspected and supervised to ensure it is used correctly.

assessment of every work activity to identify the hazards arising out of that work and the
persons or groups who might be affected.
When hazards are identified, it is then the Contractor's duty to either remove the hazard or to
put control measures in place to reduce the risks to health and safety arising out of the
those risks.
situation which presents a risk to the health and safety of themselves or any other persons
AT
IO
AL
TE

Safety nets, equipment used in other soft landing systems, and harnesses/lanyards are all
classified as work equipment and must therefore comply with these Regulations.
Contractors must ensure that where the safety of work equipment depends upon the way it is
installed, it is inspected as necessary.
EG
IN

1
used by employees.
controlling the risk have been considered.
In deciding which type to issue, the Contractor must take into account the hazard that the
QCS 2014

Page 112
PPE is being used to protect against, and that the PPE must fit the wearer and allow them to
work comfortably.
4
The idea of comfort is important and needs to take account of other items of equipment and
other PPE that will also be worn.
Whilst the Contractor must take 'reasonable steps' to ensure that any PPE supplied is worn,
employees in turn must ensure that they wear the equipment provided and know the
procedures for reporting any loss or defect to their Contractor.

The fact that some form of fall-arrest equipment is to be used is indicative that work at height
is to be carried out. These Regulations place duties on Contractors, the self-employed and
employees to ensure that such work is carried out safely.
AL
(b)
where such work cannot be avoided, make sure to select the most appropriate work
equipment for the work and to prevent falls
(c)
reduce the distance, and potential consequences, of any fall
(d)
ensure that the work is risk assessment based and that it is carried out safely by
competent persons
(e)
(f)
TE
AT
IO
(a)
IN

The definition of 'load' within these Regulations includes a person. This means that if it is
foreseeable that the equipment may be used for lifting a person, then these Regulations will
apply. So inertia reels, harnesses, strops and other equipment are likely to be covered.
The main requirements of these Regulations are that:

lifting equipment and accessories must be of adequate strength and the lifting
equipment stable, for each lift undertaken
(a)
EG
(b)
lifting equipment used for lifting persons is constructed and used so as to protect the
safety of the person(s) being carried
(c)
the load must be under full and proper control at all times
(d)
lifting equipment and accessories must be clearly marked with their safe working load
and other markings if designed for lifting persons
(e)
every lift must be properly planned by a competent person, properly supervised and
carried out safely
(f)
generally lifting equipment must be subjected to a programme of inspections and

thorough examination as is appropriate.
1.3.7.8 Inspection and thorough examination

1
The frequency and type of inspections and thorough examinations should be determined by
a competent person. This is quite simply because the risk of damage will depend on the
work activity and environment. For example, a harness worn by a demolition burner will
probably require more frequent checks than that of a utility engineer inspecting street lighting
QCS 2014

Page 113
columns.
1.3.7.9 Safety nets

Nets are an area where complying with best practice means testing, inspection record
keeping and storage facilities are required to ensure that the net itself is fit for use. It is
important that the end users appreciate that a safe net is not simply about whether the net
erectors have a training records card, but also look deeper to check that the net itself has
been checked and inspected.
There are a number of British Standards which relate to safety nets. They should be
manufactured to the requirements of BS EN 1263-1 and erected in accordance with BS EN
1263-2. This latter standard gives information on the installation and use of safety nets.
A further standard, BS 8411, contains construction-specific information and more importantly

a list of duties for the parties usually involved in construction projects.
This standard specifies that anyone who is planning the installation of a safety net system
should take into account the:
AL
experience and competence of the net erectors
(b)
sequence and type of work being carried out during installation and removal
(c)
sequence of construction work to be carried out whilst the nets are in position
(d)
provision of effective anchorages
(e)
means of access for erecting and removal
(f)
access for inspection, debris removal and temporary repair
(g)
clearance distances below the net
(h)
protection of anyone below
(i)
recovery of anyone who has fallen into the net.
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
Modern safety nets are efficient at saving lives and preventing injury. They are an energyabsorbing system designed to minimise the consequences to the person who has fallen.
Safety nets should be erected as close as possible to the working level to minimise the
height of any fall that may occur.
There are two types of net manufacture.
EG
(a)
Knotless. These provide energy absorption by permanent plastic deformation

(stretching) of the net material.
(b)
Knotted. This, generally heavier and older type of net, provides energy absorption by
tightening at the knots and permanently deforming.
Safety nets are manufactured in square or diamond mesh, with two mesh sizes: 60 mm and
100 mm. The 100 mm is the normal mesh size used in the UK.
All safety nets should carry an identification label. This includes the date of manufacture; the
net type, class and size; and reference to the British Standard BS EN 1263-1. It should also
carry a unique serial number for record purposes and traceability.
Fall heights
9
The positioning of a safety net system is critical to minimise the height of falls that may
occur. Although safety nets are designed for a maximum fall height of 6 m, the maximum fall,
if installed directly under the workplace, should be under 1 m.
QCS 2014

Page 114
10
When nets are installed, the maximum amount of sag in the net should be no more than 10%
of the bay width.
11
When a load or person falls into a correctly erected net, the net material will deform as it
absorbs the energy from the fall.
12
It is therefore critical to provide adequate clearance below the net, to allow the deformation
to occur without the load or person striking the ground or some other object.
13
If a person were to fall 2 m into a net between 5 m and 9 m wide, the total deformation,
including the erection sag, may be between 2.6 m and 3.5 m, depending on the width of net.
It is essential to check the manufacturer's specification to ensure that there is adequate
clearance below the planned net position.
Competence
The way in which safety net systems are installed is critical. Not only must those installing
the net system be trained and competent, so must the people who carry out the routine
inspection of safety nets.
15
The issue of competence is important, as a handover certificate should be issued. Always

receive a handover certificate from the riggers for each section of netting as it is completed.
16
There are industry agreed standards and qualifications for training in the rigging and
inspection of safety nets. The training of inspectors is aimed at site management staff as well
as professionals within the industry.
AT
IO
AL
14
TE
Safety nets are provided with short lengths of test cord attached to the net. These cords
carry the net's unique serial number and are so fitted that they receive the same
environmental exposure as the net material. At yearly intervals, a test cord should be
detached from the net and sent back to the manufacturer so that it may undergo a tensile
failure test, to monitor the degradation of the net material through exposure to sunlight.
Typically a net is made with three so called 'test diamonds'. The presence or absence of
these gives the site manager a clear indication as to whether the basic testing regime is in
place.
Inspection
EG
IN
17
Periodic testing
18
Where safety net systems are erected, they should be inspected on a weekly basis by a
competent person to ensure that they are still in a safe condition, fixed correctly and will
provide the fall-arrest capability if required.
19
Inspections should be carried out more frequently if circumstances indicate that the integrity
of the net system is in doubt.
20
A net should also be inspected after a person or substantial load has fallen into it, to
determine whether it should remain in service or be replaced. In some cases, it may be
necessary to seek specialist advice.
21
Findings of all inspections need to be recorded.
Care of nets
22
Care should be taken to reduce to a minimum unnecessary wear and mechanical damage
likely to weaken the net. Materials must not be stacked on it and the deliberate jumping into,
or dropping of objects on to nets must be prohibited, as permanent deformation may occur.
QCS 2014
23

Page 115
The following sources of damage or wear should be avoided as far as possible:

(a)
dragging the net over rough surfaces
(b)
contact between the net and sharp edges
(c)
an accumulation of debris in the net
(d)
any sparks from hot work, welding, grinding, burning operations, hot gases from
blowlamps, or hot ash from chimneys or furnaces
(e)
chemical attack
(f)
any form of radiation.
Special care should be exercised and precautions taken to prevent the net and any
supporting framework from being struck by loads on moving vehicles or by the vehicles
themselves.
25
Regular inspection is necessary to ensure that the nets remain serviceable. The net
manufacturer should be consulted when there is any doubt about the suitability of nets for
use in hazardous conditions, after any known contamination or when deformation has
occurred.
26
When erecting nets in the vicinity of electricity lines or overhead power cables, the
appropriate authority should be consulted before work starts.
AT
IO
AL
24
Maintenance
Nets must always be inspected after use and before storing to identify any damaged areas.
Glass, metal, grit and other debris should be removed to prevent abrasion.
28
If contaminated by acids or alkalis, nets should be thoroughly washed, preferably by hosing,

and allowed to dry naturally away from heat.
29
If areas of damage are found or chemical damage is suspected, contact the manufacturer to
obtain a list of competent people able to repair or clean the nets.
TE
IN
EG
Storage
27
Nets should be stored away from heat, chemicals and solar radiation.
31
Nets should be stored in dry conditions.
32
Nets should be stored to minimise vermin attack.
33
Wet nets should be dried naturally.
34
Storage cupboards should be well ventilated.
35
Nets should be turned periodically to allow air circulation.
36
If stacked, nets should be packed up clear of the ground.
30
Rescue from a net system

37
Where the net is erected as close as possible below the work area, many of the situations
where persons enter a net will be minor 'step-ins', with the person able to climb out unaided.
38
On other occasions, a person may fall a considerable height into a net. They may fall onto
materials lying in the net, or strike their head or body on, for example, structural steelwork
QCS 2014

Page 116
during the fall.

39
When such accidents occur, extreme care must be taken during the rescue of the person
lying injured in the net. Due to the 'stretching' nature of the net, it is possible that any rescuer
entering it could inadvertently and unavoidably cause further injury to the victim.
40
It is therefore essential that Contractors using safety net systems have, as part of their risk
assessment process, emergency procedures written for:
(a)
treating first aid needs whilst the injured person is in the net
(b)
emergency recovery from a rigged net system.
1.3.7.10 Other soft landing systems

Alternative soft landing systems are an effective alternative to safety nets in some
circumstances.
Designed to be used in buildings with a storey height of up to 2.5 m, one type of system
comprises large polypropylene bags (typically 2.5 m long x 0.55 m wide x 0.55 m deep) that
are packed with polystyrene chippings or another energy-absorbing material. The depth of
the bags both cushions a fall and reduces the distance of that fall (by the depth of the bag).
The bags are linked together with plastic snap-clips to completely fill the area over which
protection is required. They can also be used on the first or subsequent floors while trusses
are being installed or in the roof space when fixing bracings.
An alternative system that may be considered in appropriate circumstances is the use of airfilled bags. Similar to the above, bags of varying sizes may be clipped together to completely
fill the area over which fall-arrest protection is required. Air bags require an air compressor
running all the time that fall-arrest is required, to maintain the pressure in the air bag system.
These devices work on the principle of a controlled rate of constant inflation and leakage so
that the air bags will absorb the energy of someone falling on to them without bouncing.
Whilst soft landing systems do not prevent falls, they are very effective in eliminating injuries
in falls of less than 2 m.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.3.7.11 Safety belts, harnesses and lanyards

1
If fall prevention measures (for example, working platforms, barriers, guard-rails) or collective
fall-arrest measures (safety nets or other soft landing systems) are not practical, an
alternative safe system of work must be employed. This safe system may require the use of
safety harnesses and lanyards, but it should be a last resort. Whereas safety nets and other
soft landing systems are 'collective measures', i.e. they automatically provide protection for
everyone working above them, safety harness systems only protect the user, and only then if
the equipment is used correctly.
Care must be taken when planning to use a safety harness, lanyard and energy-absorbing
system since, depending on where the lanyard is anchored, a falling person may fall around
4 m before the fall is arrested.
One of the limitations of using such fall-arrest equipment is that it only protects a person if
they adjust and wear the harness properly and connect the lanyard to an appropriate and
secure point. The use of any such system requires a high degree of training, competence
and supervision.
Training
4
Training should only be carried out by competent accredited third party trainers, following
QCS 2014

Page 117
industry guidelines. Training should refer to the manufacturer's instructions and should
emphasise the importance of following those instructions.
It should cover the selection, fitting, adjustment, maintenance and use of the safety belt or
harness, and explain the choice and use of suitable anchorage points. Employees should not
be permitted to use the equipment before adequate instruction has been received, and they
have been judged to be competent in its use.
Safety belts and harnesses are wrongly regarded by some workers as an encumbrance and
a restriction on their freedom of movement. The fact that a safety belt or harness can prevent
serious injury or even save a life is often ignored.
The problems arising from such attitudes can and must be

solved by applying the principles of good health and safety
management. These include educating employees in the
need for the equipment, training them in its use, ensuring it is
provided and, through adequate supervision, ensuring it is
always used.
AL
AT
IO
While the British Standard which defined the various types of

belt and harness has been replaced by a European Standard, the common construction
industry terminology for these pieces of equipment is as shown on the next page.
A - Pole belt
(b)
B - Chest harness
(c)
C - General purpose safety harness
(d)
D - Safety rescue harness.
(a)
TE
Types of belt or harness
IN
Selection of equipment
General purpose safety

harness
The correct selection of a safety harness or safety belt is important. If a person falls more
than 600 mm when using a safety belt, serious injury can be sustained due to a heavy load
being exerted on the spine and internal organs. Safety belts should only be used for pole
access or other similar specialist access needs.
10
If any doubt exists concerning the suitability of a piece of equipment for a particular task or
type of work, further information and advice should be sought from the manufacturer.
11
Whatever type is chosen, it should give a high degree of safety allied to mobility and wearer
comfort.
12
The main characteristics of the types of appliance, together with an indication of their uses,
are given below.
13
A - Pole belt. A simple waist belt for use by pole linesmen and for other similar tasks. They
are not intended for situations where a drop may exceed 600 mm.
14
B - Chest harness. A safety belt with shoulder straps, for use where a lanyard and
anchorage point limit the drop to a maximum of 600 mm. It must be worn quite tightly to
prevent any slippage after a fall.
15
Both A and B above are for very specific and for restricted use only.
16
C - General purpose safety harness. A full harness with thigh and shoulder straps. In the
event of a fall, a person is suspended in a reasonably upright position from the attachment
EG
QCS 2014

Page 118
point. If the harness is of the right size and properly adjusted, the wearer cannot fall out.
17
D - Safety rescue harness. Designed to be worn by anyone in a confined space or location

where they may be overcome or incapacitated and need to be rescued. A safety rescue
harness looks similar to Type C, but will support a person almost upright for rescue
purposes. It is intended for a maximum drop of 600 mm.
18
A competent person should draw up a schedule for testing and examination, which is likely
to also include a requirement for thorough examinations at six-monthly intervals and userchecks each time the equipment is used. The six-monthly examination is a detailed visual
examination, typically following cleaning where the harness is checked for contamination by
oils and other solvents as well as abrasion and damage. The user check is simply to make
sure that 'all the bits' are still there and there are no obvious defects.
1.3.7.12 Type of lanyard

There are several types of lanyard, each intended for a particular purpose.
Fall-arrest lanyards incorporate an energy-absorbing feature to reduce the shock loading on

the body of the person who has fallen when the fall is arrested.
Twin tailed lanyards are a type of fall-arrest lanyard that allows greater mobility at height by
enabling the repositioning of one tail at a time so that the user is constantly 'clipped on'.
However, this type of lanyard can pose additional risks to safety if it is not used correctly. If
only one tail is clipped to a secure anchorage and the second tail is not located correctly,
then during a fall the second tail could loop over a fixed object and arrest the fall before the
energy-absorber has deployed, which may cause severe personal injury.
The second tail must never be clipped back on to the user's harness unless it is fitted with
purpose-fitted 'parking points' that will break away from the harness if the second tail comes
under tension. Alternatively, the second tail can be either left to hang free or (on this type of
lanyard only) be simultaneously clipped to the same secure anchorage. If there is any doubt
about these lanyards' safe use, the supplier or manufacturer should be consulted.
Restraint lanyards are shorter and used as a means of limiting the range of movement of
the wearer to stop them entering an area of danger, for example to prevent a cherry picker
operator from being thrown out of the basket. These lanyards are not designed to arrest falls
and have no energy-absorbing feature. Sometimes two of these may be worn at the same
time, with each lanyard fixed to a clip on either side of the harness to make the harness what
is termed a 'work positioning harness'.
Irrespective of the type of lanyard used, they are only effective if the free end is securely
anchored to a suitable anchorage point.
Manufacturers and suppliers will advise on the appropriate type of lanyard for particular work
situations.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Selecting the anchorage point

9
In order to limit the drop, the anchorage points should always be as high as possible above
the person and as near to vertical as possible in order to avoid 'the pendulum effect'.
10
Anchorage points must be capable of withstanding the anticipated shock loading.
11
Consideration should also be given to how persons would be rescued following an arrested
fall, particularly when work is from high structures. Some harness manufacturers also
produce rescue systems that enable a single rescuer to raise a suspended person back to
QCS 2014

Page 119
the working platform or safely lower them to ground level.

Markings on belts and harnesses
(a)
the British Standard, or International Standard, to which it conforms
(b)
the name, trademark or other means of identification of the manufacturer
(c)
the year in which the harness or belt was manufactured
(d)
the type of belt or harness
(e)
the manufacturer's serial number
(f)
the company serial number, or other recognition system, for recording maintenance
and inspections.
Under these Regulations the safe working load would also be required, and it would be
common to see some form of marking that indicates that the harness has been tested.
AL
13
Safety belts and harnesses must be clearly and indelibly marked or permanently labelled
with the following information:
12
15
AT
Lanyards which are not permanently attached to belts or harnesses must be clearly and
indelibly marked or permanently labelled with the following information:
the British Standard, or International Standard, to which it conforms
(b)
the name, trademark or other means of identification of the manufacturer
(c)
the year of manufacture
(d)
the manufacturer's model number and the type of belt or harness with which the
lanyard is designed to be used
(e)
the company serial number, or other recognition system, for recording maintenance
and inspections.
IN
TE
(a)
Ideally, lanyards will have a label with the words (or similar):
EG
14
IO
Markings on lanyards
'For maximum safety attach the free end to a point as high

as possible above you and avoid looping the lanyard around
small joists and angles with narrow edges.'
16
Lanyards should preferably be permanently attached to belts so that 'longer' lanyards cannot
be substituted.
Shock absorbers
17
If a person wearing a harness and lanyard falls, there is a considerable shock loading to the
body. The further the fall, the greater the shock. Generally speaking, the maximum distance
a person should fall before a fall is arrested is 2m.
18
Shock absorbers in the form of tear-away stitching, stretch springs or a deforming metal strip
are built into fall-arrest lanyards as a means of reducing the shock loading. Once a lanyard
has been used to arrest a fall and the energy-absorber has been deployed, it must be
discarded.
Arrester devices
19
These devices are similar in operation to the 'inertia reel' safety seat-belts fitted in cars.
QCS 2014

Page 120
The safety harness is attached to a self-reeling cable which is securely anchored. The
wearer is free to move normally but, in the event of a sudden movement (i.e. a fall), the
locking device is brought into operation.
21
Most 'inertia reel' type arresters are only designed to safely arrest someone who has fallen
from a position directly below, or very close to, the anchorage point (which should be above
the head-height of the user). They are not designed to compensate for the 'pendulum effect',
which will occur when the faller is a significant horizontal distance from the suspension point.
22
A typical misuse would be to see a line rigged along the ridge of an industrial roof with inertia
reels fixed to it by carabiners. The work being carried out is not actually on the roof but on a
lower level, resulting in the safety lines being stretched, and possibly abraded, across the
lower edge (eaves) of the pitched roof.
23
The issue is that most examples of this type of device are not tested for 'over the edge' type
falls in which the retractable lanyard is pulled tight across the edge of a surface, for example
a roof sheet or floor slab, by the weight of the fallen person. In these circumstances it has
been reported that the lanyard could snap or fail to limit the height of the fall to a safe
distance.
24
If this is the proposed work method, then advice needs to be taken from the manufacturer
that their equipment will work satisfactorily in this manner.
25
Various other types of fall-arrester are often incorporated as a permanent fixture into the
structure being built, such as a traveller on a pre-tensioned vertical cable. There are also
proprietary systems where the lanyard is attached to a traveller which moves along a prepositioned and tensioned horizontal or vertical steel cable. This permits movement around
corners and past obstacles without the need to unclip.
26
Where the client provides this equipment as is common in many cases, care still needs to be
taken that it has been inspected and checked as required and that the users understand how
it works.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
20
Storage
27
While not being worn, appliances should be stored in a cool dry place and not subjected to
direct sunlight. The use of purpose-designed cabinets which allow ventilation is
recommended. If the appliances get wet, they should not be dried by direct heat.
28
The equipment should not be subjected to unnecessary strain or pressure and must be kept
free from contact with sharp implements, corrosives and other possible causes of damage.
29
Recommended cleaning instructions should be followed.
QCS 2014

Page 121
Inspection
The wearer must make a visual inspection of safety equipment before use. The equipment
should be examined by a 'competent person' at least once every six months and a record
kept of this inspection.
31
Safety belts, harnesses and lanyards should be examined by a 'competent person' after a
fall or other circumstances in which the equipment has been deployed, before it is reissued
for use.
32
Safety belts, harnesses and lanyards should be taken out of use if found to be damaged or
defective.
33
Under most circumstances, knots in lanyards would be considered to be a significant

problem. Typically, a knot is presumed to reduce the strength of the rope or strop by 50%.
34
Particular attention should be directed to the points below.
35
Webbing and leather. Examine for cuts, cracks, tears or abrasions, stretching and
distortion, damage due to deterioration, contact with heat, acids or other corrosives and rot.
36
Snap hooks. Examine for damaged or distorted hooks, faulty springs and strained jaws.
37
Buckles. Carefully examine the shoulders of buckles; inspect for open or distorted rollers,
and undue wear.
38
Sewing. Examine for broken, cut or worn threads, open seams and failed stitching.
39
Lanyards, ropes and chains. Examine for damage or signs of wear and, in the case of
ropes, inter-strand wear, unravelling extension and fusion.
40
For webbing lanyards, specific attention should be given to:

cuts to the edge of the webbing (as a result of being choke-hitched around steelwork)
(b)
surface abrasions to surface or edges
(c)
damaged stitching
(d)
a knot in the lanyard other than the manufacturer's
EG
(a)
(e)
41
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
30
results of chemical attack.
Unauthorised modifications. Examine equipment for 'home-made' attachments or

adaptations. It should be impressed upon the wearers that their lives could depend upon the
continued efficiency and durability of their safety equipment and that, by frequent personal
inspections, the possibility of equipment failure will be reduced to a minimum.
Records
42
A card or history sheet should be kept for each harness and lanyard, and particulars of all
examinations and other details of interest recorded. Each harness and lanyard should be
marked with an individual serial number for identification purposes.
Dead weight anchor devices

43
The use of dead weight anchors in accordance with International and British Standards BS
EN 795 and BS 7883 (Class E) has become an acceptable means of providing a safe fallarrest anchor device on flat roof surfaces, particularly where it is not possible to penetrate
the roof surface.
QCS 2014

Page 122
44
However, the increased usage and range of devices developed over recent years has
revealed a number of factors not previously considered.
45
To ensure the safety of users, Contractors should consider the following points:
(a)
Have the BS EN 795 and BS 7883 tests been carried out in accordance with the latest
version of BS 7883?
While many dead weight anchor devices have been tested for use on single-ply membrane
roofs, it has recently been found that the performance of some (and, possibly all) is far less
satisfactory on embossed membranes rather than on plain, smooth membranes. This is
thought to result from the reduced contact surface area between the anchor device and the
roof surface. This effectively reduces the amount of friction,
47
Anyone who wishes to use a dead weight anchor device on an embossed membrane
surface or a surface that is not smooth should seek advice from the anchor device
manufacturer before proceeding.
48
The attention of users is drawn to the fact that no standard, at present, specifies tests for fallarrest systems in the following circumstances.
When a full body harness is connected via a retractable fall-arrestor to a dead weight
anchor device using a connector.
(b)
When a full body harness is connected via an energy-absorbing lanyard to a dead

weight anchor device using connectors.
AT
IO
(a)
Users who wish to connect such a system to a dead weight anchor device are advised to
seek confirmation from the manufacturer of the retractable fall-arrestor or energy-absorbing
lanyard that their products are safe to use in this way.
49
AL
46
TE
Suspension trauma
One of the effects of being suspended in a harness is a tightening of the leg straps that bear
the body weight of the suspended person. This can affect the blood circulation in the legs
and cause the suspended person considerable discomfort, possible kidney failure and
eventually unconsciousness and death. This is known as suspension trauma. It is essential
that someone suspended in a harness is recovered in the shortest possible time.
51
Fall victims may be able to slow the onset of suspension trauma by relieving the pressure on
their legs by pushing down vigorously with the legs, by positioning their body in a horizontal
or slight leg-high position, or if there is something nearby upon which the feet can be rested,
by standing up. However, the design of the harness and injuries sustained during the fall
may prevent these actions being taken.
52
Some harnesses are fitted with stirrups that are secured out of the way by Velcro during
normal use but can be lowered after a fall to enable the person to effectively 'stand up' in the
harness.
53
The person must be placed in a horizontal position, preferably the standard 'recovery'
position. It is essential that the emergency services are summoned immediately if it becomes
apparent that there could be a medical emergency situation.
EG
IN
50
1.3.7.13 Rope access (abseiling)

1
rd
This technique is only to be carried out by 3 party accredited fully trained and competent
persons. It is generally suitable for inspection and other similar activities but not for general
construction work except in exceptional circumstances. An example might be the rigging of
safety nets where it is not reasonably practicable to do it by using other means of access
such as a MEWP or another form of working platform.
QCS 2014

Page 123
Generally anyone carrying out roped access uses a system that incorporates two separately
anchored lines: the 'working line', which is the means of access, and a 'safety line', which
prevents a fall if the working line fails.
This requirement may be ignored in exceptional circumstances where:

(a)
the risk assessment shows that the use of a second line would increase the risk to the
person
(b)
effective alternative safety measures are taken.
The person must be connected to both lines by automatic locking devices that prevent an
uncontrolled descent should the person lose control of their actions.
The ropes, harnesses and other equipment are covered by the six-monthly thorough
examination and inspection requirements.
Protection must be installed if there is a danger of materials or equipment falling onto

persons below.
It is essential that only persons trained and competent in the use of rope access equipment,
to current industry standards, are allowed to carry out such activities.
IO
AL
AT
1.3.7.14 Boatswain's chairs
Boatswain's (or bosun's) chairs should only be used

where the work is of a relatively short duration and
where no other means of access or working, such
as a suspended scaffold, is practicable.
Note: Independently anchored safety line and safety

harness not shown
A person in a boatswain's chair is extremely

vulnerable. They are suspended high above the
ground and, if anything goes wrong, the chances are
that they are beyond rapid or immediate help. The
risk assessment should cover rescue procedures
should an emergency occur.
The installation and use of a boatswain's chair must

be supervised by an experienced and competent
person. Only properly trained and competent
operatives should be permitted to use them. These
Regulations must be strictly observed.
The traditional non-British Standard boatswain's

chair is still used by specialist trades such as
steeplejacks and lightning conductor engineers.
Operatives need to be fully trained and competent
before being permitted to use and work from it.
Where possible, consideration should be given to

the provision of a second safety line connected to a
harness being worn by the operative. In this way,
should there be a problem with the Boatswain's
chair, this safe system of working will prevent a fall. It may not always be possible and if this
is the case, then the reason for this should be recorded as part of the work at height risk
assessment.
EG
IN
TE
QCS 2014

Page 124
Rigging
7
A boatswain's chair should always be rigged with a pair of single sheave pulley blocks,
having a safe working load of at least 225 kg. Outriggers and other supports must be strong
enough, and be securely fastened down. Where weights are used, a safety factor of four is
required.
A boatswain's chair is classified as a 'roped access system', therefore, the system should be
rigged with a separately anchored safety line complete with an automatic locking device
attached to the user of the seat that prevents or limits a fall should the primary suspension
system fail.
Chair
A boatswain's chair should meet the following requirements:
compliance with BS 2830. A certificate of compliance should be available from the
manufacturer
(b)
be of a recommended size:
(ii)
not less than 225 mm deep
(iii)
have a back not less than 250 mm high
between 450 mm and 610 mm wide
AT
IO
(i)
AL
(a)
if the chair has a single central leg or suspension member, this should be without
sharp bends and be securely fixed to the seat as far back as practicable, so that the
user sits with one leg at either side
(d)
be provided with a safety harness to prevent the occupant falling out
(e)
the back and the suspension member should be placed so that no one can fall out
(f)
the suspension point must be at least 500 mm above the seat, with provisions for
suspension. No part should be able to become detached
(g)
be made for a safe working load of 115 kg. A proof test of 150 kg is recommended.
TE
(c)
IN
When the risk assessment identifies that work from a boatswain's chair will take place above
areas where people may be present, adequate protection must be installed to prevent them
being injured from falling equipment or materials.
10
EG
Safety factor
11
The counterweight (W) x tail length (T) should be at least four times the projection length (0)
x weight of the person, the chair and any tools or equipment being carried (C).
12

Page 125
AL
QCS 2014
Note: Independently anchored safety line and safety harness not shown
IO
Lifting equipment
All ropes and chains used should be thoroughly examined before their first use for any sign
of chafing or wear, and then every six months. They must be securely attached to the chair
and to the anchor. Swivel connections should be used to prevent spinning.
14
Fall ropes should not be less than 18 mm in diameter. They should be tied off correctly in the
working position. The rope must not be removed from the cleat while the chair is in use; a
controlled descent is achieved by removing the locking-hitch from the rope in the 'tied-off'
position and easing it around the cleat.
TE
AT
13
Hooks should be 'moused', 'C' shaped, or fitted with a spring-loaded device to prevent the
displacement of the load.
EG
15
IN
Hooks
Cradles
Cradles, which come within the category of suspended access equipment, may be used for
window cleaning, painting, exterior maintenance and inspection.
17
They may be permanently rigged and attached to the roof, or be a temporary installation
which can be dismantled. Safe access to the cradle must be provided, either at ground or
roof level. Cradles, as 'man riding' equipment must be inspected at appropriate intervals and
subjected to six-monthly thorough examinations.
18
Two main types of cradle in use within the construction industry are:
19
16
(a)
those 3.2 m or less in length, suspended on pulley blocks with natural or synthetic
fibre ropes
(b)
those more than 3.2 m in length, suspended on wire ropes controlled by handoperated or power winches which are mounted on the cradle.
Both types can be installed as:

(a)
Fixed cradle - Rise and fall only
(b)
Travelling - Capable of moving horizontally across the workface as well as rising and
falling.
QCS 2014

Page 126
Rigging
20
The erection of a cradle must be carried out and supervised by an experienced, competent
person who is familiar with the type of equipment being erected.
Outrigger
21
Timber poles, roller steel section or specially stiffened scaffold tube may be used. The
framework must be secured at intersections to prevent displacement and the counterweight
must be sufficient to give a resisting moment at least three times the overturning moment,
i.e. W = 3 x O x C
T
Where:
W = Counterweight
C = Total weight of fully loaded cradle
AL
0 = Overhang
IO
T = Tail length
Where a traversing track is required, this should be an alloy or steel section, properly joined
or shackled to the outriggers. If the track is joined to provide a continuous run, this must be
with both the load-bearing connectors and the join supported by an outrigger. End stops
must be in place at either end of the track, to prevent the trolley from running off.
23
When installing temporary cradles, a check must be made that nothing on the face of the
structure, for example, satellite dishes, will obstruct its range of travel.
24
Care must be taken not to damage the roof or structure, and adequate packing should be
used on copings.
IN
TE
AT
22
To identify compliance with BS 2830, markings should clearly show the safe working load
and maximum number of persons held.
25
EG
Markings
Working platform
26
Should be not less than 600 mm wide.
27
Should be closely boarded (except for drainage).
28
There must be no gaps in platforms through which materials may fall and injure people
below.
29
Timber boards should overhang the stirrups by at least 100 mm but not by more than 200
mm.
30
Should be supplied with a non-slip surface, if possible.
Toe-boards
31
Ideally will not be less than 150 mm high.
QCS 2014

Page 127
Guard-rails
32
Should be at least 950 mm above the working platform.
33
There should be an intermediate guard-rail or other substantial barrier.
34
The space between guard-rails and toe-board should be not more than 470 mm.
Suspension points
35
Should be positioned centrally in the width of the platform.
36
Heights should be not less than 1.67 times the clear width of the platform.
Safe working distributed load

225 kg when there is a 2 m clear working length.
38
295 kg when there is 2-3.2 m of clear working length.
39
The maximum number of persons allowed on a platform should be displayed. (This does not
take into account the weight of any materials.)
IO
AL
37
AT
1.3.7.15 Stirrups
Stirrups should pass under the platform and be secured.
If hinged for operational purposes:
the pivot point should be non-detachable
(b)
the stirrup should be able to be locked in the vertical position.
IN
TE
(a)
The stirrup should be hinged to a metal strip of the same strength as the stirrup which is
fixed under the platform.
EG
Demountable stirrup
Should be designed so that it cannot become accidentally detached.
Guard-rails required for hinged and demountable stirrups should be secured with captive
devices.
Suspension
6
Ropes should be not less than 18 mm in diameter and should be either natural fibre or
synthetic fibre, conforming to BS EN standards, as appropriate.
Wire ropes used to suspend cradles should have a safety factor of at least eight.
The proper inspection of wires and ropes is essential to safety, with renewal as soon as
necessary.
Suitable devices should be fitted or other steps taken, where practicable, to prevent the
carrier falling if the main support fails.
QCS 2014

Page 128
Pulley blocks
10
Must be suitable for the ropes which are to reeve through them.
11
The safe working loads for cradles are:

(a)
250 kg for cradles with 2 m clear working lengths
(b)
380 kg for cradles with 2 - 3.2 m clear working lengths.
Winches or similar
12
The safe working loads for winches are:

(a)
225 kg for cradles up to 2 m in length
(b)
295 kg for cradles up to 3.2 m in length.
As for boatswain's chairs
13
AL
Hooks
When working above areas where people may be present, adequate protection must be
installed to prevent people being injured from falling equipment or materials.
AT
14
IO
Fall-arrest devices
These are provided to avoid the consequences of a suspension rope failure. They must be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
16
If such a device is not used, operatives must wear a safety harness attached via a selflocking device to an independently anchored safety line.
IN
TE
15
EG
General
Care must be exercised when planning works at elevated positions, where the 'safe distance'
from electric cables may be reduced. The risk assessment should specify appropriate
distances and precautions.
18
Only competent and properly trained personnel should be employed in the erection and use
of cradles.
19
All equipment must be thoroughly examined at six-monthly intervals and tested in

compliance with the relevant legislation and standards, and proper records must be kept,
20
The public should be warned of operations.
17
QCS 2014

EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Typical suspended cradle
Page 129
QCS 2014

Page 130

1.3.7 Appendix 1
Safety nets
Safety checklist
Before use
Are the safety nets rigged to minimise the height of any fall such that an uninjured person
can simply climb out?
If not, have emergency rescue procedures been established?
Have checks been made to ensure that free fall distances are not more than specified?
Have the safety nets been rigged by trained and competent persons?
Is the use of safety nets to be supervised by competent persons?
Have safety nets been inspected prior to current use?
Are complete and proper records kept of all inspections and examinations?
Has the safety net system been inspected within the previous week?
10
Are all anchors and supports secure?
11
Is the safety net clear of all debris?
12
Have checks been made to ensure that nothing is positioned under the net to reduce the
minimum clearance distance required?
TE
AT
IO
AL
During use
Is the net being kept clear of debris?
Are the safety nets inspected:

after a fall
(b)
for the effects of contamination
(c)
every seven days during use
EG
(a)
IN
to ensure that the safety net is not damaged and that the anchorage points and ties are
sound.
After use
1
Are safety nets inspected for any damage following use and before being stowed away?
Are any defects reported promptly and correctly?
Are repairs only carried out by a competent person?
Are adequate records maintained as to the use and condition of safety nets?
Are safety nets dried and stored correctly?
Are the annual condition tests being undertaken?
QCS 2014

Page 131

1.3.7 Appendix 2
Safety belts, harnesses and lanyards
Safety checklist
Before use
Have emergency rescue procedures been established?
Has the most suitable harness or belt been selected for the type of operation and hazard?
Are the operatives who are to use the equipment adequately trained in its inspection and
use?
Is it all in good order and fit for purpose?
Is a secure and appropriately positioned anchorage point available?
Have checks been made to ensure that the weather conditions are such that an operative
can work safely in the prevailing conditions?
Is there a schedule of detailed examination of the equipment?
Are records of the examinations kept?
10
Have steps been taken to see that adequate warning notices are displayed?
AT
IO
AL
During use
Have safety lines been set by a competent person?
Are only authorised, trained and competent personnel allowed to use the equipment?
Is all equipment inspected before the start of work each day, following an established
routine, particularly for damage to webbing lanyards?
Have set procedures been established and implemented?
Is horseplay strictly prohibited?
After use
EG
IN
TE
Is the equipment inspected for damage?
Are defects reported promptly and correctly?
Is defective equipment quarantined (if it can be repaired) or discarded?
Is the equipment cleaned and stored correctly?
QCS 2014

Page 132

1.3.7 Appendix 3
Boatswain's chair
Safety checklist
Before use
Has a separately anchored safety line been installed?
Is the installation and use of a boatswain's chair supervised by trained, experienced and
competent personnel?
Are the chair and associated equipment carefully examined for defects prior to use?
Is confirmation at hand that test and examination certificates are valid?
Has the safe working load been established?
Have checks been carried out to ensure that the user is both trained and competent in the
use of the chair?
Are warning notices displayed and has notification of intention to carry out work been given?
AT
IO
AL
During use
Is the chair free of materials or articles which could interfere with the user's control of the
chair?
Has the fall rope been properly tied off whilst the chair is in use and always under or around
a cleat to act as a brake?
Has a safe area been created below the work area or protection installed?
Is the safety line being properly used?
After use
EG
IN
TE
Is the chair inspected for defects following its use?
Are chairs and ropes left in a safe condition, i.e.

(a)
is the chair raised to the first floor level if possible, and the top rope secured?
(b)
have the chair and rope been secured to prevent swing?
(c)
have the ropes (and chair, if timber) been dried before storage?
QCS 2014

Page 133

1.3.7 Appendix 4
Cradles Safety checklist
Before use
Are cradles installed and supervised by a competent person?
Are cradles inspected and appropriate reports made?
Are current test certificates available for winches, wire ropes, blocks and so on?
Have users been properly trained?
Has adequate protection been installed and proper warning given to members of the public
and other people who might be affected?
Have occupiers of the building been warned not to open windows?
Have steps been taken to erect the correct warning signs?
10
Have secondary safety ropes and harnesses been provided as necessary?
11
Is the safe working load of the cradle marked?
12
Has a check been carried out for obstructions on the face of the structure?
13
Have effective fall-arrest measures been installed?
AT
IO
AL
During use
Is a competent person in charge of all operations when cradles are being used?
15
Are operations being carried out with authorised operatives only?
16
Are inspections carried out weekly?
17
Have checks been made to ensure that there are no knots or kinks in the ropes?
18
Are ropes correctly reeved on the drum with at least two turns left when the cradle has
reached its maximum operating distance? (Power-operated cradles only.)
19
Have both power supplies and cables been checked before operating?
20
Have checks been carried out to the controls for correct function and to ensure that pendant
controls are secured to the cradle?
21
Have all ropes been securely anchored?
22
Are the stops and over-runs operational?
23
Are secondary safety devices properly secured and anchored?
24
Has the cradle been tied-off to the building to prevent sway?
25
Have checks been made to ensure that the safe working load is not being exceeded?
26
Is the cradle kept clean and clear of rubbish?
27
Have all necessary precautions been taken to ensure that the platform is not slippery?
28
Are all tools carried in the cradle secured?
29
Is there adequate protection from above to stop any falling materials?
30
Are all necessary steps being taken to ensure that the proper access is being used?
31
Is the practice of climbing down ropes strictly prohibited?
EG
IN
TE
14
QCS 2014

Page 134
32
Are all personnel aware that there must be no transferring between adjacent cradles?
33
Have all possible steps been taken to ensure that personnel do not allow ropes and cradles
or connections to lie in gutters?
34
Are all operatives aware that use in high winds or adverse weather conditions is not safe and
is prohibited?
After use
Are the cradle and all ropes, in a secure position to prevent unauthorised access or usage?
36
Are checks carried out to ensure that power supplies are isolated and control equipment is
removed and secured?
37
Are defects and breakdowns reported promptly and correctly?
38
Are all warning signs removed after the completion of work?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
35
QCS 2014

Page 135

1.3.8
Safety with Steelwork
1.3.8.1 Key points

The majority of jobs that involve erecting steelwork will also involve working at height, and
exposure to the associated potential hazards.
A schedule of erection should be in place to ensure the safe erection and stability of the
structure until it is complete.
All steel erection must be the subject of a risk assessment and carried out in accordance
with a method statement.
Ideally, the erection of steelwork will be carried out in such a way that those doing the job are
on a stable working platform at all times, be that a scaffold or a mobile elevating work
platform (MEWP). Operatives having to go onto the steelwork should be a last resort.
Ground conditions must be suitable to take the weight of MEWPs and their loads.
Designers have the potential to ensure that the erection of steelwork can be carried out
safely, for example, designing-in lifting eye attachment points, or specifying ground-level
fabrication.
The erection of steelwork will usually involve extended crane operations, the use of MEWPs
in and around the new structure, lorry movements, steel laydown areas and possibly a lorrypark, all of which must be planned for when the site is first set up.
All lifting operations, including the use of cranes and MEWPs, must be carried out by, and
under the control of, competent persons.
The presence of overhead power cables and the possible need to manually align steelwork
components for connection are other potential hazards associated with the erection of
steelwork.
The majority of fatal accidents are as a result of falls from height. In addition, many serious
accidents occur due to workers being struck by falling materials.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

1
assessment of every work activity to identify the hazards arising out of that work and the
persons or groups who might be affected.
When hazards are identified, it is then the Contractor's duty to either eliminate the hazards or
The Contractor must provide all employees with comprehensible and relevant information on
those risks.

1
By its very nature, the erection of steelwork will usually involve a degree of working at height.
These Regulations require that Contractors:

(a)
avoid the need to work at height where it is reasonably practicable to do so
QCS 2014

Page 136
(b)
where this is not possible use work methods or equipment to prevent falls
(c)
where this is not possible, use work equipment or other measures to minimise the
distance or the consequences of falls
(d)
ensure that all work at height is based on a risk assessment and is carried out safely
by competent persons
(e)
(f)
ensure that measures are taken to prevent anyone being injured by falling objects
(g)
ensure that adequate emergency arrangements are in place in the event of an incident
(rescue).

Any work equipment used in the handling or erection of steelwork, such as tirfor winches,
wire rope slings, lifting gear, lifting tackle, MEWPs and even hand tools, must comply with
these Regulations.
They require that a Contractor only supplies work equipment that is correct and suitable for
the job and ensures that the equipment is maintained and kept in good working order.
The Contractor is also required to provide employees with all necessary information,
instruction and training to ensure that they are competent to use any work equipment
provided.
employees, the use of the equipment must be restricted to competent and authorised
workers only.
TE
AT
IO
AL
IN

Any lifting activity and the equipment used to carry it out must comply with the requirements
of these Regulations. The term lifting equipment not only includes machinery such as cranes
but also any device used to connect the machinery to the load, such as eye-bolts, hooks,
slings. These are known as lifting accessories.
Briefly, these Regulations place legal duties on the Contractor to ensure that:
(a)
EG
all lifting equipment is stable in use and of adequate strength for the purpose for which
it is being used - safe working loads
(b)
lifting equipment used to lift persons, for example a passenger hoist, is designed for
the purpose and is safe to use
(c)
lifting equipment is positioned and
(d)
installed so as to keep the load under full control
(e)
lifting equipment is marked with its safe working load
(f)
lifting activities are properly planned, appropriately supervised and carried out in a
safe manner
(g)
lifting equipment (including lifting accessories) is subjected to a scheme of periodic

thorough examination for which reports are raised.

1
Many risks can be eliminated, avoided or reduced by careful attention to design and planning
aspects before construction work starts. Any remaining risks can be controlled by the
QCS 2014

Page 137
effective management of health and safety risks during the construction phase. Both
planning and management are key requirements of these Regulations.
2
These regulations place duties on (amongst others) the client, the contractor and designers,
and provide a framework for the management of risks, including those inherent in the
handling and erection of steelwork.

everyone working on a project is competent to do what is required of them
(b)
all parties involved in a project co-operate with each other in the interests of health
and safety
(c)
all parties involved in a project coordinate their activities in the interests of health and
safety
(d)
only authorised persons are allowed on to site.
AL
In addition to the design and general health and safety management issues outlined above,
in the context of steel erection, these Regulations cover:
the stability of structures
(b)
demolition and dismantling
(c)
the presence of overhead cables (and in some instances, buried services)
(d)
establishing traffic routes
(e)
the safe use of vehicles
(f)
temperature and weather protection
(g)
lighting (if working in reduced level of light)
(h)
are considered to be particularly relevant.
AT
IO
(a)
TE
(a)
(a)
(b)
(c)
EG
Steel erection, by its very definition, involves creating structures, which these Regulations
require to be stable at all times. In particular:
all practicable steps must be taken to ensure that no person is put at risk by the
collapse of any structure which may become unstable or weakened
IN
1.3.8.8 The stability of structures
structures must not be loaded to an extent that they become unsafe

any temporary means of supporting a permanent structure must be:
(i)
designed and maintained to withstand any stresses and strains that are put on it
(ii)
only used for the purpose for which it was designed, installed and maintained
(iii)
not overloaded so as to render it unsafe.
1.3.8.9 Traffic routes and vehicles

1
Prior to and during steel erection, deliveries of steel on articulated lorries will be a feature of
many jobs. In the context of this section, these Regulations place a legal duty on the person
in charge of the site to ensure:
(a)
that pedestrians and vehicles can move safely and without risks to health, so far as is
reasonably practicable
(b)
there are sufficient traffic routes, all of which must be suitable for the vehicles using
them
QCS 2014
(c)

Page 138
there is sufficient segregation between pedestrians and moving vehicles but where
this is not reasonably practicable:
(i)
other means of protection are provided, and
(ii)
a means of warning pedestrians of the approach of vehicles, where the

pedestrians would otherwise be at risk, is provided
(d)
that (vehicle) loading bays have one exit for the exclusive use of pedestrians
(e)
appropriate signs are erected in the interests of health and safety
(f)
steps are taken to prevent the unintentional movement of any vehicle
(g)
each vehicle must be operated in a safe manner with its load arranged safely
(h)
every vehicle is fitted with means of warning persons who may be at risk when the
vehicle is moving.
AL

These Regulations require that where there is a risk of injury, Contractors must, so far as is
practicable, avoid the need for employees to carry out any manual handling operations.
Where this is not possible, the Contractor must make an assessment of the work to be
carried out and take appropriate steps to reduce the risk of injury to employees.
Contractors must provide employees with adequate and suitable training in manual handling,
and employees must follow any such information or instructions given and use the safe
systems of work that have been put into place by their Contractor.
It is anticipated that the amount of manual handling involved in steel erection has been
significantly reduced due to the improved standards of design and modem methods of
access and working.
IN
1.3.8.11 Design and planning
TE
AT
IO
Design and planning considerations Contractors should follow:
EG
Structural stability
The structure must be stable at all times from when the first piece of steelwork is put into
position until it is completed.
Temporary supports, such as bracing, guys or stays, must be used during the erection of any
structure which may be unstable or liable to collapse before it is completed. Additionally,
where any work is carried out which is likely to adversely affect the foundations or stability of
any existing building or structure (or one under construction), all practicable precautions,
such as shoring, must be taken.
Temporary structures
4
Any temporary structure must be of good construction, adequate strength and stability, made
of sound materials free from obvious defects and be properly maintained.
1.3.8.12 Safe means of assembly or making connections

1
Assembly of steelwork components or making connections should be planned so that

erectors can do as much of the work as possible at ground level.
Where erectors have to work at a height, provision must be made for safe means of access
to the connecting points and any other working places. Ideally, work will be carried out from
QCS 2014

Page 139
MEWPs operating on a suitable floor surface. However, where this is not possible, design
consideration should be given to:
(a)
ensuring there is adequate working space and a suitable work platform for a crane
(b)
connections between steelwork components that are simple to make off-site or

ground-level assembly or fabrication to reduce work at height
(c)
the provision of fixed work platforms and ladders
(d)
the provision of anchorage points for safety nets and fall arrest devices.
Steelwork components
The size, weight and shape of individual steelwork components will influence safe handling
and erecting. The designer should therefore consider the following steps:
marking components as an aid to identification (also to prevent costly mistakes)
(b)
optimising the length of structural members in an attempt to reduce the number of

connections at height
(c)
calculating the weights of components to assist in the estimation of safe crane

capacities and the location of cranes
(d)
identifying the positions where components should be lifted
(e)
indicating centres of gravity where these are not readily evident
IO
AL
(a)
AT
1.3.8.13 Site features
Potentially hazardous features should be identified that will conflict with health and safety.
Some typical examples include the following items.
TE
If there are any overhead power lines near the proposed erection site, the local electricity
company should be consulted. Either the power lines should be made dead, temporarily
rerouted or other suitable precautions taken to prevent any close approach to, or contact
with, live overhead lines
Buried services
EG
IN
Overhead electric cables
As well as a visual inspection for marker posts or obvious signs, a check should be made
with the owner or occupier of the land and the various utility companies, including electricity,
gas, water, telecommunication and cable TV companies.
Other site features which require attention

5
These features include:

(a)
lack of space for the handling and storage of steelwork
(b)
restricted (crane) oversailing rights and safety
(c)
restricted area(s) for vehicle movements
(d)
low resistance to ground bearing pressures
(e)
poor access onto the site
(f)
any buildings close to the site that may affect the erection process
(g)
any rights of access that may bring members of the public close to the erection site
QCS 2014
(h)

Page 140
ground contamination from previous use of the land.
Other contractors and their activities

6
Certain activities or processes on, or adjacent to, the site may have the potential to
adversely affect the health and safety of workers on site. For example, noxious gases,
vapours or dusts may be given off from chimneys, stacks, tank vents and ventilation ducts.
These may not cause a problem at ground level but may affect steelwork erectors working at
a height.
Managing the safe erection of steelwork

Following a detailed risk assessment of the work activity, the next step in ensuring safe work
practices in erection is the preparation of a method statement.
This important document should detail the proposed erection scheme and should form part
of the health and safety plan for the project.
AL
Method statements
The amount of detail required in a method statement will depend on how big or complex the
job is. However, method statements should be written for even small steel erection jobs. It is
clear evidence that attention has been given to design and planning aspects, as well as
being a plan to ensure that the project is completed without risks to health and safety.
10
A typical method statement should include the following points:
AT
IO
details of how the project will be managed and health and safety risks eliminated,
avoided or reduced
(b)
information on the site, including any hazardous features, such as overhead electric
power lines, and what effect these will have on the project
(c)
details of plant requirements such as cranes, MEWPs and other lifting equipment, and
the competencies required to operate them
(d)
arrangements for the safe receipt, offloading, storage and handling of steelwork
components on site
(e)
details on where and how steelwork will be assembled prior to erection
(f)
the sequential method of erecting the structure and how stability will be ensured at all
times
EG
IN
TE
(a)
(g)
how activities such as slinging, lifting, unslinging and the initial and final connecting of
steelwork components will be carried out safely
(h)
the safety precautions to prevent falls from height. For example, arranging for as much
assembling as possible to be done at ground level, minimising the number of
connections to be made at a height
(i)
the means of providing safe access and a safe place of work by methods such as
mobile towers, temporary platforms and walkways
(j)
details of the means of communication during lifting operations
(k)
any requirement for safety nets, safety harnesses and fall arrester devices (provisions
for design features should be specified, for example, attachment points for ladders,
safety nets and fall-arrest devices)
(l)
how people will be protected from falling objects. For example, use of screens, fans
and debris nets, installation of barriers and warning notices at ground level
(m)
a contingency plan for dealing with any problems that may arise.
QCS 2014

Page 141
Site access/egress
The Contractor should check that all of the vehicles associated with the erection or
dismantling of steelwork can access and egress the site safely. It is envisaged that the
vehicles will mainly be cranes and delivery lorries (delivering steel and MEWPs).
12
A safe location for lorries to park must be identified and communicated to employees. This
area must not be immediately outside the site or on any access road if doing so would create
an unacceptable obstruction or other hazards for passing traffic or pedestrians. On larger
sites space should be allocated as a dedicated lorry or trailer park.
13
On sites where there is simply not space to park large vehicles, appropriate arrangements,
such as a road or lane closure, must be made for delivery lorries (and possibly the mobile
crane) to be parked on the public highway adjacent to the site boundary for the off-loading of
the steel.
14
Where there is a loading/unloading bay for only a single lorry, a strict schedule of delivery
times must be written, communicated to the steel delivery company and adhered to. In this
instance it is highly advisable to identify a 'lorry holding area', to which lorries that 'miss their
slot' can be sent pending the allocation of another unloading 'slot'.
15
Every effort should be made to avoid the need for vehicles to reverse, particularly out of the
site gate and back on to a public road. Where this is not possible, suitable precautions must
be taken, for example, the use of one or more signallers or an alternative traffic-control
system.
16
Where it is considered unsafe for vehicles and pedestrians to use the same site entrance,
one or more separate pedestrian entrances must be provided, clearly indicated and kept free
of obstruction.
TE
AT
IO
AL
11
1.3.8.14 Housekeeping
Construction sites must, so far as is reasonably practicable, be kept in good order and a
reasonable state of cleanliness.
Platforms, gangways, floors and other places must not be obstructed by loose materials.
Projecting nails or similar sharp objects in timber or other materials must be removed or
knocked down to prevent injury.
Materials must be stacked safely.
EG
IN
1.3.8.15 Lighting
1
The following areas must be adequately and suitably lit:

(a)
every working place
(b)
access to working places
(c)
where lifting operations are in progress
(d)
all dangerous openings.
1.3.8.16 Protection from falling material

1
At any place where people work, steps must be taken to prevent them from being struck by
any falling material or article.
QCS 2014

Page 142
Scaffold components, tools and other objects must not be thrown or tipped down from a
height where they are liable to cause injury, but should be properly lowered.
1.3.8.17 Lifting and slinging

1
Competent people must be used to operate lifting equipment and give signals in line with BS
7121.
All critical lifts, including tandem lifts, should be carefully planned and supervised.
Reference - BS 7121:2006 Code of Practice for safe use of cranes
Appropriate precautions must be taken to ensure the stability of lifting appliances when used
on soft, uneven or sloping ground. These could include measures such as ground levelling,
use of mats or hard standing.
A safe means of access and a safe workplace must be provided when off-loading
components from delivery lorries. Two examples of recently developed safety systems are:
a tensioned steel wire running the length of the lorry trailer, at above head-height of
anyone standing on the trailer. Each slinger wears a safety harness and a restraintlanyard, the free end of which is clipped to the tension steel wire. In the event of a trip
or stumble, the slinger is prevented from falling from the trailer
(b)
a 'U' shaped inflatable air bag or a 'bean-bag' that fits around the back and sides of
the trailer to act as a soft-landing system, should anyone fall off the trailer.
AT
IO
(a)
AL
1.3.8.18 Offloading, stacking and storage of steelwork
Many accidents have occurred during the off-loading of lorries when the load-securing
mechanism was released. This is because the load was either not stable when loaded or
because it moved and became unstable during the journey.
The stability of the load on the lorry, or in the stack, must be ensured at all times. Suitable
timber wedges or packing pieces can be used as an aid to stability.
Precautions should be taken to prevent slingers being struck by the load. For example,
taking up a safe position off the lorry before the load is lifted.
The stack must be constructed so that components can be removed without risk of someone
being trapped or struck.
There may be an advantage in using a suitable transportable storage rack (stillage) for
smaller components.
Anyone not directly involved in the off-loading activity should not be allowed into the area.
EG
IN
TE
1.3.8.19 Safe means of access and safe place of work

1
To comply with these Regulations, consideration must be given to reducing the need to work
at height. The following are a way of doing this:
(a)
doing as much of the connecting work at ground level or from erected floor decks, as
the work progresses
(b)
use of a releasing device so that lifting gear can be released remotely
(c)
ensuring that, wherever possible, inspection and testing is carried out at low level.
When people must work at height, consideration should be given to the following measures:
QCS 2014

Page 143
(a)
installing permanent stairways, ladders, walkways and floor decking, so that these can
be used by erectors as the work progresses
(b)
providing hard standings or floor slabs so that mobile access platforms can be used
(c)
providing temporary access and working platforms, including scaffolds, lightweight

staging, purpose-built platforms with safe means of access
(d)
working from mobile elevating work platforms (MEWPs).
Whilst the increased use of MEWPs has brought about safer working at height, it has also
created the need to ensure that:
(a)
MEWP operators are adequately trained and competent
(b)
ground conditions on the site are properly surveyed and prepared to enable the safe
use of such heavy plant without risk of sinking or overturning.
Traditionally, scaffolding was the main form of edge protection, which could only be installed,
modified or removed by trained scaffolders, after the steelwork was in place. However, the
development of various types of 'system edge protection' has provided opportunities for preinstalling edge protection before work at height commences. The use of such systems can
also eliminate the need for successive trades to install their own edge protection and then
remove it when leaving site, only for it to be replaced by the next trade's edge protection.
The elimination of such duplication has obvious safety benefits.
It may be appropriate in some circumstances to use other means of access to height, such
as the use of roped access techniques, which must be carried out by trained and competent
persons, alternatively, access may be achieved by using a 'man-riding' basket suspended
from a crane.
There may be occasions when it is necessary to use fall arrest rather than fall prevention
measures, with safety nets or other soft landing systems being the preferred method of fall
arrest.
IN
1.3.8.20 Beam 'straddling'
TE
AT
IO
AL
There may be occasions where the work cannot be done from a MEWP or other platform
and erectors may have to work from the steel. This is known as beam 'straddling'. This form
of access is only permissible for specific short-duration jobs where the beam is of I beam
section.
A full body harness with a twin-tailed lanyard system may be used. However users must
ensure that this system is used correctly and that the second leg is not attached to the user's
harness as this may interfere with the operation of the energy absorber.
The erector can sit astride the flange with the sole and heel of each foot resting on the
bottom flange and both hands able to grasp either side of the top flange.
Alternatively, proprietary 'beam gliding' devices are available to improve ease of mobility.
The risk assessment must consider how anyone carrying out this practice is going to be
rescued following a fall.
The use of a safety harness or lanyard requires a minimum clearance below the high-level
place of work to allow the lanyard to function properly in arresting a fall. Expert advice should
be sought.
The safe system of work must also ensure the operative's safety:
EG
(a)
whilst getting up to the place of work and down again
QCS 2014
(b)
8

Page 144
during the period of time at high level before the operative is able to 'clip on'.
If access has to be made inside a structural' steel box section, or any configuration of
steelwork where ventilation is poor, it should be treated as a confined space and appropriate
precautions taken. The atmosphere should be tested by a competent person, before entry is
made, to ensure that there is sufficient oxygen present. Continuous monitoring for oxygen
deficiency is strongly recommended. Tests for flammable or toxic gases or vapours and
oxygen enrichment should be carried out as appropriate, depending on the proposed work
activity. For example, oxy-propane cutting or burning may lead to a build up of toxic gases or
toxic metal fumes, or there may be a leakage of propane or oxygen.
1.3.8.21 The weather
wind strengths
(b)
rain or dew
(c)
poor visibility (fog, mist or glare)
(d)
Sand storms.
(a)
AL
A regular weather forecast should be obtained by the manager in charge of the erection
programme. Erection should not take place where weather conditions impose an adverse
effect, such as:
IO
If erection work is stopped, measures should be taken to ensure that the structure remains
stable.
After a stoppage due to the weather, stability of the structure should be checked before work
is allowed to restart.
EG
IN
TE
AT
QCS 2014

Page 145

1.3.8 Appendix
Safety checklist: steelwork
Is the contractor responsible for erection competent?
Has a risk assessment been undertaken for the project?
Does the contractor have a method statement?
Does it specify the sequence of erection and how the structure will be kept stable at all
times?
What types of temporary support will be used?
Does everyone know the requirements for safe erection?
How will the structure components be erected and connected safely?
Will as many connections as possible be done at ground level?
Where work must be done at height, have safe means of access and safe places of work
been planned?
10
Has the site been surveyed for hazardous features such as overhead power lines?
11
Is there sufficient access for off-loading lorries?
12
Is there a planned delivery sequence of components?
13
Are there plans to deal with lorries that have to reverse?
14
How will components be offloaded, stacked and de-stacked safely?
15
Are the weights of individual components known?
16
Does all lifting gear that is to be used have adequate safe working loads?
17
Have crane capacities been calculated?
18
Have steps been taken to eliminate the need for manual handling?
19
Are the steel erectors competent? Have they been adequately trained?
20
Will all lifts be supervised by a competent person?
21
If MEWPs are to be used, are all the operators trained and competent?
22
Is it necessary to survey and prepare the ground so that MEWPs can operate safely?
23
Will work at height be carried out other than from a MEWP?
24
What measures will be taken to prevent or arrest falls?
25
Are emergency rescue procedures in place?
26
Have any special risks been identified, for example, work in confined spaces?
27
Is there a plan to monitor the weather?
28
Is there a contingency plan?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 146

1.3.9
Roofing and Fragile Surface Practices
1.3.9.1 Roof work and fragile surfaces

The main causes of accidents are falling off the edges of roofs and falling through holes, roof
lights and other fragile surfaces.
Compliance with well-established safety procedures could save lives and prevent injuries. All
roof work requires a risk assessment and, if the work is extensive, a method statement that
sets out a safe system of work. Most accidents could be avoided if the most suitable
equipment was used and those carrying out the work were given adequate information,
instruction, training and supervision.
If work is going to be done on any roof, the Contractor is to make sure there is:
AL
safe access onto the roof, e.g. a general access scaffold, tower scaffold (preferably of
the stairway design) or mobile access equipment etc
(b)
a safe means of moving across the roof, e.g. using proprietary staging or purposemade roof ladders.
(c)
a means of preventing falls when working on the roof, e.g. edge protection consisting
of guard rails and toe boards, a proprietary access system or a MEWP.
(d)
measures to prevent falls through fragile materials (e.g. barriers or covers) and
mitigate the consequences should a fall occur (e.g. nets).
AT
IO
(a)
Independent scaffolds that provide safe access onto the roof, a safe working platform and
the capacity for material storage (always check with the scaffold designer before stacking
material at roof level) are the ideal solution.
However, it is not always possible to use a general access scaffold. In these circumstances,
for a sloping roof, edge protection erected at eaves level, with or without a scaffold platform,
or for a flat roof, edge protection erected around the edges provides an alternative fall
prevention measure. Figure 23 shows some of the options for sloping-roof edge protection
and Figure 24 shows examples of flat-roof edge protection.
EG
IN
TE
Figure 23 - Typical sloping-roof edge protection

Page 147
AL
QCS 2014
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Figure 24 - Example of flat-roof edge protection
Irrespective of the type of edge protection used, safe access onto the roof and a safe way of
lifting materials up to roof level must be provided and maintained.
Alternatively, mobile elevating work platforms or proprietary access systems (see Figure 25
), which are easy to transport from site to site and quick to erect, provide good access and
should be considered as an alternative to fixed edge protection.
Figure 25 - Proprietary access system for roof-work

Page 148
AL
QCS 2014
On sloping roofs, roof workers should not work directly on the tiles or slates. Roof ladders
and proprietary staging should be used to enable safe passage across a roof. They must be
designed for the purpose, of good construction, properly supported and if used on a sloping
roof, securely fixed by means of a ridge hook placed over the ridge. They should be used in
addition to eaves-level edge protection and if the work requires access with 2 m of the gable
ends, edge protection will be needed there as well.
Short-duration work means tasks that are measured in MINUTES rather than hours. It
includes such jobs as inspection, replacing a few tiles or adjusting a television aerial. Work
on a roof is still dangerous even if it only lasts a short time and appropriate safety measures
are essential.
10
For short-duration work it may not be reasonably practicable to provide full edge protection,
but you will need to provide something in its place. The minimum requirements for shortduration work on a roof are:
IN
TE
AT
IO
a safe means of access to roof level; and
(b)
a safe means of working on the roof (e.g. on a sloping roof, a properly constructed
roof ladder, or on a flat roof, a harness attached to a secure anchorage and fitted with
as short a lanyard as possible).
EG
(a)
11
Many roof assemblies are, or can become, fragile. Asbestos cement, fibreglass and plastic
generally become more fragile with age. Steel sheets may rust. Sheets on poorly repaired
roofs might not be properly supported by the purlins. Any of these materials could give way
without warning. Do not trust any sheeted roof. Do not stand directly on any sheeted roof.
12
On fragile roofs, the work has to be carefully planned to prevent falls through the roof. All
work should be carried out from beneath where practicable. Where this is not possible,
consider using a mobile elevating work platform (MEWP), which allows the operatives to
carry out the work from within the MEWP basket without standing on the roof itself (see
Figure 26 ). NEVER try to walk along the line of the roof bolts above the purlins, or along the
roof ridge, as the sheets can still crack and give way. The sheets are not designed to support
your weight and you should therefore approach the roof as if the sheets were not in position.
Figure 26 - A mobile elevating work platform being used to replace a roof sheet
Page 149
If access onto a fragile roof cannot be avoided, edge protection should be installed around
the perimeter of the roof and staging should be used to spread the load. Unless all the work
and access is on stagings or platforms that are fitted with guard rails, safety nets should be
installed under the roof or a harness system should be used (see Figure 27 ).
IN
TE
AT
IO
13

AL
QCS 2014
EG
Figure 27- Workmen wearing harnesses attached to a work positioning line, which is fitted to
the staging
14
Roof openings and fragile roof lights are a particular hazard. Some roof lights are difficult to
see in certain light conditions and others may be hidden by paint. Protection from falling
through openings and fragile roof lights must be provided using either barriers or covers that
QCS 2014

Page 150
are secured or labelled with a warning. If the work is the replacement of roof lights, nets
slung close beneath the roof lights, or a harness attached to a work positioning line which is
fixed to the staging, provides protection should a fall occur.
15
Do not throw materials such as old slates, tiles etc from the roof or scaffold - someone may
be passing by.
16
Refer to Section 11 Part 2 (SAMAS) 2.2 (2.2.9)
1.3.9.2 Industrial roof work

Industrial roof work involves all the hazards already mentioned and in addition, falls from the
'leading edge' also need to be prevented. Leading edges are created as new roof sheets are
laid or old ones are removed. Fragile and lightweight materials, such as liner trays which will
buckle and give way under the weight of a person, can also be a problem and should be
protected.
Work at the leading edge requires careful planning to develop a safe system of work,
including measures to mitigate the distance and consequences of a fall. Work platforms or
staging used in conjunction with nets is the preferred method, as nets provide protection to
everyone on the roof. Nets should only be installed by trained and competent net riggers.
If this is not practicable, work platforms or staging (fitted with guard rails and toe boards) in
advance of the leading edge can provide protection in some circumstances. However, these
will need to be used in conjunction with harnesses attached to a work positioning line which
is fixed to the work platform. If a harness is used, you must ensure that workers can attach
themselves to the anchorage without putting themselves at risk of a fall. Using the harness in
work-restraint mode is the preferred option, as this does not allow the operative to approach
the leading edge and enter into a fall position. Close supervision of this system of work will
be required as it is difficult for harnesses to remain clipped on at all times throughout the
work activity.
When developing a safe system of work the Contractor needs to consider the following:
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
how the first sheets will be laid - a separate platform may be required (a pack of roof
sheets is not a safe working platform) - and how hip ends and other special details are
to be fitted.
(b)
how sheets will be raised to roof level - decide what type of lifting machinery, such as
a crane or an inclined hoist, will be the preferred method. This will eliminate
unnecessary risks when placing packs of sheets on the roof supports or when
breaking open packs spread over the roof supports.
EG
(a)
1.3.9.3 Roof truss installation

1
When installing roof trusses, their placement and associated bracing is a hazardous activity,
which requires careful planning to ensure a safe system of access and protection against
falls is implemented. You must provide a safe working platform around the perimeter of the
roof together with measures to mitigate the distance and consequences of a fall should one
occur. This can be achieved by providing a working platform or 'crash deck' immediately
beneath the bottom members of trusses. Either conventional scaffolding or (if appropriate)
proprietary plastic decking systems can be used for this. Alternatively, nets can be used
providing a safe clearance distance can be achieved below the net and a suitable fixing point
is available. Providing nets or soft landing systems is particularly important when installing
temporary bracing or before boarding out along the bottom chord of the trusses, where
access within them is required.
END OF DOCUMENT
QCS 2014

Page 1
Part 1.04: Safe Use of Plant Equipment (Regulatory Document)
REGULATORY DOCUMENT ............................................................................... 1
1.4 SAFE USE OF PLANT EQUIPMENT ................................................................... 1

Abrasive Wheels .............................................................................................. 4
1.4.2
Portable Fixing Tools ..................................................................................... 16
1.4.3
Lifting Operations, Equipment and Accessories ............................................ 29
1.4.4
Mobile Elevating Work Platforms ................................................................... 69
1.4.5
Hoists and Hoist Towers ................................................................................ 86
1.4.6
Plant and Work Equipment .......................................................................... 100
1.4.7
Woodworking Machines ............................................................................... 120
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.4.1
QCS 2014

Page 2
FORWARD
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 3
Sr. No
QCS 2014
Section No.
Part No.
Part Name
Submittals
7.5.2

Chart
Submittals
7.6.1
10
Health and Safety
All
All
All
11
10
11.4.6
14
14.4

Lifting Tackle
15
Temporary Controls
All
All
All
16
Traffic Diversions
16.1.3
Safety
General
8.1.6
Safety
General
8&9
1.4.12
10

Work
11
Deep Foundations
12
Deep Foundations
42
13
General
4&5
1.6
Temporary Fencing
14
Asphalt Plants
15
7.8.13
Safety Requirements
15
14
14.2.2
Safety
General
7,8, 9 &
10
1.3.2
Health and Safety
IO
TE
AT
37 & 38
Item Name
AL
Page No. Item No.
1.6
Safety
4.9.1.7
Safety Precautions
17
8.1.9
Safety
18
9.2.5
Safety Requirements
19
20
21
22
EG
IN
16

Survey
4,5&6
10.1.7
Safety Requirements
11
11.2.2
Safety
General
16
1.2.8
Safety Guards
General
19
1.2.16
23
19
Hot Water Storage
5.1.6
Safety
24
21

Installation
7&8
1.1.11
25
21

Installation
14
1.1.23
Safety Interlocks
26
24
General
1.1.4
Scaffolding
27
29
Design Aspects
1.1.5
28
29
2.3.1.5
Safety
29
29
Tunnel
18
4.5.8
Safety Regulations
30
29
Tunnel
19
4.5.9
Fire Prevention
31
29
Tunnel
21
4.6.4
32
29
Concrete Structures
7.1.10
Safety Railing
10
QCS 2014

Page 4

1.4.1
Abrasive Wheels
1.4.1.1 Key Points

Abrasive wheel machines of all types have the potential to cause severe injury if they are not
used with care.
Anyone who uses an abrasive wheel machine must be trained and competent to do so.
The potential for danger arises not so much from the machine itself but from the grinding
wheel or cutting-off disc used with the machine.
Many accidents are caused by the abrasive wheel being rotated faster than it was designed
to go, which results in it breaking up ('bursting') at high speed.
It is essential to check the compatibility of the abrasive wheel or cutting-off disc with the
machine to which it is about to be fitted.
The fitting of any abrasive wheel or cutting-off disc to a machine ('mounting') must only be
Carried out by someone who is trained and competent to do so.
The person who is trained and competent to mount abrasive wheels or cutting-off discs need
not be the same person who is competent to operate the machines.
Using an abrasive wheel machine has the potential to cause occupational health problems
and usually the wearing of appropriate PPE will be required.
AT
IO
AL
Abrasive wheels are potentially dangerous if not used correctly. Most accidents result from
selecting the wrong type of wheel or from over-speeding. It is essential that the right abrasive
wheel for the job is chosen; that it is correctly mounted by a competent person; that it is run
at the correct speed and that guards and eye protection are used.
In most circumstances abrasive wheels rotate at very high speeds and contact with the
revolving wheel can cause serious injury. When using a grinding wheel, a stream of hot
abrasive particles is thrown off, which can cause injury, particularly to the eyes. Finally, there
is always a risk of the wheel disintegrating or 'bursting' as it revolves. Fragments of the
wheel can be projected a great distance, at high velocity, in every direction.
EG
IN
TE
1.4.1.3 Types of abrasive wheel

An abrasive wheel is generally defined as a wheel, cylinder, disc or point having abrasive
particles, and intended to be power driven. It may consist entirely of abrasive particles, or be
of metal, wood, cloth, felt, rubber or paper, with a surface covered with abrasive material. It
may also be formed of a ring or segments of abrasive materials. These types of abrasive
wheels are used for shaping material via grinding operations.
Other types of abrasive wheel are those used for cutting rather than grinding operations.
These are circular metal blades, usually with diamond impregnated tips, used for cutting
through concrete, steel, etc.

1
assessment of every work activity to identify any hazard that employees or other people
When hazards are identified, it is the Contractors duty to either eliminate the hazard or to put
control measures into place to reduce the risks to health and safety arising out of the
hazards, as far as it is reasonably practicable to do so.
The Contractor must provide employees with:

(a)
comprehensible and relevant information on any risks that exist out of the work activity
QCS 2014

Page 5
and of any control measures that are in place to reduce those risks
(b)
4
adequate training to enable employees to work safely.
The employee, in turn, has a duty under these Regulations to tell their Contractor of any
work situation which presents a risk to their health and safety or to the health and safety of
any other person who may be affected.

high-impact eye protection (possibly a full-face visor) to BS EN 166
(b)
hearing protection
(c)
possibly hand/forearm protection, depending upon the material that is being cut
(d)
possibly respiratory protection,
(e)
depending upon what is being cut and whether the machine is fitted with a particle
collection/extraction system.
AL
(a)
Contractors must:
(a)
(b)
(c)
IO
PPE will include some or all of:
AT
(i) the risks that the PPE will protect against
(ii) the purpose for which it has been issued and the manner in which it is to be
used
TE
(iii) maintaining the PPE in good working order.

IN
received
(b)
(c)
EG
(a)
1.4.1.6 Control of Vibration

1
The use of most types of abrasive wheel machine will involve the user either holding the
material to be worked or the machine itself whilst the work activity is carried out. This has the
potential of subjecting the person doing the job to hand/arm vibration.
These Regulations place various requirements on Contractors including:

(a)
establishing if there is a risk from exposure to vibration
(b)
eliminating the risk at source or reducing it to as low as is reasonably practicable
(c)
implementing appropriate control measures if the exposure action value is reached
(d)
taking appropriate actions if the exposure limit value is reached
(e)
providing health surveillance to any employee when the risk assessment indicates that
there is a risk to health
(f)
providing at-risk employees with adequate information, instruction and training.
QCS 2014

Page 6
1.4.1.7 Choosing the correct wheel

1
BS 4481 Part 2:1983 includes a system of marking for abrasive wheels, which has been
adopted by the UK Abrasives Industries Federation. This specifies the type and nature of the
abrasive, grain size, grade and structure, as well as the nature of the bond.
Many types and grades of abrasive wheel are available, and the correct selection is
important. As a general rule, soft grade wheels are most suitable for use on hard materials,
and hard grade wheels on soft materials. Coarse grains are for the rapid removal of material,
and fine grains for polishing.
The two common British markings in this class are:

(a)
A.30.R.BF Suitable for general use on ferrous metals.
(b)
C.24.R.BF Suitable for general use on stone, brickwork, concrete, plastic and nonferrous metals.
The use of an unsuitable wheel may result in the wheel face becoming loaded as the pores
are clogged by the material being removed. If the wheel is too hard or too fine it may become
glazed or polished. The consequence, in both cases, may be that the operative will press too
hard, in an attempt to get the work done, and cause the wheel to break.
It is important that only reinforced resin-bonded abrasive wheels should be used with
portable grinding machines.
IO
AL
EG
IN
TE
AT
British Standard system for the marking of abrasive wheels (BS 4481)
* Optional symbols The symbols 0 and 6 are the manufacturer's own
QCS 2014

Page 7
1.4.1.8 Wheels 'bursting'

1
The two main causes of abrasive wheels bursting are:

(a)
over-speeding
(b)
the incorrect mounting of wheels.
1.4.1.9 Over-speeding
Abrasive wheels must not be run in excess of the maximum permissible speed
recommended by the manufacturer. This should be clearly marked in rpm on all wheels over
55 mm in diameter.
For smaller wheels, a notice stating the maximum speed permissible should be displayed on
or adjacent to where the machine is being operated. Any type of record may be kept, from
computer database to a written record. The only restrictions are that a hard copy of the
information must be available on request.
AL
1.4.1.10 Speed of spindle
Every power-driven machine for use with abrasive wheels should have a notice fixed to it,
specifying the maximum and minimum spindle speeds.
Machines that are not marked with their spindle speed must not be used.
Sometimes these markings are very small. If this is the case, consideration should be given
to painting or engraving the spindle speed clearly on the machine.
Always keep the markings clean and in good condition so that they are easy to read.
Care must be taken to see that the maximum speeds are never exceeded. Governors, or
other devices to control or limit speed, must be properly maintained and in good working
order.
The speeds of wheels may be checked using stroboscopic timing lights.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
1.4.1.11 Peripheral speeds

1
As an abrasive wheel wears down, its peripheral speed is reduced and this, in turn, reduces
its efficiency.
A wheel operated at too low a speed will not cut properly and there will be a tendency to
press the workpiece hard against the wheel. This may damage the wheel and cause it to
burst.
Care must be taken to operate the wheel at the optimum speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
1.4.1.12 Mounting of wheels

1
In order to be able to demonstrate compliance with legislation, abrasive wheels should only
be mounted by a trained and competent person appointed to this duty by the Contractor.
1.4.1.13 Maintenance
1
In addition to checks immediately before and after each use, every machine should be
regularly and frequently serviced by a competent person in accordance with the
QCS 2014

Page 8
manufacturer's instructions. A record of this maintenance should be kept.

2
It is good practice to record the type and serial number of all abrasive wheel machines in a
maintenance log, together with the date each machine is due for service. When servicing
has been carried out, ensure that details of any work done are entered in the log, together
with the date that the next service is due.
All records should be kept up to date.
1.4.1.14 Appointment of a competent person

It is strongly recommended that each appointment to mount abrasive wheels is recorded as
a signed, dated entry in a register or by a certificate attached to that register. Records may
be kept in an electronic format, providing a hard copy can be printed on request. Particulars
of the class and description of the abrasive wheels for which the person is competent should
be stated. A copy of the entry (or certificate) should be given to the person appointed.
Note: The suggested layout for a Register of Appointment is attached at Appendix 1. A copy
of a suggested Certificate of Appointment is attached as Appendix 2.
A Contractor may revoke the appointment at any time, with a signed and dated entry in the
register.
IO
AL
AT
1.4.1.15 Training
Training for the mounting of abrasive wheels must only be given by a competent person,
which often involves attending an external course. It must cover the grades, types and
marking of wheels; the use, hazards, speeds, storage, handling, inspection, testing,
dressing, adjustments; and the functions of associated components such as flanges,
blotters, bushes and locking nuts.
Employees who are being trained in the use of abrasive wheels must be provided with
appropriate information, instruction and supervision.
IN
TE
Procedure
EG
1.4.1.16 Mounting the wheel
The following procedure should be followed when mounting an abrasive wheel:

(a)
ensure the power to the tool is 'OFF'
(b)
clean the abrasive wheel with a brush and check for any signs of damage. In no
circumstances should a damaged wheel be used
(c)
check that the spindle bearing is not worn
(d)
check that the maximum wheel speed is greater than the maximum spindle speed
(e)
check that the wheel fits easily and snugly onto the spindle. The correct brushes
should be used if required
(f)
check that straight-sided wheels are mounted

between the flanges, with a diameter of not less
than one-third that of the wheel. The flanges
should be recessed on the side which is next to
the wheel, to ensure that the clamping pressure is
not exerted near to the hole
(g)
ensure that the driving flange is secured to the

spindle

Page 9
(h)
check that washers or blotters of paper, or other compressible material, are fitted one
either side (one only on a wheel with a depressed centre). Blotters ensure that the
clamping pressure is distributed evenly over the wheel, and will reduce wear on the
flanges
(i)
when tightening the nut on the spindle, use the correct size of spanner. Use hand
pressure only. This will ensure that the flanges drive the wheel and prevent slip
(j)
use only the correct locking nuts.
IO
AL
QCS 2014
AT
1.4.1.17 Diamond blades
As with bonded abrasive wheels, people working

with diamond blades must be properly trained and
competent. Most of the safe procedures and
precautions for using bonded abrasive wheels on
hand-held machines apply to diamond blades.
Additional advice and information can be obtained
from the suppliers and manufacturers.
Diamond blades are directional and must be

mounted so that they rotate in the direction marked
on the blade.
Diamond blades can be used on hand-held

machines at peripheral speeds of up to 100 m/s,
provided that the machine is designed for this speed
and the marked maximum permissible operating
speed of the blade is not exceeded.
Under no circumstances must the blade be allowed

to overheat.
Periodically, it may be necessary to redress the blade by making cuts in a special dressing
block or abrasive block.
These wheels can last a comparatively long time. Before use and with the power
disconnected, make a special point of checking the condition of the spindle bearings as
these can deteriorate considerably during the lifetime of a diamond-cutting wheel.
EG
IN
TE
QCS 2014

Page 10
1.4.1.18 In-use considerations

Guards - fixed and hand-held machines
1
The guard should be so designed, and sufficiently robust, to contain any fragments in the
event of the wheel bursting.
The guard must be securely attached to the body of the machine, properly adjusted and
maintained.
The guard or shield supplied by the manufacturer must be adjusted to permit exposure of the
minimum amount of wheel or disk to enable the job to be carried out. It must not be left off or
altered in any way.
Defects
Employees are required to report any defects in work equipment, including abrasive wheels,
guards or tool rests, to their Contractor.
AL
IO
Rests should be secured and adjusted so that they are as close as practicable to the wheel,
i.e. no more than 3 mm away. If the gap between the wheel and the rest is too great, the
workpiece may become trapped and an accident may result.
AT
Tool rests
It is good practice to continue to display cautionary notices concerning the dangers of

abrasive wheels, wherever abrasive wheels are used or changed.
EG
IN
TE
Notices
1.4.1.19 Health considerations

Protection of eyes
1
During cutting or grinding processes, a stream of dust or abrasive particles and hot sparks is
thrown off. These can cause serious injury to the eyes.
QCS 2014

Page 11
Because there is an obvious risk of eye injuries when an abrasive wheel is being used, eye
protection should be provided in accordance with either goggles or a face shield or visor, to
BS EN 166.
Respiratory protection
3
Depending upon what material is being cut, it is possible that the user of an abrasive wheel
may be vulnerable to inhaling hazardous dust. With fixed machinery such as bench grinders
or fixed concrete saws, it may be possible to reduce airborne dust to a safe level by such
measures as:
(a)
This would also serve as a useful reminder to employees of the training they have received.
(a)
purchasing abrasive wheel machines which incorporate a facility for wet cutting or the
attachment of a stand-alone dust extraction/collection unit
AL
If such dust suppression measures are not practical, it will be for the Contractor, or the
person to whom the responsibility is delegated, to assess the hazardous nature of the dust
and provide suitable respiratory protective equipment (RPE), consulting a supplier of PPE if
necessary to establish what is needed
IO
installing a fixed local exhaust ventilation system, for example in workshops
The very nature of carrying out grinding or cutting activities using abrasive wheels is likely to
subject the person doing the job to a degree of hand-arm vibration. In extreme cases, handarm vibration can lead to permanent and disabling injuries. Contractors must assess the risk
to employees who carry out such work and put preventative and protective measures in
place to ensure that the health of employees who carry out this type of work is not adversely
affected.
TE
AT
Vibration
Grinding and cutting operations using abrasive wheel machines will inevitably result in an
increased level of noise, both from the machine itself, for example a petrol-driven disc-cutter,
and from contact between the cutting disc or grinding wheel and the material being worked
upon. In many cases the level of noise generated will exceed the lower exposure action
value, meaning that unless other control measures can be put in place, personal hearing
protection must be made available and worn. Depending upon the level of noise and the
proximity of other people, it may be necessary for them also to wear the hearing protection.
EG
IN
Noise
1.4.1.20 Other safety considerations

1
The machine must have an efficient starting and stopping device that is easily accessible
and which can be readily operated.
The floor area of the workplace must be kept in good condition, free of loose material, and
should not be slippery.
Abrasive wheels should be properly stored, flat and preferably in their boxes and in
accordance with the manufacturer's guidance. Care must be taken to see that any labels are
retained, and not soiled or defaced so as to make them illegible.
QCS 2014

Page 12

1.4.1 Appendix 1
Specimen Sheet for a Register of Appointment
Appointment of persons to mount abrasive wheels
Revocation
Signature of
occupier or his
agent
Date of
revocation of
appointment
Signature of occupier or
his agent
Class or
Date of
description of appointment
abrasive
wheels for
which
appointment is
made
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
AT
IO
Name of person
appointed
AL
Appointment
TE
_________________________________________________________________________________
IN
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
EG
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
QCS 2014

Page 13

1.4.1 Appendix 2
Abrasive Wheels
Certificate of Appointment to mount abrasive wheels
Name
Is hereby appointed to mount the following classes or descriptions of abrasive wheels
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
AL
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
IO
_________________________________________________________________________________
AT
_________________________________________________________________________________
Signature of occupier or occupier's agent:
IN
The above is hereby revoked
TE
Date .............................................
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------
Signature of occupier or occupier's agent:
EG
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------
Date .............................................
QCS 2014

Page 14

1.4.1 Appendix 3
Abrasive wheels
Safety checklist
Who is responsible for the selection and the supervision of equipment using abrasive
wheels; are they competent?
Have operatives received suitable instruction and training in the use of abrasive wheels
equipment, and are they competent to use it?
Are the manufacturer's recommendations and company rules relating to the control and use
of abrasive wheels being observed?
Are safety signs and notices displayed where cutting or grinding operations take place?
Are the abrasive wheels that are being used suitable for the type of work being carried out?
Have all abrasive wheels been mounted by a competent person?
Was the competent person appointed by the Contractor in writing, and has an entry been
made in an appropriate register?
What types and classes of abrasive wheel or disc is the appointed person entitled to fit and
mount?
Have two blotters been supplied with all flat wheels and discs? (Some wheels may not
require blotters, therefore refer to the manufacturer's guidance for the specific wheel to be
mounted.)
10
Are wheels of more than 55 mm in diameter marked with the maximum rotational speeds in
rpm?
11
Are smaller wheels accompanied by details of their maximum rotational speed?
12
Is the maximum permissible spindle speed clearly marked on the machines in rpm?
13
Are checks made to ensure that abrasive wheels are not operated in excess of the maximum
permissible speeds?
14
Are the correct flanges being used?
15
Is the guard fitted compatible with the machine?
16
Is the guard of the correct size, and not been exchanged or altered?
17
Are only reinforced discs used on portable hand-held machines?
18
Are the correct locking nuts used?
19
Are grinding machines complete with guards of the correct size and with tool rests?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
20
21
Angle grinder with cutting disc and adjustable guard and depth gauge
22
Are guards and tool rests correctly adjusted and secured?
23
Are machines properly maintained?
QCS 2014

Page 15
Is local exhaust ventilation required and, if so, is it available?
25
Are other dust suppression measures necessary and, if so, have they been taken?
26
What facilities exist to have the spindle or wheel speed checked?
27
Has BS EN 166 eye and other necessary PPE protection been provided for the operator?
28
Is the PPE properly used?
29
Is RPE necessary and, if so, is it provided and used?
30
Have precautions been taken to safeguard other persons who may be affected by grinding
operations?
31
What precautions are taken to ensure that the floor area is free from loose materials and
maintained in a safe condition without risk?
32
Are the storage facilities for abrasive wheels and machines adequate?
33
To whom should operatives report defects?
34
Are all defects reported to the proper person?
35
What action is taken when defects are reported?
36
Has the problem of noise been considered?
37
Is a noise assessment necessary?
38
Are persons who are being trained, properly supervised?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
24
QCS 2014

Page 16

1.4.2
Portable Fixing Tools
1.4.2.1 Key points

Portable fixing tools are used to drive fixing devices into a base material using either
cartridges or a gas canister providing the propellant.
They can be extremely dangerous if used incorrectly. Operatives must be trained and
competent and be of a sufficiently mature and responsible disposition.
Poor technique, or the use of incorrect equipment, will result in poor or defective fixing.
The tool, type of cartridge or fuel cell, type of fixing and the base material must all be
compatible.
In most cases, items of additional PPE, in addition to helmet, boots and hi-viz, will have to be
worn.
At the end of the job all unused cartridges must be accounted for.
AL
IO
Portable fixing tools use the power of an explosive charge or a gas propellant to drive a
fixing device into position. They are particularly useful if there is a large number of repetitive
fixings to be made, where a portable fixing tool reduces the time and labour expended in this
area. However, the resemblance of the tools to the shape and action of a gun can lead to
their misuse, especially by young and inexperienced workers.
It should always be remembered that portable fixing tools are potentially lethal if they are
used recklessly or incompetently.
TE
AT
IN

When hazards are identified, it is the Contractors duty to either eliminate the hazard or to put
control measures into place to reduce the risks to health and safety arising out of the
those risks.
These Regulations also require that the Contractor provides employees with adequate
information, instruction, training and supervision to be able to carry out any work safely and
without risk to their health.
Employees, for their part, have a duty under these Regulations to tell their Contractor of any
work situation which presents a risk to the health and safety of themselves or any others who
may be affected.
EG
QCS 2014

Page 17

These Regulations require that the Contractor only supplies work equipment that is correct
and suitable for the job and ensures that the equipment is maintained and kept in good
working order.
These Regulations require that where the use of any equipment involves a specific risk to
the health and safety of employees, use must be restricted to competent and specified
workers. This is of particular relevance to the user of portable fixing tools.
Proper training (which is offered by all tool manufacturers) and continual care in their issue
and use is therefore essential.
Before portable fixing tools can be used, a risk assessment must be carried out.
IO
AL
AT
1.4.2.5 The Control of Vibration at Work
The use of any percussive tool, such as one repeatedly operated by firing a cartridge or fuel
cell, has the potential to subject the person doing the job to hand/arm vibration.
These Regulations place various requirements on Contractors including:
establishing if there is a risk from exposure to vibration
(b)
eliminating the risk at source or reducing it to be as low as is reasonably practicable
(c)
implementing appropriate control measures if the exposure action value is reached
(d)
taking appropriate actions if the exposure limit value is reached
(e)
providing health surveillance to any employee when the risk assessment indicates that
there is a risk to health
(f)
providing at-risk employees with adequate information, instruction and training.
EG
IN
TE
(a)

1
PPE will be needed including:

(a)
high-impact eye protection (possibly a full-face visor) to BS EN 166-B
(b)
hearing protection.
Contractors must:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(i)
the risks that the PPE will protect against
(ii)
the purpose for which it has been issued and the manner in which it is to be
used
QCS 2014

Page 18
(iii)
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
maintaining the PPE in good working order.
QCS 2014

Page 19

(a)
received
(b)
(c)
1.4.2.7 The safe use of cartridge-operated tools
adequate information, instruction, training and supervision
(b)
competent and responsible users
(c)
the compatibility of the base material, the type of fixing and the cartridge strength
(d)
restricting access to the work area during fixing activities
(e)
the provision and use of appropriate PPE
(f)
carrying out activities in accordance with BS 4078-1, Code of practice for safe use
(g)
using cartridge-operated tools that comply with BS 4078-2.
IO
AL
(a)
Note: Cartridge tools must not be used in areas where a flammable atmosphere or risk of
dust explosion may exist.
EG
IN
TE
A cartridge-operated tool works by using a firing cap or cartridge to provide propellant to

drive a fixing home. The primary factors which will ensure the proper and safe use of
cartridge tools are:
AT
Don't 'fool about' with cartridge-operated tools
1.4.2.8 Types of tool

3
There are two main types of cartridge-operated tool.

(a)
Indirect-acting. The driving force is transmitted to the fixing by means of the

expanding explosive gas acting on a piston.
(b)
Direct-acting. The explosive force of the cartridge acts directly on the fixing, driving it
along the barrel into the wall or material.
QCS 2014

Page 20
1.4.2.9 Power level of tools

Cartridge tools are generally classed as high power and low power.
Low power is defined as giving the pin a kinetic energy not greater than 3.5 m/kg/f and a
velocity not greater than 98.5 m per sec.
High power applies to any values greater than those above. Using high power tools can
result in dangerous through-shoots. This is where the fixing is fired right through the material.
Most of the commonly available tools are low power and indirect-acting. These are by far the
safest. There are high power tools for special applications, and some old high power (directacting) tools are still in use.
Hammer-activated tools are nearly always low power.
Some modern tools have provision for varying the power level (within the low power range)
by means of an adjustment which changes the size of the gas expansion chamber. There
are also interchangeable pistons for different fixings or depths of penetration. Tools
incorporating these features require a smaller range of cartridges.
IO
AL
AT
1.4.2.10 Safety devices
All tools should incorporate a contact pressure safety device, which prevents them being
fired unless the muzzle is pressed hard against the workface. They should always
incorporate a drop-firing safety device which prevents the tool from firing when it is dropped
onto a hard surface.
In addition, some tools are equipped with an unintentional firing safety device. This prevents
the tool from firing if the trigger is pulled before the tool is pressed against the work surface.
It should only be possible to fire the tool when it is correctly pressed against the work
surface.
IN
TE
EG
1.4.2.11 Cartridges
Cartridges are designed for specific brands or types of tool and are not interchangeable,
even if they are of a similar type or appearance.
Cartridges are available in different strengths. It is preferable to start with a lower strength
cartridge for a test fixing and then change to a more powerful cartridge if the depth of
penetration is not sufficient.
BS 4078 requires the strength of the cartridges to be marked on the packaging and each
cartridge to be colour-coded to indicate its strength.
The colour codes set out in BS 4078 are as follows:
Cartridge strength
Extra Low (XL)
Low (L)
Low/Medium (LM)
Medium (M)
Medium/High (MH)
High (H)
Extra High (XH)
Colour
Brown
Green
Yellow
Blue
Red
White
Black
QCS 2014

Page 21
It should be noted that the code is not universally followed, and that colour-coding alone
must never be relied on as an indicator of the cartridge strength. Cartridges should be
retained in the packaging (which identifies their strength) and not carried loose. Both
cartridges and fixing nails are now available on plastic strips.
Proper controls must be put in place to account for all dispensed and unused cartridges.
Unused, or unserviceable cartridges which cannot be fired, are hazardous and in no

circumstances should be exposed to fire or heat or be subject to mechanical impact.
The supplier should be contacted to discuss suitable arrangements for the return/disposal of
any unused or unserviceable cartridges. Cartridges should be returned to their original
packaging so that they can be properly identified.
1.4.2.12 Fixings
Fixings are generally either drive nails, eyelet nails or threaded studs. Designed to penetrate
wood, steel and concrete, they have special characteristics of strength, hardness, shape and
size which make them suitable for the purpose to which they are to be put. Ordinary nails
and screws must never be used as substitutes.
AL
AT
Attempting to fix into unsuitable materials with cartridge tools is dangerous. Before firing the
first fixing, a simple test should be made by driving a fixing of the intended type into the base
material with a hammer. The result will show whether the material is suitable. No attempt
should be made to fix into unsuitable materials. The table below provides general guidance.
Conclusion
Plaster, plywood,
lightweight blocks
Sinks in easily
Too soft
Fixing blunted
Too hard
Material cracks or
shatters
Too brittle
IN
Result
EG
Material
TE
IO
1.4.2.13 Suitability of base materials
Marble, some rock,

hardened steel, weld
metal
Glass, glazed tiles,
slates, some cast-iron
Sound wood, concrete, Clear impression of

mild steel
fastener point
Suitable
1.4.2.14 Hazards in use

1
Hazards from the use of cartridge tools generally arise from one or more of the following
three factors:
(a)
lack of competence, knowledge or training
(b)
misuse, whether this be deliberate or due to ignorance of proper use
(c)
poor maintenance, rendering the equipment defective or unsafe.
QCS 2014
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Two conditions which specially need to be guarded against are through penetration, where
the fixing goes through the material emerging in free flight on the other side, and ricochet,
possibly towards the operator, where the fixing is deflected after firing.

Page 22
QCS 2014

Page 23
1.4.2.15 Causes of through penetration:

1
cartridge too
undertaken
powerful
for
the
job
being
fixing into voids in the structure
the material being fixed into is too thin
changes in the type or consistency of the

material being penetrated
not establishing the density of the material being

fixed into.
AL
Penetration due to a change in the type of material
To avoid these hazards:

check the suitability of the material for cartridge-fired fixing
if necessary, make a trial fixing using a low-powered cartridge
check the area behind the material or structure into which the fixing is being fired, and guard
the area so as to prevent the access of unauthorised persons
use an indirect acting tool.
IN
1.4.2.16 Causes of ricochet:
TE
AT
IO
firing into a hole of a previously attempted fixing
attempting to fix into excessively hard materials,

such as hardened steel or welded areas
cartridge tools not held square onto the work

surface, causing the pin to strike at an angle and
then be deflected
attempting to fix too near to an edge
hitting a reinforcing rod or dense aggregate hidden just under the surface
ricochet due to firing too near to edge
EG
To avoid ricochets:
(a)
fixings should be at the recommended distance (or greater) from failed attempts
(b)
do not fix into unfamiliar materials without first checking their suitability for cartridge
fixing
(c)
tools should be at right angles to the work surface. The whole rim of the splinter guard
should be firmly placed against the workface so as to stabilise the tool and not leave
gaps. (See diagrams below.)
The risk of ricocheting is reduced by the use of low-powered, indirect-acting tools. If highpowered tools are used, there is a risk that the fixing can be deflected and come back
towards the operator.
IO

Page 24
AL
QCS 2014
AT
1.4.2.17 Fixing into concrete
The advice of cartridge tool manufacturers should be sought before

attempting to fix into concrete which is over two years old or any other
special type of concrete.
Depth of material. Generally, concrete should be at least 100 mm thick

or three times the depth of the fixing penetration, to avoid fixings breaking
through the back surface.
IN
TE
Fixing breaking through
Penetration. Concrete varies in hardness, and trial fixings may be necessary to establish
the optimum penetration.
Spading in concrete is caused by the initial compressive impact of the

tool and results in a crater being formed around the fixing. It may be due to
the fixing being too large or through using a cartridge that is too powerful.
Spalling can reduce holding strength of the fixing by up to 20%.
EG
Spalling of concrete
Edge failure is the result of attempting to fix too near to the edge of the material, causing it
to break away. The minimum distances given below should be
observed.
Fixing distances. Always leave at least 75 mm between the

edge of the material and the nearest fixing, or from a failed
attempt.
Minimum distances between fixings into concrete
QCS 2014

Page 25
Fixing into masonry requires greater penetration. Fixings should not be made into mortar
joints unless no other choice exists, and then only after seeking advice from the cartridge
tool manufacturer.
1.4.2.18 Fixing into steel

1
Fixing distances. The minimum fixing distances

are 12 mm from an edge of the material being
fixed into and 25 mm from any other fixing or failed
fixing, or 2.5 times the fixing shank diameter from
an edge and 6 times the shank diameter from
another fixing respectively (where this is greater
than the distance detailed above).
The shank diameter of a fixing should always be less

than the thickness of the steel being fired into.
Penetration. For maximum holding strength, fixings (whenever possible) should penetrate
just through the steel being fixed into.
1.4.2.19 General precautions
TE
Shank diameter less than thickness of steel
AT
IO
AL
Minimum distance between fixings into steel
Recoil of a cartridge tool can lead to loss of balance if working from an unstable workplace.
In this instance, only low-power tools should be used. Operators not familiar with cartridge
tools, or with the type of tool to be used, should test the tool for recoil before use. In all
circumstances, an adequate and safe footing is a necessity. Makeshift platforms should not
be used.
Misfires. In the event of a misfire, the cartridge tool should be kept pressed in position
against the workface for at least 30 seconds, to allow for any delayed detonation. Following
this time period, the cartridge must then be removed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Cartridges which have misfired should be stored in a metal box
and returned to the supplier.
Note: Misfired cartridges should not be removed from the tool by levering under the rim.
Some types are rim detonated and could be fired by this action. Only the proper extraction
tool as supplied by the manufacturer should be used.
Loading of tools should be carried out immediately prior to use. Once the tool is loaded, it
must never be pointed towards other people or at any part of the operator's body. Unused
cartridges must be removed from the tool as soon as
possible.
EG
IN
1.4.2.20 Storage and issue of tools

1
Only responsible and competent persons should supervise

and check the acquisition, issue, use, return and
QCS 2014

Page 26
maintenance of cartridge-operated tools.

2
Cartridge-operated tools and cartridges should be stored in a place which is secure, dry and
cool. The issue of such tools and cartridges should be strictly controlled, and licensed if
necessary.
Storage box
The following points should be clearly noted and understood:

(a)
cartridge tools should only be stored in an unloaded state
(b)
different strengths of cartridge should be clearly identified and kept separate
(c)
the use of different makes of equipment on one site should be limited as far as
possible
(d)
the manufacturer's instructions on the safe use of the cartridge tool should be
available.
AL
1.4.2.21 Gas powered tools
Lighter duty gas powered tools can be used for the fixing of timber and other low density
materials. These fixing tools are generally lighter in weight and use a battery and fuel cell,
either propane or other gas, to act as a propellant rather than a cartridge. The fuel cell,
typically a small aerosol canister, is mounted within the tool. The safety issues that need to
be considered when using a gas powered tool are:
AT
IO
operators must be trained. Usually this can be provided by the supplier of the
equipment. Operators must also be in possession of the relevant equipment
instructions with which they must be familiar
(b)
the tool and the fuel cells must not be exposed to extremes of heat nor used within a
flammable atmosphere
(c)
during use, harmful fumes are expelled and therefore the tool should be used in a well
ventilated area
(d)
when firing, the operator must be in a stable position and holding the tool at right
angles to the work
(e)
firing must not take place when others are behind the work. As with cartridge tools,
through-penetration can occur
(f)
if a malfunction occurs, unlike when using a cartridge tool, the tool can usually be fired
again. However, the manufacturer's instruction manual should be consulted
(g)
EG
IN
TE
(a)
because of the mode of operation and speed of use, the tool can become hot
(reference should be made to warnings of hot areas on the tool).
1.4.2.22 Personal protective equipment

1
Personal protective equipment, complying with the relevant British Standards, should be
used by operatives using cartridge-operated and gas-operated tools, as follows:
(a)
eye protection to BS EN 166-B must be provided and worn at all times when handling
cartridge-operated tools, their cartridges or gas-operated tools
(b)
noise levels will vary with the make of tool but all tools create a high intensity, short
duration noise. Suitable hearing protection should be worn
(c)
safety helmets to BS EN 379 should be worn while cartridge tools are in use.
The safety of other persons in the vicinity of where cartridge-operated or gas-operated tools
are being used, a factor which should have been covered in the risk assessment, must be
considered and all necessary precautions taken.
QCS 2014

Page 27
1.4.2.23 Selection, training and supervision
(a)
operatives should be properly and adequately trained and be competent in the use of
the equipment and aware of the hazards which may arise
(b)
they should be tested for colour blindness (cartridge-operated tools only)
(c)
it is recommended that only persons over 18 years of age are allowed to use portable
fixing tools
(d)
operatives selected to use these tools should be of a mature and responsible

disposition
(e)
adequate close supervision must be provided where necessary, for example when the
operator of a portable tool is inexperienced.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Training can usually be sourced from the supplier or manufacturer of the equipment.
EG
The selection and training of personnel should take the following points into consideration:
QCS 2014

Page 28

1.4.2 Appendix
Portable fixing tools
Safety checklist
Has a suitable and sufficient risk assessment been carried out?
Has adequate information, instruction, training and supervision been provided?
Is the activity carried out in accordance with BS 4078-1?
Does all cartridge-operated tool equipment comply with BS 4078-2, (BS EN 792 for gaspowered fasteners) including the provision of splinter guards?
Are the operatives selected for training in the use of portable fixing tools of a mature and
responsible disposition?
Who is responsible for the maintenance, issue and return of equipment including any unused
cartridges?
Are operatives properly trained and aware of hazards associated with portable fixing tools,
especially penetration, ricochets, misfiring, and the misuse of tools?
Are safe systems of work in operation? Do they cover the above hazards?
Are checks made to ensure that procedures are being observed and especially to ensure
that loaded tools are not left lying about?
10
Are all cartridges and fuel cells kept in a cool, dry place, under lock and key?
11
Are cartridges clearly marked to indicate their strength?
12
Is the correct PPE available as required and is it being worn correctly?
13
Is the place where the work with fixing tools is being carried out safe for the tool user and for
any other people who may be in the vicinity?
14
Is there a need to create an 'exclusion zone' around the work area?
15
Where will cartridge-operated tools and their associated cartridges be securely stored on
site?
16
Will fixing tools and their cartridges and fuel cells be stored in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions?
17
Is the tool correct and suitable for the job?
18
Are tools equipped with suitable safety devices?
19
Are operatives fully aware of cartridge colour codes?
20
Are operatives aware of the different types of fixings?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 29

1.4.3
Lifting Operations, Equipment and Accessories
1.4.3.1 Key points

Many accidents occur during lifting operations because they were not properly thought
through in advance.
All lifting operations must be carried out by, and under the control of, trained and competent
persons.
The safe working load (SWL) of any item of lifting equipment or lifting accessory must never
be exceeded.
All equipment and accessories used for lifting operations must be subjected to a schedule of
inspections and thorough examinations.
In addition to the equipment and accessories used, attention must also be paid to site
features such as overhead cables, unstable ground conditions and adjacent properties.
AL
IO
Section 9, Part 7 of the QCS covers lifting equipment.
AT
Experience has shown that lifting operations can be hazardous work activities if not properly
planned and carried out. Safe lifting operations will depend upon:
The availability of suitable lifting equipment, that is properly maintained
(b)
the provision of adequate information, instruction, training or supervision for everyone

involved
(c)
thorough pre-planning of each lifting operation
(d)
compliance with safe systems of work as detailed in risk assessments and method
statements (lifting plan).
IN
TE
(a)
EG
Note: Section 1, Part 14.4 of the QCS covers the certification of lifting equipment and
These Regulations require that safe systems of work are developed, accidents that have
occurred during lifting operations indicate that all too often these are not in place or not
complied with if they are in place.
Unsafe working and accidents result from:
(a)
a lack of training or knowledge of the equipment
(b)
poor maintenance of the equipment
(c)
the correct (or recommended) plant or equipment not being available
(d)
the misuse of plant and equipment
(e)
insufficient or inaccurate information on the load
(f)
insufficient or inaccurate information on underground hazards, such as buried services
(g)
unstable ground collapsing under the weight of the crane and its load
(h)
failure to take account of adverse weather conditions
(i)
poor slinging of the load
(j)
rushing to get the job done.
Note: BS 7121-1 General gives advice on the safe use of cranes but excludes manually-
QCS 2014

Page 30
operated cranes and those mounted on waterborne vessels, except where a land-based
crane is temporarily fixed to such a vessel.
5
It details safe systems of work and the control of lifting operations, which include site
preparation, along with the rigging and de-rigging of cranes.
The Code of Practice to BS 7121 also introduces the term 'signaller' in place of 'banksman'.
Throughout the following text any reference to a banksman has been replaced with
signaller.

assessment of every work activity to identify any hazard that employees or other persons
those risks.
work situation which presents a risk to the health and safety of themselves or any other
persons who may be affected.
The Regulations require that, additionally, the Contractor provides employees with adequate
information, instruction, training and supervision to be able to carry out any work safely and
without risks to their health.
Before any lift is carried out, a suitable and sufficient risk assessment must be carried out
under these Regulations, although where lifting activities are repetitive with broadly the same
hazards and levels of risk, a single risk assessment to cover all the lifts might be satisfactory
in some situations.
EG
IN
1.4.3.4 Risk assessments
TE
AT
IO
AL

1
The main requirements are:

(a)
(b)
(c)
lifting equipment must be positioned or installed so as to prevent the lifting equipment

or the load striking a person, or the load otherwise becoming out of control
(d)
(e)
lifting equipment must be equipped with suitable devices to prevent any person falling
down a shaft or hoistway
(f)
(g)
QCS 2014

Page 31
carried out safely
lifting equipment must be subjected to a programme of inspections and thorough
examination as appropriate
(i)
reports of thorough examination must be made and retained, with all defects notified
to the Contractor who must take appropriate actions.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(h)
QCS 2014

Page 32

All lifting equipment and accessories for lifting are classified as work equipment and must
therefore also comply with these Regulations.
Dangerous parts of machinery must be adequately guarded, preferably by fixed guards that
cannot be defeated or removed.
AL
IO
The use of some lifting equipment, for example tower cranes, will inevitably involve
employees having to work at height, the legal definition of which includes getting up to the
high-level work place and getting down again. Even standing on the tracks of a crawler crane
would be classified as working at height if a fall from that place could result in personal
injury.
The key provisions of these Regulations are (briefly) that Contractors should:
TE
AT
(b)
where such work cannot be avoided, to select the most appropriate work equipment
for the work and to prevent falls
(c)
(d)
ensure that the work is properly planned, risk-assessment based and carried out
safely by competent persons
EG
(e)
IN
(a)
equipment used for working at height is appropriately selected and inspected as

specified
(f)
establish danger areas from which people must be excluded, when there is a danger
of them falling or being struck by falling objects
(g)
measures are taken to prevent anyone being injured by falling objects.

1
CDM has implications for the way in which lifting operations are carried out:
(a)
designers must ensure the health and safety of anyone engaged in lifting operations,
for example by designing-in lifting points on components that will have to be craned
into place
(b)
designers must provide sufficient information regarding their designs, such as notifying
the weight of any component that has to be craned into place
(c)
there must be safe places of work, including getting to and from the place of work
(d)
traffic routes must be suitable for the vehicles that will have to pass over them, for
example, mobile cranes must be used and moved in a way that pedestrians are not
QCS 2014

Page 33
put at risk
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
there must be suitable and sufficient lighting for every place of work and traffic route
(e)
QCS 2014

Page 34
1.4.3.9 Definitions
Appointed person: A person who has the competence, adequate training, authority and
experience to take overall responsibility and control of a lifting operation, having been
appointed by the management of the organisation or organisations that require the load to be
moved.
Competent person (for the purposes of inspection and examination): A person who has the
practical and theoretical knowledge together with actual experience of what they are to
examine so as to enable them to detect errors, defects, faults or weaknesses, which it is the
purpose of the examination or inspection to discover; and to assess the importance of any
such discovery.
Crane co-ordinator: A person who plans and directs the sequence of operations of cranes
to ensure that they do not collide with other cranes, loads and other equipment (for example,
concrete placing booms, telehandlers and piling rigs).
Crane supervisor: A person who controls the lifting operation and ensures that it is carried
out in accordance with the appointed person's safe system of work.
Crane operator: A person who operates the crane for the purpose of moving and
positioning loads or erection of the crane.
Lifting accessory: A lifting beam or frame, chain sling, rope sling or similar gear, a ring, link,
hook, interlocks, plate clamp, shackle, swivel or eyebolt, and any loose equipment used with
lifting gear.
Lifting equipment: A piece of work equipment for lifting or lowering loads including a crab,
winch, pulley block or gin wheel (for raising or lowering), a hoist, crane, shearlegs,
excavator, dragline, piling frame, aerial cable way, aerial ropeway or overhead runway,
goods hoists, mobile elevated work platforms, scissor lifts, vehicle hoists, ropes used for
access, forklift trucks, lorry loaders (hiabs) and passenger lifts.
Mobile crane: A crane capable of travelling under its own power, but does not include a
crane that travels on a line of rails.
Plant and equipment: Any plant, equipment, gear, machinery, apparatus or appliance, or
part thereof.
10
Safe working load (SWL): The maximum load that can be safely lifted by any item of lifting
equipment, such as a crane or hoist, or any accessory for lifting.
11
Note 1: The safe working load includes the weight of the hook block and all the lifting gear.
The weight of these should be deducted from the declared safe working load of the lifting
equipment to obtain the net load that can be safely lifted.
12
Thorough examination: An examination by a competent person in such depth and detail as

the competent person considers necessary to enable them to determine whether the
equipment being examined is safe to continue in use.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.4.3.10 Safe systems of work

1
A safe system of work should be devised and effectively communicated to all those involved
in a lifting operation. It must include:
(a)
thorough planning of the operation, along with the selection, provision and use of
suitable cranes and equipment
QCS 2014

Page 35
any necessary preparation of the site and erection and dismantling of the crane(s)
(c)
ensuring that all equipment has been maintained, tested and examined as necessary
(d)
operation of all equipment by trained and competent people
(e)
supervision of the lift by trained and competent people, with the authority to progress
or stop a job as necessary
(f)
safe slinging of the load by a trained and competent person
(g)
the provision of all test certificates and other documentation relevant to the equipment
being used
(h)
the prevention of unauthorised use or movement of equipment, both by workers or

members of the public who may be trespassing
(i)
an effective means of communication between all members of the team during lifting
operations
(j)
the safety of all persons, both those involved in the lift as well as those not involved in
the lift but who may be affected by the lifting operation.
AL
(b)
1.4.3.11 Construction and support
Every crane and item of lifting equipment must be properly made and strong enough to carry
out the work for which it is intended.
Foundations, stages, scaffolds, derrick masts and anchorages that have to carry a load must
be of good construction and adequate strength. All temporary support structures should be
certified by a competent temporary works engineer and a 'Permit to Load' issued before any
support is loaded.
Winch frames must be made of metal. Separate crane jibs must be clearly marked to identify
which crane they are part of.
IN
1.4.3.12 Platforms
TE
AT
IO
Platforms for crane drivers and signallers must be large enough to allow the person to do
their work properly, close boarded or plated and fitted with access ladders or steps.
Where a risk assessment indicates that there is a possibility of injury resulting from a person
falling from the platform of a crane, suitable guard-rails and toe-boards should be provided to
prevent such an occurrence. Guard-rails should be at least 950 mm above the working
platform. The gap between the guard-rails and between the lower - guard-rail and toe-board
must not exceed 470 mm. Guard-rails and toe-boards may be removed for temporary
access.
EG
1.4.3.13 Cabin
1
Generally speaking, a crane should be provided with a cabin to give the driver protection
from the weather. The cabin should afford an unrestricted view of the work in hand and
permit access to any machinery contained within the cab, for maintenance, etc. Where
practicable, it should be cooled in hot weather and heated in cool weather.
Cabins are not required, however, when the plant is indoors or otherwise protected (unless it
is mobile) and will not lift more than 1 tonne or where, in the case of a hoist, it can be
operated from a landing platform or inside the cage.
QCS 2014

Page 36
1.4.3.14 Drums and pulleys

1
The size of a drum or pulley must match the size of the rope or chain being used. The rope
or chain must be anchored to the drum and there should be never less than two 'dead' turns
remaining on the drum.
1.4.3.15 Brakes, controls, etc.

Cranes, winches, etc. must be fitted with brakes capable of holding and controlling the
maximum load. Controls on all lifting devices must be clearly marked and designed so that
they cannot be operated accidentally.
Cranes with derricking jibs
If the derricking motion of a crane is driven by the hoist motor through a clutch, and can only
be controlled by the hoist brake, an interlock must be fitted to prevent dual operation.
AL
1.4.3.16 Access
Ladders, platforms or handholds must be provided to give safe access to all parts of the
crane or lifting appliance that need inspection or regular maintenance, and from which a
person may fall from height.
AT
IO
1.4.3.17 Hired cranes
Where a crane is hired, the responsibility for ensuring compliance with these Regulations lies
with:
the hire company to ensure work equipment is maintained, inspected and tested as
appropriate, and to provide information to the hirer
(b)
the person hiring the crane to ensure they have selected suitable work equipment and
that it complies with all relevant legislation.
TE
(a)
IN
Where the hirer arranges for the crane hire company to carry out a 'contract lift', the crane
hire company takes on the total responsibility for all aspects of the safety of the lifting
operations.
The responsibilities for hired and contract lifts are clarified below:
Hired crane (hired and managed). The employing organisation should:
EG
(a)
carry out all work in accordance with BS 7121
(b)
supply the appointed person
(c)
plan the lift and operate a safe system of work
(d)
ensure that the crane hired is of a suitable type and capacity
(e)
check the credentials of the crane company and certification supplied.
The crane owner has a duty to:

(a)
provide a crane that is properly maintained, tested and certified
(b)
provide a competent driver.
Contract lift (fully contracted). The employing organisation should specify:

(a)
that all work is to be undertaken in accordance with BS 7121
(b)
that the lifting contractor is to supply the appointed person
QCS 2014

Page 37
(c)
what information and/or services will be provided to the lifting contractor by the
employing organisation.
The lifting contractor is responsible for:

(a)
supplying the appointed person
(b)
planning the lift, and operation of a safe system of work
(c)
organisation and control of the lifting operation.
1.4.3.18 Siting
The site engineer, in consultation with the appointed person, usually decides on the siting of
cranes or other lifting appliances. In the case of mobile cranes, the operator is responsible
for ensuring that the movement and position of the crane are both safe and suitable under
the direction of the crane supervisor and in accordance with the appointed person's safe
system of work.
The crane operator should check that any ramps, slopes, gates, archways, buildings, trees
or overhead lines do not present an obstacle or danger, and that refuelling or other service
vehicles can gain access without causing a hazard.
A minimum 600 mm-wide clearance between travelling or slewing cranes and any fixed
object (guard-rail, adjacent building, etc.) must be maintained. Where this is not practical,
any place where a person might be trapped must be blocked by enclosing it with barriers.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.4.3.19 Overhead power cables

1
Particular care should be taken when siting cranes or other lifting appliances close to
overhead power cables. The jib or boom does not need to touch a live power cable, a
'flashover' can occur over some distance depending on the voltage carried by the overhead
cables and the level of moisture in the air.
The minimum recommended safe working distance away from overhead cables is the
length of the jib of the crane, plus 9 metres if the cable is slung on wooden or metal poles
and 15 metres if the cable is slung on pylons. This is measured with the jib pointing towards
the cable, even when the crane will be working in the opposite direction.
If the minimum safe working distance cannot be maintained, the electricity supply company
should be consulted to enable a safe system of work to be devised.

Page 38
AL
QCS 2014
The 'danger area' must be clearly marked off with stakes, flags, or similar indicators and,
where it is necessary to pass below overhead power cables, 'goal posts' should be set up to
indicate the maximum clearance height, as specified by the local electricity supply company.
Materials, including rubbish, should not be deposited in this area.
AT
IO
1.4.3.20 Stability
A crane must have a stable and level base. The stability and load-bearing capacity of the
ground must be sufficient to carry the most severe static and dynamic loads, taking into
account such factors as the slewing torques, wind stresses and shock loading, as well as the
weight of the crane and its load.
Care must be taken to see that the ground is firm and stable. Excavations which may not
have been correctly filled in, as well as cellars, culverts, tunnels and shafts, may all reduce
the stability of the ground and constitute a hazard to machinery and heavy loads.
It is also important to identify underground services and to carry out any temporary
protection measures that may be required. The failure of a water main due to overloading,
for example, can dramatically reduce the load bearing capacity of the ground.
The same principles apply when a crane is sited on a street or roadway for the purpose of
working into a site.
Adverse weather, such as rain (producing soft ground) and strong winds, can rapidly affect
the stability of a crane, and no crane should be used without these factors first being
considered.
EG
IN
TE
1.4.3.21 Outriggers
1
The majority of mobile cranes are fitted with

outriggers to increase the area of the supporting
base. Outriggers are effective only if they are
deployed correctly.
The safe rule is to use outriggers for all lifting

duties (except where 'free on wheels' duties are
required). ALL the outriggers must be extended
QCS 2014

Page 39
fully and equally, on both sides.

3
If the stability of the ground is in any way suspect, suitable grillage must be used under each
outrigger to reduce the ground area loading.
Where operating on a slight slope cannot be avoided, the operating area should be built up
to give a level base (see diagram below). A slope of as little as 1 can significantly affect the
stability and capacity of a crane, particularly where long jibs are in use.
1.4.3.22 Ballast, anchorage, etc.

Cranes may need to be anchored to the ground or other
foundations, or have counterweights or ballast to
prevent them overturning. The anchorage or ballast
should be checked each time the crane is erected, and
after bad weather.
Before a crane is put to work, any new anchorage or

ballast must be checked by applying a load 25% greater
than the maximum rated load. If this test shows the
crane cannot be worked safely with its normal load, it
may still be used, if it is sufficiently derated. Such tests
may only be carried out by a competent person. A
modified loading diagram should then be fixed to the
crane where it can be seen by the operator. Other lifting
control documentation, such as the lift plan and method statement, should also be modified
accordingly. A record of the test should be kept.
IN
Rigging
No crane or other lifting appliance may be erected unless under the supervision of a
competent person, such as the operator or crane supervisor.
De-rigging
EG
TE
1.4.3.23 Rigging and de-rigging
AT
IO
AL
The de-rigging of a crane must also be carried out under the supervision of a competent
person, normally the crane operator, plus any other persons as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Care must be taken to see that nobody stands under any jib section while the connecting
pins are being withdrawn. People have been killed through doing so.
1.4.3.24 Rated capacity indicators, etc.

1
Rated capacity indicators (previously known as automatic safe load indicators), radius load
indicators and motion limit switches, together with their audio-visual warning systems, are
fitted to cranes and other lifting appliances. Their purpose is to prevent any item of lifting
equipment from operating outside its safe operating parameters. Under no circumstances
should these devices be overridden or disabled.
During rigging (including the fitting of jib extensions and changes in reeving) it will be
necessary to reset these warning indicators to take account of load conditions and operating
radius. They must be tested by a competent person before use.
These requirements do not apply to guy derricks, small cranes (less than 1 tonne SWL), any
QCS 2014

Page 40
hand-operated crane used in crane erection, and some hydraulic cranes.

4
They must be inspected by a competent person on a weekly basis, and inspections

recorded.
1.4.3.25 Crane markings

All cranes and other lifting appliances must be clearly marked with their maximum safe
working load (SWL). If the lifting radius can be varied, an indicator must be fitted which
shows the safe load at each operating radius.
All cranes or lifting appliances which are designed for lifting persons should be identified as
such. Cranes and lifting equipment that are not designed for lifting persons, and might be
used in error for this purpose, should also be clearly marked to this effect.
All cranes and other lifting appliances must carry clear identification marks.
AL
1.4.3.26 Lorry loader cranes - interlocks
Lorry loader cranes must be fitted with an interlocking system (or equivalent engineering
solution) to prevent cranes from operating without their stabilisers extended.
IO
AT
1.4.3.27 Lifting operations
Control of lifting operations
A person, other than the crane operator, should be appointed to take responsibility for the
organisation and control of any lifting operations on behalf of the management.
They should be adequately trained and have the necessary experience to be deemed
competent. The appointed person should be formally notified in writing of their appointment.
The appointed person must:
IN
TE
assess the proposed lift to identify the hazards and corresponding risks, provide for
planning, selection of equipment, instruction and supervision to enable the work to be
carried out safely
(b)
ensure that all tests, inspections, examinations and maintenance have been carried
out, and that there is a procedure for reporting defects and taking any necessary
corrective action
EG
(a)
(c)
ensure that the crane supervisor is fully briefed on the relevant sections of the lift plan
and contents of method statements
(d)
have the authority to carry out their duties and to stop the operations if they think there
is a danger.
The appointed person's duties, but not their responsibilities, may be delegated to another
competent person.
Drivers of cranes and other lifting appliances, and others involved in lifting operations,
including signallers, must be adequately trained, experienced and of a mature disposition.
The recommended age is 18 years or over, unless under the direct supervision of a
competent person for the purpose of training.
1.4.3.28 Signals
1
If a driver cannot see the load during the whole lifting operation, they must have one or more
QCS 2014

Page 41
trained signallers or some other signalling system (e.g. radio) to enable them to handle the
load safely.
2
Signallers must be in a safe position, have a clear view of the path of the load and have
effective communication with the driver. Signals must be clear and distinct. Mechanical or
electrical signals should be kept in good order and safeguarded against accidental operation.
It is very important that clear and precise words of command are given so that there can be
no misunderstandings.
A positive decision is needed on the use of words; for example, which word you would use:
up or raise or lift or hoist
(b)
similarly,
(c)
lower or down or rest, etc.
AL
The use of hand signals should be equally clear and everyone involved in the lift must be
made aware of whether the hand signals specified in:
(a)
BS 7121 Safe use of cranes Part 1 (as shown in Appendix 7).
(a)
IO
1.4.3.29 Restriction on use
A hoisting mechanism should be used for - raising and lowering loads vertically and for no
other purpose, unless it is designed to do so, competently supervised and can be done
without overstressing the crane structure or mechanism or endangering its stability.
Crane jibs must not be worked at a radius greater than that specified on the test certificate.
TE
1.4.3.30 Safe working load
AT
In no circumstances must the load on the lifting equipment exceed the safe working load
(SWL), except when under test by an authorised competent person.
When lifting near to the SWL, the load should be raised a short distance only and the
operation stopped to check stability and safety before continuing. Wind-loading will affect
how near to the SWL a crane can operate. Care must also be taken when planning to lift
loads out of water, as the load may suddenly increase beyond the SWL since the support
previously given by the water no longer exists.
When two cranes or other lifting appliances have to be used for one load, each must work
within its safe load, and must remain stable throughout the lift. Multiple lifts of this type must
be supervised by a specially appointed competent person (see tandem lifts on the next
page).
EG
IN
1.4.3.31 Loads
Slinging loads
1
Many accidents associated with lifting operations are caused by faulty slinging (for example,
overloading, use of the wrong type of sling, unbalanced or insecure loads). This results in the
load falling or tipping out of control with damage to plant, machinery and to the load.
The crane operator will often have to rely on the slinger or signaller, who should be trained,
competent and aware of the possible hazards arising from the use of lifting accessories.
Loads must be correctly slung and made secure to prevent any part of them slipping and
QCS 2014

Page 42
falling. The slinging of loads must only be carried out by someone who has been trained and
is competent to do so.
Many crane accidents feature loads that fall from height because they were not correctly
slung.
Precautions must be taken to prevent the load striking, or becoming snagged on, any
obstacle or causing other items to fall from height.
As far as possible, loose materials (bricks, slates, etc.) should ideally be banded and on
pallets when being lifted. If not, they should be lifted in a properly constructed box or other
container.
If loose materials are carried on a hoist, side pieces should be fitted to prevent anything
falling. Wheelbarrows and trucks must be prevented from moving and should not be
overfilled.
Loads should not be suspended or carried over areas occupied by persons. However, where
this is not practicable, a safe system of work should be developed to minimise any risks to
those below the load.
The safe system of work should include, for example, the prevention of access to the danger
area below a suspended or moving load, by barriers or other means, ensuring the load is
adequately secured and that the operator is in control of the movement at all times.
AT
IO
AL
Cranes are not designed to pull loads free from their attachment to their surroundings. The
additional loading stress cannot be accurately determined and, when a load does break free,
the sudden shock can result in damage to the boom or crane machinery, failure of the sling,
failure of the wire, whiplash and other dangers.
TE
10
Anchored loads
In circumstances where the centre of gravity of a load is

not known or where it is known to be off-centre, these
factors must be allowed for when planning the lift. An
example is the lifting of long columns from the vertical,
where the load could become unstable and topple the
crane. A written procedure setting out a safe system of
work should be prepared to cover such operations.
EG
11
IN
Unstable loads
1.4.3.32 Tandem lifts

1
Tandem lifts (lifting a load using two or more cranes

simultaneously) is a specialist activity. This type of lift must only be planned and supervised
by someone who has been trained and is competent in the techniques and calculations
involved. The main factors to be considered when planning multiple lifts are the total weight
and distribution of the load, its centre of gravity, the weight and capacity of any lifting
accessories and synchronisation of the crane motions.
1.4.3.33 Demolition and dismantling work

1
Lifting loads from a place that is significantly above ground level demands the utmost care
and, in particular, an accurate assessment of the weight of the load and its point of balance.
By the time the load is 'on the hook' it may be too late to call a halt and start again. Loads
should be raised about 150 mm and held, while the stability is assessed, before proceeding.
QCS 2014

Page 43
1.4.3.34 Carriage of persons

1
Some items of lifting equipment, such as MEWPs or suspended cradles, are specifically
designed for the lifting of persons and this type of equipment should be used wherever
possible.
However, it is sometimes necessary to adapt equipment that is primarily designed for lifting
materials to lift persons. An example of this is the fitting of a temporary working platform to
the forks of a forklift truck. In such circumstances the working platform must:
conform to the requirements of working at height with regard to guard-rails and toeboards
(c)
be securely fixed to the forks so that it cannot become detached or otherwise unstable
(d)
prevent access to otherwise exposed dangerous parts of the forklift truck
(e)
be protected against overhead hazards.
AL
(b)
These Regulations require that all work equipment designed for carrying persons:
be constructed to prevent a person using it from being crushed, trapped, or falling
from the carrier, either whilst in transit or carrying out work from the carrier
(b)
be equipped with suitable devices to prevent the 'person carrier' falling
(c)
is such that a person trapped in a carrier is not exposed to danger and can be freed.
AT
IO
(a)
Furthermore, if a 'man-riding' cradle suspended from a crane is being used, BS 7172 Part 1
advises that the cradle:
(a)
is prevented from spinning or tipping
(b)
is controlled as described in the section on tower cranes.
TE
be fully compatible with the forklift truck to which it is fitted
IN
(a)
Contractors to ensure that work equipment (which includes lifting equipment and
accessories) is maintained in an efficient state, in efficient working order and in good repair.
Therefore, lifting equipment and accessories for lifting must be properly maintained, although
the frequency of maintaining work equipment is not specified.
As far as lifting equipment and lifting accessories are concerned, maintenance will normally
be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, using 'check-sheets,
lubrication charts, etc. Maintenance must be carried out by a competent person who is
familiar with the equipment and has the knowledge and experience to detect existing or
potential faults.
The extent of the maintenance activities will vary between different types of lifting equipment
depending upon its complexity. For example, maintaining a tower crane at one end of the
scale and a gin-wheel at the other. Where the equipment has a maintenance log, it must be
kept up to date.
EG
1.4.3.36 Thorough examination and inspection

Thorough examination
1
These Regulations place a duty on Contractors to ensure that all lifting equipment and lifting
accessories are subjected to a schedule of thorough examinations by a competent person at
QCS 2014

Page 44
intervals not exceeding:

(a)
six months for lifting equipment used for lifting persons and all lifting accessories
(b)
12 months for other lifting equipment.
The competent person might decide, for a variety of reasons, that a schedule of more
frequent examinations is appropriate.
A thorough examination must also be carried out after any other event likely to have affected
the safety of any lifting equipment or accessories or where the equipment has been out of
use for a long period.
Furthermore, where the safety of lifting equipment depends upon the way it has been
installed (as for the many items of temporary lifting equipment used on construction sites,
such as tower cranes), it must be thoroughly examined after assembly and before being put
into service at a new site or a new location on the same site.
The competent person must have sufficient practical and theoretical knowledge and
experience of the lifting equipment to enable defects and weaknesses to be detected, and
their importance in relation to the safety of the equipment to be assessed.
The competent person should also be sufficiently independent of the operation to ensure that
there is no fear or favour in any recommendations made as a result of the thorough
examination.
AT
IO
AL
1.4.3.37 Inspection
These Regulations also require that, where appropriate, as determined by a risk

assessment, intermediate inspections of lifting equipment are carried out although the
frequency of inspections is not specified. Depending upon the complexity of the equipment it
might be appropriate to put in place two levels of inspection: daily and weekly.
Again, these inspections must be carried out by someone who is competent to do so

although, in most cases, the same depth of technical knowledge will not be required as for
thorough examinations. In some cases, for example carrying out a daily pre-use inspection
of a mobile crane, it would be reasonable to expect the operator to be able to carry out the
inspection.
Some factors that will determine the frequency and 'depth' of any inspection are;
(a)
EG
IN
TE
if the equipment is being used in a hostile environment
(b)
if failure becomes more likely due to repeated use
(c)
the critical nature of some components, such as the 'rated capacity indicator'
(d)
the potential for the equipment to be tampered with, for example a mobile crane left
overnight in a public place.
Some of the things covered by inspections include, but are not limited to:
(a)
the soundness of materials, attachments, fittings, outriggers, jibs, ropes and hooks
(b)
the testing of the rated capacity indicator, the correct settings of cams, linkages and
switches, and the correct working of audio-visual warning signals
(c)
the mechanical condition of the lifting equipment
(d)
routine maintenance (lubrication, tyre pressures and hydraulic fluid level).
In summary, any lifting equipment which is used in conditions commonly found in the
building and construction industry should not be used unless it is:
QCS 2014

Page 45
(a)
mechanically sound and free from any defects affecting its safe operation
(b)
properly maintained
(c)
regularly inspected, either weekly or to an agreed programme, when in use, usually by

the operator, or other authorised person
(d)
thoroughly examined every 12 months (every six months when used for lifting people)
by a competent person and after any exceptional circumstances likely to affect the
safety of the lifting equipment
(e)
tested and thoroughly examined
Following any repairs or alterations which may affect the strength or stability of the lifting
equipment.
1.4.3.38 Reports
These Regulations establish a regime of good maintenance and record keeping, whilst
allowing the competent person to determine the schedule of inspections and thorough
examinations.
An essential requirement, under these Regulations and good business practice, is to

maintain records of maintenance and the results of inspections, thorough examinations and
tests.
Evidence of inspections, thorough examinations and tests must accompany lifting equipment
and accessories for lifting when they are hired, leased or loaned to other users.
Where thorough examinations or tests are carried out by the user during the period of hire,
lease or loan, the owner of the lifting equipment or accessory must be informed of the results
of each thorough examination or test.
The format in which the records of inspections, thorough examinations and tests are kept is
not specified in these Regulations. However, records must be readily accessible, although
they can be stored in an electronic format providing a hard copy can be produced on
request.
Reports of thorough examinations should contain the information in Appendix 6 of this

section.
Again, the records can be held in electronic form, but must be readily available to the user of
the lifting equipment or accessory for lifting provided that the following safeguards are
incorporated into the system.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
The records must be capable of being reproduced as hard copy when required.
(b)
The information must be secure against loss or unauthorised interference.
(c)
The information must be authenticated only by a person who is in a position to declare

that the information is correct.
1.4.3.39 Tower cranes

1
Tower cranes can present particular safety considerations when used on site.
(a)
Generally they are self-erecting and dismantling, or erected and dismantled using a
large mobile crane for which provision has to be made in terms of space and stable
ground conditions.
(b)
Portable tower cranes, often controlled remotely from the ground, need to be treated
the same as a mobile crane.
QCS 2014

Page 46
(c)
They require detailed attention to the foundation (static crane) or rails (mobile crane);
manufacturers or suppliers should be consulted.
(d)
In many cases they have the capacity to over-sail adjacent properties and areas to
which the public have access;
Arrangements will have to be made:

(a)
Where the right to over-sail adjacent property is not given, it may be necessary and
feasible to:
(iv)
rearrange the siting of the tower crane(s)
(v)
review the type of crane required, for example a luffing-jib crane might be the
only solution.
The required airspace must be confirmed with regard to the proximity of adjacent
structures, overhead power lines or other obstructions.
(c)
The requirement for airspace may need to be discussed with any local airport to
establish that there will be no intrusion into, or unacceptably near to, aircraft flight
paths.
(d)
There may be a requirement for an aircraft warning light or beacon on the highest
point of the crane; the colour intensity and whether it is on steady or flashes will
depend upon the local rules for any flight path affected.
(e)
On sites where more than one tower crane is erected, there may be overlapping arcs
of operation when slewing; anti clash devices should be fitted.
(f)
As a result of the above, the cranes should be erected with their jibs at different
heights; crane slewing operations will have to be co-ordinated.
(g)
Electrically powered cranes will require a heavy duty power supply and the crane must
be effectively earthed to protect against electrical faults and lightning strikes, including
earthing of the appropriate rails.
(h)
High winds can temporarily stop tower crane operations; each crane should be fitted
with an anemometer (wind-speed indicator).
(i)
In high winds, tower cranes must be left in 'free slew' with their hooks raised.
(j)
If used for lifting persons, a tower crane must:
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(b)
only be capable of lowering the load under power controlled conditions, i.e. not
under 'free-fall'
(i)
EG
(ii)
be equipped with an automatic braking system, e.g. a 'dead-man's' handle type

of control.
(k)
A rescue plan must be in place in the event of an accident or incident, for example, the
operator becoming ill. The emergency services have no obligation to carry out such
rescues and are often not able to assist because of the height of the rescue and
because of restricted access for large vehicles such as fire service turntable ladders.
(l)
Tower cranes must be secured against unauthorised access, including climbing the
tower and unauthorised use.
(m)
A lifting plan approved by an appointed person must be in place.
1.4.3.40 Excavators used as cranes

1
Excavators, loaders and combined excavator loaders may be used as cranes in connection
with work directly associated with an excavation, and any other application where this type of
equipment can be used.
All work is subject to a suitable and sufficient risk assessment, subsequent control measures
QCS 2014

Page 47
and capabilities of the work equipment.

The risk assessment should take account of the fact that when a machine is in the object
handling mode (being used as a crane), it will be necessary for the slinger to approach the
machine to hook the load on and off. This person will be in what is regarded as a hazardous
area and much nearer to the machine than anyone would be in normal circumstances. The
slinger is at risk of being struck by the load, bucket or excavator arm if the excavator moves
or slews rapidly. Excavator operators and slingers must be made aware of these dangers;
effective communication and constant vigilance are essential.
The risk assessment must also establish whether the machine is suitable for the proposed
task. The weight of the bucket (if still fitted) plus the quick hitch must be added to the weight
of the load to establish if the machine will be working within its safe working load. Ideally,
unless there are good reasons for not doing so, the bucket will be removed to improve the
machine operator's visibility.
The risk assessment must also address:
AL
the need for the lifting operation to be ideally segregated from other work activities
taking place in the vicinity, particularly where it is necessary for the machine to travel
with a raised load
(b)
the ground conditions, particularly where a tracked excavator will carry out the lifting
operation. Such machines have no means of levelling themselves and are therefore
dependent upon the ground being sufficiently level to track across it and carry out the
lifting operation safely.
AT
IO
(a)
The safe working load must be clearly marked on the machine and any lifting accessories,
such as a quick hitch. A rated object handling capacity table must be available in the cab.
If the rated lifting capacity for an excavator (or the backhoe of a backhoe-loader) is greater
than 1 tonne (or the overturning moment is greater than 40,000 Nm), the machine must be
fitted with:
TE
a boom lowering control device on the raising boom cylinder(s) (a safety check valve),
which meets the requirements of BS 6912:1, and
(b)
an acoustic or visual warning device, which indicates to the operator when the object
handling capacity or corresponding load moment is reached.
EG
IN
(a)
Chains or slings for lifting must not be placed around or on the teeth of the bucket.
Accessories for lifting may only be attached to a purpose-made point on the machine.
Whilst BS 7121 may not specifically refer to excavators used as cranes, compliance with all
the appropriate parts of BS 7121 would be required.
1.4.3.41 Security when not in use

1
The manufacturer's handbook will contain recommendations for securing the crane when it is
not in use, to minimise the chance of tampering, vandalism and damage.
The measures to be taken will vary for different types and makes of crane, and may also
vary depending upon the length of time that a crane will be out of use.
However, in general:
(a)
Do not leave loads suspended
(b)
Do remove operating keys
(c)
Do lock cabs and, where appropriate, prevent unauthorised access using other
means.
QCS 2014

Page 48
1.4.3.42 Strong wind conditions

1
Crane manufacturers' operating instructions will specify a maximum wind speed for safe
operation.
This may be a single wind speed for all configurations of the crane or may vary, depending
on the jib length, the radius, the load and other factors.
The manufacturers' instructions will also indicate the actions to be taken to leave the crane in
a safe manner if the wind does exceed the maximum safe operating speed.
A copy of the Beaufort Scale, that outlines the visible signs of various wind strengths, is
included in this section at Appendix 8.
1.4.3.43 Accessories for lifting

Ropes, chains, eye bolts and slings are all examples of accessories for lifting. They must be
clearly marked with their safe working load.
All lifting accessories must also be:
properly constructed and maintained
(b)
free of any defect or damage likely to affect their strength
(c)
regularly maintained and inspected
(d)
thoroughly examined
(e)
securely attached to the lifting equipment, for example the crane, and the load
(f)
used within their safe working load.
TE
AT
IO
(a)
Accessories used for lifting must be inspected and thoroughly examined, with records kept
as specified in Appendix 5.
IN
AL
EG
1.4.3.44 Marking
Every rope, chain, etc. must be

clearly marked with its SWL and
carry an identifying mark. Where
this is not possible then a coding
system, such as a tag or colour
code, should be used to allow the
user to determine the safe working
load. A lifting accessory may also
be marked with its own weight
which is a consideration when
assessing the total load to be lifted.
Where the SWL depends on the configuration of a lifting accessory, such as a two leg chain,
then the SWL for each configuration should be clearly marked on the equipment using a tag
or by a chart available at the point of use.
1.4.3.45 Overloading
1
Ropes, chains, etc. must never be overloaded except under test and as authorised by an
experienced and competent person.
QCS 2014

Page 49
1.4.3.46 Preventing damage

1
The edges and corners of a load should be packed to prevent sharp edges damaging lifting
ropes, chains or slings.
1.4.3.47 Hooks
All hooks used for lifting must be fitted with a safety catch, or should be moused, or so
shaped as to prevent the sling eye or load coming off the hook
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.4.3.48 Slings
Slings must be attached correctly to the lifting equipment by an approved method, either by
securing the ring directly onto the hook if size permits, or by use of a suitable shackle, fitted
with the pin of the shackle on the hook and the load suspended from the bow.
The correct method of slinging will vary with the types of load, the different materials or items
lifted. It is essential to see that the load is secure. Care must be taken to see that slings are
not damaged, and suspect or defective slings must be discarded.
Dog ropes or tag lines, securely attached to the end of the load, should be used when
handling long or large loads, to direct the load into position and prevent it spinning. Tag lines
should be as short as possible.
EG
See the slinger and signaller safety checklist in

Appendix 4 to this section.
QCS 2014

Page 50
Multiple slings (two-legged, three-legged, etc.) must be connected by a ring or shackle and
the load properly distributed so that no leg is overloaded.
When in use, the angles between sling legs should be less than 90. At angles greater than
this, the strain on each leg increases very rapidly to a point where they may break because
of overloading.
With a simple two-legged parallel sling, the load on each leg is half the total load. As the
angle between sling legs increases,
the load on each sling leg increases
to approximately double at an angle
of 120.
With a sling angle of 90, the SWL of

the sling should be at least 43%
greater than the nominal weight of
EG
the load.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

Page 51
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
How the load in each sling leg increases as the angle between the sling legs is increased
TE
(Refer to manufacturer's SWL tables)
IN
1.4.3.49 Repaired ropes, chains, etc.
Any chain sling, etc. that has been altered or repaired by welding must be examined and retested, and an inspection or examination carried out before taking it back into use. The
record should be kept until the next scheduled thorough examination.
Knotted ropes, chains or slings and those which have been shortened or joined by nuts and
bolts through the links must not be used.
Any chain, sling or lifting equipment or accessory for lifting which is thought to have suffered
a loss of strength or is otherwise defective should be withdrawn from use and quarantined.
The equipment should be scrapped or re-examined by a competent person who will
recommend that either it can be put back into service or must be disposed of.
EG
1.4.3.50 Construction of slings

1
Slings are available in a wide range of styles made from many different materials to suit
particular purposes.
Chain slings are made from various grades of steel. They can stretch and the links, rings or
hooks may become distorted and fracture if subject to excess stress.
Chain slings should only be shortened by using the correct shortening clutches. Chains must
not be knotted or joined by nuts and bolts. Hooks must be of the 'C' type or fitted with a
safety latch.
QCS 2014

Page 52
Wire rope slings are made from drawn steel wire. Each leg of the sling will have an eye
formed at either end. Wire rope slings may be damaged
when 'kinked' sharply or if put under stress when twisted.
Steel wire rope may be damaged by corrosion through
poor care and storage.
Wire ropes should never be used if more than 5% (1 in

20) of the wires can be seen to be broken in any 10 x
diameter, length.
Wire ropes should also not be used where they have

been flattened such that there is a 10% reduction in rope
diameter.
Wire rope slings must not be made up on site using

bulldog grips.
Wire ropes and slings are of many different types of

construction, each having properties related to usage. It is therefore important, when
ordering an item, to specify the intended use.
Fibre rope slings might be made from natural fibres (manila, sisal, hemp) or synthetic
fibres. Slings made from natural fibres can be prone to rotting. Only purpose-made slings,
clearly marked with their SWL, should be used on site.
10
On no account should slings be fabricated from lengths of rope found laying around site.
Fibre rope slings are more easily cut or damaged, and should be visually examined by a
competent person every time before use to ensure they are serviceable. Natural fibre ropes
should not be used for making up slings on site.
11
Synthetic fibre ropes do not rot but can be affected by some chemicals. Care should be
taken to avoid contamination with alkalis or acids. Suspect or contaminated synthetic fibre
ropes and slings must not be used.
12
Flat lifting slings are used where special lifting operations are required and afford a certain
amount of protection to the load.
13
Flat and round slings may be made of woven

synthetic materials (such as nylon, polyester,
polypropylene and terylene) with 'eyes' sewn in, or
plastic-coated wire mesh, or formed by a series of
plaited wire ropes between two end fittings. These
might also be covered with a plastic material. All
woven materials are prone to damage and should be
regularly checked for serviceability. Slings should be
protected from sharp edges and placed evenly about
the load, not twisted. Care must be taken to see that
the SWL is not reduced by having a sling angle
greater than 90.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.4.3.51 Shackles
1
Two types of shackle are commonly used

in lifting operations. They are the Bow
type shackle and Dee type shackle, both
of which are available with threaded or
plain pins.
QCS 2014

Page 53
Only bow type shackles may be used to suspend a load from a hook. The shackle must be
positioned with the pin across the hook and the load suspended from the bow. If necessary,
spacers should be fitted over the pin to centralise the shackle on the hook.
Overloading, out of balance loads and misuse can distort shackles; they should be checked
regularly for shape and wear.
1.4.3.52 Eyebolts
Eyebolts are made to screw into or through
a load and may be plain (dynamo) or have
collars, with or without links. The plain
eyebolt is good only for vertical loading.
Even when a collared eyebolt is used, the
safe working load is reduced if the load to
which it is attached initially lifted at an
angle.
Collared eyebolts with links may be used

providing the angle of load to the axis of
eyebolt thread does not exceed 15. Over 15, safe working loads must be derated in
accordance with BS 4278: Specification for eyebolts for lifting purposes.
When installed, the collar must be at right angles to the hole, should be in full contact with
the surface, and be properly tightened.
The load should always be applied in the plane of the eye, never in the other direction. If
necessary, washers or shims should be inserted below the collar to ensure that the eye is
correctly aligned when tight.
Extreme care must be taken to ensure that metric threaded eyebolts are not inserted in
imperial threaded holes. Although these might appear to match, it is an interference fit only,
and the mechanical strength may be almost nothing.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
EG
1.4.3.53 Bulldog grips (wire rope grips)

Bulldog grips, if used properly to make an eye with a thimble, provide a simple and effective
means of securing the ends of wire ropes instead of splicing or socketing. The final SWL will
be about 75% of that of the wire. It is essential that the correct size and type of grip is used,
that the wire is clean and that the correct torque is applied when tightening the grips.
Bulldog grips must be fitted with the 'U' bolt on the dead or tail end of the line (non loadbearing end). There must be no deviation from this practice.
Correct method of fitting wire rope grips

Note: The number of wire rope grips shown in the above illustration is insufficient. The figure is
schematic only.
QCS 2014
Wire rope grips meeting the requirements of BS EN 13411 are efficient when correctly
installed by a competent person. Generally, when using wire rope grips, the previous
numbers of grips should be used and they should be tightened to the relevant torque.
However, in all cases, the manufacturer's recommendations, in addition to the advice given
in the standard, should be closely followed.
Required number of
wire rope grips
Tightening torque
required (Nm)
2.0
6.5
3.5
6.0
10
12
14
16
AL
Maximum nominal
rope diameter (mm)
AT
IO
9.0

Page 54
33.0
49.0
68.0
107.0
147.0
212.0
34
296.0
40
363.0
19
20.0
TE
22
EG
30
IN
26
The wire should be in good condition and all threads and nuts should be suitably greased.
The first bulldog grip should be fitted as close as possible to the thimble and, thereafter, at a
spacing of no greater than six times the rope diameter.
Nuts must be tightened to the relevant torque:
(a)
when the rope is assembled
(b)
when taken into use
(c)
on the application of the load
(d)
at periodic intervals when in continuous use.
If the above criteria are not followed, then the strength of the eye and thimble will be
considerably reduced. If the criteria are neglected for an extended period, the eye and
thimble may fail.
QCS 2014
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Wire rope grips must not be used to make lifting slings, long splices, or to join two wire
ropes, other than with thimbles or eyes.

Page 55
QCS 2014

Page 56
For intermediate diameters of rope, the next larger size wire rope grip should be used,
except as follows:
(a)
the size 5 mm grip should only be used on a nominal 5 mm diameter rope
(b)
for 11 mm diameter rope, use four 10 mm rope grips tightened to a torque of 14 n/m.
1.4.3.54 Spreader and equaliser beams

Spreader beams are used to support long or wide loads during lifts. They eliminate the
hazard of a load tipping, as well as wide sling angles and any tendency of the sling to crush
the load.
Equaliser beams are used to equalise the load in sling legs and to keep equal loads when
making multiple leg lifts.
Both types of beam are normally manufactured to suit a particular purpose. Care should be
taken to see that the correct beam is used.
The capacity of a beam with multiple attachments will be specified by the manufacturer.
Generally, it will depend on the distance between the attachment points, for example, if the
distance between attachment points is doubled, the lifting capacity is halved. Care must be
taken not to exceed safe working loads at the various slinging points.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 57

1.4.3 Appendix 1
General lifting operations
Safety checklist
Before starting work
Ensure that adequately trained, competent persons are available to plan, carry out and
supervise the lift.
Ensure that a suitable and sufficient risk assessment has been carried out, which considers
all aspects of the lift including environmental factors such as the proximity of obstructions,
underground services, overhead cables and structures.
Ensure that lift plans and method statements for the lifting operation are developed as
appropriate.
Ensure that appropriate protection measures are put in place.
Ensure that all temporary works supporting lifting equipment, such as foundations, have
been certified by a competent temporary works engineer and a 'permit to load issued'.
Ensure that a current thorough examination and/or test record has been issued and is
available for each item of lifting equipment and accessory.
Ensure that the SWL of the lifting equipment and accessories is adequate for the weight of
the load.
Ensure that all lifting accessories are clearly marked with their safe working load.
Ensure that correct and up-to-date copies of the Sling Chart and Safe Working Load tables
are available, when using multi-leg slings.
10
Ensure that the method of communication is agreed and understood by everyone involved in
the lift.
11
Ensure that a suitable rack is available for storing slings, etc. when they are not in use. Wire
ropes should be stored in a dry atmosphere.
12
Ensure that the weights of loads to be lifted are known in advance, and that load weights are
clearly marked.
13
Ensure that the ground conditions are sufficiently stable to take the weight of the lifting
equipment and any load.
14
Ensure that a trained and competent slinger is available.
15
Ensure that a trained and competent signaller is available if required.
16
Ensure that all personnel involved in the lifting operation have been briefed and understand
the risks, methods or work and the equipment to be used including emergency
arrangements.
17
Ensure that the appropriate permissions have been gained if it is necessary to position any
crane on the public highway (or other public place) to carry out lifting operations.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Whilst work is in progress

18
Ensure that copies of the Sling Chart and Safe Working Load tables are being used where
necessary.
19
Ensure that the correct techniques are being used for the attachment to the appliance and
slinging.
20
Ensure, wherever possible, that the angles of slings are no more than 90.
QCS 2014

Page 58
Ensure that regular inspections, thorough examinations and tests of the equipment are
carried out, as appropriate, and records maintained (see Appendix 5).
22
Limit the use of endless wire rope slings.
23
Ensure that slings are protected from sharp corners of loads by suitable packings.
24
Ensure that slingers understand that 'doubling up' slings does NOT 'double up' the safe
working load; avoid this practice if possible.
25
Prevent strops, slings and ropes from being dragged along the ground.
26
Ensure that hooks used for lifting are NOT also carrying unused slings.
27
Ensure that any unused leg of a
28
multi-sling is correctly hooked back. The correct sling only should be used.
29
Ensure that unfit slings are removed from the site, and a responsible person informed.
30
Ensure that the crane hook is positioned above the load's centre of gravity.
31
Ensure that the load is free before lifting and that all legs have a direct load.
32
Ensure that 'snatch' loading does NOT take place.
33
Ensure that NO ONE rides on a load which has been slung and is being lifted.
34
Use tag lines to stabilise long or large loads.
35
Ensure that the load is landed onto battens to prevent any damage to slings, and to assist
their easy removal.
36
Ensure that NO ONE is under a load which is being lifted.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
21
QCS 2014

Page 59

1.4.3 Appendix 2
Mobile cranes
Safety checklist

Carry out the checks detailed in Appendix 1, plus:
Consider whether a 'contract lift' is the best and safest option.
Check that the selected crane has been supplied. Check that the correct operating
information and a competent operator have been supplied along with it.
Check that the ground is capable of taking the loads of the outriggers, crane, load or wind. If
in doubt, get ADVICE from specialist companies.
Ensure that the approach and working areas are as level as possible.
Ensure that there is adequate protection from live electrical cables.
Ensure that the area is kept free of obstructions, and is adequately lit.
Ensure that the weights of the loads are known, and that the correct lifting gear has been
ordered and is available.
Ensure that no 'crush zone' exists between the crane and any fixed object; if there is, erect
barriers.
Check there are no restrictions on the access, i.e. check size(s) of vehicles.
10
Check that the company has provided enough information about the safe use of the crane.
11
Check that there is an up-to-date record and that inspections, thorough examinations and
tests have been carried out as necessary.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
12
13
14

Check that daily and weekly inspections are being carried out.
Ensure the crane is operating from planned and approved positions only in accordance with
lift plans and method statements.
Ensure that the signaller is available for each lift.
15
If outriggers are being used (blocked duties), ensure that they are fully extended, locked and
adequately supported.
16
Check that tyres are at the correct pressure and in good, clean condition and that tracks are
properly maintained.
17
Check that the crane is kept at a safe, predetermined distance from any open excavations or
live overhead electricity cables.
18
Check, when travelling, that the load is secured and carried as near to the ground as
possible and that tag lines are used.
19
20
Check that the rated capacity and radius indicators are in working order.
Check that loads are not being slewed over any persons and that persons are not standing
or walking under the load.
QCS 2014
21

Page 60
Check, when travelling on sloping ground, that the driver changes the radius to
accommodate the movement of the load.

1.4.3 Appendix 3
Tower cranes
Safety checklist
Check that the appointed person has put in place a lift plan.
Check that the selected crane has been competent engineer supplied. Check that the correct
operating information has been supplied along with it.
Ensure that the crane will be capable of lifting the required loads at the maximum required
radius of operation.
Check that the ground is capable of taking the weight of the crane, the load and wind load. If
in doubt, get ADVICE.
Ensure that any foundations have been designed and certified by a and a 'permit to load'
issued.
Ensure that adequate ballast or counterweight units are in position and are correctly
secured.
Check that a diagram or notice indicating the position and weight of removable ballast is
prominently displayed.
Ensure that the approach and the base are as level as possible.
Check that the limit switch and other devices are installed to limit the travel of the bogie.
Ensure that limit switches have also been installed to limit the crane travel on rails.
10
Ensure that the work area is kept free of obstructions, particularly where the crane operates
on rails.
11
Ensure that there is an adequate power supply properly installed, earthed and tested. Where
the crane operates on rails, ensure that they are also earthed.
12
Ensure that the weight of each load is known, and that the correct lifting accessories are
available.
13
Ensure that a competent operator, who is sufficiently fit and has good eyesight, is available.
14
Ensure that a competent, trained signaller is available, and that the method of
communication is understood by all involved in the lift.
15
Check that there are no restrictions on the access, i.e. check size(s) of vehicles for
rigging/de-rigging.
16
Ensure that all necessary precautions with regards to live overhead electric cables have
been taken.
17
Where necessary, ensure that all work areas are adequately lit.
18
Where appropriate check that any building or temporary works to which the crane is tied can
support the loading.
19
What is the crane's free standing height? Check that the supplier has provided information
with reference to the crane, etc.
20
Where appropriate, check that over-sailing and airspace rights have been agreed.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 61
21
Check that warning has been given of the slewing activities and that property has been
protected, as necessary.
22
Check that there is an up-to-date record of inspection, thorough examination and test.
23
Check that there is a rescue plan in place and that it is acceptable in terms of practicality.
24
Check the competency, including training and qualifications, of the competent persons
involved in lifting operations.

Ensure that the works are being carried out in accordance with the lift plan.
26
Check that the daily and weekly inspections are being carried out and recorded.
27
Check that the rails, if used, are level, in line and being guarded.
28
Check the position and condition of the sleepers, etc. (Look for washouts.)
29
Check that the buffers are in place and that they are secure (if on rails).
30
Check that the bogie is blocked and chocked when not in use (if on rails).
31
Check that no nuts or bolts are missing or loose.
32
Check that crane ties, if used, are securely fixed in position.
IO
AL
25
Check that the wind speed indicator is in working order. What wind speed is allowed for safe
working?
34
Check that, when not in use, the crane jib is free to slew with the wind. Check that power
supplies are off; loads lowered, hooks raised and doors locked.
35
Check the slewing movements in relation to people or adjacent property, etc.
36
Check that earth bonding strips are in place.
37
Where more than one tower crane is in operation with overlapping arcs of operation, ensure
that crane activities are co-ordinated.
38
Ensure that the load rating chart is in place and being complied with.
39
Ensure that the rated capacity indicator is in working order.
40
Check that the SWL is plainly marked at different operating radii along the jib.
41
Ensure that all lifts are within the jib radius.
42
Ensure that operators know the weight of loads being lifted.
43
Ensure that loads are being lifted and not dragged, and that they are not swinging and
creating a hazard.
44
Ensure that the operator is at the controls whenever a load is suspended.
EG
IN
TE
AT
33
QCS 2014

Page 62

1.4.3 Appendix 4
Slinger and signaller safety checklist
Inspect to ensure that:
1
slings and other chains are not shortened by tying knots in them or by wrapping them round
the crane hook
fibre or rope slings are not damaged
chains are not joined by means of bolts or wire
wire ropes are not sharply bent or flattened at any point
wire ropes are never in contact with hot metal or acids that will damage them
wire ropes are never used singly when hooked by a spliced eye. (The cable is liable to
untwist, allowing the splices to open and slip)
the proper pin is used in all shackles and the correct type of shackle is being used
all end links, rings or shackles ride freely on any hook on which they are used
the wind strength is safe for lifting operations to start.
AT
IO
AL
Reject:
any slings of insufficient length which create a wide angle between legs
11
extra long slings which seriously reduce the headroom
12
any wire ropes that have become damaged or rusty
13
any fibre or rope slings that are damaged or frayed.
TE
10
IN
When loading
Ensure the slings are protected from sharp-edged loads by packing soft wood or other
suitable material between the load and the sling. (Bricks are not suitable packaging
material.)
15
Ensure the load is evenly distributed to avoid excessive stress on one side of the sling.
16
DO NOT let any load rest on a wire rope; it may crush the strands and render the rope
unsafe.
EG
14
Before lifting
17
Ensure that the load is securely slung.
18
Always see that the crane hook is centrally placed over the load to prevent it swinging when
the load is being raised, and that the load is in balance.
19
Position the hands well away from any chains or ropes before the crane takes the load.
20
Check that the load is free for lifting.
21
Give warning to all persons to keep clear of the load.
During lifting
22
Use only British Standard 7121 signals.
23
Always lift slightly, then pause to see that the load is safe and balanced.
24
Ensure signals are given by the person responsible for the lift, and nobody else.
QCS 2014

Page 63
25
Ensure hooks and slings not in use are carried on the carrying hook, since they may cause
the sling carrying the load to ride on the nose of the hook.
26
Never ride on a crane load, or allow any other person to do so.
27
Whenever possible, keep the load clear of people.
28
Ensure chains, slings, hooks or loads are never dragged along the ground.
When unloading
29
Make sure there is a firm foundation for the load, and make provision for the removal of all
slings.
30
Stack
securely
and
provide
safe
access
for
subsequent
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
material
removal.
AL

Page 64
AT
IO
QCS 2014

1.4.3 Appendix 5
Inspection and thorough examination
Inspection
Reports
Lifting equipment and

accessories for lifting
TE
R
Lifting equipment
and accessories for
lifting
If appropriate and at
suitable intervals between Before first use, unless a record Lifting equipment
accompanies the lifting
thorough examinations.
equipment. Installation conditions
(Suitable intervals, unless require assurance that it is safe
otherwise laid down, would to use:
be every week.) Carried
after installation
out by a competent
person.
EG
IN
Lifting equipment
after assembly. When

exposed to conditions
causing deterioration:
lifting persons - every six

months
other lifting equipment every 12 months.
User or owner
Follows the thorough

examination. Report
authenticated. Format - register
or certificate, electronic form
(easily retrievable). Provided to
the user, and to the person from
whom the equipment has been
hired or leased in writing. Kept
available for inspection. Kept
available until next examination
carried out or for two years,
whichever is the longer.
In accordance with an
examination scheme drawn up by
a competent person. Carried out
by a competent person.
Accessory for lifting
If appropriate and at intervals

Before first use. When exposed
between thorough examinations. to conditions causing
Carried out by a competent
deterioration:
person.
every six months, in

accordance with an
examination scheme drawn
up by a competent person.
Carried out by a competent
person.
Accessory for lifting
Report kept available until next

inspection report made. Made in
writing and provided to user.
Thorough examination record for
two years after report made.
Health and Safety

Executive
Following thorough examination

identifying an imminent risk of
serious personal injury. Report in
writing.
QCS 2014

Page 65

1.4.3 Appendix 6
SCHEDULE 1
INFORMATION TO BE CONTAINED IN A REPORT OF A THOROUGH EXAMINATION

The name and address of the Contractor for whom the thorough examination was made.
The address of the premises at which the thorough examination was made.
Particulars sufficient to identify the lifting equipment including where known its date of
manufacture.
The date of the last thorough examination.
The safe working load of the lifting equipment or (where its safe working load depends on
the configuration of the lifting equipment) its safe working load for the last configuration in
which it was thoroughly examined.
In relation to the first thorough examination of lifting equipment after installation or after
assembly at a new site or in a new location-
(b)
(if such be the case) that it has been installed correctly and would be safe to operate.
AT
whether it is a thorough examinationwithin an interval of 6 months
(ii)
within an interval of 12 months
(iii)
after the occurrence of exceptional circumstances.
TE
(i)
IN
(b)
In relation to a thorough examination of lifting equipment other than a thorough examination

to which paragraph 6 relates(a)
(if such be the case) that the lifting equipment would be safe to operate.
In relation to every thorough examination of lifting equipment-
EG
that it is such a thorough examination;
IO
(a)
(a)
identification of any part found to have a defect which is or could become a danger to
persons, and a description of the defect;
(b)
particulars of any repair, renewal or alteration required to remedy a defect found to be

a danger to persons;
(c)
AL
in the case of a defect which is not yet but could become a danger to persons(i)
the time by which it could become such a danger;
(ii)
particulars of any repair, renewal or alteration required to remedy it;
(d)
the latest date by which the next thorough examination must be carried out;
(e)
where the thorough examination included testing, particulars of any test;
(f)
the date of the thorough examination.
The name, address and qualifications of the person making the report including the
Contractor they are employed by.
10
The name and address of a person signing or authenticating the report on behalf of its
author.
11
The date of the report.
QCS 2014

Page 66

D3. Appendix 7
Recommended crane signals
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Reproduced from BS 7121 Safe Use of Cranes Part 1
Note: The signaller should stand in a secure position, where they can see the load and can be seen
clearly by the crane driver, and they should face the crane driver if possible. Each signal should be
distinct and clear.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

Page 67
QCS 2014
QCS 2014

Page 68

1.4.3 Appendix 8
Wind strengths and effects (Beaufort Scale)
Windforce
number
Description of
wind
Wind effect locally
Speed
Km/h
1
Speed m/sec
0-1
Calm
Calm, smoke rises vertically.
Light air
Direction of wind shown by smoke drift, but 1.1-5.5

not by wind or weather vanes.
Light breeze
Wind felt on face. Leaves rustle. Wind or

weather vanes move.
5.6-11
2-3
Gentle breeze
Leaves and small twigs in constant motion. 12-19

Wind extends light flags.
3-5
Moderate breeze Wind raises dust and loose paper. Small

branches move.
Fresh breeze
1-2
AT
IO
AL
5-8
Small trees in leaf begin to sway. Little

crested wavelets form on inland waters.
29-38
8-11
Strong breeze
Large branches in motion. Umbrellas used

with some difficulty.
39-49
11-14
Near gale
Whole trees in motion. Becoming difficult to 50-61

walk against the wind.
14-17
Gale
Twigs break off trees. Progress is generally 62-74

impeded.
17-21
Strong gale
Chimney pots, slates and tiles may be blown 75-88

off. Other slight structural damage may be
caused.
21-24
EG
IN
TE
20-28
QCS 2014

Page 69

1.4.4
Mobile Elevating Work Platforms
1.4.4.1 Key points

Mobile elevating work platforms (MEWPs) are a safe and convenient alternative to scaffolds
when working at height, providing they are used correctly by trained and competent
operators.
On some types of machine it will be necessary for the operator and any passengers to wear
a safety harness and lanyard, the free end of which must be clipped to a strong point on the
machine.
Operators and passengers must never clip the free end of the lanyard to the structure
against which they are working.
Normally, MEWPs should only be operated from the controls in the basket or on the
platform.
The ground level controls should only be used in an emergency such as the operator
becoming incapacitated when the machine is elevated.
MEWPs are classified as 'work equipment' and 'lifting equipment for carrying people' and
must therefore be subjected to an appropriate schedule of inspections and thorough
examinations.
MEWPs must not be used to carry any load above the stated safe working load.
When calculating the total load carried, consideration must be given to any additional
materials 'taken on board' when elevated, such as a quantity of removed roof tiles.
AT
IO
AL
TE
The term mobile elevating work platform (MEWP) covers pedestrian-controlled, selfpropelled and power-operated mobile elevating work and access platforms.
MEWPs are designed to provide temporary working platforms that can be easily moved from
one location to another. They are particularly suitable for tasks where the use of a ladder
would be unsafe and the erection of a scaffolding platform too time-consuming or
impracticable in relation to the job to be done. Some machines have specialised
applications.
When using MEWPs (as with all other types of work equipment), the Contractor has a legal
duty to provide, as far as is reasonably practicable, a safe place of work and the necessary
information, instruction, training and supervision ' for operators..
The manufacturer or hire company who supplies any type of MEWP to a contractor must
provide familiarisation training on the type of machine they are supplying. The Contractor of
the machine operator, however, has a legal duty to ensure the operator's overall
competence and assess the risks arising out of the work activity for which the machine is to
be used. It is essential that no one should be allowed to use the equipment unless they have
been instructed and trained by a competent person on the specific type of equipment to be
used, and have themselves been judged competent to use it.
EG
IN

1
QCS 2014

Page 70
to put control measures in place to reduce the risks to health and safety arising out of the
those risks.

All MEWPs are classified as 'work equipment' under these Regulations and Contractors
must:
ensure that the equipment is suitable for the intended task
(b)
maintain and keep the equipment in good working order (or ensure that it has been
properly maintained if a hired-in machine)
(c)
ensure the equipment is subjected to a scheme of regular inspections (or has a valid
certificate of thorough examination if a hired-in machine)
(d)
provide competent supervision.
IO
AL
(a)
AT
Dangerous parts of machinery must be adequately guarded, preferably by fixed guards that
cannot be defeated or removed.
IN
TE
All MEWPs are classified as 'lifting equipment' (for lifting people) under these Regulations.
The main requirements of these Regulations are that:
(a)
EG
(b)
(c)

or the load striking a person or the load otherwise becoming out of control
(d)
(e)
(f)
carried out safely
(g)

examination as is appropriate
(h)
reports of thorough examinations must be made and retained, with all defects notified
to the Contractor who must take appropriate actions.
QCS 2014

Page 71

The fact that a MEWP is in use is indicative that someone is going to work at height. The key
provisions of these Regulations are (briefly) that Contractors must:
(b)
where such work cannot be avoided, make sure to select the most appropriate work
equipment for the work and to prevent falls
(c)
(d)
ensure that the work is properly planned, risk-assessment based and that it is carried
out safely by competent persons
(e)
establish danger areas from which people must be excluded, when there is a danger
of them falling or being struck by falling objects
(f)
(g)
Employees who work at height, for example MEWP operators, must:
(h)
report to the Contractor any situation that they consider to be unsafe to themselves or
to anyone else
(i)
use any work equipment, such as a MEWP, in accordance with the training and
instructions provided.
AL
(a)
IO
AT
These Regulations require that, where a risk has been identified by a risk assessment and it
used by employees. In essence, PPE may only be used as a last resort.
In the context of using MEWPs, PPE will include items of fall-arrest equipment, such as
harnesses and lanyards, although consideration must also be given to the provision of PPE
that protects against hot, cold and wet weather in the appropriate circumstances.
Whilst the Contractor must, as far is reasonably practicable, ensure that any PPE supplied is
correctly used or worn, the employee, in turn, has a duty to properly use or wear the
equipment, follow any information, instruction or training which they have been given, and
know the procedures for reporting loss or defect to their Contractor.
EG
IN
TE
1.4.4.8 Types of MEWP

1
The basic types of mobile elevating work platform are:

(a)
scissor lifts
(b)
telescopic booms or jibs
(c)
articulating and telescopic booms. All of these may be:
(d)
towable units
(e)
vehicle-mounted
(f)
self-propelled, or
(g)
pedestrian controlled.
The main functional differences between the three basic types of platform are described
below.
QCS 2014

Page 72
Scissor lift: This type of appliance gives a vertical lift only. It

may be fitted with outriggers, depending on its size and the
height to which it extends.
Hydraulic extending boom (telescopic): This type gives

both vertical height and outreach. The working platform
may also be manoeuvrable.
All boom-type MEWPS are generally known as 'cherrypickers'.
Articulating
and
telescopic
or
multi-boom
articulated: These types of equipment are usually
vehicle mounted. They give a wide range of reach and
height, with good platform mobility. They are nearly
always equipped with outriggers. There are specialised
types, for instance, machines that enable access to the
underside of bridge arches from the roadway above.
Some units have a 'travel while elevated' ability and fourwheel drive. Rough terrain MEWPs have been specially
developed for construction site work.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 73
1.4.4.9 Sizes
1
Sizes and capabilities vary considerably. Small, one-person platforms are available, with
safe working loads of about 100 kg, and working heights of a few metres.
At the other end of the scale, platforms may be over 4 m x 2 m in size and have safe working
loads in excess of 1,000 kg. Extending boom heights exceeding 60 m are obtainable and the
outreach of some units can exceed 30 m.
The work activity which results in the use of MEWPs must, of course, have been subject to a
risk assessment.
1.4.4.10 Causes of accidents

MEWPs can provide safe access and safe working at heights, and are often safer than
ladders or other access equipment. However, there have been a number of serious
accidents in which operators have been thrown from MEWPs, particularly 'cherry pickers'.
This can be caused by such events as the moving basket snagging an obstruction or the
operator simply leaning too far beyond the guard-rail. In many cases, the wearing of a safety
harness and short restraint lanyard, clipped to a strong point inside the basket, would have
prevented the accident. This advice relates primarily to 'cherry pickers' but it is also relevant
to scissor lifts if the operator is at risk of falling, for example, as a result of leaning too far
over the guard-rail.
The typical 'cherry picker' consists of one or more pivoted arms. Movement from a single
pivot causes the basket to move through an arc. To make the basket move in a straight line,
for example up or down the face of a building, the operator must adjust more than one
control either alternately or simultaneously. Accidents can occur when the operator is too
'heavy handed' with the controls, or the actual movement of the basket in relation to the
degree of control movement is too coarse. This may cause the basket to move further and
more rapidly than anticipated, or the operator may not be able to compensate quickly
enough for the 'arc' movement. This may result in the basket striking, or being obstructed by,
a nearby structure. If this occurs and power continues to be applied, the basket could
become jammed and it is possible that a structural failure of part of the machine or a sudden
movement of the basket could throw the operator out.
Other significant causes of accidents are:

(a)
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
when a nearby vehicle or mobile plant strikes the MEWP, for example, if part of the
boom encroaches into a traffic route or if road traffic skids into the machine on wet or
icy roads
(b)
entrapment of the operator below a fixed object whilst elevating the basket or platform
(c)
failure of the levelling system or a major component of the MEWP
(d)
an unexpected movement or overturning due to incorrect installation, or soft or uneven

ground
(e)
falls from height whilst climbing from a MEWP onto a roof or other high level place.
(MEWPs are intended for use as work platforms and not as a substitute for stairs to
gain access to upper levels)
(f)
lack of information, instruction and training resulting in collisions whilst manoeuvring
(g)
where the nature of work being done from the basket may mean that operators are
likely to lean out. This may happen, for example, when operators:
(i)
inadvertently, or for reasons of speed and convenience, overreach or stretch

from the basket and overbalance, or
(ii)
are handling awkward workpieces which may move unexpectedly
QCS 2014

Page 74
(h)
where rapid movement of the machine is possible
(i)
where there are protruding features which could catch, impede or trap the basket.
Error of judgement by operators, or a lack of sufficient information, instruction, training and

supervision can cause rapid movement of the basket and collision whilst manoeuvring.
Whilst many incidents have been attributed to 'operator-error', these errors are foreseeable
and should be considered as part of the Contractor's risk assessment.
The Contractor's risk assessment should, therefore, consider:

information, instruction, training and supervision
(b)
competence and operator suitability
(c)
the degree of fine control that is necessary and available for the safe movement of a
MEWP
(d)
the condition, suitability and maintenance of the MEWP
(e)
the need for, and use of, fall-arrest or fall restraint equipment.
AL
(a)
1.4.4.11 Controlling the risks
Having assessed the risks, Contractors and others responsible for the use of MEWPs must
implement measures to control those risks.
The precautions for safe working from a MEWP include:
AT
IO
ensuring that a MEWP is suitable for the job to be undertaken, as revealed by a risk
assessment
(b)
ensuring guard-rails and toe-boards are fitted to the platform or the basket
(c)
ensuring the machine is never overloaded
(d)
using stability devices provided, i.e. outriggers, to make the machine stable
(e)
the provision of designated anchorage points for the attachment of lanyards
(f)
locking-out controls (other than those in the basket) to prevent unintentional operation
(g)
correct planning of the proposed task
(h)
use of trained, competent and experienced operators
TE
IN
EG
(i)
(a)
instructions when to enter or leave a basket, such as when it is fully lowered
(j)
instructions for emergency procedures, such as rescue should the operator be

incapacitated
(k)
use, as and where necessary, of suitable fall restraint equipment or, in high-risk
situations, fall-arrest equipment.
1.4.4.12 Fall protection

Work restraint system
1
Whereas fall-arrest equipment allows a person to fall but arrests the fall before the person
hits the surface below, work restraint equipment prevents the fall from happening.
The main feature of work restraint equipment is that a shorter lanyard is used which restricts
the operator's limit of travel to the confines of the basket or platform.
Lanyards should be carefully selected, taking into account the features of the machine on
which they are to be used, to ensure that the user cannot get into a situation where a fall
QCS 2014

Page 75
could occur.
4
BS EN 358 specifically states that such devices are not intended to arrest a fall.
Fall-arrest system
5
This passage of text refers predominantly to the use of 'cherry pickers', although in some
circumstances parts could also be relevant to the use of scissor lifts.
Where a decision has been taken to rely on fall-arrest equipment as a means of preventing
injury, it will be necessary for the operator to wear a full body harness and a lanyard
equipped with an energy absorber. Vital considerations are:
the height at which work is being carried out must be such that it allows the lanyard to
arrest the fall and the energy absorber to deploy before the wearer hits the surface
below. A minimum working height of 5 metres is recommended if fall-arrest is to
operate successfully
(b)
the anchor point on the machine must have been designed to withstand the shockloading of arresting a fall. Many anchor points fitted to MEWPs are only rated for work
restraint. If the anchor point is not marked with its rating, contact the manufacturer to
find it out
(c)
users of harness and lanyard must have been trained in their use, inspection and care
(d)
in arresting a fall, a 'cherry picker' will flex, which could eject other occupants and
materials out of the basket. This could also overturn the machine if it is operating
towards the extent of its lateral operating-envelope
(e)
a check must be made that the structure has no projecting features that the falling
person would strike during the fall
(f)
how the person who has fallen will be rescued after the fall has been arrested. This
may be as simple as another operator gently lowering the boom of a 'cherry picker'
using the ground level controls until the fallen
person is at ground level.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
A safety harness must never be attached to

anything outside the platform; operation of the
controls in this situation could leave the user
suspended in mid air (see illustration above).
An exception to wearing a harness whilst operating

a mobile elevating work platform is when the
machine is working over or near water. If a harness
is being worn in such circumstances and the MEWP
toppled into the water, the operator could be
dragged under the water and drowned. The wearing
of harnesses in such situations is not recommended,
although operators should wear life jackets.
EG
1.4.4.13 Safe operation of MEWPs

Safety helmets
1
Safety helmets must be worn if there are overhead obstructions in the area of operation or if
there is a possibility of injury resulting from falling objects. On all building and construction
sites, the wearing of safety helmets is mandatory. Chin straps should be worn to prevent the
helmet slipping off and falling to a lower level and perhaps injuring someone.
QCS 2014

Page 76
Safe working load

2
The safe working load (SWL) specified by the manufacturer must not be exceeded. The
maximum number of persons permitted on the platform may also be given but, if it is not, 8590 kg of the SWL should be allowed for each person.
Care must be taken not to exceed the SWL with tools and equipment when work is being
carried out from the platform.
Examples of how this can also be caused are:
(b)
the removal and lowering of fans, motors, pipework, window frames or other
equipment from high level onto the platform prior to removing them for repair,
maintenance or replacement
(c)
the temporary storage of removed materials, such as roof tiles
(d)
any form of shock loading.
AL
allowing an accumulation of plaster, cement, blasting grit or other loose materials
It is usual for a single SWL to be specified for all conditions of height or reach.
(a)
IO
Height and reach
The figures given by manufacturers are the maximum possible; allowance has already been
made for the physical height and reach of the operator.
If it becomes evident that the task requires a range of travel that is outside the reach of the
machine, work must be stopped and the job reassessed. Steps, ladders, hop-ups or boxes
must never be used on the platform or in the basket to gain extra height or reach.
TE
AT
Operating envelope
All configurations of MEWPs have an operating area or envelope. With scissor lifts, the
operating envelope will be determined by the maximum height and width of the platform; with
articulated booms, it is a more complex shape.
As maximum height and maximum reach are not usually available at the same time, care is
needed to ensure that the intended work area is within the machine's operating envelope
(see diagram below).
EG
IN
Ground conditions
10
MEWPs are often fitted with outriggers or stabilisers and these must always be fully
deployed and used as recommended by the manufacturer. Attempting to operate the unit too
close to a building or obstruction can make it impossible to fully extend the outriggers, and
therefore unsafe to use.
11
Before deploying stabilisers or outriggers, check:

(a)
that the machine is either level, or can be levelled up
(b)
that the ground is firm, without hidden voids and will support the loading with the use
of adequate packing if necessary
(c)
that the machine will not have to pass over a cellar, basement, sewer, drain, manhole,
old trench, uncompacted backfill or anything else that might collapse; consider the
possible need for a ground survey.

Page 77
AL
QCS 2014
IO
(a)
AT
Travelling in operational mode
Travelling with the platform occupied or boom extended should only be undertaken when this
mode of operation is within the machine's specified capabilities. Travel must never take
place with outriggers or stabilisers extended, unless the machine is designed to function in
this way.
13
Before travelling, a check should be made to ensure:
TE
12
no ramps, trenches, holes or other ground obstructions lie in the path of travel
(b)
no overhead electrical or other (communication) cables, building projections or other

overhead hazards will be encountered
(c)
adequate warning has been given to people on the ground
(d)
a signaller or other responsible person is employed, if necessary
(e)
nothing has been left unsecured and liable to fall off
EG
(f)
IN
(a)
no trailing hoses, cables, wires on the unit or other snagging hazards are in the path of
travel.
14
Travelling up and down inclines and traversing slopes should only be undertaken within the
limits laid down by the manufacturers.
15
Specially designed units, designated as 'rough terrain', can operate (usually without any
stabilisers or outriggers) on construction and other sites where ground conditions may not
permit a standard type vehicle to be used.
1.4.4.14 Tandem use

1
Under no circumstances should two platforms be linked together or bridged. However, in

some circumstances, manufacturers can advise on the interlocking of platforms and
controls so that one set of controls operates both platforms, allowing directional stability to
be maintained at all times.
If a unit is being used in conjunction with a crane or some other appliance, a safe system of
QCS 2014

Page 78
work must be planned and implemented; it should clearly define individual responsibilities
and set out precise arrangements for communication.
Wind and wind speeds
1
A MEWP must not be used in wind speeds exceeding those specified by the manufacturer.
One commonly specified wind speed upper limit is that of 48.28 km/h (Beaufort Scale Force
6 -Strong Breeze) or about 12.5 m per second. This is also generally accepted as the
maximum wind strength in which an operator can work without undue discomfort.
Other problems associated with operating in windy conditions include:

the funnelling effects of winds between buildings, where actual wind speeds may be
double that measured in the open
(b)
in the vicinity of large slab-sided buildings, high wind speeds and eddy currents may
be created at the corners and on the side facing the wind
(c)
the effect of height - wind speed may be 50% greater at a height of 20 m than it is at
ground level; modern machines are fitted with a wind-speed sensor which, if activated,
only enables the working platform to be lowered
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
(b)
Percentage to be added to ground level windspeed to correct for working height.

Height above ground at which platform will be used.
(d)
wind chill factor. On a calm day 10C is cool but not unpleasant, but with a wind of
32.19 km/h the temperature experienced on the face and hands is 0C. If the day is
cold, about freezing, the temperature experienced on the skin can be down to minus
15C, making it almost impossible for the operator to work safely unless properly
clothed and equipped for the circumstances.
Problems may also arise when handling sheet materials, panels and other materials light in
weight in relation to their area. They can act like 'sails' and seriously affect the stability of a
mobile elevating work platform due to the excess wind loading. If such materials are to be
used, due allowance should be made, especially in gusty conditions.
Because of the difficulty in accurately estimating wind speeds by the observation of trees,
windblown litter, smoke, etc., a hand-held anemometer should be used where necessary.
QCS 2014

Page 79
Use on roads
5
People trained to operate a vehicle-mounted MEWP on site may not drive it on a public road,
unless they hold the appropriate licence.
1.4.4.15 Prohibited uses

1
MEWPs must not be used:

(a)
as jacks, props, ties or supports
(b)
primarily for the transportation of goods or materials
(c)
as an alternative to passenger hoist (for example, transporting workers to a high level

floor slab)
(d)
as a crane or lifting appliance.
Such uses are either outside the designed use and safe working limits of the machine, or
would bring it under other statutory provisions, such as those applicable to cranes and
hoists.
Platforms must not be tied to buildings or other structures to gain additional support. The
operation of the controls in such circumstances could cause an accident or create another
hazard.
Extra height should not be gained by using ladders, stepladders or similar devices on the
platform or in the basket of a MEWP. If the machine itself does not reach the required height,
it is the wrong machine for the job. An alternative machine must be obtained or an alternative
(safe) means of access devised.
TE
1.4.4.16 Operator requirements
IN
Physical fitness
(a)
must have full physical mobility
(b)
must have sufficient agility to climb in and out of the platform
(c)
EG
People nominated or applying for training as operators should meet the following general
requirements:
AT
IO
AL
must have a good head for heights, and not be subject to vertigo or acrophobia (fear
of heights)
(d)
must have good hearing in case warning signals are given
(e)
must have the correct colour vision for colour-coded controls (the Ishihara colour test
may be relevant)
(f)
must have the ability to accurately judge space and distance
(g)
must have good eye-to-hand co-ordination, and sufficient dexterity to operate the
controls
(h)
must have good eyesight, with glasses if necessary. The ability to read a car number
plate at 25 m is usually satisfactory
(i)
must have a stable disposition.
Fainting or dizziness may render people unsuitable as operatives.
QCS 2014

Page 80
Duties of operators
3
The main duties of operators are:

(a)
to operate the machine safely and without risks to themselves or anyone else who
may be affected by the works which are being carried out
(b)
to operate the machine in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and any
other training given, and to ensure that it remains safe and stable
(c)
not to abuse, ignore or override any safety device or equipment
(d)
to report all defects, faults or dangerous situations
(e)
to stop work and seek advice in any conditions that they consider could be unsafe to
themselves or anyone else.
Training
No-one should be allowed to operate a MEWP unless they have demonstrated their
competence on the machine and have had proper and adequate training, unless they are
under the direct supervision of a competent person as a part of their training.
A wide range of MEWPs is now available, and operators should be trained specifically for the
type of machine in use that they are required to use. For example, a person competent to
operate a scissor lift would need separate and specific training and become competent
before they could use an articulated boom unit ('cherry picker').
Both knowledge and skill should be tested during training to ensure that the operative has
achieved a satisfactory standard of competence.
For all types of unit, three main stages of training can be identified:
TE
AT
IO
AL
basic understanding of the operating principles, and the knowledge necessary for the
day-to-day operation of the platform
(b)
task-specific training and practice on the type of machine concerned, if possible under
all foreseeable operating conditions
(c)
properly supervised on-site familiarisation to gain experience and confidence.
EG
IN
(a)
It is important to ensure that operatives fully understand the functions of limit switches and
interlocks, and the serious dangers which can be caused by defeating or overriding them.
Most manufacturers provide some form of training or offer training courses.
10
When units are hired, it is important to ensure that the hire company provides adequate
operative familiarisation training unless trained operators on that type of machine are already
available.
11
The demonstration of equipment by a manufacturer's or hire company's representative

should not in itself be regarded as sufficient training for those who are to operate it. In
addition, the ability and experience of demonstrators and instructors should be verifiable,
especially in respect of the user's proposed mode of use of the equipment.
Other points
12
Operatives should only be permitted to use the type of unit they have been trained and
authorised to use.
13
After training, an 'in-Contractor license' should be issued and adequate records kept of initial
and any further training.
QCS 2014
14

Page 81
The safety element of the training must include safety awareness and recognition of
hazards.
1.4.4.17 Hazards
1
Some of the more common hazards associated with the use of MEWPs are outlined below.
The list should not be regarded as exhaustive.
Work on or near a highway

A collision with another vehicle. Always use barriers, lights, cones, notices, guards, or
arrange traffic diversions.
The knuckle or elbow of an articulated boom encroaching into a traffic lane. Always ensure
adequate space is available.
Standing and operating the platform in a traffic lane. Ensure that adequate safety provisions
have been made.
AL
IO
Overhead electrical cables
Electric shock from contact with, or electric arcing due to close approach to, overhead
electric cables is often fatal.
Always maintain a safe distance from overhead

electrical cables. The absolute minimum
distance, measured from the furthest point of
outreach to the ground level barrier or point
directly beneath the nearest conductor, must be
at least 6 m (when there is not work or passage
under the lines), although most electricity
companies recommend 9 m.
High winds can cause cables to sway and

significantly reduce this distance.
No part of any machine should be closer than 15 m to any overhead line on steel pylons (9
m if on a wooden or steel pole) unless by arrangement with the electricity company.
EG
IN
TE
AT
Falls of people or materials

9
Ensure that fall-arrest or work restraint equipment is worn at all times.
10
Do not allow any loose materials to accumulate on the platform.
11
If there is any danger of tools being dropped from the platform or basket by the operator
then, where practical, the tools should be securely tethered to a point within the basket;
alternatively, the area beneath the platform should be regarded as a danger area.
Entrapment of people
12
All moving parts and mechanisms should be properly and securely guarded.
13
All operators should be made aware of the hazards and procedures for avoiding entrapment
between the platform and any fixed obstruction.
QCS 2014

Page 82
Overturning
Check for soft ground, drains and other unsuitable ground conditions before deploying the
outriggers or stabilisers; check for the hazard before siting the machine.
15
Beware of overloading, especially if the platform or basket is being used at maximum

outreach to remove fans, motors or other heavy loads. Always observe the safe working
load.
16
Be careful when operating on a slope, even with the machine properly levelled by using the
stabilisers or outriggers.
17
Always check that the machine is stable before operating.
18
Be careful when travelling with the platform raised, especially on poor ground conditions.
19
Unless the machine is specifically designed to travel while the outriggers or stabilisers are
deployed, never attempt to travel in this manner.
20
Be careful not to collide with any obstruction or other vehicle.
21
Modern machines are fitted with a 'tilt sensor' which, if activated, only enables the working
platform to be lowered.
AT
IO
AL
14
Restricted or enclosed spaces
Extra care is needed when working in, or maneuvering into, restricted or confined spaces to
avoid collisions and or entrapment. A full and precise understanding of all controls is
essential.
23
If the self-propelled unit has an internal combustion engine, remember that the exhaust
fumes will cause a hazard in any confined or enclosed space.
24
Batteries for units should not be charged in enclosed spaces. There is a hazard of explosive
hydrogen gases being given off.
25
LPG powered vehicles should not be refuelled in a confined space. Any spillage of fuel will
quickly and dramatically expand into a large gas cloud. The gas will then accumulate at the
lowest point and create an explosive hazard.
EG
IN
TE
22
Interference with vehicles in public places

26
Additional interlocks or guards may be necessary to prevent the operation of, or tampering
with, ground level controls by unauthorised persons or children.
27
Care should be taken against the risk of entrapment as a result of inquisitive people, and
especially children, getting too close or underneath. Scissor lifts are particularly hazardous.
Other hazards
28
Never attempt to use a unit which has a nearly flat battery. This could result in the operator
being stranded aloft, in which case an emergency descent procedure would be required.
29
Avoid knuckles, joints and hoses becoming encrusted with paint, blasting grit, cement or
plaster. This can be avoided by using gaiters which are usually supplied by the
manufacturer.
30
Beware of the sideways thrust or torque from a drill or hand tools, or the recoil or thrust of
QCS 2014

Page 83
cartridge tools. Whenever and wherever possible, the platform should be square onto the
work. If it is sideways on, any thrust or recoil will push the platform away from the workface.
Boom length will increase this effect.
1.4.4.18 Inspections and thorough examinations

The maintenance of MEWPs is an essential feature in ensuring their safety when in use.
These Regulations require a competent person to draw up a schedule for maintenance,
taking into account the machine's mode of use, its frequency of use and the conditions under
which it is used.
These Regulations require the minimum of a thorough examination before being used for the
first time and, thereafter, every six months or when exposed to conditions that may cause
deterioration.
Records of such inspections should be kept until the next thorough examination or for a
period of two years.
However, the following inspections are recommended.
Daily inspections at start of work, usually carried out by the operator. They should check
the following:
IO
tyre pressures and wheel nuts
(b)
brakes and steering
(c)
fuel, oil, water, hydraulic fluid and battery levels
(d)
lights, warning devices and communications
(e)
structure for visible defects
(f)
all operating controls
(g)
all hydraulic fluid lines for any leaks, however small.
IN
TE
AT
(a)
EG
Weekly inspections by a competent maintenance fitter or operator after a specific number

of hours of use. They should be:
(a)
a check of all items covered under the daily inspection
(b)
an operational check of all functions of the machine
(c)
AL
a close visual examination of the chassis and structure.
A record that these inspections have been carried out should be kept. .
At six-monthly intervals or after 1,000 operational hours, or as recommended by the

manufacturer, a thorough examination should be made by a competent person and a written
report issued. A similar examination is recommended after an accident, major repair or
modification.
Maintenance work on scissor lifts

9
Special care is needed in the care and maintenance of this type of MEWP. No work or
inspection should take place within the stack of a scissor lift unless scotches or chocks are
used to prevent any entrapment hazard arising from mechanical or hydraulic failure leading
to movement of the elevating/lowering mechanism.
QCS 2014

Page 84

1.4.4 Appendix
AT
IO
AL
Mobile Elevating Work Platforms
Safety checklist
Has a risk assessment for the work been carried out?
Has the daily inspection been completed?
Are lanyards always clipped to a strong point on the machine?
Ensure that the wind speed is not excessive.
Are the correct signs and barriers erected?
Is the operative competent, authorised and fully fit?
Does the operator have access to a copy of the manufacturer's operating instructions?
Ensure that the safe working load will not be exceeded.
Ensure that it is all clear overhead.
10
Ensure that the ground conditions are satisfactory.
11
Ensure a current record of the last thorough examination is available prior to use.
12
Are all outriggers and stabilisers safely deployed?
13
Make sure that the machine is level.
14
Ensure as far as possible that there are no cellars, drains or other voids beneath the area
where the machine will be working.
15
Make sure that all tools and materials are secure.
16
Is a work restraint system or fall-arrest system necessary and, if so, is it available and used?
17
Make sure that the platform is not slippery or obstructed.
18
Ensure that all work is within the specified reach of the unit.
19
If movement of the machine is planned, ensure that the route is clear and safe.
20
Ensure that there are no restricted or confined space hazards.
21
Ensure that no part of the machine will encroach into a traffic route.
EG
IN
TE
QCS 2014
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Ensure that the machine operator is aware of the location of all fixed structures to avoid the
risk of entrapment.
22

Page 85
QCS 2014

Page 86

1.4.5
Hoists and Hoist Towers
1.4.5.1 Key points

Such equipment must only be designed (where appropriate), erected and operated by
trained and competent persons.
Partially completed hoists used to move scaffolding during scaffold erection offer special
challenges.
It is vital that the design of the hoist includes how the hoist will be supported or tied into
existing or temporary structures.
Hoists that are designated for the carriage of goods only must not be used for carrying
passengers.
Materials which are unhanded or otherwise loose must not be loaded onto inclined or other
types of mobile hoist in such a way that they can fall off.
Under no circumstances should the safe working load of a hoist be exceeded.
The safe working load will be displayed on a notice attached to the hoist; this is usually
expressed as a number of persons for passenger-carrying hoists.
Particular safety precautions apply to hoist towers to ensure the safety of passengers (where
applicable) and others working nearby.
Note:
Section 9, Part 7 of the QCS covers lifting equipment.
AT
IO
AL
TE
Hoists of various types are widely used on construction sites. These range from complicated
goods and passenger (tower) hoists, mobile hoists and inclined hoists, and still include the
humble gin wheel. As pressure increases to become more efficient and reduce manual
handling, hoists are an increasingly vital part of many construction operations. The smooth
and rapid movement of persons and materials assists in efficient management of projects.
Even where other methods of moving materials around site are to be used, for example by a
tower crane, it is not unusual to find a hoist used solely to assist the scaffold" erection
process.
The number and type of powered hoists available for hire has increased significantly and
their use may require a lifting plan to be drawn up by a competent person. This would need
to consider possible exclusion zones under the hoist in the event of the load dropping, safe
slinging methods, the appropriate lifting accessories, and so on. These are a different set of
risks compared with, for example, loads being carried within the enclosed cage of a goods
hoist.
Risks can arise from a late decision to use a hoist to solve a previously unforeseen problem
during the construction phase, for example, if planning to use a hoist attached to a scaffold
system that is already in place but which was not originally designed to take the additional
loadings. There is a need for careful planning and possibly discussions with the scaffold
designer before simply allowing a hoist to be hired and fixed to the scaffold.
The installation of hoists requires good planning and co-ordination and must be undertaken
by competent individuals. All hoists must be supplied and, where appropriate, erected,
altered and dismantled by people who are aware of these Regulations and the relevant
British and International Standards. Special attention must be given to ground conditions to
ensure adequate support for the hoist. The forces imposed on the structure by the hoist, its
loads and inclement weather, particularly high winds, must also be taken into account. Hoist
operators must be adequately trained, competent and authorised; and should be specifically
EG
IN
QCS 2014

Page 87
responsible for ensuring that the hoist is not overloaded or otherwise misused.
5
Except for manually operated hoists and any that have an independent power supply, the
requirement for a dedicated power supply to the hoist must also be considered. Power
requirements may also mean the need for generators, which introduces potential noise and
fuel storage and spillage issues.

Contractors must provide and maintain plant and systems of work that are, so far as is
reasonably practicable, safe and without risk to health.
Contractors have a duty to provide their employees with all necessary information,
instruction, training and supervision which is necessary to ensure, so far as is reasonably
practicable, the health and safety at work of the employees. This applies in respect of all
systems of work and all work equipment. In the appropriate circumstances, this duty is also
extended to cover subcontracted employees.
Employees have a duty to take reasonable care of their own health and safety and the health
and safety of others who may be affected by what they do.
AT
Where a hoist tower has to be attached to an existing structure, the client's biggest problem
is likely to be the provision of information on the location and load-bearing capacity of secure
anchorage points. Given the complexity, size and loading of many systems, this will mean
providing detailed information on the existing structure, which may necessitate the
commissioning of specialist reports. These would be passed on to the designers and
contractors to form part of the pre-construction information. Hoists impact on designers in
two ways:
TE
IO
AL
whoever designs the hoist installation must be a competent designer as defined within
these Regulations and therefore will assume all of the designer's duties under CDM
(b)
if the design concept is that the materials movement would be by hoist then it must be
feasible to erect one. What will the hoist tie to? Are there additional security aspects
that need to be considered? Have the attendant logistics for deliveries been
considered, for example, can a road closure be obtained?
EG
IN
(a)
Whoever appoints a contractor to provide a hoist will have to consider their competence.
CDM contains details of the type of questions to ask to verify organisational and individual
competence.
When considering the competence of potential contractors, relevant points for consideration
would be:
(a)
to establish how they would check the installation has been designed and installed
correctly
(b)
the extent of the training they provide to users
(c)
the handover and subsequent inspection arrangements.
Whilst many site managers are competent to carry out weekly inspections of, for example a
simple scaffold hoist, more complex hoists will require additional expertise.

1
These Regulations formalise the need for risk assessments. Each assessment must be
made by competent people and must consider all aspects of the work. A significant factor for
QCS 2014

Page 88
consideration is where the works will be carried out on occupied premises and where there is
the potential for interaction between the construction activities and other people such as the
public or the occupier's employees.

These Regulations require that all work equipment supplied by the Contractor must be safe
and without risk to health when properly used, is correct and suitable for the job, and
maintained in good working order. In respect of this module, this applies to hoist towers,
inclined and other types of mobile hoist, including hired machines and those purchased
second-hand.
Contractors must provide employees with adequate and appropriate training so that they
may use the work equipment safely and without risks to their health, and without risk to the
health and safety of any other person who may be affected.
Generally, these Regulations require:
AL
work equipment to be suitable for the job
(b)
proper maintenance of work equipment
(c)
thorough examination after installation before first use and at further suitable intervals
by competent persons
(d)
proper recording of inspection results
(e)
its use restricted to specified persons, where necessary
(f)
adequate information to employees concerning risks
(g)
suitable and adequate training on the work equipment
(h)
the guarding of all dangerous parts
(i)
protection against specific hazards
(j)
effective controls, stop controls and emergency controls
(k)
adequate lighting
(l)
appropriate warnings.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)

By definition, all types of construction hoist are classified as lifting equipment under these
Regulations. The main requirements of these Regulations are that:
(a)
(b)
(c)

or the load striking a person
(d)
(e)
lifting equipment must be equipped with suitable devices to prevent a person falling
down a shaft or hoistway
(f)
(g)
carried out safely
QCS 2014

Page 89
(h)

examination as is appropriate.
Reports of thorough examination must be made and retained, with all defects notified to the
Contractor who must take appropriate actions.

1
The use of any kind of hoist will inevitably involve either persons working at height or loads
being raised to height. In almost all cases the erection, dismantling, servicing, loading or
unloading of hoists will require that persons work at height.
The relevant requirements of these Regulations are:

Contractors to ensure that work at height is planned, supervised and carried out in a
safe manner by competent person
(b)
work at height is carried out using appropriate work equipment, particularly that which
provides collective fall protection
(c)
suitable and sufficient steps are taken to prevent falling objects which are likely to
cause injury to any person
(d)
where there is a risk of a person being struck by a falling object, steps are taken to
prevent unauthorised access into that area.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
1.4.5.9 Pre-planning (hoist towers)
When it has been decided (possibly as early as the tender stage) that a construction (tower)
hoist will be required on site, requirements must be quantified with regard to:
consideration of the locations for siting the hoist
(b)
the loads to be carried in terms of weight and whether goods only or passengers are
to be carried
(c)
the likely loading on the structure and whether any enabling work or structural
changes are required
(d)
any constraints in the position where the hoist can be erected and whether other
features such as scaffolds must be modified to accommodate the hoist
(e)
the loading on the hoist's foundations
EG
IN
TE
(a)
At an appropriate point both the user of the hoist, for example the Contractor, and the
supplier of the hoist should each assign an 'appointed person' who must liaise with each
other to ensure that all aspects of the hoist selection, delivery, erection and use are carried
out safely. The user's appointed person may need to rely upon the experience and
competence of the supplier's appointed person in order to fulfil their responsibilities.
The detailed requirements of these roles, both of which require specific training and previous
relevant experience, are considered to be outside the scope of this module. If necessary,
readers should refer to BS 7212:2006.
A full and detailed risk assessment should be carried out before a hoist is positioned. A
method statement can then be developed, which must then be agreed with the user.
1.4.5.10 Site survey

5
Prior to delivery of the hoist it will be necessary for both appointed persons to visit the site to
establish the practicalities of installing it. During the site survey the supplier's appointed
person will determine the appropriate type of hoist required, based upon criteria and
QCS 2014

Page 90
information on the intended usage of hoist provided by the user's appointed person.
(a)
co-location with materials storage areas
(b)
avoidance of hazardous features such as overhead cables
(c)
the need for safe access at all levels
(d)
safe access to the cage or platform at ground level
(e)
the need for foundations and drainage.
In selecting the most appropriate hoist, the supplier's appointed person will have to take into
account such factors as:
the space constraints of the area
(b)
access implications relating to the size and weight of the hoist components
(c)
ground conditions
(d)
the proximity of site features such overhead power lines, railway tracks, adjacent
public thoroughfares etc.
(e)
other work that will take place whilst the hoist is in place and how the site might
change during this period
(f)
foreseeable extremes in weather conditions.
AL
(a)
IO
The findings of the survey will determine the optimum position for the hoist, based upon such
factors as:
AT
1.4.5.11 Erecting hoists
Hoists which rest on the ground must only be erected on a firm base, adequately supported
and secured. All materials supporting the hoist must be strong enough to support the weight
of the completed hoist structure and its maximum load, and be free from defects.
The erection of the hoist must be carried out in accordance with a method statement that has
been discussed and approved by the user, as the proposed method and timing may impact
upon other site activities.
In many ways, this is the most dangerous part of the work. Anyone not directly involved in
erecting the hoist should keep clear of the area.
However, planning how the hoist will be erected and deciding 'who is responsible for what' is
key to implementing a safe system of work. This is particularly important where the hoist will
be built in conjunction with the erection of a scaffold. It is essential that the erection, and later
modification and dismantling, of hoists are properly planned, adequately supervised and
carried out in a safe manner by competent persons.
Where the hoist is attached to and supported by a scaffold, the scaffold must be designed to
take account of the imposed loadings. This becomes more important where the use of a
larger capacity hoist is being considered. These can lift weights of 1000 kg to heights of up
to 60 m and can obviously exert significant loading on the hoist anchorages and scaffold ties.
EG
IN
TE
1.4.5.12 Use of part-erected hoists

1
It is common practice for scaffolders to build three or four lifts of scaffold, raising the
components by hand, followed by the hoist company erecting the hoist to the height of the
scaffold. Further erection of the part-completed hoist is co-ordinated with the scaffold
contractors so that it can be used for hoisting scaffold components, as it follows the scaffold
up. In such circumstances, normal safe working practices may not be practical. For example,
QCS 2014

Page 91
the rules regarding the interlocking of landing gates cannot be applied when some of the
gates have not been installed. Detailed guidance is available and it is strongly recommended
that anyone faced with this situation on their site obtains and reads it. The guidance is
published jointly by the UK National Access and Scaffolding Federation.
1.4.5.13 Safety of hoistways, platforms and cages

Where necessary to prevent injury, hoistways and/or the hoisting machinery must be
segregated by a substantial enclosure at ground level. Suitable barriers must be installed at
all other access points, over the full height of travel, and wherever persons could be struck
by any moving part, to prevent injury and/or falls.
Consideration must be given to the area around the base of the hoist with regard to loading
and unloading materials, and whether a ramp or pit is required to facilitate access to the
platform.
The area between the cage or platform and the host structure (the threshold) must be
suitably protected to prevent any person or material falling through the gap at each landing.
AL
IO
1.4.5.14 Landings
Where access to a hoist tower is required at several levels, consideration must be given to
the space requirements at each landing with regard to loading and unloading the hoist. It is
essential that each landing and threshold (the area between the platform and landing) can
withstand the loads that will be imposed, with particular emphasis on items such as pallet
trucks which can impose significant point-loading.
The mechanical or electrical features of the hoist should ensure that:
AT
the gates at any landing point cannot be opened unless the cage or platform is at that
landing point
(b)
the cage or platform cannot be set in motion unless all of the landing gates are closed
and latched.
Winches for hoists must be constructed so that a brake is applied when the control lever or
switch is not held in the operating position (the dead-man's handle concept), or if the power
fails.
EG
1.4.5.15 Winches
IN
TE
(a)
1.4.5.16 Handover
1
Once erected, the hoist will be subjected to a thorough examination, after which the
supplier's appointed person should arrange to formally hand over the hoist to the user's
appointed person.
The user's appointed person should arrange for all trained operators to be present at the
handover of the hoist to receive:
(a)
familiarisation training on the use of the hoist in normal operations
(b)
instruction on what to do in emergency situations
(c)
instruction on how to carry out the daily pre-use inspections and weekly inspections.
A handover report, containing details of the instruction given, should be passed to the user's
appointed person.
QCS 2014

Page 92
1.4.5.17 Operation of hoists

It is essential that only operators who have been trained in the use of the hoist are allowed to
operate it. The operator should:
(a)
know the rated load of the hoist
(b)
be able to accurately assess the weight and distribution of any load brought on to the
hoist, and therefore identify if it is overloaded
(c)
have access to accurate wind-speed figures and be aware of any limitations placed on
the hoist
(d)
be able to lower the hoist to the next landing in the event of a power failure (passenger
carrying hoists only)
(e)
carry out daily pre-use checks and weekly inspections, and take the appropriate
follow-up action as necessary. On some complex hoists, it will be necessary for the
weekly inspection will be carried out by an employee of the hoist company.
AL
Each hoist should only be capable of being operated from one position at any one time.
Where the operator is not carried on the platform or cage, they must have a clear view at all
levels from the operating position or, if they have not, arrangements must be made for
signals to be given to them at each level.
Whatever the system of signalling used, it must be distinct and clear to the person being
signalled.
It is reasonable to expect that the hoist operator and the person(s) giving signals are at least
18 years of age. Irrespective of their age, hoist operators must be trained and competent
unless under constant supervision by a competent person, for the purpose of training.
AT
IO
IN
(a)
the safe working load
(b)
that passengers must not ride on the hoist.
EG
The platform of a goods hoist must carry a notice stating:
Cages for passenger hoists must carry a notice stating:

(a)
(b)
TE
1.4.5.18 Safety notices
the safe working load

the maximum number of passengers that can be carried
1.4.5.19 Carriage of persons in hoists

1
No person should be carried by a hoist, unless it is a designated passenger lift and it is

provided with:
(a)
gates that shut to prevent persons falling out or being trapped between the cage and
any other part
(b)
an efficient interlocking device which ensures that gates can only be operated when
the cage is at the landing place, and that the cage cannot be moved until the gate is
closed
(c)
an efficient automatic overrun device to ensure the cage will come to rest at its lowest
point of travel.
The construction of the cage must be such as to protect passengers from falling objects.
No person should be allowed to travel in a hoist that is designated a 'goods only hoist'.
QCS 2014

Page 93
1.4.5.20 Security of loads

All loads must be secured to prevent any part slipping and falling.
Loose materials, for example, bricks and slates, must be lifted in a properly designed box,
cage or other container. If loose materials are carried on the platform of a hoist, side boards
must be fitted or other precautions taken to prevent anything falling. Wheelbarrows must be
prevented from moving and must not be overfilled.
If hiring a powered scaffold hoist, consideration must be given as to how loads will be slung.
Hoisting a wheelbarrow full of render using fabric slings is not likely to be considered as an
acceptable or safe solution. Some of these now have a lifting capacity of 1000 kg and are far
removed from simple powered gin wheels. The use of the proper lifting accessories, which
can be hired-in with the hoist, is strongly recommended.
The slinging of loads may become an issue and whilst the suppliers may call the equipment
a hoist, some are more akin to cranes, and users may, depending upon the nature of the
load, need to be trained in safe slinging techniques.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.4.5.21 Inspection and thorough examination of hoists

Inspection
1
These Regulations recommend that construction hoists are subjected to the following regime
of checks and inspections, by a competent person who has been trained to the appropriate
level.
(a)
Daily pre-use checks, carried out by a person who has been trained to do it. This will
often be the hoist operator who has been trained by the hire company.
(b)
A more thorough weekly inspection, which, depending upon the complexity of the
hoist, may be carried out by the trained hoist operator. A greater degree of
QCS 2014

Page 94
competence is required than for carrying out daily checks.
In either case, any defect discovered should be reported to the user of the hoist and, where
necessary, the hoist put out of use until rectified.
In addition, passenger or goods hoists must be tested each time:
(a)
the height of the hoistway is altered or
(b)
gates or ties are added or removed to check for safe operation of the hoist.
Hoists which are not in regular use may need a special programme of checks, carried out by
a competent person.
All hoists must be thoroughly examined by a competent person:
before first use on site
(b)
after substantial alteration, modification or repair
(c)
after any exceptional circumstance, such as accidental overloading, and
(d)
at least every six months if used for carrying passengers, or
(e)
at least every 12 months if used for carrying goods.
IO
AL
(a)
AT
Accessories for lifting must be thoroughly examined at least every six months.
If, as a result of any thorough examination, a risk of imminent personal injury is identified, a
copy of the report must be sent without delay to the Qatar Enforcing Authority.
Note: Where manufacturers recommend inspection at different intervals to the statutory

periods, such recommendations should be followed and records kept.
IN
TE
1.4.5.22 Keeping of reports, records, etc.

These Regulations require that all testing, inspections and examinations are carried out by a
competent person, and records kept by ways or means best suited to the needs of the
Contractor concerned.
This enables the keeping of records in an electronic format provided that:
EG
(a)
the correct information is kept as is required by these Regulations
(b)
it is secure against loss or unauthorised interference
(c)
it is capable of being provided as a printed copy
(d)
it is authenticated by a competent person.
The reports or copies would normally be stored at the premises where the lifting equipment,
in this case a hoist or hoists, is being used. Where this is not possible due to space
constraints or for security reasons, then reports can be stored elsewhere, such as on a
computer, provided that they are readily accessible.
1.4.5.23 Mobile hoists

1
Mobile hoists and conveyors are now commonly used throughout the construction industry.
They can be easily transported to the site, are quickly erected and require little operating
space. They may be fitted with buckets, skips, platforms or cages.
QCS 2014

Page 95
Different models allow for basic height variations of between 8 metres and 30 metres,
although much greater heights can be reached
with extensions. Load capacity varies with the
model but lifting capacity of 500 kg is not
untypical.
1.4.5.24 Scaffold cranes or barrow hoists

1
These are lifting appliances within the meaning of

these Regulations
Care must be taken to see that they are not

overloaded and are only attached to scaffolds in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and the scaffold design.
AL
1.4.5.25 Inclined hoists

These are lifting equipment within the meaning of these Regulations. They are particularly
useful for trades such as bricklaying and traditional roofing, and indeed on a larger project
they have the potential to eliminate a significant amount of manual handling.
Inclined hoists are also known as roof tile or brick carriers. New developments include
telescopic and slewing functions. Load capacities go up to 200 kg and lateral extensions
may be up to 35 metres.
Inclined hoists are specifically designed for use at angles between 10 and 85, and they
may also incorporate a hinged section to allow the hoist to follow the pitch of a roof.
They also provide flexible solutions to the problems of removing demolition waste in
refurbishment situations. As they are in effect a conveyor belt system, care needs to be
taken to ensure that the guards to the rollers are in place to ensure that fingers and/or
clothing can not be dragged in. These are so called 'in running nips' and particularly where
the motor driving the hoist is powerful the potential for serious injury is significant.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
1.4.5.26 Gin wheels
In many cases provision has to be made to raise tools and

light materials manually with a rope and gin wheel or single
block. Whilst these are still in common use, modern variants
are available, which incorporate an automatic locking
mechanism to prevent the load from going into free-fall if the
hoisting rope is accidentally released.
The following provisions and requirements apply to gin wheels

connected to a scaffold:
(a)
poles and hooks should be strong enough to take the

load which is to be lifted and be properly secured to
prevent movement
(b)
all ropes should comply with the relevant British or

International Standard and fit the wheel correctly. They
should be marked with a tag confirming their safe
working load
(c)
preferably, the gin wheel should be suspended from a

ring-type fitting passed over the end of the supporting
tube and secured against lateral movement by scaffold fittings. If using a hook type, it
QCS 2014

Page 96
should be properly lashed and moused (see diagram opposite)
(d)
any joints in standards should be made with sleeve couplers
(e)
gin wheels should be suspended not more than 750 mm from the outer support
(f)
hooks used for supporting materials should be safety hooks and spliced into the rope
(g)
the maximum loading should be no more than 50 kg at 750 mm from the outer
support.
Inspection and thorough examination

Whilst of simple construction, gin wheels are categorised as lifting equipment so must be
thoroughly examined before use and then at least every 12 months, with a test certificate
issued.
Similarly, the lifting accessories used -such as the rope, hook and shackles -must be
thoroughly examined before use and then at least every six months.
Given the scope for the harsh treatment of this type of equipment, all parts of a gin wheel
assembly should be thoroughly examined at least every six months.
The extent of any thorough examination should reflect the risks that would arise from its
failure.
Where scaffolds are not available, other suitable anchorages must be provided if necessary
by using counterweights.
If the appliance to be attached is a gin wheel, a safety factor of not less than three must be
allowed when calculating the weight of the counterweight.
If the load to be lifted is G (in kilograms), twice G must be allowed because of the downward
pull on the tail rope when raising the load; to this 0.5 G is added for friction.
10
To calculate the counterweight required, the following formula should be used:
IN
EG
W = 3(2.5 x G x 0)
T
Where:
TE
AT
IO
AL
W = Counterweight
T = Tail length (metres)
G = Greatest load to be lifted
0 = Overhang (metres)
Reference BS 1261, BS EN 698, 699, 700 and 701
QCS 2014

Page 97

1.4.5 Appendix 1
Hoist towers safety checklist
Pre-planning
Have design calculations been obtained to ensure that the host structure can withstand the
loads
Have the risks associated with having the hoist delivered, erected, used, modified and
dismantled been assessed?
Have relevant other parties been informed of how these activities will affect the work that
they have to do?
Has a method statement been agreed between the hoist company and the user?
Have the hoist company and the user each selected an 'appointed person'?
Has there been sufficient liaison between both appointed persons?
Have arrangements been made for the installation and testing of an adequate and safe
electrical power supply?
If the hoist is not electric, have arrangements been made for the safe storage and decanting
of petrol?
Is a foundation necessary and if so:
AT
IO
AL
is a design necessary?
(b)
is the extent of enabling work known?
(c)
must arrangements be made for drainage?
IN
Protection and access
TE
(a)
Is the hoistway and any moving parts of its machinery protected by an enclosure?
Is the hoist tower completely enclosed on all four sides with wire mesh (except any landing)?
Have appropriate measures to taken to ensure safe access to the cage or platform at ground
level?
Is it not possible to set the hoist in motion whilst any gate at ground level or at any landing is
open?
Can the gates at any landing point only be opened if the cage is at that landing point?
Is any gap between the platform and tower (threshold) closely boarded?
Are landing stages kept free of plant or materials?
Is the hoist fitted with an overrun device at its highest point?
Is the hoist fitted with an efficient device capable of supporting the platform and load in the
event of a failure of ropes or lifting gear?
EG
Loadings
1
Are loadings placed on a hoist tower as recommended by the manufacturer?
Are all loads evenly distributed?
Are loads prevented from displacement?
Are all wheelbarrows chocked?
QCS 2014

Page 98
Is a safe working load notice displayed on the platform or cage and can it be clearly seen at
all levels?
Is the safe working load strictly complied with?
Is the carriage of passengers on goods only hoists clearly prohibited and this communicated
by appropriate signs?
Are special precautions put in place when the load will overhang the cage or platform?
Operation
Is it clearly understood that the hoist must not be operated from inside the hoist enclosure?
Are the hoist controls so arranged that the hoist can only be operated from one position at
any one time?
Is the operator's position safe and adequately guarded with hand-rails and toe-boards?
Is the operator provided with a clear view of the platform at all times?
Are all operators trained, competent, and not under 18 years of age (unless under constant
supervision of a competent person)?
Are all signals connected with the operation of the hoist clear and distinct?
Is adequate lighting provided at all loading places?
IO
AL
AT
Testing and thorough examination
Hoist
All hoists should be tested and thoroughly examined before use and after any substantial
alteration or repair.
All material (goods) hoists should have been subjected to a thorough examination within the
preceding 12 months.
It is good safety practice for all hoists to be inspected weekly by a competent person.
IN
TE
EG
Winch
All material (goods) hoist winches must be thoroughly examined every 12 months, or in
accordance with an examination scheme of lesser intervals.
All hoist winches should be inspected weekly by a competent person.
All wire ropes used in conjunction with a material hoist winch must be thoroughly inspected
every 12 months, or in accordance with an examination scheme of lesser intervals.
Major defects
1
Any report relating to a thorough examination of a hoist showing that there is a defect
involving an existing or imminent risk of serious personal injury must be sent to the Qatar
Enforcing Authority.
Any such report must also be given immediately to the Contractor. The hoist must not be
used before the defect is rectified.
Recording requirements
Tests and examinations
1
Tests and examinations must be recorded before first use, after re-erection, alteration or
repair and following alteration in height of travel.
The results of thorough examinations carried out before first use must be recorded in
QCS 2014

Page 99
whatever manner the company requires and that record must be available for inspection.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
It is good practice to ensure that a weekly inspection is carried out and recorded in whatever
manner the company requires and kept available for inspection.
QCS 2014

Page 100

1.4.6
Plant and Work Equipment
1.4.6.1 Key points

The term 'work equipment' is self-explanatory and very wide ranging; it refers to any item of
equipment being 'used' to carry out work.
The word 'used' means any activity involving the work equipment, including: starting,
stopping, repairing, modifying, maintaining, servicing or repairing.
Examples are an excavator, a hammer, a cement mixer and a hydraulic trench-support

system.
Broadly speaking, the effort necessary to comply will depend upon the complexity of the
equipment and its potential to cause harm; for example, a trowel will not require the same
level of inspection as an electric goods hoist.
These Regulations also require anyone who uses an item of work equipment to be trained
and competent to do so.
The effort and time needed to achieve the required level of competence will depend upon the
complexity of the equipment and its potential to cause harm.
Work equipment must be inspected as necessary to ensure that it can continue to be used
safely.
Certain work equipment must also be subjected to a schedule of thorough examinations.
AT
IO
AL
TE
It is all referred to as 'work equipment' and includes all:

toolbox tools, such as hammers and screwdrivers
(b)
powered tools, including electric and pneumatic (such as hand drills and circular saws)
(c)
testing and laboratory equipment, such as cube crushers
(d)
complex structures and machines made up of other components and equipment are
also covered, such as scaffolds.
IN
(a)
EG
Some types of powered hand tools, such as engine-powered cutting-off machines and
chainsaws, have the potential to cause severe personal injury unless they are used by
trained and competent persons in appropriate circumstances.
Another type of equipment commonly used in the construction industry that has the potential
to cause harm if not properly used is mechanical equipment that operates through the
application of leverage or torque. This includes jacks, winches and various cutting and
bending tools that incorporate manually operated mechanisms.
Tools and equipment operated by air also cause significant injuries upon failure of the tools
or the connections to the compressor.
All items of plant are classified as work equipment, including static and mobile equipment,
pedestrian-controlled equipment, ride-on equipment and remote-controlled equipment.
Plant used in construction operations on site includes static plant used in the actual
construction work, such as mixers and pumps.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

Page 101
QCS 2014
QCS 2014

Page 102

These Regulations place general duty on all Contractors to provide safe plant and machinery
for use at work. The self-employed worker is given similar duties regarding plant and
machinery that they provide for their own use.
Additionally, these Regulations place a duty on Contractors to provide the information,

instruction, training and supervision necessary for persons to be able to operate the plant
and machinery safely. Employees, in turn, are required to use the equipment safely, in
accordance with the training which they have been given.
A general duty is placed on any person who manufactures, designs, imports or supplies any
article, materials or substance for use at work to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable,
that articles and substances are, by design and construction, safe and without risks to health
when being used, set, cleaned or maintained by persons at work.
In addition, duties are placed on employees not to recklessly interfere or misuse anything
provided for health and safety purposes. This could include the act of removing a guard or
defeating a safety cut out switch.
AL
IO
measures into place, to either eliminate the hazards or, where this is not possible, reduce the
risk of injury or ill health resulting from those hazards, as far as is reasonably practicable.
The Contractor must, through the risk assessment process, establish any risks to the health
and safety of any employee (or anyone else) arising out of the use of any item of work
equipment. They must take the necessary steps to ensure that the equipment can be used
safely.
This will involve:
providing employees with comprehensible and relevant information on any risks that
exist with regard to the use of work equipment
(a)
EG
IN
TE
AT
(b)
informing employees of any control measures that are in place to reduce those risks
(c)
taking into account the capabilities of employees who are required to use work
equipment
(d)
providing adequate (health and safety) training in the use of potentially hazardous
work equipment.
work situation that presents a risk to the health and safety of themselves or of any other
QCS 2014

Page 103

1
These Regulations are fundamental to the health and safety aspects of how work equipment
is selected, used and maintained.
These Regulations place legal duties on Contractors with regard to work equipment that they
provide to employees and the self-employed for their own use, and those who otherwise
have control of work equipment, such as those who hire in equipment.
These duties are to:

only provide work equipment that is suitable for the job
(b)
ensure that work equipment is maintained in an efficient state and kept in good
working order by persons who are trained to do so
(c)
ensure that maintenance logs are kept up to date where they exist
(d)
ensure that where the safety of work equipment depends on the way it is installed, it is
inspected as necessary and records of inspections made
(e)
ensure that equipment subject to deterioration through exposed conditions, which

could give rise to a dangerous situation, is maintained and inspected at appropriate
intervals to allow remedy, or after each exceptional circumstance
(f)
ensure that where the use of work equipment involves a specific risk to the health and
safety of employees, the use, maintenance, repair, modification and service of the
equipment is restricted to competent and specified workers
(g)
provide employees with information, instruction and training in the use of work
equipment, where necessary for their health and safety, including abnormal situations
(h)
ensure that work equipment has been designed and constructed in compliance with
any European Safety or International Safety Directives?
(i)
ensure that dangerous parts of machinery are adequately guarded, where practical, by
fixed guards that cannot be defeated or removed
(j)
take measures to protect the health and safety of any person from exposure to:
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
(ii)
rupture or disintegration of any parts of work equipment

work equipment overheating or catching fire
(iii)
anything falling from or being ejected from any item of work equipment
EG
(i)
(iv)
the unintended discharge of any article, dust or gas which is produced by or

stored in the work equipment
(v)
the unintended explosion of any item of work equipment or any article or

substance produced, used or stored in it
(k)
ensure that users of work equipment are adequately protected from any part of the
work equipment that exposes them to very high or low temperatures
(l)
ensure that all work equipment has adequate controls, emergency controls and, where
necessary, a control system to enable it to be used safely
(m)
ensure that where stop controls are fitted, they bring the machine to a safe condition.
This may include bringing the machine to a complete stop and/or isolating it from
energy sources
(n)
ensure that where stop controls are provided, they are easily accessible and activated
(o)
ensure that all controls for use are easily identifiable and that where reasonably
practicable, the operator is in a position of safety when operating them
(p)
ensure that failure of any equipment leads to a safe situation and that the function of
QCS 2014

Page 104
stop controls are not affected, if reasonably practicable
ensure that each item of work equipment can be effectively isolated from all sources of
energy
(r)
ensure that work equipment is stable in use, if necessary by clamping
(s)
ensure that suitable and sufficient levels of light are available for the safe operation of
work equipment
(t)
ensure where reasonably practicable, that servicing, maintaining and cleaning of

equipment is carried out whilst it is shut down or with appropriate measures in place to
safeguard employees
(u)
ensure, where appropriate, that warnings are incorporated. These can range from
signs and notices, to alarms and beacons.
Specific conditions apply to mobile and self-propelled work equipment that has the potential
to cause injury to employees and third parties. These require the Contractor to:
ensure that no one is carried on mobile equipment unless provision is made for
carrying passengers and provisions for their safety are made
(b)
ensure where there is a risk of an operator being injured from plant turning over, that
sufficient steps are taken to prevent the machine from overturning or the provision of a
roll over protection system (ROPS) (see below for further detail)
(c)
ensure that equipment has facilities to prevent unauthorised start-up, has appropriate
controls, anti-collision measures (rail-mounted equipment) and, if required, has
suitable lighting and adequate fire-fighting facilities
(d)
ensure that the operator of such plant and equipment has suitable vision in all
directions, with visibility aids if direct vision is blocked, so far as reasonably practicable
(e)
ensure that remote controlled equipment stops automatically upon leaving its control
range and incorporates anti crush and impact devices that are appropriate
(f)
ensure that measures are taken to prevent drive shaft seizures and systems for
safeguarding drive shafts.
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
IN
(q)
These Regulations apply to all lifting equipment and accessories, such as cranes, shackles,
hoists and slings that are used to carry out mechanical lifting operations.
EG
1.4.6.7 General requirements applicable to all work equipment

Suitability for purpose
1
All equipment that is used to carry out a work activity must be suitable for the work to be
carried out.
QCS 2014

Page 105
Improvisation is dangerous and can lead to serious accidents occurring. A hand-held circular
saw being used instead of a router to cut grooves or rebates in timber, or a dumper being
used to transport persons, both have the potential to create dangerous situations.
All work equipment must be regularly maintained in an efficient state, in efficient working
order and in good repair (as described in the following section).
IO
AL
To be able to work as safely as possible, it is essential that work equipment is regularly

maintained, again by a competent person. In practice, maintenance is usually divided into
three types of activity:
(a)
daily basic maintenance can be as simple as regularly checking the oil and water
levels of a petrol-driven cement mixer, and is sometimes referred to as 'pre-use
checks'
(b)
periodic maintenance of equipment involves more detailed checks than carried out
under 'daily maintenance' and is usually carried out by a fitter as part of a pre-planned
programme of regular inspections, for example the replacement of engine oil or
hydraulic oil filters
(c)
detailed inspection and servicing, which may involve a degree of dismantling of the
equipment in a workshop and entail, for example, the measurement of wear of moving
parts or the integrity of hydraulic hoses and connections. This type of inspection is
carried out at specific intervals according to the manufacturer's instructions and is
often based on the 'running hours' of the equipment.
EG
IN
TE
AT
Maintenance
In conjunction with manufacturers' guidance, the competent person should draw up a

programme of the frequency of maintenance to be applied to work equipment.
In drawing up the programme, there will be a need to take certain factors into consideration.
(a)
The type, class and complexity of equipment.
(b)
Some types require weekly maintenance, others less frequent maintenance.
(c)
The frequency that a piece of work equipment is used.
(d)
Equipment in regular use will probably require more frequent maintenance than
equipment used infrequently.
(e)
The equipment's potential to cause serious harm. Powered machinery with the
potential to cause serious harm, for example a circular saw, will require more regular
attention than a hammer.
(f)
The likely deterioration of work equipment when not in use.
(g)
The environment that the equipment is used in.
QCS 2014

Page 106
There is no specific requirement to keep a maintenance log for work equipment, but where
there is one, it must be kept up to date.
AL
Inspection
All work equipment must be inspected at suitable intervals and records of inspections made.
As with maintenance, a competent person must set up an inspection regime, in accordance

with legal requirements and manufacturers' guidance. The frequency of inspection is not
specified.
10
The level of inspection will depend on the complexity of the equipment and vary from a visual
inspection to a comprehensive inspection that might include some dismantling and testing.
11
Usually inspection is undertaken as part of the maintenance activity as well, but inspection
falls into two broad headings.
12
A visual check of low risk items before use will suffice for items such as hand tools, to check
they are in good order. These inspections are not usually formally recorded inspections. In
addition, equipment that poses a high risk, such as some plant, or is used in a high risk
environment, such as a confined space, should undergo a visual check every time before
use -usually an operator inspection, provided they are competent to do so.
13
More complex equipment and equipment used in higher risk areas should also undergo a
formal inspection, after which the details of the inspection are recorded.
14
When deciding the frequency of inspections, the following points need to be considered:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
the type and class of the equipment
(b)
the frequency of use of the equipment
(c)
the potential of the equipment to cause serious harm if not maintained
(d)
the likely deterioration of the equipment whether in use or in store
(e)
the environment in which the equipment is being used.
15
Normal practice for most plant is to undergo a weekly formal inspection, in addition to the
driver's daily inspection. The frequency of inspections may be adjusted after considering the
above factors.
16
The following legislation also place duties on Contractors to ensure that specific work
equipment and areas of work (which will also involve inspecting the associated work
equipment) are inspected as highlighted below.
QCS 2014

Page 107
Work at Height
17
These Regulations specifically require the inspection of work equipment used for working at
height, such as scaffolds, and the recording of those inspections as detailed in these
Regulations.
Construction (Design and Management) CDM

18

(a)
excavations which are supported are inspected at specific intervals
(b)
energy distribution systems are checked as necessary to prevent danger
both of which will involve the inspection of the associated work equipment.
20
Furthermore, these Regulations place duties on those people in charge of sites with regard
to the safe use of vehicles on site.
AL
19
Records of inspection
These Regulations require that systems must be put in place for recording the results of
inspections, Unlike in the past when prescribed registers had to be used, Contractors can
produce their own records in paper form or electronically, providing that they can produce
hard copy if requested.
22
Inspection records should include the following:
AT
IO
21
information on the type and model of the equipment
(b)
any identification mark or number
(c)
its normal storage or use location
(d)
the date that the inspection was carried out
(e)
the name of the person who carried out the inspection
(f)
any faults found
(g)
any corrective action which was necessary
(h)
to whom the faults were reported and details of the action taken
TE
IN
EG
(i)
(a)
the date when repairs or other necessary action were carried out and by whom.
23
When hiring equipment, the records and results of the last inspection should be supplied, by
the hire company, with the equipment.
24
There is no specified format for records of inspection, providing the necessary details are
recorded.
Conformity with EU requirements or equivalent standards

25
Contractors should ensure that any work equipment that is in use or acquired, either new or
second-hand, has a 'CE' or equivalent mark. This indicates that there is a relevant European
product directive equipment and that it has been manufactured to known standards.
Training
26
Many accidents involving plant and equipment occur because the operator, through lack of
training, is not competent. It is therefore essential that persons are adequately trained in the
safe and correct use of the type of equipment they are required to operate.
QCS 2014
27

Page 108
The level and complexity of the training required should be such that an operative can
operate the plant or equipment safely, without risk to themselves or others who may be
affected by their actions or omissions. In addition, adequate training should be given to
supervisors and managers to allow them to understand the equipment and methods used.
Quick-hitches
The operatives selected for training should be both physically and mentally able to cope with
any situation the use of the item of plant or equipment demands. For example:
(a)
a person with a fear of heights would not be suitable for training as a tower crane
driver
(b)
a person who suffers from claustrophobia would be unsuitable as an operator of a

tunnel-boring machine.
(c)
The intellect of the person to be trained should also be judged, to ensure that they can
assimilate the information they will be expected to retain in order to carry out their
tasks safely.
AL
28
IO
1.4.6.8 Types of plant and equipment -specific requirements and risks

Mobile work equipment
Mobile work equipment is any work equipment that

carries out work while it is travelling, or which
travels between different locations where it is used
to carry out work. Mobile work equipment may be
self-propelled, towed or remotely controlled, and
may be fitted with attachments.
Examples of the types of equipment falling within

these definitions include:
trucks
(b)
diggers
(c)
loaders
(d)
forklift trucks
(e)
EG
(a)
IN
TE
AT
compressors
(f)
site transport
(g)
remote controlled rollers etc.
(h)
trailers.
General considerations
3
The movement of mobile work equipment, whether over site roads or within specific areas,
involves different and continually changing hazards. These have the potential to cause harm,
such as:
(a)
persons being struck or run over
(b)
persons being thrown from moving plant or equipment
(c)
persons being crushed by moving plant or equipment.
QCS 2014
Practical measures which should be considered to ensure that mobile plant and equipment
can be used safely on site are:
traffic routes should be planned in order to minimise congestion and risk of collision
(b)
these routes should be kept free of obstructions and properly maintained, with access
points restricted and clearly marked
(c)
appropriate speed limits should be introduced
(d)
one-way traffic systems should be implemented if possible and appropriate parking

places should be designated for delivery vehicles and those left temporarily on site
(e)
the operating area should be clear, as far as possible, on all sides
(f)
where excavation is taking place, operators must know the location of any overhead
power lines, underground cables, sewers, ducts or services before digging operations
commence
(g)
trenches and excavations should be fenced or otherwise guarded
(h)
ground conditions should be stable and sufficiently level for the operations being
carried out and the equipment used
AL
(a)
(i)
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO

Page 109
where equipment fitted with outriggers or stabilisers is used, the load-bearing capacity
of the ground should be assessed so that the imposed loads do not exceed this
capacity
(j)
where site vehicles are employed in tipping material into excavations, baulks of timber
or other effective blocks should be provided to prevent the vehicle over-running the
edge
(k)
excavations may have to be provided with extra support or shoring to prevent the
weight of adjacent vehicles causing a collapse (surcharging).
Vehicles and plant designed for specific operations must only be used for those operations,
and the design limitations and permitted modes of operation specified by the manufacturer
must be complied with.
The overloading or overstressing of plant is particularly dangerous and must be prohibited.

Manufacturers' and suppliers' instruction and information manuals should be made available
for all who may need them.
QCS 2014

Page 110
Forward-tipping dump trucks
(a)
overturning on slopes, rough ground and at the edges of excavations
(b)
travelling with a high-lift skip in the raised position
(c)
the driver failing to observe pedestrians who are then run over by the front wheels
(d)
the driver being thrown from the vehicle whilst travelling over rough ground
(e)
driver error due to lack of experience and training, including accidental operation of
the controls.
Efforts to reduce dumper accidents must focus on:

effective site management and control of how dumpers are operated generally
(b)
selecting the correct machine for the job
(c)
ensuring that machines are routinely inspected, serviced and withdrawn from use if
unsafe
(d)
ensuring that only trained, competent drivers are allowed to operate dumpers, which
includes removing the key when not in use
(e)
ensuring that site roads are suitable and safe for the use of dumpers.
AL
(a)
IO
Amongst mobile plant, forward-tipping site dumpers are worthy of special note because they
are involved in a disproportionately high number of plant-related accidents. This applies to
both rigid-frame and articulated dumpers. The common causes of these accidents are:
AT
Material unloading and loading
Materials that are unloaded or tipped from plant should be deposited in planned locations
where they will not cause an obstruction or hazard.
10
A signaller should assist the driver during any tipping operation to ensure that it is safe to tip
and that there are no other hazards to be encountered during the operation.
11
Operatives must not remain on vehicles that are being loaded unless the vehicle is equipped
with a reinforced cab or falling object protection system (FOPS).
12
Operatives working with plant or vehicles, or on sites where there are regular vehicle
movements, should be provided with the appropriate personal protective equipment which
should include high visibility clothing.
EG
IN
TE
Roll-over protection systems (ROPS)

13
Where there is the risk of mobile work equipment rolling over, Contractors have a duty to
ensure that protective measures, such as reinforced cabs or a roll-cage, are fitted to stop
mobile equipment doing anything more than falling onto its side, thereby minimising the risk
of a person being crushed. The cabs or roll-cages should give adequate clearance for
operatives to escape if the equipment does completely overturn.
14
Where there is a risk of an operator being thrown then crushed by equipment rolling over, a
suitable restraining system (such as a seat belt) should be fitted.
15
This requirement may also apply to equipment fitted with a fully enclosed cab if there is a risk
that a person being thrown from their seat could be injured by coming into contact with the
inside of the cab's structure.
16
Restraining systems must be fixed to a strong anchorage point on the main structure of the
equipment.
QCS 2014
In areas of limited access, ROPS may be removed only if a suitable and sufficient risk
assessment has been carried out and there is no risk of overturning.
AL
17

Page 111
AT
There is no requirement for forklift trucks fitted with a vertical mast to be provided with
specific roll-over protection where the mast acts as an anti-roll device. There is, however, no
exemption from forklifts having to be fitted with restraining systems.
TE
Where there is the risk to persons operating mobile work equipment of being struck by falling
material, overhead protection or reinforced cabs must be fitted which stop any falling
material striking the operator.
EG
IN
19
Falling object protection system (FOPS)
18
IO
Roll-over of forklift trucks
Prevention of unauthorised start-up

20
It must not be possible for self-propelled mobile work equipment to be started by

unauthorised persons when the vehicle is parked. Additionally, it must be possible to isolate
the drive mechanism. This can be achieved by the removal of ignition keys or starting
handles.
Lighting and warnings

21
When self-propelled mobile work equipment is used in the dark or in reduced visibility, lights
must be fitted and used to enable the work area to be adequately illuminated. In addition,
amber flashing beacons that give warning of the presence of the vehicle should be fitted and
used. It is required that some types of construction vehicles be fitted with audible reversing
QCS 2014

Page 112
warning devices or similar devices, such as CCTV.

Ride-on plant
Ride-on plant refers to equipment that is operated or used with persons 'riding on' the piece
of plant as opposed to riding in it. Some trucks, excavators and planers are among the types
of equipment within this category.
23
Plant that is not designed to carry passengers should be provided with a notice clearly
stating 'No Passengers'.
24
People can only be carried if the vehicle has been designed for such a purpose. Passengers
and drivers must not be carried unless proper seating, strongly and correctly connected to
the main structure of the vehicle, is provided.
25
Where passengers are permitted to be carried, additional restraining devices must be

provided.
26
Where on-board work activities have to be carried out, seating should be provided, if
possible, with work platforms fitted with suitable barriers or guard-rails to stop operatives
falling from the equipment whilst it is in motion.
IO
AL
22
AT
All-round visibility
To ensure safe operation of plant, a standard is being accepted whereby the operator of the
plant or vehicle has all-round vision from the operating position. It is generally accepted that
the operator should be able to see, at all times, an object positioned 1 metre above ground
level and 1 metre away from the plant through 360 visibility.
28
This can usually be achieved by the use of additional mirrors, convex mirrors or by CCTV.
29
Where this is not possible, consideration should be given to providing a competent, qualified
signaller working exclusively with the plant operator.
30
Contractors meeting the above criteria would be seen to be doing what is reasonably
practicable to provide a safe place of work and a safe system of work in respect of that item
of plant.
31
Every Contractor must ensure that the work equipment is so constructed or adapted as to be
suitable for the purpose for which it was provided.
32
In selecting the work equipment, every Contractor shall take account of the working
conditions and to the risks to the health and safety of persons who are in the vicinity of
where the work equipment is to be used.
EG
IN
TE
27
1.4.6.9 Pedestrian-controlled work equipment

1
This type of equipment relies heavily on the experience and competence of the operative for
its safe operation. Small pedestrian-operated rollers, vibrating or 'whacker' plates and
surface grinders are among the types of equipment within this category.
QCS 2014

Page 113
Common accidents involving pedestrian-controlled equipment occur when operators of small

vibrating rollers are crushed between the machine and adjacent obstructions. This is one
reason why these Regulations require efficient stop controls to be fitted.
It is also essential that operators be provided with, and wear, strong protective footwear to
prevent their feet from being injured.
TE
AT
IO
AL
EG
IN
1.4.6.10 Static work equipment
This type of small plant should be sited on firm, level ground with the brakes applied and
wheel chocks in position, as necessary.
Cement or concrete mixers, compressors and pumps are examples of static equipment.
Plant should be sited clear of personnel with allowance for safe access by authorised
persons.
QCS 2014

Page 114
The correct procedures for starting, operating and shutting down should be correct and
strictly complied with.
All gauges, valves, connections and guards should be checked for tightness and proper
attachment as a matter of routine.
Other points to be considered are:
AL
appropriate personal protective equipment must be provided by Contractors and used

by operatives
(b)
access to all dangerous or moving parts of the equipment must be provided with
guards which are securely fixed and in position
(c)
adequate ventilation is essential when using equipment in confined places, with

harmful fumes being extracted to the open air
(d)
any air lines, spray guns or blasting nozzles, used as an accessory to the equipment,
must never be pointed towards other persons or at any part of the body
(e)
hoses, pipes or cables should be kept clear of traffic and pedestrian routes. Simple
ramps and barriers can be used to protect cables etc., and to provide safe access
(f)
air hoses should be fitted with whip-checks at every connection to prevent the hose
connections from blowing apart
(g)
electrical and mechanical plant and equipment, unless specifically designed to

eliminate the risk, must be switched off or stopped before adjustments are made and
before any accessories are connected or disconnected.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
1.4.6.11 Manually operated hand-held plant and mechanical equipment

1
Selection of the correct equipment for the job in hand is vitally important. Choosing modern
equipment that reduces the risk of injury or ill health is fundamental to creating safer working
environments.
The environment in which the equipment is used also has a bearing on the safety of the
QCS 2014

Page 115
AL
operative. It may be safe to use a hand saw from a pair of builders' steps, but to use the
modern electric equivalent from them could have fatal results.
Hand-held power tools, whether powered electrically, by internal combustion engine,

hydraulically, by cartridge or compressed air, are covered by the definition.
As the use of these types of tool has increased, so has the potential for serious injury. Old
type hand-operated smoothing planes could cause nasty cuts if wrongly used, but those
injuries bear no comparison with the injuries that could occur when wrongly using their
modern electrical equivalent.
Cutting chases in a wall using an older type cutting disc produces unacceptable amounts of
dust. Modern equipment that is fitted with a dust suppression mechanism is safer and much
healthier.
Also included within this category is the type of equipment that requires human effort in its
operation, such as jacks, bar-bending machines, pipe-threaders and other machines where
the principles of leverage or torque are utilised.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
QCS 2014

Page 116
Many jobs, such as nailing tiling battens on a roof, that traditionally would have been
achieved by using a hammer, are now carried out by using nail guns powered by gas
canisters. Equipment of this type is open to abuse, which can result in horrific
consequences. It is possible to propel a nail in free flight from a nail gun giving it the lethal
potential of a firearm.
Included in this category are hand tools, ladders scaffolding, etc. Also included are huts and
other temporary structures used for welfare accommodation or fuel and materials stores.
IO
AL
1.4.6.12 Non-mechanical plant and equipment
AT
Hand tools
Unfortunately, many persons working in the construction industry do not appreciate that
simple hand tools have the potential to cause serious harm.
In many cases where hand tools are used, persons react when things go wrong, instead of
proactively checking to ensure that things do not go wrong in the first place.
Cold chisels with burred-over mushroom heads can result in a person losing an eye when a
burr breaks off during use. A hammer head becoming detached from its shaft can cause a
serious injury and not necessarily to the user.
In both examples, the potential to cause harm can be drastically reduced if a system of
regular inspection and maintenance, as required by these Regulations, is in place.
EG
IN
TE
1.4.6.13 Access equipment

Scaffolds
1
Scaffolds, if incorrectly erected or exposed to misuse, can also be the cause of accidents.
Such equipment must:

(a)
comprise suitable components that have been inspected prior to use
(b)
be regularly inspected every 7 days or after alteration, damage or high winds, the
QCS 2014

Page 117
results of the inspection recorded, and proactive maintenance regimes put into place
(c)
3
not be interfered with or altered by untrained individuals.
Many accidents have occurred due to installation of scaffold with damaged equipment such
as split boards and bent tubes.
Ladders and other wooden access equipment

Work equipment made from wood will not last for ever. It will deteriorate with age and use.
Regular inspection of the equipment is essential for safety and will prolong its useful life,
giving early indication of deterioration. It is commonplace for inspections of ladders and
steps to be formally recorded, with each ladder or step being given a specific identifying
number.
A key issue with wooden ladders and steps is that they must not be painted or treated with
anything that would hide any faults or defects.
The regular inspection of wooden builders' steps must include the hinges that connect the
support stays and the restraining rope that controls the opening of the steps as well as the
condition of the timber.
Wooden extension ladders have ropes, pulley blocks, and clips that fit over rungs. These are
vital to the safe use of these ladders and therefore must again be regularly inspected.
The simple wooden pole ladder must be checked to ensure that the wire ties beneath certain
of the rungs are in place and tight. Rungs must be checked to ensure they are still firm and
do not twist, and the stiles checked to ensure they are not split.
All work equipment has the potential to be the cause of accidents. Obviously, the potential
and the consequences differ between types of equipment.
10
Management systems for the training and instruction of operators, and the inspection of
equipment, must be in place and complied with.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

Page 118
QCS 2014
QCS 2014

Page 119

1.4.6 Appendix 1
Plant and work equipment
Safety checklist
When was the plant or equipment last checked or tested?
Are statutory records being kept up to date?
Is the item of plant or work equipment the most suitable for the job in hand?
Is a risk assessment necessary to determine the most suitable item of plant or work
equipment?
Have any faults developed through misuse or neglect?
Have faults or defects been correctly and promptly reported?
Are those faults reported being remedied promptly and effectively?
Does all plant or equipment comply with the relevant standards?
Are spot checks made on the condition of hand tools and other minor items of equipment?
10
Is there a procedure for the inspection of and repairing or replacing of such equipment and
tools?
11
Are drivers and operators trained on specific plant or equipment aware of the hazards that
are associated with its operation?
12
Is safety training included in any instruction which is given to operatives?
13
Is personal protective equipment available and issued to all who need it?
14
Have lists of authorised drivers and operators been kept up to date?
15
Is equipment issued to and used only by authorised persons?
16
What information is available in relation to specific items of plant? Where is it kept and by
whom?
17
Do checks show that plant is being used safely?
18
Do operatives know the requirements of these Regulations and those which have a bearing
on their activities, and are they aware of their own responsibilities?
19
Are rules observed by site vehicles?
20
Has any instance of overloading or over-stressing of plant come to light?
21
Are ROPS, FOPS and driver restraint systems fitted if appropriate?
22
Does the operator of mobile or self-propelled plant have adequate visibility in all directions
and are all visibility aids in good order?
23
Are there any signs of the unplanned or dangerous location of any plant?
24
Are the locations of supply cables, pipes, services, etc. identified before any plant or other
equipment is brought into the vicinity?
25
Where appropriate, are communications adequate between:
26
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
the teams doing different work within the same area?
(b)
the different shifts using the same plant?
(c)
the workers engaged in a co-ordinated operation?
Has all work equipment been identified?
QCS 2014

Page 120
27
Have inspection regimes appropriate to the equipment been instigated?
28
Are the records of the inspections and tests being kept up to date?

1.4.7
Woodworking Machines
1.4.7.1 Key points

Woodworking machines are classified as 'work equipment' and must therefore comply with
certain legal requirements.
Many items of woodworking equipment, with their partially exposed blades or cutters, have
the potential to cause serious personal injury if they are not properly used and maintained.
Users of woodworking machinery must be trained on each type of machine that they are
required to operate and be judged as competent by their Contractor.
Hand-held, bench-mounted and free-standing woodworking machines can all be found on

sites; all types present particular hazards to the operator and, in some cases, other people.
The use of woodworking machines also has the potential to cause occupational health
problems if appropriate preventative measures are not taken.
Section 18 of the QCS covers carpentery, joinery and ironmongery.
AT
IO
AL
Woodworking machine cutters can inflict very serious injuries and it is essential that these
Regulations for guarding them are strictly observed. Neglect or ignorance of these
Regulations governing the use of such machinery creates the conditions in which accidents
occur.
Furthermore:
IN
TE
the use of woodworking machines
(b)
contact with some hardwoods used
(c)
contact with the dust produced
EG
(a)
All have the potential to cause occupational health problems.
Within these Regulations, particular reference is made to circular saws and planing
machines, since these are most commonly used on-site in the construction industry.

1
those risks.
Compliance with these Regulations mainly involves Contractors pro-actively managing:
QCS 2014

Page 121
(a)
personal injury risks resulting from contact with moving blades and cutters
(b)
personal injury risks resulting from the maintenance of the machines
(c)
occupational health risks resulting from the use and maintenance of the machines.

1
These Regulations stipulate the requirements for the safe operation and maintenance of all
'work equipment', which includes woodworking machines.
In the context of this section, the parts of these Regulations that are particularly relevant
cover such factors as:
(b)
the guarding of dangerous parts of machines and provisions relating to working space,
floors, lighting, noise and temperature. They apply to all places where woodworking
machinery is used
(c)
the requirements relating to the instruction and training of persons operating work
equipment, including those employed in 'taking-off' and maintenance, and specify the
duties of operatives
(d)
work equipment being fitted with suitable controls, emergency controls and where
necessary, a control system, to enable it to be used safely
(e)
ensuring that each item of work equipment can be effectively isolated from all sources
of energy
(f)
the requirements for maintenance and inspection.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
work equipment being suitable for the job, and kept in good working order by persons
who are trained to do so
The parts of these Regulations that are particularly appropriate to the use of woodworking
machinery are expanded throughout.
EG
(a)

1
These Regulations place duties on Contractors and employees with regard to the provision,
use and care of personal protective equipment (PPE). Where the risks to health and safety
cannot be controlled by other means, PPE may be issued and used; as a method of
controlling risk it is the last resort.
However, when using woodworking machinery on site, PPE will often be the only practical
method of controlling risk, particularly health risks
These Regulations place legal duties on Contractors to:

(a)
provide suitable PPE for their employees and make sure that it is used properly
(b)
make sure that items of PPE are compatible when more than one item is worn at the
same time. For example, if wearing safety spectacles, it is possible that the side-arms
would interfere with the seal of a half-face respirator
(c)
make an assessment of the most suitable PPE to protect against the identified risks
(d)
make sure that PPE is properly maintained where this is necessary
(e)
replace PPE that is damaged or lost
(f)
provide suitable accommodation where necessary for PPE that is not in use
QCS 2014
(g)

Page 122
provide employees with adequate information, instruction and training on:
(i)
the risks that the PPE will avoid or limit
(ii)
why the PPE has to be worn and how it should be used
(iii)
how to maintain the PPE in efficient working order and good repair.
These Regulations place legal duties on employees to:

(a)
use any PPE provided in accordance with the instruction and training provided
(b)
report to the Contractor the loss of or defect in any PPE provided.

In the context of this section, the relevant requirements are that the Contractor or person in
control of the site must ensure:
the competence of everyone who has to use or supervise the use of a woodworking
machine
(b)
a safe place of work with safe access and egress and sufficient working space is
provided
(c)
the prevention of risks of fire or explosion
(d)
the provision of adequate fire detection methods and fire-fighting equipment
(e)
adequate levels of lighting, taking into account the nature of the work being carried out
(f)
an acceptable level of site tidiness and cleanliness
(g)
suitable information, instruction and training where necessary for work to be carried
out safely and without a risk to health.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
The following list gives examples of different types of woodworking machine. It should not be
taken as exhaustive.
Circular saws
(b)
Sanding machines
(c)
Bandsaws
(d)
EG
(a)
IN
1.4.7.7 Types of machine
TE
Routing machines
(e)
Planing/thicknessing machines
(f)
Chainsaws
(g)
Mortising machines
(h)
Tenoning machines
(i)
Vertical spindle moulding machines, including high-speed routing machines
(j)
Multi-cutter moulding machines having two or more cutter spindles
(k)
Trenching machines
(l)
Boring machines
(m)
Automatic and semi-automatic lathes.
1.4.7.8 Training
1
No person should be required to operate any type of woodworking machine unless they have
QCS 2014

Page 123
been trained and instructed in its operation. They must either be competent or under the
direct supervision of someone who is.
2
Training should include instruction on all machines the person is likely to operate and the
types of work to be undertaken on the completion of training. Instruction on the provisions of
these Regulations and the methods of using guards, devices and appliances required by
these Regulations must be included. Training should emphasise the dangers connected with
the use of such machines.
Contractors will need to make sure that they do not employ young people in work situations
where:
the work is beyond their physical or psychological capacity
(b)
it involves harmful exposure to hazardous substances
(c)
it involves a risk of accidents which the young person, by reason of a lack of

experience etc., would not recognise
(d)
there is extreme heat, cold, noise or vibration.
AL
(a)
Employees using woodworking machines must use and keep properly adjusted all guards
and other safety devices, and use push sticks, spikes, push blocks, jigs, holders, backstops,
and any other safety devices provided.
They must report to responsible persons any defects in machinery, guards, devices or
appliances and any damage or defects in the surface or ground around the machine.
AT
IO
TE
1.4.7.10 Occupational health Hearing protection

Woodworking machines can be particularly noisy when in use and the noise generated will
be a significant hazard to health unless adequately controlled.
Ideally, the level of noise will be controlled by means other than issuing personal protective
equipment (PPE), although in practice this will often not be possible on construction sites.
Where work activities are liable to expose employees to certain levels, Contractors to carry
out an assessment of the risk and implement the necessary control actions, which will often
translate into:
(a)
EG
IN
identifying suitable hearing protection (PPE)
(b)
issuing it to those persons who are at risk
(c)
ensuring that it is worn in certain circumstances
(d)
providing adequate information, instruction and training on the risk to health arising
from noise and the correct use of hearing protection.
There are three action levels at which particular actions should be taken;
(a)
The lower exposure action value (80 dB(A)), at which an employee may request the
provision of hearing protection from the Contractor, should he or she so wish.
(b)
The upper exposure action value (85 dB(A)) at which the Contractor is required to
provide hearing protection for employees and ensure that it is worn by all employees
who are at risk.
(c)
The exposure limit value (87 dB(A)) above which no employee may be exposed.
In work areas where the noise is at or above the upper exposure action value, the Contractor
QCS 2014

Page 124
is required to create hearing protection zones, designated by appropriate signs, within which
everyone must wear the hearing protection provided.
1.4.7.11 Vibration protection

1
Contractors are required to control the level of vibration experienced by employees whilst at
work.
In the context of using woodworking machines, the predominant problem is considered to be

hand-arm vibration. Whilst several manufacturers have produced 'anti-vibration' gloves,
laboratory testing has shown these to be largely ineffective against vibration at the most
damaging frequencies. In some circumstances, the fact that such gloves will keep the hands
warm may offer limited benefit against hand-arm vibration. The control of hand-arm vibration
will have to be achieved by other means.
AL
1.4.7.12 Respiratory protection

Contractors must control substances hazardous to health and to control occupational health
risks arising out of the use of hazardous substances.
As noted earlier, hardwood dust is known to be a cause of nasal cancer. Ideally, airborne
dust will be controlled by the fitting of effective extraction systems or dust-collection bags to
woodworking machines and hand-held tools that generate either softwood or hardwood dust.
However, if for any reason the control of dust is not possible in this way, operators must be
provided with, and wear, suitable respiratory protective equipment.
AT
IO
TE
Depending on the machine being used and the nature of the work being carried out, it may
be necessary for machine operators (and possibly anyone assisting them) to wear eye
protection, such as goggles or a full-face shield of a suitable impact-resistant grade.
It may be necessary to provide operatives with suitable gloves to protect against skin
damage whilst handling timber, particularly unplaned timber. Furthermore, the skin of a small
number of persons is adversely affected by the natural oils that occur in some woods,
notably cedar.
EG
1.4.7.14 Skin protection
IN
1.4.7.13 Eye protection
1.4.7.15 Working environment

1
Sufficient clear and unobstructed space must be provided around machines to allow persons
to work without the risk of injury.
Floors should be level, in good condition, free of loose material (wood chips, wood shavings
and sawdust) and must not be slippery.
Where woodworking machines are being used on site, the temperature of any indoor
workplace must be reasonable, having regard to the purpose for which the place is being
used.
Where a reasonable temperature cannot be achieved or maintained, effective means of

providing warmth for operatives should be introduced. If it is not a construction site, then a
temperature of 16C should be maintained but, where work is of a physically demanding
nature, a temperature of 13C is appropriate.
QCS 2014

Page 125
Adequate natural or artificial lighting must be provided so that the work being carried out on
each machine can be done safely. Artificial light must be positioned or shaded to prevent any
glare affecting the operator.
1
Saw blades must not be cleaned while they are in motion or with the power supply to the
machine switched on.
All machines must be of good construction, manufactured with sound material and properly
maintained. Unless a machine is hand-held, it must be level, and fixed securely to a
substantial structure which ensures its stability.
1.4.7.17 Controls
Every machine must be fitted with start and stop controls which can be quickly and easily
operated by the machinist.
AL
1.4.7.18 Braking
An essential safety feature of most woodworking machinery is the provision of an automatic

brake.
This is to ensure that, if there is a risk of an employee coming into contact with tooling during
the rundown period, the machine stops within 10 seconds or less, as defined by European
Committee for Standardization (CEN) standards.
AT
IO
TE
1.4.7.19 Retrofitting of brakes
All work equipment should be provided with the necessary controls which bring the
equipment to a safe condition in a safe manner. To achieve this, a risk assessment should
be carried out to determine whether the rundown time should be reduced and the retrofitting
of brakes to a machine is necessary.
If the risk assessment shows that there would be no added safety benefit, then braking does
not have to be provided.
Examples include machines fitted with interlocking guards that enclose the cutters and
cannot be opened until the cutters have come to rest. Some machines might be totally
enclosed by a noise hood, but the same interlocking requirements will apply.
In these situations, the machine rundown time is immaterial since an acceptable standard of
safety has been achieved by guarding alone and subsequently there is no risk of contact in
the rundown period.
Another example is where the blade, tool or cutter returns automatically to a safe position,
such as a cross-cut saw fitted with a spring return which retracts the blade into a protective
housing at the end of the cutting operation. However, if a risk assessment shows that the
machine has a long rundown period and is in regular use by more than one person,
consideration should be given to fitting a brake. This is because the machine could still be
running down after use by one person when a second person pulls the saw carriage out of
the protective housing, unaware that the blade is still rotating.
As well as enhanced safety, braking can improve productivity since more rapid stopping will
allow quicker setting, adjustment and unjamming of a machine.
EG
IN
QCS 2014

Page 126
1.4.7.20 Guarding cutters - general

'Cutters' include saw blades, chain cutters, knives, boring tools, detachable cutters and solid
cutters. Cutters must be guarded to the greatest practicable extent, having regard to the
work being done.
Guards must be of substantial construction, properly secured and adjusted, and maintained
constantly in position while cutters are in motion.
Adjustments must not be made to any guard whilst the cutters are in motion, unless safe
means (i.e. mechanical adjusters) are provided for those adjustments to be made.
The shape and size of guards may change as technology develops alternative safeguards, if
these are at least as effective as before.
Every dangerous part of any woodworking machine must be securely fenced, unless it is in
such a position or of such construction that it is as safe to every person on the site as it
would be if it were fenced.
AL
IO
1.4.7.21 Portable electrically-powered saws
Portable electrically-powered saws should always be disconnected from the electrical supply
before any adjustments, repairs, cleaning or any type of maintenance is carried out.
Whenever possible, to reduce the risk from electric shock, all portable electric tools should
operate from a 110 volt supply and be earthed or double insulated. The mains input to the
110 volt transformer should be protected by a residual current device (RCD), commonly
known as a 'power breaker'.
Portable electrically-powered saws must never be carried by their supply cable. Furthermore:
TE
when operating, the supply cable must always be kept clear of the saw blade
(b)
the power plug must be examined each time, prior to use, for damage and security of
the cable
(c)
all electrically-powered saws should be examined regularly by a competent electrician.
EG
IN
(a)
Care should be taken to ensure that the spring-loaded, lower blade guard returns to cover
the blade after every cut. This guard, also known as the swivel guard, is designed to uncover
the saw teeth when material is being cut then automatically covers the saw teeth when the
saw is withdrawn. This guard must never be wired in the open position.
AT
1.4.7.22 Riving knife (also called splitter or spreader)

1
The riving knife must be securely fixed below the table level, be of the correct radius, behind
and in line with the saw blade.
It must be strong, rigid, smooth and easily adjustable.
The radius of the knife must not exceed the

radius of the largest saw blade for which the
machine has been designed.
It must be adjusted as close as practicable to the

saw blade. Any gap between the riving knife and
the blade must not exceed 8 mm at table level.
QCS 2014

Page 127
In the case of a parallel plate saw blade, the knife must be thicker (usually about 10%) than
the parallel plate of the saw blade to form a wedge in the saw cut, thereby preventing the
timber 'ripping' the saw blade.
Where the diameter of the saw blade is less than 600 mm, the top of the knife should not be
more than 25 mm below the top of the blade.
Where the diameter of the blade is 600 mm or more, the knife must extend at least 225 mm
above the machine table.
1.4.7.23 Top guard (crown guard)

The guard must be strong and easily adjustable.
It must be adjusted to extend from the top of the riving knife to a point as close as practicable
to the surface of the material being cut; or to a point not more than 8 mm above the material
being cut where squared stock is being hand fed.
The guard should have flanges on either side of the blade and be adjusted so that these
extend beyond the roots of saw blade teeth. Where the guard has an adjustable front
extension piece, it must be flanged on the side remote from the fence, and adjusted to
extend beyond the roots of saw blade teeth above the saw table.
Note: Some saws have adjustable extensions to the front of the guard.
AT
IO
AL
1.4.7.25 Size of saw blade
The part of the blade below the table must be guarded to the greatest extent practicable.
TE
1.4.7.24 Bottom Guard
Saw benches with a one-speed spindle must not use a saw blade less than 60% of the
diameter of the largest saw blade which the bench is designed to use. In the case of saw
benches with more than one spindle speed, the blade must not be less than 60% of the
diameter of the largest blade which the machine is designed to use at the fastest spindle
speed.
A notice should be displayed on the machine specifying the smallest diameter saw blade that
may be used.
EG
IN
1.4.7.26 Limitations on use

1
No circular saw may be used for cutting

rebates, tenons, mouldings or grooves unless
the cutter above the table is effectively
guarded.
The saw blade teeth must project right

through the upper surface of the timber at all
times in any ripping operation.
A circular saw must not be used for crosscutting logs unless the material is firmly held
by a gripping device, secured to a travelling
table.
QCS 2014

Page 128
1.4.7.27 Push sticks

1
Push sticks must be available for use on every table-mounted circular saw, and used to:
(a)
keep hands away from the saw blade
(b)
feed material throughout any cut of 300 mm or less
(c)
feed material during the last 300 mm of any cut more than 300 mm in length
(d)
remove cut material from between the saw blade and the fence.
1.4.7.28 Removal of material

Assistants employed to 'take-off' cut material may only stand at the delivery end of the
machine.
Where this operation must be performed, the delivery end of the machine table must extend
(over its whole width) at least 1.2 m from the up-running part of the saw blade.
This requirement is not applicable to machines which have a roller table, or a travelling table,
or to portable machines with a maximum blade diameter of less than 450 mm.
IO
AL
a suitable top guard, riving knife and ripping fence to be fitted
(b)
that the fixed guards should be of adequate strength and construction to withstand
normal operational use
(c)
the fitting of a suitable switch attachment to enable the operator to control the saw at
the bench.
TE
(a)
Note: Some manufacturers have designed a saw bench complete with a top guard, riving
knife assembly and fence for use with their hand-held circular saws.
IN
Mounting a hand-held circular saw onto a support for use as a bench circular saw, requires:
EG
AT
1.4.7.29 Bench-mounted portable hand circular saws
1.4.7.30 Narrow bandsaw
A narrow bandsaw is defined as a machine with a blade not exceeding 50 mm in width,

running vertically.
The saw wheels and the whole of the blade,

except the part which runs downward,
between the top wheel and the machine
table must be enclosed by guards.
The part of the blade between the top wheel

and the friction disc or roller must be
guarded by a front plate, as close as
practicable to the blade, and having a flange
at right angles to the plate extending behind
the saw blade.
The friction disc or rollers must be adjusted as close to the surface of the machine table as
practicable.
QCS 2014

Page 129
1.4.7.31 Planing machines

1
(See illustration in Appendix 3)
If the machine is not mechanically fed and is used

for surfacing work, it must be fitted with a cylindrical
cutter block.
Table gap
If the planer is hand fed, the gap between the cutter

block and the front edge of the infeed or delivery
table must not exceed 6 mm, measured radially
from the centre of the cutter block.
A planing machine must not be used for cutting any

rebate recess, tenon or mould unless the cutter is
effectively guarded.
IO
AL
1.4.7.32 Limitations on use
AT
1.4.7.33 Bridge guard
Planing machines not mechanically fed must have a bridge guard over the cutter block,
mounted approximately centrally and not liable to accidental displacement.
The guard must be strong, rigid and easily adjustable, vertically and horizontally, to allow
work to be carried out without the risk of injury.
The guard must cover the full length and diameter of the cutter block, be mounted centrally
over it and be securely fixed.
When 'flatting' squared stock:
IN
TE
the gap between the end of the guard and the fence should not exceed 10 mm
(b)
the gap between the upper surface of the wood and the underside of the guard should
not exceed 10 mm.
(c)
When 'edging' (i.e. planing the narrow surface of a squared stock):
(e)
(d)
EG
(a)
the gap between the end of the guard and the surface of the wood should not exceed
10 mm
the gap between the underside of the guard and the surface of the feed table should
not exceed 10 mm.
When 'flatting' and 'edging' are carried out successively, the clearances between the bridge
guard and the material for each operation must be no greater than 10 mm.
When the planing of adjacent surfaces of stock of square cross-section is carried out as
successive operations, the bridge guard must be adjusted so that the clearance between the
material and the guard, or the fence and the guard, never exceeds 10 mm.
Where the above adjustment of the bridge guard is not practicable because of the shortness
of the material, a suitable push block with handholds must be provided and used.
1.4.7.34 Cutter block guards

1
In addition to the bridge guard, hand-fed overhand planers must be provided with an
QCS 2014

Page 130
effective, easily adjustable guard over the part of the cutter block which is behind the fence.
1.4.7.35 Combined machines used for thicknessing

1
The part of the cutter block exposed in the table gap must be effectively guarded.
1.4.7.36 General safety procedures

The following general procedures should be observed to ensure the safety of operators and
anyone else who may be affected by wood machining activities:
knives, saws and cutters should be properly sharpened and correctly set
(b)
circular saw blades should be checked for cracks, particularly near the gullet at the
root of the teeth. Defective items should not be used
(c)
before a machine is started, a check should be made to see that the cutters, saws or
knives are of the correct type and are securely fixed; and that guards are properly
adjusted and secure
(d)
the area around the machine should be cleared of waste material and there should be
sufficient space to stack work safely before and after machining
(e)
the floor must be clean and free from oil, grease or anything else which might cause
the operator to slip or trip
(f)
multi-speed machines must be started at their lowest speed
(g)
guards should be set to give the minimum clearance necessary for the material being
worked. They must always be in position
(h)
the operator should not wear loose clothing, and should wear goggles, masks or ear
protectors, if necessary
(i)
workplaces should have adequate heating and be well lit
(j)
adjustments must never be made to a machine while it is in motion, unless safe

provision is made to do so
(k)
push sticks and jigs should be available and in use whenever necessary
(l)
offcuts, chips and sawdust should not be removed from the machine table with the
hands while machine is in motion
(m)
material should not be forced through the machine
(n)
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
any fault should be promptly reported to responsible persons. If a fault develops, the
machine must be switched off immediately
(o)
machines must be switched off when left, even for a short period. They should also be
switched off when the operator is speaking to somebody
(p)
operators should never allow their attention to be distracted while operating a

machine, neither should anybody seek to distract them
(q)
at the end of a work operation, the machine must be switched off and isolated.
1.4.7.37 Operational safety - circular saws

1
Low peripheral speeds result in inefficient cutting as do dull, badly set or badly ground saw
teeth. The extra effort applied to feed the wood increases the accident risk.
Deposits of sap, gum or resin on the blade tend to cause the saw to jam, or stall, or the
timber to stick. Such deposits must never be cleaned whilst the blade is moving or with the
power supply to the machine switched on. The saw should be stopped, electrically isolated
and the proper tool used.
QCS 2014

Page 131
1.4.7.38 Chainsaws
Due to their high potential to cause injury, the use of chainsaws on building and construction
sites is not generally recommended.
Where chainsaws are used on site, they must be used only by operatives who are fully
competent, have received specific and nationally approved training, and who are certificated
to carry out the intended operation.
A specific risk assessment should be carried out for the operation and a written method
statement produced covering the operation, including the need for full personal protective
equipment, safe working at heights and, if necessary, a workplace safely away from other
workers,
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 132

1.4.7 Appendix 1
Safety checklist - general
Operatives
Is a list kept of operatives who are authorised and competent to operate woodworking
machines?
Are operators only required to operate machines on which they have been trained and are
competent?
Are operatives properly supervised, particularly those under 18?
10
Is adequate training given on the types of machine to be used and the kinds of work to be
done?
11
Are operatives provided with all necessary personal protective equipment, including goggles,
ear protectors, face masks and other protective equipment, where required?
12
Is the wearing of loose-fitting clothing prohibited at those machines where entanglement

could be a problem?
IO
AL
13
AT
Machines and surrounding area
Is a programme of planned preventative maintenance in place for all woodworking

machines?
Are the start and stop controls so situated that they can be easily reached and operated?
15
Are all cutters guarded to the greatest extent practicable?
16
Are all machines level and securely fixed to ensure their stability?
17
Are all machines of sound construction and properly maintained?
18
Is sufficient space provided around a machine for safe working?
19
Are floors level, in good repair, free of loose material and not slippery?
20
Is adequate natural or artificial light provided in the workplace without glare being caused?
21
Is the temperature of the workplace satisfactory?
22
Is respiratory protection required?
23
Are noise levels reduced as far as practicable?
24
Is ear protection available where required?
25
Is eye protection required?
26
Is skin protection required?
27
EG
IN
TE
14
Is extraction equipment provided for chips and particles as is required on specified

machines?
28
Has provision for the extraction of fumes been made where necessary?
29
Are fire extinguishers of the correct type immediately available?
30
Are suitable personnel fully trained in the use of fire-fighting equipment?
31
Do machines, as far as possible, run off a 110 volt supply with mains-powered equipment
protected by a residual current device (RCD)?
QCS 2014

Page 133

1.4.7 Appendix 2
Circular Saw
Safety checklist
Riving knife
Is the riving knife secure, in a sound
condition, and easily adjustable?
AL
Is the radius correct and in line with the saw blade?
Is the gap between the riving knife and the saw blade correct?
Is the riving knife of the correct thickness?
Is the height of the riving knife correct for the saw blade fitted?
AT
IO
Saw blade
Is the saw blade in good condition -sharp with no cracks, and not less than the smallest
diameter permitted?
Is a notice fixed to machines, specifying the smallest permitted blade diameter?
Does the saw blade project through the upper surface of the timber when ripping?
Is the saw blade above the table effectively guarded, when the machine is rebating,
tenoning, moulding or grooving?
IN
TE
10
EG
Fence
Is the fence correctly adjusted and secured?
Top guard
11
Is the top guard sound and easily adjustable?
12
Is it adjusted correctly for the work being done?
13
Do the flanges at either side of the blade extend below the roots of the saw teeth?
Front extension guard

14
Is the front extension guard adjusted to give maximum protection, and does it cover the saw
teeth?
Bottom guard
15
Is the blade guarded below the table (open frame machines)?
Feeding work
16
Is a gripping device in use when cross-cutting?
17
Is there a push stick or are push blocks available and in use?
QCS 2014

Page 134
Taking off
18
Does the delivery table extend at least 1.2 m from the up-running part of the saw blade?
19
Is the assistant, if present, correctly positioned?
AT
IO
AL

1.4.7 Appendix 3
TE
Safety checklist
Table
Is the gap between the table and the cutter not more than 6 mm?
Is the table gap as small as possible?
Bridge guard
EG
IN
Is the bridge guard rigid, strong, securely fixed and easily adjustable?
Is the bridge guard centrally mounted over the cutter block?
Does the bridge guard cover the full length and diameter of the cutter block?
Is the bridge guard adjusted to exclude the risk of injury, as far as is practicable?
Cutter block
7
Is the cutter block guarded, on the side of the fence, remote from the bridge guard?
Limitations on use
8
Is the cutter effectively guarded when rebating, recessing, tenoning and moulding are taking
place?
Is the machine fitted with a cylindrical cutter block if it is being used for surfacing?
10
Is the bridge guard correctly adjusted when 'flatting' or 'edging' is taking place?
11
Are push sticks available and in use?
QCS 2014

Page 135
Combined machine used for thicknessing

Is the cutter block exposed in the table gap effectively guarded?
13
When thicknessing, is an anti-kickback device fitted, or notice displayed specifying one piece
only?
14
Is an extraction system provided to remove and collect any wood chips?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
12
QCS 2014

Page 136
AT
IO
AL

1.4.7 Appendix 4
Safety checklist
Are saw wheels and saw blades guarded correctly?
16
Is the saw blade between the top wheel and disc or roller guarded by a frontal plate as
closely as possible, and does the flange extend behind the saw blade?
17
Are rollers or discs correctly adjusted?
18
Is the saw blade tension correct?
19
Is the saw blade in good condition and sharp?
EG
IN
TE
15
QCS 2014

Page 137
AT
IO
AL

1.4.7 Appendix 5
Safety checklist
Operative
Is the operative suitably trained in the correct use of the machine?
Does the operative understand that there should be no loose clothing, ties or scarves, etc.?
Is the operative aware of the relevant Regulations?
IN
TE
EG
Prior to use
Ensure the electrical power plug is removed from the supply socket before carrying out priorto-use checks.
Are the machine and plug compatible with the electrical supply?
Are all leads, plugs and switches undamaged?
Does the on/off trigger and safety interlock operate freely?
Is the correct type of saw blade fitted for the work which is to be carried out?
Is the saw blade in good condition, sharp and not cracked?
Is the saw blade effectively guarded, above and below the soleplate?
10
Is the condition and the function of the spring-loaded bottom guard checked before use?
11
Does the spring-loaded bottom guard return to cover the saw blade after every cut?
12
Is the saw blade securely fitted to rotate in the correct direction? (Teeth should point
upwards at the front end of the saw towards the soleplate.)
13
Has the fence (if used) been adjusted to the correct dimension?
14
Has the saw been adjusted to the correct depth and angle before use, with the teeth
projecting just through the underside of the material?
15
Are all locking nuts and securing devices properly tightened and fastened?
QCS 2014

Page 138
In use
16
Is the saw being held correctly with two hands using the main and front hand grips?
17
Is the material being cut adequately supported?
18
Is the fence or a straight edge being used as a guide as necessary?
19
Has a check been made to ensure that the clamps do not impede any movements of the
saw?
Is there sufficient free cable on the saw?
21
Is the correct stance being taken behind and in line with the saw?
22
Is the work area clear and free of obstructions?
23
Is the correct protective equipment in use?
24
Do all other personnel on site know that the operator must not be distracted whilst he or she
is operating a saw?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
20
QCS 2014

Page 139
AT
IO
AL

1.4.7 Appendix 6
Safety checklist
TE
Operative
Is the operative competent, adequately and properly trained and supervised?
Is the operative familiar with the type of machine they are using and with the manufacturer's
operating instructions?
Is the correct personal protective equipment being worn?
Is the operative aware that whilst using a chainsaw there must be no loose clothing, ties,
belts, etc.?
Prior to use
EG
IN
Is the ignition switched off?
Are new chains soaked in oil prior to use?
Is the chain sharp and in good condition?
Is the guide bar excessively worn? If so, it should be changed.
Does the chain brake function correctly?
10
Is the tension of the chain correct?
11
Is the lubrication reservoir functioning?
12
Are all handles and guards firm and secure?
13
Are all switches and controls effective?
14
Are wood or plastic wedges available to free the saw if it jams?
QCS 2014

Page 140
In use
Is the correct starting procedure (i.e. on the ground) undertaken?
16
Is the stance of the operator correct?
17
Does the operator keep both hands on the machine when it is in use?
18
Is there a safe system of work in place for cutting, avoiding kickback?
19
Is the chainsaw correctly adjusted so that the chain does not rotate when the engine is idling
with the chain brake released?
20
Is the operator aware that the nose of the guide bar should not be used to cut?
21
Are all bystanders kept well clear of any cutting operations?
22
Do all other personnel on site know that the operator must not be distracted whilst he or she
is operating a saw?
23
Is the work area kept clear and free from obstruction?
AL
15
Are all parts checked for damage and soundness?
25
Are the cutting components protected from damage?
26
Are any defects found reported to the supervisor?
27
Is the chainsaw stored safely?
AT
IO
24
After use
Refueling
Is the correct type and grade of fuel used, from a properly marked, leak-proof, securely
capped container?
29
Is all refueling carried out in a well-ventilated area outdoors?
30
Is there any leakage of fuel or spillage during refueling?
31
Are fuel and lubrication systems leak-free and functioning correctly?
32
Are fuel and lubrication system fluid levels correct?
33
Has clothing (which may have been contaminated during refueling) been changed prior to
the saw being operated?
34
Is any spilt fuel removed from the saw or work area prior to saw operation?
35
Is the saw always started at least 3 metres away from the refueling area?
36
Is care taken to ensure that refueling is never carried out near to fires, sparks or other
sources of ignition?
EG
IN
TE
28
Transportation
37
Is the chainsaw switched off when being transported, even if it is only a few paces?
38
Is the chainsaw always carried by the front handle?
39
Is the chainsaw always carried with the engine muffler away from the body, to prevent
burns?
40
Has the chain guard (scabbard) been fitted?
41
If the chainsaw is being transported in a vehicle, has it been secured to prevent overturning
and damage?
END OF DOCUMENT
QCS 2014

Page 1
Part 1.05: Other hazardous Activities (Regulatory Document)
REGULATORY DOCUMENT .......................................................................... 1
1.5
OTHER HAZARDOUS ACTIVITIES ................................................................ 1
1.5.1
Working With or Near to Buried Services ...................................................... 4
1.5.2
Lone Working .............................................................................................. 19
1.5.3
Electrical Safety on Site............................................................................... 25
1.5.4
Working In and Around Excavations............................................................ 56
1.5.5
Working in Confined Spaces ....................................................................... 75
1.5.6
Safety in Demolition..................................................................................... 95
1.5.7
Safety in Piling ........................................................................................... 115
1.5.8
Safety in Formwork/Falsework .................................................................. 124
1.5.9
Explosives ................................................................................................. 126
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 2
FORWARD
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 3
Sr. No
QCS 2014
Section No.
Part No.
Part Name
Submittals
7.5.2

Chart
Submittals
7.6.1
10
Health and Safety
All
All
All
11
10
11.4.6
14
14.4

Lifting Tackle
15
Temporary Controls
All
All
All
16
Traffic Diversions
16.1.3
Safety
General
8.1.6
Safety
General
8&9
1.4.12
10

Work
1.6
Safety
11
Deep Foundations
4.9.1.7
Safety Precautions
12
Deep Foundations
13
General
14
Asphalt Plants
15
14
AT
IO
37 & 38
42
Item Name
AL
Page No. Item No.
4&5
1.6
Temporary Fencing
15
7.8.13
Safety Requirements
14.2.2
Safety
General
1.3.2
Health and Safety
17
8.1.9
Safety
18
9.2.5
Safety Requirements
19
10

Survey
4,5&6
10.1.7
Safety Requirements
20
11
11.2.2
Safety
21
General
16
1.2.8
Safety Guards
22
General
19
1.2.16
23
19
Hot Water Storage
5.1.6
Safety
24
21

Installation
7&8
1.1.11
25
21

Installation
14
1.1.23
Safety Interlocks
26
24
General
1.1.4
Scaffolding
27
29
Design Aspects
1.1.5
28
29
2.3.1.5
Safety
29
29
Tunnel
18
4.5.8
Safety Regulations
30
29
Tunnel
19
4.5.9
Fire Prevention
31
29
Tunnel
21
4.6.4
32
29
Concrete Structures
7.1.10
Safety Railing
EG
16
IN
TE
4
7,8, 9 &
10
QCS 2014

Page 4

1.5.1
Working With or Near to Buried Services
1.5.1.1 Key points

Many injuries and deaths have occurred because the location and exposure of buried
services were not carried out in a safe manner.
Cable plans and charts cannot be depended upon to accurately identify the exact route of a
buried service.
Safe digging procedures are essential; final exposure of buried services by hand-digging will
be necessary.
Prior consultation with utility companies will be necessary in most circumstances.
There are now devices available for locating all types of underground service; operators
must be trained and competent in their use, including the interpretation of survey results.
The exposure of buried marker tape or tiles whilst digging will indicate the presence of buried
services below.
It should always be assumed that buried services are 'live' unless proved otherwise.
On certain sites old and abandoned metallic services or other metallic items can pick up
signals from known services and distort survey results.
Accidental damage to any buried service must be reported immediately to the relevant
authority.
IO
AT
Section 8, Part 9 and Section 8, Part 10 of the QCS cover trenchless pipeline construction and
pipeline cleaning and inspection, respectively.
Note:
AL
IN
Buried services are, to a great extent, out of sight and out of mind until, perhaps, there is a
fault or another reason to excavate. Every year people are injured and some killed due to
accidental contacts with buried services, such as electricity cables and gas pipes. In every
case, the damage and injury could have been avoided if the proper procedures had been
followed.
EG
TE
1.5.1.3 Legislative requirements

The Management of Health and Safety
1
All work, including any work in relation to the location and exposure of buried services, must
have been subject to a risk assessment.
Once those hazards have been identified, it is then the Contractors duty to put control
measures into place to either eliminate the hazard or, where this is not possible, reduce the
risk of injury as far as is reasonably practicable.
any risks that exist in the workplace and of any control measures that have been put in place
to reduce those risks.
In the context of this module, some of the factors that the risk assessment must take into
QCS 2014

Page 5
account are:
(a)
the equipment and work methods employed to safely identify, locate, expose and, if
necessary, work on the services
(b)
the potential hazards posed by
(c)
accidental damage to the buried services
(d)
the competence of the persons who are to plan, supervise and carry out the work
(e)
satisfactory reinstatement of the disturbed ground.
situation which presents a risk to the health and safety of themselves or of any other person
The Provision and Use of Work Equipment

All equipment used in conjunction with excavations or buried services is 'work equipment".
suitable for the job and ensures that the equipment is maintained and kept in good working
order.
It is essential that any work equipment used to locate buried services:
AT
IO
AL
is suitable and sufficient, for example, a cable avoidance tool that works by detecting
electromagnetic fields will not detect a plastic gas pipe
(b)
is fully serviceable and calibrated where appropriate
(c)
is used by a trained and competent operator who has the knowledge and experience
to interpret the results.
TE
(a)
IN

Under these Regulations, the client must provide the project-specific information needed to
identify hazards which can be obtained by making sensible enquiries. This includes
information from utility companies on the location of underground services.
11
By providing this information to the designer, the client creates an opportunity for hazards to
be avoided by design.
12
Information on new services installed should be passed to the Engineer for inclusion in the
health and safety file.
13
Contractors are required that energy distribution installations are located, checked and
clearly marked to prevent danger.
14
Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken, so far as is reasonably practicable, to prevent
risks to health and safety from construction work likely to damage or disturb underground
services
15
Furthermore, under these Regulations the following requirements are particularly relevant to
working with or near to buried services:
EG
10
(a)
no duty-holder may arrange for any person to carry out design or construction work
unless they are competent to carry out the work they are required to do, or are under
the supervision of a competent person
(b)
all duty-holders must co-operate with each other to ensure that each can fulfil their
duties under these Regulations
QCS 2014

Page 6
(c)
every person working on a project under the control of another person is required to
report to that person anything which is likely to pose a risk to health or safety of any
persons
(d)
duty-holders must co-ordinate their work activities to ensure, so far as is reasonably

practicable, the health and safety of those people carrying out the construction work
and any other person who might be affected by it
1.5.1.4 Types of buried services

The most obvious examples of buried services are those used to carry gas, electricity, water
and telecommunications. These may be found almost anywhere. However, drains and
sewers are also buried services, the location of which must be identified before excavation
starts.
There are many other types of buried services, the presence of which may not be known or
detected unless a thorough investigation is carried out. They include services associated
with cable television, hydraulics, process fluids, pneumatics, railway signalling, petroleum
and fuel oils (large bore, deep pipelines linking major installations), private
telecommunications, highway authorities, street lighting, civil aviation and military authorities.
Work in the vicinity of gas transmission pipelines, normally operating at above 7 bar (100
psi), often requires special measures to be taken and the local gas distribution company will
be able to supply details of appropriate procedures.
AT
IO
AL
1.5.1.5 Risks and cost of damage
A significant risk of injury results from accidental contact with electricity cables. Buried
electrical cables often carry high voltages, and accidental damage and contact has resulted
in death or major burns. Most injuries are caused to people using pneumatic drills or
jackhammers and involve 415 volt cables which were located within 0.5 metres of the
surface.
Damage to gas pipes can cause a leak resulting in fire and an explosion.
In the event of a gas leak, suspected gas leaks or any other emergency relating to gas,
immediately ring:
EG
IN
TE
Gas Emergency Service Number:

4
The consequences of damaging water pipes and telephone cables may be less immediately
evident but are nonetheless serious, both in terms of disruption and cost. The interruption of
services can create serious problems for places critically dependent upon them - for
example, hospitals - and many people are likely to be put at risk or inconvenienced.
The cost of damage can be considerable. Fibre optic telecommunication cables are very
expensive and a simple break may mean the replacement of a 2 kilometre length, at a cost
measured in thousands of Riyals. Indirect costs, in some cases resulting from loss of
production and disruption of business activities, will be borne by all affected, including those
whose negligence caused the incident.
1.5.1.6 Checking for buried services

1
Before any digging takes place, a check must be made with all public and private utilities,
such as gas, electricity, telecommunication and cable TV companies, and the owner or
occupier of the land for the existence of services in the proposed work area.
The routes of known buried services should be clearly marked on the site plans
QCS 2014

Page 7
When looking at plans, it should be borne in mind that reference points may have been
moved, surfaces may have been regraded, services moved without authority or consent, and
that not all service connections or private services are shown. Plans must be interpreted with
care; the route shown may only be approximate. There may be other services present not
shown on the plans.
It is not unknown on certain sites for old and abandoned services or other buried metallic
items, such as tram lines or cast iron pipes, to pick up the electro-magnetic signals from
known cables and distort the survey results.
Where appropriate, the route, when established, should be identified with paint, tape or
markers but not steel spikes which might penetrate a cable or pipe.
A line on a plan does not necessarily mean a pipe or cable is located exactly in the position
marked. It only indicates that it is roughly in that location. The exact position will only be
known when the buried service is uncovered.
In many cases, there is no indication above the ground that a buried service exists. They
may be found almost anywhere and at any depth from immediately beneath the surface to
1.5 metres or more below.
Indications that buried services do exist include the presence of lighting columns, illuminated
traffic signs, telephone boxes, concrete or steel manhole covers, and hydrant and valve pit
covers.
A change in the colour of the surface material may indicate the line of a trench where
services have previously been installed.
10
Indicator posts, usually on the verge, or plaques on walls, are a clear sign that buried
services are present. Indicator posts belonging to water and gas suppliers often give the size
of the pipe and its distance from the post. The absence of posts or covers must not be taken
as evidence that there are no buried services. Access covers can be as much as 1.5 km
apart.
11
Cables or pipes may be laid loose in the ground, run in earthenware, concrete, metal,
asbestos or plastic ducts, or be buried in cement-bound sand, loose sand, fine backfill or
material dissimilar from the surrounding ground. Plastic marker tape, tracer wire, boards,
tiles or slabs may have been laid above the service to indicate that there is something below.
These may, however, have been removed or damaged in the past; they are also liable to be
laterally displaced by ground water or movement and thus no longer indicate the true
location of the service.
12
It is common practice for brightly coloured polythene tape (150 mm wide) or expanded
plastic mesh, sometimes incorporating metallic tracer wire, to be placed in the backfill about
300 mm above the pipe or service. A text on the tape identifies the type of service below.
When uncovered, these tapes indicate the presence of a pipe or cable before any damage is
done. The absence of a tape should not be taken as evidence that there are no pipes or
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 8
cables at the location; it may simply mean that no marker tape was used.
Caution
13
Never assume that services have been installed at the recommended depth, they are often
shallower.
14
Never assume that when you have located a service that it is the only one, there may be
others adjacent to, above or underneath it.
15
Beware of services encased in concrete bases, structures or in the concrete backing to

kerbs.
16
Beware of services rising over obstructions, culverts, bridges etc. They are often much
shallower in these locations.
AL
1.5.1.7 Use of cable and pipe locators

A wide range of instruments are available for the detection of buried services. Often they are
just referred to as CATs (Cable Avoidance Tools). Several different principles may be
applied in the task of detection and an instrument may incorporate more than one of these.
Note: Both CAT and Generator must be used together to give an effective search for
services. Using the CAT alone will only give part of the picture.
Power detection. Virtually all electricity cables give off or radiate a magnetic field while
current is actually flowing through them. This magnetic field or 'hum' is usually easy to detect
by a CAT.
However, it should be noted that CATs may not be able to detect live cables:
TE
AT
IO
when there is no current flow because the cable has been disconnected from its load.
(An example of this is a live pot-ended cable)
(b)
when the loading on a three-phase supply is evenly distributed across the three
phases
(c)
when the current flow is so small that it is beyond the detection capability of the
detection tool
(d)
when there is no current flowing because the device is inactive, for example, street
lighting during the daytime.
EG
IN
(a)

Page 9
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
Used in the power detection mode, CATs will occasionally detect metal, gas and water
pipes, and telephone cables in proximity to electricity cables.
Radio frequency. Metal pipes and cables can act like radio aerials and re-broadcast low
and very low frequency radio signals which can be detected. There are limitations due to
geography and initial broadcast signal strength. If this method is used, other metallic objects
may also radiate the signal, but it is a useful method and can sometimes detect electricity
cables that have not been found by power detection. Not all CATs have this function.
Transmitter and receiver (inductive or conductive). This method is used when the
service is not carrying electricity or there is no current flow in the service to be located.
A small portable transmitter or signal generator (Genny) is connected to an exposed part of

the cable or pipe, or placed very close to it, so that the signal is fed into or induced in the
pipe or cable. This signal is then detectable by a CAT. In order to use this method, the
location of at least one section of the cable or pipe must be accessible, so that the
transmitter can be positioned or attached.
It is important to continue to use the locator as the excavation progresses.
10
Metal detectors. Conventional metal detectors will usually locate flat metal covers, joint
boxes, etc., but may well miss round cables or pipes. The deeper the object, the less the
chance of detection. Reinforcing bars, metal deposits in the ground and discarded metal
objects will usually also be registered by a signal. Some cable locators have a metal detector
function.
11
Developments in 'moles', 'pigs', 'mouses' and 'sondes', which are detection devices put into
pipes and services to trace their routes, mean that previously undetectable pipes and
services can be followed and, in some instances, blockages and joints can be located.
12
Ground-penetrating radar. A portable radar transmitter is used to 'sweep' the area of land
under which the buried services run. A display on the transmitter indicates variations in the
density of the materials below the surface and can show where the land has previously been
disturbed.
EG
IN
TE
QCS 2014

Page 10
The display will also show solid objects such as cables or pipes filled with air, gas or liquids,
and indicate the depth at which they are buried. By marking all the spots on the ground
where an underground service has been located, its route can be traced. Ideally, this method
should be supported by existing service plans.
14
The proper training of operatives is essential. Interpretation of the radar display can be
difficult for the untrained. A skilled and trained operative with the correct instrument can
detect the majority of underground services.
15
In unskilled hands, the average locator will not reveal exactly what has been found, or
exactly where and how deep it is.
16
One problem that can arise in the use of ground-penetrating radar is the detection of
individual buried services where more than one service follows the same route. The majority
of detectors cannot distinguish between cables or pipes running close together.
Consequently, the uncovering of one cable or pipe does not mean there is not another close
by.
17
Some of the detectors or detection modes are not omni-directional and it is therefore
essential to cover or sweep the area twice to ensure a good chance of detecting a buried
service. This is especially true in the case of electricity cables. The sweep must be made up
and down, then from side to side.
18
It is important that those using any type of cable locating equipment are given sufficient
training and experience to be competent.
Training
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
13
Recording location of services

19
A record of the nature, co-ordinates, line and level of newly installed services as well as
those exposed on site should be kept and passed to the Client. This will enable those in the
future to locate underground services more accurately.
1.5.1.8 Colour-coding of buried services

1
A national agreement exists between the utilities groups for the colour-coding of buried
services.
The colours used for ducts, pipes, cables and marker/warning tapes are listed in Appendix 1
of this module. The listing has been reproduced from the publication NJUG Guidelines on
the Positioning and Colour Coding of Underground Utilities Apparatus (December 2007).
These colour-coded buried services should not be confused with the colour system
contained in BS 1710 Specification for identification of pipelines and services, which
QCS 2014

Page 11
generally applies to all above-ground building and process services.

4
It should be noted that both green and black plastic-covered cables have been laid for
private telecommunications and television, some of these in earthenware ducts or previously
used metal pipes.
Identification of colours in conditions of poor light or artificial lighting may be difficult.
The colour-codings in Appendix 1 apply to services being laid now. With the great variety of
pipes and services laid over a period of years, there is a wide mixture of materials and
colours. The principal ones, excluding cement, plastic, metallic or earthenware ducts, are
summarised in the table below. This table also highlights the different services that may have
similarly coloured pipes or cables.
Service(s)
Cast iron
Gas, water
Steel
Gas, water
Braided steel
Electricity
Yellow steel
Gas
Copper
Water
Lead or lead covered
Electricity, water
Electricity
IN
TE
Black PVC
Red PVC
Water
Hessian wrapped
Grey PVC
IO
AT
Asbestos
Blue PVC
AL
Pipe or cable
Electricity, water, telecoms

Water
Water, telecoms
Electricity
Gas
Natural PVC
Telecoms
EG
Yellow PVC
All plastic, polythene and polyvinylchloride pipes are shown above as PVC.
(a)
black PVC must always be assumed to be live electricity until proved otherwise
(b)
all cast iron and steel must be assumed to be carrying gas until proved otherwise
(c)
ducts may well contain any one of the services, irrespective of type or colour of the
duct.
1.5.1.9 Digging - mechanical or manual

1
Once the approximate location of a service has been identified using all available information
(including plans, marker posts and other indicators and detectors), trial holes should be dug
carefully by hand to establish the exact location and depth of the service.
Where two holes are dug at intervals, it should not be assumed that the service runs in a
straight line between them, or that it runs at a consistent depth.
Mechanical excavators and power tools should not be used within 0.5 metres in any direction
of the indicated line of a service, unless prior agreement on a safe system of work has been
reached with the service owner. Power tools may be used to break paved surfaces, but great
QCS 2014

Page 12
care must be taken to avoid over penetration, since a service may have been laid at an
unusually shallow depth, especially in the vicinity of buildings or other services. Power tools
must never be used directly over the indicated line of a cable unless it has been made dead
or steps have been taken to prevent damage.
4
Buried services that cross the route of an excavation must be supported as necessary. It is
also necessary to ensure that the method used to support the sides of an excavation allow
for the protrusion of buried services through the excavation's sides.
Before and during excavation work:

Check with all utilities and landowners before starting work.
(b)
Assume the presence of services when digging, even though nothing is shown on
plans.
(c)
Use detection devices and keep a close watch for signs of buried services, such as
marker tape or tiles.
(d)
Although there are recommended minimum depths for all services, they may be closer
to the surface than normal, especially in the vicinity of works, structures, or other
services.
(e)
Markers such as plastic tape, tiles, slabs or battens may have been displaced and will
not indicate the exact location of the buried service.
(f)
Some electric cables and water pipes look alike, as do some gas pipes and water
pipes. Ensure each pipe is properly identified before starting work on them.
(g)
Services could be easily damaged by a fork or a pickaxe forced into the ground, but
careful use of spades and shovels enables services to be safely uncovered.
(h)
Carefully lever out rocks, stones and boulders.
(i)
Overpenetration of the ground or surface with hand-held power tools is a common

cause of accidents.
(j)
If an excavator or digger is being used near any service, take extra care to prevent
accidental damage. Where possible, no one should be near the digger bucket while it
is digging.
(k)
Ensure the excavator operator and others excavating are informed of the presence of
suspected services.
(l)
If the service is embedded in concrete or paving material, the owner should deenergise it, otherwise make it safe or approve a safe system of work before it is
broken out.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
(m)
Always assume closed, capped, sealed, loose or pot-ended services are live or
charged, not dead or abandoned, until proved otherwise.
(n)
Follow the guidelines and advice issued by the electricity, gas, water and
telecommunication industries.
1.5.1.10 Piling and drilling, etc.

1
Piling and drilling, thrust boring, bore holing and augering must not start until all the
necessary steps and precautions have been taken and a safe system of work has been
devised and implemented.
Services shown or thought to be nearby should be exposed by hand digging to establish

their precise location.
QCS 2014

Page 13
1.5.1.11 Exposure and protection

1
When a service is exposed in the bottom of a trench or excavation, it should be protected

with suitable timber or other material to prevent it becoming damaged.
Services across a trench or along a trench above the bottom should be supported by slings
or props, to avoid unnecessary stresses. In case of doubt, advice should be sought from the
utilities or the owner.
Cables and services must never be used as jacking or anchorage points, or as footholds or
climbing points. If a service pipe or cable needs to be moved to allow work to progress, the
owner should be consulted and advice sought.
1.5.1.12 Reporting damage

Any damage to buried services must be reported to the owners. Minor damage to the sheath
of a cable or to a coating on a pipe can result in moisture penetration, corrosion and
subsequent failure. A cable pulled and stretched may result in a conductor or core being
broken, and a broken earthenware or concrete duct may prevent a service being routed
through it.
IO
AL
If a gas pipe is fractured or starts leaking:

evacuate all personnel from the area
enforce a ban on smoking and naked lights
prevent any approach by members of the public or vehicles
inform the gas company immediately.
TE
AT
IN
If an electricity cable is damaged:

avoid all contact with it
do not attempt to disentangle it from digger buckets, etc.
do not attempt to leave your cab. Stay put until you are told the cable has been made safe
inform the electricity company
10
keep everyone clear.
11
Note: Some cables are automatically re-energised by the local sub-station after a short time
following the supply tripping out due to damage. Do not assume that a damaged cable will
remain dead.
12
Beware of old pot-ended cables and pot joints; these are easily damaged if moved. Always
consult the service provider before touching such apparatus.
EG
If any other service pipe or cable is broken:

13
leave well alone
14
inform the owner.
QCS 2014

Page 14
Backfilling
15
Surplus concrete, hard core, rock, rubble and flint must never be tipped onto a service
while backfilling a trench or hole, since it may result in damage.
16
Selected backfill material should be adequately settled and compacted, with care being
taken to avoid mechanical shocks to the service pipe or cable. Warning tapes, tiles, etc.
should be placed above the service at about 300 mm. When gas service pipes have been
exposed, advice on backfill should be sought from the gas company.
Emergency works
17
Emergency works and excavations usually mean that there is no time for planning or
contacting each of the utilities.
18
However, work can be carried out safely if:

the area is marked out carefully
(b)
detectors are used correctly
(c)
trial holes are dug by hand
(d)
the practice of safe digging is followed.
N
IO
AT
Permit to Work and Permit to Dig
AL
(a)
Where it is appropriate, a formal Permit to Work system should be employed, with a Permit
to Dig being issued, duly signed by a competent person. Those engaged on the work can
then see exactly what has been done, what is expected of them and what precautions they
must take. The permit also allows the person in control of the works to authorise excavation
to proceed only when they are satisfied that the conditions of the permit have been met.
20
An example of a Permit to Dig is given in Appendix 2.
IN
TE
19
EG
Conclusion
PLAN... LOCATE... DIG...
Plan the work to be done, including the risk assessment, using all available sources of
information. Contact the utility companies and owners of services for information and advice
on procedures and continue to liaise with them.
22
Locate the buried service before digging or excavation starts. Use all available information;
look for indicators or markers and other signs; use detectors and locators, and dig trial holes.
23
Dig using a safe method of work (Permit to Work systems whenever possible); observe the
rules in respect of the use of mechanical diggers and power tools. Ensure that all services
are identified positively. Do not make assumptions about the number, type or exact location
of services.
21
QCS 2014

Page 15

1.5.1 Appendix 1
Colours of ducts, pipes, cables and marker/warning tapes
1
These guidelines, reflect utility practice in the UK. However, operators must not assume that
any mains or services encountered will conform to the recommendations for positioning or
colour coding detailed in this appendix.
Pipe/Duct Identification
Issue 4, dated 8 January 2009
The pipe or duct may have the owning utility's name stamped upon it.
Colour of Duct/Pipe/Cable Buried in Ground
Duct
Pipe
Cable
Colour of Marker/ Warning

Tape Where Used
Electricity HV (High Voltage)
Black or red tile
N/A
Black or red
Electricity LV (Low Voltage)
Black or red
N/A
Black or red
Gas
Yellow
Yellow or yellow with N/A

brown stripes that is
removable to reveal
white or black pipe
Water non potable & Grey water
N/A
Black with green

stripes
Water -Firefighting
N/A
Oil / fuel pipelines
N/A
Yellow with black legend

N/A
Black with red

stripes or bands
N/A
N/A
Black
N/A
Various surface markersMarker

tape or tiles above red concrete
EG
IN
TE
N/A
Black
No distinguishing
N/A
colour/ material (e.g.
Ductile Iron may be
red; PVC may be
brown)
N/A
Telecoms
Grey
White
Green
Black
Purple
N/A
Various
Water
Blue or grey
Blue polymer or blue N/A

uncoated Iron /
GRP. Blue polymer
with brown stripe
(removable skin
revealing white or
black pipe)
Blue or Blue/black
Water pipes for special purposes

(e.g. contaminated ground)
N/A
Blue polymer with

brown stripes (nonremovable skin)
Blue or blue/black
Sewerage
AT
IO
AL
Utility
Black or light grey
N/A
QCS 2014

Page 16
Cable
Tape
Street lighting England and

Black or orange
Wales (consult the electricity
company first)
N/A
Black
Yellow withblack legend
Street lighting Scotland
Purple
N/A
Purple
Yellow with purpleblacklegend

or
Street lighting Northern

Ireland
Orange
N/A
Black or orange
Various
Traffic control
Orange
N/A
Orange
Yellow withblacklegend
Street furniture
Black
N/A
Black
Telecoms
Purple/orange
N/A
Black
Various
Communications
Purple
N/A
Grey
Communications power
Purple
N/A
Black
Road lighting
Orange
N/A
Black
Communications
Black or grey
N/A
Road lighting
Purple
N/A
TE
IN
EG
Black
Purple
Scotland
AL
Pipe
IO
Duct
AT
Highway Authority Services
QCS 2014

Page 17

1.5.1 Appendix 2
Example of a Permit to Dig
Work must not start until Sections A, B & C of this permit have been completed and signed by
authorised persons.
Section A. Project details
To be completed by project manager
Company: .................................................................. Job/Contract ref: ..............................................................
Contractor: .................................................................Location of works:...............................................................
AL
Start date: ..................................................................Completion date:.................................................................
Section B. Preliminary work
Essential procedures
To be completed by the Supervisor in change of the works
AT
IO
Brief description of works
Yes
No
Comments
TE
1. Have contract drawings and details been issued by the client or

otherwise obtained?
IN
2. Do drawings show the location, type and status of buried services?
EG
3. Have live services been made dead as far as it is possible or

necessary to do so?
4. Has the work area been surveyed by a competent person, using

appropriate detection equipment to confirm the exact location of buried
services?
5. Has a method statement been written and submitted for comment and
approval?
6. Has the method statement been explained to the operatives carrying
out the work?
7. Is the person in charge of the excavation fully conversant with the
principles of safe digging and/or avoidance of buried services?
8. Are all operatives familiar with safe excavation practices?
9. If plant is being used, is the operator competent and familiar with safe
digging practices?
I declare that the above safety precautions will be put into place before work commences or that an explanation given as to
why some or all are not necessary:
Name:..................................
Signature:..................................
.Date:.....................
Time:....................
QCS 2014

Page 18
Section C. Certification To be completed by the supervisor in charge of the works
I am satisfied that the precautions identified on the previous page are satisfactory to enable the
excavation to be undertaken safely*
I am NOT satisfied that the precautions identified on the previous page are satisfactory to enable the
excavation to be undertaken safely and require the additional precautions / work outlined below to be
undertaken before excavation work commences*
*Delete as appropriate
AT
IO
AL
Name:............................Signature:...................................Date:.....................Time:....................
Additional precautions / work necessary prior to commencement:
Section D. Completion of work
TE
To be completed by the supervisor in charge of the works

I am satisfied that the precautions identified on the previous page are satisfactory to enable the
excavation to be undertaken safely*
IN
I am NOT satisfied that the precautions identified on the previous page are satisfactory to enable the
excavation to be undertaken safely and require the additional precautions / work outlined below to be
undertaken before excavation work commences*
EG
*Delete as appropriate
Additional work that is necessary to enable this permit to be cancelled:
Section E. Cancellation of permit

To be completed by the supervisor in charge of the works
I am satisfied that all work has been completed and this permit is now cancelled.
QCS 2014

Page 19

1.5.2
Lone Working
1.5.2.1 Key points

The implications of lone working must be thoroughly investigated, via a risk assessment,
before anyone is allowed to work alone.
Lone working must be avoided whenever it may put the health or safety of any person at an
unacceptable level of risk.
Anyone working alone, for example a single person working in a lift shaft, is a lone worker
even if there are other people on site.
The suitability of the job and the person who will undertake the work must both be taken into
account to establish whether lone working is advisable.
A suitable and effective system of checks to confirm the continued wellbeing of the lone
worker must be put in place.
The risk assessment might indicate the need for a rescue plan.
Resist the urge to carry out unplanned lone working, for example the two members of a
maintenance team separating so that one of them can fix an unexpected fault, unless it is
proved safe to do so.
AT
IO
AL
Before lone working is permitted, the risks of a single worker carrying out the task must be
assessed. The findings of the risk assessment must demonstrate that the person would not
be at a greater level of risk than if accompanied.
Contractors have responsibilities for the health and safety of their employees and other
people who might be affected by the Contractors work activities. Whilst legal duties are also
placed upon employees, the Contractor still retains the legal duty to ensure the wellbeing of
the employees.
Lone workers are people who work by themselves without any close or direct supervision.
As far as construction industry activities are concerned, they are likely to be people who:
(a)
EG
IN
TE
work on their own in a part of the site that is otherwise occupied by other people
(b)
have to work alone on the site outside of normal working hours
(c)
work alone in premises which are remote from the site, such as company offices or a
builder's yard
(d)
work alone in domestic premises whilst the householder is not present.

Duties of Contractors
1
A general duty on every Contractor is to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, the

health, safety and welfare at work of all their employees.
All of the requirements listed below could have implications when considering the need or
advisability for someone to work alone.
So far as is reasonably practicable, Contractors must:
QCS 2014
(a)
protect the health, safety and welfare at work of all their employees
(b)
provide and maintain plant and systems of work that are safe and without risk to
health
(c)
ensure safety and absence of risks in the use, handling, storage and transport of
articles and substances
(d)
provide any necessary information, including information on legal requirements, to

ensure the health and safety of their employees
(e)
provide adequate supervision and training, as is necessary, to ensure the health and
safety of their employees
(f)
provide and maintain a safe and healthy place of work, with safe access and egress
(g)
provide and maintain a working environment that is safe and without risks to health
and is adequate with regard to welfare facilities and arrangements for welfare at work.
(a)
AL
Certain additional duties have been placed on the Contractor including:

to ensure, as far as is reasonably practicable, that the conduct of their activities does
not endanger persons not in their employment who may be affected by operations
under their control, for example, all contractors or the public.

Page 20
AT
General duties on employees:
to exercise reasonable care for the health and safety of themselves or others who may
be affected by their acts or omissions at work
(b)
to co-operate with the Contractor, as far as may be necessary, to enable them (the
Contractor) to carry out their legal duties in health and safety matters.
(a)
TE
IO
Duties of employees
IN

practicable.
those risks.
Employees, in turn, have a duty to tell their Contractor of any work situation which they
believe presents a risk to themselves or to others, or of any matter which affects the health
and safety of themselves or other persons.
10
Also of importance with regard to lone working are the requirements on the Contractor to:
EG
(a)
establish contacts with external services, for example the emergency services
(b)
provide employees with comprehensible and relevant information on any risks that
exist in the workplace and on any control measures that are in place to reduce those
risks
(c)
assess employees' capabilities when allocating work to individuals
(d)
provide adequate training for anyone involved in any aspect of lone working (including
QCS 2014

Page 21
rescue).
11
Arising out of the risk assessment for lone working the Contractor may decide that there is a
need to:
(a)
develop a method statement for each job
(b)
implement a Permit to Work system, encompassing or supplemented by a Permit to

Enter.
1.5.2.4 Practical considerations

1
Before the job starts, the following factors must be considered as part of assessing the risks
of carrying out lone working.
The job
AL
Job factors that must be taken into account when considering whether the risks of lone
working are acceptable include the following:
Does the place of work and the job to be carried out present more unacceptable risks
to the health and safety of a lone worker than it would for, say, a gang of two workers?
(b)
Can the lone worker enter and exit from the place of work safely, including exiting
quickly and safely in an emergency?
(c)
Can all equipment, plant and substances used be safely handled by one person?
(d)
Are there barriers to effective communication with the lone worker?
(e)
If something goes wrong, is a prompt and effective rescue a realistic possibility?
AT
IO
(a)
There may be circumstances in which unplanned lone working takes place when, for
example, one person decides to separate from workmates to investigate a fault or sort out a
problem. Depending on the working environment, these situations have the potential to put
the health or safety of the 'lone worker' at significant risk. The findings of the risk assessment
should indicate the potential risks arising from one member of a team becoming separated
from workmates.
If such a situation could arise, managers and supervisors must ensure that clear instructions
are given about the need for 'team members to stick together'.
The person
5
EG
IN
TE
The suitability of the person who will undertake the work has to be considered when deciding
whether lone working is safe. Questions to be asked and satisfactorily answered as part of
the risk assessment include the following.
(a)
Given that there will be no direct supervision, has the person who will carry out the job
received adequate training and instruction to do it safely?
(b)
Does the person have sufficient experience to be able to recognise an unsafe situation
developing which necessitates leaving the place of work?
(c)
Does the person know how to inform others, and who to inform if an unsafe situation
develops?
(d)
Considering both routine work and a possible emergency situation, does the person
have a medical condition that might make them unsuitable for lone working?
(e)
Does the person require and possess a particular level of physical fitness to carry out
the work?
(f)
Is a young female or non-English speaking worker at a greater level of risk?
QCS 2014

Page 22
The risks
6
A wide range of work activities can be classified as lone working, not all of which present
unacceptable risks. For example, it could be argued that a lone worker travelling to an
otherwise unoccupied part of a highway construction site, in a serviceable and suitable
vehicle, is at far less risk than a lone worker entering an underground chamber after normal
working hours.
The findings of a thorough assessment of the risks arising out of proposed lone working will
indicate whether it is safe to proceed.
An assessment of the risks arising from carrying out work which involves the following
common construction activities might indicate that lone working is not acceptable:
working at height
(b)
working in any area which could become a confined space
(c)
working in narrow, deep excavations, whether classified as a confined space or not
(d)
working with, or close to, exposed live electrical cables or fittings
(e)
working with, or close to, other sources of other potentially hazardous energy
(f)
using any substance that could deplete the level of oxygen or otherwise result in
reduced awareness or loss of consciousness
(g)
any hot-works
(h)
disturbance of sludge in any underground chamber, pipe etc.
(i)
entering ductwork
(j)
working over or near to water or other fluids in which a person could drown
(k)
the operation of any equipment such as power saws, misuse of which could lead to
severe bleeding
(l)
the operation of any engine-driven equipment that emits toxic exhaust fumes
(m)
the operation of construction plant.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
Note: The above list is not exhaustive.
Control measures
9
The health and safety of anyone who is working alone should not be put at a higher level of
risk than if working with other people.
10
This may require that extra risk-control measures are taken, for example:
(a)
ensuring that the lone worker is competent to carry out the work
(b)
supplementing the risk assessment with:

(i)
a permit to work which clearly defines the limits of the work allowed and the
time within which it must be completed, and/or
(ii)
a method statement
(c)
providing the lone worker with a means of communication
(d)
implementing a 'check-in' system whereby either:

(i)
the lone worker contacts another person at prearranged intervals, the frequency
of checking-in depending upon the urgency of response if the lone worker fails
to 'check-in'; or
QCS 2014

Page 23
(ii)
the reverse of the above system in which someone such as a supervisor

periodically contacts the lone worker
(e)
supplying the lone worker with a manual alarm system or one which operates
automatically by the absence of activity (see below)
(f)
providing the lone worker with a 'travelling' first-aid kit and possibly (if indicated by the
findings of the risk assessment) first-aid training
(g)
establishing a trained rescue person or team and practising the rescue procedure.
Alarm systems
Automatic alarms, also known as 'man down' alarms, have been in use in hazardous
industries such as petrochemicals for some time. This equipment also has its uses for lone
workers in the construction industry. Although the alarm can be triggered manually by a lone
worker who is in distress or danger, depending on the type, they can be automatically
triggered by:
a lack of motion for a pre-set period of time
(b)
a tilt switch which typically operates after a short delay if the unit is tilted beyond 45
from the vertical.
AL
(a)
Of course, if such a system is in use, it is essential that:
the 'base station' where the alarm system is received is staffed continually whilst lone
working is taking place
(b)
the exact location of the lone worker is known
(c)
a prompt rescue can be initiated by a trained rescue person or team, depending upon
the circumstances.
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
12
IO
11
QCS 2014

Page 24

1.5.2 Appendix
Lone working checklist
1
Have the risks of lone working been assessed?
Do the findings of the risk assessment show:

(a)
that there are any particularly hazardous aspects of the job that might make it unsafe
for lone working?
(b)
that lone working significantly increases the risks to the person doing the job?
(c)
that particular skills, knowledge, training or instruction are necessary?
Will the lone worker be able to cope with all the physical aspects of the Job without
assistance?
Do the physical characteristics of the place of work make it suitable for lone working and
emergency evacuation?
Are the levels of risk acceptable?
Is a permit to work necessary?
Is a method statement necessary?
Can the person selected for lone working follow a method statement when unsupervised?
Is the lone worker competent to work without direct supervision?
10
Will the lone worker be able to recognise an unsafe situation developing?
11
If so, will they know what to do?
12
Is a rescue plan necessary?
13
Has sufficient instruction and training been provided?
N
IO
AT
TE
IN
Will an effective method of communication between the lone worker and a

supervisor/manager be established?
EG
(a)
Is an automatic 'man down' alarm system necessary and if so:

(a)
(b)
where will the base station be located?
14
AL
who will staff it whilst lone working is in progress?
15
Is it necessary to establish a rescue plan and team?
16
Is a 'check-in' system required?
17
Does the lone worker have a medical condition that might increase the risks to their health or
safety?
18
Does the lone worker require a 'travelling' first-aid kit and first-aid training?
19
Is there a need to isolate electrical supplies or other sources of energy?
QCS 2014

Page 25

1.5.3
Electrical Safety on Site
1.5.3.1 Key points

Electricity can be a killer; you cannot see it and may not know that an item of equipment is
live until you touch it.
Buried cables, and those inside partition walls or other 'hidden places', are just waiting for
the unwary to accidentally damage the cable and cause themselves serious injury or even
death.
The electrical distribution systems found on site tend to operate in a harsh environment and
must be treated with care and respect.
No-one other than a qualified electrician must alter the site distribution system.
Ideally, apart from mains-powered equipment in site offices, all other powered equipment
such as electrical hand tools will run off a 110 volt supply.
The safest electrically powered tools and equipment are those that run off batteries.
Working on or near to live, exposed conductors poses obvious dangers. Competence is

required and such work is usually carried out under a Permit to Work.
IO
AT
Section 9 of the QCS covers mechanical/electrical equipment and Section 21 covers electrical
works.
Note:
AL
Unlike most other hazards which can be seen, felt or heard there is no advance warning of
danger from electricity; and electricity can kill.
Electricity and electrical installations on construction sites must always be treated with the
utmost care and be under the control and supervision of experienced competent persons.
Hazards arise through faulty installations, lack of maintenance and abuse of equipment.
Electric shock is a major hazard. The severity of the shock will depend on the level of electric
current, and the duration of the contact.
At low levels of current, about 1 milliamp, the effect may be only an unpleasant tingle but
enough to cause loss of balance or a fall. An electrical current of about 10 milliamps can
cause muscular spasm and loss of control. Higher levels of electric current of 50 milliamps or
above, for a period of about one second, can cause fibrillation of the heart which can be
lethal.
Electric shock also causes burning of the skin at the points of contact.
1 milliamp is a one thousandth part of an amp.
Fuses cannot be regarded as adequate protection against electric shock. A fuse is

intended only to protect equipment from damage. They are commonly rated at 3, 5, 10 or 13
amps for domestic and normal business use.
EG
IN
TE
1.5.3.3 Causes of electric shock

1
Contact between a live conductor and earth.
Contact between phase and neutral conductors (as the body is likely to have less electrical
QCS 2014

Page 26
resistance than any load).

3
The majority of electrical accidents happen because people are working on or close to
equipment which is either:
(a)
assumed to be dead but is, in fact, live
(b)
known to be live, but workers have not received adequate training, lack adequate
equipment or have not taken adequate precautions.
It cannot be emphasised too strongly that the installation, maintenance and repair of
electrical services must only be carried out by a competent, qualified electrician.
Electric shock is not the only hazard. The very high temperature that results from electric
arcing can produce severe and deep-seated burns. An electric arc also produces intense
ultraviolet radiation which can damage the eyes (arc eye).
An electrical short circuit or the use of unstable or badly maintained equipment can ignite
flammable materials, resulting in a fire or explosion.
AL
IO
Once those hazards have been identified, it is - then the Contractors duty to put control
measures into place, to either eliminate the hazards or, where this is not possible, reduce the
risk of injury or ill health resulting from those hazards, as far as is reasonably practicable.
any risks that exist in the workplace and of any control measures that are in place to reduce
those risks.
situation which presents a risk to the health and safety of themselves or to any other person
In the context of this module, the risk assessment should include consideration of:
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
the possibility of anyone coming into contact with live electrical equipment at a
dangerous voltage
(b)
the control measures that must be put in place to ensure that no one is injured by
coming into contact with live electrical equipment at a dangerous voltage, for example
a Permit to Work system
(c)
the training and competence of any person who may have to work in the vicinity of live
electrical supplies.

6
order.
QCS 2014
Furthermore, these Regulations require that:

all work equipment has adequate controls, emergency controls and where necessary,
a control system, to enable it to be used safely
(b)
each item of work equipment can be effectively isolated from all sources of energy
(c)
the Contractor provides employees with adequate information, instruction, training and
supervision to be able to carry out any work task safely and without risk to their health.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)

Page 27
QCS 2014

Page 28

The hazard of exposure to live electrical conductors can in many cases be eliminated, or the
residual risks reduced, by careful attention to design and planning aspects before
construction work starts. Any residual risks must be controlled by good management and
safe working practices during construction.
10
These Regulations place health and safety responsibilities on the client, designers,
contractor and provide a framework for the management of risks, including electrical risks.
11
The client must ensure that all designers and all contractors appointed by the client, or likely
to be, are promptly provided with all relevant information that the client has in relation to the
health and safety risks arising from the project.
12
In the context of this section, this information could cover, for example, the existence of
buried electrical services or live electrical circuits in a building that is about to undergo
renovation.
13
The client must ensure that the Engineer promptly supplies the relevant information to the
contractor and all designers.
14
Given the hazardous nature of electricity, it is difficult to see how identifying the location of
live electrical services could be anything other than relevant.
15
These Regulations require that where there is a danger from electrical power cables they
must be:
AT
IO
AL
suitably located (positioned) to prevent danger, periodically checked and clearly

indicated by signs
(b)
directed away from the area of risk, or
(c)
made dead and where necessary earthed, or
(d)
where neither of the above two options are 'reasonably practicable', erect suitable
warning notices and:
IN
TE
(a)
(ii)
(e)
suspended protection if vehicles need to pass below the cable, or

in either case other equally effective measures
(iii)
barriers suitable to exclude work equipment which is not needed, or
EG
(i)
construction work that is liable to create a risk to health or safety from underground
services must not commence unless all reasonably practicable steps have been taken
to avoid damaging or disturbing them.
Electricity at Work
16
These Regulations apply to all situations involving electricity, at any place of work, and place
legal obligations on both Contractors and employees.
17
The main points of these Regulations are, briefly, as follows.

(a)
All systems shall be of such a construction so as to prevent, so far as is reasonably

practicable, any danger.
(b)
All work activity on or near a system, including operation, use or maintenance, shall be
carried out, so far as it is reasonably practicable, so as not to give rise to any danger.
(c)
Any equipment provided to protect people while they are at work on, or near, any
electrical equipment shall be suitable for use and properly maintained.
QCS 2014

Page 29
Notes:
(i)
(i) 'System' includes every part of the system or installation, all conductors and
electrical equipment, whether the system is electrically alive or dead.
(ii)
(ii) 'Electrical equipment' includes everything from overhead to underground

cables with thousands of volts, right down to 6 volt circuits and even batterypowered hand lamps. The spark from the switch on a hand lamp could be a
source of danger in an explosive atmosphere.
(iii)
(iii) 'Danger' is the risk of injury to any person.
(iv)
(iv) 'Injury' means death or any injury caused by electricity. This covers electric
shock, electric burns, fires, arcing or explosions caused by electricity.
The strength and capability of electrical equipment must not be exceeded in such a way as
may give rise to any danger.
19
All electrical equipment which may be exposed to the following must be constructed, or
protected to prevent, so far as reasonably practicable, any danger arising from:
mechanical damage
(b)
the effects of weather, temperature and so on
(c)
wet, dirty or corrosive conditions
(d)
flammable or explosive dusts or gases.
AT
IO
(a)
AL
18
Note: 'Technical knowledge and experience' means that the person must be competent to do
their job. To be considered competent a person needs:
adequate knowledge of electricity
(f)
good experience of electrical work
(g)
an understanding of the system being worked on
(h)
practical experience of that type of system
(i)
knowledge of the hazards that might arise and the precautions that need to be taken
(j)
the ability to immediately recognise unsafe situations.
20
Electricity supply
EG
IN
TE
(e)
The supply of electricity on construction sites will normally be provided by one or both of the
following:
(a)
A public supply from the local electricity company.
(b)
A site generator, where public supply is not practicable or is uneconomic.
Public supply
21
A public supply of electricity being provided depends on the following:

(a)
written application being made to the local electricity company, as soon as possible at
the planning stage
(b)
the name, address, and telephone number of the main contractor and developer,
giving the full site address and a location plan
(c)
details of the maximum demand load (in kilowatts) which is likely to be required during
construction
(d)
details of the maximum final demand load (in kilowatts) which will be required when
the job is complete
QCS 2014

Page 30
(e)
dates when the supply is needed
(f)
a discussion with electricity company staff to determine the necessary precautions to

avoid damage or hazards from any existing overhead or underground cables
(g)
the establishment of supply points (where incoming cables will terminate), switch gear,
metering equipment and requirements for earthing.
Generators
Generators (even if for stand-by purposes) may be required, and will be powered by petrol or
diesel engines. Attention should be given to the siting of such equipment in order to minimise
pollution caused by noise and fumes.
23
Any private generating plant must be installed in accordance with BS 7375. You are advised
to seek advice from the local electricity company.
24
If the generator will produce over 55 volts AC, it must be effectively earthed. A competent
person should test the effectiveness of the earth.
25
The principle of low voltages and their advantages should be considered further where
portable generators are used on site.
26
Not all portable generators available for use on site have the 110 voltage output centre
tapped to earth. This is particularly true of generators which have dual voltage selectable.
This is important as the whole concept of using 110 volts on site is that by centre tapping to
earth, the maximum voltage to which anyone is exposed is only 55 volts. Most people can
survive a shock of 55 volts. If the supply is not centre tapped to earth, anyone receiving a
shock will be exposed to the full 110 volts.
27
The metal framing of the generating set should be bonded to the metalwork of the site
distribution system, where there is one.
28
The use of generators in excess of 10 kVA may require advice from a specialist electrical
contractor.
29
Overhead power lines
30
Generally, electricity supplies above 33,000 volts are routed overhead. Supplies below this
voltage may be either overhead or underground.
31
Overhead lines are normally uninsulated and can be lethal if contact, or near contact, is
made. Electric arcs may jump a considerable distance. Care should be taken when dumping,
tipping waste, regrading, landscaping, or when in planned or unplanned storage areas, not to
reduce these minimum clearances.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
22
Working near overhead power lines

32
The local electricity company must be consulted before any work starts and a safe system of
work must be devised and implemented.
33
Other suppliers may also need to be consulted, for example, Qatar General Electricity &
Water Corporation and other electricity companies.
34
For some jobs, it may be necessary for the electricity supplier to isolate or re-route overhead
cables to enable the work to proceed.
35
Practical steps that can be taken to prevent danger from any live electrical cable or
apparatus include the placing of substantial and highly visible barriers.
QCS 2014

Page 31
36
If access is only required from one side of a power line, then a barrier, on that side only, will
suffice. If the overhead line crosses the site, barriers will be required on both sides of it. If
there is a danger to people carrying metal scaffold poles, ladders or other conducting
objects, the barrier should exclude both people and mobile plant.
37
Any ground level barriers should consist of either:

(a)
a stout post and rail fence, or
(b)
a tension wire fence, earthed at both ends, with flags on the wire. The fence is earthed
in consultation with the electricity company, or
(c)
large steel drums (for example 200-litre oil drums) filled with rubble or concrete, and
placed at frequent intervals, or
(d)
an earth bank, not less than 1 m high and marked by posts to stop vehicles, or
(e)
substantial timber baulks, to act as wheel stops.
Fences, posts and oil drums should be made as distinctive as possible by being painted with
red and white stripes. As an alternative, red and white plastic warning flags or hazard
bunting should be used on wire fences.
39
There should be a general rule prohibiting the storage of materials in the area between the
overhead lines and the ground-level barriers. Precautions are necessary even though work
in the vicinity of the line may be of short duration.
AT
IO
AL
38
Before doing any work on site, consult the local electricity company. They will normally
arrange a site meeting and advise on heights, distances and other precautions.
(b)
It must be assumed that all overhead lines and cables are live unless advised
otherwise by the electricity company.
(c)
All work should be carried out under the direct supervision of a responsible supervisor,
appointed by the Contractor, who is familiar with the hazards likely to be encountered.
TE
(a)
EG
If mobile cranes or excavators are used, the minimum distance from the ground level barrier
to the line should be 9 m if on wood or metal poles, 15 m if on pylons PLUS the length of the
jib or boom.
40
IN

Page 32
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
Ensure that safety precautions are developed and observed.
(b)
All plant, cranes and excavators may be modified with suitable physical restraints to
limit their operations, where applicable.
(c)
Additional care may be needed as work proceeds because of reduced clearances.
(d)
Electronic proximity warning devices may be fitted on crane jibs.
IN
TE
(a)
Where it is necessary to work beneath live overhead lines, additional precautions will be
required to prevent the upward movement of ladders, scaffold poles, crane jibs or excavator
buckets.
41
EG
Note: If any work takes place after dark, notices and crossbars should be illuminated. The
height will be specified by the electricity company.
Working in proximity of underground cables

42
Damage to live underground cables during excavation work is the cause of a number of
accidents resulting in injuries and disruption of supplies. There have been occasions when
such accidents have been fatal. The electricity company should be consulted before the
commencement of any work that may result in the exposure of or damage to, underground
electricity cables.
43
Technology such as ground penetrating radar has improved cable identification significantly
and there is now very little excuse for hitting underground cables.
44
It is essential that all those involved, particularly machine operators, are aware of the
hazards.
45
Before any excavation work starts:

(a)
ensure that employees have proper and safe work procedures and are working under
QCS 2014

Page 33
adequate supervision
(c)
obtain advice on the location and ownership of any underground electricity cables
(d)
check plans to establish cable routes, as well as their depth and voltage
(e)
use cable location devices where necessary and mark cable routes
(f)
users need to be trained to use cable avoidance tools (CAT) effectively
(g)
CAT will usually only locate energised cables and so a signal generator may have to
be used in conjunction with the CAT to find the cable (CAT and genny as it is known).
During excavation:
regard all buried cables as live. Do not assume that pot-ended cables are dead or
disused
(b)
dig by hand when nearing the assumed line of the cable
(c)
do not use excavators and power tools within 0.5 m of the indicated line of the cable
(d)
if hand digging is not an option, the service must be isolated
(e)
ensure exposed cables are supported and protected against damage. They should not
be used as hand and footholds
(f)
consult the local electricity company (Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation) in
all cases of doubt.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
Many incidents occur where people are asked to hand dig through concrete, tarmac and
other compressed surfaces, and have to resort to using bars and picks. Consequently,
cables are hit and penetrated. Alternatively, they persuade the excavator driver to dig a bit
closer to the cable to reduce the amount of hand digging that they have to do. It is important
to understand and be aware of situations where these so called 'human factors' may make
an incident more likely.
EG
IN
TE
47
check with the electricity company that it is safe to start work
46
(b)
Site distribution
48
As a first general guide, all wiring should conform to BS 7671: Requirements for Electrical
QCS 2014

Page 34
Installation, even though much of it will be temporary. Makeshift arrangements cause

accidents and must be prohibited.
49
All switch gear should be freely accessible and capable of being locked in the 'off position.
50
Wherever possible a reduced voltage system should be used.
51
Site offices and other accommodation should be a standard installation to the current BS
7671: Requirements for Electrical Installation.
Distribution equipment
Electrical equipment must be manufactured to a standard which prevents, for example, the
ingress of fingers, tools, dust or moisture as appropriate, depending upon the nature of the
hazard. This is particularly important where electrical distribution equipment is to be sited
outdoors, where the ingress of water and to a lesser extent, dust could be a problem.
53
Internationally, such equipment is assigned an IP (ingress protection) number. For example,

equipment manufactured to:
IP 32 - is protected against the ingress of solid objects over 2.5 mm, for example tools,
and against the ingress of direct sprays of water up to 15 from the vertical
(b)
IP 54 - is protected against the ingress of dust (no harmful deposits) and low pressure
jets of water (limited ingress).
AT
IO
(a)
Electrical distribution equipment obtained from reputable suppliers or hire companies will
conform to the necessary British or International standards.
54
AL
52
TE
Site accommodation
Site offices and welfare facilities are the only locations where electrical equipment that runs
off a 230 volt supply should be in use. The electrical supply panel for such facilities must
incorporate a residual current device (RCD) in each circuit.
56
The correct operation of each RCD must be confirmed weekly by operating the 'TEST'
button.
57
The incoming electrical supply to site accommodation must be properly designed and be
installed and commissioned by competent electrical contractors.
58
All portable electrical equipment must be electrical safety (PAT tested) at appropriate
intervals as decided by a competent person. This includes:
EG
IN
55
(a)
common types of office equipment, such as fax machines and photocopiers
(b)
'kitchen-type equipment', such as kettles, microwave ovens, and so on.
(c)
small items, such as chargers for site radios and battery-powered tools.
59
All units for site use should comply with BS 4363 and installations with BS 7375. Plugs,
sockets and couplers must conform to BS EN 60309-2.
60
BS 4363 recommends use of the following units:
Supply incoming unit (SIU)

61
Ratings up to 300 amps per phase. These units include main switch gear and metering
equipment.
QCS 2014

Page 35
Mains distribution unit (MDU)

For the control and distribution of electricity on site. 415 volt three-phase, 230 volt singlephase AC.
63
A combined supply incoming and distribution unit (SIDU) may be used in some installations.
AT
IO
AL
62
TE
Transformer units (TU)
TU 1 single-phase 230 volts - 110 volts TU 3 three-phase 415 volts - 110 volts
65
Transformer units are available with different outlet ratings, i.e. 16, 32 or 60 amps. Some units have socket outlets switched through miniature circuit-breakers for added protection.
66
Such transformer units can be used for portable tools and plant, and general floor lighting.
(a)
(b)
67
Outlet units (OU)
EG
IN
64
110 volt socket outlet units

16 or 32 amp
Such outlet units can be used for portable tools, floodlighting and extension outlets. They are
not usually protected by circuit-breakers.
Extension outlet units (EOU)
68
(a)
110 volt socket outlet
(b)
16 amp
Such units can be used for portable tools, local lighting and hand lamps. They are not
usually protected by circuit-breakers.
Markings
69
All supply, distribution and transformer units should be marked with the warning sign shown
below from BS 5378 Safety signs and colours.
QCS 2014
A supplementary sign with the word DANGER, and indicating the highest voltage likely to be
present, should be placed below the warning sign.
AL
70

Page 36
IO
All metal parts of the distribution systems and fixed appliances not carrying a current must
be effectively earthed in accordance with BS 7430 Code of Practice for Earthing, to either:
the metallic sheath and armouring of the incoming supply cable
(b)
the earthed terminal supplied by the supply authority
(c)
a separate earth electrode system.
AT
(a)
71
Earthing
Periodic maintenance, inspection and testing is essential.
73
Earthing via water pipes or gas pipes is not permitted.
74
Monitored earthing systems are recommended for all transportable plant operating at any
voltage above 110 volts and supplied with flexible cables. In these systems, a very low
voltage current circulates continuously in the earthing circuit. If this circuit is broken or
interrupted, the supply to the plant is automatically cut off until the earth path is made
effective.
EG
IN
TE
72
Plugs, socket outlets and couplers

75
Only components to BS EN 60309-2 should be used. This covers both single and threephase supplies and is intended to prevent plugs designed for one voltage being connected to
sockets of another. This is achieved by different positions of the key-way in plug and socket.
Examples
76
Accessories should be marked with the maximum rated operating voltage and current.
QCS 2014

Page 37
Colour coding may sometimes be used.

Colour
Operating voltage
(AC) at 50/60 Hz
Violet
White
Yellow
Blue
Red
Black
25
50
110-130
220-230
318-415
500-750
1.5.3.5 Cables
In all site offices, workshops, huts and similar premises, wiring, which is of permanent
nature, should comply with BS 7671: Requirements for Electrical Installation.
AL
Changes to electrical wiring colours
In order to bring about a complete standardisation Internationally, changes to cable core

colours were introduced and have been effective since 1 April 2004. These changes were
introduced by an amendment to BS 7671: Requirements for Electrical Installation and will
affect all single-and three-phase circuit cables.
The new core colours are:
AT
IO
IN
TE
Neutral
Blue (previously black)
Earth will remain Green/Yellow
Phase 1
Brown (previously red)
Phase 2
Black (previously yellow)
Phase 3
Grey (previously blue)
Many cables and flexes in the new colours are already in use, but this recent change further
emphasises the need to use competent electricians for all cabling and wiring work, if
electrical accidents are to be avoided.
More information on the changes can be found in a promotional leaflet that can be accessed
at www.iee.org/publish/wireregs/cablecol.cfm
EG
Cables used for site distribution
(a)
Cables that carry more than 65 volts (with respect to earth) should have a continuous
armour or sheath, which is effectively earthed. (This requirement does not apply to arc
welding processes.)
(b)
Where trailing cables are used, sheathing must be earthed in addition to the normal
earth conductor.
All cables should have an overall protective sheathing. The three most common types in use
are:
(a)
tough rubber sheathing (TRS), resistant to wear and abrasion. Not used near solvents
or oils
(b)
polyvinyl chloride (PVC). For site office and permanent work. Not suitable for outside
work at low temperature
(c)
polychloroprene (PCP). This is the best all round type.
QCS 2014

Page 38
Buried cables
7
All buried cables should be:

(a)
at least 0.5 m below ground
(b)
protected with tiles or covers or placed in a duct
(c)
in a trench marked to indicate their route.
Cables on the ground

The use of cables laid on the ground is dependent on the nature of work being carried out,
and should be:
(a)
only permitted for short periods
(b)
provided with additional protection, such as a reinforced sleeve
(c)
clearly marked, so as not to constitute a tripping hazard.
AL
IO
Suspended cables are permissible on condition that:

there is no tension or strain on connections
(b)
they are adequately marked for protection
(c)
they are supported on proper hooks, not nails
(d)
spans over 3 m are supported by catenary wires on poles
(e)
they are at a minimum height of 5.2 m above ground.
AT
(a)
TE
Suspended cables
1.5.3.6 Installations
Installations should be in accordance with plans drawn up by a competent person.
Any work or alterations to the installation may only be undertaken by a competent person.
The installation should conform with BS 7671: Requirements for Electrical Installation, and
BS 7375 Code of Practice for the distribution of electricity on construction and building sites.
EG
IN
General
4
All installations should comply with these Regulations as for permanent installations, with
good workmanship and the use of correct materials.
Testing
5
Every installation should be tested in accordance with BS 7671: Requirements for Electrical
Installation, before use on site, at three-monthly intervals or shorter periods if necessary.
(a)
The record of any testing and inspections should be made by a responsible person on
the appropriate certificates.
(b)
Testing and inspections must include:

(i)
a visual inspection
(ii)
the continuity of final circuit conductors
(iii)
the continuity of protective conductors
(iv)
the earth electrode resistance
QCS 2014

Page 39
(v)
the insulation resistance
(vi)
polarity
(vii)
the earth fault loop impedance
(viii)
the correct operation of residual current devices and fault voltage operated
protective devices.
Weekly inspections should be made of the whole system, including all portable electric tools.
Records should also be kept of all these inspections.
Annual portable appliance testing of electrical equipment used in offices is recommended especially for items with heavy usage, for example, kettles, microwaves, photocopiers.
Power requirements
The calculation for power requirements should be left to an experienced person or to the
electricity supply company.
To enable the total site requirements to be established, a site demand table listing items of
plant, equipment and general site requirements should be completed. (See Appendix 4. This
appendix also contains a guide to voltages required for typical plant.)
10
When calculating the demand, it is permissible to allow a diversity factor (assuming not all
appliances will be in use at the same time), and a figure of not more than 50% is generally
acceptable. Care should be taken to ensure that items such as lighting and heating remain at
their full rated value, because heaters used in huts and drying rooms, or for water and
cooking apparatus, tend to be left on.
AT
IO
AL
TE
Work on site
The activities of contractors and others installing electrical equipment, lifts, heating,
ventilation, and so on, must be carefully monitored to ensure that they do not jeopardise
electrical safety or leave an installation in a dangerous condition.
12
Particular care is needed in respect of any alterations and extensions to existing

installations, especially in the identification of circuits.
EG
IN
11
Use of mains powered equipment

13
Wherever possible, battery-powered or 110 volt powered equipment should be used for
reasons of electrical safety. However, on rare occasions, it may be necessary to use mains
(230 volt) operated equipment on site, possibly because 110 volt variants are not available.
Electrical equipment used in site offices will invariably be mains operated. As previously
stated, the use of low voltage equipment is preferred due to the potentially deadly nature of
230 volt equipment in the event of a fault.
14
Where the use of mains powered equipment is inevitable, additional safety precautions must
be taken. The supply must be protected by the use of a residual current device (RCD).
Residual current devices

15
Under fault conditions, these devices detect an imbalance in the current in the circuit and
disconnect the supply before the person at risk can receive a potentially fatal electric shock.
16
There are two types of RCD:

(a)
Those that are fitted as part of an electrical distribution system and, for example, are
found within the supply panel for a site office. This type of RCD can only be installed
QCS 2014

Page 40
by a competent electrician.
(b)
Plug-in RCDs (commonly known as 'power-breakers') that are plugged into a mains
supply socket and which have an in-built socket into which an individual mains
powered electrical tool or other appliance is plugged.
17
Both types of RCD have a test button that simulates a fault and operates the device. The
correct operation of the test button should be checked daily.
18
It should be noted that:
(b)
RCDs are delicate devices and should be treated with care. Advice on suitable RCDs
for construction sites should be sought from manufacturers or suppliers
(c)
the use of a RCD does not give a 100% guarantee of safety
(d)
the device does not have a fail-safe feature and will not give an indication if it is faulty.
AL
RCDs do not reduce current flow or the voltage, only the time that the current flows
(about 30 milliseconds), and thereby the severity of the shock
It cannot be stressed strongly enough that every attempt should be made to use battery
powered tools or 110 volt powered tools where practical and possible. The use of mains
powered equipment, apart from situations like site offices, should be avoided wherever
possible.
IO
19
(a)
All portable and hand-held electric tools should be selected according to the principles of risk
control. For example, where there is a very high risk of electric shock due to site conditions,
the use of pneumatic equipment will eliminate the risk.
20
AT
Portable and hand-held electric tools
IN
A reduced low voltage system, i.e. virtually safe, which is recommended as the safest type of
system for building and construction sites, is one where the phase to earth voltage does not
exceed:
55 volts to earth in the case of a single-phase centre tapped to earth supply
(b)
63.5 volts to earth in the case of a three-phase neutral point earthed supply.
EG
(a)
21
TE
Reduced voltage systems for use with portable and hand-held electric tools
22
The maximum recommended voltage to earth for a reduced low voltage system is stated as
65 volts. Both of these systems will offer a phase to phase voltage of 110 volts for supplying
power tools on site.
23
A reduced low voltage system will eliminate the risk of death from a phase to earth shock in
the majority of situations. Other safer systems, for example, compressed air or battery
power, should be considered when working in confined spaces or damp conditions.
Outputs of 230 volts or 110 volts

24
110 volt systems that are not centre tapped or neutral point earthed can be just as lethal as a
230 volt system in phase to earth faults. In certain situations, even reduced low voltages are
not safe.
25
The maximum voltage for portable and hand-held electric tools should be 110 volt centre
tapped to earth. Flexible cables should be kept as short as possible, frequently checked for
damage and properly repaired as necessary.
QCS 2014

Page 41
1.5.3.7 Maintenance and testing

1
An appropriate maintenance schedule should be established for all portable electrical

equipment and should include user checks, regular visual inspections, and combined
inspection and electrical testing as necessary. It is recommended that 110 volt portable and
hand-held tools should have the following inspection and testing facilities:
(a)
User check Weekly
(b)
Visual inspection Monthly
(c)
Combined inspection and test before first use and thereafter three-monthly.
Insulating tape by itself is neither a legal nor satisfactory repair, either on conductors or the
cable sheath.
Long leads which trail over the ground or floor and so create a tripping hazard must be
avoided. Care must be taken in the use of cable drums or reels, as internal cable
terminations may become loose. They can overheat and cause a fire. Drums and reels
should be inspected regularly for signs of damage or wear.
All insulated or double-insulated tools manufactured in accordance with BS 2754, and with
the recognised symbol attached, give extra protection against the danger of electric shock.
IO
AL
AT
1.5.3.8 Fuses
Fuses can blow through ageing as the internal fuse wire sags and eventually breaks.
However, fuses usually blow for other reasons; usually due to a fault in a piece of equipment.
The reason should be investigated and rectified before a fuse is replaced. If a second fuse
blows immediately the power is switched on, the equipment is defective and no further
attempt should be made to use it.
The equipment should be quarantined if it is repairable or otherwise safely disposed of and

replaced.
Nails, screws, wire or silver paper must never be used to replace fuses.
It is very dangerous.
1.5.3.9 Lighting
EG
IN
TE
Lighting is needed for safety, productivity and security.
The colour and nature of any artificial lighting must not adversely affect, or change the
perception of the colour of any safety sign.
Where the failure of the primary artificial lighting would create a risk to health or safety of the
person(s) at work, secondary lighting must be provided.
There are many different types of lighting, each with its own most suitable application.
Advice should be sought in order to obtain the best light for a particular place, considering
such factors as colour rendition, humidity, flammable or explosive atmosphere.
Handlamps
5
Handlamps must never be run from a 230 volt supply. They should be used on 110 volts or
lower, and preferably from a safety extra low voltage (SELV) supply.
Lamps should all be insulated or double-insulated to BS EN 60598.
QCS 2014

Page 42
The use of extra low voltage handlamps, even down to 12 volts, does not give any protection
against fire or explosion in flammable or potentially explosive atmospheres if the bulb is
broken. In such hazardous areas, only lamps to BS EN 60079-14 should be used.
Special care is needed in sumps and pits, where petrol, LPG fumes or other flammable gas
might collect. All electrical equipment should be BASEEFA approved.
In confined spaces, boilers, tunnels, cramped locations or other hostile damp or humid
atmospheres, lamps supplied should work at 25 volts.
Levels of illumination
Illumination is measured in units of lumens or lux, which is the amount of light falling on one
square metre.
11
Light meters are used to check levels of illumination. Illumination should be measured at the
workplace, not at the light fitting.
12
There are certain factors which can affect the efficiency of lighting, such as:
the amount of daylight available
(b)
the cleanliness and maintenance of light fittings and reflectors
(c)
reflection from walls and ceilings
(d)
the distance of the light source from the workplace
(e)
shadows thrown by equipment, materials, and so on.
AT
IO
(a)
When considering the level of illumination required at a workplace, it should be remembered

that if the distance from the light source to the workplace is doubled, the illumination level will
be reduced to one quarter (inverse square law). For recommended levels for site lighting,
see Appendix 2.
The mounting of lights
(a)
(b)
EG
Lighting should be:
securely mounted at a height that will avoid damage to the lights whilst giving the
required level of illumination
14
IN
TE
13
AL
10
positioned so as to prevent glare, dazzle or reflection
(c)
able to change position as work proceeds
(d)
adaptable, remembering that 50 to 100% more light is required for people over 40
years of age
(e)
increased if necessary, because more light will be required in hazardous situations

and when goggles are worn
(f)
so positioned that it can be screened or shielded from reflective surfaces, on traffic

routes, etc.
(g)
treated as a heat source, with the possibility of burns or fire hazards, particularly with
halogen lighting units.
Site lighting
15
For area lighting with floor lights or beam floodlights:

(a)
all areas should receive light from at least two directions
(b)
fittings should be mounted on poles; towers and high masts must be securely stayed
QCS 2014
(c)
fittings should usually be spaced at not more than two or three times the mounting
height
(d)
230 volts is generally accepted for fixed floodlighting, mounted well above ground
(e)
installations must be to BS 7375, equipment to BS 4363
(f)
additional lighting should be provided in hazardous areas.
Dust and dirt on lights can absorb up to 20% of their output and cleaning is often costeffective in maintaining adequate levels of lighting for both working and safety. However,
there may be access issues to overcome.
AT
IO
AL
16

Page 43
IN
This is usually of the tungsten filament type.

It is used to supplement the general area lighting scheme.
(b)
Small sources of light tend to produce shadows; they should be used with a diffuser or
be hung in rows.
(c)
Pendant fittings should be supported so

as not to tension the supply cable.
They should be of the festoon type
only, with moulded-on lamp holders
and protective guards.
EG
(a)
17
TE
Local (task) lighting
(d)
The common type of lighting used by

operatives should be 110 volts reduced
voltage.
(e)
Care should be taken not to dazzle or

cause a nuisance to anyone, including
people outside the site boundary.
For a guide to the characteristics and types of electric lamp, see Appendix 3.
Dispersive lighting
18
This is used over working areas, walkways, ladder access and stairs.
19
Types include dispersive, cargo cluster, fluorescent trough, wall glass unit, bulkhead unit
QCS 2014

Page 44
tungsten or fluorescent.
Fittings should be similar to the industrial indoor type but waterproof.
(b)
They should be mounted centrally, overhead where possible.
(c)
They should usually be spaced at one-and-a-half times mounted height, but the
manufacturer's recommendations should be followed.
(d)
They should be mounted as high as possible to give an even spread of light.
(e)
Mains voltage (230 volts) should only be used where the installation is well protected
and of a permanent nature. Reduced voltages should be used for regular sire work.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
TE
1.5.3.10 Permit to Work
Permit to Work systems are essential to ensure safe working where high-voltage electrical
supplies, cables and equipment exist, particularly in installation, maintenance or construction
work.
A Permit to Work system should form part of that 'safe system'. In the case of construction
sites, Permits to Work are more commonly used whilst the site electrical distribution system
is itself being worked on.
Permits to Work must only be issued by an appointed authorised person, using duplicate and
numbered printed forms as the example shown (see Appendix 5). They must be signed by
an authorised person and by the competent person who is to carry out (or be responsible for)
the work described on the permit.
Most systems contain provisions for the physical locking off of switches, and the retention or
display of keys or permits.
One copy of the permit must be retained for the duration of the work by the person to whom
it is issued. Before apparatus is made live again, the permit must be returned for
cancellation. At cancellation, it must be countersigned by both the holder and the authorised
person.
The authorised person should keep a record in the job file of the issued permits and their
cancellation.
Before work starts, the authorised person should ensure that the Permit to Work will cover
the making safe from all possible sources of supply.
If the work is handed over from one competent person to another, the permit is to be
EG
IN
QCS 2014

Page 45
endorsed by the authorised person and transferred to the second operative.
1.5.3.11 Dealing with electric shock emergencies

1
On a construction site, a plan should be prepared for potential emergencies, including

electric shock.
The plan should include:

posting notices in appropriate and prominent places publicising the emergency
procedures
(b)
training sufficient workers in the procedures to follow when treating an electric shock
casualty, including first aid action
(c)
instructing workers in the action to take in the event of someone receiving an electric
shock. For example, switching off the electrical supply and calling the emergency
services.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
QCS 2014

Page 46

1.5.3 Appendix 1
Safety checklist
Permit to Work
Are the instructions clear about who can grant permits and the time when a permit comes
into operation or expires?
Who is the manager responsible for overseeing Permit to Work systems?
What is the procedure for co-ordinating the activities of different trades working on the same
job?
What is the procedure for informing all contractors that a Permit to Work system exists?
Have all operatives been instructed and trained in safety procedures, such as Permit to Work
systems, locking off and treatment for electric shock?
Have Permit to Work documents and procedures been checked and agreed by the
Contractor and employee representatives to ensure all necessary safeguards have been
provided?
Is the Permit to Work procedure regularly reviewed and updated?
IO
AL
AT
Cables
Have all necessary precautions been taken where overhead lines exist close to the site?
Are distribution cables so positioned that they do not cause a hazard at openings, passages,
ladders, stairs, and so on?
10
Have precautions been taken to ensure that cables lying on the ground have been protected
from physical damage or wet conditions?
11
Have the necessary precautions been taken to ensure that cables do not hang directly from
nails, which may cause insulation damage?
12
Are cables protected from the edges of sharp objects?
13
Have all possible precautions been taken to ensure that suspended cables do not carry any
weight? Are they supported by rods or catenary wires?
14
Are all cables visible, with, if necessary, yellow and black or red and white plastic bunting
strips attached?
15
Is there an adequate supply of extension cable for use on the site?
16
Are all junctions and repairs properly carried out by a qualified electrician?
17
Are electrical circuits used for the correct purpose (for example, lighting circuits must not be
used for power tools, especially where lighting festoons are fitted with trailing leads)?
18
Are buried cables correctly protected by a 450 mm cover and cover tiles? Is the line of the
cable also clearly marked?
19
Are cables capable of carrying the load required and are they adequate for their purpose?
EG
IN
TE
Plugs
20
Are all industrial plugs to BS EN 60309-2, in good condition, not cracked or otherwise
damaged?
21
Are splash-proof covers being used as necessary?
22
Are the correct plugs properly fitted to equipment?
QCS 2014

Page 47
23
Are all plugs being used suitable for the site conditions prevailing?
24
Have any plugs been forced into the wrong sockets (for example, by the removal of keys)?
25
When plugs have been fitted, have the correct connections been made, with the wire being
correctly colour coded in line with British and International Standards.
26
Are cable grips being used and is the earth cable fitted with some slack, so that it is the last
to be pulled out?
27
Have all possible steps been taken to ensure that there are no improvised junctions, nails,
matches or silver paper, being used in place of the correct equipment?
28
Is the correct type of fuse with the proper rating fitted?
29
Have all made-up leads or extension cables been correctly assembled by a competent
electrician?
Site accommodation
Has the incoming supply been installed by competent electrical contractors?
31
Is an RCD incorporated into each electrical circuit?
32
Is each RCD checked for correct operation on a weekly basis?
33
Is the use of 230 volt equipment restricted to office accommodation and welfare facilities?
34
Is a programme of PAT testing carried out on all portable 230 volt equipment?
AT
IO
AL
30
Power tools
Are all power tools used manufactured to BS EN

50144-1 or double-insulated to (BS 2754) and CE
marked?
36
Is the plug undamaged?
37
Are cable clamps secure?
38
Have checks been made to ensure that trailing leads are not cut or frayed?
39
Is the cable protected from excessive flexing by a rubber sleeve where the cable enters the
tool?
40
Are all screws in place and secure?
41
Have the tools or machines been checked to ensure that there are no cracks or missing
pieces?
42
Have checks been made to ensure that the nameplate is secure with details of:
EG
IN
TE
35
Type
Serial number
Voltage
Volts AC/DC
Frequency
(normally 50 HZ)
Current
Amps
Speed
RPM
Checklist for operatives

43
Are all machines and hand tools disconnected before any adjustment or work is carried out
on them?
44
Are all machines disconnected when not in use?
45
Is the tool fitted with the correct type and size of plug?
46
Have checks been carried out to ensure that any colour codings are correct?
QCS 2014

Page 48
47
Are cables of an adequate rating for the tool that is being used?
48
Are checks carried out to ensure that no unofficial cables are being used?
49
Have instructions been issued to ensure that no makeshift repairs or maintenance are
carried out?
50
Are all defects reported immediately to a competent person?
51
Is the machine kept clean and free from damp?
52
Are all connections correctly made, including waterproofing?
53
Are all operatives aware that they should never carry any tool or machine by its cable?
54
Have instructions been issued to ensure that no machine is started or stopped under load?
55
Do all portable tools have a current PAT test sticker?
AL
until the electricity company is consulted for advice
(b)
within 9 m of overhead power lines on wood, concrete or steel poles, or
(c)
within 15 m of overhead power lines on steel towers?
(a)
Are all personnel working close to overhead power lines aware that the distances mentioned
above are measured horizontally at ground level from directly below the outermost
conductor?
AT
57
Is everyone working on site aware that no work should take place:
IO
56
Note: Electricity companies have different rules for the lateral swing of conductors in high winds and
the distance of barriers may vary between companies.
TE
Precautions near live overhead power lines
Has an essential ongoing system of liaison between Contractor or contractor and the
electricity company been established?
59
Where overhead power lines have not been diverted or made dead and therefore remain
live, have all practicable steps been taken to provide adequate barriers.
60
Have adequate arrangements been made for the passage of tall plant at specific times
where overhead power lines have been made dead?
EG
IN
58
Work beneath overhead power lines

61
On sites where work will take place below overhead power lines, have additional
precautions, as necessary, been taken, as well as the provision of barriers with
passageways?
62
Is all work carried out under the direct supervision of a responsible person, familiar with the
hazards, after consultation with the local electricity company?
Passage beneath overhead power lines

63
If there is no work or passage of plant under overhead power lines, have barriers been
positioned so as to prevent any close approach of any plant, equipment or personnel to
within at least 9 m from the overhead power lines?
64
Does all plant passing under overhead lines use a defined passageway, protected by
barriers?
Alterations to buildings
65
Have all electrical circuits been identified before any work is allowed to start?
QCS 2014
66

Page 49
Is there a plan to remove old wiring and equipment which is no longer required, as early as
possible?
Commissioning new parts of the electrical installation

Has the Contractor prepared an agreed plant commissioning programme?
68
Are all the relevant contractors aware of this programme?
69
Is the programme regularly monitored?
70
Is each part of the installation that is being worked on securely isolated (lock, tag and try)?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
67
QCS 2014

Page 50

1.5.3 Appendix 2
Recommended levels for site lighting
Governing factors
Design value lux
Security
Depending on the degree of risk
5-30
Movement and
handling
Movement of people, machines and vehicles, handling of

materials, walkways and access routes
20
Stores and
stockyards
For stored goods
30
Site entrances
General access, vehicle and pedestrian
30
General work area
General rough work, site clearance
50
Craft work
Reinforcing concreting, shuttering erection, bricklaying,

scaffolding
Fine craft work
Joinery, all work with power tools and circular saws,

plastering, painting, electrical, plumbing, shopfitting,
brickwork
300
Special work
Retouching paint, French polishing
500
Rest rooms, locker rooms, toilets
150
100
EG
IN
TE
IO
AL
Purpose
AT
Applies to both indoor and outdoor activities and relates to the value on the ground, floor or
horizontal working plane. They may require adjustment according to district brightness.
Site offices
Site huts
On desks and reference tables, general lighting of drawing 500

office
Drawing offices on
site
On drawing boards
750
Emergency lighting
For escape and standby purposes
5-70
QCS 2014

Page 51

1.5.3 Appendix 3
Guide to the characteristics and types of electric lamp
Tungsten
halogen
(T-H)
Mercury
vapour
(MBF)
Fluorescent
tubular
(MCF)
Sodium
Sodium vapour
vapour low high pressure
pressure
(SON)
(SOX)
Wattage range
40/1500
300/2000
50/2000
6/85
35/180
250/1000
Voltage range
25/250
110/250
200/250
110/250
200/250
220/250
* Efficacy
(Lumens Watt)
10-18
17-22
35-55
41-68
Colour
rendering
Good
Good
Fair
Good
Resistance to
vibration
Poor
Fair
Good
Normal life
(hours)
1000
2000
Restrictions on
use or on
position
None
Horizontal
4 degrees
80-100
Poor
Good
Good
Good
Good
5000/7500
6000
6000
None
None
For road
lighting only
None
AT
IO
124-175
AL
Tungsten
filament
(GLS)
7500
IN
TE
Brief lamp
characteristics
EG
* The efficacy is the measure of effectiveness in converting electrical energy into usable light.
QCS 2014

Page 52

1.5.3 Appendix 4
Electrical demand for construction sites
Plant 415 V3 phase
Type
Portable tools 110V 1/3 Site lighting 110V1 Temp accommodation

phase
phase
230 V 1 phase
kW No Total
Type
RW No
Total
Location
Type
kW
Requirement
Tower crane
Chasers
Lighting
Hoist
Hammers
Heating
Platform
Saw drills
Water heating
hoist
kW
Drying
Sanders
Cooking
Pump 'A'
Vibrators
Pump 'B'
Air blowers
Saw bench
Dehumidifiers
AL
Compressor
Power
IO
Printing
Batching
plant
Diversity factor
Demand load
Demand load
Total load
Diversity factor
Diversity factor
Demand load
Demand load
AT
Diversity factor
Total load
Total load
Floodlighting
Total load
Fixed
where
TE
For calculation purposes, check that only the formula: i x V = W is used

i = current in amps
IN
V = voltage
EG
W = wattage
Typical electrical supplies used on construction sites

Phase
415
230
Derived from
Volts
Special provision
Application
Supply undertaking
Fixed and transportable equipment above 5 hp,

e.g. crane, hoist, compressor, concrete mixer, and
large scale personnel amenities
Supply undertaking
110
415V ' transformer Secondary winding phase to

earth 64 V
Site offices, personnel amenities and fixed

floodlighting
Transportable equipment up to 5 hp, e.g. vibrators,
pumps, site lighting other than fixed floodlighting,
and hand tools
110
230V transformer
Secondary winding outers to

earth 55 V
All portable and transportable tools up to 2.5 hp

and site lighting
50
Transformer

earth 25 V
Dangerous situations, tunnelling work, inside

boilers, confined spaces
25
Transformer

earth 12.5V
Dangerous situations, tunnelling work, inside

boilers, confined spaces
QCS 2014

Page 53

1.5.3 Appendix 5
Permit to Work on high voltage equipment
No.
Issued to ........................................................................ Job
...............................................................................
I hereby declare that it is safe to work on the following H.V. apparatus which is dead, isolated from all
live conductors and is connected to earth:
AL
All other apparatus is dangerous
AT
IO
SWITCHING AND ISOLATING. The apparatus is disconnected from all live conductors by the
following operations:
EARTHING. The equipment is earthed at the following points:
TE
IN
DANGER NOTICES are posted at.....................................................................................................
EG
AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHING CONTROL has been rendered inoperative

at....................................
OTHER PRECAUTIONS..................................................................................................................
Signed .................................................................. Date ........................................... Time
................................. (Authorised person)
I hereby declare that I accept responsibility for carrying out work on the apparatus detailed on this
permit and that no attempt will be made by me, nor by any person under my control, to carry out work
on any other apparatus:
Signed .................................................................. Date ........................................... Time
.................................
Note: After signature for work to proceed, this receipt must be signed by, and the Permit to Work
retained by, the person in charge of the work until work is suspended or completed and the clearance
section has been signed.
This is to certify that the work authorised above has been completed or stopped and that all workers
under my charge have been withdrawn and warned that it is no longer safe to work on the apparatus
specified on this Permit to Work and that gear, tools and additional earthing connections are all
cleared. Automatic fire extinguishing control has been restored.
QCS 2014

Page 54
Permit to Work is hereby cancelled
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Signed .................................................................. Date ........................................... Time

................................. (Authorised person)
QCS 2014

Page 55

1.5.3 Appendix 6
High voltage safety
Identity of site.................................................................................................................
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT ...............................................................................................................
is the person responsible on this site for ensuring that the rules for the safe operation of H.V. systems
and the Permit to Work system are complied with in every respect.
Signed .............................................................................. Date ..........................................................
AL
Status .............................................................................. Company...................................................

The authorised person(s) for H.V. switching, isolation, testing and earthing is (are):
IO
AT
EG
IN
TE
QCS 2014

Page 56

1.5.4
Working In and Around Excavations
1.5.4.1 Key points

1
Many deaths and serious injuries have resulted from the collapse of unsupported
excavations.
These accidents could have all been prevented if the sides had been supported.
The type of support system must be selected or designed by a competent person.
There is no minimum depth at which an excavation must be supported; it depends on the

soil/sand.
The installation, modification and removal of any support system must be carried out:
by persons who have been trained and are competent to do so
(b)
without putting the safety of these people at risk.
AL
(a)
Generally, the longer that an unsupported excavation is open the more chance there is of it
collapsing; ground that was previously stable can become waterlogged or dry out.
In some cases it will be possible to detect at an early stage that the sides of an excavation
are becoming unstable, for example during the inspections carried out by a competent
person.
There are other hazards associated with working in excavations, for example the presence
of underground services, contaminated land, etc.
Excavations can become confined spaces under certain circumstances, necessitating the
management of additional health and safety hazards.
Section 2 of the QCS covers ground investigation and Section 12 covers earthworks.
IN
Note:
TE
AT
IO
Almost all construction work involves some form of excavation, for foundations, drains,
sewers, etc. These can vary greatly in depth and may be only a few centimetres deep or be
very deep and very dangerous.
A relatively small collapse might involve about a cubic metre of soil, but a cubic metre of soil
weighs over a tonne. A person at the bottom of a trench who is buried under this volume of
material would be unable to breathe, due to the pressure on the chest, and could quickly
suffocate and die.
Deep trenches look dangerous; however, trenches less than 2.5 metres deep are where
most related deaths occur, in fact, most accidents occur in ground conditions with no visible
defects; the trench sides seem clean and self-supporting.
Despite appearances, however, the removal of material causes pressure relief and
introduces the conditions which lead to failure. Rainwater or hot, dry weather increase the
chances of such failure. Surcharging the sides of an excavation also increases the likelihood
of collapse.
Neither the shallowness of an excavation nor the appearance of the ground should be
automatically taken as indications of safety.
An excavation may also be a 'confined space' and additional precautions will need to be
taken.
EG
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

Page 57
QCS 2014
QCS 2014

Page 58

Before carrying out any work, including excavation work, a risk assessment of the work to be
done is required under these Regulations.
person might encounter as a result of the work being carried out. This includes other
contractors and the public.
practicable.
those risks.
themselves or other persons.
TE
With regard to excavations, these Regulations require that:

all places of work are safe, with safe means of access and egress
(b)
steps are taken to ensure any structure that has become unstable due to any
construction work, including excavation, does not collapse
(c)
steps are taken to prevent anyone being buried by a collapse of material
(d)
the sides of excavations are supported or battered back where necessary to prevent
collapse or dislodgement and fall of material
(e)
steps are taken to prevent people, materials, spoil, vehicles, equipment or plant falling
into, or causing the collapse of, an excavation
EG
IN
(a)
AT
IO
AL
(f)
steps are taken to prevent danger from damage to underground and overhead
services
(g)
excavations are inspected by a competent person and inspection reports prepared as

specified
(h)
each excavation has sufficient fresh air
(i)
there is suitable lighting at places of work
(j)
anyone who has to carry out excavation work or work in an excavation is provided with
appropriate training and is competent
Risk assessments
7
Before carrying out any work, including excavation work, a risk assessment of the work to be
done is required.
The risk assessment must consider the potential for the sides of an excavation to collapse,
the potential for someone to be injured and the possible need for a support system. The
QCS 2014

Page 59
person assessing the risk of collapse must be competent to assess the soil stability.
9
The risk assessments should seek to eliminate or control the risk at source, for example by
specifying trenchless techniques or ensuring the sides are 'battered' or 'stepped' (sometimes
known as 'benched)' thus making a collapse impossible.
10
The risk assessment must include consideration of the following hazards:

collapse of the sides
(b)
underground services
(c)
contaminated ground
(d)
fall of materials, persons, plant or equipment into the excavation
(e)
confined spaces - poisonous or explosive atmospheres or lack of oxygen
(f)
flooding
(g)
overhead services
(h)
moving plant - injury to persons
(i)
lifting operations
(j)
undermining adjacent structures or services
(k)
surcharging the sides of an excavation. Control measures should include:
(l)
protection of person(s) who are installing the support system
(m)
safe exposure and, if necessary, support of underground services
(n)
safe access and egress from the excavation
(o)
adequate ventilation of the workspace
(p)
dewatering the trench if necessary
(q)
the need for inspections of the excavation by a competent person
(r)
the stability of adjacent structures or land
(s)
guarding and lighting where necessary.
IO
AT
TE
IN
EG
Soil stability
AL
(a)
11
Excavation involves the removal of soil and rock, in lesser or greater quantities. Water is
almost always present, even if only as moisture in the soil. This presents an additional
hazard that must be considered.
12
Soil varies in its nature. Some soil, like fine sand,

flows easily. Other soils, like stiff clay, are more
cohesive. No soil, whatever its structure, can be
relied upon to support its own weight and, if a
trench or excavation cannot be made safe by
battering or stepping the sides, some form of
support will be required. Loose and fractured
rock will also need some support.
QCS 2014

Page 60
Firm or stiff clay type ground

Trenchless techniques
13
This module highlights the potential dangers associated with any form of excavation.
Readers should also be aware of the work techniques available to eliminate, or at least
partially eliminate, the need for excavations and thus their associated hazards.
14
Thrust boring, directional drilling and pipe jacking are examples of such techniques. Some of
the trenchless methods that have been developed still require the excavation of pits at either
end of the 'trenchless run' in order to launch and retrieve the boring equipment.
Battering or stepping excavations
AL
If battering the sides of an excavation, the angle at which the sides are cut will depend upon:
the nature of the soil, which may be a mixture of materials
(b)
the water content of the soil, including any increase or decrease whilst the excavation
is open.
(a)
IO
15
EG
IN
TE
AT
Refer to Appendix 4 - Angles of repose
1.5.4.4 Trench supports

1
The need for adequate support will depend on:

(a)
the type of excavation
(b)
the nature of the ground
(c)
ground water conditions
(d)
surcharge of sides of excavation.

Page 61
AL
QCS 2014
Close boarded excavation
Generally speaking, timbering or shoring is not required for trenches or excavations where
there is no danger whatsoever of any material falling or collapsing or where excavations are
so shallow that such a fall would not result in any injury.
For all other excavations or trenches, a survey of the type of soil or other materials that will
be excavated must be carried out by a trained and experienced person prior to excavation.
This will usually provide sufficient information for a suitable method of excavation and
support to be determined.
Where large, complex or extensive excavations are concerned, a specialist engineer should
decide how to proceed.
An adequate supply of support materials must be available on site ready for use before the
excavation commences.
They must be sound, free from defects, of adequate strength, of good construction and
properly maintained. Supports must be fixed securely to prevent displacement.
All supports should be erected, altered and dismantled under the supervision of a competent
person.
It is essential that work is organised so that the person(s) installing any type of support
system can do so without their safety being put at risk.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Types of support systems

9
All practical steps should be taken where necessary to prevent danger to any person from
collapse of an excavation and from accidental fall or dislodgement of material from the side
or roof or adjacent to any excavation.
10
Conventional timber shuttering or steel trench sheets and adjustable props should be used.
The props may be mechanical (jacks or acrows) or hydraulic.
11
A temporary framework of supports, or a protective box or cage, may be needed to protect

workers while they put in permanent timbering. A box or cage can be moved forward as
timbering progresses.
QCS 2014
12

Page 62
In addition to the traditional systems of supporting excavations, several proprietary support

systems are available. These include shields (also known as drag boxes), trench-boxes
and plate lining systems.
Shields
13
A shield consists of two vertical plates which are permanently braced apart to provide a safe
working area between them. Shields are designed for providing temporary protection for
workers in a trench, rather than for providing permanent support for the trench sides. Shields
are designed to be dragged along the trench as work progresses, therefore only localised
protection from falling materials is provided.
Trench-boxes
The trench-box support system is modular and involves either lowering strutted, metal box
sections into a pre-dug trench, or progressively digging the boxes in to provide continuous
support as the depth of the trench increases.
15
The box sections are built up vertically and laterally to form a permanent support for the
trench sides.
16
Boxes of this type can generally be extended in width and height to cater for various
excavation dimensions.
AT
IO
AL
14
Plate lining
The principle of a plate lining system is that metal plates are slid into position between
vertical soldier posts, which have been installed previously at pre-set intervals. The soldier
posts are strutted apart to counteract inward pressure from the trench sides.
TE
17
IN
Avoiding buried services
The use of any of these proprietary support methods can present problems when existing
buried services cross the line of the trench being excavated.
19
A further method of supporting the sides of excavations, which combines proprietary and
traditional technology, is the use of hydraulic waling frames. This system incorporates the
lowering of a hydraulic frame into an excavation in which trench sheets have already been
installed. The hydraulic frame is then jacked apart to provide support for the trench sheets.
Each hydraulic frame, when in position, is disconnected from the hydraulic supply and left in
the pressurised state. This method of support is better able than the other proprietary
systems to cope with buried services that cross the trench because it leaves gaps between
the trench sheets. Hydraulic frames that can be expanded in both length and width are
available to cope with the excavation of manholes and pits.
EG
18
Inspection and maintenance of support systems

20
All excavation work requires careful monitoring, particularly when trenches are first opened
and sides are unsupported. Even when support work has been installed, constant vigilance
is essential.
21
Small movements of earth, resulting in movements in the supports or timbering of no more

than 6-12 mm, are usually the only sign of the progressive weakening in cohesive soils.
22
Such movements can easily pass unnoticed but they are signs that something is wrong.
23
Movements can be detected from slight distortion in the timbering, bowing of poling boards
and walings, or signs of local crushing.
QCS 2014

Page 63
All timber must be regularly checked. Where timber remains in position for any length of
time, it may dry out, shrink or rot.
25
The ground also may dry out and shrink, which loosens the timbering. Alternatively, it may
absorb additional moisture, swell and displace the timbering. Soil may even leak into the
excavation from behind the timbering, loosening it.
26
In close-boarded excavations, the support-work members must be kept tight against each
other and against the soil face; wedges or telescopic struts holding them must always be
kept tight. Raking, or angle, struts should all be regularly examined for signs of having been
damaged or dislodged.
27
When loads are being moved into or out of the excavation by skip or bucket, care should be
taken to avoid damage to struts or walls. Vertical boards, commonly known as rubbing
boards, should be provided to avoid such damage.
28
During bad weather, spoil heaps tend to slump, and loose boulders or masonry may fall into
the excavation. As a general rule, the distance between the edge of the trench and the
bottom of the spoil heap must not be less than the depth of the trench.
29
Heavy vehicles should not be allowed near the edge of excavations unless the support work
has been specially designed to permit it.
IO
AL
24
Care must be taken to see that excavation work does not jeopardise the stability of any
adjacent structure. Precautions to protect workers and others must be taken before and
during any excavation work.
30
AT
Adjacent structures
TE
1.5.4.5 Access
Safe means of getting into and out of an excavation must be provided. If a risk assessment
identifies that ladders are a reasonable means of access or egress from an excavation, they
must be suitable and of sufficient strength for the purpose.
They must be on a firm level base, sufficiently secured so as to prevent slipping and must,
unless a suitable alternative handhold is provided, extend to a height above the landing
place of at least 1 metre (about 5 rungs), so as to provide a safe handhold. Climbing into or
out of an excavation using the walings, buried services and struts must be prohibited and
specifically covered in the safe system of work and, if there is one, the method statement.
EG
IN

Page 64
AL
QCS 2014
IO
Open sheeting using steel sheets and jacks
AT
1.5.4.6 Guarding excavations
Where necessary, suitable steps must be taken to prevent any person, vehicle, plant or
equipment, or any accumulation of earth or other materials from falling into an excavation.
Barriers should also serve to keep materials, plant and equipment away from the edges of
an excavation. Barriers may be removed to permit access of personnel, plant and
equipment, but should be replaced as soon as possible.
During darkness, the edges of an excavation should be marked with lights, especially where
they are close to public thoroughfares. Battery-operated traffic lamps placed at suitable
intervals are usually sufficient.
EG
IN
TE
1.5.4.7 Vehicles and plant

1
Ideally, all vehicles and plant (except those which must approach an excavation, for
example, for tipping or lifting activities) should be kept away from excavations. Traffic routes
should be planned and set out accordingly.
When heavy loads (such as items of construction plant) are positioned close to excavations,
additional pressure - known as surcharging - is placed on the excavation sides and on any
form of support system that is in use. Where this cannot be avoided, it must be allowed for in
QCS 2014

Page 65
the design of the excavation support system.

Where vehicles are used for tipping materials into an excavation, safety measures, such as
well anchored stop blocks, should be used to prevent the vehicle overrunning the edge.
These must be placed at a sufficient distance from the edge of the excavation to avoid the
danger of the edge breaking away under the weight of vehicles.
IO
AL
AT
1.5.4.8 Site lighting
There must be suitable and sufficient lighting at every workplace, the approaches to the
workplace and on traffic routes. As far as possible, this should be natural lighting.
It is also good practice to ensure that attention is paid to the adequate lighting of access
points, openings and lifting operations.
TE
IN
1.5.4.9 Ventilation
Excavations must be kept clear of suffocating, toxic or explosive gases. These may be
natural gases like hydrogen sulphide, methane and sulphur dioxide, exhaust gases from
nearby plant, or leaks from nearby pipes or installations. These can seep through the soil
and can accumulate at the bottom of an excavation, below ground level.
Leakage of propane and butane from LPG cylinders is potentially very dangerous; the gases
will sink to the lowest point and form an explosive concentration that cannot disperse
naturally. In a similar way, leaking oxygen in an excavation can lead to oxygen enrichment
which can lead to fire or explosion. Gases which are heavier than air can leak into an
excavation causing air to be displaced, leading to asphyxiation.
For the purpose of dealing with these hazards, the bottom of a deep excavation should be
regarded as a confined space.
EG
Confined spaces
4
When an excavation is classified as a confined space, tests for toxic gas or oxygen depletion
must be carried out before work starts, and continuously as work progresses. It is also
recommended that the work should be subject to the issue of a Permit to Work certificate.
To ensure that every workplace or approach is safe and without risks to health, there must
be a sufficient supply of purified air. The most common method of ventilation is to blow clean
air into the excavation in sufficient volume to dissipate any gas and provide adequate
breathable air.
QCS 2014

Page 66
1.5.4.10 Underground cables and services

1
No excavation work should be carried out unless steps have been taken to identify and
prevent any risk of injury arising from underground cables or other underground services.
1.5.4.11 Inspection and reports

1
All excavations used to carry out construction work must be inspected by a competent
person:
(a)
at the start of every shift in which the work is to be carried out
(b)
after any event likely to have affected the strength or stability of the excavation or any
part of it
(c)
after any accidental fall or dislodgement of any material.
The person who carried out the inspection must be satisfied that the work can be carried out
safely and without risk to workers.
A report must be prepared by the person carrying out the inspection, giving the following
information:
IO
AL
the name and address of the person on whose behalf the inspection was carried out
(b)
the location of the place of work inspected
(c)
a description of the place of work or part of that place of work inspected, including
plant and equipment or materials, if any
(d)
the date and time of the inspection
(e)
details of any matter identified that could give rise to a risk to the health or safety of
any person
(f)
details of any action taken as a result of any matter identified above
(g)
details of any further action considered necessary
(h)
the name and position of the person making the report.
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
The person who prepares the written report must write it before the end of the shift in which
the inspection was carried out and provide a copy of the report within 24 hours to the person
on whose behalf the inspection was carried out.
The report or a copy of it must be kept on the site until the work is completed and for a
period of three months from the date of completion.
Not more than one written report in any period of seven days is required in respect of the
inspection at the start of any shift. However, it is advised that a daily record of the inspection
is kept, possibly in the site diary.
An example of an inspection report, which may be reproduced, can be found in Appendix 3

of this module.
Steps must be taken to protect workers from the fall of any material or object.
No material or object may be thrown or tipped from a height where injury may result. This
includes scaffolding materials which should be lowered under control.
10
No timber or other materials are to be left with projecting nails.
11
Every workplace on a construction site must be kept in a reasonable state of tidiness and
QCS 2014

Page 67
cleanliness.
12
Materials and equipment must be properly and securely stacked and stored.
13
Work equipment must be constructed or adapted so as to be suitable for the purpose for
which it is used or provided. This includes any tools or items of equipment, for example, a
shovel, podger or pile driving rig.
14
Contractors must avoid the need for employees to undertake any manual handling
operations at work that will involve the risk of them being injured.
Every client must ensure that the engineer and designer for any project carried out for
the client is provided with any relevant information which the client holds, or could find
out by making reasonable enquiries. For example, the client must provide details of
underground services, ground conditions, etc, which could be found from making
reasonable enquiries.
(b)
The designer has a duty to eliminate or reduce hazards by design. This might mean
locating structures to avoid underground services, or specifying techniques that
minimise deep excavations.
(c)
A health and safety plan must be prepared for every project and should include details
of health and safety risks to any person carrying out construction work. This would
include the risks from any excavation project.
IO
AL
(a)
AT
1.5.4.12 Excavators used as cranes
Excavators, loaders and combined excavator loaders may be used as cranes in connection
with work directly associated with an excavation, and any other application where this type of
equipment can be used.
All work is subject to a suitable and sufficient risk assessment, subsequent control measures
and capabilities of the work equipment.
The risk assessment should take account of the fact that when a machine is in the object
handling mode (being used as a crane), it will be necessary for the slinger to approach the
machine to hook the load on and off. This person will be in what is regarded as a hazardous
area and much hearer to the machine than anyone would be in normal circumstances. The
slinger is at risk of being struck by the load, bucket or excavator arm if the excavator moves
or slews rapidly.
Excavator operators and slingers must be made aware of these dangers; effective
communication and constant vigilance are essential.
The risk assessment must also establish " whether the machine is suitable for the proposed
task. The weight of the bucket (if still fitted) plus the quick hitch must be added to the weight
of the load to establish if the machine will be working within its safe working load.
Ideally, unless there are good reasons for not doing so, the bucket will be removed to
improve the machine operator's visibility.
The risk assessment must also address:
EG
IN
TE
(a)
the need for the lifting operation to be ideally segregated from other work activities
taking place in the vicinity, particularly where it is necessary for the machine to travel
with a raised load
(b)
the ground conditions, particularly where a tracked excavator will carry out the lifting
operation. Such machines have no means of levelling themselves and are therefore
dependent upon the ground being sufficiently level to track across it and carry out the
lifting operation safely.
QCS 2014

Page 68
The safe working load must be clearly marked on the machine and any lifting accessories,
such as a quick hitch. A rated object handling capacity table, must be available in the cab.
If the rated lifting capacity for an excavator (or the backhoe of a backhoe-loader) is greater
than 1 tonne (or the overturning moment is greater than 40,000 Nm), the machine must be
fitted with:
(a)
a boom lowering control device on the raising boom cylinder(s) (a safety check valve),
which meets the requirements of ISO 8643, and
(b)
an acoustic or visual warning device, which indicates to the operator when the object
handling capacity or corresponding load moment is reached.
Chains or slings for lifting must not be placed around or on the teeth of the bucket.
Accessories for lifting may only be attached to a purpose-made point on the machine.
11
Whilst BS 7121 may not specifically refer to excavators used as cranes, compliance would
assist in the provision of safe systems of work.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
10
QCS 2014

Page 69

1.5.4 Appendix 1
Excavations Safety checklist
Before starting excavation work
Check that a site-specific risk assessment has been carried out.
For purposes of excavation, no ground should be considered good or safe until it has been
investigated.
Prevent all access to the excavation by unauthorised persons, especially children. Backfill as
soon as possible to reduce risks.
Check the soil types and decide which type of support work is required in consultation with a
competent engineer or supervisor.
Check whether the excavation will affect adjoining roads, buildings or other structures, such
as scaffolds.
Determine the positions of all public services, especially buried services, and ensure that
they are adequately marked, supported or disconnected as necessary.
Always seek advice before excavating below existing foundations of adjacent or adjoining
buildings. It may be necessary to provide shoring, i.e. raking or flying or both.
Provide an adequate supply of material for support work, along with barriers and correct
traffic notices, before work starts.
Make provision for any side support system to stand proud of the existing ground levels. This
prevents any loose material from falling into the excavation.
10
Check the need for, and provision of, adequate lighting.
11
Check that adequate and sufficient ladders have been provided for safe access to the
excavation and that sufficient ropes for securing these items are to hand.
12
Determine the positions of bridges, temporary roads and spoil heaps.
13
Determine the methods of excavating before starting work, and the method by which it is
intended to install and remove any support work.
14
Plan traffic routes to keep heavy plant and vehicles away from excavations, as far as is
possible, except where they must approach the excavation for tipping and lifting activities.
15
Plan the safe backfilling of the excavation, using suitable materials.
16
Check that the excavator operator is competent.
17
Check that the excavator and equipment is in good repair and has been inspected.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 70

1.5.4 Appendix 2
Excavations Safety checklist
Whilst digging, working in, or reinstating an excavation
Ensure that only sound support material is being used.
Ensure that approved and safe methods are adopted for the installation of support work in
excavations. A competent person should be in attendance at all times.
Ensure that all working surfaces are safe.
Install supports as soon as the excavation sides are trimmed. This should be done from a
work cage, from ground level, or from inside existing supports.
Ensure that all support work is secure and that props and wedges are tight and properly
maintained.
Check for signs of overstress in support work, any damage that may have been caused by
plant and, when timber is used, make long-term checks for disease and defects, i.e. dry rot,
shakes, etc.
Check for any water or soil which may be seeping through support work.
Check for signs of the earth peeling or cracking at unsupported faces.
Check that there are adequate ladders, that they are maintained, secured and used
correctly.
10
When pumping, ensure that there are adequate sumps and that soil is not being drawn from
behind support work.
11
Check for hazardous atmospheres.
12
Ensure that spoil heaps and other materials are kept back from the edges of the excavation.
13
Ensure that there are adequate barriers, notices and warning lights.
14
Check that the edges of excavations are provided with top and mid guard-rails at all places
where there is a danger of persons falling a distance likely to cause personal injury.
15
Check that any bridges and gangways are fitted with guard-rails and toe-boards.
16
Ensure that stops for dumpers, and tipping lorries are well anchored.
17
Ensure that all passing traffic is kept well back from the edge of the excavation.
18
Ensure that the correct method of withdrawing support work is used; if for any reason it is
considered unsafe to remove it, leave it in.
19
Ensure there is adequate separation between working plant and people.
20
Dumper drivers should dismount while the dumper is being loaded.
21
Ensure that appropriate protective clothing and protective equipment are being used.
22
Ensure that persons are wearing suitable ear defenders when piling or other noisy activities
are taking place.
23
Ensure that machine operators have the best possible vision of the work which is in
progress.
24
Ensure that services are marked, protected and adequately supported when exposed in
excavations.
25
Ensure that any backfilling is carried out correctly and in a planned sequence, and
maintained.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
26

Page 71
Ensure that each excavation is inspected by a competent person:

(a)
before it is first entered
(b)
at the start of each shift
(c)
after any accidental fall of rock, earth or other material
(d)
after any event likely to have affected the strength or stability of the excavation.
Ensure that a proper record of all inspections is made and signed by a competent person.
28
Remember that records of inspections may be kept on computer or in another electronic

form, so long as it is possible to immediately produce a hard copy on request.
29
Ensure that the written report, or a copy, is provided to the person on whose behalf the
inspection was made within 24 hours.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
27
AL

AT
IO
QCS 2014

1.5.4 Appendix 3
Report of inspection on *excavations, *cofferdams and caissons (*Delete as appropriate)

Inspection carried out on behalf of (name and address)...................................................................................................................................................
TE
R
..
Inspection carried out by (name) ...................................................(position) ....................................................................................................................
Description of place of
work, or part inspected
EG
Location
inspected
Date and
time of
inspection
IN
Address of site ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Details of any matter
identified giving rise to a
risk to the health and
safety of any person
Details of any action taken Details of any further action

as a result of any matter
considered necessary
identified
Page 72
QCS 2014

Page 73

1.5.4 Appendix 4
Angles of repose for different soil types
The graph below shows the angle of repose at which various types of soil will slide if
unsupported. They represent the maximum safe angle of batter.
This illustration shows typical maximum safe 'battering' or 'stepping' angles for certain types
of soil. A competent person must be consulted on the safe angle for battering or stepping
excavations. If in doubt, consult a geotechnical engineer.
Users of the above graph should be aware that:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
in many cases soil is a mixture of material and the above diagram must be interpreted
with caution
(b)
an increase in water content will affect the ability of some types of soil to be selfsupporting. Bad weather, vibrations and other pressure could cause early failure
(c)
Slip planes can form in seemingly solid materials, even some types of rock.
QCS 2014

Page 74

1.5.4 Appendix 5
Requirements for excavators used as cranes
Requirements on manufacturer at time of supply
Requirement
When object handling with When object handling with

a rated lift capacity of more a rated lift capacity of less
than 1 tonne
than 1 tonne
EC or Equivalent Certificate
Yes
Yes
of Conformity
Hose burst check valve on
Yes
Not required
boom lift ram
Fixed safe working load

(SWL) marked on the
machine or displayed in the
cab
Acoustic or visual warning
device
Yes
Lift point with SWL marked
Yes
Not required
AL
Yes
Yes
Not required
Not required
Not required
IO
Rated object handling

capacity table in cab
When not
object
handling
Yes
AT
Yes
Not required
Not required
Yes
Not required
Yes
Not required
Yes
Yes
Not required
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
TE
EG
Weekly inspection of
excavator
IN
Four-yearly test and

thorough examination
Twelve-monthly thorough
examination
Yes
Six-monthly thorough
examination of lifting gear
Machine maintenance required by owner
Records may be kept as a paper copy or by electronic means providing a hard copy is always easily
accessible.
QCS 2014

Page 75

1.5.5
Working in Confined Spaces
1.5.5.1 Key points

Working in confined spaces has the potential to be very hazardous unless the appropriate
controls are put in place.
Many people have died as a result of work in confined spaces not being adequately planned
or organised, or safely carried out; many of them were would-be rescuers.
Ideally it will be possible to carry out the work without anyone having to enter a confined
space.
Confined spaces are not just sewers and ducts; under these Regulations many other work
areas could also be classified as confined spaces with issues including difficulty of access
and egress, heat stress, etc. having to be considered.
A risk assessment must be carried out for all work in a confined space.
Where the findings of the risk assessment reveal there to be significant risks to health or
safety, it may result in a method statement being written.
Any plan of the work must consider the method of rescuing the people in the confined space
should the situation become unsafe.
Entry to a confined space should be controlled by a Permit to Work and, where considered
necessary, a separate Permit to Enter.
Any training may need to be specific for the type of confined space - a sewer entry course
may not be appropriate for someone who has to work in a hot roof space.
10
The use of respiratory protective equipment is common in confined space work and users
must be face-fit tested and trained in its use, general care and maintenance.
TE
AT
IO
AL
IN
Every entry into a confined space is potentially hazardous.
Accidents are caused by a combination of factors arising from a lack of safety awareness,
inadequate supervision and a lack of training. The situation is often made worse by heroic
but ill-conceived rescue attempts, founded on insufficient planning and knowledge, which
may lead to multiple fatalities. It is essential therefore, to be able to identify confined spaces
and the hazards associated with entering and working in them.
EG
1.5.5.3 Meaning of 'confined space'

1
A "confined space' can be either:

(a)
a place which is substantially, though not always entirely, enclosed or
(b)
a place where there is a reasonably foreseeable risk of serious injury from hazardous
substances or conditions within the space or nearby.
Some confined spaces are easy to identify, such as closed tanks, vessels and sewers.
Others are less obvious but may be equally dangerous, such as basement-level boiler rooms
or toilets, as well as open-topped tanks, vats, silos or other structures that become confined
spaces during their manufacture.
Some places may become a confined space only occasionally, perhaps due to the type of
work to be undertaken, such as a room during paint spraying. A confined space may not
necessarily be enclosed on all sides; some confined spaces (such as vats, silos or deep
QCS 2014

Page 76
excavations) may have open tops. Places not usually considered to be confined spaces may
become confined spaces because of a change in the condition inside or a change in the
degree of enclosure or confinement.
4
The expression 'confined space' could also refer to the following examples: ducts, vessels,
boreholes, building voids, and enclosures for the purpose of asbestos removal.

practicable.
those risks.
themselves or other persons.
Also of importance with regard to confined space working are the requirements on the
Contractor to:
provide health surveillance for at-risk employees
(b)
establish contacts with external services, for example the emergency services (rescue
and medical services)
(c)
provide employees with comprehensible and relevant information on any risks that
exist in the workplace and on any control measures that are in place to reduce those
risks
(d)
assess employees' capabilities when allocating work to individuals
EG
IN
(a)
(e)
TE
AT
IO
AL
provide adequate training for anyone involved in any aspect of confined space working
(including rescue).
Arising out of the risk assessment for confined space working will usually be a need for the
Contractor to:
(a)
develop a method statement for each job
(b)
implement a Permit to Work system, encompassing or supplemented by a Permit to

Enter.
Confined Spaces
7
These Regulations require Contractors to plan work so that entry to confined spaces is
avoided so far as is reasonably practicable, for example, by doing the work from outside.
They also require a safe system of work to be developed and implemented if entry to a
confined space is unavoidable, and adequate emergency arrangements, which will also
safeguard rescuers, to be put in place before work starts.
QCS 2014

Page 77
Duties to comply with these Regulations are placed on:

(a)
Contractors in respect of work carried out by their own employees and work carried
out by any person (for example, a contractor) insofar as that work is to any extent
under the Contractors control.
The key duty is a complete prohibition of any person entering a confined space to carry out
any work for any purpose whatsoever, where it is reasonably practicable to carry out the
work by any other means.
10
If entry into a confined space is necessary then a risk assessment by a competent person
must be undertaken. The outcome of the risk assessment will then provide the basis for the
development of a full and effective safe system of work, including rescue arrangements.

These Regulations place a legal duty on designers, when preparing their designs, to carry
out design risk assessments and 'design out risk' so far as it is reasonably practicable to do
so.
12
In the context of this section, designers should carry out their design work so that no-one has
to enter a confined space during construction work, maintenance or cleaning of the structure
or during its demolition.
13
Also, within the context of this section these Regulations place legal duties on contractors,
including Contractors, with regard to:
AT
IO
AL
11
safe places of work
(b)
excavations
(c)
prevention of drowning
(d)
prevention of risk from fire, explosion, flooding and asphyxiation
(e)
(f)
fresh air.
EG
IN
TE
(a)

order.
15
employees, the use of the equipment must be restricted to specified workers.
14

16
used by employees.
17
controlling the risk have been considered and are found to be not reasonably practicable to
implement. In practice, however, unless it is possible to carry out the work without entry into
the confined space, the wearing of PPE will usually be necessary.
18
QCS 2014

Page 78
is being used to protect against, and ensure that the PPE will fit the wearer and allow them
to work safely. Where the use of RPE is necessary, face-fit testing to establish the suitability
of the RPE for the wearer, would be required. If more than one item of PPE is being used,
the Contractor must make sure that individual items of PPE are compatible and suitable for
the task that is to be undertaken.
adequate and appropriate information, instruction and training to enable them to understand
the risks being protected against, the purpose of the PPE and manner in which it is to be
used.
20
instruction and training that they have been given, and know the procedures for reporting
loss or defect to their Contractor.
21
In addition to the more commonly used PPE, confined space working will often require the
use of appropriate respiratory protective equipment (RPE) and rescue equipment such as a
safety harness and line.
AL
19
IO
Access to and egress from many confined spaces is made by lowering or raising a person
vertically through the entry/exit point, including during practice or actual rescues.
In these circumstances:
safety harnesses and rescue lines must be regarded as lifting accessories
(b)
the tripod hoist or other type of winch must be regarded as lifting equipment used for
lifting persons
TE
(a)
All such require inspection on a six monthly basis.
IN
AT
EG
1.5.5.6 Dangers in confined spaces

Oxygen deprivation and suffocation
The air that we breathe contains around 21% oxygen and, at that level, people can work
without difficulty. A falling level of oxygen will create an increasingly serious situation if
breathing apparatus is not worn, or the level of oxygen otherwise restored. Generally, the
following symptoms are experienced at the corresponding level of oxygen depletion:
(a)
19% tiredness (normal acceptable minimum level for working)
(b)
17% judgement (decision making) is affected
(c)
12% respiration is affected, fatigue experienced, flames are extinguished
(d)
10% light-headedness, increasingly difficult respiration
(e)
8% nausea, possible collapse
(f)
6% respiration stops, death in minutes.
Oxygen deprivation may be the result of:

2
the displacement of oxygen by gas leaking in from elsewhere, or the deliberate introduction
of purge gas
the displacement of oxygen by a naturally occurring gas, such as methane
QCS 2014

Page 79
oxidisation, rusting or bacterial growth using up the oxygen in air
oxygen being consumed by people working and breathing, or by any process of combustion
welding and other 'hot works'
the prior discharge of a fire extinguisher containing carbon dioxide or other asphyxiating gas.
Toxic atmospheres
8
However much oxygen is present in the atmosphere, if there is also a toxic gas present in
sufficient quantity it will create a hazard.
Some of the many toxic gases which may be encountered include:

hydrogen sulphide, usually from sewage or decaying vegetation
(b)
carbon monoxide from internal combustion engines, or any incomplete combustion,

especially of liquefied petroleum gases (LPG)
(c)
carbon dioxide from any fermentation or being naturally evolved in soil and rocks, or
coming from the combustion of LPG
(d)
fumes and vapours from chemicals such as ammonia, chlorine, sodium, and from
petrol and solvents.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
Whenever a toxic gas (or any gas, fume or vapour that may be hazardous to health) is
thought to be (or known to be) present, then an assessment of the risk to health must be
made. Appropriate control measures must be put into place to eliminate the hazard or control
the risks.
11
Petrol and diesel engines create carbon monoxide, which is an extremely toxic gas.
12
Liquid petroleum gas-powered engines create an excess of carbon dioxide, which is a

suffocating hazard. The use of any form of internal combustion engine within a confined
space must be prohibited, unless a specifically dedicated exhaust extraction system is
operative.
EG
IN
TE
10
Flammable atmospheres
14
Some gases need only be present in very small quantities to create a hazard. A few of the
major sources of explosive and flammable hazards are:
13
(a)
petrol or liquefied petroleum gas, propane, butane and acetylene. These are explosive
in the range of 2% in air upwards. The hazard is normally created by a spillage or
leakage
(b)
methane and hydrogen sulphide, which are naturally evolved from sewage or
decaying organic matter. These are explosive in the range of 4% in air upwards
(c)
solvents, acetone, toluene, white spirit, alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc. These are
explosive in the range of 2% in air upwards. The hazard generally results from
process plants and/or spillage
(d)
hydrogen and other gases evolved from processes such as battery charging.
In an explosive or flammable atmosphere, a toxic or suffocating hazard may also exist.
Other causes of a hostile environment

15
Apart from the hazards dealt with above, other dangers may arise from the use of electrical
and mechanical equipment, from chemicals, process gas and liquids, dust, paint fumes,
QCS 2014

Page 80
welding and cutting fumes.

16
Extremes of excess heat and cold can have adverse effects and may be intensified in a
confined space. Consideration must be given to the timing of what would otherwise be
considered 'standard' work. During hot weather, roof spaces and other types of confined
spaces may reach temperatures which will lead to a dangerous increase in body
temperature.
17
If work cannot be planned to avoid this, for example by starting early, then physical
measures such as cooling and reducing the time spent working in the confined space must
be introduced following an assessment by a competent person.
18
Further dangers exist in the sheer difficulty of getting into or out of, and working in a confined
space. The potential hazard of an inrush of water, gas, sludge due to a failure of walls or
barriers, or leakage from valves, flanges or blanks, must all be considered at the risk
assessment stage.
AL
1.5.5.7 Information, instruction and training
The information, instruction and training given to employees must enable them to carry out
work safely and without risks to their health. The extent of training needed will vary according
to circumstances and the type of space being entered. An entry into a deep confined space
using breathing apparatus would require a full breathing apparatus and rescue course.
However, training to enter a bund around a large diesel tank where the risks are less
significant, such as fumes and possible drowning in diesel, would not require such an
intensive course, and indeed adopting the use of breathing apparatus in this instance may
be entirely inappropriate.
Training should involve demonstrations and practical exercises. It is important that trainees
are familiar with both equipment and procedures before working for the first time in confined
spaces.
Practical refresher training should be organised and available. The frequency with which
refresher training is provided will depend upon how long it is since the type of work was last
done, or if there have been changes to methods of work, safety procedures or equipment.
No person should enter a confined space unless they are trained and competent to do so
safely.
The training needs of each of the four categories of employee considered for confined space
working should be considered. The categories are:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
supervisors
(b)
employees entering confined spaces
(c)
people employed as attendants outside confined spaces
(d)
rescue teams.
Some of the roles identified may be carried out by the same person.
1.5.5.8 Safe working

1
Safe working in a confined space can only be achieved by the use of a Permit to Work
system in which each step is planned and all foreseeable hazards are taken into account.
Such a system, backed up by adequate rescue facilities, should enable work to be carried
out safely.
At the planning stage it will be necessary to determine;
QCS 2014

Page 81
(a)
whether an entry into the confined space is required, or whether an alternative method
of doing the work exists (see Checklist 1 at Appendix 1)
(b)
if an entry is necessary, whether it can be carried out without the use of breathing
apparatus (see Checklist 2 at Appendix 1)
(c)
whether the entry must be made with the use of breathing apparatus (see Checklist 3
at Appendix 1).
In respect of (3) above, it should be emphasised that entry into a confined space using
breathing apparatus should not be made routinely or undertaken as a matter of convenience,
where the use of mechanical or forced ventilation would achieve a safe atmosphere.
If it is decided that the work can be done without anyone entering the confined space,
provided that a safe system of work exists and the confined space has been isolated from
potential sources of hazard, the work can proceed. It is important to avoid systems or plant
being re-energised while work is proceeding and everyone involved should be advised
accordingly.
Once it has been decided that people must enter a confined space, a preliminary meeting
should be held with all concerned, and effective lines of authority and communication
established in order to minimise any risk of subsequent misunderstanding.
The exact routine to be followed will vary, depending on the type of confined space to be
entered. The provisions and precautions required for entry into a large empty surface water
tank will obviously be different from those needed for entry into a narrow service duct
containing pipes and valves, but the fundamental principle of a safe system of work applies
to these and other cases. The risk assessment, as mentioned previously, will have identified
many of the above points and should be used as the basis for developing the safe system of
work.
It is stressed that all personal protective equipment in general, and respiratory protective
equipment in particular, must have been specified by a competent person who is clearly
aware of all of the circumstances surrounding its use.
If the fire and rescue service forms a part of the rescue plan, they must be given a warning
that a confined space entry is to be made. This will give them the opportunity to assess the
risks to their own staff and identify any equipment they might need.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.5.5.9 Isolation
1
The confined space must be isolated from all possible external sources of danger to persons
entering it.
A full Permit to Work system should be used to record the location and types of isolation,
and the hazards being guarded against.
Electrical isolation must never rely on a switch or fuse. The switch gear or fuse holder must
be locked off and a warning notice applied.
Mechanical isolation of pipework should not rely on a single valve or on a non-return valve;
these may let-by and create a hazard. Whenever possible, a section of pipe should be
removed or a blank or spade should be put into a flange between the valve and the confined
space and a warning notice displayed.
Paddles, stirrers or agitators, whether electrically or mechanically operated, should be

physically disconnected by the removal of an operating arm, and a warning notice displayed.
QCS 2014

Page 82
1.5.5.10 Cleaning
There are a variety of methods of cleaning the inside of confined spaces to remove
hazardous solids, liquids or gas. Cold water washing, hot water washing and steaming will
remove many contaminants, while solvents or neutralising agents may be necessary for
others. If hot water or steam is used, with or without a solvent, care must be taken to ensure
that adequate ventilation exists for steam pressure and that condensation does not build up
to unacceptable levels.
If steam is used or water is boiled in a confined space, account must be taken of the vacuum
that can be created on cooling.
When steam or solvents are used, these may in themselves create a toxic, suffocating or
flammable hazard. Even though a space has been well cleaned, it must not be entered until
it has been monitored.
Great care must be taken if encountering any sludge or heavy deposits which may release
toxic gases if disturbed.
AL
IO
1.5.5.11 Purging and ventilation
Air purging and ventilation can be carried out by removing covers, opening inspection doors,
etc. and allowing ordinary air circulation, or by the introduction of compressed air via an air
line. However, higher rates of air exchange can be achieved by the use of air movers,
induction fans or extractor fans.
It is especially important that when an inert gas (such as nitrogen) has been used to purge or
render inert a flammable atmosphere, the inert gas itself is properly purged with air.
When air purging is taking place, the flow of air should be of a sufficient volume and velocity
to ensure that no pockets or layers of gas remain undisturbed.
IN
Atmospheric monitoring
TE
AT
Depending on the circumstances, as a result the risk assessment, continuous atmospheric

monitoring may well be necessary when any work is to be done that would expose
employees to any substance hazardous to health.
Before an entry is made into a confined space, tests must be carried out to establish the
levels of oxygen, toxic gas or flammable gas in the atmosphere.
The external atmosphere around the opening should be monitored first and if the results are
satisfactory, internal monitoring should be carried out by lowering a gas monitor into the
confined space before it is occupied.
If entry into the confined space is necessary to carry out the tests, breathing apparatus or
other respiratory protective equipment must be worn.
Suitably trained and competent personnel may use simple, reliable instruments to measure
oxygen and flammable gas levels. The accuracy of the instruments must be assured by
periodic calibration.
A satisfactory oxygen content must not in itself be relied on to indicate safety since
flammable, explosive or toxic gas may exist alongside oxygen and need only be present in
minute quantities to create a serious hazard.
10
The tests applied should take account of what the space is known to have contained,
including any inert gas used to purge a flammable atmosphere which may itself produce
EG
QCS 2014

Page 83
toxic hazards or the risk of asphyxiation. Account must also be taken of hazards arising from
other sources such as materials used for cleaning. Methane, hydrogen sulphide and carbon
dioxide can all evolve naturally due to the decomposition of organic matter or, in some
cases, by the effect of rainwater percolating through certain types of ground. It is necessary
to test the atmosphere of a confined space at both high and low level as well as in any
corners, etc. where pockets of gas may exist. Instances have occurred of carbon dioxide
displacing oxygen at lower levels while a normal oxygen level continues to exist at higher
levels of the same confined space.
11
The sense of smell must never be relied upon to detect gases. Some are odourless, and
hydrogen sulphide, in particular, can paralyse the sense of smell to such an extent that even
fatally high concentrations of the gas cannot be detected. In any case, the sense of smell
varies from person to person and deteriorates with age.
Monitoring and testing equipment

Providing that the specific contaminant is known, tests can be carried out by competent
persons using the individual detector tubes available for the detection of specific toxic and
asphyxiant flammable or explosive fumes or gases.
AL
12
A wide range of portable gas detection equipment is available for flammable and toxic gases;
some are specific to one gas (for example, hydrogen sulphide), while others can sample a
range of different gases. Such instruments need to be properly calibrated.
EG
13
IN
TE
AT
IO
Continuous monitoring
14
The initial monitoring and testing must establish that the confined space is safe to enter.
Monitoring should then be carried out at intervals to ensure the continued safety of
personnel. Tests should be repeated after any breaks, such as lunch or overnight, or after
the time limit set out in a Permit to Work has expired.
15
It may be necessary to issue individual monitors to people working in a confined space, so

as to give them an instant warning of low oxygen, or toxic or flammable gas hazards.
QCS 2014

Page 84
Competence of monitors
16
All atmospheric monitoring must be carried out by persons who are trained and competent to
use the instruments and interpret the results. They must have sufficient practical and
theoretical knowledge to enable them to make a valid judgement based on the results. They
must be fully aware of their responsibilities in permitting an entry into a confined space.
Hazards of excess oxygen

An oxygen-enriched atmosphere is, in itself, a major hazard. Organic materials, such as oil
and wood, become highly combustible and ordinary materials, like paper and clothing, will
burn with exceptional ferocity.
18
An increase of only 4% oxygen is sufficient to create a hazard and this may occur
inadvertently. In oxyacetylene and oxypropane processes, sometimes not all of the oxygen
supplied to a cutting torch is consumed. Some may be released, increasing the atmospheric
oxygen above the normal 21%. The oxygen enrichment of the atmosphere in a confined
space also results from the practice of using oxygen to sweeten or enrich the atmosphere
when it has become oppressive, stale, hot, fume-filled or otherwise unpleasant. This is a
very dangerous practice and must be prohibited.
19
Another way in which the atmosphere may become oxygen-enriched is through leakage from
torches or hoses during meal breaks or overnight. For this reason, they should be removed
at each breaktime. The deliberate kinking or nipping of an oxygen hose while changing a
torch does not usually cut off the supply completely and can result in the release of
substantial quantities of oxygen.
20
If excess oxygen is discovered, the space must be quickly evacuated and ventilated until
normal levels of oxygen are regained.
TE
AT
IO
AL
17
1.5.5.12 Selection of personnel
Care is required in selecting the right people to work in confined spaces, since conditions
can be difficult. They must be physically fit, agile and, most importantly, not be
claustrophobic. People who suffer from asthma, bronchitis, or other respiratory conditions, or
whose immune system has been suppressed, must be assessed by a medical practitioner as
to their suitability to work in confined spaces.
Other health conditions which might indicate that a person is not suitable for working in a
confined space, or that further checks need to be made before it is allowed, are:
EG
IN
(a)
high blood pressure
(b)
partial or complete deafness
(c)
lack of mobility through joint problems
(d)
diabetes
(e)
depression or other mental illness
(f)
defective eyesight (which is not corrected by wearing glasses)
(g)
sensitivity of the skin to some substances
(h)
taking some types of medication.
Stamina is also required. The wearing of any form of respiratory protection tends to lead to
an increase in respiration and a higher use of energy; the amount of work which can be done
in confined spaces is less than that expected under normal conditions.
When respiratory protection is to be used, it should be remembered that facial hair and
QCS 2014

Page 85
spectacles often prevent a respirator from fitting properly and thus achieving the assumed
degree of protection.
5
Face-fit testing should be carried out to ensure that the chosen mask fits the wearer. This
can be achieved quantitatively using a 'Portacount' for half or full face masks or qualitatively
using bitter/sweet solutions for half or disposable masks.
1.5.5.13 Communications
Adequate and effective communications must exist between those inside and those outside
the confined space, so that, in the event of an incident, a warning can be given and the
space evacuated or those inside rescued. The system needs to be 'fail safe', ensuring that if
a reply is not received or a scheduled call not made, the procedure for rescue starts
immediately.
When a confined space is relatively small, such that the person entering it cannot move far
from the entry point and there are no other factors that could hinder effective communication,
the method of communication may be relatively simple such as a pre-arranged system of
tugs on the safety rope, which must be fully understood by all involved. However, if the
nature of the confined space, the job to be carried out and other factors necessitates the
'entry person' travelling some distance from the entry point, a more elaborate communication
system might be required.
Factors that could hinder effective communication and may need to be considered in the risk
assessment are:
AT
IO
AL
the level of noise inside or outside the confined space, which may or may not be
associated with the confined space work
(b)
the physical nature of the confined space or the presence of substances that could
reduce visibility
(c)
the distance between the point of entry and the place of work
(d)
the presence of workers with little or no understanding of English, although it could

easily be argued that such a situation should not arise in connection with working in
confined spaces.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
Depending upon the findings of the risk assessment, prior communication with the
emergency services regarding the location and nature of the work, might be considered
necessary.
All types of respiratory protection affect verbal communication to some degree and, whatever
method of communication is chosen, it should be tested and proved outside the confined
space before entry is made.
1.5.5.14 Work equipment

1
Due to the potential for a flammable or explosive atmosphere in confined spaces, selecting
tools and other work equipment with which the work can be carried out safely is essential.
If there is any possibility of flammable gas existing in a confined space, all tools must be of a
non-sparking material and all lighting and electrical equipment must carry BASEEFA* or
equivalent approval. Smoking and naked lights must be strictly prohibited and care must be
taken to avoid the generation of static electricity with the consequent risk of sparks.
* British Approvals Service for Electrical Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres
QCS 2014

Page 86
1.5.5.15 Fire safety

1
Hot works must not be carried out in a confined space unless atmospheric testing has
confirmed that flammable or explosive gases are not present and the findings of a risk
assessment show that it is otherwise safe to do so.
Where there is still a residual risk of fire, appropriate fire extinguishers may need to be kept
in the confined space at the entry point.
Where 'hot works' are being carried out inside a confined space, the operative carrying out
the work must also have a suitable and serviceable fire extinguisher at the place of work. In
the event of a fire, the local fire service should be called in case the fire cannot be contained
or extinguished.
1.5.5.16 First aid

Appropriate first-aid equipment and trained first aiders should be provided and available for
emergencies and to provide first aid until professional medical help arrives.
AL
IO
1.5.5.17 Rescue
The arrangements for the rescue of persons in the event of an emergency, both in terms of
trained persons and equipment, need to be suitable and sufficient. The arrangements must
be in place before any person enters or works in a confined space.
Where there are no qualified in-house emergency rescue services, the external emergency
rescue services should be informed of the area and type of work taking place in a confined
space.
Proper and effective rescue training is quite hard and arduous and is not to be undertaken
lightly. Persons selected for such training need to be physically fit and able to adapt to
situations as they arise during a rescue.
If a person is injured in a confined space which has been certified safe to enter without
respiratory protection, an entry can be made to rescue and remove them straight away.
When a person collapses in a confined space and the cause is not known, irrespective of
whether or not the confined space was certified fit for entry without respiratory protection, no
one must enter unless they are wearing breathing apparatus. The collapse may have been
due to a deterioration in the atmosphere within the confined space. The first duty of any
rescuer is to ensure that they do not become a casualty themselves.
Each year, would-be rescuers who are insufficiently trained or equipped die by going into
confined spaces where a person has collapsed.
EG
IN
TE
AT
Rescue equipment
7
Every person entering a confined space wearing breathing apparatus must also wear a
safety harness. The harness must be attached to a lifeline, attended by a person outside the
confined space.
The harness must be one that is suitable for confined space rescue in that it must enable an
unconscious person to remain in an upright position whilst being hoisted (see the following
illustration). An unsuitable harness will allow the unconscious person to bend at the waist,
making recovery through a narrow opening difficult or impossible.
This equipment forms part of a safe system of work for any entry into a confined space.
Properly used, it may enable a rescue to be carried out successfully without the need for a
QCS 2014

Page 87
rescuer to enter the confined space.

Rescue
equipment
must
include some means of lifting
or pulling a person up from a
confined space, since it is
virtually impossible for the
average person to achieve this
solely by muscular effort.
There are a variety of tripods,
winches, blocks and tackles
which,
when
used
in
conjunction with a safety
harness, enable a person to be
lifted quickly and safely out of a
confined space.
11
This would mean testing and

inspection in accordance with
the schedule drawn up by the
competent person. In practice,
harness, lines and accessories
such as carabiners should be
subjected to a formal thorough
examination, by a competent
person, every six months and
checked by the user weekly
and before each use. Tripods,
hoists and other lifting devices need to be load tested every six months in the same way that
a scissor lift used for lifting people would.
12
Dependant on circumstances, rescue equipment may have to include first aid equipment,
oxygen or resuscitation packs and rescue breathing apparatus. A secure line of
communication to the emergency services may also be required.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
10
EG
1.5.5.18 Respiratory protective equipment (RPE)

Respiratory protective equipment must be
selected by a competent person, be 'CE'
marked and be suitable for the type of hazard
against which it is to protect the wearer.
A wide range of types of respiratory protective

equipment
is
available
from
various
manufacturers. The equipment functions on
the basis of two distinct principles outlined
below.
By purifying the air breathed

3
The air inhaled is drawn through a filter or

medium that removes the harmful substance
or pollutant. The nature of the filtering agent
depends on the type of pollutant to be dealt
with. These types are commonly called
respirators.
The simplest form of respirator is the 'dust mask', a preformed cup made of filtering material
QCS 2014

Page 88
which fits over the nose and mouth to filter out nuisance dust. These masks give no
protection against harmful or toxic gases or fumes and the protection factor of the mask may
not offer adequate protection against the level of airborne dust that can be experienced in a
confined space.
5
More complex types have filter cartridges that may be general for various types of dust or
fume, or specific to a particular substance.
By supplying clean air

The air can be supplied straight through an air line via a pump or compressor or,
alternatively, the person may carry compressed air in cylinders.
These types are known as breathing apparatus.
An alternative type of breathing equipment is the self-rescue set. This comprises a small
compressed air bottle, the necessary hoses and valves and a face piece. Self-rescue sets
can be carried by operatives who enter confined spaces in which the air is initially safe to
breathe.
Should the air quality deteriorate, the face piece is placed over the nose and mouth and the
air valve opened. The air bottle supplies fresh air to the operative whilst an escape from the
confined space is made. The air bottle of a self-rescue set has a duration of typically 15-20
minutes.
10
The chart reproduced from BS 4275 at Appendix 2 details the different types of respiratory
protective equipment and the system of classification. Whilst BS 4275 has now been
withdrawn, it is considered that the chart still offers good guidance on general principles of
selecting appropriate respiratory protective equipment.
11
Care must be taken to select the correct type of protection for the conditions. Respirators (as
opposed to breathing apparatus) do not protect against oxygen deficient atmospheres and
should not be used in any atmosphere dangerous to life. Respiratory protective equipment
should not be used unless all other methods of control or protection have been examined
and it is established that the use of RPE is the only reasonably practicable solution.
12
Respirators can only be used for protection against the gases or dusts for which they are
specifically intended. It is important to note that dust masks and canister and cartridge
respirators have a limited period of usage before becoming clogged with the contaminant.
They may also have a limited shelf life, indicated by a use-by date.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 89
1.5.5.19 Permits
Permit to Work
Every entry into a confined space must be made under a Permit to Work, whereby a
competent person must be satisfied that all necessary precautions have been taken and
provisions made to secure the safety of those entering the confined space, before signing
the Permit to Work. The signed Permit thus gives an assurance that work may safely take
place.
Appendix 3 to this module shows an example of a Permit to Work. The content may be
varied to meet individual requirements.
Permits should only be issued by named authorised persons, who must sign them. Such
persons must be competent, have authority and possess sufficient practical and theoretical
knowledge and actual experience of working conditions to enable them to judge whether
everything necessary has been done to ensure the safety of personnel. It is quite common
for several authorised persons to sign a Permit to Work, each certifying that they have taken
the necessary actions with regard to their own area of responsibility, for example, electrical
isolation, atmospheric testing. Where a Permit to Work system involves the use of padlocks
and keys, for example for locking-off electrical isolators or other sources of energy, the keys
must stay with an authorised person until such time as the Permit is returned for
cancellation.
AT
IO
AL
Permit to Enter
Depending upon the nature of the confined space and the inherent risks of carrying out the
work, some Contractors may choose to run a separate Permit to Enter system.
An example of when such a system might be used is where all preparatory work is carried
out to meet the requirements of the Permit to Work and then the Permit to Enter is issued
when final pre-entry checks of the atmosphere have been carried out.
Such a system would cover situations where:
IN
TE
a single Permit to Work covers the duration of the whole job, but
(b)
successive shifts of workers are each authorised to enter the confined space under a
newly raised Permit to Enter.
EG
(a)
1.5.5.20 Access and egress

1
Where it is practical, a safe way in and out of the confined space should be provided and,
wherever possible, allow quick, unobstructed and ready access, such as a fixed, vertical
ladder inside an underground chamber that terminates just below the entry/exit point at
ground level.
The means of escape must be suitable for use by the individual who enters the confined
space so that, ideally they can quickly escape in an emergency. However, it must be
accepted that in many cases the entry/exit point will be of a restricted size that will not
necessarily allow an easy escape route in an emergency, particularly if the person who is
escaping is wearing a compressed air cylinder. The means of achieving a prompt escape or
rescue must be considered in the risk assessment.
Suitable means to prevent access, for example a locked hatch, should also be in place when
there is no need for access to the confined space. There should be a safety sign that is clear
and conspicuous to prohibit unauthorised entry alongside openings that allow for safe
access.
QCS 2014

Page 90
1.5.5.21 Conclusion
poorly trained and equipped workers
(b)
the failure to put in place adequate emergency arrangements before work starts
(c)
the failure to carry out an initial check of air quality
(d)
the failure to set up a safe system of work, including continuous air monitoring, based
around a Permit to Work system
(e)
the failure to follow an established safe system of work
(f)
the incorrect use of respiratory protective equipment
(g)
the use of the incorrect type of respiratory protective equipment
(h)
the failure to use safety harnesses and lifelines
(i)
ill-conceived and badly executed rescue attempts.
AL
(a)
IN
TE
AT
IO
All such accidents are avoidable. If an accident does occur, it demonstrates that a
breakdown has occurred in the supposed safe system of work.
EG
For work to be done safely in a confined space, great care has to be taken over the detail of
each step of the procedure. Common causes of accidents are:
QCS 2014

Page 91

1.5.5 Appendix 1
Checklist 1 -Work in a confined space without entry of persons
1
Ensure that entry into the space is totally prohibited.
Ensure that the isolation of services and processes is carried out as necessary.
Wash, clean, and purge the workplace, as appropriate, for work to be done.
Ensure that there is a safe system of work for the people concerned.
Ensure that other people know that work is going on.
Authorise work to start only on the issue of a Permit to Work.
AL
Checklist 2 - Entry into a confined space without breathing apparatus

Follow a safe system of work.
Put in place adequate emergency arrangements before work starts, which will also
safeguard rescuers.
Initiate a Permit to Work which includes the requirements of a Permit to Enter unless
separate permits are raised.
10
Withdraw the space from service.
11
Isolate the workplace from electrical, mechanical, chemical, heat and all other sources.
12
Check that no inward leakage of gas, fumes, steam or liquids is possible.
13
Clean, drain and purge the workplace as necessary for the type of work to be carried out and
entry to be made.
14
Test the atmosphere for oxygen, flammable gas, toxic gas, etc.
15
Carefully check any sludge or deposit that may harbour gas, fumes or liquids.
16
Carry out a COSHH assessment, if necessary.
17
Arrange for any checking to be carried out remotely.
18
If necessary, clean, purge and ventilate the workplace again until the atmosphere is safe to
enter.
19
Ensure that all tools and equipment are safe to use in the area.
20
Check the provision of protective clothing, harness, lifelines, rescue equipment and rescue
personnel.
21
Ensure that rescue personnel are trained in the use of the equipment and capable of using it.
22
Ensure that the fire and rescue service is informed of the location and nature of the work,
where appropriate.
23
If appropriate, ensure that the external emergency rescue services are informed of the
location and type of work being carried out.
24
Brief all personnel on what is to be done and arrange communications.
25
Issue the Permit to Work which
26
authorises entry and fixes a timescale within which the work must be completed.
27
Constantly monitor the workspace and communications.
28
If the task is completed within the timescale, advise all concerned, cancel the Permit to Work
and return the space to service.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
QCS 2014
29

Page 92
If the work is not completed in time, withdraw all staff, cancel the Permit to Work and
consider how best to proceed.
Checklist 3 - Entry into a confined space with breathing apparatus

Follow a safe system of work.
31
Put in place adequate emergency arrangements before work starts, which will also
safeguard rescuers.
32
Initiate a Permit to Work.
33
Withdraw the space from service.
34
Isolate the workplace from electrical, mechanical, chemical, heat and all other sources.
35
Check that no inward leakage of gas, steam or liquids is possible.
36
Clean, drain and purge the workplace as necessary for the type of work and entry.
37
Test the atmosphere for flammable gas, toxic gas, oxygen, etc.
38
Decide which type of breathing apparatus is to be used.
39
Ensure that the personnel involved have a current valid certificate for the type and use of
breathing apparatus.
40
Ensure that all tools and equipment are safe for use in the work area.
41
Check the provision of protective clothing, harness, lifelines, rescue equipment and rescue
personnel.
42
Ensure that rescue personnel are adequately trained in the use of rescue equipment and are
capable of using it correctly.
43
Ensure that the fire and rescue service is informed of the location and nature of the work,
where appropriate.
44
If appropriate, ensure that the external emergency rescue services are informed of the
location and type of work being carried out.
45
Brief personnel on what is to be done and arrange communications.
46
Issue the Permit to Work which authorises entry and fixes a timescale within which the work
must be completed.
47
Constantly monitor the workspace and communications.
48
If the task is completed within the timescale, advise all concerned, cancel the Permit and
return the space to service.
49
If the work is not completed in time, withdraw all staff, cancel the Permit to Work and
consider how best to proceed.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
30
AL

QCS 2014
EG
IN
TE
R
AT
IO

1.5.5 Appendix 2
Classification of types of respiratory protective equipment
Page 93
AL

AT
IO

1.5.5 Appendix 3
Possible Layout for a Permit to Work Certificate
PLANT DETAILS (Location, identifying number, etc.)
COMPLETION OF
WORK
Signed
Date
Time
The above plant has been isolated from all sources of ingress of
dangerous fumes, etc.
Signed
The above plant has been isolated from all sources of electrical REQUEST FOR
EXTENSION
and mechanical power
Signed
The above plant has been isolated from all sources of heat
Signed
Date
The above plant has been freed of dangerous materials
EXTENSION
C
CLEANING AND
PURGING
Material(s):
I have read and understood this certificate and will undertake to work
in accordance with the conditions in it
Signed
The above plant has been removed from service and persons
under my supervision have been informed
EG
ISOLATION
ACCEPTANCE OF
CERTIFICATE
IN
WITHDRAWAL
FROM SERVICE
TE
R
WORK TO BE DONE
Page 94
QCS 2014
Date
Time
The work has been completed and all persons under my supervision
materials and equipment withdrawn
Signed
Date
Time
The work has not been completed and permission to continue is

requested
Signed
Date
Time
I have re-examined the plant detailed above and confirm that the
certificate may be extended to expire at
Method(s):
Further precautions:
TESTING
Signed
Contaminants tested
Date
Time
Signed
Results
Signed
Date
Time
I CERTIFY THAT 1 HAVE PERSONALLY EXAMINED THE PLANT DETAILED ABOVE
AND SATISFIED MYSELF THAT THE ABOVE PARTICULARS ARE CORRECT
*(1)THE PLANT IS SAFE FOR ENTRY WITHOUT BREATHING APPARATUS
(2) BREATHING APPARATUS MUST BE WORN
Other precautions necessary:
Time of expiry of certificate:
* Delete (1) or (2)
Signed
Date
Time
Date
Time
THE PERMIT TO WORK IS NOW CANCELLED. A NEW PERMIT WILL BE REQUIRED IF

WORK IS TO CONTINUE
Signed
RETURN TO SERVICE
Date
Time
I accept the above plant back into service

Signed
Date
Time
QCS 2014

Page 95

1.5.6
Safety in Demolition
1.5.6.1 Key points

Demolition can be dangerous and should be left to competent persons. Almost all demolition
projects will encounter asbestos.
Planning and supervision is vital to ensure a successful project.
Ensure the appropriate survey has been undertaken.
Ascertain if the structures are stable before starting and that instability can be avoided
unless planned.
Ensure written risk assessments and method statements are developed, communicated and
understood.
Salvage or soft stripping is hazardous and must be planned and controlled to avoid the risk
of falling objects or collapse.
AL
IO
Safe demolition is a very complex and technical skill. It is also potentially very dangerous if
carried out by Contractors who are not fully competent in demolition techniques.
Information, planning, responsible implementation and controls are the essential elements
for safe and successful demolition projects.
Whether demolition is required for a small building or for a complex factory site, you must be
aware of the hazards and risks. These need to be identified, assessed and effectively
controlled to reduce the potential for injury to persons and damage to property.
IN
TE
AT

assessment of every work activity. This is to identify any hazard that employees, or any other
person who might be affected, may encounter during the work and to put control measures
into place. These measures will aim to remove the hazards, or reduce the risks to health and
safety arising out of those hazards, as far as is reasonably practicable.
The Contractor must provide comprehensive and relevant information on risks that exist in
the workplace and on any control measures that are in place, ensuring these are fit for
purpose and monitored for ongoing safety.
Employees have a duty to tell their Contractor of any work situation, including near misses,
which presents a risk to the health and safety of themselves or of any other person who
might be affected.
Where specific health hazards are identified, the Contractor must offer health surveillance to
the at-risk employees. Given the nature of demolition and the potential hazardous
substances that may be encountered, this duty could be particularly relevant to demolition
contractors.
EG
QCS 2014

Page 96

These Regulations cover equipment used in demolition. They require that a Contractor
supplies work equipment that is safe, correct and suitable for the job, and that the equipment
is maintained.
Demolition has traditionally involved some work being carried out at height, which has in the
past been the cause of deaths and injuries to demolition operatives. Due to advances in
demolition techniques, and the increasing size and reach of the machines used, there is no
longer such a need to work at height. However, where work at height is carried out, it must
be done in a safe manner.
Under these Regulations, falling object protection is required for machinery. A demolition
specification excavator must have a cab guard, as it is foreseeable when working overhead
that material could fall onto the cab. The use of reinforcing bars as make-shift retaining pins
for attachments would be contrary to these Regulations.
It is common to see mobile crushers used in the demolition process to process the
demolition arisings for reuse as part of the next use of the site. These machines pose great
risks to the untrained. Issues such as machinery guarding and clearing blockages, as well as
noise and vibration, must be considered.
IO
AL
These Regulations require Contractors to:
avoid the need to work at height where reasonably practicable
(b)
select the most appropriate work equipment when work at height cannot be avoided
(c)
(as far as is reasonably practicable) prevent falls
(d)
reduce the distance and consequences if there is a fall
(e)
where harnesses are being used, ensure emergency recovery arrangements are in
place
(f)
ensure that all work at height is based upon a risk assessment and carried out safely.
IN
TE
(a)
EG
AT
Where the use of work equipment involves a specific risk to health and safety, the use of the
equipment must be restricted to competent, specified workers authorised to carry out the
task.
The use of demolition machines, and in particular ultra high reach machines, is an important
part of the strategy to reduce the need for employees to work at height during demolition
activities.

1
cannot be adequately controlled by other means which are equally or more effective, the
Contractor must provide and ensure that employees use suitable personal protective
equipment.
In essence, personal protective equipment (PPE) may only be used as a last resort after all
other means of eliminating or controlling the risk have been considered and are not
practicable.
QCS 2014

Page 97
understand the risks being protected against, the purpose of the PPE and the manner in
which it is to be used.
4
instruction, and training that they have been given, and know the procedures for reporting
loss or defects to their Contractor.
These Regulations require that the Contractor provide employees with adequate information,
instruction, training and supervision to be able to carry out any work safely and without risks
to their health.

CDM applies to all demolition and dismantling work, as defined in BS 6187, regardless of the
project's size or duration.
Every contractor undertaking demolition operations must appoint one or more competent
person(s) to plan and supervise the work. Under CDM it is a requirement that any dutyholder who puts 'another person' to work on a construction site, for example a contractor
engaging the services of a demolition contractor, must ensure that the person is competent
to do what is required of them.
The client has to ensure that there are adequate welfare arrangements. The demolition
contractor is therefore expected to control and co-ordinate all aspects of health and safety
regardless of the size of the project.
The National Federation of Demolition Contractors (NFDC) and the Institute of Demolition
Engineers (IDE) can provide information regarding the competence required for particular
projects.
CDM requires the following:
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
The demolition or dismantling of a structure or part of a structure shall be planned and

carried out to prevent danger so far as is reasonably practicable, or reduce the danger
to as low a level as is reasonably practicable.
(b)
The arrangements for carrying out demolition or dismantling work shall be recorded in
writing, prior to the commencement of the work.
EG
(a)
1.5.6.8 CDM duty-holders

1
The client is responsible for the provision of information such as Type 3 asbestos
surveys/service information and must appoint various other duty-holders. The client must
also ensure that adequate welfare facilities are provided, and not permit work to start until
there is evidence of adequate health and safety management systems and planning.
The designer is responsible for making the client aware of the client's responsibilities under
these Regulations as well as the design of the project. Many duty-holders can have designer
responsibilities as outlined in CDM.
The Engineer is responsible for the co-ordination of health and safety design and planning
aspects for projects, including:
(a)
identifying and collecting pre-construction information
(b)
informing the client if there are gaps in the pre-construction information, which need to
be addressed (for example additional surveys)
(c)
distributing relevant parts of the pre-construction information to contractors to enable
QCS 2014

Page 98
them to tender for, or prepare to carry out, the work
(d)
generally managing the flow of information between all parties
(e)
preparing the health and safety file
The Engineer is also to advise - the client on the competency and resourcing of contractors
and to ensure that the Contractor's health and safety plan is adequately developed prior to
the work starting on site.
The minimum lead times for the project must form part of the information pack. This is a very
important development as, historically, the mobilisation period imposed by clients for this
sector of the industry has been too short to allow for adequate planning. Engineers must
themselves be competent; demolition and asbestos issues may be too specialist for many
who normally perform the Engineers role and they should be prepared to take specialist
advice.
The Contractor must ensure that the client is aware of their duties and is responsible for the
overall construction phase, taking into account health and safety issues and the
development of the health and safety plan.
Contractors and other workers must all work together as a team to achieve high standards in
health, safety and welfare on site. The contractors, which normally include utility companies,
must co-operate with the Contractor by obeying site rules, and so on.
AT
IO
AL
1.5.6.9 The health and safety plan and the health and safety file
The health and safety plan provides a focus for the construction phase of a project.
Relevant pre-construction information, relating to the health and safety hazards associated
with the work, should be provided by the client regardless of the size of the project.
In the context of this section, such information is likely to include:
IN
TE
the location and physical state of any asbestos where its presence has been identified
by a comprehensive invasive asbestos survey (Type 3 as defined in MDHS 100
(b)
the results of structural surveys
(c)
plans identifying the location of underground services
(d)
the possible presence of contaminants, for example:
EG
(a)
(i)
poly chlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) in old electrical transformers
(ii)
the residual contents of tanks and pipelines
(iii)
the location and nature of contaminated ground
(iv)
other information which is required to ensure that the work can be planned
safely.
After being appointed by the client, the contractor must use the pre-construction information
provided by the client to develop the construction phase plan to the satisfaction of the client,
as advised by the Engineer.
The health and safety plan must be:
(a)
completed prior to any work commencing on site
(b)
reviewed and amended as often as is necessary for the duration of the project.
The health and safety file is a record of information for the client or end user of the premises.
It tells those who might be responsible for the structure in future, of the risks that will have to
QCS 2014

Page 99
be managed during any maintenance, repair or renovation. Generally, for demolition work
the health and safety file will contain information such as details of:
(a)
any services, which have been capped or discovered and worked around
(b)
the presence of any voids and details of any areas that may have been filled
(c)
the actions taken to remove or treat contaminated land
1.5.6.10 British Standard

1
BS 6187:2000 is the British Standard for Demolition. It recommends good practice methods
for the demolition (both partial and whole), as well as decommissioning, of sites including
buildings and structures. It takes into account safety, health and issues which affect
protection of the environment.
1.5.6.11 Definitions and terms used by the demolition industry

Competent person in demolition: someone who has practical and theoretical knowledge,
with actual experience, of the type of demolition which is taking place on the site. This
person is generally accepted to be on site full time as the person responsible for the
demolition activity.
Demolition; the deliberate pulling down, destruction or taking apart of a structure or a

substantial part of a structure. It includes dismantling for re-erection or reuse.
Exclusion zone: an area where people are fully (sometimes partially) excluded during a
demolition activity. This zone should be determined by a competent person, detailed in the
health and safety plan, and may need to be defined by physical barriers on site.
Facade retention: where the outer wall of a building or structure is retained in its original
position during the demolition phase. It is usually supported by a facade retention system,
internal or external.
Fan: a protective screen fixed to scaffolding to contain falling debris during demolition. Any
fan must be designed to withstand the intended load.
Felling: the deliberate collapse of a structure in such a way that the debris falls in a
predetermined area.
Hot work: the application of heat (including the use of tools that can produce an incendiary
spark). It generally uses oxygen and propane gas cutting equipment.
Propping and shoring: a system of temporary supports to prevent movement.
Safe working spaces: areas where demolition work is taking place, often protected by
physical barriers (e.g. machines protected by ROPs, FOPs and MOPs as applicable).
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Machine-mounted attachments
10
Brock: a trade name for a range of remote control excavators, which can carry most
demolition attachments.
11
Combination Cutter: a tool which can crush concrete and also cut steel reinforcing bar.
12
Demolition ball: a cast steel ball (drops or pendulum swings in line with the jib) used to
demolish a structure (slew balling should be avoided; this technique is very rarely used now).
QCS 2014

Page 100
Grapple: a powered claw for handling waste and recycled material.
14
Impact hammer: a large breaker, mounted on an excavator, and usually powered by

hydraulics (occasionally by compressed air).
15
Pulveriser: hydraulically powered jaws for crushing concrete. It may be hand/machine/

crane mounted.
16
Pusher arm: an extension to an excavator, which enables it to carry out high reach
demolition.
17
Shear: powered jaws for cutting metal.
18
Rotator: an attachment fitted between the tool and the end of dipper arm of the excavator,
which allows the tool to be turned. Essential for most work in restricted sites.
AL
13
Control of Asbestos:
state that all asbestos containing materials should be removed prior to demolition so
far as is reasonably practicable
(b)
require that the necessary planning actions and notifications are carried out.
IO
(a)
AT
1.5.6.12 Asbestos considerations
The management process should be based upon the information from an Asbestos survey,
carried out before contractors are invited to tender for the demolition. This should include a
drawing of the building footprint (all floors) and a list of the approximate amounts and
locations of asbestos-containing materials found.
From the survey, an inventory of asbestos containing materials should be made and ticked
off when they are removed. This should prevent creating risk during soft strip and demolition.
There are many occasions when asbestos containing materials are only revealed during the
demolition.
Machine drivers need to be trained in basic asbestos recognition so that they can stop work
and take advice if they discover suspicious materials.
EG
IN
TE
1.5.6.13 Planning for demolition
It cannot be emphasised too strongly that demolition is dangerous and must be left to the
experts.
Planning and supervision are of

paramount importance.
Before any work starts, the implications of the demolition to be carried out must be
determined, for example:
(a)
What is the age of the building(s) and what was (were) the previous use(s)?
QCS 2014

Page 101
What was the type of construction and what were the materials used?
(c)
How much is to go?
(d)
Are floor slabs or piles involved?
(e)
Where are the separation points?
(f)
Are there any dangerous substances in, around or under the buildings which are to be
demolished, e.g. asbestos, lead paints, flammable liquids, unidentified drums or
packages, etc.?
(g)
Is the building on contaminated land?
(h)
Are there any site restrictions?
(i)
Are there people and adjacent properties that may be affected by the proposed
working hours?
(j)
Will people be affected by noise or vibration emanating from the site?
(k)
You may need to carry out a dilapidation survey of the adjacent buildings and or
highways.
AL
(b)
Once these things have been determined, decisions should be taken as to what are the
acceptable or unacceptable methods to carry out the demolition.
Two important final questions remain.
AT
IO
How should the job and site be left safe?
(b)
What is the time scale for the job to be carried out and is it sufficient for the demolition
to be carried out safely?
(a)
TE
1.5.6.14 The selection and appointment of a demolition contractor

The Contractor, in selecting a demolition contractor, should satisfy themselves of the
contractor's competence, knowledge, ability and resources to carry out the work safely.
Expertise is vital.
EG
IN
1.5.6.15 Essential elements of a demolition health and safety plan

Some or all of the following points may be covered in the risk assessment and method
statement for the proposed job.
1.5.6.16 Project information

1
Names, addresses, contacts and telephone numbers should be detailed indicating the
project managers, quantity surveyors, architects, structural engineers etc
1.5.6.17 Scope of work

1
An explicit and concise opening paragraph should be included, outlining the extent of work
along with any other related activities, e.g. asbestos removal, facade retention, etc.
1.5.6.18 Existing environmental information and drawings available

1
Where available, construction drawings should have been supplied to the contractor, along
with information on the former use of the site or buildings to be demolished. This information
(if any) physical or chemical hazards are on the site or in the buildings, e.g. underground
tanks and/or potential chemical or biological hazards or contaminated land.
QCS 2014

Page 102
1.5.6.19 Risk assessment and special hazards

1
Having gathered all available information and visited the site to assess the work involved,
along with identifying all known hazards and confined spaces, the contractor's appointed
person on site should ensure that risk assessments, and assessments for asbestos, COSHH
or noise are made. Method statements should then be drawn up.
Consideration must be given at an early stage to control the access for workers and any
visitors, and ensure separate access and egress for vehicles, plant and machinery.
Finally, assess the impact that the site environment will have on any people who might be
affected by the activity, such as neighbours or members of the public.
1.5.6.20 Programme
The programme time allocated must be adequate to allow the demolition work to be carried
out safely. This should detail the correct sequence of the works with any stop and review
points.
Where the programme has unavoidable interfaces with other trades or contractors on site,
this must be recognised as a potential area of risk. Good communications, planning and
management are therefore essential to ensure high standards in health and safety.
IO
AL
AT
1.5.6.21 Services
Before any work starts, all utility companies should be contacted by the Contractor and sent
a site plan, showing the footprint and extent of the planned demolition, and requesting the
disconnection or isolation of the appropriate service (i.e. electricity, gas, water,
telecommunications or other cables).
These requests should be made in good time and be acknowledged in writing by the relevant
utility, with confirmation that the services have or will be isolated or disconnected.
Where such disconnection is not possible, any pipes or cables should be clearly identified,
marked and protected to ensure that they are not disturbed during the works.
If overhead power lines are present, care needs to be taken, particularly where machines,
cranes or excavators with high reach are to be used. Adequate control measures should be
put in place (e.g. warning goalposts).
EG
IN
TE
1.5.6.22 Contractors
1
Competent contractors should be carefully selected and appointed. Their activities should be
detailed in the health and safety method statement and incorporated into the health and
safety plan.
All contractors must be adequately supervised, controlled and made aware of any site rules
and emergency procedures.
1.5.6.23 Plant and equipment on site

1
Confirmation that personnel operating the machinery and equipment have been trained in
their safe and proper use for the types of machine being operated) should also be kept
readily available.
All plant, machinery and any associated equipment should be properly isolated and secured
at the end of each shift.
QCS 2014

Page 103
1.5.6.24 Site signage and security

1
The demolition area must be clearly defined by both physical barriers and adequate signage.
The demolition zone and exclusion areas may vary quite dramatically during the different
activities which will take place on the site and must be properly maintained and controlled.
Typical signage on demolition sites includes the following text:
Danger demolition in progress - No unauthorised access
IO
AL
Safety helmets must be worn at all times
existing walls with adequate secured hoarding to a minimum of 1.8 (but preferably 2.4)
metres high, sheeted in plywood or corrugated iron sheeting
(b)
an existing access scaffold with hoarding around the base as above
(c)
temporary ready fencing securely bolted together.
IN
(a)
EG
Typical physical barriers may include the following:
Where there is the likelihood of trespassers or vandals, 24-hour security arrangements may
have to be implemented.
TE
AT
[Organisations contact details]

Page 104
AL
QCS 2014
IO
1.5.6.25 Protection of people
The hierarchy of risk management must be applied, i.e. where possible avoid the risk, then
reduce, manage and control to an acceptable level of protection.
Where demolition is being carried out above or unavoidably close to the public, adequate
protection must be provided, e.g. fully sheeted scaffold with either 'Monarflex' or debris
netting. If necessary, also provide scaffold fans and walkways.
IN
1.5.6.26 Access and egress
TE
AT
Safe access and egress, both to the site and the workplace, must be clearly defined and
maintained at all times for use by personnel, equipment, vehicles and emergency services.
Where practicable, pedestrians should be segregated from vehicles, plant and equipment
movements.
EG
1.5.6.27 General site safety

1
Adequate procedures for action in the case of an emergency should be developed,

implemented and communicated to all on site.
Adequate fire-fighting equipment must be available at all times, especially when any hot
work is being undertaken.
A telephone or another form of communication must always be available on site to summon

emergency services as necessary.
1.5.6.28 Welfare
1
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that there are adequate and maintained welfare
facilities.
1.5.6.29 First aid

1
An assessment should have been carried out by the demolition contractor.
QCS 2014

Page 105
This will confirm the adequacy or otherwise of the company's arrangements for first aid. Any
shortcoming identified by the assessment must be rectified.
On a demolition site it is envisaged that the minimum requirement will be a trained first aider
or a number of trained emergency aiders, all with access to adequate first-aid facilities.
1.5.6.30 Scaffolding and access equipment platforms

All access scaffolding or equipment must be fit for its purpose, properly designed,
constructed of sound material and not so overloaded as to risk a collapse.
Scaffolding that is to be fitted with fans, debris netting or sheeting must be designed to take
into account wind loadings and the changing conditions on site (e.g. the partial removal of
structures which will affect the wind loading and ties). It is essential to ensure that the
scaffold contractor fully understands the intended demolition method so that they can decide
on the placement of scaffold ties.
Whenever scaffolding is provided as a means of access to the workplace, the contractor

should ensure that the completed scaffolding has a handover certificate before allowing any
of their personnel to work on it. Alterations to scaffolding must only be carried out by
specialist competent persons.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor that scaffolding is inspected regularly and that
suitable records of inspections are kept.
Mobile tower scaffolds should be erected in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
by trained personnel only.
In line with good practice, access should be by stair towers; however, ladders that are used
for access to working platforms should be:
TE
AT
IO
AL
free from defects and not painted
(b)
placed on a firm footing
(c)
used at an angle of approximately 75 (1 part out at the base to 4 parts up)
(d)
securely fixed at the top
(e)
extend at least five rungs (1 metre) above the working platform unless an adequate,
separate handhold is provided.
EG
IN
(a)
Where the demolition work requires that a progressive dismantling of the scaffolding takes
place, attention must be paid to the remaining scaffold's stability, for example the adequacy
of the remaining working platforms, ties and bracing.
After each time that the scaffold is modified and before it is next occupied, it must be
inspected by a competent person to certify that it is still safe to work on, and a record of the
inspection made
Where self-propelled mobile access platforms are used, Contractors must ensure that the
operator is properly and adequately trained.
10
Additionally, care must be taken to ensure ground conditions are acceptable for these
platforms.
11
Where the work requires employees to work from cradles (and/or suspended baskets)
attached to a crane, a deadman's handle should be fitted with the ability to be power lowered
only.
QCS 2014

Page 106
1.5.6.31 Fall-arrest equipment

1
Operatives must receive training in the inspection and safe use of safety harnesses, worn at
all times when working in such equipment. These harnesses must be secured to an anchor
point in the equipment. The harness and lanyard must be inspected each time they are worn.
This is very important for anyone involved in hot works which could result in damage to a
harness or lanyard.
With the progressive nature of demolition projects, harnesses are commonly used to prove a
quick solution to a difficult access problem. It is vital that the following basic check is
performed to avoid selecting an anchor point that is simply too close to the ground. The
wearer needs to allow for:
their height
(b)
the length of the lanyard
(c)
the extended length of any fall absorption device.
AL
(a)
In many instances this will mean that a minimum of a 5.5 m 'fall distance' is required to
enable a fall to be safely arrested. This needs to be factored into the plan for working at
height. It does not mean that harnesses may not be the safest way to do the work; just that
restraint lanyards or work positioning harnesses, as opposed to fall-arrest equipment, are
more appropriate in some circumstances.
There is significant concern regarding how long someone can survive if they do fall whilst
wearing a harness and are suspended in it. Unless they are rescued immediately they are
likely to suffer from a potentially serious medical condition known as 'suspension trauma'.
Before work starts an effective rescue plan must be developed, which would ensure that
someone who has fallen is rescued as soon as is practical and certainly within 10 minutes.
IN
The expertise of a structural engineer must be used in the following cases:

in the design of a facade retention scheme
(b)
where there is doubt over the building's stability
(c)
where there is doubt about the proposed method of demolition
(d)
where there is doubt about the capacity of the building to take loadings.
EG
(a)
TE
1.5.6.32 Structural engineers
AT
IO
It is good practice to consult a structural engineer at the planning stage of demolition to avoid
uncontrolled collapse.
1.5.6.33 Methods of demolition

1
This section gives an outline of the types of demolition techniques commonly employed.
Risk assessments, method statements and sequence

2
The key to a successful demolition is to ensure the appropriate risk assessments and
method statements have been developed to identify the correct sequence of carrying out the
work. These must be fit for purpose, clearly communicated and understood by the persons
using them.
Partial demolition
3
Partial demolition is often carried out where refurbishment is being undertaken and can
include facade retention. In any demolition, daily or, if required, more frequent checks should
QCS 2014

Page 107
be carried out to confirm the stability of the remaining structure.

4
If at any time during the demolition the structure appears or becomes unsafe, all workers
should be withdrawn until actions have been taken to remove any danger.
Complete progressive demolition

5
Progressive demolition is generally carried out in the reverse order to construction, and often
follows the soft strip-out phase.
This is the most commonly used method of demolishing structures and should be detailed in
the health and safety plan.
In high-rise buildings where a floor-by-floor demolition is being carried out, danger points
should be recognised such as:
structural stability
(b)
on floor loadings
(c)
falling debris
(d)
maintaining clear access and egress
(e)
risk of fire hazards
(f)
the need for secure edge protection.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
Demolition by deliberate collapse
Demolition by deliberate collapse can be achieved by pre-weakening the structure, followed

by explosives, remote mechanical demolition or pulling, using a wire rope.
When explosives are being considered, only fully qualified explosive engineers should be
used.
IN
TE
EG
Manual demolition techniques
Manual demolition techniques are used when other methods of demolition are not suitable or
possible.
11
Some of the types of tools or operations that can be used in manual demolition are:
(a)
10
hand tools
(b)
breakers, compressors or hammers
(c)
concrete nibblers or hydraulic pulverisers
(d)
stitch drilling
(e)
drilling and hydraulic bursting
(f)
drilling and expansive pastes
(g)
oxygen and propane cutting equipment
(h)
diamond cutting and sawing
(i)
steeple jacking.
General precautions
12
For brick or concrete structures:

(a)
identify any pre-stressed or post-tensioned concrete beams that may be present within
QCS 2014

Page 108
the structure and determine a safe method of demolition
(b)
wherever practicable, carry out demolition in the reverse order to construction
(c)
maintain tools in good condition, and use them safely
(d)
use compressed air or portable electric power tools, from a 110 volt supply
(e)
make operatives fully aware of the safe procedures
(f)
in addition to site induction, ensure task and tool box talks are prepared, delivered and
understood at key stages of the work.
As far as is reasonably practicable, employees should not work above each other and care
must be taken to ensure that debris does not drop into other working areas.
14
If lift shafts or other formed openings are used to drop debris down, the openings must be
adequately protected by either suitable guard-rails and toe-boards (with no gap between
guard-rails and toe-boards exceeding 470 mm) or by other substantial, effective barriers. It
may not be possible to guard an opening where plant such as a 'bob cat' is being used to
bulldoze arisings into a shaft or chute. In such cases a safe system of work must be
developed which is sufficiently robust to:
AL
13
stop the item of plant falling into the chute or shaft
(b)
control when materials will be loaded and unloaded to stop materials being tipped onto
someone below
(c)
protect other workers from falling down the shaft.
AT
IO
(a)
It is still acceptable to use window openings as a means of removing debris from upper
floors under certain conditions. The opening would need to be protected so that operatives
cannot fall whilst throwing the debris out and the landing zone must be completely protected
so that materials cannot fall on anyone. Typically the area will be fenced off with mobile
fence panels and then the material loaded with an excavator into a hook bin container. If the
structure has more than two storeys, consideration should be given to creating an enclosed
drop zone within a scaffold chute.
16
With regard to falling materials and exposed edges, where necessary danger areas
(exclusion zones) must be created.
EG
IN
TE
15
17
Oxy-propane cutting equipment

Oxy-propane cutting equipment:
(a)
should be inspected and tested for leaks before use
(b)
cylinders should be secured in an upright position
(c)
hoses should be secured with crimped fittings not jubilee clips
(d)
flashback arresters should always be fitted between cylinder gauges and hoses
(e)
operatives must be trained in the safe use of the equipment and wear the appropriate
PPE (e.g. goggles and gloves).
18
Whenever oxy-propane cutting equipment is used, the correct fire-fighting equipment should
always be available. All operatives should be trained in the safe use of fire extinguishers.
19
Hot work should generally be stopped for an agreed period before leaving site, typically one
hour before finishing, to avoid the potential of fire.
Mechanical demolition techniques

20
Machinery used should be fit for purpose, used in safe working spaces, adequately protected
QCS 2014

Page 109
(e.g. by ROPs and/or FOPs) and operated by authorised competent persons.

Remote control demolition
21
This utilises specialised equipment, often in hazardous or aggressive environments (e.g.

nuclear installations). The use of 'Brock' type machines is becoming more common and they
offer possible solutions to the difficulties of complying with the problems of noise and
vibration experienced during hand demolition.
Using a 360 excavator with multi-functional attachments

This type of demolition is commonly used to demolish low buildings, or is used after other
height reduction techniques have been carried out.
23
To avoid physical injury from movement of the parts of the building being demolished, the
machine should work in its own zone and be guided by a signaller. The signaller should
always be in visual contact with the machine driver when positioned close to the machine.
24
Whilst the machine driver is isolated from noise and dust, the signaller is not and may need
to wear PPE depending on the findings of the risk assessments for the work being done, for
example if an impact hammer is being used.
25
The height of the wall or building to be demolished should not normally be greater than the
attack (maximum) reach of the machine.
26
In some circumstances, it is possible to create a ramp for the machine to sit on to increase
the reach using rubble from previous demolition. Care must be taken to ensure that there
has been sufficient compaction to avoid the machine sitting on an unstable base.
27
If the ramp is being created within a building, it is very important to keep the ramp separated
from the outside walls to avoid surcharging them. In some very limited circumstances,
undermining or undercutting when the machine cannot reach the top of the building may be
acceptable. Any contractor selecting this method must implement a safe system of work that
ensures:
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
22
(b)
the protection of the driver from falling material.
EG
the stability of the structure is maintained
With regard to the second bullet-point, it is likely that a combination of methods, such as preweakening, will be employed to ensure the direction that the material will fall is controlled.
28
(a)
QCS 2014

Page 110
Super high reach 360 excavators

29
Typically these machines have a reach between 15 and 50 metres plus the length of the
fitted attachments for crunching concrete or shearing steels. The recommended working
height for this type of machine is 75% of the maximum reach.
30
These sophisticated machines are often fitted with variable width tracks, which usually make
them much heavier, giving increased ground-bearing pressure and reduced working
envelopes. It is vital that any voids and ducts located where the machine will track are
discovered and adequately filled. In terms of ground conditions, these machines should be
considered more as a crane or piling frame in terms of stability, rather than an excavator.
General precautions
Before using the demolition equipment, steps must be taken to ensure that the building is
completely empty and that all services are isolated.
32
Because of the danger of debris falling onto the excavator and its driver, the machine should
have a fitted cab guard and, as an added precaution, should be fitted with shatterproof glass.
AL
31
IO
Demolition ball
Demolition using a ball is extremely rare due to the advent of super high reach machines.
When a ball is used, the crane equipment must be heavy duty and only drop or pendulum
(e.g. in line with the jib) balling techniques should be employed.
34
When a ball is employed, regular (e.g. hourly) inspections of the equipment must take place,
paying particular attention to the attachments and shackles.
The demolition of bridges, pylons, masts, etc. requires specialised planning and techniques.
EG
General precautions
IN
35
TE
Bridges or steel structure demolition
AT
33
An assessment by a structural engineer should be undertaken to see if the structure could

be safely broken down into small component lifts.
37
A comprehensive safe working plan must be developed providing a safe means of access,
using a competent crane hire company and experienced slingers and signallers.
36
38
Noise, dust, fumes, vibration and fire control need to be properly addressed before and
during the demolition operation. Consideration should be given to the following points.
Noise
39
The contractor must ensure that a noise assessment has been carried out and that, where
possible, people are kept out of the danger area.
40
Any machinery which is to be used in the demolition process should, as far as possible, be
fitted and used with soundproofing equipment (e.g. exhaust silencers).
41
Where it is necessary for people to work within the area of noisy operations, adequate
hearing protection must be provided and used as necessary. If the upper exposure action
value is exceeded, or likely to be exceeded, hearing protection must be worn and hearing
QCS 2014

Page 111
protection zones clearly indicated.

42
Where the findings of a risk assessment indicate that the hearing of any employee is at risk
due to noise exposure at work, health surveillance, including hearing checks, must be
provided.
43
British Standard 5228 gives advice on the provisions for noise control on demolition sites.
Dust
44
Nearly all demolition activities create dust and many require a COSHH assessment.
45
Taking simple precautions, such as the following, ensures the dust nuisance can be reduced
to a minimum.
Implementing techniques that reduce dust generation.
(b)
The use of light water sprays both before and during demolition are very effective.
However, consideration should be given to any potential run-off contaminants that
may be produced and to the proximity of demolition work to electrical services and
drains.
(c)
Where demolition is being carried out inside a building and water sprays are
inappropriate, local ventilation, using air movers and filters, can help to alleviate dust
levels.
(d)
Dust masks, as any other personal protective equipment, should be used only as a
last resort. Where any mask is used, the wearer must be face-fit tested for the mask.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
A comprehensive ' invasive asbestos survey must be undertaken prior to the demolition
being started and preferably before contractors are invited to tender for the demolition.
TE
46
Asbestos
IN
Fumes
A cutting torch, used on steelwork, may produce toxic gases such as nitrogen dioxide. If a
phosphate coating is present, phosphine may be produced. If a chlorinated solvent has been
used, sulphides may be formed which have no smell until high toxic levels are present.
Additionally, toxic metal fumes may be given off.
48
Attention is drawn particularly to lead (lead painted steelwork), cadmium (cadmium bolt
heads) and zinc.
49
Before any hot work cutting is allowed, available information or paint samples may be
required for analysis, a COSHH assessment should be undertaken, and the necessary
control measures implemented.
EG
47
Vibration transmission
50
Vibration from demolition operations can cause damage to adjacent property and injury to
personnel working on site or, in extreme cases, to members of the public. Exposure to
vibration must be controlled.
51
The following points should be given consideration.

(a)
Attempts should be made to establish the presence of any existing sources of

vibration and whether vibration monitors are needed in sensitive locations.
(b)
Where buildings adjoining those to be demolished are being retained, separation

should be carried out using hand tools rather than machinery.
QCS 2014

Page 112
(c)
Necessary precautions should be taken or alternative equipment considered to

alleviate the risk of hand-arm vibration syndrome (HAVS), e.g. 'vibration white finger'
from continued use of vibrating tools.
52
With regard to the last point, the exposure time for most demolition hand tools is extremely
short, and the contractor will need a robust policy which includes health surveillance to carry
out hand demolition using demolition picks.
Fire and explosion risks

Where flammable liquids, gases or vapours have been used, or were released in a building
which is under demolition, any equipment, tank or pipes, etc. which could have contained
such substances must be purged and tested for explosive gases prior to work taking place.
Any work should be done under a Permit to Work system.
54
General hot work, using oxygen and propane cutting equipment, should be carried out only
by operatives trained in its safe and proper use, wearing the appropriate personal protective
equipment, i.e. goggles, gloves, overalls.
55
If the occasional burning of debris, such as wood or paper, is allowed on site, the fire must
be as small as possible, well away from buildings, roadways, fuel stores, and kept under
constant supervision.
56
All fires must be completely extinguished at least one hour before work stops for the day and
checked again, to ensure there are no glowing embers before operatives leave the site.
57
Adequate fire-fighting equipment must be available, with fire points containing extinguishers
in prominent and well-marked areas adjacent to the demolition operations.
AT
IO
AL
53
TE
Recycling
Demolition works should therefore be reviewed carefully to identify what wastes will be
produced, what actions will be taken to deal with these wastes.
59
In addition to removing recoverable items from demolition operations, it is becoming

increasingly common to crush the resultant brick and concrete into a sub-base material for
future construction purposes.
Crushing on site should only take place when environmental conditions permit such
actions. Environmental emissions (noise, fumes and dust) are required to be recorded
at least three times daily on a check sheet. Operations should cease if there are
excessive emissions which cross the site boundary.
(a)
EG
IN
58
(b)
All materials to be recycled should be checked for any contaminants and dealt with in
the correct manner to the required specification e.g. 6F2.
(c)
Operatives working on the crushers must be properly trained (both general training on
the use of crushers and specific training in respect of the equipment being used).
(d)
Serious consideration must be given to the need for machinery guarding on crushers.
A daily check sheet should be completed by the operator, which confirms that all
guards are in place and the emergency stops are working.
(e)
Robust safe systems of work are required to deal with blockages. These often happen
because the operator loading the crusher simply feeds in lumps that are too big, or
because during the demolition process the machine driver did not sort the materials
well and large lumps of timber have entered the stockpile.
(f)
All crusher operators are likely to require hearing checks and monitoring as the noise
levels are normally high.
(g)
Even with the dust suppression systems operational, it is unlikely that disposable
QCS 2014

Page 113
masks will offer a high enough level of protection. A risk assessment will be required
to determine the type of RPE. Face-fit testing may be required following this.
(h)
In many circumstances the operator acts as a picker. On some machines it is an

accepted practice that the operator wears a full body harness and is attached to a
strong point by a restraint lanyard to avoid them being pulled into the machine and
crushed.
Removal and disposal of materials

60
Before any materials are removed from site, both vehicular access to, and egress from, the
site must be agreed. Where applicable, bog mats and wheel washing facilities should be
provided to ensure that debris is not carried onto the highway. Depending on the nature of
the material, consideration should be given to covering lorries to prevent dust and debris.
61
Daily records must be kept of materials taken off site.
Demolition is not an exact science and if the job does not look or sound right there may be a
problem. If you have any doubts about the job, or how it can be safely carried out, request
further clarification before proceeding.
IO
62
AL
Common errors and assumptions
AT
Daily inspection by the site supervisor and/or Contractor
Provide daily briefings to the workforce on complex projects.
(b)
Check for continuing safe working practices.
(c)
Ensure access and egress routes are properly maintained.
(d)
Ensure the site is kept tidy.
(e)
Ensure the site is, as far as possible, free from any piles of combustible rubbish.
(f)
Ensure that sufficient signs are available and clearly visible to warn of hazardous
areas and activities.
(g)
Check the contractor's operatives are continuing to wear suitable protective

equipment.
(h)
Check the progress and sequence of the job to ensure that it is being carried out in
compliance with the health and safety plan.
TE
IN
EG
(i)
(a)
Check that an approved safe system of work is being followed.
The key to a successful and safe demolition project is to plan, implement, monitor and maintain a safe
system of work.
DEMOLITION IS
DANGEROUS,
TECHNICAL
AND ONLY FOR THE

Page 114
EXPERTS
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
PLANNING AND
SUPERVISION ARE
PARAMOUNT
QCS 2014
QCS 2014

Page 115

1.5.7
Safety in Piling
1.5.7.1 Safety in Piling

1
Piling operations can give rise to different hazards dependent upon the type of piling being
undertaken. Certain hazards are, however, generally common on all types of piling and the
following gives both the general precautions to be taken and the special precautions relating
to the different types of piling.
Note:
Section 4 of the QCS covers technical aspects of piling operations.
AL
1.5.7.2 General precautions
For all types of piling it is essential that a working surface designed to support the plant &
equipment safely when working and moving, is provided. Failure of the Working Platform
(piling mat) accounts for 30% of dangerous occurrences involving piling equipment. Any
such failure is potentially fatal. It is important that the responsibility for design, construction
and maintenance of the working platform is established and agreed, before work
commences. Piling contractors will provide details of their equipment to assist contractors in
constructing suitable access and working surface in the piling area. Piling contractors are to
ensure that their access and work area remains suitable and in good order.
Prior to piling, all underground services in the area should be located and marked where
they cannot be rendered safe. It is important to consult the services authority in the area on
these matters. A check should also be carried out to ensure that there are no cellars,
underground watercourses, ground conditions or made up or soft ground, etc., which could
create hazards during the operation. Consideration must also be given to potential instability,
which may be caused by the weather.
Where the site is contaminated, consideration must be given to the type of piling used and
additional welfare facilities provided.
Piling contractors should be requested to provide an appropriate written method statement to

the contractor. It is essential that induction training and information specific to the method
statement is provided to piling and site operatives.
Particular attention should be given to planning activities concurrent with piling including
identifying safe working distances and pedestrian and traffic access routes.
All persons working on piling operations must wear safety helmets and footwear. Ear and
eye protection must be provided and worn where necessary.
When piling from a pontoon or adjacent to water, personnel should wear self-inflating life
jackets. Rescue equipment (e.g. a safety boat and lifebuoys with lifelines attached) must be
kept ready for immediate use and enough men must know how to use it.
Where fluid concrete is used provision for the washing out of static plant and delivery
vehicles must be made, as you must protect watercourses against pollution.
Rated capacity indicators / limiters (RCI/L) are not required to be fitted on piling rigs when
used for normal piling operations. Likewise, an RCI/L - is not required when a rig is being
used to erect another rig,provided that the weight of components is accurately known and
does not exceed 75% of the safe working load (SWL) of the rig. However, if a rig with a SWL
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
QCS 2014

Page 116
of more than one tonne is used for general lifting operations, such as the loading and
transport of materials on site, it must be fitted with an RCI/L.
10
Machine operators must be trained, competent, medically fit and authorised by the contractor
to operate the machine.
11
Piling rigs are classed as lifting equipment and therefore require a thorough examination
after assembly and before being put into service at a new site or in a new location and at
least every 12 months. Inspections should also be carried out at suitable intervals.
Accessories for lifting (lifting gear) require a thorough examination at least every 6 months.
12
Piling rigs and cranes should only travel on slopes at gradients approved by the machine
manufacturer and "slew pins" must be used in these circumstances to reduce the risk of
overturning.
13
Guards must be fitted to the dangerous parts of the rig.
AL
1.5.7.3 Use of Cranes with piling
It is important to differentiate between cranes and piling rigs.
Cranes are widely used conventionally for load handling in association with piling activities.
Some techniques (e.g. sheet piling) also use cranes to install piles.
IO
Piling rigs are either purpose made machines or cranes specially adapted for piling by
the fitting of masts / leaders and / or sub assemblies to power boring equipment.
(b)
Cranes must be selected and used in accordance with BS 7121 or equivalent

international standard.
(c)
Cranes, which have been employed on piling duties, should be subjected to a

thorough examination before being returned to general lifting operations.
(d)
Any crane used for raising or lowering people must be fitted with a dead man's handle
and the descent must be effectively controlled; the latter is currently achieved by
power lowering. Properly constructed man carrying cages, designed to prevent
crushing and falls of people that are unable to spin or tip, must be used. The cages
should be regularly and carefully inspected. Any item of lifting equipment used to carry
persons must be thoroughly examined by a competent person at six monthly intervals.
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
1.5.7.4 Materials handling

1
Piles and other materials should be stacked safely on ground of equal bearing ability, with
safe access for subsequent removal and use in mind.
Circular objects should be chocked to prevent rolling.
Where there are marked lifting points they should be used. Never lift bundles by their
security ties, use the correct sling.
Flat and bundled items (e.g. sheet piles, bundles of reinforcement) must be lifted with the
correct lifting accessories and spacers placed between layers so that chains etc. can be
safely removed after setting down.
Hand tag lines should be used for long or bulky items which are likely to spin, especially in
windy conditions.
QCS 2014

Page 117
1.5.7.5 Piling Techniques

Driven piling - other than sheet piling
Specialist piling rigs incorporating a leader or mast which guides the pile driving hammer and
driving head are used. Piles are fitted to the driving head, pitched at the required position by
the rig and driven to the required depth. No spoil is generated. Piles may be extended to
meet technical criteria.
All machinery should be in good condition and no lifting equipment should be used
unless there are current records of thorough examination and where appropriate,
testing of the equipment in existence.
(b)
All control levers on the piling rig should be clearly marked to indicate their purpose
and mode of operation.
(c)
Persons not directly involved must stand well clear at all times when the rig is
operating.
(d)
Hearing protection will be required.
(e)
When piles are extended by welding, full precautions for temporarily securing the
additional length and welding must be observed.
(f)
When piles are extended using proprietary jointing systems the manufacturer's safety
and technical procedures must be followed.
(g)
Where persons have to approach the rig mast and the raised hammer for alignment
and, or maintenance purposes the hammer must be secured to prevent its
unintentional release.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
QCS 2014

Page 118
Driven sheet piling

2
The Contractor must consider the following simple factors in connection with the sheet piling
process:
(a)
how the piles are held in position during driving, how the piles are to be threaded,
(b)
how the first pile is secured whilst the second is threaded, the overall scheme to
devise a system to prevent the falls of persons and materials.
(c)
Piles can either be held in position during driving using a special leader arrangement
attached to the crane or piling plant or, alternatively, a gate system may be used.
Gate systems
A supporting system should be chosen which is appropriate for the operation, e.g. where
short runs of sheet piling are required and accuracy is not the main criteria', then a single
gate system may be used.
A single gate system is made up of a simple frame of either timber or steel gates supported
by block a suitable distance above ground level. A shallow guide trench is normally dug to
assist with the location of the sheet piles.
The "gate support system" shown is a two-gate system, made up from timber H-frames, set
in concrete
Kelly Blocks. These H-frames are then spanned by RSJs (gates). If the gates are over 2m
high, or over any potentially dangerous area, they must not be used as working platforms
unless fitted with toe boards which rise at least 150mm and main guardrails at least 950mm
above the walkway. Additionally, intermediate guardrails, or other rigid barriers, must be
fitted so that there is not an unprotected gap of more than 475mm in height in the means of
protection against a fall. Where such protection cannot be provided, access to slinging points
must be gained by ladder and NOT by means of the gates.
Permanent ladder access must be secure and extend above the gates sufficiently to provide
a safe handhold. (A distance of 1.05m is recommended).
If using a cantilever system, a tie-back should be used where possible, as well as kentledge
to provide safe anchorage and stability of the frame.
When piling is progressing and temporary piles are used to support the gate system, it is
advisable to use purpose made brackets and bolt them to the piles. Any welding necessary
should be carried out by competent welders.
10
When constructing Kelly Blocks, reinforcement should be placed in the concrete base.
Vertical RSJs should have a good "key". Vertical timber should not be cast into the block but
should be wedged and bolted. Where doubt exists over the stability of Kelly Blocks, guy lines
should be used. Lifting eyes should be cast into the blocks.
11
When using Kelly Blocks, it is essential to ensure that these are temporarily landed on an
adequate foundation to prevent subsidence and overturn during piling operations. This is
particularly applicable during works in rivers, etc.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Pitching sheet piles

12
If shackle holes have to be burned in the pile, sharp burrs should be removed to prevent
damage to shackle pins.
13
Remote release shackles should be used where possible and the sheet pile must not be
lifted vertically without first checking that the pin is properly engaged through the sheet. The
QCS 2014

Page 119
length of the operating rope must be less than the length of the pile and the rope should be
secured around the pile to prevent snagging, or being caught in the wind and becoming
inaccessible.
If piles are too heavy for a remote release shackle and work cannot safely be carried out
from a ladder, a lifting cage should be provided to gain access for unscrewing the shackle.
15
If a special lifting eye is to be welded to the pile for angled pitching, the weld should have a
factor of safety of at least 2.
16
Long sheet piles should be pitched with a pile threader following the manufacturer's
guidance for use. Where this is not possible, a pile pitching cage should be used. The cage
should hang from an adjacent pile, the operatives wearing safety harnesses hooked to the
adjacent pile before the crane hook is removed from the cage.
17
When sheet piles are being pitched it is essential to take particular care to ensure the
stability of the first few piles, but especially the first pile. This may be achieved by fixing the
pile to the gate at two points so that it cannot move within the plane of the gate. This action
will also ensure that the pile is stable if an effective toe-in is not achieved due to hard/stony
ground conditions.
18
When feeding sheet piles through top and bottom gates, use wood blocks or a bent bar.
Never use a straight pinch bar, as fingers can easily be trapped.
19
Additional precautions are required for work carried out from ladders, e.g. Clutching: the
ladder must be placed in the valley of a previously placed pile; the ladder must be footed
and, when at the top of the ladder and both hands are required for clutching, a safety
harness must be worn and secured to the pile using a girder grip.
20
Wedging: the ladder must be placed against the RSJ and footed; wedges should be prepositioned on the RSJ A 4lb lump hammer should be used as this can be swung with one
hand. If two hands are required, a safety harness must be worn, with the lanyard wrapped
around the RSJ or connected to a girder grip.
21
The work method must not be changed without the approval of the contractor responsible for
the piling operation. If windy conditions make the handling of the sheet piles difficult, work
must stop until the responsible person has been consulted and a safe method of continuing
the work has been devised.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
14
Piling Hammers
22
The recommendations of BS 5228 Pt. 4: Code of practice for noise control applicable to
piling operations, should be closely followed.
23
Hammers, and in particular all clamping bolts, should be regularly inspected and a record
kept.
24
Use guide rope when positioning a hammer.
25
Stand clear when starting and operating.
26
ALL personnel should be at ground level during pile driving.
27
Should the piston of a hammer jam, the trip-lever should be pulled to the open position
before removing the hammer from the pile.
28
Damaged high-pressure airlines or high voltage cables, feeding the hammer, can present a
QCS 2014

Page 120
serious hazard to persons working in the vicinity of the operation.

29
Therefore it is important to keep supply lines/cables under constant observation to avoid

damage by trapping or from sharp objects.
Double acting air hammers

30
All hose couplings should be properly manufactured and matched. The joining of rubber
pipes to brass spigots should be by clamp and not hose clips.
31
Ensure that the oil bottle/filter lid is secure.
Internal drop hammers

Always place a swivel between the hammer and hoist rope.
33
Attachment of a hoist rope should always be done using a properly matched anchor and
pear; the dead end of the rope should be secured to itself using a bulldog clip or other
approved means.
34
Intermediate linking shackle pins should be secured.
35
Hoist ropes should be inspected regularly during piling operations and a record of
inspections kept
AT
IO
AL
32
Pile helmets or crowns must be well constructed, strong enough and free from defect.
Should packing or spacers be needed, they should be drilled, tapped and screwed, to secure
in place, and then be welded. Remember that any welds to a solid cast helmet will eventually
crack.
IN
TE
36
Helmets and inserts
EG
Pile extraction
Where pile extraction is necessary, due allowance should be made for the frictional forces
occurring between the pile and ground, in order to determine the correct size of crane and
extractor.
38
It is good practice to use a tag line between hook and adjacent pile to prevent the extractor
swinging out of control should the pile snap.
39
Care should be taken when lowering extracted piles to ensure that the load on the crane
hook is kept vertical.
40
Where a crane is used to extract piles it is common practice for the rated capacity indicator
to be disconnected to prevent damage. This is a legal operation in that the crane is
effectively a "piling rig" whilst this work is taking place. However, the competent person for
lifting operations must ensure that the machine remains within its safe working capacity
throughout the operation. The RCI/L must be promptly connected before any other lifting
work is attempted.
37
Rotary Bored piling

41
This technique involves specialist piling equipment that bores a hole which, depending on
ground conditions may be lined (cased). Relatively short rotating boring tools are used which
are withdrawn from the ground fully loaded with spoil. Once the tool is above the ground the
QCS 2014

Page 121
rig is commonly slewed off the bore and the spoil is discharged. Reinforcement bars and
concrete are placed in the hole and any temporary casing is extracted to complete the
process.
Personnel not directly involved with the activity should be kept clear at all times,
particularly from the boring and spin off (spoil discharge) areas.
(b)
Fixed guarding to Rotary Bored Piling Augers is not practicable due to the nature of
the equipment. A controlled zone must be identified at each pile location and can be
defined as a zone at 2m radius from the centre of the auger. A banksman must be in
attendance at all times while the piling rig is active and must be given authority and
responsibility to ensure only authorised persons are permitted within the zone. No
person is permitted within the zone while the auger is rotating (this precludes manual
cleaning of the auger). Should any manual intervention be required the auger must be
stopped. An excavator can be used within the zone for the purposes of clearing spoil
but only under the banksmans supervision.
(c)
To remove spoil from the auger the loaded auger should be carefully slewed off the
pile position to the discharge point in a controlled manner. When the auger is being
spun off it should be as close to the ground as possible to minimise the spread of spoil
and the auger spin speed should be only sufficient to empty the tool so as to minimise
the spread of spoil.
(d)
Spoil from bores should be kept clear of access to the borehole.
(e)
Open bores must be fitted with a cover or other suitable protection to prevent people
falling into them. Common practices include leaving the casing 1m above working
platform level and the auger or other boring tool in the borehole.
(f)
Freshly completed piles must be marked individually or in blocks to minimise trip

hazards from reinforcement and soft concrete. They should be backfilled as soon as
technically possible, remembering that soft spots must remain highlighted for the
safety of people and plant stability.
(g)
In the majority of circumstances there is no need for a person to enter a pile bore/shaft
and this should be avoided. Remote means of inspection and sampling the sides of
shafts should be used wherever possible.
(h)
Where entry into a pile bore / shaft is unavoidable the recommendations of British
Standard BS 8008 or equivalent must be followed.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
All persons entering the controlled zone must be properly informed and instructed on the
risks associated with this operation. The banksman must be trained on slinger signalling
matters. The banksman must be identified.
43
The guard forms a natural resting position for the banksman, this position is away from the
auger.
42
Auger guarding and mechanised cleaning
QCS 2014

Page 122
CFA (Continuous Flight Auger) Piling
AL
With this technique specialist piling rigs screw an auger into the ground the full depth of the
pile bore. Concrete is then pumped through the hollow auger stem and spoil is removed as
the auger is withdrawn. Reinforcement is placed in the bore after concreting.
(a)
The majority of rigs used for this type of piling have a certain amount of guarding
achieved by extending the gate (guide), which is used to maintain the position of the
augers. However this gate does need to be opened to allow the piling rig to achieve its
full depth and to facilitate the rigging of the augers and the gate will not allow work
immediately adjacent to structures, especially in corners.
(b)
A controlled zone must be identified at each pile location and can be defined as a
zone at 2m radius from the centre of the auger. A banksman must be in attendance at
all times while the piling rig is active and must be given authority and responsibility to
ensure only authorised persons are permitted within the zone. No person is permitted
within the zone while the auger is rotating (this precludes manual cleaning of the
auger). Should any manual intervention be required the auger must be stopped. An
excavator can be used within the zone for the purposes of clearing spoil but only
under the banksmans supervision
(a)
(b)
EG
IN
All persons entering the controlled zone must be properly informed and instructed on the
risks associated with the CFA piling operation. The banksman must be trained on slinger
signalling matters. The banksman must be identified. Providing this procedure is strictly
adhered to then this may be adopted as an alternative approach to the guarding of CFA
augers when mechanical means of guarding is not reasonably practicable.
Mechanical or automatic auger cleaning devices should be used.
45
TE
AT
IO
44
All control levers on the piling rig should be clearly marked to indicate their purpose
and mode of operation.
(c)
When ropes are subject to heavy wear, they must be frequently inspected and
changed as necessary.
(d)
Similarly, the auger section joints and their wedges must be inspected on a daily basis
for excessive wear.
(e)
Freshly completed piles must be marked individually or in blocks to minimise trip

hazards from reinforcement and soft concrete. They should be backfilled as soon as
technically possible, remembering that soft spots must remain highlighted for the
safety of people and plant stability.
Tripod bored piling

46
A tripod is set up over the pile position and various tools are used to advance boring. These
are raised and dropped by a rope winch attached to the tripod. Casings are driven to line the
bore, their depth varying with ground conditions. Spoil is removed as boring progresses.
Reinforcement and concrete is placed before the casings are withdrawn.

Page 123
(a)
Each tripod leg must be identity marked and every tripod and winch marked with its
safe working load (SWL). Identity marks must correspond with the examination
records.
(b)
Ropes should be secured with suitable fastenings, e.g. bulldog clips. Where
appropriate, properly constructed saddles or hard eyes should be used.
(c)
Knots must not be tied in any rope used for lifting.
(d)
The tripod legs must not be overspread or overloaded. The base plates should be
adequate and secured to prevent any accidental movement of the rig.
(e)
Only the correct pins should be used in the sheerlegs (tripod).
(f)
All parts of the winch should be effectively guarded, although it is acknowledged that
access to the winch drum is required to enable the rope to be pushed across the drum
during a gear change.
(g)
Constant attention must be paid to the condition of rope, which should be changed as
soon as it becomes necessary.
(h)
When a rope/chain block is being used to extract the casings, the capacity of the block
must not exceed the capacity of the rig.
(i)
Under no circumstances must there be less than 2 full turns of the rope on the winch
drum at any time.
IO
AL
QCS 2014
EG
IN
TE
There are many other piling techniques. Specialist suppliers should be contacted for
alternative safe working procedures.
47
AT
Other techniques
QCS 2014

Page 124

1.5.8
Safety in Formwork/Falsework
1.5.8.1 Formwork/Falsework and reinforced concrete structures

1
Falsework is any temporary structure used to support a permanent structure during its
erection and until it becomes self-supporting. This definition applies not only to in-situ
concrete construction, but also to precast concrete structures, structural steel erection, and
even such items as brick arches, indeed, any construction method where the permanent
structure may have a period of instability, requiring support in the erection process.
Note: Section 5 of the QCS covers use and handling of concrete.
1.5.8.2 Standard solutions

Falsework covers an extremely wide range of temporary support methods and BS 5975
recognises that, in simpler and more commonplace situations, e.g. support of floors and
beams involving light loadings and low height support (within the range of standard props)
standard solutions can most likely be used instead of individual designs.
Standard solutions are given in B5 5975. However, unless the job falls within the limitations
of the particular standard solution, further design will be required.
IO
AL
1.5.8.3 Causes of failure
AT
Incorrect estimation of loads to be supported.
(b)
Design error, or loading programme changes after design completed.
(c)
Inadequate detailing and/or execution of points of load transference.
(d)
Inadequate horizontal lacing and diagonal bracing to resist lateral loads.
(e)
Inadequate foundations.
TE
(a)
IN
Whatever category the work falls into, it is generally accepted by competent international
authorities that the causes of failure fall into a number of well-defined areas:
Within the above scope, it must be recognised that failure often does not result from one
specific error or inadequacy. More likely it will be due to an accumulation of errors, not in
themselves critical, which combine to erode the factor of safety to the point where failure
occurs.
1.5.8.4 Design
EG
The design of temporary works such as falsework comes within the scope of these
regulations. Whether the falsework design is provided by standard solutions or by individual
design, the parameters on which the design is to be based need to be clearly established. In
this respect, it must be recognised that the loads imposed on falsework do not only arise
from the permanent structure. Many will occur as a result of method and plant decisions.
BS 5975 covers with the preparation and contents of the design brief in detail.
The main risks are:

(a)
people falling during erection and striking of formwork and assembly of the steel frame
collapse of the formwork
(b)
materials falling while striking the formwork
(c)
manual handling of shutters, reinforcing bars etc
(d)
being struck by the concrete skip
(e)
silica dust and hand-arm vibration from scabbling operations
(f)
awkward postures and working positions for steel fixers
(g)
dermatitis and cement burns from wet concrete.
QCS 2014
(a)
designers should consider the manual handling risks when detailing size and length of
the reinforcing bar;
(b)
fixing reinforcement steel in prefabricated sections in factory conditions and craning it

into position so that work can be done on benches to reduce the need for bending
down. Alternatively, using long-handled tools can reduce the need to bend over
(c)
using formwork systems that have edge protection and access designed in
(d)
minimising the need for scabbling by using retarders; and
(e)
using concrete pumps instead of cranes and skips.
The Contractor is to ensure that:

a method statement has been agreed before work starts, and that it is followed.
(b)
guard rails or other suitable barriers to prevent falls are put in place as work
progresses.
(c)
workers have safe access to the work -- it is not safe to stand on primary or other
open timbers.
(d)
a safe means of access is used. Many formwork systems have purpose-designed

fittings to allow access platforms to be fitted and they should be used (see Figure 29).
(e)
climbing up vertical sections of reinforcement or up the outside of column formwork is

not permitted. A tower scaffold can provide safe access to columns (see Figure 30).
(f)
equipment is in good order before use. Do not use substitutes for the manufacturer's
pins in adjustable props.
(g)
the formwork, falsework and temporary supports are checked, properly tied, footed,
braced and supported before loading, and before pouring walls or columns.
(h)
workers are protected from wet concrete (provide gloves and Wellington boots and
proper washing facilities) and silica dust (provide respirators or avoid the need to
scabble by using a retarder).
(i)
loads are spread as evenly as possible on the temporary structure. Do not place large
loads of timber, reinforcing bars or wet concrete in a localised area -- spread loads
evenly.
(j)
it is known when back-propping is required and how soon the new structure can be
loaded; and there is a planned safe dismantling procedure.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
EG
Many of these risks can be reduced or removed by design and careful planning:

Page 125
Figure 29: A formwork system with

multipurpose fittings
Figure 30: A tower scaffold provides a

safe means of access to the columns
QCS 2014

Page 126

1.5.9
Explosives
1
This subsection aims to give general guidance to Site Managers on the acquisition, keeping,
transfer, storage, transportation and use of explosives in the construction industry. In
addition, it is anticipated that the information will enable Sub Contractor's method statements
and risk assessments to be assessed. Further guidance on the use of explosives is provided
in BS 5607:1998 "Code of Practice for safe use of explosives in the construction industry".
Advice on the explosives used in cartridge operated fixing tools is given in BS 4078 Part 1.
Note: Section 2, Part 1.5 of the QCS covers explosives.
Before any work involving explosives is planned and carried out the person responsible for
the site, for example the Principal Contractor, must appoint someone with sufficient
knowledge and experience to oversee this work. Even when a sub contractor will carry out
the blasting the appointed Supervisor must satisfy him or herself that the planning,
documents and implementation are satisfactory as this is obviously a high-risk operation.
Similarly, the business actually carrying out the work with explosives must ensure that
Supervisors and Shot firers are competent to carry out their work. The competence and
training of Shot firers is dealt with later in the section.
AT
IO
AL
1.5.9.2 Appointments
1.5.9.3 Preliminary survey
Before any work involving the use of explosives is started, a detailed survey should be made
of the site and its adjoining areas. Where earthworks, tunnelling or demolition are involved,
relevant information may be obtained from British Standards 6031, 6164 and 6187
respectively.
Special attention should be given to the character and structure of the geographical strata to
ensure that they are not likely to transmit ground vibration to areas where it is likely to cause
damage. The affect on utilities, including underground and over-ground services, should be
carefully considered.
Notifications
3
EG
IN
TE
Prior notice of the intention to use explosives should be given to all those who may be
affected. For example, the water; gas, electricity and telephone authorities, the police and
airports.
Documentation
4
Eplosives may be acquired, or stored only by persons who hold a valid Explosives
Certificate. This is usually referred to as the "acquire and keep" certificate. An Explosives
Certificate may be issued for both acquisition and storage of explosives or for acquisition
only. Certificates permitting acquisitions only should be obtained where it is intended to use
explosives on the day they are delivered to site. An Explosive Certificate is not required for
the acquisition or storage of cartridge operated tool cartridges which carry the following UN
numbers: 0275, 0276, 0323 or 0381.
In addition to the explosives certificate the person ordering or taking delivery of explosives
must be competent to do so and have received the relevant approvals from the competent
authorities.
QCS 2014

Page 127
Storage
Guidance on the methods of storing and types of construction required for a store for
explosives may be ontained from the competent authority. In addition, advice may also be
obtained from the manufacturer of the explosives which are to be used. The storage facilities
will be inspected and therefore it is important that the guidance and advice is complied with.
The movement of explosives into and out of the store must be recorded, and there must be a
formal procedure for accepting delivery of explosives and for checking that they conform to
the contents of the advice note. It is essential to ensure that detonators are stored separately
from other explosives. The loss of any explosives must be reported to the police. No person
may transfer explosives to another person unless he is satisfied that the transferee has an
Explosive Certificate certifying him to be a fit person to acquire explosives. This does not
prohibit employers from giving explosives to their employees, but it does mean that a
Principle Contractor must check that a Sub-contractor has an Explosives Certificate before
providing the Sub-contractor with explosives.
Explosives stores must be kept clean and free from grit.
Rubber Overshoes must be kept in each store and worn by people who are not wearing
rubber soled footwear and have to enter the store. No iron or steel implements should be
taken into explosives stores and no naked lights or other means of ignition should be taken
within 25m of them.
10
The issuing of explosives should be restricted to persons who have been authorised in
writing by the Site Manager.
AT
IO
AL
TE
Regarding the transport of explosives on public roads, various duties on operators of

vehicles include:
(a)
the requirement for vehicles to be suitable, having regard to the type of explosives and
quantity of explosives carried; quantity limits for various types of explosives are also
imposed,
(b)
restrictions on the carriage of loads of mixed explosives,
(c)
the requirement for the marking of vehicles and containers, except where small
quantities of certain types of explosives are carried,
(e)
(d)
EG
IN
11
Transport
the requirement for written, specified information about the load to be kept on the
vehicle,
the requirement to take all reasonable steps to ensure safe and secure carriage,
12
Vehicle operators must ensure that drivers have received adequate instruction and training
on dangers which may arise, action to be taken in an emergency and on their duties. Drivers
must attend an approved course, on successful completion of which they will be awarded a
Vocational Training Certificate. Drivers must carry these certificates.
13
Finally, where explosives are carried on the public roadway, the safe system of transport
must be prepared by a person with training and knowledge of the health and safety
implications of carrying explosives. This requirement will normally apply to the supplier who
should be organised so that he delivers directly to the explosive store on the day when
blasting is taking place.
14
Further transport of explosives on site must be in a vehicle provided solely for this purpose
and be under the control of the shot firer. The vehicle should be clean internally and carry a
red flag to indicate the presence of explosives. Detonators should be separated from
explosives by at least 1m during carriage; explosives which have already been fitted with
QCS 2014

Page 128
detonators must not be carried in any vehicle. Detonators should be kept in a suitable
container, with no metal parts that will come into contact with the detonators; it should be
kept locked until access is required. Explosives should be protected from the weather during
transit. "No Smoking" restrictions and a ban on the use of CB radios and mobile telephones
in the immediate vicinity must be strictly observed.
15
When explosives are being transported on site, only sufficient explosives for the work in
hand should be drawn from the explosives store, and the vehicle carrying the explosives
should go directly to the shot holes.
16
When explosives are brought on to a site where there is no lawful storage facility, (as
outlined under "Documentation"), liaison may be necessary between the explosives engineer
making the delivery and site management on such matters as emergency arrangements and
the provision of safe parking away from obvious sources of ignition and other dangerous
goods.
AL
Mixing on site
Before explosives mixtures are manufactured on site an application for an application for
approval is required. In addition, a small amount of record keeping is required.
18
The actual mixing process itself is very simple although the manufacturers advice should be
sought as to the provision and use of suitable equipment and the appropriate mixing ratios.
Some further guidance on this subject can be found in BS 5607:1998.
AT
IO
17
Suitable and sufficient steps must be taken to ensure that nobody is exposed to risk of injury
from the use of explosives in construction work. In addition, persons undertaking the drilling
of shot holes must be protected from the dangers associated with work at edges from which
there is a risk of falling, dust from the drilling process, unguarded dangerous parts of
machinery and the rupture of large diameter compressed air hoses. These are normally
chained at the coupling to prevent them snaking about in the event of a burst.
IN
TE
19
Use of explosives
Before any blasting takes place, both audible and visual signalling systems, giving warning
of blasting operations, should be established. These must be explained and publicised
through the site Induction Training, Site Rules and clearly visible Signs affixed at the
entrances to the site. Audible warnings should consist of a series of readily recognisable
signals, which have a distinctive sound. Visual signs should take the form of clearly painted
notices posted on all access roads and sited outside the danger area. Sentries should be
posted with clear instructions as to when they can stop access to the site and when they can
allow access.
20
EG
Code of signals
1.5.9.4 Shotfiring
Competence of shotfirers
1
BS 5607:1998 sets out the training requirements for Shot Firers, these must be adhered to if
safety is to be achieved.
General precautions
2
Before explosives are used on any particular site, a written system of work, applicable
specifically to that site, should be prepared. The responsibilities of persons with specific
duties, such as the Supervisor, Shot firer and Sentries should be detailed in writing. When
the system of work is being prepared, consideration should be given to the following matters:
QCS 2014

Page 129
The development of the Blasting Specification.
(b)
The preparation of written Explosives Rules that, that can be easily understood by the
workforce.
(c)
The need to post sentries and visual warning signs around the areas likely to be
affected by the blast.
(d)
The need to ensure that the danger area is clear of all personnel immediately before
firing occurs.
(e)
The need to have an audible means of giving warning that a shot is about to be fired
and to sound the all clear.
(f)
The need to notify the police, the general public, or occupiers of adjacent properties of
shot firing times.
(g)
The system of work should always emphasise the following general precautions: -
(h)
The importance of the shot firer satisfying himself that the danger zone is clear before
firing a round and that, after firing, a complete check is made to ensure that no
misfires or other hazards exist.
(i)
The banning of cigarettes, matches and naked lights within a radius of 10m from
explosives and detonators. This is a legal requirement in quarries.
(j)
The prohibition of drilling into old sockets, as these may contain explosives or
detonators, which may be detonated by a drill.
(k)
The use of only wooden rods for charging and stemming shot holes.
(l)
Shot holes should be minimum of 3mm larger than the cartridge diameter for normal
holes and 13mm for deep holes. Before charging, shot holes should be proved clear
by inserting a stemming rod to the bottom.
(m)
Cartridges should be inserted into the holes one at a time, and stemming should be
completed only with suitable material, e.g. sand, clay, gypsum, etc.
(n)
As high explosives are initiated by the application of a powerful localised shock,

exposure to any deliberate, accidental or random compressive action must be
prevented.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
Electrical shotfiring
Electrical detonation allows shot firing from a remote location and also controls the precise
instant of firing, thus increasing the safety factor. In addition, the use of timing delay
detonators in the firing circuit significantly reduces the levels of vibration. The method is
generally used as a number of shot holes can be connected together and fired as a group.
The making up of primed charges should normally be undertaken by the shot firer
immediately prior to charging. A non-ferrous pricker must be used for piercing the explosive,
making it ready to receive the detonator. On no account must any other form of pricker be
used. Detonators must be firmly secured to the primer cartridge in such a manner as to
prevent the detonator or wire becoming detached or damaged. The ends of the detonator
leads must remain twisted together until all holes have been charged.
Where it is not possible to achieve safe conditions at the charging place (e.g. in very wet
conditions), it will be necessary for priming explosives to be transported to the charging
place. Such procedures will require additional careful planning.
All rock surfaces, rails, metal objects, cables etc. must be considered as potential sources of
stray current and great care must be taken to prevent detonator lead wires coming into
contact with them.
Good connection of the detonator leads, connecting wire and shot firing cables is essential.
QCS 2014

Page 130
Before attempting to fire a shot electrically, the shot firer must test the continuity of the circuit
with a suitable instrument before he connects the firing cable to the exploder. This testing
procedure must be carried out only after all persons have left the shot firing area and the
shot firer himself is in the firing position. The removable handle of the exploder must be kept
in the shot firer's possession at all times. The handle may be inserted into the exploder
immediately prior to firing only and it must be withdrawn immediately after firing.
8
After the shot has been fired, the appointed shot firer must inspect the area of the blast for
misfires, or any other sort of danger, before allowing people to return to the area.
When detonating near overhead electrical cables, consultation should take place with the
electricity supplier, who may be able to make the cables dead for a limited period. Advice
should be sought on the minimum distance permissible between an explosive charge and an
overhead electric cable. The following distances may be used for guidance:
11-70kV
20m
(b)
132-400kV
61m
AL
(a)
Premature ignition of electric detonators by electromagnetic energy from radar, radio and
television transmitters is a possibility which should always be considered and this is why CB
radios and mobile telephones should be excluded from the shot-firing area.
11
Beamed transmitters, such as navigational aids and military installations often operate at a
high power and, if the station is in direct line of sight of blasting operations, adequate
investigations should be made and suitable precautions taken. Commercial radio
transmitters may be potentially dangerous as the wavelengths used are often similar to the
overall length of the proposed blasting circuit.
12
Television transmitters are not generally a hazard as they transmit horizontal beams from a
high mast, but portable walkie-talkie equipment and unmodified car transmitters up to 5W in
output should not be taken within 10m of any blasting operation. Modified car transmitters
and CB radio transmitters, which may have been illegally modified to increase their power,
are potentially dangerous at much larger distances. Users of electric detonators are
recommended to discuss this matter with the manufacturer or supplier of their detonators. In
any event, the use of CB radios on sites should be banned by notices placed at all entry
points.
13
Electrical means of detonations must not be used during storm conditions when there is
thunder and lightning in the vicinity. The possibility of uncontrolled detonation should not
necessarily prevent the use of this type of firing method. However, the manufacture/supplier
must be consulted to ensure that the firing initiation system is appropriate for the
circumstances.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
10
Detonating cord
14
Detonating cord is a very reliable initiator and its use for firing large groups of charges is free
from some of the drawbacks of electrical shot firing such as current leakage problems.
However, detonating cord must be protected from rain and ground water as moisture
penetration can cause transmission failures. Covering the ends of the cord with waterproof
tape may prove effective, but if conditions are very wet, the use of sealing compounds may
be necessary. When laying out detonating cord, it is essential to ensure that branch lines do
not cross over the main line, as on detonation a branch line may be severed, resulting in a
misfire in the shot hole which it is serving. Detonating cord must not be kinked or knotted,
otherwise transmission failure may occur. In use, detonating cord passes down the outside
of explosive cartridges to the bottom of the shot hole, so care should be exercised when
using a stemming rod otherwise the cord may be broken or damaged. Breakage of cord can
also result from excessive tensioning, repeated stretching or the imposition of a sustained
load. The power core of detonating fuse is liable to detonate, with the risk of serious injury if
subjected to impact or shock. Detonating cord should always be protected from friction and
QCS 2014

Page 131
heat.
Shotfiring using safety fuse
In surface blasting applications, the use of safety fuse is virtually restricted to single shotfiring operations such as the "popping" of large boulders. This is because accurate timing
cannot be achieved and, if used in a group, an erratic timing sequence would result.
However, safety fuse may be used where it is considered dangerous to use electrical
detonation due to the presence of nearby electrical hazards.
16
Safety fuse is used in conjunction with a plain detonator. The fuse is inserted into the open
end of the detonator, which is secured by crimping on to the fuse. The correct crimping tool
must be used. A primed charge is made up by inserting the detonator into a hole prepared in
the primer cartridge.
17
The length of safety fuse must allow the shot firer and assistants ample time to walk to a
place of safety after ignition. No single shots should be fired by fuse less than 1m in length,
nor any shot in a round be fired by fuse less than 1.25m in length. A shot firer must not
attempt to ignite more than six individual shots in a round. Only fuse lighters, specifically
designed for the purpose, should be used.
IO
AL
15
The following additional precautions are relevant to tunnelling and shaft sinking:
AT
1.5.9.5 Tunnelling and shaft sinking
TE
Where it is necessary to store explosives in the tunnel between blasting operations, proper
reserve stations should be excavated and fitted with steel doors. Reserve stations should not
be nearer than 300m to the tunnel face. Reserve stations are not authorised storage places.
Any explosives remaining in them at the end of a shift should be returned to the licensed
explosives store or magazine.
Transport
Explosives should be transported to the tunnel face in a clearly marked special mine car,
lined with timber and having top or side lids fitted with padlocks. Explosives must not be
carried on the driving locomotive itself.
EG
IN
Storage
Drilling and charging

4
Drilling patterns should adhere to the agreed profile. All shot holes should terminate at the
same vertical plane, except those drilled for cut shots and easers. If the presence of gas is
suspected, tests should be made at the mouth of each shot hole, and within 9m of the face
prior to charging. Plastic water stemming, water stemming under pressure, or water gel
capsules reduce dust and toxic fumes. If possible, explosives with non-toxic characteristics
should be used in tunnelling operations.
No explosives or blasting accessories should be conveyed to the face until all drilling
operations for the round to be charged have been completed.
Sockets left after blasting

6
The most common cause of severe accidents with explosives in tunnelling results from
drilling into sockets containing explosives which were not fired in the previous round. It is
essential that drilling into such sockets be avoided.
QCS 2014

Page 132
Electrical faults and hazards

7
Short-circuiting or current leakage from the circuit to earth is more likely to occur when
conditions are wet. Ground water from rock fissures often contains mineral salts, which
greatly increase its electrical conductivity. Bare wire connections should not be allowed to
dangle in water, nor be allowed to hang against a wet rock face.
The risk of premature explosion during electric storms is particularly high in tunnelling work.
Dangerous static charges can also build up in compressed air equipment, and it is essential
that such equipment should be positively earthed. Another hazard is from portable electric
lighting cables; such lights should be removed to at least 9m from the face when preparing
or charging blasts. Power to drilling and other equipment should also be switched off or
completely isolated, when explosives and detonators are in the vicinity.
Shotfiring
Serious shock and flash wave effects can be experienced in tunnel blasting work. In straight
tunnel work, the minimum distance from the face to the firing point should be at least 300m.
A shorter distance may be acceptable where a cross- tunnel or special refuge provides
protection but, in such cases, the dangers from ricochets and fumes must be assessed.
Before the all clear is given, the shot firer must ensure that all fume has been adequately
diluted or has dispersed. This may initially require gas testing with a stain tube detector or
some other suitable testing device to establish the timescale at which fume dilution is such
that it is safe for the workforce to return to the face. This testing must be repeating as the
work progresses and written records kept to ensure that the re-entry timescales are
appropriate. Miners are likely to be working on a bonus system and therefore re-entry may
require a strong level of control!
AT
IO
AL
All shot-firing operations are likely to leave fragments of loose material on the face. These
can fall and have been known to cause injury and in some cases, where inclined, sloping
rock beds in tunnelling are concerned, death. These must therefore be removed or stablised
before any work involving an approach to the face, where there is a risk from falling material,
can begin. A cherry picker will provide a useful platform for scaling down and the Shot firer
should not allow anyone to approach a face until he is satisfied that the face has been
inspected and loose material cleared.
EG
IN
10
TE
Scaling Down Faces
1.5.9.6 Misfires
Electrical shotfiring misfires
1
If an electrically initiated charge fails to fire, the shot firer must follow the following procedure:
(a)
Remove the handle from the shot firing apparatus.
(b)
Disconnect the cable from the shot firing apparatus.
(c)
After waiting 5 minutes, examine the shot firing cable and connections for any defect.
If one is found, it must be remedied.
(d)
Return to the firing point and make a further attempt to fire the shot.
(e)
If this second attempt to fire is unsuccessful, the circuit should be split in half and each
half should be tested in turn to locate the fault.
(f)
The faulty half should then be split in two and again each half should be tested
separately by continuing this process, the fault can be located. All such tests must be
affected from the firing shelter.
QCS 2014

Page 133
(g)
Once the faulty detonator has been located, the remainder of the circuit should be
connected in series, omitting the faulty detonator. The leading wires of the faulty
detonator should be connected by string to a suitable marker to facilitate recovery of
the primer cartridge after firing.
(h)
After re-testing, the modified circuit should be fired. Dislodged material should then be
searched for any undetonated cartridges.
(i)
If material in the vicinity of the misfired hole is not dislodged by the blast, recovery of
the misfired charge may be attempted by firing shot relieving holes at a distance of at
least 300mm from the misfired charge. A similar procedure should be adopted if a
misfire is found after a blast has been fired.
(j)
Where misfires are encountered after firing a round, the face or structure is likely to be
fractured and weakened. Any dangerous conditions must be rectified before the shot
firer deals with the misfire.
In the event of a misfire, the shotfirer must adopt the following procedure:(a)
Ensure that no one approaches the shot firing area until at least 30 minutes have
elapsed.
(b)
At the expiration of the 30-minute period, inspect the safety detonation fuse and, if the
cause of the misfire is clearly evident, rectify the fault and make a second attempt to
fire the round.
(c)
If this second attempt to fire is unsuccessful, the shot firer may adopt one of the
following procedures: -
AT
Remove the stemming by compressed air, or water, using a non-ferrous or

rubber blowpipe. Insert a primer cartridge into the hole, re-stem and fire, or
(ii)
Drill a relieving hole at least 300mm away from the misfired charge, taking care
to ensure that this hole is drilled parallel to the misfired hole. Load and fire the
relieving hole in the normal way.
IN
TE
(i)
After either of these procedures has been followed, a most careful search must be made of
the debris for detonators and unexploded explosives.
EG
IO
AL
Safety fuse misfires
Records of misfires
Records should be kept of any misfires.
1.5.9.7 Disposal of Explosives

1
Extreme care must be taken in the disposal of unwanted, or apparently deteriorated

explosives. In general, explosives should be returned to manufacturers or suppliers although
substances such as gelignite can be burned Manufacturers guidance is essential in this
respect and the persons involved should avoid the fumes as they produce severe
headaches. Guidance is also contained in booklet HS (G) 36 Disposal of explosives waste
and the decontamination of explosives plant.
All empty explosive boxes must be thoroughly examined by the shot firer, taken to a safe
place, at least 50m from the store or magazine, and burned.
END OF DOCUMENT
QCS 2014

Part 1.06: Human Factors (Regulatory Document)
Page 1
1.6
HUMAN FACTORS ......................................................................................... 1
1.6.1
Accident Prevention and Control...................................................................... 4
1.6.2
Accident Reporting and Investigation (RIDDOR) ........................................... 22
1.6.3
Behavioural Safety ......................................................................................... 43
1.6.4
Drugs and Alcohol Misuse ............................................................................. 57
1.6.5
Safety Critical Communication ....................................................................... 72
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 2
FORWARD
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 3
Sr. No
QCS 2014
Section No.
Part No.
Part Name
Submittals
7.5.2

Chart
Submittals
7.6.1
10
Health and Safety
All
All
All
11
10
11.4.6
14
14.4

Lifting Tackle
15
Temporary Controls
All
All
All
16
Traffic Diversions
16.1.3
Safety
General
8.1.6
Safety
General
8&9
1.4.12
10

Work
1.6
Safety
11
Deep Foundations
4.9.1.7
Safety Precautions
12
Deep Foundations
13
General
14
Asphalt Plants
15
14
AT
IO
37 & 38
42
Item Name
AL
Page No. Item No.
4&5
1.6
Temporary Fencing
15
7.8.13
Safety Requirements
14.2.2
Safety
General
1.3.2
Health and Safety
17
8.1.9
Safety
18
9.2.5
Safety Requirements
19
10

Survey
4,5&6
10.1.7
Safety Requirements
20
11
11.2.2
Safety
21
General
16
1.2.8
Safety Guards
22
General
19
1.2.16
23
19
Hot Water Storage
5.1.6
Safety
24
21

Installation
7&8
1.1.11
25
21

Installation
14
1.1.23
Safety Interlocks
26
24
General
1.1.4
Scaffolding
27
29
Design Aspects
1.1.5
28
29
2.3.1.5
Safety
29
29
Tunnel
18
4.5.8
Safety Regulations
30
29
Tunnel
19
4.5.9
Fire Prevention
31
29
Tunnel
21
4.6.4
32
29
Concrete Structures
7.1.10
Safety Railing
EG
16
IN
TE
4
7,8, 9 &
10
QCS 2014

Page 4

1.6.1
Accident Prevention and Control
1.6.1.1 Key points

The construction industry consistently accounts for a disproportionately high number of
fatalities and major accidents.
Everyone on site has their part to play in accident prevention.
Accident prevention has to be actively managed; a good safety record will not 'just happen'.
Reported details of accidents show that in the vast majority of cases the accident could
easily have been prevented by taking simple precautions.
You may have no influence over these decisions but find that you need to challenge the
health and safety implications that arise as a consequence of them.
The true 'cost of an accident' encompasses many considerations and goes way beyond the
financial implications.
Statistics show that new starters on site, and those at both ends of the age spectrum, are the
most prone to accidents.
IO
AL
AT
1.6.1.2 Definitions
There are many interpretations of the words 'Accident/Hazard/Risk', but it is generally agreed
that the following definitions apply:
Accident is an unplanned, unscheduled, unwanted event or 'occurrence', or any undesired

circumstance which may result in injury to persons and damage to property. The injured
person may not be an employee and property may not belong to a Contractor.
Hazard is the potential to cause harm, including ill health and injury; damage to property,
plant machinery or environment; production losses or liabilities.
Risk is the likelihood that a specified undesired event will occur due to the realisation of a
hazard by or during work activities or by products created by work activities.
An alternative word that is sometimes used for an accident is 'incident'. The main difference
in the use of this word is that an incident is something that happened which may or may not
have resulted in an injury or
damage.
This diagram is a modified version

of the Bird's triangle. Its aim is to
simply
demonstrate
the
approximate
relationships
between the different 'levels' of
accident that occur. The triangle
shows that for each fatality there
will be several major injuries, a
higher number of 'over-3-day'
accidents and so on. In theory, if
the number of minor accidents can
be reduced, the base of the
triangle will be shortened thereby
having a beneficial effect at all
levels with possibly no fatalities.
EG
IN
TE
QCS 2014

The problem with this theory, and most of the other accident reduction models, is that
frequently an incident can occur which results in no injury or even particular loss. However,
the same incident under a slightly different set of circumstances could be a fatal accident.
This makes accident prevention more difficult, particularly if the incidents go unreported.
1.6.1.3 The cost of accidents
(b)
loss of earnings
(c)
extra expense
(d)
continuing disability
(e)
incapacity for the same job
(f)
incapacity for activities outside the job
(g)
consequent effect on dependants and friends.
worry and stress
(b)
recriminations, guilt
(c)
extra work, for example, reports, training and recruitment
(d)
loss of credibility.
AT
N
R
Cost to the Contractor:

working time lost by victim
(b)
time lost by other employees out of sympathy, curiosity, discussion
(c)
time lost by supervisors and others investigating the accident
(d)
possible damage to machines or materials
(e)
idle time (replan, repair and reinstate job)
(f)
rise in insurance costs
(g)
prosecution under Qatar Law
TE
(a)
(i)
IO
(a)
(h)
Cost to people directly responsible:
AL
pain and suffering
IN
(a)
EG
Cost to the victim:
Page 5
damage to reputation
possible failure to obtain work.
Cost to the working group:

(a)
shock
(b)
personal grief
(c)
low morale
(d)
effects on production.
Cost to the State of Qatar:

(a)
in social and economic terms, accidents are an unwanted expense
(b)
hundreds of thousands of person-day production lost each year
(c)
hundreds of hospital beds occupied
(d)
financial sums paid in death benefits
QCS 2014
(e)

Page 6
countless scores of lives changed for the worse.
Whilst there can be no complete end cost figure, the size of the problem can be seen to be
huge. Therefore anything that helps to reduce the number of accidents must benefit both the
nation and the individuals concerned.
The consequences of each accident are considered from different standpoints:

(a)
vocational - future job prospects
(b)
financial - loss of earnings
(c)
social - standard-of-life issue
(d)
behavioural - reliance on medication, inability to concentrate, inability to sleep, illtemper, and so on
(e)
psychological - mood swings, loss of memory, emotional instability and guilt.
AL
1.6.1.4 Causes of accidents
Examining accident details will help to establish common factors and trends, revealing any
weaknesses in a Contractors health and safety management system.
Accidents can be caused by the unsafe acts and attitudes of people at work, which result in
unsafe conditions being created. They are also caused by a lack of foresight or planning,
which may be a failure to set up a safe system of work, or failure to appreciate the results of
risk assessments, COSHH assessments or other similar activities.
AT
IO
and these accidents often result in
injury or damage
It is impossible to list all the different types of unsafe acts and unsafe conditions which are
found to exist in the Qatar construction industry. However, it is worth recording those which
have been the most frequent known causes of accidents on construction sites:
EG
IN
TE
Unsafe people
create
unsafe conditions
which cause
ACCIDENTS
(a)
lack of planning
(b)
lack of management control and supervision
(c)
lack of knowledge of good safety techniques
(d)
lack of safety awareness
(e)
unsafe methods of working at height, including the use of working platforms, scaffolds,
alloy towers, ladders and trestles
(f)
incorrect use of machinery, excavators, loaders, diggers, piling rigs, pneumatic drills
(g)
failure to segregate operating plant and pedestrians
(h)
failure to inspect and maintain all types of machinery, including ropes and hoists, lifting
gear
(i)
incorrect use of tools and equipment, hand tools, power tools
(j)
use of faulty equipment with improvised repairs and modification of ladders, hand and
power tools, trestles, ladders, fittings, fixings
QCS 2014

Page 7
unsafe manual handling, lifting, loading, moving, stacking, storing
(l)
working at unsafe speeds on machines or with power tools, lifts, hoists
(m)
overloading of working places, scaffolds, false work, hoists, ropes, gin wheels,
machines, vehicles, roofs
(n)
removal of guards from scaffolds, working platforms, machinery and excavations
(o)
failure to use protective safety
(p)
equipment, helmets, goggles, gloves, masks, clothing, footwear
(q)
unauthorised operation of tools, machinery, vehicles, equipment
(r)
ignoring or failure to use safety signals, signs and warning devices
(s)
ignoring established rules, safe procedures or work methods
(t)
throwing or accidentally dropping objects from heights
(u)
leaving nails or other objects protruding from timber
(v)
spillage of grease or oil
(w)
smoking, creating a naked flame or sparks in an area where flammable materials are
stored or are in use
(x)
operating mechanical plant and vehicles at unsafe speeds, disregarding clearances

necessary whilst manoeuvring
(y)
failing to adapt and adhere to established safe systems of work and procedures
(z)
illegal methods of access or egress to the workplace
(aa)
unauthorised interference with and misuse of plant and machinery
(bb)
carrying out work on moving parts with guards removed or safety devices inoperative
(cc)
riding on mechanical plant or vehicles in unauthorised and insecure places
(dd)
slippery or muddy conditions underfoot
(ee)
not obeying COSHH and risk assessments
(ff)
failure to warn others within the workplace
(gg)
failure to observe statutory or company or site requirements
(hh)
distracting people at work
AT
TE
IN
EG
(ii)
IO
AL
(k)
indulging in horseplay
(jj)
failure to report faulty or unsafe equipment, or dangerous occurrences and incidents
(kk)
creating unstable structures.
1.6.1.5 Duties of the Contractors

1
The scope of Contractors responsibilities under this Regulatory Document is both wide and
demanding. Some of these duties are detailed below.
1.6.1.6 The Health and Safety at Work

2
Contractors duties include:

(a)
It shall be the duty of every Contractor to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable,

the health, safety and welfare at work of all his employees.
(b)
the provision and maintenance of plant and systems of work that are, so far as is
reasonably practicable, safe and without risks to health;
QCS 2014

Page 8
arrangements for ensuring, so far as is reasonably practicable, safety and absence of

risks to health in connection with the use, handling, storage and transport of articles
and substances;
(d)
the provision of such information, instruction, training and supervision as is necessary

to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, the health and safety at work of his
employees;
(e)
so far as is reasonably practicable as regards any place of work under the Contractors
control, the maintenance of it in a condition that is safe and without risks to health and
the provision and maintenance of means of access to and egress from it that are safe
and without such risks;
(f)
the provision and maintenance of a working environment for his employees that is, so
far as is reasonably practicable, safe without risks to health, and adequate as regards
facilities and arrangements for their welfare at work.
(g)
It shall be the duty of every Contractor to conduct his undertaking in such a way as to
ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that persons not in his employment who
may be affected are not thereby exposed to risks to their health or safety.
AL
(c)
These Regulations require that all Contractors carry out a risk assessment of all work
operations and workplaces.
Furthermore, the Contractors must:
put into operation whatever preventative and protective measures are necessary, and
take effective steps to monitor these measures
(b)
provide information both to employees and those not employed by him as to the risks
to health and safety generated by his operations
(c)
provide adequate training:
TE
(a)
upon recruitment
(ii)
when new processes are introduced
(iii)
when new work equipment is installed
EG
IN
(i)
when new systems of work are introduced.
(iv)
3
AT
IO
Refresher training should be carried out during working hours.

1
Every Contractor must:

(a)
ensure that PPE is available, is compatible with and appropriate for the risk
(b)
carry out assessments for risks to health and safety
(c)
carry out periodic reviews of those assessments
(d)
ensure that any PPE is maintained and properly stored when not in use
(e)
give adequate training, information and instruction
(f)
take steps to ensure that any PPE supplied is properly used
(g)
provide any necessary PPE free of charge.

1
Contractors must ensure that:
QCS 2014

the work equipment provided is suitable for the purpose for which it is to be used
(b)
it is only used for the purpose it is intended
(c)
it is maintained in good working order
(d)
equipment logs are maintained, where necessary
(e)
the use of equipment is restricted to those so designated
(f)
repairs are only carried out by trained and competent personnel
(g)
any necessary maintenance or inspections recommended by the manufacturer are

carried out
(h)
persons who are required to operate the equipment have received adequate
information and training
(i)
safe systems of work are implemented and followed
(j)
maintenance can be done safely
(k)
controls are fitted to the machine.
AL
(a)
IO
All Contractors must ensure that:
all lifting operations are properly planned by a competent person, are appropriately
supervised and undertaken in a safe manner
(b)
each selected item of lifting equipment is suitable for the intended purpose, and is of
adequate strength and stability for each load
(c)
the lifting equipment is positioned and installed to minimise the risk of:
the equipment or load striking personnel
(ii)
the load drifting, falling or being unintentionally released
TE
(i)
an examination schedule is drawn up by a competent person and that all lifting

equipment is thoroughly examined:
IN
(d)
AT
(a)
(i)
every six months for lifting accessories (abseil ropes/harnesses, chains, slings,
and so on) and equipment used to lift people; or
(ii)
before being used for the first time, following installation or assembly at a new
location
EG
Page 9
(e)
2
(iii)
every 12 months for other lifting equipment
(iv)
after any activity or event liable to jeopardise its integrity
suitable equipment is installed to prevent anyone falling down a hoistway or shaft.
If the equipment is to be used for lifting people, the Contractors must ensure that:
(a)
people cannot be crushed, trapped, struck or fall from the carrier
(b)
the equipment has devices to prevent a carrier from falling
(c)
if a person becomes trapped in a carrier, they can be freed.

3
Every Contractor must:

(a)
ensure that employees avoid risks to health and safety when manual handling
(b)
make an assessment of all lifting operations
QCS 2014

Page 10
(c)
take steps to eliminate injuries
(d)
give information with regard to weights and centres of gravity of items to be handled.
1.6.1.12 Workplace Disability Awareness

1
Where people with a disability are employed on site, even, for example, administrative staff
in site offices or staff in catering facilities, this is a part of the accident prevention process
Contractors may have to consider the appropriate safety management steps to be taken to
ensure the safety of employees who have a disability, based upon the findings of a risk
assessment.
Examples of such steps might be:

the provision of a disabled toilet
(b)
Providing assistance for employees with hearing difficulties who may not be aware of
alarms
(c)
ensuring the effectiveness of site induction for those who have hearing problems or
learning difficulties
(d)
considering the needs of people with physical disabilities with regard to access to site
offices and other areas
(e)
the provision of appropriate evacuation equipment for evacuating people with physical
disabilities from site offices and other areas
(f)
emergency escape routes that can be used by people with disabilities and, where
appropriate, those assisting them.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
TE
Responsibilities of employees as follows.
It shall be the duty of every employee while at work:
IN
to take reasonable care for the health and safety of himself and of other persons who
may be affected by his acts or omissions at work: and
(b)
as regards any duty or requirement imposed on his Contractors or any other person
by or under any of the relevant statutory provisions, to co-operate with him so far as is
necessary to enable that duty or requirement to be performed or complied with.
(c)
EG
(a)
No person shall intentionally or recklessly interfere with or misuse anything provided

in the interests of health, safety or welfare in pursuance of any of the relevant statutory
provisions.

1
All employees must make full and safe use of systems of work implemented by their
Contractors.

1
Employees must report any loss of, or any defect in, personal protective equipment.

1
Employees must:
(a)
make full and proper use of any control measure put in place to prevent harmful
exposure to a substance hazard to health
QCS 2014
(b)

Page 11
report the fact to the Contractors if the control measure is thought to be defective.

1
Employees must:
(a)
report to the Contractors (or supervisor) any work activity or defect which is thought
could endanger the safety of anyone who is working at height
(b)
use any work equipment (including safety devices) provided for safe working at height
in accordance with any training and instructions provided.
1.6.1.18 Planning for health and safety

Despite the effort made by the majority to fulfil their legal, moral and social obligations,
difficulties are often encountered in human behaviour which require time and tolerance
before acceptable safety standards are achieved. It is essential that careful consideration is
given to pre-planning, communication, training, supervision and the dissemination of
information, if safe systems and places of work are to be developed and maintained.
All of the following measures can make a significant contribution towards the prevention of
accidents through the implementation of safe systems of work and procedures:
IO
AL
Allowing enough money and time to do the work safely.
(b)
Adequate protection and guarding of working places, platforms, machinery, tools,

plant and equipment.
(c)
Implementation of an adequate system for the maintenance and repair of plant,

equipment and tools.
(d)
Provision of appropriate training, instruction and information at all levels, including

safety training.
(e)
Provision of adequate supervision and control.
(f)
Displaying the appropriate notices and warning signs.
(g)
Planning, siting and/or stacking materials and equipment to allow safe access or
egress of site plant, vehicles and equipment.
(h)
Pre-planning and organisation of site layout which will provide maximum efficiency,
safety and progression of the work sequences and operations.
TE
IN
EG
(i)
AT
(a)
The provision of adequate resources and equipment to protect and maintain the health
and welfare of all personnel.
(j)
Producing, declaring, maintaining and supporting a safety policy, updating as

appropriate to accommodate advancement and development.
(k)
Bringing about and maintaining an awareness of, and compliance with, all safety
legislation and information relating to systems and procedures of work.
1.6.1.19 Factors likely to affect safety at work

1
Safety at work will be affected by:

(a)
human and personal factors
(b)
job factors
(c)
environmental factors.
QCS 2014

Page 12
1.6.1.20 Human and personal factors

1
Attitudes of people at work often play an important part in the prevention of accidents, and
conversely, a wrong attitude can cause accidents to happen.
Attitudes differ depending on the person, for example their:

age
(b)
general health
(c)
physique and ability
(d)
disabilities, if any
(e)
senses of smell, sight, hearing, touch and, sometimes, taste
(f)
natural dexterity, agility
(g)
education and qualifications
(h)
training and skills
(i)
home and social life
(j)
status at home and work
(k)
position in peer group.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
SAFE ATTITUDES
= SAFE ACTIONS
TE
= SAFE CONDITIONS
IN
1.6.1.21 Job factors
Every work activity has a degree of inherent hazard. Building and construction sites can be
particularly hazardous and demand the co-ordination of a large number of trades, skills and
activities at any one time.
Particular attention should be given to:

(a)
EG
the adequacy of time and resources to plan the job
(b)
adequacy, time and resources to do the job
(c)
provision of tools and equipment which are safe to use and properly maintained
(d)
implementation of safe systems of work
(e)
personnel who are unfamiliar with established safe systems of work and practices
(f)
personnel who are new to a specific worksite or unfamiliar with a new working
environment
(g)
those lacking induction training and/or experience
(h)
the provision of adequate training, information and supervision
(i)
balanced workload
(j)
fatigue and boredom
(k)
the nature of the activity.
QCS 2014

Page 13
1.6.1.22 Environmental factors

1
The majority of people do not work in isolation. The attitudes of others in a working group, for
example, managers, supervisors, safety advisors, may help to prevent accidents.
The following details should also be considered:

the accident record of the firm, site and working group
(b)
the interrelationship of people within the group
(c)
information and communication processing methods
(d)
weather conditions - hot, cold, wet, windy
(e)
working at heights, in confined spaces or underground
(f)
working conditions - noise, dust, light, ventilation
(g)
health and welfare facilities.
AL
(a)
IO
Types of hazard include:

obvious dangers
(b)
potentially dangerous situations, often resulting from late changes to planned

activities, forced by unforeseen circumstances
(c)
operational hazards, including high risk activities and operations creating health
hazards or risk of injury.
AT
(a)
1.6.1.23 Hazards
Examples of dangerous conditions which may exist at the workplace include:

failure to comply with safe systems of work
(b)
the presence of highly flammable material and other fire hazards
(c)
dangerous materials - acidic, radioactive, corrosive and gaseous
(d)
insecurely stacked, slung, lifted and transported loads
(e)
unsafe machinery, equipment and tools
(f)
(g)
EG
IN
(a)
TE
1.6.1.24 Obvious dangers
unsafe working area due to weather conditions

unsafe electrical, dust and gaseous conditions.
1.6.1.25 Potentially dangerous situations

1
Examples of circumstances which might result in an accident:

(a)
personnel entering a new workplace for the first time
(b)
personnel uninformed/unaware of emergency procedures
(c)
working with machinery or tools with guards or fences removed
(d)
unauthorised repair to plant and equipment
(e)
adopting incorrect methods of lifting and handling loads
(f)
use of incorrect type of plant, tools or equipment for the work involved
(g)
unauthorised removal of guard-rails, or failure to replace them following removal for

access of plant or materials
QCS 2014

Page 14
inadequate clearance around moving plant or equipment (minimum 500 mm)
(i)
transport of insecure or unstable loads
(j)
dropping tools and materials from a height
(k)
unauthorised improvisation
(l)
failure to wear PPE
(m)
spillage of oil, grease, paint, flammable and corrosive liquids
(n)
working in unstable excavations, without adequate supervision and control
(o)
untidy working places
(p)
congested walkways and areas -creating a tripping hazard
(q)
working at heights or over water without edge and/or personal protection
(r)
inadequate, incorrect or badly placed lighting
(s)
overhead carriage of materials
(t)
uncontrolled release of dangerous gases, steam, compressed air
(u)
unsafe electrical equipment
(v)
buried services and overhead cables.
IO
AT
1.6.1.26 Operational risks
AL
(h)
Examples of work that require competence, careful monitoring and/or close supervision are
listed below.
High risk activities:
demolition
(b)
anything involving tower cranes
(c)
working at heights
(d)
work involving explosives
(e)
excavations
(f)
piling
(g)
EG
IN
(a)
TE
work in confined spaces
(h)
operating cranes, lifting equipment and other moving plant
(i)
steel erection or sheet material cladding
(j)
steeple jacking and other rope access activities
(k)
use of chemicals or other substances for which the manufacturer has advised strict
control and usage
(l)
work associated with live traffic.
Operations creating health hazards or risk of injury:

(a)
work with lasers
(b)
jobs with continual high exposure to noise or vibration
(c)
jobs with continuous elements of the same type of manual handling such as block
laying, kerb laying
(d)
work with asbestos and other toxic dusts
(e)
work with hazardous substances
QCS 2014

(f)
work involving radiography
(g)
work involving exposure to extremes of hot or cold.
Page 15
Activities which are tedious, repetitive, carried out in extreme climatic conditions, demand
long periods of concentration or are physically tiring may require:
(a)
careful selection of personnel
(b)
consideration of medical history of personnel involved
(c)
pre-planning and sequence of operation
(d)
frequent shift changing
(e)
use of mechanical handling aids.
1.6.1.27 The implications of inexperience
AL
Young persons
In accordance with Labor Law 14 Article (86), a child who has not attained the age of sixteen
may not be employed in a workplace of whatsoever nature and shall not be permitted to
enter into any place of work such as a construction site.
A 'young person', is any person who is between the age of sixteen but has not reached the
age of eighteen.
Contractors are to ensure that ALL young persons they employ are protected at work from
any risk to their health or safety.
Before employing a young person, the Contractor must assess the risks to the young
person's health and safety arising from the work they are required to do, in accordance with
these Regulations. This assessment must take account of a number of factors, such as:
TE
the inexperience and immaturity of young persons, and their lack of awareness of
risks
(b)
the type of any work equipment involved and the way it is used
(c)
the potential for exposure to physical, biological and chemical agents
(d)
any health and safety training that is required for young persons.
EG
IN
(a)
AT
IO
Having carried out this assessment, Contractors must then determine whether the level of
risk has been reduced to as low as is reasonably practicable. There is particular importance
placed on avoiding work that:
(a)
is beyond the young person's physical or psychological capacity
(b)
involves harmful exposure to agents which are toxic or carcinogenic, cause heritable
genetic damage or harm to the unborn child or which in any way chronically affect
human health
(c)
involves harmful exposure to radiation
(d)
involves the risk of accident, which it may be reasonably assumed cannot be

recognised by young people owing to their insufficient attention to safety or lack of
experience or training
(e)
involves exposure to physical agents such as extreme cold or heat, noise and
vibration.
Consideration to the level of acceptable risk may be given for young persons between the
ages of sixteen and eighteen, where the work is necessary for their training, and where they
are properly supervised
QCS 2014

Page 16
New starters
7
New starters on a site and inexperienced persons, of whatever age, have similar problems to
those of young workers.
They are subjected to a new environment, rules, methods and procedures; under different
supervision; working with new colleagues using a variety of tools, equipment and manual
effort to produce the work required. The start of their health and safety training is usually an
induction into the company that should cover the following:
(b)
company safety policy
(c)
health, welfare facilities, pattern of work, movement of materials, direction of

movement, and so on
(d)
warning signals and signs
(e)
special processes, materials, precautions and restrictions
(f)
fire procedures, drills, alarms, escape routes
(g)
reporting hazards
(h)
good housekeeping
(i)
first aid procedures and the reporting of accidents
(j)
safety equipment and clothing
(k)
machinery hazards
(l)
introduction to supervisor, trainer, colleagues
N
IO
IN
EG
It should be noted that the number of incidents to older workers is typically higher than
average. There are various reasons which have been suggested, such as:
over familiarity with the job
(b)
general slowing of reactions
(a)
(c)
11
AT
N
The need for refresher and continuance training should be reviewed at intervals and carried
out as necessary.
Older workers
10
AL
responsibility of management and supervision
TE
(a)
general loss of strength and flexibility
(d)
pre-existing damage to body and systems
(e)
age-related degeneration of hearing and eyesight
What is also noteworthy is that when an older person is injured, often the recovery time is
longer, because the injury is more severe than it would be for a younger person. The classic
example is a fall from height. A young person may well have the speed and strength to avoid
the fall, and if they do fall they often seem to land better and do less damage. With the older
person, the fall seems more inevitable, the landing harder and the recovery time longer.
1.6.1.28 Site security

12
Contractors must take all reasonable and practical steps to ensure that sites are secure, for
example by:
(a)
providing a perimeter fence not less than 2 metres high, either close-boarded or
meshed (mesh not exceeding 30 mm)
QCS 2014
(b)
ensuring that the site access is gated and locked when the site is unoccupied
(c)
maintaining reasonable surveillance when the site is open
(d)
ensuring materials are not stacked dangerously near fences
(e)
displaying suitable warning notices
(f)
guarding or protect obvious hazards
(g)
regularly inspecting perimeter fencing, especially for holes near the bottom or other
damage through which children might gain access.
Where complete fencing of the site is impractical:

guard or cover all excavations and holes where there is a danger of any person or any
materials falling in. And, if left open or unattended, fence at every accessible part with
a barrier, preferably of chain link fencing, not less than 2 metres in height
(b)
effectively immobilise vehicles and plant
(c)
stack materials to prevent any possible displacement and use racking where possible.
This particularly applies to manhole rings, large diameter concrete pipes and cable
drums, all of which could roll and crush a child
(d)
lock off electricity supplies or switch off at isolators in locked enclosures or the building
(e)
isolate gas supplies, keep cylinders in a locked enclosure
(f)
keep all tools and harmful chemicals in a locked enclosure, when the site is
unoccupied
(g)
for ladders to elevated positions; block off the first 2 metres and chain all loose ladders
or lock them in enclosures.
IN
Supervision and control
AT
IO
AL
(a)
1.6.1.29 Accident prevention
The accident trend can be strongly influenced by providing adequate training and
supervision to control the worker, the machine or the equipment and the working
environment.
EG
Page 17
TE
13

Accident prevention is the control of these factors

The worker
2
It is essential to ensure that the worker:

(a)
is adequately trained and informed of the activities they are expected to do
(b)
is aware of all the hazards in any activity they are expected to do
(c)
is competent to do the work or is under adequate suitably qualified supervision
QCS 2014

Page 18
(d)
adopts a safe system of work
(e)
uses the protection provided
(f)
is aware of accident and emergency procedures
(g)
is aware of the company's health and safety policy in addition to rules applicable to
the work.
The working environment

3
This applies to all areas of the site including workshop, stores, offices, depot and welfare
facilities.
Regular checks are essential to ensure:

floors are clean and level, not slippery, and free from debris
(b)
stairs, gangways and working platforms are adequately guarded and maintained
(c)
openings, edges and holes are adequately protected
(d)
projecting objects or obstacles are protected and guarded
(e)
adequate lighting is provided at workplaces
(f)
materials and equipment are stacked or stored correctly
(g)
approved warning signs are displayed where required or where hazards exist
(h)
there is adequate ventilation, protection and control when working in confined spaces
(i)
there are established systems of waste disposal
(j)
passages and escape routes are clearly defined, and marked KEEP CLEAR
(k)
there is provision and maintenance of adequate welfare facilities
(l)
best possible standards in working conditions are provided
(m)
safe systems of work are maintained
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
there is adequate fire-fighting equipment and extinguishers, which are properly sited
an adequate level of security is established and maintained to prevent unauthorised visitors.
EG
Equipment and machines
Ensure the following procedures and practices are observed:

(a)
regular inspections by trained, competent persons
(b)
no defective equipment is used
(c)
defects are properly rectified
(d)
adequate servicing and maintenance
(e)
records and reports maintained
(f)
all moving parts adequately guarded or protected
(g)
manufacturers' literature and instructions available for operatives
(h)
proper handling, lifting and slinging of equipment
(i)
equipment and machines adequately secured when in use and parked
(j)
hand tools inspected and maintained.
QCS 2014

Page 19
Near-miss reporting
6
The importance of learning from experience cannot be overstated. It is an essential element

of accident prevention. A near-miss is an incident which had the potential to result in
personal injury and/or damage to the structure under construction, plant and equipment or
the environment. Contractors will decide on their criteria for categorising an incident as a
near miss.
The details of all near misses must be accurately and honestly reported to enable the
circumstances to be investigated and measures put in place to prevent a recurrence. In
many cases, the only person able to give a full and accurate account of what happened will
be the person who 'got it wrong'.
To achieve an effective reporting system, the workforce must:

trust that management will treat the incident fairly and objectively
(b)
be sufficiently trained in risk awareness to appreciate that a near miss has occurred.
Some near misses may not be so obvious as the side of an excavation collapsing
seconds after it was evacuated be encouraged to report near misses with the
assurance that individuals involved will not be disadvantaged by their honesty
(c)
have confidence that the issues raised will be addressed, or else 'why bother?'
(d)
be provided with the means of promptly recording the details of exactly what
happened and offering their opinion as to why it occurred.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
Contractors may find it is beneficial to provide easily accessible near-miss reporting forms
which can be completed in privacy and anonymously if that is the individual's choice.
However, anonymous reporting does not provide the opportunity for follow-up discussions to
establish more details, and it may encourage malicious reports to be submitted.
10
There could be a case for rewarding the honesty of individuals who made a mistake but had
the courage to compile a near-miss report, which ultimately resulted in a safer system of
work being developed. Theirs was the first step in the chain of improvement. Evidence
shows that near-miss reporting linked to a reward scheme has the best chance of
succeeding.
11
An example of a near-miss reporting form is given in the appendix to this module. This
example;
(a)
EG
IN
TE
requires that the person involved outlines the circumstances of the event, then passes
the form to their supervisor or manager as appropriate
(b)
requires the supervisor or manager to assess the details of the event and declare
what remedial actions have been, or will be, taken
(c)
incorporates a tear-off slip providing feedback on the investigation, which is returned

to the person raising the issue as confirmation that the circumstances have been
investigated.
QCS 2014

Page 20

1.6.1 Appendix
Example of a minor event/near-miss report
ANY CONTRACTOR: MINOR EVENT/NEAR-MISS REPORT (page 1)
Please use this form to report:
Personnel safety - near misses (NM)

Plant safety - minor events or near misses (ME/NM)
Environment - minor events or near misses (ME/NM)
A report can be raised by ANY PERSON

PERSON INVOLVED
DATE/TIME OF
OCCURRENCENE
Name:
LOCATION OF OCCURRENCE
AL
Date:
Section:
DESCRIPTION OF OCCURRENCE
TYPE OF OCCURRENCE
People
Plant
Environment
EG
IN
TE
AT
Please identify the plant/procedures/people involved and

any relevant identified factors which can be used to
improve safety
IO
Time:
Thank you for completing this form. Please hand it to your supervisor immediately for completion of
the second part.
This portion to be detached and returned to sender after the investigation.
.
Please print your name and telephone number so that we can get back to you for more information if
necessary and to let you know the outcome of our investigation.
Name:
Section:
Please turn over to page 2 to complete the form
Tel:
QCS 2014

Page 21
ANY CONTRACTOR: MINOR EVENT/NEAR-MISS REPORT (page 2)

Potential for
loss/severity
STATE:
minor/serious/ major
ASSESSMENT OF THE OCCURRENCE BY

SUPERVISOR OR PERSON INVOLVED
e.g. section head, manager
NB: if major or frequent are appropriate,
consider producing an event report instead
Possibility for
recurrence
STATE:
seldom/occasional/
frequent
Direct cause:
IO
AL
Root cause:
EG
TE
IN
Suggested corrective actions:
AT
Corrective actions already undertaken: please give details of any immediate actions taken to prevent
recurrence or make safe
Signature:
Date:
Supervisor's name:
Thank you for completing this form. Please send it to:
Feedback on investigation:
Name:
Reference:
Tel:
Date:
QCS 2014

Page 22

1.6.2
Accident Reporting and Investigation (RIDDOR)
1.6.2.1 Key points

1
It is important that all workplace accidents, no matter how minor, are reported to the injured
person's Contractors, site manager or supervisor as appropriate.
Certain types of accident, cases of occupational diseases (when connected with specific
work activities) and some dangerous occurrences, must be reported to the Qatar
Each Contractor should have a procedure for investigating workplace accidents.
The investigation of accidents will enable trends to be established and preventative

measures put in place.
The level of investigation should be proportionate to the seriousness of the accident.
AL
It may be said that there is no such thing as an 'accident'. An accident is always someone's
fault and it is by no means always the fault of the injured person.
You have to report deaths, serious injuries and dangerous occurrences immediately, and
less serious injuries within 10 days. Certain occupational ill-health issues and diseases also
have to be reported.
Establishing the responsibility for investigation and enforcement will be carried out
automatically after the accident report has been received.
AT
IO
1.6.2.3 Accident records
Records can be stored in any medium, including electronic, providing that printable copies
are readily available if required.
Records must include details of:
date, time and place of accident
(b)
name and job of injured or ill person
(c)
details of injury/illness and what first aid was given
(d)
what happened to the person immediately afterwards, e.g. went home, to hospital,
back to work
EG
(a)
(e)
3
IN
TE
name and signature of the first aider or person dealing with the incident.
Details of an accident should be recorded by the injured person, but can be completed by
any employee.
1.6.2.4 The Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences

1
RIDDOR requires the following to be reported directly to the appropriate Qatar Administrative
Authority:
(a)
fatalities and major injuries
(b)
injuries resulting in incapacity for more than three days when linked to certain work
activities
(c)
specified diseases
(d)
dangerous occurrences.
QCS 2014

Page 23
People covered by these Regulations include:

(a)
employees including trainees
(b)
self-employed
(c)
other people who have been injured.
1.6.2.5 Reporting deaths, major injuries and dangerous occurrences

These Regulations place a duty on the Contractor to make reports to the Administrative
Authority. In the case of employees, the responsible person will be the Contractors. In the
case of the self-employed or a member of the public, the responsible person will be the
person in control of the site where the event occurred.
All subcontractors must notify both the Administrative Authority and the Contractor of any
reportable accidents.
Where an accident, occupational disease or dangerous occurrence takes place that requires
reporting under RIDDOR
Contractors can send reports by post to the competent authority:
The following must be reported immediately to the Administrative Authority by the quickest
practical method (usually by telephone) and a report submitted on the approved form within
10 days:
AT
IO
AL
death of any person as a result of an accident at work
(b)
an accident to any person at work resulting in major injuries or serious conditions

specified in these Regulations (see list below)
(c)
any one of the dangerous occurrences listed in these Regulations (see summary
opposite).
IN
TE
(a)
Note: A fatality cannot be registered without a properly completed death certificate.
(b)
Any fracture of any bone, other than to the fingers, thumbs or toes.
(a)
EG
1.6.2.6 Major injuries and serious conditions
Any amputation.
(c)
Dislocation of the shoulder, hip, knee or spine
(d)
Loss of sight (whether temporary or permanent) or any other listed eye injury.
(e)
Electric shock or burn causing unconsciousness, or requiring resuscitation, or

requiring admittance to hospital for more than 24 hours.
(f)
Any injury leading to hypothermia, heat induced illness or to unconsciousness

requiring resuscitation or admittance to hospital for more than 24 hours.
(g)
Unconsciousness due to asphyxia or by exposure to a harmful substance or biological

agent.
(h)
Acute illness or unconsciousness caused by any poisoning by any route.
(i)
Acute illness caused by exposure to infected material or a biological agent.
QCS 2014

Page 24
1.6.2.7 Reportable dangerous occurrences

Collapse, overturning or failure of any load-bearing part of any lift, hoist, crane,
derrick, mobile powered access platform, access cradle, window cleaning cradle,
excavator, piling rig or forklift truck.
(b)
Collapse or partial collapse of any scaffold over 5 metres in height or fall of any cradle.
(c)
Collapse of 5 tonnes or more of any building or structure, or any false work, or any
wall or floor in any workplace.
(d)
Explosion, bursting or collapse of any closed vessel or boiler.
(e)
Contact with, or arcing from, any overhead electric cable caused by any plant or
equipment.
(f)
Electrical short-circuit with fire or explosion, for example, from hitting an electrical
service.
(g)
Explosion or fire caused by any material resulting in stoppage of work or plant for
more than 24 hours.
(h)
Uncontrolled release of 100 kg or more of a flammable liquid, 10 kg or more of a

flammable liquid above its normal boiling point or 10 g of a flammable gas inside a
building, and 500 kg or more of such substances outside a building.
(i)
Uncontrolled release of any biological agents.
(j)
Accidental ignition of any explosive.
(k)
Failure of any load-bearing part of a freight container.
(l)
Bursting, explosion or collapse, or fire involving a pipeline.
(m)
Specific incidents involving road tankers.
(n)
Specific incidents involving dangerous substances being conveyed by road.
(o)
Escape of any substance in a quantity sufficient to cause death, injury or damage to

health, for example, asbestos.
(p)
Malfunction of any breathing apparatus whilst in use or when being tested before use.
(q)
Contact with or arcing of any overhead power line.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
1.6.2.8 Other reportable injuries and deaths

The following must be reported to the Administrative Authority within 10 days on an
approved form (F100). A copy of the form is reproduced at Appendix 3.
(a)
Any accident at work where, because of an injury, a person is incapacitated for work
of their usual kind for more than three consecutive days, not counting the day of the
accident, but counting rest days, weekends, and so on.
(b)
The death of an employee, if it occurs within one year of the date of the reportable
injury, even though the injury has been previously reported.
(c)
Any injury caused by a work activity to someone who is not at work that results in
them being taken to hospital by whatever means, e.g. a taxi, ambulance or private car,
for treatment of that injury. This would include all members of the public.
QCS 2014

Page 25
1.6.2.9 Keeping records

1
Records of all reportable deaths, injuries and dangerous occurrences must be kept for a
period of three years. No precise method is prescribed, but a photocopy of the approved
form is acceptable, as are electronic databanks and computer storage. If an 'in-house'
accident form is designed to record the same details as the approved form, it is acceptable.
The minimum particulars that must be kept are:

(a)
the date and time of the accident or dangerous occurrence
(b)
the injured person's details:

full name and occupation
(ii)
nature of the injury
in the event of an accident to a non-employee:

(iii)
full name and status (for example passenger, customer, visitor or bystander)
(iv)
nature of the injury
AL
(c)
(i)
the place where the accident or dangerous occurrence happened
(e)
a brief description of the circumstances in which the accident or dangerous

occurrence happened
(f)
the date on which the event was reported to the Administrative Authority
(g)
the method by which the event was reported.
AT
IO
(d)
1.6.2.10 Reporting diseases
A disease must be reported where it has been diagnosed in a person doing a specified type
of work. These Regulations list diseases against the type of work which makes them
'reportable'.
The report must be made when the disease has been diagnosed by a registered medical
practitioner, who will notify the Contractors of it in writing.
Diseases have to be reported to the appropriate Administrative Authority on the approved

form. (Form F100A) A copy of the form is reproduced at Appendix 4. Refer to the SAMAS
SHE PROCEDURE 8
Reports must be kept in the same manner as for accidents and the minimum particulars that
must be kept are:
EG
IN
TE
(a)
date of diagnosis of the disease
(b)
name of the person affected
(c)
occupation of the person affected
(d)
name or nature of the disease
(e)
the date on which the disease

AuthorityAdministrative Authority
(f)
the method by which the disease was reported.
was
reported
to
the
Administrative
QCS 2014

Page 26
Diseases and work activities listed in these Regulations are:
Disease
Work activity
Chemical and metal poisoning
Any work activity
Chrome ulceration, acne, skin

cancer, folliculitis
Work with chrome compounds, minerals, oil, tar, pitch,

radiation
Occupational asthma
Work with epoxy resin, soldering flux, silica, sand, wood dust
Mesothelioma, lung cancer,

asbestosis
Leptospirosis
Work with asbestos
Hepatitis
Exposure to blood or human waste products
Nasal or sinus cancer
Working in a dusty building
Hand-arm vibration syndrome
Hand-held rotary or percussive tools, chainsaws and handheld

circular saws
Pneumoconiosis
Work with silica, sand, grinding wheels, boiler descaling
Occupational dermatitis
Work with epoxy resin, oil, cement, solvents, hardwoods,

plaster, concrete, bleach, acids, alkalis, wood preservatives
and anything else which causes dermatitis
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Where there are rats, field mice, voles or other small mammals
EG
1.6.2.11 Reportable or not reportable incidents under these regulations?
Note: For simplicity in the following passage of text, the word 'incident' is used to cover any reportable
event such as injury, disease or dangerous occurrence.
The following examples may provide some clarification:
1. A directly employed person breaks their arm at work. This must be reported by the Contractors, in
their capacity as 'responsible person', as a major injury.
2. A self-employed subcontractor breaks their leg at work. The injury must be reported as a major
injury by the Contractor acting in their capacity as 'the responsible person' who was in control of
the premises.
3. An employee of a subcontractor on a project is informed by his doctor that he is suffering from
work-related vibration white finger and subsequently informs his Contractors. The Contractors, in
their capacity as 'responsible person', must report the incident as a reportable disease.
4. An employee inadvertently hits an underground electric cable whilst operating a road-breaker.
There is minor damage to the external sheath, but the conductor is not exposed. This is not
reportable as there was no electrical short circuit with fire and explosion. The incident, however,
warrants significant internal investigation.
5. A member of the public is knocked down by a lorry entering the site as it crosses the pavement.
They are taken to hospital by ambulance. This would be reportable as it involves a member of the
QCS 2014

Page 27
public being taken to hospital.

6. A subcontractor employee burns his hand and is taken to the local hospital. He is back on site
later that afternoon and continues to work as normal for the rest of the week. This would not be
reportable. However, had the employee been admitted to hospital for 24 hours or more, the
incident would be reportable.
7. An employed delivery driver twists his ankle on a Monday when he steps down from his cab. He
receives first aid, insists he is fit to drive and later leaves the site. He subsequently takes the rest
of the week off because of pain and swelling in his ankle. The incident should have been recorded
in the site accident book, but it would seem unreasonable for the site to be aware of the
consequence. The delivery driver's Contractors would have a responsibility to report this as an
'over-3-day' accident.
AL
8. An employee sustains a head injury as a result of falling over debris left on site. The accident
occurred on a Thursday and because of the injury, the person is unable to return to work until the
following Tuesday. Although only two actual working days have been lost, the accident must be
reported as an 'over-3-day' accident because the Saturday and Sunday also count, as the injured
person would have been unfit for work had these been working days.
From Contractors accident records and other statistics, it is possible to calculate the
incidence and frequency rates for accidents at a particular place of work and for the types of
injury, severity or duration.
AT
IO
1.6.2.12 Calculating the incidence and frequency rates of accidents
The incidence rate is based on the number of accidents, taken over a fixed period, per
100,000 employees.
TE
Accident incidence rate (AIR)
IN
Incidence rate =
For example, if during a 12-month period there were six reportable accidents and during that
year the company employed an average of 120 employees, the calculation would be:
EG
Number of reported injuries in a year x 100,000

Average number of employees in a year
6 x 100,000 = 5,000
120
The following formula is also used to calculate the incidence rate, particularly when the
number of employees is small.
Number of reported injuries in a year x 1,000
Average number of employees in a year
Accident frequency rate (AFR)

5
The accident frequency rate allows a calculation to be made that balances the number of
reportable accidents that occur against the number of hours worked.
Frequency rate =
Number of injuries in a period x 100,000
Number of hours worked in that period
QCS 2014

Page 28
For example, if a company had five reportable injuries in a period during which its 260
workers worked a total of 125,000 hours, the accident frequency rate would be:
5 x 100,000 = 4
125,000
Therefore, when comparing the figures of different companies, care must be taken to ensure
that the same multiplier is used.
1.6.2.13 Analysis and presentation of data

1
To visualise trends more clearly, accident statistics are often displayed as bar charts,
histograms and graphs.
The proper and effective reporting of accidents, along with their thorough investigation, can
have major benefits for a Contractor. A Contractor might consider that they could:
reduce costs by that the Contractor has a pro-active implementing change and
preventing accidents
(b)
identify training needs which will also improve performance
(c)
show Qatar Administrative Authority, Workplace Inspectors their approach to safety
(d)
satisfy stakeholders that their workforce is properly trained and totally safety
orientated
(e)
benefit from a possible reduction of insurance premiums following years of hard work
to reduce accidents.
An effective investigation will:
be factual and without bias
(b)
clearly show the sequence of events leading to the accident or incident
(c)
identify the immediate cause
(d)
identify the underlying cause, e.g. unsafe acts or conditions
(e)
show the root cause, e.g. lack of supervision, training or monitoring.
EG
IN
(a)
TE
1.6.2.14 Accident investigation
AT
IO
AL
(a)
By discovering all causes, especially root causes, you will be able to learn from accidents
and incidents and then aim to prevent re-occurrences.
1.6.2.15 Accident procedure

1
The procedure below is given as general guidance and outlines the steps that should be
taken immediately after an accident:
(a)
attend to the injured person, call for assistance if necessary and arrange for first aid,
doctor, ambulance, hospital
(b)
isolate machine, tools or equipment
(c)
do not disturb or move anything unless to release an injured person
(d)
inform the manager, safety adviser, safety representative and other appropriate
persons (such as the Workplace Inspectors, Fire Officers or Insurers)
(e)
ensure any remaining hazard is guarded against
(f)
take notice of anything significant and make general observations at the scene of the
accident.
QCS 2014

Page 29
1.6.2.16 Conducting an investigation

It is not usually practical to investigate every minor accident, but those involving major or
serious injuries to persons and major damage to plant or equipment should be thoroughly
investigated so that immediate action can be taken to prevent a recurrence. The following
headings may be useful as a guide to the steps to be taken:
investigate promptly
(b)
record evidence
(c)
identify types of evidence, e.g. factual, corroborative
(d)
interview the injured person, if possible
(e)
question the person in charge and other supervisors
(f)
obtain details of the injured person's job and what they usually or normally do
(g)
interview witnesses
(h)
inspect plant for signs of misuse or defects
(i)
establish the full sequence of events
(j)
ascertain the nature and extent of the injury or damage
(k)
complete the accident report and the accident book
(l)
notify the appropriate authorities.
1.6.2.17 Investigate promptly
IO
AL
(a)
AT
The sooner an investigation is started, the better - provided it is safe to do so.
Engineers and supervisors will be anxious to find ways and means of repairing the damage
to plant, machinery or buildings, but the first priority should be to establish the cause of the
accident. Safety specialists, managers and safety representatives will be concerning
themselves solely with the safety implications and preventing a recurrence.
It is important that the investigation is properly supervised and organised.
Where the Police, Fire or Workplace Inspectors wish to investigate, any other persons
responsible for, or involved in investigating, the accident must take extreme care not to
disturb possible evidence at the scene.
EG
IN
TE
1.6.2.18 Recording evidence

1
Statements from witnesses should contain such details as their age and occupation. The
time, date and place of interview should be indicated at the end of the statement.
Witnesses' statements should always be written in their own words, even if these include
slang or expletives.
The completed statement should be read to the witness and, ideally, signed by them and by
the person who took the statement.
1.6.2.19 Identifying the types of evidence

1
Evidence will usually include:

(a)
statement of witnesses and others given orally, or in writing. 'Others' may include
experts who, for example, might have been called in to examine a machine or the
state of a scaffold
QCS 2014

(b)
documentation of all kinds
(c)
material exhibits of all kinds.
Page 30
Factual evidence comprises the facts related by persons directly involved, and by witnesses
who are able to say what they felt, saw, heard, or give an expert opinion. This type of
evidence is primary, direct and positive and should be written in simple language, keeping to
the facts and avoiding inferences, opinions and beliefs. The facts should be recorded clearly,
accurately and in sequence.
The best witnesses are those persons directly involved who are able to:
listen carefully to the questions
(b)
answer directly, fairly, impartially and truthfully
(c)
state clearly when they do not know the answer
(d)
remain calm when they are being asked questions.
AL
(a)
Material evidence includes, for example, equipment, machines, scaffolds,ladders or hand

tools, where the use of or the state or condition of the item has a bearing on the accident.
Corroborative evidence tends to support the truthfulness and accuracy of the evidence
which has already been given. The confirming evidence may take the form of site records,
plant or maintenance records, warning notices, written procedures, reports made by safety
officers etc.
People in the vicinity of an accident should be asked to give an opinion. In this way a full
picture can be built up of the circumstances of the accident.
Experts, or specialists, who are familiar with the type of accident, or technical and other
factors surrounding the accident, may be called upon to express their expert opinions.
When there is a lack of real or factual evidence, other forms of evidence such as
circumstantial and corroborative evidence tend to become more valuable.
Photographs taken immediately after an accident record the state of the scene and often
highlight conditions which existed at the time. Machines, equipment, tools and obstructions,
and factors such as floor conditions, space and dimensions, may show up very well on
photographs.
10
If possible, it is best to engage professional photographers and to obtain the largest possible
prints. Time, date and place or subject photographed should be written on the back of the
pictures.
11
Too many photographs are far better than too few, and it is a good idea to make drawings of
the area where the incident happened.
12
Digital photography may not be accepted as primary evidence but may be suitable as
supportive evidence.
13
Procedures should be in place to ensure that photographs have not been, or cannot be,
computer-enhanced as this would destroy their value as evidence.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
1.6.2.20 Interviewing the injured person

1
Interviewing the injured person should be an early priority. Even the briefest description of
the accident should suffice initially.
The physical and mental state of the injured person will need to be considered, and tact and
QCS 2014

Page 31
patience required during the interview. The injured person should be fit to answer questions.
3
The injured person should be encouraged to talk about how the accident happened and it is
important they have confidence and trust in the listener. It is important to stress that the
purpose of the investigation is to find the cause so that preventive action can be taken.
Blame should not be apportioned.
Questioning should not take the form of an interrogation. Someone well known to the injured
person is probably the best person to do this. Safety officials are more likely to receive the
co-operation of an injured person if they are able to demonstrate a genuine interest in their
welfare and recovery. This may involve visiting the injured person, with the doctor's approval,
in hospital or at home.
1.6.2.21 Questioning the person in charge
AL
Establish from the injured person, manager, supervisor or the person in charge, what the
normal job and tasks of the injured person were. Did they include the activity which led up to
the accident? Other questions which might be asked include:
what task or type of job was being performed?
(b)
was it planned or part of a planned activity?
(c)
at what stage of the work did the accident occur?
(d)
was the person involved trained, and if so, when?
(e)
was the person authorised to carry out that type of work or use machinery in that
location?
(f)
was the person authorised to be where the accident occurred?
(g)
what instructions had been given?
(h)
how many other persons were involved, or should have been involved, in the activity?
(i)
was the activity or task covered by any these Regulations?
(j)
were safe and correct procedures being observed?
(k)
did unsafe acts cause the accident? If so, were they those of the injured person,
workmates, or others?
(l)
did any unsafe condition contribute to the accident?
(m)
what safety equipment or personal protection was available and in use?
(n)
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
were other contractors' employees or plant and machinery involved or at fault?
(o)
had the injured person been involved in previous accidents?
(p)
who was supposed to be supervising the work activity?
1.6.2.22 Interviewing witnesses

1
Skill is required when interviewing. Witnesses should be interviewed one at a time. If they
wish to say anything before notes are taken, they should be allowed to do so.
Interviewers should seek answers to the following basic questions:

(a)
what did the witness actually see or hear?
(b)
what was the witness doing at the time?
(c)
what was the proximity of the witness to the accident or occurrence?
(d)
what actions did the witness take?
(e)
what actions did others take before and after the accident?
(f)
what was the condition of the workplace at the time?
QCS 2014

Page 32
(g)
what hazards or unsafe conditions existed and what unsafe acts were performed?
(h)
what was the probable cause(s) of the accident or occurrence?
Skilled interviewers allow witnesses to tell things in their own way, intervening only to clear
up specific points or answers where necessary. Questions should be impartial, and should
be recorded together with the answers.
It is quite acceptable to go through an incident with a witness making rough notes and then
to take a statement after that. That way, the witness often has more chance to remember
and sometimes provides far more detail on the second run through.
Many witness statements are taken by the interviewer rather than written by the witness, and
this would normally be agreed during the interview.
It is common for certain details to differ in witnesses' accounts, and it would be suspicious if
they were identical, but there should be agreement about basic facts if the true cause of an
accident or occurrence is to be determined.
The important witnesses are those persons involved. Their evidence will be more valuable
than evidence from witnesses who saw or heard only from a distance, although they, too,
should be interviewed. Corroborative evidence and information is often required, particularly
when witnesses are few or are not reliable.
As much evidence and information as possible should be collected, since the action taken to
prevent a recurrence will be based on what is learned.
AT
1.6.2.23 Inspection of plant for misuse or defects
IO
AL
Inspection of plant, equipment, tools and machinery immediately after an accident may
reveal signs of misuse, or defects, which may or may not have contributed to the accident.
The scene should also be carefully examined to see if trip hazards, slippery floors, or some
other defect contributed to, or caused, the accident.
Assistance from specialists and persons directly involved or familiar with the type of plant,
equipment, or machinery in question can provide valuable information.
TE
Evidence gained from interviews and from inspection of the scene, plant, equipment or
machinery, should give an indication of the sequence of events leading up to the accident.
EG
IN
1.6.2.24 Establish a sequence of events
1.6.2.25 Ascertain the extent of injury or damage

It is not always possible to ascertain the full extent of injuries and damage resulting from an
accident.
There may be complications or delayed effects from injuries. The total time off work will
obviously not be known at the time of investigation.
Whilst it may be easy to identify the extent of the damage caused to plant, machinery,
equipment, buildings and materials, it is far from easy to measure the overall effects of the
accident in terms of lost time, lost production and, of course, the suffering of the injured
person or persons.
1.6.2.26 Completion of the accident book and an accident report form

1
Accident report details will vary, depending on who produces the report and whom the report
is for. To help eliminate or reduce this variation, guidance in making reports and the use of a
standard form is recommended.
As far as possible, reports should be concise, based upon fact rather than speculation,
unbiased and should summarise the essential information obtained during the investigation.
Sample accident and damage report forms are included as Appendices 1 and 2 of this
section.
QCS 2014

Page 33

1.6.2 Appendix 1
Personal Accident Report
1.
Name of Contractors
............................................................................................................................
2.
Site address ......................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................... Contact...................................................................
Injured persons name ......................................................................................................................
4.
Injured person's address ..................................................................................................................
5.
Age ...................................................................................................................................................
6.
Normal occupation ............................................................................................................................
7.
Occupation at time of accident .........................................................................................................
8.
Exact location of accident .................................................................................................................
9.
Date and time of accident .................................................................................................................
AT
IO
AL
3.
10. Date and time of ceasing work .........................................................................................................
TE
11. State precise nature of injury ............................................................................................................
IN
(If eye or limb, state left or right)
EG
12. To whom was the accident reported? ........................... Date ..................... Time ..........................
13. Entry made in accident book on .......................................................................................................
14. Qatar Administrative Authority informed :

Date ..................... Time ...................................................................................................................
15. F100 report sent to Qatar Administrative Authority
on....................................................................................
16. Accident recorded in the official Contractors register? (If applicable) ..............................................
17. Was first aid given on site? ...............................................................................................................
If treatment was received from a doctor, state name .......................................................................
18. Did the injured person go to hospital? ..............................................................................................
Give name of hospital .......................................................................................................................
19. Was the injured person authorised to be at the place of the accident for the purpose of his/her
work?
20. How was the accident caused? ........................................................................................................
QCS 2014

Page 34
a) Give a full description of what happened .....................................................................................

b) State what the injured person was doing at the time ...................................................................
c) If falls of persons from heights or into excavations or holes are involved, state distance of fall
in metres
21. What action has been taken to prevent a recurrence? .....................................................................
22. If machinery was involved
a) Give name and number of machine or part causing the accident................................................
b) Was it working at the time of the accident?
..................................................................................
AL
23. Names and addresses of witnesses to the accident. Always obtain witnesses wherever possible.
a) ....................................................................................................................................................,.
IO
b) ......................................................................................................................................................
AT
c) ......................................................................................................................................................
Attach signed statements from each witness whenever possible.
24. Use the reverse of this form or a separate sheet of paper for a sketch plan of the scene.
TE
This form was completed by:
Name .................................................. Signed ....................................... Date ................................
IN
TO BE COMPLETED BY HEAD OFFICE
EG
Further medical reports on injured person
Date ...........................
Date ...........................
New address for injured person
.....................................................................................
Injured person ceased employment
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
QCS 2014

Page 35

1.6.2 Appendix 2
Damage Report
Contact .....................................................................................................................................................
Address of site ..........................................................................................................................................
...
Plant or equipment affected ......................................................................................................................
...
AL
...
Serial numbers or identifying marks .........................................................................................................
IO
Full name and address of owner of the plant or equipment ......................................................................

...
AT
...
Place, date and time of accident ...............................................................................................................
TE
...
Details of defects or damage ....................................................................................................................
IN
...
EG
...
Names of operators concerned ................................................................................................................
...
...
Cause of the accident ....;..........................................................................................................................
...
Names of witnesses ..................................................................................................................................
...
...
Agent or supervisor's signature ............................................ Date ...........................................................
QCS 2014

Appendix 3
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Form F100 Reporting of an injury or dangerous occurrence
Page 36
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

QCS 2014
Page 37
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

QCS 2014
Page 38
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

QCS 2014
Page 39
QCS 2014

1.6.2 Appendix 4
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Form F100A Reporting of a disease
Page 40
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

QCS 2014
Page 41
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

QCS 2014
Page 42
QCS 2014

Page 43

1.6.3
Behavioural Safety
1.6.3.1 Key points

Behavioural safety attempts to focus on why people act the way they do in relation to work
activities and decision making. It is based on a process of observation, intervention and
feedback, and aims to identify, in advance, any situations or conditions that may have an
impact on completing tasks safely.
Situations or conditions may be influenced by an organisation, the individual or as a reaction

to change by either.
Behavioural safety is proactive, trying to head-off potential problems rather than reacting to
past accidents and mistakes.
For simplicity, this module and much of the text within it refers to 'behavioural safety;
however, the principles apply equally to preventing incidences of occupational ill health.
To be effective, a behavioural based approach requires:
AL
clear and unambiguous leadership from the top down
(b)
'buy-in' at all levels to making the scheme work
(c)
an 'up-front' commitment in terms of time, effort and determination
(d)
scheme sponsors who believe in the value of making it work, who can be sympathetic
to the reasons why some people behave in an unsafe manner and persuasive in
convincing those people that they should not
(e)
effective communication on what the scheme is trying to achieve
(f)
a concerted effort to convince those affected that they will not be disadvantaged by
the changes that will come about as a result of introducing the approach
(g)
effective engagement of everyone involved in the approach, not just those directly
involved with the construction process.
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
EG
1.6.3.2 Why use a behavioral safety approach?

Historically, improvements in health, safety and environmental performance have been
achieved through improvements in engineering technology and enhancing safety
management systems. In many ways, this methodology has reached its optimum
performance and the related improvements in health and safety performance have begun to
level off. Future performance gains will only be achieved by taking more account of the way
people interact in every aspect of the workplace; and through integrating and understanding
the human element of risk.
Trying to account for human performance in numerical ways is difficult. Many companies
have tried to quantify human performance by using engineering methods.
For example, 'at risk' and 'safe' behaviors have been analysed to create a '% Safe' rating.
We all have our own perception of risk based on our individual experiences and it is not easy
to make direct comparisons between different views and opinions. Despite this, most people
have a genuine desire to work safely through adopting the 'best practice'.
This document defines behavioral safety as:
'organisational, job and individual factors which influence behaviour at

work in a way which can positively affect health and safety.'
QCS 2014
The practicalities of successfully implementing a behavioural approach involve:

establishing an effective system of two-way communication to develop mutual trust
between management and workforce
(b)
engaging the right people in the decision making
(c)
observing people at work
(d)
assessing their safe and unsafe behaviours (non-judgemental)
(e)
making timely interventions
(f)
establishing why unsafe behaviours take place
(g)
influencing those who behave unsafely not to do so in the future
(h)
recognising safe behaviours and if appropriate, rewarding
(i)
continuing assessment and research whilst looking for improvements in safety

behaviour.
AL
(a)
The overall benefits are likely to be:

more effective communication
(b)
a reduction in the number of workplace injuries
(c)
improvement in the standards of health and safety
(d)
reduced losses for the individual and the Contractors
(e)
the extension of safe working practices into the home life.
IO
(a)
AT
Page 44

There is a recognition that a behavioural approach attempts to:

increase efficiency
(b)
achieve more flexibility and effectiveness
(c)
produce long-term changes.
IN
(a)
EG
TE
1.6.3.3 Developing a behavioural approach
The benefit for managers is to understand the motives behind why some people take risks
and put themselves and others in danger, and thereby significantly reduce the potential for
injuries and occupational ill health.
A behavioural safety approach is very effective in preventing workplace injuries and

instances of occupational ill health. However, the approach does not reach its full potential
until people start to share problems and issues with each other and with their supervisors.
Any success is dependent upon free and effective two-way communication and engagement.
There must be mutual trust as to the motives of all parties. Such trust can only be built upon
a just culture where employees at all levels can voice their mistakes knowing that the
information will only be used to prevent the situation occurring again.
If a health and safety discussion is a positive experience, people will think about safety more
positively and take steps to create the necessary safe working environment. Everyone has a
right to carry out their work without being injured or becoming ill. Equally, nobody should
have to tell somebody's family that their loved one has been killed or injured because the
Contractor hasn't organised its health and safety arrangements effectively.
Behavioural safety has significantly contributed to improving the safety performance of

Contractors that have committed resources and time to it.
QCS 2014

Page 45
An effective behavioural approach must involve all levels of an organisation, not just those
on the 'coal face'. However, when we look at why people do what they do, we often find that
errors are rooted in the way that health and safety is organised. Unsafe situations found in
the workplace reflect problems with the way the company is led and organised.
The principles of behavioural safety are well established but putting them into practice can
be difficult. Low levels of trust, poor motivation, or management that is not visible and rarely
visits the site mean that many organisations do not communicate effectively and do not
obtain or sustain effective involvement from the workforce.
However, many workers are still sceptical about these processes because of their current
working practices. For example, some people object to observing colleagues, while others
feel that it is a judgemental process in disguise in which gathering information leads to
allocation of blame. Others may just fill in the observation cards because they have a target
to meet.
10
Furthermore, cultural issues such as poor leadership, completion bonuses, little or no worker
engagement and not reporting accidents affect the ability to establish an open culture.
11
When not everyone is open about what is really taking place on site, there is the obvious
potential for someone to be injured.
12
Organisations should provide a platform for productive debate, a chance to share best
practice, air conflicting opinions that challenge existing working practices and provide an
opportunity to learn more about the psychology of injury prevention.
AT
IO
AL
1.6.3.4 The psychology of behavioural safety
Behavioural safety applies tried and tested psychological principles in order to change the
way people and organisations do things, particularly how people act or behave in respect of
their own health and safety.
A behavioural approach takes into account:
IN
TE
how people think
(b)
how people act and behave
(c)
how people respond to certain situations
(d)
how their immediate surroundings can influence people's thoughts and actions.
EG
(a)
Thought processes
3
The conscious or alert state of mind can only process on average seven thoughts at once. If
a distraction disturbs a person's thought processes, they may, for example, trip over a
toolbox they have placed on some steps or fall into a hole they recently dug. Other thoughts
have entered their conscious mind and the hazardous situation is momentarily forgotten.
Hence good workplace design and housekeeping practices, such as removing hazards
immediately and always keeping walkways clear, are critical to prevent injury.
It is difficult to convert emotions and opinions into usable information that promotes safety
improvements. Often the ability to increase safety awareness by the individual doing a
'Mental Risk Assessment' (i.e. asking 'what is going to put me at risk while I do this job?') is
lost. Yet future performance gains will only be achieved by creating a process that is simple,
positive and, most of all, resolves the issues as soon as practicable.
It is essential that employees feel that they are able to discuss the day-to-day aspects of
their job, and it should be as natural as talking about their favourite sport. We should take
QCS 2014

Page 46
into account the way people work alongside each other and try to work from a baseline of
openness about what is going on.
7
By helping people to understand the implications

knowledge, we will have identified a process that
management system of the business, encouraging
that resolves issues when they arise, rather than
occurs.
of how they work and engaging their

integrates human factors into the core
positive, open and real communication
keeping them hidden until an incident
Habits
Habits are subconscious ways of thinking, both positive and negative. They are formed when
a task and behaviour is repeated. The more repetitions, the stronger the habit, until no
conscious thought is given to the job. An example of a negative habit is not wearing eye
protection when using a disc cutter because the past is used to justify present actions - the
worker has not been injured before so argues that they will not be injured now.
A positive habit can be formed by communicating the benefits, consciously ensuring eye
protection is worn, perhaps by raising awareness via posters or stickers on the disc cutter,
keeping eye protection with the disc cutter, or spoken reminders from work colleagues and
supervisors. Eventually wearing eye protection becomes a habit and the norm.
AT
Beliefs, expectations, attitude and behaviour
IO
AL
We all have our own beliefs (attitudes) that underlie how we think and hence define the way
we act. If managers and supervisors are not committed or do not really believe that health
and safety is a priority, a powerful negative message will be sent to employees.
11
Low expectations and poor leadership from management can create negative attitudes from
employees that result in poor methods of working that lead to poor health and safety
performance.
IN
TE
10
EG
The challenge
It is increasingly being recognised that integrating a systematic, proactive process within the
organisation's arrangements can add significantly more value by addressing behavioural
aspects of health and safety at the same time as optimising efficiency and productivity.
13
Significant improvements can be made to performance through open communication and a

reporting process based on what is really happening. This will enable better assessment of
risks, bridges to be built, trust to be enhanced and the workforce to participate willingly as
issues are resolved and solutions found.
12
The barriers to progress

14
If management promotes a negative or passive message, making the workforce believe that
it is collecting unnecessary data or that the information will never provide solutions, any
potential gains will be lost.
15
Organisations that adopt a behavioural approach must fully understand that it is not a short
term solution but a 'change in the way we do things round here' that will need an effective
investment of resource and commitment.
The solution
16
A simple, fully integrated process that stimulates discussions on everything that is going on,
QCS 2014

Page 47
whether safety or otherwise, is progressed through an action plan. Once people see that
these positive discussions lead to a positive gain, even without the difficult observation
process, even greater workforce involvement would occur.
1.6.3.5 Why observation processes can be difficult

1
People sometimes have major difficulties in carrying out a formal observation. To stand,
observe, then to talk about what was seen in order to seek ways to improve work practices
creates a challenging situation for many people.
Some of the issues are:

people dislike being observed during any task
(b)
people will tend to change their behaviours whilst being observed, therefore defeating
the purpose of the exercise
(c)
difficulty in interpreting the information to identify any trends
(d)
a focus on changing attitudes and behaviours means that training is likely to be via
workshops and committees. This may be too expensive in terms of both available time
and resources.
AL
(a)
Individuals vary in their perception of the level of risk associated with a particular situation.
We all base this mental risk assessment on our own experiences and have a slightly
different perspective on what is going on.
If a worker has not had an accident while carrying out a particular activity, they will often
score the risk as zero in a personal risk assessment because they judge that it will not
happen to them. For instance, an individual may work from an untied ladder, accepting there
is a small risk of falling and not necessarily recognising the severity of the consequence if
they did fall. However, they may observe a work colleague on the same ladder and can see
the risk and potential consequence.
TE
AT
IO
EG
People can cause or contribute to accidents, or mitigate the consequences, in a number of

ways:
(a)
A person can directly cause an accident by failing to carry out a job correctly.
(b)
A person may hear but not listen and understand health and safety information that is
associated with the task, thereby failing to work to expectations.
IN
1.6.3.6 Reducing human error and influencing behaviour
(c)
People tend not to make errors deliberately but they are often 'set up to fail' by the
way the brain processes information. For example, errors may occur as a result of
stress, fatigue, working long hours without sufficient rest, a lack of training, the poor
design of equipment, weak procedures or because of the shortcomings in the culture
of the organisation in which they work.
(d)
People can make disastrous decisions even when they are aware of the risks. A
particular situation or the severity of its consequences can be misinterpreted and
inappropriate action taken as a result. This poor assessment of the situation can lead
to the escalation of an incident.
(e)
On the other hand, other people (such as workmates, supervisors and managers) can
intervene to prevent potential accidents or mitigate their possible effects.
(f)
The severity of an accident can be reduced by the effectiveness of the emergency

response. The effectiveness can be improved by planning and appropriate training.
QCS 2014

Page 48
1.6.3.7 Active and latent failures

1
The consequences of human failure can be immediate or delayed. It is important to have an

understanding of active and latent failures and how they impact on health and safety.
(a)
Active failures have an immediate consequence and are usually made by front-line
people such as drivers, operators or even the public. In a situation where there is no
room for error, these active failures have an immediate impact on health and safety.
(b)
Latent failures are caused by people such as designers, decision makers and
managers whose tasks are removed in time and space from operational activities.
Latent failures are typically failures in the design, implementation or monitoring of
health and safety management systems.
Latent failures provide as great, if not greater, potential danger to health and safety as active
failures. These can be highlighted only through positive safety discussions that utilise the
experience and knowledge of the workforce. Latent failures are hidden within an organisation
until they are triggered by an event likely to have serious consequences.
Examples of latent failures are:

Poor design of workplaces, plant and equipment
(b)
Gaps in supervision
(c)
Undetected manufacturing defects
(d)
Maintenance failures
(e)
Unworkable procedures
(f)
Clumsy automation
(g)
Ineffective competency assurance
(h)
Ineffective training
(i)
Ineffective communications
(j)
Uncertainties of role and responsibility
(k)
Ageing assets, plant, tools and equipment
(l)
Poor planning - insufficient people/time
(m)
Poor intelligence on health and safety incidents.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
AL
1.6.3.8 The management of change

1
Most people fail to plan for the human side of change and wonder why their plans rarely
succeed. No single behavioural process fits into every company but some prescriptive
processes may be a necessary step towards achieving open communication.
Any change creates 'people issues'. For example, there may be new leaders, changed roles,
and the need to develop new skills and capabilities. Employees may be uncertain and
resistant because they do not see the need for change or feel that they will be
disadvantaged by it. Dealing with these issues on a reactive, case-by-case basis puts the
progress of the job, workforce morale, and overall performance of the behavioural approach
at risk.
Change is unsettling for people at all levels of an organisation. The team needs to work
together and understand that individuals are going through stressful times and need support.
Only after everyone aligns and commits to the change programme can the workforce deliver
tangible results.
QCS 2014

Page 49
Individuals (or teams of individuals) need to know what changes they will see as a result of a
behavioural safety programme being - implemented, what is expected of them during and
after the change programme, how they will be measured, and what success or failure will
mean for them and those around them.
1.6.3.9 Lead by example

The implementation of behavioural safety can pose particular problems with a fragmented
and mobile workforce such as that found in the construction industry.
To be successfully implemented on site, it is fundamental that the principles of behavioural

safety are embedded within the organisation's culture and understood by the workforce and
management from the beginning. It cannot 'just be thrown in' as an initiative at a later stage.
The foundations, expectations and compliance processes must be made clear from the
beginning. If employees and contractors receive the right induction, standards will be set for
the future.
If people digress into non-compliance and break basic rules (such as not wearing hard hats
or safety goggles), then subsequent batches of inductees will receive the message that
safety is not taken seriously (they can get away without wearing their hats and goggles).
Similarly, when senior managers visit sites, they should receive the same induction and live
by the same rules - body language and example can send a powerful message.
AT
IO
AL
1.6.3.10 Facilitation and coaching
Team leaders should be as honest and explicit as possible about what impacts on health
and safety. People react to what they see and hear around them, and need to be involved in
the change process.
Individual commitment, ownership and accountability for safety is vital to making change
happen. Everyone must be willing to accept responsibility for change in the areas they
influence or control. We do not expect machinery or plant to undergo alteration without
appropriate engineering controls, why should we expect people to change without support.
Ownership is often encouraged by involving people in identifying problems and Grafting

solutions. It is reinforced by coaching and facilitation, incentives and, sometimes, rewards.
These can be tangible (for example, financial compensation) or psychological (for example,
camaraderie and a sense of shared involvement).
The best programmes reinforce the core messages of safety through regular, timely
engagement and communication that is both inspirational and practicable. Communications
are targeted to provide employees with the right information at the right time and to solicit
their input and feedback.
Effective change requires continual review to ensure that new issues are identified and
actioned.
EG
IN
TE
1.6.3.11 Staffing levels

1
Some companies operate with the lowest possible number of people required to achieve
their commercial objectives. Margins are tight and contracts are won and lost on cost. This
means that people can be stretched beyond acceptable limits, doing too much, working long
hours and experiencing high levels of stress and fatigue - a recipe for disaster. Contractors
should remember that if a job needs more people, then they should be provided, otherwise
people get hurt.
QCS 2014

Page 50
1.6.3.12 Training and competency

1
It is likely that if a workforce is:

(a)
motivated and well trained
(b)
not under unreasonable time pressure
(c)
given the correct information and training
(d)
working with the right, well-maintained equipment
(e)
they will efficiently complete their tasks to a high standard.
Conversely, high workloads and tight timescales often result in training and competency
assessments falling by the wayside, which can lead to ineffective decision making, poor
working practices, out-of-date certification of plant, equipment and, of course, a negative
effect on people's skills.
As part of managing change, it is essential that a training and competency assessment be

carried out so that shortcomings are identified and addressed, and consequently people are
not put at risk. Every Contractor is responsible to ensure that people are trained and
competent to carry out their tasks. Greater production efficiencies are achieved through
correct skill levels and further gains are made in completion times and work output.
IO
AL
AT
1.6.3.13 Fatigue
It has long been recognised that fatigue affects the mind and emotions as well as the body.
The issue is important in any discussion regarding safety; operator fatigue has been
implicated in many serious construction accidents.
The word 'fatigue' is, like 'stress', an umbrella term that encompasses many meanings. The
phrase 'physical fatigue', for example, may refer to muscle aches and pains, shortage of
oxygen, or a more systematic feeling of tiredness caused by sleep deprivation, illness or
poor nutrition.
'Mental fatigue' is typically associated with tasks that demand intense concentration, rapid
or complex information processing, and other high-level cognitive skills. Another form of
fatigue is boredom, particularly when it results from repetitive or monotonous activity.
Symptoms of extreme fatigue would include obvious loss of concentration or difficulty in

recalling information, poor decision-making, irritability, red eyes, uncontrollable yawning, and
slow responses to questions.
A person suffering from mental fatigue may also spontaneously complain about being tired
or having had too little sleep. Asking the person if they feel fit to start work may not result in a
very reliable answer. Individuals may feel that they are under pressure to state they are fit for
work, knowing that they are not.
EG
IN
TE
1.6.3.14 Shift work

1
Humans have evolved to be active during the day and to sleep at night. The timing of work,
particularly shift work, can interfere with this pattern so the increasing demand for a 24/7
workplace has a serious impact on safety.
A disrupted sleep pattern can lead to fatigue and poor performance, which can increase risk.
On a night shift, people are likely to be working when their bodies expect them to be asleep;
they also then have to sleep during the day when they would otherwise be alert.
Other features of work schedules that affect levels of fatigue include the shift start time, the
QCS 2014

Page 51
length of a shift, the number of shifts worked before a rest day, whether there is overtime,
how much rest is taken between shifts, how much rest is taken during the shift, and whether
the work schedule is regular and predictable.
4
Some shift patterns can result in a short daily rest interval of perhaps only 8 hours; this
would be unfavourable for safety-critical workers.
1.6.3.15 Culture
1
Culture can be seen as 'the way we do things round here'.
Generally, people at work do unsafe things because:
(b)
it was a genuine slip or lapse-work patterns, working hours, fatigue and stress
resulting from work or private issues etc. could be playing a part
(c)
a deliberate breaking of the rules - is the time allowed to do the job safely unrealistic?
Is there a lack of management commitment to insisting on safe working? Peer
pressure, particularly with regard to the young and inexperienced
(d)
management failure to devise and implement a safe working environment thus making
unsafe working practices inevitable unless workers 'stand their ground'.
AT
IO
AL
they did not know that what they were doing, or the way they were doing it, was
unsafe - an 'education' or 'training issue'
Safe working depends upon equal attention being given to:

the conditions in which people are expected to work
(b)
safe systems of work being developed and implemented
(c)
safe behaviours being instilled in the people who have to do the work.
(a)
TE
(a)
The health and safety management system, as well as individual management practices,
must support the desired culture. In fact, in the absence of a positive (or changing) culture,
an observation and feedback process is unlikely to succeed.
Organisations rely on a number of processes and procedures to manage risk and thereby
decrease the chance of incidents and injuries. Each of these processes has an important
contribution to make, not only by improving workplace safety but also by influencing an
organisation's culture.
These generally include systems such as:
EG
IN
(a)
site rules and procedures
(b)
health and safety training
(c)
hazard identification and correction
(d)
discipline
(e)
incident reporting and investigation
(f)
health and safety communications
(g)
worker engagement
(h)
health and safety suggestions
(i)
rewards and recognition.
When the system is poorly designed or operating ineffectively, its ability to accomplish its
primary purpose will be compromised. At worst, a poorly designed, badly implemented or illfunctioning system can also have a negative influence on an organisation's overall health
QCS 2014

Page 52
and safety culture.

8
For example, the culture cannot improve when:

(a)
incident investigations create an air of mistrust and blame
(b)
safety incentive programmes discourage injury reporting
(c)
accountability processes fail to recognise individuals for their accomplishments
(d)
performance evaluations only consider safety performance in terms of whether or not

the individual was involved in an incident, i.e. the outcome of an incident and not the
potential.
Poor features of one system can have negative influences on other systems. For example,
when employee incentive programmes or supervisor performance evaluations are based
primarily on reducing injury rates, is it reasonable to expect employees to embrace an open
injury reporting and investigation system?
10
Similarly, when the incident investigation process is viewed as extremely blame-oriented, is it

reasonable to expect employees to feel uncomfortable in having their safe and at-risk
behaviours observed and recorded? The above factors will stifle open and honest
communication and can impact upon each other.
11
Hazard identification and correction requires a climate that fosters:
IO
AL
willing employee participation
(b)
sufficient training so that employees can recognise and correct hazards
(c)
open communication about the hazard and/or its suggested solution.
AT
(a)
TE
1.6.3.16 Intervention
There are many recorded instances of people failing to intervene when they see an unsafe
or illegal act, which is taking place in public. Whilst it is fully understandable that someone
might not want to become involved in a violent confrontation in the street, in the context of
work the personal risk to say, a supervisor who intervenes to prevent someone working
unsafely, should not be so great.
However, the behaviour of supervisors and managers can directly affect the behaviour of
operatives. The effect of failing to intervene in an unsafe situation is to condone that activity,
practice or behaviour. This in turn sends a message to the operatives that the activity
concerned is permitted and confuses the site teams. Therefore, intervention by managers
and supervisors is critical in every case.
From the information available, the reasons for a failure to intervene appear to be split
between a lack of knowledge that anything was wrong and a conscious decision not to
take any action.
EG
IN
1.6.3.17 Lack of knowledge

1
The situation in which there was a lack of knowledge is self-explanatory; the person in
control of the activity had not received adequate training and was not sufficiently competent
to appreciate that work was being carried out in an unsafe manner.
1.6.3.18 Conscious decision

1
The conscious decision not to intervene may possibly be based upon financial or time
considerations, for example, a supervisor might ignore the unsafe use of a ladder because it
saves the time and expense of hiring-in a MEWP.
QCS 2014
Page 53
However, there may be other personal factors for not intervening:

(a)
overload, the supervisor or manager is suffering from a heavy workload and is simply
unable to identify the unsafe situation developing
(b)
actions of others, especially other managers or senior managers, can shape the
decisions of the supervisor. Usually the fact that no one else involved in the operation
is concerned is excuse enough for not getting involved
(c)
ownership of the situation where the supervisor or manager does not actually believe
or understand their duties, or where they are not directly in charge of the operation
and believe they have no jurisdiction
(d)
having the skills to resolve the issue is also important. Where a supervisor or manager
lacks knowledge about the task or the important communication skills, then they are
less likely to get involved
(e)
the risk of possibly entering into a situation where they may be required to make a
difficult decision that could have a significant effect on the project. The support of
senior managers is critical to allow junior managers and supervisors to become
involved in safety issues and empowering them to take whatever action they deem
necessary if an unsafe situation arises. At worst, this could even involve the cessation
of work until the safety issue is investigated further.
AL

IO
1.6.3.19 Risk and safety
Making assessments about risks and reaching an informed decision cannot be achieved
without information - or at least that's what most management systems require.
The process of obtaining information begins with the recognition that the problem exists, and
then raises questions to which answers are required. Deciding the level of accuracy and
precision depends on the sampling and measurement methods.
In behavioural terms, this is done through identifying 'what' is happening during an

observation and asking 'why'. The 'whats and whys' are collated, analysed and tabulated to
identify trends, often by interpreting the data. Interpretation is based on the personal
perception of what has been observed and so identifying trends can be difficult. Although risk
can be quantified as abstract principles, health and safety cannot.
Whilst risk assessment is based on knowledge of the job and past experience, the
corresponding judgement on safety is normative and can be 'political'. It may be possible to
obtain group agreement on objective and rational measures of risk for various activities.
However, there will often be . controversy over what are considered to be safe conditions.
Attempting to define acceptable levels of risk immediately raises the question of 'to whom' or
'on what terms' is the risk acceptable?
The distinction between risk and safety is more than a semantic one.
There are a number of factors to be considered in defining the acceptability of risk:
Cost: Safety is always compromised by available budget yet it costs far more to investigate
and restore safe working conditions after an accident than it does to resolve the issues in the
first place.
Controls: Who has control? Those at the place of work should have control over the safety
requirements of the task. Ownership is critical for a safe working environment.
10
Customs: Many risks are taken because certain activities have always been done that way.
11
Conditions: Many people are put at risk because conditions have changed resulting in
EG
IN
TE
AT
QCS 2014

Page 54
longer working hours, tight timescales, lack of resources, workload, fatigue, stress or an
ageing workforce. This leads to errors, particularly in plant maintenance.
12
Consequences: Managers rarely evaluate in advance the consequences of something

going wrong. Often the thought process seems to be 'if it hasn't happened yet, it won't
happen at all'.
13
Benefit: What benefits does the individual get from taking a 'short cut' such as getting the
Job done and an early finish.
1.6.3.20 Communication
'Actions speak louder than words'. For trust to be built an individual's behaviour and body
language must reinforce what is being said -'walk the talk' as some people say.
Communication is at the heart of all that we do, both at work and in our own time. It takes
place in many forms and can be transmitted via various media, e.g. face to face, radio,
telephone, email or video conferencing. It is essential, especially within our working
environment, that we get it right. Difficulties in achieving efficient communication may include
background noise, the type of language used and sociocultural issues, so the potential for
confusion and misinterpretation can be high.
It is vital to give the person receiving information the time and space to be able to think and
formulate a response. In communication, it is the quality, not the quantity, which matters.
AT
IO
AL
(b)
how it is said
(c)
body language (conscious or not).
IN
Studies have shown that, generally, individuals assess what is being communicated to them
by subconsciously attaching an 'importance value' to each of the above three factors in the
following proportions:
(a)
(b)
(c)
what is said
TE
(a)
EG
During a normal conversation, we usually transmit and receive in three ways:
7% of the communication is by words that are said
1.6.3.21 Verbal and non-verbal communication
38% is through the way we say it, and

55% by the use of our 'body language'.
During periods of high workload or stress, our body language goes largely unnoticed. This is
when the words we use and the way in which we say them become more important. In
addition, our listening capability reduces as our workload or stress increases. Key points are:
(a)
communication involves both a listener and a receiver. What we say, how we say it
and when we say it are very important
(b)
we need to watch out for overload - if the receiver is overloaded then there is no point
in trying to communicate with them. If the message is important then we need to
lessen the workload
(c)
ensure you have the receiver's attention - some, or all, of the message will be lost or
misunderstood if the recipient is not paying attention.
1.6.3.22 Hearing and listening

1
There is a difference between hearing and listening. Hearing is a mechanical process
QCS 2014

Page 55
involving the way sound waves are translated by our ear into sound. When listening, we
actively engage the brain and apply logic and context to the sound.
2
We only listen to about one-third of what we hear and that is only if we are interested. The
proportion is much less if we are not interested. A productive exchange would usually
involve:
(a)
Listening by actively engaging the mind
(b)
Evaluating by considering what is being said; asking ourselves if it makes sense, if it

is in context; whether we wish to respond
(c)
Planning what we are going to say and waiting for an opportunity to respond.
1.6.3.23 Questioning skills

The way in which questions are asked can control the discussion.
There are several types of question and the most used are:
AL
Response
Closed
A fact or YES/NO
Open
Invites an extensive reply
Leading
Indicates the required answer
Limiting
Restricts options
Multiple
Many questions in one -confusion
AT
IO
Type
We are always communicating. Even silence communicates something and may imply
annoyance or criticism. Consider what effect your own personal style can have on others.
Some good practices in communication
TE
Control distractions.
(b)
Where possible make visual and eye contact.
(c)
Clearly identify the transmitter and receiver.
(d)
Be clear, precise and concise.
(e)
Avoid words that could be misinterpreted.
EG
(f)
IN
(a)
Use phonetics for alphanumeric information (for example, 'M for mother').
(g)
Obtain verification from the receiver that the message is understood.
(h)
Acknowledge the verification (closed loop communication).
1.6.3.24 Nationality, language and culture

'Safety must be a common language'
1
Construction has become a globalised business, with Qatar worksites typically staffed by
multinational as well as multilingual and multicultural crews. This trend has posed risks, in
particular with respect to communication.
Areas for consideration when working with a multicultural team include their:
(a)
capability in Arabic and/or English
(b)
work role expectations
(c)
leadership expectations
QCS 2014

(d)
attitudes to safety
(e)
mutual understanding.
Page 56
Cultural differences can be overcome by all parties, especially the leader, practising mutual
respect and by taking the trouble to understand the differing cultures and getting to know the
team members as individuals.
1.6.3.25 The benefits of health and safety discussions

Discussion/Consultation/ Involvement/Feedback
Improvements to working practices will reduce the potential for accidents, create a better
system of work and raise awareness of issues and solutions.
One method of enhancing any safe system of work is through frequent and open
discussions. The heart of any process is communication: everyone involved needs to share
ideas and knowledge. This can have a massive influence on bottom line profits with
everyone working more efficiently towards achieving a high quality product.
The Contractors image will also benefit if, by the actions exhibited, it is shown to be
committed to a safe and healthy working environment where no one is injured or becomes ill
as a result of coming to work.
One option is for site managers to have an informal 10-minute chat with their employees
and/or contractors' supervisors at the start of every day. The manager should encourage
them to tell each other where they will be working and how their activity could affect other
people. This will help supervisors to plan their day as well as improving co-ordination,
consultation, production and, ultimately, safety.
The aim of a behavioural safety discussion is to identify any difficulties in completing tasks
safely and to aid the supervisor or manager in identifying problems to achieve a safe system
of work. Participants in the discussion should:
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
use open questions
(b)
smooth the way forward
(c)
be clear in what they are saying
(d)
avoid any misunderstanding
(e)
EG
(a)
proactively resolve issues through positive actions rather than reactively observing
unsafe actions.
Those with more knowledge and experience can assist newer colleagues in understanding
the hazards around them and stop people putting themselves at risk. Learning from a
friendly, coaching manner is by far preferable to formal observations.
All employees should be involved in these discussions. Above all else, problems or issues
should be resolved immediately with someone who has the authority to make the necessary
changes.
QCS 2014

Page 57

1.6.4
Drugs and Alcohol Misuse
1.6.4.1 Key points

Managers and supervisors should know the signs and symptoms of taking drug and alcohol.
People who take drugs and alcohol and are still under the influence when they arrive at work
are far more likely to suffer an accident and be a danger to others.
There is also likely to be an impact on productivity, sickness absence and morale generally.
If staff are under the influence of drug or alcohol misuse at work, firm decisive action must be
taken by the Contractor; it is unlikely that the problem will just go away.
Contractors should have a written policy for dealing with employees who are unfit for work
through drug and/or alcohol misuse.
Such a policy must be reflected in employees' contracts of employment to cover such

eventualities as the 'right of search', random testing, suspension/dismissal from work.
Policies should be tailored to the specific needs of the company, be fully integrated with
existing procedures and strike a balance between appropriate support and robust discipline.
Unless there is related misconduct, substance misuse should be seen as a treatable illness.
Anyone facing up to suffering from a drugs/alcohol misuse problem should be offered

support and rehabilitation in strict confidence; there are many agencies who can offer
professional advice and help.
10
Drugs testing is expensive and can introduce more problems than it solves, so the rationale
for introducing a testing programme must be thoroughly thought out.
AT
IO
AL
TE
The influence and use of alcoholic drinks and illegal drugs by employees on site is of
growing concern to Contractors, given the risks to the health and safety of those employees
and others who may be affected by the employees' actions or omissions.
Drug use poses a serious threat to the health, safety, well-being and livelihood of
employees. Drugs may reduce perception, concentration and awareness, which can affect
the safety and welfare of users and of others. The inability of a person to function
competently and with reasonable care is a problem that must be addressed to prevent
accidents occurring in the workplace.
It should also be appreciated that taking some prescription and over-the-counter drugs can
result in a reduction in alertness, concentration and, therefore, safety performance. This is
covered in greater detail later in this text.
Alcohol-related problems can be detrimental to the individual's state of health and their
safety awareness.
This can affect the smooth operation of an Contractors business, and can result in waste and
inefficiency. Both alcohol and drug problems can be effectively treated by a variety of means.
The earlier the intervention, the higher the likelihood of a positive outcome.
Research findings show that drug and alcohol misusers are:
EG
IN
(a)
3 times more likely to be absent from work for 7 consecutive days or more
(b)
at least 25% less effective overall
(c)
nearly 4 times more likely to be involved in workplace accidents.
QCS 2014

Page 58
Drink driving
1
Driving on site under the influence of alcohol is equally, if not more dangerous than driving
on a public road, and Contractors are required to develop a written policy on the matter.
Contractors may also need to consider what their policy would be if an employee whose
duties include driving (either on or off site) was convicted of drink driving.
Approximate detection time
Alcohol
Amphetamine
Dependent on amount consumed

(approx. 1 unit per hour)
2-4 days
Barbiturates
2-10 days
Cannabis
2-30 days
Cocaine
12 hours - 4 days
Dihydrocodeine
1-2 days
Ecstasy
2-4 days
Heroin detected as morphine
IO
AL
Drugs
AT
Approximate detection times of alcohol and commonly used drugs in urine
1-2 days
2-3 days
Lysergide (LSD)
2-3 days
Methadone
1-2 days
IN
TE
Temazepam Diazepam (Valium)
1.6.4.3 Prescription and over-the-counter drugs
EG
In addition to the dangers which can be caused on site by the use of illegal drugs, some
drugs prescribed by doctors or bought from pharmacies may also have unwanted sideeffects. On every drug packaging, there is a notice giving details of the correct dosage to be
taken and at what intervals. This dosage must be strictly adhered to, as taking more than
directed may have adverse effects. Similarly, there is often a warning on the packaging of
over-the-counter drugs of the side-effects that they may have. This is suggested to be the
case particularly with painkilling drugs and antihistamines. Some direction labels may also
give a warning, for example:
May cause drowsiness. If affected do not drive. Do not operate machinery

2
Such warnings should not be ignored - they are there for the guidance and safety of the
person for whom the drugs are prescribed and should be strictly adhered to.
If an employee is taking these forms of medication, a supervisor should be notified.
1.6.4.4 The scope of the problem

1
Problems at the workplace relate not just to consumption at or before work. Drugs or alcohol
taken outside the workplace can affect performance long after the substance is consumed.
The indirect effects of alcohol and drug problems on individuals' actions within the workplace
can also be severe. When considering the scale of the drugs or alcohol problem within a
company, the following must be taken into account.
QCS 2014

Page 59
The risk of accidents due to under-performance caused by drugs or alcohol.
(b)
Inept and poor decision making.
(c)
Lower standards of work.
(d)
Low productivity caused by employees' inability to cope with workplace situations.
(e)
Disruptive actions by employees under the influence of substances, bringing about a

breakdown in discipline.
(f)
The amount of time lost from the workplace due to absenteeism, lateness or habitual
sick leave.
(g)
The general long-term health of the workforce.
(h)
Stress factors on employees due to home circumstances.
(i)
Stress factors on employees due to financial implications brought about by the need to
feed a habit or addiction.
(j)
The adverse effect drugs or alcohol use could have on a Contractors image.
(k)
Security considerations.
(l)
The adverse effect on staff retention rates.
IO
AL
(a)
Successfully tackling alcohol and drug misuse can benefit both your business and your
employees. For example, you would save on the cost of recruiting and training new
employees to replace those who left work because of untreated misuse.
Offering support to those employees who declare a drug-related problem will also help to:
AT
reduce the risk of accidents caused by impaired judgement
(b)
create a more productive environment, and improve employee loyalty and morale
(c)
enhance public perception of your organisation as a responsible Contractor
(d)
contribute to Qatar society's efforts to combat alcohol and drug misuse.
IN
TE
(a)
The misuse of alcohol or drugs (or solvents) by employees may come to light in a variety of
ways. The following actions may indicate that a problem exists:
(a)
(b)
absenteeism without notice
EG
1.6.4.5 Identifying substance misuse
poor time-keeping
(c)
high accident levels and a tendency to be clumsy
(d)
tendency to become confused and disorientated
(e)
poor performance of duties, a sloppy approach to work and poor presentation of the
finished article
(f)
irritability or aggression, argumentative with superiors or work colleagues
(g)
misconduct
(h)
failure to remember, or failure to comply with, common instructions
(i)
a sudden need for increased supervision
(j)
leaving site either without permission or at lunch times to visit licensed premises
(k)
the finding of empty beer cans, bottles or drug-related paraphernalia.
Physical symptoms of substance misuse may include:

(a)
rapid loss of weight
QCS 2014
(b)
gaunt appearance
(c)
tremors or sweating
(d)
constant tiredness
(e)
trackmarks, severe bruising or abscesses on arms
(f)
overdilated or very small pupils
(g)
cravings - ice cream, nicotine, sweet foodstuffs.
Page 60
degenerating personal appearance
(b)
severe mood swings
(c)
avoidance of authority or supervision
(d)
deteriorating relations with other staff
(e)
swings in morale
(f)
minimum involvement with other staff
(g)
obsessive or compulsive behaviour.
(a)
AL
Behavioural symptoms may include:
IO

The benefits of such identification need to be clear and, should a Contractor seek help, the
Contractors may need to guarantee that the employee will not be disadvantaged.
Supervisors and managers may need training so as to be effective in identifying and

addressing drug or alcohol misuse problems. The focus should be on specific examples of
how work performance is being affected and not on direct confrontations or accusations of
drug or alcohol related problems. Full training on effectively raising the issue with employees
should be given. Contractors policy on the subject should be clear and specific.
TE
AT
IN
1.6.4.6 Developing a workplace policy
The substance misuse policy that is adopted will need to take account of the particular needs
of the Contractor and the practical situations, including those brought about by working on
building and construction sites.
However, there are a number of minimum requirements for such a policy, which should:
(a)
EG
contain a clear statement of the behaviour that is expected of employees
(b)
apply equally to all employees, including managers and supervisors, at the workplace
(c)
be made known to all employees
(d)
be an integrated part of an overall health and safety policy
(e)
include clear statements on the roles and responsibilities of all employees in relation
to the policy (e.g. site-based operatives, site based managers)
(f)
encourage those with a problem to come forward under a promise of strict

confidentiality and future support
(g)
to the greatest possible degree, be non-punitive
(h)
state the conduct likely to result in action being taken under the policy
(i)
provide for appropriate treatment and rehabilitation for those with problems
(j)
be evaluated after implementation and amended, if necessary, in line with the

outcome of the evaluation.
The policy is likely to be proportionate if:
QCS 2014

Page 61
(a)
it is instituted to protect and promote employee safety
(b)
employees are aware of the policy
(c)
the process of collecting, transporting and testing samples can be proven to be

independent and beyond reproach
(d)
employees will know what the Contractors will do with the test results
(e)
the Contractors has no other reasonable alternative way of obtaining the same result.
1.6.4.7 Implementing a substance misuse policy

Implementing such a policy has four essential components:
the education and information of all levels of management and employees and their
representatives
(b)
the organisational support shown by the company
(c)
the addressing of issues in the work environment
(d)
the prevention and rehabilitation support offered by the Contractor to its employees.
AL
(a)
Information about a substance misuse policy, covering alcohol and drugs, must be provided
to all employees, and be included as part of any induction training for new recruits. The
policy must be supported by education about the harmful effects of alcohol and drugs
It is important that management demonstrates its full support for the policy by ensuring
observance by all staff, at whatever level, and endorsing changes to the working
environment to facilitate the full and proper implementation of the policy.
The provision of treatment and/or referral services is an important component of

implementing the policy. If problems are detected early, before serious physical and social
effects occur, a brief intervention may be all that is needed.
Confidentiality for employees undergoing treatment and rehabilitation must be guaranteed.

Equally, employees should not be disadvantaged in terms of promotion or seniority because
they have sought or are accepting help.
However, as with all workplace health and safety matters, consultation with employees and
the provision of education and information at an early stage may prevent the onset of alcohol
and drug problems at work.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
1.6.4.8 Misuse outside of the workplace

1
Generally, an employee's conduct outside of the workplace is not within the Contractors
control. However, if drug or alcohol misuse during recreational times creates a risk to their
health and safety, or to that of others who may be affected by the employee's actions during
working hours, consideration must be given to the situation and to what action should or can
be taken.
1.6.4.9 Alcohol or drug screening and testing

1
Introducing drug testing in the workplace is a difficult and potentially expensive initiative. It is
essential to be completely clear on the reasons for doing so, or not. Testing is far from the
whole answer and has inherent limitations.
Before any decision is taken by a Contractor to implement an alcohol or drug testing regime,
care must be taken to ensure that an alcohol and drugs policy is fully established and
communicated to all employees.
QCS 2014

Page 62
Why test
Drug testing might be introduced for a number of reasons. Other than where there is a clear
clinical imperative (i.e. rehabilitation testing), the effectiveness of each approach has not
been proven.
Recruitment screening usually refers to testing or assessing the health of potential

employees during the recruitment process. Testing of this kind presents far fewer legal and
logistical problems than introducing testing for existing employees.
Routine testing is done at specified times, and gives a clear message that it is not
acceptable to be affected by alcohol when working. It might be used in situations where
employees are in 'safety critical' posts, such as operating driving construction plant on a
public road or operating machinery.
Random testing or unannounced testing is used as a deterrent to identify previously

undetected drug or alcohol misusers. As with routine testing, any use in situations that are
not safety critical may cause feelings of resentment amongst the workforce.
Reason or 'With Cause' testing might be used if a manager has reason to believe that an
employee has been using drugs or drinking. This might be because of their behaviour or by
physical signs, such as smelling of alcohol. It may also form a part of a post-incident or
accident investigation.
Rehabilitation testing may be used where an employee has agreed to treatment and the
treatment provider is testing to ensure compliance with a prescription (e.g. urine testing to
ensure that an individual who has been prescribed methadone is not using heroin as well as
the prescribed dose). Similarly, testing may be introduced as part of a return to work
agreement between employee and Contractors.
TE
AT
IO
AL
Is testing necessary?
Drug and alcohol testing is a controversial and complex issue which has scientific, ethical,
legal, social, industrial and economic ramifications.
10
It is reasonable to expect employees to be unimpaired by drugs or alcohol whilst at work, but

it could be argued that requiring an employee to undergo a test 'without cause' (randomly or
without specific evidence that they are impaired) is unfair and intrusive.
11
Whether testing is appropriate or necessary should be carefully considered, as the damage

to Contractors-employee relations can potentially outweigh the benefits.
12
Whether you decide to introduce testing or not, it must be emphasised that it is not an end in
itself. Drug testing is no substitute for good management practice and should never be
introduced without:
13
EG
IN
(a)
full co-operation from employees
(b)
a programme of education for managers and employees
(c)
robust systems for referral to adequately trained health professionals.
Before considering the introduction of a testing programme, Contractors should be able to

fully answer the following questions.
(a)
Why do we want to test? (i.e. what do we hope to achieve by it?)
(b)
What substances will we test for?
(c)
Which employees will we test?
(d)
How will we select them?
QCS 2014
Page 63
When will we test them? (e.g. routinely, randomly, pre-employment)
(f)
How often will we test?
(g)
How will we test (e.g. what method)?
(h)
Who is best placed to conduct the test? (e.g. independent company/laboratory,

occupational health department)
(i)
What will we do with a positive result?
(j)
What training will be necessary and for whom?
(k)
What will be the financial costs?
(l)
What may be the other costs? (e.g. staff morale)
(m)
How will we involve the workforce and gain their consent?
(n)
What will be our safeguards? (i.e. how do we ensure that test results are accurate and
legally defensible?)
AL
(e)
The conclusions that are drawn from these questions should guide you to a well thought-out
and rational decision.
14

IO
Methods of testing
There is a variety in both the methods used for employee testing and in the standards of
service offered by drug testing companies. As yet there is no universally accepted
accreditation scheme or quality standard.
16
It should also be clearly understood that there is a significant difference between testing for
alcohol and testing for other drugs.
17
Alcohol testing indicates whether an individual is under the influence at that time. Drug
testing - shows traces of drugs used in the past but does not necessarily confirm impairment
at the time of testing.
IN
TE
AT
15
18
EG
Methods of testing for alcohol use
Alcohol use can be tested by:

Breath testing - a 'breathalyser' measures the level of alcohol in the breath. This is
convenient and inexpensive. Employees may be tested prior to commencing a shift, or
immediately following an incident.
(a)
(b)
Blood testing is the most accurate measure of alcohol in the body although it is more
invasive than a breath test. It is often inappropriate in a workplace setting due to lack
of staff suitably trained to take samples.
Methods of testing for drug use

19
Drug use may involve the use of illegal drugs, or prescribed and over-the-counter medicines.
These can be detected by gaining samples from:
(a)
oral fluid: not as invasive as other methods but a relatively new technology so may
be expensive or inaccurate
(b)
hair: not accurate for recent use, but depending on hair length the sample may reflect
the individual's drug use pattern over a course of months
(c)
blood: very invasive, but can be more accurate than others
(d)
urine: potentially invasive, but well established science
(e)
sweat.
QCS 2014

Page 64
1.6.4.10 Disciplinary procedures

1
The majority of Contractors will have a disciplinary procedure in place. It may be appropriate
to ensure the procedure covers the consumption of alcohol or drugs in the workplace. You
may also wish for the policy to contain a provision that possession, dealing or trafficking in
drugs will be reported to the police.
For a drug and alcohol policy to be effective, it is essential that it is consistent with
disciplinary procedure.
Taking disciplinary action

Employees with a substance misuse problem or suspected of misusing drink or drugs should
have the same rights to confidentiality and support as they would if they had any other
medical condition
It can be very difficult for employees to discuss or openly admit to having a drink or drugs
problem, because of the stigma or fear of reprisals, or the difficulty they have facing up to the
issue.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 65

1.6.4 Appendix 1
Example drink and drug misuse policy and procedure
1
Any policy should reflect the requirements of the Contractor and must be implemented in
practice. Introducing a policy that is not followed or is inappropriate to the business may be
worse than not having a policy at all. The policy imposes obligations on you as a Contractor
as well as your employees. If you have a policy you may, for example, have to agree to
treatment for employees where you may otherwise have simply followed the disciplinary
procedure.
Furthermore, if a policy is adopted it must be reviewed regularly to ensure that it is working

and changed as necessary. You must also ensure the employees remain aware of the policy
and its consequences.
AL
Policy
The company recognises the potential dangers of alcohol, drug and solvent misuse, known
as substance misuse, to both the individual and the company.
The company aims to prevent, where possible, alcohol, drug and solvent misuse amongst
employees and to detect at an early stage employees with problems.
The company aims to prevent misuse, where possible, and will offer assistance such as
counselling or leave of absence from work if required for treatment. There may be, however,
some instances when this offer may not be appropriate and managers must assess each
case individually.
AT
IO
TE
Rules
Employees must not use, possess, conceal, transport, promote, or sell prohibited
substances whilst on company premises, in company vehicles, on client premises or at the
work site.
Employees must not report for work under the influence of alcohol or other drugs
Employees must not consume alcohol in the office or on site except on occasions approved
by a senior manager.
EG
IN
Establishing the problem

9
Managers should be aware that the misuse of drugs, alcohol or solvents by employees may
come to light in various ways. The following characteristics, especially when arising in
combinations, may indicate the presence of a substance problem.
Absenteeism
10
Instances of unauthorised leave.
11
Frequent Friday/Monday absences.
12
Leaving work early.
13
Lateness (especially on returning from lunch).
14
Excessive level of sickness absence.
QCS 2014

15
Strange and increasingly suspicious reasons for absence.
16
Unusually high level of sickness for colds, flu, and stomach upsets.
17
Unscheduled short-term absences, with or without explanation.
Page 66
High accident level

18
At work.
19
Elsewhere, for example driving, at home.
Work performance
Difficulty in concentration.
21
Work requires increased effort.
22
Individual tasks take more time.
23
Problems with remembering instructions or own mistakes.
IO
AL
20
25
Depression.
26
General confusion.
Irritability.
TE
24
AT
Mood swings
In some instances, employees may come forward voluntarily and seek help themselves.
EG
27
IN
Self-referral
Manager's responsibility
A manager is the individual responsible for a specific set of tasks and who has the power to
issue orders, decisions and controls the resources and expenditures
29
A manager who suspects one of their employees of having a substance misuse problem
must discuss the matter with the relevant manager/director before approaching the
employee with their concern.
30
The manager will then discuss the matter with the employee and try to establish the cause of
the problem (although it must be pointed out that individuals with a drugs or alcohol problem
will often go to great lengths to conceal the situation).
31
The employee should be reminded or informed of the assistance the company is prepared to
give employees who are trying to overcome an alcohol or drugs problem and should be
informed of outside agencies where help can be obtained.
32
The employee should be informed that the company requires his or her performance to be
improved to an acceptable and specifically outlined standard and that failure to achieve this
will result in dismissal. The manager, having consulted with the director, should agree with
the employee what follow-up action is to be taken. Where it is established that alcohol or
drugs is or could be the problem, an appointment should be arranged with the company
doctor or local drug and alcohol service provider.
28
QCS 2014

Page 67
33
If the employee denies that either alcohol or drugs are the cause of the problem (whether
believed or not), he should be treated as for any other disciplinary/capability problem,
whichever is judged as appropriate by the manager and director.
34
However, if there are strong signs that the employee's unsatisfactory performance is drug or
alcohol-related and he will not admit or acknowledge this, further encouragement should be
given at all stages of the disciplinary/ capability procedure to face up to the problem.
Treatment and assistance

Where employees acknowledge that they have a problem and are given support and
treatment, this will be on the understanding that the company will give employees, assessed
as having a substance misuse problem, all reasonable time off in accordance with the
company's Absence Policy.
36
Every effort should be made to ensure that, on completion of the recovery programme,
employees are able to return to the same or equivalent work.
37
However, where such a return would jeopardise either a satisfactory level of job performance
or the employee's recovery, the appropriate director will review the full circumstances
surrounding the case and agree a course of action to be taken. This may include the offer of
suitable alternative employment, or the consideration of retirement on the grounds of ill
health or dismissal. (Before a decision on dismissal is made, it should be discussed with the
employee and an up-to-date medical opinion obtained.)
AT
IO
AL
35
Where an employee, having received treatment, suffers a relapse, the company will consider
the case on its individual merits. Medical advice will be sought in an attempt to ascertain how
much more treatment or rehabilitation time is likely to be required for a full recovery. At the
company's entire discretion, more treatment or rehabilitation time may be given in order to
help the employee to recover fully.
IN
TE
38
Relapse
If, after the employee has received treatment, recovery seems unlikely, the company may be
unable to wait for the employee any longer. In such cases, dismissal may result but in most
cases a clear warning will be given to the employee beforehand and a full medical
investigation will have been undertaken.
39
EG
Recovery unlikely
Drug screening programme

Procedure
40
Employees may be required to submit to a test to check for the presence of drugs or alcohol
under the following circumstances.
(a)
Following an accident or incident on company or client premises, at a work site or

involving a Contractors vehicle.
(b)
Following the discovery of a prohibited substance on company premises.
(c)
Where there is reason to suspect that the employee may be under the influence of a
prohibited substance.
(d)
Where it is suspected there has been a breach of the policy, for example high
individual accident experience, excessive absenteeism, observed erratic behaviour
and/or deteriorating job performance.
Refusal to take a drugs test
QCS 2014
41

Page 68
If the employee refuses to take a drugs test, the employee will be subject to action under the
company's disciplinary procedure up to and including dismissal.
Release of the test result

42
It is a condition of employment that all employees agree to the release of the results of
screening for prohibited substances as required.
Right of search
The Contractor reserves the right to search the person, his or her possessions and/or
immediate work area, who works, visits or performs services on company premises. Where
practical, in arranging for the search of the person to be carried out:
(a)
the police will be contacted in the first instance
(b)
the person to be searched will be entitled to have a colleague present
(c)
the search will be carried out by someone of the same sex.
AL
43
Serious misconduct caused by alcohol, drugs or solvents
If an employee is known to be, or is strongly suspected of being, intoxicated by alcohol,

drugs or solvents during working hours, arrangements will be made for the employee to be
escorted from the company premises immediately. The Contractors doctor may also be
consulted on the incident. Disciplinary action will take place when the employee has had
time to become sober.
AT
44
IO
Intoxicated employees
Employees are expressly forbidden to consume alcohol when at work or to bring alcohol
onto company premises under any circumstances. Any breach of this rule will result in
disciplinary action being taken which is likely to result in summary dismissal.
The Contractor will provide training for appropriate staff in recognising and responding to the
early stages of alcohol or drugs problems amongst employees. The Contractor will provide
health educational initiatives to raise awareness of the policy and the risks associated.
46
EG
Education and training
IN
45
TE
Consumption of alcohol on the premises
AL

Page 69
QCS 2014
AT
IO

1.6.4 Appendix 2
Commonly misused substances
How usually taken
Effects sought
Harmful effects include
Injected, snorted or
smoked
Drowsiness, sense of warmth and wellbeing
Physical dependence, tolerance, overdose can

lead to coma and even death. Sharing injecting
equipment brings risk of HIV or hepatitis
infection
Snorted in powder form,

injected
Sense of well-being, alertness and

confidence
Dependence, restlessness, paranoia,

depression, damage to nasal membranes
TE
R
Name (street or trade name)
IN
Heroin(Smack, horse, gear, H, junk,

brown, stag, scag, jack)
EG
Cocaine(coke, charlie, snow, C)
Smokable form of cocaine Similar to those of snorted cocaine but

initial feelings are much more intense
As for cocaine but, because of the intensity of its

effects, crack use can be extremely hard to
control, damage to lungs
Ecstasy(E, XTC, doves, disco

biscuits, echoes, scooby
doos)Chemical name MDMA
Swallowed, usually in
tablet form, occasionally
snorted as a powder
Alertness and energy but with a

calmness and sense of well-being
towards others. Heightened sense of
sound and colours
Possible nausea and panic, overheating and

dehydration if dancing, which can be fatal. Use
has been linked to liver and kidney problems.
Long-term effects not clear but may include
mental illness and depression
LSD(acid, trips, tabs, dots, blotters,

microdots)
Swallowed on a tiny
square of paper
Hallucinations, including distorted or

mixed-up sense of vision, hearing and
time. An LSD trip can last as long as 812 hours
There is no way of stopping a bad trip which

may be a frightening experience. Increased risk
of accidents can trigger off long-term mental
health problems
Crack(freebase, rock, wash, stone)
AL

Page 70
AT
IO
QCS 2014
How usually taken
Magic mushrooms(shrooms,
mushies)
Eaten raw or dried,

Similar effects to those of LSD but the
cooked in food or brewed trip is often milder and shorter
in tea
As for LSD, with the additional risk of sickness

and poisoning
Swallowed as tablets or
capsules, injected ampoules
Dependence and tolerance, overdose can lead

to coma or even death. Severe withdrawal
symptoms
TE
R
IN
Barbiturates(barbs, downers)
Effects sought
Calm and relaxed state, larger doses

taken to produce a drunken effect
EG
Amphetamines(speed, whizz, uppers, In powder form, dissolved Stimulation of the nervous system,
billy, sulph)
in drinks, injected, sniffed wakefulness, feeling of energy and
or snorted
confidence
Cannabis(hash, dope, grass, blow,
ganja, weed, shit, puff, marijuana,
skunk*)
Rolled in tobacco into a

Relaxed, talkative state, heightened
spliff, joint or reefer and
sense of sound and colour
smoked; smoked in a pipe
or eaten *Also smoked
from a 'bong' waterpipe
Tranquillisers(brand names include

Valium, Altivan, Mogadon (moggies),
Temazapam (wobblies, mazzies,
jellies))
Swallowed as tablets or
capsules, or injected
Insomnia, mood swings, irritability, panic. The

comedown (hangover) can be severe and last
for several days
Impaired co-ordination and increased risk of
accidents, paranoia, poor concentration, anxiety,
depression, increased risk of respiratory
diseases including lung cancer. Possible risk of
developing mental health problems, especially
schizophrenic conditions
Prescribed for the relief of anxiety and to Dependency and tolerance, increased risk of
treat insomnia. High doses cause
accidents, overdose can be fatal, severe
drowsiness
withdrawal symptoms
AL

Page 71
AT
IO
QCS 2014
How usually taken
Effects sought
Anabolic steroids(many trade

names)
Injected or swallowed as
tablets
With exercise can help to build up

muscle. However, there is some
debate about whether drug improves
muscle power and athletic
performance
For men: erection problems, risk of heart attack

or liver problems For women: development of
male characteristics Injecting equipment brings
risk of HIV or hepatitis infection
IN
TE
R
EG
Poppers(alkyi nitrates, including arnyl Vapours from a small bottle Brief and intense head-rush caused by Nausea and headaches, fainting, loss of
nitrate with trade names such as Ram, of liquid are breathed in
sudden surge of blood through the
balance, skin problems around the mouth and
TNT, Thrust)
through mouth or nose
brain
nose, particularly dangerous for those with
glaucoma, anaemia, breathing or heart problems
Solvents(including gas lighter refills,

aerosols, glues. Some paint thinners
and correcting fluids)
Sniffed or breathed into the Short-lived effects similar to being

lungs
drunk and disoriented, possible
hallucinations
Nausea, thick-headed, dizziness, blackouts,

increased risk of accidents. Fatal heart problems
can cause instant death
QCS 2014

Page 72

1.6.5
Safety Critical Communication
1.6.5.1 Key points

Good communication is essential for the management of health and safety on construction
sites.
Contractors are legally required to provide information that is 'comprehensible', i.e. provided
in a format that can be understood by the worker.
This requirement can result in problems where the recipients of the information have limited
or no understanding of Arabic and/or English, particularly during site induction.
Communicating using images has the potential to overcome these problems, regardless of
the mix of languages spoken on site.
A bank of images, each representing a hazard or a simple instruction has been developed.
It is likely that it will be necessary to hold separate training sessions to assess the
understanding of safety critical words and phrases by those with Arabic and/or English
language problems.
Confirming that the workers being assessed can associate each image with a spoken short
phrase in plain Arabic and/or English, will give supervisors and managers confidence that
the workers have an understanding of safety critical words in Arabic and/or English.
Due to their simplicity, these phrases aid translation into other languages, if needed.
Before using any images, workers' competence, training and language skills must be
assessed. This will also indicate the level of supervision required generally.
10
The images can be used to support site inductions, tool box talks or other training, or
superimposed on site plans to identify the location of welfare facilities, fire-fighting
equipment, and so on.
11
The images also help to fill gaps in translation, as well as improving memory recall of site
rules.
12
If appropriate, the images can enhance and complement existing procedures rather than
replace them.
13
An understanding of the images should not be solely relied upon to ensure that work of a
higher risk nature can be carried out safely.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1
Good communication is essential for the management of health and safety on construction
sites. The number of workers on sites, where Arabic and/or English is not their first
language, has increased over recent years. Some of these workers have excellent skills in
spoken and written Arabic and/or English, but there are others for whom understanding
Arabic and/or English is a problem. This can be a barrier to effective communication of
health and safety information.
1.6.5.3 Relevant health and safety legislation

Health and Safety at Work
1
Contractors to provide employees with any necessary information and adequate training to
ensure their health and safety at work.
QCS 2014

Page 73

The requirements of these Regulations:
(a)
requires Contractors to provide 'comprehensible' information on the:

(i)
risks identified in their risk assessment
(ii)
preventative and protective measures identified as necessary by risk

assessments
(iii)
emergency procedures on site
(iv)
risks arising from the work of other contractors
(b)
duties on Contractors to provide 'comprehensible' information to subcontractors and

the self-employed
(c)
duty on Contractors to take into account the capabilities of their employees. This
includes their capability to understand instructions and training given in Arabic and/or
English
(d)
places duties on Contractors regarding the employment of temporary workers or those

supplied by a labour agency. Before starting work these workers need to be supplied
with 'comprehensible' information on:
any special occupational qualifications or skills required to enable the worker to
work safely
(ii)
the requirement for any health surveillance arising out of the work to be carried
out.
AT
(i)
The word 'comprehensible' can be taken to mean provided in a format that can be
understood by the worker. The Contractor can provide information in a form which takes
into account any language difficulties and suggests the use of symbols as one way of doing
this.
IN
TE
IO
AL

These Regulations place duties on the Contractors to ensure that workers are provided with
instruction and training, with specific references made to induction training and site rules.
EG
1.6.5.6 Managing the situation

1
Contractors who engage workers who cannot speak or understand Arabic and/or English
have a few options when deciding how to manage communications. These include hiring a
bilingual supervisor who can give information, instruction and training to workers.
Alternatively, Arabic and/or English speaking co-workers are often used on site to
communicate with non-Arabic and/or English speaking workers. However, their competence
(both technically in construction and as a translator) must be assessed first.
Another option is for training materials to be translated or to be represented in a pictorial

form (images). The effectiveness of images to overcome language barriers has been
confirmed through research.
1.6.5.7 Pre-start assessments

1
Before any worker starts on site certain facts must be established. These are the level of:
(a)
the worker's competence and training
(b)
the worker's understanding of Arabic and/or English
QCS 2014
(c)

Page 74
supervision required.
The type of work to be done by the worker will dictate the required level of competence and
identify any training needed. Regardless of language issues foreign workers must meet the
level of competence and training expected of any worker asked to do the task(s). Therefore,
contractors should apply the same criteria for non/low-Arabic and/or English speaking
workers as they do for Arabic and/or English speakers, which will require some form of
competency assessment.
Failure to prove an acceptable level of competence will indicate that further training is
required before considering the other pre-start factors.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
END OF DOCUMENT
QCS 2014

Page 1
Part 1.07: Fire and Flammable Substances (Regulatory Document)
1.7
FIRE AND FLAMMABLE SUBSTANCES ........................................................ 1
1.7.1
Fire Prevention and Control in the Office....................................................... 4
1.7.2
Fire Prevention and Control in connection to construction .......................... 25
1.7.3
Dangerous Substances ............................................................................... 35
1.7.4
Liquefied Petroleum Gases ......................................................................... 50
1.7.5
Vehicle Fuels (including Petrol, Diesel and LPG) ........................................ 67
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 2
FORWARD
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 3
Sr. No
QCS 2014
Section No.
Part No.
Part Name
Submittals
7.5.2

Chart
Submittals
7.6.1
10
Health and Safety
All
All
All
11
10
11.4.6
14
14.4

Lifting Tackle
15
Temporary Controls
All
All
All
16
Traffic Diversions
16.1.3
Safety
General
8.1.6
Safety
General
8&9
1.4.12
10

Work
1.6
Safety
11
Deep Foundations
4.9.1.7
Safety Precautions
12
Deep Foundations
13
General
14
Asphalt Plants
15
14
AT
IO
37 & 38
42
Item Name
AL
Page No. Item No.
4&5
1.6
Temporary Fencing
15
7.8.13
Safety Requirements
14.2.2
Safety
General
1.3.2
Health and Safety
17
8.1.9
Safety
18
9.2.5
Safety Requirements
19
10

Survey
4,5&6
10.1.7
Safety Requirements
20
11
11.2.2
Safety
21
General
16
1.2.8
Safety Guards
22
General
19
1.2.16
23
19
Hot Water Storage
5.1.6
Safety
24
21

Installation
7&8
1.1.11
25
21

Installation
14
1.1.23
Safety Interlocks
26
24
General
1.1.4
Scaffolding
27
29
Design Aspects
1.1.5
28
29
2.3.1.5
Safety
29
29
Tunnel
18
4.5.8
Safety Regulations
30
29
Tunnel
19
4.5.9
Fire Prevention
31
29
Tunnel
21
4.6.4
32
29
Concrete Structures
7.1.10
Safety Railing
EG
16
IN
TE
4
7,8, 9 &
10
QCS 2014
1.7.1

Page 4
Fire Prevention and Control in the Office

1.7.1.1 Key points
Fires can and do kill, injure and cause serious human suffering and financial loss. The
potential dangers are particularly severe on many construction sites, where construction
activities such as hot work are frequently combined with circumstances where fires can
spread quickly and escape may be difficult.
The rate of injury to people and damage to property and environment caused by fire in
connection to construction is significant.
When construction activities are not adequately controlled, employees and members of the
public can also be killed or injured, and property adjacent to construction sites be put at risk
for example, from a site fire large enough to spread off-site. Offices in particular site offices
are vulnerable to fire risks and serious fire damage.
Particular attention is required regarding sites, premises, temporary accommodation brought

onto site to provide offices, canteens and welfare facilities that are occupied by people at
work on construction sites. They shall be subjected to a specific fire risk assessment.
Temporary accommodation on site must be used for their intended purpose. They shall not
be used for storing dangerous substances.
These Regulations require a risk based approach for fire prevention and control and places
legal obligations on the contractor to carry out a fire risk assessment and put in place
appropriate control measures and maintaining them in accordance with any changes that
occur.
IN
These Regulations places legal duties on contractors (thereafter referred to as the

contractor) for fire prevention and control with regards to:
site-based offices and temporary site accommodation;
(b)
off-site company offices;
(c)
any other place of work in connection to construction activities.
EG
(a)
TE
AT
IO
AL
These Regulations require the contractor to ensure that:

(d)
construction sites, offices, premises and temporary accommodation or part of them

are subjected to fire prevention and control measures;
(e)
fire risk assessments are carried out, recorded, reviewed and acted upon;
(f)
fire arrangements are in place for the offices, temporary accommodation and the
construction site;
(g)
elimination and reduction of risks from dangerous substances are followed;
(h)
fire detection and fire systems are in place;
(i)
Procedures for serious and imminent danger and for danger areas;
(j)
emergency arrangements are in place including emergency routes and exits;
(k)
liaison is undertaken with the relevant governing body for fire.
1.7.1.3 The fire problem

(l)
QCS 2014

Page 5
1.7.1.4 Enforcement of fire safety legislation

1
The Fire safety legislation is enforced by the Civil Defence, Ministry of Interior, the State of
Qatar.
1.7.1.5 Duty for fire prevention

1
These Regulations require the contractor to undertake a formal risk assessment in relation
to:
(a)
site-based offices and temporary site accommodation;
(b)
off-site company offices;
(c)
any other place of work in connection to construction activities and his undertakings;
so as to determine the appropriate fire safety measures to be implemented.

These measures include a suitable means of escape, fire alarms, emergency lighting and
fire-fighting equipment. Suitable records should be maintained.
(b)
in relation to relevant persons who are not their employees, take such general fire
precautions as may reasonably be required to ensure that the premises are safe.
'General fire precautions' includes:
reducing the risk of fire and the spread of fire on the premises
(b)
methods of escape
(c)
measures for securing that the means of escape can be safely and effectively used at
all times
(d)
measures in relation to the means for detecting fire on the premises and giving
warning in case of fire on the premises
(e)
arrangements for action to be taken in the event of fire, including measures relating to
the instruction and training of employees, and measures to mitigate the effects of the
fire.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
(f)
5
IO
take such general fire precautions as will ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable,
the safety of any of their employees; and
AT
(a)
AL
measures in relation to the means for fighting fires on the premises

(a)
assess the risks to which relevant persons are exposed
(b)
consider the effects of dangerous substances
(c)
review the risk assessment regularly, particularly if there have been significant
changes to the environment
(d)
not employ young persons without making a suitable and sufficient risk assessment of
the risks to them.
The risk assessment must include the control measures which have been, or will be taken, to
reduce the risk of fire and identify any group of persons identified by the assessment as
being especially at risk.
No new work activity involving a dangerous substance may start unless the risk assessment
has been made and the required measures have been implemented.
QCS 2014

Page 6
Elimination or reduction of risks from dangerous substances

8
Where a dangerous substance is present, the Contractor must ensure that risks are either
eliminated or reduced so far as is reasonably practicable.
Fire-fighting and fire detection

9
Where necessary, the contractor must ensure that the premises are equipped with
appropriate fire-fighting equipment, fire detectors and alarms. Any non-automatic fire-fighting
equipment must be easily accessible, simple to use and indicated by signs.
10
The Contractor must, where necessary:

take measures for fire-fighting on and in the premises, adapting them to the nature of
the activities carried out there and the size of the undertaking and of the premises
concerned
(b)
nominate competent persons to implement those measures and ensure that the
number of such persons, their training and the equipment available to them are
adequate, taking into account the size of the premises concerned and any related
hazards. This requirement does not apply to a self-employed person or a partnership
where, in either case, there is sufficient knowledge and experience to enable
adequate preventative and protective measures to be taken
(c)
arrange any necessary contacts with external emergency services, particularly

regarding fire-fighting, rescue work, first aid and emergency medical care.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
TE
In order to safeguard the safety of relevant persons where necessary, the Contractor must
ensure that routes to emergency exits from premises and the exits themselves are kept clear
at all times. The following requirements must be complied with.
Emergency routes and exits must lead as directly as possible to a place of safety.
(b)
People must be able to evacuate the premises quickly and safely.
(c)
The number, distribution and dimensions of emergency routes and exits must be
adequate for the maximum number of persons who may be there at any one time.
(d)
Emergency doors must open in the direction of escape. Sliding or revolving doors
must not be used for exits specifically intended as emergency exits. Emergency doors
must not be locked or fastened in a way that stops them from being easily and
immediately opened in an emergency.
EG
IN
(a)
11
Emergency routes and exits
(e)
Emergency routes and exits must be indicated by signs. Emergency routes and exits
requiring illumination must be provided with emergency lighting of adequate intensity
in the case of failure of their normal lighting.
Procedures for serious and imminent danger and for danger areas
12
The Contractor must establish and put into effect appropriate procedures, including safety
drills, and nominate a sufficient number of competent persons to implement those
procedures. The Contractor must also ensure that nobody can access any area to which
access has been restricted on grounds of safety, unless the person concerned has received
adequate safety instruction.
Additional emergency measures in respect of dangerous substances

13
The Contractor must ensure that:

(a)
information on emergency arrangements is available
QCS 2014

Page 7
(b)
suitable warning and other communication systems are established to enable an

appropriate response
(c)
where necessary, before any explosive conditions are reached, visual or audible
warnings are given and relevant persons withdrawn
(d)
where the risk assessment indicates it is necessary, escape facilities are provided and
maintained to ensure that, in the event of danger, relevant persons can leave
endangered places promptly and safely.
14
The Contractor must ensure that the information required is made available to relevant
accident and emergency services, and also displayed at the premises, unless the results of
the risk assessment make this unnecessary.
Maintenance
The Contractor must ensure that the premises and any facilities, equipment and devices
provided are subject to a suitable system of maintenance and are maintained in an efficient
state, in efficient working order and in good repair.
16
Where the premises form part of a building, the Contractor may make arrangements with
other occupiers of the building to ensure that the above requirements are met.
17
Provision of information to employees, self-employed and Contractors from outside the

undertaking
18
The Contractor must provide employees and relevant others with understandable and
relevant information on the risks identified, the preventative and protective measures, the
significant findings of the risk assessment and certain other matters. Such information will
usually be communicated by way of safety signs, site induction, written procedures and
similar means.
TE
AT
IO
AL
15
EG
The Contractor must ensure that employees are provided with adequate safety training that
includes suitable and sufficient instruction and training on the appropriate precautions and
actions to be taken by employees in order to safeguard themselves and other relevant
persons on the premises. It needs to take account of the fire risk assessment and the
emergency procedures, and be easily understandable and repeated periodically. The
training should cover:
(a)
19
IN
Training
discovering a fire
(b)
how to raise the alarm
(c)
what to do on hearing the alarm
(d)
procedure for alerting visitors and all staff
(e)
calling the fire service
(f)
evacuation procedures, assembly points and fire drills
(g)
location and use of fire-fighting equipment
(h)
location of escape routes
(i)
how to open escape doors
(j)
importance of fire doors
(k)
how to stop equipment and isolate power
(l)
not using lifts
(m)
use and risks of highly flammable and explosive substances
QCS 2014

Page 8
(n)
good housekeeping
(o)
smoking policy and smoking areas.
Co-operation and co-ordination

20
Where two or more Contractors share, or have duties at, premises, whether on a temporary
or a permanent basis, they must co-operate as necessary to enable them to comply with the
requirements of these Regulations.
General duties of employees at work
(p)
take reasonable care for the safety of themselves and of other relevant persons who
may be affected by their work
(q)
co-operate with their employer (the contractor)
The employee must inform their employer, or any other employee with specific responsibility
for the safety of employees, of any work situation which they would reasonably consider to
be a serious and immediate danger to safety. Employees should also report any matter
which they consider to be a shortcoming in the employers protection arrangements for
safety.
AT
IO
22
Every employee must, while at work:
AL
21
1.7.1.6 The Management of Health and Safety

These Regulations require that risk assessments be carried out for all work activities. These
include assessing and controlling the risk of fire on construction sites.
Furthermore, these Regulations require that all Contractors have access to competent health
and safety advice, which again in the context of this module, includes having access to
someone who is competent to:
IN
TE
accurately assess the risks to the health and safety of any person from the outbreak of
a fire, and
(b)
indicate to the Contractor what additional actions, if any, must be taken to adequately
control those risks
EG
(a)

1
In most cases, the requirements for fire and safety in on-site offices and other
accommodation will be enforced under these Regulations and the requirements are:
(a)
for measures to be taken to prevent the risk from fire, explosion or any substance
likely to cause asphyxiation.
(b)
for measures to be taken to detect and fight fires in relation to work carried out on
construction sites.
1.7.1.8 Fire risk assessments

1
The stages of a fire risk assessment are:
Identify potential fire hazards on site

2
What flammable materials are present?
What sources of ignition are present?
QCS 2014

Page 9
Can anything be done to reduce either?
What must be done to keep flammable materials and sources of ignition apart?
Identify who might be harmed

6
How many people are at risk?
Are any at an enhanced level of risk because of what they do or where they work?
Is the means of raising the alarm effective - can it be heard by all?
Are escape routes clearly signed and kept free of obstructions?
10
Does everyone know where their escape route is?
AL
Determine the level of risk

Having considered the fire hazards and who might be harmed, is the level of risk acceptable
- are the existing fire prevention measures adequate?
12
To determine the answer to the above point consider:
IO
11
are sources of ignition under adequate control?
(b)
is a hot-works permit system in place and if not, is one necessary?
(c)
are the existing fire detection/warning systems effective?
(d)
is the means of escape (for everyone on site) adequate?
(e)
is the means of fighting fire (for example, portable fire extinguishers) adequate,
appropriate for the likely type of fire and well maintained?
(f)
have sufficient site staff been trained in the use of fire extinguishers?
(g)
is it necessary to establish a network of Fire Wardens to oversee any evacuation of

the site?
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
Record the significant findings

Significant findings of the risk assessment, including details of any actions taken to reduce
the fire risk, must be recorded in a manner that can be easily retrieved should it be
necessary to do so.
13
Review the fire risk assessment

14
It could be argued that this stage is more important on construction sites, due to the everchanging nature of the site, than it is in many other types of workplace.
15
For example, consider:

(a)
what was an escape route last week might be a 'dead-end' today
(b)
the increasing complexity of escape routes as large structures are built
(c)
the start of a "hot-works' process
(d)
the start of a process that necessitates the storage of flammable substances, such as
LPG and other gases, in bulk.
QCS 2014

Page 10
1.7.1.9 The following is a list of some of the factors that should be considered
when carrying out a fire risk assessment.
(b)
Abrasive cutters
(c)
Heaters
(d)
Heat-producing processes
(e)
Electrical apparatus
(f)
Machinery overheating
(g)
Discarded smoking materials
(h)
Arson or malicious fire-raising
Storage of combustible materials

Flammable gases
(b)
Flammable liquids
(c)
Timber
(d)
Plastics
(e)
Paper, cardboard and similar materials
(f)
Cotton, wool and similar materials
(g)
Flammable waste material
Access, egress
(b)
Floor openings
(c)
Flues
(d)
Doors, windows
(e)
Atria
AT
IO
(a)
TE
Building features
(g)
(a)
(f)
AL
Hot work
IN
(a)
EG
Sources of possible ignition
Wall linings
Floor construction
Maintenance
(a)
Cleaning (use of flammable materials)
(b)
Plant maintenance
Fire detection
(a)
Automatic detectors
(b)
Fire alarm call points
(c)
Alarm bells
Means of escape in case of fire

(a)
Doors
(b)
Staircases
QCS 2014

Page 11
(c)
Passageways
(d)
Assembly points
(Note that lifts are not recommended as a means of escape.)
10
Fixed fire-fighting equipment
(b)
Hose reels, sprinklers
(c)
Extinguishers
(d)
Position of extinguishers
(e)
Site fire plan
(b)
Service after use
(c)
Maintain in correct position
Test regularly
IO
(a)
AL
Maintenance of fire-fighting equipment
Raising the alarm
(b)
(c)
Appointment of fire wardens
(d)
Fire drills
(e)
Fire-fighting equipment
(f)
End-of-day fire checks
(a)
AT
Staff training
(a)
TE
Provision of fire-fighting equipment
IN
An example fire risk assessment questionnaire is included at Appendix 2.
EG
1.7.1.10 On-site temporary buildings

Temporary buildings on site include site offices, canteens, rest rooms, drying rooms and
toilets. They are often of timber construction, although of fire-resisting surface materials.
They may be found as a single building, or as a range of single-storey structures, or they
may form a multi-floor 'administrative complex'. Ideally all temporary buildings would be
easily accessible by the fire and rescue service, should the need arise.
Temporary buildings should be separated from the building under construction, other
temporary buildings and storage compounds by a fire-break of at least 10 metres where
possible. If it is not possible to achieve a 10-metre separation, ideally, the fire break will not
be less than 6 metres.
Temporary buildings which are located inside the building under construction, or within 6
metres of it, must be equipped with fire-detection systems.
Temporary buildings should be designed and constructed:
(a)
of materials that would not contribute significantly to the growth of a fire or the
propagation of smoke or corrosive fumes
(b)
of fire-resisting material to BS 476 with regard to walls, roof, doors and windows, to
achieve 30 minutes fire resistance
(c)
where stacked on top of each other, the floor and roof assembly, and members
QCS 2014

Page 12
supporting it, should have at least a 30-minute fire resistance.
Where temporary buildings do not sit flush on the floor, measures must be taken to prevent
the accumulation of rubbish in the space beneath the floor, whilst still allowing under-floor
ventilation.
Consideration should be given to fitting automatic fire detection systems and intruder alarms
to temporary buildings in which flammable substances are stored.
Automatic fire detection systems must be fitted in temporary buildings in which cooking is
carried out.
1.7.1.11 The conditions for fire

In order to take the measures required to prevent fires starting, it is first necessary to
understand the conditions that must be present to enable a fire to start.
Three factors are necessary for fires to burn:
Fuel or combustible material. Any material or substance, whether liquid, solid or gas, which
will burn given sufficient amounts of heat and a supporter of combustion such as air or
oxygen.
Heat or ignition source. Every fuel has an ignition temperature. All solids and liquids give off
vapour when heated, and it is this vapour that ignites.
Air (or other supporter of combustion such as oxygen) which is always there to sustain fire,
providing the other factors are present.
Once a fire has started, if any one of these factors is isolated or removed, the fire will be
extinguished. There are three basic ways of achieving this:
Removal of the fuel or combustible material, leaving nothing to burn.
Removal of the heat by the application of water to cool the burning material.
Reduction or exclusion of the air/oxygen by smothering the burning material. Foam, dry
powder, carbon dioxide (CO2) and fire blankets are all smothering agents.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.7.1.12 How fires can be spread

1
Fire can be spread in four ways:

(a)
conduction
(b)
convection
(c)
radiation
(d)
direct burning.
Conduction is where heat is transmitted from one place to another along or through solid
material, such as along a metal pipe or through a door or wall. The conduction of heat
therefore has the potential to start a fire in a location that is remote from the original source
of heat.
Convection occurs where superheated gases or heat rising from a fire ignites other
combustible material or when particles of burning material in the circulating air are deposited
QCS 2014

Page 13
in another place, causing another fire.

4
Radiation is the transfer of radiated heat from the fire, through the air directly to other
flammable materials nearby, which will cause those materials to be raised to their ignition
temperature and then burn.
Direct burning is a combination of conduction, convection and radiation and is where the
fire spreads and reaches other combustible materials and ignites them, adding further fuel to
the fire.
1.7.1.13 Classes of fire

All fires can be placed into one of the following six categories.
Class A - Carbonaceous material, such as paper, cloth, wood, rubber, often referred to as
'solid fuel fires'.
Class B - Flammable liquids or liquefiable solids, such as oil, fat, paint and fuel. These can
be subdivided into:
B1 - Fires involving liquids that are soluble in water, such as methanol. They can be
extinguished by carbon dioxide, dry powder and water spray.
B2 - Fires involving liquids that are not soluble in water, such as petrol and oil. They can be
extinguished using foam, carbon dioxide and dry powder.
Class C - Flammable gases or liquefied gases, such as propane, butane, hydrogen or

acetylene.
Class D - Combustible metals, such as magnesium, sodium and phosphorus.
Class E - Electrical fires - Any fire involving electrical apparatus or equipment.
Class F - High temperature cooking oils or fats, such as those used in deep fat fryers in
large catering establishments or restaurants.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
10
11
Class A - carbonaceous material

On the majority of building or construction sites, the following carbonaceous items are freely
available sources of fuel:
(a)
cardboard, paper and cloth
(b)
wood
(c)
dirty rags, oily rags and clothes
(d)
packaging materials.
If a fire occurs involving carbonaceous material, a hose-reel or a water extinguisher should

be used. The jet of water should be aimed at the base of the fire first, and then moved
progressively over the whole of the burning area. Always remove the material from the
source of heat if possible, but without endangering the person involved or starting a fire in
another location.
Class B - flammable liquids or liquefiable solids

12
Fires involving flammable liquids, such as:

(a)
petrol or diesel
QCS 2014

Page 14
(b)
oil
(c)
paraffin
(d)
paint
(e)
resin and adhesive.
This type of fire should be dealt with using foam or dry powder extinguishers, depending on
whether the fire is contained or flowing.
14
If the fire is contained, use a foam extinguisher with the jet of foam directed at the back of
the container.
15
This allows a blanket of foam to build up and spread across the surface of the burning liquid.
16
If the fire is flowing, a dry powder extinguisher should be directed at the front edge of the fire,
in an attempt to separate the flames from the fuel.
17
The aim of using extinguishers in such a way is for the fire to be covered with a blanket of
either foam or dry powder. This will cut off the supply of air, and thus the oxygen, to the fire.
18
Once the blanket has been laid, do not disturb it until the liquid has cooled. Any
reintroduction of air may cause the fire to re-ignite.
19
NEVER use a water extinguisher or a hose-reel on a fire involving any flammable liquid. The
water will react violently with the burning liquid and cause an explosion.
Class C - flammable gases or liquefied gases
AT
IO
AL
13
Extreme caution is necessary when dealing with fires involving liquefied gases as there will
always be the danger of an explosion.
21
LPG expands to a ratio of 274:1 so a leak of just 1 litre of liquid would produce a cloud of
gas, if diluted in air to the right concentration, large enough to fill a room 3m x 2m x 2m. This
would cause an explosive atmosphere.
22
If a fire occurs in which a compressed gas cylinder is directly involved:
(b)
call the Qatar Administrative Authority and tell them of the location of the cylinders
and type of gas involved
(a)
EG
IN
TE
20
attempt to turn the gas off at the cylinder, if it is safe to do so
(c)
attempt to turn off any gas appliances if it is safe to do so
(d)
activate the emergency evacuation procedure and clear the site.
23
Do not try to fight a fire in which a compressed gas cylinder is directly involved; leave it to the
Qatar Administrative Authority as an overheated cylinder can explode.
24
If a fire involves other combustible materials, for example timber, that might cause the fire to
spread to the location of the cylinders, a decision based upon personal safety will have to be
taken upon whether to attempt to fight the fire to prevent an escalation of the situation.
25
Class C fires are best dealt with by the use of dry powder extinguishers.
Class D - combustible metals

26
Fires of this type involve magnesium, sodium, phosphorus, and similar metals, and should
only be dealt with by trained fire fighters.
QCS 2014

Page 15
27
NEVER APPLY WATER TO ANY BURNING METAL FIRE OR A FIRE INVOLVING

POWDERED METAL. It would cause an immediate explosive reaction.
28
Specially formulated powders are available for use in controlling fire in metals but, as a last
resort, if no proprietary powder is available, dry sand or earth may be applied to smother the
burning area.
29
The proprietary powder should be carefully placed and not thrown onto the burning metal.
Throwing the powder will cause the burning material to be spread.
30
Be sure either to wear darkened safety glasses whilst attempting to cover the fire, or to look
away from the extreme brightness. Failure to take these precautions could damage the eyes.
1.7.1.14 Electrical fires

Fires involving electrical equipment can be dealt with using carbon dioxide (CO2) or dry
powder.
In staff training, the following simple rules for safety should be emphasised:
AL
do not use water on any fire involving electrical equipment. You may be electrocuted
(b)
switch off the electricity supply, if possible, before fighting the fire. It is then just an
ordinary fire
(c)
do not approach closer than 1 metre to any fire where the electrical supply has not
been switched off
(d)
carbon dioxide (CO2) is the best extinguishing medium if the concentration of gas can
be confined, for example within an electrical distribution cupboard
(e)
in extinguishing electrical fires, direct the discharge from the extinguisher to one edge
of the fire and, with a sweeping movement, pass to the far edge until the fire has been
extinguished.
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
Electrical equipment used on building and construction or demolition sites sometimes

incorporates devices to protect against overheating and fire.
Most fires in electrical equipment are due to misuse or neglect, where appliances have not
been properly maintained, or are being used for a purpose, or in a manner, for which they
were not designed.
A fuse larger than the appliance rating will negate the purpose of the fuse and render the
appliance potentially unsafe.
All employees should be properly trained so that they do not misuse equipment, and ensure
that damaged or defective equipment is reported, taken out of use and professionally
repaired.
EG
1.7.1.15 Other types of fire

Flammable adhesives and flammable liquid stores
1
Use dry powder or foam.
Extreme care must be taken if the adhesive is petroleum- or spirit-based as explosive

vapours will be given off.
QCS 2014

Page 16
Cooking ranges (site canteens)

3
Use foam, dry powder, carbon dioxide (CO2) or a fire blanket. Never move a cooking
container, the contents may splash and cause serious burns.
Hot working with cutting or welding equipment, bitumen boilers

4
Use foam, dry powder or carbon dioxide (CO2). Turn off the heater.
The correct types of fire extinguisher must be provided and kept close at hand, with a careful
watch being maintained for fire breaking out whilst work is in progress.
1.7.1.16 Dealing with fire

In the event of a fire, the most important consideration is the safety of occupants such as site
visitors and staff.
Effective control measures, such as periodically practising emergency evacuations and the
routine maintenance and/or testing of fire detection and fire-fighting equipment, can save
lives. Everyone must know what they have to do if there is a fire or during a rehearsal of
emergency evacuation procedures (a fire drill).
IO
AL
AT
1.7.1.17 Emergency procedures
In the event of a fire occurring, it is essential that the alarm is raised as quickly as possible
so that workers can quickly and safely reach a place of safety.
This can only be achieved by considering the following steps.
A means of detecting and warning of fire must be provided in all offices. Hand bells, klaxons,
manually or electrically operated sounders may be suitable so long as they are clearly
audible above background noise in all areas and can be readily identified as being a fire
alarm. Flashing lights or vibrating pagers may be required in certain circumstances.
Legible written emergency procedures must be displayed in prominent locations within

offices and should include:
(b)
the location of the notice to enable the location of the fire to be pinpointed, e.g. firstfloor photocopier room
(a)
EG
IN
TE
instructions for raising the alarm
(c)
instructions for calling the fire and rescue service
(d)
instructions to report to the nearest assembly point
(e)
clear information as to the whereabouts of the assembly point
(f)
a clear instruction not to leave the assembly point until a roll-call has been taken
(g)
an indication of the locations of fire escape routes
(h)
an instruction not to re-enter the building or site until it has been declared safe to do
so by someone in authority.
1.7.1.18 Calling the fire and rescue service

1
If a fire is discovered, everyone on site must be made aware of it. The fire and rescue
service must be called. Where there is a switchboard, it is usual for the switchboard operator
to be nominated as the person who always calls the Civil Defence (Fire Department).
QCS 2014

Page 17
On hearing the alarm, anyone calling the fire and rescue service should give the full postal
address of the site, any prominent nearby landmark, and any instruction for entering the site
where there is more than one option.
If you have a fire alarm which is automatically connected to the Civil Defence (Fire
Department) via an alarm company, the Civil Defence (Fire Department) must still be called
to confirm that the automatic call has been received.
Location of occupants
It will be necessary to appoint fire wardens whose job it is to ensure that offices and other
accommodation are completely evacuated in the event of the fire alarm sounding (including
practice drills) and to conduct a roll-call at the assembly point.
The fire wardens must be trained in their duties and have a clear understanding of the area
of the offices for which they are responsible. The number of fire wardens required will
depend on several factors, including the area and layout of the office complex and the
number of levels on which it is sited.
The location of permanent staff can be easily identified by the use of IN/OUT boards that can
be removed from their normal location, taken to the assembly point and used for the roll-call.
Arrangements must be made for visitors to be logged into and out of offices so that, in the
case of an emergency, they can be located quickly and taken to a safe place.
AT
IO
AL
Means of escape
Adequate means of escape must be provided to enable all visitors and employees to reach a
place of safety if a fire occurs. If a fire occurs in the open air, it will usually be obvious to all
site staff where the danger lies and the direction they must go to remain safe.
Means of escape must have regard and consider individuals with disabilities.
10
They should also consider the following points:
IN
TE
As part of emergency planning, dedicated escape routes should be decided on, clearly
signed and adequately lit.
(b)
All directional signs should be clearly visible and kept unobstructed and should
conform to BS 5499.
(d)
11
(c)
EG
(a)
Such signs should be positioned where the escape route changes direction or level.
The signs must indicate the final exit to a place of safety.
To ensure that all site employees are aware of these escape routes, periodic fire drills
should be carried out and should include the full evacuation of all visitors and staff
from the building. Records should be kept of all drills and evacuations.
Where construction site offices are located in a multiple-occupancy building, the safety of
other occupiers, as well as their visitors and members of the public, must be a consideration.
For example, emergency exit routes from the premises may have to be maintained or
provided for other occupiers through the construction area or other provisions made for
them.
1.7.1.19 Emergency lighting

1
The provision of emergency lighting should always be considered when assessing the fire
safety requirements for satisfactory means of escape.
This is particularly important where work is dependent on artificial lighting because natural
QCS 2014

Page 18
light is not available or practical.

3
If the lighting circuits fail, any standby emergency lighting system must switch on
automatically and clearly illuminate:
(a)
exits and directional signs
(b)
corridors and associated exits
(c)
circulation areas
(d)
changes in levels
(e)
any projections and protrusions, such as temporary partitioning, office equipment and
storage
(f)
internal and external staircases.
Emergency lighting, whether by battery or standby generator or a combination of both,

should be tested on a regular basis by a competent person in accordance with BS 5266.
Records of tests of the emergency lighting equipment should be kept and must be available
for inspection when required.
AL
Automatic or manual fire alarms should be tested weekly, with a different call point being
used on each occasion where these are a feature of the system.
AT
IO
1.7.1.20 Fire alarms
1.7.1.21 Fire drills
Fire drills in site offices and on site should be held on a regular basis, at not more than sixmonthly intervals. They should take the form of a rehearsal of the evacuation procedures to
ensure that everyone knows how to leave the site quickly and safely if a fire occurs.
Records of fire alarms, equipment tests and fire drills should be kept.
IN
TE
EG
1.7.1.22 Fire-fighting equipment
Portable fire extinguishers

1
Fire extinguishers do not prevent fires.
Fire extinguishers can be used by trained employees in an attempt to minimise loss and
damage after a fire has started. However, preventing the fire in the first place is a far better
option.
Where there is a realistic possibility that staff will have to use a fire extinguisher, they should
be trained in their use.
In line with the risks identified in a fire risk assessment, adequate numbers of suitable types
of portable fire extinguisher must be provided and kept available throughout the premises.
Extinguishers must be located in conspicuous positions near exits on each floor. They
should be fixed to the wall with their carrying handles approximately 1 metre above the floor
level. Where this is not possible, they should be fixed in position (for example, using base
plates or stands) at floor level.
In the open, they should be situated in red painted boxes which are either sitting on the floor
or raised 500 mm above ground level, with a 'FIRE POINT' sign at a height readily seen
QCS 2014

Page 19
above any obstructions. Care must be taken during winter months to ensure that
extinguisher contents do not freeze.
To protect electrical distribution panels and items of electrical equipment, appropriate
extinguishers (usually carbon dioxide) must be provided near but not dangerously close to
the equipment concerned.
For large or costly items of equipment, such as computer suites, the installation of automatic
fire detection and extinguishing systems should be considered.
Fire-fighting equipment should be inspected monthly and maintained and tested at least
once a year by a competent person. The maintenance and tests should be carried out in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
10
All fire-fighting equipment must be maintained and inspected regularly, and all such
inspections recorded in the appropriate register.
11
Extinguishers should be tested by discharge at intervals specified in BS 5306, and should

always be recharged immediately after any use.
AL
IO
Colour of fire extinguishers

All fire extinguishers should conform to BS EN 3.
13
Colour-coding by agent or medium (see below) enables a trained person to rapidly identify
the type of extinguisher needed in an emergency.
AT
12
Colour of panel
TE
Extinguishing medium
Water
Red
IN
Foam
Wet chemical
14
Carbon dioxide
EG
Powder (all types)
Cream
Blue
Black
Yellow
Other information concerning its use may also be displayed on the body of the extinguisher.
Toxic vapours from fire extinguishers

15
The discharge of a carbon dioxide (CO2) extinguisher in any small, enclosed or confined
space will reduce the percentage of oxygen in the air. The dust cloud from a dry powder
extinguisher may, in a confined space, produce local and temporary breathing difficulties and
poor visibility.
16
Once an extinguisher has been discharged in such circumstances, the user should leave the
area immediately. When it is safe to do so, the area should be thoroughly ventilated before
allowing anyone to re-enter. If there is a need to re-enter before the air has cleared, suitable
breathing apparatus will have to be worn.
Staff training in the use of fire extinguishers

17
The contractor is to ensure that all employees are familiar with fire procedures, and that an
appropriate number of them are trained in the use of fire-fighting equipment.
QCS 2014

Page 20
18
Training in the selection and use of portable extinguishers is essential if they are to be used
effectively in fighting small fires.
19
It is also very important that the right type of extinguisher is used on certain types of fire.
Details of which one to use with which type of fire are contained in Appendix 2 of this
section.
20
Attention should be given to the physical strength of persons who may have to use
extinguishers. Some extinguishers weigh up to 20 kg.
21
During staff training on the use of extinguishers, the following points also need to be
emphasised:
(b)
only use an extinguisher if it is safe for you to do so
(c)
do not let the fire come between you and your escape route. You may become
trapped if the fire develops
(d)
always stay between the fire and your escape route
(e)
if the extinguisher does not appear to be working or is ineffective on the fire, get out
immediately
(f)
if the fire starts to increase or gets out of control, get out immediately.
AT
IO
AL
think of evacuation first
During induction training or ongoing staff training, the following points should be made to all
staff:
do not use a fire extinguisher unless you have been trained to do so
(b)
do not misuse fire extinguishers, for example, when messing around or as a joke
(c)
do not move fire extinguishers from their allocated positions
(d)
do not use fire extinguishers as door stops
(e)
immediately report any fire extinguishers that appear to have been used, misused or
damaged.
IN
TE
(a)
EG
22
(a)
1.7.1.23 Hose-reels
Hose-reels linked to a constant water supply may sometimes be available, and can be an
effective means of fire-fighting.
Hose-reels work:
(a)
either, by the user opening a valve adjacent to the hose-reel drum before unreeling
the hose and turning on the nozzle
(b)
or, by automatically turning on the supply as the hose-reel is unwound.
Training employees in the correct use of hose-reels is essential if fire-fighting is to be

effective. Staff need to be fully aware of how the hose-reels work before they use them in an
emergency.
A HOSE-REEL SHOULD NOT BE USED:
(a)
on live electrical apparatus
(b)
on any fire involving fat, oil, paint or other flammable liquids
(c)
on any fire involving burning metal or metal powder.
To do so could lead to electrocution, or a violent explosion of burning liquid or metal.
QCS 2014

Page 21
1.7.1.24 Fire blankets

These are usually sufficient to deal with small, contained fires involving frying pans, teamaking facilities and so on.
Before attempting to extinguish such fires, always turn off the gas or electricity supply.
Pull the blanket from its container and wrap the corners of the blanket around your hands,
making sure that your hands and forearms are completely covered. Hold the blanket at chest
level and gently place it over the burning container to exclude the air from the fire. DO NOT
THROW the blanket as you may miss the burning container or cause it to spill.
Leave the blanket in place until the container has cooled down. Do not lift one corner to
check if the fire is out as this may allow enough air in to re-ignite the fire. Do not move the
container before it is cold.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
AL

Page 22
AT
IO
QCS 2014

1.7.1 Appendix 1
Types of portable fire extinguisher and what to use them on
TE
R
Make yourself aware of the instructions on the fire extinguisher before using it.
Class Substances, materials, etc.
Water
(red)
Foam
(cream)
Carbon dioxide
(CO2) (black)
Dry powder
(blue)
Wet chemical
(yellow)
YES Difficult to
use o For small
fires
YES outdoors in windy conditions only YES, but not

if no water available
ideal
Carbonaceous and organic materials,

wood, paper, rag, textile, cardboard,
common plastics, laminates, foam
YES Excellent YES
Flammable liquids, petrol, oil, fats,

adhesives, paint, varnish
NO
YES If liquid is YES, but not ideal YES

not flowing
YES, but not

ideal
Flammable gas: LPG, butane,

propane, methane, acetylene
YES Will cool

the area and
put out
secondary
fires
YES If in liquid YES

form
YES
NO
Metal, molten metal, reactive metal

powder
NO
NO
NO
YES Trained person - if no explosive

NO
risk Special powders are available, but
DRY sand or earth may be used
NO
NO
YES
YES, but not ideal Or switch off

NO
electricity and deal with as an ordinary
fire. Be aware that equipment may
retain an electrical charge.
NO See Note
NO
NO
EG
IN
Electri Electrical installations, computers,

cal electric typewriters, VDUs,
photocopiers, televisions, etc.
Commercial deep fat fryers or oil fryers NO
Notes: Dry powder may not penetrate spaces or behind equipment

Light water foam (AFFF) may be used instead of water or foam
Extinguishers used to control Class B fires will not work on Class F fires because of the high temperatures generated
YES
QCS 2014

Page 23

1.7.1 Appendix 2
Fire safety questionnaire
1
This questionnaire has been worded so that the desirable answer is YES. If you answer NO,
you may wish to give more thought to the problem.
General
Has a fire risk assessment been carried out?
Have any shortcomings highlighted by the risk assessment been rectified?
Have employees been made aware of the significant findings of the fire risk assessment?
AL
Flammable materials
Are flammable materials, especially flammable waste materials, cleared away on a daily
basis?
Is there proper storage for highly flammable liquids?
Are LPG bottles being stored properly?
AT
IO
Smoking materials
Is there a non-smoking policy?
Are ashtrays provided in places where smoking is permitted?
10
Are there adequate and clear 'No Smoking' signs in areas where smoking is not permitted?
IN
TE
EG
Heating appliances
Are heating appliances correctly sited, installed and maintained?
12
Are fuel supplies, such as propane and butane, kept outside and piped into the building?
13
Are combustible materials being kept well away from heaters and stoves?
11
Electrical appliances
14
Is all electrical work or repairs carried out by competent electricians?
15
Are the correct fuses fitted to electrical appliances?
16
Is only one appliance being used from each socket?
17
Are all electrical appliances being inspected and tested regularly?
Staff training
18
Is everyone on site trained in fire prevention?
QCS 2014

Page 24
19
Are all staff being properly trained in procedures to be followed in case of fire?
20
Are all staff being trained in the use of fire-fighting equipment?
21
Have fire marshals been appointed and trained?
22
Is the location of the fire assembly point known to everybody?
Fire extinguishers
Are all fire extinguishers serviced regularly, checked and recharged as necessary?
24
Are all fire extinguishers of the appropriate type?
25
Are all fire extinguishers clearly identified and easily accessible?
26
Is there an up-to-date fire plan, showing the location of each fire extinguisher and its type, for
the premises?
AL
23
Fire alarm
Is the fire alarm tested weekly?
28
Is a different call point used for each test?
29
Can the fire alarm be heard clearly in all parts of the premises?
30
Is someone nominated to call the fire and rescue service in case of fire?
AT
IO
27
TE
Fire drills and records
Are fire drills held on a regular basis?
32
Are records kept of all drills and tests of equipment?
33
Are the records readily available for inspection?
EG
IN
31
QCS 2014

Page 25

1.7.2
Fire Prevention and Control in connection to construction

1.7.2.1 Key points
The risk of fire is greater during the construction- including refurbishment and demolition
works.
This set of regulations is about preventing fires from starting and ensuring peoples safety if
they do.
It applies to all construction works, small and large, and aimed at all with a role in
developing, managing and applying fire safety prevention and development of standards and
arrangements on site.
It is essential that fire safety are considered in the planning for construction and implemented
effectively during the construction phase. Precautions must be considered at the design
stage and before work starts.
It needs to address the risks both to the site personnel and neighbouring environment. This
may mean rejecting proposals for particular methods and materials in a specific location,
based on the potential for serious consequences from any fire during the construction stage,
or planning additional, sometimes expensive or difficult, mitigation methods if a specific
design or method is not to be changed.
Materials, methods of construction and site processes must be selected to minimise fire risk
and work planned in an order that is practical but also minimises risk. For example,
alternative specifications for materials which are fixed together using mechanical rather than
hot means can reduce risk.
Sites involving higher risk materials and processes will need higher standards of general fire
precautions. Reducing the risks is particularly important when there are constraints which
cannot be removed such as location of site and space available.
There are specific duties for the responsible person to carry out fire risk assessments for
construction and construction related activities. A detailed fire risk assessment and required
controls need to be developed from the outset identifying the stages and activities which give
rise to critical risk points and which, therefore, will need highest levels of control.
Fire risk assessments need to be carried out by a competent person. Projects that are more
complex will probably need to be assessed by a person who has had comprehensive
training or experience in fire risk assessments.
10
A high degree of communication and co-operation is required between all parties, including
main and sub-contractors, to ensure adequate controls are in place at all times. Where
construction work takes place in occupied or part-occupied buildings or premises, the
responsible person needs to take account of the implications for occupiers including staff.
Effective liaison between contractors and occupiers is essential.
11
Coordination with the Civil defence for works, including demolition shall be part of planning of
works. The Civil Defence (Fire Department) may wish to be involved in advising on the
management of on-site fire risks.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
It should be noted that the Civil Defence (Fire Department) can gain access to site at any
time to conduct their fire fighting/prevention duties. Fire extinguishers, emergency lighting,
fire alarms and fire signs must comply with current Civil Defence
1.7.2.2 Interpretation
1
Construction work means the carrying out of any temporary or permanent building, civil
engineering or engineering construction and includes:
QCS 2014

Page 26
(a)
the construction, alteration, conversion, fitting out, commissioning, renovation, repair,

upkeep, redecoration or other maintenance, (including the use of corrosive, flammable
or toxic substances), de-commissioning, demolition or dismantling of a structure;
(b)
the preparation for an intended structure, including site clearance, exploration,

investigation and excavation, and the clearance or preparation of the site or structure
for use or occupation at its conclusion;
(c)
the assembly on site of prefabricated elements to form a structure or the disassembly

on site of prefabricated elements which, immediately before such disassembly, formed
a structure;
(d)
the removal of a structure or of any product or waste resulting from demolition or

dismantling of a structure or from disassembly of prefabricated elements which
immediately before such disassembly formed such a structure; and
(e)

electrical, gas, compressed air, hydraulic, telecommunications, electronic or similar
services which are normally fixed within or to a structure.
AL
Dangerous substance means:

(a)
a substance or preparation which meets the labeling guide for classification as a

substance or preparation which is explosive, oxidising, extremely flammable, highly
flammable or flammable;
(b)
a substance or preparation which because of its physico-chemical or chemical

properties and the way it is used or is present in or on site or premises creates a risk;
and
(c)
any dust, whether in the form of solid particles or fibrous materials or otherwise, which
can form an explosive mixture with air or an explosive atmosphere;
AT
IO
Explosive atmosphere means a mixture, under atmospheric conditions, of air and one or more
dangerous substances in the form of gases, vapours, mists or dusts in which, after ignition has
occurred, combustion spreads to the entire unburned mixture;
General fire precautions has the following meaning:
IN
TE
measures to reduce the risk of fire on the construction sites and premises and the risk
of the spread of fire on them
(e)
measures in relation to the means of escape from the construction sites and premises;
(f)
measures for securing that, at all times, the means of escape can be safely and
effectively used;
(g)
EG
(d)
measures in relation to the means for fighting fires on construction sites and premises;
(h)
measures in relation to the means for detecting fire on the premises and giving
warning in case of fire on the construction sites and premises; and
(i)
measures in relation to the arrangements for action to be taken in the event of fire on
the construction sites and premises, including
(i) measures relating to the instruction and training of employees; and
(ii) measures to mitigate the effects of the fire.
Responsible person means:

(a)
in relation to construction site, the party (normally the contractor) responsible for the
site;
(b)
in relation to workplaces other than the above (such as an office building), the owner,
if the workplace is under his control;
(c)
in relation to any place of work not falling within (a) or (b) (e.g. site compounds or
premises) -
QCS 2014

Page 27
(i) the party who has control of the place of work; or
(ii) the owner where the party in control of the place of work does not have control in
connection with the construction works.
Workplace means any construction sites, site compounds, site premises or building provided
on a permanent or temporary basis in connection with construction used or provided as a place of
work and includes:
(a)
temporary accommodation units brought onto site to provide offices, canteens and
welfare facilities or a part of them;
(b)
any place within the sites or premises to which such employee has access while at
work; and
(c)
any room, lobby, corridor, staircase, road, or other place

(i) used as a means of access to or egress from that place of work; or
(ii) where facilities are provided for use in connection with that place of work.
AL
Substance means any natural or artificial substance whether in solid or liquid form or in the
form of a gas or vapour;
IO
1.7.2.3 Duty for general fire precautions

The responsible person shall:
AT
(a) take general fire precautions to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, the safety of
his employees; and
(b) in relation to relevant persons who are not his employees, take general fire precautions,
as may reasonably be required to ensure their safety and that of the construction site.
The responsible person shall take suitable and sufficient steps to prevent, so far as is
reasonably practicable, the risk of injury to any person during the carrying out of construction
work arising from fire or explosion
IN
TE
1.7.2.4 Duty for prevention of risk from fire form construction works
EG
1.7.2.5 Duty for fire risk assessment

The responsible person shall make a suitable and sufficient assessment of the risks to which
relevant persons are exposed for the purpose of identifying the general fire precautions he
needs to take to comply with the requirements of the Regulatory Document.
Any such assessment must be reviewed by the responsible person regularly so as to keep it
up to date and particularly if:
(a) there is reason to suspect that it is no longer valid; or

(b) there has been a significant change in the matters to which it relates including when the
site, special, technical and organisational measures, or organisation of the work undergo
significant changes, change in scope or extensions; or
5
Where changes to an assessment are required as a result of any such review, the
responsible person must make them.
The responsible person must not employ a young person unless he has, in relation to risks
to young persons, made or reviewed an assessment in accordance with the above duties.
As soon as practicable after the assessment is made or reviewed, the responsible person
must record the following:
(a) the significant findings of the assessment, including the measures which have been or
will be taken by the responsible person; and
(b) any persons or group of persons identified by the assessment as being especially at risk.
QCS 2014

Page 28
No new work activity involving a dangerous substance may commence unless:

(a) the risk assessment has been made; and
(b) the measures required have been implemented
1.7.2.6 Duty for Fire Safety arrangement

9
The responsible person must make and give effect to such arrangements as are appropriate,
having regard to the size of his undertaking and the nature of its activities, for the effective
planning, organisation, control, monitoring and review of the preventive and protective
measures.
1.7.2.7 Duty for elimination and reduction of risks from dangerous

substances
Where a dangerous substance is or is liable to be present in or on site and premises, the
responsible person shall ensure that risk to relevant persons related to the presence of the
substance is either eliminated or reduced so far as is reasonably practicable:
AL
10
(a) replace a dangerous substance, or the use of a dangerous substance, with a substance
or process which either eliminates or reduces the risk to relevant persons.
AT
IO
(b) Where it is not reasonably practicable to eliminate risk, apply control measures
consistent with the risk assessment and appropriate to the nature of the activity or
operation
(c) mitigate the detrimental effects of a fire.
The responsible person must:
11
(a) arrange for the safe handling, storage and transport of dangerous substances and waste
containing dangerous substances; and
Temporary accommodation on site must be used for their intended purpose. They shall not
be used for storing dangerous substances.
IN
12
TE
(b) ensure that any conditions necessary for ensuring the elimination or reduction of risk are
maintained.
In order to safeguard the safety of relevant persons, the responsible person must ensure
that:
13
EG
1.7.2.8 Duty for fire detection and fire fighting
(a) the site is, to the extent that it is appropriate, equipped with appropriate firefighting
equipment and with fire detectors and alarms; and
(b) any non-automatic fire-fighting equipment so provided is easily accessible, simple to use
and indicated by signs.
14
For the purposes of the above, what is appropriate is to be determined having regard to:
(a) the dimensions;
(b) Use of the site and work activities;
(c) the equipment contained on the site;
(d) the physical and chemical properties of the substances likely to be present; and
(e) the maximum number of persons who may be present at any one time.
15
The responsible person must, where necessary:

(a) take measures for fire-fighting in the site, adapted to the nature of the activities carried
on there and the size of the undertaking and of the environment concerned;
(b) nominate competent persons to undertaken and implement those duties and measures
QCS 2014

Page 29
respectively, and ensure that the number of such persons, their training and the
equipment available to them are adequate, taking into account the size of, and the
specific hazards involved in, the environment concerned; and
(c) arrange any necessary contacts with external emergency services, particularly as
regards fire-fighting, rescue work, first-aid and emergency medical care.
(d) A person is to be regarded as competent for the purposes of the above shall have
sufficient training, experience and knowledge and other qualities to enable him properly
to undertake the duties in relation to Fire prevention and control.
1.7.2.9 Emergency procedures

16
Where necessary in order to safeguard the safety of any person on a construction site, the
responsible person shall prepare and implemented suitable and sufficient arrangements for
dealing with emergency, including procedures for any necessary evacuation.
17
The procedures shall take account of:
AL
(a) the type of work for which the construction site is being used;
(b) the characteristics and size of the construction site and the number and location of
places of work on that site;
IO
(c) the work equipment being used;
(d) the number of persons likely to be present on the site at any one time; and
AT
(e) the physical and chemical properties of any substances or materials on or likely to be on
the site.
TE
(f) The procedures shall ensure that steps are taken to ensure that every person to whom
the procedures extend is familiar with its arrangements and that they are tested and put
in effect at suitable intervals.
1.7.2.10 Emergency routes and exits

Where necessary in order to safeguard the safety of relevant persons, the responsible
person must ensure that routes to emergency exits from premises and the exits themselves
are kept clear at all times.
19
The following requirements must be complied with in respect of sites where necessary
(whether due to the features of the site, the activity carried on there, any hazard present or
any other relevant circumstances) in order to safeguard the safety of relevant persons
EG
IN
18
(a) emergency routes and exits must lead as directly as possible to a place of safety;
(b) in the event of danger, it must be possible for persons to evacuate the site as quickly and
as safely as possible;
(c) the number, distribution and dimensions of emergency routes and exits must be
adequate having regard to the use, equipment and dimensions of the premises and the
maximum number of persons who may be present there at any one time;
(d) emergency doors must open in the direction of escape;
(e) sliding or revolving doors must not be used for exits specifically intended as emergency
exits;
(f) emergency doors must not be so locked or fastened that they cannot be easily and
immediately opened by any person who may require to use them in an emergency;
(g) emergency routes and exits must be indicated by signs; and
(h) emergency routes and exits requiring illumination must be provided with emergency
lighting of adequate intensity in the case of failure of their normal lighting.
QCS 2014

Page 30
1.7.2.11 Liaison with the emergency services
access for emergency service vehicles
(b)
fire-fighting shafts
(c)
fire lifts and temporary hoist facilities
(d)
dedicated emergency escape routes and staircases
(e)
sprinkler installations
(f)
floor-load limitations
(g)
positions of dry riser inlets and wet risers
(h)
fire points
(i)
temporary buildings and accommodation
(j)
hazardous items such as gas cylinders, gas mains, electrical risers, temporary holes
in floor slabs etc.
AL
(a)
Liaison with the local fire and rescue service should also include the arranging of site
inspections and familiarisation tours for fire and rescue service crews.
AT
35
Liaison with the emergency services is essential. In particular, on large or complex

developments, the fire and rescue service should be provided with site plans detailing the
following:
IO
34
1.7.2.12 Fire protection during construction
Construction works should be designed and planned to allow the earliest possible installation
of fixed fire protection features. These will aid the protection of the building and improve the
means of escape of those working within the structure.
37
Such measures include:
IN
fire-protective materials on structural steelwork
(b)
automatic fire detection systems
(c)
automatic sprinklers and other fixed fire-fighting installations
(d)
fire escape staircases
EG
(a)
(e)
38
TE
36
compartment walls
(f)
fire doors
(g)
fire stopping to lift shafts, service ducts and voids.
Wet or dry rising mains, where planned, should be progressively commissioned as the
project progresses.
1.7.2.13 Water supplies for fire fighting

39
Adequate water for fire fighting must always be available. Whether this is achieved by
utilising the fire hydrants fixed to existing street mains or by providing a fixed dam, the
amount of water likely to be required should be discussed with the fire authority as part of the
liaison process.
40
All fire hydrants must be clear of obstructions and suitably marked. Particular care should be
taken to ensure that site plant, delivery lorries or workers' cars are not parked close to or
over hydrants.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

Page 31
QCS 2014
QCS 2014

Page 32

1.7.2 Appendix
Safety questionnaire
1
This questionnaire has been worded so that the correct answer is YES. If you answer NO,
you may wish to give more thought to the problem.
Assessing fire risk

Has a suitable and sufficient fire risk assessment been carried out?
Have any shortcomings highlighted by the risk assessment been rectified?
Have employees been made aware of the significant findings of the fire risk assessment?
Has a competent person been appointed to continually assess the fire risk and to develop
and update the fire safety plan?
Is it necessary to appoint Fire Wardens to oversee any site evacuation?
If so, have they been appointed and their duties and areas of responsibility made clear?
AT
IO
AL
Flammable materials
Are flammable materials, especially flammable waste materials, cleared away on a daily
basis?
Is there safe, secure storage for highly flammable liquids?
10
Are LPG bottles securely stored in a facility which enables any leakage of gas to safely
disperse?
IN
TE
EG
Bonfires
If bonfires are allowed on site and are really necessary, are they properly supervised?
12
Are bonfires lit during working hours?
13
Are bonfires properly extinguished well before the end of the working day?
11
Smoking
14
Is smoking prohibited in all site accommodation and enclosed work areas?
15
Is there a non-smoking policy on site?
16
Is a means of safely disposing of smoking materials provided in places where smoking is

permitted?
17
Are there adequate and clear official 'No Smoking' signs at each entrance to all site
accommodation and in other areas where smoking is not permitted?
18
Is any total or partial smoking ban actively enforced?
QCS 2014

Page 33
Hot work
19
Where required, has a Hot Work Permit been issued?
20
If so, does it specify that hot work must cease a specified period (e.g. 1 hour) before the end
of the working day?
21
When hot work takes place is the correct type of fire extinguisher provided?
22
Are the correct precautions being taken where flame-cutting and welding takes place?
23
Are checks being made at the end of work to see that nothing is left smouldering?
24
Are cavities, eaves and other voids checked at the end of work?
AL
Heating appliances
Are heating appliances correctly sited, installed and maintained?
26
Are fuel supplies, such as propane and butane, kept outside and piped into the building?
27
Are combustible materials being kept well away from heaters and stoves?
IO
25
AT
Electrical appliances
Are all electrical work or repairs carried out by competent electricians?
29
Are the correct fuses fitted to electrical appliances?
30
Is only one appliance being used from each socket?
31
Are all electrical appliances being inspected and tested regularly?
IN
TE
28
EG
Staff training
Is everyone on site trained in fire prevention?
33
Are all staff properly trained in the procedures to be followed in case of fire?
34
Are all (or sufficient) staff trained in the selection and use of fire-fighting equipment?
35
Have fire marshals been appointed and trained?
36
Is the location of the fire assembly point known to everybody?
32
Fire extinguishers
37
Are all fire extinguishers serviced regularly, checked and recharged as necessary?
38
Are all fire extinguishers of the appropriate type?
39
Are all fire extinguishers clearly identified and easily accessible?
40
Is there an up-to-date fire plan for the site?
41
Is the fire plan updated as necessary?
QCS 2014

Page 34
Fire alarm
42
Is the fire alarm tested weekly?
43
Is a different call point used for each test?
44
Can the fire alarm be heard clearly in all parts of the premises?
45
Is someone nominated to call the fire and rescue service in case of fire?
Fire drills and records

Are fire drills held on a regular basis?
47
Are records kept of all drills and tests of equipment?
48
Are the records readily available for inspection?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
46
QCS 2014

Page 35

1.7.3
Dangerous Substances
1.7.3.1 Key points
A risk assessment must be carried out before dangerous substances are stored, transported
or used. In some cases, a method statement and/or a Permit To Work will also be required.
These Regulations cover the flammable or explosive properties of dangerous substances

used in the workplace.
People who use dangerous substances must be fully aware of their hazardous properties,
adopt methods of controlling the risks and be trained in the use of portable fire extinguishers.
Electrical apparatus and naked flames should not be used near dangerous substances,
particularly if they are being sprayed.
Good ventilation is essential wherever dangerous substances are used or stored.
Smoking policies and waste disposal policies must be established and diligently monitored.
AL
IO
Dangerous substances are widely used on building and construction sites. The main hazards
are fire and explosion, and everything possible must be done to lessen the risks.
Safety is divided into three areas:
AT
the storage of substances
(b)
the safe handling and transport of substances
(c)
the uses to which substances are put.
TE
(a)
IN

put control measures in place to reduce the risks to health and safety arising out of the
If an identified hazard requires health surveillance, the Contractor must make it available to
employees. The surveillance must be appropriate, taking into account the risks to their health
and safety that have been identified.
The Contractor must provide employees with clear and relevant information on any risks that
exist in the workplace and of control measures that are in place to reduce those risks.
situation which presents a risk to the health and safety of themselves or of any other person.
EG
1.7.3.4 Dangerous Substances and Explosive Atmospheres

1
Contractors must control the risks to safety from fire and explosions. These Regulations
apply at all places of work where:
(a)
a dangerous substance is present (or is liable to be present) at the workplace
QCS 2014

Page 36
(b)
the dangerous substance could be a risk to the safety of people as a result of fires,
explosions or similar energetic events.
A definition of a 'dangerous substance' is:
'any substance or mixture of substances that can put people's health or safety at risk from
fire and explosion.'
Dangerous substances are:

(a)
any substance or mixture of substances that is classified as explosive, oxidising,

extremely flammable, highly flammable or flammable
(b)
any dust, whether in the form of solid particles or fibrous materials, which can form an
explosive mixture in air.
A definition of 'explosive atmosphere' is:
'a mixture of air and one or more hazardous substances in the form of a gas, vapour, mist or
dust, which will explode after ignition has occurred.'
In the construction industry, many dangerous substances are used, or created by, work
activities, for example:
IO
AL
the storage and use of solvents, adhesives and paints
(b)
the storage and use of flammable gases such as oxygen and acetylene during cutting
and welding
(c)
the storage and use of LPG for work processes, heating or cooking
(d)
the creation of large quantities of airborne dust, for example as a result of woodmachining or sanding, and the handling and storage of bulk waste dust
(e)
the storage and decanting of vehicle fuels and lubricants
(f)
the storage and handling of liquid flammable wastes such as fuel oils
(g)
many 'hot work' activities such as the hot-cutting of tanks and drums that have
contained flammable materials.
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
1.7.3.5 Contractors' duties

1
Contractors must assess and eliminate or reduce risks from dangerous substances.
Complying involves:
Assessing risks
3
Before work is carried out, Contractors must assess the fire and explosion risks that may be
caused by dangerous substances. This should be an identification and careful examination
of:
(a)
dangerous substances in the workplace
(b)
work activities involving those substances
(c)
ways in which those substances and work activities could harm people.
The purpose is to help Contractors to decide what they need to do to eliminate or reduce the
risks from dangerous substances. If there is no risk to safety from fires and explosions, or
the risk is low, no further action is needed. If there are risks then Contractors must consider
what else needs to be done.
QCS 2014

Page 37
Preventing or controlling risks

Contractors must put control measures in place to eliminate risks from dangerous
substances, or reduce them as far as is reasonably practicable. Where it is not possible to
eliminate the risk completely Contractors must take measures to control risks and reduce the
severity of the effects of fire or explosion.
The best solution is to eliminate the risk by replacing the dangerous substance with another
substance, or using a different work process.
This is called substitution.
In practice, this may be difficult to achieve. However, it may be possible to reduce the risk by
using a less dangerous substance, e.g. by replacing a low flashpoint liquid with a high
flashpoint one. In other situations, it may not be possible to replace the dangerous
substance. For example, it would not be practical to replace petrol with another substance at
a filling station.
AL
IO
reduce the quantity of dangerous substances to a minimum
(b)
avoid or minimise releases of dangerous substances
(c)
control releases of dangerous substances at source
(d)
prevent the formation of a dangerous atmosphere
(e)
collect, contain and remove any releases to a safe place (for example, through
ventilation)
(f)
avoid ignition sources
(g)
avoid adverse conditions, e.g. exceeding the limits of temperature or control settings,
that could lead to danger
(h)
keep incompatible substances apart.
IN
TE
AT
(a)
These control measures should be proportionate to the degree of risk as highlighted in the
risk assessment and be appropriate to the nature of the activity or operation.
10
Where the risk cannot be eliminated, these Regulations require control measures to be
applied in the following priority order:
EG
Control measures
Mitigation
11
In addition to control measures, Contractors must subsequently put in place mitigation

measures. These measures should be consistent with the risk assessment and appropriate
to the nature of the activity or operation, and include:
(a)
reducing the number of employees exposed to the risk
(b)
providing explosion-resistant plant
(c)
providing explosion suppression or explosion relief equipment
(d)
taking measures to control or minimise the spread of fires or explosions
(e)
providing suitable personal protective equipment.
Preparing emergency plans and procedures

12
Arrangements must be made to deal with emergencies. These plans and procedures should
cover safety drills and suitable communication and warning systems, and should be in
QCS 2014

Page 38
proportion to the risks. If an emergency occurs, workers tasked with carrying out repairs or
other necessary work must be provided with the appropriate equipment to allow them to
carry out this work safely.
13
The information in the emergency plans and procedures must be made available to the
emergency services to allow them to develop their own plans if necessary.
Providing information, instruction and training for employees

14
Employees must be provided with relevant information, instructions and training.
15
This includes:
the dangerous substances present in the workplace and the risks they present,
including access to any relevant safety data sheets and information that applies to the
dangerous substance
(b)
the findings of the risk assessment and the control measures put in place as a result
(including their purpose and how to follow and use them)
(c)
emergency procedures.
AL
(a)
Information, instruction and training need only be provided to other people (non-employees)
where it is required to ensure their safety. It should be in proportion to the level and type of
risk.
17
The contents of pipes and containers must be identifiable to alert employees and others to
the presence of dangerous substances.
AT
IO
16
In relation to construction site activities, this could include bottled gas/petrol storage areas.
These duties include:
identifying and classifying (zoning) areas where potentially explosive atmospheres
may occur
(b)
avoiding ignition sources in zoned areas, in particular those from electrical and
mechanical equipment
(c)
where necessary, identifying the entrances to zoned areas by the display of signs
(d)
(e)
19
EG
IN
(a)
18
TE
Places where explosive atmospheres may occur
providing appropriate anti-static clothing for employees

before they come into operation, verifying the overall explosion-protection safety of
areas where explosive atmospheres may occur.
Decisions on the zoning of areas and the appropriate actions to take must be made by
someone who has been trained and is competent to do so.

1
cannot be adequately controlled by other means that are equally or more effective, then the
Contractor must provide and ensure that suitable personal protective equipment is used by
employees. In essence, personal protective equipment (PPE) may only be used as a last
resort. In deciding which type of PPE to issue, the Contractor must take into account the risk
that the PPE is being used to protect against, and ensure that the PPE will fit the wearer and
allow them to work safely.
If more than one item of PPE is being used, the Contractor must make sure that individual
items of PPE are compatible so that each item does not adversely affect the performance of
QCS 2014

Page 39
another.
3
Whilst the Contractor must, as far as possible, ensure that any personal protective
equipment supplied must be worn, the employee in turn must ensure that they wear the
equipment provided and know the procedures for reporting loss or defect to the Contractor.
Dangerous substances and explosive atmospheres require the prevention of:

(a)
inhalation of fumes and vapour given off by dangerous substances
(b)
skin contact with dangerous substances
(c)
eye injuries resulting from splashes of dangerous substances.

order.
employees, it must be restricted to competent specified workers.
In the context of this module, these Regulations apply to the provision and use of work
equipment that allows dangerous substances to be handled (including decanting),
transported, used and disposed of in a safe manner.
AT
IO
AL
The Control of Substances Hazardous to Health does not apply to dangerous substances by
virtue of their explosive or flammable nature. However, they may apply if these substances
also possess certain other hazardous properties. This would be identified as part of the
COSHH assessment carried out on the substance.
IN
TE
EG

These Regulations specify the measures to be taken to prevent the risk from fire, explosion
or any substance likely to cause asphyxiation.
These Regulations specify the measures to be taken to detect and fight fires in relation to
work carried out on construction sites.
1.7.3.10 Competence and training

1
In most cases it will be necessary for the Contractor to provide employees with adequate
information, instruction, training and supervision to enable them to carry out any work task
safely and without risk to their health.
1.7.3.11 Storage of dangerous substances

1
On most building or construction sites, dangerous substances will be used at some time
during the construction phase. Depending upon the nature of the work to be undertaken it
may be necessary to store bulk quantities of dangerous substances, either:
(a)
in an external, secure, purpose-built compound, where site conditions allow
(b)
in a suitable, secure internal storeroom if, because of the nature of the site, external
storage is not possible.
Alternatively, small quantities, from, say, 200 ml containers upwards will often be taken to
QCS 2014

Page 40
the place of work by the person doing the job.

Where small quantities of dangerous substances for daily use are required in the workplace,
metal lockable bins may be used.
AL
IO
on a concrete sloping pad with a sump to catch any leaks or spillage
(b)
with a low sill all around, sufficient to contain the contents of the largest can or drum
stored + 10%, i.e. bunded
(c)
surrounded by a 1.8 metre high wire fence
(d)
so that it is protected against direct sunlight
(e)
at least 2 metres away from nearby buildings or boundaries, except that, where the
boundary of the store forms part of a solid wall, cans or drums may be stacked up
against that wall up to 1 metre from the top.
IN
TE
AT
(a)
Cans or drums should be stored:
EG
Where it is necessary to store dangerous substances in bulk, a store should be built:
(a)
so that their contents can be easily identified and removed in the event of any leak or
damage
(b)
on their sides and chocked to prevent movement.
Storage in the open air
Stores or bins must be kept locked and only sufficient amounts for each day's requirements
should be removed, as and when needed.
They may be marked with suitable signs such as 'Flammable Liquid' or 'Flammable Gas'.
Additionally, if an assessment shows that an

explosive atmosphere may be present in a
particular area, appropriate numbers of the sign
below must be displayed.
The sign comprises a yellow background and

black graphics. Signs must conform to BS 5499
Safety signs and colours.
10
Naked flames, smoking, matches or lighters

must not be allowed in the area of the store, and proper prohibition signs must be clearly
displayed as well as other signs already indicated.
QCS 2014

Page 41
Any lighting within a store must be flameproof to the appropriate standard, and under no
circumstances should electrical sockets be permitted.
12
Where there is a need for electrical apparatus (other than lighting) within a store, the supply
must be permanently wired in using intrinsically safe equipment.
TE
AT
IO
AL
11
IN
Other points to be noted.
Stores should not be built below ground level, because the vapours from spillages and leaks
will not be able to disperse.
14
Adequate cross-ventilation at both high and low level is necessary.
15
The store should always be kept locked when unattended.
16
A door sill of approximately 150 mm in height should be provided to catch any leaks or
spillages in order to retain the liquids inside the building.
17
A quantity of absorbent material, to soak up any spilt liquids, and a suitable container for the
collection and safe disposal of the contaminated absorbent, should be provided at the store.
18
The use of mobile phones in or immediately adjacent to the store should be prohibited.
Notices to this effect should be provided and prominently displayed.
19
Any shelves or racking in the store should be of a non-ferrous metal or other noncombustible construction.
EG
13
Storage inside a building

20
A separate building should be provided, if possible, solely for the storage of dangerous
substances where protection from the weather or security is required. Ideally, it will be
constructed from fire-resisting materials and it should be at least 2 metres away from other
buildings or boundaries.
QCS 2014

Page 42
21
A risk assessment should be carried out to determine whether the risks of storing dangerous
substances in such a location are acceptable. If not, either additional control measures must
be put in place or alternative arrangements made for storing the substances.
22
Where a separate building cannot be provided, and the store forms part of an existing
structure, the surrounding walls and roof of the store must be fire-resisting and the door
should be of the fire-resisting type and open outwards.
23
It is recommended that the maximum quantities that may be stored in cabinets and bins are
no more than 50 litres for highly flammable liquids (and flammable liquids with a flashpoint
below the maximum ambient temperature of the workroom/working area) and no more than
250 litres for other flammable liquids with a higher flashpoint of up to 55C.
Other points to be noted.

Stores should not be built below ground level, because the vapours from spillages and leaks
will not be able to disperse.
25
Adequate cross-ventilation at both high and low level is necessary.
26
The store should always be kept locked when unattended.
27
When not in use, containers of flammable liquids needed for current work activities should be
kept closed and stored in suitable cabinets or bins of fire-resisting construction and which
are designed to retain spills (110% volume of the largest vessel normally stored in it).
28
A quantity of absorbent material, to soak up any spilt liquids, and a suitable container for the
collection and safe disposal of the contaminated absorbent should be provided at the store.
29
Signs should be positioned on or near the store stating, for example 'Highly Flammable' or
'Flashpoint below 32C'. All signs should conform to BS 5499 Safety signs and colours.
30
Naked flames, smoking, matches or lighters must not be allowed in the store, and signs
stating this must be clearly displayed.
31
The use of mobile phones in or adjacent to the store should be prohibited. Notices to this
effect should be provided and prominently displayed.
32
Any lighting or other electrical apparatus must conform to BS EN 60079-14.
33
Any shelves or racking in the store should be of a non-ferrous metal or other noncombustible construction.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
24
1.7.3.12 Handling and use of dangerous substances likely to cause an

explosive atmosphere
1
The use of any dangerous substance, including decanting small quantities for daily use from
bulk containers, must be the subject of a risk assessment.
The findings of the risk assessment will indicate the maximum quantity of the dangerous
substance that can be taken to the place of work and the safe working practices to be
observed once it is there and being used.
Generally, only enough of the dangerous substance to enable the work-in-hand to be carried
out should be taken to the place where it is to be used. Clearly, actual quantities will depend
on the work activity and also the organisational arrangements for controlling the fire risks in
the workroom/ working area.
QCS 2014

Page 43
Decanting, mixing or sampling should not be carried out in a store. It should be done in the
open air or in a separate room constructed of fire-resisting materials.
Funnels should be used to prevent spillage whilst decanting is taking place and drip trays
should be used to catch any spillage that may inadvertently occur.
Any spillage should be soaked up using proprietary absorbents, dry earth or dry sand.
Metal bins with lids should be provided for any used absorbents to be placed in and these
should be emptied regularly and carefully.
Consideration must be given to the disposal of any waste as it may well be classified as
hazardous waste.
In general, where work involves the use of a dangerous substance that has the potential to
create an explosive atmosphere inside a room, all electrical power should be turned off
unless all electrical fittings are intrinsically safe by design. If space heating is needed, it
should be flameproof and incapable of causing the ignition of any vapours present in the
atmosphere.
10
The build-up of concentrations of vapours must be avoided and dispersed, if necessary, by

natural or mechanical ventilation. If mechanical ventilation is necessary, a flameproof motor,
not in the ventilation trunking, should be used.
AT
IO
AL
Other points to be considered
Naked flames, welding and heating torches, and smoking materials should be prohibited in
any area where an explosive atmosphere may be present.
12
Metal bins with lids must be provided for offcuts, waste or rags. They should be emptied
regularly.
13
A suitable container with a lid should be used for any brushes or scrapers which require
soaking, to remove residues of dangerous substances. This should be placed in a safe area
well away from any possible source of ignition.
EG
IN
TE
11
1.7.3.13 Spraying of dangerous substances

New covering materials, such as paints, varnishes and lacquers, and the techniques for
applying them, have been developed and extensive use of spray painting equipment can
now be seen on construction sites,
Using a spray gun for spraying dangerous substances is most likely to introduce an airborne
explosive mist into the workplace, creating a hazard both to the user and to other workers in
the area. Such work must only be undertaken by fully trained and competent employees and
in a situation where all appropriate precautionary measures are in place. A risk assessment
must be carried out and other controls such as 'permits to work' and 'permits to enter' (for
those people involved in the job, by implication, excluding all others), implemented as
necessary.
Points to be noted
3
Identify the material carefully and always follow the manufacturer's instructions on
preparation, use and application.
Always use the correct type of spraying equipment. Never make do, just because the proper
equipment is not immediately to hand.
QCS 2014

Page 44
If alternative control measures are not available or adequate, protective clothing and
respiratory protective equipment must be used.
Always use the hygiene and washing facilities provided.
Do not introduce ignition sources into the working area.
Do not smoke or use naked flames in the working area.
Always place warning signs in approaches to the area where the work is being carried out,
and at entrance points to areas in which dangerous substances are being used. Use
physical barriers, if necessary, to stop unauthorised persons entering the area.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 45
1.7.3.14 Empty tanks and containers

Bulk tanks and drums
Do not cut or heat any empty tanks, containers or drums unless they have been certificated
as being free of flammable vapours that could explode. Current opinion recommends
reducing the length of time that such certification is valid for. Under most circumstances, the
cutting work should be planned to start immediately the 'gas-free' certificate is issued.
Special care is necessary when demolishing or dismantling disused bulk-tanks. By disturbing

the tank or heating the residues left inside, you may cause an explosive concentration of
vapours.
Entry into any disused tank or vessel that may be regarded as a confined space should be
avoided by doing the work from outside, if possible. Often, there will be a need to clean
residues and if entry to a confined space is unavoidable, a safe system of work must be
followed and the work carried out under a Permit to Work system.
There are a number of factors to consider when the work involves large tanks. The first
would be what the contents were. Oil storage tanks may have held so called 'heavy fuel oil'
and these will undoubtedly have been insulated. It is quite likely that the insulation system
will have been asbestos. If the tanks once held petrol, it may have been leaded fuel. This
means that the exposure to lead fumes during cutting should be considered.
It is normal for large tanks, whether above or below ground, to be emptied and cleaned by a
specialist contractor before dismantling. The contents are generally removed by a large
vacuum tanker and then the inside of the tank is steam cleaned. Most of this work can be
carried out from the outside and it is only to carry out the final clean that entry is required.
Operatives carrying out this final clean must be trained in confined space working and
provided with all the normal gas detector, rescue equipment and PPE that would be
expected for confined space working.
Having been cleaned, the tank is tested and a 'gas-free' certificate issued. It should then be
cut up as soon as possible. The implication of not doing so is that it is practically impossible
to completely clean a tank, particularly where its construction incorporates internal ribs,
welds and other internal features which could harbour residue of the content. These may
well become fume and if the concentration becomes high enough then the atmosphere
inside the tank may become explosive if ignited.
It is important to be aware that even so called cold cutting techniques such as hydraulic
shears may cause sparks and so leaving the cutting even until the next day is simply not an
option.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
1.7.3.15 Fire
1
Fires involving flammable liquids usually fall into one of two categories:
(a)
flowing liquid fires
(b)
contained liquid fires.
Powder extinguishers are the most suitable type for tackling a flowing liquid fire. The use of
foam or carbon dioxide extinguishers may be effective on a small, flowing liquid fire.
Foam extinguishers are the most suitable type for use on contained liquid fires. Powder or
carbon dioxide extinguishers may also be used, but operators should be aware of the short
duration of small carbon dioxide extinguishers and the possibility of reignition of any residual
vapours being given off when an ignition source is still present.
QCS 2014

Page 46
DO NOT USE A WATER EXTINGUISHER FOR ANY FIRE INVOLVING HIGHLY

FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS, BECAUSE THE WATER WILL CAUSE A VIOLENT REACTION
AND MAKE THE LIQUID OVERFLOW.
Suitable portable fire extinguishers should, wherever possible, be sited in pairs (so as to
minimise the risk of failure) and in strategic positions adjacent to the store.
Colour of fire extinguishers

6
Colour-coding by agent or medium (see below) enables a trained person to rapidly identify
the type of extinguisher needed in an emergency.
Colour of panel
Water
Red
Foam
Cream
Powder (all types)
Blue
Carbon dioxide
Black
Wet chemical
Yellow
AT
IO
AL
Extinguishing medium
Other information concerning its use may also be displayed on the body of the extinguisher.
Training in the correct type of extinguisher to use and the safe way to operate fire-fighting
equipment is essential and should be undertaken by all staff who work with dangerous
substances. The use of the wrong extinguisher in the wrong way would have serious
consequences.
Advice on training can be obtained from extinguisher manufacturers or the local fire station.
EG
IN
TE
QCS 2014

Page 47

1.7.3 Appendix 1
Safety questionnaire
1
This questionnaire has been worded so that all the correct answers are YES. If you answer
'NO' to any question perhaps you need to give the matter more attention.
Dangerous substances
General
Does it indicate that other methods of managing the situation are required, such as a method
statement or Permit to Work system?
Have employees been made aware of the significant findings of the risk assessment?
AL
IO
Storage in the open air

Is the base of the store built of concrete and sloped?
Is there a low level sill surrounding the base?
Is there a ramp for access to the store over the sill?
Is a sump provided to catch any leakages or spillages and is the capacity large enough to
contain any leakages or spillages?
Is there a roof or cover over the store to protect the contents from direct sunlight?
10
Is there an adequate separation distance between the store and adjacent buildings or
boundaries?
11
Are appropriate signs displayed, for example 'Highly Flammable' or 'Flashpoint Below 32C'?
12
Are the correct fire extinguishers provided and positioned adjacent to the store?
EG
IN
TE
AT
Storage in buildings
13
Is the storage building used exclusively for the storage of dangerous substances?
14
If the store is part of a multi-purpose building, is there adequate fire separation from the rest
of the building?
15
Are appropriate signs displayed, for example 'Highly Flammable' or 'Flashpoint Below 32C'?
16
Is there a sill across the doorway to prevent leakages or spillages reaching the open air and
is the capacity large enough to contain any leakages or spillages?
17
Is there adequate cross-ventilation at both high and low level?
18
Is there the required separation distance between the store and adjacent buildings or
boundaries?
QCS 2014

Page 48
Storage at the place of work

19
Is there a lockable metal cabinet available to store small quantities for daily use?
20
Is it marked with appropriate safety signs?
Decanting
Is decanting done only in the open air or in a fire-resisting building?
22
Is the decanting located away from any source of heat or ignition?
23
Are dangerous substances only decanted into small, correctly marked containers with
effective closures?
24
Are funnels correctly used to assist decanting?
25
Are drip trays positioned to catch any leakages or spillages?
26
Are suitable absorbents or spill kits available to contain any spillage?
27
Are metal bins available for used absorbents to be placed in?
28
Are these bins emptied regularly?
29
Is contaminated absorbent safely, carefully and properly disposed of?
AT
IO
AL
21
Use of dangerous substances
Where dangerous substances are used, is adequate ventilation provided?
31
If there is a need for mechanical extraction, is the electric motor out of the line of discharge
of the fumes?
32
Are there signs stating 'No Smoking' or 'Naked Lights'?
33
Are metal waste bins with lids provided for dangerous substances that are no longer
required?
34
Are the correct warning notices provided?
35
Are serviceable fire extinguishers of the correct type provided and positioned adjacent to the
workplace?
36
Are containers with lids provided for cleaning brushes?
EG
IN
TE
30
Spraying
37
Have the materials in use been clearly identified?
38
Are the correct precautions in relation to use and storage being observed?
39
Is the correct spraying equipment being used?
40
Is the correct protective clothing and equipment, including RPE, being worn?
41
Are the necessary precautions being taken to avoid all ignition risks?
QCS 2014

Page 49
42
Are warning notices correctly displayed?
43
Are barriers in use if necessary?
44
Are serviceable fire extinguishers of the correct type provided and positioned adjacent to the
workplace?
Empty tanks and containers

Are the necessary precautions being taken against the risk of explosion in storage tanks
awaiting demolition or dismantling?
46
Has an explosive gas-free certificate been obtained prior to any hot work? (NB Check how
long the certificate is valid for.)
47
Is a Permit to Work system used when work is being carried out on disused or redundant
tanks?
48
Are authorising Permits to Work to deal with all the confined space issues being obtained
before any entry into a tank is made?
49
Has thought been given to the possibility of contamination around the tank from leakage or
spillage?
50
Has advice been sought from a competent person before work begins?
AT
IO
AL
45
Fire
TE
Are the correct types of fire extinguisher provided and suitably positioned adjacent to the
store or workplace?
52
Have the staff been correctly trained to use them?
53
Are there procedures to call the fire and rescue service?
54
Is there a telephone available to call the fire and rescue service?
55
Is the address of the site displayed on prominent notices conveniently located in offices and
near telephones?
56
Are suitable absorbents or spill kits available to contain any spillage?
EG
IN
51
QCS 2014

Page 50

1.7.4
Liquefied Petroleum Gases

1.7.4.1 Key points
A risk assessment must be carried out before dangerous substances are stored, transported
or used. In some cases a method statement and/or a permit to work will also be required.
Liquefied petroleum gases (LPG) are normally found as compressed liquids, usually of
commercial butane or propane.
LPG is a colourless odourless liquid that floats on water but vaporises to form a gas which is
heavier than air. A stenching agent is normally added.
A release or spillage of LPG can form a large vapour cloud of flammable gas capable of
ignition from some distance.
LPG is stored on site in fixed tanks, refillable cylinders or non-refillable disposable cylinders
(cartridges).
Storage should be in secure, non-combustible, well ventilated areas away from other risks
and sources of ignition.
All LPG cylinders and regulators for use with fixed heaters, cookers and lighting in site huts
must be kept outside and piped in using rigid copper piping.
Staff who work with LPG must be suitably trained in the hazards and use of LPG, such as
not rolling cylinders. .
In the event of a leak, do not attempt to operate electrical apparatus or switches.
10
If a fire breaks out that involves LPG cylinders:
AT
IO
AL
immediately inform the fire and rescue service of the whereabouts of all cylinders on
site, including details of whether they are full or empty
(b)
if in any doubt as to the safety of the overall situation, evacuate the site and put a
security cordon in place.
IN
TE
(a)
EG
LPG is a mixture of hydrocarbons that are a gas or vapour under normal conditions of
temperature and pressure, but can be turned into a liquid by either the application of
pressure or the reduction of temperature.
LPG can be found in numerous locations, in various sizes of cylinder and can be put to a
variety of uses on building and construction sites. Uses range from the heating of bitumen
boilers, site huts and offices to providing a fuel for hand tools and cutting equipment.
If used properly and safely, LPG is a convenient and valuable source of energy. Misuse or
carelessness can cause serious accidents.
Legislative requirements
1.7.4.3 Dangerous Substances and Explosive Atmospheres

1
The nature of LPG, particularly in its gaseous form, will result in areas where it is used or
stored coming within the requirements of these Regulations.

1
All work activities must be the subject of a risk assessment, including those that involve the
QCS 2014

Page 51
use of LPG and other flammable substances. These Regulations place a requirement on
every Contractor to make a suitable and sufficient assessment of every work activity in order
to identify any hazard that employees or any other person might encounter as a result of the
work being carried out.
2
Once those hazards have been identified, it is the Contractor's duty to put control measures
into place in order to remove or reduce those hazards as far as is reasonably practicable.

1
These Regulations specify the measures to be taken to prevent the risks of fire, explosion or
exposure to any substance likely to cause asphyxiation on construction sites.
These Regulations specify the measures to be taken to detect and fight fires in relation to
work carried out on construction sites.
AL

Any equipment used in conjunction with the use, handling or storage of LPG is classified as
work equipment under these Regulations. Every Contractor must ensure that all persons
who work with or supervise others in the use of LPG or LPG equipment have available to
them adequate health and safety information and, where appropriate, written instructions
regarding the use of that equipment.
Equipment that is used in conjunction with LPG which is hired-in or purchased second-hand
must also comply with the requirements of the Regulations.
Every Contractor must ensure that all persons who work with, or supervise others in the use
of LPG equipment, have received adequate training for the purposes of health and safety,
and be aware of any risks in the use and precautions to be taken in the case of an accident.
TE
AT
IO
IN

These Regulations require that, where a risk has been identified by a risk assessment and it
the Contractor must provide and ensure that suitable personal protective equipment is used
by employees. In essence, personal protective equipment (PPE) may only be used as a last
resort. In deciding which type of PPE to issue, the Contractor must take into account the risk
that the PPE is being used to protect against, and ensure that the PPE will fit the wearer and
allow them to work safely.
If more than one item of PPE is being used, the Contractor must make sure that individual
items of PPE are compatible so that each item does not adversely affect the performance of
another.
While the Contractor must, as far as reasonably practicable, ensure that any personal
protective equipment supplied is worn, employees must ensure that they wear the equipment
provided and know the procedures for reporting loss or defects to the Contractor.
In the context of these Regulations they are preventing:
EG
(a)
skin contact with LPG in its liquid form
(b)
jets of gaseous LPG entering the eyes or impacting on the skin
(c)
the inhalation of gaseous LPG when a released cloud of LPG is confined. Entry into
such areas should only be undertaken by trained persons when absolutely necessary.
QCS 2014

Page 52

1
Every Contractor should, as far as is reasonably practicable, avoid the need for employees
to undertake any manual handling operations at work which may involve a risk of injury.
1.7.4.9 The Control of Substances Hazardous to Health

1
These Regulations do not apply to LPG by virtue of its flammable nature, but they will apply
by virtue of its other hazardous properties.
Definitions
2
Liquefied petroleum gas means any commercial butane, commercial propane or a mixture
of the two.
AL
Commercial butane
This is usually stored in blue cylinders and is generally known as Camping Gaz or Calor
Gas.
It consists mainly of butane and butane isomers. The remaining components are
predominantly propane and propane isomers, pentane and pentane isomers.
Because of the low vapour pressure, butane cylinders are not generally used outside.
AT
IO
Commercial propane
This is usually stored in vessels or in red cylinders.
It consists mainly of propane and propane isomers. The remaining components are
predominantly butane and butane isomers, ethane and ethane isomers.
IN
TE
LPG properties
LPG is a colourless, odourless liquid or gas which normally has a smell or 'stench' added
before distribution.
As a liquid, it is lighter than water and will float before evaporating.
10
As a gas, it is approximately twice as heavy as air and will sink and flow into sumps and
underground excavations or workings. It will also sink into drains but, because its density is
approximately half that of water, it will not flow through drains which are water trapped.
11
It is capable of ignition at some distance from the original leak. The resulting flame can travel
back to the source of the leak.
12
Any release of liquid under pressure to the atmosphere results in its rapid conversion to gas.
This gas has a volume of about 230 (butane) and 270 (propane) times that of the liquid.
13
The expansion during a rapid release of pressure results in a rapid drop of temperature,
which for propane can approach its boiling point of 45C. Leakage of liquid LPG will result in
the release of large volumes of highly flammable gases.
14
For example, 1 litre of liquid propane spilt in a workplace will evaporate to make
approximately 270 litres of gas. If it is diluted with air to 2%, this will give 13,750 cubic litres
of an explosive gas/air mixture - enough to fill a room 3 m x 2.3 m x 2 m.
EG
QCS 2014

Page 53
Properties of liquefied petroleum gases
Property
Commercial butane
0.57
Commercial
propane
0.5
1.5
Litres per tonne
1745
1995
Boiling point
-2C
-45C
1.5 bar
7.0 bar
1:230
1:270
1.9%-8.5%
2.0%-10.9%
Density in comparison to water

Density in comparison to air
Pressure at 15C
Expansion ratio
Levels of flammability
The use of LPG equipment in confined spaces, and small, poorly ventilated spaces (such as
basement and sub-basement boiler houses, toilets and kitchens) can give rise to a highly
flammable or explosive atmosphere, if the equipment should leak.
AL
15
IO
Flammability
Following mechanical failure of LPG equipment, or any other event which causes the release
of LPG, the resulting gas will form a flammable mixture with air at gas concentrations
between approximately 2% and 10%.
17
Ignition of released LPG, where the concentration exceeds 2%, can result in fire or, if
confined, an explosion. If a leak does not ignite immediately, and the LPG and air mixture
drifts from the point of release, it will gradually become more diluted.
18
However, should the concentration still exceed 2% and ignition occur, this could cause a
flash or cloud fire-back to the point of release.
19
A leak of LPG may be noticed either by the smell or the noise of the gas escaping. There
may also be condensation or frosting on the outside of the cylinder.
20
Leaks must not be traced with a lighted match or naked flame as this would almost certainly
cause an explosion. Only soapy water or a proprietary leak-finding fluid should be used.
21
If it is suspected that LPG has leaked inside a building, no attempt should be made to touch
any electrical apparatus.
22
DO NOT turn light switches or sockets or any other electrical appliance either ON or
OFF.
23
Open all doors and windows, if it is safe to do so, and leave immediately. Do not re-enter the
building until advice has been sought and you are told it is safe to do so.
EG
IN
TE
AT
16
Workplace exposure limits

24
25
The maximum levels of exposure for LPG, are:

(a)
1,000 ppm (0.1 %) for long-term exposure (reference period: 8 hours)
(b)
1,250 ppm (0.125%) for short-term exposure (reference period: 15 minutes).
During any maintenance work involving release of pressure, especially in confined spaces,
care must be taken that these exposure limits are not exceeded.
QCS 2014

Page 54
Inhalation
26
LPG gas is not toxic, but at concentration levels above about 10,000 ppm (1%) in air,
propane becomes a slight narcotic. At higher levels, it becomes an asphyxiant by displacing
oxygen.
27
In a sufficiently high concentration, a person will suffocate and die.
Cold burns
The release of liquid propane onto unprotected skin will cause cold burns. This is due to the
rapid vaporisation of the liquid, withdrawing heat from the affected area of the body.
29
The release of liquid, or significant amounts of gas at vessel pressure, can also cause the
adjacent fittings to cool. This may be sufficient to cause cold burns if the fittings are
subsequently touched by unprotected hands.
30
Suitable skin and eye protection must be worn whenever there is the possibility of a release
of liquid LPG.
31
In the event of a cold burn, treat as for a bum from a hot object. Flush with copious
amounts of cold water and seek medical help.
IO
AL
28
AT
Environmental hazards
A small unignited release of LPG would not pose a serious danger to the environment.
33
The gas, being heavier than air, will 'roll' and sink to the lowest point, such as basements or
excavations. This may result, if in the flammable range, in a fire or explosion, even if a naked
source of flame is a considerable distance from the original leak.
34
A fire and explosion would be instantaneous on ignition and would be limited to immediate
damage. The fire might devour only escaping LPG and then the danger will have passed
with no lasting environmental damage.
35
The fire will bum fast and the explosion will be intense, but both may be over very quickly.
EG
IN
TE
32
1.7.4.10 Storage
LPG can be stored on construction sites in one of three ways:

(a)
in fixed storage tanks
(b)
in refillable cylinders
(c)
in non-refillable cylinders (i.e. disposable cylinders).
Fixed storage tanks

2
Whilst most LPG used on construction sites can be found in cylinders, on some larger sites
there may be a need for bulk storage. In view of the large capacity, it is essential that the
positioning of any storage tank is carefully planned and discussed with the local Fire
Prevention Officer.
LPG tanks should be positioned on a level concrete base to provide a stable foundation. For
short-term installations it may be satisfactory to stand the tank on concrete slabs, but advice
must be sought from the tank or gas suppliers.
Tanks should not be sited close to any ditches, cellars or drains, and delivery and
QCS 2014

Page 55
emergency vehicles must easily reach them.

5
All access roads must be clear of obstruction and the entire area kept free from weeds and
other vegetation.
Tanks over 2,250 litres liquid capacity should be electrically bonded and earthed.
All bulk storage tanks must have good all-round ventilation. On non-secure sites, tanks
should be protected against vandalism by a chain link fence at least 2 m high.
Motorway type crash barriers should surround the installation to minimise damage by motor
vehicles. Installations must be clearly labelled:
HIGHLY FLAMMABLE LPG: NO SMOKING OR NAKED LIGHTS

Signs must conform to BS 5499 Safety Signs and Colours.
AL
Separation
Adequate separation must be maintained between bulk storage tanks and adjacent buildings
or boundaries.
11
As a guide, the distances detailed in the table should be followed:
Separation distances of bulk LPG tanks

Gas capacity
Water capacity
litres
450
99
2.5
451-2,250
100-495
2,251-9,000
496-1,980
7.5
EG
"1-4
metres
IN
0.2-1
Minimum distance*
gallons
TE
tonnes
Under 0.2
AT
IO
10
"Minimum distance from boundaries, buildings or sources of ignition

Where possible, LPG storage areas should not be positioned under power cables.
13
Where this is unavoidable, the minimum distances between the extremity of the vessel or
cylinders to the nearest cable should be:
12
(a)
up to 1 kV - 1.5 m
(b)
1 kV or above- 10 m.
1.7.4.11 Cylinders
Handling
1
Care must be taken when moving cylinders around the site, especially by hand or on rough
ground. A full 47 kg cylinder has a total mass of about 90 kg and, before moving by hand,
requires a manual handling assessment. Cylinders must not be rolled, even when empty.
Cylinders should be handled with care and, wherever reasonably practicable, moved using
suitable equipment. They should not be moved unprotected in dumper trucks or on forklift
trucks. The valve on a cylinder should not be used for lifting or to lever the cylinder into
position. Damage to the valve can result in a non-controllable release of LPG under high
QCS 2014

Page 56
pressure. Throwing cylinders from any height or dropping them is prohibited, as in such
circumstances damage to the valve, shroud and cylinders is even more likely.
Damaged cylinders
3
Before use, cylinders should be examined. Any damaged or faulty cylinder should not be
used. The cylinder should be labelled and put in a safe place for return to the supplier.
If a cylinder is found to be leaking (usually from the valve) and the leak cannot be stopped,
the cylinder should be carefully removed to a well-ventilated open space free from sources of
ignition. It should be left with the leak uppermost, marked faulty, and notices displayed
prohibiting smoking or other naked lights. General access should be prevented by barriers or
otherwise. The supplier of the cylinder and, if necessary, the fire and rescue service, should
be informed immediately.
Under no circumstances should attempts be made to dismantle or repair defective cylinders.
AL
Refillable cylinders
A level base of compacted earth, concrete or paving slabs should be provided and
surrounded by a secure chain link fence at least 2 m high. A hard standing should be
provided for the delivery and dispatch of cylinders. The area should be kept weed and
vegetation free. If the compound is more than 12 m square, two exits should be provided in
opposite corners of the compound. If less than 12 m square, one gate will suffice. Gates
should open outwards and always be left unlocked when someone is in the compound.
There should be sufficient shelter to prevent cylinders from being exposed to extremes of
weather.
Signs must be clearly displayed indicating the presence of LPG, and prohibiting smoking and
the use of any naked flame in the
area of the store.
LPG cylinders must be stored with

their valves uppermost. They must be
stored away from oxygen, highly
flammable liquids, oxidisers, toxic or
corrosive gases or substances. A
distance of at least 3 m must be kept
between LPG cylinders and other
such substances, although they may
be kept in the same compound.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Separation
9
Any store for refillable LPG cylinders must be located away from boundaries, buildings, fixed
sources of ignition or electrical equipment by at least the distances detailed in the table
below.
LPG storage (including empties) Separation from building/boundary
under 1,000kg
3m
10
1,001-4,000 kg
4m
The store must be sited at least 3 m away from any cellars, drains or other excavations into
which a leak of gas would collect.
11
No cylinder should be stored within 1.5 m of any compound fencing.
12
If only a small compound is used, 3 m x 3 m for example, cylinders may be stored against
QCS 2014

Page 57
the inside of the compound fencing, providing this fence is not within 3 m of any boundary.
13
Empty cylinders must be stored with their valves securely closed to prevent any residue of
gas escaping, or air being drawn into the cylinder.
14
Stocks should be grouped in batches of not more than 1000 kg and batches separated by a
minimum 1.5 m gangway.
15
Where lighting is necessary, it should be mounted well above ground level and not less than
2 m above the cylinders.
16
Any equipment not in use, such as portable hand equipment, should be isolated so as not to
be accessible to trespassers. Any cylinders not required should be returned to the storage
compound or other secure position.
Non-refillable cylinders
Non-refillable LPG cylinders for use with small portable equipment such as blowlamps may
be stored in a lockable metal container.
18
Care should be taken when changing cylinders to ensure that connections are correctly
made and that there are no leaks.
19
Always dispose of empty containers safely and in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Do not, under any circumstances, puncture or throw 'empty' cylinders
onto a fire.
AT
IO
AL
17
Additional storage details for small LPG containers

These are often non-refillable (e.g. cartridges) but small refillable cylinders (e.g. Primus)
should also be stored in the same way.
21
Although only containing small quantities of gas, they must not be stored in occupied site
huts.
22
They should be kept in a secure, non-combustible, well-ventilated external enclosure. The

store should have warning signs: 'Highly Flammable - LPG' and prohibition signs: 'No
smoking/naked lights'.
23
The disposal of cartridges after use requires care as they still contain gas. Under no
circumstances should cartridges be thrown on fires. Small numbers of empty cartridges may
be disposed of by including them in normal refuse.
EG
IN
TE
20
General transportation of LPG cylinders

24
When loaded onto vehicles, cylinders must be kept upright and secured. Vehicles must be
equipped with a dry powder extinguisher and a first-aid kit. They must also display warning
notices.
25
Do not overload the vehicle and, if using a closed vehicle, ensure that any cylinders are
removed from the vehicle at the end of each journey.
26
If a cylinder leaks during a journey, close the valve immediately. If this is not possible, move
the vehicle to open ground away from buildings and people, and inform the emergency
services.
QCS 2014

Page 58
Use of LPG in cylinders

27
Everyone with any responsibility for the storage and transportation of LPG must understand
the characteristics and hazards of the LPG product they are using.
28
They should understand the fundamentals of fire fighting and control of leakages. They
should also have knowledge of the procedures for dealing with emergencies.
29
It is not possible to cover all aspects of the use and application of LPG, but the following
checklist gives the main points for its safe use and handling. Please note that this list should
not be regarded as exhaustive.
Never use or store a gas cylinder on its side, unless it is a special cylinder for use on
LPG-fuelled plant and vehicles. Liquefied gas may escape, causing concentrations of
gas, and operatives may suffer frostbite because of the very low temperature of the
escaping liquid.
(b)
Propane cylinders must never be stored indoors because any leak will lead to large
concentrations of explosive mixtures.
(c)
Only hoses suitable for use with LPG installations or appliances should be used and
these should be inspected frequently for wear.
(d)
Cylinders must not be dropped during handling, nor brought into violent contact with
other cylinders or adjacent objects.
(e)
Before and after use, valve protection caps and plastic thread caps or plugs should be
fitted to prevent accidental leakage.
(f)
LPG cylinders should not be used below ground level as any leakage of gas will
collect at the lowest point and will not disperse.
(g)
Regulators must be handled with care. Damaged regulators should not be used, but
should be replaced or sent for specialist repair.
(h)
Hoses and fittings should be examined before use. Damaged items must be replaced.
(i)
LPG cylinders are fitted with a left-hand thread or push-on connection. Union nuts and
couplers have grooves on the outside corners of the nuts confirming this. Always use
the correct size spanner to tighten or loosen connections. Hand tight connections will
permit leaks.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
Left-hand threaded nut showing grooves on face corners
30
Over-tightening will damage threads and cause leaks. Checks for leaks should be carried out
using soapy water or other proprietary detector.
31
NEVER USE A MATCH OR OTHER NAKED FLAME.
32
Before connecting any cylinder of LPG to equipment, it is essential that all fires, flames or
other potential sources of ignition, including any smoking materials, are extinguished. Where
it is reasonably practicable to do so, cylinders should be changed in the open air.
33
If a leak is found, the gas supply must be turned off at the cylinder immediately.
34
Flexible hoses should be in good condition and be protected or steel braided if they are likely
to be subjected to damage by abrasion. Hoses must conform to BS 3212 (Specification for
QCS 2014

Page 59
flexible rubber tubing, rubber hose and rubber hose assemblies for use in LPG vapour phase
and LPG air installations).
35
Before use, inspections should be carried out on all LPG appliances and equipment. The
inspection should cover testing for leaks, cleaning, adjusting, checking hoses, hose clips and
ferrules.
36
Empty cylinders should always be treated as new ones and returned to a properly
designated central storage area for collection. Under no circumstances should an LPG
cylinder, either full or empty, be left around the site or buried during site operations.
Regulators
LPG regulators should be suitable for the equipment with which they are to be used. They
should be suitable for either propane or butane and be set to the correct pressure. They
should be capable of passing the correct flow capacity.
38
It is dangerous to use regulators set at the incorrect pressure.
AL
37
1.7.4.12 Bitumen boilers and cauldrons
The majority of, if not all, bitumen boilers or cauldrons are fuelled by LPG to melt the block
bitumen. Such a boiler or cauldron must be sited on a level non-flammable base, away from
areas where site traffic may damage hoses or gas cylinders.
Ensure that any LPG cylinder is at least 3 m away from the boiler or cauldron to which it is
attached.
Full cylinders, not attached, should be kept at least 6 m away from the boiler or cauldron and
protected from heat.
Supply hoses should be checked for crushing, damage to the metal braiding or impregnation
with bitumen. Any unserviceable hose must be replaced.
The sequence for lighting is as follows:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Remove the burner from the boiler or cauldron.
(b)
Have the source of ignition ready before turning on the gas.
(c)
(d)
(a)
Light the burner, ensuring that the gas is turned on slowly.

Replace the burner beneath the boiler or cauldron.
If frost forms on the outside of the cylinder, the gas flow rate is too high. Either use a smaller
burner or couple two or more cylinders together by means of a manifold.
Never leave a bitumen boiler or cauldron unattended when the burner is alight.
Never move a bitumen boiler or cauldron with the burner alight.
If a bitumen boiler or cauldron is overfilled, overflows or boils over, the LPG cylinder valves
must be turned off immediately. Any spillage should be contained using dry sand or earth
and then left until cool. No attempt should be made to remove or recover any spillage of hot
bitumen.
10
A dry powder extinguisher, of a minimum 4.5 kg in size, should be provided whenever a

bitumen boiler or cauldron is used.
QCS 2014

Page 60
1.7.4.13 Gas-operated hand tools

1
(a)
disposable
(b)
refillable.
These cylinders come in various shapes, sizes and colours, depending on the manufacturer.
They range in size from the very small (0.5 kg) to the very large (47 kg).
AT
IO
AL
There are two types of LPG cylinder available for use with portable tools:
Range of LPG cylinder sizes
All LPG cylinders used with portable equipment should be positioned upright and secured (if
possible). Cylinders used with cutting equipment should always be placed on purpose-made
trolleys.
Before changing a cylinder, always make sure that all valves are closed.
Hoses must never be kinked to try to shut off gas when changing torches. It does not work
and can lead to a gas escape.
Always replace valve protection caps and plastic thread caps.
Flames from portable tools must not be allowed to play on LPG cylinders.
When work has been completed, turn off the cylinder valves and allow the flame from the
portable torch to burn out.
Closure of torch valves rather than cylinder valves will retain gas in hoses which, if damaged,
will allow gas to escape.
10
Hoses and torches must never be put into site toolboxes while still attached to the cylinder.
11
Manufacturers' operating pressures must be strictly observed and must NEVER be

exceeded.
12
Do not interfere with preset pressure regulators.
EG
IN
TE
1.7.4.14 LPG for use in site huts and other small buildings
1
All LPG cylinders and regulators for use with fixed heaters, cookers and lighting within site
QCS 2014

Page 61
huts, must be kept outside and the gas supply piped in using rigid copper piping. The use of
flexible hosing is permitted only between the cylinders and change-over valves or manifolds,
and for the final connection to appliances, but this must be kept as short as possible.
All pipework should be exposed and easily accessible for inspection, but located to prevent
accidental damage. Any work on LPG pipework or other parts of a fixed installation, including
testing, must only be carried out by appropriately trained persons.
Ventilation for heaters and cookers must be permanent and adequate. It should be divided
equally between vents at high and low level.
A two-burner cooker in a site hut needs approximately 150 mm x 150 mm ventilation. A 3 kW

convector heater needs approximately 225 mm x 225 mm ventilation.
Inspections of all appliances must be carried out before use. If soot forms or smells occur, do
not use or allow the appliance to be used. Find out the reasons for the problem and have it
put right.
AL
Enclosed spaces
Before using LPG equipment in an enclosed space, it is essential to carry out a risk
assessment. It is essential to ensure that there is adequate ventilation, which may have to
be forced. This is necessary to ensure full combustion and also to make certain that the
products of combustion, other fumes and excess oxygen from any cutting apparatus are
removed. Proper safety precautions and atmospheric monitoring should be considered.
Wherever practicable, cylinders used with operations in confined spaces should be located
in a safe area, preferably in the open air. The supply pressure should be reduced to the
lowest practicable level on leaving the source of supply.
Where cylinders are used below ground level, the number must be kept as small as possible.
All cylinders and hoses should be removed as soon as work has finished or if it is interrupted
for a substantial period, e.g. overnight.
IN
TE
AT
IO
EG
Fire
Action in an emergency
Instructions for dealing with incidents involving LPG will vary for each situation. The most
important thing is to avoid endangering anyone's life. The following actions should be taken
by anyone discovering a fire.
(a)
In case of fire, no matter how small, call the Civil Defence (Fire Department).
(b)
Whilst waiting for the fire and rescue service to arrive (if it can be done safely), turn off
all cylinder valves to cut off the fuel supply and remove the cylinders from the area.
(c)
If the actions in 2 above cannot be completed safely, and thereby starve the fire of
further LPG, evacuate the site and impose a cordon to stop anyone inadvertently
entering the area.
(d)
Never attempt to use a water extinguisher to put out an LPG fire. Dry powder
extinguishers are the most suitable type to use. The use of the wrong extinguisher in
the wrong way could have serious consequences.
(e)
Training in the correct type of fire-fighting equipment to use, and the safe way to
operate it, should be undertaken by all staff who work with LPG. These staff must be
trained to recognise when the situation is getting out of control and they should also
evacuate the area.
(f)
When the fire and rescue service arrives, inform the Fire Officer of the situation
QCS 2014

Page 62
including:
(i)
the location and contents of all the cylinders
(i)
details of any security cordon that you have implemented
(ii)
confirmation that all people who were known to be in the area have been
accounted for or details of anyone that is unaccounted for, and
(iii)
if possible and required, offer them the data information sheet relating to the
cylinder(s) involved.
Remember
that cylinders fitted with pressure relief valves can produce gas jets which will extend a
considerable distance.
(h)
if cylinders are exposed to a severe fire or are engulfed in flames, no attempt should
be made to fight the fire. Evacuate everyone from the area.
(i)
where a flame from a leaking gas cylinder is extinguished but the valve is still open,
gas will continue to escape and there will be a danger of a gas cloud forming and the
risk of an explosion.
(j)
any cylinder involved in a fire should be clearly labeled that it has been involved in a
fire and removed from the area to a safe place. Contact the suppliers -they will give
advice and arrange for the cylinder(s) to be collected,
AT
IO
AL
(g)
Instructions concerning emergency procedures should be clearly displayed and all

employees should be made aware of them.
11
Data information sheets are available from product manufacturers giving advice in case of an
accident involving LPG cylinders. A copy of each sheet should be available for inspection
and those sheets relating to the cylinders involved should be given to upon request the Civil
Defence (Fire Department).
TE
10
IN

Selected and suitable employees should be trained in the use of fire-fighting equipment.
Advice on the training of staff can be obtained from the LPG supplier or fire and rescue
service.
Portable fire extinguishers, sited in pairs to minimise the risk of failure, should be positioned
at strategic points wherever LPG is stored or used. As a general guide, no fewer than two
4.5 kg dry powder extinguishers or equivalent should be provided for every 20 large
cylinders (47 kg) stored.
EG
1.7.4.16 Training
1
Most accidents involving LPG are due to ignorance of basic safety precautions.
All persons using LPG cylinders, tools or equipment should be suitably instructed in the
hazards associated with LPG, and the precautions to be taken in its use.
An LPG safety questionnaire is attached at Appendix 1.
QCS 2014

Page 63

1.7.4 Appendix 1
LPG safety questionnaire
1
This questionnaire has been worded so that all the correct answers are YES. If you answer
'NO' to any question you may need to give the matter more attention.
Storage
Has specialist advice been sought prior to the location of fixed or moveable storage tanks?
Is there the required separation distance between the storage tanks and adjacent buildings
or boundaries?
Is the base supporting the tanks level?
Is the base paved or concrete?
Is there a chain link fence surrounding the tank?
Are there barriers to prevent collision?
Are the correct warning signs displayed?
10
Are there outward opening exits from the cylinder storage compound?
11
Are the exits non-self locking?
12
Is the area kept weed free?
13
Are all access areas being kept clear?
14
Are the correct type of fire extinguishers provided?
15
Are all cylinders stored upright?
16
Are the LPG cylinders 3 m from cylinders containing any other products?
17
Are cylinders being handled safely?
18
Is the LPG being grouped in not more than 1,000kg?
19
Are there 1.5 m wide gangways?
20
Is lighting provided?
21
Is lighting at least 2 m above the tallest stack?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Transportation
22
Have drivers received adequate training?
23
Are cylinders transported upright and secured?
QCS 2014

Page 64
24
Is the vehicle equipped with the correct type of fire extinguisher?
25
Is the vehicle equipped with a first-aid kit?
26
Does the vehicle carry suitable warning notices?
27
If using a closed van, are all gas cylinders offloaded at the end of each journey?
Use of LPG cylinders and appliances

Are valve caps and protectors replaced after every use?
29
Are regulators being handled carefully?
30
Is the correct size of spanner being used to tighten connections?
31
Is all equipment, such as hoses and clips, being inspected regularly for leaks?
AL
28
Bitumen boilers and cauldrons
Is there a fire extinguisher of the correct type readily available?
33
Is the boiler or cauldron standing on a non-flammable level base?
34
Is the cylinder in use with the bitumen boiler or cauldron, a minimum of 3 m away?
35
Are any cylinders not in use a minimum of 6 m away?
36
Are hoses inspected regularly for damage or bitumen impregnation?
37
Are cylinders ice-free when the boiler or cauldron is alight?
38
Should manifolds coupling two or more cylinders be used?
39
Are bitumen boilers always attended when alight?
Hand tools
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
32
40
Are cylinders being used in the upright position?
41
Are purpose-made trolleys being used for cylinders used in conjunction with cutting
equipment?
42
Are hand tools being used at the manufacturer's recommended operating pressures?
43
Are connecting hoses being regularly checked for wear and damage?
44
Are cylinder valves being turned off on the completion of work?
45
Site huts and other buildings

46
Are LPG cylinders, supplying heaters and other appliances, fixed outside the building?
47
Is the gas fed into the building by the provision of fixed copper piping?
QCS 2014

Page 65
48
Are fixed installations only installed, modified and by competent engineer?
49
Is the final, short flexible hose as short as possible?
50
Are all pipes in use readily accessible for inspection?
51
Is there plenty of ventilation at high and low levels?
52
Are weekly inspections being carried out on all appliances?
53
Fire precautions
Are written procedures provided and displayed prominently?
55
Is there a telephone available to summon the fire and rescue service?
56
Are the correct types of fire extinguishers provided?
57
Are your staff trained in the use of fire extinguishers?
58
Are your staff and visitors aware of the site emergency evacuation alarm and procedure?
59
Are personnel aware of pressure relief valves?
60
Are product data sheets available?
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
54
QCS 2014

Page 66

1.7.4 Appendix 2
Retrieval of orphaned compressed gas cylinders
The cylinder retrieval arrangements in place for the major national companies are listed below.
Collection company
Contact numbers
AL
Parent company
IO
Notes
If a cylinder is no longer needed, it should be returned to the local dealer of the company
owning the cylinder.
Until such time as they are collected, 'orphaned' cylinders should be stored in a safe and
secure manner.
EG
IN
TE
AT
QCS 2014

Page 67

1.7.5
Vehicle Fuels (including Petrol, Diesel and LPG)

1.7.5.1 Key points
A risk assessment must be carried out before dangerous substances are stored transported
or used; in some cases a method statement and/or a permit to work will also be required.
Petrol is a flammable liquid that can be used for equipment such as generators and stored
on site in small quantities in containers designed for the purpose. It has a flashpoint below
21 C.
Diesel is a heavy mineral oil with a flashpoint much higher than that of petrol and is normally
used as fuel for large commercial vehicles and construction plant.
Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) is a compressed liquid, usually propane or butane, stored in
cylinders. It is commonly used for heating, cooking or powering small vehicles such as
dumper trucks or forklifts. It is heavier than air and has a flashpoint much lower than that of
petrol.
Sources and safe storage of fuels should be recorded and carefully monitored.
Staff who work with flammable fuels must receive training in their safe handling and use prior
to beginning work and must receive regular training in the use of fire extinguishers. Water
must not be used on any liquid fuel fires.
The disposal of waste fuel is likely to be hazardous waste and should be managed
accordingly.
AT
IO
AL
Vehicle fuels are classified as 'dangerous substances'. As such, there will be a risk of fire
involved in their transportation, storage and use.
Wherever flammable liquids are stored or used a list of the substances present should be
maintained, along with details of their quantities and location, which should be readily
available for use by the fire and rescue service.
When used correctly and safely, petrol, diesel and LPG are useful fuels for the engines of
vehicles and plant. When abused, they can cause explosions which can severely burn or
even kill.
EG
IN
TE

1
Contractors are strongly advised to familiarise themselves with the content of Sections G1,
G3 and G4 with regard to:
(a)
the practical aspects of safe transportation, storage and use of dangerous substances
(diesel and petrol) and LPG in the workplace
(b)
general advice on fire fighting, including the selection and use of hand-held fire
extinguishers.
1.7.5.4 Petrol
1
Whilst the majority of construction plant will run on diesel oil, some small items of plant will
have petrol-fuelled engines, for example:
(a)
chainsaws
(b)
small portable generators
QCS 2014

Page 68
(c)
disc cutters.
(d)
there will, therefore, be a need on occasions for petrol to be stored on site. This
assumes that only small quantities of petrol will be stored on site.
Petrol, like many other flammable liquids, can give off large volumes of flammable vapours at
room temperature. These vapours, when mixed with air, can ignite with violent and
devastating consequences. Spilled petrol, if not contained, can flow to a source of ignition
and then flash back to the source of the spillage. It is a dangerous substance to have on site
unless adequate controls are implemented.
Petrol should ideally be stored outdoors to permit the dispersal of fumes from leakage.
However, it is acknowledged that in some circumstances, for example the refurbishment of a
city-centre building which has no open land, it may be necessary to store small quantities of
petrol inside the building.
Petrol should be stored in suitable containers that enable the safe filling of petrol-powered
machinery without spillage. Where necessary a funnel should be made available.
Containers must be robust, have tight fitting lids to prevent the leakage of liquid and vapour
and be otherwise suitable for the purpose. Ideally containers will be of metal construction as
these are more resistant to fire. These are usually of 5 litres capacity and the convention is
that green containers are used for unleaded petrol.
All containers should be clearly labeled "Petroleum Spirit' or 'Highly Flammable' so that
people on site are aware of the contents and any precautions that they must take.
Containers should, where reasonably practicable, be stored in the open air at ground level
(singularly or in stacks). This enables leaks to be quickly seen and any vapours to be easily
dispersed. They should not be stored on the roof of a building.
Where the best option of storing containers outside is not reasonably practicable they may
be kept in suitable storerooms, preferably separate buildings, specifically designed for the
purpose.
Other activities, including filling and emptying containers, must not be carried out in the
designated storage area. This is to prevent other activities that are a higher risk causing a
fire, which then spreads to involve the larger quantities in storage.
10
Any lighting equipment in any installation must conform to BS EN 60079-14 Explosive

atmospheres - electrical installation design, selection and erection.
11
Electrical socket outlets are not permitted within any store where petrol or other flammable
materials are stored.
12
Suitable fire-fighting equipment, such as a foam or dry powder extinguisher conforming to

BS EN 3, must be positioned in close proximity to the store.
13
The store should not be sited under a staircase or other means of escape. A sill should be
provided (not less than 150 mm in height) across the doorway of the store to prevent any
leakage of petrol flowing out, along with measures to prevent any leakage of petrol into the
drains or sewers.
14
The height of the sill should be adequate to contain a spillage of 110% of the volume of the
largest container in the store or 25% of the aggregate capacity, whichever is the greater.
15
All reasonable precautions must be taken to prevent fire or means of ignition being brought
close to any container.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 69
Outdoor storage
16
Petrol must be stored away from other storage areas and processes. There must be a
minimum distance of 2 metres between a petrol storage area and any:
(a)
occupied building
(b)
site boundary
(c)
process area
(d)
fixed sources of ignition
(e)
flammable liquid storage tanks.
Where higher risk activities (processes) are taking place, such as oxyacetylene cutting, the
safety distance should be increased to a minimum of 4 metres.
18
The above distances may be reduced if fire walls to specific dimensions and standards of fire
resistance are built.
19
Any outdoor petrol storage area should be secure both during working hours and at night. It
might be considered that the normal site security arrangements are sufficient or that a
dedicated secure store is required, in which case a welded mesh, palisade or chain-link
fence of 1.8 metres high is the minimum requirement.
20
The features of any petrol storage area should not limit the means of escape in a fire.
21
Storage areas and a space of 1 metre around them will be classified as a Zone 2 hazard
area and as such:
AT
IO
AL
17
any electrical fittings must be of the appropriate standard
(b)
there must be no sources of ignition
(c)
there must be no accumulation of combustible materials such as rubbish or

vegetation.
Where petrol is stored indoors at a place of work, a maximum of 50 litres may be stored. A
risk assessment must be carried out and measures implemented to ensure that so far as is
reasonably practicable, storage is carried out so as to:
22
EG
Indoor storage
IN
TE
(a)
23
(a)
minimise the risks of fire and explosion
(b)
mitigate the effects of any fire and explosion that may occur.
In doing so, the risk assessment must consider the storage area with respect to:
(a)
the absence of any sources of ignition
(b)
effective ventilation
(c)
adequate security
(d)
prohibition of filling equipment inside the storage area
(e)
avoiding spills and dealing with any spills that do occur
(f)
keeping containers closed when not in use.

Page 70
Where significant amounts of petrol will be stored indoors a specially designed storage
building must be constructed. However, given the small quantities of petrol that will be stored
indoors on most construction sites, it is not envisaged that such a structure will be required.
Bulk petrol storage tanks
IN
TE
24
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
Demolition or rebuilding work on a site may involve the removal of old petrol storage tanks.
Before any work can be started to demolish or remove any tanks, they must be certified gasfree and cleaned. This is a hazardous operation and should only be done by skilled specialist
contractors.
26
No attempt must be made by anyone other than a specialist contractor to enter a disused
petrol tank.
27
Note; Lead which has settled into any remaining sludge can be a major health hazard in old
petrol tanks. It may also be present in rust and scale.
28
Where any tank is to be left in temporary disuse, it must be sealed below the pump by
disconnection, and then by stopping the suction pipe. The vent pipe should be left open to
the air.
EG
25
Vehicle petrol tanks

29
No welding, soldering or brazing operations should be performed on any vehicle fuel tank
until it has been properly freed from gas or the contents made inert. This prohibition applies
whether the tank is on or off the vehicle. A competent person should then authorise 'hot
work' on the tank, preferably under a Permit to Work system.
QCS 2014

Page 71
1.7.5.5 Diesel oil

1
The tank must have sufficient strength so that in normal circumstances it will not leak.
Appropriately designed and constructed supports for the tank must be used.
The tank must be so positioned to minimise the risk of impact damage by other vehicles and
should not be placed within 10 metres of a watercourse or within 50 metres of a spring, well
or borehole. The tank should also be positioned with consideration for future maintenance.
The tank must be situated within a secondary containment system (bund wall) which:
has a capacity of 110% or more of the tank's capacity - or, if more than one container
is stored, 110% of the largest container's storage capacity or 25% of the aggregate
capacity, whichever is the greater
(b)
is so constructed that its base and walls are impermeable to oil and water
(c)
is strong enough to withstand being filled with either water or oil
(d)
has walls which cannot be penetrated in any form by tank drainage
(e)
if penetrated by a fill pipe or draw-off pipe, is adequately sealed to prevent leakage
(f)
has valves, sight gauges and vents sited within it.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
External fill pipes and draw-off pipes to the tank(s) should be positioned to minimise impact
damage and, if above ground, should be properly supported. If underground, they should
have no mechanical joints except where accessible.
They should be laid in a duct or sleeve to protect them from physical damage, and be
protected against corrosion.
The whole system should have a leak detection system which should be tested regularly.
IN
TE
EG
Fill pipes
All fill pipes should be fitted with an automatic overfill prevention device if filling takes place
where the tank cannot be kept under constant observation.
All fittings should either be screw type or other fixed type coupling.
Dispensing fuel
10
Where fuel oil is to be dispensed into containers or vehicles, the outlet must be fitted with a
valve or nozzle which closes automatically when not in use, and which cannot be fixed in the
open position unless an automatic cut-off nozzle is used on the end of the hose.
11
The hose and nozzle should be housed in an enclosed secure cabinet with a drip tray when
not in use, or have a lockable valve where the feed leaves the tank. Hoses should be kept
locked or kept within the bund when not in use.
12
Any permanent valve or tap which opens directly from the tank must:
(a)
be located within the secondary containment system (bund wall)
(b)
discharge vertically downwards
(c)
be locked off when not in use.
QCS 2014
13

Page 72
Finally, no vent must discharge outside of the bund in the event of an overfill.
Bulk diesel storage tanks

the storage tank should be of mild steel
(b)
all bulk storage tanks should be placed on concrete or brick cradles
(c)
storage tanks should be protected from impact damage by delivery vehicles or site
traffic
(d)
the tank should be in the open air, on level ground well clear of any openings,
windows or doors
(e)
the tank should be vented at the top
(f)
protective gloves should always be worn when handling diesel oil. Skin contact may
cause irritation leading to dermatitis and infection
(g)
metal storage cans should be kept in a lockable store, which has a sill to prevent any
spillage flowing out. Appropriate warning labels should be displayed prominently on
the store
(h)
a minimum distance of 750 mm between the tank and walls and 600 mm from the
base is recommended to facilitate inspection
(i)
the tank should be marked with its capacity and the type of material stored within it
(j)
ensure that surfaces where deliveries are to be made and oil dispensed are protected
by a surface impermeable to the oil stored and isolated from any drainage system
(k)
protective gloves should always be worn to protect any exposed skin. Contact can
lead to irritation and dermatitis
(l)
metal storage cans should be kept in a lockable store with a sill to prevent spillage
flowing out.
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
IN
14
Mobile bowsers
Any mobile bowser should be fitted with a lock to any tap, valve or pipe through which oil is
discharged and all pipes and valves should be locked shut within the bunded area of the
bowser when not in use.
16
Where the oil is delivered through a permanently attached flexible pipe:
EG
15
(a)
the pipe must be fitted with a hand pump or with a valve at the end which closes
automatically when not in use
(b)
the pump or valve must be fitted with a lock and locked shut when not in use
(c)
the pipe must be fitted with a lockable valve at the end where it is connected to the
bowser and kept locked shut when not in use
(d)
any sight gauge must be fitted with a lockable valve which is locked shut when not in
use.
1.7.5.6 Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG)

1
Every Contractor must ensure that all persons who work with or supervise others in the use
of LPG equipment have available to them adequate health and safety information and,
where appropriate, written instructions relating to the use of that equipment.
Containers of LPG are liable to explode if involved in a fire; pieces of the container may be
projected over considerable distances.
QCS 2014

Page 73
Every Contractor must ensure that all persons who work with, or supervise others in the use
of, LPG equipment, have received adequate training for the purposes of health and safety,
and be aware of any risks in the use and precautions to be taken in the case of an accident.
LPG is used in the building and construction industry as a fuel for small plant vehicles, such
as dumper trucks and forklift trucks.
Only the correct type of cylinder should be used as these are of special construction and
designed specifically to be laid on their side for fitting to the truck and for operation.
The following safety points should be strictly observed:

make sure you have the correct type of cylinder
(b)
make certain it is correctly connected using the correct size of spanner to tighten the
connection
(c)
if you suspect a leak, do not use a lighted match or other naked flame. Only use soapy
water or other proprietary leak detection fluid
EG
(a)
(d)
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
make sure all cylinder valves are turned off before you attempt to change the cylinder
(e)
never interfere with preset reducing valves
(f)
manufacturers' recommended operating pressures should never be exceeded
(g)
store additional cylinders safely
(h)
only keep on site the minimum quantity of LPG that is needed for effective operations.
LPG cylinders are fitted with a left-hand thread or push-on connection. Union nuts and
couplers have grooves on the outside corners of the nuts confirming this. Always use the
correct size spanner to tighten or loosen connections. Hand-tight connections will permit
leaks.
QCS 2014

Page 74
Left-hand threaded nut showing grooves on corners
Storage of LPG cylinders

All LPG cylinders not in use, empty cylinders awaiting return to the supplier and spare
cylinders should be kept securely.
LPG cylinders should be stored above ground level well away from drains and other
low lying areas.
(b)
Stores in the open air should be sited as far from buildings as possible.
(c)
LPG stores in buildings should be accessible directly from the outside and be well
ventilated.
(d)
LPG cylinder stores should not be used for the storage of petrol or other fuels
(including acetylene).
(e)
Full cylinders should be stored separately from empty cylinders; all cylinders being
stored with their valves uppermost.
(f)
Cylinders should be protected from direct sunlight.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
TE
Fire fighting
Fires involving petrol and other vehicle fuels are usually severe, may cause explosions and
are generally best left to the fire and rescue service. Knowledge of what to do in the event of
a fire is essential if injuries and deaths are to be avoided.
10
In most cases where vehicle fuels are involved in a fire, or are being heated by it, a rapid
evacuation of the site and a call to the fire and rescue service will be the only sensible and
safe courses of action.
11
However, where other, less hazardous materials such as timber are involved in a fire, which
could spread to a fuel storage area or an area where construction plant is located, a decision
based upon the risks to personal safety will have to be taken as to whether or not to attempt
to fight the fire to prevent the situation escalating.
12
Generally, the fire and rescue service will not enter any structure that is on fire in which LPG
cylinders are known to be present. They are more likely to create an exclusion zone around
the structure. It is of great assistance to them if the location of any LPG storage area is such
that it can be cooled by a water spray from a distance.
EG
IN
Disposal of Fuels
13
Other materials contaminated by fuels such as PPE, rags, used spill kit materials, etc. should
also be regarded as hazardous waste and should be segregated from other non-hazardous
wastes.
14
LPG cylinders that are no longer required should be returned to a local dealer of the
company owning the cylinder. Under no circumstances should the LPG cylinder be disposed
of in a waste skip or metal recycling skip.
END OF DOCUMENT
QCS 2014

Part 1.08: Miscellaneous (Regulatory Document)
Page 1
1.8
MISCELLANEOUS .......................................................................................... 1
1.8.1
Sources of Health and Safety Information ....................................................... 4
1.8.2
Safety Signs .................................................................................................. 12
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 2
FORWARD
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 3
Sr. No
QCS 2014
Section No.
Part No.
Part Name
Submittals
7.5.2

Chart
Submittals
7.6.1
10
Health and Safety
All
All
All
11
10
11.4.6
14
14.4

Lifting Tackle
15
Temporary Controls
All
All
All
16
Traffic Diversions
16.1.3
Safety
General
8.1.6
Safety
General
8&9
1.4.12
10

Work
1.6
Safety
11
Deep Foundations
4.9.1.7
Safety Precautions
12
Deep Foundations
13
General
14
Asphalt Plants
15
14
AT
IO
37 & 38
42
Item Name
AL
Page No. Item No.
4&5
1.6
Temporary Fencing
15
7.8.13
Safety Requirements
14.2.2
Safety
General
1.3.2
Health and Safety
17
8.1.9
Safety
18
9.2.5
Safety Requirements
19
10

Survey
4,5&6
10.1.7
Safety Requirements
20
11
11.2.2
Safety
21
General
16
1.2.8
Safety Guards
22
General
19
1.2.16
23
19
Hot Water Storage
5.1.6
Safety
24
21

Installation
7&8
1.1.11
25
21

Installation
14
1.1.23
Safety Interlocks
26
24
General
1.1.4
Scaffolding
27
29
Design Aspects
1.1.5
28
29
2.3.1.5
Safety
29
29
Tunnel
18
4.5.8
Safety Regulations
30
29
Tunnel
19
4.5.9
Fire Prevention
31
29
Tunnel
21
4.6.4
32
29
Concrete Structures
7.1.10
Safety Railing
EG
16
IN
TE
4
7,8, 9 &
10
QCS 2014

Page 4

1.8.1
Sources of Health and Safety Information
British Standards Institute (BSI)

BSI publications, including all British, European and ISO standards and other reference material, can
be obtained direct from:
British Standards Institution
AL
Customer Services
389 Chiswick High Road
London W4 4AL
Tel: 020 8996 9001
Fax: 020 8996 7001
Email: cservices@bsigroup.com
Alternatively, they can be ordered:

online from www.bsonline.bsi-global.com
from most branches of good quality bookshops; details on the above website.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
QCS 2014

Page 5
Construction Standards
British and European Standards
Sections
1.1
BS 598 Sampling and examination of
bituminous mixtures for roads and other
paved areas
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.6
1.7
BS 1139-3 Metal scaffolding. Specification

for prefabricated mobile access and
working
AL
BS 1129 Specifications for portable timber

ladders, steps, trestles and lightweight
staging
BS 1377 Methods of test for soils for civil

engineering purposes
BS 1710 Specification for identification of

pipelines and services
AT
IO
BS 2037 Specification for portable

aluminium ladders, steps, trestles and
lightweight stagings
BS 2482:2009 Specification for timber
scaffold boards
TE
BS 2830 Specification for suspended

access equipment for use in the building,
engineering construction, steeplejack and
cleaning industries
IN
BS 3212 Specification for flexible rubber

tubing, rubber hose and rubber hose
assemblies for use in LPG vapour phase
and LPG air installations
1.5
BS 4078-2 Powder actuated fixing

systems. Specification for tools
EG
BS 4078-1 Powder actuated fixing

systems. Code of practice for safe use
BS 4250 Commercial butane and propane

BS 4293 Specification for residual current
operated circuit breakers
BS 4363 Specification for distribution

assemblies for reduced low voltage
electricity supplies for construction and
building sites
BS 4465 Specification for design and

construction of electric hoists for both
passengers and materials
BS 4481 Part 2 Bonded abrasive products
BS 5228:2009-1 CoP for noise and

vibration control on construction and open
sites - Noise
BS 5228:2009-2 CoP for noise and

vibration control on construction and open
sites - Vibration
BS 5266 Part 1 Emergency lighting
BS 5266-10 Guide to design and provision

of emergency lighting
BS 5306 Fire extinguishing installations

and equipment on premises
1.8
QCS 2014

Page 6
Sections
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
BS 5306-3 CoP for maintenance of

portable fire extinguishers
1.7
BS 5499 Fire safety signs, notices and

graphic symbols
BS 5531 CoP for safety in erecting

structural frames
BS 5534 CoP for slating and tiling
BS 5588 Fire precautions in the design,

construction and use of buildings
BS 5607 CoP for safe use of explosives in

the construction industry
BS 5972 Specification for photoelectric

control units for road lighting
IO
BS 6187 CoP for demolition (under review)
AT
BS 7071 Specification for portable residual

current devices
BS 7121-1 Code of Practice for safe use of
cranes. General
BS 7121-2 Inspecting, testing and

examination
X
X
X
X
X
BS 7121-3 Mobile cranes
TE
X
X
X
IN
BS 7212 CoP for safe use of construction

hoists
BS 5975 CoP for Falsework
BS 7121-5 Tower cranes
AL
BS 5974 CoP for temporarily installed

suspended scaffolds and access
equipment
BS 7121-4 Lorry loaders
BS 7273 CoP for the operation of fire

protection measures
EG
BS 7375 CoP for the distribution of

electricity on construction and building
sites
BS 7430 CoP for earthing
BS 7671 2008 IEE wiring regulations 17th

edition
BS 7288 Specifications for socket outlets

incorporating residual current devices
(SRCDs)
BS 7863 Recommendations for colour

coding to indicate the extinguishing media
contained in portable fire extinguishers
BS 7883 CoP and use of anchor devices

conforming to BS EN 795
BS 8411 Code of practice in the use of

safety nets on construction sites and other
works
BS 8454 Code of practice for the delivery

of training and education for work at height
and rescue
BS 8476 Code of practice for the safe use

of concrete pumps
BS 8800 Guide to occupational health and
safety management systems
X
X
1.8
QCS 2014

Page 7
Sections
1.1
BS 18004 Guide to achieving effective
occupational health and safety
performance
1.2
R
TE
IN
EG
BS EN 143 Respiratory protective devices.

Particle filters. Requirements, testing,
marking
IO
AT

Half masks and quarter masks.
Requirements, testing, marking
AL

Specification for fresh air hose breathing
apparatus for use with full face mask, half
mask or mouth piece assembly
1.6
BS EN 166 Personal eye protection.

Specifications
BS EN 169 Personal eye protection. Filters
for welding and similar operations
Ultraviolet filters
Infrared filters
Sunglare filters for industrial use
BS EN 175 Equipment for eye and face
protection during welding and allied
processes
BS EN 280 Mobile elevating work
platforms. Design calculations. Stability
criteria. Construction. Safety. Examinations
and tests
BS EN 340 Protective clothing. General
requirements
BS EN 341 Personal protective equipment
against falls from a height. Descender
devices
BS EN 352-1 Hearing protection. Safety
requirements and testing. Ear muffs
BS EN 352-2 Hearing protection. Safety
requirements and testing. Ear plugs
1.5
1.7
1.8
BS EN 137 Specification for respiratory

protective devices: self-contained opencircuit compressed air breathing apparatus

Vocabulary
1.4
BS 31100 Code of practice for risk

management
BS EN 3 Portable fire extinguishers Parts
3, 6 and 7
BS EN 131-3 Ladders - user instructions
Full face masks. Requirements, testing,
marking

Filtering half masks to protect against
particles. Requirements, testing, marking
1.3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
QCS 2014

Page 8
Sections
1.2
1.3
1.4
BS EN 353-2 Personal protective

equipment against falls from a height.
Guided type fall-arresters including a
flexible anchor line

against falls from a height. Lanyards

against falls from a height. Energy
absorbers
against falls from a height. Belts for work
positioning systems and restraint and work
positioning lanyards
against falls from a height. Retractable type
fall-arresters
against falls from a height. Full body
harness
AT

against falls from a height. Connectors
EG
BS EN 792-13 Hand-held non-electric

power tools. Safety requirements. Fastener
driving tools
BS EN 795 Protection against falls from a
height. Anchor devices. Requirements and
testing
BS EN 1146 Respiratory protective devices
Self-contained open-circuit compressed air
breathing apparatus incorporating a hood
for escape
N
R
TE
X
X
BS EN 393 Lifejackets and personal

buoyancy aids. Buoyancy aid 50
BS EN 397 Specification for industrial
safety helmets
BS EN 420 Protective gloves. General
requirements
BS EN 474 Earth moving machinery.
Safety
BS EN 529 RPE - Recommendations for
selection, use, care and maintenance
BS EN 671 Fixed fire fighting systems.
Hose systems
BS EN 752 Drain and sewer systems
outside buildings
1.8
IN

against falls from a height. General
requirements for instructions for use,
maintenance, periodic examination, repair,
marking and packaging
BS EN 388 Protective gloves against
mechanical risks
1.7

against falls from a height. Fall-arrest
systems
against falls from a height. Test methods
IO
1.6
BS EN 353-1 Personal protective

equipment against falls from a height.
Guided type fall-arresters including a rigid
anchor line
1.5
AL
1.1
X
X
X
X
X
QCS 2014

Page 9
Sections
1.1
1.2
1.3
BS EN 1261 Fibre ropes for general

service. Hemp
BS EN 1263-1 Safety nets. Safety
requirements, test methods
BS EN 1263-2 Safety nets. Safety
requirements for the positioning limits
1.4
BS EN 1492-4 Textile slings. Safety. Lifting

slings for general service made from
natural and man-made fibre ropes
X
X
BS EN 1498 Personal fall protection

equipment - rescue loops
BS EN 1869 Fire Blankets
AT
BS EN 1827 Respiratory protective

devices. Half masks without inhalation
valves with separable filters for gases and
particles. Requirements, testing, marking
IO

equipment - rescue lifting devices
IN
TE
X
X
BS EN 1870 Safety at woodworking

machines - circular saws and vertical panel
saws
X
X
BS EN 12158-2: Builders hoists for goods.

Part 2: Inclined hoists with non-accessible
load carrying devices
BS EN 12159: Builders hoists for persons

and materials with vertical guided cages
BS EN 12385-2 Steel wire ropes. Safety.

Definitions, designation and classification
BS EN 12385-4 Steel wire ropes. Safety.

Stranded ropes for general lifting
applications
EG
BS EN 12158-1: Builders hoists for goods

Part 1: Hoists with accessible platforms
BS EN 12810-2 Facade scaffolds made of

prefabricated components. Particulars of
structural design
BS EN 12811-1 Temporary works

equipment. Part I Scaffolds. Performance
requirements and general design
BS EN 12811-2 Temporary works

equipment. Information on materials

equipment - rope access - rope adjustment
devices
X
X
AL
BS EN 1492-2:2000 Textile slings. Safety.

Roundslings, made of man-made fibres,
for general purpose use
BS EN 12899-1: Fixed, vertical road traffic

signs. Fixed signs
1.7
BS EN ISO 6103 Bonded adhesive

products. Permissible unbalances of
grinding wheels as delivered. Testing
1.6
BS EN 1492-1:2000 Textile slings. Safety.

Flat woven webbing slings, made of manmade fibres, for general purpose use
BS EN ISO 5349-1 Mechanical vibration.

Measurement and assessment of human
exposure to hand transmitted vibration
1.5
1.8
QCS 2014

Page 10
Sections
1.1
1.2
BS EN 13794 Respiratory protective

devices. Self-contained close-circuit
breathing apparatus for escape
1.3
1.4
1.7
BS EN 14439 Cranes - safety - tower

cranes
X
X
AL
IO
AT
X
X
TE
IN
BS EN 61557 Electrical safety in low

voltage distribution systems
1.6
BS EN 13411-5 Terminations for steel wire

rope. Safety. U-bolt wire rope grips
BS EN 14502-1 Cranes - equipment for

lifting persons - suspended baskets
BS EN 14593-1 Respiratory protective
devices. Compressed air line breathing
apparatus with demand valve. Apparatus
with a full mask. Requirements, testing,
marking
BS EN 14593-2 Respiratory protective
devices. Compressed air line breathing
apparatus with demand valve. Apparatus
with a half mask at positive pressure.
Requirements, testing, marking BS
BS EN 14686 Fibre ropes of
polyester/polyolefin dual fibres
BS EN 50144-1 Safety of hand-held
electric motor operated tools. General
requirements
BS EN 60079-14:2008 Explosive
atmospheres - electrical installations
design, selection and erection
BS EN 60309 Plugs, socket-outlets and
couplers for industrial purposes
BS EN 60825 Safety of laser products
1.5
BS EN ISO 12402-2:2006 Personal

flotation devices. Lifejackets, performance
level 275. Safety requirements
EG
BS EN ISO 12402-3 Personal flotation

devices. Lifejackets, performance level
150. Safety requirements
devices. Lifejackets, performance level
100. Safety requirements
devices. Buoyancy aids (level 50). Safety
requirements
devices. Accessories. Safety requirements
and test methods
BS EN ISO 14001:2004 Environmental
management systems. Requirements with
guidance for use
BS ISO 525 Bonded abrasive products.
General requirements. Pt1: Specification
for general features of abrasive wheels,
segments, bricks and sticks
BS OHSAS 18001 Occupational health and
safety management systems.
Requirements
BS OHSAS 18002 Occupational health and
safety management systems -guidelines
for the implementation of OHSAS
18001:2007
1.8
QCS 2014

Page 11
Sections
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
PD 2754-2: IEC 60536-2:1992

Classification of electrical and electronic
equipment with regard to protection against
electric shock. Guide to requirements for
protection against electric shock
1.6
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
PD 5304 Safe use of machinery
1.7
1.8
QCS 2014

Page 12

1.8.2
Safety Signs
1
The colours used and their meanings are outlined on the following pages, together with
example signs.
1.8.1.2 Prohibition signs
TE
AT
IO
AL
These signs are red and white with a black image. The signs inform people of things they
must not do, for example 'No pedestrians' or 'No smoking'.
Scaffolding incomplete
EG
IN
No pedestrians
No smoking
Children must not play
QCS 2014

Page 13
1.8.1.3 Mandatory signs
AL
These signs are blue with a white image and inform people of things that they must do, for
example 'Wear ear protection' or 'Use crawling boards'.
Wear a respirator
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Wear a hard hat
Wear eye protection
Wear safety gloves
Wear ear protection
Wear work boots

Page 14
IO
AL
QCS 2014
Ear protection zone
Use crawling boards
AT
Wear a safety harness
1.8.1.4 Warning signs/signs on hazardous substances
EG
IN
TE
These signs are either yellow or amber with a black image and warn people of potentially
dangerous situations, for example 'Forklift trucks operating' or 'Fragile roof.
General warning
Flammable
Corrosive
QCS 2014

Radioactive
Page 15
Toxic
Explosive
Danger of electrocution
Laser beams
Highly flammable
Forklift trucks operating
Harmful
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Fragile roof
Irritant
Falling objects
Hazardous to the environment
Suspended loads
QCS 2014

Page 16
1.8.1.5 Safe condition signs
Emergency eye wash
First aid
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Assembly point
AL
These signs are green with a white image and inform people of features of the site that are
associated with a safe condition, for example 'First aid' or 'Fire exit'.
Emergency shower
Wash hands
Drinking water
Line-throwing appliance
Lifebuoy with line
Stretcher location
QCS 2014

Page 17
Fire exit
1.8.1.6 Fire safety

These signs are also red and white, but predominantly red with a white image. They indicate
the location of facilities associated with fire safety such as 'Call point' or 'Fire point'.
AT
IO
AL
Fire point
1.8.1.7 Mixed signs
IN
Often 'mixed signs' will be displayed, which are a combination of the four main types of sign.
For example, a sign at the site entrance might include:
an 'Unauthorised access strictly prohibited' sign - red and white = must not do
(b)
an 'All visitors must report to the site office' sign - blue and white = must do
(c)
a 'Beware open excavations' sign - yellow and black = beware of danger
(d)
2
EG
(a)
Hose reel
TE
Call point
an 'Assembly point' sign - green and white = safe condition.
Similar signs that indicate, for example, the location of a dangerous substance storage area
will also usually comprise a combination of signs, such as a 'Flammable' (warning) sign, a
'No smoking' (prohibition) sign, and additional appropriate wording.
END OF DOCUMENT
QCS 2014

Page 1
Part 2.1.01: Safety, Health and Environment Management System
SAFETY AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION MANAGEMENT /

ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM (SAMAS) ..........................................................1
2.1
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT (SHE) MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .1
2.1.1 Amendment Schedule .................................................................................................. 3

2.1.2 Safety, Health and Environmental (SHE) Management Framework ............................. 4
2.1.3 Statement of Intent ......................................................................................................10
AL
2.1.4 Policy and Responsibilities - Example .........................................................................12
IO
2.1.5 Organisation Charts ....................................................................................................22
AT
2.1.6 Index of Key Process ..................................................................................................22
2.1.7 Author .........................................................................................................................22
EG
IN
TE
2.1.8 Approvals ....................................................................................................................22
QCS 2014

Page 2
Purpose
1
The purpose of this document is to provide guidance for development of a clear policy,
responsibilities and an example of a management framework that reflects the COMPANY
commitment, core values, standards and expectations for both the organisation and those
working with COMPANY.
Scope
This policy covers all COMPANY operating areas, projects and activities.
This policy is intended to assist appointed consultants, sub-contractor and suppliers etc., to
meet legislative and other requirements not intended to replace these. The policy should
always be read in conjunction with QCS Part 1 (RD) requirements and any other legislative
requirements as advised and may be introduced.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
Amendment Schedule
Details of change
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Date
EG
Revision No.
2.1.1

Page 3
QCS 2014
2.1.2

Page 4
Safety, Health and Environmental (SHE) Management Framework
1
This document sets out a framework for the management of Safety, Health and
Environmental (SHE) issues across COMPANYs operations, projects and activities.
2.1.2.2 SHE Management System

The management system, and this framework, is based on recognised standards i.e. ISO
9001 Quality Systems, BSI OHSAS 18001 Occupational Health and Safety Management
Systems and ISO 14001 Environmental Management Systems.
In summary, the key requirements of the system are:
(b)
Procedures for hazard identification, risk

assessment, control and management of
change.
(c)
Documented, measurable SHE objectives

and plans.
(d)
Clear
management
responsibilities.
(e)
Competence assurance
identification and delivery.
(f)
Arrangements
for
communication,
consultation and engagement with the
appropriate stakeholders.
(g)
Operating procedures and processes.
(h)
Arrangements for SHE document control

and retention.
(i)
Active performance indicators.
AT
and
structure
training
EG
IN
TE
and
(j)
Consistent
SHE
policy
statements
throughout COMPANYs operations.
IO
(a)
AL
System for notification, investigation and recording of accidents, learning events and
environmental incidents including standardised statistics.
(k)
Systems for capturing learning events and best practice.
(l)
An audit and monitoring system.
(m)
Regular management reports on SHE performance, including improvement reports.
(n)
Regular management reviews.
In order to achieve the consistency desired, along with compliance, with the OHSAS 18001
and ISO 14001 standards, these management system elements are mandatory.
2.1.2.3 Background
1
To ensure core values and expected behaviors set out in the SHE policy namely,
commitments to:
(a)
Continuously improve SHE performance towards our overall goal of protecting both
people and the environment.
QCS 2014

Page 5
(b)
Ensure that business decisions take proper account of SHE matters and their
implications.
(c)
Comply with all legislative requirements pertaining to SHE as the minimum standard.
Our overall goal is to protect both people and the environment. Our principles require us to
have an effective SHE management system that will deliver consistency in approach and
good management information on performance throughout our operations.
Good corporate governance also requires SHE performance to be properly reviewed and in
addition COMPANY is committed to review and publish this information.
2.1.2.4 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to set out an enabling framework for the management of
Safety, Health and Environmental (SHE) issues across COMPANYs operations wherever
they are carried out. It deals with the management systems to be adopted, and does not
prescribe actual systems of work which it is recognised will be affected by stakeholder,
legislative, cultural and working practice requirements.
AL
IO
2.1.2.5 Scope
Throughout this document reference is made to COMPANY. This term means any region,
operational area or project wherever it is based and wherever it carries out work.
AT
GENERAL
Continuously improve SHE performance towards our overall goal of protecting both
people and the environment.
(b)
Ensure that business decisions take proper account of SHE matters and their
implications.
EG
(a)
(c)
3
IN
Joint shall ensure that the SHE management system is consistent with the international best
practice principles set out within QCS commitments to:
TE
JOINT VENTURES (JVS) AND PARTNERING AGREEMENTS
Comply with all legislative requirements pertaining to SHE as the minimum standard.
When entering into a Joint Venture or partnering arrangement the business concerned will
ensure that:
(a)
A clear and unambiguous policy is developed, put in place and communicated.
(b)
The relevant parties will agree/develop a SHE Management System that takes
cognizance of best practice and standards.
(c)
Key processes put in place include planning, competence, operational control,

emergency preparedness, change management, performance measuring and
monitoring, accident and incident investigation and review.
(d)
Arrangements must also be in place for reporting on SHE performance to relevant

parties (including incident reporting), SHE management review by the board and if
appropriate the formation of an independent SHE board to provide advice etc
(e)
Within the policy and defined roles and responsibilities, a board member must be
identified who has specific responsibility for SHE matters.
QCS 2014

Page 6
2.1.2.6 Policy
POLICY STATEMENTS
1
The COMPANY SHE policy statement and responsibilities applies to all COMPANYs
operations wherever they are carried out. They are included in Section 3 and Section 4 of
this document.
A template format for the SHE policy statement is included in Section 3 of this document. All
Joint Ventures or partnering agreements must use this template as a basis for developing
any specific policy.
COMMUNICATION
The developed policy, including personal responsibilities and those of direct reports, must be
communicated to each employee. Examples of those responsibilities are outlined within this
section.
AL
The policy statement will be reviewed at least annually.
AT
IO
REVIEW
2.1.2.7 Planning
TE
PLANNING FOR HAZARDS, ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT IDENTIFICATION, RISK

ASSESSMENT AND RISK CONTROL
COMPANY will have and maintain procedures for the identification of hazards,
environmental impacts, the assessment of risks, and the implementation of necessary
control measures. Procedures must include the provision of suitable management and
operational levels to ensure work is carried out safely and with consideration of the
environment.
The procedures will address the activities of:
(b)
COMPANY employees
(a)
EG
IN
COMPANY contractors (including any further sub-contractors)
(c)
Other contractors performing work under COMPANYs control
(d)
Other persons affected by COMPANYs undertakings, i.e. members of the public
In respect of environmental impact the procedures will also address the supply of goods and
materials for use by the COMPANY business.
LEGAL AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS
Establish and maintain a procedure for identifying and accessing the legal SHE requirements
that apply and have an impact on our activities. Impact may also include the effect of any
material change that may be brought about by organizational re-structure or senior
management appointments. Information on any relevant new SHE requirements that must
be communicated to employees and other interested parties as appropriate.
QCS 2014

Page 7
OBJECTIVE
5
COMPANY will set documented, measurable, annual SHE objectives and targets. The
objectives must be consistent with the SHE policy and the commitment to continuous
improvement. A management programme will be produced for achieving the objectives
setting out:
(a)
The designated responsibility for achievement of the objectives
(b)
The means and time-scale by which the objectives are to be achieved
(c)
Any appropriate improvement targets and associated improvement plans
The programme will be reviewed at regular intervals to ensure it is up to date and that it
addresses any changes that may have occurred in COMPANY.
AL
2.1.2.8 Implementation and Operation
STRUCTURE AND RESPONSIBILITIES
This document recognises that SHE is everybodys responsibility and will be managed
through the organisation in a systematic and structured manner.
Regional businesses must develop an effective management structure, including individual

responsibilities in SHE matters at all levels. The structure will recognise line management
responsibility and allow for access to competent advice on SHE matters.
Statements of individual and collective responsibilities are included in Section 4 of this

document.
A SHE organisational structure chart for the COMPANY business is included in Section 5 of
this document. The chart shows operational and functional responsibilities for SHE and
visible to all, for example displayed on site.
IN
TE
AT
IO
EG
COMPETENCE AND TRAINING

COMPANY will have processes in place to ensure that those working for, or on behalf of,
COMPANY are competent to perform any tasks they are given that may have an impact on
SHE performance.
COMPANY will also identify the training necessary to meet our SHE policy commitments at
each level and function within the business.
Plans will be developed to deliver the required training.
Training records will be kept and achievement of the required training will be monitored.
COMMUNICATION AND INVOLVEMENT

9
COMPANY will establish and maintain appropriate arrangements and strategies for:
(a)
The communication
(b)
The communication of relevant SHE information to employees and those working on

our behalf.
(c)
Consultation with and engagement of employees, those working on our behalf and
those affected by the activities of the business.
QCS 2014
(d)

Page 8
Receiving and responding to relevant communication from external interested parties.
OPERATIONAL CONTROL
(b)
Project Management Plans
(c)
SHE Management Plans
(d)
Method/Task Statements
(e)
Permit Controls
(f)
Work Instructions
(g)
SHE Performance Reports
AL
Risk Assessments
In addition, establish arrangements for the control of SHE documentation and data. The
arrangements will ensure that documentation and data is:
Retrievable
(b)
Current
(c)
Appropriately authorised, and where necessary
(d)
Periodically reviewed
IO
(a)
Records retention schedule will be prepared, which will identify all SHE records and their
associated retention periods. These records will be stored appropriately such that they are
readily retrievable and protected against damage, deterioration or loss throughout the
retention period.
IN
TE
12
(a)
AT
11
Prepare operating procedures and plans for the planning and control of activities associated
with identified risks. These may include provision for:
10
EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS
COMPANY will assess the potential for emergency situations and, where appropriate,
establish emergency preparedness and response arrangements.
14
There arrangements will be periodically reviewed and tested and, where necessary, revised.
Reviews will be undertaken to a pre-determined programme and after the occurrence of
accidents or emergency situations.
EG
13
2.1.2.9 Checking and Corrective Action

PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT AND MONITORING
1
COMPANY will establish and maintain procedures to monitor and measure SHE
performance on a regular basis. This will include:
(a)
Active systems which monitor the achievement of objectives and compliance with
standards.
(b)
Reactive systems which monitor accidents, ill-health and incidents.
ACTIVE PERFORMANCE INDICATORS

2
Active performance indicators will at least include:
QCS 2014

Page 9
(a)
Performance results against our short, medium and long term SHE strategy
(b)
Achievement of objectives
(c)
SHE training achievement
(d)
Audit results and surveys
(e)
Assessment against SHE performance standards
(f)
Statistical analysis
(g)
Cases of good working practices
(h)
Learning event reports
ACCIDENTS, INCIDENTS AND CASES OF ILL HEALTH
COMPANY employees
(b)
Employees of sub-contractors where

(i)
COMPANY has direct sub-contractors (and any further sub-contractors)

performing work under its control, or
(ii)
Has general supervisory authority over the worksite
Others affected by COMPANY work such as visitors or members of the public
(c)
IO
(a)
AL
COMPANY will establish procedures for notification, investigation and recording of

accidents, incidents, cases of ill health, learning events (near misses) and environmental
incidents involving:
AT
Accident and cases of ill health statistics will be compiled and included in management
reports. The standard statistics to be used across COMPANY are based on RIDDOR record
keeping guidelines for occupational injuries and illnesses. In particular, accident frequency
rates, accident incident rates, lost time incident frequency rate and total recordable case
frequency rate will be used.
Investigation procedures will ensure that incidents that have, or could have, led to serious
harm to the individual or the environment are investigated and reported on. Investigations
will establish what happened, any corrective or preventive actions required and allocate
responsibility for taking such action.
EG
IN
TE
ENFORCEMENT ACTION
6
Details of any enforcement action taken by the Administrative Authority in the form of
prosecutions, enforcement notices, orders, etc will be recorded and included in management
reports and communicated as soon as is reasonably practicable, to the senior management
team.
AUDIT
COMPANY Regional businesses will undertake regular audits to monitor the operation of the
SHE management system and measure its adequacy and performance.
Significant findings of the audits must be acted upon. Close-out reports detailing the action
taken will be produced.
Details of audits undertaken and their results will be included in management reports.
QCS 2014

Page 10
2.1.2.10 Management Review

MANAGEMENT REPORTS ON SHE PERFORMANCE
1
Prepare regular reports on SHE performance for review by its senior management board.
These reports should be prepared at least monthly.
Management reports on SHE performance will be produced at corporate, operational area

and project levels. A consistent structure will ensure that the key information contained in
the reports can be meaningfully compiled and used at a higher level.
Report on SHE performance on a monthly basis.

MANAGEMENT REVIEW MEETINGS
AL
Senior management teams of each COMPANY Regional businesses must regularly review
SHE performance. Review of SHE performance should be a standard agenda item for
management team meetings, and should be high on the agenda. The review should at least
consist of presentation and consideration of the relevant SHE report. Headings within the
report include:
Executive summary
(b)
SHE performance
(c)
Site visit feedback (by exception)
(d)
Learning Events
(e)
Occupational Health
(f)
Environmental
(g)
Stakeholder involvement
(h)
Training
(i)
Best Practice
(j)
Progress against action plans
EG
IN
TE
(a)
AT
IO
Actions arising from the review should be documented, responsibility clearly allocated with
appropriate timescales.
2.1.3
Statement of Intent
COMPANY, (The Contractor) will comply with its legal duties in order to provide a safe and
healthy working environment for its employees and others affected by its activities. It will take
positive action to ensure that other contractors' employees, occupiers of premises, and
members of the public do not have their health and safety adversely affected by the work
operations of the company. The only acceptable standard of health and safety, and for
welfare facilities, will be full and proper compliance with the requirements of legislation.
Where it is possible and practical to do so, the company will exceed the minimum
requirements of the Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction).
The company will seek to ensure that each company with whom it contracts or subcontracts
aspires to a similar high standard of health and safety management.
In recognition of the importance that this company places on the engagement and wellbeing
of its employees, the company will:

Page 11
(a)
consult, on health and safety matters, with its employees and others who may work
under its control to ensure that the arrangements for health and safety management
are practical to implement and effective
(b)
as far as is reasonably practicable, fully and effectively control the health and safety
risks arising from its work activities, in co-operation with employees, other contractors,
clients and other relevant parties
(c)
ensure that accident and ill health prevention is provided the highest priority,
commensurate with business objectives, within all company operations
(d)
investigate lapses in health and/or safety performance and implement remedial

actions to prevent, so far as is reasonably practicable, their recurrence
(e)
provide and ensure that all plant and equipment owned, used or hired by the company
is appropriate, safe to use and properly maintained, inspected and tested
(f)
ensure that all equipment, materials and substances used by the company are
appropriate for their intended use and used, handled and stored safely
(g)
ensure that all employees are provided with adequate supervisory training, information
and instructions to competently carry out their work activities
(h)
ensure that all working places are maintained in a safe and healthy condition
(i)
provide adequate resources, including sufficient finance, and access to competent

health and safety advice, to achieve the aims of this policy
(j)
review and revise this policy statement at regular intervals and also where necessary
due to changes in the company activities.
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014
Signed:........................................................ Designation: ............................................
EG
IN
TE
Date: .......................................................... Review Date: ...........................................
QCS 2014
2.1.4

Page 12
Policy and Responsibilities - Example
2.1.4.1 Senior Management Board

Collective responsibilities in safety, health and environmental (SHE) matters
Provide positive individual and collective leadership on SHE issues.
(b)
Promote an enthusiastic SHE culture that delivers positive commitment to and

engages all employees in continuous improvement in SHE performance.
(c)
Ensure a SHE management system is implemented within their sphere of

responsibilities. Monitor and review its effectiveness and take necessary improvement
action.
(d)
Monitor that personnel under their control comply with their individual responsibilities
in SHE matters.
(e)
Challenges areas or instances of performance.
(f)
Ensure that disciplinary processes are in place to address breaches of the SHE policy
or management system.
(g)
Establish a framework for the management of SHE.
(h)
Monitor and review the overall SHE performance and where appropriate take
necessary actions to minimize and negate.
(i)
Ensure board discussions and decisions take proper account of SHE policy
commitments.
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
IN
2.1.4.2 Managing Director
EG
Individual responsibilities in safety, health and environmental (SHE) matters

(a)
Provide positive leadership on SHE issues for COMPANY
(b)
Set a clear vision and values for SHE expectations for COMPANY.
(c)

(d)
Ensure that business decisions take proper account of SHE policy commitments.
(e)
Keep abreast of developments in SHE legislation and industry standards.
(f)
Ensure the implementation of an appropriate SHE management system, in

compliance with a developed SHE Management Framework, within the business(es)
for which responsibility is held.
.
(g)
Appoint a responsible person for SHE responsibility.
(h)
Review SHE performance at management team meetings and take appropriate

improvement action.
(i)
Monitor that members of the management team comply with their individual
responsibilities in SHE matters.
(k)
Consult regarding on decisions affecting SHE management.
QCS 2014

Page 13
(m)
Ensure that arrangements are in place to ensure everyone is aware of their own
individual responsibilities under SHE policies and those of any personnel under their
control.
(n)
Ensure appropriate action is taken to address breaches of the SHE policy
2.1.4.3 Directors/Members of the Senior Management Team

Provide positive leadership on SHE issues.
(b)
Promote a SHE culture that delivers positive commitment to and engages all
employees in continuous improvement in SHE performance.
(c)
Keep abreast of developments in all Qatar SHE legislation and industry standards.
(d)
Ensure that the SHE management system is implemented within their sphere of
responsibility. Monitor and review its effectiveness and take necessary improvement
action.
(e)
in SHE matters.
(f)
Ensure appropriate action is taken to address breaches of the SHE policy.
IO
AL
(a)
AT

Provide positive leadership of SHE issues and promote the adoption of SHE best
practice.
(b)
Promote an positive SHE culture of that engages all employees.
(c)
Monitor and report on the implementation of the COMPANY SHE Management

Framework and progress against the COMPANY SHE Performance Standards.
(d)
Lead and provide functional management for the SHE personnel within COMPANY.
(e)
Provide assistance and advice to ensure compliance.
(f)
EG
IN
TE
(a)
2.1.4.4 SHE Director
Develop and recommend annual SHE objectives and targets. Monitor and report
against these.
(g)
Produce reports monthly and annually on SHE performance in COMPANY.
(h)
Involved and lead in investigations to ensure that they are adequately reported.
(i)
Review reports of accident and incident investigations identify any trends and ensure
that there is an appropriate response to prevent future recurrence.
(j)
Regularly meet with all SHE personnel in COMPANY to monitor and review
management of the function as well as development.
(k)
Keep abreast of developments in SHE legislation.
(l)
Represent COMPANY through involvement with appropriate external SHE forums,

networks, industry and regulatory bodies.
(m)
Develop and monitor the implementation of processes for the development of SHE
personnel in COMPANY.
QCS 2014

Page 14
2.1.4.5 SHE Managers/Advisers*

Provide positive leadership within your area of operation and promote the adoption of
best practice.
(b)

(c)
Keep abreast of developments in SHE legislation and industry standards.
(d)
Monitor and report on the effectiveness of the SHE management system and progress
against the COMPANY SHE Performance Standards. Make recommendations for
improvement as appropriate.
(e)
Monitor and report on operational SHE performance and make recommendations for
improvement. Monitor to ensure that effective action is taken.
(f)
Lead and provide functional management for any SHE personnel under their control.
(g)
Assist with the identification of SHE training needs, and monitor delivery and
recording.
(h)
Monitor and report on the implementation of the approved SHE objectives.
(i)
Produce SHE performance reports as required.
(j)
Promptly alert line and functional management to significant accidents and incidents.
Where appropriate be involved in the investigation and ensure that the findings are
reported.
(k)
Review accident and incident reports and investigation reports, identify any trends and
ensure that there is an appropriate response to prevent future recurrence.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
IN
TE
EG
* The term SHE Adviser includes dedicated health and safety or environmental advisers .
2.1.4.6 Managers at all levels*

Individual responsibilities in safety, health and environmental (SHE) matters. In so far as
they are applicable to the role
(a)
Provide positive leadership on SHE issues within your area of operation.
(b)

(c)
Implement the business unit SHE management system. In particular:

(i)
Identify SHE training needs and have the necessary training arranged. When
arranged, release those who require training;
(ii)
Make arrangements for SHE induction training for all new starters at the
workplace under their control
(iii)
Implement operating procedures, including risk assessment procedures, for the

planning and control of activities associated with identified risks;
(iv)
Ensure that written method statements, risk assessments and/or SHE rules are
brought to the attention of those affected;
(v)
Appoint appropriate personnel to undertake SHE duties;
QCS 2014

Page 15
(vi)
Ensure that suitable arrangements are in place for the effective control of
changes to planned methods of work.
(d)
Keep abreast of developments in Qatar SHE legislation and industry standards.
(e)
Monitor and review the effectiveness of the SHE management system and report
deficiencies.
(f)
in SHE matters.
(g
Give personnel under their control, including contractors, clear instructions as to their
responsibilities to ensure correct working methods.
(h)
Make adequate provision for dealing with safety, health or environmental

emergencies.
(i)
Promptly alert line and SHE management to

Significant injury to employees or those working under our control;
(ii)
Reportable dangerous occurrences and learning events;
(iii)
Incidents that could lead to enforcement action;
(iv)
Enforcement notices served;
(v)
Injury to a member of the public or a visitor;
(vi)
Serious environmental incidents.
AT
IO
AL
(i)
Where appropriate, be involved in the investigation and ensure that the findings are
reported.
(k)
Report visits by members of relevant administrative authorities e.g. Civil Defence (Fire
Department)
(l)
Ensure that the SHE manager/adviser is accompanied on workplace inspections.

Following such inspections take action agreed as necessary. Thereafter report as
requested on the action taken.
(m)
Act immediately on any breach of SHE rules or procedures, unsafe situation or

potential threat to the environment that comes to their attention and, where necessary,
report such breaches.
(n)
Ensure that the disciplinary process to address breaches of the SHE policy or
management system is applied where necessary.
EG
IN
TE
(j)
*Managers people in the organisation at any level above supervisor and below director
2.1.4.7 Supervisors*
1

(a)
Provide positive leadership on SHE issues for the members of the work team for
which they are responsible.
(b)
Promote a positive attitude in the workforce and encourage behaviours that protect
both people and the environment.
(c)
Organise work to be carried out in accordance with relevant SHE risk assessments/
method statements.
(d)
in SHE matters.
(e)
Give personnel under their control, including contractors, clear instructions about the
required methods of work.
QCS 2014

Page 16
Ensure that all relevant personnel are involved in SHE risk assessments prior to any
work activity commencing, and, where appropriate, that method statements are
available, understood and that any identified control measures are implemented.
(g)
Where appropriate assess and implement any additional SHE controls required to
address the needs of new employees, young persons, non-English speaking workers,
disabled persons, pregnant women, etc.
(h)
Monitor that risk assessments/method statements accurately reflect the SHE hazards
present and ensure that any required changes are agreed and implemented in
accordance with the arrangements for control of changes to planned methods of work.
(i)
Ensure appropriate arrangements are in place for two-way communication and where
appropriate deliver tool box talks to the work teams.
(j)
Identify any SHE training requirements of personnel under their control and advise
appropriate management accordingly.
(k)
See that accidents and incidents are reported immediately to the relevant manager.
(l)
Ensure that personal protective clothing and equipment is used where identified as
required and is properly maintained and stored.
(m)
Ensure that the plant and equipment supplied is appropriate for the work and has any
necessary certification. Ensure that plant and equipment is immediately put out of use
if unsafe or presents a potential threat to the environment.
(n)
Ensure that only authorised persons operate plant and equipment.
(o)
See that unattended plant, materials and premises are left in a condition that does not
present a risk to persons or the environment.
(p)
Ensure that the disciplinary process for breaches of SHE procedures and rules is
applied where necessary.
(q)
Develop fire safety procedures, communicate with staff and carry out the necessary
training and fire drills with a frequency that is appropriate for the size of the site and
the duration of the construction operations.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(f)
All Employees
2.1.4.8
EG
*Supervisors people at the first level in the organisation that have responsibilities over the work of
others;
Individual responsibilities in safety, health and environmental (SHE) matters. In so far as

they are applicable to the role
(a)
Set a good personal example on SHE issues within your area of operation.
(b)
Take care of your own health and safety whilst at work; ensure your activities do not
adversely affect the health and safety of others or damage the environment.
(c)
Co-operate with the company in all matters of health, safety and environmental
protection and make your contribution to reducing accidents and conserving natural
resources.
(d)
Ensure you have been fully briefed on, and have a good understanding of, the task at
hand. Always work in accordance with the instructions given and any written SHE risk
assessments/method statements. Report any conflict.
(e)
Never deviate from an agreed method of working unless the supervisor or relevant
manager has been notified and authorisation has been obtained.
(f)
Ensure that you have and use the correct access, tools, equipment and personal
protective equipment for the work.

Page 17
(g)
Never undertake hazardous operations nor operate any items of plant or equipment
unless trained and authorised to do so.
(h)
Maintain a tidy workplace with an appropriate level of cleanliness.
(i)
Report to immediate supervisor any defects in plant or equipment or unsafe methods

of work and ensure that plant, equipment and premises are left in a safe and secure
state and place when unattended. Do not operate any item of plant or equipment that
has become defective.
(j)
Report to your immediate supervisor all potential hazards and incidents that have or
could have resulted in personal injury or environmental damage.
(k)
Report any work-related personal injury or disease to your immediate supervisor and
ensure that an entry is made in the accident book at your place of work.
(l)
If you are asked to undertake a task that you feel is unsafe or for which you feel you
do not have the appropriate knowledge or training, report this to your immediate
supervisor.
(m)
Ensure you have been fully briefed on the fire safety drill and that you understand your
roles and responsibilities. Actively participate in all health and safety drills.

Ensure that arrangements exist to deliver the following:
(i)
Orders to suppliers for materials, plant and equipment etc. include relevant SHE
requirements notified by the specifier;
(ii)
Suppliers of materials, plant and equipment etc. are requested to provide all
necessary information and operating instructions so that their products can be
used safely without risk to persons or the environment;
(iii)
Where such information is received by the procurer that it is passed on to the

persons who will use the materials, plant and equipment etc;
IN
Orders to suppliers for personnel include sufficient detail to adequately describe

the work for which they are required;
Contractors and Labour Agencies are assessed as competent and adequately
resourced for the work before contracts are placed;
(v)
EG
(iv)
TE
(a)
Procurement Managers and Buyers*
AT
2.1.4.9
IO
AL
QCS 2014
(vi)
Tendering contractors have been provided with the Standard Rules for SubContractors on Safety, Health and the Environment and that compliance with
them is a condition of contract;
(b)
No undertakings, either verbal or written, are given to any supplier relieving it of its
SHE responsibility.
(c)
Monitor that the above arrangements are effectively implemented.
* Notes
1.
Procurement Managers includes those individuals managing the procurement of personnel.
2.
These responsibilities are specific to this role and are in addition to the other relevant responsibilities
contained in this document.
3.
Procurement Managers where they are responsible for placing contracts with suppliers of products
and services.
QCS 2014

Page 18
2.1.4.10 Design, Engineering and Planning Managers*

1

(a)
(i)
Designs which recognise, include and apply safe practice during preparation,
construction and subsequent operational use and maintenance, and which
consider lifecycle environmental impact including decommissioning and
disposal;
(ii)
Design/engineering/planning interfaces are co-ordinated to ensure that the

project can be carried out with minimum risk to persons and environment.
AL
(b)

All plant and equipment is in a safe condition on leaving its depot or store and
that relevant, current inspection/thorough examination certificates and licences
are carried with that item of plant or equipment;
(ii)
Plant and equipment hired in is from an approved supplier and has current
inspection/thorough examination certificates available with it;
(iii)
Inspection, planned preventative maintenance and periodic tests and thorough

examinations are carried out and that results are recorded;
Repairs and maintenance work are carried out in a proper manner by
competent personnel;
(iv)
TE
(i)
IN
(a)
EG
AT
2.1.4.11 Plant/depot/works/stores manager*
IO
* These responsibilities are specific to this role and are in addition to the other relevant responsibilities
contained in this document
(b)
(v)
Sufficient information is available regarding the use of all plant, equipment and
materials and this information accompanies the item when leaving the depot or
store;
(vi)
All plant and equipment defects notified are remedied and plant and equipment
is immediately put out of service if it is unsafe or a risk to the environment.
* These responsibilities are specific to this role and are in addition to the other relevant responsibilities
contained in this document
QCS 2014

Page 19
2.1.4.12 Site Engineers/Foremen

Individual responsibilities in Safety, Health and Environmental (SHE) matters
Appreciate the responsibility allocated to individuals within the operative and
management structure.
(b)
Set a good example and leadership by working safely on the site and wearing the
appropriate personal protective equipment.
(c)
Ensure safety arrangements, including fire safety drills, are implemented.
(d)
Ensure that only trained and authorised workers use plant and equipment and that
persons undergoing training do not operate plant and equipment unless closely
supervised by a competent person.
(d)
Ensure that employees under their control attend induction training before working on
the site and that they are correctly supervised at all times.
(e)
Ensure that plant and equipment under their control or brought to site by the
subcontractor has any necessary certificates of test, inspection and examination and
is safe to use.
(f)
Ensure that clear instruction and information is give to persons under their control.
(g)
Carry out recorded safety inspections of site conditions.
(h)
Ensure that persons under their control wear and use any personal protective
equipment correctly, to manufacturers instructions and to statutory and company
requirements.
(i)
Ensure that employees under their control are given appropriate safety information as
required and that details of control measures from risk assessments are fully
explained.
(j)
Ensure that any accident/incident is reported and that all accidents are entered in the
accident register.
(k)
Ensure that access/egress routes are kept clear from obstruction, particularly escape
routes and ensure that good housekeeping is observed at all times.
(l)
Ensure that any plant/equipment for use by employees under their control is checked
to ensure any necessary guards or safety devices are checked and fit for use by
competent persons prior to use.
AT
IO
AL
(a)
IN
EG
(m)
TE
Attend any meeting on safety issues as required and as applicable, co-operate with all
personnel on matters of Safety, Health and the Environment.
2.1.4.13 Office Staff

1
Individual responsibilities in Safety, Health and Environmental (SHE) matters

(a)
(b)
Ensure personnel are fully aware of the procedures in the event of an emergency,
including:
(i)
Any accident, incident or emergency procedure
(ii)
Positions of the fire exits, layout out of escape routes and assembly point
location/s
(iii)
Position of the first aid equipment and the identity of the trained first aid
personnel
Report any defects in plant or equipment immediately to your supervisor. Ensure

plant, equipment and premises are left in a safe and secure state and place when
unattended

Page 20
(c)
Observe good housekeeping at all times and keep corridors, doorways and floor
spaces clear and free from obstruction.
(d)
Do not attempt to lift or move articles as heavy as likely to cause injury.
(e)
Do not over-reach for items on high shelves, use the equipment provided.
(f)
Do not misuse or interfere with equipment provided for the safety of you and others.
(g)
Do not try to use, repair or maintain any equipment for which you have received no
training or instruction.
(h)
Report any work related personal injury or disease to your immediate supervisor and
ensure that an entry is made in the accident book at your place of work.
(i)
Report all potential hazards and incidents that have or could have resulted in personal
injury or environmental damage to your immediate supervisor.
(j)
Report any unsafe situation or task you may feel is unsafe and for which you do not
have the appropriate knowledge or training, to your supervisor.
AL
QCS 2014
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
A responsibility matrix that links the roles in the organisation to the responsibilities under the
COMPANY policy is shown on the following page.
2.1.4.14 Responsibility Matrix
AL

Page 21
QCS 2014
AT
IO
Responsibility Matrix
Directors/Managers at all levels

a
Senior Management
Board
Managing Director
Directors/Members of
the Senior
Management Team
SHE Director
Managers at all Levels
Supervisors
SHE
Managers/Advisers
TE
R
IN
EG
Paragraph No.
All employees
All Employees
HR Managers
Procurement Managers
and Buyers
Design Engineering &
Planning Managers
Plant/Depot/Works/
Stores Manager
Engineers/Foremen
Office Staff
QCS 2014
2.1.5

Page 22
Organisation Charts
COMPANY plc
TBA
Index of Key Process
SHE Mandatory Policy, responsibilities and management framework
Safety, Health and Environmental Risk Management
COSHH (Control of Substances Hazardous to Health)
Guidance on Safe Working in the Vicinity of Buried and Overhead Services
Electricity at Work
Authorisation of Plant/Equipment Operators
Safety, Health and Environmental Information and Training for all Employees, Newly
Assigned Employees, Promotees and Subcontractors
Contractors Check List for Initial Safety, Health and Environmental Meeting
The Reporting of Accidents/Incidents, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences (RIDDOR),

Learning Events and Environmental Incidents
10
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
11
The Safe Use of Cranes and Other Lifting Appliances (Excavators, Tele Handlers and Lorry
Loaders)
12
Permit to Work Systems
13
Control of Scaffolding and Working at Heights
14
Fire Precautions During Construction Works in Building
15
Asbestos
16
Procedures for Environmental Protection
17
Associated forms for the above.
18
Standards and Guidance
2.1.7
Author
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
2.1.6
SECTION
NAME
POSITION IN
COMPANY
CONTACT DETAILS
SHE Manager
2.1.8
Approvals
NAME
Approved by:
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SHEQ Director
END OF DOCUMENT
SIGNATURE & DATE
QCS 2014

Part 2.2.01: Safety Health and Environment Procedural Audit Checklists

ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM (SAMAS).............................................................. 1
2.2
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURAL AUDIT

CHECKLISTS.... ................... 1
2.2.1 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-002- COSHH.................................................................. 2

2.2.2 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-003- Safe Working in the Vicinity of Buried and
Overhead Services............................................................................................ 5
2.2.3 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-004- Electricity at Work .................................................. 9
AL
2.2.4 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-005- SafetyAuthorisation of Plant/Equipment Operators

........................................................................................................................ 12
2.2.5 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-006- Safety, Health and Environmental Training ......... 14
AT
IO
2.2.6 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-008- The Report and Investigation of Accidents and

Incidents.......................................................................................................... 18
2.2.7 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-011- Permit to Work Systems ...................................... 22
2.2.8 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-013- Fire Precautions During Construction Works in

Buildings ......................................................................................................... 23
EG
IN
TE
2.2.9 SHE-PRO-014- Asbestos................................................................................ 24
AL

AT
IO
QCS 2014
2.2.1 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-002- COSHH
Has the Project Manager appointed a

COSHH Coordinator for the project?
TE
R
Project
Manager
The Project /Site Manger must Ensure the procedure is

established and reviewed for effectiveness. Appoints a
COSHH Coordinator for the project.
3.i
3.ii
Has a register of hazardous substances

been produced?
3.ii
COSHH
Have all substances on the register had an
Coordinat
assessment done?
or
If a substance is supplied or created by a sub-contractor,
it is their responsibility to provide the COSHH assessment
along with all other risk assessments submitted for
acceptance. These assessments are likely to accompany
a method statement, and
should be read as part of
the method statement acceptance process. Project/Site
Managers must ensure that assessments and method
statements have been agreed, and monitor work to
ensure it is undertaken in line with the method statement.
The COSHH Coordinator should ensure that all hazardous
substances present on a project have a valid COSHH
assessment. For a supplied substance the COSHH
assessment
should
be
accompanied
by
the
manufacturers/suppliers MSDS.
3.ii
COSHH
Coordinat
or
EG
IN
If a substance is supplied or created by COMPANY, the

COSHH Coordinator is responsible for ensuring a COSHH
assessment has been undertaken.
The COSHH
Coordinator should ensure that a register of all hazardous
substances is maintained, and that each has a valid
COSHH assessment, and where applicable a MSDS.
1.ii
3.ii
Page 2
AL

If there are sub-contractor supplied
hazardous materials do they have a valid
COSHH assessment?
Project
Manager
Competent
Person
Supervisor
Is there evidence that where an activity has

changed after the initial Risk Assessment/
Method Statement was carried out, a
review has taken place and the documents
updated in line with the change?
been
TE
R
EG
IN
3.iv
3.iv
Where the health of an individual has been

identified as a risk, has health surveillance
been arranged?
All activities undertaken under the Risk Assessment (and

controls therein) shall be monitored to ensure that the
assessment is both suitable and sufficient and is being
worked to correctly.
Project
manager /
Supervisor
3.ii
Have the COSHH assessments

reviewed and agreed?
Where an assessment identifies the likelihood of an

adverse health condition or identifiable disease being
contracted, then health surveillance may be required.
Project
Manager /
Contractor
3.ii
AT
IO
Contractor
s / COSHH
Coordinat
or
Project/Sit
e Manager
QCS 2014
Is the work being carried out in accordance

with the agreed Risk Assessment / Method
Statement?
3.iv
Page 3
AL

EG
IN
TE
R
Has a briefing been given to the workforce

based on the content of the risk
assessment / method statement?
Supervisor
AT
IO
Dependant on the nature of the Risk Assessment and

Method Statement, give a briefing to ensure that the detail
is communicated to all relevant Operatives and carry out a
reality check to confirm understanding of key aspects.
QCS 2014
Total
Awarded
Total
Achievable
% Score
12
Page 4
AL

Page 5
QCS 2014
AT
IO
2.2.2 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-003- Safe Working in the Vicinity of Buried and Overhead Services
Project/Site Manager
3.i
IN
Has the Project manager identified the

excavations required to carry out the
contract works?
EG
Has the Project manager Appointed a

Services Coordinator?
Are suitable service location equipment
available and a competent operator
identified / trained?
Project
Manager
TE
R
Evaluate Project Program and the works drawings to identify the requirements for excavation. Appoint a Services Co-ordinator or retain the
Services Coordinators duties himself. Ensure the availability of suitable service location equipment and a competent operator. Where
overhead electrical supply cables are present ensure that controls are in place before authorising any activities on site Agree with Services
Co-ordinator the site colour-coding scheme for surface marking of services.
Where overhead electrical supply cables

are present have controls been put in place
before authorising any activities on site?
Is a site colour-coding scheme for surface
marking of services in place and
communicated?
Services Co-ordinator
3.ii
AL

QCS 2014
Page 6
EG
IN
TE
R
AT
IO
Seek out and retain copies of all statutory authority and service drawings relevant to the projects scope of work. Have transposed onto a
master drawing(s), the details of all relevant services.
Have recorded on the master drawing(s) the location and depths of services installed during site establishment.
Confirm with the Supervisor/Engineer in control of an activity requiring a Permit to Excavate the full extent of the intended activity. Check the
activity drawings against the master drawing(s). Produce an activity specific location drawing for reference by the locator of services that
includes current landmarks, using SHE-FRM-3-02.
Request the locator of services undertake a thorough survey of the area where the activity is to take place with an appropriate service locator,
even if it has been established from drawings that there are no recorded services present.
Provide an activity specific, location drawing (including any updates identified in the survey) for reference by the Supervisor/Engineer in
control of the activity.
Update master drawing(s) following receipt of survey information. Ensure information on master drawing(s) is transferred to as-built drawings
for inclusion in the H&S file.
Before any activities start on a site where overhead services are present or adjacent, contact the SHE Adviser for advice. Where overhead
electrical supply cables are present the local Electricity Company shall also be contacted for advice on re-routing or clearance and insulation.
Have copies of all statutory authority and
service drawings relevant to the projects
scope
of work been obtained. And details
Services
transposed
onto a Master services
Coordinat
drawing?
or
Has an activity specific location drawing

been produced for all activities requiring
excavations,
that
include
current
landmarks, using SHE-FRM-3-02?
Has a thorough survey of the area where
the activity is to take place been undertaken
with an appropriate service locator, even if
it has been established from drawings that
there are no recorded services present?
Has the master drawing(s) been updated
following receipt of survey information or
installed services?
AL

3.iii
IN
TE
R
AT
IO
Has the information on the master drawing

been transferred to as-built drawings for
inclusion in the H&S file?
Where overhead services are present or
adjacent to the works has the local SHE
Adviser been contacted for advice?
Where overhead electrical supply cables
are present has the local Electricity
Company been contacted for advice on rerouting or clearance and insulation?
Locator of Services
QCS 2014
Locator of
Services
EG
Physically and clearly mark the position of services on the ground in accordance with the services marking scheme. Update the activity
specific location drawing provided for reference to you by the Services Co-ordinator. .
Has the position of services been physically

and clearly marked on the ground in
accordance with the services marking
scheme?
Have updates been made to the activity
specific location drawing?
Supervisors/Engineers
3.iv
Page 7
AL

Page 8
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Prepare or arrange for the Sub/Work Package Contractor to prepare for agreement/approval by the Project/Site Manager a specific method
statement for activities involving: -
excavation or penetration of the ground (using the information in the guidance);

any activity beneath or in the vicinity of overhead electrical supply cables or pipework containing a hazardous substance where there
is any possibility, however remote, of plant, equipment, materials or people encroaching into a safety zone;
any activity beneath or in the vicinity of any other overhead service where there is a possibility of damage.
TE
R
IN
Ensure persons under their control fully understand they do not commence excavation or penetration of the ground in an area unless the
whereabouts of services has been established and a Permit to Excavate has been prepared and approved by the Service Coordinator and
obtained, SHE-FRM-3-02.
Has a specific method statement for activities

involving: - excavations or work under or near
overhead services been prepared?
Supervisor
s
/Engineers
EG
Ensure all personnel involved in the activities are instructed in the method statement and Permit to Excavate and sign to confirm their
understanding.
Has a Permit to Excavate been prepared and

approved by the Service Coordinator?
Have all personnel involved in the activities
been instructed in the method statement and
Permit to Excavate and signed to confirm
their understanding?
Total
Awarded
Total
Achievable
% Score
17
AL

QCS 2014
AT
IO
2.2.3 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-004- Electricity at Work

Managing Director
3.i
Electrical Duty Holder
3.ii
Electrical
Duty
Holder
EG
The Electrical Duty Holder shall

Assess and approve all temporary Electrical contractors prior to their appointment
In conjunction with the Site / Project Manager appointed coordinator and Authorised Person for each location.
Take reasonable steps to ensure that the site electrical coordinator has the competency to undertake the role.
Ensure that all projects and appropriate contractors have a copy of the latest Rules for Electrical Safety
Undertake independent inspection/audit of site electrical installation / equipment under COMPANY control.
TE
R
Has The MD for the Company / Region shall

appoint in writing an Electrical Duty Holder
for their area of responsibility?
IN
Managing
Director
The MD for the Company / Region shall appoint in writing an Electrical Duty Holder for their area of responsibility
Have all temporary Electrical contractors

been Assessed and approve prior to their
appointment?
Has an authorised person been appointed to
for the location?
Has the site electrical coordinator been
assessed to ensure he has the competency
to undertake the role?
Is there a copy of the latest Rules for
Electrical Safety available on the project?
Do the electrical contractors working on the
project have a copy of the latest Rules for
Electrical Safety?
Have inspections / audits been undertaken
by the Electrical Duty Holder?
Page 9
AL

QCS 2014
AT
IO
Site Electrical Coordinator

The Site Electrical Coordinator shall
3.iii
IN
Has the coordinator checked to ensure work

is being carried out in accordance with the
RES?
EG
Site
Electrical
Coordinat
or
TE
R
Ensure All work is carried out in accordance with the COMPANY Rules for Electrical Safety.
After consultation with the EDH, appoint in writing a competent person for the location he is responsible for.
Display the appointment of the site electrical coordinator and competent person on the location notice board and electrical switch gear.
Keeps an up to date drawing showing the electrical circuits for the locations temporary electrical system.
Ensure schedule tests are carried out on installations and equipment
Has a competent person been appointed for

the project, and the appointment displayed?
Is there an up to date drawing of the
temporary site electrical circuits?
Has the required tests for the electrical
system been scheduled?
Have the required tests for the electrical
system been carried out as scheduled?
Authorised Person
3.iv
The Authorised Person shall control the permit to work system and issue permits as required.
Authorise
d Person
Is the Authorised person issuing electrical

permits as required?
Site / Project Manager
3.v
Page 10
AL

AT
IO
QCS 2014
The Site / Project Manager shall
IN
TE
R
Has the Site /Project Manager appointed in

writing a permanent works electrical duty
holder?
Has the specification for the temporary site
electrics been communicated to the
temporary electrical contractor?
EG
Site /
project
Manager
After consultation with the EDH appoint in writing a permanent works Electrical Duty Holder.
Ensure that the specification for the temporary site electrics is communicated to the temporary electrical contractor.
Total
Awarded
Total
Achievable
% Score
15
Page 11
AL

Page 12
QCS 2014
AT
IO
2.2.4 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-005- SafetyAuthorisation of Plant/Equipment Operators

3.i
TE
R
Identify the plant requirements for the project and produce a plant schedule. This should identify COMPANYs plant requirements. The
schedule should be reviewed and revised as the project progresses.
Where appropriate appoint a Plant Coordinator or retain the duties.
Project
Manager
IN
Has a plant schedule been developed to

record the plant requirement of both
COMPANY & contractors?
EG
Has a plant schedule been developed

reviewed and where necessary revised?
Has a plant Co-ordinator been appointed in

writing?
Plant Co-ordinator
3.ii
Assess the plant schedule and ensure the plant required is available in line with the contract programme. Advise the Project/Site Manager of
any revisions/additions needed to complete the works..
Plant Coordinator
Is the required plant available to carry out the

work in accordance with the plant schedule
and contract program?
Plant Co-ordinator/Supervisor
3.iii
AL

Page 13
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Are copies of the plant operator certificates

available in the site register?
EG
IN
Are plant operators in possession of the

correct certificate for the plant they are
using?
Have any defects been noted in the site
register and if necessary has the plant with
the defect been put out of service?
Plant
Coordinat
or
Supervisor
TE
R
Obtain copies of Plant Operator certificates; forward a copy of the COMPANY direct employed operators certificate to the Regional Training
Coordinator. A copy of all Plant Operator certificates should be held on site in the Site Register.
Check the operators certification for the plant to be operated (see section 4.i and 4.ii) and only allow the use of plant where the certification
corresponds to the exact type of plant to be used.
Where defects are reported / noted on item of plant, ensure the plant is put out of service and replacement/repair is arranged.
Total
Awarded
Total
Achievable
% Score
AL

Page 14
QCS 2014
AT
IO
2.2.5 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-006- Safety, Health and Environmental Training

SHE training strategy
3.i
TE
R
.
The SHE Department will be responsible for producing and reviewing a SHE training strategy for the whole business. The training strategy and
associated training matrix will be available on the intranet*.
Line managers are responsible for ensuring that their staff have had the necessary training, or ensuring that appropriate arrangements are
made to cover any shortfalls. Requests for SHE training are to be made to the relevant Training Coordinator
Has a SHE Training Strategy been
produced and is it available to the projects?
Manager
Has a local schedule been produced to

identify training requirements for the
location in line with the training matrix?
EG
Inductions
IN
SHE
Department
3.ii
All newly assigned employees will receive a SHE induction. In addition a location specific induction will be required to ensure all necessary
SHE information is provided. Project inductions will not be given to any person who cannot provide evidence of competency relevant to their
role. Projects will provide a full SHE induction for everyone who will be on site. This induction must be provided before an individual is
allowed to go onto the site. Project Managers are responsible for ensuring that a site specific induction is in place and provided as required.
Visitors to sites, and other locations such as offices, must receive a tailored SHE induction if the full induction is not provided. Visitors must
be accompanied by a suitable person who has attended a full site induction. Site inductions will include a short evaluation.
Location
Have all persons received a SHE induction.
Manager /
including a location specific induction?
Supervisor
Are all persons working on the project in
possession of relevant qualifications to their
role?
Where there are Visitors on site have they
received a visitors induction and are they
being accompanied around site?
AL

AT
IO
Have all persons on site undertaken an

induction evaluation questionnaire specific to
the projects?
3.iii
Supervisors inductions
Page 15
QCS 2014
IN
Have all supervisors received a specific

supervisor SHE induction?
EG
Location
Manager /
Supervisor
TE
R
Any person on a site who will act in a supervisory capacity must undergo a top up induction. This will identify what COMPANY will expect of
them as a supervisor or manager. In particular it will cover expected standards of behaviour on site, and dealing with instances of unsafe
behaviour
3.iv
Newly assigned COMPANY staff:
staff shall not commence their duties until they have:
received a copy of the SHE policy statement and their SHE responsibilities. If the role involves managing or supervising others they
must also receive a copy of the responsibilities of those grades they will be managing or supervising. Responsibilities should be
explained to them by their line manager;
received general advice and been informed of any significant findings of risk assessments for the work they will undertake;
Location
Manager /
Supervisor
Have all staff received a copy of their specific

SHE Responsibilities, and have they been
explained to them by their line manager?
AL

Page 16
AT
IO
QCS 2014
TE
R
Have all staff been informed of the significant

findings
contained
within
the
risk
assessments for the work they will undertake.
3.v
IN
Agency staff
EG
When requesting staff or labour the COMPANY Manager is required to specify to an employment agency:
any special occupational qualifications or skills required to do the job, including any specific evidence of competence
specific features of the job that may effect health and safety (e.g. work at heights, heavy manual handling operations, etc).
Project
Manager
If agency staff are being employed on the

project have any specific requirement, with
regards to skills, qualifications etc and
special features of the job which may effect h
& s, been notified to the agency?
SHE training arrangements
3.viii
SHE training will be arranged by the relevant Training Coordinator, who will also maintain SHE training records. The only exception to this will
be project specific site Inductions which will be arranged and delivered by site personnel, with records maintained on site.
Training
Coordinator
Are the SHE training records up to date and

available to Managers
AL
IN
TE
R
AT
IO
Are the SHE Induction records up to date

and available on site
EG
Project /
Site
Manager

QCS 2014
Total
Awarded
Total
Achievable
% Score
12
Page 17
AL

Page 18
QCS 2014
AT
IO
2.2.6 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-008- The Report and Investigation of Accidents and Incidents
For All Accidents on Site
Investigate cause of accident, record physical evidence and take steps to prevent recurrence.
Inform the SHE Department of such incidents.
Record and report the accident on the accident book form and send a copy to the SHE Department together with any supporting
evidence/documentation
Complete the accident book entry report. (Accident Investigation Report Part 1, AIR SHE-FRM-8-02/2)
TE
R
3.
Have all accidents recorded had an

element of investigation and steps taken to
prevent re-occurrence?
Project /
Site
Manager
Project /
Site
Manager
Has the SHE Department been informed of

all accidents recorded on the project?
EG
IN
Project /
Site
Manager
For all accidents reported to COMPANY

has the Accident Book been completed?
AL

Inform the SHE Department and Contracts Manager as soon as the accident becomes a possible over 3 day reportable.
Obtain from any contractor a copy of the F100. In the case of an COMPANY emplyee, provide the SHE Adviser / Manager with all
relevant detail to allow MIT / SHE to complete the F100.
Where appropriate to the potential outcome of the accident / incident, in conjunction with SHE Adviser / Manager, complete/send First
Alert form SHE-FRM-8-01 to ensure that relevant persons are informed (see distribution list on First Alert form).
Ensure the investigation is undertaken and the report Produced within an appropriate time frame as per QCS requirement.
TE
R
AT
IO
For All > 3 Day RIDDOR Reportable Accidents
Page 19
QCS 2014
For any RIDDOR Accidents has an F100

been completed and sent to the Enforcing
Authority?
Project /
Site
Manager
Project
Manager /
SHE
Advisor
For appropriate accidents / incidents has a

First Alert been completed?
EG
IN
Project
Manager /
Supervisor
Has an investigation been carried out and a

report been completed?
Reporting and Investigating a Major Accident/Incident

(Fatal Accident or Major Injury)
AL

Page 20
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Contact your SHE Adviser / Manager. The SHE Adviser / Manager will inform the MIT and prior to commencing the investigation and
following
consultation with the SHE Manager / Director, will advise our legal representatives.
In conjunction with SHE Adviser / Manager, complete/send First Alert form SHE-FRM-8-01 to ensure that relevant persons are informed
(see
distribution list on First Alert form).
TE
R
SHE Advisor to ensure that the Labor Ministry has been informed. Where applicable ensure that the Police has also been informed.
SHE Advisor to Inform SHE Director / SHE Manager.
SHE Advisor to carry out an immediate investigation of the accident in conjunction with MIT.
Project
Manager /
SHE
Advisor
Project
Manager /
SHE
Advisor
SHE
Advisor
Was contact made immediately to the SHE

Advisor?
Project
Manager
EG
IN
SHE Advisor to ensure that a copy of the form F100 is completed and sent to the Enforcing Authority within 10 days of the accident, or
in the case of a non COMPANY employee, obtain a copy from their employee and ensure that a copy is forwarded to the COMPANY
Insurer.
Has a First Alert been completed?
Were the Enforcing Authority has been

informed and an F100 been completed and
sent to the Enforcing Authority & other
relevant parties?
Has an investigation been carried out and a
report been completed?
Accident Book/Register
AL

Page 21
Project
manager
Project
Manager
Is the Accident book available and under

secure control?
Have all accident book entries been sent to
the SHE Department?
TE
R
Site management shall control and verify entries made in the COMPANY accident book and ensure that copies are forwarded as soon as
possible after they are made to the SHE Department.
All notified accidents shall be entered in the COMPANY accident book including all employees, contractors, visitors to site and accidents
to members of the public.
The Project / Site Manager is responsible for the completion of the SHE Return and this shall be sent to the SHE Department as soon as
possible after the month end but no later than the second working day of the following month.
EG
Monthly SHE Returns
IN
AT
IO
QCS 2014
Project
Manager /
Contractor
Have the monthly returns been completed

and sent to the SHE department each
month within the time scales set?
Total
Awarded
Total
Achievable
% Score
13
AL

QCS 2014
AT
IO
2.2.7 EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-011- Permit to Work Systems
EG
IN
TE
R
Project/Site Manager to ensure this procedure is

established and proper application of a permit to work
system affecting COMPANY, or employees of sub
contractors.
Project
Has an authorized person been appointed
Manager
for the implementation of this procedure?
Have responsibility for the overall co-ordination and
signature for the permit to work system.
Authorized Have they co-ordinated the permit to work
Person
system relating to complexity and detail of
the project?
Have they satisfied themselves that the
precautions required by the permit to work
are in place before work commences?
Sub contractors to work in accordance with this
procedure.
Sub
Worked in accordance with the permit and
contractor associated document?
1.ii
2.ii
1.iii
3.iii
3iii
1.vi
1.vi
Total
Awarded
Total
Achievable
% Score
Page 22
AL
AT
IO
EXAMPLE SHE-PRO-013- Fire Precautions During Construction Works in Buildings

Has a fire safety coordinator
appointed for the project?
been
IN
TE
R
Have fire wardens been appointed for the

project?
Have the appointed duty holders received
suitable training?
Does the site specific induction include
details about fire risks on site and site
specific emergency arrangements?
Has a fire risk assessment been completed
for the project and integrated into a site
emergency plan?
Have fire emergency drills been completed
/ planned?
Have the requirements of the fire plan been
fully implemented on site?
EG
Project
Manager /
Site
Manager
2.2.8

QCS 2014
3.iv
3.iv
3.iv
3.iv
3.iv
3.iv
Total
Awarded
Total
Achievable
% Score
Page 23
AL

2.2.9
AT
IO
QCS 2014
SHE-PRO-014- Asbestos
1.ii
EG
IN
TE
R
Project/Site Manager to ensure the procedure is

established and that the identification and removal of
asbestos containing materials (ACMs), is carried out in
accordance with this procedure and relevant information is
communicated to interested parties.
Project
Has a suitable asbestos survey relevant to
Manager
the works & project been completed and is
the report available on site?
Have the relevant control measures been
implemented and being monitored from the
asbestos removal plan/risk assessment?
Has the asbestos removal plan/risk
assessment/method
statement
been
reviewed and accepted?
Does the site specific induction include
reference about the Asbestos Containing
Materials (ACMs) on site?
Persons undertaking the work activities are required to
carry out the task in accordance with this procedure.
4.ii
5.i
6.i
5.xiii
1.vi
Competent
Person/
Contractor
Has a suitable risk assessment been

undertaken for any work which may expose
persons to asbestos fibers?
Have the findings of the risk assessment
been incorporated into planned works?
Has a competent supervisor been identified
within the planned works?
Although COMPANY appoints a specialist contractor for
the removal of Asbestos, Project/Site Manager should
ensure that they work in line with current legislation and
do not put others at risk from their operations.
5.v
5.v
1.iv
5.vi
Page 24
AL
Is the asbestos removal contractor

sufficiently dealing with waste produced
during any works. Double bagged with
separate disposal as special waste?
Project
Manager
Competent
Person
Supervisor

AT
IO
QCS 2014
5.viii
5.ix
EG
IN
TE
R
Are viewing panels or CCTV viewing aids

incorporate into the enclosure?
Are air clearance certificates available for
areas reoccupied further to asbestos
removal?
An effective Management System/ Asbestos Management
Plan should be in place to protect staff, operatives and the
public when working within a building which contains
asbestos
Project
Are ACMs clearly labeled with suitable
Manager/
warning signs?
Site
Manager
5.vii
Total
Awarded
Total
Achievable
% Score
11
END OF DOCUMENT
Page 25
QCS 2014

Part 2.3.01: Safety Health and Environment Procedures
Page 1

ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM (SAMAS) ................................................... 1
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES ........................... 1
2.3.1
Risk Identification and Management ............................................................... 6
2.3.1.1 Responsibilities ............................................................................................... 6
AL
2.3.1.2 Definitions ....................................................................................................... 7

2.3.1.3 Action Required To Implement This Procedure ............................................ 10
IO
2.3.1.4 Guidance To This Procedure ........................................................................ 12
AT
2.3.1.5 Appendices ................................................................................................... 14

2.3.1.6 Reference Documents .................................................................................. 14
2.3.1.7 Author ........................................................................................................... 15
EG
IN
TE
2.3.1.8 Approvals ...................................................................................................... 15
QCS 2014

Page 2
PROCESS MAP COMPANY DIRECT WORK

Estimator
Project/Site
Manager
Competent
Person
Operative
SHE Team
HR
Review tender
information for
SHE Risk
3.1
3.1
Where identified
prepare MS
3.2
3.2
3.5
Circulate RA/MS
for review
3.
TE
Review
completed RAMS
prior to issue
Stop work and

inform
competent
person if works
significantly
change from the
agreed RA/MS
with agreed
RA/MS
Provide advice
and monitor
works against
RA/MS
AL
Appoint a project
competent person
to produce
Company Risk
Assessment and
Method Statement
3.2
Undertake
activity in line
with agreed
RA/MS
Allow for measures

to control the
Identified risk
Prepare RA in
line with
RA Schedule
IO
3.1
Review Risk
Register and
produce a SHE Risk
Assessment
Schedule
3.2
AT
Include SHE risk

on project
Risk Register
Issue Agreed
RAMS to
relevant
supervisor/operat
ive
IN
3.2
EG
3.2
Monitor works
against agreed
RA/MS
3.2
Maintain up to date
Risk
Assessment/Method
Statement records
Brief
supervisor/operat
ive on content of
RA/MS
3.2
Monitor works
against issued
RA/MS
3.2
3.2
Review and revise
RA/MS if
circumstances change
Provide advice where

works involve young
person or expectant
mothers
3.2
3.2
Key
Activity
Guidance
QCS 2014

PROCESS MAP SUBCONTRACT WORKS

Estimator
Project/Site
Manager
Contractors
Responsible
Person
Contractors
Operatives
Review tender
information
for SHE Risk
Provide advice
and monitor
works against
RA/MS
3.1
Review Risk
Register and
update with
changes identified
by Contractors
3.3
Prepare RA for
all activities in
the scope of
Works
3.3
3.5
AL
Include SHE risk

on project
Risk Register
Where identified
prepare a
Method
Statement
3.3
EG
IN
3.3
Brief the
Operatives of
the content and
controls in the
agreed RA/MS
TE
When satisfied the

RA/MS is sufficient,
return to the S/C for
issue
AT
3.3
IO
Review the RA/MS

using Check Sheet
System
3.1
Allow for
measured to
control the
Identified risk
3.1
SHE Team
Undertake the
activity in line
with the RA/MS
3.3
Monitor works
against agreed
RA/MS
Monitor the
works against
agreed RA/MS
3.5
3.5
Stop work and inform the relevant person if works significantly change from the agreed
RA/MS
3.3
Maintain up to date
Risk
Assessment/Method
Statement records
3.5
Key
Activity
Guidance
Review and revise

RA/MS if
circumstances change
3.3
Page 3
QCS 2014

PROCESS MAP FACILITIES SERVICES AND CUSTOMER ACTIVITIES

Area
Manager/Customer
Care Manager
COMPANY
Operative/Tradesman
Line
Manager/Customer
Care Manager
Produce a Schedule
of regular activities
undertaken in
Property Services
and Customer Care
operations
3.1
Undertake a general
Risk Assessment to
determine whether
the activities require a
Method Statement
3.2
AT
IO
3.1
Complete task Risk Identification and Control

Statement (TRICS) for the activity
Carry out the works in

accordance with the
completed form
EG
IN
TE
3.2
Complete task Risk Identification and Control

Statement (TRICS) for the activity
3.2
Produce a Schedule of
regular activities
undertaken in property
Services and Customer
Care operations
3.
Key
AL
Complete a full
Method Statement
where the Risk cannot
be controlled by a
TRICS form
Activity
Guidance
Page 4
QCS 2014

Page 5
PURPOSE
1
The purpose of this procedure is to assign responsibilities and provide a consistent approach
to the planning, development and production of suitable and sufficient Risk Assessments
and the control of Method Statements for all activities.
SCOPE
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
This procedure covers all COMPANY Projects and locations under the control of
COMPANY. A COMPANY is defined as the organization with responsibility for management
of safety at a construction site
QCS 2014
2.3.1

Page 6
Risk Identification and Management
SHE DIRECTOR
1
Authorises and reviews this procedure.
PROJECT/SITE MANAGER
Ensures the procedure is established and used and that Risk Assessments are carried out
and, where appropriate, Method Statements are produced.
Unless delegated to others, in writing, retain responsibility for monitoring of the works against
the relevant control documents.
IO
AL
Prepare Risk Assessments taking account of the task being undertaken and the specific
layout and restrictions of the place the work is to be carried out and where identified produce
a written Method Statement incorporating a safe system of work.
TE
AT
COMPETENT PERSON
Either supervises the work activities or the sub/work package contractor undertaking those
work activities in line with relevant control documents required by this procedure. Provide
support to the review process for the Risk Assessment and Method Statement, to ensure
acceptability SHE-FRM-1-03.
EG
IN
SUPERVISORS
SHE MANAGER/ADVISER
6
Provides advice and support in the application of this procedure and monitors effectiveness
of the relevant control documents.
If the nature of the work is deemed safety critical, the SHE Manager/Adviser may provide
appropriate support for the production of the control documents and the communication to all
relevant Operatives.
OPERATIVE/CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEE
8
Carry out the work in accordance with the relevant control documents.
QCS 2014

Page 7
SUB/WORK PACKAGE CONTRACTOR

9
Prepare Risk Assessments taking account of the work being undertaken and the specific
layout and restrictions of the place the works is to be carried out.
HUMAN RESOURCES
10
Provide assistance in cases of new or expectant mothers, young persons or children.
2.3.1.2 Definitions
Written documents used to manage the risk associated with the work activity including:
Risk Assessment
(b)
Method Statement
(c)
Permits
(d)
Plan of Work
(e)
Certification
(f)
Licence
(g)
Skill Card
(h)
or any other supporting documentation
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
EG
AL
CONTROL DOCUMENTS
RISK ASSESSMENT
The process of hazard, aspect, impact, identification, assessment of the risk, and
identification of the controls required to manage the risk to an acceptable level to ensure the
health and safety of those affected by the activity and the protection of the environment from
harm. In undertaking the Risk Assessment the Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction)
principles of prevention must be considered, which are:
(a)
Eliminate
(b)
Control - In controlling the hazard the following should be considered in order:

(i)
Substitution use a less risky method/material
(ii)
Guarding place guards, barriers and /or signage to isolate or warn of the
hazard
(iii)
PPE provide personal protection to individuals
(iv)
Decontamination clear/clean up after exposure
QCS 2014

Page 8
RISK ASSESSMENT GUIDES

3
Refer to SAMAS 2.4.
METHOD STATEMENT
A hazard control measure in the form of a written safe system of work describing the
proposed working method and addressing the output from the Risk Assessment process,
providing instruction and guidance for those individuals carrying out the activities. The
purpose of this document is to ensure the proper planning of an element of the works and to
detail the overall methodology and associated controls SHE-FRM-1-03. The document must
be issued/briefed to management/supervision.
For work carried out by COMPANY Facility Services or Customer Care activities, the Method
Statement may be substituted with Task Risk Identification and Control Statement (TRICS)
SHE-FRM-1-05.
Sub/Work Package Contractors are to be encouraged to follow the COMPANY structure as

mentioned above. Suggestion to adopt COMPANY safe system will require an element of
instruction/training. For guidance contact the SHE Team.
Alternatively Risk Assessment and Method Statements prepared by Sub/Work Package

Contractors may be prepared as a single document, providing the content is equivalent to
that of the RA/MS above.
TE
AT
IO
AL
This document is specific to Property Services Work and Customer Care activities and
eliminates the need to produce a detailed Method Statement in the format described above.
It must only be used when the Supervisor has carried out a Risk Assessment which
concludes that a Method statement is not required. The Job/Task RA/MS is completed by
the operative / supervisor using form SHE-FRM-1-02.
EG
IN
TASK RISK IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL STATEMENT (TRICS)
COMPETENT PERSON
9
Is a person who has sufficient training, experience and knowledge to enable them to properly
undertake the task in question or carry out the Risk Assessment.
TECHNICAL ADVISER
10
Dependant on the type of work the Method Statement is being prepared for, the Technical
Adviser can be any combination of individuals (i.e. Designer, Materials Engineer, Temporary
Works Co-ordinator, etc.)
11
The Technical Adviser provides, where required, support to the review process to ensure
suitability of the content of the Risk Assessment/Method Statement. SHE-FRM-1-03.
QCS 2014

YOUNG PERSON
12
Any person between the age of 16-18 years old.
CHILD
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Any person under 16 years old.
13
Page 9
QCS 2014

Page 10
2.3.1.3 Action Required To Implement This Procedure

GENERAL
At Tender stage the Estimator will review the Pre-Tender Safety Information provided and
instigate the production of a Project Specific Risk Register, which will identify Risk including
safety risks associated with the proposed works.
Details of the risks identified and any measures included on the risk register will be included
in the enquiry documents produced for contractors works.
Allowances should be made in the settled tender for arrangements to control these risks
during the Construction Phase of the project.
At the start of the Construction Phase, the Project/Site Manager will review the risk register
and project program and produce a schedule of activities which will be used as a basis for
ensuring that all elements of the construction process are identified and considered for Risk
Assessment.
Using the schedule the Project/Site Manager will ensure a suitable Risk Assessment is
produced which will identify whether a Method Statement is required as part of the control
measures.
For Facility Service or Customer Care works the Area Manager or Customer Care Manager
will produce a schedule of activities undertaken on a regular basis by operatives working on
this type of work. A Risk Assessment will be undertaken and where it is identified that the
hazards can be controlled without the need of a full Method Statement he will indicate that
the operation be subject to a Risk Identification and Control Statement (TRICS) and the
procedure in 3.4 will be followed.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
ACTIVITIES UNDERTAKEN BY COMPANY

7
Before carrying out any activity undertaken by direct COMPANY employees, the
Project/Area/Site Manager for the workplace/operation/ design concerned shall first
produce/review the Risks Assessment Schedule with the intention of identifying where
hazard and risk could arise. This should include discussion with the people undertaking the
work, if appropriate. It should be remembered that a risk could be seen as minimal but by
further work processes could become significant. Such as painting outside to painting in a
confined space.
Following this review a specific Risk Assessment using SHE-FRM-1-02 shall be undertaken
by a Competent Person appointed by the Project/Area/Site Manager.
Where young persons or expectant mothers are involved in the activity, additional concerns
may be required. Advice should be sought from the HR Team.
10
Where identified in the Risk Assessment the Competent Person in conjunction with any
other relevant person will:
(a)
prepare a Method Statement taking account of the following:
QCS 2014

Page 11
(i)
The controls identified in the Risk Assessment.
(ii)
All relevant Safety, Health, Environmental (SHE) matters.
(iii)
The headings, as a minimum, indicated in SHE-FRM-1-03 & 1-04.
(iv)
Circulate the Method Statement utilising the tracking and content sheet SHEFRM-1-04.
Take account of comments received from other parties and re-circulate Risk
Assessment and Method Statement to those people to ensure issues raised have
been dealt with adequately.
(c)
Following agreement of the suitability of the Risk Assessment and Method Statement
by the Project/Site Manager, ensure it is issued to relevant management/supervision.
(d)
Monitor performance against the Risk Assessment and Method Statement and identify
and make any necessary changes The Risk Assessments produced shall be used,
where appropriate, as the basis for COMPANY personnel checking the contents of
sub or work package contractors safety method statements.
(e)
The Risk Assessment and Method Statement shall be briefed to ensure that the detail
is communicated to all relevant Operatives and carry out a reality check to confirm
understanding of key aspects.
AT
IO
AL
(b)
ACTIVITIES UNDERTAKEN BY CONTRACTORS
The Project/Site Manager must ensure contractors have been procured via COMPANY
Contractor Assessment procedure.
12
Before carrying out any activity undertaken by sub-contract employees the Contractors
Responsible Person shall first undertake a risk assessment taking into account the hazards
associated with the work this should include, if appropriate, discussion with the people
undertaking the work, and COMPANY Management.
13
The Risk Assessments produced shall be used, where appropriate, as the basis for
COMPANY personnel checking the contents of sub or work package contractors safety
method statements.
14
Where identified in the Risk Assessment the Contractors Responsible Person will prepare a
Method Statement taking account of the following:
EG
IN
TE
11
(a)
The controls identified in the Risk Assessment.
(b)
All relevant Safety, Health, Environmental (SHE) matters.
(c)
The headings, as a minimum, indicated in SHE-FRM-1-03 & 1-04

(Note: the use of the COMPANY format Risk Assessment and Method Statement
templates may be suggested to the Sub-Work Package Contractor for work carried
out on projects and locations under COMPANY control).
15
The Project/Site Manager will review the Risk Assessment and Method Statement
produced using the tracking and content sheet SHE-FRM-1-04. Circulating to relevant
parties as required. Following the review he will take account of comments received from
QCS 2014

Page 12
other parties and re-circulate Risk Assessment and Method Statement to those people to
ensure issues raised have been dealt with adequately.
16
Following agreement of the suitability of the Risk Assessment and Method Statement, the
Project/Site Manager will issue it to relevant COMPANY Management/Supervisor who will
then ensure that the contractors supervisor gives a briefing of the Risk Assessment and
Method Statement so that the detail is communicated to all relevant operatives.
17
The Project/Site Manager or Supervisor will monitor performance against the Risk
Assessment and Method Statement and identify and communicate any suggested changes.
In cases where any significant changes to the system of work are necessary, activities must
be stopped so that the changes to be made are re-assessed and approved. Where
appropriate, following any revision, the checking process should be repeated.
AL
TASK RISK IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL STATEMENT (TRICS)

The TRICS SHE-FRM-1-05 should be completed prior to commencement of works by the
Appropriate Line Manager. Where this is not possible or practicable, the individual
tradesman undertaking the task should complete the task assessment. The TRICS format is
only to be used after an assessment has been made by the relevant Manager and the need
to produce a Method Statement for the works has been eliminated.
19
Should the initial TRICS being completed by the tradesman reveal that other assessments
(e.g. Manual Handling/Noise) are required the risk assessment guides should be used to
develop a safe system of work. Should the safety requirements of the job still not be met
then the individual Line Manager shall be contacted immediately.
TE
AT
IO
18
IN
RECORDS AND MONITORING OF THE RISK ASSESSMENT

The Project/Site Manager should maintain up to date current Risk Assessment records so
that any significant change to a activity requiring the Risk Assessment to be re-evaluated
can be controlled. The need for review will depend upon the level of risk and the significance
of the change.
21
Where appropriate to the activity the SHE Advisor for the project will monitor performance
and identify any necessary changes by inspection and/or audit.
EG
20
2.3.1.4 Guidance To This Procedure

RISK ASSESSMENTS
1
All Contractors and self-employed persons are required to make suitable and sufficient Risk
Assessment of work activities to be undertaken. A record of the significant findings of Risk
Assessments must be kept. This record shall state the hazards and risks and the controls
needed to reduce the risks to an acceptable level. The controls shall then be implemented by
management to protect health and safety and the environment.
Where Risk Assessments are required to be carried out under particular sections of the
Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction), COSHH, Noise, Asbestos and Lead etc. a
repeat assessment is not required unless other elements of the work demand assessment in
QCS 2014

Page 13
their own right (e.g. painting at height may require a COSHH Assessment for the paint as
well as an assessment of the risk of working at height or damage to a watercourse due to
spillage).
Where an assessment identifies the likelihood of an adverse health condition or identifiable
disease being contracted, then health surveillance may be required. In all such cases the
advice of the SHE Team shall be sought.
On completion of a Risk Assessment the record shall then be used to supply the following
information to the relevant persons at risk:
Hazard/risk/impacts
(b)
Preventative and protective measures
(c)
(d)
Name of emergency wardens or incident controllers
(e)
Instruction and training to carry out the work safely
IO
(a)
AL
All activities undertaken under the Risk Assessment (and controls therein) shall be
monitored to ensure that the assessment is both suitable and sufficient and is being worked
to.
Any changes in work must be notified to the competent person who has developed the Risk
Assessment and must result in a review of the assessment and if necessary a revised
assessment produced.
TE
AT
IN
METHOD STATEMENTS
Refer to SAMAS 2.4
EG
USE OF RISK ASSESSMENT GUIDES

8
Refer to SAMAS 2.4
QCS 2014

2.3.1.5 Appendices
TE
AT
IO
AL
Appendix 1 Risk Assessment Process
IN
2.3.1.6 Reference Documents
EG
FORMS
S,H&E Risk Assessment Form (SHE-FRM-1-01)
Job/Task Risk Assessment/Method Statement (SHE-FRM-1-02)
Tracking and Content Sheet (SHE-FRM-1-04)
Task Risk Identification and Control Statement (TRICS) (SHE-FRM-1-05)
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
5
Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction) RD1.1.7
Risk Assessment Methodology SAMAS 2.4
Page 14
QCS 2014

Page 15
2.3.1.7 Author
SECTION
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT
DETAILS
AL
SHE Manager
AT
IO
2.3.1.8 Approvals
POSITION
IN
COMPANY
TE
NAME
Approved by:
EG
IN
SHEQ Director
SIGNATURE &
DATE
AL
Date :
Person Conducting Assessment :
PERSONS EXPOSED
Disabled :
Date :
Almost no probability
A small probability
A high probability
Almost Certain
YOUNG PERSONS :
Acceptable
Risk Level
Action
Insignificant
No action required and no documentary records need to be kept
Estimated Total No. of Persons at Risk :
HAZARDS (WHAT MIGHT

CAUSE HARM?)
Acceptable
Unacceptable
Others :
EG
New or Expectant Mothers :
PUBLIC/VISITORS :
IN
OTHER WORKERS :
TE
R
Person Supervising Work :
EMPLOYEES :
Risk Quantifying
Fatality, building loss,

catastrophic
environment impact
Location :
Major injury, damage or

environment impact
Activity :
No injury, damage or
environment impact
Risk Assessment No :
AT
IO
Site & Contract No :
Minor injury, damage or

environment impact
RISK FACTOR
SHE-FRM-1-01 - SAFETY, HEALTH & ENVIRONMENTAL RISK ASSESSMENT
Unacceptable
No further preventative action. Consideration shall be given to more costeffective solutions or improvements that impose no additional cost
burden. Monitoring required to ensure that controls in place are properly
maintained.
Work shall not be started or continued until the risk level has been
reduced to an acceptable risk level. While the control measures selected
shall be cost-effective, legally there is an absolute duty to reduce the risk,
this means that if it is not possible to reduce the risk even with unlimited
resources, then the work shall not be started or shall remain prohibited.
NOTES
1
Adverse Weather Conditions
17
Loading/Unloading
Cold\Hot
18
Materials
Electricity
19
Moving Parts of Machinery
Excavation
20
New or Expectant Mothers
Fire/Flammable Atmosphere
21
Proximity to Water
Floor/Ground Conditions
22
Scaffold
Flying Particle/Dust
23
Sharp Objects
Hand or Power Tool
24
Stairs/Steps
Hazardous Substance
25
Static Equipment/Machinery
10
Heat/Hot Work
26
Structure
11
Lack of Experience
27
Temporary Works
12
Lack of Training
28
Vehicle/Mobile Equipment
13
Lack of/too much Oxygen
29
Working Hours/Fatigue
14
Ladder
30
Workstation Design
15
Lifting Equipment Appliances
31
Young Persons
16
Lighting
32
Other
1.
Physical Hazards are the nature of issues that may cause harm. Tick box for
hazard.
2.
Preventative / Control Measures are the actions that will stop it going wrong.
3.
Control measures are to ensure that residual risks are reduced to a minimum.
Where controls fail to reduce the risk to a acceptable level then refer assessment to
your line manager.
4.
If the operations are likely to affect the public or the safe operation of a public
infrastructure or transport system, the control measures must reduce the likelihood
of significant harm to the level that existed before our work commenced.
5.
Where young persons or expectant mothers are involved in the activity, ensure that
any additional controls are put in place in accordance with local procedures.
6.
In addition to the above, consideration must be given to other individuals

susceptibility due to pre-existing health conditions, e.g. bad back, poor hearing.
Additional human factors such as ergonomics, workplace design, etc. should also
be considered.
7.
Where a hazard is identified that is not listed in the Physical Hazards list, enter the
hazard description followed by Other in brackets i.e. (Other).
AL
Control Measures
Implemented By
(Name)
Perceptive /Control Measures

How do you Stop it Going Wrong?
Risk
Before
Controls
U/A
AT
IO
Nature of Risk What Might Go Wrong?
Risk
After
Controls
U/A
EG
IN
TE
R
HAZARD
No.
Name
Person Completing the Assessment
Person Reviewing the Assessment
Signature
Date
EG
AT
IO
TE
R
IN
AL
QCS 2014

Page 19
(SHE-FRM-1-02) Job/Task Risk Assessment/Method Statement

Section 1 - Job / Task Allocation
To be completed by person taking works order/organising task:
o
Job / Contract N .:
Client:
Contact Name:
Date:
Job / Task Location:
Description of work:
Proposed work method:
AL
(additional sheets if required)
Signature:
Completed By (Name):
IO
Section 2 - Risk Assessment

To be completed by operative / person undertaking the work/task
AT
Upon arrival at the work location complete this Risk Assessment before starting work. If the
responses mean you cannot complete the job/task safely, discuss your concerns with your
Manager.
TE
IN
SAFETY &
SECURITY
Yes /
No
Are barriers and signs needed to separate the work area?

Do you know the location emergency procedures / fire exits / muster points / First
Aid etc?
Do power supplies / fire detection systems need isolating
EG
SAFE
SYSTEM
*Delete as required
Is the proposed work method (above) acceptable? (If No following this risk
assessment a method statement must be produced)
Are there any client controls e.g. Permits / clearances certificates etc?
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
/
/
/
/
EXCAVATION
Have all underground services been located and clearly marked?

Are shoring materials on site before starting work?
PLANT &
EQUIPMENT
HEALTH
HAZARDS
What personal protective equipment is needed (tick relevant boxes)?

Safety Footwear
Safety Helmet
Hi-Visibility Vests
Gloves
Eye Protection
Hearing Protection
Dust Masks
Other(state): .
List any items of plant / tools required:
(Include drills, saws, compactors, breakers
etc)
Are you competent and have you received the training to use them?
Yes / No
Are all the plant / tools suitable for use, tested and inspected?
Yes / No
Confirm plant / tools will be visibly inspected by the user prior to use?
Yes / No
Check labels on materials and substances. If hazardous, has a COSHH
Yes / No / NA
Assessment been carried out?
SAFETY
EQUIPMENT
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No / NA
Which is the most appropriate for access (circle as appropriate)

Ladder
WORK AT
HEIGHT
Access Tower
MEWP
Scaffolding
If Mobile Elevated Work Platform are you trained and competent to
operate?
If scaffold / access tower has this been erected by competent person?
Will this be inspected by the user prior to use?
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No / NA
QCS 2014
MANUAL
HANDLING
SITE TIDINESS
ENVIRONMEN
T
Completed by
(Name):

Page 20
Can heavy/awkward items be moved and stacked securely?

Is lifting apparatus required?
Is a separate Manual Handling assessment required?
Are materials in safe area and stacked securely?
Are all materials segregated from building users and members of the
public?
Are there facilities for the disposal of spent materials or packaging?
Do any consents to discharge trade effluent apply or are any required?
Are there any risks to trees or other ecology contact SHE adviser for
advise where required
Has consideration been given to prevention of nuisance from dust/noise to
neighbours
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Signature:
Date:
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No / NA
Section 3 Task Statement
AL
To be completed by operative / person undertaking the work/task if the proposed work method
does not accurately describe the method of work required, complete the following to explain
the safe method of working that will be adopted:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(Explain how the work is going to be done, include things such as plant, materials, access to the work
area, manual handling, sequence of work, any limitations, protection to building users, members of
public etc.)
Insert names of all members of the work gang and confirm the work method has been explained.
Name and position:
Signature
QCS 2014

Page 21
Risk Assessment/ Method Statement Tracking and Content Sheet (SHE-FRM-1-04)

Project :
Contractor :
METHOD STATEMENT TITLE :
DATE :
Review
SHE Function
1st
review
date
Status*
Name (print)
2nd review
date
Status*
Name (print)
1st
review
date
Status*
Name (print)
2nd review
date
Status*
Name (print)
1st
review
date
Status*
Name (print)
2ndreview
date
Status*
Name (print)
As Required
Technical Advisor
AL
As Required
Name:
Signature and date:
Prompt List
AT
Signed off by COMPANY as current

working document
A Work can proceed as described

B Work can proceed when comments are incorporated
C Re-submit and review before work can proceed
IO
NB: Use the Prompt List below to give a status code, as follows: *Status
Status
Fully describes the works/individual tasks/the sequence, method and

process in place to identify change requirements?
Names and titles of key personnel/supervisors responsible?
Details resources required eg equipment, plant, men and materials?
Programme of works and working hours identified?
Interfaces/security of the client/public/other contractors identified?
EG
IN
TE
Specific Risk Assessment / attached and satisfactory?

6
High risk or safety critical activities identified/controls specified?
Access/scaffolding requirements (including ancillary arrangements

such as anchor points) fully detailed and described?
Certificates of competence or qualification of operatives provided?
10
Certificates for plant/equipment inspection/examination provided?
11
COSHH, noise, manual-handling issues dealt with?
12
Personal protective equipment specified?
13
Permit requirements identified?
14
Monitoring (checks and inspections) identified?
15
Any builders work in connection identified/adequate notice given?
16
Temporary protection/support identified (eg fire, traffic, services)?
Are all the hazards identified?

Have all the risks been evaluated? (See item 7)
Are there arrangements in place for reviewing control measures
due to changing circumstances?
Yes
No
In
Part
N/A
QCS 2014

17
Environmental controls/waste disposal identified?
18
Cranage/lifting equipment - certificates/checklist/lifting plan in

place?
19
Emergency arrangements/first aid/special welfare/?
Prompt List
Yes
Details of toolbox talks to be provided?
21
Details of temporary works schemes identified, including drawings,

calculations and checks?
22
Workplace environment, design, layout and specific limitations

identified, have human factors been taken into consideration, ie
experience, fatigue, communication, methods, etc?
23
Conformation of briefing of method statement to operatives.
24
Any other (specify)?
EG
IO
IN
TE
AT
Comment/Observation (if appropriate)
AL
20
No
Page 22
In
Part
N/A
QCS 2014

Page 23
(SHE-FRM-1-05) Task Risk Identification and Control Statement (TRICS)

Section 1 - Task Allocation
To be completed by person organising task:
o
Job / Contract N .:
Date:
Client:
Contact Name:
Location:
Description of work:
IO
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
/
/
/
/
No
No
No
No
Yes / No
Yes / No
AT
LOCATION
INFORMATION
AL
Are there any client controls e.g. Permits / clearances certificates

etc required?
Is there a requirement to isolate fixed plant or equipment?
Will there be a requirement for Lone Working?
Will there be a need to enter a confined space?
Are there materials / substances used by the client which could be
hazardous to the person carrying out the work
Do any consents to discharge trade effluent apply or are any
required?
If the answer to any of the above is YES, consideration should be given to producing a detailed Method
Statement
TE
The need for a Method Statement has been considered and the issue of this TRICS is
acceptable for this work
Contact Details
EG
Review Date
Signature:
IN
Yes / No
Section 2 - Risk Assessment
To be completed by the person undertaking the work/task
Upon arrival at the work location complete this Risk Assessment before starting work. If the
responses mean you cannot complete the job/task safely, discuss your concerns with the
person signing above.
Signature:
Contact Details
EMERGENCY
& SECURITY
SAFETY
EQUIPMENT
Are barriers and signs needed to separate the work area?

Do you know the location emergency procedures / fire exits / muster
points / First Aid etc?
Do power supplies / fire detection systems need isolating
The following PPE is mandatory for COMPANY Employees.
Safety Footwear
Safety Helmet
Gloves
Eye Protection
Indicate if it is available for use
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
QCS 2014

Page 24
What additional personal protective equipment is needed (tick relevant boxes)?

Dust Masks
Hi-Visibility Vests
Hearing Protection
Other (state): .
HEALTH
HAZARDS
Check labels on materials and substances. If hazardous, has a COSHH

Assessment
been carried out?
If yes attached to this TRICS
Yes / No / NA
List any items of plant / tools required:

(Include drills, saws, compactors, breakers etc)
PLANT &
EQUIPMENT
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Have all underground services been located and clearly marked?

Is there a drawing available for the support work?
Are sufficient shoring materials, as identified on the drawing, on site before
starting work?
AT
EXCAVATIO
N
IO
AL
Are you experienced in their use or received the training to use them?
Are all the plant / tools suitable for use, tested and inspected?
Plant / tools have been visibly inspected by the user prior to use and no
defects apparent
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No / NA
Scaffolding
TE
If Mobile Elevated Work Platform are you trained and competent to

operate?
If scaffold / access tower has this been erected by competent person?
Confirm this has been inspected by the user prior to use?
IN
WORK AT
HEIGHT
MEWP
Access Tower
Which is the most appropriate means of access (circle as appropriate)
If non of the above is practical is a ladder the proposed means of access
EG
Specify the type of ladder
MANUAL
HANDLING
SITE
TIDINESS
WORK
AREA
ENVIRONME
NT
Indicate the height / no of rungs needed to provide safe access
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No / NA
Type
Rungs
Are there any heavy or awkward items be moved or stacked?

If lifting equipment is required is it available?
Is a separate Manual Handling assessment required?
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No
Yes / No
Is there space in the work area to stack / store materials safely and allow
access?
Are all materials segregated from building users and members of the
public?
Are there any object / vehicles materials belonging to the client which may
be a hazard?
Is the area suitably lit to carry out the task safely?
Are the ground / floor conditions suitable for the work to be carried out?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Are there facilities for the disposal of spent materials or packaging?

Are there any risks to trees or other ecology contact SHE adviser for
advise where required
Has consideration been given to prevention of nuisance from dust/noise to
neighbours
Yes / No / NA
/
/
/
/
/
No
No
No
No
No
Yes / No / NA
Yes / No / NA
QCS 2014

Page 25
Section 3 Task Statement

To be completed by the person undertaking the task.
Accurately describe the safe method of working that will be adopted:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(Explain how the work is going to be done, include things such as plant, materials, access to the work
area, manual handling, sequence of work, any limitations, protection to building users, members of
public etc.)
I confirm that the above statement identifies the hazards and risks associated with the
works to be carried out and the control measures identified are in place.
Signature:
Date:
Completed by
(Name):
Insert names of all members of the work gang and confirm the work method has been explained.
Name and position:
Signature
QCS 2014

Page 1
Part 2.3.02: Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH)
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM (SAMAS)
MANAGEMENT
/
1
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES
2.3.2
COSHH (CONTROL OF SUBSTANCES HAZARDOUS TO HEALTH)
2.3.2.1 Responsibilities .................................................................................................. 4

2.3.2.2 Definitions of terms ............................................................................................ 5
AL
2.3.2.3 Appointment of COSHH Co-ordinator ................................................................ 5

2.3.2.4 Appendices .......................................................................................................11
2.3.2.5 Reference Documents ......................................................................................13
IO
2.3.2.6 Author ...............................................................................................................13
EG
IN
TE
AT
2.3.2.7 Approvals ..........................................................................................................13
QCS 2014

Page 2
Process Map
Project Manager
Ensure procedures are

in place and COSHH
Co-ordinator is
appointed
1.2, 3.1
COSHH
Co-ordinator
C/S Manager/
Works Package
Manager
Procurement
Sub
Contractors
Provides support
as necessary
Understand duties.
Attend training if
necessary
1.3, 3.5
Undertake COSHH
assessments for all
used and/or created
by
Company
3.3
1.7, 3.8
Request MSDS for all

substances ordered by
Company
1.5, 3.12
Control exposure
to hazardous
substances used or
created by
1.4, 3.11
Company
Ensure all appropriate information is

obtained/passed over at initial SHE
meetings with sub contractors
AL
Attend initial SHE

meeting. Identify
hazardous
substances to be
used
1.6, 3.2
3.6
IO
Ensure hazardous
substances used or
created by sub
contractor has valid
assessments and
3.2,
3.5
MSDS
AT
Agrees and
monitors against
method statements
Undertake COSHH
assessments for all
hazardous
substances and
submit for
approval
3.2
TE
Request MSDS for all

substances ordered by
Company
1.5, 3.12
EG
IN
3.5
1.4, 3.2
Maintain Register and file

containing assessments
and MSDS and advise
First Aiders of location
When required ensure

face fit tests have
been carried out and
records maintained
3.6
Ensure arrangements are

in place for disposal of
and containers
3.7
Review arrangements at
regular intervals to
ensure continued
effectiveness
3.2, 3.5
Key:
Activity
Guidance
Ensure monitoring and

health surveillance is
carried out where
identified in COSHH
assessments
3.8, 3.9
SHE
Control exposure in
line with COSHH
assessments
1.6, 3.4
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
1
The purpose of this procedure is to assign responsibilities and establish a system for the
control of substances hazardous to health.
SCOPE
of safety at a construction site.
AL
IO
EG
IN
TE
AT
Governmental responsibilities regarding COSHH rest with Civil Defense & Environment
Ministry.
COMPETENT AUTHORITIES
QCS 2014

Page 4
SHE DIRECTOR
1
Authorises this procedure.

PROJECT/MANAGER
Ensures the procedure is established and reviewed for effectiveness. Appoints a

COSHH Co-ordinator for the project.
COSHH CO-ORDINATOR
Carries out duties as defined in the procedure.
AL
IO
Is aware of COSHH assessment controls along with other risk assessments and method
statement. Monitors work to ensure it is done in line with method statement.
AT
CONSTRUCTION/SITE MANAGER OR WORKS PACKAGE MANAGER
SUB-CONTRACTORS
Provide COSHH assessments and MSDS for all substances. Control exposure in line
with COSHH assessment and method statement.
IN
Requests Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for all substances ordered by COMPANY
TE
PROCUREMENT
Make themselves aware of location of COSHH assessments and MSDS in case needed
in an emergency.
EG
FIRST AIDERS
SHE MANAGER/ADVISER
8
Provides advice and support in the application of this procedure and monitors
effectiveness of control measures.
QCS 2014

Page 5
2.3.2.2 Definitions of terms

HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE
Substance means a natural or artificial substance whether in solid or liquid form or in the
form of a gas or vapour (including micro-organisms).
A substance hazardous to health is one which, because of the way it is made, stored,
transported, used or disposed of, presents a risk to health in the workplace. The definition of
a hazardous substance is comprehensive. All supplied substances which are classified as
hazardous must by be labelled correctly. Substances will be labelled as Very Toxic, Toxic,
Harmful, Corrosive or Irritant. However, some hazardous substances can be created during
processes, and these are also covered by the Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction),
for example dusts of any kind in specified concentrations.
AL
QATAR WORKPLACE EXPOSURE LIMITS (WEL) (BASED ON UK HSE STANDARDS)
This is the exposure limit approved by the UK Health and Safety Commission for a
substance in relation to the specified reference period of either 15 minutes or 8 hours. A
list of WELs is available in the HSE Publication EH/40 Workplace Exposure Limits,
which is updated annually. The majority of WELs listed in EH40 are for single compounds
or for substances containing a common element or radical, for example, 'isocyanates'. A
few of the WELs relate to substances commonly encountered as complex mixtures or
compounds, for example 'rubber fume'. If the Safety Data Sheet lists a substance with a
WEL, the employer should ensure that the WEL is not exceeded.
Is a dust of any kind present in the air at concentrations equal to or greater than 10 mg/m
3
over an 8 hour period if inhalable (i.e. can be breathed in) or 4 mg/m over an 8 hour
period if respirable (i.e. small enough to reach to the very base of the lungs).
EG
IN
TE
HAZARDOUS DUST
AT
IO
2.3.2.3 Appointment of COSHH Co-ordinator

The Project Manager is responsible for appointing a COSHH Co-ordinator
ASSESSMENT OF RISK
2
Under COSHH the risk presented by any hazardous substance used, stored, transported,
created or disposed of in the workplace must be assessed.
If a substance is supplied or created by COMPANY, the COSHH Co-ordinator is responsible

for ensuring a COSHH assessment has been undertaken. The COSHH Co-ordinator should
ensure that a register of all hazardous substances is maintained, and that each has a valid
COSHH assessment, and where applicable a MSDS.
If the substance is supplied or created by a sub-contractor, it is their responsibility to provide

the COSHH assessment along with all other risk assessments submitted for acceptance.
These assessments are likely to accompany a method statement, and should be read as
part of the method statement acceptance process as covered by procedure SHE-PRO-001.
Construction/Site Managers and Works Package
Managers must ensure that assessments and method statements have been agreed and
must monitor work to ensure it is undertaken in line with the method statement. The COSHH
QCS 2014

Page 6
Co-ordinator should ensure that all hazardous substances present on a project have a valid
COSHH assessment. For a supplied substance the COSHH assessment should be
accompanied by the manufacturers/suppliers MSDS.
6
NB - a MSDS alone does not constitute a COSHH assessment.
In all cases risks to persons other than those using a substance must also be considered
(e.g. those working in adjacent areas). The COSHH Co-ordinator should ensure this is done,
and that suitable measures are taken. These measures may include provision of information
and training to personnel other than those who will use the substance.
COSHH ASSESSMENT PROCEDURE
To enable COMPANY to comply with the requirements of COSHH, an assessment is
required. This is in two parts:
Firstly, COMPANY must not carry out any work that is liable to expose employees to
any substance hazardous to health, unless a suitable and sufficient assessment of the
risks created by the work has been made.
10
Secondly, if the first step indicates that substances hazardous to health will be used or
created, COMPANY must identify the actions to be taken to comply with COSHH.
11
The procedure itself is fairly simple but does take time and effort. It involves:
AT
IO
AL
identifying jobs, working processes and procedures that involve the use or generation
of substances that are hazardous to health
(b)
identifying all the hazardous substances in use in the workplace, very toxic, toxic,
harmful, corrosive or irritant
(c)
identifying how the hazardous substances are stored and used. This means how they
are used, not how they should be used
EG
IN
TE
(a)
12
Very toxic or toxic: Substances that, in low quantities, cause death or acute or chronic
damage to health when inhaled, swallowed or absorbed via the skin.
13
Harmful: Substances that may cause death or acute or chronic damage to health when
inhaled, swallowed or absorbed via the skin.
QCS 2014

Page 7
Corrosive: Substances that may, on contact with living tissues, destroy them.
15
Irritant: Non-corrosive substances that through immediate, prolonged or repeated

contact with the skin or mucous membrane may cause inflammation.
16
Identifying how these hazardous substances might enter the body. Normally these methods
are classed as:
AT
IO
AL
14
inhalation into the lungs, when the substance is in the form of a gas, vapour,
fume, mist, aerosol or dust
(b)
absorption through the skin or eyes by contact with a substance that can
penetrate unbroken skin, or is absorbed through unprotected cuts or grazes
(c)
injection by contact with contaminated sharp objects or high-pressure equipment,

e.g. water jetting
(d)
ingestion by swallowing particles of a hazardous substance resulting from handto-mouth transfer identifying the amount of exposure. This involves knowing how
much of the substance will be used, how people will be exposed to it and if there
are is a workplace exposure limit investigating the possible health effects of such
exposure
identifying who is at risk, for example the persons using it or anyone who
enters the area within the following 24 hours
(i)
EG
IN
TE
(a)
17
(ii)
considering the effectiveness of the control measures already in place, for

example whether the concentration of vapour is likely to be above the WEL
(iii)
identifying the risk to workers if control measures deteriorate or fail or if an

emergency occurs, for example if a volatile solvent is accidentally spilt
resulting in a high concentration of hazardous vapour in the workplace
(iv)
finally, from the above considerations, making a decision upon whether a

substance represents a health risk or not. If the answer is 'no', the findings
should be recorded. If 'yes', action will be necessary to either prevent or
control exposure.
Completed assessments must be made available to the person who is going to carry out the
work so that they are aware of the health hazards present and the control measures that
they must use, record COSHH Assessments on SHE-FRM-2-01.
QCS 2014

Page 8
CONTROL OF EXPOSURE TO HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

The measures which need to be taken to comply with COSHH should be detailed on the
COSHH assessment. The overriding duty is to prevent exposure to hazardous substances.
This may be achieved by using a different process, design or technique which does not
require or create the hazardous substance, or substituting the hazardous substance for a
non-hazardous one. Where it is not possible or practicable to prevent exposure completely,
exposure should be reduced by using an alternative less hazardous substance or version
(e.g. more dilute concentration), using a different form (e.g. pellets instead of powders) or
changing the process (e.g. to use less).
19
If it is not reasonably practicable to prevent exposure, then exposure must be controlled.

This must be achieved as far as possible by controlling the substance at source by
engineering controls. Other measures may also be needed such as provision of information
and instruction, and hygiene facilities. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can only be
used as a last resort where adequate control cannot be achieved by other means.
20
Where a substance has been assigned a WEL, this must not be exceeded.
21
Additional requirements may be necessary if substances have been identified as

carcinogens, mutagens, asthmagens or are biological agents. These substances may be
identified by the risk phrases R42, R42/43, R45, R46 or R49. Consult the SHE Advisor for
further information if required.
22
Control measures should be monitored to ensure that they are effective. Where they prove
ineffective the assessment should be reviewed, and measures modified so far as is
reasonably practicable.
AT
IO
AL
18
TE
DUTIES OF THE COSHH CO-ORDINATOR

The COSHH Co-ordinator should ensure that first aiders know where to access information
on hazardous substances used on the project. This could be achieved by maintaining a file
of all MSDS and assessments which is easily accessible by first aiders.
24
COSHH Co-ordinators should liaise with Safety Co-ordinator / SHE Adviser / Managers /
Environmental Adviser / First Aiders / Emergency Co-ordinators for further advice if
necessary.
EG
IN
23
RESPIRATORY PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (RPE) FIT TESTING

25
COSHH requires fit testing of RPE. Where sub-contractors provide RPE for their workers they
should also provide evidence that a suitable fit test has been carried out for each worker
required to wear RPE. The COSHH Co-ordinator should ensure that fit tests have been
carried and records are available.
26
Where COMPANY employees are required to wear RPE, COMPANY will be responsible for
ensuring fit tests have been carried out. The SHE Department can undertake fit tests, or it is
possible to have a member of the project staff trained to undertake the tests. Training can be
provided by the SHE Department and takes half a day. Records of training should be kept
on site as well as centrally.
27
Fit testing of individuals must be carried out using the appropriate RPE for the task identified
in the risk assessment, and the results recorded on the Qualitative Fit Test Proforma SHEFRM-2-02.
QCS 2014

Page 9
28
Records of fit testing must be kept on the users personnel file for 5 years. If there are any
changes in the wearer, such as significant weight change or dentistry that may affect the size
or shape of the face, then a new fit test should be carried out.
29
Further information on RPE can be found in SHE-PRO-010 Personal Protective Equipment

(PPE).
USE AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
30
Hazardous must only be used by persons who have received instruction and training, and
must only be issued in quantities sufficient to complete the task. Hazardous substances are
often harmful to the environment, and half empty containers can pose a risk to persons in
the future. Therefore, all containers must be disposed of as hazardous waste, including empty
containers.
The COSHH assessment will identify when exposure monitoring is required. Typically this
will be required if any of the following apply:
If it is possible that the failure of any control measures could result in a serious health
effect;
(e)
If a substance has a WEL
(f)
If there is doubt whether exposure monitoring should be carried out, consult the SHE
Dept who will advise on appropriate protocols and details of record keeping.
AT
IO
(a)
IN
Responsibility for health surveillance lies with COMPANY. Many of the tasks carried out in the
construction environment will not require health surveillance to be carried out. However, if all
three of the following conditions apply, then health surveillance is required:
An identifiable disease or adverse health effect may be related to exposure.
(b)
There is a reasonable likelihood that the disease or effect may occur under particular
conditions of work.
(c)
There are valid techniques for detecting indications of the disease or the effect.
EG
(a)
32
TE
HEALTH SURVEILLANCE
31
AL
EXPOSURE MONITORING
ARRANGEMENTS TO DEAL WITH ACCIDENTS, INCIDENTS AND EMERGENCIES

33
Arrangements to deal with emergency situations (e.g. spillages, accidental release or over
exposure) should be detailed in the appropriate method statement. Emergency arrangements
which cover the project as a whole should also be detailed in the construction phase plan.
INITIAL SHE MEETING
34
At the initial SHE meeting (see procedure SHE-PRO-007) COMPANY will advise subcontractors of any substances used by others which could affect their employees. In addition
sub-contractors will be required to advise COMPANY of all hazardous substances they will
use.
QCS 2014

Page 10
PROCUREMENT
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
All orders and requisitions shall clearly identify the product being ordered and shall contain a
requirement to comply with COSHH and to provide the MSDS. The COSHH Co-ordinator
shall ensure MSDS from the supplier are delivered with the product.
35
QCS 2014

Page 11
2.3.2.4 Appendices
APPENDIX 1 EXAMPLE OF COSHH RISK ASSESSMENT
Auto diesel
Flammable, harmful/irritant
Trade name(s):
Any auto fuel production company
Substance used for:
Motive power for plant and other diesel powered vehicles
AL
Safety precautions
Inhalation: can lead to

nausea and headaches.
Avoid inhaling vapour or mist;

ensure good ventilation. Remove
the victim from exposure.
Skin contact: can be

irritating and have a
defatting effect.
Avoid prolonged/repeated contact.

Wear PVC gloves. Do not use as a
cleaning agent.
Eye contact: will cause

irritation.
Wear eye protection if splashing can Rinse immediately with plenty of

occur.
water until irritation subsides. Seek
medical advice.
Remove contaminated clothing.

Wash skin thoroughly with soap and
warm water.
EG
Do not eat, drink or smoke during

use.
Do not induce vomiting. Wash mouth

with water. Seek immediate medical
attention.
Fire: products of
combustion are toxic.
Vapour/air mixture is
explosive.
Do not smoke during use. Avoid

heat sources and open flames.
Clear the area. Do not inhale

vapours, smoke etc.
Spillage: fumes/vapour
likely to collect in low
areas.
Do not allow to enter drains.

Eliminate ignition sources. Ensure
good ventilation.
Contain with sand or granules.

Remove into a container. Dispose of
as hazardous waste.
Ingestion: will irritate

mouth, throat etc.
Remove to fresh air. Seek medical

attention if conditions severe.
IN
TE
AT
IO
Potential hazards
Additional information: Environmentally damaging.

Assessment date
Approved for use by (print name and
position)
Next review date
QCS 2014

Page 12
Signature
APPENDIX 2 - COSHH RELATED RECORD KEEPING REQUIREMENTS
COSHH Related Record Keeping Requirements Summary

Issue
Document
COMPANY Register entries
Maintenance Records
Examination and where appropriate
test records. Maintenance records.
AL
PPE (various items)

Respiratory Protective
Equipment (RPE) e.g. cartridge
type
Local Exhaust Ventilation (LEV)
Archive Period
None specified,
recommended
minimum 3 years
Minimum 5 years
Minimum 5 years
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Examination and test records

Minimum 5 years
(including repairs)1
Exposure Monitoring (Personal)
Monitoring results or a suitable
Minimum 40 years
summary2
Exposure Monitoring (Not
Monitoring results or a suitable
Minimum 5 years
Personal)
summary
Health Surveillance
Health record containing particulars
40 years from date
approved by the HSE.
of last entry
Disposable RPE
Project specific records
Minimum 5 years
Breathing Apparatus
Maintenance, examination and test
Minimum 5 years
records. Maintenance log.
Fit Test Report
RPE Qualitative Fit Test Records
Minimum 5 years
1
All LEV systems must be examined/tested every 12 months. 2 All personal monitoring results
must be treated as confidential information and consultation must be carried out through the
SHE Department.
QCS 2014

Page 13

FORMS
1
COSHH Assessment Form (SHE-FRM-2-01)
COSHH RPE Qualitative Fit Test Report (SHE-FRM-2-02)
COSHH Training Record (SHE-FRM-2-03)
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
UK Workplace Exposure Limits (EH40)
IO
AL
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT DETAILS
TE
SECTION
AT
2.3.2.6 Author
EG
IN
SHE Manager
2.3.2.7 Approvals
NAME
Approved by:
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SHEQ Director
SIGNATURE & DATE
QCS 2014

Page 14
COSHH ASSESSMENT

Trade name(s):
Substance used for:
AL
Safety precautions
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Potential hazards
Additional information:
Assessment date
NEXT
REVIEW
DATE
Approved for use by (print name and
position)
Signature
QCS 2014

Page 15
Name:
Worker No:
Report Number:
Employer:
Date of Test:
Name of tester:
RPE Model Number:

Size of RPE Tested:
Sensitivity Test
Complete? Y/N
Solution Dose?
10 - 20 - 30 (circle)
Please circle test solution used.

Sweet
Bitter
AL
User Seal Test carried out successfully? Y/N

Exercise (Duration is 1 minute for each).
Normal Breathing.
Deep breathing through mouth
3
4
Turn Head side to side breathe in as head looks at

shoulder.
Look up and down breathe in looking at ceiling.
Talking for 1 minute.
Jog on the spot OR bend down and then up.
Breathe normally.
Note - 1
The performance of RPE with a tight fitting facepiece (filtering facepieces, half and full
face masks) depends on good contact between the wearers skin and the face seal of the
mask. A good face seal can only be achieved if the wearer is clean- in the region of the
seal and the facepiece is of the correct size and shape to fit the wearers face. Spectacles
with side arms and other items of PPE must not interfere with the correct fitting of the
facepiece or the face seal
Dosage for Fit test Initially, same dosage as determined in Sensitivity Test when hood is
in place. Then introduce a dose every 30 seconds during exercises
If at any time during the test, the subject tastes the particulate then the test is failed.
Wait 15 minutes before re-testing. If the retest is failed then test using a different sized
mask.
Note 3
Fail
IO
AT
N
R
TE
IN
EG
Note - 2
Pass
Exercise
1
QCS 2014

Page 16
AT
IO
AL
Notes: (To be used by the employee, Manager, Occupational Hygienist and/or SHE Advisor. )
I certify that I have carried out the Fit Testing of Respiratory Protective Equipment as required under
the COSHH Regulations
TE
Signature of tester Date .
IN
I certify that I have received Fit Testing for Respiratory Protective Equipment as required under the
COSHH Regulations
EG
Signature of employee Date .
THIS DOCUMENT TO BE RETAINED ON FILE FOR 5 YEARS.
AL

Page 17
QCS 2014
Assessment Sheet No:
AT
IO
Contract:
Substance:
Activity No:
Date
Position Held
Signature
EG
IN
TE
R
Name
I declare that I am in receipt of training in the precautions required for the safe use of substances list above.
Instructor's Signature:
Copy to:
Site Register
Date:
QCS 2014

Page 1
Part 2.3.03: Safe Working in the Vicinity of Buried and Overhead Services
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
MANAGEMENT
/
2.3
SAFETY , HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES .......................... 1
2.3.3
SAFE WORKING IN THE VICINITY OF BURIED AND OVERHEAD

SERVICES ...................................................................................................... 1
Responsibilities .......................................................................................... 4
2.3.3.2
Definitions .................................................................................................. 4
2.3.3.3
Action Required To Implement This Procedure .......................................... 5
2.3.3.4
Guidance to This Procedure....................................................................... 7
2.3.3.5
Reference Documents................................................................................ 7
2.3.3.6
Author......................................................................................................... 8
2.3.3.7
Approvals ................................................................................................... 8
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
2.3.3.1
is appointed
QCS 2014

Page 2
Process Map
Ensure evaluation of
programme & works
drawings, identify
requirement for
excavations &
equipment is available
3.1
Locator of
Service
Supervisor/Electrical
Engineer
SHE Advisor
Contact all relevant

stat. authorities,
Engineer & obtain
information on all u/g
and overhead
services. Produce
Master drawing
where practicable
3.2, 3.5
Produce activity
specific service
location drawing
3.2
Carry out
cable/pipe/service
detection survey
3.3
Mark location of
services on
ground/identify
overhead services
3.3
Undertake service
plans and maintain
master copy
Update activity
specific service
location drawing
3.3
TE
3.2
IO
Ensure timed
circuits are
identified or
isolations
3.2
AT
PLANNING LOCATION
Ensure this procedure

is established. Appoint
1.2
Services Coordinator
AL
Project Manager
EG
IN
Identify trial holes required to establish exact

location and type of service
3.2, 3.3
Ensure services to be
removed are made
DEAD
or SPIKED by
authorised
person
3.2
Input to Method
Statement as
appropriate
Agree Method Statement
3.1 and 4
Re-assessed by competent person
OPERATIONAL
CONTROLS
Approve and monitor

Permit to break
ground & confirm
duration
3.2
Ensure service plans

are updated & maintain
master copy
3.2
Ensure updated plans

are forwarded to H&S
file
Re-assessed by competent person

Key
Activity
Guidance
HOLD POINT
Instruct personnel
in contents of
Permit and Method
Statement
3.4
Proceed in
accordance with
Permit & Method
Statement and
monitor. Notify
Service Cocoordinator of any
3.5
change and need to
review RAMS
Monitor operations
& permit.
Investigate any
learning events or
strikes
1.6
Insp. Report
HOLD POINT
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
1
The purpose of this procedure is to assign responsibilities and establish a safe system of
work for activities carried out where buried services may exist or overhead services are
present.
SCOPE
AL
IN
TE
AT
IO
Qatar General Electrical and Water Corporation (KAHRAMMA) is the responsible for the
distribution network cables and wire, not the Qatar General Electricity and Water Company
EG
Note:
QCS 2014

Page 4
SHE DIRECTOR
1
Authorises this procedure

Ensures that works are carried out in accordance with this procedure and appoints the
Services Co-ordinator.
SERVICES CO-ORDINATOR
Ensures that necessary information regarding services is available and undertakes the
duties specified in this procedure.
AL
work activities and ensures preparation of the necessary control documents required by this
procedure.
AT
IO
SUPERVISOR/ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
SHE ADVISER
Provides advice and support in the application of this procedure and monitors others
effectiveness to manage the activities.
EG
TE
Undertakes the physical check and survey, in line with their training, to determine the
location of both identified/unrecorded services.
IN
LOCATOR OF SERVICES
2.3.3.2 Definitions
SERVICES
1
Any cable or pipe, either buried in the ground or supported overhead, providing
telecommunications, electricity, gas, water, drainage or other service.
ANY CABLE RISK ASSESSMENT
The process of hazard identification, assessment of the risk, and identification of the controls
required to manage the risk to an acceptable level to ensure the health and safety of those
affected by the activity.
Refer to SHE-PRO-001
(
).
METHOD STATEMENT
QCS 2014

Page 5
A statement describing the proposed working method that addresses the output from the
risk assessment process and provides instruction and guidance for those individuals
carrying out the activity.
Refer to (SHE-PRO-001).
PERMIT TO BREAK GROUND
Control document (SHE-FRM-3-02 ) Permit to Break Ground, to ensure that potential

hazards from services during excavation or penetration of the ground are identified and risks
are controlled and maintained.
AL
Ensure the evaluation of tender information, Project Programme and the works drawings to
identify the requirements for breaking ground or location of overhead services.
Appoint a Services Co-ordinator or retain the Services Co-ordinators duties in 3.2.
Ensure the availability of suitable service location equipment and a competent operator who
is appropriately trained in the use of detection equipment.
Agree with Services Co-ordinator the site colour-coding scheme for surface marking of
services.
Check that the controls in this procedure are implemented.
Agree method statements and associated risk assessments.
In case of a service strike, a specific site investigation must be undertaken in conjunction

with the SHE Team (SHE-FRM-8-06).
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
SERVICES CO-ORDINATOR
Seek out and retain copies of all statutory authority and service drawings (including clients
where applicable) relevant to the projects scope of work.
Have transposed onto a master drawing(s), the details of all relevant services.
10
Have recorded on the master drawing(s) the location and depths of services installed during
site establishment.
11
Confirm with the Supervisor/Electrical Engineer in control of an activity requiring a Permit to

Break Ground the full extent of the intended activity. Check the activity drawings against the
master drawing(s).
12
Produce an activity specific location drawing for reference by the locator of services that
includes current landmarks, (SHE-FRM-3-02).
13
Request the appointed Locator of Services to undertake a thorough survey of the area where
the activity is to take place with an appropriate service locator (and Genny where circuits on
timers are likely), and none energised services, e.g. gas and water, even if it has been
established from drawings that there are no recorded services present.
QCS 2014

Page 6
In conjunction with the Locator of Services, specify where and when trial holes are dug to
establish the exact location and type of service identified. Provide an activity specific,
location drawing (including any updates identified in the survey) for reference by the
Supervisor/Electrical Engineer in control of the activity.
15
Update master drawing(s) following receipt of survey information.
16
Ensure information on master drawing(s) is transferred to as-built drawings for inclusion in

the projects Health and Safety File.
17
Ensure secure isolation of any service or purging of any pipe-work before it is worked upon
or removed and be aware of any presence and effect of timed circuits.
18
Before any activities start on a site where overhead services are present or adjacent, contact
the SHE Adviser for advice. Where overhead electrical supply cables are present, Qatar
General Electricity & Water Company shall also be contacted for advice on re-routing or
clearance and insulation. Review Method Statement/Risk Assessment before final approval
by Project Manager.
AL
14
IO
LOCATOR OF SERVICES
Physically and clearly mark the position of services on the ground in accordance with the
services marking scheme.
20
Assist in establishing the exact location and type of service identified when trial holes are
being dug.
21
Update the activity specific location drawing provided for reference to you by the Services
Co-ordinator.
22
Advise the Services Co-ordinator of any deviations from records
23
Seek advice from the Services Co-ordinator where doubt about a signal or lack of one
exists.
24
Continue to use the service locator and genny, whilst the work proceeds, to establish the
presence of any services missed/not located during the initial sweep, frequency as
determined by the Service Co-ordinator.
EG
IN
TE
AT
19
SUPERVISORS/ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
25
Prepare or arrange for the Sub/Work Package Contractor to prepare for agreement by the
Project/Site Manager a specific method statement SHE-PRO-001 for activities involving: (
26
(a)
excavation or penetration of the ground;
(b)
any activity beneath or in the vicinity of overhead electrical supply cables or pipework
containing a hazardous substance where there is any possibility, however remote, of
plant, equipment, materials or people encroaching into a safety zone;
(c)
any activity beneath or in the vicinity of any other overhead service where there is a
possibility of damage.
Ensure persons under their control fully understand they do not commence excavation or
penetration of the ground in an area unless the whereabouts of services has been
established and a Permit to Break Ground has been prepared and approved by the
Service Co-ordinator and obtained (SHE-FRM-3-02).
QCS 2014

Page 7
Ensure all personnel involved in the activities are instructed in the method statement and
Permit to Break Ground and sign to confirm their understanding, including the requirement to
stop work immediately in cases where a service is damaged so that the situation can be reassessed by a competent person.
28
Ensure persons under their control fully understand they may not in any way interfere with a
service or remove any service cover, warning tile or other protection unless specifically
authorised by their Supervisor.
29
In the event of a service being damaged, work must be stopped immediately and cordoned
off so that a re-assessment can be undertaken by a competent person before work recommences.
30
Establish in conjunction with the Services Co-ordinator the need for additional surveys as
the activity progresses where the location of services may have been missed.
31
Where overhead electrical supply cables are present, that persons under their control fully
understand these are not insulated, therefore if contact or near contact is made with them
by a conducting object, there is a risk of death or serious injury to any person in the
immediate vicinity.
AL
27
AT
IO
2.3.3.4 Guidance to This Procedure

RISK ASSESSMENT/METHOD STATEMENT
The Risk Assessment/Method Statement (SHE-PRO-001) shall reference the activity specific
location drawing provided by the Services Co-ordinator.
TE
PERMIT TO BREAK GROUND
IN
Any delay between the services survey and the activities to be performed shall be
minimised and a limit specified on the Permit to Break Ground, SHE-FRM-3-02 This limit
for the Permit(s) must be agreed with the Service Co-ordinator.
(
..
EG
REFERENCING
The Risk Assessment/Method Statement shall be referenced on the Permit to Break Ground.
If a sub or work package contractor is undertaking the works, the contractors supervisor shall
confirm that the items on the Permit have been undertaken before any ground is broken (see
also 3.4 stop work requirements).

PROCEDURES
1
Safety, Health and Environmental Risk Management and Written Safe Systems of Work
(SHE-PRO-001)
Permit to Work Systems (SHE-PRO-011)

FORMS
Permit to Break Ground (SHE-FRM-3-02)
QCS 2014

Page 8
Site Investigations of Underground Strikes (SHE-FRM-8-06)

FURTHER REFERENCE
Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction) , Section 1.5
Statutory Authorities/Clients Plans & Drawings
Works Programme & Drawings
Site Service Plan
Risk Assessment/Method Statement or Task Statement
10
Site Investigation
AL
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT DETAILS
AT
SECTION
IO
2.3.3.6 Author
TE
SHE Manager
EG
NAME
IN
2.3.3.7 Approvals
Approved by:
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SHEQ Director
SIGNATURE & DATE
QCS 2014

Page 9
Section
1
Permit Number
Prepared By
Start Date/Time
Date
(To be noted on the RA+MS)
Requested By
Duration
Specific Location
Activity
Plant To Be Used (As Part Of The Safe Systems Of Work)
Yes
No
Safety Pin Required
Yes
No
The services itemised below exist at the above location & on the attached sheets
Service
Drawing
Exist
Service
Drawing
Exist
Number
Yes/N
Number
Yes/N
o
o
Electricity
Drainage
Underground
Ducts
Overhead
CCTV
Street Lighting
Temporary Services
Gas
Others (i.e. ordinance)
Telecom
Approval
To Remove
Fibre Optics
Redundant
Water Mains
Services
Sewers
Restrictions
1
Permit valid from ...................................... to ............
2
Excavate trial holes by hand every ....................................... metres
3
Expose services along full length in works areas
Yes
No
4
Confirm a risk assessment and method statement have been prepared
Yes
Risk assessment/s and method statement/s ID Number ................................................................
5
Service locator/survey carried out
Yes
by whom ......................................
Is the equipment calibration up to date Yes
Date of Calibration ...............................................
6
Has ground radar survey been carried out Yes
(If Yes attach appropriate drawings) No
Any other comments/ restrictions identified
Approved By: (COMPANY Authorised Person/Service Co-ordinator)

Print Name .................................................... Signature .................................
Position ......................................................... Date .......................................
Acknowledgement of COMPANY/*Contractors Supervisor
I understand the hazards involved in this work and that in the event of a service strike the area will be
cordoned off and only re-entered following advice from the utility provider. All personnel involved will have
this fully explained to them by me and sign section 9 of this permit to confirm this is the case.
Print Name ................................................... Signature ...................................................Position ....................................
Print Name ................................................... Signature ...................................................Position ...................................
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Quick Hitch Fitted
Date ...............................
Confirmation of Completion of Works
Print Name ............................................................... Signature ......................................
Position ................................................................... Date .............................................
Confirmation that personnel have been advised of Section 7 (Sign and Print Name)
Date ................................
*If relevant
Distribution:
White copy Workplace recipient

Pink copy
Distribute as
required Blue
copy Retain in
book (file copy)
QCS 2014

Part 2.3.04: Electricity at Work
Page 1
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
MANAGEMENT
/
ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM (SAMAS) ------------------------------------------- 1
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES ---------------------- 1
2.3.4
ELECTRICITY AT WORK ------------------------------------------------------------------ 1
2.3.4.1
2.3.4.2
2.3.4.3
2.3.4.4
2.3.4.5
2.3.4.6
2.3.4.7
Responsibilities ........................................................................................................... 4
Definitions ................................................................................................................... 4
Actions Required to implement This Procedure .......................................................... 5
Appendices ................................................................................................................. 7
Reference documents............................................................................................... 10
Author ....................................................................................................................... 10
Approvals ................................................................................................................. 10
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
is appointed
QCS 2014

Page 2
Process Map - Control of Electrical Operations

Project Manager
Services Coordinator
Appoint an Electrical
Duty Holder for the
Company/Region
Issue current version

of RES to Project
Managements/Electric
al Contractors
3.1
3.2
Locator of
Service
Supervisor/Engineer
Appoint an
Authorised Person
for electrical works
for the location
3.3
Appoint an Authorised person for the Permanent

and Temporary Works
Obtain and update a

drawing showing
the locations
Temporary Electrical
System
3.3
IO
Appoint a
Permanent Works
Electrical Duty
Holder
3.5
EG
IN
TE
AT
Audit the electrical

installation/equipme
nt
3.2
AL
3.2
Display the
appointment on the
location notice
Board
3.3
Key:
Activity
Guidance
Ensure the Schedule

tests are carried out
3.3
SHE Advisor
Control the
Permit of Work
System and issue
the appropriate
permits
3.2
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
1
work in relation to the design, installation, maintenance, and examination and testing of
electrical systems/equipment.
SCOPE
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 4
SHE DIRECTOR
1
The SHE Director shall approve this procedure

MANAGING DIRECTOR
The Managing Director shall appoint in writing an Electrical Duty Holder (EDH) for the
Company/Region who shall be a qualified Electrical Engineer or appoint an Electrical
Consultant to manage the EDH duties
Ensure any applicable sections of this procedure are established, and complied with.
The responsibility for electrical safety of the permanent works under construction shall
remain with the operational line management.
The appointment of a Permanent Works Electrical Duty Holder shall be the responsibility of Site
Manager with reference to the EDH.
ELECTRICAL DUTY HOLDER (EDH)
AT
IO
AL
It is the responsibility of the EDH to implement this procedure and monitor that all portable
electrical appliances provided by COMPANY for use by COMPANY personnel or others
comply with it.
The EDH shall be responsible for electrical safety with respect to the whole or defined parts
of the Companys electrical systems and/or equipment, ensuring compliance with the Rules
for Electrical Safety and, with regard to installations, planned preventative maintenance.
The vetting/approval of temporary electrical sub-contractors shall be the responsibility of the

EDH or the Operational/Area Director following consultation with his/her SHE Adviser in
circumstances where the EDH duties are delegated to an approved electrical contractor.
It is acknowledged that different arrangements exist in respect of site set ups, some being
under the control of the client/external partners. In circumstances where deemed
necessary the EDH shall endeavour to influence the client/external partners to adopt
COMPANY standards.
EG
IN
TE
2.3.4.2 Definitions
1
A full set of definitions are contained in the COMPANY Rules for Electrical Safety.
DESIGNATED PERSONS
ELECTRICAL DUTY HOLDER
An Electrical Engineer appointed by the Managing Director in writing to be responsible for

ensuring electrical safety with respect to the whole or defined parts of the Company's
electrical system and/or equipment.
QCS 2014

Page 5
AUTHORISED PERSON
3
An electrical contractor or electrically qualified Engineer or Technician appointed by the

Electrical Duty Holder in writing, to carry out specified duties on the electrical system or
equipment and to take control of any danger that is to be avoided and who is competent to
accept such responsibility.
SUB CONTRACTOR'S AUTHORISED PERSON
An electrically qualified Engineer or Technician appointed by the by the Sub-Contractor in

writing, to carry out specified duties on the electrical system or equipment and to take control
of any danger that is to be avoided and who is competent to accept such responsibility.
SITE ELECTRICAL CO-ORDINATOR
The Site/Location Manager will be the Site Electrical Co-ordinator for the site/location under
that person's control, unless the position is otherwise delegated in, writing and that person is
approved by the Electrical Duty Holder in writing.
IO
AL
AT
2.3.4.3 Actions Required to implement This Procedure
The MD for the Company/Region shall appoint in writing an Electrical Duty Holder for their
area of responsibility.
TE
MANAGING DIRECTOR
ELECTRICAL DUTY HOLDER
IN
The Electrical Duty Holder shall :
Ensure ALL work is carried out in accordance with the COMPANY Rules for Electrical
Safety.
(b)
Assess and approve all temporary electrical contractors prior to their appointment.
(c)
In conjunction with the Site/Project Manager appoint in writing an Authorised Person

for each location.
EG
(a)
(d)
Take reasonable steps to ensure that the Site Electrical Co-ordinator has the
competency to undertake the role.
(e)
Ensure that all projects and appropriate contractors have a copy of the latest Rules for
Electrical Safety.
(f)
Undertake independent inspection/audit of site electrical installation/equipment under

COMPANY UK control.
(g)
During inspection/audit of the temporary electrical installation shall also consider the
electrical safety controls in place for the permanent works.
The minimum frequency of inspection/audits shall be carried out at a frequency as deemed

necessary by the EDH in agreement with the Area Director responsible for the site.
SITE ELECTRICAL CO-ORDINATOR
The Site Electrical Co-ordinator shall :
QCS 2014

Page 6
(a)
Safety.
(b)
After consultation with the EDH, appoint in writing an Authorised person for the
location he is responsible for.
(c)
Display the appointment of the Site Electrical Co-ordinator and Authorised Person on
the location notice board and electrical switch gear.
(d)
Keep an up-to-date drawing showing the electrical circuits for the locations temporary
electrical system.
(e)
Ensure schedule tests are carried out on installations and equipment.
AUTHORISED PERSON
The Authorised Person shall :
(a)
Control the permit to work system and issue permits as required.
AL
IO
The Site/Project Manager shall :
Safety.
(b)
After consultation with the EDH appoint in writing a permanent works Electrical Duty
Holder.
(c)
Ensure that the specification for the temporary site electrics is communicated to the
temporary electrical contractor.
(d)
Undertake the duties of the Site Electrical Co-ordinator or appoint appropriate person
to undertake those duties.
EG
IN
TE
AT
(a)
SITE/PROJECT MANAGER
AL

Page 7
AT
IO
QCS 2014
2.3.4.4 Appendices
TE
R
APPENDIX 1
SUGGESTED INSPECTION AND TEST FREQUENCIES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Equipment/Environment
Combined Inspection and Testing
No
No
No
No
Yes, 2-4 years
No if double insulated
otherwise up to 5 years
Photocopiers, fax machines: NOT hand-held Rarely moved
Yes, 2-4 years
No if double insulated
otherwise up to 5 years
Double insulated equipment: NOT hand-held. Moved occasionally,

e.g. fans, table lamps, slide projectors
Yes, 2-4 years
No
Double insulated equipment: HAND-HELD

e.g. some floor cleaners
Yes, 6 months 1 year
No
Earthed equipment (Class 1):

e.g. electric kettles, some floor cleaners
Yes, 6 months 1 year
Yes, 1-2 years
Cables (leads) and plugs connected to the above.

Extension leads (mains voltage)
Yes, 6 months 4 years

depending on the type of
equipment it is connected to
Yes, 1-5 years depending on the

type of equipment it is connected to
IN
Battery operated: (less than 20 volts)
Formal Visual Inspection
EG
Extra low voltage: (less than 50 volts AC)

e.g. telephone equipment, low voltage desk lights
Information technology:
e.g. desktop computers, VDU screens
AL

Page 8
QCS 2014
AT
IO
OFFICES AND OTHER LOW RISK ENVIRONMENTS ONLY CONSTRUCTION SITES

Formal Visual
Inspection
Combined
Inspection and Test
Less than 25 volts
No
No
25V portable hand lamps (confined or damp

situations)
25 volt secondary winding from

transformer
No
No
50V portable hand lamps
Secondary winding centre tapped to earth

(25 volt)
No
Yearly
Equipment/Application
IN
TE
R
Battery operated power tools and torches
Voltage
EG
110V portable and hand-held tools, extension leads,

Secondary winding centre tapped to earth
site lighting, moveable wiring systems and associated
(55 volt)
switchgear
Monthly
Before first use on site and

then 3 monthly
230V portable and hand-held tools extension leads

and portable floodlighting
230 volt mains supply through 30mA RCD
Weekly

then monthly
230V equipment such as lifts, hoists and fixed

floodlighting
230V supply fuses or MCBs
Monthly

then 3 monthly
Weekly
*Before first use on site and

then 3 monthly
6 monthly

then yearly
RCDs
Fixed**
Equipment in site offices
230 volt office equipment
*Note:
RCDs need a different range of tests to other portable equipment, and equipment designed to carry out appropriate tests on RCDs will need to be
used.
** It is recommended that portable RCDs are tested monthly.
AL

Page 9
QCS 2014
AT
IO
APPENDIX 2 - VISUAL INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST

THIS IS A SIMPLE INSPECTION REQUIRING THE MINIMUM OF TRAINING. THE FOLLOWING CHECKLIST COVERS THE
REQUIREMENTS.
TE
R
Plug
General
EG
Appliance Casing
N.B.
IN
Cable
No damage, cracks or bent pins, cable sheath secured. Inspection of the inside of
the plug to check correct fusing/wiring in place can also be part of the visual
inspection.
No damage, significant abrasions, cuts, taped joints
No damage, loose parts or screws missing

No evidence of overheating (discoloured/hot areas), air intakes not choked, appliance
is dry (where appropriate) appliance is dry (where appropriate) appliance is within its
test period (check tag)
Use the right tool for the job in the right place dont improvise. UNPLUG
APPLIANCES WHILST INSPECTING. IF APPLIANCE IS DEFECTIVE DONT USE IT
REPORT IT!
QCS 2014

Page 10
2.3.4.5 Reference documents

1
Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction) RD1.5
COMPANY Rules for Electrical Safety (RES) (Qatar General Electricity & Water
Company to Supply)
2.3.4.6 Author
POSITION IN
COMPANY
CONTACT DETAILS
AL
NAME
SECTION
AT
IO
SHE Manager
2.3.4.7 Approvals
POSITION IN
COMPANY
IN
TE
NAME
SHEQ Director
EG
Approved by:
END OF DOCUMENT
SIGNATURE & DATE
QCS 2014

Part 2.3.05: Powered Work Equipment Procedures
Page 1
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
MANAGEMENT
/
ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM (SAMAS) ..................................................... 1
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONEMNT PROCEDURES..............................1
2.3.5
POWERED WORK EQUIPMENT PROCEDURE ..............................................1
2.3.5.1 Responsibilities ..................................................................................................4
AL
2.3.5.2 Definitions ..........................................................................................................5

2.3.5.3 Action Required to Implement this Procedure ...................................................6
2.3.5.4 Guidance To This Procedure .............................................................................8
IO
2.3.5.5 Appendices ......................................................................................................11
AT
2.3.5.6 Reference Documents .....................................................................................13

2.3.5.7 Author ..............................................................................................................13
EG
IN
TE
2.3.5.8 Approvals .........................................................................................................13
QCS 2014

Page 2
PROCESS MAP
Project
Site
Manager
Plant
Coordinator
Supervisors
Procurement
Quantity
Surveyor
Identify PWE
requirements
and produce
PWE schedule
3.1
Operator
Contractor
Regional
Training
Coordinator
SHE
Team
Provide proof
of
competence
Review PWE
schedule and
maintain during
the project
3.7
AL
Estimator/
Bid
Manager
3.2
Appoint a plant
Co-ordinator
Assist and
advise on
plant
requirements
use and
maintain as
3.8
IO
Monitor use
of PWE
including
inspection
and
3.4
AT
Operate,
inspect and
maintain plant
3.2
3.3
Report
defects as
identified
3.5, 3.6
3.7
Identify PWE
equipment
and provide
a copy to
COMPANY
Plant Co3.8
EG
Ensure
relevant
Certification is
available for
PWE on site
3.3
Advise
Subcontracto
r
Management
of PWE
requirement
at pre-start
Report
defects as
identified
34
IN
Develop and
revise PW
Schedule
TE
3.7
Monitor use,
inspection
and
maintenance
f PWE
3.3
Key:
Activity
Guidance
Arrange
training as
requested
by Project
Team
3.9
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
1
The purpose of this procedure is to assign responsibilities and establish a system for the
control and safe use of powered work equipment.
SCOPE
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 4
SHE DIRECTOR
1

ESTIMATOR/TENDER TEAM
Ensures that information provided by designers is utilised at tender stage for inclusion of
resource to allow compliance by others with this procedure.
AL
Ensures this procedure is established on Projects under his control. For the purposes of this
procedure, Project/Site Manager may also mean Office Manager.
IO
PLANT CO-ORDINATOR
Applies the requirements of this procedure.
Note: The person appointed must be site based and competent to carry out their duties.
AT
Supports the Plant Co-ordinator in the application of this procedure.
TE
SUPERVISOR
Supports the plant co-ordinator in the application of this procedure.
Operates Plant in accordance with the requirements of this procedure.
EG
OPERATOR
IN
PROCUREMENT/BUYER/QS
SHE ADVISER
9
Provides advice and guidance in support of this procedure and monitors the effectiveness
of its application.
CONTRACTOR
10
Ensures only competent personnel are

dedicated/owned/hired plant and equipment.
authorised
11
Ensures maintenance is completed and recorded as appropriate.
to
REGIONAL TRAINING CO-ORDINATOR

12
Processes formal training requests from the Project/Site Manager.
operate
specifically
QCS 2014

Page 5
2.3.5.2 Definitions
POWER
1
The Provision and Use of Work Equipment.

POWERED WORK EQUIPMENT (PWE)
Powered Work Equipment as referred to in PUWER.
NB. The Requirements for the use of Lifting Equipment are contained in SHEPRO-010
SUITABILITY OF PWE
AL
Defines the equipment as fit for its intended use within its design and operational
parameters.
For the purposes of this procedure, use includes all activities involving PWE such as
starting, operating and stopping the equipment, plus any setting, repair, modification,
maintenance, servicing, transportation and cleaning.
AT
IO
USE
Contractor means any work package contractor or their sub-contractor and include any
PWE supplier.
TE
CONTRACTOR
The individuals demonstrated capacity to perform, i.e., the possession of knowledge,

experience, training, skills and personal characteristics needed to satisfy the special demands
or requirements of a particular situation.
EG
IN
COMPETENCE
PWE SCHEDULE
A control/management document displayed within the project office to be updated regularly

by the Plant Co-ordinator. SHE-FRM-5-001.
PWE CHECKLIST
An aide memoir and control document to be completed by the Plant Coordinator (COMPANY
and Contractor) or nominated person for any equipment received onto site and filed within
the SHE Register. SHE-FRM-5-02.
PLANNED PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PPM)
10
Involves replacing parts and consumables or making necessary adjustments at preset

intervals so that risks do not occur as a result of the deterioration or failure of the equipment.
QCS 2014

Page 6
CONDITION-BASED MAINTENANCE
11
Involves monitoring the condition of safety-critical parts and carrying out maintenance
whenever necessary to avoid hazards which could otherwise occur.
BREAKDOWN MAINTENANCE
12
Involves carrying out maintenance only after faults or failures have occurred. It is appropriate
only if the failure does not present an immediate risk and can be corrected before risk
occurs, It is unlikely that this system of maintenance would be acceptable for the PWE
covered by this procedure.
AL
2.3.5.3 Action Required to Implement this Procedure
Identify the PWE requirements for the project and complete the initial PWE schedule
(Appendix 1) Allow resource for any equipment in the bid and include details and
information relative to the same in the handover process between the pre-construction and
construction teams.
AT
IO
ESTIMATOR/TENDER TEAM
Review the initial PWE schedule (Appendix 1) and amend / maintain as required throughout
the Project duration.
Where appropriate, appoint a Plant Co-ordinator or retain the duties of that appointment.
Arrange training for Directly employed persons through the Regional Training Co-ordinator
as necessary to ensure the competence of appointees.
Monitor PWE use on site to ensure the effectiveness of controls.
EG
IN
TE
PLANT CO-ORDINATOR
6
Take control of, review and develop the PWE Schedule as the project progresses.
Enter all details of PWE received on site into the PWE Schedule (SHE-FRM-5-01).
Act as the focal point for all PWE used on site and assist other management/supervision in
the selection and control of the PWE used.
Must ensure either a certificate of thorough inspection not more than 12 months old (6
Months where lifting persons) for any lifting equipment received on site is attached to the site
register and the next inspection date is logged on the PWE Schedule (SHE-FRM-5-001).
10
Arrange/Complete all pre-use checks as detailed on SHE-FRM-5-002.
11
Record operators/users of each PWE on the PWE Schedule.
12
Complete or ensure the completion of all regular inspections and maintenance of PWE in the
appropriate Project SHE Register or the equivalent subcontractor control document.
QCS 2014

Page 7
13
Ensure arrangements are made for the safe-keeping and issue of all ignition and security
keys and for smaller PWE for its safe storage and controlled issue.
14
Confirm a system of PPM or Condition Based Maintenance is applied by all sub-contractors

on any PWE used on site.
15
Implement a system of PPM or Condition Based Maintenance on any PWE purchased for
use on site based on manufacturers guidelines and completed by competent people
(externally contracted as necessary).
SUPERVISORS
Complete all duties as appointed and authorised by the Plant Co-ordinator.
17
Monitor PWE use on site to ensure the effectiveness of controls, maintenance and
servicing.
AL
16
Advise sub-contractor management at pre-start of requirements regarding PWE (see

Contractor actions below).
AT
IO
18
PROCUREMENT/BUYERS
QS
Advise sub-contractor management at pre-start of requirements regarding PWE (see

Contractor actions below) and issue copy of Appendices 1 & 2 where no sub-contractor
internal control documents/system exists.
TE
19
OPERATOR
Provides proof of competence.
21
Operates plant and equipment when authorised to do so, in approved areas, subject to
site or ordered limitations and in compliance with training and manufacturers guidelines.
22
Ensures maintenance is completed in accordance with training, employers Risk

Assessment and manufacturers guidance.
23
Ensures defects are promptly reported to the plant co-ordinator and where necessary
secures unsafe equipment in a safe location/state.
EG
IN
20
CONTRACTOR
24
Identify the PWE requirements for the project and complete an initial PWE schedule
(Appendix 1) or similar in-house control document. Provide copy to COMPANY Project
Manager/Plant Co-ordinator.
25
Monitor PWE use on site to ensure the effectiveness of controls, maintenance and
servicing.
REGIONAL TRAINING CO-ORDINATOR
26
Deliver or arrange to be delivered any training formally requested by the Project Team to
ensure the competence of Directly employed appointees.
QCS 2014

Page 8
SHE ADVISER
27
2.3.5.4
Assist pre-construction and construction teams as requested in application of this

procedure.
Guidance To This Procedure
This procedure and guidance is intended to ensure compliance with statutory requirements
for all COMPANY projects regarding PWE.
Although POWER covers all work equipment, this procedure and guidance is only intended
to provide direction on the control of Powered Work Equipment (PWE) which would
include but is not limited to the following:
Drills - cable fed, hydraulic and petrol driven (it is not intended that sites include low
risk battery drills etc within the scheduled part of this procedure however this does not
remove the needs to monitor the use of such equipment to ensure it is fit for purpose
and used correctly).
(b)
Saws circular, reciprocating, bench and rip
(c)
Breakers/Hammers/Chisels/Tampers All
(d)
Electric/petrol/diesel/gas Powered Plant All
(e)
Self Propelled Work Equipment Dumpers, Dozers, Rollers, Excavators etc
(f)
Cartridge Operated Fixing Tools - All
(g)
Lifting Equipment - FLTs, Hoists, HIABs, MEWPs
(h)
n.b. Other than inclusion on the PWE Schedule, all Crane Lifting Operations controls
and requirements are covered in SHE-PRO-010.
IO
AT
TE
IN
RISK ASSESSMENT
Where the specific controls required for the use of PWE have not been considered under the
general Risk Assessment for work, a specific Risk Assessment is required prior to its use.
The Plant Co-ordinator or Contractor (in the case of sub-contractor equipment) is responsible
for its completion. See SHE-PRO-001.
EG
AL
(a)
SELECTION AND SUITABILITY

The equipment ordered must be suitable to the work intended and the operating
environment, e.g.
(a)
Telehandler consider: loads, reach, site height/width/ground restrictions, operator

competence/ability and delivery restrictions etc.
(b)
Breaker consider: Individual capability, material to be broken, access, technological

developments (noise/vibration suppression), tool outputs etc.
Experience coupled with Risk Assessment should allow the selection of the correct
equipment, however, if doubt exists consult your local SHE Adviser.
PRE-USE/RECEIPT INSPECTION
To ensure serviceability, all equipment received on site (COMPANY and Sub-contractor)

must be subject to a pre-use inspection using either the COMPANY PWE Checklist (SHEFRM-5-002) or manufacturers guidance as appropriate.
QCS 2014

Page 9
REGISTRATION AND AUTHORISATION

7
To assist in ensuring only competent and authorised personnel use PWE on site, all
operators shall be recorded on the PWE Schedule (SHE-FRM-5-001).
COMPETENCE
Where a recognised industry standard exists i.e. certificate of training achievement, to show
competence for the operation of particular equipment, the operator shall possess that
appropriate certification, the details of which shall be entered on the PWE Schedule.
Where there is no recognised industry standard/certificate of training achievement, the

operator shall possess evidence of training on that particular equipment or his employer shall
provide written confirmation of training on that particular equipment.
AL
REGULAR INSPECTION
The purpose of an inspection is to identify whether the equipment can be operated, adjusted
and maintained safely and that any deterioration (for example defect, damage, wear) can be
detected and remedied before it results in unacceptable risks. Inspection should include,
where appropriate, visual checks, functional checks and testing. Regular inspections in this
context should be completed by the nominated competent person (usually the operator) and
conform to the requirements of the Risk Assessment taking into account, training
requirements, manufacturers guidelines and equipment specifications.
11
All PWE in use on COMPANY sites will subject to a regime of regular recorded inspection.
The maximum period between inspections shall be 7 days and these inspections shall be
recorded in the site SHE Register.
12
The above does not include any pre-use checks required of the operator, the occurrence of
which should be included in the monitoring checks.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
10
THOROUGH INSPECTION (LIFTING EQUIPMENT)

In line with current statutory requirements, all lifting equipment must be subject to thorough
inspection:
(a)
13
Before being put into service for the first time unless either ;
(i)
the lifting equipment has not been used before; and
(ii)
in the case of lifting equipment, the employer has received such a declaration
made not more than 12 months before the lifting equipment is put into service or
if it is obtained from the undertaking of another person, it is accompanied by
physical evidence of thorough inspection
(iii)
Where the safety of the lifting equipment is dependent on the installation

conditions
14
Where it is exposed to conditions causing deterioration which is liable to result in dangerous

situations
15
As a maximum the thorough inspection should be completed at 12 monthly intervals, where

the equipment is used for the lifting of persons, the period is reduced to 6 months.
QCS 2014

Page 10
MAINTENANCE
16
It should be remembered that different maintenance management techniques have different

benefits:
17
Where safety-critical parts could fail and cause the equipment, guards or other protection
devices to fail and lead to immediate or hidden potential risks, a formal system of PPM or
Conditioned Based Maintenance is likely to be required.
RECORDS
The following records shall be maintained throughout the use of any PWE on site:
PWE Schedule - Completed on receipt of any PWE and maintained with all relevant
detail until the PWE is removed from site. Any PWE merely Off-Hired shall be subject
to the same controls as other in-use equipment.
(b)
Maintenance A record of all maintenance completed shall be kept in the site SHE
Register.
(c)
Regular Inspection All regular inspections shall be recorded in the site SHE
Register.
(d)
Thorough Inspection A record of all thorough inspections completed prior to or

during the PWE time on site shall be maintained in the site SHE Register.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
18

Page 11
AL
QCS 2014
AT
IO
2.3.5.5 Appendices
APPENDIX 1 PWE SCHEDULE
EG
IN
TE
R
COMPANY
Registration/
Date
Checklist
Equipment
Fleet/
Received
Completed
Type
Serial
on
By
Number
Site
Owner
Works
Package/ Subcontractor
Date of Last
Thorough
Inspection
Date of
Next
Thorough
Inspection
Authorised
User(s)
By Name
Competence
Details
Risk
Assessment
Completed and
Communicated
By
Competent
Inspector
Date
Removed
From
Site
QCS 2014

Page 12
Appendix 2 PWE Checklist

PLANT/WORK EQUIPMENT DETAILS
Contract:
Location:
Type of plant/Equipment:
Equipment Fleet or Serial No:
Supplier:
Order No:
Received by:
Date:
AL
User (COMPANY or Sub-Contractor):
CHECKLIST
Yes
IO
WORK EQUIPMENT
1. Is the item of plant/work equipment as ordered or a suitable alternative?
EG
IN
TE
AT
2. Is the item of plant/work equipment in good condition? Are there any noticeable
defects i.e. oil leaks, damaged panels, tyres, guards missing, etc?
3. Has plant/equipment been supplied with the necessary;
Operating instructions
Manufacturers Handbook
Completed maintenance Checklist (PPM/Service Record)
Warning Notices/Signs/Safety Equipment (locking bars/pins etc.) attached
Appropriate Drip Trays/Spill Response Kit
Is all information in English
4. Has a current certificate of thorough examination (or EU Declaration of
Conformity) been supplied/provided with the equipment (Lifting Equipment only)
5. Where equipment has been assembled on site, has a written confirmation been
provided as to its fitness for use?
Defects/Comments/Actions:
Signature:
Date:
Notes:
1: Where a suitable alternative has been provided, the person completing the checklist must revisit the Risk Assessment and amend controls as necessary.
2: Where lifting equipment is supplied for the lifting of persons, the thorough inspection/EU
Declaration must be within 6 months of issue date.
COMPLETED FORM TO BE FILED IN PROJECT SHE REGISTER
No
QCS 2014


PROCEDURES
1
SHE PRO 001 SHE Risk Management and Written Safe Systems of Work
SHE PRO 010 The Safe Use of Cranes and other Lifting Appliances
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
AL
IO
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT DETAILS
AT
SECTION
2.3.5.7 Author
TE
SHE Manager
2.3.5.8 Approvals
EG
IN
NAME
Approved by:
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SHEQ Director
SIGNATURE & DATE
Page 13
QCS 2014

Page 14
PLANT/WORK EQUIPMENT DETAILS

Contract:
Location:
Type of plant/Equipment:
Equipment Fleet or Serial No:
Supplier:
Order No:
Received by:
Date:
User (COMPANY or Sub-Contractor):
AL
CHECKLIST
Yes
No
WORK EQUIPMENT
IO
1. Is the item of plant/work equipment as ordered or a suitable alternative?
EG
IN
TE
AT
2. Is the item of plant/work equipment in good condition? Are there any

noticeable defects i.e. oil leaks, damaged panels, tyres, guards missing, etc?
3. Has plant/equipment been supplied with the necessary;
Operating instructions
Manufacturers Handbook
Completed maintenance Checklist (PPM/Service Record)
Warning Notices/Signs/Safety Equipment (locking bars/pins etc.)
attached
Appropriate Drip Trays/Spill Response Kit
Is all information in English
4. Has a current certificate of thorough examination (or EU Declaration of
Conformity) been supplied/provided with the equipment (Lifting Equipment
only)
5. Where equipment has been assembled on site, has a written confirmation
been provided as to its fitness for use?
Defects/Comments/Actions:
Signature:
Date:
Notes:
1: Where a suitable alternative has been provided, the person completing the checklist must revisit the Risk Assessment and amend controls as necessary.
2: Where lifting equipment is supplied for the lifting of persons, the thorough inspection/EU
Declaration must be within 6 months of issue date.
COMPLETED FORM TO BE FILED IN PROJECT SHE REGISTER
QCS 2014

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
1 Satisfactory guards provided for
dangerous parts of machinery?
1 Suitable for its purpose

2 Suitable for its location
2 Other hazards minimised?

3 In a good order
a) Ejection/falling of anything
4 Restricted to use by authorised
personnel (if necessary)
b) Disintegration/collapse of equipment
5 Provided with instruction for use

and maintenance (in Arabic &
English)
c) Fire or overheating
6 Have operators been trained?
e) Hot/cold surfaces
7 Have supervisors been trained?
3 Controls satisfactory?
8 Is a maintenance log kept (plant

and machinery only)
a) Stop/start
IO
AL
d) Explosion of equipment or contents
c) Run controls
10 Are maintenance arrangement

satisfactory
AT
b) Emergency (over-rides others)

9 Is log kept up to date (plant and
machinery only
EG
IN
TE
d) Audible/visual warnings
e) Clearly indicated, visible, safely
positioned
f) Fail safe
g) Isolation arrangements
4 Is equipment stable?
5 Is lighting adequate?
6 Have the safety of maintenance
personnel been considered?
7 Is safety information marked on the
equipment
8 Are necessary warnings/warning
devices on equipment?
9 If warnings not marked and necessary
is there a written system of
work/permit?
Page 15
QCS 2014

Part 2.3.06: Safety, Health and Environmental Training
Page 1
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
MANAGEMENT
/
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES..............................1
2.3.6
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL TRAINING FOR ALL

EMPLOYEES, NEWLY ASSIGNED EMPLOYEES, PROMOTEES AND SUBCONTRACTOR PERSONNEL ...........................................................................1
AL
2.3.6.1 Responsibilities ...................................................................................................5

2.3.6.2 Definitions ...........................................................................................................6
2.3.6.3 Action Required To Implement This Procedure .................................................7
IO
2.3.6.4 Guidance To This Procedure ..............................................................................9
AT
2.3.6.5 Reference Documents ......................................................................................10

2.3.6.6 Author ...............................................................................................................11
EG
IN
TE
2.3.6.7 Approvals ..........................................................................................................11
QCS 2014

Page 2
PROCESS MAP - INDUCTION FLOWCHART

Employees
Ensure project
specific inductions
are developed and
delivered (including
supervisors)
1.3, 3.2, 3.3
Attend all
inductions and
complete any
questionnaires for
project specific
inductions
Ensure all their

employees
receive SHE
Inductions,
provide support
to employees if
i d
1.2, 3.1, 3.4
Contracts
Managers and
Supervisors
Contractors
Employees & Site
Visitors
Advise on content of
inductions. Use
Company standards
as the baseline
1.4
Attend project
inductions and
additional;
supervisors
induction. Ensure
evaluation of
understanding
1.7, 3.2, 3.3
3.6, 5.2, 5.4
Attend project
induction and
complete
questionnaire (if
required)
1.7, 3.2, 3.6
IO
Ensure all their

employees and
subcontract
employees attend
project induction
1.4, 3.2
SHE Team
AL
Project and Site

Manager
Line Manager
EG
3.8, 3.10
IN
Check training and

competency
certification where
required
TE
AT
Check
understanding of
content with
individual(s). Take
suitable action if
i d
3.2,
Maintain induction,
training and
competence records
Monitor inductions
are taking place and
that required
standards are being
achieved
1.4
1.3, 3.8, 3.10
Provide assistance
to project teams
1.4
Key:
Activity
Guidance
QCS 2014

PROCESS MAP - TRAINING FLOWCHART

Line Manager
Project and Site

Manager
Training
Co-ordinators
Employees
SHE Team
Develop and review

SHE training
strategy and matrix
1.4, 3.1
Arrange training to
meet line managers
AL
Ensure all Employees have had training as

defined by SHE training Strategy Matrix.
Make arrangements for additional training to
fill short falls (ie sickness absence)
1.5, 3.8
Attend all training

within required
timescales
IO
1.2, 1.3, 3.1, 3.7, 3.9
1.6, 3.7, 3.9
AT
Maintain training
records
EG
IN
TE
3.8, 3.9, 3.10
Key:
Activity
Guidance
Monitor training is
being provided in
line with strategy
and matrix
1.
Page 3
QCS 2014

Page 4
PURPOSE
1
The purpose of this procedure is to outline measures to be taken to ensure the provision of
consistent levels of Safety, Health and Environmental inductions and training throughout all
managerial levels and operations across the business, thereby ensuring that each employee
receives appropriate training in safety, health and environmental matters which reflect their
operational needs. None of the processes described in this procedure are intended to
replace external schemes.
SCOPE
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
This procedure covers all COMPANY projects and locations under the control of
QCS 2014

Page 5
SHE DIRECTOR
1

LINE MANAGERS
Line managers are responsible for ensuring that all staff for whom they are responsible have
received the training and inductions, and that necessary standards have been attained.
Should any staff for whom they are responsible fail to achieve required standards, line
managers must provide appropriate support to assist employees.
In addition to the above, Project and Site Managers must ensure that a suitable site specific
induction programme is in place, and that necessary records are kept on site.
IO
AL
PROJECT/SITE MANAGERS
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL TEAM
Training Co-ordinators are responsible for the co-ordination and standards of training
required by this procedure.
EMPLOYEES
EG
Will attend all training (including inductions) they are required to do to ensure compliance
with the safety, health and environmental training strategy. Where there is a problem attending
courses, this will need to be raised at the earliest opportunity, with appropriate authorisations
obtained from their Line Manager and or Director.
IN
TE
TRAINING CO-ORDINATORS
AT
Safety, Health and Environmental Advisors will provide advice on the content of Safety,
Health and Environmental inductions, and they will also monitor that inductions are being
provided as necessary, and that standards are being achieved.
CONTRACTORS
7
Attend all site inductions, and ensure all sub-contract staff also attend. Only where
authorised to do so, deliver COMPANY site inductions and ensure records are kept.
QCS 2014

Page 6
2.3.6.2 Definitions
EMPLOYEES
1
For the purposes of this procedure, any person carrying out work activities for or on behalf of
COMPANY, this will include agency personnel and labour, but not contractors.
NEWLY ASSIGNED EMPLOYEES
Any employee who is new to a site/location, or new to their role.

TRAINING CO-ORDINATORS
AL
The person within a business unit given the responsibility of co-ordinating delivery and
recording of training provided to employees and, where Contractors appropriate, within the
business unit.
Any person who is not carrying out work activities for or on behalf of COMPANY but is
visiting the project for other reasons, i.e. Client staff, Trade representatives.
AT
IO
VISITOR
Workers with the adequate:
Knowledge Mentor or classroom gained.
(b)
Ability Competence based assessment.
(c)
Technical Training International Certification i.e. NEBOSH, CITB, OSHA.
(d)
Experience Site hazard and operations awareness.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
COMPETENT OPERATIVES
QCS 2014

Page 7

1
Refer to the Induction flowchart to ascertain who is assigned the actions required to
implement this procedure.
SAFETY HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL TRAINING STRATEGY
The Safety, Health and Environmental Team will be responsible for producing and
reviewing a safety, health and environmental training strategy for the whole business. The
training strategy and associated training matrix will be available on the COMPANY intranet*.
This will ensure that the latest version is always available. The Safety, Health and
Environmental training strategy will identify which training is to be provided to whom, and at
which stage of their employment.
AL
THE INDUCTIONS
All newly assigned employees will receive a Safety, Health and Environmental induction. The
induction format can be found on the COMPANY intranet*. In addition a location specific
induction will be required to ensure all necessary safety, health and environmental information
is provided.
Project inductions will not be given to any person who cannot provide evidence of
competency relevant to their role.
Projects will provide a full Safety, Health and Environmental induction for everyone who will
be on site, except accompanied visitors see below. This induction must be provided before
an individual is allowed to go onto the site. A standard format will be used for site inductions.
This format is available on the COMPANY Intranet. Project Managers are responsible for
ensuring that a site specific induction is in place and provided as required.
Visitors to sites, and other locations such as offices, must receive a tailored Safety, Health
and Environmental induction if the full induction is not provided. This will cover important
arrangements such as access and egress (including emergencies), muster point, location of
first aid, etc. Visitors must be accompanied by a suitable person who has attended a full site
induction. This will usually be a member of the site or contractors management team, but
could be other designated persons by agreement with the Project or Site Manager. The
induction formats are available on the COMPANY Intranet*.
All inductions should be interactive, and seen as an opportunity for two way communication.
Where aids such as video/DVD are used these must not be used as the sole means of
delivering the induction.
Site inductions will include a short evaluation. There are two example formats one on the
reverse of the Induction Record sheet (SHE-FRM-6-02 and a separate question set and
*
guidance which may be used is available on the COMPANY Intranet . Local project
management will need to determine what action to take should any individual fail to
demonstrate a good level of understanding of the project requirements, including safety
critical items. This should begin with taking reasonable steps to provide some assistance
which may include further explanation, assistance with language difficulties, or assistance
with reading and/or writing.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
SUPERVISORS INDUCTIONS
9
Any person on a site who will act in a supervisory capacity must undergo a top up induction.
This will identify what COMPANY will expect of them as a supervisor or manager. In
particular it will cover expected standards of behaviour on site, and dealing with
QCS 2014

Page 8
instances of unsafe behaviour. A format for the supervisors induction is available on the
COMPANY Intranet*.
NEWLY ASSIGNED COMPANY EMPLOYEES
Received a copy of the Safety Health and Environmental Policy Statement and their
Safety, Health and Environmental Responsibilities. If the role involves managing or
supervising others they must also receive a copy of the responsibilities of those
grades they will be managing or supervising. Responsibilities should be explained to
them by their Line Manager.
(b)
Been informed where they can access a copy of the Safety Health and Environmental
procedures, and the name of the person they should contact to explain those
procedures (usually their local Safety Health and Environmental Advisor).
(c)
Received general advice
(d)
Been informed of any significant findings of risk assessments for the work they will
undertake.
(e)
Received inductions as required by this procedure.
AL
(a)
If site based, they will also need to be informed of the Safety Health and Environmental
Standards and Guidance, requirements for daily briefings and communication of safety, health
and environmental matters.
AT
11
Newly assigned COMPANY staff shall not commence their duties until they have:
IO
10
TE
Any special occupational qualifications or skills required to do the job, including any
specific accredited training or evidence of competence.
(b)
Specific features of the job that may effect health and safety (e.g. work at heights,
heavy manual handling operations, etc).
IN
(a)
Before starting work the line manager of agency staff or labour is required to check that
they hold the necessary qualifications, and that they have been informed of any features
identified to the agency as above.
13
When requesting staff or labour COMPANY is required to specify to an employment agency:
EG
12
AGENCY STAFF & DIRECT LABOUR
PROVISION OF INDUCTIONS BY CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL

14
(To be read in conjunction with guidance in Section 4)
15
Only in exceptional circumstances will contractors be allowed to undertake COMPANY site

induction training. Agreement of the appropriate Project Manager and Safety, Health and
Environmental Team will be required.
16
Where a contractor delivers this training COMPANY will provide contractors with sufficient
site specific details to enable the training to be properly conducted. The same records will be
maintained as would be if COMPANY were undertaking the training, including any test
results.
17
In addition to the COMPANY Induction contractors may undertake their own induction
training to their own staff or sub-contractors.
QCS 2014

Page 9
TEMPORARY COVER
18
Whenever temporary cover is provided for a post, particularly posts with key safety, health
and environmental responsibilities, the immediate Line Manager shall ensure that the
person undertaking the temporary cover is fully conversant with, and inducted in, the safety,
health and environmental responsibilities of their temporary position. The responsibility to
ensure this training has been delivered to the temporary post holder remains with the Line
Manager, even if the delivery is delegated to the outgoing post holder or another.
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL TRAINING ARRANGEMENT
Safety, health and environmental training will be arranged by the relevant Training Coordinator, who will also maintain safety, health and environmental training records. The
only exception to this will be project specific site inductions which will be arranged and
delivered by site personnel, with records maintained on site.
AL
19
PLANT AND MACHINERY
See SHE-PRO-005
IO
20
AT
RECORDS
Records of training, including all inductions, will be maintained to provide proof of inductions
and training, also these records will allow accurate planning for future training needs.
Records will include evidence such as copies of certificates or tests (where they have
been used) and will be maintained on site and where appropriate forwarded to the Training
Co-ordinator.
22
Project Introduction to Health & Safety at Work SHE-FRM-6-02.
TE
21
IN
EG

This procedure and the roles and responsibilities highlighted within it aim to ensure that a
consistent and relevant level of safety, health and environmental inductions and training is
provided across the business.
One vital element required to achieve this aim is in the delivery of the inductions, this is often
one of the first contacts with personnel working on COMPANY projects/sites and as such is
the opportunity to engage with people and to set out the culture required to achieve a safe
environment.
Delivery of inductions may not be an easy task for individuals to perform and to aid with this
process the Safety Health and Environmental Team has produced a short training session for
personnel who may be required to undertake this operation, it is then envisaged that only
these personnel should carry out the inductions as far as possible. This process will then
produce a standardised, consistent and comprehensive approach to inductions throughout
COMPANY
Evaluation of understanding of the induction is useful in gauging retention of information

and to highlight any areas of confusion or further clarification, an example of a format that
may be utilised is form SHE-FRM-6-02
).
Clarification of understanding may also be obtained via the use of questions and answers
amongst the participants both during and at the completion of an induction. For further
QCS 2014

Page 10
advice and clarification on the type and circumstances of use of evaluation contact the
Safety, Health and Environmental Team.
Following a number of incidents it has become necessary to ascertain if inductees
working under the control of COMPANY have any health issues that may affect their
work, such issues can include for example :
(b)
Taking medication that makes you feel drowsy
(c)
Diabetes
(d)
Epilepsy
(e)
Lone working restrictions
(f)
Issues First Aiders need to know about, etc
On the induction record sheet SHE-FRM-6-02 there is a space for this information. The
completed sheet must be kept in a secure, locked location on the project and regularly reviewed
so that data that is no longer relevant can be appropriately destroyed.
(
AL
(a)
IO
Project Introduction to Health & Safety at Work and Induction Evaluation SHE-FRM-6-02
AT
FORMS
TE
DOCUMENTS
Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction) All Sections
Safety Health and Environmental Policy Statement & SHE Responsibilities
Safety Health and Environmental Standards & Guidance
Safety Health and Environmental Training Strategy and Matrix
Visitors Induction Format & Guidance
Site Specific Induction Format & Guidance
Active Behavioural Change Induction & Guidance
Supervisors Induction & Guidance
10
Office Induction Format
EG
IN
QCS 2014

2.3.6.6 Author
SECTION
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT DETAILS
AL
2.3.6.7 Approvals
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SIGNATURE & DATE
IO
NAME
SHEQ Director
EG
IN
TE
AT
Approved by:
Page 11
QCS 2014

Page 12
Accurate completion of this form will enable us to make the necessary provisions without
delay
(PLEASE GIVE SITE/MOBILE CONTACT NUMBER)
Name:
Site/Dept:
Job Title:
Staff/Hourly Paid:
IO
AL
Please state why the person requires training.
AT
If a specific course is required give full details below.
Fee:
Course Title
TE
Course organiser
EG
Preferred dates
IN
Location of course
Signed by Nominating Manager
Signed by Trainee
Send copies of arrangements to:

Authorisation for Booking and Cheque for
made payable to:
Approved/not approved
Date
Director

Page 13
AL
QCS 2014
AT
IO
RECORDOFINDUCTIONATTENDANCE
DATE OF INDUCTION:
CARRIED OUT BY(print:name)
NAME of attendee: (capitals) Mr. Mrs. Ms HOME POSTCODE (First 3 digits)
TE
R
EMPLOYED BY (company name); : .

OCCUPATION; NUMBER OF YEARS IN OCCUPATION:.
EVIDENCE OF COMPETENCY HELD:.
IN
NUMBER AND EXPIRY DATE : ..
EG
Is attendee a SUPERVISOR OR OPERATIVE (state which)
Please detail below any medical condition(s) that may affect your normal day to day activity or require specialist attention or medication during
your working day.
For example:,
Taking prescribed medication may make you feel drowsy; and expose you to potential danger.
If you have Diabetes or Epilepsy this may require us to implement, for example Lone Working Restrictions in case of a potential seizure.
SIGNATURE of attendee
Date.
Please be assured that any medical information you provide will be treated as confidential, securely stored and disposed of when no longer
required, in accordance Company procedures. It is requested solely for the purpose of assisting COMPANY to maintain its duty of care
obligations to all individuals working on our sites and will enable us to provide appropriate support as required.
InductionEvaluation(pleasetickappropriateanswer)*
1.
The nearest person to it when it needs to be moved
2.
Anyone with a car driving licence
3.
Answer
Q5
What is needed to achieve Perfect Delivery?
1.
Four cornerstones completed
2.
Three out of the four cornerstones completed
Only suitably trained, certificated and appointed drivers
3.
Two out of Four as long as plan is in place to complete
4.
Anyone with 30 years experience on a building site
4.
What event the client allows
Q2
If you have any doubt about your task you should?
Q6
Who could potentially be affected if you had an accident
Use your best guess and carry on.
1.
Yourself
Dont start work, stop and ask.
2.
Yourself and your colleagues
Follow what everyone else is doing.
3.
Yourself, colleagues, family, friends & anyone else connected
Q3
What mandatory P.P.E must be worn on this site?
Q7
Where should re-fuelling of plant take place
1.
Hard hat and Safety footwear
1.
Anywhere
2.
Hard hat, safety boots, hi viz jacket, eye protection and

gloves
2.
Where directed and in designated area
3.
Hard hat, ear protection and safety boots
3.
In parking area for plant
4.
Hard hat, eye protection and gloves
Q8
The COMPANY LIFE programme asks for your help by
Q4
Which of the following should be reported immediately?
1.
Being responsible for you and your workmates
1.
Accidents
2.
Challenging unsafe behaviours
2.
Environmental incidents (spills etc)
3.
Believing we can achieve an incident free environment
3.
Learning events (near misses)
4.
Going home from work in the same condition you arrived in
4.
All the above
5.
Everything mentioned above
Who can operate mobile plant on COMPANY sites?
IN
TE
R
AT
IO
Q1
Page 14
AL

EG
QCS 2014
Answer

Page 15
AL
QCS 2014
AT
IO
Additional questions to be completed by supervisors only

As a supervisor you must
Answer
1.
Ensure that job is completed at all costs
2.
Ensure that there are site specific risk assessments

and method statements in place before job
commences
3.
Ensure that only your own personnel are working

safely
EG
IN
TE
R
Q9.
Q10.
Communication is vital in helping build a good

safety culture and incident free environment,
should you?
1.
Select pieces of information that apply only to your

work
2.
Communicate with all parties anything that will

impact on the operation of the site
3.
Not give feedback to people raising issues
Answer
*It is appreciated this type of evaluation by testing will not fit all circumstances and arrangements, ie special works or property services but
some form of evaluation must take place via discussions or interactive sessions.
QCS 2014

Page 1
Part 2.3.07: Contractors Initial Safety, Health and Environmental Meeting
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
MANAGEMENT
/
ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM (SAMAS) ....................................................... 1
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES............................... 1
2.3.7
CONTRACTORS INITIAL SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL

MEETING
1
AL
2.3.7.1 Responsibilities.............................................................................................. 4
2.3.7.2 Definitions ...................................................................................................... 4
IO
2.3.7.3 Actions Required to Implement This Procedure ........................................... 5
AT
2.3.7.4 Reference Documents ................................................................................... 6
2.3.7.5 Author ............................................................................................................ 6
EG
IN
TE
2.3.7.6 Approvals ....................................................................................................... 6
QCS 2014

Page 2
Process Map
Project/Site
Manager
Contractor
Supervisors
SHEadvisor
Evaluate each
Contractor Scope of
Works to
assess Risk Rating
SHE FRM 7 02
3.1
AL
Where the Activity Risk

Rating is high, notify
the SHE Advisor
Attend Contractor
SHE Meeting when
required
IO
3.1
AT
Arrange for Contractors

and others to attend the
pre-start SHE meeting
3.1
Monitor the site performance against the agreed record
EG
IN
3.1
TE
Review the Contractors Pre-start Agenda in line with

the Creating a Safe Environment document and
record the outcome of discussions
3.1
Address any non-compliance noted during monitoring

3.1
Key
Activity
Guidance
3.1
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
1
The purpose of this procedure is to provide appropriate SHE information to sub-contractors

and ensure a clear and common understanding in respect of contractors activities,
obligations, responsibilities and expectations in relation to SHE matters.
SCOPE
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 4
SHE DIRECTOR
1
Ensures that any initial safety meeting, as defined in the procedure, is carried out in
accordance with this procedure and relevant information is communicated to interested
parties.
AL
Provides advice and support in the application of this procedure.
IO
SHE MANAGER/ADVISER
To monitor any identified arrangements are adhered to and report any non-compliance to
Contractor/Project Manager.
AT
SUPERVISOR/CONTRACTORS CO-ORDINATOR#
IN
Where they are responsible for the procurement of the contractor, they are to ensure that a
copy of the Safe Delivery Document is included in the enquiry/tender documentation and that
the contractor acknowledges receipt.
EG
TE
QUANTITY SURVEYOR/ESTIMATOR/BUYER
2.3.7.2 Definitions
CONTRACTOR
1
The organisation undertaking the activity or arranging for the activity to be undertaken.
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES

2
Any work evaluated as High Risk on form SHE-FRM-7-02
ANY WORK INTERESTED PARTY

3
Any person/s who will benefit and/or need to know the information or arrangements that are
defined in the outputs/actions from the initial safety meeting, detailed in this procedure.
QCS 2014

Page 5
2.3.7.3 Actions Required to Implement This Procedure

SCOPE OF WORK
1
TheProject/Site Manager will evaluate each contractors scope of work to assess the Risk
rating, using form SHE-FRM-7-02.
HIGH RISK ACTIVITY

The Project/Site Manager will notify SHE Adviser of any meeting taking place, for High Risk
activities.
The SHE Advisor will attend any meeting for High Risk activities when requested to by the
Project Manager.
AL
AT
The Project/Site Manager shall ensure the Contractor is aware of site arrangements for
Safety, Health and Environmental issues by holding an initial SHE meeting prior to the
Contractor commencing work on site.
IO
SITE ARRANGEMENTS
In conjunction with the COMPANY Safe Delivery Document each item in the checklist at
SHE-FRM-7-01 Checklist for Contractors Initial SHE Meeting shall be covered or
deleted/struck through where not applicable, and where appropriate a record of the
discussion taken.
EG
IN
TE
RECORDS
RECORD STORAGE
On completion of the checklist it shall be stored for record purposes and distributed to all
interested parties who have duties identified within the checklist detail. This, for example,
could include the Contractors Site Manager, Supervisor and Safety Manager, who needs to
be informed in relation to any of the arrangements/agreements.
PERFORMANCE MONITORING
7
The Project Manager / Supervisor(s) / Co-ordinator(s), shall monitor the performance of

the contractor against the agreements made to ensure compliance, and report on any nonconformance.
NON COMPLIANCE
8
The Project Manager will act on any Reports to ensure the non- compliance is addressed.
QCS 2014

Page 6

FORMS
1
Checklist for Contractors Initial SHE Meeting (SHE-FRM-7-01)
Risk Evaluation form (SHE-FRM-7-02)
AL
DOCUMENTS
Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction) RD1.1.4 and RD1.1.8
Standard SHE Rules for Subcontractors
Contract Documents
CDM Evaluation Information
TE
AT
IO
IN
2.3.7.5 Author
NAME
POSITION IN
COMPANY
CONTACT DETAILS
SHE Manager
EG
SECTION
2.3.7.6 Approvals
NAME
Approved by:
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SHEQ Director
SIGNATURE & DATE
QCS 2014

Page 7
Section A
Contract:
Contract Nr.:
Venue:
Meeting Date:
Trade:
Trading
Address:
Contract
Address:
Tel. Nr.
Tel. Nr.
Mobile Nr.:
Mob. Nr.:
Fax Nr.:
Fax Nr.:
e-mail:
e-mail:
AT
IO
Subcontractor
Name:
AL
Subject to Contract
The matters agreed at the pre-contract meeting, as recorded in these minutes, are not binding on the parties unless
and until the issue by . of a Letter of Intent or Sub-Contract order. Once a Letter of Intent or Sub-Contract
order is issued by .. the matters set out in these minutes shall be incorporated as terms and conditions of
the Letter of Intent and / or Sub-Contract, as appropriate.
Company Representatives Present
Subcontractor's Representatives Present

Job
Title
Name
Job Title
IN
TE
Name
EG
By signing below, the Sub-Contractors representative is deemed to have the authority to agree to the following and
hereby confirms that these minutes are a true and accurate record
Name:
Signature:
Name:
Signature:
Date
Is the Sub-Contractor approved within the

COMPANY Pre Qualification System?:
YES
NO
Date
If NO refer to COMPANY Regional Commercial Director before

proceeding with this meeting or any works
Subcontractor Staff Responsible
COMPANY Staff Responsible
Director / Principal:
Project Manager:
Manager / Supervisor:
Contract Manager
Foreman:
Foreman:
Safety Advisor
SHE Advisor:
First Aider:
First Aider:
The Sub-Contractor proposes to Sub Let the following works The prior written consent of COMPANY is a condition precedent to any sub letting
or assignment of the Sub-Contract works or any part thereof.
Item to be Sub Let
Company Details
QCS 2014

Page 8
Section B
SCHEDULE OF ATTENDANCE
CONTRACT..CONTRACTOR..
Item
N/A
Provided by
..
Maintained By
Contractor
Contractor
Records & Inspections

By
..
Contractor
Mechanical Plant
Small tools and tackle
Access Scaffold
Cradles/Suspended Access Equipment
Mobile Elevated Work Platforms
Public Protection / Fans etc
Bandstands, hop-ups etc
Unloading
N/A
AL
Safety Scaffold
N/A
N/A
N/A
Distribution of materials
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
IO
Roof edge protection
Hoist
AT
Piling mat
Crane facility
Lifting gear
Offices, stores etc

Space for offices, stores etc
N/A
N/A
TE
1st Aid equipment

First aid room
IN
Water Supply
Electrical Power 110v
Safety Lighting
Task Lighting
Set out grid lines and levels
EG
Leads, spiders etc
Set out from grid lines and levels
N/A
N/A
Clear rubbish to centre point
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Clear away rubbish on a daily basis
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Skips
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Protection of work in progress
N/A
N/A
Protection of work on completion

Remove temporary protection (from
other trades) and make good
N/A
N/A
Holes and chases (mark/cut)

Signed for COMPANY
Signed for Contractor
Date:
Date:
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
QCS 2014

Page 9
Section C
Scope & Definitions

The purpose of the meeting is to ensure that there is a clear and common understanding as to the package
contents, respective obligations, responsibilities and expectations. The term Contractor throughout these minutes
shall mean the prospective Sub-Contractor named above, and subject to the requirements of section A the
agreements reached shall apply to ALL sub-sub-contractors appointed by the sub-contractor to carry out works on
his behalf.
All Reference to numbered rules in this document are the rules contained . Creating a Safe
Environment Document, which has been issued to the subcontractor and forms part of the Sub-contract
and Suppliers conditions.
Matters for Discussion
(Delete Where Not Applicable)
Notes / Actions
(Agreement Reached or N/A)
COMPANY
Manager / Supervisor
(b)
Forman / Foremen
(c)
Site Safety Supervisor
(d)
Temporary Works Co-ordinator
AT
IO
(a)
(f)
First Aiders
(g)
Emergency/Fire Marshall
(h)
Waste Controller
(i)
Scaffold Inspector
(j)
Electrical Duty Holder
(k)
Safety Advisor / Supervisor
(l)
(m)
Plant Co-ordinator
(n)
Appointed Person for Cranes
(o)
Crane Supervisor/s
(p)
Induction Presenter
EG
IN
TE
COSHH Co-ordinator
Temporary Works Supervisor

(e)
Contractor
AL
Appointed Persons & Duty Holders

The following persons were identified as carrying out the specified
roles for the Contractor on this project.
Where these names are not known at this time they are to be advised to .. in
writing not less the 2 weeks prior to commencement of the Contractors Works. Failure by the
Contractor to notify by this time may delay the start of the contractors works.
QCS 2014

Page 10
Section D
General
to provide the Contractor with a copy of the Projects

Construction Phase Plan and/or specify where available on site.
Copy provided
/ Available in . site
office
Health & Safety File / Operational & Maintenance Manuals / As installed

Drawings
The Contractor is to supply the following to be included in the CDM Safety File
AL
Details to be added as appropriate to the project
confirmed that these are not required.
AT
IO
All information is to be Delivered to .. as specified by the Project

manager and in any case within 14 days of the completion of the contractor's
works, or 7 days before the practical completion date of the project which ever is
the sooner.
OR*
TE
The contractor will be issued with a copy of the COMPANY Document Creating a Safe Environment which contains
reference in the form of Rules to the topics listed below.
IN
The COMPANY Manager and the representative of the Contractor at this meeting will review the Creating a Safe
Environment Rules and indicate:-
EG
1. Whether the rule applies to the contractors works , and
2. The contractors understanding and agreement to those applicable rules.
In addition to these rules some of the topics require further site specific details to be agreed, these specifics are
contained in Section E of this document and where applicable the attendees must discuss these items and reach
agreement or detail the actions to be taken in the relevant sections, in order for the works to be carried out in a
controlled and safe manner.
Where agreement cannot be reached then the work must not proceed until persons of appropriate seniority have
discussed and assigned actions to enable the works to be carried out safely and without risk.
QCS 2014

Page 11
Applicable
Yes / No
Item / Rule
Entry to site
Yes / No
3.0
Site Safety, Health and Environmental supervision and visits (see additional
information in section E)
Yes / No
4.0
Safety, Health and Environmental training, instruction and competence (see

additional information in section E)
Yes / No
First aid and welfare facilities

Pre-agreement as to safe work procedures (see additional information in sectio
E)
Permits
to work (see additional information in section E)
AT
IO
AL
Housekeeping (see additional information in section E)

Fire precautions (see additional information in section E)
Personal Protective Equipment (see additional information in section E)
Hazardous substances (see additional information in section E)
Environmental impact
Waste management (see additional information in section E)
Work at height (see additional information in section E)
Scaffolding and safe means of access
Mobile Plant
Other plant and equipment (see additional information in section E)
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Lifting operations and lifting equipment (including Piling)(see additional

information in section E)
Yes / No
19.0
Excavations and confined spaces
Yes / No
20.0
Electrical work (see additional information in section E)
Yes / No
21.0
Noise at work
Yes / No
22.0
Asbestos
23.0
Explosives and sources of ionising radiation
24.0
Services and operating processes
Yes / No
25.0
Substance abuse
Yes / No
26.0
Reporting of accidents and dangerous occurrences
Yes / No
27.0
Statutory improvement, prohibition and other notices
Yes / No
28.0
Safety representatives, safety committees and worker engagement
Yes / No
29.0
Non-English speaking personnel
Yes / No
30.0
Temporary works/false work/formwork (see additional information in section E)
Yes / No
31.0
Manual Handling
Yes / No
32.0
Demolition (see additional information in section E)
Yes / No
33.0
Vehicle drivers including delivery drivers
Yes / No
34.0
Installation and commissioning of lifts
Yes / No
35.0
Working in occupied premises
Yes / No
EG
IN
TE
18.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
Yes / No
Yes / No
Agreement &
Understanding
Confirmed (9)
QCS 2014

Page 12
Section E
Additional Topics to be discussed in Detail and agreement reached
INSPECTIONS & AUDITS
The Contractor indicated that he would be undertaking Senior Manager

SHE inspections / audits.
AL
3a
THE CONTRACTOR AGREED TO UNDERTAKE REGULAR

SITE SHE INSPECTIONS AT A FREQUENCY AGREED BY
COMPANY.
Yes / No
IO
The following requirements were confirmed to the Contractor
Yes /No
AT
The contractor will be encouraged to participate in the COMPANY VOICE consultation process and
COMPANY Behavioural Change Programme which will be / is running on this project.
IN
The contractor and COMPANY agreed a schedule for the submission of

SHE Method Statements prior to commencement of the work activity
(attach schedule to these minutes)
Yes / No
EG
6a
TE
PRE-AGREEMENT AS TO SAFE WORK PROCEDURES RISK ASSESSMENT/SAFETY METHOD STATEMENT

The attached Method statement review form will be used to assess the completeness of the Contractors
Method statements, the contractor should ensure that all the relevant points noted on the review sheet
are addressed.
Permit to Work
7a
The following permits will operate on this project:-
QCS 2014

Page 13
Housekeeping & Clearance of Rubbish
8a
The storage area for the Contractors materials was agreed as.
Liquefied Petroleum Gases / Welding and Cutting
Yes / No
The contractor indicated he would be carrying out welding / cutting

operations
Yes / No
AL
The contractor will be bringing LPG to site
Flammable Liquids and Compounds
AT
9b
IO
The location of the storage for gas bottles was agreed with COMPANY site management as
Yes / No
TE
Are any types of flammable liquids or compounds e.g. petrol, diesel, Solvents,
mastics etc. to be brought to site by the contractor
IN
If Yes the contractor is to provide detail
10
EG
The location of the storage for flammable liquids etc was agreed with COMPANY site management as

COMPANY will provide PPE to the contractor as a last resort but will charge the contractor at the following
rates;
Safety Helmets
Hi Viz Vest
Standard Gloves
Standard Light Eye Protection
Ear Protection (Muffs)
Safety Boots
Other (Specify)
Hazardous Substances
11
Does work involve the use of any substances that can give rise to hazards in use?
Yes / No
QCS 2014

Page 14
If Yes the contractor is to provide detail

11a
11b
COMPANY provided a list of substances to Contractor that may affect his employees on site,
including land contamination or biological hazards. List to be attached to this document
12
Environmental Impact
12a
Yes / No
Yes / No
Are any substances being used that may harm the environment
AL
If Yes Details are to attached to this document

Are there any contaminants which may affect the Contractors working area?
12b
Yes / No
AT
IO
If yes COMPANY are to supply details and a list is to be attached to this document
Waste Management
13a
The Contractor was informed of the locations of disposal skips & the recycling arrangements
which will be adopted & the arrangements for temporary storage.
Yes / No
IN
TE
13
Work At Height
14a
Specify any access equipment e.g. elevating platforms, MEWPS or facilities for safe working places e.g.
scaffolding, edge protection to be used by the Contractors.
18
Piling Operation
EG
14
The Contractor supplied details and specification of the Piling Mat
Yes / No
If yes a copy is to be attached to this document
20
Electrical Work
A Copy of The COMPANY Rules for Electrical Safety (RES) has been issued to the contractors
as the works they are undertaking involve the provision of or connection to electrical systems or
equipment
Yes / No
QCS 2014
22

Page 15
Asbestos
It has been identified that this project / building contains Asbestos Containing Materials (ACMs).
If yes the contractor was made aware of the requirement for ALL persons who work on this
Project to have suitable asbestos awarness training. NB any person not able to provide
evidence will not be admitted to site.
Temporary Works / Falsework / formwork

Yes / No
The contractor confirmed that he will be designing the Temporary Works and therefore will have
additional duties under CDM.
Yes / No
AL
The Contractor confirmed that his work will require elements of temporary works.
IO
The contractor confirmed his appointed Temporary Works Supervisor for his works is:
AT
TEMPORARY WORKS DESIGN
Discipline
Qualifications / Experience
EG
IN
TE
Employer
Name
If the contractor has indicated that temporary works design will be included in their scope of works the following
information should be provided for the design staff to be employed on this project (direct and agency) and the
breakdown of relevant qualifications and experience.
30
Yes / No

A Temporary Works Co-ordinator has been / will be appointed. The Contractors full co-operation is
required in helping to ensure that his duties can adequately be fulfilled.
QCS 2014

Page 1
Part 2.3.08: The Report and Investigation of Accidents and Incidents
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
MANAGEMENT
/
ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM (SAMAS) ....................................................... 1
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES............................... 1
2.3.8
THE REPORT AND INVESTIGATION OF ACCIDENTS AND INCIDENTS ...... 1
AL
2.3.8.1 Responsibilities.............................................................................................. 4
2.3.8.2 Definitions ...................................................................................................... 4
IO
2.3.8.3 Action to Be Taken To Implement This Procedure ....................................... 5
AT
2.3.8.4 Appendices .................................................................................................. 12

2.3.8.5 Reference Documents ................................................................................. 20
2.3.8.6 Author .......................................................................................................... 20
EG
IN
TE
2.3.8.7 Approvals ..................................................................................................... 20
QCS 2014

Page 2
PROCESS MAP
Project/Site
Manager
Contract
Manager/Director
SHE
Manager/Adviser/Dept
Client/Regulatory
Bodies
Human
Resources
MIT
Insurers
Incident Control
Determine type and nature of

incident/occurrence
Tie in with any

contractual
reporting
requirements
1.3, 3.12
Contact Regulators
as required
IO
Contact Regulators
as required
Receive First Alert
AL
Receive First Alert
Inform all relevant

parties by
first alert
(within 24 hours)
Provide support, as
circumstances
dictate
Investigation of
Anon
emergency
procedures
including consider
use of company
emergency
telephone number
and informing
Company
Media
Representative
AT
3.1, 3.2, 3.3
If appropriate obtain a copy of the F100 and

distribute to relevant parties
Receive copy of
F100/A
TE
3.1, 3.2, 3.3
Receive copy of
Accident
Register/Book
3.7
EG
If appropriate,
complete and
forward accident
book form to
Regional Office
IN
Involvement of
Comapny
SHE Director,
as circumstances
dictates
Agree requirement for investigation and report

based on outcome and/or potential
3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5
Carry out investigation, prepare report action plan and distribute as required.
(Interim report to be issued within 7 days of incident)
Provide detail,
if required
Provide detail,
if required
3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5

Produce Monthly
Returns form and
send
to SHE
Department
3.8
Key
Activity
Guidance
Log into
data base
Receive information
for processing
Receive copy of
F100/A and
Investigation
Report
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
1
The purpose of this procedure is to focus on the potential of incidents, NOT just the
outcome, and to assign responsibilities and establish a system for the reporting and
investigation of Safety, Health or Environmental accidents/incidents, diseases, dangerous
occurrences and learning events as required by both Qatar Legislation (RIDDOR) and
COMPANY and client requirements.
SCOPE
AL
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Note: Qatar Civil Defence and the Environment Ministry have responsibilities and authority
in relation to the reporting of fires and environmental impacts, respectively.
QCS 2014

Page 4
SHE DIRECTOR
1
Authorises this procedure and decides whether an incident review is necessary. He may
also delegate responsibility for chairing this review.
CONTRACTS DIRECTOR / MANAGER

Provides support in the application of this procedure, assists the Major Incidents Team (MIT)
in the investigation process and the production of reports.
AL
Ensures that any reporting and investigation of an incident is carried out in accordance with
this procedure (and any associated client procedures), and that appropriate contact is made
with the SHE Department and other interested parties
AT
IO
Provides advice and support in the application of this procedure, assists the Project/Site
Manager and the Major Incidents Team (MIT) in the investigation process and the production
of reports.
TE
SHE ADVISER / MANAGER
IN
EMPLOYEE / CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEE
EG
To report all accidents, incidents, diseases, dangerous occurrences and learning events to
the appropriate person.
2.3.8.2 Definitions
CONTRACTS MANAGER
1
Project or Office based Manager overseeing a number of projects.
PROJECT / SITE MANAGER

2
For the purposes of this procedure, Project / Site Manager may also mean Depot Manager
or Office Manager.
MAJOR INCIDENT TEAM (MIT)

3
A team appointed by the Regional Managing Director to investigate all major incidents in
line with the matrix in Appendix 5.
QCS 2014

Page 5
RIDDOR
4
Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction) Report of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous

Occurrences
LEGAL REPRESENTATION
5
A firm of Solicitors, approved by the Company.
LEGAL PRIVILEGES
Any report formed under request from legal representation.
AL
IO
Classification of accidents and injuries are detailed in Appendix 2.
AT
ACCIDENT / INJURY CLASSIFICATION
2.3.8.3 Action to Be Taken To Implement This Procedure
TE
REPORTING AND INVESTIGATING A MAJOR ACCIDENT/INCIDENT (FATAL

ACCIDENT OR MAJOR INJURY) PROJECT / SITE MANAGER
Ensure first aid is provided and an ambulance is called and/or medical attention
administered.
Where advised by the appointed 1st Aider, do not move the person unless this is absolutely
essential.
Ensure that the scene of the accident is not interfered with. Cordon off area wherever
possible (instruct line supervision accordingly).
Contact your SHE Adviser / Manager. The SHE Adviser / Manager will inform the MIT and
prior to commencing the investigation and following consultation with the SHE Manager /
Director, will advise our legal representatives.
If an COMPANY employee is involved, notify HR Department who will arrange for notification
of relatives of the person concerned as soon as possible and preferably by personal visit by
someone who knows the family etc.
Obtain photographs of the area. (Any digital prints may be verified by date and signature.)
In conjunction with SHE Adviser / Manager, complete/send First Alert form SHE-FRM-8-01
to ensure that relevant persons are informed (see distribution list on First Alert form).
Complete the accident book entry report. (Accident Investigation Report Part 1, AIR SHEFRM-8-03)
EG
IN
QCS 2014

Page 6
If appropriate :
(a)
Consider also any specific client requirements.
(b)
Contact the COMPANY Emergency Media Telephone Number.
REPORTING AND INVESTIGATING A FATAL ACCIDENT OR MAJOR INJURY SHE

MANAGER /ADVISER
Ensure that the Qatar Labor Ministry, Workplace Inspector has been informed.
applicable ensure that the Police have been informed.
Where
11
Inform SHE Director / SHE Manager.
12
Carry out an immediate investigation of the accident in conjunction with MIT.
13
Ensure that a copy of the form F100 is completed and sent to the Labor Ministry within 10
days of the accident, or in the case of a non COMPANY employee, obtain a copy from their
employee and ensure that a copy is forwarded to the COMPANY Insurer.
14
Ensure copies of any relevant reports and forms are forwarded to the SHE Department.
15
Complete an AIR Part 1 SHE-FRM-8-02 and 2 SHE-FRM-8-03 and agree distribution with
the Business SHE Manager.
TE
AT
IO
AL
10
IN
REPORTING AND INVESTIGATING AN OVER 3 DAY INJURY PROJECT / SITE

MANAGER
administered.
17
essential.
18
Investigate cause of accident, record physical evidence, and take steps to prevent
recurrences.
19
Inform the SHE Department and Contracts Manager as soon as the accident becomes a
possible over 3 day reportable.
20
In conjunction with the SHE Manager / Advisor complete Accident/Incident First Alert report
form and distribute.
21
Obtain from any sub-contractor a copy of the F100.
22
Report the accident in the accident book and send a copy to the SHE Department and
Insurance Broker.
EG
16
QCS 2014
23

Page 7
Agree with the SHE Manager / Adviser who will produce the investigation report and the
timing of this, including any interim report if necessary.
REPORTING AND INVESTIGATING A NON RIDDOR REPORTABLE ACCIDENT (LOST

TIME INJURY AND ANY OTHER PERSONAL ACCIDENT) PROJECT / SITE
MANAGER
administered.
25
essential
26
Investigate cause of accident, record physical evidence and take steps to prevent
recurrence.
27
Inform the SHE Department of such incidents.
28
Record and report the accident on the accident book form and send a copy to the SHE
Department together with any supporting evidence/documentation.
AT
IO
AL
24
REPORTING AND INVESTIGATION OF AN INCIDENT/NEAR MISS/LEARNING EVENT

PROJECT / SITE MANAGER / SHE ADVISER / MANAGER
Where a near miss, learning event is observed, the process detailed in SHE-PRO-016
should be followed.
30
If appropriate to the circumstances the Project / Site Manager / SHE Adviser / Manager will
complete First Alert report and circulate as appropriate.
EG
IN
TE
29
PROCEDURES CONTRACTORS (SUB/WORK PACKAGE), THIRD PARTIES, ETC

31
Procedures above apply.
32
These contractors are expected to carry out their own reporting and investigation procedures
but we must ensure that it is done. Where the contractor is obliged to report accidents, they
shall be requested for a copy of the report to COMPANY site management who will forward
to the SHE Department.
33
According to the severity or potential of the injury or the level of environmental damage the
contractor may be requested to carry out a joint investigation. This will be decided in
discussion with the Contractor.
34
Reporting/Investigating of Accidents to the General Public/Third Parties
35
Follow the procedure as Section 3.i to 3.iv above as appropriate to the category and
ascertain the type of injury and hospital details, etc.
QCS 2014

Page 8
ACCIDENT BOOK/REGISTER
Site management shall control and verify entries made in the COMPANY accident book and
ensure that copies are forwarded as soon as possible after they are made to the SHE
Department.
37
All notified accidents shall be entered in the COMPANY accident book including all
employees, contractors, visitors to site and accidents to members of the public.
38
Remember, some accidents, which seem minor at the time, may be important long after the
particular contract is finished and hence full information becomes essential.
39
Accident books must be retained for at least three years from the date of the last entry in the
book.
40
The accident book must be sent to archive at the end of the contract with the rest of the
contract documents.
IO
AL
36
The Project / Site Manager is responsible for the completion of the SHE Return and this shall
be sent to the SHE Department as soon as possible after the month end but no later than the
second working day of the following month.
IN
In the event of a reportable disease being advised by a Doctor, the Project / Site Manager
must:
Ensure that the SHE Department is notified.
(b)
After consultation with the SHE Adviser / Manager carry out an immediate
investigation and prepare a written report with emphasis on preventing recurrence of
the problem with a copy to the SHE Department.
(c)
(d)
EG
(a)
42
TE
DISEASES - PROCEDURES
41
AT
MONTHLY SHE RETURNS
After completing above, arrange with the SHE Adviser to complete and forward form
F100A to the appropriate Labor Ministry Department with a copy to the SHE
Department within 10 days. In the case of COMPANY employees, forward a copy to
the Insurance Broker.
A disease needs to be reported only when a written statement prepared by a
Registered Medical Practitioner diagnosing the disease is in line with the Qatar
Regulatory Document (Construction) RIDDOR Section.
DANGEROUS OCCURRENCES (SPECIFIED BY RIDDOR) - PROCEDURES

43
If injury to person is also involved, carry out procedure under Section 3.1 to 3.4 as
appropriate.
44
For all events, consult with the SHE Manager / Adviser for the full list of specified Reportable
Dangerous Occurrences.
QCS 2014
45

Page 9
All Dangerous Occurrences shall be investigated by the Site / Project Manager in

conjunction with the SHE Department :
ALL DANGEROUS OCCURRENCES

Do not interfere with the scene of the accident.
47
Notify the Contract Manager and SHE Department immediately and discuss whether
reportable.
48
If appropriate contact the COMPANY Emergency Media Telephone Number.
49
Obtain written statements for witnesses where possible.
50
Obtain photographs of the area and record physical evidence.
51
Report accident on the form from the accident book with a copy to the Insurer.
52
Reportable Dangerous occurrences shall be reported by the SHE Department will inform the
Qatar Administrative Authority. The Administrative Authority, Workplace Inspector will advise
whether and when you can resume work in the area.
AT
IO
AL
46
In addition to the above:
The Manager, in consultation with the SHE Manager / Adviser, shall report the
occurrence on First Alert report form and distribute as appropriate.
(b)
The Manager, in consultation with the SHE Manager / Adviser, to complete Form F100
and send to the Qatar Administrative Authority within 10 days.
EG
IN
(a)
53
TE
DANGEROUS OCCURRENCES REPORTABLE UNDER RIDDOR
REPORTING & INVESTIGATING ENVIRONMENTAL INCIDENTS - PROCEDURE

54
To assist the reporting process, environmental incidents have been categorised and
examples of each type of category are listed in Appendix 1 (guidance document).
55
For all environmental incidents, consult with the SHE Manager/Environmental Adviser for
advice.
56
Following an environmental incident, complete the reporting requirements as detailed below :

(a)
If it is a significant/serious incident then completes a First Alert form as per section

3.12 (note examples of types of environmental incidents requiring First Alert).
(b)
In addition, less serious incidents must also be recorded and reported monthly as per
section 6.8, to enable COMPANY to monitor and measure environmental
performance.
QCS 2014

Page 10
(c)
Where deemed necessary, a formal Investigation report shall be completed as per

section 3.13 and 3.5 in cases of Learning Events
FIRST ALERT PROCEDURES

57
COMPANY operates a First Alert system to ensure that serious incidents are notified
quickly to the relevant personnel.
58
A First Alert form should be completed for the following circumstances:

Fatal accidents;
(b)
Major Injury accidents;
(c)
Over 3 Day Injury;
(d)
Dangerous Occurrences;
(e)
Following receipt of enforcement notices from any enforcing authority either by the
Company or its sub-contractors;
(f)
All accidents and incidents, including those resulting in significant damage to the
environment, where prosecution is likely or where substantial loss has occurred or
where public attention is likely.
(g)
Significant Learning events (near misses).
(h)
Visits by a Regulatory Authority
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
If however, doubt exists whether or not to send a First Alert then it should be sent. It is the
responsibility of the Regional SHE Adviser / Managers to ensure the First Alert is circulated
to respective COMPANY post holders. Further circulation will be agreed with the relevant
SHE Managers.
60
All First Alerts shall also be copied to the COMPANY SHE Director.
61
First Alerts shall be sent as soon as possible after the accident/incident has become known
to the Company and in any case WITHIN 24 HOURS.
62
The Project/Site Manager shall contact the SHE Manager/Adviser for their site to provide
support on the information required for the First Alert.
EG
IN
59
ACCIDENT/INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORTS

63
It is important that accidents/incidents are properly investigated by the Project Management

Team to determine what has happened and any actions needed to improve performance.
64
It is of the utmost importance that actions arising from an investigation are fully closed out.
This is the responsibility of the Project / Site Manager to produce a written report in
conjunction with the local SHE Manager / Advisor.
65
Formal investigations will be necessary:
QCS 2014

Page 11
(a)
for accidents/incidents reportable under RIDDOR;
(b)
where prosecution or other formal enforcement action is being taken/is considered

likely;
(c)
where, although not reportable, there was potential for more serious consequences or
there are wider lessons to be learned (such as near miss/learning event incidents)
(d)
Significant pollution/damage to the environment has been caused
The decision on whether to conduct a formal investigation should be taken in conjunction

with the relevant SHE Manager / Advisor.
67
Reports on accident/incident investigations should be written in the format set out on the
Accident/Incident Investigation Report form. (Notes for guidance for completing the AIR are
also included with this form). In cases where witness reports are taken to support the
investigation, these should also be included.
68
For any incident and subsequent investigation, a completed or interim report shall be issued
within 7 days from the date of the incident.
69
Distribution of completed accident/incident investigation reports must include the COMPANY

SHE Director. Any distribution outside COMPANY should be agreed with the SHE Director
who will provide the necessary direction
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
66

Page 12
AL
QCS 2014
2.3.8.4 Appendices
AT
IO
APPENDIX 1 GUIDANCE ON CATEGORIES OF ENVIRONMENTAL INCIDENTS
ENVIRONMENTAL
INCIDENT TYPE
EXAMPLE
YES
YES
Notifiable Pollution Incident
Any formal investigation into complaints of nuisance
YES
YES
TE
R
Significant or major spillage which has entered a

watercourse or drain
OTHER
IN
Non-notifiable Pollution Incident
Any waste materials causing a nuisance
YES
Any visible oil/silt/chemicals in controlled waters as a result

of COMPANY activities
YES
Discharging to Controlled Waters or Drains without

discharge consent/approval from Regulator.
YES
Any Breaches of Discharge Consent Parameters
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Notfiable Pollution Incident
YES
Environmental Managers discretion
EG
YES
C
ECOLOGY & BUILT
HERITAGE
Category for Sustainability

Reporting (SHE Dept Use Only)
YES
Any letters/correspondence received from in relation to

nuisance complaints/investigation
CONTROLLED
WATERS
First Alert
Required?
Any Spillage of Fuel / Oil / Chemicals / Soap Oil etc. <10

liters
SPILLAGES
NUISANCE
I.E. NOISE, DUST,
VIBRATION,
ODOUR ETC.
Report in
Monthly
returns?
River/stream bank collapse as a result of COMPANY

operations.
Damage to any plant, animal (or their habitat), or
building/structure that is protected under Qatar law such as
Damage to any listed buildings, Scheduled & Ancient
Monuments etc.
Any other incident leading to damage to the environment,
breach of regulation etc.
YES
YES

(Environmental Managers Discretion)
(Environmental Managers Discretion)
QCS 2014

Page 13
Appendix 2 Accident / Injury Report Form Classifications
NO TREATMENT
1
Any incident, which results in a minor injury but requires none of the treatments noted in any
other of the above categories.
FIRST AID CASE

Injury that is given First Aid treatment by a First Aider, site medical centre or hospital.
First Aid treatment means the following:
AL
Cleaning, flushing or soaking wounds on the surface of the skin.
(b)
Using wound coverings such as bandages, Band-Aids, gauze pads, etc.; or using
butterfly bandages or Steri-Strips, (other wound closing devices such as sutures,
staples, etc., are considered medical treatment);
(c)
Using any non-rigid means of support, such as elastic bandages, wraps, non-rigid
back belts, etc. (devices with rigid stays or other systems designed to immobilise parts
of the body are considered medical treatment)
(d)
Using temporary immobilisation devices while transporting an accident victim (e.g.,

splints, slings, neck collars, back boards, etc.).
(e)
Drilling of a fingernail or toenail to relieve pressure, or draining fluid from a blister;
(f)
Using eye patches;
(g)
Removing foreign bodies from the eye using only irrigation or a cotton swab;
(h)
Removing splinters or foreign material from areas other than the eye by irrigation,
tweezers, cotton swabs or other simple means;
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
(i)
Using finger guards.
(j)
Administering tetanus immunisations.
MEDICAL TREATMENT CASE

4
Injury that results in a person being taken to hospital or given medical treatment by a Doctor
or other Health Care Professional.
Medical Treatment means the management and care of a patient to combat disease or
disorder including;
(a)
Closing wounds using sutures or staples,
(b)
Immobilisation of parts of the body using rigid stays plaster casts etc.
QCS 2014

Page 14
Medical Treatment does not include;

(a)
Visits to a doctor or health care professional solely for observation or counselling;
(b)
The conducting of diagnostic procedures such as x-rays and blood tests, including the
administration of prescription medications used solely for diagnostic purposes (e.g.,
eye drops to dilate pupils); or
(c)
First-Aid Treatment as defined above.
LOST TIME INCIDENT (LTI) /RESTRICTED WORK CASE

Injury that results in a person missing between one and three workdays (not counting the
day of the accident) from work, or injury that results in a person remaining at work but being
unable to discharge their normal duties for one to three days.
Injury not being a major injury that results in a person either missing 4 or more consecutive
days from work (not counting the day of the accident) or being unable to fulfil his/her normal
duties for 4 or more consecutive days, including non-working days i.e.- weekends.
AT
IO
OVER 3-DAY LT OR RESTRICTED / MODIFIED CASE
AL
TE
Defined injury, which requires immediate notification to Enforcing Authority under the
Reporting of Injuries, Disease or Dangerous Occurrence (RIDDOR). Specifically:
Any fracture, other than to the finger, thumb or toe
(b)
Any amputation
(c)
Dislocation of the shoulder, hip, knee, or spine
(d)
Loss of sight (whether temporary or permanent)
(e)
EG
IN
(a)
MAJOR INJURY
A chemical or hot metal burn to the eye or penetrating injury to the eye
(f)
Any injury resulting from an electric shock or electric burn, leading to unconsciousness
or requiring resuscitation, or admittance to hospital for more than 24 hours
(g)
Any other injury

(i)
Leading to hypothermia, heat induced illness or to unconsciousness
(ii)
Requiring resuscitation
(iii)
Requiring admittance to hospital for more than 24 hours
(iv)
Loss of consciousness caused by asphyxia or by exposure to a harmful

substance or biological agent
(v)
Acute illness or loss of consciousness resulting from the absorption of any

substance by inhalation, ingestion or through the skin
QCS 2014

Page 15
(vi)
Acute illness which requires medical treatment where there is reason to believe
that this resulted from exposure to a biological agent or its toxins or infected
material.
FATALITY
10
The death of any person, whether or not they are at work, if it results from an accident
arising out of or in connection with work.
LOSS OF CONSCIOUSNESS
11
Caused by asphyxia or by exposure to a harmful substance or biological agent.
Any injury to person who is not at work if it results from an accident arising out of or in
connection with work and results in them being taken from the place where the accident
happened to a hospital by whatever means.
AT
IO
12
AL
3RD PARTY HOSPITAL
LEARNING EVENT
Near miss/learning events are a near miss or significant incident which could have resulted
in injury or damage to property or harm to the environment.
14
Site management should openly encourage near miss/learning event reporting which is vital
in creating a climate which sustains communication and co-operation to rectify unsafe
situations or conditions and therefore preventing the situation or condition eventually causing
harm.
15
SHE Learning Event cards have been introduced to improve the frequency of reporting and
providing a feedback mechanism at the operational zone.
EG
IN
TE
13
DANGEROUS OCCURRENCE (DO)

16
An occurrence, which arises out of or in connection with work and contained in RIDDOR,
specifically for construction works, this would include:
(a)
The collapse of overturning of, or the failure of any load bearing part of any lift, hoist,
crane, derrick, MEWP, access cradle, excavator, pile-driving frame or rig (over 7m in
height) or fork lift truck.
(b)
Any unintentional incident in which plant or equipment comes into contact with or
causes an electrical discharge by coming into near proximity of an overhead electrical
line exceeding 200 volts
(c)
Electrical short circuit or overload attended by fire or explosion and stops the plant for
more than 24 hours or has the potential for death.
(d)
Collapse of:
(i)
Scaffolding over 5m in height
QCS 2014

Page 16
(ii)
Scaffolding erected near to water, which could have resulted in a drowning

incident
(iii)
The suspension arrangements of any slung scaffold
(e)
Incidents involving pipelines or pipeline works including unintentional escapes,

damage, etc.
(f)
Collapse of:
A building or structure under construction, alteration, demolition etc that
involves the fall of more than 5 tonnes of material.
(ii)
Any floor or wall of a building used as a work place
(iii)
Any false work
AL
(i)
The escape of flammable substances, including specific quantities of liquids or gas
(h)
The escape of any substances in sufficient quantities to death or major injury or

damage to health.
AT
IO
(g)
Where any person suffers from any of the occupational diseases specified in RIDDOR and
their work involves one of the activities noted. All instances where it is suspected that it may
be necessary to report an Occupational Disease should be referred to the SHE dept.
TE
17
REPORTABLE ILL HEALTH
IN
ENVIRONMENTAL INCIDENT
Any unplanned event that may result in damage to the environment, enforcement action from
regulators, or likely to affect or attract public attention. A number of examples of
environmental incidents are included in Appendix 2.
19
Where there is any doubt as to which category the injury / occurrence should be recorded
contact your local SHE department or Advisor
EG
18
Appendix 3 Accident/Incident Reporting Matrix
MAJOR
INCIDENT
Level 4
Inform
SM/PM
immediately.
Leave the
accident
scene
untouched.
Inform SHE
and CM
immediately.
Isolate/secure
the scene.
MAJOR
INCIDENT
Level 3
Inform
SM/PM
immediately.
Leave the
accident
scene
untouched.
Inform SHE
and CM
immediately.
Isolate/secure
the scene.
SHE
Advisor/
Manager
Inform MIT
immediately,
RMD, EA and
SHEM as
soon as
possible.
Accident
Register/
Book
LEVEL
Initial
Contact
Pollution
Incident
Any
Accident
Involving a
Member of
the Public
AT
IO
Major Injury
Incident
Involving
Verbal or
Physical
Abuse at the
Workplace
Dangerous
Occurrence
or Disease
Significant
Pollution
Incident
SIGNIFICANT
Level 2
Fatal
Accident
Resulting in
3-Days or
More
Absence
Page 17
AL

QCS 2014
Accident
Requiring
First Aid
Treatment
Minor
Pollution
Incident
Learning
Event
MINOR
Level 1
Inform SM/PM
as soon as
practicable.
Inform
SM/PM
immediately.
Inform
SM/PM as
soon as
practicable.
Inform
SM/PM as
soon as
practicable.
Inform
SM/PM as
soon as
practicable.
Inform
SM/PM as
soon as
practicable.
Inform
SM/PM as
soon as
practicable.
Inform
SM/PM as
soon as
practicable.
Inform SHE
and CM
immediately.
Isolate/secure
the scene.
Inform SHE
and CM
immediately.
Inform SHE
and CM
immediately.
Inform CM,
SHE and
SHEM as
soon as
practicable.
Inform CM
and SHE as
soon as
practicable.
Inform CM
and SHE as
soon as
practicable.
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
SM to
complete
First Alert
report form.
Limited
circulation.
Inform MIT
immediately,
RMD, EA and
SHEM as
soon as
possible.
Inform MIT
immediately,
RMD, EA and
SHEM as
soon as
possible.
Inform RMD
and SHEM as
soon as
possible by
First Alert.
Inform RMD
and SHEM
as soon as
possible by
First Alert.
Inform SHE
and SHEM as
soon as
possible.
Inform RMD
and SHEM
as soon as
possible.
Inform RMD
and SHEM
as soon as
possible.
Inform RMD
and SHEM
as part of
monthly
report.
Inform RMD
and SHEM
as part of
monthly
report.
Inform RMD
and SHEM
as part of
monthly
report.
CM/SM/PM to
complete
First Alert as
soon as
practicable.
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
SM to
complete
Dangerous
Occurrence
form.
SM to
complete
Dangerous
Occurrence
form.
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
SM to
complete
Learning
Event report
form.
First Alert
CM/SM/PM to
complete
First Alert as
soon as
practicable.
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
SHE and SM
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
Full
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
Full
SM to
complete
Dangerous
Occurrence
form.
Full
Full
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
SM to
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
SM to
SM to
complete
Learning
Event report
form.
Full
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
Full
SM to
complete
Dangerous
Occurrence
form.
Investigation
SM to
complete all
sections of
Accident
Register/
Book.
Full
TE
R
IN
EG
Project/Site
Manager
Inform SM/PM
immediately.
Leave the
accident
scene
untouched.
Review of
Requirement
SHE Adviser/
Manager to
obtain copy
from
contractor or
complete if
COMPANY
employee.
SHE to obtain
copy from
contractor or
complete if
COMPANY
employee.
Any
Accident
Involving a
Member of
the Public
AT
IO
MAJOR
INCIDENT
Level 3
investigation
by MIT, EA,
and Police.
Prevent
witness
collusion.
Incident
Involving
Verbal or
Physical
Abuse at the
Workplace
Dangerous
Occurrence
or Disease
Significant
Pollution
Incident
SIGNIFICANT
Level 2
investigation
by MIT, EA,
and Police.
Prevent
witness
collusion.
SHE to obtain
copy from
contractor or
complete if
COMPANY
employee.
Accident
Requiring
First Aid
Treatment
Minor
Pollution
Incident
Learning
Event
MINOR
Level 1
to complete as
detailed in
Investigation
Requirements.
Prevent
witness
collusion.
investigation
by SM and
SHE.
investigation
by SM and
SHE as
necessary.
investigation
by SM and
SHE as
necessary.
investigation
by SM and
SHE as
necessary.
inform SHE.
inform SHE.
incident by
SM and
SHE
SHE to obtain
copy from
contractor or
complete if
COMPANY
employee.
SHE to
complete and
forward to EA
as RIDDOR.
SHE to obtain
copy from
contractor or
complete if
COMPANY
employee.
SHE to
obtain copy
from
contractor or
complete if
COMPANY
employee.
SHE to
obtain copy
from
contractor or
complete if
COMPANY
employee.
No
requirement
No
requirement.
No
requirement.
EG
F100 Report
Form
MAJOR
INCIDENT
Level 4
investigation
by MIT, EA
Inspector and
Police.
Prevent
witness
collusion.
Pollution
Incident
LEVEL
Major Injury
TE
R
Fatal
Accident
Resulting in
3-Days or
More
Absence
Page 18
AL

IN
QCS 2014
Notes :
EA
1
= Enforcing Authority, SM = Site Management, CM = Contract Management, RMD = Regional Managing Director, MIT = Major Incidents Team,
SHEM = Safety, Health & Environmental Manager
It is the duty of the SM to ensure that all accidents, incidents or near misses are reported as detailed above.
Only the Health and Safety Support Team are to complete the F100 for COMPANY employees.
In the event of a fatality, every assistance is to be given to the visiting authorities; however no statement should be given under caution without legal
representation.
Any enquiries by the media should be directed to head office.
The level of investigation and responsible persons noted are the minimum required in some cases for significant and minor categories a higher level of the
management structure may need to produce the required reports.

Page 19
AL
QCS 2014
AT
IO
APPENDIX 4 INCIDENT POTENTIAL MATRIX AND INVESTIGATION LEVELS
TE
R
When using this matrix consider the potential outcome of the incident not the actual outcome, and use this to help decide the appropriate investigation and
reporting levels. Guidance on the Environmental categories is given overleaf.
Investigation Levels
Level
3
Level
4
Approval
Supervisor or
equivalent
AIR Pt 1
only for
each IP
Project
Manager or
SHE
Adviser
N/A
SHE Adviser +
Supervisor
AIR Pt 1 for each IP

+
AIR Pt 2
Project
Manager
N/A
(MIT)
SHE Manager + SHE Adviser + Project Manager
or equivalent

+
AIR Pt 2
Senior
Manager, e.g.
Ops Director
MD + SHE Director +
Ops Director +
Head of SHE
(MIT)
Ops Director + SHE Director + Head of SHE

+
AIR Pt 2
Senior
Manager, e.g.
Ops Director
MD + SHE Director +
Ops Director +
Head of SHE
EG
Level
1
Level
2
Report
IN
Investigation Team
Incident Review
Panel
NB The Managing Director will decide whether a Level 3 Incident Review is necessary and may delegate responsibility for chairing it.
COMPANYS Head of SHE should be notified of all Incident Reviews and should be invited to attend at Level 4.
QCS 2014

Page 20

FORMS
First Alert (SHE-FRM-8-01)
Accident/Incident Investigation Report (AIR) Parts 1 SHE-FRM-8-02 (Accident Book) and 2

(SHE-FRM-8-03)
Statement of Injured Person/Witness Report Form (SHE-FRM-8-04)
Monthly Data Collection Form (SHE-FRM-8-05)
Site Investigation Avoidance of Underground Services (SHE-FRM-8-06)
Learning Event (SHE-FRM-16-01)
IO
AL
AT
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction) RD1.1.6.
F100
F100/A
TE
EG
NAME
SECTION
IN
2.3.8.6 Author
POSITION IN
COMPANY
CONTACT DETAILS
SHE Manager
2.3.8.7 Approvals
NAME
Approved by:
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SHEQ Director
SIGNATURE & DATE
QCS 2014

Page 21
Information should be communicated immediately by telephone to the project SHE

Advisor. The first alert to be completed by the Project Management in conjunction with
SHE Dept and circulated by e-mail/letter within 24 HOURS to person identified in
section 8. The information communicated should only be based on fact and not on
hearsay at this initial stage of notification.
Project Name
Contract Number
Project Manager
Region
Originator
Date
(Please print name/title in block capitals)
1.0
INCIDENT TYPE
Lost time Incident
Major Injury
Dangerous Occurrence
Over 3 day Injury
Enforcing Authority Visits
Improvement/Prohibition
Notice
Significant Environmental
Incident
AT
IO
AL
Fatal
INCIDENT DETAILS
2.0
Significant Learning event

(near miss)
Injury to member of the

public or Third Party
TE
Date of Incident
IN
Time of Incident
EG
Site Address
Name of any injured
Occupation of injured
Male/Female
Age
Address of any injured
COMPANY Employee
3.0
Contractor (please specify)
Other (please specify)
FULL DETAILS OF INCIDENT (HOW IT HAPPENED) / RESULT OF ENFORCING

AUTHORITY VISIT
QCS 2014
NATURE OF INJURY / DAMAGE / LOSS / ENFORCEMENT ACTION
5.0
DETAILS OF PLANT AND OWNER / HIRER (IF RELEVANT)
AL
4.0
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
ACTION TAKEN (AS A RESULT OF THE INJURY / DAMAGE / LOSS / ENFORCEMENT

ACTION)
6.0

Page 22
QCS 2014

Page 23
DISTRIBUTION
PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS
TICK THE BOXES ON THE RIGHT HAND SIDE OF THE DISTRIBUTION LIST TO IDENTIFY THE
ACTUAL CIRCULATION DETAILS.
DISTRIBUTION TO PERSONNEL IN TABLE 1 IS A MANDATORY REQUIREMENT.
WHERE THE INCIDENT IS A FATALITY, MAJOR INJURY, DANGEROUS OCCURENCE, OVER 3 DAY
OR ENFORCEMENT NOTICE THE DISTRIBUTION MUST ALSO INCLUDE THE RELEVENT
PERSONNEL IN TABLE 2.
TABLE 3 SHOULD BE COMPLETED AS APPROPRIATE TO THE LEVEL OF INCIDENT AND/OR MEDIA
INTEREST.
Distribution as appropriate:
Name:
Telephone
E-mail
AL
TABLE 1 SHE DEPARTMENT Mandatory Distribution
IO
SHE Director
AT
SHE Manager(s)
SHE Team Leads
9
9
9
3
9
TE
SHE Support Team
Dist.
9
Head of Environment and

Sustainability, if appropriate
IN
SHE Adviser (relevant to the

project)
EG
TABLE 2 SENIOR MANAGEMENT TEAM
Managing Director
Regional MD/ Area Director/BD

Director for Retail or Airports
TABLE 3 OTHERS
HR Director/ Regional Delivery Centre
HR Manager (serious accident to
COMPANY/ employee only)
Business Development & PR (E=MC)
Others as required
Insurance Department to be notified by
SHE Director
QCS 2014

Page 24
Part 1(page 1 of 2)
ForOfficeUseOnly
o
INCIDENTN .
Instructionsforuse
1. ThisformistobeusedforALLaccidents(howeverminor),dangerous
occurrencesandcasesofillhealtharisingfromworkwhichoccurat
CompanypremisesorinvolveCompanyemployees,orthepublic
2. Fordetailedguidanceseerelevantbusinessunitguidance
3. Useapplicablepartsofthisformtoreportsignificantdangerous
occurrences
4. ALLpartstobecompletedlegiblyandtheoriginalforwardtotheSHE
DepartmentIMMEDIATELY
rd
O Minor08hourslosttime
O Fatality3 PartyHospital
O Between13dayslosttime
orrestrictedwork
O ReportableDangerous
Occurrence
O Morethan3dayslosttime
orrestrictedwork
O ReportableIllHealth

O MajorAccident
O Environmental
IncidentDate:..IncidentTime:(24hourclock).AssignShift:
Day
Night
GeneralLocationofAccident
AccessRoutes
Other
CarParks
ConstructionSites
PublicHighway
Delivery/StorageArea
ResidentialDwelling
Unloading/LoadingArea
SitePerimeter/OffSite
WelfareArea
AL
Whereonthepremisesdidtheaccidentoccur?
Vehicle
Office
Project/ContractName: Project/ContractNumber:
IO
Address:
SiteTelephoneNo:..SiteFaxNo:.
AT
Descriptionofincident:Giveabriefdescriptionofwhathappenedanddetailsofanyinjuriessustainedincludingtheside
IN
TE
ofthebody(leftorright)
Nameandtelephonenumberofhospital(whereapplicable):
..
EG
Initialtreatmentreceived:Nonerequired
OnsiteFirstAid Paramedic/AmbulanceHospitalA&Evisit
Date/timeIPceasedwork: Date:Time:TimelostbyIPasaresultoftheincident:hours
Date/timeIPreturnedtowork:Date:.
Time:.
DetailsofInjuredCasualty(IP)
Surname:Forename(s):..DOB:Sex:Male
Status
ContractorEmployee
SubContractorEmployee
ClientRep
MemberofPublic
Female
Other
Nameofemployer:Occupation:..
Address:
.
Postcode:ContactTelephoneNumber:
Witnesses
Name
Occupation
Employer
QCS 2014

Page 25
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Part 1(page 2 of 2)
Injury nature Select ONE only

Immediate Cause
Immediate Causes continued
Asphyxiation/gassing
Animal/Insectbiteorsting
Struckbyfallingobject
Asphyxiation
Amputation
Structuralcollapse
Burn/Scald
Contactwithelectricity/lighting
Trapped/caughtinmachinery
Concussion
Contactwithheat/cold
Usingnonpoweredhandtools
Confusion/Bruising
Contact/exposurebiologicalhazards
Usingpoweredhandtools
Crush/Trapinjury
(specifyinbox)
Contactwith/exposuretoair/waterPressure
Dislocation
Drivingatwork
Existingconditions/naturalcauses
ElectricShock
Injury location Select ONE only

Explosion
Effectsofweather/exposure
Exposuretoextremeheat/cold/explosion
Foreignbodyinnose/ear/throat
Abdomen
Exposuretomentalstressfactors
Foreignofvertebralcolumn
Ankle
Fractures
(exclvertebralcolumn)
Exposuretonoise/vibration
Arm/Shoulder
IllHealth
Exposuretoradiation(e.g.UV/nuclear)
Back
Ingestion
Facecollapse/Caveinorrockslide
Chest
Internal
e.g..chest/abdominal/pelvis
Fallwhileascending/descending
DigestiveSystem
Jolt/Jarinjury
Fallsfromheight
Eye
Fallsonsamelevelincl.trips/slips
Lossofsight
Face/neck
Fire
Finger
(specifyinbox)
Multipleinjuries
Hitbymoving/flyingobjects
Nerves/Spinalcord(exclboneinjury)
Foot
Hitting/steppingonstructure/object
Notyetknown
Hand
Manualhandinglifting
Openwound/Laceration
Head
Manualhandlingpush/pull/carry
Other
Leg/Hip
Other/notknown(Specifyinbox)
Poisoning/Toxicsubstance
Multiple
Physicalassault/bullying
Shock/Trauma
Other(PleaseState)
Plant/vehiclecomponentfailure
Sprains/strains
RespiratorySystem
PPEFailure
Superficialcuts/Abrasions
Wrist
Repetitivemovementinjury
Unconscious
Source of
Hazard Select ONE only
BiologicalAgent
FlyingParticle
LiftingEquipment
Radiation
Vehicle/mobileequipment
Cold/Heat
HandTool
Materials
Scaffold
WorkingSurface
Stairs/Steps
Workstationlayout
Dust
HazardousSubstance
Movingpartsofmachinery
ElectricalEquipment
Heat/HotWork
Other
Staticequipment/machinery
Excavation
LackofOxygen
PowerTool
Structure
Floor/groundcondition
Ladder
Proximitytowater
TemporaryWorks
Actiontaken(orsuggested)topreventrecurrenceandtocommunicatelessonslearntfromtheincident
Detailsofpersoncompletingtheform
QCS 2014

Page 26
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Name:Position:. Date:
.
QCS 2014

Page 27
Part 2 This form must only be used in conjunction with the accident/dangerous
occurrence/case of ill health Part 1
Project:
Name of
Injured
Person:
Date:
Safety
Health
Environment
Property
To check a box above, right click on the box, click on Properties and then click onto Default Value, Checked.
Click OK to finish.
Supporting Information Available

Risk Assessment
Competency
Checks
Maintenance
Checks (PPM)
6.
8.
Insurance Report
4.
Method Statement
9.
F100/A
5.
Photographs *
10.
Construction Drawings
Occurrence/Case of ill health form
Injured Persons Statement
12.
Witness Statement
13.
Other Specify
AL
3.
7.
11.
2.
Site Sketch
Accident/Dangerous
IO
1.
Previous Experience/Training
AT
Relevant Training Details
Other, specify
Date of Induction
TE
Procedures applicable to
accident/incident
Date of last relevant

awareness talk(s)
IN
Incident Details (use continuation sheet if necessary)
EG
(in addition to the information on the Accident/Dangerous Occurrence/Case of Ill Health form)
Immediate Causes
(see A-Z of Accident Causes)
Category
Description
Category
Description
* Digital photographs must have the correct level of validation i.e. date, independent witness
etc.
QCS 2014

Page 28
Part 2
Root Causes
(see A-Z of Accident Causes)
Category
Description
Category
Description
AL
Remedial Action (use continuation sheet if necessary)
Action
Target Date
Close Out
Date
TE
Toolbox Talks
Safety Briefing
Review of RA
Other Specify
EG
First Alert
Safety Bulletin
Safety Reminder
IN
Communication of Learning
AT
IO
Person
Responsible
Learning Opportunities and Responsibilities
Investigation Team
Name
Position
Signed
Investigation Approval
Name:
Position:
Signed:
QCS 2014

Page 29
Distribution
PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS
TICK THE BOXES ON THE RIGHT HAND SIDE OF THE DISTRIBUTION LIST TO IDENTIFY THE
ACTUAL CIRCULATION DETAILS.
DISTRIBUTION TO PERSONNEL IN TABLE 1 IS A MANDATORY REQUIREMENT.
WHERE THE INCIDENT IS A FATALITY, MAJOR INJURY, DANGEROUS OCCURENCE, OVER 3 DAY
OR ENFORCEMENT NOTICE THE DISTRIBUTION MUST ALSO INCLUDE THE RELEVENT
PERSONNEL IN TABLE 2.
TABLE 3 SHOULD BE COMPLETED AS APPROPRIATE TO THE LEVEL OF INCIDENT AND/OR MEDIA
INTEREST.
Distribution as appropriate:
Name:
Telephone
E-mail
AL
TABLE 1 SHE DEPARTMENT Mandatory Distribution
IO
SHE Director
AT
SHE Manager(s)
SHE Team Leads
IN
TE
SHE Adviser (relevant to the

project)
Head of Environment and
Sustainability, if appropriate
EG
TABLE 2 SENIOR MANAGEMENT TEAM
Managing Director
Regional MD/ Area Director/BD

Director for Retail or Airports
TABLE 3 OTHERS
HR Director/ Regional Delivery Centre
HR Manager (serious accident to
COMPANY/ employee only)
Business Development & PR (E=MC)
Others as required (
Insurance Department to be notified by
SHE Director
9
9
9
3
9
SHE Support Team
Dist.
9
QCS 2014

Page 30
Statement
Witness
DOB or Age:
Address:
of
Name:
DD/MM/YY
Post Code:
AL
Employer:
Occupation:
Length of Employment:
Relating to Accident/Incident
at
Date & Time:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
STATEMENT:
I confirm that the above statement is true.

Signed:
Witnessed:
Name:
Name:
Date:
Date:
QCS 2014

Page 31
Project :
Project No : Month :
.
Completed By : ... Date :
AIR 1 sent ;
No of Accident Book Entries
Minor
Lost Time
>3Day
Major
COMPANY
Sub-Contractor / Other
Hours/Employees
Av. No. Direct Employees DAY SHIFT
Contractor Employees Hours Worked DAY SHIFT
Av. No. Contractor Employees DAY

SHIFT
Direct Employees Hours Worked NIGHT SHIFT
Av. No. Direct Employees NIGHT

SHIFT
Contractor Employees Hours Worked NIGHT SHIFT
Av. No. Contractor Employees NIGHT

SHIFT
AL
Direct Employees Hours Worked DAY SHIFT
Training/Inductions
No. of Persons with Skill Cards Direct

Employees
IO
No. of Inductions Direct Employees
No. of Persons with Skill Cards

Contractors/Others
AT
No. of Inductions Contractors/Others

No. of Supervisors Inductions Direct Employees
No. of Supervisors Inductions Contractors/Others
Yes
No
IN
Do you hold Employee Safety Meetings
No. of Toolbox Talk Attendees Direct

Employees
No. of Toolbox Talk Attendees
Contractors/Others
R
TE
Proactive Indicators
Total No. of Toolbox Talks Undertaken
No. of Employee Safety Meeting
No. of Representatives
No. SHE Advisor Inspections Undertaken Sub-Contractors
No. of Issues Raised
EG
No. of SHE Advisor Inspections Undertaken COMPANY
No. of Issues Closed Out
No. of Leadership Assessments Undertaken
No. of SHE Procedural Audits Carried

Out
No. of Project SHE Inspections Undertaken

(Managers/Supervisors)
SHE Procedure Ref. No.
Environmental Indicators
Electricity
(Kilowatt
Hours)
Fuel Oil
(Litres)
Waste Generated
Gas (Kilowatt
Hours)
Water (Cubic Metres)
Construction
Demolition
Excavation
Construction
Demolition
Excavation
Project Waste Generated Inert (tonnes)

Project Waste Generated Non Hazardous (tonnes)
Project Waste Generated Hazardous (tonnes)
Waste Management
Project Waste to Landfill (tonnes)
Project Waste Recycled Off Site (tonnes)
Material Re-Used Directly on the Project (tonnes)
QCS 2014

Page 32
To be completed by Manager/Supervisors for damages to underground services

Contract Location :
Manager :
Date of Incident:
Time of Incident:
1.
Type of damage
(9)
2.
Where was the damage? (9)
Electric
Gas
Telecom
Water
Service
Main
Other (please
state)
Other (please
state)
For gas/water/drainage
What diameter was the main or service?
3.
State type (e.g. PE, Ductile Iron, Steel, Lead, etc) :
AL
4.
Street
Lighting
State voltage of electric cable (if known) (9)
IO
5.
Was the cable in a duct?
No
No
Power Mode
Radio Mode
Genny Mode
7.
What mode did the team use? (9)
8.
Locator No:
Was a cable locator used prior to excavation?
Yes
Other (please
state)
Yes
6.
TE
415v
AT
If yes, please state number of ducts
240v
For electric cables / telecom / fibre optic cable (if known)
Calibration Expiry:
IN
What is the number of the locator and is it in calibration?

Genny No:
Calibration Expiry:
10.
No
Yes
Yes
No
The services had been marked i.e. crayon / spray paint / other
Yes
b)
Plans were issued
Yes
c)
Plans were accurate and they cover the working area
9.
EG
Was there evidence to show :a)
Were trial holes dug?
No
No
metres
If yes, at what depth were they dug?
Was the service

11.
12.
13.
a)
Encased in concrete
Yes
b)
Under concrete
Yes
c)
Under tarmac
Yes
d)
Unmade ground (verge)
Yes
No
No
No
No
What was the depth of the underground service

damaged?
Were there any visible features above or below ground to
assist in location of service e.g. covers/boxes, etc
If yes, what were they?
metres
Yes
No
QCS 2014

Page 33
Was assistance required from utilities before excavating?

14.
Yes
No
If yes, please give details

Name
Address
Telephone No.
Contact Name
15.
16.
What caused the

damage? (9)
Mechanical Plant
Power Hand Tools
Non-Powered Hand
Tools
Other (please
state)
State type (i.e. JCB 12 Bucket, Breaker Chisel, Shovel Grafter, Fork, etc) :
If the excavation was open at the time of the damage, state what measures had been
taken to protect the damaged service:
AL
17.
IO
Give a brief description of how the damage occurred and sketch layout of site. (Show
AT
dimensions of excavation, position of damaged utility and location of relevant valve covers, boxes, manholes, metres,
street lights, etc)
18.
Was a Sub-contractor responsible?
TE
Yes
No
IN
19.
If yes, please give details

Name
Telephone No.
Address
Please detail an assessment of repair costs (i.e. time taken

on job, etc)
EG
20.
21.
What steps have you taken to prevent re-occurrence? (use additional sheet if required)
Supervisors Name
(Print)
Signature
Street Works Qual
Date
Project Managers Close Out

Are you satisfied that a full investigation has been completed?
Yes
No
Yes
No
State additional actions where necessary
Is the action to prevent reoccurrence appropriate?

State additional actions where necessary
Where appropriate state what management action has been taken.
QCS 2014

Page 34
Managers Name
Signature
Street Works Qual
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
(Print)
Date
QCS 2014

Page 35
REPORT OF AN INJURY OR DANGEROUS OCCURRENCE

Form F100 Filling in this form
This form must be filled in by a Contractor or other responsible person.
Part A
Part C
About you
1 What is your full name?
About the injured person
2 What is your job title?
1 What is their full name?
3 What is your telephone number?

postcode?
2 What is their address and
AL
If you are reporting a dangerous occurrence, go to Part F to describe

the incident.. If more than one person was injured in the same
incident, please attach the details asked for in Part C and Part D for
each injured person
About your organisation
IO
4 What is the name of your organisation?
3 What is their home phone number?
AT
5 What is its address?
TE
Part B
Female?
6 What is their job title
IN
About the incident
4 How old are they?

5 Are they
Male?
7 Was the injured person (tick only
one box)
EG
1 On what date did the incident happen?
2 At what time did the incident happen?
one of your employees?
(Please use the 24-hour clock eg 0600)
on a training scheme?
Give details:
3 Did the incident happen at the above address?
Yes
No
Go to question 4
on work experience?
Where did the incident happen?
Employed by someone else? Give details of

the employer:
Elsewhere in your organisation give

the name, address and postcode
At someone elses premises give the
name, address and postcode
In a public place give details of
Where it happened
self employed and at work?

a member of the public?
Part D
About the injury
QCS 2014

Page 36
If you do not know the postcode, what is the name of the

Construction Site?
1 What was the injury? (eg fracture,
laceration)
4 In which department, or where on the premises, did the

incident happen?
2 What part of the body was injured?
Part F
3 Was the injury (tick one box that applies)

a fatality?
Describing what happened
a major injury or condition?
Give as much detail as you can: For instance
(see accompanying notes)
the name of any substance involved
an injury to an employee or self-employed

person which prevented them doing their
normal work for more than 3 days?
AT
remain in hospital for more than 24 hours?
TE
none of the above
Part E
IN
About the kind of accident

Please tick the one box that best describes what
happened, then go to Part G.
EG
Contact with moving machinery or material

being machined
Hit by moving, flying or falling object

Hit by moving vehicle
Hit something fixed or stationary
Injured while handling, lifting or carrying
Slipped, tripped or fell on the same level
Fell from height
How high was the fall?
Trapped by something collapsing
Drowned or asphyxiated
Exposed to, or in contact with, a harmful
substance
Exposed to fire
Exposed to an explosion
the part played by any people
4 Did the injured person (tick all the boxes that apply)
become unconscious?
need resuscitation?
the events that led to the incident
IO
an injury to a member of the public which

meant they had to be taken from the scene of
the accident to a hospital for treatment?
AL
the name and type of any machine involved
metres
If it was a personal injury, give details of what the person

was doing. Describe any action that has since been taken
to prevent a similar incident. Use a separate piece of
paper if you need to.

Page 37
Contact with electricity or an electrical
discharge
Part G
Your signature
Injured by an animal
Physically assaulted by a person
Date
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Another kind of accident

(describe it in Part F)
QCS 2014
QCS 2014

Page 38
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Please continue on this page if necessary
QCS 2014

Page 39
REPORT OF A CASE OF DISEASE

Form F100A Filling in this form
This form must be filled in by an employer or other responsible person.
Part B
About you
About the affected person
1 What is your full name?
1 What is their full name?
2 What is your job title?
2 What is their date of birth?
3 What is your telephone number?
3 What is their job title?
IO
AL
Part A
AT
About your organisation
male?
female?
TE
4 What is the name of your organisation?
4 Are they
one of your employees?

on a training scheme? Give
details:
5 Is the affected person (tick one box)
EG
IN
5 What is its address?
6 Does the affected person usually work at this

address?
Yes
No
Go to question 7
Where do they normally work?
on work experience?
employed by someone else?
Give details:
was the injury? (eg fracture, laceration)
7 What type of work does the organisation do?

other? Give Details:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

Page 40
QCS 2014
QCS 2014

Page 41
Part C
Continue your description here
The disease you are reporting

1 Please give:
the name of the disease and the type of work
7
it is associated with; or
AT
IO
AL
the name and number of the disease
IN
TE
2 What is the date of the statement of the doctor who first

diagnosed or confirmed the disease?
EG
3 What is the name and address of the doctor
Part E
Part D
Describing the work that led to the disease
Your signature
Signature
Please describe any work done by the affected person

which might have led to them getting the disease.
If the disease is thought to have been caused by exposure
to an agent at work (eg specific chemical) please say what
that agent is.
Give any other information which is relevant.
Give your description here
Date
QCS 2014

Page 42
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Please continue on this page if necessary
QCS 2014

Part 2.3.09: Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
Page 1
SAFETY AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION

MANAGEMENT /
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES .......................... 1
2.3.9
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) ........................................... 1
2.3.9.1 Responsibilities................................................................................................ 4
2.3.9.2 Definitions ........................................................................................................ 4
AL
2.3.9.3 Actions Required to Implement This Procedure ............................................. 5
IO
2.3.9.5 Author ............................................................................................................ 12
EG
IN
TE
AT
2.3.9.6 Approvals ....................................................................................................... 12
QCS 2014

Page 2
PROCESS MAP COMPANY DIRECT WORK

ProjectManager
Buyer
COSHHCoordinator
SHE
Dept/Competent
Person
Supervisor
Operatives
Ensure PPE procedure

is established
1.3
Hold until specific PPE identified by Risk Assessment 3.2
AL
Note Light Eye protection is not suitable for all operations

Assist in assessing
suitability or any
need for specialist
PPE, BA equipment
to be ordered
Specify and order PPE in accordance with

Appendix 1
3.2, 3.4
AT
IO
3.2, 3.4
Ensure stock is
adequate and
maintained
Ensure an adequate
issue and return
system is
implemented
3.16
Review this
procedure and
improve if
appropriate
Ensure adequate
instruction ion use,
replacement and
maintenance of PPE
EG
IN
TE
3.5
3.16
Issue PPE and

record
3.16
Monitor
effectiveness of
procedure. Review if
required or feedback
to S.H&E Dept
1.3
Use/wear PPE as
detailed by Risk
Assessment/Method
Statement. Provide
feedback on
effectiveness
Monitor compliance of working practices
of operatives against procedure
1.5, 1.6
1.8
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
1
The purpose of this procedure is to assign responsibilities and establish an adequate

system is in place for the selection, storage, issue and maintenance of Personal Protective
Equipment (PPE).
SCOPE
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
This procedure covers all COMPANY projects and locations under the control of
QCS 2014

Page 4
SHE DIRECTOR
1

MANAGING DIRECTOR
Agrees and communicates PPE requirements for their area of responsibility and sets the
appropriate delegated authority to allow sign off of exceptional risk assessments for any
deviation of the mandatory PPE requirements set out in this procedure.
AL
Ensures that works are carried out in accordance with this procedure and arrangements are
monitored.
Ensures that PPE is ordered in accordance with the specifications set out in this procedure.
AT
IO
BUYER
SUPERVISOR
work activities and ensures the controls are in place that are required by this procedure.
IN
TE
SHE ADVISER
Person identified as being competent to undertake a risk assessment in relation to the

activity being undertaken.
EG
COMPETENT PERSON
OPERATIVE/CONTRACTORS EMPLOYEES
8
To comply and co-operate with COMPANY/Employer in respect of this and any associated
procedure and requirements therein.
2.3.9.2 Definitions
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
1
Personal Protective equipment (PPE) means all equipment which is intended to be worn or
held by a person at work and which protects them against one or more risks to their health
and safety, and any addition or accessory designed to meet that objective. Items such as
fluorescent yellow waistcoats, safety harnesses etc are PPE as defined. Ordinary working
clothes and uniform not specifically provided to protect the wearers health and safety are
not PPE.
QCS 2014

Page 5
SUITABLE
2
Suitable means it is appropriate for the risk, user friendly, correctly fitted, effective and
complies with design and manufacturing standards.
OVERLAPPING REQUIREMENTS
N/A
RESUME OF THE REQUIREMENTS
(b)
The PPE is suitable.
(c)
If two different types of PPE are worn, they do not adversely affect each others
performance against the risk (i.e. they are compatible).
(d)
PPE is maintained (including replaced or cleaned), in efficient working order and in

good repair.
(e)
Appropriate storage and accommodation is provided for PPE when not in use.
(f)
Employees are provided with adequate information, instruction and training about the
use of the PPE, its limitations, the risk(s) it guards against and how to maintain it in
efficient working order. Such information should be easily understood.
(g)
That PPE is properly used.
The required employees are to:-
AT
IO
AL
PPE is provided but only as a LAST RESORT for employees exposed to a risk of
health or safety whilst at work.
(a)
Use the PPE provided to them in accordance with any training and instruction given
(b)
Return the PPE to any accommodation provided for it after use
Report any loss of or obvious defect in the PPE to their employer.
EG
(a)
TE
The required employers to ensure that:
IN

1
Places responsibilities on employers to provide suitable personal protective equipment to

their employees whilst at work. There is a similar duty for the self employed.
RISK ASSESSMENT
Prior to the selection of any Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) a risk assessment shall
be carried out to identify the relevant PPE, proportionate to the risk involved. Any
assessment should also take into consideration any overlapping requirements.
Refer to SHE-PRO-001 to assist with this process. The risk assessment shall also consider
the requirements for specialist PPE, such as Breathing Apparatus. Further advice in this
area can be sought from your local SHE Dept.
A guide to the standards required for common PPE is in Appendix 1.
The List at Appendix 1 covers:(a)
Type of protection
QCS 2014

(b)
Potential Health and Safety effects if not worn
(c)
Typical hazards
(d)
Relevant BS/EN
Page 6
CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT
6
COMPANY promotes the continual assessment of PPE in terms of fit for purpose and
suitability and the users feedback on its effectiveness, comfort and compatibility should be
encouraged by the relevant project management.
Any feedback on its effectiveness should then be reported to the SHE Department. This
could then allow for items/types of PPE to be added to the approved list. Purchase of such
unlisted PPE should initially not take place until there has been consultation with the SHE
Department.
When considering the type of PPE, ie gloves, respirators, foot protection etc. further
information is available on the MSDS sheets as detailed in SHE-PRO-02. Information can
be obtained through the COSHH Co-ordinator.
IO
AL
CONSIDERING TYPE OF PPE
A stock of the appropriate PPE shall be available on site. This will be dependent on the
contractual requirements (i.e. stipulated by clients) or as a result of risk assessment.
AT
STOCK OF PPE
TE
The main types of protection that are in regular use with COMPANY are:
Eye protection
(b)
Head protection
(c)
Hearing protection
(d)
Respiratory protection
(e)
Foot protection
(f)
Hand protection
EG
IN
(a)
10
TYPES OF PPE
MANDATORY PPE
11
COMPANY has a requirement in place for the mandatory wearing of the following items of
PPE on all its projects:
(a)
Head protection
(b)
Foot protection
(c)
Hand protection
(d)
Eye Protection
12
In addition where there are plant movements, Hi-Vis clothing must be worn in areas
designated by the Project/Site Manager.
13
Mandatory requirements will be included in the Site Rules and communicated at Induction.
14
In exceptional circumstances an approved risk assessment may be undertaken to allow for

deviation from the mandated PPE requirements. This would be at Director level.
QCS 2014

Page 7
EYE PROTECTION (SEE ALSO VII MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS)

15
Particular operations may require the use of either glasses, goggles or full face masks etc.
The SHE Department shall be contacted and will advise on the type required.
16
It is also critical that suitable and sufficient risk assessments identify the correct type of eye
protection to ensure that Light Eye Protection (LEP) is not used in place of the eye
protection that may be required, e.g. grinding or cutting operations where goggles would be
required and not LEP.
17
It is COMPANY policy to issue prescription safety glasses to COMPANY employees when

applicable. Anyone who considers they need prescription safety glasses should contact the
local SHE Manager/Advisor who will advise on the process to be followed.
HEAD PROTECTION (SEE ALSO 3.7 MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS)
Safety helmets are only designed to last for 3 years and this figure may reduce dependent
on the use, environment, storage arrangements etc., for example helmets must not be
stored in direct sunlight as the sun rays degrade the plastic (e.g. if stored on the rear shelf of
a car). Safety Helmets should be subject to regular inspection by the user, to determine
their suitability for use up to the 3 year maximum.
19
To identify the age of a helmet there is identification on the underside of a helmet (usually
under the peak), it is usually a stamped circular disc containing a number surrounded by 4
or 12 segments. The number represents the year of the helmet shell moulding and each
segment containing a dot defines the month of the year. A shell marked with six dots
surrounding a number 98 would represent a shell that was moulded in June of 1998. Some
manufactures use different methods, reference should be made to the manufacturers
guidance
20
Markings on the Helmet
21
Every helmet claimed to comply with the requirements of European Standard BS EN 397,
shall carry a moulded or impressed marking giving the following information :
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
18
number of European Standard BS EN 397
(b)
name or identification mark of the manufacturer
(c)
year and quarter of manufacture
(d)
type of helmet (manufacturers designation). This shall be marked on
(e)
EG
(a)
both the shell and the harness
(f)
size or size range (in centimetres). This shall be marked on both the shell
(g)
and the harness
(h)
abbreviation for the material of the shell in accordance with ISO 472 (eg ABS, PC,
HDPE etc)
HEARING PROTECTION
22
There are two basic types of ear defender used in construction; they are ear plugs and ear
muffs. It is also possible to purchase more specialist type such as ear muffs with in built
communication systems.
23
Both plugs and muffs give good attenuation and comfort, although ear muffs give better
protection at frequency ranges HZ 1000-8000 e.g. high impact noise, hilti, piling hammers.
24
In some extreme cases it may be required to give double protection, ie muffs and plugs. In
all cases the requirement is for assessment of noise and the selection of the most suitable
QCS 2014

Page 8
type of defender. Consultation with the SHE Department will help you choose the most
suitable type.
25
There may also be operational constraints on the type of protection, for example plugs
should not be the automatic choice if working with contaminated land and should definitely
not be used when working in compressed air.
26
If there are medical reasons why a person cannot use certain types of protection then this
should only be agreed to after a letter has been received from a doctor.
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
Respiratory Protective Equipment (RPE), as with any other form of PPE, should be
considered as a method of last resort in preventing or reducing exposure.
28
Before ordering RPE there must be prior consultation with the SHE Department who will
assist you in assessing the risks and advise on the type of RPE to purchase/use.
29
RPE includes a very wide range of devices, from disposable filtration masks to self
contained Breathing Apparatus (BA). Therefore choosing the right type of RPE is essential.
Please refer to COSHH procedure for information on face fitting or RPE.
30
In the case of BA, please refer to your local SHE Department for advice.
AT
IO
AL
27
FOOT PROTECTION (SEE ALSO VII MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS)

The type of foot protection will depend on the particular circumstances and the identified
types produced by means of assessing the risk. This includes the frequency of exposure
and the likely severity of the injury.
32
The type and style is detailed at Appendix 1 and it should be recognised that in some
circumstances personnel may be eligible for more than one type, e.g. when working in both
dry and wet conditions.
33
As a minimum the protection afforded should be steel toe cap and mid sole protection.
EG
IN
TE
31
HAND PROTECTION (SEE ALSO VII MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS)

Gloves must be carefully selected so as to be fit for purpose, taking into account use,
comfort, dexterity, temperature protection and grip.
35
The general requirements of any glove must include:
34
(a)
Fit for purposes
(b)
Construction
(c)
Sizing
(d)
Storage requirements
(e)
Breakthrough properties
36
For whatever glove is being used on site, both product and technical information should be
available.
37
Consultation with the SHE Department will provide further advice on type/selection. Where
gloves are required to prevent a health risk, they will be selected as part of the COSHH
assessment.
38
NB:
For further details on all the above protection see Appendix 1.
QCS 2014

Page 9
MINIMUM DRESS STANDARDS

39
The minimum acceptable dress on site when working is:

(a)
Long Trousers (Waist to ankle. Shorts & length are not permitted)
(b)
Shirt, T Shirt, Polo Shirt, wearing of short sleeves may also have restrictions in terms
of COSHH assessment requirements such as protection against irritants etc Long
sleeves preferred ( Vest, singlets are not permitted
(c)
Safety helmet
(d)
Safety footwear
CE MARKING
All PPE manufactured and imported from the European Union should have CE marking
indicating its conformity with the PPE directive. Items referred to within this document
conform to the CE standard marking and site management will check compliance.
41
NB: NUISANCE DUST MASKS (mask or gauze pad) do not conform to the European
Standard EN149 and are not CE marked. Therefore they are not classified as protective
equipment and SHALL NOT be used on site.
IO
AL
40
AT
ISSUE AND USE
The COMPANY Personal Record/Issue Card logs shall be completed for the issue of
protective equipment/clothing to confirm receipt by employees.
43
All PPE issued to COMPANY employees is issued/replaced free of charge .
44
Abuse or non use of PPE supplied is a disciplinary offence.
45
In addition to the issue of equipment the project manager shall ensure that there are
procedures in place for the replacement, maintenance, means of reporting defects, storage
and, if appropriate, return of PPE when not in use.
46
Where relevant adequate information, instruction and training proportionate to the risk shall
be provided. This may range from instruction on how to fit and fit test RPE through to the
mandatory legal requirement for training in the use of BA.
EG
IN
TE
42
SUPPLIERS
47
Suppliers quoted within these procedures have no prior arrangements or contractual

agreements and all purchases shall be made in accordance with COMPANY Procurement
Procedures.
CONTRACTORS, VISITORS AND LABOUR AGENCY PERSONNEL
CONTRACTORS
48
It is a condition of contract that all contractors provide PPE to the appropriate BS/EN as
required, and also be of the type identified by the Project or the contractors risk
assessment.
49
The type identified for the Project will, where appropriate, be discussed at the initial safety
meeting.
50
If the contractors do not supply the relevant PPE then COMPANY will supply the PPE and
charge the contractor at cost, plus handling fee.
QCS 2014

Page 10
LABOUR AGENCY PERSONNEL
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Labour agencies are required by COMPANY contract conditions to ensure the personnel
they supply to COMPANY possess the relevant PPE. Visitors shall comply with the
directions of the Project Manager.
51
QCS 2014

Page 11
APPENDIX 1 - PPE PURCHASE LIST

Type of Protection
Typical Hazards
Eye Protection
Potential Health & Safety effects if protection not worn:
Blindness
Eye injuries (various)
Cataracts
Headaches
Restricted vision
Eye strain
Arc eye
Head Protection
Head injuries
Sunburn
Cuts, bruises
Fractures
Concussion
Unconsciousness
Hearing Protection
Potential Health & Safety effects if protection not worn.
Hearing damage
Noise induced hearing loss
Tinnitus
Increased stress levels
Communication problems
Chemicals
Liquids
Gases
Molten metal
Hot solids Short circuit electrical
Direct sunlight
Laser beams
Airbourne dust (large and small particles)
Flying particles (high and low velocities)
Relevant
BS/EN
BS 2092
BS EN 166
349B
Falling objects
Striking objects
Sunlight UVA & B
Restricted view
High noise levels

Low frequency noise levels
Mid frequency noise levels
High frequency noise levels
High impact noise levels
EN 352-1
EN 352-2
EN 352-3
Harmful dusts
Inhalable dusts
Respirable dusts
Toxic dusts
Gases
Liquids or solids
Micro biological
Vapours
Fumes
Mists
Oxygen deficiency
EN149
Pr EN 140
En 405
Foot Protection
Foot injuries/amputation
Burns
Dermatitis
Biological infection
Blood poisoning
Sprains & strains
Fractures
Bruising
Cuts
Falling objects
Sharp objects
Piercing objects
Cements
Oils
Contaminated land
Chemicals
Water/mud
Uneven ground
BS EN 345 and
346
Hand Protection
Hand injuries general
Cuts/lacerations
Dermatitis
Burns
Poor dexterity and grip (i.e. due to cold weather)
Sharp objects
Abrasives
Chemicals
Oils
Cement
Wood
Lack of dexterity
Cold/ Heat
Weather
Water
EN 420
High Visibility Clothing

Bruising
Fractures
Concussion
Unconsciousness
Death
Cars
Mobile Equipment
Heavy Equipment
EN 471 Class 3
EG
IN
TE
Notes: 1)
2)
AL
IO
AT
N
Respiratory Protection
Upper tract respiratory problems ie rhinitis
Lower tract respiratory problems ie asthma, bronchitis
Toxic poisoning (various health effects)
Viral infections
Asphyxiation
EN 397
This list must be read in conjunction with any relevant company procedure.
When in doubt the SHE Department must be consulted to assist in any assessment
or alternative PPE.
QCS 2014

Page 12

FORMS
1
N/A
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction) RD1.3 and RD 1.4
(SHE-PRO-001)
COSHH - (SHE-PRO-002)
AL
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT DETAILS
SECTION
AT
IO
2.3.9.5 Author
EG
IN
TE
SHE Manager
2.3.9.6 Approvals
Approved by:
NAME
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SHEQ Director
SIGNATURE & DATE
QCS 2014

Part 2.3.10: The Safe use of Cranes & Other Lifting Appliances
Page 1
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
MANAGEMENT
/
ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM (SAMAS) ......................................................... 1
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES ..................................1
2.3.10 THE SAFE USE OF CRANES & OTHER LIFTING APPLIANCES

(EXCAVATORS, TELE HANDLERS AND LORRY LOADERS) ...........................1
2.3.10.1 Responsibilities .............................................................................................. 4
AL
2.3.10.2 Definitions ....................................................................................................... 5

2.3.10.3 Action Required To Implement This Procedure ............................................. 6
2.3.10.4 Application of Procedures to Cranes under the Control of Contractors ........ 8
IO
2.3.10.5 Guidance To This Procedure ......................................................................... 9
AT
2.3.10.6 Reference Documents ................................................................................. 13

2.3.10.7 Author ........................................................................................................... 14
EG
IN
TE
2.3.10.8 Approvals ..................................................................................................... 14
QCS 2014

Process Map
Project
Manager/Contractor
Ensure all those

involved in planning,
recording, permitting
and carrying out lifting
operations are
competent. Ensure
adequate arrangements
are put in place,
including for
1.2, 3.2, 3.8
Specialist
Contractor/Crane
Supplier
Appointed
Person
Lift Supervisor
Slinger/Signaller
& Operators
Ensure lifting
equipment and
accessories are
suitable for the task
and have adequate
strength and stable
in use
3.1, 3.9,
Appendices 1 & 2
AL
All crane lifts must

have an appropriate
Lift Plan prepared
by a qualified
IO
1.3, 3.3, 3.7, 3.9,

Appendix 1
AT
Appointed Person
assesses lifts and
classifies as either
standard or complex
1.3
EG
IN
2.1
TE
Standard lift classified

as crane lift with no
extraordinary hazard
Classified complex
lift due to nature of
lift i.e. location,
tandem lift, unusual
load, high risk
i
2.2
Appointed person
interfaces with
specialists engineers,
designers, temporary
works co-ordinators to
assess options and
limitations
Company
supply relevant
information and
agree with
specialist crane
company the
parameter for a
complex lift
3.6
In cases of tower
cranes, specialist
advice on
selection and
type of crane is
required taking
into account site
conditions,
access,
foundations and
3.5, 3.7
1.2
Appointed person
prepares, reviews Lift
Plan and ensures
permits in place. NB
additional permit
required for multi
positions
1.2, 3.3
Key
Activity
Guidance
Tower crane
thoroughly
examined before
use and lifting
schedule in place
3.7
Crane lift supervisor

made aware of
operational
requirements
including any
1.4, 3.1, 3.9,
Appendix 1
Slinger,/Signaller
and operator(s)
made aware of
operational
requirements
including any
restrictions
1.5, 1.6, 3.1, 3.4,
3.9, Appendix 1
Crane Lift
Supervisor to
inform appointed
person of
situation or
1.4
Stop and inform

of any abnormal
situations or
changes in work
practice from
agreed method
or sequence
1.6
Page 2
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
1
The purpose of this procedure is to ensure the correct selection, safe use and maintenance of all
lifting equipment and lifting accessories as prescribed in the Lifting Operations and Lifting
Equipment (LOLER) section of the Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction).
SCOPE
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
This procedure covers all COMPANY Projects and locations under the control of COMPANY. A
COMPANY is defined as the organization with responsibility for management of safety at a
construction site.
QCS 2014

Page 4
1
The following duty holders must be appointed for all crane operations in accordance with current
guidance and their responsibilities are detailed below :
SHE DIRECTOR

Their responsibilities are as follows:
Ensure this procedure is implemented for all types of lifts.
(b)
Ensure appropriate measures are in place for the control of change for risk
assessment/method statements.
(c)
Ensure the COMPANY nominate an authorised person to sign off Crane Permit to Lift.
(d)
Ensure all persons involved in the planning and carrying out of lifting operations are
competent.
(e)
Ensure a COMPANY person is appointed to co-ordinate the relevant plans, permits, forms
and associated paperwork for the COMPANY filing system.
IO
AL
(a)
AT
The Appointed Person will ensure that :
The assessment and planning of lifting operations is undertaken and complies with the
requirements of the COMPANY lifting operations procedure.
(b)
The Crane Team is appointed and all are made aware of authorities and responsibilities.
(c)
There is an effective line of communication back to him in the event he is not present at the
lift.
(d)
Close liaison is maintained with the technical crane suppliers throughout the installation,
operational and dismantling phases of tower cranes.
(e)
Lifting
operations
are
reviewed
following
advice
from
the
Crane/Lift
Supervisor/Signaller/Slinger on any matters of change in arrangements, and that the Permit
to Lift and Risk Assessment are amended accordingly.
EG
IN
TE
(a)
APPOINTED PERSON (LIFTING OPERATIONS)
LIFT SUPERVISOR
4
The Lift Supervisor will :

(a)
Act as a key member of the Crane Team and report to the Appointed Person as leader of
that team, including details of any change in activities or arrangements.
(b)
Ensure that the Slingers/Signallers, the Crane Operator and any other person involved in
the lift are familiar with and follow the safe system of work and the details and limitations
recorded in the lifting plan.
(c)
Ensure that Tower Crane Operators working hours do not exceed the operating criteria.
(d)
Ensure that Crane Operators are suitably trained and competent.
(e)
Ensure the safe working load (SWL) is never exceeded, other than for the express purpose
of testing a crane under the supervision of a competent person. There are no exceptions to
this.
(f)
Ensure cranes do not operate in any weather conditions that exceed the limit stated for that
type of crane.
QCS 2014

Page 5
(g)
Ensure that man-riding is never carried out unless it is part of the agreed safe system of
work.
(h)
Ensure grab work, demolition balling or pile driving are only performed by machines specially
adapted and intended for these purposes.
SLINGER/SIGNALLER
The Slinger/Signaller will :
Read, understand and comply with the lifting plan and take instruction from the Lift
Supervisor.
(b)
Establish weights, balance loads and judge distances, heights and clearances.
(c)
Select the correct lifting gear in suitable condition for the loads to be lifted, reporting any
defects where necessary.
(d)
Adopt correct slinging techniques.
(e)
Give precise and clear instructions to the Lifting Equipment Operator.
(f)
Initiate and direct the safe movement of the crane and load.
(g)
Signallers shall be identified on site by their orange hi-vis tabards and/or orange helmets.
(h)
Stop operations if any changes to the agreed method are undertaken or required.
AL
(a)
IO
AT
OPERATORS
Ensure they are in possession of and have been briefed on the Permit to Lift and have signed the
relevant section.
Position the crane, as instructed, in accordance with the Permit to Lift.
Operate in accordance with the Permit to Lift.
Inform the Lift Supervisor/Signaller/Slinger if any problems arise which would affect the lifting
operation.
10
Operate the crane in accordance with the cranes operating instructions.
EG
IN
TE
2.3.10.2 Definitions
STANDARD LIFT
1
Any lift using lifting equipment. 2.2
Complex Lift
A lift where the lifting operation requires more than one crane to lift the load, or cranes using load
enhancement attachments (super lift etc), or the lift is to take place at a location with exceptional
hazards, e.g. chemical plant or lifting loads on or near live equipment, including Rail Infrastructure.
CONTRACT LIFT
COMPANY may enter into a contract with a third party (usually a crane hire company) who will
undertake the work on its behalf. Before entering into such a contract, COMPANY has a duty to
satisfy itself that the third party has the necessary competence to carry out the work in accordance
with the requirements of BS 7121.
In a Contract Lift the crane hire company will plan the lift, select a suitable crane, specify the
slinging and signalling arrangements, supervise the lift and be responsible for the lifting operation.
QCS 2014

Page 6
CRANE HIRE ARRANGEMENTS

5
In a crane hire arrangement (including tower cranes), the crane and operator will work to the
clients instructions. Under this arrangement, COMPANY will plan the lift and specify the
slinging and signalling arrangements, supervise the lift and be responsible for the lifting
operation.
LIFTING EQUIPMENT
Lifting equipment means work equipment used to lift or lower loads (cranes, hoists, tele handlers,
vehicle mounted lifting arms i.e. Hiab etc) and includes the attachments for the anchoring, fixing or
supporting of lifting equipment.
Should an excavator be used for lifting materials, other than for excavated material or fill, then by
definition it becomes lifting equipment (eg. an excavator used to lift and lower a manhole section in
position).
Lifting accessories are items of work equipment used to attach loads to lifting equipment, eg.
chains, shackles, strops, slings, eye-bolts, spreader beams, etc.
AT
IO
AL
LIFTING ACCESSORIES
Lifting operations if not properly planned, managed and executed can result in accidents, serious
incidents or fatalities.
IN
The Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment requires the appointment of Duty Holders to ensure:
All lifting operations are properly planned, managed and executed.
(b)
Those involved in lifting operations are competent.
(c)
All crane lifts must be planned and approved by an Appointed Person.
(d)
The risks from lifting operations are assessed and lifting equipment and lifting accessories
selected and used are suitable for the task. When in use, the equipment must be stable and
the safe working load of equipment and accessories MUST NEVER be exceeded.
(e)
Lifting equipment is inspected, maintained and thoroughly examined as required.
(f)
Lifting accessories (eg. chains, shackles, strops) are thoroughly examined every 6 months.
(g)
Any lifting accessory found not to have a current test certificate should be taken out of
service immediately and be quarantined and clearly marked for re-testing or disposal.
(h)
Any defects found must be reported to the person in control of the lifting operation
immediately so that appropriate action can be taken to repair or replace the equipment or
otherwise ensure that potential dangerous equipment is withdrawn from use as soon as
possible.
(i)
The safe working load must be marked on the lifting equipment. Where the configuration of
the lifting equipment can be altered, affecting the safe working load, there must be adequate
information to determine the safe working load in the different configurations.
(j)
Lifting equipment and accessories that are used for lifting persons must be marked to
indicate this fact.
(k)
Consider the positioning and installation of lifting equipment, site conditions for proximity
hazards, eg. overhead cables, space availability, and suitability of the ground or foundations
eg. for outriggers in consultation with the manufacturers information.
EG
(a)
TE
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
QCS 2014

Page 7
(l)
Ensure that there is a plan in place that also considers a safe system of work to prevent
persons being trapped, eg. physical barriers to prevent access to restricted areas. Refer to
theTemporary Works Co-ordinator if necessary.
(m)
The COMPANY Regional SHE Adviser is advised in advance, of any intention to carry out
man-riding. (See also Appendix 1 General Rules for the Use of Cranes).
(n)
Where there is more than one Appointed Person allocated to a project, then appropriate
communications to co-ordinate any interfaces should be put in place and a lead appointed
person nominated.
See also:
Appendix 1 General Rules for the Use of Cranes.
Appendix 2 Table of examinations and inspections.

LIFTS OTHER THAN CRANE LIFTS
AL
Other than crane lifts, numerous operations fall under the category of lifting operations as per the
Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment (LOLER). These may include :
Fork Lift Trucks
(b)
Excavators (used as lifting devices).
(c)
Hoists & material lifting equipment (all types).
(d)
Hiab (or vehicle mounted lifting arm) operations. See SHE-FRM-10-06
(e)
Scaffold Pulley Wheels (Gin Wheels).
(f)
Working platforms i.e. MEWPs, Mast Climbers
AT
IO
(a)
For lifting appliances other than cranes or Hiab, the checklist in form SHEFRM-10-05 should be
considered.
Where the above does not cover the type of lift or equipment involved, the person managing the lift
should consult with the manufacturer, supplier or a member of the SHE team to establish and
record a safe system of work.
EG
CRANE LIFTS
IN
TE
A Lift Plan must be received from the Appointed Person responsible for a Contract Lift carried out
by a third party. Note: Tthe lift plan must include a detailed layout plan.
All lifting plans must be verified using the Control of Lifting Operations Permit to Lift Checklist to
ensure all associated documents are included and authorised by the Appointed Person.
10
Once these checks are signed off the Control of Lifting Operations Permit to Lift can then be
issued by the nominated person to authorise commencement of lifting operations. Note that in
cases where the crane moves location (multiple crane position) around site then the Permit must
be used for multiple positions (SHE-FRM-10-02).
SLINGING PLANS
11
During standard lifting operations, the following slinging plan shall be followed by the
Signaller/Slinger as part of their duties :
(a)
Assess the weight of the load.
(b)
Choose the correct lifting equipment and control the lifting operation.
(c)
Ensuring lifting equipment is fit for use by carrying out pre-use checks.
(d)
Ensure that any physical controls ie. barriers are in place and nonessential personnel are
kept out of the immediate working area of the operation.
(e)
Check the anticipated path of the load.
QCS 2014

(f)
Prepare a place to set down the load.
(g)
Fit the lifting equipment to the load together with tag lines as necessary.
(h)
Make the lift (a trial lift may be necessary to establish centre of gravity).
(i)
Release the lifting equipment after the lift has been completed.
Page 8
12
Clear up.
13
Where appropriate, return lifting equipment to a suitable secure storage location.
14
Be familiar with any appropriate communication arrangements, documentation or operational

requirements such as risk assessments, method statements or Permit to Lifts.
2.3.10.4 Application of Procedures to Cranes under the Control of Contractors

When contractors provide cranes for their own use and operate them under their own control,
then the principles of this procedure shall apply, however COMPANY will retain permit control.
These requirements shall be discussed at the initial safety meeting with contractors. It shall be
agreed at that meeting:
AL
When a method statement is required from the Contractor.
(b)
Who the Contractor has nominated as his competent Appointed Person.
(c)
The Contractors Appointed Person shall prepare a Crane Lift Plan (it will be necessary for
ourselves to provide details of the ground conditions). COMPANY shall complete the
Permit to Lift Checklist and Permit to Lift.
AT
IO
(a)
SPECIAL OR COMPLEX LIFTS
Special lifts include Tandem, Complex, Floating Lifts etc. Additional advice must be sought from
the SHE team during the planning of such lifting operations.
Where possible this should be arranged as a contract lift.
Certain crane applications, such as handling temporary pile casings or piling hammers/extractors
can be controlled by a trained Signaller/Slinger provided that a detailed risk assessment/method
statement has been produced by the Appointed Person, and it is worked to, and the
Signaller/Slinger has been specifically instructed in its application.
Complex lifts may be common and repetitive during piling operation ie. Tandem Lifts, Diaphragm
Walls, Topping and Tailing Loads etc. Where it has been identified by the Appointed Person that
this is the case, the Appointed Person shall be in attendance for the duration of the first lift. Once
satisfied the Lifting Operation, Risk Assessment and Method Statement are correct they may
delegate their supervisory duties to the Crane/Lift Supervisor for the remainder of the operation.
Thereafter the Appointed Person will be required to monitor the lifting operation at intervals
agreed with the Project Manager. Where changes to lifting operation, Risk Assessment/Method
Statement are required, the Appointed Persons must be notified immediately and shall review
and revise the lifting operation, Risk Assessment/Method Statement for the duration of the lift.
Once satisfied, the Appointed Person can once again delegate the supervisory duties back to the
Crane/Supervisor.
EG
IN
TE
TOWER CRANES
7
Due to the high risk nature of tower crane selection, erection, use, maintenance and dismantling
operations, specialist advice must be sought.
The
Appointed
Person
must
ensure
there
is
an
appropriate
plan/lifting
schedule in place for lifting operations. A typical example of a tower crane
lifting schedule is included in the Lifting Plan and Schedule (SHE-FRM-10-03).
QCS 2014

Page 9
Where more than two tower cranes are operating within the same radius zone automatic proximity
warning devices must be fitted, ie. anti clash systems,
10
Where tower cranes are operating, systems should be in place which take account of protestors,
unauthorised entry, etc. Controls should include :
(b)
For external cranes, a 2.4 m. high plywood hoarding with a security fan, independent of the
crane, gated as above, with mesh viewing panels to give additional natural lighting to
facilitate safe access/egress.
(c)
Where the building is progressed around the tower crane, 2 m. high double clipped
demountable Heras type fencing to be placed around the floor aperture at each floor slab
level as the building progresses.
(d)
Lockable access doors to the cab/jib installed and padlocked shut when the crane driver
vacates the crane.
AL
For internal cranes, first/base section of the mast, in the region of 4 m. high, or to the
underside of the upper floor, can be covered with heavy gauge 50 mm. squared (maximum)
weld mesh secured with either wire or zip ties (not welded). Access for the crane driver can
be in the form of an outward opening lockable door, with a turnbuckle on the inside with key
access from the outside. Keys can be held by the crane driver and the Slinger/Signallers for
use in the event of an emergency. The gate is to remain closed at all times whilst the driver
is up the crane.
IO
When the crane driver vacates the crane, the machine to be locked off, isolated and secured into
free slew either from the cab or from the isolator situated at the base.
AT
11
(a)
EMERGENCY ARRANGEMENTS
COMPANY must ensure that suitable arrangements are put in place for emergency situations
(rescue from tower crane, crane failure etc). Any such arrangements shall be subject to liaison
with emergency services and appropriate rescue practices carried out to test any agreed
arrangements.
TE
12
A list of general rules for the use of cranes is included at Appendix 1 and shall be made known to
persons involved in lifting operations
EG
13
IN
GENERAL RULES

MINIMUM TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
1
Appointed Person must hold training certification following attendance and successful
completion of a recognised Appointed Persons (Lifting Operations) training course.
Lift Supervisors must have received suitable and sufficient training. Slinger/Signaller must
have received suitable and sufficient training certification for Slinger/Signaller.
Mobile or Tower Crane Operator must have received suitable and sufficient training certification
for crane operation.
Pedestrian Operated Tower Crane Operator must have received suitable and sufficient training
certification for crane operation.
Other Lifting Equipment, operators must hold suitable training certification relevant to the
category of lifting equipment being used.
Lifting Equipment and Accessories Testing (see Appendix 2)
QCS 2014

Page 10
The implementation of LOLER and BS 7121 Part 2:2003: Code of Practice for Safe Use of Cranes
- Inspection, Testing and Examination, provides the opportunity for either a specified period or an
examination scheme approach to the 12 monthly thorough examination.
If the examination scheme approach is to be used, the owner must produce a scheme in
consultation with the manufacturer or another competent engineer.
Mobile cranes with a rated capacity of less than 500 tonne that are not thoroughly tested in
accordance with an examination scheme should be load tested every 4 years.
10
Any lifting accessory found not to have a current test certificate should be taken out of service
immediately and be quarantined and clearly marked for re-testing or disposal.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 11
APPENDIX 1 - GENERAL RULES FOR THE USE OF CRANES

The following rules apply to all COMPANY sites and shall be made known to all persons involved in
lifting operations :
Cranes shall only be used for vertical lifts.
(b)
The weight of the load (including lifting gear, etc.) shall be confirmed before lifting.
(c)
A common lift schedule for tower cranes to be produced.
(d)
The safe working load shall never be exceeded; if the Rated Capacity Indicator is activated
this shall be investigated.
(e)
When lifting a load for the first time the crane stability shall be checked when the load is just
off the ground.
(f)
No operation shall be carried out where high winds affect the stability of the load or the
crane. Limits on wind speeds shall be determined (i.e. by reference to the operators
manual). The means for determining wind speed shall be by use of an anemometer fitted to
the crane or available on site.
(g)
An audible alarm shall be capable of being heard at the cranes maximum operation radius.
(h)
No crane shall be left unattended with the load suspended or the engine running.
(i)
The crane shall be left secured when unattended.
(j)
Persons shall only be lifted by a crane in power lowering mode and automatic brakes.
Cranes with keys to set power lowering shall be locked in this mode and the key retained by
the Appointed Person or Project/Site Manager whenever persons are to be lifted.
(k)
Crane Selection for Carriage of Persons: The following points are mandatory:
AT
IO
AL
(a)
Cranes with the traditional manually operated slipping friction clutch will not be used
(ii)
Cranes with hydraulically driven permanently engaged clutches are preferred.
(iii)
Cranes must be used in a power load lowering mode. Cranes which have a free fall
mode must be locked out of free fall with a key operated selector and indications of
this shown externally on the crane and within the cab, by light or sound. The keys
must be held secure by the Project/Site Manager or other Appointed Persons whilst
the crane is engaged in man riding duties.
(iv)
The cranes must have automatic brakes which will be automatically applied if the
hoisting lever is not in the operating position.
TE
IN
EG
(v)
(i)
Besides the automatic brake, there must be other means of arresting the load, i.e. by
the hydraulic winch motor and a foot operated brake.
(vi)
Cranes with latchable controls must have the latching mechanisms removed,
ie. controls must automatically return to the neutral position when released.
(vii)
Lifting equipment used shall comply with relevant Qatar Regulatory Document
(Construction) together with the relevant British Standard.
(viii) Each crane must be individually assessed and a technical statement, with appropriate
information, obtained from the owner as to its suitability for the carriage of persons.
This statement must be appraised by a technically competent person and agreed prior
to the commencement of man-riding.
(ix)
Technical assistance is available from the SHE Manager/Team.
(x)
Overhoist device shall be fitted for all man-riding operations or where an overhoist risk
exists.
(l)
Cranes shall not slew within 600 mm. of any fixed object that may cause a trap.
(m)
Only trained and certificated Signaller/Slingers shall direct crane drivers. If more than one
Signaller is appointed only one shall have authority to direct the Crane Driver and that
Signaller shall be known to the Crane Driver.
(n)
Site conditions, both underfoot and overhead, shall be checked for hazards before a crane is
used. This includes checking access to and egress from the site before attendance.
QCS 2014

Page 12
APPENDIX 2 - TABLE OF INSPECTION AND EXAMINATIONS

TYPE OF EQUIPMENT
Daily pre-use checks and weekly

inspection by trained operator.
Lorry mounted cranes

Excavator
Weekly inspection by trained driver.
Mobile elevating work

platforms
(MEWPs)

Passenger and goods lifts
In accordance with the manufactures

instructions.
Scissors lifts (fixed)
Refer to manufacturers instructions.
6 monthly by competent
person
AT

Weekly inspection by trained driver.
TE
In accordance with the manufactures

instructions.
In accordance with the
manufacturers instructions.
Visually check for obvious defects in

accordance with training / experience
immediately prior to use.
person
person
12 monthly by
competent person
6 monthly competent
person
12 monthly by
competent person
12 monthly by
competent person
6 Monthly by competent
person.
EG
Overhead cranes
(motorised or manual)
Vehicle tail lifts,
maintenance lifts
Lifting chains, chain slings,
spreader beams, lifting
frames ring hooks,
shackles, swivels, eyebolts,
turnbuckles, wire ropes &
slings, strops, fibre ropes,
slings & all textile based
slings.
IN
Fork lift trucks
Tele-handlers (all terrain)
As above and initial test

and examination before use
required
12 monthly by
competent person
12 monthly by
competent person
AL

IO
Tower cranes
Mobile cranes and tower

cranes
PERIOD OF
THOROUGH
EXAMINATION
12 monthly* by competent
person (6 monthly if used
for lifting persons)
INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Hydraulic jacks and screw

jacks
Periodic visual inspection depending upon

usage.
Periodic visual inspection depending upon
usage.
Flood lighting winches
None.
Fixed lifting beams
12 monthly by
competent person
12 monthly by
competent person
12 monthly by
competent person
Tie down straps for lorry

loads.
Weekly visual inspection by trained

Not required
driver.
Visual inspection of all webbing
stitching and attachments every
Body harness
person
month, and before use.
* Can be a specified examination scheme in lieu of the 12 monthly thorough examination for cranes.
Equipment such as pallet trucks, sack barrows and manhole cover lifters do not require a thorough
examination under LOLER but shall be subject to regular visual inspections as required by the Provision
and Use of Work Equipment - PUWER (refer to separate procedure and guidance).
QCS 2014

Page 13

PROCEDURES
FORMS
Site/crane Permit to Lift Part 1 (SHE-FRM-10-01)
Site/Crane Permit to Lift Part 2 (Multiple Operations) (SHE-FRM-10-02)
Control of Lifting Operations - Lift Plan and Schedule (SHE-FRM-10-03)
Control of Lifting Operations Pre-Permit to Lift Checklist (SHE-FRM-10-04)
Lifting Appliance Use for Loading (Tele Handler etc) (SHE-FRM-10-05)
Lorry Mounted Crane Checklist (Hiab) (SHE-FRM-10-06)
AL
AT
Lifting operations are properly planned and appropriately supervised. Detailed information on all
these issues can be found in:
Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction) RD1.3 and RD1.4
(b)
BS 7121-1:2006 Code of practice for the safe of cranes Part 1: General
(c)
BS 7121-2:2003 Code of practice for the safe of cranes Part 2: Inspection, testing and
examination
(d)
BS 7121-3:2000 Code of practice for the safe of cranes Part 3: Mobile Cranes
(e)
BS 7121-4:2010 Code of practice for the safe of cranes Part 4: Lorry Loaders
(f)
BS 7121-5:2006 Code of practice for the safe of cranes Part 5: Tower Cranes
(g)
Management of temporary works and equipment is covered in QCS Section 1, Part 14
EG
IN
TE
(a)
IO
FURTHER REFERENCE
QCS 2014

2.3.10.7 Author
SECTION
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT DETAILS
SHE Manager
AL
2.3.10.8 Approvals
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SIGNATURE & DATE
SHEQ Director
EG
IN
TE
AT
Approved by:
IO
NAME
Page 14
QCS 2014

FORM SHE-FRM-10-04 CRANE/PERMIT TO LIFT CHECK LIST COMPLETED
Page 15
YES
Contract :
Location :
Task/Method Statement No. (If applicable):
Appointed Person :
Employed by:
Standard Lift
Date and Time of Visit :
Contract Lift
Complex Lift
Single Crane Position Complete Part 1 only
Multiple Crane Positions Complete Parts 1 & 2
Description of Works :
LOAD DETAILS
Max. Size of Load :
Max. Lift Height :
CRANE DETAILS
AL
Max. Weight :
Max. Radius :
Others e.g. Unusual Centre of Gravity, Lifting Points etc. :
Capacity and Type :
Max. Boom Length To Be Used For Lift :
Counterweight Req :
Hook Block Reeving (No. of Falls) :

m. x
m.
Outrigger Pad Size (without mats) :
AT
Outrigger Spread (centre to centre) :
IO
Max. Available Boom Length :
Max. Outrigger Load:
SITE SURFACE CONDITIONS
IN
TE
Access for Crane :

Access for Transport :
Lifting Position :
Laydown Area :
Safe Ground Bearing Capacity Under Outrigger :
Assessed by :
Proximity Hazards, provide details and attach sketch (eg overhead lines, public roads, drains, ground conditions etc) :
A temporary works design for the lifting platform must be in place and signed off prior to setting up/commencing lifting operations.
(Permit part 2 shall be completed for all crane positions/repositions of the crane.)
CRANE ACCESSORIES REQUIRED (State type and safe working load)

Chains :
Shackles :
Outrigger Mats (state size) :
EG
Wire ropes :
Web Slings :
Beams :
Others (including specialist equipment) :
Permit Valid From
Operational Requirements e.g. road closures/possessions/site clearance :

To
CRANE TEAM
Name
Appointed Person
Crane Supervisors
Crane Operator
Qualifications
Signature
Date
No.
Expires:
No.
Expires:
No.
Expires:
Signaller/Slinger
No.
Expires
Where contractors are required to complete this form, assistance shall be given by COMPANY Authorised Person who shall agree the
details entered on the form and sign below.
Lifting operations must not commence until this form has been signed by
Details agreed on behalf of COMPANY
COMPANY Authorised Person.
Distribution: Site File
Appointed Person
Crane Operator
Crane Supervisor
Signature
Date
If for any reason the details contained within this permit cannot be adhered to, the lifting operation must not continue, the Appointed
Person must be notified immediately.
QCS 2014

Page 16
ARRANGEMENTS FOR MULTIPLE CRANE POSITIONS

I agree that the crane described in part 1 may be re-positioned within the constraints defined within the Lift
Plan provided that each time it is set up in a new position the items in the list below are checked and signed
for by the Crane Supervisor. When the crane is being operated by a Contractor, each entry shall be
countersigned by an COMPANY person, authorised by the Project Manager. The signature(s) shall be
entered on this form prior to allowing the crane to operate in the new position.
.............................................................................
........................
Appointed Person
Date
EG
IN
Date
AT
IO
AL
Additional
items to be
inserted by
AP, if required
Mats as Defined in Lift Plan Correctly Placed

Under Each Outrigger
All Outriggers on Crane Platform and Within

Designated Lifting Area Defined in Lift Plan
TE
Time
Position
Ref. as
Lift Plan
Outriggers Extended to Spread Stated in Lift

Plan
This form shall remain in the crane cab during lifting operations and be returned to the COMPANY Project Manager on
completion of the lifting operations as described in part 1.
Crane Lift
Supervisor
Signature
COMPANY
Authorised
Signature
QCS 2014

LIFT PLAN AND SCHEDULE
Page 17
This Lift Plan is specific to the lifting operations described in the Scope.
It is not and should never be considered Generic
Contract:
Date of Lifting
Operation:
Lift Plan Ref or
Activity:
Appointed Person Preparing this Lift Plan:
Date:
Signed:
AL
Lift Supervisor:
Purpose
AT
The crane overturning

The load falling from the crane
The load or machine striking someone or any other identified hazard
1.
2.
3.
IO
The purpose of this lifting plan is to identify the control measures necessary to negate the primary
hazards of :
IN
TE
Scope of Works
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Address:
EG
Details of Crane Hire Company
Telephone:
Details of Crane Operator

Qualifications and
Operating History:
Load Details
Max Size of
Load:
Other Details (centre of gravity, lifting points, packaging, pallets etc):
Max Weight:
QCS 2014

Page 18
Details of Crane
Capacity and Type:
Height (Ground Jib
Head):
Radius:
Main Jib Length:
Fly Jib Length:
Total Jib Length:
Safe Working Load:
Actual Working Load:
Out Rigger Spread:
AL
Counterbalance Weight:
AT
IO
Ground Conditions (CBR,

Strata), Temporary Works
Design in Place and
Checked Off (where
appropriate) :
Out Rigger Loadings:
IN
TE
Spread Mat
Requirements:
Note: Where operating (Jib) height equals or exceeds 10m at any time, the Appointed Person must
advise and consult with the Manager from any airport/airfield with 6km of the site.
Airport/Airfield
Requirements:
Lifting Accessories & Configuration
EG
Equipment Details:
Type (e.g. spreader beam):
Safe Working Load:
Sketch of Slinging Method:
(Note: will configuration affect SWL?)
QCS 2014

Page 19
Site Conditions and Hazards
The following non-exhaustive list should be considered during the lift plan along with any other factors
which could affect any aspect of the lift.
Excavations, embankments, overhead and underground services or obstructions, culverts, drainage,
manhole/inspection chambers, buildings, stationary objects, scaffolding, plant and equipment, roads,
rivers, railways, personnel and public, other cranes, environmental considerations.
Hazard
Control
Strength and Stability
IO
AL
Ground conditions must be suitable and sufficient and remain so during crane lifts to take the anticipated
loads. Include details of the ground conditions and any additional works required to the ground,
including spreader mats specification and any testing regime required e.g. CBR tests.
A temporary works design must be in place and checked off before any lifting operation or crane set up
takes place.
AT
Weather / Environmental Considerations
TE
Indicate in this section detail of wind speeds / environmental conditions that have been referenced /
anticipated for the duration of the lifting operations.
Access
EG
IN
Include any special travelling routes, road closures / highways notifications, access problems.
Third Party Considerations
Over-sailing, works adjacent to railways, noise and restriction of view.
Emergency / Breakdown Procedures
Signalling
Indicate whether hand signals or radios are to be used. Also indicate signalling source and radio
frequency/channel. This section can also include any unique slinger/signaller identification (i.e. different
colour helmet / hi-vis) if required.
QCS 2014

Page 20
Site and Crane Layout Plan
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Include crane position, lay-down / rigging area, position of delivery vehicles, landing points, banksman
positions, ground and overhead hazards and exclusion zones. If required use elevation drawings.
Safe System of Work - Methodology
EG
Include pre-lift, lift and post lift.
QCS 2014

Page 21
Lift Team
The details of this Lift Plan along with any other associated Risk Assessment, Method Statement or
Safe System of Work have been brought to the attention and explained to the persons listed below who
have acknowledged that they understand the contents, hazards and associated control measures.
Other Relevant Documentation (list and attach)
Position
Name
Signature
Date
Site/Project
Manager:
Lift Supervisor:
AL
Crane Operator:
Slinger / Signaller:
AT
IO
Others:
This plan is specific to the lift as detailed in the scope of works.
EG
IN
TE
In the event of any changes to circumstances, personnel or equipment, the plan should be
reviewed and revised by the Appointed Person and any changes re-communicated to the lift
team.

Page 22
AL
QCS 2014
SCHEDULE OF LIFTS (Common Lifts) :

Max
Weight
Crane
Used
Lifted
From
Lifted To
Lifting
Accessories SWL
Used
Comments
Pallets of
Bricks/blocks
2 tonne
tower
Lorry or
store
Loading
platform
Forks &
netting
2.5 Tonne
Forks must be slid fully home and netting wrapped around

load after having lifted the pack approx 300mm from
original position.
2 tonne
tower
RMC
truck
Drop chain
3 Tonne
Drop chain only to be used, not longer chains hooked back

up to main lifting ring
TE
R
IN
EG
C
Concrete skip
AT
IO
Item to be
Lifted
pour
QCS 2014

Page 23
This checklist must be completed fully before the permit to lift is issued.
Contract:
Date of Lifting
Operation:
Lift Plan Ref or
Activity:
No.
1
Check
Yes
No
Has a Lift Plan been produced by an Appointed Person and accepted by COMPANY?
Has the correct crane, as stated in the Lift Plan, been supplied, complete with manufacturers
operating manual including a maintenance inspection checklist and duty charts?
Is a current report of last thorough examination of the crane (within the last 12 months or 6
months in the case of man-riding operations) available?
Are current 6 monthly test/thorough examination certificates for all lifting equipment /
accessories available on site and their ID numbers checked.
AT
IO
AL
Have all maintenance inspections, including last daily / weekly checks been carried out and
recorded, and evidence of PPM scheme available?
Last recorded entry in register:
Is the Crane Drivers training certification available and current for the category of crane being
operated? (Check that the Driver has experience of this type of crane or operation e.g.
grabbing or balling operations.)
Is the Banksman/Slingers certificate of training / competence available and current?
Has the Crane / Lift Supervisor been appointed?
Is the crane sited in the position identified in the Lift Plan?
11
12
TE
IN
EG
10
Have all risks from obstructions, such as foul sewer and surface water drain manholes,
overhead cables or adjacent structures, been identified and suitable precautions implemented?
Are the lifting accessories suitable for the task and as identified within the Lift Plan, is there
safe access to sling the load and will the load(s) be stable while being slung / unloaded and are
any lifting points on the load identified and correct?
Has the Crane Lift Team (and others that may be affected) been made aware of the
requirements in the Lift Plan, received an induction, and signed acknowledgement of the
content of the Plan and the operations associated control measures?
A complete copy of the Lifting Plan and associated crane documentation must be retained in the
site safety file and be ready for inspection at any time.
If the answer to any of the above questions is NO, the Permit to Lift must not be issued
until the query has been resolved.
Site / Project Manager Completing this
Checklist:
Date:
Signature:
QCS 2014

Page 24
Operators Confirmation
I have carried out all statutory and maintenance inspections as detailed above.
Operators Details
__________________________________________________
Signature:
__________________________________________________
Crane Type:
__________________________________________________
Qualifications:
__________________________________________________
Registration No :
__________________________ Date: ___________________
Site File
EG
IN
TE
Crane Operator
Distribution :
AT
IO
AL
Name (print):
QCS 2014

Page 25
DELIVERIES
Vehicle Registration
Number (as
applicable):
Type of
Plant/Equipment:
Project Name:
Supplier:
Driver
Name:
Delivery For:
Date:
Yes
No
Is the drivers qualifications correct for the required task?
2.
Is a current 12 month certificate of thorough examination in place for the

Appliance?
3.
Is the common Lift Plan in place?
4.
Are certificates in place for lifting accessories?
5.
Does the driver understand the requirement to have assistance

loading/unloading transport vehicles?
Location:
EG
TE
AT
IO
1.
IN
AL
CHECKLIST
Defects Found:
Comments:
Signature:
On completion file.
Date:
QCS 2014

Page 26
DELIVERIES
Type of
LORRY
MOUNTED Vehicle Registration
Plant/Equipment: CRANE (HIAB)
Number:
Project Name:
Supplier:
Driver
Name:
Delivery for:
Date:
AL
CHECKLIST
Yes
No
Is the drivers qualifications correct for the required task?
2.
Is a current 12 month certificate of thorough examination in place for the

HIAB?
3.
Is the common lifting plan in place?
4.
Does the above include the operation in hand?
5.
Does the driver understand that a lift must not take place if they are
beneath the load, is this identified in the plan (Item 3)?
6.
Does the driver understand the No Lone working rule relative to the
loading and unloading of the wagon?
Location:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
1.
Defects found:
Comments:
Signature:
On completion file.
Date:
QCS 2014

Part 2.3.11: Permit to Work Systems
Page 1
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
MANAGEMENT
/
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES ............................ 1
2.3.11 PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEMS ......................................................................... 1

2.3.11.2 Definitions ...................................................................................................... 4
2.3.11.3 Action Required To Implement This Procedure ............................................ 5
AL
2.3.11.4 Guidance to this procedure............................................................................ 7
IO
2.3.11.6 Author........................................................................................................... 10
EG
IN
TE
AT
2.3.11.7 Approvals ..................................................................................................... 10
QCS 2014

Page 2
PROCESS MAP
Project
Site/Manager
Authorised
Person
SHE Advisor
Supervisor
Liaise with Project

manager to ensure
suitable persons are
appointed to control
permits on sale
Appoint an Authorised
Person to control
permits for the project
3.1, 3.3
3.1
When necessary
produce and update a
suitable map or plans
for the permits being
d
3.1
AL
Ensure that the

Appointed Person is
trained to carry out
3.2
TE
For some activities, the

contract may run their
own permit system.
When this is the case,
the PM/SM will issue an
overriding permit to
enable the system to be
run
3.3
AT
Issue and sign off

Company permits
after ensuring
necessary checks have
been carried out and
IO
3.1
In conjunction with
the Authorised
Person, assess and
confirm the
competency of the
individual
undertaking the task
3.3
EG
IN
In conjunction with the

task supervisor, assess
and confirm the
competency of the
individual undertaking the
task
3.2
Monitor the Permit to Work system and advise the relevant person of any change required so that an
appropriate review can be made of the Permit requirement and issue
3.1
Key
Activity
Guidance
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
1
work to control hazards (which under normal circumstances are difficult to control), by
means of a recognised permit system.
SCOPE
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 4
SHE DIRECTOR
1

CONTRACTS MANAGER
Ensures that the authorised person(s) are appointed.

Ensures this procedure is established on the project under their responsibility and where
applicable a permit to work system is applied.
AL
AUTHORISED PERSON
Has responsibility for the overall co-ordination and signature for the permit to work system
IO
SHE ADVISER/MANAGER
Provides advice and support in the application of this.
AT
Work in accordance with this procedure.
TE
CONTRACTORS
IN
HAZARD/ ASPECT/IMPACT
EG
Something with the potential to cause harm, this can include substances, workplaces,
machines, tools, etc and includes the potential to harm/damage the environment including the
potential of causing a statutory nuisance.
RISK
2
Is the likelihood that the potential harm from a particular hazard is realised.
Risk = consequence x probability and is classed as

either Acceptable or Unacceptable, depending on the
results of the quantifying matrix.
METHOD STATEMENT
PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM
3
The arrangements, confirmed by a written permit, by which a competent person/s satisfies

that all necessary precautions have been taken and provisions made to secure the safety of
persons associated with an activity.
PERMIT TO WORK
A permit is a signed document that provides assurance that work may safely take place. It does
not replace any requirements for risk assessments or method statements
QCS 2014

Page 5

1
In order to control hazards which under normal circumstances are difficult to control such as
fire, dangerous substances electrical equipment, confined spaces, excavations etc. A formal
written procedure shall be used to ensure a safe place of work/safe system of work strategy
and full compliance with current legislation.
Permit to Work Systems Shall be used on COMPANY Projects in the following circumstances:
Work on/test on electrical equipment which could give rise to risk of injury or death from
electrical shock or burn, including commissioning work and, particularly, work involving
exposed live conductors operating at dangerous voltages. (USE ELECTRICAL PERMIT
FORMS).
(b)
Welding, flame cutting, use of ignition sources, or work on electrical equipment which
could give rise to an incentive spark. (USE HOT WORK PERMIT FORM).
(c)
Work in confined spaces or at any poorly ventilated place where toxic/flammable gases,
fumes, or vapours are likely to be present in dangerous concentrations, or where there
may be oxygen deficiency or oxygen enrichment. (USE CONFINED SPACE PERMIT
FORM).
(d)
Permit to excavate to be produced prior to any ground being broken. Information

relative to services etc. shall be identified on the permits. (USE EXCAVATION WORK
PERMIT).
(e)
Controlling access to complete or specific areas. (USE WORK ACCESS CONTROL

PERMIT FORM).
(f)
Any other clearly dangerous circumstances e.g. site radiography where formal coordination of people and precautions is necessary in order to secure safety. (BESPOKE
PERMIT FORM TO BE PRODUCED REFER TO SHE DEPARTMENT FOR
ASSISTANCE).
TE
AT
IO
AL
(a)
GENERAL
Only competent persons fully conversant with the COMPANY and/or client permit to work
procedures shall be appointed as an Authorised Person by the Project/Site Manager
The Project / Site Manager responsible for the Project will ensure that the Authorised
Person(s) have received suitable and sufficient training in order to execute their duties in this
procedure, and should take into account the practical experience of the proposed Authorised
Person of the particular plant, equipment and/or situation involved.
The Authorised Person shall ensure that on large sites, particularly where more than one
permit system is operating, a suitable map(s) or plan(s) shall be produced and posted at a
focal point(s). The map/plan shall where appropriate indicate the type of permit operating in,
what areas, and shall make clear that only personnel covered by the permit shall enter those
areas. The map or plan shall be updated, and removed immediately all work which demands
a permit is closed.
N.B. Where more than one permit is issued on plant or an operating system a cross
referencing procedure shall be adopted to ensure safety.
EG
IN
HOT WORK PERMITS

7
The Authorised Person shall ensure that conditions are safe for work to be carried out, and
where necessary, carry out, or arrange for atmospheric tests to ensure safety. Additionally, the
Authorised Person shall ascertain the presence, nature and properties of any flammable,
combustible, or explosive agent involved in the work (e.g. LEL, UEL, WEL, Flash Point,
Density, Threshold of Smell, etc).
In addition the Authorised Person shall consider the possible sources of ignition such as:
QCS 2014

Page 6
(a)
Matches, lighters, cigarettes, etc.,
(b)
Oxyacetylene and other gas welding, cutting and burning, Electrical arc welding
(c)
Electrical sparks from electric motors, circuit breakers, capacitors etc.
(d)
Static Electricity
(e)
Percussive Sparks from metal tools etc.
(f)
Solar refraction
(g)
Any other source of ignition
WORK IN CONFINED SPACES

Before signing this Form the Authorised Persons shall be sure he knows the exact nature
and properties of any gases, liquids, vapours, solids or sludges present in the confined space
(LEL, UEL, OEL, WEL, density, flash point, threshold of smell etc.).
10
The Authorised Person should carry out or arrange to carry out air tests if breathing
apparatus is not worn by operatives entering the confined space and ensure that any working,
escape or rescue respirator or breathing apparatus is suitable for the hazard involved, users
have been instructed in correct usage and the time for which it will remain effective.
11
If breathing apparatus is to be worn, the Authorised Person must ensure that the operative is
attached to a trained observer outside the confined space by means of a lifeline and harness
and that any necessary rescue equipment is in position, and that operatives never work
unattended in confined spaces.
AT
IO
AL
WORK INVOLVING THE PRESSURE TESTING OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Pressurisation of air and gases produce a much greater hazard if a vessel or pipe bursts than
when hydrostatic pressurisation is used. Therefore, hydrostatic testing shall be used
whenever practicable.
13
All tests shall be carried out in full consultation with the relevant Designer. If for technical
reasons air or gas pressure testing is unavoidable the Project / Site Manager shall obtain
formal permission to carry out such testing from the relevant Designer and safety procedures
agreed with them.
14
Where the risk of an explosion or injury through pressure testing is evident the Project / Site
Manager shall ensure that the Authorised Person ultimately signing the permit is a trained
and experienced engineer who fully understands the hazards involved.
EG
IN
TE
12
OUT OF HOURS PERMIT

15
This is a delegation of control permit (it does not delegate responsibility which will still rest
with the Project / Site Manager) and is intended to be used on projects where a contractor
wishes to work outside normal site hours and no COMPANY supervision is available. It must
only be used where the risk from the activity has been assessed as acceptable and can only
be used for Single Contractor Works, where co-ordination between more than one
contractor is an issue an COMPANY Manager or Supervisor must be in control of the site.
WORK ACCESS CONTROL PERMIT
16
Where an access Control permit is to be used before issuing the permit the Authorised
Person must ensure clear demarcation of the area is in place by means of notices and
barriers so that personnel know the existence of such an area and its limits.
17
A means of identifying personnel permitted to enter the restricted area, must be established by
the Supervisor of the works (The permit shall list the names of those permitted in the
restricted area).
QCS 2014

Page 7
ACTIVITIES UNDERTAKEN BY COMPANY

Whenever COMPANY operates a permit to work system the Project / Site Manager shall
liaise with the SHE Department and agree who shall have responsibility for overall signature
of the particular permit to work form. In all cases such persons shall be appointed in writing as
Authorised Persons.
19
The Authorised Person who signs the Permit to Work shall assess the persons who are to
carry out the work and decide in conjunction with the supervisor in charge of those persons
whether they are competent to undertake the work safely.
20
The Authorised Person has a clear responsibility to satisfy themselves that the precautions
required by any particular permit to work they issue are in place before work is authorised,
and must be aware of any risk assessments and controls identified therein associated with
the activity to be undertaken.
AL
18
ACTIVITIES UNDERTAKEN BY CONTRACTORS
In some circumstances sub/work package contractors may wish to operate their own permit to
work systems, and it may be that COMPANY will require some contractors to control their
own works by a permit system. In these cases the following actions should be undertaken.
22
The Site Manager will issue an over riding permit of the appropriate type authorising the
Contractor to control the works in accordance with an agree permit system, this permit shall
be reviewed regularly by the Project Site Manager to verify it is still appropriate and updated
as necessary. The review shall be at intervals not exceeding 7 days.
23
The Project Site Manager shall liaise with the SHE Department and agree who from the
Contractors team shall have responsibility for overall signature of the particular permit to
work form. In all cases such persons shall be appointed by the Contractor in writing as
Authorised Persons and this appointment `notified to the Project Site Manager.
24
The Contractors Authorised Person who signs the Permit to Work shall assess the
persons who are to carry out the work and decide in conjunction with the supervisor in charge
of those persons whether they are competent to undertake the work safely.
25
The Contractors Authorised Person has a clear responsibility to satisfy themselves that the
precautions required by any particular permit to work they issue are in place before work is
authorised, and must be aware of any risk assessments and controls identified therein
associated with the activity to be undertaken.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
21
2.3.11.4 Guidance to this procedure

1
In some circumstances, particularly where COMPANY is modifying or enlarging an

existing plant, the client may require his own permit to work system to be used and that
sub/work package contractors working on the site be subject to it.
AUTHORISED PERSONS
All Authorised Persons shall be aged over 21 years.
Authorised Persons shall formally accept and not delegate their duties.
Authorised Persons shall be identified in the SHE Management Plan.

TYPES OF PERMITS AND THEIR APPLICATION ELECTRICAL WORK PERMITS
QCS 2014

Page 8
Electrical work is subject to the Electricity at Work Regulations. The procedures for complying
with them are contained in SHE-PRO-004 together with any COMPANY Electrical Safety
Instructions
All work on electrical equipment that has the potential to be energised at a dangerous voltage
shall be covered by a permit to work and the necessary signs displayed.
HOT WORK PERMITS
The objective of these permits is to allow work that may give rise to a source of ignition in
circumstances where there is risk of fire and/or explosion, and/or burns to personnel.
The permits are for use where hot work on plant or equipment is required and a permit
for general hot work within buildings where flammable materials are liable to be
present. The advice of the SHE Department shall be sought when determining which
the appropriate permit to be used in is circumstances where there is any doubt, and
should be used where one or more of the following are present in significant quantities:
(b)
Flammable liquids (particularly highly flammable liquids whose flash points lie below
32C). It should be remembered that vapours from such liquids are normally heavier
than air, and may collect in sumps, drains etc
(c)
Flammable gases or vapours where the concentration involved could approach or

exceed the lower explosive limit. (NB whilst methane is lighter than air, most other
hydrocarbon gases are heavier than air e.g. propane, butane).
(d)
Flammable dusts (particularly organic dusts like grain, wood, sugar, etc. Also certain
metal and other inorganic dusts which are explosive e.g. aluminium. It should also be
remembered that a relatively minor initial explosion may disturb lying dust and give rise
to a catastrophic secondary explosion.
(e)
Solid organic and other materials, for instance timber structures or combustible
insulation materials such as paper, polystyrene, polyurethane foam, etc.
IO
AL
(a)
TE
The permit shall also be used in circumstances where

Dangerously hot plant (e.g. steam heated) has to be isolated to avoid burns, scalds,
etc., to personnel working on that plant.
(b)
Metal cutting is being undertaken either by gas or mechanical means
(c)
Welding or brazing operations are required
IN
(a)
EG
AT
WORK IN CONFINED SPACES

9
The presence of potentially dangerous sludges or deposits shall also be considered which
may, when disturbed, give rise to hazardous gas etc. Further hazards may also arise from
flammable liquids, gases, and vapours, introduced by the work itself, or the ingress of steam
or corrosive/hot liquids etc. or lack of oxygen.
10
The objectives of the permit are to minimise these hazards, and secure compliance with the
Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction).
EXCAVATION WORK PERMIT
11
See procedure SHE-PRO-003 for the procedure to be adopted for excavation work. Work
Access Control Permit
12
This permit shall be used where it is necessary to control the access of personnel to certain
work areas for the following reasons:
(a)
To prevent damage and vandalism to installed plant within a particular area.
(b)
To know the exact whereabouts of personnel on "high security" sites at given times.
(c)
To restrict personnel who enter potentially hazardous areas to a limited number, all with
appropriate specialist knowledge and training.
QCS 2014

Page 9
WARNING SIGNS AND TAPES

The following warning signs/tapes shall be used where applicable.
Danger Permit to Work Area Entry Forbidden Except to Authorised
(b)
Persons
(c)
Scaffolding Incomplete Do Not Use
(d)
Caution Men Working on Apparatus
(e)
Danger Keep Away Exposed Live Conductors
(f)
Danger No Unauthorised Person to Touch This Switchgear
(g)
Danger No Smoking or Naked Flames
(h)
Danger Plant Equipment Under Test Do Not Touch/Operate
(i)
Caution Risk of Ionising Radiation (Provided by Specialist Contractor)
(j)
Restricted Work Area Entry Only to Listed Workmen on COMPANY Access Permit
(k)
Danger Buried Cables
AL
(a)
13
IO
AT
FORMS
Confined Space Entry Work Permit (SHE-FRM-11-01)
General Permit to Work (SHE-FRM-11-02)
Hot Work Permit General (SHE-FRM-11-03)
Hot Work Permit Plant and Equipment (SHE-FRM-11-04)
Pressure Test Work Permit (SHE-FRM-11-05)
Work Access Control Permit (SHE-FRM-11-06)
Permit to Work on Test Electrically Isolated Apparatus
(SHE-FRM-11-07) Permit to Test Electrically Live
Apparatus (SHE-FRM-11-08)
10
Out of Hours Work Permit (SHE-FRM-11-09)
11
Permit to Excavate (SHE-FRM-3-02)
12
Site Crane Permit to Lift (SHE-FRM-10-02)
EG
IN
TE
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
13
14
(SHE-PRO-001)
15
Safe Working in the Vicinity of Buried and Overhead Services (SHE-PRO-003) Electricity at
Work (SHE- PRO-004)
QCS 2014

Page 10
16
The Safe use of Cranes and Other Lifting Appliances (Excavators, Tele Handlers and Lorry
Loaders (SHE-PRO-010)
17
Fire Precautions During Construction Work in Buildings (SHE-PRO-013)
2.3.11.6 Author
SECTION
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT DETAILS
AL
SHE Manager
IO
2.3.11.7 Approvals
POSITION IN
COMPANY
AT
NAME
SHEQ Director
EG
IN
TE
Approved by:
SIGNATURE & DATE
QCS 2014

Page 11
Contract: Permit No: .

Location:
Description of Work:
Valid From ..hrs on (Date)..To... .hrs on (Date) ..(Max 1 shift)

Hazard Restrictions, Comments: .
REQUIRED
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
IO
AL
MANDATORY CONTROL MEASURES

Supervision Nominated and Completed
Means of Communication
Instruments to detect adverse atmospheres
Gas Purging
Forced Air Ventilation
Intrinsically Safe Lamps or Lighting
Removal of residues (without causing additional hazards)
Suitable Access/Egress arrangements including emergency evacuation
Emergency Rescue equipment and procedure
AT
PERMIT MUST NOT BE ISSUED OR WORK COMMENCED UNTIL ALL THE CONTROL
MEASURES ABOVE ARE IN PLACE
OPTIONAL CONTROL MEASURES
Isolation (Gases, Electrical, Mechanical)
RPE
Full BA, Escape Breathing Apparatus or External Air Feed
Fire Precautions (Intrinsically safe lamps etc)
Task and Emergency Lighting
Additional permits for specific activities i.e. hot work
ISSUE OF PERMIT
IN
TE
REQUIRED
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
EG
I confirm that all atmospheric checks have been made and all persons required to enter the Confined Space for any
reason are medically fit and have proof of having received the relevant training in Confined Space Entry to the
correct category.
Authorised Person: Signed: Date:.

Names of persons entering the Confined Space are attached
RECEIPT OF PERMIT
I confirm that work by myself or by any person under my control in the Confined Space will be carried out in
accordance with this permit, all statutory requirements and company safety policy. All persons entering the
Confined Space will receive information and instruction in the requirements of this permit and safety measures
necessary prior to entry into the Confined Space.
Competent Person: Signed: Date:.

CLEARANCE (Competent Person Confined Spaces)
I certify that all persons have been withdrawn and warned that it is no longer safe to enter the Confined Space
above and that all tools and equipment have been removed.
Competent Person: Signed: Date:.

CANCELLATION AUTHORISED PERSON
I acknowledge receipt of the clearance of this Permit. THE PERMIT IS NOW CANCELLED
Name:
Distribution: White copy Workplace recipient
copy)
Signed: Date:.
Pink copy Distribute as required
Blue copy Retain in book (file
QCS 2014

Page 12
This Permit is valid only for the period specified

Contract Name:
Contract No:
Location of works:
Description of works:
Part 1
Permit No:
Names of persons in working party:
Part 2 Details of work to be carried out (risk assessment, method statement, etc, to be attached)
Action to be taken
IO
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
AT
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y N
Part 4 Other hazards

Heat source
Steam
Electricity
Noise
Work at height
Mechanical power
Others (specify)
Other
AL
Part 3 Precautions to be observed (e.g. other permits, lock off, access control)
Protective clothing
Y N Breathing
Y N Gloves
Y N
required
apparatus
Safety helmet
Y N Eye protection
Y N Ear
Y N
defenders
Safety harness
Y N Wellingtons
Y N Overalls
Y N
Safety boots
Y N Face mask
Y N RPE
Y N
IN
TE
Part 5 Issue of Permit:

I hereby certify that the precautions detailed above have been carried out and that it is safe to
commence work.
Signed:
Name:
(Authorised person)
(Print)
Date:
Time:
Valid from:
Valid to:
EG
Part 6 Receipt of Permit:

I hereby declare that I accept responsibility for carrying out work detailed in this permit including all
precautions noted.
Name:
Signed:
(Authorised person)
(Print)
Date:
Time:
Part 7 Clearance of Work Area
I hereby declare that the work for which this permit was issued is now complete and that all employees
under my control have been withdrawn. All equipment, tools, material and gear has been removed. All
guards have been replaced and the area has been checked as safe.
Signed:
Name:
(Authorised person)
(Print)
Date:
Time:
Part 8 Permit cancellation
I declare that this permit and all copies of it are cancelled
Signed:
Name:
(Authorised person)
(Print)
Date:
Time:
Distribution:
copy)
Blue copy Retain in book (file
QCS 2014

Page 13
Contract: Permit No: .

Location:
Description of Work:
Valid From hrs on (Date). To .hrs on (Date)

Hazard Restrictions, Comments: ..
REQUIRED
AT
IO
Combustible materials to be removed from the working area

Suitable Fire Fighting Equipment (FFE) is in position
Person received appropriate fire safety training
No combustible liquids, vapours, gases or dusts within the work area
Work location has been thoroughly examined
Exposed wooden flooring or skirting etc, covered to prevent ignition
Gas cylinders secured upright and flash back arrestors fitted
Hot work to cease one hour before end of shift
Operatives familiar with emergency procedures
Screens positioned when welding, cutting or grinding operations
AL
CONTROL MEASURES
IN
TE
ISSUE OF PERMIT
I confirm that all persons carrying out hot work have been made aware of the
contents of this permit
Authorised Person.Signature
EG
RECEIPT OF PAYMENT
I confirm that work by myself or by any person under my control carrying out
hot work will do so in accordance with this permit, all statutory requirements
and company safety policy. All persons involved will receive information and
instruction in the requirements of this permit and safety measures necessary
prior to work commencing.
Competent Person.Signature
Weekly Issue Fire

Watch Checks
Day
Mon
Tues
Wed
Thur
Fri
Sat
Sun
Initial
Initials confirm
temporary cancellation
for weekly issue
FINAL CANCELLATION Sub-contractor Representative
I confirm that all sources of ignition have been removed and the relevant fire watch stood
Name Signed ......................................... Date
FINAL CANCELLATION Authorised Person
I acknowledge receipt of the cancellation of this Permit. THE PERMIT IS NOW CANCELLED
Name .............................................................................. Signed .......................................... Date...
QCS 2014

Page 14
Permit Serial No.

Date of Issue
Hot Work Permit - Plant/Equipment
1. Details of location and work to be carried out
Plant/equipment no.
2. This permit is valid from
hrs on (date) to
hrs on (date)
3. Description of fire/explosion/hazards involved: Quote flammable gases, liquids, vapours involved, and give lower
and upper explosive limits etc. or steam
4. Description of other hazards: Give details of noise, toxic dangerous chemicals, steam, hot liquids etc. Quote OELs
where applicable
YES
NO
Comment
AT
IO
AL
Precautions
Valves (designate) padlocked off
Total disconnection
Spades fitted
Open-ended pipes/vessels sealed
Fire-fighting systems locked off
Other isolation methods (specify)
Drains, sewers within 25 metres sealed
Mechanical ventilation
Flame-proof electrical equipment or equivalent
Fire blankets
'Don't Touch' labels
Local electrical circuits isolated
Dangerous machinery isolated/guarded
Earthing against static electricity
Smoking/naked lights prohibited
Danger area demarcated
Operators instructed in hazards and precautions
Caution signs posted
Standby fire-fighting equipment
Explosimeter reading:
Date:
Time:
TE
Atmospheric tests (not for steam)

Reading taken by Print Name
Other necessary precautions (including breathing apparatus)

6.
Title
Gas detector reading Specify gases
Authorisation I have personally checked the above conditions and consider it safe to carry out this work
Authorised person Print Name
Title:
Signature:
Date:
Time:
Acknowledgement I understand the hazards of this work and the precautions to be taken. These have also
been fully explained to the operatives carrying out this work, and I consider them competent to do it safely. I
will return my copy of this permit to the authorised person when this work has been safely completed
Competent supervisor Print Name
Title:
Signature:
Date:
Time:
Time extension Subject to the following precautions Mark N/A if none are required the expiry time of this
permit is extended from hours on (date) to hours on (date)
Signed Authorised person
Date:
Cancellation
I have completed the work detailed in this permit, and have restored the location to a safe condition. I have
returned my copy (white) of this permit to the authorised person
Signed Competent supervisor
Date:
I accept that the work has been safely completed. The top (white) copy of this permit has been destroyed
Date:
Time:
IN
7.
EG
8.
9.
10.
10.1
10.2
Notes
a)
b)
c)
Permit is automatically suspended upon sounding of emergency alarms, instructions via public address system etc. Check
with authorised person before recommencing work.
Where the authorised person is also the competent supervisor he should sign all parts of the form and issue the top original
(white) copy to himself as a check on procedure.
Signatures for paragraphs 10.1 and 10.2 to be placed only on duplicate (blue) copy which is to be retained for record
purposes.
QCS 2014

Permit Serial No.
Date
1.
Details and location of plant to be pressure tested:
2.
This permit is valid from:

.........................
3.
Page 15
hrs on (date) to
hrs on (date) ....................
Nature of pressure test:

Hydrostatic
Air
Pressure involved.
Description of any other hazards associated with pressure test (noise, hot liquid, steam, toxic/corrosive
agents etc.):
Precautions
6.
Authorisation
Applicable
Yes
No
Comment
AL
5.
4.
Gas
Signed
Time (hrs).
Acknowledgement:
Date
AT
7.
IO
Authorised Person : Print NameTitle.............
I understand the hazards of this work and the precautions to be taken. These have also been fully explained
to the operatives carrying out this work, and I consider them competent to do it safely. I will return my copy
of this permit to the authorised person when this work has been safely completed.
Print NameTitle..........
TE
Competent Supervisor:
Signed Time (hrs). Date

Time Extension: Subject to the following precautions Mark N/A if none required
IN
8.
The expiry time of this permit is extended from ........................ hrs on (date)
EG
To ........................hrs on (date)
9.
Cancellation:
9.1 I have completed the work detailed in this permit, and have restored the location to a safe condition. I
have returned my copy (white) of this permit to the authorised person.
Signed Competent Supervisor..
Time (hrs).
Date..
I accept that the work has been safely completed. The Top copy (white) of this permit has been destroyed.
Signed Competent Supervisor..
Date..
Time (hrs).
Notes
a) Permit is automatically
suspended upon sounding of
emergency alarms, instruction via
public address system etc.
Check with authorised person
before recommending work.
Distribution:
White copy
Pink copy
Blue copy
b) Where the authorised person is

also the competent person, he
should issue the top copy (white)
to himself as a check on
procedure.
Workplace recipient
Distribute as required
Retain in book (file copy)
c) Signature for paragraphs 9.1 and

9.2 to be placed on duplicate
copy (blue) which is to be
retained for record purposes.
Top copy (white) to be destroyed
to prevent re-issue.
QCS 2014

Page 16
1.
Project:
2.
Description of controlled work area:
3.
The above work area has been demarcated in the following manner:
4.
This permit is valid from:

................
..hrs on (date) ............
5.
The person(s) designated below is hereby authorised to enter and work in the
controlled area described in 2. above
Title
Name and initials
Title
Name and initials
Title
AL
Name and initials
Title
AT
IO
Name and initials
hrs on (date) . to
Special conditions (if any):
7.
I hereby agree to return my copy of this permit to the authorising person in 8.

Below immediately after the expiry time /date at 4. above
IN
TE
6.
8.
EG
Signed person requesting access..
Signed Work Access Controller

Notes
a) Top copy (white) to be
issued by Works
Access Controller to
person requesting
Distribution:
White copy
Pink copy Blue copy -
b) Duplicate copy (blue)

to be retained in file
Workplace recipient
Distribute as required
|Retain in book (file copy)
Date.
Date.
QCS 2014
1.

Page 17
Details of apparatus and work on/test* to be done:

Contract No:..
Location:..
Precautions and authorisation
2.1
Isolation: State isolation point(s), whether or not isolators have been padlocked off, fuses
drawn, etc.
2.2
Warning notices and access control: State where caution/danger notices have been posted and
if appropriate, how work area has been fenced off.
2.3
Prove apparatus dead: State what tests have been made, where and with what instruments.
2.4
Earthing: State where apparatus has been earthed and, for testing, which earths may be
removed.
2.5
Other precautions: Specify if required for special circumstances.
2.6
Validation period: This permit is valid from hrs on (date)to..hrs on (date)

I hereby declare that the above precautions have been taken and made known to the
competent person in charge of the work. I consider that the apparatus specified in paragraph 1
is safe to work on/test*
AT
IO
AL
2.
Signed (Authorised Person)Time (hrs)Date

Acceptance and receipt of Top copy (White) by competent person
3.
TE
I acknowledge receipt of this permit and understand the safety precautions described above.
Neither I nor the men under my control will work on/test* any other electrically dangerous
apparatus. I will return this permit to the authorised person when the work on/test is complete.
IN
Signed (Authorised Person) Time (hrs)Date

Cancellation
4.1
I hereby declare that the work on/test*- detailed in paragraph 1 has been completed/stopped,
earths removed, and men/gear withdrawn. The apparatus is now in safe condition.
EG
4.
Signed (Authorised Person) Time (hrs)Date

4.2
I hereby declare this permit cancelled. The top copy (white) has been returned to me by the
competent person and destroyed. The apparatus detailed in paragraph 1 may be reconnected
for service.
Signed (Authorised Person)Time (hrs)Date

Notes
a) Where the authorised person is
also the competent person, he
should sign all parts of the form
and issue the top (white) coy to
himself as a check on procedure.
b) Top copy (white) is to be

retained by competent person
whilst work on test is going on
and returned to authorised
person for destruction when work
is complete.
Distribution:
Top Copy White 2nd Copy - Blue
This form is intended to be used in a PAD format only
c) Signature for paragraphs 4.1 and

4.2 to be placed only on duplicate
copy (blue) which is to be
retained for record purposes. Top
copy (white) to be destroyed to
prevent re-issued.
QCS 2014
1.

Page 18
Details of apparatus and test to be done

Contract No.
Location
2.
Reasons why test cannot be carried out with apparatus isolated
3.
Person(s) involved in test Only authorised or competent persons may work on/test live apparatus at or
above 55 volts AC/DC
Competent person name and initials
Observer name and initials
4.
Precautions and authorisation
4.1
Safety equipment: The following safety equipment will be provided and used throughout the test
Max safe voltage
insulating rubber boots
Max safe voltage
insulating rubber mats
Max safe voltage
insulating push bars
Max safe voltage
AL
insulating rubber gloves
Other tools and equipment: State type and when to be used
Adjacent live equipment: The following precautions are to be taken to ensure that the persons named in
paragraph 3 cannot come into contact either adjacent live equipment
4.3
Danger and caution notices have been posted at
4.4
Atmospheric conditions: The following precautions are to be taken to avoid danger from wet and humid
conditions
AT
IO
4.2
From
4.6
hrs on (date)
to
Validation period: This permit is effective
hrs on (date)
Authorisation: I declare that all precautions specified in paragraph 4 are in force and that the test described
in paragraph 1 may now begin.
Time
hrs
Date
IN
TE
4.5
Important: No electrical test is to be carried out in potentially flammable atmospheres unless a hot work
permit is in force
Acceptance by competent person and observer
5.1
I acknowledge receipt of the top (white) original of this permit and understand/will use the safety precautions
listed in paragraph 4. I will work only under the surveillance of the observer, and will return this permit to the
authorised person when the test is complete.
5.2
I acknowledge receipt of the first (pink) copy of this permit and will monitor the safe progress of the
competent person. I have been instructed what to do in the case of emergency, and will return the permit to
the authorised person when the test is complete.
EG
Signed Observer
6.
hrs
Date
Time
hrs
Date
Clearance I hereby declare that the test described in paragraph 1 is complete. The apparatus is safe and
tools/gear have been withdrawn.
Signed Competent person
7.
Time
Signed Competent person
Time
hrs
Date
Cancellation For cancellation complete blue copy

I hereby declare this permit cancelled. I have received back respectively from the competent person and the
observer the white original and pink copy of the permit. These copies have been destroyed.
Time
hrs
Date
NOTES
a) Top original (white) and first copy (pink) to be issued by
authorised person to competent person and observer
respectively and retained by them during the work/test.
Both copies to be returned to authorised person for
destruction on completion of test.
b) Where the authorised person is also the competent

person he should issue the top original (white) to
himself as a check on correct procedure.
QCS 2014

Page 19
CONTRACT: ......................................................................................Permit No. ................

LOCATION: ..................................................................................................
DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ..............................................................................
DATE & DURATION OF WORKS:
Hours: ........................
IS THE WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT A HIGH RISK ACTIVITY (e.g. Steel erection,
roofwork, cladding, asbestos removal, work at height, excavations over 600mm deep etc.) Refer
to initial risk assessment Construction Phase Safety Plan. (circle appropriate risk rating)
LOW
AL
HIGH
If the work is high risk or multi discipline, COMPANY supervision must be on site at all times.
IO
Name and position of competent person supervising work activities.

(person named must stay on site at all times)
Name ................................................Position ..............................
AT
FURTHER CONTROL MEASURES
Safety
Courses
attended
YES OR
IN
TE
Is there a first aid trained person on site?

Is there access to welfare and washing facilities?
Can the emergency services be called?
Is there sufficient lighting and access to work areas?
Have emergency contact numbers been passed to the supervisor?
Are all staff inducted and aware of fire and emergency procedures?
Have all applicable risk assessments / method statements been accepted?
Confirm tool-box talk has been held to communicate this permit?
Are there any specific environmental considerations i.e. consented noise levels
IF NO IS INSERTED IN THE RESPONSE BOX THEN THE WORK MUST NOT CONTINUE
EG
OTHER SITE SPECIFIC CONTROLS:
Site Manager: ...................................................
Signed: ............................................................
Contract Manager: .........................................
Date Approved: .....................................................
RECEIPT OF PERMIT
I confirm that work by myself or by any person under my control carrying out work out of hours or without
on-site COMPANY supervision will do so in accordance with this permit. All persons involved will receive
information and instruction in the requirements of this permit and safety measures necessary prior to
work commencing
Named Supervisor:
Sub-contractor:
Signature:
Date:
Works Completed:
YES
/ NO
Permit Return Date:
Further Permit Required:
YES
/ NO
Site Manager Signature:
*Out of hours
QCS 2014

Part 2.3.12: Control of Working at Heights
Page 1

ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM (SAMAS) ........................................................... 1
2.3
2.3.12 CONTROL OF WORKING AT HEIGHTS ......................................................... 1

2.3.12.2 Definitions ...................................................................................................... 4
AL
2.3.12.3 Procedure ...................................................................................................... 5
IO
2.3.12.5 Author............................................................................................................. 7
EG
IN
TE
AT
2.3.12.6 Approvals ....................................................................................................... 7
QCS 2014

Page 2
Process Map
Scaffold/Work at
Height Coordinator
Project
Manager/Contractor
SHE
manager/Adviser
To ensure this
procedure is
established and prior to
tender ensure detailed
scaffold specification is
produced, including for
all production etc.
Contractor
Operatives
Provide details,
including Design as
appropriate to
1.5
1.2, 3.1
Prior to erection of
scaffold, appoint
scaffold Co-ordinator
Provide support and

identify
requirements for
training
1.3
3.1
AL
Ensure work at
height/scaffold
requirements are
discussed at contractor
pre-start monitoring
Erect/Inspect scaffold and protection in

accordance with this procedure
Understand scaffold
specification and
comply with defined
duties including
ensuring the availability
of risk assessment and
method statements
AT
Arrange for scaffold

Co-ordinator to attend
scaffold inspection
course, if required
IO
3.1
3.1
1.5, 3.3
TE
3.1
IN
Check scaffolders
training certificates and
retain copies
EG
Ensure scaffold
inspected after erection
and every 7 days.
Record using Company
Register or similar
ti
t d d
3.2, 3.3
Monitor that scaffolding etc. Erected by

Company or Sub/Works Package Contractor
are safe and inspected
3.2
Receive scaffold
handover certificate from
scaffolding contractor etc.
3.4
Key
Activity
Guidance
Provide the
appropriate
certificates
3.2
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
1
The purpose of this procedure is to control the hazards and associated risks of working at
height by ensuring proper design and safe systems of work including the requirements for
statutory inspections.
SCOPE
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
This procedure covers all COMPANY Projects projects and locations under the control of
QCS 2014

Page 4
SHE DIRECTOR
1

Ensures this procedure is established and that works are carried out in accordance with
this procedure.
SHE MANAGER/ADVISOR
AL
Ensure duties are carried out in accordance with this procedure
IO
SCAFFOLD/WORK AT HEIGHT CO-ORDINATOR
To provide all relevant information including where appropriate design details, specifications
and calculations to COMPANY and to work in accordance with this procedure and any other
information/rules provided in relation to this procedure.
AT
CONTRACTOR
To work in accordance with this procedure and any other information/rules provided in
relation to this procedure.
EG
IN
TE
EMPLOYEES
SCOPE AND SUMMARY OF WORK AT HEIGHT

This procedure has been prepared to control the risk of falls, falling objects and collapse
of all work places and is particularly aimed at scaffolds, working platforms, and personal
fall protection systems.
THE REQUIREMENTS
2
The control of scaffolding and working at heights are contained in the Qatar Regulatory
Document (Construction) Work at Height Section, relevant British or International
Standards and Codes of Practice, National Access and Scaffolding Confederation Current
TG20 for Technical Guidance on the use of BS EN/2811-1. The current NASC SG14
Guidance for Preventing Falls in Scaffolding and False work.
PERSONAL FALL PROTECTION IS
A fall prevention, work restraint, work positioning, fall arrest or rescue system, other than
a systems in which the only safeguards are collective safeguards, or,
Rope access and positioning techniques.
QCS 2014

Page 5
2.3.12.3 Procedure
MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITIES
The Project/Site Manager will appoint a Scaffold Co-ordinator to ensure the proper control
of all scaffolding, working platforms, working restraint mitigation. If no appointment is
made the Project/Site Manager will assume the duties himself.
Specific details in relation to contractors scaffold etc and working at height shall be
discussed at the initial SHE meeting SHE-PRO-007.
The person appointed will be site based and competent to carry out his duties. Training
where necessary shall be arranged through the regional Training Coordinator.
Erection and dismantling of scaffolds shall be carried out in accordance with the National
Access and Scaffolding Confederation (NASC) Guide (SG4).
Ensure all risk assessments and method statements have been prepared in relation to
the erection use and maintenance of scaffolds
AL
AT
IO
USE OF SCAFFOLDS, WORKING PLATFORMS, PERSONAL FALL PROTECTION AND

WORK RESTRAINT MITIGATION MEASURES PROVIDED BY COMPANY
COMPANY retain the responsibility for ensuring that any such equipment it provides for use
by its own personnel or others is safe for proper use.
Sub or Work Package Contractors have a responsibility to check any

equipment/scaffold etc. provided for their use is safe before they use it and that their
operatives are adequately trained.
COMPANY has a responsibility to ensure that any workplace that is part of a scaffold is safe
before others under COMPANY control or COMPANY own employees use it.
COMPANY Scaffold and Work at Height Co-ordinator shall also monitor that scaffolds etc.
erected by COMPANY/sub/work package contractors are safe and inspected as required
by Regulations and are only erected by trained, competent and certified persons.
EG
IN
TE
SCAFFOLDS, WORKING PLATFORMS AND PERSONAL FALL PROTECTION

ERECTED/USED BY SUB OR WORK PACKAGE CONTRACTORS' PERSONNEL
10
All sub/work package contractors' personnel retain the responsibility for ensuring that any
such equipment provided is safe for proper use and inspected as required by the Regulations.
11
Each sub or work package contractor has a responsibility to inspect equipment provided to it
by another contractor before they use it.
MANDATORY ITEMS RELATIVE TO WORK AND ACCESS/EGRESS TO HEIGHT
12
Staircases shall be the default primary means of access/egress to scaffolding/working

platforms where practicable, and shall only be excluded by Risk Assessment.
13
Where ladders are to be used as a means of access/egress following considerations in above,

they shall be incorporated into a ladder tower/ladder landing platform.
14
Where the above is not practicable ladder access openings shall be protected with a
gravity gate, (running the top guard rail into the ladder access point as an alternative is
not permissible.)
QCS 2014

Page 6
Where ladders are incorporated within a scaffold/working platform the access shall be
protected by a ladder flap or suitable guard rails and toe boards, to protect the opening.
16
When considering the use of ladders including step ladders, they shall not be used for Work at
Height unless Risk Assessment has demonstrated the other systems such as Podium or
Tower Scaffolds are not practicable or are for very short duration only. A Ladder Permit must
be issued for their use.
17
All working platform edges including edge protection to roofs, floor slabs and loading bays
shall incorporate material fall protection whether in use or not
18
Material Transport Loading/unloading plans shall be produced by the material receiving

company and applied and shall form part of the traffic management plan, and shall include fall
prevention during these operations
19
To compliment the above, a pre unload check shall be carried out prior to releasing the
ropes/chains/straps.
20
All Loading Bays shall be located away from building pedestrian access points where
practicable and in all cases incorporate triple guard rails to sides and a proprietary front
loading gate which protects users at all times.
21
Requirements for passive collective fall arrest where there is a risk of persons falling and edge
protection cannot be provided, a fall mitigation system such as nets, air/beanbags shall be
supplied and used. Where this is not practicable fall restraint shall be considered before
fall arrest.
22
Where safety harnesses and lanyards are used by employees they shall be inspected before
use and thoroughly examined at least every 3 months or as recommended by the
manufacturer if a lesser period. Safety belts are prohibited.
23
Scaffolds must not be used until a scaffold handover certificate has been issued by the person
erecting the scaffold and an entry has been made in the appropriate register.
24
Scaff-tag or similar notices are to be displayed on ALL scaffolding - in particular tower

scaffolds.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
15
QCS 2014

Page 7

FORMS
1
Checklist for Scaffold Design Requirements (SHE-FRM-12-01)
Ladder/Step Ladder Use Authorisation (SHE-FRM-12-02)
FURTHER REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

COMPANY Register Handover Certificates, Inspection Records and Training Records.
Contractors Check List for Initial Safety, Health and Environmental Meeting (SHE-PRO-007)
Standards and Guidance Risk Assessment Guides
AT
IO
AL
2.3.12.5 Author
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT DETAILS
TE
SECTION
EG
IN
SHE Manager
2.3.12.6 Approvals
Approved by:
NAME
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SHEQ Director
SIGNATURE & DATE
QCS 2014

Page 8
All scaffolds and working platforms shall be properly constructed to provide a safe
working place and be suitable for the type and nature of the work being carried out.
There shall be provided suitable and sufficient safe access to and egress from every
working place. Scaffolds shall only be erected or altered by competent, trained and
experienced workmen. Materials used shall be of suitable quality, in good condition and
free from patent defect.
Scaffolds shall conform to current British or International Standards.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Before the erection of any scaffold the following question shall be addressed:
What is the scaffold for?
1
Where is it to be erected?
2
3
Can safe access be provided for:4
Erection?
I)
Use?
II)
Dismantling?
III)
How many working platforms are needed?
5
What loading will be imposed?
6
Are the ground conditions or supporting structure suitable?
7
How and where can the scaffold be tied in?
8
What bracing will be used?
9
Will the scaffold be sheeted?
10
Is there a need to provide protection for the public?
11
QCS 2014

Page 9
EXCLUDING INTERNAL SCAFFOLD LADDERS
Contract Name ........

Date
Contract Number..
Area check description of work to be carried out

Height to be accessed ..
Location
..
..
Yes
No
AL
Section A
Can a mobile tower/MEWP be used?
IO
Can podium steps be used?
AT
Can fixed erected scaffold be used?

If NO is answered to all questions in section A, is a step ladder
the only means of access for the work activity?
TE
Section B (If steps are the only option, the following must be answered
IN
Is the work of a light nature?

Is the work of a short duration?
Repetitious short use does not constitute short duration works
EG
Will the tools be of a light nature and hand held?

If No is answered to any questions in section B, futher consideration must be given to
providing a suitable working platform before completing sections C and D
Type of steps to be used (tick as appropriate)
Wood
Aluminium
Fibreglass
Number of treads required e.g. 6,10,12

Section C
Has the operative read and understood the risk assessment and
method statement?
Yes
No
Section D Authorisation
Employee
Signature .. Print Name .
Supervisor
Signature .. Print Name .
QCS 2014

Part 2.3.13: Fire Prevention and Control on Site
Page 1
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
MANAGEMENT
/
2.3
2.3.13 ...........................................................................................................................
FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL ON SITE ............................................ 1
AL

2.3.13.2 Definitions ...................................................................................................... 5
2.3.13.3 Actions Required to Implement This Procedure ............................................ 6
IO
AT
2.3.13.5 Author........................................................................................................... 15
EG
IN
TE
2.3.13.6 Approvals ..................................................................................................... 15
QCS 2014

Page 2
Process Map
Tender Team
Projects Engineer
(CDM)
Design
Project Manager
SHE Dept
Appoint Fire Safety

Co-ordinator
Ensure adequate
resources for fire
control/protection
1.2, 3.4
1.4
Ensure fire risk has
been considered by
designers
1.6, 3.2
Consider fire risks

during development
AL
1.5, 3.2
Carry out a specific

Fire Risk
Assessment and
Site Emergency
3.4
3.4
Provide advice on
certificates,
training, etc. If
necessary, liaise
with Anon
1.3, 3,4
Ensure specific Fire

Risk Assessment is
produced for office
and storage units
and monitor
Monitor controls
are in place
3.1
3.4
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
SHE Management
Plan to detail
relevant
appointments and
emergency details
Ensure information
on fire risk is
provided at project
induction
3.4
Ensure adequate
monitoring
arrangements are in
place and carry out
emergence drills as
required by the SHE
Plan
3
Key
Activity
Guidance
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
The purpose of this procedure is to ensure adequate controls are in place from fire and the adequate
provision of emergency procedures.
SCOPE
AL
This procedure covers all COMPANY Projects and locations under the control of COMPANY.
A COMPANY is defined as the organization with responsibility for management of safety at a
construction site.
Introduction
IO
This Section provides guidance on Fire prevention and control on site which is a legal
requirement under the Regulatory document Section 1.7.
AT
It is strongly advised that reference is made to BS 5839 BS 5839-1:2013- Fire detection and
fire alarm systems for buildings Code of practice for design, installation, commissioning and
maintenance of systems in non-domestic premises.
Fire extinguishers, emergency lighting, fire alarms and fire signs must comply with current
local civil defense Standards and / or British Standards.
IN
TE
Every year there are a number of large fires on construction sites and in buildings undergoing
alteration and refurbishment. All have serious consequences: Injury and fatality to people, environment
and property damages. Some irreplaceable buildings burn down.
EG
The risk of fire is greater during the construction, refurbishment or demolition of buildings than
at any other time, and the loss of equipment, working time and resultant financial implications can be
severe.
Such fires have been started by the careless use of blowlamps, faulty electrical wiring etc.
The practical steps which can be taken to prevent fire are a cost-effective investment that may
bring great benefits. The majority of fires can be prevented by taking simple precautions and by
adopting safe working practices.
Every fire, no matter how large the end result, starts from a small beginning. But certain
fundamentals are common to every fire, and knowledge of these will help to prevent or to control a fire.
Everyone who has been trained will know the different types of fire that can occur and the
right extinguisher to use in each case. Using the wrong extinguisher can make a fire situation
deteriorate rapidly. If you are not trained, do not attempt to use them.
Sources of fuels, such as bonfires, LPG cylinders, dangerous substances, and flammable
materials, shall be identified as well as sources of ignition, such as smoking, cooking and heating
appliances and operations involving hot works (e.g. welding and cutting)
Controls shall take into account site security with respect to trespassers and acts of
vandalism.
Materials storage and all waste produced present a fire hazard and needs to be taken into
account in the risk management process.
QCS 2014

Page 4
Fire alarms, emergency lighting, fire-fighting equipment, signage, fire safety procedures,
emergency plans and staff training should keep in step with the progress of construction works so that
all areas are adequately covered throughout all stages of development.
The simplest fire procedure is as easy as A B C =
Raise the alarm
Call the fire brigade (Civil Defense)
Immediate evacuation
REMEMBER!
The majority of fires on site can be prevented by taking simple precautions and by adopting
safe working practices.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Fire legislation is designed to reduce the risk of a fire starting and ensures that, if it does
there are adequate means of escape and measures to control the fire.
occur,
QCS 2014

Page 5
SHE DIRECTOR
PROJECT / SITE MANAGER
Ensures that works are carried out in accordance with this procedure.
SHE MANAGER / ADVISER
AL
Provides advice and support in the application of this procedure and monitors others effectiveness to
manage the activities.
IO
ESTIMATING / TENDER TEAM
AT
Ensure necessary resources are available for fire precautions.
DESIGNERS
TE
Designers and specifies shall consider their proposals in terms of the potential for reducing construction
phase fire risks at source. The ability to do this will vary according to the circumstances.
PROJECT ENGINEER (CDM)
IN
The Engineer shall ensure that the relevant information provided by clients or designers is included in
the tender stage information pack.
EG
They shall also monitor design proposals and if they note designs that appear to ignore significant fire
matters, or introduce significant fire hazards for the construction phase, then they shall be referred back
to the designer for resolution.
INCIDENT CONTROLLERS, FIRE MARSHALS, ETC.
Ensure duties are carried out in accordance with those detailed.
CDM
Construction (Design and Management) and the definitions therein.
INTRODUCTION AND SUMMARY OF CONTRIBUTION TO FIRE SAFETY FROM KEY
PARTIES
As with all health and safety issues, fire safety during construction work will best be achieved through
adoption of the principles set out in the CDM i.e. design and planning to avoid or reduce the risks
followed by thorough planning, organisation and control of the execution of the works.
QCS 2014

Page 6
The material contained in this document shall be used in the preparation of site fire plans
that shall be included in the SHE Management Plan.

TENDER STAGE
The person responsible for preparing the tender shall ensure that all necessary resources for
fire precautions has been included and where necessary seek the advice of the SHE Department.
DESIGN PHASE
Where COMPANY is the designer, the design leader shall ensure that fire risks are considered in the
process of developing the design. In practice designers shall consider the elimination or mitigation of
construction phase fire risks as part of the design risk assessment.
AL
Where COMPANY is the Engineer the in house co-ordinator shall ensure that fire risks have been
considered by designers in their design.
IO
PRE CONSTRUCTION PHASE
AT
All sub and work package contractors shall be required as a condition of contract, to comply with the
requirements of the Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction) and as such this requirement has been
incorporated in the COMPANY standard rules for sub and work package contractors.
TE
The location and fire precautions required for temporary site accommodation e.g. offices, canteens,
cargo containers and caravans etc as well as parts of the existing buildings used for these purposes
demand special consideration and the Project/Site Manager shall seek the advice of the SHE
Department during the planning of such facilities.
IN
CONSTRUCTION PHASE
EG
The Project/Site Manager shall appoint a Incident Controller for the site whose name shall be recorded
in the SHE Management Plan. In addition, and where appropriate, a sufficient number of fire marshals
shall also be appointed.
The Project/Site Manager in association with the SHE Adviser for the site shall undertake a Fire Risk
Assessment and prepare a site specific emergency plan which shall be integrated into the SHE
Management Plan.
Safety induction of all personnel onto the project/site shall include fire related risks and arrangements.
The Project/Site Manager shall in consultation with the SHE Manager/Adviser, prepare, undertake and
record a specific Fire Risk Assessment for all Site Offices/Temporary Accommodation units. Contact
the SHE Department for advice.
The SHE adviser appointed for the site shall provide any necessary fire training requested and
undertake fire audits, as circumstances dictate.
The Project Manager shall arrange and carry out emergency evacuation drill as required by the SHE
Management Plan.
The Project/Site Manager must ensure that arrangements are in place to monitor the effectiveness of
this procedure including the maintenance of any fire fighting equipment etc.
QCS 2014

Page 7
2.3.13.4 Managing fire risks

On every construction site, there will always be the risk of fire. By the very nature of the operations
carried out (cutting, burning, grinding, welding, etc.), the use of flammable substances and the amount of
wood and other combustible materials used or stored on site, the potential for fire is always present and
must be properly guarded against.
As with all potential workplace problems, the situation can be effectively managed by:
taking steps to prevent a fire starting in the first place
preparing for, and effectively reacting to, a fire situation if it occurs.
Contractors must make a suitable and sufficient assessment of the risks to health and safety of their
employees whilst they are at work, and of the risks to any person not in their employ but who may be
affected by their actions. The purpose of these risk assessments is to:
identify any hazards that may be inherent within any work process
AL
establish the risks to health and safety arising from those hazards
establish the control measures necessary to reduce the risks to an acceptable level.
In circumstances where fire is an on-site hazard, a 'fire risk assessment' must be carried out.
IO
In many cases, fire risk assessments may be quite straightforward and completed relatively quickly. As
outlined above, the principles of fire risk assessment are the same as for the risk assessment of any
other construction work activity or process.
AT
In more complicated situations, carrying out a fire risk assessment may need more consideration and
may need to be reviewed as the construction project progresses or new situations arise. It almost goes
without saying that anyone carrying out a fire risk assessment on site needs to have both knowledge and
competence in the subject.
TE
TEMPORARY BUILDINGS
IN
The design for Fire prevention and control need to include temporary structures and works such as office
accommodation, canteens and other temporary accommodation and their maintenance.
BONFIRES
EG
2.3.13.5 Personal responsibilities
Where bonfires are allowed, no fire should be left unattended at any time.
A bonfire should only be lit after conducting a risk assessment:
Special attention is to be given to drifting smoke which could be a nuisance and represent danger to
road.
They should be situated well away from any buildings, boundaries, roadways, fuel stores or other
combustible materials or structures.
Consideration must be given to wind direction and strength.
Never light a bonfire by using a flammable liquid. There is a danger of the person lighting the fire being
burnt by the 'flash' as the flammable liquid ignites and also a chance of secondary fires starting as heavier-than-air
vapours spread.
SMOKING RESTRICTIONS
QCS 2014

Page 8
Where it is decided that smoking can be allowed in 'non-enclosed' areas, these areas must exclude any
'fire-risk' areas such as storage areas for combustible materials, flammable liquids and gas storage areas. The
official NO SMOKING notice must be clearly displayed in any area where smoking is not allowed, including all
entrances to all enclosed working places.
Areas where smoking is allowed should be equipped with adequate fire-fighting equipment.
Non-combustible containers should be provided to aid safe disposal of discarded smoking materials.
As work progresses and the site develops it will be necessary to monitor the changes in the 'fire risk
areas' and review the areas where smoking is allowed accordingly.
Site rules should ensure that smoking is prohibited for an appropriate period at the end of each working
day, for example the last hour. This will allow any developing fire to be discovered and dealt with before
the site closes at the end of the day.
AL
TRESPASSERS
IO
Children and other trespassers may start fires on site. Sites should, as far as possible, be secured
against intruders. In every case, combustible materials should be cleared on a regular basis (daily) and not left
lying around. Storage areas for flammable liquids and gases should be secured during non-working hours.
Everyone should know the correct action to take if they discover a trespasser on site during working
AT
hours.
HOT WORK
TE
Cutting, burning and welding operations, together with the use of blowlamps and other LPG-fuelled tools,
are the cause of many fires on building and construction sites. It is essential that anyone engaged in hot
works is aware of the fire risk, and is trained and competent to use the equipment that will produce the
heat.
IN
Precautions must be taken where heat from a work process could be transmitted to other combustible
materials, for example where hot works are carried out on steelwork or pipes adjacent to or passing
through flammable materials such as stud-work walls or timber floors.
EG
Where this kind of operation is anticipated, it is essential that all combustible materials (and liquids) are
protected before any work is allowed to start. Special care should be taken when working with cutting or
welding equipment at raised levels. Any equipment or combustible items situated below cutting or
welding operations where there is a danger of sparks or fragments of hot metal dropping, should, if
possible, be removed or covered with fire-resisting material.
When working with blowlamps, welding, flame-cutting or grinding equipment, thorough checks should
always be made to ensure that nothing is left smouldering after the work is finished.
As an added precaution, always check into cavities, around eaves, behind studding and into other voids
after any hot work has been completed.
In many cases such work must be carried out in compliance with a Hot Work Permit. This will stipulate
the safety conditions under which the work must be carried out and will usually require:
that a suitable and serviceable fire extinguisher is available at the place of the work
that hot work ceases at least one hour before the end of the working day
that a check for the presence of fire or potential fire is carried out before the end of the working day.
HEATING APPLIANCES
The risk of fire arises from the use of heating appliances if they are sited and installed incorrectly,
inadequately maintained or are not suitable for the intended use or location.
Fuel supplies for gas-fired appliances, especially propane or butane, should be kept secured outside the
building and piped in through fixed pipework. Any flexible pipework should be kept as short as possible,
QCS 2014

Page 9
and used only for the final connection to the cylinder. Any room in which a gas fire is used must be fitted
with a permanently open vent or louvre to enable the fire to operate properly without producing excess
carbon dioxide. (A window that could be closed in cold weather, for example, is not acceptable.)
Gas fires, plus the associate pipework and connections and so on must be regularly serviced.
The use of oil heaters is not recommended due to the inherent risk of fire if they are knocked over or
otherwise misused.
Combustible material should be kept well away from heaters and stoves. The practice of drying wet
clothing in front of fires should be prohibited. Care must be taken to see that newspapers, clothing or
other combustible materials are not allowed to build up around such heaters.
Care must be taken also to ensure heaters are not used near liquid fuel cylinders. Heat applied to the
surface of such cylinders will cause the contents to pressurise and could trigger an explosion.
AL
All heaters and stoves, including cookers and kettles, must be turned off at the end of the working day.
Portable electrical apparatus should be switched off, unplugged and disconnected from the mains
supply.
STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Many of the materials used in the construction process are combustible.
AT
IO
Whilst it is appreciated that there is a need for enough material to be available to do the job, only an
amount equivalent to one day's work supply should be stored in the work area. Where it is possible to
use a material which is less flammable, but will do the same job, then that type of material should be
specified by the designer.
Wherever possible, the stockpiling of flammable materials should be avoided, as quantity increases the
scale of any fire.
TE
Where possible, all combustible materials should be stored outside the building under construction in a
locked compound or storage container with adequate separation between differing types of product.
Such items as LPG and flammable adhesives should be isolated into a separate locked compound.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
IN
Most construction sites generate large quantities of rubbish and waste material which present a potential
fire risk.
EG
Good housekeeping is essential. Rubbish and waste should be cleared from site on a regular basis, if the
risk of fire is to be controlled. Although not all rubbish and waste can be taken to a centralised point for
disposal, places should be organised so that skips and other waste disposal containers can be safely
positioned not less than 3 metres way from any building or structure.
Skips and other waste disposal containers should not be placed adjacent to means of escape from
buildings or the site, but must be so positioned as to be readily available to vehicles contracted to collect
skips or to clear the accumulations of rubbish and waste material.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES

Once a building is nearing completion, it is common practice to use temporary coverings to protect
finished surfaces during the remaining fitting-out phase. These coverings often take the form of plastic
sheeting, fibreboard, or similar materials, some of which may be flammable. They can therefore add to
the fire loading of the building, and consequently increase the risk of fire. Ideally, fire retardant materials
will be used.
Care should be taken in such situations to ensure that, where possible, materials with flame-retardant
surfaces are used, that fire precautions are upgraded as appropriate, and that features requiring such
protection are installed as late as possible into the project.
2.3.13.6 Protection of employees

FIRE RISK ASSESSMENTS
QCS 2014

Page 10
The Regulatory Document, in particular Section 1.7 sets out the law regarding Fire prevention and control and
stipulates specific duties for conduct of fire risk assessments.
The Regulatory Document requires that a responsible person must carry out, and keep up to date, a risk
assessment and implement appropriate measures to minimise the risk to life and property from fire.
The responsible person will usually be the main contractor in control of the site or in teh case of a property the
property owner.
Sources of fuel and ignition shall be identified and general fire precautions including, means of escape, warning
and fighting fire shall be established based on fire risk assessment.
In occupied buildings such as offices, works must not interfere with existing escape routes from the building, or any
fire separation, alarms, dry risers, or sprinkler systems.
There are five steps in carrying out a fire risk assessment:
Identify hazards: consider how a fire could start and what could burn;
AL
People at risk: employees, contractors, visitors and anyone who is vulnerable, e.g. person with physical
disabilities; pregnant woman etc
Evaluation and action: consider the hazards and people identified in the above and act to remove and
reduce risk to protect people and premises;
IO
Record, plan and train: keep a record of the risks and action taken. Make a clear plan for fire safety and
ensure that people understand what they need to do in the event of a fire; and
AT
Review: your assessment regularly and check it takes account of any changes on site.
MEANS OF ESCAPE
Key aspects to providing safe means of escape on construction sites include:
TE
Routes: your risk assessment should determine the escape routes required, which must be kept available
and unobstructed;
Alternatives: well-separated alternative ways to ground level should be provided where possible;
IN
Protection: routes can be protected by installing permanent fire separation and fire doors as soon as
possible;
EG
Assembly: make sure escape routes give access to a safe place where people can assemble and be
accounted for. On a small site the pavement outside may be adequate; and
Signs: will be needed if people are not familiar with the escape routes. Lighting should be provided for
enclosed escape routes and emergency lighting may be required.
MEANS OF GIVING WARNING
Set up a system to alert people on site. This may be temporary or permanent mains operated fire alarm (tested
regularly), a klaxon, an air horn or a whistle, depending on the size and complexity of the site.
The warning needs to be distinctive, audible above other noise and recognisable by everyone.
MEANS OF FIGHTING FIRE
Fire extinguishers should be located at identified fire points around the site. The extinguishers should be
appropriate to the nature of the potential fire:
wood, paper and cloth water extinguisher;
flammable liquids dry powder or foam extinguisher;
electrical carbon dioxide (C02) extinguisher.
Nominated people should be trained in how to use extinguishers
RESPONSE TO A FIRE ALARM
QCS 2014

Page 11
In the event of a fire occurring, it is essential that the alarm is raised as quickly as possible so that employees and
others, such as visitors, can quickly and safely reach a place of safety.
This can be achieved by considering the steps outlined in Module HI that cover:
calling the fire and rescue service
means of escape.
However, if a fire starts inside a building which is under construction, demolition or refurbishment, particularly in a
basement, the location of the fire exits may be unknown to many of the people on the site. Therefore,
publicised and clearly signposted escape routes must be established.
As part of the site emergency planning, dedicated escape routes should be decided on during the planning phases
of the project, and arrangements made for them to be clearly signed and adequately lit.
Escape routes and their signage may have to be reviewed and reorganised as construction work progresses.
AL
As part of establishing a satisfactory means of escape, it will be necessary to install an emergency lighting system
in circumstances where failure of primary lighting would create a hazardous situation.
2.3.13.7 Fire Alarm system and compliance
IO
A good fire alarm system should be installed within the site compliant to the current standards, and provides the
level of protection demanded by current legislation.
AT
Correct documentation to be in place:

An up-to-date risk assessment
A log book that records the date and time of weekly tests, and a record of any faults detected, false
alarms and the service history, by whom.
TE
A design certificate (such as a BS 5839-1 G1 Design certificate or equivalent) with Specification, Fire
Plan or cause and effect, a set of drawings that clearly states the category or level of protection, plus any
variations that have been agreed with interested parties such as Civil Defence, the Insurers or Building Control.
IN
An Installation certificate (such as a BS 5839-1 G2 Installation certificate or equivalent) including a set of

as fitted drawings.
EG
A commissioning certificate (such as a BS 5839-1 G3 Commissioning certificate or equivalent) including

equipment manuals with user instructions.
An acceptance certificate that confirms the date of handover
An inspection and servicing certificate (such as a BS 5839-1 G6 Inspection & Servicing certificate or
equivalent) that record all tests and checks made at each service visit since original installation handover.
Modification certificates as applicable (such as a BS 5839-1 G7 Modification certificate or equivalent)
identifying any work undertaken on the system since the date of handover.
The responsible person should ensure that certification is in place covering these subjects as identified in BS
5839-1. If there is inadequate certification available, it is recommended that a Verification Certificate
(such as a BS 5839-1 G5) is obtained from a competent maintainer
In the case where installations don\t have the certificates, it is recommended that the system is assessed by a
competent service provider who can issue the necessary certificates detailed above.
Anyone who will undertake the works will need to be competent and those carrying out works on a fire alarm
system shall hold either a BAFE SP203 or LPS1014 certificate approved from Kahramaa. The
certificates should include details of their capability to Design, Install, Commission and/or Maintain a fire
alarm system.
It is also important to ensure that any service provider is competent to advise of any potential sources of false
alarms and their corrective action.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
The provision of emergency lighting should always be considered when assessing the fire safety requirements for
QCS 2014

Page 12
a construction site.
This is particularly important where being able to carry out work safely is dependent on artificial lighting because
there is no natural light, for example in basements.
If the lighting circuits should fail, any standby emergency lighting system must switch on automatically and clearly
illuminate the following:
exits and directional signs
corridors and associated exits
circulation areas
changes in levels
any projections and protrusions, such as temporary partitioning, trestles, scaffolding, items of plant and
machinery
internal and external staircases, including ladders, particularly if these are essential to evacuate the site.
AL
Emergency exit routes from the premises may have to be provided or maintained through the construction area for
use by the occupiers of the premises. This is relevant where the building in which construction is taking
place is partially occupied by others.
It may be necessary to amend the location and extent of the emergency lighting system as works progress.
IO
Emergency lighting, whether powered by battery or standby generator or a combination, should be tested on a
regular basis by a competent person in accordance with BS 5266 Part I.
AT
Records of tests of the emergency lighting equipment should be kept and must be available for inspection when
required.
TE
As work progresses, the requirement and suitability of fire-fighting equipment must be reviewed, and amended as
necessary.
IN
All mechanically-propelled site plant should carry its own fire extinguisher of the correct type. On large or costly
items of equipment or plant, the installation of automatic fire detection and extinguishing systems should
be considered if there is a risk of fire.
EG
MAINTENANCE OF FIRE-FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
In addition to the monthly inspections of fire-fighting equipment it is particularly important to check extinguishers
which, within a year, are sent to more than one site. When a site is being set up, on receipt of the fire
extinguishers, the Site Manager must inspect them for the date that the next check is due.
2.3.13.9 Staff training
The Contractor must ensure that employees are provided with adequate safety training that includes suitable and
sufficient instruction and training on the appropriate precautions and actions to be taken by employees in
order to safeguard themselves and other relevant persons on the premises. It needs to take account of
the fire risk assessment and the emergency procedures, and be easily understandable and repeated
periodically. The training should cover:
discovering a fire
how to raise the alarm
what to do on hearing the alarm
procedure for alerting visitors and all staff
calling the fire service
evacuation procedures, assembly points and fire drills
location and use of fire-fighting equipment
location of escape routes
QCS 2014

Page 13
how to open escape doors

importance of fire doors
how to stop equipment and isolate power
not using lifts
use and risks of highly flammable and explosive substances
good housekeeping
smoking policy and smoking areas.
FIRST AID
Trained first aiders will know how to deal with anyone who has been burnt in a fire on site. However, it may not be
a trained first aider who is first on the scene.
Site security
AL
2.3.13.10
Effective site security is a way of preventing malicious fires caused by trespassers.
Irrespective of the site boundary fence, buildings and storage areas for flammable liquids, liquefied petroleum gas
cylinders and other combustible materials should be individually fenced or otherwise suitably protected.
IO
Illumination of the site, the provision of security guards or guard dogs or the installation of CCTV is additional
deterrents to unauthorised access.
Fire safety and the Construction (Design and Management) CDM Regulations
2.3.13.11
AT
At the end of each working day a fire check should be undertaken, particularly in areas where hot work has been
carried out. Where 24-hour security is provided, fire checks should be undertaken throughout the night,
during holiday periods and at weekends.
IN
TE
CDM imposes duties with regard to the safe operation of construction sites on Contractors and Sub-Contractors.
These duties focus on minimising the risk of fires and ensuring that, if a fire should occur, it can be
correctly dealt with. Fire should be one of the hazards covered in a fire safety plan that will form a part of
the construction phase health and safety plan.
EG
These Regulations require that the Contractor appoints a competent person to be responsible for continually
assessing the fire risk and updating the Fire Safety Plan.
Designers, who will be guided by the fire prevention and control elements of the QCS, should attempt to 'designout' fire risks where possible.
Additionally, CDM requires that:
suitable and sufficient steps are taken to prevent, so far as is reasonably practicable, the risk of injury
from fire or explosions.
measures to be taken to detect and fight fires in relation to work are carried out on construction sites.
2.3.13.12
Guarding against fire
DESIGN PHASE
Effective fire prevention planning begins at the design stage. The architect or designer must consider the
measures which will eliminate or diminish the potential for fire. It is essential that, where appropriate, an
experienced and qualified person is appointed to consider the fire aspects of the design phase; not only
to ensure that fire risk and potential for damage are properly assessed and kept to a minimum during
construction, but also to see that the finished building will comply with all statutory requirements in
respect of fire precautions.
FIRE SAFETY PLAN
On a site of sufficient size or complexity, or if required by the Contractor they may need to appoint a competent
QCS 2014

Page 14
person (for example, a site fire-safety adviser).

This person should be responsible for formulating and regularly updating the site fire safety plan as construction
work proceeds.
A site fire safety plan should include details of:
the organisation of fire safety procedures
the names and positions of persons, and their responsibilities for the various aspects of fire safety, for
example calling the fire and rescue service
general site fire precautions
fire detection and warning alarms installed on site
arrangements for maintaining fire escape routes and changing them as necessary as work progresses
arrangements for notifying staff of the emergency escape routes and any changes to them
the procedures for a Hot Work Permit system, if such is in use
AL
the location, construction and maintenance of site accommodation
fire evacuation plans and procedures for calling the fire and rescue service
fire and rescue service access
IO
fire drills and training, and also procedures for maintaining a written record of all checks.
The person responsible for site fire safety should:
AT
ensure that the site fire safety plan is clearly understood and complied with by all those on the site
ensure that a system using Hot Work Permits is established, as necessary, and monitor its effectiveness
carry out regular checks of fire-fighting equipment and facilities installed on site
test all alarms and detection devices weekly
TE
carry out weekly inspections of emergency escape routes

ensure that fire and rescue service access is always maintained
IN
liaise with site security staff, if they are employed

arrange for the necessary inspections, tests and fire inspections to be carried out
EG
regularly monitor and check the arrangements and procedures for calling the fire and rescue service
carry out the duties required for the safe evacuation of the site in the event of an emergency situation
ensure that all staff and visitors report to the assembly points.
The site fire adviser or other competent person may, in consultation with the Contractor, need to arrange for the
appointment of fire marshals to assist in the implementation of the site fire safety plan, particularly any
site evacuation. On large sites it is usual for a fire marshal to be appointed from each company of
subcontractors to account for that company's staff in the event of a site evacuation.
Where fire marshals' duties are more extensive, they must be allowed sufficient time to carry out their duties and to
undertake any training that may be necessary.
Notices detailing the action to be taken in case of a fire should be displayed on all notice boards and adjacent to
fire alarm call points.
2.3.13.13
SAMPLE PROCEDURE FOR CONTRACTORS
2.3.13.14
Reference Documents
FORMS
Fire Prevention Checklist (SHE-FRM-13-01)
QCS 2014

Page 15
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
SHE Management Plan
Safety, Health and Environmental Risk Management and Written Safe Systems of Work (SHE-PRO-001)
QCS 2007 Fire Prevention Standards and Guidance for Buildings under Construction.
Author
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT DETAILS
Approvals
Approved by:
EG
IN
NAME
TE
2.3.13.16
AT
SHE Manager
IO
SECTION
AL
2.3.13.15
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SHEQ Director
SIGNATURE & DATE
QCS 2014

Para
No.
1.0
Tick Box
for yes
Question
Design Phase
Has a Co-ordinator been appointed for the Design Phase?
Does the Co-ordinator understood the full scope of his responsibilities?
2.0
Construction Phase
Has a Site Fire Safety Co-ordinator been appointed by the COMPANY?
Has the Fire Safety Co-ordinator :
formulated a fire safety plan?
ensured that staff are familiar with the plan and understood it?
monitored compliance are fire safety plan, especially with regard to hot?
AL
work permits?
established a regime of checks and inspections office protection

equipment and escape routes?
IO
established effective liaison with security contractors or staff?
AT
written records of checks, inspections, maintenance work, fire patrols

and fire drills?
carried out a fire drill and analysed the results?
checked the arrangements and procedures for calling the fire brigade?
Large Projects
TE
3.0
On the large projects, has the Fire Safety Co-ordinator:
IN
appointed fire marshals and/or deputies, trained them and delegated

responsibilities to them?
EG
provided site plans for the emergency services detailing the escape
routes, fire protection equipment and facilities for the fire brigade?
Fire Safety Plan
4.0
Page 16
Does the fire safety plan detail:
the organisation and responsibility for fire safety?
the site precautions?
the means for raising the alarm in case of fire?
the procedure for calling the fire brigade?
the means of escape in case of fire?
the hot work permit scheme?
the site accommodation, its use, location, construction and maintenance?
the points of access and sources of water for the fire brigade?
the control of waster materials?
the security measures to minimise the risk of arson?
the staff training programme?
QCS 2014

Para
No.
5.0
Tick Box
for yes
Question
Emergency Procedures
Is the means of warning of fire known to all staff?
It is checked routinely and can be heard in all areas above background noise?
Are fire instruction notices prominently displayed?
Are the fire brigade access routes clear at all times?
Have specified personnel been briefed to unlock barriers when the alarm sounds?
Have signs been installed indicating fire escape routes and the positions of fire
protection equipment?
6.0
Fire Protection
Have measures been taken to ensure the early installation and operation of:
AL
escape stairs (including compartment walls)?
lighting conductors?
automatic fire alarms
IO
automatic sprinkler systems
AT
hose reels?
are fire dampers and fire stopping provided at the earliest opportunity?
is steel work protected as soon as possible?
are adequate water suppliers available for fire fighting purposes?
are all hydrants clear of obstruction?
TE
7.0
Temporary Covering Materials
IN
Are temporary protective materials required to protect surfaces and fittings?

Have these been selected so that the fire load is still acceptable?
EG
Where flexible covering materials are used do they comply with relevant
Standards?
8.0
Portable Fire Extinguishers
Are adequate numbers of suitable extinguishers provided?

Are sufficient personnel trained in their use?
Are extinguishers located in conspicuous positions near exits?
Are carbon dioxide extinguishers in place adjacent to electrical equipment?
Does all mechanically-propelled site plant carry suitable extinguishers?
Have procedures been implemented for the regular inspection and maintenance of
extinguishers?
9.0
Page 17
Site Security Against Arson

Are adequate areas of the site, including all storage areas, protected by hoarding?
Is security lighting installed?
Has closed circuit television (CCTV) been installed?
If CCTV is in position are the screens monitored and/or recorded?
Is the site checked for hazards at the end of each work period, particularly where
hot work has been in progress?
QCS 2014

Para
No.
10.0
Tick Box
for yes
Question
Temporary Buildings
Is the fire break between the temporary building and the structure undergoing work
more than 10 meters?
If the fire break is less than 6 meters
Is the temporary building constructed with materials which will not significantly
contribute to the growth of a fire?
Is the building fitted with an automatic fire detection system?
If the
temporary building is within the building under reconstruction or
refurbishment:
is escape for personnel sufficiently easy?
is access for the Civil Defence (Fire Department) readily available?
is the building fitted with an automatic fire detection system?
AL
IO
If the floor of the building is raised above ground level is the space beneath
enclosed with non-combustible material?
Are heaters enclosed with guards and securely fixed on the walls?
If separate buildings contain heaters for drying clothes, are the heaters
AT
thermostatically controlled? (with enclosed elements) are the drying racks fixed
firmly at a safe distance?
Are all heaters and cookers properly installed and is adequate ventilation provided?
IN
TE
Are automatic fire and intruder alarms installed and is temporary buildings used for
storage of flammable liquids and gases?
Do temporary buildings contain the minimum of furniture and fittings made from
synthetic materials?
In all areas of fire hazard does a no smoking policy prevail and there adequate No
Smoking signs in place?
11.0
Site Storage of Flammable Liquids and LPG
EG
Are containers of flammable liquids and LPG stored in purpose designed

compounds?
If flammable liquids are not stored in compounds, is the quantity less than 50 litres
(or half a days supply, whichever is less) and is it kept in a fire resistant cupboard
or bin?
Is the storage area at least 10 meters from temporary and permanent buildings
If not, are the recommended precautions taken?
Are cylinders of oxygen and chlorine and containers of similar agents kept
separately from flammable liquids and LPG?
Are the stores properly signed?
Has the store a paved or compacted base, and is clear if weeds and rubbish?
Are all electrical fittings of intrinsically safe design?
Is automatic gas detection equipment installed?
Are suitable fire extinguishers provided at the entrances?
12.0
Page 18
Site Storage of Flammable Liquids and LPG

Do electrical installations conform to British or International Standards?
Is all electrical work undertaken by competent electricians?
Are all circuits, other than those controlling security devises and security lights,
QCS 2014

Para
No.
Tick Box
for yes
Question
turned off when work ceases?
Are all gas suppliers installed by a competent gas fitter?
Are all gas suppliers in fixed piping or armoured flexible tubing?
Where gas cylinders are used are they located outside building, secured and
protected from interference?
Are flexible links for LPG supplies only connected by a competent person?
13.0
Hot Work
Is a permit to work system in operation?
Does that system include an adequate maintained register?
IO
AL
Is the area involved cleared of combustible materials before work commences, and
are the opposite sides of walls or partitions also inspected?
Is a careful watch maintained while hot work is in progress, with suitable
extinguishers of appropriate type at hand?
Is wooden flooring and other combustible material which is not movable covered
before commences?
Is the work area screened when welding or grinding is undertaken?
AT
Are gas cylinders secured vertically, and are they fitted with flashback arresters?
Are tar boilers supervised by experienced operatives, and only taken onto roofs in
exceptional circumstances?
Is the work area thoroughly examined and hour after work is finished?
Waste Materials
14.0
TE
Are provisions made for the safe storage and removal of waste materials?
IN
Are checks carried out routinely to ensure that waste materials are not
accumulating on the site?
Are metal bins, with metal lids provided for oily rags?
EG
Is collected waste, awaiting disposal, kept away from temporary buildings stores
and equipment?
Is all dry vegetation removed regularly from around the site?
Plant
Is there an absolute prohibition on burning rubbish on site?

15.0
Page 19
Is all plant with internal combustion engines positioned in well-ventilated, noncombustible enclosure with the exhaust pipes clear of combustible materials?
Are compressors housed away from other plant?
Do notices and staff training make it clear that fuel tanks must not be refilled whilst
engines are running?
Is plant equipment protected from accidental impact?
Are air intakes positioned so that air is cool and free from flammable gases and
vapours?
Are sand-trays provided to absorb drips of fuel and lubricant?
QCS 2014

Part 2.3.14: Asbestos
Page 1
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
MANAGEMENT
/
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES ............................. 1
2.3.14 ASBESTOS ....................................................................................................... 1

2.3.14.2 Definitions ...................................................................................................... 4
AL
2.3.14.3 Types of Asbestos Surveys ........................................................................... 5

2.3.14.4 Procedure ...................................................................................................... 5
2.3.14.5 Project Delivery .............................................................................................. 6
IO
2.3.14.6 Monitoring & Performance ............................................................................. 8
AT
2.3.14.7 Feedback & Action ......................................................................................... 8

2.3.14.8 Records .......................................................................................................... 8
2.3.14.9 Appendices .................................................................................................... 9

Reference Documents .............................................................................. 14
2.3.14.11
Author ....................................................................................................... 14
2.3.14.12
Approvals .................................................................................................. 14
EG
IN
TE
2.3.14.10
QCS 2014

Page 2
PROCESS MAP
Competent
Person/Contractor
Estimator
Supervisor
SHE Advisor
Ensure that the

system is
1.2
Review PreConstruction
Information
Information
Information
4.1
4.1
4.1
AL
4.2
Ensure Risk
Assessment
findings/controls
are incorporated
into the Plan of
work if identified
5.5
Ensure that the

Induction references
asbestos material is
on site
Issue Asbestos
Survey,
Risk
Assessments/
Method Statement
/Emergency Plan
to supervisor
5.5
5.1, 6.1
Provide support
and training if
Authorises and
implements method
statement/risk
assessment
Produce and
record a suitable
and sufficient
asbestos risk
assessment
5.5
IO
4.2
Inform team of
Asbestos Risks
AT
Ensure that
Asbestos Survey
has been completed
and the report is
available
Provide details to
relevant personnel
TE
1.4
IN
5.13
Monitor activities to ensure compliance
5.1, 6.1
EG
Provide PreConstruction
information
including Asbestos
S
Project Manager
Client
Provide Health
Surveillance as
required
5.12
Monitor activities to ensure compliance
1.5, 5.8
Monitor and review performance
5.1, 6.1
Notify competent person of any change

needed to controls
Conduct a subcontract review and

record results
Attend a subcontract review
Ensure that the

Induction
references any
changes in
asbestos material
on site
Ensures that all

relevant records are
maintained and/or
archived
8
Key
Activity
Guidance
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
1
The purpose of this procedure is to define how Asbestos related activities shall be carried
out safely.
SCOPE
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
This procedure covers all COMPANY Projects and locations under the control of COMPANY.
A COMPANY is defined as the organization with responsibility for management of safety at a
construction site.
QCS 2014

Page 4
SHE DIRECTOR
1

Ensures the procedure is established and that the identification and removal of asbestos
containing materials (ACMs), is carried out in accordance with this procedure and relevant
information is communicated to interested parties.
ESTIMATOR
Ensures that the information provided by the client or his representative is considered
when pricing the works and informs the relevant persons of details with regards to
asbestos and asbestos containing materials.
AL
Either supervises the work activities or the sub/work package contractor undertaking
those work activities and ensures preparation of the necessary control documents
required by this procedure.
AT
IO
SUPERVISOR
Provides advice and support in the application of this procedure and monitors
effectiveness to control the activities.
TE
SHE MANAGER/ADVISER
Persons undertaking the work activities and required to carry out the task in accordance
with this procedure.
EG
IN
OPERATIVE/CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEE
PROJECT MANAGER
1
For the purpose of this procedure, Project/Site Manager may also mean Depot Manager or
Office Manager.
SUPERVISOR
Ensures duties are carried out in accordance with this procedure.

CONTRACTORS
Means work package contractors and their sub-work package contractors. (Includes work
equipment supplies.)
QCS 2014

Page 5
2.3.14.3 Types of Asbestos Surveys

TYPE 1 PRESUMPTIVE SURVEY
The purpose of the survey is to locate, as far as reasonably practicable, the presence and
extent of any suspect ACMs in the building and assess their condition. This survey essentially
defers the need to sample and analyse for asbestos (or the absence thereof) until a later time
(e.g. prior to demolition or major refurbishment). The duty holder bears potential additional
costs of management for some non asbestos-containing materials. All areas should be
accessed and inspected as far as reasonably practicable (e.g. above false ceilings and inside
risers, service ducts, lift shafts etc), or must be presumed to contain asbestos. Any material
which can reasonably be expected to contain asbestos must be presumed to contain
asbestos, and where it appears highly likely to contain asbestos, there should be a strong
presumption that it does. All materials which are presumed to contain asbestos must be
assessed.
AL
TYPE 2 SAMPLING SURVEY
The purpose and procedures used in this survey are the same as for Type 1, except that
representative samples are collected and analysed for the presence of asbestos. Samples
from each type of suspect ACM found are collected and analysed to confirm or refute the
surveyors judgment. If the material sampled is found to contain asbestos, other similar
homogeneous materials used in the same way in the building can be strongly presumed to
contain asbestos. Less homogeneous materials will require a greater number of samples. The
number should be sufficient for the surveyor to make an assessment of whether asbestos is or
is not present. Sampling may take place simultaneously with the survey, or as in the case of
some larger surveys, can be carried out as a separate exercise, after the Type 1 survey is
complete.
TE
AT
IO
TYPE 3 FULL ACCESS
IN
This type of survey is used to locate and describe, as far as reasonably practicable, all ACMs
in the building and may involve destructive inspection, as necessary, to gain access to all
areas, including those that may be difficult to reach. A full sampling programme is undertaken
to identify possible ACMs and estimates of the volume and surface area of ACMs made. The
survey is designed to be used as a basis for tendering the removal of ACMs from the building
prior to demolition or major refurbishment so the survey does not assess the condition of the
asbestos, other than to note areas of damage or where additional asbestos debris may be
expected to be present.
EG
2.3.14.4 Procedure
TENDER
1
It is the responsibility of the client and their nominated representatives to provide detailed
information including an Asbestos Survey. Pre-Construction Information should be examined
by the Project Manager, Estimator and SHE Adviser to determine the presence of asbestos
containing materials (refer to Asbestos Control Procedures Pre-Construction Stage Flow
Chart at Appendix 1).
PROJECT START-UP
The Estimator should inform the site team of the Asbestos Risk including previous asbestos
removal during handover meeting. If an Asbestos Survey has not been provided, the Project
Manager must request from the client information regarding the presence of asbestos. If the
QCS 2014

Page 6
client confirms asbestos is or may be present the Project Manager must request a survey be
carried out the type of survey should be determined by the nature of the work to be
undertaken but where practical a Type 3 survey should be requested. Any identified asbestos
must be removed by an approved and licensed contractor prior to commencement of works
(refer to Asbestos Control Procedures Pre-Start Flow Chart at Appendix 1).
2.3.14.5 Project Delivery

ON SITE ACTIVITIES
1
The Project Manager should ensure that relevant control measures from the asbestos risk
assessment have been implemented. In addition, all relevant information shall be
communicated to personnel during the site induction process (refer to Asbestos Control
Procedures On Site Flow Chart at Appendix 1).
AL
STOP ISOLATE PREVENT INFORM

ASBESTOS SURVEY
The results of all types of survey should be recorded and the information provided to anyone
who may work on, disturb, be exposed to or supervise work on these materials.
IO
A list of approved surveys shall be monitored and held by the Procurement/SHE Department
AT
COMPANY APPROVED ASBESTOS SURVEYORS
Work with the most dangerous asbestos-containing materials (which give off high fibre levels
when disturbed), require a competent contractor to undertake the removal works. Further
guidance is available from the SHE Manager/Advisor.
IN
TE
ASBESTOS REMOVAL CONTRACTORS
ASBESTOS RISK ASSESSMENT
(a)
(b)
(c)
EG
A suitable risk assessment should be made before carrying out any work which may expose
employees to asbestos.
If any work which will, or could, disturb asbestos is planned, has the risk assessment
been done by a competent person?
Does it relate specifically to the particular job and site?
Does it cover other risks (like falls from height or electricity?
ASBESTOS REMOVAL
6
Selection of an approved competent contractor should be made from the company approved
supplier/subcontractor database. Database administrators monitor the approval status of
these specialists.
Although COMPANY appoints a specialist contractor for the removal of Asbestos, the
Project/Site Manager should ensure that they work in accordance with the requirements of the
Qatar Regulatory Document (Construction) and do not put others at risk from their operations.
The appropriate checklists should be used to assess the suitability of the method of removal
and to monitor the on-site activities. The checklist should be used in conjunction with the
method statement/risk assessment review form.
QCS 2014

Page 7
ASBESTOS WASTE
9
All forms of asbestos (including overalls used for removal & enclosure materials) requires
double bagging and specialist waste removal procedures.
ROLE OF VIEWING PANELS AND CCTV
A sufficient number of viewing panels should be installed in enclosures. The purpose of such
panels is to allow supervisors, managers to monitor work, thereby minimising the need to
enter enclosures. Viewing panels should be located to ensure that all areas inside the
enclosure are visible, as far as reasonably practicable.
11
Where such panels are not reasonably practicable or where they do not allow good visibility of
the active work area, a CCTV system should be installed such that ongoing work can be seen.
12
Entry will be required on appropriate occasions in order to check compliance with the plan of
work and relevant health and safety procedures. CCTV and/or viewing panels do not replace
the need for enclosure entry but they may help to reduce the frequency of entry.
AL
10
AT
All air testing, sampling of asbestos and clearance certification must be carried out by
someone who is accredited by an appropriate body.
13
IO
SAMPLING, AIR TESTS AND CLEARANCE CERTIFICATION
In any circumstance where there is an emergency including an accidental uncontrolled

release of asbestos fibres or uncovering of previously unidentified ACM, it is essential to limit
exposure and the subsequent risks to health by implementing the Site and SHE Advisors
emergency procedures (refer to Asbestos Control Procedures Site Emergency Flow Chart at
Appendix 1).
IN
TE
14
SITE MANAGEMENT
EG
ASBESTOS REMOVAL CONTRACTORS

All asbestos removal contractors must have prepared procedures which can be put into effect
should an incident, accident or emergency occur which could put persons at risk because of
the presence of asbestos e.g. employee collapsing or suffering serious accident within the
active stripping enclosure or an uncontrolled release of asbestos fibres.
16
These procedures should include sufficient information to enable the emergency services
(paramedics, Civil Defence (Fire Department) to properly protect themselves against the risks
of asbestos when attending an on-site emergency. Spare PPE and RPE should be available
for the use of emergency personnel who may have to attend to persons removed from an
enclosure without full decontamination procedures being carried out.
15
MEDICAL AND HEALTH SURVEILLANCE

17
In circumstances where cases of inadvertent exposure to asbestos may have occurred,

the following steps should be considered:
(a)
Ascertain as far as possible the type of asbestos, the likely exposure levels involved
and the duration of exposure.
(b)
Where employees may have been significantly exposed (for instance exposure may
have exceeded the relevant action level), obtain advice from the appointed occupational
health service provider, particularly regarding the medical assessment and counseling
of exposed employees.
QCS 2014

Page 8
(c)
Consider offering those involved employers, employees or members of the public, the
opportunity to discuss the situation with a medical or occupational health advisor,
particularly where they are otherwise unlikely to have access to an occupational health
service.
(d)
Complete and archive an Inadvertent Exposure Record for each person who may have
been exposed to airborne asbestos dust in the course of work for COMPANY.
INFORMATION, INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING

Personnel who are, or may be, exposed to asbestos should attend asbestos awareness
training given at regular intervals.
19
The safety induction format for the project shall include the discovery of asbestos whilst
working within the premises and working at height.
20
All workers should attend a safety awareness tool box talk.
AL
18
IO
2.3.14.6 Monitoring & Performance

THE PROJECT MANAGER SHALL:
Review the Management System/Asbestos Management Plan every 6 Months and record
details.
Review Risk Assessments and Method Statements (SHE-PRO-001) at regular intervals or, if
there is a significant change to either the task to be carried out or substances to be used or
produced.
Inspect known ACM for deterioration at least every 12 months or as indicated in the Asbestos
Management Plan and record results.
IN
TE
AT
Project/Site Manager should conduct a sub-contract review of all contractors and record
their findings on the Procurement Database
EG
2.3.14.7 Feedback & Action
2.3.14.8 Records
1
An effective Management System/ Asbestos Management Plan should be in place to

protect staff, operatives and the public. Details should include:
(a)
Label ACMs clearly with a suitable asbestos warning sign and make personnel aware
of where it is located;
(b)
Make a note of where ACMs are on a site plan or other records and keep this
information up-to-date;
(c)
Maintain records demonstrating that both training and information in relation to

asbestos has been delivered to personnel;
(d)
Inadvertent Exposure and Health Records shall be kept and archived for a period no
less than 40 years.

Page 9
AL
QCS 2014
AT
IO
2.3.14.9 Appendices
APPENDIX 1 ASBESTOS CONTROL PROCEDURES 1 - 5
PRE-CONSTRUCTION (TENDER) STAGE
Examine documents to
see whether Asbestos
is mentioned
EG
IN
TE
R
CONTROL PROCEDURE 1
Request assistance
from SHE Advisor
Looking For
Asbestos Survey
Does the survey cover the work

area and is it a Type 3 Survey
Request that client TYPE 3

survey be carried out
Proceed to next stage

(Pre-Start)
Refer to SHE Advisor

PRE-START
Internal Tender Handover Meeting
AT
IO
Control Procedure 2
Page 10
AL
QCS 2014
TE
R
Estimator to inform site team of Asbestos Risk

including previous asbestos removal during
handover meeting
IN
Refer back to Pre-
EG
SHE Advisor to
organise Asbestos
Training
Arrange Asbestos removal by a

competent Contractor
Proceed to next stage
Is TYPE 3 Survey in place?
Actions for SITE

MANAGER
Training Required
Request assistance
from She Advisor
Have you attended Asbestos Training
Team review of Asbestos Survey
Ensure all Asbestos associated Surveys and

documentation (including Risk Assessments and
Asbestos Management Controls are retained.

Page 11
AL
QCS 2014
ON SITE
Control Procedure 3
IN
Contractor to Monitor
Asbestos Removal Subcontractors
Ensure relevant control measures from risk

assessment been implemented?
Site Manager to inform all operatives of

controlled Asbestos areas during site induction
process
Asbestos Management
EG
Asbestos Removal
TE
R
Inform all persons on site of risk of

Asbestos Risk
AT
IO
Is Asbestos present on site?
If Asbestos materials are suspected, which

have not been previously identified?
STOP WORK
ISOLATE AREA
PREVENT EXPOSURE
Notify Line Managers

Contractor
INFORM SHE ADVISOR

Refer to site emergency procedure
Notify Sampling
Contractor

SITE EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
AT
IO
Control Procedure 4
Page 12
AL
QCS 2014
STOP, ISOLATE,
PREVENT FURTHER
Site Manager to notify SHE Advisor
IN
EG
Notify Line
Managers
TE
R
Potential Asbestos Disturbance
SHE Advisor to notify MD & SHE Manager
SHE Advisor & Site Team commence incident

investigations
Confirmation of Asbestos Containing Materials

NO
Proceed
with Works
Appoint competent contractor to carry out clean

up/removal
Notify Sampling
Contractor

Page 13
AL
QCS 2014
SHE ADVISORS
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
AT
IO
Control Procedure 5
EG
IN
TE
R
SHE Advisor receives phone

call/notification
Discuss emergency procedures

(stop work, isolate, limit, prevent)
Notify MD & SHE Manager
Decide if incident investigation should be carried out, then

attend site
Assist in planning for professional clean up/removal
Complete RIDDOR Dangerous

Occurrence notification F100
within 10 days
Undertake Investigation
Contact fellow SHE Advisor for

advice
Is exposure considered a Dangerous Occurrence in

accordance with RIDDOR
Note: Decision to be undertaken

in consultation with MD & SHE
Manager
Record notification decision outcome within incident investigation report and close out
investigations with regional and site management
QCS 2014

2.3.14.10
Reference Documents
Page 14
FORMS
1
Asbestos Removal Method Statement Checklist (SHE-FRM-14-01)
Asbestos Removal On-Site Activity Checklist (SHE-FRM-14-02)
Inadvertent Exposure Record (SHE-FRM-14-03)
Method Statement Tracking and Content (SHE-FRM-1-04)
Permit to Work (SHE-FRM-11-02)
Author
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT DETAILS
SECTION
AT
2.3.14.11
IO
AL
FURTHER REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Approvals
EG
2.3.14.12
IN
TE
SHE Manager
Approved by:
NAME
POSITION
IN
COMPANY
SHEQ Director
SIGNATURE &
DATE
QCS 2014

Page 15
REMOVAL METHOD CHECK LIST
ACL
1
ASBESTOS
Introduction
Although we appoint a specialist contractor for the removal of Asbestos we still have a
duty to ensure that they work in accordance with current legislation and do not put
others at risk from their operations. This checklist must be used in conjunction with
your method statement review form.
Training and Capability
AL
Operatives undertaking this nature of work should have been trained annually on
working methods, types of equipment used, types of works carried out and PPE & RPE
use. Note young persons must not undertake asbestos removal works.
Control Arrangements
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note
TE
IN
6
7
8
Checked
EG
Item
Name and address of asbestos removal contractor
Asbestos competency evidence
Name and address of the site to which the method statement relates
Names of the supervisor/foreman and appointed safety adviser and
arrangements for monitoring the work
Type of work e.g. removal of roof sheets, insulation boarding or
lagging
Type and quantity of asbestos and the results of any analysis
Probable duration of works
The controls to be applied to reduce exposure other than by PPE e.g.
controlled wetting method
Details of expected exposures
Details of the steps to be taken to control the release of asbestos to
the environment e.g. enclosure arrangements, negative pressure
equipment, reassurance monitoring, clearance certificate on
completion etc.
Location of decontamination unit
Arrangements for 240v power supply and clean water supply
Details of the equipment, including PPE, to be used for the protection
and decontamination of those carrying out the work
Procedures for the removal of waste from the work area and the site,
and disposal of contaminated water
Procedures for dealing with emergencies
No.
1
2
3
4
AT
IO
Asbestos removal method statements should normally include the following so far as is
relevant to the specific works:
The above list is not exhaustive for every asbestos removal task but should be used as
an aid. Consult with your regional SHE advisor for further guidance.
QCS 2014

Page 16
ON-SITE ACTIVITY CHECK LIST
ACL
2
ASBESTOS
Introduction
Although we appoint a specialist contractor for the removal of Asbestos we still have a
duty to ensure that they work in accordance with current legislation and do not put
others at risk from their operations.
Site Management Requirements
AL
Site Managers and their appointed supervisors must understand company procedures
on Asbestos management. Read through procedures and discuss with your
regional SHE advisor.
Control Arrangements
AT
TE
That asbestos does not escape into the atmosphere during the
stripping operation. Air monitoring around the enclosure during
stripping works will indicate efficiency.
The adequacy of the personal decontamination procedure, so that asbestos

is not released from persons moving through the site.
That the area being stripped is clean, both visually and with the supporting
air sampling results.
That the removal of the enclosure does not give rise to the release of
asbestos fibre. Air monitoring around the enclosure before stripping
work commences and during enclosure removal.
That the storage of removed asbestos on site does not give rise to asbestos
fibre release and that all asbestos is effectively removed from site double
bagged and in suitable skips.
Air clearance certification received for work area concerned prior to re
occupation by Anon and associated contractors.
8
9
10
Checked
Suitable plan/method statement has been supplied, outlines the method of

work and any health and safety issues raised by the risk assessment
Facilities provided by the asbestos removal contractor are suitable and do
not obstruct any access, etc This applies particularly to the enclosure, the
hygiene facility and air ducting.
Before work commences, that the enclosure within which the contractor is
to work, will not permit any escape of asbestos fibre into the atmosphere.
This can be achieved by witnessing the smoke test being carried out.
Insist that the enclosure includes a viewing panel.
A maintenance/inspection schedule is in place for the enclosure and any air
extraction equipment.
IN
Item
EG
No.
1
IO
Asbestos removal works must be monitored throughout their duration and this check
list is intended to assist in this process.
Note
The above list is not exhaustive for every asbestos removal task but should be used as
an aid. Consult with your regional SHE advisor for further guidance.
QCS 2014

Inadvertent Exposure Record
Page 17
Region:
ASBESTOS
Department:
The person named below may have been exposed to airborne asbestos dust in the course of work for
COMPANY. The circumstances are detailed for record purposes.
Worker Number:
Name:
Home Address:
DOB:
Date of Exposure; Start:
Finish:
Time of Exposure; Start:
AT
IO
Project where incident occurred:
Finish:
EG
IN
TE
Respiratory Protective Equipment in use?
Other:
Activity at time of exposure:
Indicate nature of product:

Cement
AIB
Lagging
Sprayed
Job Title
AL
Employer:
YES/NO
Type of asbestos:
Crocidolite (Blue)
Amosite (Brown)
Chrysotile (White)
Other:
YES/NO
Sampling date:
Time:
Air testing results attached?
Name of person completing this form:

Signature:
Title:
Region:
Department
Date:
This record should form part of the investigation into the inadvertent exposure; all records must be
kept for a minimum of 40 years.
QCS 2014

Part 2.3.15: Environmental Protection
Page 1
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
MANAGEMENT
/
ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM (SAMAS) ........................................................... 1
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES ................................... 1
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ........................................................................ 1
2.3.15.1 Responsibilities ...................................................................................................... 4

2.3.15.2 Definitions .............................................................................................................. 5
Reference Documents ..................................................................................... 12
2.3.15.5
AL
2.3.15.4 Guidance to This Procedure .................................................................................. 9
IO
2.3.15.13 Author ................................................................................................................ 25
AT
2.3.15.14 Approvals ........................................................................................................... 25
EG
IN
TE
2.3.15.14 Approvals26
QCS 2014

Page 2
Process Map
Input
Design
Procurement
Contact SHE
for input
Receive
contract
documents
Communicate
any design
decision that
impacts in
waste and
environment
Risk
Assessment
and ECCoP
Procedures
Project
Management
Dept: Complete Risk Assessment and produce specific

ECCoP and SWMP opportunity/early decision
SHE
Output
With Project
team/Estimati
ng assist with
Risk
Assessment /
ECCoP
and
SWMP
SWMP
documents
or client
documents
Tender ECCoP
SWMP
AL
Pre-Construction
Contract
Documents
Estimating
Review and
implement with
SHE team
Assist Audit,
check and
correct
ECCoP
Guidance
SHE-FRM8
05 01
TE
SWMP
Develop and complete on site record Waste through TRAKER
Works Order
Request
Assist
SWMP
IN
Monthly Data
Collection Form
(SHE-FRM-8
05-01)
EG
Construction
AT
IO
Draft ECCoP
and Risk
Assessment
SHE-FRM-1-03
Method
Statement
or
Task Risk
Assessment
SHE-FRM-1-02
Assist
SWMP Archive
documents
O & Ms
O & Ms,
Issue to client
Documents for
archive SWMP
Consent Records
Etc.
Issue to Client
Key
Activity
Guidance
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
The purpose of this procedure is to provide a framework by which environmental impacts and
aspects will be managed. COMPANY Policies and in compliance with the requirements of the
Environmental Management System Standard BS EN ISO 14001.
The Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 translates environmental policy objectives into a
benchmark standard of environmental operation and this Environmental Management System may
be subject to third party, independent certification by external Environmental Auditors.
The Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 provides a structure in which legislative
requirements, best practice and pollution prevention obligations can be addressed in a logical,
orderly manner. The framework can be extended to incorporate Client and/or regulatory nonstandard requirements. The law also provides a vehicle for corporate commitments to be translated
into everyday activities.
AL
IO
SCOPE
AT
1. This procedure covers all COMPANY Projects and locations under the control of
COMPANY. A COMPANY is defined as the organization with responsibility for
management of safety at a construction site.
EG
IN
TE
Note: Environment Ministry is the competent authority in relation to matter relating to

environmental protection and any spillages of hazardous material/substances must
reported accordingly.
QCS 2014

Page 4
2.3.15.1.1 SHE Director
1

PROJECT/SITE MANAGER/SUPERVISORS
Ensure this procedure is established and works are carried out in accordance with this procedure.
Environmental or SHE Advisers should be contacted to carry out the Environmental Survey and
Risk Assessment and assist site management in the implementation of the Environmental
Protection Law No. 30 of 2002. Successful operation of the system is dependant on Project
Management's commitment to make it work.
2.3.15.1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGER/ADVISOR/SHE ADVISER
Provide advice and support in the application and monitoring of this procedure. In conjunction with
Project Management, carry out Environmental Survey and Risk Assessment form and produce
project specific framework.
IO
AL
Determine the relevant issues identified by this procedure and provide for adequate resources at
the tender stage.
AT
2.3.15.1.3 PROCUREMENT/ESTIMATING
Consider environmental issues in the preparation of designs and provide input to the construction
process to facilitate environmental best practice.
IN
TE
2.3.15.1.4 DESIGNER
EG
2.3.15.1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CO-ORDINATOR

In most cases the Site Safety Co-ordinator shall assume the role as Site Environmental Coordinator.
Where more than one Site Environmental Co-ordinator is appointed their areas of responsibility
shall be clearly defined and agreed with them.
The role of the Site Environmental Co-ordinator is to assist the site/location manager to comply
with their environmental responsibilities.
The main duties of the Site Environmental Co-ordinator are as follows:
(a)
To assist management in identifying environmental requirements set out in the contract

documentation.
(b)
Accompany Environmental Advisers during visits to site.
(c)
Assist management in the implementation of the Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of

2002.
(d)
Co-ordinate and attend Environmental forum meetings.
(e)
Conduct regular environmental inspections to check compliance with the Environmental

Protection Law No. 30 of 2002.
(f)
Liaise with management to facilitate environmental improvement where deficiencies have

been highlighted.
QCS 2014

Page 5
(g)
Respond to observations/comments from personnel with environmental concerns.
(h)
To maintain a liaison role with COMPANY Environmental Adviser and the appropriate local
agencies (e.g. Labor & Environment Ministries)
(i)
Assist the Site Safety Co-coordinator in the timing of environmental awareness talks.
(j)
To assist in site induction preparations and/or presentations.
(k)
Ensure adequate emergency procedures are developed for the site/location
2.3.15.1.6 DUTIES OF WASTE CO-ORDINATOR

In association with the Purchasing Team, monitor sub or work package contractors replies relating
to waste.
Notify sub or work package contractors of site requirements relating to waste including separation.
Monitor waste handling and containment on site or at the permanent location ensuring that the
requirements of the Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 are being fulfilled.
Check that the waste is disposed of at an appropriately authorized facility obtaining relevant copies
of documentation and as necessary follow loads to disposal facilities to support this requirement.
Report any inadequacies in carrier performance immediately to the site or permanent location
manager and the Purchasing Team.
Report any failure of sub or work package contractors to handle waste correctly to the site or
permanent location manager.
Liaise with the SHE Team if there are any doubts on classification of waste such as hazardous
waste.
Where COMPANY vehicles carry waste, determine that the waste to be carried is acceptable to the
authorized waste manager/disposer for whom it is destined.
Maintain records for archiving for a period of three years.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
2.3.15.2.1 RISK ASSESSMENT

1
2.3.7.1.2
2
The process of hazard, aspect and impact identification, assessment of the risk and identification of
the controls required to manage the risk to an acceptable level to ensure the health and safety of
those affected by the activity and the protection of the environment from harm.
HAZARD/ASPECT/IMPACT
Is something with the potential to cause harm (this can include substances or machines, methods
of work, harm/damage to the environment including the potential of causing a statutory nuisance
and other aspects of work organization).
2.3.15.2.3 METHOD STATEMENT

1
A statement describing the proposed working methods that address the output from a risk
assessment process. A Method Statement provides instruction and guidance for those individuals
carrying out the activities.
QCS 2014
2.3.7.1.4
1

Page 6
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION LAW NO. 30 OF 2002
The Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 forms a key part of COMPANYs
Environmental Management System, particularly on larger projects, and provides an
effective environmental management tool for a project, office or other fixed location.

2.3.15.3.1 INITIAL CONTRACT OR SUB-CONTRACT ENQUIRY
Pollution sources potential or impact identified
(b)
Possible areas of pollution/contamination, or potentially contaminated past and use, e.g.

landfill, heavy industrial works.
(c)
Conditions of any Environmental Statement (contact the Environmental Adviser).
(d)
Waste types and quantities likely to be generated.
(e)
Other environmental issues such as special Client requirements.
AL
(a)
In view of the necessity to identify applicable legislation and prevent breaches, advice, where
appropriate, shall be sought from the following sources:
AT
On receipt of the tender enquiry, the contract documents shall be reviewed by the Estimating
Team to ascertain the following (where required assistance should be sought from the
Environmental Adviser) :
IO
TE
The environmental issues identified in 3.1 shall be communicated to the project team to allow
environmental issues to be addressed by appropriate team members such as Designers,
Estimators etc.
IN
(a) The Client

(b) Enforcing Authorities (e.g. Labor & Environmental Ministries)
(c) Environmental Adviser/Manager
EG
2.3.15.3.2 TENDER
The elements of the Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 (Appendix 1) shall be taken into
account in the tender submission in addition to any other requirements identified through section
3.1.
Any tendering sub or work package contractors shall be made aware of any environmental
constraints or issues potentially affecting their works and likely commercial effects.
It is a policy requirement that only sub or work package contractors who can demonstrate a
commitment to environmental management shall be invited to tender for work. Estimators or
procurement personnel shall therefore implement this requirement where the environmental
performance of a sub or work package contractor is previously unknown.
2.3.15.3.3 DESIGN
1
Initial and any subsequent design shall take into account the requirements of the Environmental
Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 (see Appendix 1).
QCS 2014

Page 7
2.3.15.3.4 CONTRACT AWARD/PRE-COMMENCEMENT

The Project Manager shall contact the Environmental Adviser to initiate an Environmental Risk
Assessment (Appendix 1) for applicable contracts and advise on establishing contact with the
appropriate regulatory authorities (e.g. Labor & Environment Ministries). The Environmental
Adviser shall carry out the baseline Risk Assessment with assistance from the Project Team.
On contract award the Project Manager shall review the Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of
2002 (Appendix 1) in conjunction with an Environmental Adviser and relevant parts implemented.
Additional environmental requirements identified in section 3.4 shall be incorporated in and be
managed through the SHE Management Plan specific to the contract.
The project Supply Chain Manager/Procurement Team shall make sub and work package
contractors shall be made aware of their environmental obligations as detailed under the
Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 and if applicable the SHE Management Plan.
For smaller projects that are instructed via a works order an Environmental Protection Law No. 30
of 2002 is not required. Environmental Management (Document, efficient etc) must be considered
as part of the Risk Assessment SHE-PRO-001.
AL
2.3.15.3.5 CONSTRUCTION PHASE
The Construction Manager/Project Manager/Site Manager shall ensure that the

Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 has been implemented on site where applicable.
In the event of a works order being placed environmental impact is assessed via a Job/Task Risk
Assessment/Method Statement (SHE-FRM-1-02) or detailed Method Statement (SHE-FRM-1-03)
dependent on the scope of work.
The Project Team shall include Environmental issues in site inductions within Safety, Health and
Environmental Information and Training for all Employees, Newly Assigned Employees, and
Subcontractors, (SHE-PRO-006)
Environmental issues shall be covered in detail within Safety, Health and Environmental Risk
Management and Written Safe Systems of Work SHE-PRO-001
IN
TE
AT
IO
The Project Management Team shall ensure that all site supervisory staff regularly monitors
environmental matters whilst executing their normal site duties.
The Project Management Team shall ensure environmental matters shall be listed and
discussed as an agenda item.
Project Manager, with the SHE Adviser, shall review the Environmental Protection Law No. 30
of 2002 on a regular basis throughout the project, and in line with the SHE Management Plan, to
take into account changes in the job.
The Project Team and Environmental Adviser shall, in pursuance of good relationships with
enforcing authorities and where it is deemed practicable, contact the statutory authority (e.g.
Labor & Environment Ministries), invite them to site to inspect works and keep them fully informed
of the progress of the works. This should be managed through the SHE Management Plan.
The Project Team shall record and report any environmental incidents in accordance with SHEPRO-008 The Report and Investigation of Accidents and Incidents procedure.
EG
2.3.15.3.6 OFFICES/FIXED LOCATIONS

1
The Office/ Facility Manager shall develop an Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 and
waste plan for each office/fixed location (yard/depot/factory etc), in conjunction with the
Environmental Adviser.
QCS 2014

Page 8
2.3.15.3.7 HANDOVER
1
The Project Team shall ensure all temporary consents are closed out with the appropriate authority or
handed over to the Client; the Client shall be informed of any statutory and/or on-going
environmental restrictions, permits, and consents operating on the contract at handover.
2.3.15.3.8 SITE CLEARANCE

1
All waste materials under the control of COMPANY shall be removed from site in accordance with
the COMPANY Environmental Standards and Guidance documents.
Following site clearance the client shall be invited to agree that the site is clear of any waste,
polluting or contaminating materials. Agreement shall be recorded in writing.
2.3.15.2.9 NOTICES
Any Environmental Notice pertaining to any environmental matter shall be notified using the
COMPANY SHE Alert System, SHEPRO-008 The Report and Investigation of Accidents and
Incidents procedure.
Any such notice shall be fully complied with and copies served on sub contractors or others likely to
be affected by the document contents.
IO
AL
Should any summons be received in relation to environmental matters it shall be referred to the
COMPANY SHE Director who shall forward it immediately to the COMPANY MD and Regional
MD and will brief solicitors and handle the matter directly.
AT
PROSECUTIONS
Formal visits to site by a Workplace Inspector shall be accompanied at all times and the Project
Manager made aware of their visit who in return will notify the Environmental Adviser or
Environmental Manager using the First Alert Form SHE-FRM-8-01
(
).
EG
IN
TE
2.3.15.3.10 VISITS BY LABOR & ENVIRONMENT MINISTRIES, WORKPLACE INSPECTORS
Notes shall be made of any action taken, comments, testing and/or sample taken including
locations at which samples have been taken during a formal visit.
Should any sample be taken off site the company should request a share of the sample and this
shall be retained, if it is refused the fact shall be recorded. Details of the exact origin of the sample,
time of sampling and the method used shall be requested.
Should a statement be requested the following should be adhered to:
(a)
Immediately notify the COMPANY SHE Director and Line Manager.
(a)
Request the presence of a third party (Project Manager or equivalent) who shall take notes.
(b)
Request a copy of any statement you have made and make it clear that you wish a copy of
the statement to be made available to your employer.
For routine visits by a Workplace Inspector, record in the Project Diary and notify the SHE Team.
2.3.15.3.11 MAINTENANCE PERIOD

1
Where maintenance operations impose a serious environmental risk any such operation shall only
be carried out under the guidance of, and in compliance with a prepared environmental method
statement and/or Client's occupier's environmental codes of practice.
QCS 2014
2

Page 9
Maintenance staff/operatives shall be briefed that their operations shall not affect the environmental
integrity of plant and control measures shall be put into place to ensure that all environmental risks
are adequately controlled.
2.3.15.3.12 POST CONTRACT AND COMPLETION ENVIRONMENTAL

1
Wherever an environmental problem is raised by the client after occupation the COMPANY
Environmental Manager shall be notified as soon as possible.
2.3.15.4 Guidance to This Procedure

1. The framework Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 (Appendix 1) is designed to
AL
be tailored to the environmental risks that are specific to the project/office, through the use
of the Environmental Risk Assessment which precedes it. The Environmental Protection
Law No. 30 of 2002 provides a robust framework detailing the companys minimum
environmental performance and community engagement standards, and can be amended
to include any contract or Client specific requirements.
2. In the event of a works order being placed environmental impact is assessed via a
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Job/Task Risk Assessment/Method Statement (SHE-FRM-1-02) or detailed Method

Statement (SHE-FRM-1-03) dependent on the scope of work.
QCS 2014

Page 10
APPENDIX 1 - ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION LAW NO. 30 OF 2002, ENVIRONMENTAL

SURVEY AND RISK ASSESSMENT FORM (SHE-FRM-15-12)
HOW TO DEAL WITH POTENTIAL THREATS TO THE ENVIRONMENT
1
Site-specific environmental threats should be identified through the review of contract

documentation and desk studies with the Project Team and incorporated in to the Environmental
Survey and Risk Assessment Form. The control measures identified should be included within the
Template of Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 and site specific controls (mitigation)
included in order to control these threats.
Task Specific Method statement (SHE-FRM-1-03) or Job/Task Risk Assessment /Method

Statement (SHE-FRM-1-02) should also include specific environmental controls. As detailed below:
IDENTIFICATION OF POTENTIAL THREATS TO THE ENVIRONMENT
AL
All activities which will require a risk assessment to be completed for the Health and Safety of the
personnel undertaking the task must also include any environmental risks associated. Some commonly
occurring potential threats to the environment can exist when:
IO
(a) there is a quantity of polluting material stored on site,
AT
(b) a site/material is located in an environmentally sensitive location such as near to a

water source or surface water drain, next to a residential property/school (Examples
of polluting materials: diesel, silty water, lubricant oils, paints, adhesives, battery
acid, slurry, cement, treated timber, pesticide),
(c) a site contains contaminated ground/materials,
(d) noise/ vibration levels are predicted to be high,
TE
(e) an invasive species is present (Japanese Knotweed, Himalayan Balsam etc.),

(f) waste is produced,
IN
(g) dust is generated,
Note: The above are commonly occurring however this does not cover all potential environmental
risks, which could be present on any specific site.
EG
(h) plant/machinery is refueled
COMMUNICATING THE ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS

1
Once a specific risk assessment or method statement (SHE-FRM-1-03) or Job/Task Risk

Assessment/Method Statement (SHE-FRM-1-02) has been produced then all affected personnel
must be informed of the relevant controls specified, most probably through a method statement
briefing.
REVIEWING THE ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS

1
Once the specific risk assessment has been established it is imperative that it is periodically
reviewed in light of changing circumstances on site, different materials and locations.
CHECK
1
All risk assessments should include any environmental risks associated with the activity. As an
example, any activity which uses plant/ machinery will have diesel as a potential pollutant.
QCS 2014

Page 11
Suitable control measures in the risk assessment should ensure that diesel from our site does not
cause any pollution during either refueling or operations.
2
Action owners shall be assigned to all appropriate sections of the Environmental Protection Law
No. 30 of 2002 and a regular review of progress shall be held at a separate environmental meeting
or environmental issues can be discussed at regular site meetings.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION LAW NO. 30 OF 2002 (SHE-FRM-15-13)

1
The following items shall be addressed in order to ensure that the Environmental Protection Law
No. 30 of 2002 is implemented effectively:
(a) Assign responsibility to site management;
(b) Assess needs for training or awareness;
(c) Co-ordinate liaison with Ministrys
(d) Measure environmental performance of the project against that planned;
AL
(e) Amend Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 ;

(f) Review environmental inspections/audits;
(g) Develop the profile of environmental performance on-site;
IO
(h) Ensure continuous improvement.
The above actions and review of progress may be conducted by the Project Management Team,
Environmental Team, SHE Advisers, Engineers, Client.
The Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 shall be revised on a regular basis, and in line
with the SHE Management Plan (e.g. every 3 months), to take into account changes in the job; the
revision programme will be dictated by the SHE Management Plan.
EG
IN
TE
AT
Environmental Forum Structure
QCS 2014

Page 12

2.3.15.5.1 FORMS
(a) Site Waste Management Plan Options
(b) SWMP Word Version (SHE-FRM-15-01)
(c) Complaints/Comments/Compliments Record (SHE-FRM-15-02)
(d) Water Discharge Inspection Sheet (SHE-FRM-15-05)
(e) Controlled Waste Transfer Note (SHE-FRM-15-06)
(f) Environmental Vibration Recording Sheet (SHE-FRM-15-07)
AL
(g) Communication Record (SHE-FRM-15-09)

(h) Environmental Check Open culvert/Stream (SHE-FRM-15-10)
(i) Environmental Noise Survey Summary Sheet (SHE-FRM-15-11)
IO
(j) Method Statement (SHE-FRM-1-03)
(k) Job/Task Risk Assessment/Method Statement (SHE-FRM-1-02)
AT
(l) First Alert (SHE-FRM-8-01)
(m) Environmental Survey and Risk Assessment (SHE-FRM-15-12)
TE
2.3.15.5.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
(n) (SHE-FRM-15-13)
Safety, Health and Environmental Risk Management and Written Safe Systems of Work (SHEPRO-001)
Safety, Health and Environmental Information and Training for all Employees, Newly Assigned
Employees, Promoters and Sub-Contractor Personnel (SHE-PRO-006)
Contractors Check List for Initial Safety, Health and Environmental Meeting (SHE-PRO-007)
The Report and Investigation of Accidents and Incidents (SHE-PRO-008)
EG
IN
QCS 2014

Page 13
2.3.15.6 Contractor Requirements

1. The Contractor will be required to appoint a suitably qualified Contractors Environmental
Manager (CEM) who will ensure that all reasonably practicable means are adopted to fulfill
the environmental requirements of the Employer. The Section D Technical Deliverables
indicates the qualifications and experience required. The CEM will hold regular meetings,
at least monthly, with the Engineer to discuss construction activities and compliance with
the Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP).
2. All CVs of contractors environmental management personnel will be subject to review and
approval by the Engineer and, if appropriate, candidates will undertake a formal interview
and be subject to an agreed probationary period. The Engineer has the right of rejection if
environmental management candidates do not reach the required criteria during the
probation period.
AL
2.3.15.7 Legal Framework
IO
1. The Contractor working on the Work Order shall comply with relevant national and
international legislation, local bylaws and codes of practice. In the absence of appropriate
legislation, recognized best practice will be followed.
AT
2. The contractor shall ensure that all subcontractors and works under their control also
comply with all relevant legislation and codes of practice. Best practice will be followed at
all times.
IN
TE
QCS (Qatar Construction Specifications) latest edition;

Labor Law 14 of the Year 2004;
Qatar Traffic Law No 19 of the Year 2007;
Environmental protection Law 30 of the Year 2002;
Executive Bylaws of Environment Protection Law Issued under Ordinance Law
No. (30) of 2002CDD (Department of Civil Defense) Fire Safety Handbook; and
Worker Rights Booklet 2009 (National Human Rights Committee).
EG
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3. The following national legislation and codes, but not limited to, will apply:
f.
4. In the event that legislation is updated the latest version shall be followed. All relevant new
legislation will be followed as appropriate.
5. The contractor shall comply with all Environment Impact Assessment Mitigation and
Environmental Permit Conditions.
2.3.15.8 Programme Management Delivery System (PMDS)

2.3.15.9 Environmental Management and Responsibilities
2.3.15.9.1 General Requirements
1. The contractor shall be required to have a recognized environmental management
system such as ISO 14001:2004 or be able to demonstrate that they are actively working
towards implementing such a system. Prior to the commencement of the project the
contractor shall produce a CEMP that will be reviewed by the Engineer. The CEMP will
be submitted for approval within 30 days of the award of contract. The CEMP must be
approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. The Contractor shall review
QCS 2014

Page 14
and update the CEMP as appropriate but no less than quarterly. A record of the review
and any recommendations shall be produced and retained on file by the Contractor.
2.3.15.9.2 Environmental Policy
1. The Contractor shall have an environmental policy dated and signed by the most senior
person in the company. The policy shall:
AL
(a) Be appropriate to the nature, scale and environmental impacts of the organizations
activities, products and services.
(b) Include a commitment to continual improvement in environmental performance
(c) Include a commitment to comply with all applicable legislation and with other
requirements to which the organization subscribes which relate to its environmental
aspects
(d) Provide a framework for setting and reviewing objectives and targets
(e) Be documented, implemented and maintained
(f) Communicated to all persons working for or on behalf of the organization
(g) Be available to the public
IO
2.3.15.9.3 Environmental Aspects
2. Environmental Risk Assessment
AT
1. The Contractor is expected to use a qualitative approach to identify and evaluate potential
environmental aspects along with any controls to prevent or mitigate environmental
damage. A simple risk matrix should be used to assess and evaluate all environmental
risks on the project. An example of a risk assessment is presented below.
TE
A. STAGE ONE: Identify your Environmental Aspects
IN
1. Your environmental aspects are how you interact with the environment e.g. your
activities, products or services. These will be identified for normal, abnormal and
emergency conditions.
EG
2. Key to operating conditions:

3. Normal those activities, products or services as they are carried out or used on a
regular day to day basis and operating as intended.
4. Abnormal those activities, products and services as they are carried out or used on an
irregular or limited basis but as intended e.g. maintenance
5. Emergency those activities, products or services as they are carried out or used in an
unintentional manner
B. STAGE TWO: Identify your Environmental Impacts
1. Your environmental impacts are how your activities, products or services cause a change
to the environment. These impacts can be positive or negative.
2. Consider the environmental media that could be affected:
Air quality;
Water quality;
Land (contamination);
Waste (solid, liquid, hazardous);
Resource use (energy, water, materials consumption);
Nuisance (noise, odour, dust);
Wildlife; and
Carbon.
QCS 2014

Page 15
C. STAGE THREE: Detail Existing Control Measures

1. There may be control measures in place that limit the risk. The controls may be
documented in procedures, physical controls (e.g. spill kits, interceptors) or control
through training.
D. STAGE FOUR: Evaluate the Environmental Risk
1. Evaluate the significance of the environmental risk. Example criteria:
Legal Breach;
Risk of environmental damage or harm;
Significant use of resources; and
Third party interest (stakeholder interest, source of complaints / questions).
E. STAGE FIVE: Determine Environmental Risk Rating
AL
1. Determine whether the risk to environment is High or Low risk. An example of how to do
this is provided in the Environmental Register, available on the PDMS.
IO
2. If the activity is identified as High risk It will require management action to improve level
of control e.g. permit may be required, EIA, mitigation detailed in CEMP. It will require
documentation of control within EMS e.g. development of procedure or training
requirement
F. STAGE SIX: Implementation
AT
3. If the activity is identified Low risk It does not require further action at this stage.
1. The risk assessment process should be reviewed during the activity and any changes or
updates should be communicated to those involved in the project.
TE
2. Worked Example
3. Activity: Storage Oil stored in tank used for powering generator
IN
4. Environmental Aspect: Leak identified from fully bunded Oil storage tank
5. Environmental impacts:
EG
Potential for contamination of land;

Potential contamination of local water bodies; and
Hazardous waste from clean-up activities.
6. Controls:
Ensure oil tank is fully bunded capable of holding 110% of tank capacity;
Ensure sight gauge and pipe work are contained within the bund;
Introduce delivery procedures, signage and training;
Carry out regular inspection of the bund and tank to check for leaks; and
Have a spill kit at the location.
7. Risk:
(a) High Risk If the fuel escapes to water or land it would be in breach of regulations and
would be costly to clean up.
2.3.15.9.4 Objectives, Targets and Improvement Programmes
1. The Contractor shall establish, implement and maintain documented environmental
objectives and targets at relevant functions and levels within the organization. Objectives
and targets shall be measurable and should be consistent with the environmental policy
and the sustainable development objectives set out in the PMDS. When establishing and
reviewing its objectives and targets the contractor shall take into account the legal and
other requirements to which it subscribes and its significant environmental aspects.
2. The contractor shall establish, implement and maintain programmes for achieving its
objectives and targets. Programmes shall include:
QCS 2014

Page 16
a) Designated responsibility for achieving objectives and targets at relevant

functions and levels of the organization;
b) The means, resources and timeframes by which they are to be achieved
2.3.15.9.5 Roles and Responsibility
1. The contractor shall ensure that resources are available to develop, implement, maintain
and improve the CEMP including:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Human resources;
Skills and training;
Organizational infrastructure;
Technology, plant and equipment; and
Financial resources.
AL
2. The Contractor shall define, document and communicate the roles, responsibilities and
authorizations in order to facilitate effective environmental management.
IO
1. The following provides guidance on roles and responsibilities at various function levels
and shall be used as a basis for further development in conjunction with the PMDS and
QCS 2010.
AT
2. Business Head/Director: Responsible for implementation of the Environment Policy and

overall environmental performance.
3. Contractor Environmental Manager (CEM): Responsible for development and
implementation of the CEMP. Duties shall include but not be restricted to:
EG
IN
TE
(a) Development and implementation of the CEMP to meet the requirements of the Work
Order in general, and PMDS;
(b) Monitoring and reporting on environmental performance;
(c) Ensuring that all staff are appropriately trained and informed;
(d) Setting, monitoring and reviewing environmental objectives and targets;
(e) Maintaining adequate environmental records;
(f) Liaising with the client and others as required;
(g) Ensuring that relevant statutory legislation is monitored and the requirements followed;
(h) Ensuring that accidents and incidents are appropriately reported;
(i) Ensuring that environmental issues are considered by all staff and are applied to their
work; Responding to unplanned and emergency situations as required; and
(j) Reviewing performance against relevant objectives and targets.
4. Site Based Responsible Environmental Person (SBREP): Duties shall include but not
be restricted to:
(a) Ensuring that the CEMP is developed, implemented and maintained on site according
to the LR&DP PMDS requirements;
(b) Reporting on performance of the CEMP and make recommendations for improvement;
(c) Undertaking daily/weekly checks as required ;
(d) Undertaking monitoring and reporting on environmental performance as required; and
(e) Delivering toolbox talks.
All staff: Duties shall include but not be restricted to:
(a) Being environmentally aware and implementing the CEMP as appropriate;
QCS 2014

Page 17
(b) For undertaking their work in a manner that does not adversely impact on the
environment; and
(c) Reporting environmental accidents, incidents and near misses.
2.3.15.9.6 Competences, Training and Awareness
1. The Contractor shall identify the training needs associated with the project, CEMP and its
environmental aspects and produce a training plan. The training plan shall be subject to
approval by the Engineer. The contractor shall provide appropriate training or take other
action to meet these needs and shall retain associated training records.
2. The Contractor shall establish and implement a procedure to ensure that all persons
working for it or on its behalf are aware of:
The importance of the Environmental Policy and compliance with it;
The requirements of the PMDS and CEMP;
The significant environmental aspects and the potential impacts of the work;
The benefits of improved environmental performance;
The importance of complying with relevant environmental law and environmental
permit
(f) conditions;
(g) The importance of complying with specified procedures; and
(h) The potential consequences of departure from specified procedures, work instructions
and method statements.
(i)
AT
IO
AL
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
TE
3. The Contractor shall ensure that all staff with specific responsibility for the environment is
trained in accordance with the PMDS.
2.3.15.9.7 Communication
EG
IN
1. The Contractor shall establish, implement and maintain communication procedures to

enable the effective implementation of the CEMP. Specifically the communication
procedure will be for:
(a) Internal communications between the various levels and functions within the
organization; and
(b) Receiving, documenting and responding to relevant communications from external
stakeholders including (but not limited to) GEC, PMC, PWA, MMUP and MoE.
2. All communication procedures must be compliant with the PMDS.
2.3.15.9.8 Documentation
1. The Contractor shall develop, implement and maintain a document system to include, but
not be restricted to:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
The Environmental Policy;

Environmental improvement objectives and targets;
Including competencies and training;
Relevant EIA documentation;
CEMP:
Procedures
Method statements
Work instructions
(f) Record Keeping:
QCS 2014

Page 18
Daily inspections
Weekly inspections
Internal and external audit reports
Environmental permits and consents.
3. The Contractor shall develop, implement and maintain a procedure to:

(a) Approve documents for adequacy and accuracy before issue;
(b) Review, update and reapprove documents;
(c) Ensure that changes to documents and the current revision status of documents are
identified;
(d) Ensure that relevant and up to date documents are available at the point of use;
(e) Ensure that documents are legible and identifiable;
(f) Ensure that documents of external origin are identified and their distribution controlled;
(g) Prevent the unintended use of obsolete documents retained for any purpose.
The controls to manage and mitigate environmental damage will be identified and put in
place during the design and development phase of the project. Despite this there are
activities that can result in environmental damage which can only be managed and
prevented through appropriate construction methods, awareness and training and
appropriate contingency measures. Where a project has been the subject of an
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study and report, many of these measures will be
stipulated in that EIA Report and associated CEMPs.
AT
IO
1.
AL
2.3.15.9.9 Environmental Control Plans
IN
TE
2. The Contractor shall establish, implement and maintain documented environmental control
procedures to manage the activities associated with the identified significant environmental
aspects. These procedures should be consistent with the PMDS and the Environmental
Policy, objectives and targets. It should be noted that all significant environmental aspects
should be controlled. Environmental Control Plans must include, but not be limited to:
EG
(a) Soil Erosion and Sedimentation;

(b) Waste Management;
(c) Air Quality;
(d) Pollution Prevention;
(e) Water and Energy Use;
(f) Dewatering activities;
(g) Construction Noise;
(h) Light Pollution;
(i) Archaeological and Cultural;
(j) Stockpile management;
(k) Dust and air-born particulate control;
(l) Contaminated land; and
(m) Surface and groundwater protection
2.3.15.9.10 Environmental Inspections, Monitoring and Reporting

(a) Daily Site Inspections
1. The Contractor shall carry daily site inspections to monitor environmental performance in
accordance with the PMDS (Site Environmental Inspection Form). The inspections should
include, but not be limited to, checking that:
QCS 2014

Page 19
All waste is appropriately stored and segregated;

Waste skips are covered to prevent windblown litter;
Drip trays are in place for all stored equipment and plant;
All chemicals/fuels are stored with appropriate containment/bunds/cover;
Construction noise is within permitted limits and does not create a nuisance;
Dust does not create a nuisance;
Spill kits are present; and
Fencing is secure.
2. Where there are particular permit conditions that require routine checks or similar, these
should be included as appropriate. Records of daily inspections shall be kept and
maintained.
(b) Weekly Inspections
1. The Contractor shall carry out weekly inspections to monitor environmental performance in
Records of weekly inspections shall be kept and maintained
TE
(c) Monitoring and Reporting
AT
IO
AL
accordance with the PMDS. The inspections should include, but not be limited to checking
that:
Daily checklists have been completed;
Waste storage areas have been checked and there is no build-up of waste materials ;
Spill kits have been checked and contain all relevant materials;
The performance of all pollution control equipment has been checked and the
equipment is working effectively;
Noise reduction equipment has been checked and is operating effectively; and
Septic tanks are not overfull/discharging.
1. The contractor shall be required to establish, implement and maintain procedures to
EG
IN
monitor, measure and report, on a monthly basis, statistics in accordance with the
requirements of the PMDS (Monthly Environmental Statistics Report). Statistics will
include, but will not be restricted, to:
General Environmental Statistics:

o Environmental incidents, accidents and near misses;
o Site inspections;
o Environmental audits;
o Environmental complaints;
o Number of training sessions delivered including topic and numbers of attendees.
Waste Management
o Total amount of waste produced by type:
General;
Hazardous;
Excavated Material;
Metals;
Liquid.
o Total amount of waste disposed of by type to:
Landfill;
Recycling;
Recovery/reuse;
Ground.
Total amount of water consumed:
QCS 2014

Page 20
o Ground water;
o Mains, potable water.
Noise and Vibration:
o Number of complaints;
o Monitoring undertaken;
o Mitigation measures applied.
Air quality, dust and odour:
o Number of complaints;
o Monitoring undertaken;
o Mitigation measures applied.
Ecology, protected species and habitats:
o Protected species or habitats identified on site;
o Vegetation removed.
AL
Archaeological or cultural artefacts:

o Number of archaeological or cultural artefacts identified on site.
2.3.15.9.11 Auditing
IO
1. The Contractor shall conduct internal audits of the CEMP at regular planned intervals to
ensure that it is:
Audits shall be conducted in line with the requirements of ISO 19011 2002 Guidance for
quality and/or environmental systems auditing. Audit Reports will be maintained by the
contractor.
TE
2.
AT
(a) Properly implemented and maintained;

(b) Conforms to the requirements of the PMDS.
2.3.15.9.12 Nonconformity and Corrective and Preventative Action
IN
1. The Contractor shall establish, implement and maintain procedures to deal with actual and
potential non-conformity (ies) and for taking corrective and preventative action.
Internal contractor audits;

Audits by GEC/PMC;
Audits undertaken by external certification bodies; and
General observations.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
EG
2. Non-conformities may be identified through:
3. The Contractors procedures shall define the requirements for:

(a) Identify and correct non-conformities;
(b) Mitigating the environmental impacts of non-conformities;
(c) Investing non-conformities including identifying
root causes and implementing
appropriate actions to avoid their reoccurrence;
(d) Evaluating the need for actions to prevent non-conformities and implementing
appropriate actions designed to avoid their reoccurrence;
(e) Setting realistic timeframes for undertaking effective corrective and preventative
actions;
(f) Recording the results of corrective and preventative actions taken; and
(g) Reviewing the effectiveness of corrective and preventative actions.
QCS 2014

Page 21
3. All actions identified should be appropriate to the nature and magnitude of the problem and
the environmental impacts encountered
2.3.15.10 Emergency Response Plan

2.3.15.10.1 Introduction
1. The Contractor shall establish, implement and maintain procedures to identify and manage
potential environmental emergency situations and potential accidents. The contractor shall
respond to actual emergency situations and prevent and mitigate adverse environmental
impacts.
2. The Contractor should periodically test, review and update emergency preparedness and
response procedures
2.3.15.10.2 Key Requirements
AL
1. During construction accidents, incidents and emergencies that have an environmental

impact may occur. In the event of an emergency, the first response is to locate the source
and stop continuation of the situation, followed by the containment, control and mitigation
of the situation.
IO
2. For each construction site the Emergency Response Procedure will be displayed at:
A copy of the Material Safety Data Sheets and an inventory for all the chemicals and their
types and quantity used on the project site shall also be kept at each site office and in
every vehicle used on the project site.
TE
3.
AT
(a) Site Offices;

(b) Remote offices on site; and
(c) Every vehicle on site.
All Contractor personnel and sub-contractors shall be instructed and rehearsed, as

appropriate, in the requirements of the emergency response procedure. Following control
of an incident or emergency, an investigation will be conducted and corrective actions
identified and addressed. The Site HSE Manager shall verify the close out of
environmental related actions. The CEM shall be responsible for notifying the Engineer of
any emergency.
5.
EG
IN
4. The main objectives of the Emergency Preparedness Response Plan are to:
(a) To ensure that all means are available to contain the consequences of an
accidental spill, fire or release of oil/fuel.
(b) To ensure that employees are suitably trained to respond to fire and spill.
(c) To ensure that proper reporting takes place.
(d) To ensure that proper investigation is undertaken.
2.3.15.10.3 Incident Classification and Notification Requirements

1. What is an Environmental Incident
(a) Near miss
An accident or incident that was narrowly avoided; and
An unplanned event that did not result in environmental damage or harm, but had
the potential to do so.
(b) Non-Compliance with legislation or permit
A breach of conditions set out in the environmental permit e.g. noise limits, waste
water effluent, air quality, hazardous waste disposal; and
Breach of Qatar Environmental Protection Law.
(c) Typical environmental incidents:
QCS 2014

Page 22
Spillage of hazardous substance e.g. oil, detergent, paint, fuel;

Loss of containment fuel, oil, liquid waste;
Fire;
Explosion;
Release to atmosphere e.g. gas, dust, pollutants;
Excessive noise, vibration, light, dust or odour;
Land contamination;
Pollution from de-watering processes/unauthorised discharge;
Incorrect disposal or storage of waste;
Contamination of water course, drains, marine environment;
Disturbance of or unplanned/unpermitted damage to or destruction of protected
species, habitat or artefact;
Legal breach/noncompliance with permit conditions; and
Other environmental incidents.
2. Incident Classification
Minor
The material is highly toxic or hazardous
The material has a low toxicity
Incident can easily be controlled e.g. spill contained

with spill kit and materials disposed of correctly
A site worker can usually clean up
Small spill of oil or diesel fuel
A spill of less than 200 litres (or 1 drum)
The incident occurred in a area low sensitivity e.g.
industrial area, hard standing
TE
The incident occurred in sensitive area e.g. close to

residential areas, water course, marine environment
AT
IO
The quantity of material released to environment

was very large (even if not dangerous)
Large number and different type of sensitive

receptors affected
AL
Major
Small number and type of sensitive receptors

affected
IN
3. Reporting Requirements
EG
(a) Major Environmental Incidents Report to the Engineer within 24 hours of the incident
and complete Report Form
(b) Minor Environmental Incidents Report to the Engineer within one week of the incident
and complete Report Form
(c) Non-compliance with legislation, environmental permit or procedure - Report to the
Engineer within one week of the incident and complete Report Form
(d) Near Miss Include detail in Monthly Environmental Report
4. Spill Contingency Plan
(a) The main causes of contamination can occur through:
Spillage of hazardous material including fuel oils, waste materials or chemicals;
Spillage of wastewater sewage and other liquid effluents; and
Spillage of contaminated wash down water with oils, chemicals etc from vehicles,
equipment and machinery.
(b) Prior to commencing activities on site, the Contractor shall develop, implement and
maintain a Spill Contingency Management Plan. The Plan should include but not be
restricted to the mitigation measures below.
Activity
Mitigation Measures

IN
TE
AL
IO
Response
AT
Emergency
The Contractor shall carry out regular inspections/ audits of hazardous

materials usage, handling and storage areas and regular/thorough
maintenance of vehicles and hydraulic systems and inspections of
sanitary facilities and disposal.
In the event of a spill, immediate action shall be taken to contain or
clean up the spill using sand or a suitable absorbent material.
All contractors handling hazardous materials will keep appropriate spill
clean-up material adjacent to storage and maintenance areas.
Minimise the amount of diesel, oil, paint, thinners and other chemicals
stored on site that pose potential spillage environmental hazards and
use materials that minimize environmental impact such as lead free
paints, asbestos free materials etc.
Storage areas will be located away from drains/trenches/wastewater
collection devices in an impervious bund area (volume of the storage
bund >110% of the largest storage tank contained within the bund).
Collection systems will be provided/bunded if necessary under
machinery or equipment that may leak hydrocarbons/hazardous
substances.
All spillages of hazardous materials shall be reported immediately in
accordance with the requirements of the PMDS.
The area shall be inspected by the Contractors Project Manager and
the Engineer and this shall form part of the incident report.
Contaminated soil, rags and other clean up material shall be kept in
appropriate containers before being disposed of in accordance with
DoE guidelines to an approved site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for training all staff in the
Procedures for handling spills and shall provide all staff with
appropriate personal protective equipment.
The Contractor shall provide all staff with appropriate personal
protective equipment.
Avoid impacting adjacent sites by ensuring all contractors activities,
equipment and waste storage is confined to the allocated site
boundary.
Mitigation Actions
Page 23
QCS 2014
5. Contamination Discovery
EG
(a) The contractor must report any suspected contamination discovery, even if the Contractor
did not cause it, to the Engineer.
(b) During construction, indications of possible contamination include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Barrels and containers;
Stained or discoloured earth in contrast with adjoining soil;
Industrial waste debris;
Non-earthy odours which emanate when the earth is disturbed;
Oily residue intermixed with earth;
Sheen on groundwater;
Underground storage tanks;
Fuel/diesel tanks; and
Proximity to petrol stations.
2.3.15.11
Completion and Site Clearance

1.
On completion of construction works the Contractor shall ensure that all waste and
polluting material is removed from the site and is disposed of using appropriately
authorized contractors and ensure that the site is restored in compliance with the terms of
the contract. Following site clearance the Engineer will undertake a final inspection of the
site. Any environmental issues identified during the final inspection will be raised with the
contractor. Mitigation measures and timeframes for completion shall be agreed between
the contractor and the Engineer in line with agreed procedures prior to final sign off.
QCS 2014

2.3.15.12 Glossary of Terms
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Audit regular check of an organisational or projects compliance with procedures,

standards, legislation or other stipulated requirements
Auditor person with the training competence to conduct an audit.
Continual improvement recurring process of enhancing the environmental
management system (EMS) to achieve improvements in overall environmental
performance consistent with the environmental policy.
Corrective action action taken to eliminate the cause of a detected nonconformity.
Environment surroundings in which the organisation operates including air, land, water,
natural resources, flora, fauna, humans and the interrelation.
Environmental aspect element of the organisations (or projects) activities or products
that interact with the environment.
Environmental impact and change to the environment, whether adverse or beneficial
resulting wholly or partly from the organisations environmental aspects.
Environmental Management Plan (EMP) - The EMP is the lead environmental
management document that defines the procedures for achieving the objectives set out in
the Environmental Policy and the identified environmental performance targets for the
project. An EMP can also provide the framework for which commitments made in an
Environmental Impact Assessment report or the requirements of planning or other
development conditions can be realised. A Construction Environmental Management
Plan (CEMP) outlines a contractors approach to environmental management, with respect
to project commitments, throughout the construction phase and with the primary aim of
reducing any adverse impacts from construction on sensitive receivers.
Environmental Policy and identified environmental performance targets for the
project.
Environmental Management System (EMS) management system used to develop and
implement an organisations environmental policy and manage its environmental
aspects.
Environmental objective overall environmental goal, consistent with the environmental
policy.
Environmental performance measurable results of an organisations management of its
environmental aspects.
Environment policy overall intention and directions of an organisation or project, related
to its environmental performance as formally expressed by top management. It provides
a framework for action and for the setting of its environmental objectives and targets.
Environmental target a detailed performance requirement applicable to the organisation
or parts thereof that arises from the environmental objectives and that needs to be set
and met to meet those objectives.
Glare uncomfortable brightness of a light source viewed against a dark background.
Interested party person or group concerned with or affected by the environmental
performance of the organisation.
Internal audit systematic, independent and documented process for obtaining audit
evidence and evaluating it objectively to determine the extent to which the environmental
management system audit criteria set by the organisation are fulfilled.
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets: instructions for the safe use and potential hazards
associated with particular products or materials.
Light Trespass the spilling of light beyond the boundary or the property of the area being
lit.
Nonconformity non-fulfilment of a requirement.
Preventative action action to eliminate the course of a potential nonconformity.
Prevention of pollution use of processes, practices, techniques, materials, products,
services or energy to avoid or control the creation, emission or discharge of any type of
pollutant or waste, in order to reduce adverse environmental impacts.
12.
13.
14.
TE
11.
IN
10.
EG
9.
AT
IO
AL
8.
Page 24
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23. Procedure specified way to carry out an activity or process, procedures can be
documented or not.
QCS 2014

Page 25
2.3.15.13 Author
SECTION
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT DETAILS
SHE Manager
AL
2.3.15.14 Approvals
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SHEQ Director
EG
IN
TE
AT
Approved by:
SIGNATURE & DATE
IO
NAME
QCS 2014

Page 26
Responsibility
Name of client
Name of contractor
Name of person who drafted the
plan
Notes, amendments
Construction Project
Location (address, postcode if
appropriate)
Estimated project cost
AL
Notes, amendments
Materials Resource Efficiency
IO
Describe here any methods adopted during the conception, design and specification phase
to reduce the amount of waste arising.
Resource saving (quantify if possible)
AT
Method
TE
Waste Management
IN
Declaration
Signatures
EG
The client and COMPANY will take all reasonable steps to ensure that
a) all waste from the site is dealt with in appropriately.
b) materials will be handled efficiently and waste managed appropriately.
QCS 2014

Page 27
STAGE 1 Design/Tender/Planning Period

Yes
No
N/A
Comment
Has the client and key suppliers been

consulted in production of the SWMP
Have alternative options been
considered which produce less waste
on site?
Identify waste management areas on
site plan - is there sufficient space for
segregation of waste types (3 or more
skips)?
AL
Is sufficient space allocated for

material storage to avoid damages?
Have you consulted Supply Chain to

identify waste minimisation options?
AT
IO
Has a programme been produced for

estimated waste costs for the Project
for monitoring against during the
works?
TE
Has a careful evaluation of materials

been made to avoid over-ordering?
Can unused materials be returned to

Supplier or used on another job?
IN
Has full consideration been given to

use of secondary or recycled
materials?
EG
Is unwanted packaging to be returned

to the Supplier after use?
Have materials been ordered to fit

e.g. plasterboard sized to avoid offcuts etc?
Have opportunities for re-use of
wastes on-site been considered?
Have opportunities for re-use of
wastes off-site been considered?
Action
owner
QCS 2014

Page 28
STAGE 2 Construction
EG
IN
N/A
Comment
N
IO
AT
N
R
TE
Has responsibility for waste

minimisation been identified? NB it is
recommended to identify an individual
to Champion and drive waste min onsite.
Has use of Tool Box Talk been
planned into the project programme.
Are sufficient skips available for
segregating wastes?
Are all skips clearly labelled?
Are you measuring your waste costs
against the programmed budget from
your Planner?
Have any materials or products been
identified by design, your supply chain
or Project team, for re-use?
Can you monitor any cost savings
from any re-use of materials during
the Project?
Does your supply chain (waste
removal) recycle waste from site, can
they give monthly figures for
materials, which have been recycled
& landfilled?
Can your supply chain offer a reduced
rate for providing a segregated
system?
Can any materials be re-sued on
other construction sites locally?
Have you identified any best practice
that we can learn from?
No
AL
Yes
Action
owner
QCS 2014

Page 29
SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN

Waste
type
Quantity (m3 or tonnes)

Reuse
onsite
Reuse
offsite
Recycling
on-site
Recycling
off-site
Other
form of
recovery
on-site
Other
form of
recovery
off-site
Estimates
AL
Inert
IO
Non Hazardous
TE
AT
Hazardous
IN
Total (m3 or
tonnes)
Actual
EG
Inert
Non Hazardous
Hazardous
Totals (m3 or
tonnes)
Difference
between estimates
and actual
Sent to
landfill
Other
disposal
QCS 2014

Page 30
SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN

WASTE RECORDS
Waste
type
Identity of the
person
removing the
waste
Site the waste

is being taken
to and whether
licensed or
exempt
Waste carrier
and registration
number*
Confirmation of
delivery*
AT
IO
AL
Date
removed
Post-Construction
[Within three months of the construction work being completed]
TE
Confirmation
EG
IN
This plan has been monitored on a regular basis to ensure that work is progressing
according to the plan and has been updated to record details of the actual waste
management actions and waste transfers that have taken place.
Signature
Issue
Explanation of any deviation from the
planned arrangements
Waste forecasts exceeded
Waste forecasts not met
Cost savings achieved
Details
Page 31
AL

QCS 2014
Complaints/Comments
/Compliments
Name & Phone Number
Date
Actioned
TE
R
Name:
Number:
IN
Name:
Name:
Number:
EG
Number:
Name:
Action Taken
Date
AT
IO
COMPLAINTS/COMMENTS/COMPLIMENTS RECORD
Number:
Name:
Number:
Name:
Number:
THIS RECORD SHOULD BE KEPT CAREFULLY ON SITE AND MADE AVAILABLE TO THE CCS MONITOR FOR
INSPECTION AS REQUESTED
Page 32
AL

QCS 2014
Complaints/Comments
/Compliments
Name & Phone Number
Name:
TE
R
Number:
Name:
IN
Number:
Number:
Name:
EG
Name:
Date
AT
IO
COMPLAINTS/COMMENTS/COMPLIMENTS RECORD
Number:
Name:
Number:
Name:
Number:
Name:
Number:
Name:
Number:
Action Taken
Date
Actioned

WATER DISCHARGE INSPECTION SHEET
AT
IO
Contract :
Comments and Remedial Action
EG
IN
TE
R
Person
Monitoring
Date
Page 33
AL
QCS 2014
pH Reading
Priority
1.1.1.1.1.1.1 High/Med/Low
Action By
Date Completed
QCS 2014

Page 34
DUTY OF CARE CONTROLLED WASTE TRANSFER NOTE

SINGLE TRIP
DESCRIPTION
MULTIPLE TRIP
1. Describe the waste being transferred:

..
(Description)....
2. Has the waste been treated to reduce its hazard or volume?
etc.
3. How is it contained?
Loose
Sacks
Drums
Skip
E.g. minimised, segregated, sorted
Other Describe: ...
4. Quantity (number of drums, skip weight etc.): ....

5. Season ticket YES
NO
HOLDER
Transfer
1. Name and address of company and contract:
..
2. Current location of waste:
AL
..
IO
..
3. Which of the following are you?: (Tick one or more boxes)
AT
Registered Waste Carrier* Licence No.: .
Waste producer
..
2. Which of the following are you?: (Tick one or more boxes)
IN
disposing
collecting or
..
TE
Person
1. Name and address of the company:
EG
DISPOSAL
Producer of waste
Waste disposal Authority
Waste exporter
Holder of waste management licence* Licence No.:

Registered waste carrier* No.: ...
*Licence and/or exemption details and copies of documents must be furnished to HOLDER prior to transfer
1. Transfer location address:
*Licence and exemption details and copies of documentation must be obtained by HOLDER prior to transfer
TRANSFER
..
2. Date of transfer:
..
3. Time(s) of transfer (for multiple consignments, give period for which note is valid):
..
4. Name and address of broker arranging the waste transfer (if applicable):
..
*Licence and/or exemption details and copies of documents must be furnished to HOLDER prior to transfer
COMPLETION
Person collecting or disposing of waste (Part C or D):
Waste Holder (as in Part B):
Signed:
Signed:
Name:
Name:
Representing:
Representing:
* For Hazardous Waste please use Hazardous Waste Consignment note. Speak to Environmental Adviser for guidance.
Distribution:
Blue copy Retain in book (file copy)
QCS 2014

Page 35
ENVIRONMENTAL VIBRATION RECORDING SHEET

Contract:
Date:
Weather/Environmental Conditions:
Vibration Monitor used:
Serial/Certificate No:
Calibration:
Monitor Mode:
Works/Operation:
Comments on Building/Structure (if relevant)
Results Summary:
Site Sketch:
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Monitoring Location:
Person Undertaking Monitoring : Date :

Position :
Print-out attached?
Comments/Recommendations:
Yes/No
QCS 2014

Page 36
COMMUNICATION RECORD
Site Set-Up Pack
Revision No.:
Date:
Community Relations
Reference No.:
Page
rd
*Example investigation by Enforcing Authority, Workplace Inspector, solicitor etc.

Representative (Person making comment/complaint)
Address:
Name:
Position:
AL
Date/Time:
AT
IO
Detail Comment/Complaint
TE
Comment/complaint received by:
IN
Date:
EG
Action Taken
Follow Up
Project Manager:
Date:
Party*
Page 37
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL

QCS 2014
Page 38
AL

ENVIRONMENTAL NOISE SURVEY SUMMARY SHEET
Monitoring Location :
Weather/Environment :
Contract :
AT
IO
QCS 2014
TE
R
Date:
Sound Level Meter:
Calibration Certificate no.:
Start Time :
Serial Number:
Type 1 or 2:
Time Response (Slow/Fast) :
Start :
IN
Survey Location (Freefield/Faade) :
EG
Finish Time :
Activity/Operation
Location Map Attached:
YES/NO
Results Sheet Attached:

L90 (dB)
LAeq (dB)
(
Finish :
mins)
YES/NO
Comments/Events
SPL
MAX
(dB)
SURVEYOR Sign:
SURVEYOR Print:
Date :
Distribution:..
AL

Page 39
AT
IO
QCS 2014
ENVIRONMENTAL NOISE SURVEY SUMMARY SHEET
Contract :
Monitoring Location :
TE
R
Date:
Weather/Environment :
Sound Level Meter:
Calibration Certificate no.:
Start Time :
Serial Number:
Type 1 or 2:
Time Response (Slow/Fast) :
Start :
IN
Survey Location (Freefield/Faade) :
EG
Finish Time :
Location Map Attached:
Activity/Operation
YES/NO
Results Sheet Attached:

L90 (dB)
LAeq (dB)
(
Finish :
mins)
YES/NO
Comments/Events
SPL
MAX
(dB)
SURVEYOR Sign:
SURVEYOR Print:
Date :
Distribution:..
AL

AT
IO
Environmental Survey and Risk Assessment Form

Surveyor(s)
Methodology
Page 40
QCS 2014
Survey Date
EG
IN
TE
R
1. Desk study: Review drawings, understand nature of project, the construction processes, their aspects and their potential effects. Note existing
features, eg. current occupation, geography especially drainage, infrastructure and surrounding built environment. Check for existence of designated
sites, heritage features, eg. ancient monuments.
2. Site visit: Identify potential receptors of environmental harm or damage and assess the significance of construction effects on them. Effects are
significant if they have the potential to cause
particularly in regard to pollution of Controlled waters
harm or damage resulting in costs to remedy
complaint from any stakeholder including the general public
Desk Study Notes
3. Assess the environmental risk rating.

4. Identify the measures required to minimise construction effects and where baseline and construction stage surveys should be carried out.
Effects Risk
AL
N
Page 41
P Personnel engaged in construction processes 0 Others on or off the site, e.g. other contractors, visitors, neighbours, passersby,
road traffic
E Environmental receptors e.g. land, air, water, flora and fauna, geological and historical features
AT
IO
Potential
Targets

F Frequency C Consequence R Risk resulting from construction effects.

NA = not
Targets
Effects
applicable
Environmental Aspect of
Construction Works
TE
R
Yes
No
NA
Significant waste streams and

potential for minimisation.
Opportunities for greater sustainability
EG
Nuisance noise, vibration,

visual, dust and odour
IN
Waste
Existing and potential levels.

Sensitive receptors. Potential
sources, e.g. piling. Workplace
issues. New earthworks, dirt roads,
sewage provision, litter.
Water and Effluents

Existing drainage and effects of
construction. Site water disposal and
pollution prevention. COSHH
controls.
Materials and Fuels, Oils and

COSHH Storage
Significant planned materials with
potential for pollution and/or
substitution.
Mitigation / Control Measures

/Consent requirements
QCS 2014
P O E Potential Effects
C R
Risk of
Residual
Effects
AT
IO
Ecology, Archaeology &

Built Environment
Designated sites, existing flora and
fauna, noxious weeds. Listed sites
and structures, archaeology.
Plant & Equipment
TE
R
Traffic movements, setting, site

access, pedestrians, parking
Resources and Energy Use
Former land use, existing condition,

site investigations.
EG
Community Relations, etc
IN
Scope for reductions and efficiencies
Contaminated Land
Proximity to housing, schools,

hospitals, parks, delicate installations
etc. Site security, community
involvement.
Training
Site specific training requirements
likely
Other Aspects
AL

QCS 2014
Page 42
AL

Page 43
QCS 2014
Risk Level
2-3
Varied wastes generated, both hazardous
and non-hazardous.
AT
IO
Examples of Aspects v Effects Rating (R)

0-1
Minimal quantities of waste likely to
be generated.
Noise, Vibration,
Visual, Dust and
Odour
Noise: Higher than background

levels expected but no receptors
nearby.
Vibration: Expected but at levels
below that unacceptable to
neighbours or sensitive structures.
Visual: Site remote, well screened
from site or in existing building or
facility.
Dust and Odour: No emissions
expected and/or no receptors
nearby.
No change in existing water regime
likely.
No effluents arising.
Noise: High/disturbing levels, receptors in

vicinity. Complaints may arise.
Vibration: High day time levels of vibration,
receptors nearby. Complaints may arise.
Minor damage may occur.
Visual: Site noticeable in landscape or
setting, temporarily affecting amenity value.
Dust and Odour: Minor emissions, receptors
nearby.
Noise: High/disturbing levels, receptors in

vicinity. Expect complaints especially at
night.
Vibration: High levels of vibration,
receptors in vicinity. Expect complaints
and/or damage especially at night.
Visual: Site in area of high visual quality
and affecting normal enjoyment for some
time.
Dust and Odour: High levels of emissions,
receptors nearby. Expect complaints.
Water regime affected by works, discharge

off site may require consent.
Minor effluents arising from site compound.
Material inputs negligible, e.g.

mainly site clearance, landscaping.
Minimal volumes of fuels and
COSHH materials stored.
None in vicinity or no disturbance
expected.
Considerable material inputs required, with

some environmental impact in resource use.
Some fuels and COSHH materials stored on
site.
Local designated area or minor disturbance
likely to designated site or protected species.
Works in main river or disturbance of

receptors likely, e.g. downstream fishery.
Large site with significant effluent
discharge.
Large material inputs with corresponding
impacts in resource use and/or transport.
Large site with significant volumes of fuels
and COSHH materials stored.
Major disturbance expected to designated
site or protected species.
No road works expected but access

may cause some minor delays.
No large plant
Road works will not close access. Local

traffic may be delayed by site traffic.
Some items of larger plant.
EG
IN
TE
R
Aspects
Waste
Water and Effluents
Materials, Fuels,
Oils and COSHH
Storage
Ecology,
Archaeology & Built
Environment
Plant & Equipment
4-9
Significant wastes with large disposal costs,
e.g. wastes from large asbestos strip.
Road works close access. Existing access

unsuitable for site plant /vehicles.
Considerable amount of larger plant, e.g.
for major earthworks
AL

Page 44
QCS 2014
Few material and plant resources

necessary and minor site
establishment.
Some significant resource use and medium

sized site establishment
Major construction site with large

establishment for extended period
Contaminated Land
No contamination proven or is
unlikely.
Possibility of contamination exists, potential

pathways and receptors nearby.
Contamination proven, potential pathways

and receptors nearby. Spread of
contamination likely.
Community
Relations, etc
No sensitive receptors nearby.

No additional security required.
Day time works, receptors in vicinity.

Normal out-of-hours security measures
required.
Some services present, requiring
diversion/protection.
Night time work, receptors in vicinity.

Full time security required.
IN
TE
R
AT
IO
Resources and
Energy Use
Other
No training beyond normal site

inductions.
Training
EG
No services in vicinity needing

consideration.
Some additional training required.
Important and valuable service assets

affected by works requiring significant
design/temp and diversion works.
Extensive environmental training required.
Page 45
AL

QCS 2014
AT
IO
Risk resulting from construction effects = Consequence times Frequency
IN
TE
R
HAZARDOUS LEVEL ACTION

No further preventative action. Consideration shall be given to more cost-effective solutions or
Insignificant Impact improvements that impose no additional cost burden. Monitoring required ensuring that controls in
place are properly maintained.
Work shall not be started or continued until the Impact level has been reduced to an acceptable
Impact level. While the control measures selected shall be cost-effective, legally there is an absolute
Significant Impact
duty to reduce the Impact, this means that if it is not possible to reduce the Impact even with unlimited
resources, then the work shall not be started or shall remain prohibited.
SIGNIFICANT
Aspects Significance
EG
Do not starts work if The HAZARDOUS IMPACT IS?
Severity
Likelihood
Certain
5
Very Likely
4
Likely
3
Unlikely
2
Very Unlikely
1
Very High
10
High
8
Moderate
6
Low
4
Minor
2
None
1
50
40
30
20
10
40
32
24
16
30
24
18
12
20
16
12
10
Significant Impact
Insignificant Impact
QCS 2014

Page 46
FRAMEWORK ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION LAW NO. 30 OF

2002
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION LAW NO. 30 OF 2002 INDEX
REGISTER OF CONSENTS AND AUTHORISATIONS
SITE WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANNING (WM)
4947
5048
NUISANCE NOISE, VIBRATION, VISUAL, DUST & ODOUR (NU)

WATER & EFFLUENTS (WAT)
5250
MATERIAL AND FUELS, OILS and COSHH STORAGE (MFS)
5351
ECOLOGY, ARCHAEOLOGY & BUILT ENVIRONMENT (ECO)
5552
5653
AL
PLANT & EQUIPMENT (PLA)
RESOURCES & ENERGY USE (RES) 5754

5855
IO
CONTAMINATED LAND (CL)
5149
5956
AT
COMMUNITY RELATIONS, COMMUNICATION AND REPORTING (COM)

Completed - No Further Action Required
Completed - But Ongoing Work Needed
Not Completed - Action Required
TE
Not Applicable at Present
IN
Contract/Office:
Date:
Revision:
Abbreviations:
EG
Initial Meeting Attendance:
The Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of 2002 shall be revised on a regular basis, and in line
with the SHE Management Plan (e.g. every 3 months), to take into account changes in the job; the
revision programme will be dictated by the SHE Management Plan.
ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR

COMPLIANCE
EG
IN
TE
R
ISSUEING
AUTHORITY
Contact details
CONSENT
TYPE /
NUMBER
AT
IO
REGISTER OF CONSENTS AND AUTHORISATIONS
Page 47
AL

QCS 2014
GUIDANCE
FOR
COMPLIANCE
ACTION
OWNER
EVIDENCE
REQUIRED / SHE
FORMS
TARGET
DATE
CLOSE
DATE
Page 48
AL

QCS 2014
AT
IO
SITE WASTE MANAGEMENTPLANNING (WM)

ACTION
MANDATORY
WM1
Waste Planning
Identify and quantify waste streams likely throughout
project including waste disposed of via subcontractors
Complete Site Waste Management Plan for project
SHE-FRM-15-01
(Checklists)
SHE-FRM-15-02 (Word)
MANDATORY
WM2
Trained competent Waste Coordinator for the project
Training Records
MANDATORY
WM3
Select and appoint waste management contractors

ensuring Duty of Care checks are carried out prior to
disposal
Audit Records
SWMP
MANDATORY
WM4
Waste Minimisation
Carry out waste minimisation workshop.
Waste Minimisation
MANDATORY
WM5
GUIDANCE
ACTION
OWNER
EVIDENCE
REQUIRED / SHE
FORMS
EG
IN
TE
R
REF
MANDATORY
WM6
Waste Storage
Assess requirement for Waste Management
Ensure waste can not leach or cause dust

nuisance
Establish waste management compound/area to

allow segregation where required. Provide clear
signage
ALWAYS Keep hazardous waste separate to

general waste
Ensure waste is segregated as per SWMP
Waste Disposal
Ensure the appropriate waste transfers notes

are completed.
Record waste movements off-site in SWMP
Environmental Advisors
Records
Visual Inspection
Consignment Notes
Waste Carriers Details
TARGET
DATE
CLOSE
DATE
Frequency
Page 49
AL

QCS 2014
AT
IO
NUISANCE NOISE, VIBRATION, VISUAL, DUST & ODOUR (NU)

ACTION
WHERE
REQUIRED
NU1
Conduct baseline environmental noise/vibration survey prior

to works commencing, if noise/vibration identified as an issue
at risk assessment stage
WHERE
REQUIRED
NU2
Conduct ongoing environmental noise/vibration surveys

during course of works as required.
WHERE
REQUIRED
NU3
Establish traffic plan to minimise nuisance from deliveries &

site traffic. Ensure safety of pedestrians. Provide adequate
parking for site personnel & visitors and avoid parking
nuisance to local community
Traffic Plan
WHERE
REQUIRED
NU4
Locate site cabins to shield neighbours from site activities.

Where possible locate generators / pumps away from site
boundaries.
Visual Inspection
Site set up plan
WHERE
REQUIRED
NU5
Identify and implement procedures and methods to minimise

noise/vibration nuisance and include in method statements
(MSs). Adopt Best Practicable Means (BPM) in accordance
with BS5228
WHERE
REQUIRED
NU6
Communicate noise/vibration & other nuisance issues &

control methods to staff, operatives & visitors
Training /induction
records
WHERE
REQUIRED
NU7
During periods of dry weather, use methods to damp down

sites and access roads to inhibit dust generation (e.g. road
sweepers)
Continual monitoring
Site inspections
WHERE
REQUIRED
NU8
Site Inspections
WHERE
REQUIRED
NU9
Install wheel-washing facilities, fit dust covers to scaffolds and

use other mitigation measures to reduce dust nuisance
Assess lighting requirements and position to avoid glare and
nuisance to neighbours
GUIDANCE
SHE-PRO-015
TE
R
REF
ACTION
OWNER
EVIDENCE
REQUIRED / SHE
FORMS
Survey / Monitoring
Results
SHE-FRM-15-07
SHE-FRM-15-11
EG
IN
Survey / Monitoring
Results
SHE-FRM-15-07
SHE-FRM-15-11
SHE-PRO-001
BS5228
SHE-FRM-1-03
Site inspections
TARGET
DATE
CLOSE
DATE
Page 50
AL

QCS 2014
AT
IO
WATER & EFFLUENTS(WAT)

ACTION
MANDATORY
WAT1
Ensure Environmental Impact Assessments (EIAs) and

method statements address issues associated with any
consents within register, including pollution prevention
measures
MANDATORY
WAT2
Monitor discharges
WHERE
REQUIRED
WAT3
Identify areas of potential run-off and take appropriate

protection measures (install French drains etc)
Design & Visual

Inspection
WHERE
REQUIRED
WAT4
Conduct dewatering / over pumping discharges to foul sewer

in compliance with consent conditions
Operational records
Site inspections
WHERE
REQUIRED
WAT5
Design and construct settlement lagoons appropriately
Design documents
Site inspection
WHERE
REQUIRED
WAT6
Maintain and inspect settlement lagoons regularly to ensure

effectiveness.
Operational records
Site inspections
WHERE
REQUIRED
WAT6
Provide wash out facility for concrete wagons with adequate

pollution prevention measures in place. Record in MS.
SHE-FRM-1-03
WHERE
REQUIRED
WAT7
Know site drainage systems, flow directions and outlets.

Colour code drainage gullies to minimise risk of pollution.
Blue for surface water drainage and red for foul drains.
Drawings
Site inspections
WHERE
REQUIRED
WAT8
Monitor and report water consumption for site activities and

office space
Meter Readings
WHERE
REQUIRED
WAT9
Set project specific targets for water resource use
Project specific Targets

and Objectives in SHE
EG
IN
TE
R
REF
GUIDANCE
SHE-PRO-001
ACTION
OWNER
EVIDENCE
REQUIRED / SHE
FORMS
TARGET
DATE
CLOSE
DATE
Ongoing
End of
project
Ongoing
End of
project
Ongoing
End of
project
Ongoing
End of
project
SHE-FRM-1-03
Monitoring Records
Page 51
AL

AT
IO
QCS 2014
plan
MATERIAL AND FUELS, OILS and COSHH STORAGE (MFS)

ACTION
MFS1
Oils / Fuels and other liquid materials to be stored with

secondary containment:
Either within a bund, on a catchment pallet or within a
proprietary double-skinned tank
Bunds and trays to have no less than 110% of capacity of
largest container and no less than 25% of total container
volume when several stored
Do not allow rain water to escape from bunds and trays
All hoses, nozzles to be locked inside bund or double
skinned tank when not in use
Check tanks, pipework, bunds and pollution prevention
equipment regularly. Ensure no build-up of rainwater
Locate oil /fuel storage areas away from surface waters and
site drainage
GUIDANCE
ACTION
OWNER
EVIDENCE
REQUIRED / SHE
FORMS
TARGET
DATE
CLOSE
DATE
Site inspections
Ongoing
End of
project
Site inspection
Ongoing
End of
project
SHE-FRM-1-01
SHE-FRM-1-03
EG
IN
MANDATORY
TE
R
REF
MANDATORY
MFS2
MANDATORY
MFS3
Locate oil /fuel storage areas on hard standing or on sacrificial

layer of sand underlain with impermeable membrane
Site inspection
Ongoing
End of
project
MANDATORY
MFS4
Locate appropriate spill response equipment close to storage

facilities and operating plant. Check regularly and maintain
Site inspection
Ongoing
End of
project
MANDATORY
MFS5
Establish site specific spill response plan and train staff in spill
response
Plan & Training

Records
WHERE
REQUIRED
MFS6
Store and handle dusty materials (aggregates) in ways to

minimise nuisance
Site inspection
Ongoing
End of
project
MANDATORY
MFS7
Maintain high standard of site housekeeping. Store materials

to avoid damage, wastage and potential pollution
Site inspection
Ongoing
End of
project
AT
IO
ECOLOGY, ARCHAEOLOGY & BUILT ENVIRONMENT (ECO)
Page 52
AL

QCS 2014
ACTION
Mandatory
ECO1
Undertake Ecological assessment of site to determine

actions to improve ecology of project and any mitigation
measures required
Eco survey
recommendations
incorporated in to
project
WHERE
REQUIRED
ECO2
Ensure preventative / mitigation measures are detailed in

RAs and MSs and are implemented
SHE-FRM-1-03
WHERE
REQUIRED
ECO3
Avoid disturbing natural habitats (including trees/vegetation)

whenever possible and especially during nesting seasons
SHE-FRM-1-03
WHERE
REQUIRED
ECO4
Manage invasive plant species (Japanese Knotweed,

Himalayan Balsam etc) appropriately, contacting Env.
Advisor in first instance (Baseline Environmental Risk
Assessment should identify these)
SHE-FRM-1-03
EG
IN
TE
R
REF
GUIDANCE
ACTION
OWNER
EVIDENCE
REQUIRED / SHE
FORMS
Site inspections
Site inspections
Site inspections
TARGET
DATE
CLOSE
DATE
Ongoing
End of
project
EVIDENCE
REQUIRED SHE
FORMS
TARGET
DATE
CLOSE
DATE
MANDATORY
PLA1
Ensure plant is adequately maintained, fit for purpose and in

a safe condition
Supervisor Checklist
Site inspections
Ongoing
End of
project
WHERE
REQUIRED
PLA2
Where appropriate, establish dedicated plant storage

area(s) away from surface waters and drains
Site inspections
Site Layout plan
WHERE
REQUIRED
PLA3
Where appropriate use drip trays under temporary static

plant (pumps, generators etc.)
Site inspections
Ongoing
End of
project
WHERE
REQUIRED
PLA4
Where appropriate, specify and use plant with low emissions

and particulate filters
Plant Records
WHERE
REQUIRED
PLA5
Ensure all authorised plant. Conduct regular monitoring
Monitoring records
Ongoing
End of
project
EG
IN
TE
R
ACTION
AT
IO
PLANT & EQUIPMENT (PLA)

REF
Page 53
AL

QCS 2014
GUIDANCE
ACTION
OWNER
Page 54
AL

QCS 2014
AT
IO
RESOURCES & ENERGY USE (RES)

ACTION
GUIDANCE
MANDATORY
RES1
Ensure no-cost energy efficiency practices are adopted on

site (switching off lights and heaters, closing windows etc)
WHERE
REQUIRED
RES2
ECO Cabin low cost energy efficiency measures adopted

(i.e. motion sensors in toilets, timers on office equipment)
WHERE
REQUIRED
RES3
Ensure plant / equipment is not left running unnecessarily
WHERE
REQUIRED
RES4
Record energy consumption on site (mains and diesel plant)
MANDATORY
RES5
Ensure compliance with COMPANY Sustainable Timber

Policy
WHERE
REQUIRED
RES6
Consider Environmental Impact and waste hierarchy of

material specification.
Material specifications
and supplier orders
MANDATORY
RES7
Ensure materials are stored to avoid damage, vandalism or

theft
Site inspections
Supervisor checklist
WHERE
REQUIRED
RES8
Consider off-site manufacturing can this be used to

produce quality, safety and environmental improvements?
SHE-FRM-1-03
Procurement
ECO Cabin
Specification
EG
IN
TE
R
REF
ACTION
OWNER
EVIDENCE
REQUIRED / SHE
FORMS
TARGET
DATE
CLOSE
DATE
Site inspections
Ongoing
End of
project
Site inspections
Ongoing
End of
project
Records of
consumption
(bills)
Ongoing
End of
project
Ongoing
End of
project
Ongoing
End of
project
Site inspections
COMPANY
Policy
Page 55
AL

QCS 2014
AT
IO
CONTAMINATED LAND (CL)

ACTION
MANDATORY
CL1
Ensue Site Investigation includes risks to human health and

the environment from contaminated land, water and ground
gas
Completed SI Checklist
New Form
WHERE
REQUIRED
CL2
Formulate plans to deal with contaminated land
SHE-FRM-1-03
WHERE
REQUIRED
CL3
Establish preventative measures to avoid pollution of water

courses or clean land.
TE
R
IN
EG
CL4
Where practicable conduct remedial treatment of

contaminated soils in-situ or on-site. Regard off-site disposal
as least preferred option
WHERE
REQUIRED
REF
GUIDANCE
ACTION
OWNER
EVIDENCE
REQUIRED / SHE
FORMS
SHE-FRM-1-01
SHE-FRM-1-03
Site inspections
SHE-FRM-1-03
TARGET
DATE
CLOSE
DATE
Ongoing
End of
project
Page 56
AL

QCS 2014
AT
IO
COMMUNITY RELATIONS, COMMUNICATION AND REPORTING (COM)

ACTION
GUIDANCE
TARGET
DATE
CLOSE
DATE
MANDATORY
COM1
Forward any communication from Enforcing Authority.
MANDATORY
COM2
Provide details of surface water and foul drainage

discharge consents and, if appropriate, permission to work
in/adjacent to rivers to SHE Team for records
MANDATORY
COM3
Report significant spills of polluting materials (oil,

chemicals) as RIDDOR procedure
SHE-PRO-008
First Alert SHE-FRM-801

AIR SHE-FRM-8-2/02
As occur
As occur
WHERE
REQUIRED
COM4
Establish community engagement strategy, e.g. advise of

activities through newsletters, public meetings / open days
Develop
Community doc
strategy
Newsletters / Minutes
of meetings
MANDATORY
COM5
Record all comments/compliments/complaints/external

environmental enquires using a logbook or form, ensure
complaints are investigated and closed out where
appropriate
SHE-FRM-15-14
Complaints Log /
RIDDOR Procedure
SHE-FRM-8-02/02
SHE-FRM-8-01
Ongoing
End of
project
MANDATORY
COM6
Notify SHE Department if any invasive or protected flora /

fauna are encountered. Stop work if archaeological
remains found
E-mails to SHE
Department
As occur
As occur
MANDATORY
COM7
Record and Report delivery staff and delivery mileage in

Site Register (starting point and destination)
Site Register / Staff

Mileage claims
Ongoing
End of
project
MANDATORY
COM8
Disseminate best practice and learning points across the

business via SHE Department
Case-Studies
Produced
As occur
As occur
REF
EVIDENCE
REQUIRED / SHE
FORMS
Communication
SHE-FRM-15-09
TE
R
IN
EG
ACTION
OWNER
Database of consents
QCS 2014

Part 2.3.16: Learning Event Reporting
Page 1
SAFETY
AND
ACCIDENT
PREVENTION
MANAGEMENT
/
2.3
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT PROCEDURES ............................. 1
2.3.16 LEARNING EVENT REPORTING ..................................................................... 1
Responsibilities ............................................................................................ 4
2.3.16.2
Definitions ..................................................................................................... 4
2.3.16.3
Actions required to implement this procedure.............................................. 5
2.3.16.4
Reference Documents.................................................................................. 5
2.3.16.5
Author ........................................................................................................... 6
2.3.16.6
Approvals...................................................................................................... 6
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
2.3.16.1
QCS 2014

Page 2
PROCESS MAP
Project/Site
Manager
COMPANY
Employees
Subcontractor
Employees
SHE Team
Include information
regarding the
reporting of
Learning in the Site
I d ti
1.3, 3.2
Ensure Learning
Event cards are
available on site
3.1
IO
Where possible and safe to do so, take

action to put right the unsafe
situation/condition
AL
Where observed, record and report any

Learning Event to the Line Manager/
Company Manager using the learning
Event cards
3.2
AT
3.2
Ensure details are

recorded
3.3
IN
For high potential

events complete a
First Alert form and
distribute as
appropriate
TE
*Complete the
learning Event Form
and identify the
potential severity
3.3
For high potential

events complete a
First Alert form
and distribute
as appropriate
EG
3.3
Feedback details of
outcome to the
original person
submitting the report
3.3
Review all Learning

Event reports at the
Project SHE meeting
3.3
*Or nominated person
Key
Activity
Guidance
Circulate significant
learning to all of
Company
to prevent
reoccurrence in
other areas
QCS 2014

Page 3
PURPOSE
1
To ensure that all learning events (near misses) are recorded and the lessons
communicated. A learning event is an event or condition that occurs that has the
potential of causing damage or injury to people, property or the environment (not to
include actual accidents).
SCOPE
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 4
SHE DIRECTOR
1

CONTRACTS DIRECTOR/MANAGER
Provides support in the application of this procedure

PROJECT/SITE/OFFICE MANAGER
Ensures that any reporting and investigation of Learning Events is carried out in accordance
with this procedure (and any associated client procedures).
AL
To actively report Learning Events to the appropriate person.
IO
EMPLOYEE / CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEE
Provides advice and support in the application of this procedure.
AT
SHE MANAGER/ADVISER
TE
EG
A learning event is an event or condition that occurs that has the potential of causing
damage or injury to people, property or the environment (not to include actual accidents).
IN
LEARNING EVENT (NEAR MISS)
QCS 2014

Page 5
2.3.16.3 Actions required to implement this procedure

LEARNING EVENT CARDS (HOTLINE)
1
Learning Event Cards and poster displaying the COMPANY hotline number will be made
available onsite and will be included in the site induction. Consideration should be given to
placing Learning Event returns boxes onsite.
COMPLETING LEARNING CARDS
All employees and contractors employees on site will be encouraged to report all learning
events observed onsite, either verbally to the appropriate person or by completing a learning
event card or through the COMPANY Hotline number , which is displayed on
posters around site. Where possible and safe to do so, take immediate action to rectify any
unsafe situation or condition.
AL
REPORTING AND INVESTIGATION OF A LEARNING EVENT
Complete the Learning Event Form to assess potential outcome and severity, investigate
immediate and root causes, consider lessons learned and take actions to prevent
recurrence.
Inform the SHE Team of the event.
If potential severity has been identified on the learning event form as high or above the
Project / Site Manager / SHE Adviser / Manager will complete First Alert report and circulate
as appropriate.
The Project/Site Manager or nominated person should communicate the learning throughout
the project and give feedback on the actions to the person who reported the learning event.
Ensure that Learning Events are reviewed on a regular basis at the appropriate project/site
meetings.
Details of all learning events should be passed to the appropriate person for entering on to
the COMPANY record system.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO

FORMS
1
Learning Event (SHE-FRM-16-01)
Learning Event Card (SHE-FRM-16-02)
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3
QCS 2014

Page 6
2.3.16.5 Author
SECTION
POSITION IN
COMPANY
NAME
CONTACT DETAILS
SHE Manager
AL
2.3.16.6 Approvals
POSITION IN
COMPANY
SIGNATURE & DATE
IO
NAME
SHEQ Director
EG
IN
TE
AT
Approved by:
QCS 2014

Date
Page 7
Print
name
Contact
No.
Location
On Site
Time
Project
Classification
Health
Safety
COMPANY
Environment
COMPANY Sub-Contractor
Other Sub-Contractor
AT
IO
AL
Details of the Learning Event (include all relevant information) :
Potential Outcome (please tick)
Potential Severity (please tick)
Personal Injury
Environmental Issue
IN
Equipment Damage
TE
Property Damage
EG
Other (please detail in comments box)
Negligible
Slight
Moderate
First Alert to be issued if High or

above
High
Very High
Lessons Learned (consider immediate and root causes) (please tick)

Work environment
Defective workplace
Design/layout
Housekeeping
Lack of room
Lighting
Noise/distraction
Weather
Access/egress
Management
System of work
Supervision
Training
Communication
Management of change
Plant/equipment
Construction/design
Installation
QCS 2014

Page 8
Safety device
Operation/use
Mechanical Failure
Maintenance
Human Factors
Failure to follow rules
Instructions misunderstood
Error of judgement
Lack of experience
Unsafe attitude
Undue haste
Horseplay
Lapse of concentration
Fatigue
Working without authorisation
Design
Wrong type used
Maintenance
Not provided/unavailable
AL
PPE
IO
Not Used
Other
Under investigation
AT
Third Party
TE
Other (please state)
Responsible
EG
Actions Required
IN
FOLLOW UP
Signed:
Date:
Completed
QCS 2014

Page 9
LEARNING EVENT CARD

Date:
Time:
Location on site:
AL
Brief details of observation:
TE
AT
IO
Action taken:
EG
IN
Optional Information:
Reported by:
Company:
QCS 2014

Part 2.4.01: Risk Assessment Guides and Method Statement
Page 1
2.
SAFETY AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION MANAGEMENT / ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM

(SAMAS) ....................................................................................................................................
2.4
RISK ASSESSMENT GUIDES AND METHOD STATEMENT .................................................
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
INTRODUCTION
What is risk assessment?
Legal requirements for risk assessment and written method of Work
Risk assessment in practice
Hazard and risk
Risk assessment Process
Identify the Hazards
Work out who might be harmed and how
evaluates the risks and decides on precautions
Record your findings and implement them
Review your risk assessment and update if necessary
Suitable and sufficient risk assessment
Recording the assessment
Qualitative and quantitative risk assessments
Qualitative assessments
Quantitative assessments
Consultation in development of risk assessment
Young persons and children
Language issues
Safety Culture and other Behavioral Safety issues
Other issues
Health Surveillance
Example of work activities requiring risk assessment
Safe method of work (Method statement)
Review of the method statement
Communication of risk assessment and method statement
Training programmes
Appendix
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.6.1
2.4.6.2
2.4.6.3
2.4.6.4
2.4.6.5
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.8.1
2.4.8.2
2.4.8.3
2.4.9
2.4.10
2.4.11
2.4.12
2.4.13
2.4.14
2.4.15
2.4.16
2.4.17
2.4.18
2.4.19
2.4.20
2
2
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
11
11
12
12
13
13
13
14
14
14
15
16
QCS 2014
2.4.1

Page 2
INTRODUCTION
Risk assessment is a fundamental principle in the management of health and safety. It is an
important step in protecting workers and business, as well as complying with the law. It helps you
focus on the risks that matter in or in connection to your work activity or construction work.
Section 1.1.7 of the Regulatory Document places legal duty on Contractors and the self-employed
to assess the risks to the health and safety of their employees and others that arise out of or in
connection with their work activities. They are also legal duty to develop written methods of work
commonly referred to as method statement.
A risk assessment can be interpreted as a structured examination of a work activity so as to identify

what could cause harm to people (employees or others) and how appropriate control measures can
be put in place to eliminate or control risks.
For any risk assessment is to be effective, it is essential that the person who carries it out is familiar
with all aspects of the task being assessed, specialist advice is sought where necessary and those
to deliver the work activities are consulted in development of the risk assessment.
For any risk assessment to be effective, it is essential that the risks and controls are communicated
to those affected.
The legal requirement on contractors to carry out risk assessments and written method of work
support the requirements for a Contractor to provide for their employees
IO
AL
A safe place of work
(b)
Safe access and egress to and from that place of work
(c)
Safe method of work
(d)
Safe plant and equipment
TE
AT
(a)
2.4.2
IN
Risk assessment and written method of work should identify the requirements for the contractor to
provide for his employees
information about how to undertake the work activity safety and without risk to their health
(b)
implementation of instructions for undertaking the work activity safety and without risk to
their health
(c)
necessary training to employees so that they have the understanding and skills to undertake
the work activity without risk to their health and safety
(d)
implementation of supervision of the work activity
EG
(a)
What is risk assessment
A risk assessment is a careful examination of what, in your work, could cause harm to people, so
that you can weigh up whether you have taken enough precautions or should do more to prevent
harm. Workers and others have a right to be protected from harm caused by a failure to take
reasonable control measures.
A risk assessment should usually involve identifying the hazards present in any working activity
and identifying the associated risks, evaluating them, identifying those affected and putting in place
suitable and sufficient mitigation. The exercise should take into account any existing precautions
and their effectiveness.
Accidents and ill health can ruin lives and affect business too if output is lost, machinery is
damaged, insurance costs increase or you have to go to court. Contractors are legally required to
QCS 2014

Page 3
assess the risks for or in connection to their work so that a plan to control the risks are put in place
and implemented
2.4.3
Legal requirements for risk assessment and written method of work

Section 1.1.7 of the Regulatory Document requires all contractors (employers and self-employed
people) to assess the risks to workers and any others who may be affected by their work activity or
construction work. The risk assessment will enable them to identify the measures they need to
have in place and implement in order to comply with section 1.1.7.
There are requirements to undertake suitable and sufficient risk assessment, to record the
assessment and to monitor & review its implementation. Development of risk assessment shall
involve consultation with expert knowledge as required and it findings shall be communicated to
those affected.
Any risk assessment shall give consideration to young persons and take into account risk barriers
such as safety culture, behavioral safety and language issues as applicable to the place of work.
There are requirements for risk assessments to be supported by effective and written method
statement identifying and implementation of training needs, instruction and supervision.
The contractor should work with other contractors, subcontractors to identify the hazards and
assess the risks related to their work, including the risks they may create for others.
Risk assessment in practice
AT
2.4.4
IO
AL
The principle of risk assessment to eliminate and control risk to safety and health is not new. In
fact, many Contractors will have been carrying out risk assessments to their day to day business as
part of business planning and success. However section 1.1.7 imposes specific legal requirements
on the Contractor to undertake risk assessment for health and safety.
If the task to be assessed is substantial, difficult or complex then, it will not be practical or effective
to carry out a single risk assessment to cover the whole of the work. The job will need to be broken
down into separate elements or work activities, each of which will have to be assessed separately.
Many Contractors, who have recognized potential problems in course of their business as they
occur, will have taken the necessary action to avoid an incident (including near misses and
accidents). Conducting risk assessment, proper recording and ongoing review of the risk
assessments is an essential process in preventing incidents.
Factors that need to be considered during the risk assessment process is the complexity of the
activity, the number of persons involved or affected, the plant or equipment being used, and the
types and nature of the materials involved. The environment where the work will be carried out is
also a factor which should be taken into account.
In many instances, straightforward measures can readily control risks, for example ensuring
spillages are cleaned up promptly so people do not slip, or cupboard drawers are kept closed to
ensure people do not trip. For most, that means simple, cheap and effective measures to ensure
your most valuable asset your workforce is protected.
EG
IN
TE
2.4.5
Hazard and risk
A hazard is something with the potential to cause harm and this can include articles, workplace,
substances, plant or machines, tools, methods of work, the working environment and other aspects
of work organization and includes the potential to harm/damage the environment and/or causing a
statutory nuisance.
A risk is the likelihood of potential harm from that hazard being realized. The extent of the risk will
depend on:
QCS 2014

Page 4
(a)
the likelihood of that harm occurring
(b)
the potential severity of that harm, i.e. of any resultant injury or adverse health effect; and
(c)
the population which might be affected by the hazard, i.e. the number of people who might
be exposed
(d)
The frequency and time of exposure

Risk = consequence x probability and is classed as either Acceptable or Unacceptable,
depending on the results of the quantifying matrix
A risk is the chance, high or low, that somebody could be harmed by these and other hazards,
together with an indication of how serious the harm could be. i.e. is the likelihood of potential harm
from that hazard being realized. The extent of the risk will depend on:
the likelihood of that harm occurring
(f)
the potential severity of that harm, i.e. of any resultant injury or adverse health effect; and
(g)
the population which might be affected by the hazard, i.e. the number of people who might
be exposed
(h)
The frequency and time of exposure
AL
(e)
IO
AT
Risk = consequence x probability and is classed as either Acceptable or Unacceptable,

depending on the results of the quantifying matrix
It is very important to distinguish between hazard and risk; the two terms are often confused.
Construction works are inherently hazardous and the risk associated with it will be reduced as
controls are implemented. The level of risk remaining when controls have been adopted is known
as the residual risk. There should only be high residual risk where there is poor health and safety
management and inadequate control measures.
Reasonably practicable is a narrower term than physically possible a computation must be

made by the owner in which the quantum of risk is placed on one scale and the sacrifice involved in
the measures necessary for averting the risk (whether in money, time or trouble) is placed in the
other, and that, if it be shown that there is a gross disproportion between them the risk being
insignificant in relation to the sacrifice the defendants discharge the onus on them.
Who is responsible for managing risk?
EG
IN
TE
All employers (and self-employed) are required to take reasonably practicable steps to assess the
risk to both employees and others who could be affected by the undertakings of their business.
Others who could be affected include:
(a)
Visitors to the workplace
(b)
Consumers of products or services
(c)
Service providers working on the premises
(d)
Work colleagues and fellow persons working in the vicinity
(e)
Neighbours or residents in the surrounding area
QCS 2014

Page 5
Fatality building loss, catastrophic environment

impact
No injury, damage or environment impact
Minor injury, damage or environment impact
Major injury, damage or environment impact
Risk Assessment Methodology
A high probability
AT
A small probability
Almost no probability
TE
Almost Certain
IO
AL
Risk Factor
Acceptable
Risk Level
EG
IN
Consequence X Probability = Risk
Acceptable
Unacceptable
Unacceptable
14
Action
No further preventative action. Consideration shall be given to
more cost-effective solutions or improvements that impose no
Additional cost burden. Monitoring required to ensure that
Controls in place are properly maintained.
Work shall not be started or continued until the risk level has
Been reduced to an acceptable risk level. While the control
measures selected shall be cost-effective, legally there is an
absolute duty to reduce the risk, this means that if it is not
possible to reduce the risk even with unlimited resources, then
the work shall not be started or shall remain prohibited.
QCS 2014
2.4.6
1

Page 6
Risk assessment Process

A risk assessment is a five-stage process:
(a)
Identification of all the hazards and associated risks
(b)
Work out who might be harmed and how
(c)
Evaluate the risks and decide on precautions
(d)
Record your findings and implement them
(e)
Review your assessment and update if necessary
2.4.6.1
Step 1: Identify the Hazards
Identification is simply working out how people could be harmed. Some techniques for risk
identification are: brainstorming, refer to sources of information such as relevant legislation, code of
practice and guidance, supplier manuals and manufacturers instructions, data sheets, safety
alerts, lessons learnt, use information supplied by designers (pre-construction information), the
residual risk supplied by designers, seeking advice from experts and competent sources and
guidance from trade associations, etc.
Identification of hazards can also be undertaken by walking around the place of work and consult
with employees or their representative about concerns in relation to the place or work or the work
activity.
Checking the accident and ill-health records often helps to identify the less obvious hazards.
A valuable source for such information is obtainable from the UK governing body for Health and
safety; known as the Health and Safety Executive (HSE). The HSE publishes practical guidance on
where hazards occur and how to control them. Visit the HSE website (www.hse.gov.uk).
Step 2: Work out who might be harmed and how
IN
2.4.6.2
TE
AT
IO
AL
For each hazard you need to be clear about who might be harmed; it will help identify the best way
of managing the risk. That doesnt mean listing everyone by name, but rather identifying groups of
people (e.g. people working in the storeroom or passers-by). In each case, identify how they
might be harmed, i.e. what type of injury or ill health might occur. For example, shelf stackers may
suffer back injury from repeated lifting of boxes.
Remember that some workers have particular requirements, e.g. young persons or others with
impaired mobility, expectant mothers etc.
Extra thought will be needed for some hazards to visitors, other contractors, members of the public
etc if they could be hurt by your activities.
EG
2.4.6.3
Step 3 Evaluate the risks and decide on precautions
Having spotted the hazards, you then have to decide what to do about them. The law requires you
to protect people from harm. You can work this out for yourself, but the easiest way is to compare
what you are doing with good practice.
Think about what controls you have in place and how the work is organized. Then compare this
with the good practice and see if theres more you should be doing to bring yourself up to standard.
In asking yourself this, consider: Can I get rid of the hazard altogether? If not, how can I control the
risks so that harm is unlikely?
When controlling risks, apply these principles: try a less risky option (e.g. switch to using a less
hazardous chemical); prevent access to the hazard (e.g. by guarding); organize work to reduce
exposure to the hazard (e.g. put barriers between pedestrians and traffic); issue personal
QCS 2014

Page 7
protective equipment (e.g. clothing, footwear, goggles etc); and provide welfare facilities (e.g. first
aid and washing facilities for removal of contamination).
2.4.6.4
Step 4: Record your findings and implement them
Putting the results of your risk assessment into practice will make a difference when looking after
people and your business. Writing down the results of your risk assessment, and sharing them with
your staff, encourages you to do this. When writing down your results, keep it simple, for example
Tripping over rubbish: bins provided, staff instructed, weekly housekeeping checks, or Fume from
welding: local exhaust ventilation used and regularly checked.
You need to be able to show that: a proper check was made; you asked who might be affected;
you dealt with all the significant hazards, taking into account the number of people who could be
involved; the precautions are reasonable, and the remaining risk is low; and you involved your staff
or their representatives in the process.
2.4.6.5
Step 5: Review your risk assessment and update if necessary
The risk assessment should be appropriate to the nature of the work and should identify the period
of time for which it is likely to remain valid. This will enable the existing control measures to be
reviewed and modified, and to put in place as necessary.
Construction sites do not stay the same. Thus hazards would be dynamic as the environment
changes and works progresses and also with the bringing in of new equipment and substances etc.
It makes sense, therefore, to review what you are doing on an ongoing basis. This means that any
significant change to a place of work, process, or activity requires the risk assessment to be reevaluated or the introduction of any new process, activity or operation to be subject to a new risk
assessment.
Look at your risk assessment again and the changes. Consult workers and lessons learnt from
accidents or near misses.
Make sure your risk assessment stays up to date and set a review date proportionate to the
complexity of the work activity or construction works. If there is any significant change to activities
or a new sub/work package contractor starting work which could lead to new hazards then these
shall be incorporated into the assessment. The need for review will depend upon the level of risk
but in every case will be reviewed on sites at the same time as the Contract Management Plan or
at permanent locations annually.
A risk assessment should always therefore be viewed as a live document and must be reviewed
following certain trigger events, or at least annually.
Risk Assessments should be reviewed when: -
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
2.4.7
1
(a)
There has been an incident (accident or near miss)
(b)
Any significant change to processes, equipment or substances occurs
(c)
When there have been changes in the law
(d)
When enforcement action has taken place
(e)
When people identify an opportunity for improvement
Suitable and sufficient risk assessment

An assessment required under The Management of Health and Safety at Work which:
(a)
Correctly identifies a hazard
QCS 2014
(b)
Disregards negligible hazards and those associated with life in general
(c)
Determines the likelihood of injury, harm or loss
Probability of exposure
Maximum probable loss
Number of persons at risk and/or the financial loss to the company
(d)
Identifies any specific legal duty or requirement relating to the hazard
(e)
Provides sufficient information to enable appropriate control measures to be taken
(f)
Enables control measures to be prioritized
Page 8
Suitable and sufficient risk assessment means the risk assessment should do the following:
Should identify the risks arising from or in connection with work
(g)
The level of detail in a risk assessment should be proportionate to the level of risk the work
activity entails
(h)
The level of risk arising from the work activity should determine the degree of sophistication
of the risk assessment; for example risks which require specialist knowledge such as a
particularly complex process or technique, or large and complex projects, hazardous sites
will require the most developed and sophisticated risk assessments to address the level of
risks.
(i)
Risk assessments must also consider all those who might be affected by the undertaking,
whether they are workers or others such as members of the public.
(j)
Whenever specialist advisers are used, contractors shall ensure that the advisers have
sufficient understanding of the particular work activity they are advising on, this will often
require effective involvement of everyone concerned contractor, subcontractor, employees
and specialist.
IO
AL
(f)
2.4.8
EG
IN
TE
AT

Recording the assessment

Risk assessment shall be recorded in writing. This means writing down the significant hazards
identifying the associated risks coming, evaluate the risks by identifying those affected, the impacts
and the controls put in place.
2.4.8.1
Qualitative and quantitative risk assessments
The risk of something going wrong is considered in terms of probability (likelihood) and the
consequences (seriousness).
2.4.8.2
Qualitative assessments
The probability of a hazard actually causing harm or an accident is rated as being High, Medium or
Low in accordance with the following:
(a)
HIGH: it will happen regularly, or it could be a usual or a common occurrence
(b)
MEDIUM: it is less regular, but is still recognized as being likely to happen
(c)
LOW: it has not happened for a long time, is known to be infrequent and is not likely to
happen
QCS 2014
(a)
HIGH: the result could be a fatal accident or multiple injuries / major property damage /
substantial pollution or environmental impact
(b)
MEDIUM: it would probably cause serious injuries, or persons would be off of work for over
three days due to their injuries / substantial property damage / there may be some pollution
(c)
LOW: there would be minor injuries to persons or some slight damage to property
Probability and consequences can then be shown on a matrix as follows
Probability
High
Medium
Low
High
Probability and consequences can then be assessed and the highest outcome of the two entered in
the matrix as follows
High
Medium
Low
Low
High
Medium
Medium
Medium
Consequences
High
High
High
High
Probability
High
Medium
Low
AT
Medium
Consequences
AL
Low
Page 9
The consequences of the event, should it happen, can then be categorised as follows:
IO

A combined risk of HIGH should be totally unacceptable and the work should not be
undertaken until the risk has been reduced MEDIUM: it would probably cause serious
injuries, or persons would be off of work for over three days due to their injuries / substantial
property damage / there may be some pollution.
(b)
When there is a combined risk of MEDIUM, action must be taken, and work stopped if
necessary, to reduce the risk level.
(c)
If the combined risk is LOW, start the work as long as everything reasonably practicable has
been done in order to reduce the risk, and that the assessment is reviewed at regular
intervals
EG
IN
TE
(a)
Using this information, decisions can now be made on whether an activity is safe to continue, or
whether control measures are necessary, either to completely change the way that the job is done
or measures put in place so as to bring the risks down to an acceptable level. In the ideal situation,
both probability and consequences should be LOW.
Probability and consequences can then be shown on a matrix as follows
2.4.8.3
Quantitative assessments
The principle is the same as for Qualitative assessments, but numerical scores rather than a grade
are assigned to probability and consequences.
The probability or likelihood of the event is rated on a scale of 1 to 5 as follows:

(a)
It is certain to happen.
(b)
It is very likely to happen, and would not be at all unusual
QCS 2014
(c)
Likely to happen, and would not be totally unexpected
(d)
Unlikely to happen, but not by any means impossible
(e)
Very unlikely to happen
No injury. It would be a 'near miss'. Minor property damage.
(b)
Minor injury. Less than three days' work time lost. Property damage more than just minor
likely to happen, and would not be totally unexpected.
(c)
Reportable injury to the HSE with over three days time lost, but not a major injury.
Substantial property damage or something causing environmental damage.
(d)
Major injury, long term absence. Major damage, serious environmental impact.
(e)
Fatal accident or multiple major injuries. Public or others could be involved as well.
(f)
A matrix can then be constructed using these numbers, as follows
AL
(a)
AT
IO
5
4
3
2
1
Probability
3
4
Consequences
TE
All possible resulting numbers are calculated by multiplying all the probability figures by all the
consequence figures. These are included in the matrix, as shown below. This means that once a
risk assessment has been made on a particular activity, and the probability factor is multiplied by
the consequence factor, the number produced indicates where the assessment places the risk
associated with the activity on the matrix
EG
IN
Page 10
The consequences or the severity of the event, should it happen, are also then rated on a scale of
1 to 5 as follows:

5
4
3
2
1
Probability
5
4
3
2
1
1
10
8
6
4
2
2
15
12
9
6
3
3
Consequences
20
16
12
8
4
4
25
20
15
10
5
5
Clearly, the higher the resulting number, the less acceptable the level of risk. The matrix shows
where actions need to be taken to reduce either the probability or the consequences in order to
reduce the risks to an acceptable level
Probability
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
1
10
8
6
4
2
2
15
12
9
6
3
3
20
16
12
8
4
4
25
20
15
10
5
5
QCS 2014

Page 11
Consequences
Contractors themselves can use these numbers to set in-house criteria, if desired, along the
following lines, and as indicated by the shaded areas in the above matrix:
(a)
Risks with a rating above 16 are totally unacceptable and the work will not be undertaken
until the risk has been reduced.
(b)
Where the risk rating is between 10 and 15, immediate action must be taken, including a
stoppage of work if necessary, to reduce the risk level.
(c)
If the rating is between 5 and 9, the risk is acceptable provided that everything reasonably
practicable has been done to reduce the risk.
(d)
With a rating of 4 or less then the risk is acceptable, provided that the assessment is
reviewed at regular intervals and further reduced if possible.
AL
Note: - It is stressed that it is for individual companies or managers to decide where the boundaries between
what is and what is not acceptable lie, and the numerical score at which certain actions should be taken
2.4.9
AT
IO
If either the qualitative or quantitative methods are used in conjunction with a simple form, then the
Contractors will have a straightforward basic risk assessment procedure
Consultation in development of risk assessment
Consulting employees or their representatives about matters to do with their health and safety and
in developing risk assessment is a requirement under section 1.1.7 of the Regulatory document
and is a good management practice as well.
Any risk assessment shall involve effective consultation with the workforce who will undertake the
job.
Thus contractors need to involve employees concern or their representative in developing risk
assessment.
EG
IN
TE
2.4.10 Young persons and children

1
Contractors are required to specifically assess and review the risks to the health and safety of
children and young persons due to their lack of maturity, lack of experience and lack of knowledge
of potential risks.
There is a requirement that young people should not carry out certain types of work, except in
circumstances involving training and supervision where the young person is no longer a child.
A 'child' is anyone under the minimum school leaving age and a 'young person' is anyone over the
minimum school leaving age but less than 18 years of age.
A young person under 16 years of age cannot be employed at all in a Qatar workplace; this is
stated in Labor Law 14, Article 86.
Before a young person is employed, the Contractors must ensure that any risk assessments
pertaining to the job take account of the following factors in relation to the young person:
(a)
their inexperience
(b)
their immaturity and lack of awareness of risks
QCS 2014

(c)
the tools and equipment that they may have to use as part of their training
(d)
the layout of the workplace and the environment in which they may have to work.
(e)
any hazardous substances with which they may come into contact
(f)
exposure to physical, chemical or biological hazards
(g)
the organization of work processes and activities
(h)
the extent of health and safety training that is to be provided
Page 12
Careful consideration must be given to the way in which information is conveyed to young persons
to ensure that it is fully and readily understood.
Where children are employed either for work experience or work in offices then the Contractors
must, before commencing the employment of the child, provide that child's parents or guardians
with details of any risk assessment which has been carried out. This information must contain
details of any risk and a description of any preventative or protective measures, whether the risk
arises from the Contractors own activity or the activities of others at the workplace.
Contractors are further required to consider the special nature of young persons due to their lack
of experience, knowledge of risks and the fact that they are not fully mature. To that end, young
people must not be employed in any work.
with which they cannot physically or psychologically cope
(b)
that exposes them to a range of hazardous substances, including any carcinogen, toxic
substance or radiation
(c)
where they might not recognize the risk of accidents due to their inexperience or lack of
training
(d)
where their health would be at risk from excessive cold, heat, noise or vibration
IN
TE
AT
(a)
The prohibition above does not apply when a young person is undergoing recognized training, or
being properly supervised by a competent person, or when any risks identified in a risk assessment
have been reduced to the lowest level that is reasonably practicable.
EG
IO
AL
2.4.11 Language issues
Site workers who have a poor or no understanding of either written or spoken Arabic must be taken
into account when compiling risk assessments. Effective communication is an essential element of
controlling risk; how such communication can be established must be a priority issue where there is
the potential for language difficulties on site.
2.4.12 Safety Culture and other Behavioral Safety issues
Site workers coming from abroad have different backgrounds and different perception of risks and
safety culture. The contractor needs to consider this as an important factor in developing the risk
assessment and implementing it.
The contractor must be proactive in monitoring behavioral safety issues and address them as part
of the risk assessment.
The contractor must implement a positive health and safety culture which means the avoidance,
prevention and reduction of risks at work must be accepted as part of the organizations approach
and attitude to all its activities. It should be recognized at all levels of the organization, from junior
to senior management.
QCS 2014

Page 13
2.4.13 Other issues

1
While it is a legal obligation for contractors to regularly review risks at the place of work, some
other issues to consider would be persons with impaired mobility and new and or expectant
mothers. The assessment will help to decide additional action that needs to be taken in such
scenarios.
Any such risks identified must be included and managed as part of the general workplace risk
assessment.
and attitude to all its activities. It should be recognized at all levels of the organization, from junior
to senior management.
2.4.14 Health Surveillance
The contractor is required have in place health surveillance programmes where the findings of a
risk assessment identify health risks to employees that can be eliminated or reduced by applying
health surveillance techniques.
Health surveillance should be introduced where the risk assessment indicates that:
AL
there is an identifiable disease or adverse health condition related to the work concerned
(b)
there are valid detection techniques
(c)
there is a reasonable likelihood that the disease or condition may occur under the particular
conditions of work
(d)
health surveillance has the potential to increase the protection of the health of the
employees concerned.
IN
TE
AT
IO
(a)
EG
and attitude to all its activities. It should be recognized at all levels of the organization, from junior to
senior management.
2.4.15 Example of work activities requiring risk assessment
1
Example of work activity that need to be risk assessed are:

(a)
the use of hazardous substances
(b)
noise in the place of work
(c)
manual handling activities
(d)
the presence of asbestos
(e)
work at height
(f)
Work with vibrating tools and equipment
See appendix A for more examples of work activities and guidance for undertaking risk
assessment.
QCS 2014

Page 14
2.4.16 Safe Method of Work (Method Statement)

A written method of work is commonly referred to as a method statement which is developed for
construction activities including temporary works. The method statement describes the logical
sequence of how a work activity is to be carried out safely and without risk to health. It should
identify the risks and the controls to be put in place, responsibilities like induction supervision
training and other elements needed to complete the work e.g. man power, plant, equipment etc.
It is good practice at planning stage of construction to identify a list of work activity which will need
development of method statement. This is sometimes referred to a schedule of method statement
which gets updated in the construction phase of the project as and when required, according to the
project complexity and the level of risks it entails.
The Contractor shall submit a Method Statement Schedule to the Engineer for approval no later
than thirty (30) days from the start of the Contract. The Method Statement Schedule shall define all
Method Statements to be prepared for the Works forming part of the Contract and the target dates
for their submission to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall submit Method Statement for his work activities to the Engineer for approval
thirty (30) days prior to the commencement of the work activity covered by a Method Statement.
The method statement should be developed prior to undertake any such work activity identified as
mentioned above and should be unique to each work activity means No work covered by a Method
Statement shall begin until it has been approved by the Engineer.
The risk assessment will provide support to the development of the method statement.
Any development of method statement shall involve consultation with the workforce and shall
identify the requirements for:
AT
IO
AL
information about how to undertake the work safety and without risk to health
(b)
implementation of instructions for undertaking the work safety and without risk to health
(c)
identify and conduct necessary training to employees before execution of the activity; so
that they have the understanding and skills to undertake the work activity without risk to their
health and safety
(d)
implementation of supervision of the work activity
EG
IN
TE
(a)
The method statement should be briefed and acknowledged by the supervisor and the worker
respectively before undertaking of the work activity.
An example template for method statement is at appendix B.
2.4.17 Review of the method statement

1
Any method statement needs to be reviewed after any incident in undertaking or related to the
works, so that additional necessary mitigation can be embedded into the work procedure.
2.4.18 Communication of risk assessment and method statement
Any risk assessment and safe working method will be as good as the way they are communicated
to those affected.
The contractor should make sure they are communicated to employees and their representatives
so that they are aware of the health and safety risks for a work activity and the preventive and
protective measures in place. Thus establishing effective means of communication should be
devised by the contractor.
QCS 2014
3

Page 15
Effective communication will ensure that employees are provided with sufficient information and
they understand the risks and control measures can be implemented effectively.
The method statement should be developed prior to undertake any such work activity identified as
mentioned above and should be unique to each work activity
2.4.19 Training programmes
The contractor needs to have in place and implement necessary training to employees so that they
have the understanding and skills to undertake the work activity without risk to their health and
safety.
Risk assessment should identify opportunities for training of workers and ensure they are
competent for the work activity.
Contractor should maintain training records.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014

Page 16
2.4.20 Appendix
2.4.20.1 Appendix A: Example of work activities requiring risk assessment
NUMBERED ASSESSMENTS
Associated with this project (Tick boxes)
SITE ESTABLISHMENT
REF NO. 2
HOARDING/FENCING (TEMPORARY)
REF NO. 3
DEMOLITION GENERAL
REF NO. 4
DEMOLITION (ASBESTOS REMOVAL)
REF NO. 5
BUILDINGS ADJACENT TO WORKS
REF NO. 6
OVERHEAD SERVICES/OBSTRUCTIONS
REF NO. 7
UNDERGROUND SERVICES
REF NO. 8
PILING (DRIVEN/BORED/BENTONITE)
REF NO. 9
EXCAVATIONS (SHALLOW/DEEP/CONTAMINATED)
REF NO. 10
HAUL ROAD CROSSINGS ON CONSTRUCTION SITES
REF NO. 11
BULK EARTHWORKS
REF NO. 12
REDUCED LEVEL DIG AND IMPORTED FILL
REF NO. 13
CONTAMINATED GROUND (WORKING WITH)
REF NO 13B
POTENTIALLY CONTAMINATED GROUND/BUILDING FABRIC (ANTHRAX)
REF NO. 14
REF NO. 15
WORKING ON PUBLIC ROADS
REF NO. 16
WORKING OVER OR ADJACENT TO WATER
REF NO. 17
WORKING OVER OR ADJACENT TO RAILWAYS
REF NO. 18
CONCRETE WORKS AND REINFORCEMENT
REF NO. 19
CONCRETING, CONCRETE REPAIR, CONCRETE FINISHING
REF NO. 20
PRE CAST CONCRETE STAIRS, WALLS AND FLOORS
REF NO. 21
SCAFFOLD (ALL TYPES)
REF NO. 22
STRUCTURES (WORKING AT HEIGHTS)
REF NO. 23
STEEL ERECTION (GENERAL)
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
REF NO. 1
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES
QCS 2014

WELDING, BURNING, STEELWORK
REF NO. 25
ROOFWORK/WORK NEAR FLOOR ETC OPENINGS
REF NO. 26
INFILLING OF FLOOR OPENING(S)
REF NO. 27
ROOFWORK (FLAT)
REF NO. 28
ROOF STRUCTURE (PLATES/TRUSSES/TIMBER)
REF NO. 29
ROOF COVERINGS (FELT/BATTEN/TILE)
REF NO. 30
EXTERNAL CLADDING (INC GLAZING)
REF NO. 31
WATER STORAGE DEVICES
REF NO. 32
LIFTING OPERATIONS
REF NO. 33
MANUAL HANDLING
REF NO. 34
SITE PLANT MOVEMENT/CARE
REF NO. 35
TOOLS (ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC/CARTRIDGE)
REF NO. 36
CONFINED SPACES
REF NO. 37
NIGHT WORK
REF NO. 38
REF NO. 39
AT
IO
AL
REF NO. 24
Page 17
TE
SPECIALIST SUB-CONTRACTOR PROCESSES e.g. BITUMINOUS SURFACING,

PAINTING WATERPROOFING, SILANE
IN
STORAGE OF HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MATERIALS (COVERS SOME USAGE

REQUIREMENTS)
REF NO. 41
REF NO. 42
LIFT INSTALLATION
REF NO. 43
ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SERVICES
REF NO. 44
PLUMBING WORKS
REF NO. 45
CARPENTRY/JOINERY
REF NO. 46
PLASTERING AND EXTERNAL RENDERING
REF NO. 47
CEILING FIXING
REF NO. 48
FLOOR AND WALL TILING
REF NO. 49
PAINTING AND PAPERING
EG
REF NO. 40
INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION COATINGS (BOARD)
INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION COATINGS (SPRAY)
QCS 2014
REF NO. 50

USE OF SPECIALIST EQUIPMENT (e.g. NUCLEAR DENSOMETERS, THERMIC

WELDERS AND LANCES, LASERS H.P. WATER JETTING
REF NO. 51
Page 18
USE OF CLASS 3B LASERS (PREDOMINANTLY IN CONFINED OR

RESTRICTED AREAS)
ARC WELDING
REF NO. 53
RADIOGRAPHY
REF NO. 54
COMMISSIONING PLANT
REF NO. 55
BLOCK PAVING, FLAGGING KERBS AND EDGINGS
REF NO. 56
ROAD/PATH SURFACING
REF NO. 57
FENCING (PERMANENT)
REF NO. 58
LANDSCAPING
REF NO. 59
TREE SURGERY/CHAINSAW WORK
REF NO. 60
FIRE PREVENTION IN WORK AREAS
REF NO. 61
FIRE IN OFFICES
REF NO. 62
OFFICE ENVIRONMENT (PERMANENT/TEMPORARY)
REF NO. 63
YOUNG PERSON IN CLERICAL POSITION (SITE)
REF NO. 64
CABLE PULLING OPERATIONS
REF NO. 65
WORKING IN CHEMICAL/RADIOACTIVE DRAINS
REF NO. 66
REF NO. 67
REF NO. 68
LADDERS
REF NO. 69
LEAD BURNING/PLUMBING WORK
REF NO. 70
MOBILE ELEVATED WORKING PLATFORMS (MEWP's)
REF NO. 71
UNLOADING OF VEHICLES
REF NO. 72
USE OF STEP LADDERS
REF NO. 73
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
REF NO. 74
BLANK GENERIC ASSESSMENT FORM
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
REF NO. 52
BRICK/BLOCKWORK OPERATIONS
CLEANING/BUILDER'S CLEAN
QCS 2014

RISK ASSESSMENT GUIDE

Assessment for:
Significant risks:
Page 19
REF NO. 1
SITE ESTABLISHMENT
Falls of persons, falling objects, Moving plant/equipment,
Trapping of personnel/limbs, Overhead obstruction.
DETAILS OF CONTROL MEASURES
Layout drawings prior to delivery of cabins. Location of services (gas,
water, electric, sewer and telephone).
Instruction
General safety instruction before activity commences e.g. Toolbox talks on

general risks etc.
Training
General health and safety. Certificated crane/HIAB operator. Banks man

training where appropriate.
Supervision
Competent person familiar with activity. Check no power lines/overhead

services in vicinity of lift.
Access
Safe access for vehicles suitable base. Safe access/egress to roof of

temporary accommodation to fix or unfix lifting slings. Proper access to
cabin doorways to be provided. Secure doors at first/second floor levels not
provided with staircases.
Environment
Establish ground loading and set up before delivery. Check location of

necessary services.
Equipment
Crane/HIAB and lifting slings check Safe Working Load (SWL) and radii.
Check statutory documents before lift. Adequate ladder for access to roof
level.
Emergencies
Standard COMPANY procedures to be in place ie. Mobile/phones/radios,

first aid etc.
TE
IN
EG
COSHH
Activity to be under the control of one competent person familiar with

task/activity/types of hazards.
Communications
AT
IO
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
Check that ground is not highly contaminated. If so conduct COSHH

assessment.
PPE
Hard hats, safety footwear, gloves and outdoor clothing. Harness at roof
level if appropriate.
Other
Keep third parties/general public well away from lifting operation area.
Obtain certificate for electrical integrity for inclusion in COMPANY register.
Fire precautions.
The above controls have been selected to protect the health and safety of operatives and others who may be
affected by the work. This assessment must take into consideration all relevant Company Safety Documents
and must be used when compiling a site specific method/task statement/procedure.
QCS 2014

Page 20
REF NO. 2
Assessment for:
SITE FENCING/HOARDING
Significant risks:
Manual handling, striking underground services,

crushing/trapping by plant & equipment
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Emergency telephone numbers. Permits to dig contact all service
companies and private service owners for service plans and tracings. Site
boundary lines structuring and height of fence/hoarding details.
Operatives to work to Safety method statements. Operatives to sign Safety
method statements. Operatives to be advised on hitting buried services.
Do Not assume depth. Use of detection equipment. Operatives to
temporarily fence when working adjacent to public.
Instruction/Training
To be fully conversant with services in work area. Must be qualified to

working in public highways/footpaths. If using crane/HIAB banks man to be
present.
Access
Traffic management for works in public highways/footpaths. Compliance

with relevant guidance when working adjacent to overhead lines. Ground
conditions. Exclusion zone prior to concrete curing.
Environment
Working adjacent to buildings. Overhead services. Traffic. Consider

effects of tree/shrub removal. Consider washing out facilities for concrete
delivery vehicles. Consider emergency action plan when near water
courses.
Equipment
As applicable. Detection equipment. Temporary support for fence

posts/gates/hoardings as applicable whilst concrete cures.
Emergencies
Liaise with emergency services and service providers. First aid kit, fire
protection, evacuation, accident reporting and investigation. Major incident
response plan. Emergency procedure to be detailed in contract safety plan.
Ensure openings/gates in hoardings/fencing are suitable for emergency
services.
COSHH
Warning signs. Hazard tape. Phone/radio.
Communications
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Supervision
As applicable for products used. Possible ground contamination.
PPE
High visibility clothing, hardhats, protective footwear, ear protection, gloves,

goggles.
Other
Detailed review of service drawings. Consider colour scheme for hoardings.

Viewing panels for security in hoardings.
QCS 2014

Page 21
REF NO. 3
Assessment for:
Significant risks:
DEMOLITION GENERAL
Falls from height, entrapment, health hazards. Injury from
falling/flying objects to operatives and general public,
sudden collapse of buildings/structures, fragile roofs, fires,
flooding, explosion, electrocution, contamination.
Inadequate access/egress.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Surveys, Safety Method Statements, structural assessments, scoping exercise
for hazards, equipments and structures etc. Previous drawings and plans. Site
history, past use, desk top study. Consultation at all levels.
Description of work to be carried out and methods to be used i.e. piecemeal or
controlled collapse. Specific responsibilities for plant and tools to be used.
Restrict others from area. Operatives to sign Safety Method Statement.
Induction: Lifting and manual handling; hazardous materials and hazardous
areas; oxygen and fuel cutting equipment; abrasive wheels; confined spaces
when applicable.
Instruction
AL
Training
Work to be placed under competent person qualified and experienced in

demolition operations of work. Monitor certification of drivers. Monitor works.
Essential to restrict access of personnel at place of work being carried out. Effect
on adjacent areas. Prohibition of unauthorised persons. Traffic marking of
danger zones.
State of existing property. Adequate welfare facilities. Overhead and general
services. Security of site during operations. General public, traffic, contaminated
material, dust, noise etc. No rubbish burning. Effect on residents, monitoring
requirements.
Provision of all relevant certification. Type to be approved as suitable to carry out
operations. Warning notices. Monitoring equipment. Consider transport safety.
Use of harnesses and equipment checks.
Standard first aid, fire protection, evacuations, accident and investigation
reporting. Emergency procedures to be detailed in the contract safety plan.
Other workers in the vicinity should be made aware of restricted access. Use of
lookouts, warning signs, letter drops to public, advice to other sub-contractors.
Handling of explosives, adhesives used for temporary support fixings, dust,
biological hazards and various chemical hazards must be identified and actioned.
Hard hats, boots, protective clothing, goggles, ear protection, face masks,
harnesses.
Discuss storage/operations/use of explosives with Qatar Police as appropriate.
Carry out administration and monitoring on daily basis. Structural assessments
must be carried out by a suitably competent person.
Disposal of smoke sensor heads must be in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations due to heads containing radioactive isotopes.
Because hot/cold water systems may be contaminated, i.e. legionella, personnel
involved in the dismantling/demolition of such systems should wear suitable
respiratory protective equipment. Contact/discuss with your Safety SHE Dept
prior to commencing work.
Supervision
AT
IO
Access
Environment
TE
Equipment
IN
Emergencies
PPE
Other
COSHH
EG
Communications
The above controls have been selected to protect the health and safety of operatives and others who
may be affected by the work. This assessment must take into consideration all relevant Company
Safety Documents and must be used when compiling a site specific method/task
statement/procedure.
QCS 2014

Page 22
REF NO. 4
Assessment for:
Significant risks:
DEMOLITION (ASBESTOS REMOVAL)

Asbestosis lung disease, mesothelioma, respiratory infections
to operatives and public. Increased risk for smokers.
Dust inhalation, ingestion and absorption.
Contaminated clothing.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Analysis of type of asbestos and evaluate the required measures. Safety Method
Statements. Provide specification for work. Survey the area.
Instruction
Consult the Safety and Environmental Department, strict control of personnel to

trained persons. Medical surveillance. Operatives to sign Safety Method
Statement. Normally a specialist operation. Personnel to be fully trained in the
handling and removal of asbestos. Check all details.
AL
Training
Specialist training is required for all persons supervising the plant, equipment and
labour associated with asbestos.
Access
Clean, tidy. Consider airlocks into work area decontamination unit. Designated
and controlled access are to be used. Exclusion zones.
Environment
Zoning of areas to be established provision of ventilation etc. Consider sealed

working area to control dust, damping down and effects of weather, i.e. wind and
rain. Monitor atmosphere against the allowed levels of exposure. Clearance
tests if applicable. Disposal as special waste.
Equipment
Consider suitable decontamination plant and materials to seal area, and dispose
of asbestos. Good separate welfare facilities. Air monitoring equipment.
Emergencies
Clearance tests, first aid (seek medical advice). Fire protection, evacuation,
accident reporting and investigation. Major incident response plan. Emergency
procedures to be detailed in the contract safety plan.
PPE
Other
TE
IN
EG
Standard warning signs and labelling of material for disposal. Advise all persons
who may be affected by work. Warning systems in event of emergencies.
Communications
AT
IO
Supervision
Suitable respirators, disposable overalls, gloves, goggles, masks.

This is a highly specialised activity; seek advice from Safety and Environmental
Department.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
BUILDINGS ADJACENT TO WORKS
Significant risks:
Page 23
REF NO. 5
Collapse/settlement. Associated services. Effect upon

occupiers from vibration and general inconvenience etc.
Undermining
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Details of existing construction and condition of the adjacent structure
should be used to produce a method statement. A detailed sequence, after
consultation with a qualified engineer, should be arrived at where
applicable. Design checks on excavations. Consider dewatering risks.
Site induction, briefing in position of existing services, methods to be
employed and special measures to limit noise, dust etc. Operatives to sign
Safety Method Statement.
Ensure all plant and equipment operators are certificated.
Instruction
Training
Supervisors to mark all services and monitor building, and wherever

possible verify details of foundations etc. Permits to dig to be issued and
possible additional supervision of operations.
Access
Safe access and egress to be provided for operators and occupiers.

Consideration to be given to restricted access zone.
Environment
Noise, dust and vibration to be kept to a level that does not interfere with
client installation or operations and monitored if applicable.
Equipment
As required by specific operation, possible monitoring equipment required

for noise, dust, movement and vibration.
Emergencies
Standard site first aid, reporting procedures. Emergency procedures for

occupiers to be considered. Major incident response plan.
Communications
Warning signs and hazard markers.
COSHH
Depends on exact activity undertaken.
Other
IN
EG
Standard for activities being undertaken.
PPE
TE
AT
IO
AL
Supervision
Agreed dilapidation survey of structure prior to work commencing (if

possible). Temporary works coordinator involvement.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
OVERHEAD SERVICE/OBSTRUCTIONS
Significant risks:
Page 24
REF NO. 6
Electrocution, structural damage to services, injury from

structural collapse or plant capsize.
Disruption to client/public services. Explosion
Contact service provider and clients for plans, details and exclusion zones.
Seek possibility of isolation of overhead electrics.
Instruction
All employees advised of location of all overhead services (with sketches

and clearances) and nature of services (electricity, gas, steam, air etc.).
Working Safety Method Statements are to consider installation dangers.
Operatives to sign Safety Method Statements.
Training
All personnel in the work area are to be inducted and given Safety
Awareness Talks on handling long object and plant movements in vicinity of
overhead services.
Supervision
Regular inspection of barriers and notices. To be fully conversant with

services in the work area.
Access
Consider exclusion zones, designated accesses and ground conditions.
Environment
Consider the effects of weather and ground conditions. In particular wind

and rain e.g. heightened risks of arcing.
Equipment
Provide crash deck where possible. Barriers to be of suitable construction

and design. Warning signs, hazard tapes and markers. Use of nonconductive material. Height restrictions in plant.
Emergencies
Liaise with Civil Defence (Fire Department) Standard site first aid, fire
protection, evacuation, accident reporting and investigation. Emergency
procedures to be detailed in contract safety plan.
COSHH
IO
AT
TE
IN
EG
Emergency contacts to be posted as applicable. Warning signs and hazard

markers.
Communications
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
As appropriate to the operations.
PPE
Hard hats and as appropriate to operations.
Other
Note that the highest risks often exist at the time of erection and removal of
barriers and height restrictions.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
UNDERGROUND SERVICES
Significant risks:
Page 25
REF NO. 7
Electrocution, explosion, asphyxiation, serious injuries,

working in vicinity of underground services with mechanical
equipment, disruption to public/client services.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Emergency telephone numbers. Permits to work. Contact service provider
and private service owners for service plans, tracings, as available. Marking
and hand excavation as appropriate.
Working to Safety Method Statements. Operatives to sign Safety Method
Statements. Operators to be advised on hitting buried services, (tracing
services). Do not assume depth.
Use of detection equipment, confined spaces.
Instruction
Training
To be fully conversant with services in the work area.

Consider exclusion zones. Review on hourly/daily basis to suit service in
work area.
Environment
Working adjacent to buildings. Overhead services. Traffic. Consider the

effects of water/flooding/weather on services and possible
emissions/discharges from services.
Equipment
As applicable. Detection equipment. Possible shoring, Protection and

Support systems.
Emergencies
Liaise with Civil Defence (Fire Department). Standard site first aid, fire
protection, evacuation, accident reporting and investigation. Major Incident
Response Plan. Emergency procedure to be detailed in contract safety
plan.
Communications
Warning signs, hazard tape and markers.
COSHH
As applicable for possible emissions/discharges, ground contamination.
EG
C
PPE
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Supervision
Access
Other
High visibility clothing, hard hats, protective footwear, ear muffs, goggles,
gloves etc.
Detailed review of available plans for identification of buried services. Note
also the following that may be in the area, Cable television, hydraulic,
process fluids, pneumatics, Railway signalling, petroleum fuel oils, private
communications, civil aviation, military authorities, also gas transmission
pipe lines (refer to owners requirements). Plastic pipes not detectable.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
PILING (DRIVEN/BORED/BENTONITE)
Significant risks:
Page 26
REF NO. 8
Crushing/laceration and entrapment injuries, drowning,

damage to plant and structures, plant and equipment
instability, reversing and slewing machinery, noise and dust.
Lifting reinforcing cages, piling gates, top men.
Contact with contaminated ground.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Obtaining information relating to services, ground conditions, adjacent
structures/foundations. Produce Safety Method Statement.
Employees are to be briefed on the Safety Method Statement and correct
use of equipment. Operatives to sign Safety Method Statement. Visitors
are to be escorted.
Personnel are to receive Safety Awareness Talks as appropriate.
Operators, banks men and piling hands are to be suitably trained and
certificated where appropriate.
Instruction
AL
Training
Supervisors to ensure that plant and equipment is operated and banked

ONLY by persons who have been trained, certificated and authorised to do
so. Ensure that weekly registers and maintenance requirements are
performed.
Access
Keep work area clear and tidy. Consider exclusion zones. Stabilise or
harden and maintain the piling mat/work area as appropriate for the work
proposed.
Environment
Consider weather, adequate lighting, ground conditions, ground water,

nearness of buildings, traffic, noise, fumes, dust and vibration. Consider
disposal of arisings in particular those contaminated.
Equipment
To be suitable for operations being carried out and test certificated

(including sub- contractors). Regular inspection, maintenance, cleaning
and reporting on condition. Check condition of plant and equipment upon
arrival on site. Weighted or anchored covers to Bentonite filled holes and
bored holes.
Standard site first aid, fire protection, evacuation, accident reporting and
investigation. Major incident response plan.
Communications
Emergencies
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Supervision
Warning signs, hazard lights and markers, audible warning units. Consider
the use of radio/transmitters.
COSHH
As applicable to materials used.
PPE
As appropriate together with high visibility clothing, ear defenders and head
protection, boots in particular for driven piling.
Other
Refer to generic risk assessment lifting equipment and contaminated land.

Avoid inhalation of Bentonite powder. Seek specialist advice as necessary.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
EXCAVATIONS
Page 27
REF NO. 9
(SHALLOW/DEEP/CONTAMINATED/BORROW PITS)
Significant risks:
Water ingress/flooding. Collapse of adjacent structures.

Injury from falling equipment and materials. Entrapment,
Contact with overhead/underground service, personal
injury to oneself or others. Failure to check and ensure
safe use of equipment. Overturning of vehicles/plant etc.
Collapse of excavation sides.
Check for services in area , evaluate ground conditions and investigate possible
flooding. Obtain adequate propping material before commencement. Major
excavations must be the subject of design check. Check for buildings, scaffolds
and other operations around trench. Operatives to enter and leave excavation
by safe access only. Monitor for possible gas. Prevent access to public
(remember blind persons require firm barriers). Adequate lighting and signs.
Check for contaminated ground. Prevent unauthorised access to excavation.
Method statement for installation and removal of support system, also services
support systems. Operatives to sign Safety Method Statement. Permit to dig
system to be adopted in identified areas of service location i.e. urban areas,
factory premises etc.
Operatives to be trained in the use of support systems and gas monitors.
Machine drivers to be conversant with support systems, also banks man and
possible confined space training. Advice on any identified risk and control
measures.
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
IO
Instruction
AT
Training
Competent person must be in attendance at all times. Daily/shift checks on

trench/support system. Weekly inspection and register kept up to date. Watch
for deterioration of ground in wet conditions. Materials and plant not stored too
close to edges of excavations. Edge protection.
Access
Safe access and egress in and around excavation to be provided. Use ladders,
ramps, cut in steps. Well lit at night. Handrails to top of batters. Stop blocks for
vehicles.
Excavations area to be kept clear of unnecessary material or plant. Keep any
water levels to acceptable levels (ensure adequate sumps). Rain could affect
ground conditions. Monitor for gases and contaminated ground. Consider
disposal of pumped water.
Plant and equipment to be suitable for operation especially support system.
Adequate supply of support materials. Pumping equipment to be available if
water present.
Standard first aiders. Rescue procedure in place. Possible major incident
response plan to be put in action. Emergency procedures to be established in
contract safety plan.
Surrounding area for excavation to be adequately signed. Quick safe warning
system considered.
Monitor for gas, contaminated ground and general assessments of all materials
to be used. Identify any control methods such as the provision of mechanical
ventilation.
Hard hats, suitable footwear, possible disposable overalls, gloves and high
visibility vests.
Machine operatives to have good vision of work in progress if possible. Cross
reference to confined space generic risk assessment for further information.
IN
TE
Supervision
Emergencies
Communications
COSHH
PPE
Other
Equipment
EG
Environment
affected by the work. This assessment must take into consideration all relevant Company Safety Documents and
must be used when compiling a site specific method/task statement/procedure.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
HAUL ROAD CROSSINGS ON CONSTRUCTION SITES
Significant risks:
Page 28
REF NO. 10
Impact injury due to collision of plant and machinery with

private vehicles or pedestrians.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Temporary Traffic Orders for speed restriction on approach to crossing
points. Method statements for installation of such schemes will also be
required on major schemes, to include all identified requirements of a safe
system of work.
Instruction
Training
Appropriate experienced personnel only to be used for actual

installation/removal of traffic management works.
Specific training for all drivers using crossing points and those who will
operate the crossing.
An experienced member of staff to be nominated as the Traffic Safety
Manager with special responsibility for plant crossings.
AL
Supervision
Crossing to be kept clean and free of debris. Lights and warning signs on
both haul road and main road to be cleaned regularly.
Environment
Consideration must be given to poor visibility during adverse weather

conditions. Lights and signs soon become observed by dirt. Similarly
during extremely dry weather dust will be a problem.
Equipment
All traffic management equipment to conform confirm to current standards

and to be regularly maintained/washed.
Emergencies
Emergency call out/liaison list to be established. Standard site first aid, fire
protection, evacuation, accident reporting and investigation. Emergency
procedures to be detailed in contract safety plan.
Communications
Radios for traffic management team. Mobile phone/radios for traffic safety
coordinator. Information signs. Close liaison with police.
Other
AT
TE
IN
EG
PPE
If using portable generators, noise and handling of fuel.
COSHH
IO
Access
High visibility clothing, hard hats etc.

Provision of shelter and adequate welfare facilities especially for plant
crossing operatives well away from temporary offices.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
EARTHWORKS
Significant risks:
Page 29
REF NO. 11
Injuries from plant movements, unstable

excavations/embankments, tipping vehicles,
overhead/underground services, contaminated ground, dust.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Safety Method Statements. Detailed review of available plans for
identification of buried services. Detailed review of ground
conditions/boreholes before commencement. Desk study, advice from
Engineering Department. Operatives to be instructed on safe system of
work appropriate to the type of operation. Operatives to sign safety method
statements.
Induction and Safety Awareness Talks to include the care to be taken on
earthworks operations. Supervisors responsible for daily/weekly inspections
are to be suitably trained. Operators to be suitably trained and certified for
the equipment used and Banks man duties as required.
Work is to be controlled by an appropriately competent experienced
earthworks supervisor. Inspections before work shift commences. Site
register to be completed weekly. Temporary Works coordinator to be
appointed.
Instruction
AL
Training
IO
Supervision
Designated routes, access points and exclusion zones. Consideration is to

be given to separation from, and control of, public and non-earthworks traffic
within the working area. Safe haul route.
Environment
Evaluate ground conditions to establish nature, groundwater, nearness of

buildings or traffic. Weather and flooding should be considered when
planning operations. Consider the stability of stockpiles and batters; and
the control of noise, dust and fume. Consider any details of contamination.
Equipment
Plant inspection and periodic testing, buried service detectors, guard rails,
barriers, warning signs, adequate lighting. Air monitoring equipment where
appropriate. Wheel wash facilities. Reversing alarms.
Communications
IN
EG
Emergencies
TE
AT
Access
Warning signs, hazard tape, markers, hazards lights and audible warning
units. Consider use of radio/transmitters. Use traffic signs.
COSHH
Not applicable, except on contaminated ground where a COSHH evaluation

of ground contaminants will be required to determine protection required.
PPE
Hard hats, protective footwear, protective clothing in adverse weather

conditions, high visibility clothing etc.
Other
Consider use of speed limits and mobile welfare facilities.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
REDUCED LEVEL DIG AND IMPORTED FILL
Significant risks:
Page 30
REF NO. 12
Contact with plant, reversing vehicles, overhead and

underground services, dust, noise, contaminated land.
Equipment to be certificated, inspected and records kept. Underground
services drawings. Safety signs, warning notices.
Instruction
Training
Competent, certificated and authorised plant operators. Banks men

required for reversing vehicles/plant movement. All operatives to sign
method statement as understood.
Supervision
Supervisors to ensure plant and equipment only operated by certificated,

authorised persons.
Access
Segregate plant from pedestrians.
Environment
Dust suppression methods. Ground conditions. Daily log of dust emissions.

Protection of features/foundations/safe batters/support/proper compaction.
Good working order, regularly maintained. Overhead power lines to be
suitably protected by high/low level barriers. Segregate from pedestrians.
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
AT
IO
Equipment
All plant to be fitted with fire extinguishers.
Communications
Warning signs, barriers and audible warning units.
COSHH
Dependent upon soil analysis/as applicable during breakdown/regular

maintenance to plant and equipment.
PPE
Banks men to wear high visibility clothing, safety footwear/safety helmets to

be worn at all times. Hearing protection to be worn as applicable.
Other
Stop blocks required for reversing plant where applicable.

Ref contaminated land risk assessment No 9 if appropriate.
EG
IN
TE
Emergencies
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
CONTAMINATED GROUND
Significant risks:
Page 31
REF NO. 13
Contact with toxic, irritant corrosive harmful and radioactive

materials. Injury through skin absorption, skin
puncture, ingestion, inhalation or radiation. Toxic/explosive
fumes or materials.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Seek all information available and where this is inadequate obtain the
appropriate chemical analysis before commencement/recommencement of
the work. Produce detailed hazard risk assessments and Safety Method
Statements. Operatives to sign Safety Method Statement. Personnel are to
be made aware of the type of contamination and possible dangers.
Operatives are to be given safety awareness talks. Operatives to be made
aware of procedure if coming into contact with unexpected material/smells.
Demonstrations and briefings are to be given to personnel on the method of
handling contaminated material, the effects and remedies, the correct use of
protective clothing and personal hygiene. This should be updated as
necessary.
Instruction
AL
Training
A competent person is to obtain the appropriate information on the

contaminated material and ensure that operatives are given and adhere to
the training information above. Designate a waste controller as appropriate.
Regularly monitor the material exposed and ensure adequate testing.
Access
Exclusion zones and designated safe access as necessary related to the

type and level of contaminant exposed.
Environment
Evaluate the effects of weather, heat, dust, vibration, corrosion, polluted

atmosphere/water, ground conditions (stability).
Equipment
To be individually assessed to suit the operation. Consider gas monitors,

breathing apparatus, chemical indicator tubes, wheel washers,
decontamination units.
AT
TE
IN
EG
C
Emergencies
IO
Supervision
Together with standard procedure for first aid, fire protection, evacuation
and reporting; specific procedures are to be considered to suit the operation
and contaminants present. Procedures for environmental emergencies i.e.
spill, groundwater contamination etc.
Communications
Warning signs, hazard markings and exclusion zones as appropriate.
COSHH
As appropriate. Specialist advice to be sought where necessary.
PPE
Consider suitable, masks, goggles, gloves, boots, barrier creams, and suits
etc. Also consider whether these should be disposable/regularly renewed.
Other
Good welfare, washing and hosing down facilities. Seek advice from Safety
& Environmental Department where necessary.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
POTENTIALLY CONTAMINATED GROUND/BUILDING FABRIC
Significant risks:
Page 32
REF NO. 13 B
Infection through skin absorption, skin puncture, ingestion or inhalation
CONTROL ITEM
Information
Instruction
Training
IO
AL
Supervision

Seek all information available about the site including site investigation reports,
trial pit records, maps and plans. Produce Safety Method Statements.
Personnel are to be made aware of the type of contamination and possible
dangers. Operatives are to be given safety awareness talk.
Operatives to be made aware of procedure if coming into contact with
unexpected material. Demonstrations and briefings are to be given to personnel
on the method of handling contaminated material, the effects and remedies, the
correct use of protective clothing and personal hygiene. This should be updated
as necessary. Give operatives information on the level of residual risk.
A designated, competent person is to obtain the appropriate information on the
potentially contaminated material and ensure that operatives are given and
adhere to the training information above. Designate a waste controller as
appropriate. Regularly monitor the material exposed and ensure adequate
identification/testing.
Effective procedures for health surveillance to enable early diagnosis of
infection.
Exclusion zones and designated safe access as necessary related to the type
and level of contaminant exposed.
Evaluate the effect of weather, wind strength and direction, heat, dust, polluted
water. Measures to prevent exposure of the general public to wind borne
contamination.
To be individually assessed to suit the operation. Consider breathing
apparatus, wheel washers, and decontamination units.
Together with standard procedure for first aid, fire protection, evacuation and
reporting, specific procedures are to be considered to suit the operation and
contaminants present. Procedures for environmental emergencies, ie spills,
groundwater contamination, etc.
Prior contact shall be established with a local general practitioner.
As appropriate. Specialist advice to be sought where necessary.
Check for and protect skin cuts or scratches before using PPE.
Consider suitable masks, goggles, gloves, boots, barrier creams and suits, etc.
Also consider whether these should be disposable/regularly renewed
Facilities for decontamination or disposal of clothing.
Adopt procedures for decontamination by heat treatment or chemical
disinfecting of any animal remains encountered during the work.
Consider immunisation
Good welfare, washing and hosing down facilities. Seek advice from Safety &
Environmental Department where necessary.
AT
Access
Environment
Equipment
Other
IN
EG
C
Communications
COSHH
PPE
TE
Emergencies
QCS 2014

Assessment for:
Significant risks:
Page 33
REF NO. 14
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES
Demonstrations/sabotage, pollution, damage/destruction of
flora, fauna, ancient monuments or protected areas etc.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Obtain details of all information and restrictions relevant to the operational
area from the Enforcing Authority, the client/employer.
Instruction
Induct personnel appropriately in relation to the information obtained above

and any effects on methods of working.
Safety awareness talks environmental awareness are to be given where
applicable. Consideration should be given as to whether further specialist
training is necessary for certain operations or localities
Training
The site manager where appropriate will make personnel aware of

information/restrictions and institute suitable controls.
Access
Consideration to be given to restricted zones, security measures and

damage caused by equipment/plant movements.
Environment
Consideration to be given to the effects of weather, noise, dust

contamination and construction methods upon the local
environment/population/watercourses.
Equipment
Fencing, covers, bunds (soil), noise and atmosphere monitors and security
equipment as applicable.
Emergencies
investigation. Establish environmental emergency response if applicable.
Communications
Warning signs, contact Health and Safety Department, emergency

telephone list.
Other
IN
EG
PPE
As appropriate.
COSHH
TE
AT
IO
AL
Supervision
As appropriate.
Record photographs, incident/insurance reports. Diesel/oil/flocculants/silt
laden water are potentially major environmental problems. Please refer to
Safety Department for further guidance.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
Significant risks:
Page 34
REF NO. 15
WORKING ON PUBLIC QATAR ROADS

Injury from passing/reversing vehicles, debris, services,
Subsidence. Dangers to public from construction operations.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Safety Method Statements Permits to work on highways. Notify and liaise
with the appropriate authorities. Traffic management assessment,
requirements for emergency routes for vehicle access i.e. ambulance, Civil
Defence (Fire Department), Police etc. Wearing of high visibility clothing.
Form of traffic control. Access and egress routes. Crossing points,
pedestrian routes, specific risks involved requirements of speed limits.
Inductions on traffic management and working on public highways.
Instruction
Training
To be suitably qualified. Monitor work to Safety Method Statements. Action

any non-conformities.
Access
Maintain public and property access where possible or make alternative

arrangements. Establish suitably signed works access. Adequate signing
of access and egress points.
Environment
Evaluate: noise, dust, fumes, identification of sensitive locations such as

schools, hospitals, surgeries, shops, public services when planning works.
Consider the hazards to blind persons.
Equipment
Plant/equipment flashing lights (if appropriate).
Emergencies
Standard first aid, fire protection, evacuation, accident reporting and

investigation. Liaise with all emergency services, and highways
departments dates, times etc., work being carried out. Major incident
response plan. Emergency procedures to be detailed in contract safety
plan.
Communications
Warning and information signs. Hazard markers. Traffic control

requirements. Liaise with local residents.
EG
C
COSHH
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Supervision
As required may include use of various materials such as black top or

assessment for dust and fumes generated by traffic.
PPE
High visibility clothing. Hard hats, protective footwear, ear muffs, goggles,
gloves, wet weather clothing.
Other
Monitor approved Traffic Diversions Plans on a regular basis and review if

needed.
affected by the work. This assessment must take into consideration Qatar Work Zone Traffic Management
Guide, all relevant Company Safety Documents and must be used when compiling a site specific
method/task statement/procedure.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
WORKING OVER OR ADJACENT TO WATER SOURCES
Significant risks:
Page 35
REF NO. 16
Drowning. Shock. (Fatigue with clothing on

in water). Possible Weils disease.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Operatives advised on risk of falling/slipping into water while working in and
around docks, swimming pools, tanks and water retaining structures/pits.
Operatives advised of risk of falling/slipping into water. Safety Awareness
Talks. Safe methods of working. Access and egress routes. Rescue
procedures. Tide tables, weather.
Instruction
Inductions, Safety Awareness Talks, use of life jacket, harness, lifebuoys,

throwing lines, warning systems. Communications. Rescue procedures.
First aiders. Rescue boats. Hygiene Weils disease.
AL
Training
Competent supervisor to monitor and check safety and rescue equipment

and working method.
Access
Scaffold if possible over water. Handrails beside water, or fencing. Safe

access and egress route to and from work areas.
Environment
Good lighting. Weather, tides and ground conditions.
Equipment
Safety boat. Life jackets, lifebuoys, safety nets, throw lines, radios,
harnesses, scaffolds, pontoons, rescue lines, audible alarms etc.
Emergencies
Trained first aiders. Rescue procedures in place. Audible alarms.

Standard site first aid/reporting procedures.
Communications
Good communications, i.e. radios, telephones or hand signals. Post list of

emergency contact numbers. Warning signs.
COSHH
Considerations to be given if water is contaminated - weils disease.
Other
TE
IN
EG
Life jackets, safety harnesses. Loose, warm, high visibility clothing.

Suitable warm footwear. Hard hats, etc.
PPE
AT
IO
Supervision
Good welfare facilities. Adjacent water traffic movement to be considered.
QCS 2014

Page 36

Assessment for:
WORKING OVER OR ADJACENT TO RAILWAYS
REF NO. 17
RISK CATEGORY
Significant risks:
BEFORE CONTROLS
Electrocution/Collision of plant and operatives with trains.

Possible collapse or subsidence of railway equipment.
Derailment.
Tick as appropriate
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Obtain from the relevant railway authority all information relative to the
operation, such as structural gauge and fencing. All safety method
statements to be agreed with railway before commencement of work.
Possessions, if required, to be agreed with railway authority.
Instruction
Training
Ensure all rail procedures and Safety Method Statements are adhered to.
Access
Use only identified walking routes and work areas as agreed in Safety
Method Statements. Possessions to be agreed with railways. Establish
exclusion zones as necessary.
Environment
Consider the effect of dust, weather and construction operations upon the
railway. Good lighting required.
Equipment
Check requirement for structural barriers. Consider the limitation of

construction plant adjacent to railway operations. Comply with railway
authority requirements for non-conductive equipment such as
wheelbarrows, ladders, approved CAT scanner, etc.
Emergencies
Standard site first aid (with particular reference to electric shock), fire
protection, evacuation, accident reporting and investigation. Major incident
response plan.
Communications
Site wardens and lookouts to be used as required. Warning signs and

hazard markers as required by railway authority. Consider use of approved
radio/transmitters. Rail emergency telephone number to be prominently
posted.
As applicable to the operations.
PPE
Other
IN
EG
C
COSHH
TE
AT
IO
AL
Supervision
Approved high visibility vests. Hard hats (white), suitable footwear (No
Rigger Boots) Harnesses if working at height.
Only personnel with good hearing and eyesight are to work on or adjacent
to railways
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
REINFORCEMENT
Significant risks:
Page 37
REF NO. 18
Collapse of reinforcement. Poor housekeeping, falls when

accessing structures. Access across reinforcement
Relevant drawings and reinforcement/structural engineers
recommendations N.B. temporary requirements relating to stability
especially in wind.
Ensure all personnel are subject of induction and are briefed in method
statement/risk assessment content.
Supervision
Competent supervision to be in attendance for duration of operation.

Ensure method statement content is applied at workface.
Access
Ensure board walkways 600mm wide are provided across slab reinforcing.
Ensure guarded and boarded platforms are provided for fixing reinforcement
at height: prohibit the use of ladders. Provide scaffold stair towers. Prohibit
the climbing of reinforcement. Expedite the installation of permanent
staircases. Provide protection to exposed starter bars.
Environment
Caution required on damp plywood decks or following application of release

agents. Limit and control mechanical and manual handling of shutters in
high wind.
Equipment
Cut off wheel operations to be certificated.
Emergencies
See site general emergency procedure.
Communications
Works to be closely coordinated with erection of false work and form work.
Formal paperwork system to be applied for control of loading and striking
formwork.
COSHH
Low risk for handling steel, tying wire and spacers.

Assessment as appropriate for any other substances.
Other
PPE
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
Safety helmet, boots, eye protection and rigger gloves. Full body harness
only when attachment location identified and agreed in method statement.
Eye protection recommended when using tying wire.
Agree methods of attachment of slings when mechanically lifting fabricated
cages.
See Risk Assessment No19 for concrete works.
QCS 2014

Page 38

REF NO. 19
Assessment for:
CONCRETING, CONCRETE REPAIR, CONCRETE FINISHING.
Significant risks:
Plant and equipment, noise/vibration, concrete burns, dermatitis,
working at heights, protruding reinforcement, manual handling,
failure of materials/equipment.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Method statements. Safety signs. Warning notices.
Operatives to sign method statements. Operator certificated and

competent to use items of plant/equipment. Manual handling/vibration
training.
Constantly monitoring concreting operations, particularly situations where
point loading/collapse could occur. Rotate workers on vibratory tools where
feasible.
Supervision
Consideration of mechanical access equipment. Provision of safe means

of access/egress suitably secured. Segregate pedestrians from plant and
equipment. Edge/hole protection.
Environment
Consider noise produced from plant and equipment particularly for out-ofhours working on curing concrete. Dust suppression methods. Adequate
lighting. Dust from mixing dry concrete locate mixers externally. Protect
vertical ends of protecting starter bars.
Equipment
Good working, least vibration order, regularly maintained and records kept.
Operators to be certificated / competent.
Emergencies
Suitable First Aid facilities to be available, particularly eye-bath stations to

be situated nearby. Operatives aware of emergency procedure and
location of assembly points. Establish systems of work/emergency contact
numbers for out of hours working.
Communications
Provision of suitable safety signs warning and barriers.
PPE
Other
EG
Assessments/information and instructions to be given to operatives on

materials. Personal hygiene essential when dealing with concrete/content.
COSHH
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Access
Suitable protective footwear, including wellington boots where necessary.

Hand, head and eye protection. Hearing protection where necessary.
Safe system of work for dismantling/stripping formwork to prevent falls onto
persons to be included in method statement.
QCS 2014

Page 39

REF NO. 20
Assessment for:
PRE-CAST CONCRETE, STAIRS, WALLS AND FLOORS
Significant risks:
Falls from height, crushing, collapse, handling, access,
lifting appliances, heavy plant.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Operatives to be given appropriate information to ensure full knowledge of
possible hazards associated with the fixing of pre-cast concrete units.
Details of designed safe Method Statements to include specific risks.
Where applicable, operatives to be inducted on the construction methods.
Operatives to be trained by competent person in use of plant and
equipment.
The installation and fixing of pre-cast units to be controlled by experienced

supervisor.
Access
Designated safe access/egress to be provided to all work areas. Control of

access of pedestrians and plant to be in place to prevent unauthorised work
under pre-cast flooring/wall installation.
Environment
Monitor for noise. Consider the effect of wind loadings on hoisted sections,
and ground conditions to be checked for cranage equipment.
Equipment
All cranage/lifting gear/mobile and static scaffolds to be properly maintained

and inspected.
Emergencies
Emergency procedures to be drawn up for the recovery of persons working

at height, to include contact numbers and location of first-aider. Standard
first aid equipment and accident reporting.
Communications
Radios to be used if possible. Systems to be in place for tandem lifting on

heavy/large pre-cast sections. Signs and hazard markers.
COSHH
N/A
IN
Hard hats, boots, high-visibility vests and harnesses.
Other
EG
PPE
TE
AT
IO
AL
Supervision
Transportation of long/wide loads to be planned with Police if applicable.

Unique Method/Risk Assessments to be drawn up for individual erection
processes with sub-contractor.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
SCAFFOLD (ALL TYPES)
Significant risks:
Page 40
REF NO. 21
Injury from falling equipment and materials. Danger of

collapse in exposed places, falling from height.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Usage of scaffolding and adequate materials/fittings. Equipment to be
used. Safety Method Statements. Evaluate ground and loading conditions.
Assess the need for any design requirements. Operatives to be provided
safe access and egress. Prevent unauthorised access. Prevent access to
any incomplete areas. Tie-ins. Drawings of system being erected.
Number/width of platforms.
Provision of handover certificates on completion.
Inductions. Safety Awareness Talks Working at Heights. Interpretation
of scaffold design drawings. No scaffold to be erected modified or
dismantled, except under the supervision of a competent person.
AL
Instruction
Training
All scaffold erection must be under the supervision of a competent person.

Thoroughly examine before first use, after substantial alteration after bad
weather, or every 7 days. Receive scaffold handover certificate as
appropriate. Keep platforms and area base clear.
Access
Keep access area to scaffold clean and tidy. Notice warning of dangers.
Identify incomplete scaffold. Adequate widths of access platforms.
Further consideration required if access by hoist, etc.
Environment
Evaluate ground conditions. Proximity to water/buildings or traffic.

Overhead services. Consider the general public. Consider weather
conditions such as wind loadings on sheeted scaffolds.
Equipment
To suit requirements.
Emergencies
Standard first aid. Accident reporting and investigation. Contract safety

plan emergency procedures.
COSHH
PPE
Other
IN
EG
C
Communications
TE
AT
IO
Supervision
Inform others working in area of proposed scaffolding to be erected.

Supply information to other employees who may be using the scaffold.
Warning signs and hazard tape and markers (lighting/traffic protection in
urban areas).
N/A
Hard hats, protective footwear, harnesses, gloves.
Review scheme if modification takes place. Ensure that a scaffold
handover certificate is issued where appropriate. Secure scaffold against
unauthorised access. Carry out manual handling assessment of the work.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
STRUCTURES (WORKING AT HEIGHTS)
Significant risks:
Page 41
REF NO. 22
Injuries from falls, falling materials and equipment,

reinforcement instability, structural failure, harmful substances,
pressure bursts, power tools, entrapment, plant instability,
splinters, dust, fragments, excessive noise, vibration,
fumes, confined spaces.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Operatives are to be given the appropriate information to ensure that they
are conversant with the hazards of operations and equipment associated
with false work, reinforcement, concrete placement, scabbling / grit-blasting,
working at heights, roof work as applicable to the type of structure. Details
of design risk assessment to be incorporated into Safety Method Statement.
Hierarchy of secure platform/workplace safety nets safety harnesses to
be determining fall protection measures.
Where applicable, operatives are to be inducted on the construction
methods, and given potential hazard details. Operatives to sign Safety
Method Statements. Operators to be trained by competent person in use of
plant and equipment.
AL
Instruction
Training
Work is to be controlled by a competent experienced supervisor and

temporary works coordinator as required. Appropriate registers to be
completed.
Access
Designated safe access is to be provided to all areas of work.
Environment
Monitor for noise, vibration, dust atmosphere. Evaluate access, wind

loading, weather, ground conditions, watercourses, nearness of buildings,
traffic or services, stacking of materials at ground level and above.
Equipment
Access equipment/platforms, guard rails, adequate lighting, false work /

scaffold design and inspection, lifting equipment.
Emergencies
investigation. Major incident response plan. Emergency procedures to be
detailed in contract safety plan for recovery of persons injured at heights.
IN
EG
C
Communications
TE
AT
IO
Supervision
Emergency contact names, organisations, telephone numbers. Warning

signs.
COSHH
All materials to be assessed for COSHH.
PPE
Hard hats, protective footwear, protective clothing, goggles, high-visibility

clothing, masks, harnesses, etc., as appropriate.
Other
Management individual to be appointed to have responsibility for coordination of design and procurement of false work and access scaffold, etc.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
STEEL ERECTION (GENERAL)
Significant risks:
Page 42
REF NO. 23
Lifting, Work at Heights. Injuries from falls/falling objects
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Detailed Safety Method Statements particularly in respect of lay down
facilities sequence, access, temporary stability and safety are required.
Location of anchor points.
Instruction
Site Induction, safety awareness, unique Safety Method Statement briefing.

Competent steel erectors only should be used familiar, as a minimum,
with rigging, erection methods, lifting equipment, tools and plant, erection of
accesses (mobile and static). Individual training for unique types of plant
such as mobile lift platforms. Certification of Banks men.
AL
Training
Competent supervisors with knowledge of lifting duties, planning, safety

equipment as well as general operative training above. Operative training
certification verified and registered.
Access
Generally via fixed scaffold system, cradles, mobile platforms or harnesses

etc. Fixed access to be properly erected and inspected. Mobile plant to be
certificated. Consider exclusion zones.
Environment
Ground conditions to be checked for cranage/mobile access equipment.

Services to be marked etc. Monitor weather conditions.
Equipment
All cranage/lifting gear/mobile and static platforms, to be properly

maintained and inspected.
Emergencies
Emergency procedures to be drawn up for recovery of persons injured at

height including contact numbers and location of first aider. Standard site
first aid, fire protection, evacuation, accident reporting and investigation.
AT
TE
IN
EG
COSHH
Radios to be used if possible. Signs and hazard markers.
Communications
IO
Supervision
N/A
PPE
High visibility vests, harnesses, helmets and boots.
Other
Unique assessments should be drawn up for individual erection processes

with sub-contractor.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
WELDING, BURNING, STEEL WORK
Significant risks:
Page 43
REF NO. 24
Fires, explosion, respiratory disease/eye damage. Various

occupational health risks.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Use Hot Work Permit System. Welding procedures, details of gases to be
used and storage details is included.
Instruction
Site induction, explanation of unique Safety Method Statement.
Training
Welding and burning should only be performed by suitably

trained/certificated individuals who can show proof of such training
appropriate to the operation.
Generally by a suitably experienced supervisor who does not have to be a
certificated welder but must be experienced in welding safety, working at
heights etc.
AL
Supervision
As general steel erection, however, due allowance must be made for safe
positioning of equipment, screens, hoses and welding leads.
Environment
Storage of bottles must be controlled with oxygen at least 3 meters from

LPG/ACETYLENE, in open air, upright, out of sunlight. Firefighting
equipment must be present. Flash guards whilst welding.
Equipment
To be regularly maintained with daily checks on hoses, regulators, leads,

flashback arrestors leak tests, etc. Only proprietary fittings to be used.
Secure bottle storage as above. Handling to be via trolleys etc.
Emergencies
investigation. Additional firefighting facilities locally.
Communications
N/A
COSHH
Materials to be welded / cut should be identified and full COSHH

assessment performed. Give particular attention to coatings on materials to
be welded / cut. Iron oxide (vapour), carbon monoxide and nitrous fumes
may be created, natural ventilation generally OK, but induced ventilation
may be required in confined spaces.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Access
PPE
Other
Specialist welding visors, goggles, helmets, masks, gauntlets and overalls

to protect bare skin.
Assess the need for fire watchmen, screen the public from welding.
Unburnt gas builds up in voids behind work piece from preheating
operations.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
ROOF WORK/WORK NEAR FLOOR ETC OPENINGS
Significant risks:
Page 44
REF NO. 25
Falls from height. Falls of materials/tools etc.

Loading sequence/Lifting arrangements. Operatives advised of contents of
risk assessment/Safety Method Statements. Operatives to sign Safety
Method Statements.
Instruction on fall arrest equipment, edge protection, wearing of harness,

fragile materials, equipment/material control.
Supervision
Competent supervisor to be present for all associated works. Supervision to

implement Safety Method Statement requirements.
Access
Guard rails/toe boards/material guards provided and used. Adequate ladder

access etc.
Environment
Weather implications i.e. winds, sand factors etc.
Equipment
Adequate access. Where used safety netting properly secured. Anchorage

points for clip-on facilities for full arrest equipment.
Emergencies
First aid, evacuation, recovery arrangements for possible injured person and
fire control.
Communications
Warning notices and where appropriate segregation at ground level to

protect pedestrians.
COSHH
As appropriate to roof work type e.g. Hot Bitumen etc.
PPE
Inertia reels for fall arrest. Full body harnesses, safety helmet, boots, warm
clothing etc.
Other
Material movement onto roof and loading sequence be controlled. Consider

point loading.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
INFILLING OF FLOOR OPENING(S)
Significant risks:
Page 45
REF NO. 26
Falls of person, falls of materials, collapse of support work

(temporary or permanent). Health risk from contact with
materials. Muscular skeletal injuries.
All persons involved in the work will receive information regarding the
hazards associated with the operation and the precautions to be taken.
The supplier of bolts and fixings should be requested to instruct installers on

the correct procedures to be used for the fixings specified.
Supervision
All work involving the support at floor infills shall be under the control of a
competent person experienced in the methods used.
Access
Proper access must be provided for installation of support system. Barriers

must be provided to the edges of the opening prior to the infilling operations.
Where appropriate fall protection to be provided.
Environment
All support work whether temporary or permanent must be subject to a

methodical system of checking to include, connections, fixings, access etc
and compliance with design drawings and specification prior to loading.
Permit system to be introduced prior to loading system with concrete.
Equipment
All equipment must be checked for good condition and suitability prior to
being used.
Emergencies
Arrangement to be put in place for recovering persons injured etc whilst

carrying out work on high level areas.
Communications
All relevant information including Safety Method Statements and Risk

Assessments, Manufacturers Instructions and design drawings should be
communicated to all persons involved.
PPE
Other
IO
AT
TE
IN
EG
Assessments should be made for materials classified under COSHH which

should be communicated to all persons.
COSHH
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
May include, eye protection, clothing, footwear, safety helmet and hearing
protection.
Safety Method Statements must be produced for all elements of the works
including preparation of existing structure, installation and inspection of
support system and access systems. Installation of Formwork and preloading checks.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
ROOF WORK (FLAT)
Significant risks:
Page 46
REF NO. 27
Falls from height, falls of materials, fragile materials,

unsecured materials, manual handling.
Sequence of work. Location of materials, raising of materials to roof level.
Means of providing fall protection. To elevations leading edge and
openings. Handling of large sheets.
Operatives and supervisors must be trained and competent. Must be

inducted and briefed in method statement content.
Supervision
Competent supervisor to be in attendance for duration of operation. Ensure

method statement is formally discussed with all roofing operatives.
Supervision to review roof operations daily.
Access
Provide ladder or access tower or identify other means of access.
Environment
Confirm maximum safe working wind speed for type of roofing. Be aware of
increased risk in dusty conditions.
Equipment
NB the options for protection are (in order of preference):1 safety nets;
2 Lead guard type leading edge protection trolley systems;
3 Safety harnesses/running lines/ fall arrestors.
Adequate access. Where used safety netting properly secured by
certificated erectors. Anchorage points / clip-on facilities for full arrest
equipment. Anemometer.
Emergencies
Agree emergency procedure for recovery and treatment of person injured at

a height. Ensure adequate firefighting and first aid provision available.
Communications
Warning notices and where appropriate segregation or protection at ground

level to protect pedestrians.
IN
EG
Assessments as appropriate for materials to be used.
COSHH
TE
AT
IO
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
PPE
Full body harnesses, safety helmets, boots, warm clothing. Gloves, eye
protection
Other
Confirm controls for hot works and storage of flammables at height.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
ROOF STRUCTURE (including wall plates/trusses/timber)
Significant risks:
Page 47
REF NO. 28
Falls, falling objects, manual handling, fire.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Agree safety method statement. Store materials in a safe manner. Provide
suitable working platform. Precautions to be taken to prevent operatives
falling whilst installing trusses e.g. safety nets or boarding. Visually check
electrical tools and leads. Obtain COSHH assessments. Ensure circular
saws are in good working order with guard and dust extraction bag in place.
Carry out manual handling assessment, use lifting appliances to lift trusses
into position. Complete crane checklist. Inspect lifting gear before use.
Keep work area free from tripping hazards. Store waste material in the
proper bins.
Operatives to receive risk, manual handling and COSHH assessment.
Carry out induction, all relevant assessments to be given as Tool Box Talks.
If using Mobile Elevated Work Platforms adequate training must be given.
Slingers to be properly trained.
Instruction
AL
Training
Competent person to inspect working platforms and work areas before work
starts. Inspection of working platforms to be entered in Site Register.
Crane controller to complete crane checklist.
Provide suitable ladders, properly secured. Keep access free of materials
and electrical leads.
IO
Supervision
AT
Access
Weather implications i.e. winds and dusty conditions.
Equipment
All electrical equipment to be inspected on a regular basis by a competent

electrician, these should be tagged with details of last inspection. Carry out
manufacturers instructions for maintaining Mobile Elevated Work Platforms.
Safety nets to be properly secured. Crane and lifting gear certificates to be
kept in site register.
Provide first aider. Provide fire extinguishers. Operatives to be informed of
all emergency procedures at induction.
PPE, Danger Men Working Overhead, Scaff tag or similar to be displayed.
Assessment for all materials to be obtained.
IN
TE
Environment
PPE
Other
Communications
COSHH
EG
Emergencies
Hard hats, safety footwear, gloves, eye protection, dust mask and ear
protection. If using mobile elevated work platforms fall body harnesses
must be worn.
Do not overload scaffold platforms, provide suitable roof truss rack.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
ROOF COVERINGS (felt/batten/slate/tile/cladding)
Significant risks:
Page 48
REF NO. 29
Falls, falling objects, manual handling
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Agree Safety Method Statement. Store materials in a safe manner. Provide
suitable working platform. Precautions to be taken to prevent operatives
falling i.e. safety nets. Visually check electrical tools and leads. Abrasive
wheels to be kept in good order and guards in place. Obtain COSHH
assessments. Carry out manual handling assessment, use lifting
appliances to lift materials into position. Complete crane checklist. Inspect
lifting gear before use. Keep work area free from tripping hazards. Store
waste material in the proper bins.
Operatives to receive risk, manual handling and COSHH assessment.
Carry out induction, all relevant assessments to be given as tool box talks,
abrasive wheel operator to be trained in its use and how to change the
abrasive wheels safely.
Instruction
AL
Training
Competent person to inspect working platforms and areas before work

Crane controller to complete crane checklist.
Access
Provide suitable pitched roof/ridge ladders, properly secured. Keep access

areas free of materials and electrical leads. Access on tile batten to be
agreed with roofers. Prohibit walking on tiled areas.
Weather implications i.e. winds and dust etc.
AT
IO
Supervision
Environment

electrician, these should be tagged with details of last inspection. Safety
nets to be properly secured. Crane and lifting gear certificates to be kept in
site register.
Emergencies
Provide First Aider. Operatives to be informed of all emergency procedures

at induction.
COSHH
EG
PPE, Danger Men Working Overhead, Inspection report or similar to be

displayed.
Communications
IN
TE
Equipment
Assessment for all materials to be obtained. Dust generation from cutting

tiles with powered abrasive cutters.
PPE
Hard hats, safety footwear, gloves, eye protection, dust mask and ear
protection.
Other
Do not overload scaffold platforms, only load out on loading bay. Consider
material movement onto roof and load points.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
EXTERNAL CLADDING
Significant risks:
Page 49
REF NO. 30
Falls of persons, handling panels at high levels, falling

materials, broken glass or unprotected edges of panels.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Instruction for supervisors and operatives in the safe storage and working
procedures.
Induction training should cover site rules and action to be taken in the event of
an emergency.
Operatives should be certificated for the erection of mobile scaffolds
Where appropriate training must be provided in the operation of Mobile Elevated
Work Platforms (MEWPs). Operatives must be trained in working at heights.
Operatives to be instructed to work to Safety Method Statements, operatives to
sign Safety Method Statements.
Instruction
Training
Works are to be controlled by an appropriately competent and experienced

supervisor. Supervisors to ensure that equipment and plant is operated and
erected ONLY by persons who have been trained, certificated and authorised to
do so. Supervisors to ensure that Safety Method Statements are being worked
to and those materials are being properly handled and stored.
Safe means of access/egress must be provided and maintained. If working at
height, an assessment should be carried out and suitable control measures
employed. Ladders should be tied or footed; mobile scaffolds and access
platforms must be properly erected with guardrails fitted and inspection details
recorded. Where MEWPs are used, operatives must wear and use safety
harnesses when working at height, operatives must not leave the confines of the
MEWP whilst at height. Exclusion zone must be established at work location.
AL
Supervision
AT
IO
Access
Works must be restricted in windy conditions. Consideration must be given to

working in the vicinity of overhead services.
Equipment
Equipment must be kept in good working order and be regularly maintained with
records being kept. Any mobile towers, scaffolding etc. should be checked at
least every seven days with a record of inspection being kept. MEWPs must
not be used as a lifting device to transport men or materials e.g. used as a hoist.
Communications
COSHH
PPE
Other
Emergencies
EG
IN
TE
Environment
At least one person in any glazing team should have been trained in first aid.
Each glazing team should have appropriate first aid equipment available to
them.
Warning signs, notices and barriers used as appropriate.
Assessments must be produced for hazardous materials e.g. sealants and
training provided.
Safety harnesses, goggles, gloves, safety footwear, helmets must be worn.
Consideration must be given to adequate segregation of the works with other
contractors employees and members of the public. See also Risk Assessment
no. 32 - use of lifting appliances/gear to lift/move/store stillages and panels
where appropriate.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
WATER STORAGE DEVICES
Significant risks:
Page 50
REF NO. 31
Falls from heights, falling materials, eye injuries during

drilling operations. Inhalation, skin absorption or ingestion
of harmful substances.
CONTROL ITEM
Information
Instruction

Instruction for supervisors and operatives in the safe storage and working
procedures.
Induction training should cover site rules and action to be taken in the event
of an emergency.
Operatives should be certificated for the erection of mobile scaffolds.
Where appropriate training must be provided in the operation of Mobile
Elevated Work Platforms (MEWP). Operatives must be trained in working
at heights. Operatives to be instructed to work to Safety Method
Statements, operatives to sign Safety Method Statements.
AL
Training
Works are to be controlled by an appropriately competent and experienced

supervisor. Supervisors to ensure that equipment and plant is operated and
erected only by persons who have been trained, certificated and authorised
to do so. Supervisors to ensure that Safety Method Statements are being
worked to and that material are being properly handled and stored.
Safe means of access/egress must be provided and maintained. If working
at height, an assessment should be carried out and suitable control
measures employed. Ladders should be tied or footed, mobile scaffolds
and access platforms must be properly erected with guardrails, mid rails,
and toe boards fitted. Where MEWPs are used, operatives must wear and
use safety harnesses when working at height, operatives must not leave the
confines of the MEWP whilst at height. Exclusion zone must be established
at work location.
AT
IO
Supervision
IN
TE
Access
Equipment
Emergencies
Communications
COSHH
PPE
Other
Works must be restricted in windy conditions. Consideration must be given

to working in the vicinity of overhead services.
Equipment must be kept in good working order and be regularly maintained
with records being kept. Any mobile towers, scaffolding etc. should be
checked at least every seven days with a record of inspection being kept.
MEWPs must not be used as a lifting device to transport men or materials
e.g. used as a hoist.
EG
Environment

and first aid provision at induction.
Warning signs, notices and barriers used as appropriate i.e. "Danger Men
Working Overhead".
Assessments must be produced for hazardous materials e.g. sealants and
training provided.
Safety harnesses, goggles, gloves, safety footwear, helmets must be worn.
Consideration must be given to adequate segregation of the works with
other contractors employees and members of the public.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
LIFTING OPERATIONS
Significant risks:
Page 51
REF NO. 32
Injury from falling equipment and materials. Entrapment,

personal injury to oneself or others. Failure to check and
ensure safe use of equipment. Overturning of crane/excavators
used as cranes.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Operatives to be advised of risks from lifting by manual or mechanical
means. Proximity of any overhead services. Safety Method Statement
required. Advice to be given on any specific control measures including
safe systems of work and Safety Method Statements. Colour coding of
lifting equipment. Operatives to sign Safety Method Statements. Moving
unusual objects. Using correct equipment. Check all crane and lifting test
certificates are in date. Check equipment supplied. Visual inspection of
equipment prior to any lifting operations. Identify if a dedicated method
statement is needed, i.e. over 10 ton. Induction mechanical and manual
lifting, banks man training certificated. The use of competent/certificated
drivers. Specifics of individual tasks.
Appoint a lifting supervisor. Nominate crane coordinator to assess local
conditions and lift requirements. Determine weight, centre of gravity, sharp
edges, condition of load. Visual inspection of equipment being used.
Reporting. Monitor drivers performance.
Plan route and assess any hazards. Keep work area clear. Ground
conditions. Exclusion zones where appropriate. Level area for lifting.
Check ground conditions. Closeness of buildings, excavations and
services. Monitor lighting and weather (including response actions during
high wind conditions).
Instruction
AL
Training
AT
IO
Supervision
Access
TE
Environment
Check valves fitted to excavator. To be suitable for operations being carried

out and test certificated. Setting up of equipment to be adequate and
verified by crane coordinator. Assess the need for a planned preventative
maintenance scheme.
Emergencies
Standard first aid, evacuations, accident reporting and investigation. Major

incident response plan. Emergency procedures in contract safety plan.
COSHH
Communications
EG
IN
Equipment
Other workers to be informed of lifting operations being carried out.

Warning signs. Hazard markers etc. Radio/transmitters. Ability to hear
audible warnings during lifting operations. One banks man only directing
crane driver.
As required.
PPE
Hard hats, high visibility clothing, gloves and footwear etc. Identification of
banks man.
Other
Excavators used for lifting must be rated or exempt with current

documentation. Provision of equipment such as tag lines. Further
considerations for lifting operations in tunneling or for man-riding will be
needed.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
MANUAL HANDLING
Significant risks:
Page 52
REF NO. 33
Various back injuries (i.e. strains, slipped discs etc.)

possible injury through dropping, torn ligaments, tendons,
hernias, general cuts and abrasions.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Operatives informed of possible back injury and strains and sprains due to
lifting tasks on site and in office. Issue Manual Handling information to
personnel. Clear labelling of weights if possible. Assess all the details and
working practices of the work to be done. Complete specific assessment
form as appropriate. Avoid manual handling if possible. Use mechanical
means if appropriate. Seek help from others if no mechanical aid available.
Follow the control methods detailed in an assessment.
Operatives trained in correct method of lifting and handling. Not to exceed
personal capability.
Instruction
AL
Training
Constantly monitor storing and stacking to keep manual handling as minimal

as possible. Ensure specific instructions are followed, supervisors to be
aware of manual handling requirements.
Access
Good flat, clear, stable ground and scaffolds are free of obstacles and
debris.
Environment
Areas to be kept clean and tidy. Free of trip hazards. Well lit. Special
attention to areas of restricted space.
Equipment
Various lifting aids available to assist manual handling. Ensure lifting aids
are subject to any applicable inspection testing etc.
Emergencies
Standard site first aid, fire protection, spillage control, accident reporting and
investigation.
Communications
Good communications between operatives in dual handling.
PPE
Other
AT
TE
IN
EG
Possible hazards from material being handled in case of spillage.
COSHH
IO
Supervision
Gloves, foot protection, hard hats, possible eye protection, masks as

appropriate.
Size of packaging to be reviewed to give consideration to manual handling.
Operatives should be screened to assess the suitability of the person to the
task.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
SITE PLANT MOVEMENT/CARE
Significant risks:
Page 53
REF NO. 34
Crushing/laceration and entrapment injuries, damage to

structures and plant, plant instability, structural failure,
reversing vehicles, slewing machinery. Loss of loads.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Operatives and visitors to be aware of dangers of equipment and related
locations. Produce Safety Method Statements where appropriate. Ensure
that plant manuals are kept with equipment where appropriate. Any
traffic/pedestrian routing to be detailed in safety plan and clearly marked.
Visitors to be inducted/escorted, operatives to receive appropriate safety
awareness talks. Use of banks man in movement areas if applicable.
Operators and banks men to be competent suitably trained and certificated.
Supervisors to ensure that plant and equipment is operated and banked
so. Ensure that weekly registers and maintenance requirements are
performed. Regular inspection of any traffic management systems to
ensure safe access etc.
Instruction
AL
Training
Supervision
Safe access to be assessed and provided before movement of plant.

Assess requirements for level ground. Consider pedestrian segregation and
high visibility clothing.
Environment
Consider weather, ground conditions, adequate lighting, dust, nearness of

excavations/buildings, traffic, noise and fumes. Suitably plan any cleaning,
wheel washing, sheeting areas, loading. Damp down in dry weather. Bund
diesel tanks.
Equipment
Regular inspection, reporting of condition, maintenance procedures and

manuals, periodic tests, cleaning. Instructions to be in English. Hazard
lights and audible warning units where applicable. Adequate marking.
Emergencies
investigation.
Use warning signs, hazard markers and audible warning units where
appropriate. Personnel in the vicinity should be made aware of plant
movements. Consider use of radio/transmitters. Use of dedicated banks
man using the appropriate signals.
IN
EG
C
Communications
TE
AT
IO
Access
COSHH
As applicable to maintenance activities. Specific hazardous loads to be

loaded and carried may need assessing.
PPE
As appropriate to maintenance operations, together with high visibility

clothing.
Check condition of plant upon arrival on site.
Other
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
TOOLS (ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC/CARTRIDGE)
Significant risks:
Page 54
REF NO. 35
Personal injuries due to misuse and failure such as

electrocution and laceration; excess noise, dust and vibration.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Assess tool requirements, location of use and obtain data sheets as
appropriate. Any relevant marking requirements e.g. ear protection (symbol
visible on the tools).
Regular tool box talks with individual reference to unusual tools.
Certificate and Authorisation of Plant Operators. Cartridge tool operators
are to be certificated by the manufacturer/supplier.
Instruction
Training
Supervision
Supervisors are to monitor condition, inspection records, certification and

use.
Consider exclusion zones and controlled issue of tools. Adequate working
space is to be provided for the safe use of tools.
AL
Access
Evaluate weather, water, earthing requirements, vibration, noise, dust,

fumes, dry storage area, security etc. Safe storage for cartridges/gas
cylinders.
Equipment
Delivery test certificates where appropriate. Maintenance, cleaning,

periodic testing and regular inspection. Ensure electrical equipment is 110v
and properly earthed.
Emergencies
investigation. Give particular consideration to electrocution in conductive
environments.
Communications
Tool box talks, warning signs.
COSHH
As applicable. Consideration to be given to dust, swarf, oils, greases,

cleansing fluids, epoxy etc. Consider the presence of asbestos.
TE
IN
EG
C
PPE
AT
IO
Environment
Other
Goggles, ear muffs, gloves, masks, etc. Consider ventilation/breathing

apparatus.
Two of the most important considerations with tools are PPE and adequate
training.
QCS 2014

Page 55
REF NO. 36
Assessment for:
CONFINED SPACES
Significant risks:
Asphyxiation from lack of oxygen or poisoning of noxious fumes/gases,

explosive gases, entrapment, flowing solid material overcome by high
heat conditions, drowning if present, fall injuries. All possibly exacerbated
by the introduction of mechanical or electrical equipment into confined areas .
CONTROL ITEM
Information
Instruction
AT
IO
AL
Training

Seek all available information on the ground/location to be entered and
establish safe systems of work. Undertake all appropriate tests to identify
the nature of the environment to be entered e.g. sludges, rust (lack of
oxygen). Procedures to be developed to take account of complexity of
confined spaces e.g. tunnels, underground shelters, caverns, vessels etc.
and the number of persons within confined spaces. All employees who
have involvement with any confined spaces work (including the writing of
Safety Method Statements) to be given specific instruction concerning
particular spaces to be entered and relevant information. This includes
supervision, employees entering confined spaces persons employed as top
men and rescue personnel. All personnel to sign Safety Method
Statements/Permits to enter and/or work. All employees entering confined
spaces are to receive training for entry procedures, atmospheric testing
equipment, emergency evacuation, lifesaving equipment and procedures.
The practical use of equipment will also be covered. Emergency rescue
team to be formed and trained where appropriate.
Designate the category if space to be entered. A trained competent
person is to be appointed to carry out tests before entry and be in
continuous attendance during work within confined space. Entry controlled
by permit system. Safe and unrestricted access to/from confined spaces to
be monitored and ensured by this person at all times. Supervisor to be
aware if the requirements of confined space work.
Unrestricted access and egress essential. Use tally boards where
appropriate to monitor entry and exit. Forces ventilation and requirements
must be assessed but they are to be mandatory in any area where any
possibility of oxygen deprivation or noxious gases identified or known to
exist, unless a system utilising working BA has been established. Traffic
management scheme to be drawn up and implemented for protection of
access/egress points in roadway.
Evaluate for ventilation requirements, consider need for non-spark
(intrinsically safe) lighting and equipment. The effects of flooding or
weather, hot or cold temperatures, contaminated ground to be established.
Identify toxic or flammable atmospheres to ensure that continuous gas
monitors are compatible. Consider the effects of noise, dust and fumes.
Provide emergency lighting.
Saver rescue and working breathing apparatus, ventilation units, gas
detectors, man hoist and harness, chemical indicator tubes to identify
fumes/gases or substances. Also consider the intrinsic safeness of all
electrical systems. Ventilation systems to have visual or audible warning in
event of failure.
Consider pre-determined system of shouts/whistles/horns etc, between all
members of the team. Clear access to be maintained to the working area
for emergency services. Standard site first aid, fire protection, recovery,
evacuation, accident reporting and investigation. Major incident response
plan.
Emergency boards, drawings, telephone numbers etc. to be displayed at
point of entry. Consider internal telephone/radio/transmitters/bell/rope
signals.
Consider the hazards of all material such as epoxies, resins, adhesives,
fuels, cleansing fluids, solvents, dust, concrete, paints etc, when used in
confined spaces.
TE
Supervision
Environment
EG
IN
Access
Equipment
Emergencies
Communications
COSHH
QCS 2014

PPE
Page 56
Hard hats, protective footwear, protective clothing, goggles, masks, hearing

protection, harnesses etc. as appropriate and breathing equipment. Gas
monitors.
Consideration should be given to confined space procedures when
personnel enter restricted spaces within form work or reinforcement cages.
Contact with Safety and environmental Department.
Other
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
NIGHT WORK
Significant risks:
Page 57
REF NO. 37
Injury from falling/tripping/fatigue in particular, plus generally

increased risks due to limited visibility.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Generally a method statement either unique to a single nights work or to an
activity over a number of nights, should be prepared incorporating the
requirements of the preceding shift and personal response alarms.
All involved should be given a briefing on the work involved including which
accesses are to be used and which areas are suitable for working. Give
specific induction and safety awareness talks on night work.
Refer to specific risk assessments and Safety Method Statements.
Instruction
Training
Supervision
Plan safe and adequate lighting both in place of work and access there to
(i.e. working and background lighting).
Ensure all access ways are completely lit, are of good standard and free of
materials. Establish exclusion zones and designated working areas. Give
particular attention to edge protection and barriers.
AL
Access
Good lighting. Special attention to all edges, trip hazards, noise and
vibration. Consider weather i.e. low temperatures and slippery surfaces.
Avoid lighting that may have stroboscopic effect particularly if using moving
equipment. If practical check lighting levels. Prevent nuisance/risk to public
from lighting/dust/noisy operations.
Equipment
All equipment required for night work, especially lights, should be checked
during prior daylight shift. Special attention to lighting cables.
Emergencies
Checks to be made on availability of night cover from local hospitals etc.

Standard site first aid and reporting procedures to apply, list of
emergency/night call out numbers. Where applicable emergency lighting
shall be provided on emergency access routes.
Communications
Greater use of radios to minimise unnecessary movements at night. A tally

system may be required on certain operations.
COSHH
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
Environment
As required by activity.
PPE
As well as normal helmets and boots, high visibility clothing should be

utilised. Attention to warm clothing, as required, should also be made.
Other
Shifting of labour resources to be arranged to prevent prolonged day and

night shift working. Consider increased supervision in working areas and
control of unauthorised access. Consider use of light sensitive cells for
lighting systems.
QCS 2014

Page 58

REF NO. 38
Assessment for:
SPECIALIST SUB-CONTRACTOR PROCESSES eg. BITUMINOUS SURFACING,
PAINTING, WATERPROOFING, SILANE ETC.
Significant risks:
Depends on process, however tend to be more COSHH/pollutant
orientated. Burns, skin complaints and asphyxiation etc.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Ensure that a Safety Method Statement risk assessment and COSHH
assessment have been supplied by the sub-contractor. Ensure that the
sub-contractor is appropriately experienced. Special care in confined
spaces and using highly flammable materials.
Require the sub-contractor to brief a member of your supervisory staff on
ALL safety requirements/hazards etc. Ensure that any employees who may
come into contact with the specialist work have been briefed, tool box talks
inductions etc.
Sub-contract personnel to be trained and certified as appropriate.
Instruction
AL
Training
Ensure that the sub-contractor adequately supervises his works and works
to the Safety Method Statement. Hot work permit to be issued where
appropriate.
Access
As required to ensure safe access and egress.
Environment
Monitor environment and set up exclusion zones etc. as appropriate.
Equipment
As required for activity. Consider standoff distances, atmospheric

monitoring and ventilation.
Emergencies
Ascertain from the sub-contractor if specialist measures are necessary.

Check fire precautions etc. Standard site first aid, fire protection,
evacuation, accident reporting and investigation.
Communications
As appropriate, warning signs.
COSHH
Obtain COSHH information assessment from sub-contractor. Ensure

compliance. Check disposal of waste etc.
EG
C
PPE
IN
TE
AT
IO
Supervision
Other
To be established with sub-contractor/Safety Environmental Department as

appropriate.
Seek advice from Safety and Environmental Department as necessary.
QCS 2014

Page 59

REF NO. 39
Assessment for:
STORAGE AND LIMITED USE OF HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MATERIALS ETC
Explosion, fire, vapours, manual handling injuries.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Assess type and quality of gases/liquid/materials to be used, quantities to
be minimised, storage/fire precaution recommendations from suppliers to be
obtained as required.
Personnel to be briefed on suppliers information safety precautions. Safety
awareness talks.
Ensure that all employees who come into contact have cause to use
materials and are trained on safe usage, storage disposal and fire
procedures.
Implement checks on storage and usage. On larger sites with greater
usage have formal issue/collection system. Establish demarcated remote
storage location.
Instruction
Training
Supervision
AL
Significant risks:
Control access to secure storage area.
Environment
Individual outdoor stores to be constructed to recommended type, including

all relevant signing and fire points precautions. Ensure no sources of ignition
including electrical.
Equipment
Gas cylinders etc. to be obtained from company suppliers only. Any

damage being reported and bottles/containers exchanged immediately. Dry
powder extinguishers.
Emergencies
Fire summon Civil Defence (Fire Department) and inform them

accordingly of type and quantities of bottles and containers. Ensure that dry
powder extinguishers are available but do not endanger life, clear area.
investigation.
Communications
Clear signage, including type of materials stored and no smoking signs.
PPE
Other
EG
Perform COSHH assessments on individual materials particularly for

inhalation of fumes.
COSHH
IN
TE
AT
IO
Access
Depends on materials being stored. In the case of adhesives/resins,

particular care to be taken when handling.
Flammable paints/resins may not be suitable for external storage. Consider
ventilated/controlled temperature stores. Consider storing and removing
waste.
QCS 2014


Assessment for: INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION COATINGS (BOARD)
Significant risks:
Page 60
REF NO. 40
Manual handling, falls, trailing leads, electricity, circular saws,

noise, housekeeping, storage of materials.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Provide suitable working platform. Visually check electrical tools and leads.
Carry out Manual Handling assessment. Obtain COSHH assessment.
Ensure circular saw is in good working order with guard and dust extract
bag in place, if using bench saw provide push stick and emergency stop
button. Store materials in a safe manner. Keep work area free from tripping
hazards. Store waste material in the proper bins. Ensure adequate task
lighting.
Operatives to receive Risk, COSHH and Manual Handling assessment.
Carry out Induction, all relevant assessments to be given as Tool Box Talks.
Operatives to be trained in the safe use of circular saw. If using Mobile
Elevated Work Platforms or Mobile Towers operatives to be suitably trained.
Instruction
AL
Training
Access
Provide suitable ladders, properly secured. Keep access areas free of

materials and electrical leads.
Environment
Dust levels to be kept suppressed.
Equipment

Emergencies

at induction.
Communications
PPE notices to be displayed and if working at height Danger Men Working

Overhead.
PPE
Other
IN
EG
Assessment for the fire protection coating board and adhesives.
COSHH
TE
AT
IO
Supervision
Hard hats, safety footwear, eye protection, dust mask and ear protection. If
using Mobile Elevated Work Platforms fall body harnesses must be worn.
If there is a lot of cutting of boards to be carried out it may be worth
considering job rotation to prevent one person being exposed to the noise
and dust problem.
QCS 2014

Page 61

REF NO. 41
Assessment for: INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION COATINGS (SPRAY) APPLIED
Significant risks:
Materials, inhalation, skin contact, falls.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Agree method statement. Store materials in a safe manner. Provide
suitable working platform. Visually check electrical tools and leads. Obtain
COSHH assessments. Provide and maintain suitable extract equipment.
Enclose work area. Keep work area free from tripping hazards. Store
waste material in the proper bins. Ensure adequate task lighting.
Operatives to receive Risk and COSHH assessment.
Carry out Induction, all relevant assessments to be given as Tool Box Talks.
If using Mobile Elevated Work Platforms of Mobile Towers operatives to be
suitably trained.
AL
Access
Provide suitable ladders, properly secured. Keep access areas free of

materials and electrical leads.
Environment
Provide suitable extract equipment to maintain a clean and healthy

environment for all workers. Segregate/enclose work area.
Equipment

Screening of scaffolding to prevent overspray will require checks carried out
on number of ties.
Emergencies

at Induction.
EG
C
Communications
IN
TE
AT
IO
Supervision
PPE notices to be displayed and if working at height Danger Men Working

Overhead. No Unauthorised Persons Beyond this Point notices to be
displayed outside the enclosure.
COSHH
Assessment for all materials to be obtained.
PPE
Hard hats, safety footwear, overalls, gloves, eye protection, dust or fume
mask (in poorly ventilated area a Fresh Air Feed mask) and ear protection.
If using Mobile Elevated Work Platforms fall body harnesses must be worn.
Other
If operatives are exposed to Man Made Mineral Fibres (MMMF) over a

prolonged period there is a danger of serious damage to their health.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
LIFT INSTALLATION
Significant risks:
Page 62
REF NO. 42
Falls from height, manual handling, confined spaces, electrocution.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Obtain layout of plant rooms/switchgear/isolation points prior to starting
work.
Working Safety Method Statements are to consider installation dangers.
Operatives to sign Safety Method Statements. Tool Box Training to be
given on relevant topics.
Work to be carried out under the supervision of a competent experienced
person.
Access
Access to lift shafts and plant rooms to be strictly controlled. Where

scaffolds are used for access these must comply with the relevant
requirements.
Equipment
Work equipment e.g. power tools etc. to be tested in accordance with

manufacturers requirements.
Emergencies
Method Statement to include procedures for rescue of persons from the

shaft in emergency situations.
Communications
Permit to Enter Shafts and Plant room to be in place and displayed.

Warning signs and barriers to be in place.
COSHH
As applicable to materials used e.g. Hydraulic Oils.
PPE
As site rules and appropriate to hazard i.e. gloves when lifting machine
parts etc.
Other
Refer to Generic Risk Assessment No. 14, 20, 22, and 23.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Supervision
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SERVICES
Significant risks:
Page 63
REF NO. 43
Electrocution/fire, fume inhalation, entanglement, vibration,

explosion, fall from height, manual handling, paint use/radiation
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Risk Assessments and Safety Method Statements, PPE, Permits to Work
(Hot Work), Flash Screens, Fire Precautions, Permits to Work (Electrical
Systems), Tower Scaffolds, Display Notices, Locking off Procedures.
Documentation for lifting appliances/gear
Inductions, Safety Awareness Talks, Permit to Work Procedures, Scaffold
Erection (Towers), Abrasive Wheels.
Permit to Work issue. Competent persons appointment. Electrical Duty
Holder. Operation of visible inspection system displayed. Work Place
Inspections.
AL
Supervision
Position of temp. Cables, step ladders inspected and of sufficient length

(split head trestles not used as steps). Ladders inspected and secure
gangways clear.
Environment
Welding fume control, noise control assessments, non-destructive testing,

dust control (drilling), housekeeping (Inc. flammable debris), waste disposal
(conduit off cuts), oil drips (threading machines).
Equipment
Guarding of threading machines/welding machines to external air, fire

extinguisher adjacent to machines, flash back arrestors, bottle stands/gas
storage, equipment inspection procedures.
Emergencies
Evacuation procedures/fire procedures/emergency lighting, access routes,

alarm systems, first aid, gas check.
Communications
Posters, Notices, Tool Box Talks.
COSHH
COSHH assessment for and including welding fume, cutting oils, paints,
fluxes, dusts (grinding) oxygen, acetylene propane etc.
Other
IN
EG
C
PPE
TE
AT
IO
Access
Head protection, foot protection, overalls, including visors, eye protection,

noise protection, gloves, RPE etc.
Ducting installation (Geanie hoists).
Special precautions for special welding operation.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
PLUMBING WORKS
Significant risks:
Page 64
REF NO. 44
Potential for inhalation, ingestion or absorption of toxic

substances (e.g. lead, solvents etc.). Fire whilst undertaking
hot work, entanglement with pipe threading machine,
vibration from percussion tools. Confined working.
COSHH assessment details made available. Detailed method statement for
pressure testing and non-destructive testing.
COSHH, manual handling, fire prevention training required.
Supervision
Effective supervision for hot work and working with lead. Health
surveillance required for significant exposure.
Access
Safe access required to all work locations.
Environment
Disposal of waste in accordance with waste procedure.
Equipment
Maintain in good condition.
Emergencies
Site arrangements and local segregation.
Communications
Tool Box Talks.
COSHH
Assessment required for flux, lead, solvents, epoxy resins, maintain.
PPE
Safety helmets, safety footwear, gloves, overalls, RPE where identified in

COSHH assessment.
Other
No smoking or eating whilst exposed to lead fume. Specific welfare for

specific lead work.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
CARPENTRY/JOINERY
Significant risks:
Page 65
REF NO. 45
Dust (hard and soft wood), fall from height, contact with
cutting machinery, glues, manual handling, treated timber,
slips and trips.
Risk assessments, safety method statements, information posters, safety
reminders.
Inductions, safety awareness talks, cartridge gun training, tower scaffold

training, manual handling, wood working machine training.
Supervision
Working at height supervision, scaffold inspections, work place inspections,

small tool inspections, tools in good order.
Access
Ladders secured and in good order, gangways clear, staircases as

alternative to ladders.
Environment
Housekeeping, dust controlled at source, flammable material, solvent glues.
Equipment
Electrical equipment in good order, hand tools in good condition, vibration

(hammer drill) checked.
Emergencies
Induction site plans and notices displayed. Access routes clear. Sufficient
staircases.
Communications
Induction/safety awareness, site notice boards, duty holders indicated,

supervision training, risk assessments and safety method statements
explained.
COSHH
COSHH assessments, materials use training, data sheets, Sypol system.
PPE
Head protection, foot protection, respiratory protection (dust mask), noise

protection, gloves, eye protection and overalls.
IO
AT
TE
IN
EG
C
Other
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
QCS 2014

Page 66
REF NO. 46
Assessment for:
PLASTERING AND EXTERNAL RENDERING
Significant risks:
Falls from height, falling objects/material, manual handling,

skin contact with wet mortar, dust from mixing unit.
General safety information on safe access e.g. ladders etc.
Manual handling of equipment/materials
Supervision
Scaffold use above 2 meters to be under control of competent person.
Access
Suitable access to be provided to all work locations e.g. hop-ups to full

scaffolds etc. segregate lower work areas whilst working in elevated
situations.
Environment
Consider weather conditions.
Equipment
Suitable access equipment to work location. Maintain equipment in good

condition.
Emergencies
General site arrangements for first aid and evacuation.
Communications
General information and tool box talks.
COSHH
As appropriate to substances in use e.g. mortar.
PPE
Safety helmets, safety footwear, warm clothing, gloves etc. Face mask
when mixing.
Other
Maintain good standards of personal hygiene.
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
EG
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
CEILING FIXING
Significant risks:
Page 67
REF NO. 47
Entanglement, fall from height, manual handling,

electrocution, hand injuries from sharp components,
eye injuries during drilling operations.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Risk assessments and safety method statements, PPE, permits to work,
tower scaffolds.
Inductions, safety awareness talks, permit to work procedures, scaffold
erection (towers), abrasive wheels.
Permit to work issue. Competent persons appointment. Electrical duty

holder. Operation of a visible inspection system. Work place inspections.
Access
Position of temp, cables, and step ladders inspected and of sufficient length
(split head trestles not used as steps). Ladders inspected and secure
gangways clear. Erection of suitable scaffold. Use of MEWPs.
Environment
Noise control assessments, dust control (insulation), housekeeping (inc

flammable debris) and waste disposal.
Equipment
Equipment inspection procedures. Scaffold inspection system visible to

operatives.
Emergencies
Evacuation procedures/fire procedures/emergency lighting, access routes,

alarm systems, first aid.
Communications
Posters, notices, tool box talks, wage packet inserts, videos, supervision.
COSHH
COSHH assessment for and including dusts (grinding) insulation.
PPE
Head protection, foot protection, overalls, eye protection, noise protection,

gloves, RPE etc.
IO
AT
TE
IN
EG
C
Other
AL
Supervision
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
FLOOR AND WALL TILING
Significant risks:
Page 68
REF NO. 48
Inhalation, skin absorption or ingestion of harmful substances.

Falls from heights, fire or explosions.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Operatives should be made aware of what materials are being used, The
associated hazards and the required control measures to be applied.
of an emergency. Where appropriate operatives should be certificated for
the erection of mobile tower scaffolds. Training should be provided in the
safe use of respiratory equipment.
Instruction
Training
Supervisors to ensure that equipment and plant is operated and erected

so. Ensure that COSHH assessments have been produced and training
provided. Ensure that suitable access is being provided and used and that
all highly flammable materials are being stored in a safe manner.
Access

at height, an assessment should be carried out and suitable control
measures employed.
Mobile scaffold and access platforms must be properly erected with
guardrails fitted where required and inspection details displayed.
Adequate ventilation must be provided. Consideration should be given to
the safe storage of flammable materials. Controlled waste must be properly
disposed of.
Equipment must be kept in good working order and be regularly maintained,
with records being kept. The ventilation system provided should be
checked regularly. Any mobile towers, scaffolding should be checked at
least every seven days with a record of inspection being kept.
If overcome by adhesive vapours, remove to fresh air, keep warm and fetch
first aider, contact emergency services if necessary. Suitable fire
procedures should be in place and fire extinguishers should be available.
investigation procedures should be applied.
Warning signs and notices and barriers as appropriate.
Alternatives to harmful adhesives should be considered. Adequate
ventilation should be provided, backed by respiratory protective equipment
where necessary. Barrier cream or suitable gloves can be used to protect
hands, overalls to protect remainder of body. Adequate hygiene facilities
should be provided. Operatives should not eat, drink or smoke at the work
location or when their hands are contaminated.
Appropriate respiratory equipment if required. Goggles/glasses, gloves,
safety footwear, overalls, helmets must be worn.
Consideration should be given to work in confined spaces e.g. small rooms
AT
IO
AL
Supervision
Environment
IN
TE
Equipment
PPE
Other
Communications
COSHH
EG
Emergencies
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
PAINTING & PAPERING
Significant risks:
Page 69
REF NO. 49
Inhalation, skin absorption or ingestion of harmful substances.

Falls from heights, falling materials, slips on spillages, fire or explosions.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Operatives should be made aware of what materials are being used, the
associated hazards and the required control measures to be applied.
of an emergency. Operatives should be certificated for the erection of
mobile scaffolds. Where appropriate training must be provided in the
operation of MEWPs. Training should be provided in the safe use of
respiratory equipment. Safety method statement to be signed by all
operatives.
Instruction
Training
Supervisors to ensure that equipment and plant is operated and erected

so. Ensure that COSHH assessments have been produced and training
provided. Ensure that suitable access is being provided and used and that
all highly flammable materials are being stored in a safe manner.
at height an assessment should be carried out and suitable control
measures employed. Ladders should be tied or footed. Mobile scaffolds
and access platforms must be properly erected with guardrails fitted where
required and inspection records displayed.
IO
AL
Supervision
AT
Access
Consideration should be given to the safe storage of flammable materials.

Adequate ventilation must be provided. Controlled waste must be properly
disposed of.
Equipment must be kept in good working order and be regularly maintained,
with records being kept. The ventilation system if provided should be
checked regularly. Any mobile towers, scaffolding etc. should be checked
at least every seven days with a record of inspection being kept.
If overcome by paint vapours, remove to fresh air, keep warm and fetch first
aider, contact emergency services if necessary. Suitable fire procedures
should be available. Standard site first aid, fire protection, evacuation,
accident reporting and investigation procedures should be applied.
Warning signs and notices and barriers as appropriate.
Alternatives to harmful paints, varnishes or adhesives should be considered.
Adequate ventilation should be provided, backed by respiratory protective
equipment where necessary. Barrier cream or suitable gloves can be used
to protect hands, overalls to protect remainder of body. Adequate hygiene
facilities should be provided. Operatives should not eat, drink or smoke at
the work location or when their hands are contaminated with paint.
Appropriate respiratory equipment if required. Goggles/glasses, gloves,
safety footwear, overalls, helmets must be worn.
Consideration should be given to work in confined spaces.
TE
Environment
Communications
COSHH
PPE
Other
Emergencies
EG
IN
Equipment
QCS 2014

Page 70

REF NO. 50
Assessment for:
USE OF SPECIALIST EQUIPMENT (NUCLEAR DENSOMETERS, THERMIC
WELDERS AND LANCES, LASERS) H.P. WATER JETTING
Significant risks:
Varies according to equipment i.e. radiation injuries,

eye damage, general injuries to public and personnel.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Normally a specialist operation requiring Safety Method Statements. List of
specialist equipment likely to be required to be drawn up and discussed with
safety adviser. Establish and issue Safety Method Statements. Information
from suppliers of equipment.
Sub-contractor or manufacturers recommendations/training to be sought
and personnel instructed as appropriate. Certificated operators.
Information obtained will establish the extent of instruction required.
As required for the particular type of specialist operation.
Instruction
AL
Training
Designated responsible person to be nominated to ensure that equipment is

correctly used and method statement adhered to.
Access
Exclusion zones where appropriate.
Environment
To be monitored/controlled as required by manufacturers/codes of practice

etc.
Equipment
To be obtained and used as manufacturers/specialist recommendations.

Appropriate storage required.
Emergencies
Specialist first aid information to be obtained. Specialist emergency

procedures to be set up as appropriate (nuclear densometer). Standard site
safety reporting procedures apply.
Communications
Warning signs, hazard markers.
COSHH
As applicable to particular process.
Other
EG
As required by particular process.
PPE
IN
TE
AT
IO
Supervision
A specific assessment should always be performed for an item of specialist

equipment.
QCS 2014

Page 71

REF NO. 51
Assessment for:
USE OF CLASS 3B LASERS (PREDOMINANTLY IN CONFINED OR
RESTRICTED AREAS)
Significant risks:
Exposure to non ionising radiation (laser light) being caused by striking

persons directly or indirectly (reflection) physical risks include eye damage,
production of toxic gases, electrical hazards.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

All personnel exposed to hazard/risk from the use of class 3B lasers shall
receive information, instruction and training regarding the hazards and risks.
Information should be sought from the supplier.
All the above measures also include the provision, fitting and wearing of
PPE.
The requirements for medical supervision should be assessed, in particular

in the event of injury due to ocular exposure. Overall supervision shall be
controlled by a competent person who has received adequate training.
Class 3B lasers are potentially hazardous if a direct beam or specular
reflection is viewed by the unprotected eye and therefore access must be
strictly controlled to those people who have received the adequate
information, instruction and training.
The entrance to areas should be posted with a standard laser warning sign.
The laser beam should be terminated where possible at the end of its path
by suitable diffusion material. Reflections must be avoided. Location and
direction of beam must be clearly marked.
The equipment must be suitable for use and any maintenance requirements
detailed.
AL
Supervision
IO
Access
AT
Environment
Equipment
IN
EG
Communications
COSHH
PPE
Other
Emergency procedures must be linked in with the specific site procedures in

particular when considering the hazards that exist including fire,
electrocution etc.
All relevant information should be communicated to all personnel involved.
An assessment must be made if there are any identified hazardous
environments in particular contamination from chlorine, hydrogen sulphide
and bromine.
The need to use PPE against the hazardous effects of laser operation
should be kept to a minimum by admin controls, engineering design and
beam enclosure. However where the risk exists the PPE may include eye
protection, clothing, respiratory etc.
A safe system of work should be devised (with all the other controls listed
above) that reduces the risk by means of cutting down the operational
times.
TE
Emergencies
QCS 2014

Page 72
REF NO. 52
Assessment for:
ARC WELDING
Significant risks:
Fire/flammable atmospheres, electric shock, noise,

substances/chemicals/fumes/dusts, burns, radiation, heat,
falls, trips and slips, flying particles, vibration, oxygen
depletion, asphyxiation, manual handling.
Permits to work. (Confined space/hot work) Method statements.
Operatives trained in fire prevention methods/precautions.
Supervision
Regular inspection of barriers, fireproof screens and notices.
Access
Safe access egress to be provided and maintained. Consideration to be

given to restricted access zone.
Environment
Good lighting. Dust and noise suppression methods.
Equipment
Flameproof welding screens. Fire protective equipment sited adjacent to

welding set. Earthling of work piece.
Emergencies
Standard first aid, fire protection. Operatives inducted in emergency

procedures and assembly points.
Communications
Warning signs and barriers. Permits to work.
COSHH
Local exhaust ventilation and others as required for location/materials used

for welding.
PPE
Welding gloves, flameproof overalls, boots, spats, eye protection, and

respiratory protection. Local exhaust ventilation.
IO
AT
TE
IN
EG
Other
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
QCS 2014

REF NO. 53
Assessment for:
RADIOGRAPHY
Significant risks:
Radioactive substances, burns, inhalation radiation,

contamination damaged/lost sources.
CONTROL ITEM
Information
Page 73

Risk assessment/method statements. Permit to work. Approved subcontractors.
All operatives to sign method statement/local rules. All operatives to receive
induction training.
Regular inspection of working barriers, signs and notices.
Access
Safe means of access/egress to provide and maintain to work area.
Environment
Safety zones/storage of sources. Audible warning systems available.
Equipment
Good working order regularly maintained. Records kept.
Emergencies
Operatives aware of emergency procedures and assembly points. Details

of radiation protection adviser.
Communications
Barricade areas, warning notices posted, audible warnings of exposure of

isotope.
COSHH
Assessment, information and instruction to all personnel
PPE
Film badges, safety helmet/footwear worn at all times. Eye/hearing

protection as/when required. Hand/body protection as required.
Other
Ensure supervision for out of hours working. Work to be carried out, outside
normal working hours. Account will be taken of project standard
requirements.
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
Supervision
QCS 2014

REF NO. 54
Assessment for:
COMMISSIONING PLANT
Significant risks:
Electrocution, steam/hot liquid scalds, toxic/flammable gas

or liquid release, bursting of vessels/pipes/joints under pressure,
falls from height, trapping or being struck by plant in motion.
CONTROL ITEM
Information
Page 74

Induction training should cover site rules and action to be taken in the event of
an emergency.
All operatives must be briefed on the hazards, precautions and emergency
procedures before testing and commissioning starts. Operatives should be
trained in the operation of the permit to work procedure and the actions required
by the system.
A formal testing/commissioning procedure must be prepared before
testing/commissioning commences and operatives signed to confirm
understanding. Leak testing will precede pressure testing; pressure testing
should be carried out at the lowest pressure acceptable to the specifier /
specification and should be avoided unless there are sound technical reasons
for carrying out such tests. Hydraulic testing should be the preferred method
where practicable. Supervisor must ensure that only authorised, experienced
and competent persons will carry out testing and commissioning operations.
Supervisor must ensure that the permit to work system is being properly
operated and that all appropriate elements of the plant have been isolated
locked off and specified safety devices have been provided.
Safe means of access/egress must be provided and maintained. If working at
height, an assessment should be carried out and suitable control measures
employed. Ladders should be tied or footed, mobile scaffolds and access
platforms must be properly erected with guardrails fitted and inspection records
displayed.
AT
IO
AL
Supervision
TE
Access
Access to commissioning and test areas must be restricted. Consideration must

be given to the surrounding environment e.g. plant, operations etc. when
planning and carrying out the works. Prior to the commencement of electrical
testing and commissioning works a check should be made to verify that all
switch rooms/control rooms have been cleared of loose materials and that all
temporary installations have been removed. Equipment covers and doors are to
be closed and guards refitted to machinery. Any circuits to be worked on will be
treated as live until verified as dead.
Equipment must be kept in good working order and be regularly maintained with
a record of maintenance being kept. Only suitable and appropriate equipment
must be used for testing and commissioning works.
Suitable fire procedures should be in place and fire extinguishers available.
investigation procedures should be applied.
Assessments produced for material used in testing and commissioning
operations, including possible emissions/discharges from plant in operation.
Hard hats, protective footwear, gloves, goggles, overalls and any specialist
equipment required e.g. insulation mats etc.
Equipment
Emergencies
Communications
COSHH
PPE
EG
IN
Environment
Other
QCS 2014

REF NO. 55
Assessment for:
BLOCK PAVING, FLAGGING KERBS AND EDGINGS
Significant risks:
Manual handling, materials/substances, plant and

equipment, power tools, cutting, noise, dust, underground
services, public protection (to and from).
CONTROL ITEM
Information
Page 75

Necessary permits when adjacent to underground services. Safety signs,
warning notices.
Operatives to sign method statement as understood. Certification for
abrasive wheel changing.
Competent supervision, monitoring work activity.
Access
Safe means of access/egress provided and maintained.
Environment
Dust/noise suppression/reduction methods e.g. enclosure for omitting

operations. Traffic protection coning/signing/safety zones.
Equipment
Good working order regularly maintained. Records maintained. Segregate

plant from pedestrians. Manholes cover handling equipment. Wet cutting of
materials.
Emergencies
Operatives aware of emergency procedures and assembly point.
Communications
Provision of suitable safety signs, warning notices and barriers.
COSHH
Assessments, information and instructions given to operators. Personal

hygiene essential.
PPE
Safety helmets, footwear to be worn at all times. Eye/hearing protection to

be worn as necessary. Yellow waistcoats adjacent to traffic.
IO
AT
TE
IN
EG
N/A
Other
AL
Supervision
QCS 2014

Assessment for:
Significant risks:
Page 76
REF NO. 56
ROAD/PATH SURFACING
Manual handling, materials and substances, reversing vehicles,
plant and equipment, underground services, noise, heat and fumes.
Fire/explosion.
Method statements, safety signs, warning notices.
All operatives to sign method statement applicable to their work activity.
Supervision
Supervisors to ensure plant and equipment only operated by certificated

authorised persons. Traffic management.
Access
Safe means of access/egress in/around plant and equipment segregate

plant from pedestrians/traffic.
Environment
Noise and dust suppression. Traffic protection coning/signing/safety

zones.
Equipment
Good working order regularly maintained. Records kept. Overhead power

lines suitably protected. Reversing alarms fitted to equipment.
Emergencies
Operatives aware of emergency procedure and assembly points. First aid

treatment for burns.
Communications
Warning signs, audible warnings, suitable barriers.
COSHH
Assessment, information and instructions.
PPE
Safety helmets/footwear to be worn at all times. High visibility clothing to be

worn at all times. Eye/hearing protection to be worn when necessary.
Hand/body protection as required.
IO
AT
TE
IN
EG
C
Other
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
Traffic management schemes.

Interface/overlap with Client personnel/members of public.
QCS 2014

Assessment for:
Significant risks:
Page 77
REF NO. 57
FENCING (PERMANENT)
Manual handling, materials and substances, noise,
underground/overhead services, plant and equipment.
Method statement/utilities drawings/permit to dig.
All operatives inducted in site requirements/manual handling/buried

services.
All operatives to sign method statement applicable to their work activity.
Supervision
Competent supervision. Supervisor to ensure on trained, certificated

authorised persons use/operate plant and equipment.
Access
Safe means of access/egress to provide and maintain to work area.

Segregate plant/equipment from pedestrians.
Environment
Noise and dust suppression methods. Soil analysis.
Equipment
Good working order, regularly maintained and records kept. Overhead

power lines suitably protected.
Emergencies
Operatives aware of emergency procedure and assembly points.
Communications
Warning signs and notices, suitable barriers and audible warnings on plant
and equipment. As appropriate to work/location.
COSHH
Assessment, information and instruction given to all operatives e.g.

preservatives/paints.
PPE
Safety helmets/footwear to be worn at all times. High visibility clothing when

adjacent to traffic routes. Eye hearing protection as necessary.
IO
AT
TE
IN
EG
Other
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
QCS 2014

Assessment for:
Significant risks:
Page 78
REF NO. 58
LANDSCAPING
Manual handling, materials and substances, plant and
equipment, overspray of substances, noise.
Method statements, safety signs, warning notices, buried services,
overhead services.
Operatives trained in use of pesticides. All operatives to attend induction

training. All operatives to sign method statement applicable to their work
activity.
Supervision
Competent supervision. Supervisors to ensure only trained certificated and

authorised persons use pesticides, plant and equipment.
Access
Safe means of access/egress to provide and maintain segregation of plant

from pedestrians.
Environment
Noise and dust suppression methods. Safe storage of pesticides/disposal

of containers.
Equipment
Good working order regularly maintained. Records kept. Check gradability

of plant on slopes.
Emergencies
Operatives aware of emergency, procedure and assembly points.
Communications
Warning signs, warning notices, suitable barriers and audible warnings.
COSHH
Assessment, information and instruction given to all operatives.
PPE
Safety helmets/footwear to be worn at all times. High visibility clothing to be

worn when adjacent to traffic routes. Eye/hearing protection when
necessary. Respiratory protection as required.
TE
IN
EG
C
Other
AT
IO
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
QCS 2014

Page 79

REF NO. 59
Assessment for:
TREE SURGERY AND CROSS CUTTING OF TIMBER WITH A CHAINSAW
Significant risks:
Falling from heights, falling objects, uncontrolled fall of

trees/limbs, personal injury from cutting equipment, injury to
members of the public/passing vehicles.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Safety method statement to be signed by operatives.
All operatives felling trees to have received training from recognised body in
Tree Surgery. Those engaged in cross cutting of timber with a chainsaw
are to have received, as a minimum, training in use of chainsaw cross
cutting.
Whilst cutting operations in progress a minimum of one person trained as

above to supervise. No burning of debris on site.
Access
If possible low level branches to be cut from footed ladders or mobile

scaffolds, high level tree cutting to be done using approved harness and
lines. Ensure that operative attaches away from cutting point and above.
Environment
Consider noise, refueling away from drains/watercourses. Ensure saw

dust/chips not causing airborne hazard.
All chainsaws to have chain break. Chains to be sharp. Test certificates for
harnesses and ropes.
IO
AL
Supervision
AT
Equipment
Rescue from height of injured person. Ensure communications are

available on site. First aider to be on site. Fire extinguisher for refuelling
operations
Communications
Radio/mobile phones to communicate in the case of emergency.
COSHH
COSHH assessments required for petrol, chain oil and two stroke oil.
Check type of wood being cut, sawdust of some trees could be a hazard.
IN
EG
C
PPE
TE
Emergencies
Forestry type safety helmet, visor and ear protection, chainsaw protective
trousers, jacket and gloves. Respirator protection as appropriate to type of
wood being cut forestry type safety boots. High visibility tabard when
working in traffic management. NOTE: harnesses for tree surgery are
different from general purpose harnesses.
Other
QCS 2014

Assessment for:
Significant risks:
Page 80
REF NO. 60
FIRE PREVENTION WORKING AREAS

Burning, explosion, asphyxiation, electrocution and structural collapse.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Obtain material manufacturers data where applicable. Provide site fire
plan. Liaise with the Civil Defence (Fire Department) as appropriate to the
construction undertaken. If applicable fire points to be identified and put on
plan and post at relevant positions.
Induct employees on methods and procedures where fire risk is apparent.
Safety awareness talks.
Where applicable employees are to be trained in evacuation and the proper
use of the correct types of fire extinguishers.
Instruction
AL
Training
Site management to ensure that sufficient suitable fire extinguishers are

correctly positioned, maintained and inspected and additionally ensure that
accesses are kept clear and materials suitably stored. Use of fire watchmen
during and after hot work operations. Issue/monitor hot work permit.
Access
Suitable accesses/escape routes are to be kept clear of obstructions.
Environment
Consideration is to be given to the safe storage of flammable materials and

fuels. Ensure cleanliness, tidiness, control of burning, regular disposal of
waste. Consider damping down where there may be a risk of self ignition.
Establish no smoking zones/site where risk is apparent.
Equipment
Site electrical equipment is to be tested and certified at 3 monthly intervals.

Monitor plant for leakage/fuel spillage.
Emergencies
PPE
Other
TE
IN
EG
COSHH
Warning signs and audible alarms where appropriate.

N/A
Communications
AT
IO
Supervision
Use as appropriate to operation i.e. welding, burning.

Hot work permits will be required in high risk areas.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
FIRE PREVENTION IN OFFICE
Significant risks:
Page 81
REF NO. 61
Burning, explosion, asphyxiation, electrocution.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Carry out a risk assessment on the premises and produce a fire plan.
Induct employees on escape procedures and the hazards of construction,
convection, radiation and direct burning. Instruction manuals are to be
provided for equipment.
Safety awareness talks. Staff must be trained in evacuation and the proper
use of the correct types of fire extinguishers.
Instruction
Training
Appoint fire warden as appropriate. The office manager is to ensure that

sufficient and suitable fire extinguishers are correctly positioned, maintained
and inspected together with carrying out 6 monthly fire drills where
applicable.
Emergency routes and exits are to be clearly identified and kept clear of
obstructions, establish suitable assembly points. Emergency exits are to
remain unlocked on the inside at all times.
AL
Supervision
IO
Access
Consideration to be given to the effects of weather and in particular dust,

externally, rain leakage, wind and flooding. Consideration is to be given to
the safe storage and flammability of solvents, fluids and canisters.
Equipment
Electrical equipment is to be electrically tested and certificated at intervals

no greater than 12 months, temporary office accommodation every 3
months. Alarms, extinguishers, hose reels, sprinklers, smoke detectors to
be tested in accordance with procedures. Emergency lighting is
installed/tested where appropriate.
Emergencies
investigation.
PPE
Other
EG
COSHH
Warning advisory signs and alarms.

N/A
Communications
IN
TE
AT
Environment
Generally not applicable.

Ensure tidiness, control of smoking, regular disposal of waste. Give
attention to the effects of dust on office equipment. Ensure availability of
water and clear access for emergency services.
QCS 2014

Page 82

REF NO. 62
Assessment for:
OFFICE ENVIRONMENT (PERMANENT AND TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS)
Significant risks:
Fire, visual fatigue, manual handling injuries, poor internal

environmental i.e. ventilation, temperature etc. Poor design and layout.
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Obtain details of hazards from manufacturers for any special
equipment/materials. Assessment on VDU operators and provision of
appropriate information. Manual handling review.
Regular fire practices, instruction on safe use of specialist
equipment/materials. Also instruction on use of fire extinguishers. Safety
awareness talks. As appropriate to equipment used and task being
undertaken.
Appoint a fire warden. Ensure regular checks on firefighting equipment etc.
as well as all electrical installations/equipment. Keep register.
AL
Supervision
To be maintained as required by fire precautions also in generally good

condition. Prevent trip/fall hazards from trailing leads.
Environment
To be kept clean and clear of debris. Noise to be monitored if immediately

adjacent to the works. Consider limitations on smokers. Establish
adequate ventilation and temperature controls. Lighting requirements
ergonomic layout of work stations. Security/location (access for visitors).
No smoking policy.
Equipment
To be kept clean, regularly maintained and tested.
Emergencies
Standard first aid, fire protection, evacuation, accident reporting and

investigation.
Communications
Warning advisory signs, hazard markers and use of notice boards as

appropriate.
COSHH
As appropriate to solvents, fluids and adhesives etc.
Other
TE
IN
EG
Not applicable
PPE
AT
IO
Access
Ensure general welfare conditions such as toilet facilities and heating are to
requirements. Give consideration to disabled facilities. Regular inspection.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
YOUNG PERSON IN CLERICAL POSITIONS (SITE)
Significant risks:
Page 83
REF NO. 63
Fire, visual fatigue, manual handling injuries,

slips trips and falls, overturning filing cabinets, electricity,
office machinery.
Training

Induction carried out.
Site specific induction required.
Training required in specific items of office equipment involved in tasks.
Manufacturers/suppliers equipment information to be available.
Supervision
Close supervision required.
Access
Safe means of access/egress to be provided and maintained. Trailing

cables to be protected / routed to eliminate possible slips/trips/falls.
Environment
Adequate ventilation, temperature. Lighting and cleanliness provided and

maintained.
Equipment
Young persons to be trained in use of all types of office equipment involved

in tasks. Do not overload electrical sockets. Cabinets to be secured to
prevent overturning.
Emergencies
Emergency routes not to be obstructed. Fire test/drills to be observed and

acted upon where necessary. All accidents however minor to be reported.
Communications
Use of notice boards as appropriate. Direct contact with line managers.
COSHH
Should not be applicable except in use of solvent based correction fluid.
PPE
Not applicable in present environment if on site must be closely

supervised and wear appropriate PPE i.e. safety helmet, safety footwear.
TE
IN
EG
C
Other
AT
IO
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
Instruction
Manual handling assessment to be carried out for replacing paper rolls on

large printer. When assessment formulated young person to receive copy
and be advised of contents/trained. Work area to be checked by young
person at end of each shift to ensure no cigarettes/combustible materials
smoldering.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
CABLE PULLING OPERATIONS
Significant risks:
Page 84
REF NO. 64
Electrocution, falls of persons, falls of materials, fire,

manual handling
Risk assessments and safety method statements. Permits to work
(electrical systems). Operatives to work to safety method statements.
Operatives to sign safety method statements. Documentation for lifting
equipment/gear. PPE. Layout drawings. Design checks.
Inductions. Safety Awareness Talks. Permit to work procedures. Mobile

tower erection. PPE.
Supervision
Permit to work issue. Competent persons appointment. Electrical Duty

Holder. Operation of scaff tag system. Workplace inspections. Work under
competent person. Careful planning of cable route.
Access
Provision of adequate access equipment. Inspection training in erection.

Use of competent persons to erect.
Environment
Waste disposal of offcuts. Overhead services. Adjacent existing services.

Integrity of existing tray supports to be investigated. Suitable anchor points
for attaching harnesses. NB Not from tray supports unless properly
tested for adequacy. Suitable access for vehicles. Level ground for jack
supports.
Equipment
Certification for winches/tirfors. Check SWL. Barriers of suitable

construction and design. Adequate number of rollers available. Rollers of
correct size and type. Appropriate size cable stacking to be provided.
Appropriate support of cable drum.
Emergencies
Evacuation procedure/fire procedure/emergency lighting. Access routes,

alarm systems, first aid.
COSHH
EG
Tool box talks, supervision, warning signs, liaison with other

contractors/client personnel.
Communications
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
CONTROL ITEM
Information
Assessments as appropriate to operation.
PPE
Head protection, safety footwear, (high visibility clothing, hearing protection,

eye protection as identified in risk assessment).
Other
Segregation of third parties from operations.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
WORKING IN CHEMICAL/RADIOACTIVE DRAINS
Significant risks:
Page 85
REF NO. 65
Contact with unsealed sources of chemicals and radiation,

injury through skin puncture, ingestion, absorption, toxic/explosive fumes,
entrapment and fall injuries, spread of contamination,
improper disposal
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Obtain information from the Client and establish a safe system of work
within the requirements of a permit to work system. Produce a detailed
hazard risk assessment. Operatives to sign safety method statement.
Personnel to be made aware of the types of chemicals/radiation and the
possible dangers. If classified personnel are to work in radioactive drains
their current dosage rates must be assessed and taken into account before
entry into the drain is permitted. Operatives to be made aware of
procedures for contact with chemicals or radioactive substances.
Operatives taking samples or wipe testing ductwork must be made aware of
the procedures laid down in the safety method statement and suitable
demonstrations and briefings on the methods of handling contaminated
materials must take place and must include the correct use of PPE and
personal hygiene.
A competent person is to obtain appropriate information e.g.
previous/current used materials/concentrations on the contaminated
substances and supply reports and results of analysis.
IO
AL
AT
Supervision
Exclusion zones to be set up with permit to work system. Designated safe

access as necessary to the type and level of contamination discovered.
Environment
Consider the risk of local flooding to drains especially if ductwork has been
stopped with drainage bungs. Special waste to be considered.
Emergencies
Together with standard procedures for first aid, evacuation, fire and
explosion. Specific procedures to suit any contaminants present.
COSHH
TE
IN
EG
Warning signs, Bio-hazard, chemical hazard markings and exclusion zones

as are appropriate.
Communications
Access
Specialist advice to be sought from a Radiological Protection Adviser.
PPE
Visor, gauntlets, waders/wellingtons, chemical suit as levels demand.
Other
Full BA or airflow system. Rescue winch, safety harness, special waste

bags for disposal of contaminated equipment, Geiger counter, sample
tubes, air monitor, compressor for airflow system, wash down matting,
communication system e.g. radio.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
BRICK/BLOCKWORK OPERATIONS
Significant risks:
Page 86
REF NO. 66
Falling from height/through work-face, slips, trips and falls,

manual handling, contact with hazardous substances, noise/vibration,
confined spaces, contact with machinery/transport, dermatitis,
falling from ladders, cut/abrasions, eye injury, falling through floor voids.
CONTROL ITEM
Information / Instruction /
Training
AL
Supervision

Specific risk assessment and safety method statement explained to
operatives, copies issued as requested and signatures obtained. Daily
briefings of operatives by supervisors.
Safety induction carried out and signatures obtained. Manual handling
training including repetitive injury identification. COSHH training identified.
Supervision to update general risk assessment as project progresses.
Ensure workplace is inspected prior to operative placement ensure statutory
registers and plant certification is up to date.
Ensure safe access and egress is provided and of sufficient width. Identify
all aspects of access on safety method statement, ensure routes are free of
debris and safe.
Area free of contaminates including dust, slippery conditions and lighting
sufficient. Confined spaces (permits completed). Plant/transport/operative
separation. All required edge protection around working platforms in
place/precautions in place to eliminate falling through work-face and/or
internal fall protection platforms or rails etc. provided. Hop-up systems at
suitable width. Brick-guards in place prior to loading out platforms.
Other persons not to work below brick/block work operations.
Tools, mixers, scaffolding, clippers, fork-lift trucks, low vibration tools
obtained. All lifting equipment in good order and certificated /inspected.
All emergency notices displayed, all personnel induction will include
emergency alarms escape routes/directional notices. Emergency
procedures displayed, first aid identified and drills carried out.
Tool box talks on regular basis, safety reminders, no access notices and
incomplete notices displayed.
COSHH information obtained for all products including MMMF,
assessments carried out alternative materials/systems of work identified.
Safety helmets, gloves, safety footwear, eye protection, noise
protection(noise assessments done), cover-alls.
Access
AT
IO
Environment
Equipment
IN
TE
Emergencies
PPE
Other
COSHH
EG
Communications
QCS 2014

Page 87

REF NO. 67
Assessment for:
CLEANING STRUCTURE INTERNALLY PRIOR TO HANDOVER
Significant risks:
Falls from heights, slips, trips and falls, cuts/abrasions,
contact with hazardous substances(including biological agents),
noise/vibration, contact with machinery, contact with electricity,
manual handling.
CONTROL ITEM
Training
AL
Supervision

operatives copies issued as requested and signatures obtained. Daily
training including repetitive strain injury identification. COSHH training
identified.
Training and instruction provided in correct use of plant and equipment.
Adequate levels of competent supervision to be maintained.
Ensure workplace is inspected prior to operative placement ensure statutory
registers and plant certification is up to date.
debris and are maintained in a safe condition. Work to be planned so that
only one trade working in an area at a time. Proper and suitable access
equipment to be provided.
Sufficient lighting to be provided, area to be kept clear of obstructions and
all trailing cables managed and minimised. Warning notices to be placed on
wet floors, electric shock possible by the overzealous use of water in the
vicinity of electrical sockets (isolation of electrical supply maybe required).
All sharp tools to be carried in holder/sheath, plant/equipment inspected and
maintained in good order, low vibration tools used where possible.
Tool box talks on regular basis, safety reminders, no access notices and
incomplete notices displayed.
All substances potentially hazardous to health will have COSHH
assessments carried out on them and the circumstances of their use,
alternative materials/systems of work identified. If biological hazards are
encountered COSHH assessment to be carried out.
Safety helmets, gloves, safety footwear, eye protection, noise
protection(noise assessments done), cover-alls. Do not use plastic overshoes when working from steps or ladders.
Limitation of access permits for clean areas.
AT
IO
Access
Environment
TE
Equipment
IN
Emergencies
PPE
Other
COSHH
EG
Communications
QCS 2014

Page 88

REF NO. 68
Assessment for:
USE OF LADDERS TO CARRY OUT GENERAL TASKS AT HEIGHT
Significant risks:
Falls from heights, contact with overhead power lines
CONTROL ITEM
Information /
Instruction / Training
AL
Supervision

Staircases to be used as an alternative to ladders. Ladders are only to be
used as a result of a specific risk assessment that shows no alternative can
be identified. Safety method statement to be explained to operatives copies
issued as requested and signatures obtained. Daily briefings of operatives
by supervisors.
training, instruction and training in the safe erection, use and lowering of
ladders required.
Ensure workplace is inspected prior to operative placement.
all aspects of access on safety method statement/risk assessment, ensure
routes are free of debris and are maintained in a safe condition, avoid
others working below/near the ladder. NB: remember three points of
contact rule when working from a ladder. Do not carry equipment/materials
whilst climbing ladders. Climb holding onto the rungs when climbing vertical
ladders and it is safer using this method on inclined ladders.
Sufficient lighting to be provided, area to be kept clear of obstructions,
ensure equipment is only used in the correct environment (firm level
ground), if un-insulated over-head power lines are present all operatives to
be informed of potential contact hazard - do not use metal ladders.
Regular inspection of equipment to ensure safe use, all ladders to be tied off
or footed when 3m or more high. Always foot the ladder whilst securing.
Never climb to very top rung/tread of ladder/step, all damaged equipment to
be removed from service immediately, where reasonably practicable use a
safe means of access.
Tool box talks on regular basis, safety reminders.
Not Applicable
Safety helmets, gloves, safety footwear.
Ladders should only be used for short term work, and priority must be given
to other forms of access particularly if plant or equipment is to be used at
height. Operate Permit system.
AT
IO
Access
Environment
IN
TE
Equipment
Communications
COSHH
PPE
Other
EG
Emergencies
QCS 2014

Page 89

REF NO. 69
Assessment for:
LEAD BURNING/PLUMBING WORK - Lead burning(welding) of lead sheet or
pipe
Significant risks:
Inhalation, ingestion or absorption of the toxic substance.
Manual handling heavy lead, fire, lead spatter from molten lead.
CONTROL ITEM
Training
AL
Supervision

training required, operatives should be informed of associated hazards and
relevant control measures before work begins, operatives should have
received extensive trade &safety training in this work, operatives should be
trained in fire prevention and use of fire extinguishers.
Managers/supervisors should be adequately trained to monitor work.
Ensure workplace is inspected prior to operative placement. Ensure that
safety equipment provided is used correctly and control measures followed.
Ensure "Hot Work" permit system used.
only one trade working in an area at a time. Proper and suitable access
equipment to be provided.
Eating, drinking and smoking prohibited in all areas likely to be
contaminated by lead. Adequate washing & changing facilities
provided/used by operatives to ensure good personal hygiene, workers
must wash hands/arms thoroughly & scrub under nails to remove traces of
lead.
All equipment must be inspected and maintained in a good condition.
Firefighting equipment must be inspected and be of a suitable type.
The degree of exposure to lead should be assessed by a competent person
to determine if exposure is significant or not, where exposure significant
local exhaust ventilation should be used to reduce exposure levels to an
insignificant level.
Medical surveillance should be carried out if exposure is significant
Appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) should be issued to and
worn by operatives, this will include safety helmets, safety footwear, gloves,
eye protection, respiratory protection and cover-alls. No contaminated
clothing or PPE should be taken into canteens/welfare facilities.
AT
IO
Access
TE
Environment
IN
Equipment
Communications
COSHH
EG
Emergencies
PPE
Other
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
MOBILE ELEVATED WORKING PLATFORMS
Significant risks:
Page 90
REF NO. 70
Falls of persons, falls of materials, striking against fixed structures,

collision with other plant, overturning platform.
CONTROL ITEM
Training
Supervision
IO
AL
Access

Safety induction carried out and signatures obtained.
Only trained and certificated operatives to operate plant.
only one trade working in an area at a time, control traffic and pedestrians,
segregate the work area, beware of use of trailing leads for power tools
(entanglement or tripping).
Ensure ground conditions are suitable
Inspected and maintained in a good condition. The manufacturer's
maintenance schedule should be followed, proof of maintenance, inspection
and testing must be obtained. Ensure MEWP's SWL (Safe Working Load) is
adequate for the work. Stabilisers used where necessary, MEWP's should
not be moved at height unless designed for it.
All personnel induction will include emergency alarms, escape
routes/directional notices. Emergency procedures displayed, first aid
identified and drills carried out. Emergency plan and safety method
statement shall include need to get persons from the platform whilst still
elevated. (Control key available at ground level where needed to operate
controls from that position)
Not Applicable
eye protection, respiratory protection and cover-alls depending on work
carried out from platform. Safety harnesses must be worn and secured to a
suitable anchorage point whilst operatives are in the platform.
Collision with any structure or other plant should be reported immediately
and the damaged assessed.
NB: frequent accidents occur when operatives trap their hands between the
upper guard rail of the MEWP and fixed structures. Regularly remind
operators of this hazard.
AT
Environment
Equipment
Communications
COSHH
PPE
EG
IN
TE
Emergencies
Other
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
UNLOADING OF VEHICLES
Significant risks:
Page 91
REF NO. 71
Being struck by a maneuvering vehicle, falling objects,

falls of persons off the load platform.
CONTROL ITEM
Information /
AL
Supervision

Safety induction carried out and signatures obtained.
Only trained and certificated operatives to act as banks man. Only trained
and certificated operatives to use plant for unloading (cranes, hiab, fork-lift,
excavators). Instruction on loads to be obtained, instruction on safe
methods required eg. Sequences of unloading and release of restraints.
all aspects of access on safety method statement/risk assessment, ensure
routes are free of debris and are maintained in a safe condition. Work to be
planned so that access by traffic and pedestrians is controlled, segregate
the work area.
Ensure ground conditions are suitable, ensure offloading area is as level as
possible, if unloading area is sloping, extra care must be taken with whole
sequence of events. Ensure good standard of lighting for the work area.
Minimise number of people in offloading area.
All equipment must be inspected and maintained in a good condition.
Ensure SWL (Safe Working Load) of lifting equipment and gear is adequate
for the work, obtain load weights and centre of gravity before moving
anything. Stabilisers to be used where necessary.
All personnel induction will include emergency alarms escape
routes/directional notices. Emergency procedures displayed, first aid
identified and drills carried out.
Tool box talks on regular basis, safety reminders. Delivery driver to be fully
consulted and briefed prior to unloading.
COSHH assessment should be carried out prior to handling potentially
hazardous materials; this should take cognisance of possible spilled
materials.
cover-alls and high visibility clothing. Eye protection, respiratory protection
may be required depending on materials being handled,
Wherever possible, minimise human involvement by using mechanical
handling methods, where manual handling is required ensure that enough
trained handlers are available. Follow safe system for release of all load
restraints and sequence of unloading, inspect load for shift prior to release
as load may have worked loose during transit.
AT
IO
Access
Environment
IN
TE
Equipment
Communications
COSHH
EG
Emergencies
PPE
Other
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
USE OF STEP LADDERS
Significant risks:
Page 92
REF NO. 72
Falls from heights, contact with overhead power lines,

falling tools & materials
CONTROL ITEM
Information

Safety induction carried out and signatures obtained. Specific risk
assessment and safety method statement explained to operatives and
signatures obtained. Manual handling training, instruction and training in the
safe erection, use and lowering of step ladders required. Stress overstretching as main cause of falls and never to climb to very top tread / step the knees of the person using the step ladder should be kept below the top
of the steps. Daily briefings of operatives by supervisors.
Adequate levels of competent supervision to be maintained. Supervision to
update general risk assessment as project progresses. Ensure workplace is
inspected prior to operative placement. Check training/instruction given to
all operatives.
Ensure clear, well-lit access/egress.
Identify all aspects of access on safety method statement/risk assessment
Sufficient lighting to be provided, area to be kept clear of obstructions.
Step-ladders should only be used on firm, level ground.
If un-insulated over-head power lines are present all operatives to be
informed of potential contact hazard - do not use metal ladders.
Avoid others working near / below the step ladder.
AL
Supervision
Access
AT
IO
Environment
Equipment
Where risk assessment dictates a safer means of access should be
TE
used, i.e. mobile access scaffold or mobile elevated work platform
IN
(scissor lift / cherry picker) etc.
EG
Regular inspection of equipment to ensure the treads /steps, bolts, screws

and fixings are sound and secure. Retaining cords or hinges should be
equal length and in good condition, all damaged equipment to be removed
from service immediately. The step-ladder must be stable when open and
standing on a level base. The legs of the step-ladder should be positioned
as far apart as the retaining cord or hinges allow, with all four legs firmly on
the ground. They should be set at right-angles to the work, whenever
possible.
Safety awareness talks on regular basis, safety reminders.
Emergencies
Communications
COSHH
PPE
Other
Safety helmets, gloves, safety footwear, overalls. The use of plastic overshoes should be avoided on step-ladders.
Step-ladders should only be used for short-term work or where space
restricts the use of safer working places particularly if plant or
equipment is to be used at height.
QCS 2014


Assessment for:
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
Significant risks:
Page 93
REF NO. 73
Impact injury to workforce/accidents to public and vehicles
CONTROL ITEM
Information

A full traffic management scheme detailed out which caters for: flow of
public vehicles; access and egress of work vehicles; safety zones;
pedestrian routes; provision for Emergency Services. Method statements
for installation of such schemes will also be required on major schemes.
Instruction
To include all identified requirements of safe system of work and method

statements.
Layout drawings, appropriate experienced personnel only to be used for
actual installation/removal of traffic management works.
Training
COSHH
An experienced member of staff to be nominated as the Traffic Safety Coordinator to check all traffic management works and monitor systems.
By designated signed access and egress points only. Prevent unauthorised
access.
Adverse weather to be taken into consideration. Glare, live traffic, lighting,
snowing, any obscured traffic signs must be cleaned as soon as reasonably
practicable or work stopped if practicable
Suitably marked vehicles with flashing lights if required. Assess the need
for a planned preventative maintenance scheme.
Emergency lane if required. Emergency call out/liaison list to be
established. Vehicle recovery to be in attendance if specified. Standard
site first aid, fire protection, evacuation, accident reporting and investigation.
Emergency procedures to be detailed in contract safety plan.
Radios for traffic management team. Mobile phones/radios for traffic safety
co-ordinator. Information signs. Close liaison with police.
No Applicable
PPE
High visibility clothing, hard hats, etc.
AL
Supervision
Access
IO
Environment
AT
Equipment
Emergencies
IN
EG
Ensure adequate provision of spare signs, cones and markers to cover loss
and waste.
Other
TE
Communications
QCS 2014

REF NO. 74
Assessment for:
Significant risks:
CONTROL ITEM
Information
AL
Instruction
Training
IO
Supervision
AT
Access
Environment
Equipment
TE
Emergencies
IN
Communications
Other
PPE
EG
COSHH
Page 94

2.4.20.2
Appendix B: Example of a risk assessment for erecting roof trusses
AT
IO
Contract number / name.............................................
Risk and identity of persons

who might be harmed
IN
Hazard
Serious injury, death (anyone

working at height)
Level of
uncontrolled
risk
High
C
Working at height
(general)
Workers being struck by falling

objects
Controls introduced to reduce risk
Assessed level of
remaining risk
Work at height only carried out by workers who

are competent to do so
Low
Injury, possibly serious, or death

from being struck by a falling
object (anyone on site who
might be passing below)
High
Working platform to be fully boarded and

adequately sheeted or netted. Entrances to
buildings protected by nets or fans. Exclusion
zones to be created and monitored where
necessary
Low
Debris guards properly fitted to all elevations of
working platform
Electrocution - serious burns

and death (anyone working at
height)
High
If possible, arrange for supply to be turned off for

duration of job. As a minimum, arrange for
electricity supply company to sheath the cables
Toolbox talk on electrical safety given to all who
will be required to work at height, including
scaffold contractors
If cables remain live, monitoring that safety
distances are being maintained
Site manager
Before work at height
starts
All waste materials transferred to ground level via

a waste chute
Presence of live overhead

electrical cables
Action placed on, and

by when
A safe working platform with edge protection and

a safe means of access and egress provided
EG
Workers falling from height
Position in company..................................
Date risk assessment due a review ..................
TE
R
Date risk assessment compiled.............................
Risk assessment number.................................
Signature..........................
Risk assessment compiled by......................................
Process
Page 95
AL
QCS 2014
Low
Page 96
AL

who might be harmed
Hazard
Debris left on scaffold platforms
Slips and trips at height (anyone

working at height)
Medium
Slips and trips at height and

during access/egress (anyone
working at height)
IN
Adverse weather conditions
TE
R
Working at height
(general)
(continued)
Level of
uncontrolled
risk
Process

AT
IO
QCS 2014
EG
Off-loading trusses from delivery Manual handling injuries

lorry
(delivery driver/carpenters)
Manual handling injuries

(carpenters)
All contractors instructed to clear up their waste

materials within a reasonable time of it being
created and before it becomes a hazard
Assessed level of
remaining risk
Low
Waste skips provided to enable the disposal and

segregation of waste
Work suspended during adverse weather

conditions. Site manager to monitor
Low
Low
Medium
Trusses off-loaded and transported
Low
Roof truss assembly to be prefabricated at ground

level and crane to be hired to lift it into place
Site manager
Before work at height
starts
Medium
Medium

by when
Low
Raising trusses to roof height
Falling through trusses whilst

fixing
Cuts, broken bones, serious

injury, death (carpenters)
High
Erection of roof
trusses
Presence of live overhead

electrical cables
Electrocution - serious burns and

death (anyone working at height
and crane driver)
Close-boarded scaffold platform, complete with

guard-rails erected at eaves height. Consider
installing safety nets across span of building if
suitable fixing points and sufficient clear height
below net are available. Otherwise install soft
landing system below
Low
Before handling of roof

trusses starts
Electricity supply company contacted to establish

minimum safe working distance for crane
High
Low
Lifting operation to be under the control of a
competent person. Safe working distance
between electrical cables and crane to be
maintained at all times
Site manager
Unstable and unsafe lifting

operation resulting in equipment
failure and/or dropped load
(anyone in the vicinity)
Level of
uncontrolled
risk
Medium
TE
R
IN
Workers being run over or

suffering crush injuries (any site
worker on foot)
EG
C
Person injury resulting from the

use of defective hand tools
(carpenter)
Assessed level of
remaining risk
Contract lift organised using the equipment and

staff of a reputable crane-hire company
Medium
Medium
All plant operated by trained, competent

operators
Physical segregation of plant and pedestrians as

far as is possible
Low
Toolbox talk on safe plant operations given to

everyone on site
Low
All tools fit for purpose and maintained in good

condition
Use of hand tools and power

tools
Low
Electric shock resulting from the
use of defective power tools
(carpenter)
Medium
Battery tools used where practical. Otherwise

only 110 volt tools used. Checks made that all
power tools have a current PAT test sticker

by when
Site manager
Persons not involved in lifting operation excluded

from the area
Other plant activity
Injury to pedestrians caused by

insecure load falling from
machine (any site worker on foot)
Low
Lifting operations
Erection of roof
trusses
(continued)
Page 97
AL

who might be harmed
Hazard
Process

AT
IO
QCS 2014

trusses starts

2.4.20.3
Appendix C: Example of a risk assessment for loading out and fixing tiles
AT
IO
Contract number / Name.............................................
IN
Hazard
Position in company..................................
Date risk assessment due a review ..................
TE
R
Date risk assessment compiled.............................
Risk assessment number.................................
Signature..........................
Risk assessment compiled by......................................
Process
Page 98
AL
QCS 2014

who might be harmed
Level of
uncontrolled
risk
Assessed level of
remaining risk

by when
EG
Working at height See risk assessment for handling

generally
and erecting roof trusses
Loading out and

fixing tiles
Abrasions to the skin of the

hands potentially leading to
dermatitis (tiling contractors)
Medium
Manual handling injury from

carrying tiles
Rigger gloves to be provided and worn at all

times that tiles are being manually handled
Low
Site manager
Palletised tiles to be moved to vicinity of where

they will be used by telehandlers
Strains and other manual
handling injuries (tiling
contractors)
Medium
Powered inclined hoist to be used to transfer tiles

to roof level. Hoist to be loaded, off-loaded and
operated by a competent person
Toolbox talk on manual handling to be given to
tiling contractors
Before manual handling

of tiles commences
Low
Level of
uncontrolled
risk
TE
R
Serious burns and death (tiling

contractors)
Assessed level of
remaining risk

by when
Site manager
High
Toolbox talks on electrical hazards to be given

to tiling contractors
Low
Before manual handling

of tiles commences
Inclined hoist to be positioned to maintain a safe

working distance from cables
EG
Tiling contractors to observe minimum safety

distance. Site manager to periodically monitor
Necessary load rating of scaffold agreed at

contract stage. Loading bays to be included
C
Scaffold collapse
Investigate feasibility of electrical supply being

turned off. As a minimum, arrange for electricity
company to sheath cables
IN
The presence of live overhead

electrical cables
Loading out and

fixing tiles
(continued)
Page 99
AL

who might be harmed
Hazard
Process

AT
IO
QCS 2014
Serious injuries or death

(anyone working at height or at
ground level in vicinity of
scaffold)
Medium
Scaffold erected and inspected as necessary by

a competent scaffold contractor
Low
Tiling contractor informed of loading [imitations

around eaves-level working platform. Periodic
monitoring by site manager
Person injury resulting from the

use of defective hand tools
(carpenter)
Low
Site manager
All tools fit for purpose and maintained in good

condition
Use of hand tools
Low
Slips and trips resulting from
tools being left lying around
(carpenter)
Medium
All tools returned to tool box or tool-belt when

not in use

trusses starts
QCS 2014

Page 100
2.4.20.4
Appendix D: Suggested Structure for Written Method of Work (Section 1.1.7 of
the Regulatory Document)
The structure for a complete written method of work is composed of:
(a) Site Checklist template,
(b) The Method Statement and
(c) The Inspection and Tests plan.
A suggested template for the Site Checklist and the Method Statement are given below. A template
for the Inspection and Test plan can be found in Section 2.
(A)
SITE CHECKLIST TEMPLATE
Occupational Health and Safety Checklist / Questionnaire Template

Department :
Project Manager :
Project Name :
Project Starting
Date:
Project Completed
Date:
Consultant :
Project No. :
Contractor :
Inspection Date :
IO
AT
AL
Affairs :
Report No.:
TE
Completion & Stamped By Consultant then Reviewed & Approved By Project Manager (Mob: ---------)
EG
MANAGEMENT
Satisfactory
Comments /
Submission
Hold Points
Yes No
N/A
Date (If No)
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.1.8/9/14 + 1.10.2 + 11.1.1
+ 11.2.1 + 11.2.3 + 11.2.4).
(CDD / Fire Safety Handbook / Building
Worksite Safety / 3 Page 35).
OH&S plan submitted for approval Within 30

days of the award of the contract?
OH&S organization chart available
OH&S Policy displayed
Regular meetings record
Responsibilities defined
Near Miss & Hazard reporting and follow up
Provision for visitors
Monitoring effectiveness implementation of
OH&S program
Generic Risk Assessment & Management
Monitoring & Control Sub-contractor to
comply with all existing rules & regulations?
In general, contractor following the
government rules & regulation.
Description
IN
Item
SAFETY STAFF
OH&S Safety Staff CV submitted for
approval within 30 days of the award of the
contract?
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.1.3 + 11.1.1.8 + 11.2.1.5).
QCS 2014

Page 101
Item
Description
Ref. to: (QCS: 11.1.1 + 11.2.2 + 11.2.3.6).

(Labor Law: Article 99).
Orientation / Site Induction

Tool Box Talk (TBT) daily documented
Task specific (Equipment Operators,
Scaffolders, Riggers, Fire Watchers,
Emergency Drill, etc)
Management
Refresher courses
AL
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.9 + 1.10.10 + 11.1.2 +

11.2.2 + 11.2.3.15).
(Worker Rights Booklet 2009 Page 41
& 45). (CDD / Fire Safety Handbook /
Building Worksite Safety / 3 Page 9 & 10).
AT
Ventilation
Removal of fumes and dust
Dust controls preventive measures
Noise levels (instrument available?)
Vibration
Lighting:
General purpose for evening work
For a particular task around construction
site
Absence of glare
Work area
Corridors
Exterior
Ergonomics - layout of work area
The disposal of surplus water and the
accompanying growth of trees and the
proliferation of insects and rodents
Does the site pose danger to the
surrounding environment?
Site office furniture?
EG
IN
TE
WORK ENVIRONMENT
OH&S Officer available during all working

hours
OH&S Officer is exclusive for site & for H&S
jobs
TRAINING
Comments /
Hold Points
N/A
IO
Yes
Satisfactory
Submission
No
Date (If No)
WELFARE FACILITIES
Clean toilets with exhaust fan

Toilets & Sanitary in good condition?
Potable water provided
Eating and resting areas
Messing / Canteen facilities
Washing facilities
Regularly cleaned area
Work clothes lockers and hanging areas
Prevent the breeding of mosquitoes on the
site
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.9 + 1.10.10 + 11.1.2)

(Labor Law: Article 103,106 & 107).
QCS 2014

Page 102
Item
FIRST AID & MEDICAL
Accident reporting, records available &follow

up
Periodic medical examinations for workers and

follow up
Medical record book existing

Paramedics Telephone numbers displayed
Adequate first aid kits supplies & expiration
dates (as per Hamad Medical Corporation
Requirement)
Adequate first aid equipment
Availability of stretcher / ambulance /

Standby Vehicle
Clean room with potable water supply
Doctor, Site Nurse & Site Clinic must be
approved from Supreme Council of Health
IN
Procedures
Assembly / Muster point
Conducted Emergency Drill Training every 6
month
Availability of Fire / Smoke / Gas detection
mobile devices
Emergency contact telephone numbers /
Communications
Breathing apparatus and / or respirators (if
applicable)
Torches
Loud Hailer
Emergency lighting
Adequate and safe Emergency Exit / Doors
are provided
Escape routes, access ways to assembly
points, extinguishers, hydrants and other
firefighting equipment's and first aid kits kept
clear of obstruction at all times
HOUSEKEEPING & TIDINESS
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.7.2).

(Labor law: Article 100).
(CDD / Fire Safety Handbook / Fire Safety
Provisions For Construction Worksites / 2
Page 16).
EG
TE
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
First aid box

for each 25
labor
(500) Above
Clinic
AL
Less than 100)

First Aider
(100) above
Nurse
(500) Above
Doctor &Nurse
Paramedics available & names displayed

(according to number of workers)
Average Manpower = ---------------------Labor
IO
AT
Satisfactory
Comments /
Submission
Hold Points
Yes No
N/A
Date (If No)
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.6 + 11.1.2.4 + 11.1.6 +
11.2.2 + 11.2.3). (Labor Law: Article
100,104,105 & 115).
Description
Segregation of waste and scrap

Sufficient bins
Ref. to: (Labor Ministry Decision No. 20 of

2005). (CDD / Fire Safety Handbook / Fire
Safety Provisions For Construction
Worksites / 2
Page 17).
QCS 2014

Page 103
Item
Description
Waste and scrap regularly collected &
removed from site
No build up of flammable materials
Removal of combustibles
Ref. to: (QCS: 11.1.2.7).

(Worker Rights Booklet 2009 Page 45).
(CDD / Fire Safety Handbook / Fire
Safety Provisions For Construction
Worksites / 2 Page 10).
STORAGE - RACKS, BINS, SHELVES
Aisles and walkways kept clear

Neat and orderly
Not too high
Heavy items kept low
Sufficient space to access items
Are chemicals, paints, flammable liquids and
gas cylinders stored only in designated
areas?
SITE SECURITY & ACCESS

Adequate transportation between working
site & accommodations
Security check correctly performed
Guardhouse continuously manned
Round check register updated
Perimeter fence intact
Inspection of materials gate passes
Need for the existence of surveillance
cameras inside the site
Need for security personnel within the site
11
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.9.2 + 11.1.1.12).
12
Coveralls
Eye protection
Head protection
Hand protection
Foot protection
Hearing Protection
Safety reflecting vests
Dust mask
Any other protection
SAFE WORK PRACTICES
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.9.2 + 11.1.2 + 11.2.3).

(Labor Law: Article 101).
EG
IN
TE
AT
10
AL
Comments /
Hold Points
N/A
IO
Yes
Satisfactory
Submission
No
Date (If No)
Avoid manual handling (Use mechanical

handling equipment)
Not working alone
Cap (cover) for rebar / reinforcement steel
Ref. to: (Worker Rights Booklet 2009 Page

45).
QCS 2014

Page 104
Item
EXCAVATIONS
AT
TE
ELECTRICAL
16
Adequate guarding on machines

Inspected regularly with color code sticker &
maintenance records
Grounding installed to equipment/machine
Unused machines electrically isolated
Emergency isolation switches
Safety devices
Heating equipment
IN
MECHANICAL
15
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.5.3 + 11.1.1.4).

Insulation, cables, industrial plugs in good

condition
Cables suspended using S hooks and lead
stands
Inspected regularly with color code sticker
ELCB provided to site power boards
Qualified electrician hired to install (Name &
Qualification)
Protection of fittings against external
damage
Trailing leads used?
Ovens and furnaces in good condition?
SCAFFOLDS & LADDER
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.5.14 + 11.1.5.3 + 11.2.2).

EG
14
AL
Location of existing utilities confirmed

Signs posted
Adequate hard barrier installed
Adequate warning tape & lighting
Bracing & Shoring provided (if applicable)
1m spoil clearance from the excavated pit
Sloping maintained (if applicable)
Correctly made ladders provided for access
into excavation
Appropriate access provided (temporary
bridges & footpaths)
IO
13
Satisfactory
Comments /
Submission
Hold Points
Yes No
N/A
Date (If No)
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.5.5 + 11.1.5.4 + 11.2.2 +
11.2.3).
(CDD / Fire Safety Handbook /
Building Worksite Safety / 3 Page 19).
Description
Certified scaffold supervisor and scaffolders

Scaffolds correctly erected
Scaffolds properly secured
Toe boards, guardrails (top & mid rail),
handrails & access checked
Fully boarded platforms
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.5.10 + 11.1.3 + 11.2.3.12).

QCS 2014

Page 105
Item
Description
Personnel working above 1.2 m using fall

protection devices
Fall protection devices condition / Certificate
Adequate safe access in place to working
height elevations
Personnel properly trained in the selection
and use of fall protection devices
All loose material & tools at heights secured
or removed
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.5.3 + 11.1.4 + 11.2.2 +
11.2.3.5/10).
19
IO
EG
AT
Qualifications of operators available

Available Qatar license for drivers /
operators
Banks man available
Used as per its design (for intended
purpose)
Vehicle and equipment condition
Reverse alarm installed
Flashing light installed
Generators and welding machine in good
condition?
Compressors and water pumps in good
condition?
Oil / fuel leak causing environmentally
pollution
PLANT & EQUIPMENT
TE
18
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.5.13 + 11.1.3 + 11.2.3).

Worksite Safety / 3 Page 11, 12 & 19).
AL
LIFTING OPERATIONS
20
Comments /
Hold Points
Scaffolds correctly tagged

Materials in good condition
WORKING AT HEIGHT
N/A
IN
17
Yes
Satisfactory
Submission
No
Date (If No)
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.5.8 + 11.1.4 + 11.2.3.10).

Available Qatar license/third party certificate

for operators and certificate of training for
banks men and riggers
Load capacity displayed
Certification updated
Condition of access and ground
Lifting locations barrier off
Outriggers/supports fully extended
Hoist limiting device and SWL indicator
working
LIFTING GEAR
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.5.9 + 11.1.4 + 11.2.3.10).

QCS 2014

Page 106
Item
Description
Yes
Satisfactory
Submission
No
Date (If No)
N/A
Comments /
Hold Points
Ropes, Chains, Shackles etc. in good

condition
Identity number and SWL displayed
Color-code system in place
Available 3rd party certificate for every lifting
gear
Damaged lifting devices removed from the
workplace
COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDERS

Stored upright, valves protected
Regulators Gauges working; hoses
inspected
Flashback arrestor fitted
Cylinders are securely tied or with trolley
Type of gas clearly marked on cylinders
Segregation of incompatible gases
Transported on appropriate trolley
Correct signage
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.5.12 + 11.1.2.14).
22
SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC (For Road Works)

Approval from Traffic Dep. & Environmental
ministry
International Warning signs
Warning yellow lights
Adequate Barricades (to comply with Traffic
law no. 19)
Railing
Pedestrians pathway signs & not interacted
with work zoon
Adequate safe access to all properties
Night watchman available
To provide road hump to reduce & control
speed with approval from Traffic
Department.
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.5.4 + 1.10.8 + 11.1.1.10).
23
SAFETY SIGNAGE & NOTICE BOARD
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
21
24
Clearly displayed
Shall be in Arabic, English & other
languages
Clean and legible
Enough traffic diversion signboard?
Adequate warning signs and guides are
provided
Shall be fully illustrated and provide details
of key safety procedures to be followed
WORK PERMITS
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.1.6 + 1.10.5.6 + 11.1.8.2).

(Labor Ministry Decision No. 20 of 2005).
Confined Space
Hot Work
Excavation
Scaffolding
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.5.1/4/11 + 11.2.2 + 11.2.3).
QCS 2014

Page 107
Item
Description
Electrical Work
Work permit correctly issued and signed
Ashghal s work permit enforced
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
27
IN
Toxic/ hazardous substance correctly

tagged/ labeled and secured
Adequate & proper storage provided
Appropriate spill containment provided
Disposal Spill kit (location, appropriate, easy
access)
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) present
& required training delivered to concerned
employees
Class B fire extinguisher near by
Correct signage
Register of chemicals
Correct labeling
EG
CONFINED SPACES
Ref. to: (QCS: 11.1.2.3 + 11.2.2 + 11.2.3).

Worksite Safety / 3 Page 15, 16, 17 & 18).
26
TE
AT
Is the firefighting equipment which approved

by Civil Defense available at working area?
Welding and grinding at working area
properly secured
Firefighting equipment not obstructed
Expiration date of firefighting equipment
checked.
Monthly firefighting equipment visual
inspected & recorded
Availability of Fire / Smoke / Gas detection
system
Alarm and Emergency Evacuation system
Are Alarms audible in all areas
Minimum quantities of flammable material
shall kept on site with full precautions
required
Access for Fire Brigade cleared
AL
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.7 + 11.1.7 + 11.2.2 +

11.2.3.13).
(Fire Safety Handbook / Fire Safety
Provisions For Construction Worksites / 2
Page 8).
FIRE PROTECTION / PREVENTION
Comments /
Hold Points
25
N/A
IO
Yes
Satisfactory
Submission
No
Date (If No)
Gas detectors/monitors with rechargeable

batteries and battery charger (2 No.)
Full body safety harnesses with lifelines and
shackles (6 No.)
Lifting frame with fall arrest device (1 No.)
Constant flow escape breathing apparatus
complete with storage cases (2 No.)
Ref. to: (QCS: 1.10.5.7 + 11.1.5.5).

Worksite Safety / 3 Page 13 & 14).
QCS 2014

Page 108
Item
Description
Automatic positive pressure self contained

breathing apparatus with storage case (1
No.)
To train employee for confined space activity
& supervision monitoring
All equipment maintained & calibrated up to
date with 3rd party certificate (record is
available)
EG
IN
TE
AT
IO
AL
OTHER RELATED SAFETY ITEMS
28
Yes
Satisfactory
Submission
No
Date (If No)
N/A
Comments /
Hold Points
QCS 2014

Page 109
Key Performance Indicator (KPIs)
Accumulating up to Date
(Clasue1+4+5+10) x 100,000
Accumulative Accident Rate
No. Per Last Month
AL
Description
No. of Medical Treatment Cases
No. of First Aid Cases
No. of Near-Miss
No. of Fatal Cases
No. of RTA (Road Traffic Accidents)
No. of Manpower (Average)
No. of Direct Man-hours
No. of Hours Lost
No. of Man-hours from Last Lost Time Accident
No. of Lost Time Accidents
No. of Safety Meeting
No. of Emergency Drill
No. of Audit
Kilometres Driven
(Clasue1+4+5+10) x 100,000
AT
Monthly Accident Rate
IO
Caluse6 (No. of Manpower Average)
Caluse6 (No. of Manpower Average)
TE
Accumulative Frequency Accident =
IN
Monthly Frequency Accident
(Clasue1+4+5+10) x 1000,000
Caluse7 (No. of Direct Man-hours)

=
(Clasue1+4+5+10) x 1000,000
Caluse7 (No. of Direct Man-hours)
EG
Consultant Name:
Filled By:
Mob. No.:
Signature:
Indicator No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Date:
Stamp:
References:
QCS (Qatar Construction Specification Latest Edition).

Labor Law No. 14 of the year 2004.
Qatar Traffic Law No. 19 of the Year 2007.
Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of the Year 2002.
CDD (Civil Defense Department) Fire Safety Handbook.
Law No. 13 of 1997 - Civil Defense
Law No. 9 of the Year 2012 - Amending some provisions of Law No. 13 of 1997
Concerning the Civil Defense
Worker Rights Booklet 2009 (National Human Rights Committee).
QCS 2014

Page 110
Site Approval Log (Supplementary Element Specific Log)

SITE APPROVAL LOG (TITLE / NAME)
Issue:
REF:
To be signed before work activity is undertaken

Work Activity:
PROJECT NAME:
Corridor No:
Corridor Name:
COMMENTS:
AL
LOCATION FROM:
Approvals: signature/date
Checks
AT
N
EG
IN
Other
TE
e.g: Check licenses are received

from MOPW, Check TM
arrangements, Check utilities
(locate & confirm), Check corridor
specific Environmental issues,
etc
Engineer
IO
Contractor
Note:
Contractor to ensure that checklist is signed off by all relevant parties before work activity can begin
Confirmation that work completed in accordance with contract, safety and quality
requirements:
Construction Manager:
date:
HSEQ Manager:
date:
QCS 2014
(B)

Page 111
METHOD STATEMENT TEMPLATE
Project Name:
Method Statement Number:
Date:
Reviewed By:
Date:
Approved By:
Date:
Item
PURPOSE, SCOPE AND LOCATION MAP
AT
IO
Prepared By:
AL
Work Activity:
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE CONTENT OF THIS MS, THE PURPOSE AND DETAIL ON THE SCOPE OF
Person
Responsible
INCLUDE PERSONS
WITH RESPONSIBILITY
FOR TASK
TE
WHO IS RESPONSIBLE
FOR MAKING SURE
WORKERS ARE
INDUCTED, TRAINED
INDUCTION
FOR THE WORK
TRAINING
INSTRUCTION
SUPERVISION
IN
LIST ALL MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR THE WORK ACTIVITY IN TERMS OF
EG
MANDATORY INDUCTION, TRAINING, SUPERVISION AND

INSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
PRELIMINARIES
WORKS. AND INCLUDE LOCATION MAP AND REFERENCES
ACTIVITY, WORKS ARE

INSTRUCTED AND
SUPERVISED E.G. SITE
ENGINEER/
SUPERVISOR
WHO IS RESPONSIBLE
TO MAKE SURE THAT
LICENSES
RELEVANT LICENSES,
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
TMS ETC ARE IN PLACE
DETECTION AND ISOLATION OF UTILITIES
AND COORDINATING
DISCONNECTION/ RECONNECTION OF SERVICES
AND MANAGING
UTILITY WORKS
SEQUENCE OF WORKS
INCLUDE PERSONS
WITH RESPONSIBILITY
WRITE OUT THE JOB PROCEDURE STEP BY STEP
FOR AUTHORISING A
USE ACTIVE, NOT PASSIVE VOICE
CONTINUATION OF
SEQUENCE IDEAS LOGICALLY
WORKS AT EACH HOLD
KEEP SENTENCES SHORT AND CLEAR
POINT
INCLUDE:
PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN
HAZARDS
HOLD POINTS
PERMIT REQUIREMENTS, COORDINATION, APPROVAL AUTHORITIES ETC
QCS 2014
5

Page 112
IDENTIFIED HAZARDS/RISKS AND CONTROLS IN PLACE
INCLUDE WHO IS
RESPONSIBLE TO
LIST ALL IDENTIFIED HAZARDS AND RISK IMPACTING ON THE WORK ACTIVITY AND THE
COMMUNICATE RISKS
CONTROLS IN PLACE
AND CONTROLS IN
INCLUDE REFERENCE TO RISK ASSESSMENT
PLACE FOR THE WORK

ACTIVITY
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS AND IMAPCT CONTROL

MEASURES
ALSO INCLUDE WHO IS

RESPONSIBLE FOR
NEIGHBOURHOOD
LIST ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS, MITIGATION AND PRECAUTIONS
IDENTIFY PUBLIC NUISANCE AND SOURCES OF NUISANCE FOR NEIGHBOURING
LIAISON
PEOPLE/PROPERTIES
MANDATORY PPE FOR THE WORK ACTIVITY
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES:
RESPONSIBLE FOR
IDENTIFY EMERGENCY TYPES AND ARRANGEMENTS INCLUDING SITE EVACUATION
WHO IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CALLING THE EMERGENCY SERVICES
CONTACT DETAILS FOR OUT-OF-HOURS EMERGENCIES
REFERENCE TO INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN NUMBERS
INTERFACES
IDENTIFY ALL INTERFACES AND LIAISON REQUIREMENTS IMPACTING ON THE WORK
TE
ACTIVITY
SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC AND OCCUPIERS
IN
11
IO
QUALITY CONTROLS
AL
10
INCLUDE WHO WILL BE
AT
LIST ALL IDENTIFIED MANDATORY PPE FOR THE WORK ACTIVITY
E.G SUPERVISOR
DESCRIBE HOW THE HEALTH AND SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC AND OTHERS AS RELEVANT
COMMUNICATIONS
REGARDING
EMERGENCIES
E.G. QUALITY
MANAGER, SITE
ENGINEER, QUALITY
INSPECTOR
WHO RESPONSIBLE TO
COORDINATE
INTERFACES IMACTING
ON AND IMPACTED BY
THE WORK ACTIVITY
WHO WILL ENSURE
THAT THE HEALTH AND
SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC
13
RESOURCE PLANNING
PERSONNEL
PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
MATERIALS
E.G. SITE ENGINEER,

SUPERVISOR
12
EG
WILL BE PROTECTED.
REFERENCES
WORK PROGRAMME
DRAWINGS
RISK ASSESSMENTS
COORDINATION PROCEDURE
WORK CHECKLIST
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN

ETC
(C)
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN
Refer to Section 2 for template Inspection and Test Plan
END OF PART

Combined

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Combined

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

QCS 2014

Section 11: Health and Safety

QATAR LEGISLATION AND MANAGEMENT

Occupational Health and Safety at Work including Construction Sites ............ 6

Duties, Responsibilities, Offences and Penalties etc. .................................... 11

Safety Policies ............................................................................................... 21

Consultation with Employees ......................................................................... 42

Health & Safety Training and Induction Training ............................................ 54

General Health and Safety ............................................................................. 72

Risk Assessments and Method Statements ................................................... 79

Construction (Design and Management) ....................................................... 82

Safety Inspections and Auditing ................................................................... 142

1.1.10 Safety at Street Works and Road Works ..................................................... 157

1.1.12 Security on Site ............................................................................................ 199

1.1.13 Statutory Forms, Notices and Registers ...................................................... 207

Section 11: Health and Safety

Section 11: Health and Safety

Health and Safety Organization

Health and Safety Plan

Health and Safety

Engineer's Site Facilities

Safety Equipment and Clothing

Temporary Works and Equipment

Test Certificates for Cranes and

Safety and Management

General Requirements for Piling

Works in Relation to Services

Page No. Item No.

4.9.1.13 Protection of Testing Equipment

Health and Safety

Painting and Protective Coatings

Trenchless Pipeline Construction

Pipeline Cleaning and Inspection

Noise Levels and Vibration

Hot Water Storage

General Provisions for electrical

Fire and Safety Precautions

General Provisions for electrical

Fire Resistance Period

Safety Measures and Systems

Section 11: Health and Safety

Qatar Regulatory Document

This Regulatory Document is designed to help managers, supervisors and safety

the avoidance of occupational ill health

Environmental good practice.

The Regulatory Document is designed to help Clients, Designers, Contractors,

Safety planning for construction, use and maintenance

Incident prevention at work

Avoidance of occupational ill health

Safety, health and environmental good practice.

Structure of the Health and Safety Regulations in QCS

Section 11: Health and Safety

Definitions of the more common terms are outlined below.

Reasonably practicable: Where a legal requirement is qualified by the term 'Reasonably

Employer: means any person, company or organisation who has an employment

Section 11: Health and Safety

Occupational Health and Safety

Occupational Health and Safety at Work including Construction Sites

1.1.1.1 Key points

Legal duties are also placed on manufacturers, designers, contractors, sub-contractors,

1.1.1.2 Aims and scope of this Regulatory Document

This Regulatory Document (Regulations) provides for a comprehensive framework to

1.1.1.3 Standards of compliance